Carlson Survey 2014 Embedded AutoCAD

Carlson Software Inc. Users manual

August 30, 2013
Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction 1
Using the Carlson Software Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Installing Carlson Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Authorizing Carlson Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Carlson Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting Up a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Startup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Command Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Layer and Style Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
What is New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Standard Report Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Report Formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Instruction Manual and Program Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Carlson File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Quick Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Obtaining Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Chapter 2. Tutorials 35
Lesson 1: Entering a Deed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Lesson 2: Making a Plat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Lesson 3: SurvNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Lesson 4: Field to Finish for Faster Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Lesson 5: Intersections and Subdivisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Lesson 6: Contouring, Break Lines and Stockpiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Chapter 3. AutoCAD Overview 160
Issuing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
General Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Selection of Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Properties and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Properties Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
i
Chapter 4. File Menu 166
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Plot Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Import Xref to Current Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Xref Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Import LandXML File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Export LandXML File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Import RoadXML File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Export RoadXML File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Import Google Earth File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Export Google Earth File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Write Polyline File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Draw Polyline File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Drawing Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Recover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Remove Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Remove Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Translate Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Remove XData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 196
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Erase Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Erase by Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Erase by Closed Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Erase Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Temporary Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Standard Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Contents ii
Copy To Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Copy Polyline Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Standard Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Variable Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Offset To Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Offset to Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Multiple Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Buffer Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Standard Explode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Block Explode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Extend To Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Extend to Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Extend Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Extend by Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Break by Crossing Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Break Polyline at Specied Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Break at Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Break, Select Object, 2nd Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Break, Select Object, Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Break, At Selected Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Change Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Change Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Change Attribute Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Change Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Change Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Change Block/Inserts Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Change Block/Inserts Substitute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Change Block/Inserts Resize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Pivot Point Rotate by Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Rotate by Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Entity Insertion Point Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2D Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Edit Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Text Enlarge/Reduce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Rotate Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Move Text with Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Contents iii
Change Text Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Change Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Change Text Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Change Text Oblique Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Flip Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Split Text into Two Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Text Explode To Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Add Prex/Sufx To Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Remove Spaces From Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Line Up Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Join Text Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2D Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Standard Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Properties Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Entities to Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Reverse Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Reduce Polyline Vertices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Densify Polyline Vertices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Smooth Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Draw Polyline Blips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Add Intersection Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Add Polyline Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Add Polyline Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Add Point by Two Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Edit Polyline Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Edit Polyline Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Remove Duplicate Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Remove Polyline Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Remove Polyline Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Remove Polyline Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Create Polyline ID Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Change Polyline Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Set Polyline Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Remove Polyline Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Change Polyline Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Contents iv
Check Elevation Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Highlight Non-Tangent Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Highlight Crossing Plines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Highlight Unclosed Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Offset 3D Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Fillet 3D Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Join 3D Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Add Points At Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
3D Polyline by Slope on Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Join Nearest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
3D Entity to 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Select by Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Select by Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Select by Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Select by Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Select by Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Select Similar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Image Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Image Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Image Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chapter 6. View Menu 255
Redraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Regen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Zoom - Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Zoom - Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Zoom - Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Zoom - Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Zoom - Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Zoom IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Zoom OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Zoom Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Zoom Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
3D Viewer Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Surface 3D Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Surface 3D FlyOver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Viewpoint 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Twist Screen: Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Contents v
Twist Screen: Line Pline or Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Twist Screen: Surveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Restore Due North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Twist To 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Restore World View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Set Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Change Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Freeze Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Freeze Layer By Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Thaw Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Isolate Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Restore Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Thaw/On All Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Lock Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Save/Restore Layer State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 276
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
2D Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
3D Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
3 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
PC, PT, Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
PC, PT, Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
PC, Radius, Chord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
PC, Radius, Arc Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
2 Tangents, Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
2 Tangents, Arc Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
2 Tangents, Chord Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
2 Tangents, Mid-Ordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
2 Tangents, External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
2 Tangents, Tangent Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
2 Tangents, Degree of Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
2 Tangents, Through Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Tangent, PC, Radius, Arc Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Tangent, PC, Radius, Tangent Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Tang, PC, Radius, Chord Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Contents vi
Tang, PC, Radius, Delta Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Compound or Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
3-Radius Curve Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Best Fit Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Curve Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Spiral Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Draw Box Around Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
White Solid Behind Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Trim Linework Through Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Insert Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Insert Multi-Point Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Raster Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Place Image by World File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Draw Standard Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Overview Draw Standard Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Draw Standard Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Set Drawing Standards Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Item Standards Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Item Standards Manager - Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Exit Drawing Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Draw By Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Sequential Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Arrowhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Curve - Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Leader With Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Special Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Callout Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Bold Curve Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Flow Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Boundary Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Shrink-Wrap Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Polyline by Nearest Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Drawing Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Write Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Contents vii
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 339
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Point ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Layer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Layer Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Layer Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Drawing Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
List Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Bearing & 3D Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Find Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Curve Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Polyline Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Angle Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Display-Edit File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Display Last Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Load Saved Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 351
Drawing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Set Project/Data Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Drawing Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Project Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Data Depot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Store Project Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Extract Project Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Congure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Carlson Settings Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Settings File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Mouse Click Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Edit Symbol Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Layer Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Mortgage Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Rescale Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Set/Reset X-Hairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Tablet Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Contents viii
Save/Load Tablet Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Set UCS to World . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Units Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Point Object Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Aperture Object Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
System Variable Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Chapter 10. Points Menu 421
Point Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Draw-Locate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
List Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Import Text/ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Export Text/ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Set Coordinate File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
CooRDinate File Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Point Group Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Edit Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Erase Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Freeze Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Thaw Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Translate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Rotate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Align Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Scale Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Move Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Edit Point Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Edit Multiple Pt Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Move Point Attributes Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Move Point Attributes with Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Scale Point Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Erase Point Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Twist Point Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Resize Point Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Fix Point Attribute Overlaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Trim by Point Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Change Point LayerColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Renumber Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Explode Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Convert Surveyor1 to CRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Contents ix
Convert CRD to TDS CR5/Convert TDS CR5 to CRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Convert CRD to Land Desktop MDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Convert Land Desktop MDB to Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Convert Civil 3D to Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Convert Carlson Points to Land Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Convert Land Desktop to Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Convert Softdesk to Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Convert Carlson Points to C&G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Convert C&G to Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Convert Carlson Points to Simplicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Convert Simplicity to Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Convert Leica to Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Convert Geodimeter to Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Convert Carlson Points to Ashtech GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Convert Carlson Points to Softdesk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Convert CAICE KCM to Carlson CRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Convert PacSoft CRD to Carlson CRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Convert Carlson Points to Eagle Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Convert Eagle Point to Carlson Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Search Published Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 485
Data Collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Edit-Process Raw Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Edit-Process Level Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Edit Process SDMS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
SurvNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Draw Field to Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Field to Finish Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Enter Deed Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Deed Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Deed Linework ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Deed Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Process Deed File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Legal Description Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Closure by Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Map Check by Pnts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Mapcheck by Screen Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Cut Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Contents x
Set Point Elevations by 3D Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Set Point Elevations by Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Polyline Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Polyline to Deed File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Polyline to RW5 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Compass Polyline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Grant Boundary Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
4 Sided Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Cadastral Automated Plat Drafting (CAPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 731
Inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Occupy Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Side Shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Enter-Assign Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Raw File On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Line On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Visual COGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Locate by Line Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Locate by Turned Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Locate by Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Locate by Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Locate by Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Pick Intersection Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Linework Intersection Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Bearing-Bearing Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Create Points from Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Distance-Distance Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Bearing-Distance Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Perpendicular Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Tangent Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
2 Point - 2 Point Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Resection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Benchmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Numeric Pad COGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Point on Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Divide Between Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
Divide Along Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
Contents xi
Interval Between Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Interval Along Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Line by Angle-Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Tangent Line from Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Building Offset Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Radial Stakeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
Section Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
GLO Corner Proportioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Geodetic Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Geodetic Single Proportion Line Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Geodetic Double Proportion Line Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Geodetic Double Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Geodetic Middle Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Irregular Boundary Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
One Way Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Two Way Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Three Way Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
Four Way Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Solar Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Triangle Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Best Fit Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Best Fit Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
Best Fit Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Best Fit Line by Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Best Fit Line by Least Squares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 785
Design Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Input-Edit Centerline File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Polyline to Centerline File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Draw Centerline File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Centerline Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
Centerline ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
Station Polyline/Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
Label Station-Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Offset Point Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Calculate Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Distance Between Two Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Centerline Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Contents xii
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 817
Area Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Inverse with Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
Area by Lines & Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
Area by Interior Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Area by Closed Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Digitize Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Label Last Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Area Table Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
New Area Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Set Active Area Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Edit Area Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Remove Area Table Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
Consolidate Area Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Tag Area Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Identify Area Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Untag Area Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Hinged Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Sliding Side Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Area Radial from Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Bearing Area Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
Lot Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
Cleanup Lot Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
Set Linework Angles To Nearest Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Set Linework Intersections To Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Offsets & Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Cul-de-Sacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Elevate 2D Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Set Back Measure-Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Draw Lot Setback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Footprint Creator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Fit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Lot Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Lot Network Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Tag Sub-Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Untag Sub-Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Identify Sub-Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Contents xiii
Report Sub-Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Hatch Sub-Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Erase Sub-Areas Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Label Sub-Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Input-Edit ROW Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Lot Network Road Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
Lot Network Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Lot Network Subdivide Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Size Lot by Frontage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Lot Network Sliding Side Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Lot Network Hinged Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Lot Network Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Lot Network Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Lot Network Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Check Lot Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Find Lot Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Lot Network Renumber Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Lot Network - Assign Lot Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Lot Network Output To Lot File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Set Lot File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Design Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Polyline to Lot File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Lot File by Pick Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Lot File by Closed Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Lot File by Interior Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Lot Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Lot Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Right-of-Way Crossing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Dene Lot Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
Import Lot File From MDB Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
Export Lot File to MDB Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Export Lot File To Old SurvCADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Set CRD File for Lot Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Lot File to Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
Contents xiv
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 905
Annotation Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Auto Annotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
Custom Label Formatter AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Draw End Point Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Dynamic Annotation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Fix Label Overlaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
Switch Bearing/Azimuth Quadrant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Mirror Selected Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Mirror and Flip Selected Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Flip Last Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
Flip ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
Move Label with Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
Bearing with Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Distance with Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
Bearing-Distance with Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
Distance-Bearing with Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Azimuth-Distance with Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Flip Selected Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Global Reannotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Survey Text Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
Offset Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Building Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Adjoiner Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Draw Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Stack Label Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Draw Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Draw North Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Draw Barscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Create Point Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Update Point Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Table Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Table Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Set Table Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Curve Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Railroad Curve Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Edit Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Contents xv
Delete Table Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Edit Table Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Split Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
Merge Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Label Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Custom Label Formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Draw Text On Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Draw Text on Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Edit Text on Arc or Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Fit Text Inside Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Fit Text Outside Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Change Polyline Linetype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Polyline to Special Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Polyline to Tree Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Add Zig to Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Add Culvert to Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Sketch Tree Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Special Line/Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Guard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Label Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Label Coordinates/Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Label LatLong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Label Curb Flow Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
Replot Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Textbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Label Offset Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Label Elevations Along Pline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 980
Triangulate & Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
Contour from TIN File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Draw Triangular Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
Contour ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Highlight Index Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Highlight Depression Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Contour Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Move Label Along Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
Volumes By Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
Triangulation File Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
Contents xvi
Surface Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Make 3D Grid File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
Draw 3D Grid File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
Two Surface Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
Volumes By Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
Spot Elevations By Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Tag Hard Breakline Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Untag Hard Breakline Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Import Google Earth Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
Design Pad Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
Convert LDD Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
Export Topcon Grid or TIN File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
Slope Zone Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
Quick Prole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Prole from Surface Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Prole from Grid or Triangulation Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Prole from Points on Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Input-Edit Prole File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Draw Prole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
Prole to 3D Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Prole To Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Prole Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1083
GIS Database Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
Dene GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
Input-Edit GIS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
GIS Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
GIS Inspector Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
GIS Query/Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Label GIS Polyline: Closed Polyline Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Label GIS Polyline: Closed Polyline Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Label GIS Polyline: Open Polyline Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
Create Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Erase Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Audit Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Import SHP File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
Export SHP File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Import GIS Data from SurvCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Contents xvii
Export GIS Data to SurvCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Export DWG File with Esri MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
Image Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
Place Camera Symbol/Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Import MrSID Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Place Image by World File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Attach Image to Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
Dene Note File Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Database File Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1109
CGFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
Current Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
Coordinate Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
Opening Closing and Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Export Coordinates to ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
Import ASCII File into Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
Close Raw File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
Close Map Check File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
CGDos Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
Open Dos Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
Setup DOS Dwg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Convert Old CG Dos Level File to New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
Convert Old CG Dos Raw File to New format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
Convert Old CG Dos Cross Section File to New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
Convert Old CG Dos Template File to New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
Empty Print File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
Print View Print File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
CGTrav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Quick Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Edit Raw File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
Data Collector Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Reduce Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
Edit Map Check File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
Reduce Map Check File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
Contents xviii
Visual Map Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
Create StarNet File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
CGCogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
Inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
Intersects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
Station Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
Station Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
Coords From Station Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
Create Point Group From Station Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
Display Centerline Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
Station Offset From Coords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222
Points on Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
Calculate Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
Curve Between Tangents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226
Middle Ordinate Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
Points on Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
Spiral Curve Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
Spiral Curve Stakeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230
Stakeout Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Tangent Between Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
Vertical Curve Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
Area Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
Roadways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Right-of-Way Easements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Intersections/Cul-de-sacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
T Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
X Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Y Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Bubble Cul-de-Sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
Standard Cul-de-Sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
Stake-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
Angles Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
Radial Stake Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
Best Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242
NAD83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
Contents xix
CGDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
Set Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
Global Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
Coordinate Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
Text on Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
Draw Mapcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
Multi-Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
Plot Points and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
Plot Points on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
Remove Points from Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
Graphic Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
Lines and Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
Lines by Point Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
Lines by Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260
Lines by Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
Polylines by Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
Fit Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264
Place Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264
Move Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
Reverse Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
Call Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
Auto Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
Coordinate Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278
Point Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
Contents xx
Station-Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
Drop C&G Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
re-Associate Coord. le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
Refresh Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
CGMngmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
Point Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
Edit Coordinates (CGEditor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
Auto Create Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
Manual Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
Fix Coords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
Renumber Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
Combined Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
Best Fit Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
Copy Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
Description Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Set Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Close Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Set Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Convert to SurvCE FCL le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Point Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
CGTopo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Topographic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Erase Surface from DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Tin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Main Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Intermediate Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
All topo items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Label Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Place Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Delete Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
Contents xxi
CGTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
CG Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
Copy Entity to Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
Pick Layers to Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
Pick Layers to Thaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
Freeze ALL Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Thaw ALL Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Pick Layers to turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Pick Layers to turn On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Turn OFF ALL Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Turn ON ALL Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Pick Current Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Point Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Auto Point Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
Auto Point Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
Auto Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
CG Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Points and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
Zoom to Point ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
Windows Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
CGEditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
CGEditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1388
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
Starting Survnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
Menu System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Process Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
Contents xxii
Raw Traverse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
SurvNET Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Data Collector Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Example Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Network Processing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
2D-1D Local Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
2D-1D State Plane Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
GPS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
GPS Vectors and Total Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478
Vertical Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Contents xxiii
Introduction 1
1
Using the Carlson Software Manual
This manual is designed as a reference guide. It contains a complete description of all commands in the Carlson
Software product. The chapters are organized by program menus, and are arranged in the order that the menus
appear in Carlson Software.
Product Overview
Carlson Software offers a full suite of commands for downloading, entering, and processing eld survey data and for
generating nal plats and drawings. Carlson Software can function as a total and complete software solution for the
land surveying rm, or as an affordable downloading, calculation, and preparatory solution used in conjunction with
the more full-featured Carlson Software. Built around the Autodesk 2013 OEM graphics engine, Carlson Software
reads and writes standard AutoCAD drawings and assures familiarity to AutoCAD trained staff.
Data Collection
The power of Carlson Survey begins with data collection. Carlson Survey downloads all major collec-
tors ranging from Geodimeter and TDS to Leica, Nikon, Sokkia, and SMI. The raw data is stored in
“RW5†format and can be viewed, edited and processed. The processing, or
calculation of coordinates, recognizes “direct and reverse†and other forms of
multiple measurement, and processes sets of eld measurements. Surveys can be balanced and closed by selective
use of angle balance, compass, transit, Crandall, and least squares methodsâ€''or simply by direct cal-
culation with no adjustment. Commands exist for nding bad angles and for plotting the traverse and sideshot legs
of the survey in distinct colors as a means of searching for “busts†or errors. In
addition to downloading of data from electronic data collectors, the program accepts manual entry of eld notes di-
rectly into a spreadsheet format, permitting review, storage, and editing. Alternatively, eld notes can be entered for
immediate calculation and screen plotting of points, with the “raw notes†stored
simultaneously, permitting re-processing and re-calculation as needed. For data that was not eld-surveyed, but
was provided in the form of an ASCII or binary point le, Carlson Software offers the “Import
Text/ASCII File†command, unrivaled in its exibility to read foreign data sources.
Field to Finish
The survey world is recognizing the power of coding eld shots with descriptions that lead to automatic layering,
linework, and symbol work. Ofce drafting time can be reduced by 50% or more with intelligent use of descriptions,
leading to “eld to nish†plotting. For example, breaklines, which act as barriers
to triangulation, should be placed on streams, ridges, toe-of-slopes and top-of-banks for more accurate contouring.
With the eld to nish command, breaklines can be created by eld coding, with descriptions such as DL, for
creating 3D polyline ditch lines, or TB for creating top-of-bank polylines, etc. and this coordinate data can be
simply plotted to the screen as undifferentiated points. However, with the eld to nish command, the data can
be plotted in one step, creating 3D polyline break lines, building lines, light poles, manholes, edge-of-pavements,
that are all distinctly layered and fully annotated. The eld to nish command within Carlson Survey is extremely
robust, so much so that it can adapt to a coding system made up on-the-y, or a coding system that has been received
from an outsourced survey. Field crew coding and ofce processing using the eld to nish command can save
valuable hours of drafting and eliminate misinterpretations, paving the way for quick plat generation or supporting
supplemental engineering work.
Deed Work
Carlson Survey allows you to enter old deeds and plot the linework, then add bearing and distance annotation
optionally. Distances can be entered in meters and feet, and even in the old measurement forms of chains,
poles, links, and varas. Both tangent and non-tangent arcs can be entered. Closures, distances traversed, and
Chapter 1. Introduction 2
areas are automatically reported. Working in reverse, the command Legal Description creates a property de-
scription suitable for deed recording directly from a closed polyline on the screen. If that polyline has point
numbers with descriptions at any of the property corners, these descriptions will appear in the deed report,
as in “…thence N 45 degrees, 25 minutes, 10 seconds E to a fence
post…â€. Deed les can be saved, re-loaded, edited, re-drawn and printed or
plotted to the screen in a report form.
Drafting and Design
Carlson Software offers approximately 150 different symbols and north arrows, broken down by categories (for
example, points, trees, map symbols). You can create new categories or supplement or change the available
point symbols within any category. The program is designed to receive entire sets of new, customized point
symbols in a single command. Attributes of points, such as elevation and point number, can be selectively
“frozen,†allowing the creation of nal plats with symbols and optional descrip-
tions remaining on points, as desired. Linework, typically in the form of polylines, can be drawn by any combination
of point number and “snap†selection, to create property lines, street lines, ease-
ments and right-of-ways, building lines and borders. In addition to Carlson Softwareâ€s standard
line types, dozens of special line types are available, including tree lines, fence lines, all manner of utility lines,
stonewalls, and customizable line types. Design features include automatic street intersections and cul-de-sacs, and
automatic lot layout. For lots, you can pick your right-of-way and back property polylines, specify desired acreages
and frontage/rear lot parameters, and the lots are automatically calculated and drawn. Hinged Area, Sliding Side
Area, and Area Radial from Curve are excellent design tools, with an easy, graphic interface. All design polylines
can be converted to point numbers at vertices and radius points for purposes of eld stakeout.
Annotation
With a full slate of annotation commands, Carlson Survey is all you need to nalize your boundary surveys and plats.
There is a wide range of bearing and distance annotation options, including the Auto-Annotate command, which
allows you to annotate an entire selection set of polylines in one step. Station and offset annotating, as for right-of-
way lines, is provided. Use commands such as Special Leader, Station Polyline, Draw North Arrow, and Draw Bar
Scale to dress up the drawing and give it a hand-drafted look. Commands such as Title Block and Draw Legend, as
well as sequential lot numbering and the area labeling commands, help you complete the nished drawing quickly.
Powerful Utilities
Carlson Software contains many strong utilities, particularly polyline utilities. You can Join Nearest disconnected
polylines, turn 2-sided gures into closed, 4-sided gures, offset, trim, and extend 3D polylines, create building
“footprints†with left and right entries using Extend by Distance, even reverse
polyline directions. There are over 20 signicant polyline utilities available, including Reduce Vertices, which weeds
out duplicate or unnecessary vertices and cuts down on drawing size. Boundary Polyline is a simplied version
of the AutoCAD command Boundary, and its opposite, Shrinkwrap Entity. Other categories of utilities include
point attribute editing, scaling, twisting and re-sizing, text editing, font alteration and re-sizing, and advanced layer
manipulation. Raster images such as aerial photos and scanned images can be placed on drawings.
Contouring and Terrain Modeling
There are many higher order features in Carlson Survey. Full contouring is provided, with options for smoothing
and labeling contours, highlighting index contours and clipping contours to selected perimeters. Carlson Survey
can be used to create both grid les and TIN les (.t format). Volumes can be computed between grid les,
inside any selected polyline perimeter. Proles can be extracted from contour maps or hand-entered, as generic
“point-to-point†proles or as road proles with vertical curves. The Design Pad
Template command carves in building pads, pits, parking lots, roads, and other 3D features into any existing terrain.
Land forms created by contouring and Design Pad Template can be viewed in 3D and rotated in real time, using
the 3D Viewer Window command. In addition to all the commands needed to create nal drawings, Carlson Survey
Chapter 1. Introduction 3
also contains commands to perform many engineering tasks typically encountered by survey rms.
Carlson Software is the ideal stand-alone solution for the survey and drafting organization, but it is also the perfect
go-between product for the large civil engineering rm with in-house or outsourced survey operations. It compli-
ments Carlson Roads. Carlson Survey enables Carlson Software to serve the full spectrum of the surveying and civil
engineering design world.
System Requirements
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 7, Vista, Windows XP Professional or Home Edition (SP1 or SP2),
Windows XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2), or Windows 2000 (SP3 or SP4).
Notes
It is recommended that you install and run Carlson Software on an English version of the operating system.
Users of Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 Professional must have Administrator permissions to install
Carlson Software. Not assigning these permissions can cause Carlson Software to perform incorrectly. See
Windows Help for information about assigning user permissions.
Carlson OEM 2013 based products do not support Windows 95, 98 and ME (all editions).
Processor
Intel Pentium IV processor recommended
RAM
512 MB
Video
1024 x 768 VGA display with true color
Hard disk
750 MB free disk space
Pointing device
Mouse
CD-ROM
Any speed (for installation only)
Optional hardware
Printer or plotter
Digitizer
Modem or access to an Internet connection
Open GL-compatible 3D video card
Chapter 1. Introduction 4
The OpenGL driver that comes with the 3D graphics card must have the following: Full support of OpenGL or later.
An OpenGL Installable Client Driver (ICD). The graphics card must have an ICD in its OpenGL driver software.
The ''miniGL'' driver provided with some cards is not sufcient for use with this Autodesk CAD engine.
Web browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or higher)
Installing Carlson Software
If you're installing Carlson Software on Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000, you must have permission
to write to the necessary system registry sections. To do this, make sure that you have administrative permissions on
the computer on which you're installing. Before you install Carlson Software, close all running applications. Make
sure you disable any virus-checking software. Please refer to your virus software documentation for instructions.
Note: If you are upgrading from an older version of Carlson Software, you must uninstall the older version before
installing Carlson Software. This is required for successful software installation and to meet the guidelines of the
EULA (End User License Agreement).
1 Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive.
If Autorun is enabled, it begins the setup process when you insert the CD.
To stop Autorun from starting the installation process automatically, hold down the SHIFT key when you insert the
CD.
To start the installation process without using Autorun, from the Start menu (Windows), choose Run. Enter the
CD-ROM drive letter, and setup. For example, enter d:\setup.
2 The Windows Installer dialog box is displayed briey, followed by a dialog box for entering in your serial number.
In the Enter Carlson Software 2008 Serial Number dialog box, you must enter the serial number provided with your
copy of Carlson Software. Then click OK.
3 The Setup dialog box appears briey, followed automatically by the Carlson Software 2008 Setup dialog. If this
is the initial installation, you will see the dialogs shown below.
Chapter 1. Introduction 5
After reading this second dialog box, press Next. If this version of Carlson Software has already been installed, you
will see a a different Add/Remove dialog instead. In this case, it is recommended that you Cancel the current install
and go to Windows > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs and remove Carlson Software 2008. After the old
installation is removed, you may start the install process once more to continue.
4 Review the End-user License Agreement, accept it with the correct click choice, and then click Next. You can
optionally print it out.
Chapter 1. Introduction 6
5 On the Select Installation Type dialog box, select the type of installation you want: Typical or Custom. Choose
Next.
Typical installs the following features:
Program les: Executables, menus, toolbars, Help templates, TrueType fonts, and additional support les
Internet tools: Support les
Fonts: SHX fonts
Samples: Sample drawings
Help les: Online documentation
Custom installs only the les you select. By default, the Custom installation option installs all Carlson Software
features. To install only the features you want, choose a feature, and then select one of the following options from
the list:
Chapter 1. Introduction 7
Will be installed on local hard drive: Installs a feature or component of a feature on your hard drive.
Entire feature will be installed on local hard drive: Installs a feature and its components on your hard drive.
Feature will be installed when required only: Installs a feature on demand.
Entire feature will be unavailable: Makes the feature unavailable.
6 On the Destination Folder dialog box, do one of the following:
Choose Next to accept the default destination folder/directory.
Choose Browse to specify a different drive and folder where you want Carlson Software to be installed. Choose any
directory that is mapped to your computer (including network directories), or enter a new path. Choose OK and then
Next.
Setup installs some les required by Carlson Software in your system folder (for example, c:\Windows\System, or
c:\Winnt\System32). This folder may be on a different drive than the folder you specify as the installation folder
(for example, d:\Program Files\Carlson Software). You may need up to 60 MB of space in your system folder,
depending on the components you select to install. Setup alerts you if there is insufcient free space on the drive
that contains your system folder.
On the Start Installation page, choose Next to start the installation.
Chapter 1. Introduction 8
The Updating System dialog box is displayed while Carlson Software is installed.
When the installation is complete, the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed. Choose Finish to exit the installation
program.
Chapter 1. Introduction 9
It is strongly recommended that you restart your computer at this point in order for the new conguration settings
to take effect.
Congratulations! You have successfully installed Carlson Software. You are now ready to register your product and
start using the program. To register the product, double-click the Carlson Software icon on your desktop and follow
the instructions.
Authorizing Carlson Software
The rst time you start Carlson Software, the Registration Wizard is displayed.
Carlson Software has installed an automated procedure for registering your software license. Change keys are no
longer given over the telephone. Please choose one of the following registration methods.
Form: This method allows you to ll out a form that you can print out and fax or mail to Carlson Software for
registration.
Internet: If your computer is online, you may register automatically over the Internet. Your information is sent to a
Carlson Software server, validated and returned in just a few seconds. If you are using a dial-up connection, please
Chapter 1. Introduction 10
establish this connection before attempting to register.
Enter change key: Choose this method after you have received your change key from Carlson Software (if you
previously used the Form method above).
Register Later: Choose this method if your want to register later. You may run Carlson Software for 30 days before
you are required to register.
After you choose the registration method, press Next
Choose the reason for installation. The very rst time you install Carlson Software is the only time you will choose
the rst reason. All subsequent installations require a choice from the remaining options.
New install or maintenance upgrade of Carlson Software: If you are installing Carlson Software for the rst
time, choose this reason.
Home use. See License Agreement: Choose this reason if you are installing on your home computer. See your
license agreement for more details!
Re-Installation of Carlson Software: Choose this reason if you are reinstalling on the same computer with no
modications.
Windows or AutoCAD upgrade: Choose this reason if you have reinstalled Carlson Software after installing a new
version of Microsoft Windows.
New Hardware: Choose this reason if you are installing Carlson Software on a new computer or if your existing
computer has had some of its hardware replaced such as the hard disk, network adapter, etc.
After you choose the reason for installation, press Next, and then enter the required information into the dialog.
Chapter 1. Introduction 11
If you are using the Form method, press the Print Fax Sheet button, to print out the form. You may fax this form
to the number printed on the form, or mail it to Carlson Software, 102 W. Second St., Suite 200, Maysville, KY
41056-1003.
If you are using the Internet method, press Next. After a few seconds, your registration will complete. If your
registration is successful, you will receive a message such as the one below. If your registration is unsuccessful,
please note the reason why and try again. Keep in mind that each serial number may be registered to a single
computer only.
If you do not have access to the Internet, and do not have a printer, you must write down the information from the
User Info tab (shown above) and fax it to 606-564-9525, or mail it to Carlson Software, 102 W. Second St., Suite
200, Maysville, KY 41056-1003.
Carlson Registration
Each Carlson program is licensed for use on one workstation which must be registered. The registration records
your company name, Carlson serial number and AutoCAD serial number. To register your copy of Carlson, start
Carlson and choose ''Register Now''. The following dialog will appear.
Note: Carlson Software will no longer issue change keys over the telephone. There are four registration options.
Fax: This method allows you to print out the required information on a formwhich you then fax to Carlson Software.
The fax number is printed on the form. The change key will be faxed back to you within 72 hours.
Internet: Register automatically over the Internet. Your information is sent to a Carlson Software server, validated
and returned in just a few seconds. If you are using a dial-up connection, please establish this connection before
attempting to register.
Enter pre-authorized change key: If you originally chose the Fax method above, you will need to choose this
method now to enter the change key that is faxed back to you.
Register Later: If you wish, you may defer registration up to 30 days. After this time, Carlson will enter demo
mode which displays a message each time a Carlson command is run.
Chapter 1. Introduction 12
After you select the registration method, choose Next and select the type of installation you are performing, choose
Next again to review the copyright information and to ll out the required information. At this point, if you are
using the Fax method, press the Print Fax Sheet button. If you are registering using the Internet method, press Next
and the process will start.
If you have any problems with Internet registration, please repeat this process and use the Fax method. The
registration form is available on the Carlson Software website at http://www.carlsonsw.com/registration.html.
Tip: If Carlson is running, you may access the registration dialog by choosing About Carlson from the Help menu,
then pick the Change Registration button.
Setting Up a Project
Over 200 Carlson Software settings can be specied in the Congure command on the Settings menu. These values
are used to initialize Carlson Software options when opening a new or existing drawing. Among these settings is
the coordinate point number format, object linking options, and settings for the COGO portion of Carlson Software.
The template drawing is the default drawing that opens up each time Carlson Software is started. To customize
the template drawing, run the OPEN command under the File pulldown menu, change the les of type setting to
Drawing Template and choose the template drawing, ''survey.dwt''. Then make your changes and SAVE the drawing
as survey.dwt in the Template folder.
When starting a new drawing, one of the rst steps is to run Drawing Setup in the Settings menu. Drawing Setup
sets the drawing scale, the units mode as either english or metric, and the text, symbol and linetype size scalers. The
initial values for these Drawing Setup variables are set in Congure > General Settings. When a drawing is saved,
the Drawing Setup variables are saved with the drawing. Carlson Software will set the text height according to the
drawing scale and text size scaler set in Drawing Setup. For example, if the horizontal scale is set to 50 and the
text size scaler is 0.1, Carlson Software will draw the text with a height of 5 (50
*
0.1). Then, when the drawing is
plotted at 1''=50', the text will be 0.1 inches.
Every drawing remembers the data les that are being used for the drawing. When the drawing (.DWG) le is saved
with the SAVE or SAVEAS command, Carlson Software writes a settings le that contains all the active data le
names. Then, when the drawing is reopened, the data les default to their previous settings. For example, you won't
have to choose which coordinate le to use unless you want to change it. The settings le is stored in the same folder
as the drawing le, and has the same name as the drawing, with an .INI extension. For example, a drawing called
survey.dwg would have a settings le called survey.ini.
The Drawing Explorer command, in the Settings menu within the Project command, tracks and stores project les
associated with each saved drawing. You may use this command to generate a report of all les used in a particular
drawing. Project Explorer takes this concept one level further and allows you to group drawing les and their
associated project les. Reports can also be generated using this tool.
Startup Wizard
For creating a new drawing in Carlson Software, the Startup Wizard can guide you through starting and setting up
the drawing. This wizard is optional, and it can be turned on or off in the Settings menu by clicking Congure, then
General Settings. You can also exit out of the Startup Wizard at any time. When the Startup Wizard is turned on and
the New drawing command is executed, you will see the Select template dialog box.
Chapter 1. Introduction 13
Typically, you want to choose the drawing template SURVEY.DWT when you are using Carlson Survey, and
then click Open. Rember that for Carlson Roads you will use ROADS.DWT. For Carlson Field you will use
ROADS.DWT. The drawing template will set some of the basic drawing parameters, such as the default layer
names. The Startup Drawing Wizard dialog appears.
Here, you need to set the new drawing name and scale. Set the drawing (.dwg) name by picking the Set button. The
Drawing to Create dialog box opens. Change to the directory/folder (''Save in'' eld) where you want to store the
drawing. You can either select an existing folder or create a new folder. Type in the drawing name in the File name
eld and click the Save button.
Chapter 1. Introduction 14
Then you can set the drawing horizontal scale, symbol size, text size and unit mode (English or Metric). Clicking
the Next button brings up the Startup Wizard Data Files dialog box. This is for setting the Data Path and CRD File.
The Set button for the Data Path is for setting the folder where Carlson Software will store the data les, such as
raw (.RW5) les and prole (.PRO) les. The Set button for the Data Path allows you to select an existing folder or
create a new folder. See the Set Data Directory command for more information.
The Coordinate (.CRD) File is the coordinate le for storing the point data. There is an option to create a new
or existing coordinate le. The New option will erase any point data that is found in the specied CRD le. The
Existing option will retain any point data in the specied coordinate (.CRD) le. If the specied coordinate (.CRD)
le does not exist, the wizard will create a new le.
The next wizard step depends on the Import Points option. The Data Collector option will start the data collection
routines to download data from a collector. The Text/ASCII option will import point data from a text/ASCII le.
See the Data Collection and Import Text/ASCII File commands for more information on running these routines. If
the None option is set, then the Startup Wizard is nished.
Once point data has been imported from the data collector or text/ASCII le, the wizard guides you through drawing
the points. There are options to run Draw/Locate Points, Field To Finish or None. If None is selected, then the
Startup Wizard is nished. Draw/Locate Points will import the points into the drawing using the same symbol and
layer for all the points. From the Draw/Locate Points dialog, set the symbol, layer and point attributes to draw
(description, elevation) and then pick the Draw All button. The Field To Finish command will import the points
into the drawing using different layers and symbols depending on the point descriptions that refer to the code table
dened in Field to Finish. Also Field to Finish can draw linework. See the Draw/Locate Point and Field To Finish
Chapter 1. Introduction 15
commands for more information on running these routines. After drawing the points, the wizard will zoom the
display around the points. Then the wizard is nished.
Command Entry
Commands may be issued by selecting a pulldown menu, screen menu, digitizer tablet item, or by typing a command
at the command prompt. Pulldown menus have a row of header names across the top of the screen. Selecting one of
these header names displays the possible commands under that name. Screen menu items are shown in the screen
menu (typically on the right side of the screen). The screen menu can be toggled off and on inside of the AutoCAD
Options dialog. The Pulldown menus are the primary method for Carlson command selection. Each section of this
manual shows the pulldown menu which contains the commands that are explained in that section. Pulldown menus
are sometimes also referred to as dropdown menus.
Command availability depends on which menu is loaded. Carlson menus have a mixture of both Carlson and CAD
commands. This allows you to execute the commonly used CAD commands from the menus while running Carlson.
Quick Keys are user-dened short cut names that can be typed in to start commands. To review the current set of
Quick Keys, run the Quick Keys command in the Settings pulldown menu. Quick Keys are explained in more detail
in the next section.
For command entry at the Command: prompt, pressing Enter repeats the last command. Also the prompt history
records the sequence of previous commands, and you can run these previous commands without invoking the menu.
To access the commands, use the keyboard up and down arrows. The up arrow moves backwards in the history and
the down arrow moves forward. As you press the arrows, the previous command names appear at the command
prompt. When you get to the command that you want to run again, press Enter.
Layer and Style Defaults
Many Carlson Software commands have default layers such as AREATXT for area labels and BRGTXT for bearing
and distance annotations. These layers can be specied in dialogs for the corresponding commands, and several can
be set in the Congure command under the Settings menu. Sometimes you may want to use the current layer, and it
can be an extra step to have to open the dialog to set the layer. In this case, instead of using the default layer that is
set in the dialog, the default layer can be set as ''CLAYER'', which will use the current layer.
For example, if the annotation layer is set to CLAYER, then annotation will be drawn in the current layer instead
of BRGTXT or whatever the annotation layer used to be. This same concept applies for text styles. Several com-
mands have specic text styles and if you want to use the current style instead of the command style, use the name
''CSTYLE'' for the style name.
Chapter 1. Introduction 16
What is New
General
Symbol Library - Added 18 new 3D symbols, 130 new points symbols and 5 new north arrows.
Toolbars - Added 38 new toolbar icons.
Linetypes - Added 16 new linetypes.
Hatches - Added 7 new hatches.
Unlock Attributes - New command to unlock block attributes.
Drawing Cleanup - Added method to set negative thickness for polylines to zero.
Median Offset - New command to create median polyline between two existing polylines.
Merge Closed Polylines - New command to select closed polylines and enter a min area and then automatically
merge too small polylines.
Join Nearest - Added option to elevate zero linework to matching linework at elevation.
Annotative Text - Added support for creating annotative text.
Text Styles - In Drawing Setup , added method to create text styles for various sizes for current drawing scale.
Convert Text To MText - New command to create MText from selected Text entities.
Text Capitalization - New command to set capitalization of selected text.
Text On Polyline - New command to create text that follows a polyline.
Text Unmask - New command to remove text masks from selected text entities.
Curve - Arrow - Added option for draw text and put all options into a dialog.
Leader with Text - Added option to store and recall text for the labels.
Layer Turn Off By Pick - New command to turn layer off by picking an entity on that layer.
Layer Turn Off By Selection - New command to turn layers off by selecting entities on the layers.
Turn On Layers - New command to turn on layers that were turned off by the layer off commands.
Freeze Layer By Name - New command to enter layer name to freeze.
Thaw Layer By Name - New command to enter layer name to thaw.
Isolate Layer By Name - New command to enter layer names to isolate.
3D Viewer Window - Created faster dynamic zoom, pan and rotate for large models. View rotation works from
current view center instead of overall model center. Added functions to save and load the model to a .3dx le.
Chapter 1. Introduction 17
Added model view tree for setting properties of objects and turning layers on/off. Added transparent shading mode
for surfaces.
Twist Screen Restore Due North - Added option to choose between geodetic or grid north.
Align Paper Space with Model Space - New command to pan the view to match a pair of points between paper
and model space.
Section Line - New command to draw section line with labels in plan view.
Curve Info - Added tangent-in and tangent-out to the report.
Export Google Earth - Added option to easily create URL to KML results for sharing results with others. When
exporting linework, special data attached to linework such as volumes attached to perimeter polylines become tags
for display in Google Earth. Added support for text, image and solid entities. Added settings for transparency of
data when shown in Google Earth.
Survey Commands
Data Collection SurvCE - Added method to transfer using external drive and method to transfer by copying les
to a folder. Added support for .STK les.
Draw Locate Points - Added Match Properties function to pick existing point to set current point style.
Edit Process Raw Data - Added support for entering, processing and reporting angles with decimal seconds.
Added option for reporting raw data to use the report formatter. Added option to apply distance scale factor for
reports to report in different units than the original measurements.
Edit Process Level Data - Added option to use the report formatter for reports. Added imports for Topcon and
old Carlson LEV formats.
SurvNET - Added statistical error information at the desired condence interval for elevations in the 2D/1D
model. Changed the ALTA reports to show the certication settings and added a PASS/FAIL message for SPECIFIC
relative error ellipses. Added the ability to use ''Point Substitution Strings'' in RW5 control point records, RW5 GPS
records, and Supplemental Control les. Added the ability to do GPS Point-to-Point closures (previously you could
only do loops). Added support for supplemental control les with ECEF coordinates. Added support for ECEF
control coordinate records with standard errors in .GPS les. Now supports all the geoids that are supported by
Carlson Survey. Improved the output format for adjusted grid coordinates.
Field-To-Finish - Added new pipe special coding to create pipe polylines with assigned width with option to
draw 3D pipes. Added height parameter and option to use point number for tree id for the tree special coding.
Added method to make two and three point curves tangent by adjusted the PC/PT points as needed within a given
tolerance. New special code ZO for points to be used for elevation only when creating linework. New special code
PHOTO for specifying image to attach to the point symbol. Added method to automatically stop linework when
there is a gap in the point numbers for the linework code.
Cut Sheet - Added method to lter the spreadsheet by point# or description. Added function to label in drawing
with full control of elds (cut/ll, station/offset, point#, elevations and description). Added report style with design
and survey data on separate lines and added option for summary statistics in the report. Added method to pair
survey and design point numbers manually.
Lock Points - New set of commands to lock selected points in the coordinate database to prevent modications.
Coordinate Transformation - Added method to grid to grid transformations between user-dened projections.
Freeze/Thaw Point Attributes - New commands to freeze or thaw all the point attributes in the drawing.
Create Points From Entities - Added method to number points from left to right or top to bottom.
Building Offset Extensions - Added options for perpendicular and for second offsets.
Point Group Manager - Points specied by number now retain user-specied order. New editor with method to
ag radius points. Added import groups from another coordinate le or C&G points list PTS le.
Compare Points - Added method to create point groups for point matching status.
Twist Point Attributes - Added option to twist specic attributes instead of whole point. Added option to set
perpendicular when using line for angle reference.
Mask Point Attributes - New command create wipeout behind selected point attributes to hide other entities.
Edit Multiple Point Attributes - Added save/load settings to le for managing different point styles.
Calculate Offsets - Added prex/suffx label settings.
Legal Description - Added method to use point group for input.
Enter Deed Description - Added option to apply a rotation to the entered angles. Added option to use curve
calculator to enter curves.
Chapter 1. Introduction 18
Irregular Boundary Adjustment - New command to adjust angle/distance courses between two control points.
Polyline Compass Adjustment - New command to adjust misclosure at end of polyline by compass rule.
Bearing-Distance Intersect - Added support for geodetic angles and distances.
Distance-Distance Intersect - Added support for geodetic distances.
Perpendicular Intersect - New command to nd intersection perpendicular from a point to another point and
angle.
Tangent Intersect - New command to nd tangential intersection from a point to another point and distance.
Best Fit Line - Added method to process points for two parallel lines and create two parallel lines.
Best Fit Centerline - Added option to create only tangents to PIs.
Inverse - Added option to report geodetic distances.
Geodetic Traverse - New command to traverse by entering geodetic bearings and distances.
Double Proportion - New command for geodetic double proportion computation.
Area Labels - Added elds for geodetic areas and area centroid northing and easting.
Inverse With Area - Added methods to use linework or point group for input. New option to report closure by
angle/distance precision. Added option to adjust perimeter by compass rule with option to draw adjusted polyline.
Polyline To Special Line - Added controls for spacing gaps and sizing labels.
Annotate Distances - Added option to label distances in chains and option to label geodetic distances.
Auto Annotate - Added method to use point group for input.
Create Point Table - Added settings for the header and footer for the table. Added setting for the max number
of rows before splitting to a new table. Added option to create table with coordinates in degrees, minutes, seconds
format.
Label Lat/Lon - Added option to label using an attribute block and added option for elevation.
Footprint Creator - New command for placing blocks into drawing for different building footprints with various
building options and ability to draw labels.
Set Linework Angles To Nearest Second - New command adjusts linework to set angles to the nearest second.
Set Linework Intersections To Perpendicular - New command to adjust linework with a tolerance at T-
intersections to be perpendicular.
Cleanup Lot Linework - New command that nds any overshoots or undershoots in the lot linework with the
options to highlight or x the errors.
Lot Network Subdivide Area - Added method to size lots by frontage.
Lot Network Report - Added option to use the report formatter and added reporting of the frontage.
Lot File By Closed Linework - New command to create lots for each closed area from the selected linework.
Lot File Manager - Added method to draw lots as non-overlapping lines and arcs in addition to closed polylines.
Added function to set clockwise point order for selected lots. Added function to create point groups. Added option
for station/offset from reference CL for report function.
Surface Commands
Draw Prole - Added a method to draw sheets in model space and create layouts in paperspace with viewports
for the proles in model space. For redrawing updated proles, program now only redraws the updated prole
instead of the entire prole sheet. Added new controls for text layers and styles for many types of labels such as
pipe labels. Horizontal Label Box now shifts labels or skip within a tolerance to avoid overlaps, has new elds for
combined cut/ll, descriptions and MXS stations, new options to use road high/low stations or centerline special
stations for labels, and new controls for which proles to use for break point stations and which elds to have
vertical lines. For road labels, added option to label PVI next to the PVI and option for slope arrow along the prole
line. Added option to prex all layers with name of rst prole. Added option to draw matchline elevation. For
PVI labels on reverse vertical curves, added label controls for combined PVC/PVT station. For break point leaders,
added option to label centerline special stations and added method to position labels on row offset from grid bottom.
Added option for station grid added to start and end of prole. For sewer proles, added option to draw short pipes
at the start and end. For sewer labels, added method for vertical line with xed height and added option to label
invert-in separately at bottom of manhole. Added option to hatch cut/ll areas between two proles. Added setting
for offset from grid for linework crossing labels.
Draw Spot Elevations - Added options to prompt for description and to apply a text mask.
Triangulate and Contour - Improved memory usage to increase capacity of data model by 50% which also
improved speed.
Chapter 1. Introduction 19
Triangulation File Utilities - Added functions to transform TIN by translate, rotate and scale.
Data Conversions
Geoids - Added support for USA Geoid2012A, New Caledonia 2008, Singapore 2009, and Mexico 97.
Projections - Added WI County projections for WisCRS.
12D Export - New command to export drawing linework, centerlines, proles, sections and surfaces.
12D Import - Added support for Unicode le format. Added support for centerlines, proles, sections and
surfaces.
Civil 3D - Updated support for newer Civil 3D versions for points and surfaces. Convert surface now works on
the current drawing and has option to output surface to Carlson TIN format.
dgDialog - Added export from Carlson RW5 to DGD format.
ePlan - New commands to import/export ePlan parcel data.
Leica - For DBX importing, added new point data import to get Leica attributes and added new GPS points
import.
MassDOT - Added symbol and layer libraries for MassDOT standards.
Netherlands - Added export from Carlson RW5 to SFN.
Saskatchewan - Added Field-to-Finish code table.
Trimble DC - Added support for importing centerlines, proles and sections.
WinCMM - Added export from Carlson RW5 to LSA.
Standard Report Viewer
Many Carlson routines display output in the Standard Report Viewer as shown below. A project name and job num-
ber can be added to the report header by lling out values for them in the Settings->Drawing Setup command. The
format for the date in the upper right of the report is controlled by the Date Format setting in Settings->Congure-
>General Settings. The report can be edited directly in the report viewer. Report Viewer commands are described
below.
Open: This allows you to open an ASCII le and display the contents in the report viewer.
Save: Save the contents of the report viewer to a text le.
SaveAs: This allows you to save the contents of the report viewer to a le.
Append To: This allows you to append the contents of the report viewer to another le.
Print: Print the contents of the report viewer. This will open the standard windows Print dialog where you can
choose the printer and modify any of the printer settings before you actually print.
Screen: Draws the report in the current drawing. The program will prompt you for a starting point, text height,
rotation, layer and whether you want it inserted as Mtext or Text.
Undo: Reverses the effect of your last action. If you mistakenly deleted some text, stop and choose the Undo
command to restore it. The key combination Ctrl+Z also performs this action.
Chapter 1. Introduction 20
Select All: Selects all the text in the report viewer.
Cut: Deletes the selected text and places it on the Windows clipboard.
Copy: Copies the selected text to the Windows clipboard.
Paste: Inserts ASCII text from the Windows Clipboard into the report viewer at the cursor.
Search: Opens the Find Text dialog. Allows you to search for text in the report viewer.
Chapter 1. Introduction 21
Replace: Opens the Find and Replace Text dialog. Allows you to search for text and replace it.
Options: Opens the Report Viewer Options dialog. In this dialog, you can specify print settings, such as lines per
page and margins. You can also specify the font used in the report viewer. This font is used for both the display and
for printing.
Hide: This button allows you to minimize the report viewer window and give focus back to the Carlson CAD
screen. This allows you to return to working on the Carlson CAD screen without closing the report. You can
re-activate the report by picking on the minimized report viewer icon.
Report Formatter
A number of Carlson routines use a dialog box called Report Formatter Options to allow you to specify how and
which results of calculations should be presented in the report. This report routine lets you select a set of data
to report and the format of the selected data. The report can be displayed in either the standard report viewer as
described in the previous section, Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Access.
The data set in the Report Formatter may be thought of as a spreadsheet, where columns are various elds related to
a single item such as time period, drillhole, area and etc. Each new row represents a new item. Descriptions of these
eld names are displayed in the Available list of the Report Formatter. To include a data eld in the report, highlight
the eld name in the Available list on the left and pick the Add button. This moves the eld name to the Used list on
the right. The order of items in the right list denes the order in which they will be displayed. In addition, the items
may be sorted as specied by the user in the right column. Items are rst sorted by the rst column, then items with
the same value in the rst column are sorted as specied for the second column, and so on.
These subsequent sortings do not modify sortings of previous columns. If you specify no sorting for some column
(even the rst one) then no sorting will happen in subsequent columns either. For example, you may want to sort
production by mining panel name but not by month.
To generate the report after selecting columns and other preferences, click on Display button. It will bring up a
standard report viewer showing the report data. Upon exiting the viewer, you come back into the Report Formatter
for further data manipulation if needed. The other data output and destination options include saving the specied
Chapter 1. Introduction 22
data into a comma-delimited text or CSV le, creating a spreadsheet preview whereby the data may be exported
using several methods, and direct export to Microsoft Excel. Due to the popularity of the Excel output choice,
you can also customize certain Excel options, including setting mirror output, just prior to export. Data can also be
merged to combine current and old reports, and it be exported to XML format les. There is an option for output to
other database formats as well.
You may dene new columns as equations based on existing columns. Click on the Edit User Attributes button to
add a new eld name. A list of the existing attributes is available for reference.
User attributes may have one of the several summation options just like program-generated ones (except that for
them these options are set by program). The summation level is dened by the ''Total'' pop-up list in the middle of
the dialog. By default only grand total will be displayed at the bottom of the list. By picking the next item in that
box, you will get subtotals added each time the value in rst column is changed. It makes most sense to use this kind
to summation if the corresponding column is sorted. For example if the rst column is ''Area Name'' and it is sorted,
and ''Total'' is set to ''Grand, Area Name'' the report will have a sub-total for each distinct Area Name. This feature
makes the Report Formatter a very exible tool for results exploration, even before or without using a spreadsheet.
Various forms of reports may be saved and recalled using controls in the top line of the dialog.
Chapter 1. Introduction 23
To save a new version of the format, type in a new name (or use default to overwrite old one) and click on the Save
button. The next time that you come to the Report Formatter from the same Carlson routine it will recall this last
format. To pick another format just pull down on list of formats in the left top corner and pick which format to use.
To Delete an unwanted format, pick it from the list rst and then click on Delete button.
There are several Microsoft Excel export options provided. You may specify a spreadsheet le to load before
export, as well as a left upper cell to start with and sheet number to use. Totals which are reported when using
built-in viewer may be skipped when using Microsoft Excel export.
For commands that process reports using perimeter polylines, the Report Formatter has an option to create GIS
links between the polylines and the database records when the Export to MS Access function is used. When the
polyline data is available for the GIS Links, there will be a report eld called Handle. This Handle eld is the
AutoCAD entity name for the polyline and serves as the hook for the GIS link. The Handle eld does not need to
be put into the report Used list in order to create the links. When the Export function is called with the MS Access
method, there is a pop-up window prompt for whether to create the GIS links. When these links are created, you
can then use the GIS menu commands to manage and report the data.
Chapter 1. Introduction 24
Instruction Manual and Program Conventions
Westwood
Italic text represent responses by the user that should be typed in and followed by the Enter key.
Number/<Pick point>:
Bold text represents prompts or questions that the computer program will ask the user.
<90.0000>
Values enclosed in corner brackets represent default values obtained by pressing Enter with a blank response.
[end on]
Lower case text enclosed in brackets in Command prompts denotes an OSNAP mode that is turned on by the com-
mand.
Carlson File Types
.AAN Auto-Annotate Settings
.ADF Annotation Default Settings
.ARX AutoCAD Runtime Extension For Carlson Program
.ATR Strata attribute denitions
.AVG Mining Composite Quality Analysis
.BLK Mining Block Model
.CAL Mining equipment calendar
.CAP Capacity le for hydrology (stage-storage)
.CDF Geology Channel Sample File Format
.CDS MDL Laser Raw Data
.CDT Mining custom date table
.CFG Congure Conguration Settings
.CFZ Cut/Fill Color Map Zones
Chapter 1. Introduction 25
.CGC C&G Coordinate File
.CGR C&G Raw Data
.CH Corehole denition
.CL Centerline le
.CLT Culvert Settings
.CN Hydrology CN Factors
.COG Cadvantage Coordinate Data
.COT Multiple Outlet Design Data
.CQT Mining custom quantity table
.CRB Template Curb Denition
.CRD Coordinate le (point#, northing, easting, elevation, description) in binary form
.CTL SDMS Format Raw Data
.CTR Auto-Run Strata Isopach Maps
.CUI Customized User Interface AutoCAD Menu
.CUT SMI Format Cutsheet
.CVT SEDCAD Format Hydro Network
.DAT GPS Localization Denition
.DCF Deed Correlation File
.DCL Carlson dialogs
.DEM Digital Elevation Model
.DEQ Drillhole equations
.DHF Drillhole Text File
.DHT Dragline History
.DIL StrataCalc Convert As-Determined Qualities
.DLL Carlson programs les
.DTF Drillhole Data Format
.DTS Drillhole Text Settings
.DWG Drawings
.DXF Drawing Exchange Format
.DZR Dozer Push Settings
.EQO Mining equipment options
.EQU Mining equipment denitions
.ERD Erodible Channel Settings
.EW Earthwork Section End Areas
.EXE Carlson programs
.FCL Feature Code List for SurvCE
.FEN Fence Diagram Settings
.FLD Field to Finish code denitions
.FLT Triangulation mesh
.FMS Report Formatter Settings
.FRM Ferm Codes
.GCL Geologic Column Settings
.GEO Settings for Draw Geologic
.GFU Grid File Utilities macro command recorder le
.GIS GIS prompting denitions for note les
.GPF Grade Parameter File For Block Model
.GRD Grid le - a DTM surface model
.GRR Lot Edge Grading Rules
.GSQ Grid sequence history le for mining
.H1 Hydrograph
.H2I HEC-2 Water Surface Prole
.HYD Watershed settings
.HZN Horizon code denitions
.IMP Drillhole Import Format
Chapter 1. Introduction 26
.INI Program user preferences settings
.LAY Layer State
.LEV Level Raw Data
.LGD Annotate Draw Legend denition le
.LOT Lot le for Survey
.LPT Coordinate Transformation Point File
.LQE Least-Squares Measurement Error Settings
.LSP Carlson Lisp programs
.LSQ Least-squares input data
.LSS Localization Settings
.LTD Lot Attribute Denition
.LTN Lot Network Settings
.MAT Materials Library
.MDN Template Median Denition
.MIN Underground Mining Report
.MNC Compiled menus
.MNL Carlson Lisp programs for corresponding menu startup
.MNR Compiled menus
.MNS Compiled menus
.MNU Carlson source menus
.MNX Compiled menus
.MPD Mining Timing Project File
.MPJ Mining project denitions
.MXS Cross section alignment
.NOT Note le - additional descriptions for points in corresponding .CRD le
.OWN Mining Ownership Data
.PAN Mining Underground Panel Data
.PAR Parameters for mining quality compliance
.PAT Hatch Pattern Denitions
.PDD Enter Deed Description data le
.PFF Mining Pit Format File
.PFS Draw Prole Settings
.PHN Modem Settings For Carlson Field
.PIT Mining Pit Parameter File
.PLN Plan view polyline le for Dozer 2000
.PNA Mining panel attributes
.PPQ Polygon Processor Query
.PRE Pre-calculated grids for strata model
.PRF Point Range File
.PRJ Project settings le
.PRO Prole (station, elevation, descriptions)
.PSZ Pipe Size Denitions
.PTA Mining pit attributes
.PVF System Variable Settings
.PVL Sewer Network Plan View Label Settings
.PVS Mining Projection and Ventilation Settings
.RCF Drainage Runoff Library
.RCL Runoff Coefcient Layer Denitions
.RDF Road Design File
.RDN Road Network File
.RDS Roadside Ditch File
.REC Seismic Record Output
.REP Hec-Ras Report File
.RES Mining Auto-Run Residuals Settings
Chapter 1. Introduction 27
.RME Reame Slope Stability Settings
.RMP RiverMorph Project
.RNF Road Network Stakeout for SurvCE
.ROW Right-of-Way offsets for Lot Network
.RPT Report Formatter Data
.RSV Mining Reserve Description
.RUN Auto-Run Strata Grids denition le
.RW5 Raw le of traverse data
.SC Coal Section Conguration
.SC5 SurvCE Raw Data Archive
.SCR COGO script le
.SCT Cross section data (station, offset, elevation, descriptions)
.SDF Strata Denitions
.SDT SB-Slope Stability File
.SEQ Dragline sequence le
.SEW Sewer network le for hydrology
.SGD Slope Group Denition for Design Pad Template
.SIF Surface Inspector File
.SLB Slide library
.SLD Slide image
.SLI Symbol Library
.SST Draw Section Sheet Settings
.STG Stage-discharge data for hydrology
.STR Sewer Structure Library
.SUP Superelevation le
.TAB Hydrology Peak Flow Data
.TCF Digitizer Tablet Conguration File
.TCH Trench Structure Template
.TIM Mining Timing Settings
.TIN Triangulation Surface
.TKD Takeoff Material Denitions
.TOP Topsoil Denition for Road Design
.TPC Template point centerline denition
.TPL Template le for Section-Prole
.TPP Template point prole denition
.TPT Template transition le for Civil Design
.TRG Takeoff Layer Target Settings
.TRI Triangulate & Contour Settings
.TSF Road Template Series File
.UAO Report Formatter Attribute Options
.UAT Report Formatter User Attributes
.UDP User-Dened Projection For Grid Coordinates
.VOL Auto-Run Strata Quantities denition le
.WST Watershed Structure File
.XML LandXML Data Exchange File
.ZIP Compressed Data Files
.ZON Earthwork Zone Denitions
Chapter 1. Introduction 28
Quick Keys
''Quick Keys'' allows you to enter in the coding shown here on the left, and by doing so run the commands shown
on the right.
2DP = 2D Polyline
3DP = 3D Polyline
A = Arc
AL = Align
B = Block
BB = Bearing-Bearing Intersect
BD = Bearing-Distance Intersect
BH = Boundary Hatch
C = Circle
CH = Change Properties
CO = Color
CP = Copy
DD = Distance-Distance Intersect
DI = Distance
DT = Draw Text
E = Erase
EA = Enter-Assign Point
EX = Extend
F = Fillet
H = Hatch
I = Inverse
L = Line
LI = List
LP = Draw-Locate Point
LS = List
M = Move
MI = Mirror
O = Osnap
OF = Offset
OP = Occupy Point
P = Pan
PL = Polyline
PR = Properties
PREF = Preferences
R = Redraw
RE = Redo
RG = Regen
RO = Rotate
SC = Scale
SET = Set Environment Variable
SS = SideShot
ST = Style
T = Traverse
TR = Trim
UN = Undo
UT = Units
VP = Viewpoint
W = Write Block
Chapter 1. Introduction 29
X = Explode
Z = Zoom
ZC = Zoom Center
ZD = Zoom Dynamic
ZE = Zoom Extents
ZIN = Zoom In
ZOUT = Zoom Out
ZP = Zoom Previous
ZW = Zoom Window
Obtaining Technical Support
via Discussion Groups
Carlson Software operates user discussion groups located at news://news.carlsonsw.com. You can participate in
user-to-user discussions on tips, tricks and problems. Our staff monitors these groups to ensure that all the issues
are addressed. Visit our website at http://www.carlsonsw.com for information on how to access these groups.
You may also access the Carlson Software Knowledge Base. Visit it directly at
http://update.carlsonsw.com/kbase main.php.
via Electronic Mail
The Technical Support e-mail address is [email protected].
via Phone/Fax
Phone: (606) 564-5028
Fax: (606) 564-6422
via Web Site
Check the Carlson Software web site at http://www.carlsonsw.com for:
Knowledge Base, discussion groups, technical support documents and newsletters
Carlson Software manuals (PDF) and training movies
Training and seminar schedules
Step by step procedures on popular called-in topics
Carlson Software and Autodesk downloads and updates (Feel free to register for automatic update notication
of updates when you come to that area.)
via Training
Basic, advanced and update training is available from Carlson College. Enroll on our webpage or call 606-564-
5028 and ask for Carlson College.
License Agreement
Copyright 1992-2013 Carlson Software All Rights Reserved
CAUTION! READ THIS NOTICE BEFORE USING SOFTWARE
Please read the following Software License Agreement before using the SOFTWARE. Using this SOFT-
WARE indicates that you have accepted its terms and conditions.
Carlson 2014
Chapter 1. Introduction 30
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR CARLSON SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: This Carlson Software End-User License Agreement (''EULA'')
is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Carlson Software, Inc for
the software accompanying this EULA, which includes computer software and may include associated
media, printed materials, and ''online'' or electronic documentation (''SOFTWARE PRODUCT'' or ''SOFT-
WARE''). By exercising your rights to use the SOFTWARE, you agree to be bound by the terms of this
EULA. If you do not agree to the terms and conditions of this EULA, you may not use the SOFTWARE. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL OR
USE ANY PART OF THE SOFTWARE.
Carlson Software, Inc., referred to as ''LICENSOR'', develops and/or licenses proprietary computer programs
and sells use licenses for such proprietary computer programs together with or apart from accompanying copy-
righted material and documentation and;
End User desires to obtain the benets thereof and, in return for which, is willing to abide by the obliga-
tions and fee agreements applicable to LICENSOR's use licenses in LICENSOR's proprietary computer programs.
For good and valuable consideration, including but not limited to license grant in accordance with this Agreement
by LICENSOR to End User's covenant regarding LICENSOR's proprietary rights, LICENSOR agrees to permit
End User to utilize materials representing LICENSOR's product or products subject to the following terms and
conditions:
1. License Grant: Subject to the terms, conditions and limitations of this EULA, LICENSOR hereby grants
End User a personal, limited, non-exclusive, non-transferable, license to utilize the Software Product you have pur-
chased. The license granted in this EULA creates no license, express or implied, to any other intellectual property
of Licensor, except for the specic Software Product which they have lawfully purchased from LICENSOR.
This EULA grants you the following rights: You may install and use one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT,
or any prior version for the same operating system, on a single computer. The primary user of the computer on
which the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is installed may make a second copy for his or her exclusive use on a portable
computer.
Storage/Network Use. You may also store or install a copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on a storage device,
such as a network server, used only to install or run the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on your other computers over
an internal network; however, you must acquire and dedicate a license for each separate computer on which the
SOFTWARE PRODUCT is installed or run from the storage device. A license for the SOFTWARE PRODUCT
may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers.
2. Exclusive Source. End User shall obtain all LICENSOR authorized product materials through LICEN-
SOR or LICENSOR'S authorized representative and no other source. LICENSOR authorized product materials
include, but are not limited to, manuals, license agreements and media upon which LICENSOR's proprietary
computer programs are recorded. End User shall make no copies of any kind of any of the materials furnished by
LICENSOR or LICENSOR's authorized representative, except as specically authorized to do so in this EULA.
End User is not entitled to make archival copies of those portions of LICENSOR's product(s) that are provided on a
machine readable media.
3. Proprietary Rights of Licensor. End User agrees that LICENSOR retains exclusive ownership of the
trademarks and service marks represented by its company name and logo and all of the documentation and
computer recorded data related thereto. End User also agrees that all techniques, algorithms, and processes
contained in LICENSOR's computer program products or any modication or extraction thereof constitute TRADE
SECRETS OF LICENSOR and will be safeguarded by End User, but in no event shall End User exercise less than
due diligence and care in accordance with the laws of the country of purchase and International Law, whichever
operates to best protect the interests of LICENSOR. End User shall not copy, reproduce, re-manufacture or in
any way duplicate all or any part of LICENSOR products WHETHER MODIFIED OR TRANSLATED INTO
Chapter 1. Introduction 31
ANOTHER LANGUAGE OR NOT, or in any documentation, or in any other material provided by LICENSOR
in association with LICENSOR's computer program products regardless of what manner of storage and retrieval
the product exists, except as specied in this Agreement and in accordance with the terms and conditions of this
Agreement which remain in force. End User agrees that in the event End User breaches this EULA, End User will
be liable for damages as may be determined by a court of competent jurisdiction.
4. Restrictions. End User's rights and obligations under this EULA are nonexclusive and personal in nature,
and the intellectual property Licensor grants to End User is subject to applicable law other than bankruptcy law. End
User may not transfer or assign the SOFTWARE, rights under this EULA or accompanying user documentation,
or any updates of the SOFTWARE which may be provided under this EULA, to a third party unless End User
receives written consent from Licensor at least 30 days prior to the completion of transfer. Licensor reserves the
right to deny transfer or assignment if, in its sole discretion, Licensor determines the transfer not to be a necessity.
Whether or not a transfer or assignment is allowed shall be determined in Licensor's sole discretion after taking
into consideration certain factors to nd the existence of a necessity including, but not limited to, merger or
acquisition of an entity, complete asset acquisition, change of control, severe economic hardship, severe loss of
human resources or signicant loss in business divisions, or winding down of entity affairs.
If Carlson consents to a transfer, such transfer shall be allowed only as a one-time permanent transfer of this
EULA and Software to another end user, provided the initial End User retains no copies or previous versions of
the Software. The transfer must include all of the Software, including all component parts, any media and printed
materials, any upgrades, this EULA, and any associated license key. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer,
such as a consignment, rental or lease. No corresponding Maintenance Agreement rights shall transfer with the
SOFTWARE transfer to the subsequent end user. Prior to the transfer, the subsequent end user receiving the
Software from the initial End User must agree to all terms of this EULA, with the added condition that no further
transfers to third parties are permitted for any reason whatsoever, and shall agree to the terms and conditions of a
new Maintenance Agreement with Licensor.
You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE or alter the images utilized in the
SOFTWARE and user documentation. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed as a single product. Its component
parts may not be separated for use on more than one computer. You shall communicate to any individual user in
your facility that they are bound by the restrictions of this license agreement may not copy or alter the SOFTWARE
for use outside End User's facilities.
Upgrades. If you purchase an upgrade of a SOFTWARE PRODUCT and you use it on different machine from one
where upgraded SOFTWARE PRODUCT was used, use of original SOFTWARE PRODUCT must be discontinued
and conrmed within 30 days. If such use is not discontinued, it is a material breach of this EULA and LICENSOR
shall be entitled to all remedies available to it under this EULA, and under the laws of Kentucky, USA.
5. Security Mechanisms. Licensor and its afliated companies take all legal steps to eliminate piracy of
their software products. In this context, the Software Product may include a security mechanism that can detect the
installation or use of illegal copies of the Software Product, and collect and transmit data about those illegal copies.
Data collected will not include any customer data created with the Software. By using the Software Product, you
consent to such detection and collection of data, as well as its transmission and use if an illegal copy is detected.
Licensor also reserves the right to use a hardware lock device, license administration software, and/or a license
authorization key to control access to the Software. You may not take any steps to avoid or defeat the purpose of any
such measures. Use of any Software without any required lock device or authorization key provided by Licensor is
prohibited.
6. Audit Rights. End User agrees that LICENSOR has the right to require an audit (electronic or otherwise)
of the LICENSOR Materials and the Installation thereof and access thereto. As part of any such audit, LICENSOR
or its authorized representative will have the right, on fteen (15) days' prior notice to End User, to inspect End
User's records, systems and facilities, including machine IDs, serial numbers and related information, to verify
that the use of any and all LICENSOR Materials is in conformance with this Agreement. End User will provide
full cooperation to enable any such audit. If LICENSOR determines that End User's use is not in conformity with
this EULA, End User will obtain immediately and pay for a valid license to bring End User's use into compliance
Chapter 1. Introduction 32
with this EULA and other applicable terms and pay the reasonable costs of the audit. In addition to such payment
rights, LICENSOR reserves the right to seek any other remedies available at law or in equity, whether under this
Agreement or otherwise.
7. Warranty. THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED ''AS IS'' WITH ALL FAULTS. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW, LICENSOR HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANITIBILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND WARRANTIES THAT THE PRODUCT IS FREE OF
DEFECTS AND NON-INFRINGING, WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, AND THE ACCOMPANYING
WRITTEN MATERIALS. YOU BEAR ENTIRE RISK AS TO SELECTING THE PRODUCT FOR YOUR
PURPOSES AND AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT. THIS LIMITATION
WILL APPLY NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY. In any
event, LICENSOR will not honor any warranty shown to exist for hich inaccurate or incorrect identifying data has
been provided to LICENSOR. The product(s) provided are intended for commercial use only and should not be
utilized as the sole data source in clinical decisions as to levels of care.
8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY LAW, LICENSOR AND ITS DISTRIBU-
TORS, DIRECTORS, LICENSORS, CONTRIBUTORS AND AGENTS (COLLECTIVELY, THE ''LICENSOR
GROUP'') WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATING TO THIS EULA OR THE USE
OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS
OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA, AND COMPUTER FAILURE OR
MALFUNCTION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND REGARDLESS
OF THE THEORY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) UPON WHICH SUCH CLAIM IS BASED. THE
LICENSOR GROUP'S COLLECTIVE LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT EXCEED THE
GREATER OF $500 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) AND THE FEES PAID BY YOU UNDER THIS LICENSE
(IF ANY).
9. Update Policy. LICENSOR may, from time to time, revise the performance of its product(s) and in do-
ing so, incur NO obligation to furnish such revisions to any End User nor shall it warrant or guarantee that any
revision to the SOFTWARE will perform as expected by the End User on End User's equipment. At LICENSOR's
option, LICENSOR may provide such revisions to the End User.
10. Customer Service. Although it is the LICENSOR's customary practice to provide reasonable assistance
and support in the use of its products to its customers, LICENSOR shall not be obligated to any End User to provide
technical assistance or support through this Agreement and may at LICENSOR's sole election charge a fee for
customer support.
11. Termination of End User License. If any one or more of the provisions of this Agreement is breached,
the license granted by this Agreement is hereby terminated. In the event of such termination, all rights of the
LICENSOR shall remain in force and effect. Any protected health information data of End User maintained on
LICENSOR'S data base shall upon reasonable notice to End User and at the discretion of LICENSOR may be
destroyed.
12. Copyright. The SOFTWARE (including, but not limited to, any images, photographs, animations, video, audio,
music and or text incorporated into the SOFTWARE), and all intellectual property rights associated with it, whether
exists in a tangible media or in an electronic image media is owned by LICENSOR and is protected by United
States copyright laws and international treaty provisions and all other commonwealth or national laws. LICENSOR
reserves all intellectual property rights in the Products, except for the rights expressly granted in this Agreement.
You may not remove or alter any trademark, logo, copyright or other proprietary notice in or on the Product. This
license does not grant you any right to use the trademarks, service marks or logos of LICENSOR or its licensors.
You may not copy any user documentation accompanying the SOFTWARE.
Chapter 1. Introduction 33
13. Injunctive Relief. It is understood and agreed that, notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, LI-
CENSOR has the unequivocal right to obtain timely injunctive relief to protect the proprietary rights of LICENSOR.
14. Entire Agreement. This EULA constitutes the entire agreement between the parties and supersedes any
prior agreements. This EULA may only be changed by mutual written consent.
15. End User Agreement Acknowledgment. The End User hereby accepts all the terms and conditions of
this Agreement without exception, deletion, alteration. End User acknowledges they are authorized to enter this
agreement on behalf of any organization for which the license is sought. Any unauthorized use of LICENSOR
products will be considered a breach of this Agreement, subject to liquidated damages and otherwise unlawful and
willful infringement of LICENSOR's trade secrets and/or proprietary products.
16. Payment and Refund Policy. The use of the SOFTWARE herein is deemed a commercial use and under
the terms of this license agreement End User shall not be entitled to any refund of purchase price. End User agrees
to pay all user fees promptly. LICENSOR is authorized by End User to suspend any further access to SOFTWARE
in the event fees are not fully paid. End user entity shall promptly pay any and all access and use charges incurred
regardless of the end user. End user is responsible for protecting any pass word and user identity supplied to End
User.
17. Loss/Theft/Misuse. End user shall promptly report to LICENSOR the theft or other loss of any pass-
word and/or user identity required to access SOFTWARE. LICENSOR shall not be responsible for maintaining the
integrity of End User data in the event that end user's data base is accessed and/or altered by an unauthorized end
user due to the failure of licensed End User to protect its password or user identity. End User shall be responsible
for any costs incurred by LICENSOR due to the negligence or reckless disregard of End User's failure to protect its
password or user identity.
18. Civil/Criminal Investigation. End user shall fully cooperate with LICENSOR and or any person autho-
rized by LICENSOR (including local, state, or federal law enforcement ofcials) to investigate any alleged theft,
misuse or unauthorized use of SOFTWARE or data related thereto.
19. U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT and documentation are provided
with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set
forth in subparagraph (b)(1)(ii) and (c) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS
252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at 48 CFR
52.227-19, as applicable.
20. Governing Law. This EULA shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of the Com-
monwealth of Kentucky, USA.
Chapter 1. Introduction 34
Tutorials 2
This section contains tutorials designed to assist you in learning this Carlson Software product. It is recommended
that you try some of these out when you are rst starting to learn the software, or when you need some pointers
later on.
You will see how to enter a deed, make a plat and use Field to Finish for faster drafting. There are also lessons on
intersections and subdivisions, SurvNET, contouring, DTM and design. Using break lines and surfaces are also
covered.
Some of the tutorials will ask you to open drawing and data les that are provided to you at purchase. Good luck!
35
Lesson 1: Entering a Deed
In this short lesson you will create a simple drawing. You will enter a 6-sided deed, add a title block, bar scale, and
north arrow, add a title and certication text, and plot the deed area.
Note that the Esc key will cancel most commands, so if you choose the wrong command or enter something incor-
rectly and want to start over, just press Esc.
1 Click the icon for Carlson. You may be presented with a ''Startup Wizard'' dialog box. If so, click Exit.
2 Under the Settings menu, click Drawing Setup. Set the unit setting to English and the Horizontal Scale to 50.
Click OK.
3 Choose Point Defaults from the Points menu, and, in the dialog box, click Elevations off to eliminate the Elevation
prompt. Click Descriptions on and also set the point symbol name to symbol 4 (SPT4), which is the round, open
circle. Click Automatic Point Numbering on. Click OK.
4 Under the Survey menu, select Enter Deed Description. Use the default settings as shown in this dialog box image.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 36
Set the To Table Scaler option to 0.00. This places all of the deed calls in the drawing. The To Table Scaler
determines which deed calls appear in the drawing and which deed calls appear in a table. Deed calls less than the
To Table Scaler value multiplied by the Drawing Scale will be placed in a table of calls. Set the dialog box options
to match those shown above. Click OK.
The command line is the area below the graphics and to the left. When prompted to ''Pick point or point number''
at the command line, pick a point in the lower left quadrant of your screen to start the deed plotting. If you are
prompted for elevation, you failed to turn off the elevation prompt in Point Defaults. Press Esc and return to the
Point Defaults command.
The following dialog box will appear so you can specify where to store the coordinates:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 37
Select the New tab. Then, for the File Name, type in Deed. This creates a le called Deed.crd. All Carlson
points are stored in les with the ''crd'' extension, which stands for ''coordinates.'' Click Open. Now respond to the
command line prompts exactly as shown here:
When you are prompted for a description, enter ''Fence Post''.
Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 125.3500
The quadrant (Q) is 1 for Northeast (2 is Southeast, 3 is Southwest and 4 is Northwest). The bearing is 25 degrees,
35 minutes, and 00 seconds. If all digits for the minutes and seconds are entered as shown above, then the deed call
will be fully plotted, including the seconds. If only the degrees and minutes were entered, as in 125.35, then the
plot would appear as ''N 25 35' E''.
Varas/Meters/Poles/Chains/<Distance(ft)>: 200.51 Note that you can enter old deeds in the forms of Poles and
Links, Chains and Links and even Varas (a unit of measurement formerly used in the southwestern states of the
U.S.).
Enter Point Description <Fence Post>: Iron Pin
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 189.4321
Varas/Meters/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 225.00
Enter Point Description <Iron Pin>: press Enter
Pressing Enter selects the default, which is Iron Pin.
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: C
Radius: 75
Curve direction [Left/<Right>]? press Enter for right
Non-tangent/Reverse-tangent/Bearing/Chord/DeltaAng/Tangent/<Arc Len>: 118.17
If you don't know the arc length, but you know the tangent, you would choose ''T'' for tangent.
Enter Point Description <Iron Pin>: press Enter
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 200.0000 (due south)
If you were to enter just 2 (no degrees, minutes, or seconds), then the deed call would be plotted ''S 000 E''.
Varas/Meters/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 178.00
Enter Point Description <Iron Pin>: Concrete Monument
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 488.2300
This entry species Northwest 88 degrees, 23 minutes.
Varas/Meters/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 300.34
Enter Point Description <Concrete Monument>: Fence Post
Chapter 2. Tutorials 38
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 454.1109
Varas/Meters/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 106.93
Enter Point Description <Fence Post>: press Spacebar, then press Enter
Simply pressing Enter uses the default text (Fence Post) again. To avoid drawing the text ''Fence Post'' twice on the
end point, press the spacebar, skip a blank character, and press Enter.
You have now completed the 6-sided gure (including one curve).
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: E
The following results are reported:
SQ. FEET: 83921.8 SQ. YARDS: 9324.6 SQ. MILES: 0.0
ACRES: 1.93
Closure error distance> 0.01708540 Error
Bearing> S 52d5'26'' E
Closure Precision> 1 in 66076.89 Total Distance Traversed>
1128.95
SQ. FEET: 82302.9 SQ. YARDS: 9144.8 SQ. MILES: 0.0
ACRES: 1.89
The resulting deed, has a closure of 1:66077. In the initial prozmpt ''Undo/Exit/Curve...'', U for Undo would allow
you to reenter the previous deed call.
Use the Extents command on the View menu to see the entire area. Then choose Zoom Out under the View menu
giving you adequate room for the next step.
5 Under the Settings menu, select Title Block. The rst dialog you will see is shown here:
Select Paper Size B2 (11 x 17), and enter the layer name of BORDER, then choose OK. You will be prompted for
the border location, pick a point in the lower left of the survey.
The following dialog appears, allowing you to enter the attributes for the Title Block. After you have completed the
title block entries, as shown below, select OK.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 39
Note that the title line is plotted in large text on the title block. Its length, therefore, should not exceed 15 characters.
Your drawing should look like the example below at this point.
Use the Extents command, found in the View menu, to see the entire working area. If you want to move the border,
use the Move command on the Edit menu. Pick the border lines and the title block objecm ts (up to 3 picks total),
press Enter (to end object selection), then pick two points representing the vector of the move.
If you want to see a margin around the working area after you use the Extents command, use the Zoom Out command
on the View menu. Then use the Window command on the View menu to capture the view and margin you prefer.
If you make a mistake, enter U for undo, or select the back arrow icon that appears at the top of the screen.
6 On the Annotate menu, select Draw North Arrow.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 40
Accept the default north arrow that is shown at the right side of the dialog, click OK, and place it in the upper right
of your drawing. Choose Move on the Edit menu (or Enter M for move at the command line) and move it.
7 On the Annotate menu, select Draw Bar Scale. Accept the defaults, and then pick an insertion point below the
north arrow and directly above the ''a'' in Farmer, and approximately the same distance from both. You can move the
bar scale using the Move command on the Edit menu, if you need to.
8 On the Draw menu, select Dynamic within the Text command. Respond to the prompts as shown below:
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: J
Enter an option [Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]: C for center justied
Specify center point of text: Choose a point near the top-center of the drawing.
Specify height <4.00>:10 Entering 10 make the title text bigger than the default.
Specify rotation angle of text <E>: E
Text: Farmer Survey
Text: Ashland, KY
Text: press Enter
To enter a certication in the lower-right of the drawing, again select Text > Dynamic from the Draw menu, or type
''dtext'' at the command line. If you haven't done anything else, such as Zoom or Pan, you can simply press Enter to
repeat the last command. If pressing Enter does not repeat the Text command, press Esc to cancel. Enter Dtext at
the command prompt, and respond to the resulting prompts as shown below.
Pick a point above and to the left of the title block for the certication. You don't have to enter L for left-justication.
The Dtext command defaults to left-justication every time.
Height <10.00>: 4
Rotation angle <E>:press Enter
Text: Surveyor's Certication
Text: Press spacebar, then press Enter
Text: I do hereby certify that the survey shown hereon
Text: is a true and correct representation.....
Text: press spacebar, then press Enter
Text:
Text: Arnold James, PLS #2534
Text: press Enter twice to end
The following is a closeup of the certication that we just entered:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 41
9 Enlarge the two title lines (''Farmer Survey'' and ''Surveyor's Certication'') by a factor of 2.0 using the command
Text Enlarge/Reduce on the Edit menu, option Text. When prompted for Scaling Multiplier, enter 2. Select both the
Farmer Survey text (at the top of the screen, not in the title block) and the Surveyor's Certication text. When asked
again to Select Objects, press Enter.
When you are selecting objects, if you select something you don't want, you can enter ''R'' at the next Select Objects
prompt, and remove items from the selection set. If you want to add objects after you have removed an object, enter
''A'' at the next Select Objects prompt.
10 Make the enlarged Farmer Survey text at the top of the screen bold by changing its font to the bold font. Select
the Text command from the Edit menu, Text, then select the Change Text Font option.
Select Objects: pick the Farmer Survey Text at the top of the drawing
Select Objects: press Enter for no more selections.
Style Name: Bold
11 Select the Edit Text command (under the Edit menu, Text option) to change
S 0000'00'' E to S 00 E. When you are prompted, ''Select Text to Edit:'' pick the due South bearing text. A dialog
box appears as follows:
The degree symbol is represented as %%d. (If you had typed N 15%%d25'35'' E in the Dtext command, Carlson
would draw that entry as N1525'35''E.) Click in the text to the immediate right of the quotation mark and press the
Backspace key until the text reads as shown here.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 42
Click OK. Press Enter to exit the command.
12 In the enlargement in Step 8 showing the title block and also showing point 5, notice how the linework travels
into the circle that represents the point. To clip off the linework at the edge of the corner symbols, use the Trim by
Point Symbol command on the Points menu. This command requires that all points be in view, so if you cannot see
your entire drawing, use the Extents command on the View menu (sometimes referred to as Zoom Extents). Respond
to the following prompts:
Select point symbols to trim against. Select objects: ALL
Entering ''all'' at the command line selects everything on the screen. Only the linework crossing into the corner
symbols will be trimmed.
Select objects: press Enter
You can continue to select objects until you press Enter.
The trimming is completed.
13 Prepare for area labeling by selecting the Area Defaults command on the Area menu. The dialog box shown
below appears. Change the Other Area Labels and Inverse with Area decimal precision to 4 decimal places. Also,
make the Area Text Size Scaler 0.2 (doubled from the default of 0.1).
You are going to compute the area by point number. You could have chosen the Area by Lines & Arcs command. In
that command, you would pick the lines and arcs that make up the gure. But since the closure was 0.017 off (the
distance from point 7 to point 1), you would exceed the default Max gap tolerance. Unless you change that tolerance
in this dialog box to something larger than 0.017, you would get no result using the Area by Lines & Arcs command.
So do not change it for this exercise because you might forget to change it back. Instead, you will compute the area
by inversing from 1 through 7 and back to 1. Click OK to exit the Area Defaults dialog box.
14 Select Inverse with Area on the Area menu. Respond to the prompts as shown below:
Station/<Pick Starting point or point number>: 1
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 2
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 3
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): R
Radius point number or pick point:CEN for center ''snap''
Chapter 2. Tutorials 43
Now move the cursor, without picking, to the arc and see how the center snap becomes active. When the radius
point is found, pick on the arc.
Curve direction [Left/<Right>]?press Enter for the Right option
Pick End of Arc or point number (U-Undo, Enter to end): 4
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 5
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 6
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 7
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 1
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): press Enter to end
A Standard Report Viewer dialog box showing the Inverse with Area results will appear. Select Exit at the top of the
dialog box and respond to the prompts as shown below:
SQ. FEET: 83921.8 SQ. YARDS: 9324.6 SQ. MILES: 0.0
ACRES: 1.9266 PERIMETER: 1128.9671
Pick area label centering point (Enter for none): pick a point near the center of the gure, in its interior. The area
units you chose in Area Defaults are labeled on the screen.
Erase Polyline [<Yes>/No]: Y
This erases a polyline that has been drawn over the original lines and arcs. The Inverse with Area command draws
this polyline because often you are solving the area from points and want the new linework drawn.
You snapped to the radius point using the ''cen'' snap. Additional object snaps appear under Aperture-Object Snap
command on the Settings menu. Since all plotted points have a node, you could have inversed around this gure
by using the ''nod'' snap for points 1 through 7, and the ''cen'' snap to capture the radius point. Snaps are typically
entered at the keyboard as 3 characters (for example, ''int'' for intersect and ''end'' for endpoint).
15 Freeze the point numbers to nish the drawing by choosing Layer Control on the View menu. In the PNTNO
row, click the sun icon to change it to a snowake icon, which freezes the PNTNO layer. Click OK. The point
numbers remain in the drawing, waiting to be ''thawed'', but they are not displayed.
The nal drawing is shown here:
This completes the Lesson 1 tutorial: Entering a Deed.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 44
Lesson 2: Making a Plat
In this lesson you will draw out a plat of a single lot, using Carlson drafting techniques. You will make the plat
from an ASCII le of points named Plat.txt.
1 Click the icon for Carlson. You may be presented with a Startup Wizard dialog box, as shown below:
You will use the Wizard in Lesson 3 to quickly perform a series of commands. In this lesson, however, you will
enter the commands individually, so that you can see what each one does.
If you see the Startup Wizard dialog box, and you don't want to see it again, click the Skip Startup Wizard Next
Time option in the dialog box above. Make sure the other settings are as shown above and click Exit.
Another way to turn off the Wizard is to click it off within the Congure > General Settings command, found under
the Settings menu. You will open this General Settings dialog box now.
2 On the Settings menu, click Congure to display the following menu:
Click General Settings to display the dialog box shown here.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 45
The settings in this dialog box, along with the settings in other Congure sub-options, determine default working
conditions for Carlson. Turn on Group Point Entities, which groups point elevations, numbers, and descriptions (all
aspects of the points) into a single entity for moving, erasing and other commands.
Choose Numeric Only to store points in numeric form. This produces point numbers such as 1, 2, 3, 10 and 11. If
you selected Alphanumeric, then you could have point numbers like 1A, 1B, 1C, HUB5, CTRL, SS10, etc. There is
a slight speed advantage to working with purely numeric point numbers. The highest numeric point number allowed
is 32000. Regardless of format, point numbers are stored in a le that has a .crd extension. There is no limit to the
number of points in an alphanumeric coordinate le. In anticipation of Lesson 3, click on the Use Startup Wizard
option. Click OK at the bottom of this dialog box.
Now we want to set the data path. Another of the Congure sub-options is Project/Data Folders. Click this option
and you will see this dialog box.
For this lesson, you will keep it simple. Click on Fixed Folder at the top. Notice the Current Data Folder section
at the bottom. This species where data les, such as .crd les in this case, are to be stored. Set the folder to
C:\Carlson2008\DATA. Click OK. You are now back to the Congure main dialog.
3 Select Drawing Setup from the Congure main dialog box.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 46
The scale acts as a multiplier on all text annotation. For example, 100
*
Text Plot Size (0.08) = 8 (text height of 8
units). The Text Plot Size is the effective height, in inches, that the text will appear when plotted at the Horizontal
Scale (here 100).
Bearings and Distances, Legends, Title Blocks, and Point Symbols will size up or down on the basis of the
Horizontal Scale set within Drawing Setup. Set the Horizontal Scale to 100. Then click OK to exit Drawing Setup.
Then click Exit to close the Congure dialog box.
4 Next, you will import the ASCII le called Plat.txt and store the points in a Coordinate le called Plat.crd.
However, since you are in a new drawing, you have not yet set a coordinate le to store the points in. You must
have a Carlson coordinate le (.crd) open and established as the container for your points.
So, under the Points menu, select the command Set CoorRDinate File to display a dialog box. Click the New tab, as
shown here. To the right of File name enter Plat and click Open. You have now created the required .crd le.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 47
You are now ready to import the points. This time, under the Points menu, select Import Text/ASCII File to display
the Text/ASCII File Format dialog box, as shown below. Click the Select Text/ASCII Files button and then choose
Plat.txt listed on the right. It is found in the default data folder (C:\Carlson2008\Data). Click Open.
Plat.txt is an ASCII le containing 54 points in the form of Point Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation and
Description. The format of the points appears in the Preview Window. The format is: Point (P), Northing (Y),
Easting (X), Elevation (Z), Description (D), or, in short, P,Y,X,Z,D. You must match this format in the Coordinate
Order. If you don't see P,Y,X,Z,D in the Coordinate Order box, then select that format from the Common Formats
option. Or, you can type the list directly into the Coordinate Order box. Make sure that Draw Points is set to Off.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 48
Click OK. The points will be saved and stored in Plat.crd. A conrming dialog appears as follows:
Click OK.
5 Choose the List Points command under the Points menu.
The List Points dialog box will typically default to the full range of points, which is 1 through 54 in this exercise.
You can control the decimal places for the Northing/Easting and the Elevation of the points in the lower portion of
the dialog box. Click OK and the settings shown above result in the report exhibited below in the Standard Report
Viewer:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 49
Exit the report by selecting the Exit icon at the top of this report viewer box, or by clicking the X in the upper right
of the window.
6 Select the Draw-Locate Points command on the Points menu to draw the points on the screen.
In this gure shown above, the current Symbol Name is showing as SPT10, which stands for Survey Point symbol
10. SPT10 is an X, shown in the symbol display window. You can select a different default symbol using the Point
Defaults command on the Points menu.
In this exercise you will change the Symbol Name to null, or symbol 0, listed as SPT0 (in effect, no symbol). Later,
you will add ofcial property corner and utility symbols. Although you are working without a default symbol, there
Chapter 2. Tutorials 50
will always be a ''dot'' or a node at the correct insertion point of each point number.
At the top click Select. You will see the following dialog box:
Note that the scroll bar at the right of this Select Symbol dialog box leads to more pages of symbols. Click the blank
SPT0 point symbol option.
When you select a symbol, you automatically return to the Draw-Locate Point dialog box. Click Draw All to display
the rather busy drawing shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 51
7 You will now be using the Scale Point Attributes command on the Points menu. Notice how the lower-right corner
of the drawing is very congested, with many point attributes overlapping. You can specify a window containing
these points and scale them down by a factor of 0.4. For Scaling Multiplier, you will enter 0.4. When you are
prompted to Select Carlson Software points, you will enter WP for Window Polygon and make a polygon around
the congested area. Press Enter when you have surrounded the points with the polygon as shown below. Here is the
command line sequence, along with the responses you will enter, after clicking Scale Point Attributes:
Scaling Multiplier <0.500>: .4
Scale symbols only, point labels only or both [Symbols/Labels/<Both>]? press Enter
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? press Enter
Select Carlson Software points.
Select objects: wp
First polygon point: start creating your polygon
Once this polygon is complete, you are again prompted to select points. Press Enter. The following shows the scaled
points.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 52
8 Next, you will prepare for drawing linework by setting the current layer. You should draft linework and symbol
work in designated layers. In this example, you will put linework and symbol work in a layer named Final. (You
could put property linework in the Final layer and utility linework in the Utility layer, but, for now, you will put all
linework and symbols in the layer Final.) To pick the current working layer, select the Layer Control command from
the View menu.
Click Final. Click Current. Click OK.
9 The 2D Polyline command allows you to enter point numbers to draw a line. First, connect portions of the
property line. Select the 2D Polyline command on the Draw menu. A dialog box might appear. If it does, accept the
defaults and click OK.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 53
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Offset/OPtions/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 1
[Arc/Close/Distance/Follow/Offset/Undo<Pick point or point numbers>]: 8
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Offset/Undo<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter
This creates a polyline. Keep this as a separate polyline because later you will turn this back lot line into a fence line.
Now, connect some of the other property lines. Repeat the 2D Polyline command. You can press Enter to
repeat the command, or you can select it from the Draw menu. Connect points 8 through 10, and start an arc, by
entering as follows:
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Offset/OPtions/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 8-10
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Offset/Undo<Pick point or point numbers>]: a
[Radius pt/radius Length/Arc length/Chord/Second pt/Undo/<Endpoint or point number>]: 15
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Offset/Undo<Pick point or point numbers>]: 1
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Offset/Undo<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter to end the
command
This creates the full lot, with the arc coming off point 10 on a tangent. The line from 15 to 1 is not guaranteed to be
tangent to the previous arc.
You should have the following linework at this point:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 54
10 You will now create a fence line on the polyline you drew from points 1 to 8. Go back to Drawing Setup from
the Settings menu and set the Horizontal Scale to 50. Click OK to exit Drawing Setup.
Now, choose the Line Types command on the Annotate menu and select the Change Polyline Linetype command.
The Line Types command creates polylines that respond as one entity when selected. When tlhe dialog box appears,
click Next twice to display the dialog box shown below.
Choose the Fence S option (the solid fence line).
Chapter 2. Tutorials 55
When prompted to Select Objects, pick the polyline you created from points 1 to 8. Press Enter to end selection.
Notice in the dialog box above that the current Line Type Scaler, governing spacing, should be 0.5 (inches) and the
Text (height) Scaler is 0.1. If your settings are different, you may want to Undo (by entering U for undo) the fence
line and select the Annotate Defaults command on the Annotate menu, and set these items to match the example.
On the View menu, select the Isolate Layers command, pick the property line, and press Enter twice. Here is the
result:
11 Next, you will connect up the edge of pavement. On the View menu, select the Restore Layers command to
restore your points. Then select the 2D Polyline command under the Draw menu. Again, a dialog box might appear
as shown below. If it does, make sure that the options selected are the same. In the future you can choose not to see
this box.
Click OK. Proceed as follows to connect up the edge of pavement:
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]:45-47,49-51
Press Enter at the next prompt to exit the command and create the road. Press Enter one more time. Note how you
can separate range entries using a comma.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 56
12 To smooth the edge of the road, select the Polyline Utilities command on the Edit menu, and select Smooth
Polylines.
Enter the looping factor (1-10) <5>: press Enter
Enter the offset cutoff <0.05>: press Enter
Select objects: pick the edge of road polyline
Select objects: press Enter
13 To offset the smoothed edge-of-road polyline by 24 feet to make the opposite edge of the road, Select the
Standard Offset command on the Edit menu.
Specify offset distance or [Through/Erase/Layer] <Through>: 24
Select object to offset or [Exit/Undo] <Exit>: pick the edge-of-road polyline
Specify point on side to offset or [Exit/Multiple/Undo] <Exit>: pick to the right of the polyline
Select object to offset or [Exit/Undo] <Exit>: press Enter to end the command
Now, select the Isolate Layers command again from the View menu, pick on any of your linework, and only the
entities on the picked layers are displayed.
Select the Restore Layers command from the View menu to recover your points. Experiment with the ''cadence''
of Isolate and Restore Layers. Select Isolate Layers, pick the layers to isolate, then press Enter twice. Then select
Restore Layers.
14 Next, you will draw the shed. Select the 2D Polyline command on the Draw menu. To draw a two-sided shed,
connect points 5 through 7 as follows:
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 5-7, press Enter twice
This produces the 2-sided building shown here:
Select the 4 Sided Building command on the Survey menu. Turn the 2-sided shed into a 4-sided shed as follows:
Options/<Pick a line or polyline>: Pick the shed
Now your 2-sided building looks like this:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 57
15 Focus your attention on the area of tightly spaced points with point numbers ranging from 27 to 44. This is the
driveway and paving area. In the case of the driveway, assume that the surveyor who collected the points shot in
3-point arcs. They came up to a PC, shot a point on the arc, and nished up at the PT.
On the View menu, select the Window option, and pick a lower left and upper right point that windows the driveway
area. (If you wish to use the View>Previous command to zoom out, then use View>Window to zoom in again.)
Select the 2D Polyline command under the Draw menu, and walk the polyline through the two arcs as follows:
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 27
[Arc/Close/Distance/Follow/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 28
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: A
[Radius pt/radius Length/Arc length/Chord/Second pt/Undo/<Endpoint or point number>]: S
Use S for 3-pt arcs.
Second point or point number: 29
Endpoint or point number: 30
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 31
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: A
[Radius pt/radius Length/Arc length/Chord/Second pt/Undo/<Endpoint or point number>]: S
Second point or point number: 32
Endpoint or point number: 33
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter
In the above exercise you started at point 27, went to the PC at point 28 and inserted a 3-point arc through points 29
and 30. You proceeded tangent to point 31, which was another PC, then completed a 3-point arc through points 32
and 33, and ended.
Now, connect up the basketball court area. Select the 2D Polyline command under Draw, or press Enter to
repeat the previous command.
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 27
[Arc/Close/Distance/Follow/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 44
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 43-39 (you can enter
''backwards'' ranges)
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: A
[Radius pt/radius Length/Arc length/Chord/Second pt/Undo/<Endpoint or point number>]: S
Second point or point number: 38
Endpoint or point number: 37
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 36
Chapter 2. Tutorials 58
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: A
[Radius pt/radius Length/Arc length/Chord/Second pt/Undo/<Endpoint or point number>]: S
Second point or point number: 35
Endpoint or point number: 34
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter
Shown below is your drawing to this point.
16 Next you will make a building footprint. Points 18 and 19 are two shot corners of a building. Assume that the
surveyors taped the main house, going clockwise from point 18, as follows: 10'L, 20'R, 40'L, 20'R, 20'L, 83'L, 60'L,
23'L, 10'R.
You can easily enter these ''jogs'' in the building using the Extend by Distance command. If you are zoomed in on
the driveway, use View >Zoom>Zoom Out, then View >Pan to focus on the building north of the driveway. Now
use the 2D Polyline command on the Draw menu to draw a line from 18 to 19.
Pick point or point numbers:18
Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point of point numbers>:19, then press Enter twice to end
Select the By Distance option from the Edit menu, Extend command.
Pick line or pline to extend: pick the building line closer to point 18
This makes the arrow point toward 18 rather than 19. Now you can go clockwise:
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): L10 (lower case ''l'' and ''r''
work also)
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): R20
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): L40
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): R20
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): L20
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): L83
Chapter 2. Tutorials 59
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): L60
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): L23
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): R10
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): press Enter to end
17 Next, you will complete the linework for the sewer line and the electric utility line. Use the View > Extents
command so you can see all your points.
The sewer line runs from points 52 to 53 to 54. Select the 2D Polyline command from the Draw menu. To create the
sewer line, enter the following:
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 52-54, press Enter twice to end
You will next annotate the sewer polyline using the Change Polyline Linetype command, but rst you must set the
default spacing for the annotation. Select the Annotate Defaults command on the Annotate menu. The following
dialog box appears.
Change the Line Type Spacing to 1.5. This will label ''S'' on the sewer line every 1.5'' at the current scale (1''=50').
To annotate the sewer line with an S, select the Line Types command on the Annotate menu, then choose Change
Polyline Linetype. Within the dialog box, click Next four times, select the Sewer linetype from the list, and then
select the sewer polyline that runs next to the road. The polyline will be annotated.
Next, create the electric utility line, which runs from point 3 to point 4 to point 17. Select the 2D Polyline command
on the Draw menu.
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 3
[Arc/Close/Distance/Follow/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 4
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 17
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter twice to end
No points were taken beyond point 17, due to obstructions from the various setups in the eld. So you must extend
the polyline from point 17 to beyond the property. Under the Edit menu, choose Extend, then By Distance. Pick on
the electric utility polyline near point 17. Then pick beyond the property. Press Enter to end.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 60
Before you annotate the electric utility line, you must offset it 25' on both sides, for a 50' total right-of-way. You will
do this using Standard Offset. Select the Offset>Standard Offset command under the Edit menu. Enter the offset
distance of 25. Pick the electric utility polyline and then pick to one side for the rst offset. Repeat for the other
side, by rst picking the electric utility polyline, then picking the other side for the offset. Press Enter to end.
Now annotate the central electric line with an E by selecting the Line Types command on the Annotate menu, then
choose Change Polyline Linetype. Choose the Electric linetype, which appears on the second page of linetypes.
Then select the electric utility polyline to annotate it, and press Enter.
18 Next, make the Property lines bold. Under the Edit menu, select Polyline Utilities, then Edit Polyline and then
select Change Polyline Width.
New Width <0.0>: 1.5
Select objects: pick the property polylines while holding down the Shift key Pick once for the fence line portion and
once for the remaining property lines.
Select objects: press Enter to end
19 To add color and improve layer management, make a layer for your road and driveway. Select theLayer Control
command on the View menu.
Click the New Layer button, and enter the name ''Road'' for the new layer. Choose the color cyan by clicking the
color square to the right of the layer name. Click OK.
On the View menu, select the Change Layer command.
Select entities to be changed.
Select objects: with Shift key held down, pick all driveway and road entities and press Enter
This brings up the dialog box shown below. Select ROAD and click OK.
Your linework is now complete and is shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 61
If you have not already saved your drawing, now is a good time to do it. Use the Save command on the File menu,
and call the le Lesson2.dwg.
20 You will add symbols for trees, property corners, manholes and a light pole.
Start with the trees. Points 11, 12, and 20 are oak trees of different sizes, and point 14 is a pine tree. Use symbol
61 for the deciduous oak trees and symbol 53 for the pine tree. On the Draw menu select Symbols. Then select the
Insert Symbols command. The following dialog box appears.
Click the Select button, and within the Select Symbol dialog box, use the down arrow at the right to scroll forward
to the tree symbols, which are several pages deep. Choose symbol SPT61. You can also choose Trees under the
Symbol category eld in this dialog. You are returned to the Insert Symbols dialog box.
Click the Select Layer button, and type in TREES in the Layer Name eld. This creates a Trees layer if one does
not exist. Click OK. For the Symbol Size use 18. A symbol size equal to the diameter of the tree is often effective.
Click OK.
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 11
Chapter 2. Tutorials 62
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 20
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: press Enter
Place symbol 61 on the larger point 12 at size 24. Press Enter to repeat the last command, or once again select the
Insert Symbols command from the Draw menu. Symbol 61 will now be the default. Change the Symbol Size to 24
and click OK.
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 12
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: press Enter
Place symbol 53 on the larger point 14 at size 8. To do this, press Enter to repeat the last command, or select Insert
Symbols from the Draw menu. Select symbol 53 and a Symbol Size of 8. Click OK.
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 14
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: press Enter
Place symbol 5 (representing an iron pin) on points 8-10 and point 15. Repeat Insert Symbols by pressing Enter to
repeat the last command, or again select the Insert Symbols command from the Draw menu. Select symbol 5 (rst
page) and leave the Symbol Size of 8. Change the layer to FINAL. Click OK.
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 8-10,15
Wildcard match of point description <
*
>: press Enter
This puts symbols on points 8 through 10, as well as point 15.
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: press Enter
Place a concrete monument (symbol 13) on point 13 on layer FINAL. Keep the Symbol Size of 8. Press
Enter to repeat the last command, or select the Insert Symbols command from the Draw menu. Select symbol 13.
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 13
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: press Enter
Place a manhole (symbol 34) on the vertices (endpoints) of the sewer line, at points 52 through 54. You
could use the above method, but you can also use S for Select entities, and place the symbol automatically at the
vertices of the selected entity.
Select the Insert Symbols command from the Draw menu. Select symbol 34 from the list. Keep with layer FINAL
and Symbol Size 8. Click OK.
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point of point numbers>: S
The following dialog box appears. Click OK.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 63
Select arcs, circles, faces, points, text, lines and polylines.
Select objects: pick the sewer polyline
The symbols are inserted at the three polyline endpoints.
21 You can reduce clutter by selecting the Freeze Layer command under the Viewmenu, and picking a point number.
The points freeze, leaving only linework and symbols. To bring the points back, use the Thaw Layer command under
the View menu. The Freeze Layer and Thaw Layer commands go together, just like the Isolate and Restore Layers
commands.
22 Next, you will create (in reduced size) your building dimensions. You can set the building dimension text size
for the current work session using the Survey Text Defaults option of the Survey Text command on the Annotate
menu. However, you can set the text size permanently using the Congure command on the Settings menu, then
selecting the Congure command. Use this last method. This dialog box appears:
Select Survey Settings and the following dialog box appears:
Choose Survey Text Defaults. The following dialog box appears:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 64
The changes you will make are in the upper-left section ''Building Dimensions.'' Change the Text Size Scaler to
0.04, change Offset From Line to 0.02, and select Drop Trailing Zeros.
The Drop Trailing Zeros option will label 17.0' as 17'. To save more space, you could blank the Characters to
Append box, but not this time. Enter the name of a new layer for the building text called BTXT, so that building
dimensions can be frozen to reduce the clutter even more. It is generally a good strategy to use layers for selective
freezing and thawing.
Click OK on the above dialog box, then click Exit until you return to the command prompt. On the Annotate menu,
choose the Survey Text command, Building Dimensions option. Click on the middle of the bottom segment of the
building and then drag the alignment to the right, along the same bottom segment being dimensioned. The resulting
label is shown below.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 65
If you had dragged the cursor to the left rather than to the right, with the same near-parallel angle to the line, the 83'
would be drawn below the building rather than above.
Another example is shown below. Select Annotate > Survey Text > Building Dimensions, and click on the left-
most segment of the building. Then click roughly perpendicular to the left. This creates a perpendicular, rather than
parallel, label as shown below.
Label the rest of the building. Notice that the sides of the building that you are dimensioning are measured in even
feet. Because you had selected the Drop Trailing Zeros option when you set your Survey Text Defaults, and you set
the Decimal Places default at 0.0, the ''.0'' is not reected in the labels,
Chapter 2. Tutorials 66
If you choose the wrong direction while you are labeling, you can exit the command, or you can erase the incorrect
dimension by typing E for erase at the command line, or you can enter U for undo to back out your last work. Once
the labels are in place, you can type M for the Move command, and move the text to the desired position.
23 Next, you will label the offset dimension from property lines to two building corners, the SE corner as offset
from the south property line, and the SW corner as offset from the west property line. Because of the options you
set in the Survey Text Defaults dialog box above, Offset Dimensions will be created on layer DTXT, and they will
be horizontal, with arrowheads.
On the Annotate menu select Survey Text, Survey Text Defaults. The dialog previously shown will reappear. Change
the Text Size and Arrow Size Scalers to 0.040. Then select Dual Arrows Line and click OK. On the Annotate menu,
select Survey Text, Offset Dimensions option.
[end on] Pick Bldg/Object Corner: pick on the SE building corner
[perp] Pick Line To Offset From: pick on the South property line (before the arc, near the end of the driveway)
The setback is labeled 43.5 ft. Why ''ft'' and not '' ' '' for distance? If you review the Survey Text Defaults dialog box
again, you will see that you set the Characters to Append option to ''ft''.
On the Annotate menu, select Survey Text > Survey Text Defaults. Under Offset Dimension Text, change the
characters to Append to an apostrophe, '' ' ''. Also, change the Text Alignment to Parallel instead of Horizontal.
Click OK. Select Annotate > Survey Text > Offset Dimensions.
[end on] Pick Bldg/Object Corner: pick on the SW building corner
[perp] Pick Line To Offset From: pick on the West property line (avoid the electric right-of-way line)
Use the Move command to move the 20' text label to the right, so that it is not overwritten by the offset dimension.
The result is shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 67
Notice the display, within the above prompts, of the [end on] and [perp] snaps. When Carlson sets a snap for
temporary use, it displays the snap within the brackets as shown. A building corner is always an endpoint, so the
end snap always applies to the rst pick. The offset is the perpendicular distance to the property lines, so the [perp]
snap always applies to the second pick. The per, or perpendicular, snap applies to offsets from arcs as well. In the
case of arcs, the per snap nds the shortest, radial distance to the arc.
When you enter a snap at the keyboard in response to a ''Pick object'' request, type only the rst 3 letters of the
snap, such as ''per'' or ''end''. You could use the Offset Dimension command to label the Electric utility right-of-way
distance of 50' total by entering ''nea'' (for nearest snap) for the rst pick, then entering the default ''per'' snap for the
second pick on the other side of the right-of-way.
24 Next, you will add adjoiner ownership text to the property lines. Select the Survey Text Defaults command, under
the Annotate menu, and set the Adjoiner Text Justication option to C for centered, and the Text Size Scaler to 0.06.
Click OK and then select the Adjoiner Text option on the Annotate > Survey Text command.
Pick Line Or Polyline: pick the west property line
Pick Starting Point: pick a centering point west of the property for the adjoiner text
Text: Brian W. and Mary T. Jones
Text: D.B. 101, P. 37
Text: press Enter twice
This produces parallel, center-justied text on the west side of the property. Repeat the command for the north side.
Press Enter to repeat the Adjoiner Text command or select it from the menus.
Pick Line Or Polyline: pick the north property line
Pick Starting Point: pick a centering point north of the north property line
Text: Stan W. Bosworth
Text: D.B. 94, P. 272
Text: press Enter twice
The results are shown here:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 68
25 Next, you will add bearing annotation. Select the Annotate menu, choose Angle/Distance, select the BearingDis-
tance option to place Bearing and Distance above the line.
Dene bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: pick the northern property line to the east, or right side The
bearing direction will be labeled towards the picked end, which is northeast.
Dene bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>:pick the eastern property line Pick closest to the southern
endpoint of the line
To label the western property line on the lower (western) side of the line, select the BearingDistance option of the
Angle/Distance command.
Dene bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: pick the western property line on the northern por-
tion of the line
To label the southern line segment with a leader, on the Annotate menu select the Annotate w/Leader command,
Brg-Dist w/Leader option.
Options/Points/<Select line or polyline>: pick the southern property line segment on the southwest side
Pick point to start leader: pick a point to start and locate the pointed end of the arrowhead
Pick next leader point: pick a point Pick a point off to the right for the left-justied bearing and distance
Pick next leader point (Enter to end): press Enter
Options/Points/<Select line or polyline>: press Enterto end
26 Next, you will want to annotate the arc in the drawing. The label will consist of four entries: arc length, radius,
chord bearing (angle) and chord distance.
Select the Annotate Arc command, on the Annotate menu, and choose the Stack Label Arc option. The Stack Label
Arc dialog box appears.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 69
Set the sequence column to 1, 2, 3 and 4 as shown. Remember that changes to this box apply only to this work
session. To set these options permanently, go to the Settings menu, choose Congure > Survey Settings > and
choose the Stack Label Arc command. When you are done with the dialog box, click OK.
Dene arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: pick the arc
Pick point for labels: pick a point to the right to place the label
As the cursor moves, the text ''ghosts'', allowing you to make the best possible placement decision
Pick point to start leader at ([Enter] for none): pick a point on or near the arc for the arrowhead
Dene arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: press Enter to end
Sometimes Carlson displays an arc as a series of chords. Type Regen at the command prompt to ''regenerate'' the
arc. Even if an arc shows up on the screen as a group of jagged chords, it will plot as a smooth arc to a printer or
plotter.
27 Next, you will label the trees, the shed, and the building using a special leader, for a hand-drafted appearance.
Under the Annotate menu, select the Special Leader command.
Options/Pick Arrow Location: pick near the southern most corner of the shed
Text location: pick slightly down and to the right
Text: Shed
Text: press Enter twice to end
Repeat the process for all the special leader text items shown in the drawing below. In the case of the 18'' Oak trees,
create just one leader with text, and on the second oak tree, create only the leader, and then press Enter when asked
for Text. For the best appearance, enter 18''Oak and 24''Oak with no spaces between the characters.
Your drawing should be similar to this one:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 70
28 You can add a North Arrow and Bar Scale by selecting these options under the Annotate menu. When you place
the North Arrow, pick your North Arrow symbol, maybe change the scale, and click OK. Then pick an insertion
point. You place the Bar Scale by answering the prompts and picking a location. Both the North Arrow and the Bar
Scale can be moved to desired locations with the Move command on the Edit menu.
29 Next, you will insert a title block with a border. Select the Title Block command from the Settings menu.
Choose paper size A1 (portrait view, 8-1/2 by 11). Click OK. Pick a point below and to the left of the survey in
Chapter 2. Tutorials 71
order to locate the lower-left corner of the border outer line. Remember that the title block will be at the bottom, so
leave extra room at the bottom.
The following dialog appears, prompting you for the attributes of the title block. Be sure to also click Next in order
to enter in more attributes.
Your drawing should resemble the one shown below.
30 Next, you will add a legend. On the Annotate menu, select the Draw Legend command. Choose the New tab,
then Open the default legend name. When the dialog box appears, select Add from Drawing. You will make one
pick for each symbol you want to appear in the legend. So, with the Shift key held down, select one of the sewer
manholes, one of the iron pins, the concrete monument, one oak tree and the pine tree. Press enter. You will then
Chapter 2. Tutorials 72
see the symbols that you picked listed.
If you want to change the order of the items in the list, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons, after rst selecting
and highlighting the item to be moved. After the list is ordered correctly, highlight one item on the list and click the
Edit button to edit the symbol denition.
Edit each symbol denition individually, typing the following descriptions in the description box:
SPT5 = ''Iron Pin''
SPT34 = ''Manhole''
SPT13 = ''Concrete Monument''
SPT 61 = ''Oak Tree''
SPT53 = ''Pine Tree''
Below is the symbol denition, with Description, for SPT13.
After you have entered the descriptions for the symbols, choose the Add option from the Legend Denition dialog
box, and add the Fence Line type to the list by picking the Select Linetype command, as shown below:
Save the completed legend, which is shown below.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 73
Select the Draw option from the Legend Denitions dialog box. Set the defaults as shown below.
Click OK. Pick a point for the legend, at roughly 5260,4380. Then click Exit.
You may need to move the fence line portion of the legend to t in the tight space. You also may need to move the
previously drawn bar scale. Use the Move command to do this. The following shows the drawing to this point:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 74
If you wish to reset the spacing of the sewer and electric utility annotation, use the LTSCALE box in the Drawing
Setup dialog box, under the Settings menu, to set it. (The setting is 50, in this example).
31 Next, you will use Dtext to label the road and Mtext to create a certication block. Zoom in on the area shown
below. At the command line, type Dtext.
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: R (for right-justied)
Specify right endpoint of text baseline: pick a pointas shown below, just to the left of the leader annotation
Specify height <8.00>: 10
Specify rotation angle of text <E>: pick a point as shown below by the location of the crosshair
Text: Meadow Lane
Text: press Enter
This right-justies the label Meadow Lane, ending it before it contacts the leader line.
Now you will enter a certication using Mtext. The Mtext command stretches an entire block of text. This command
breaks up the lines in the block of text, depending on how you edit and adjust the Mtext window. First, use the View
> Extents command to view the entire drawing. Then, at the command line, type in Mtext.
Specify rst corner: pick a point in the 5660,4980 range
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]: pick a point below and to the
Chapter 2. Tutorials 75
right of the rst, but inside the inside border line.
You now see a dialog box that displays all the text heights that you have used in the drawing. Choose the text height
of 8. Then type the following into the dialog box:
The command adds carriage returns to the text when it runs out of space in the Mtext window. Click OK at the
upper right to place this text into the drawing.
After the Mtext is plotted, you can click on the text to activate the grips. All 4 corners highlight as grips. Pick on
a grip, and then you can expand or change the shape of the Mtext rectangle. When you do this, the text adjusts
automatically, adding more lines and carriage returns, or condensing many lines into fewer, but longer, lines of text.
You can also move the entire text block to a new location.
32 Next, you will dene a text style, then add text using that style. On the Draw Menu, under Text, choose select
the Set Style option. The Text Style dialog box appears. Click New, enter Bold in the New Text Style dialog, and
click OK.
Create a Bold Style consisting of the Arial Black font tilted at a 10 degree oblique angle, by entering the settings as
show below.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 76
Then click Apply and Close. Now, run the Dtext command by typing Dtext at the command line, and place the text
at the top of the drawing as follows:
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: pick a point near the northwest corner of the drawing
Specify height <10.00>: 20
Specify rotation angle of text <N 54d40'16'' E>: E for due East
Text: William T. Farmer
Text: press Enter twice
33 Next, you will create an area label for the drawing. Select the Area Defaults command, under the Area/Layout
menu, and change the Precision for Other Area Labels to 2 decimal places.
Select the Areas by Lines & Arcs command, under the Area menu. When prompted to Select objects, pick the 2
polylines that, taken together, completely enclose the property.
Pick an area labeling centering point for the area label under the William T. Farmer title at the top of the drawing.
34 Next, bring the points back and draw a contour map. To draw the points, use the Thaw Layer command under the
View menu. If you did not complete this lesson in one sitting, then Carlson won't ''remember'' what layer to thaw. In
that case, select the Layer Control command on the View menu, and thaw the PNTS layer by turning the snowake
to a sun symbol.
Go to the Surface menu and select the Triangulate & Contour command. Click the Contour tab.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 77
In this Contour tab section, change the contour interval to 1.0. Now click on the Triangulate tab, then click on Use
Inclusion/Exclusion Areas. Press OK and then answer as follows:
Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select objects: press Enter
We have no ''inclusion'' perimeter.
Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select objects: select the building and the shed while holding down the Shift key, then press Enter
Since the building and shed are closed polygons acting as exclusion perimeters, the contours will not pass through
them when they are created.
Select the points and barrier lines to Triangulate: select a window around the points by picking from the lower
left to the upper right
The contour map is created. Freeze the points again by using View > Freeze Layer and picking one of the points.
35 Next, label the contours. Select the Contour Elevation Label command from the Surface menu > Contour
Labels. Select OK after matching the settings in the dialog box shown here:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 78
Now pick two points that cross through one or more contours. The contours are automatically labeled using the
current text style. You can use the Change Text Font command, part of the Text command in the Edit menu, to
change the font to Romans, or to another font, if you wish to.
The Completed Plat is shown here:
If you have not saved your drawing for awhile, now is a good time to do it. Use the Save command on the File menu.
36 Now we are ready to plot the drawing.
Before plotting it's a good idea to do a Zoom Extents, then a Zoom Out (both on the View Menu) before executing
the plot command.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 79
To get started, choose Plot from the File menu. There are many variables that can affect how the dialog box will
look, such as what version of AutoCAD you are using. Here is a common Plot dialog box:
With this layout, you have two tabs on the dialog labeled ''Plot Device'' and ''Plot settings''. We will start with ''Plot
device''. The rst thing to select is your plotting device (see arrow #1). Here DWF6 ePlot.pc3 is already selected,
and that is what we want to use. Next, arrow #2 points to the ''What to Plot'' section. In this version of AutoCAD,
you are either working in the model tab or one of the layout tabs. Our example is drawn in the model tab, so the
option labeled ''Current Tab'' should be selected. If you want more than one copy of your plot, this is where you
would change that number. Arrow #3 points to the plot settings tab. Click on here next. Now the dialog should look
like this:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 80
Now we are on the ''Plot settings'' tab. Arrow #4 points to where you can change the paper size and units. Here we
chose 8.5 X 11 for our size and inches for our units. The next thing to select is the drawing orientation, arrow #5
shows you where this is. We will choose portrait.
Now looking at arrow #6, we want to choose the window button in order to select the area we want to plot. After
you select this button, the dialog will disappear and you can select the upper left and the lower right corners of the
drawing border. When you nish, the dialog will reappear.
The next thing to do (arrow #7) is choose the correct plotting scale, our drawing is 1''=100' or 1:100. Choose this
from the dropdown list. Now we are ready to preview the plot. Press the Full Preview button in the lower left corner
of the main dialog. Press ESC to return to the main dialog. One new feature starting in AutoCAD 2000 is the ability
to save all the information you have just entered in a ''Page Setup''. In the upper part of the dialog, check on the box
labeled ''Save changes to layout'', then to the right of that, click the button labeled ''Add''. A new dialog will appear,
at the top of this dialog, enter a name to save your page setup as and click OK. I chose 8.5 X 11 STD. You can see
this in the dialog shown above. If your plot preview looked OK, choose OK from the bottom of the dialog and your
plot is on its way. The advantage to saving the page setup is that you can open this drawing tomorrow or 3 weeks
later and choose 8.5 X 11 STD as your page setup, and then choose OK to plot the drawing exactly like you did
today, without having to remember all the settings yourself.
This completes the Lesson 2 tutorial: Making a Plat.
Lesson 3: SurvNET
This tutorial is divided into two lessons covering the process of reducing and adjusting raw survey data into nal
adjusted coordinates, using the SurvNET program. The tutorial will describe the reviewing and editing of the raw
data prior to the processing of the raw data. Next, the least squares project settings will be described, and then the
nal report generated from the least squares processing will be be reviewed. This tutorial will review both a total
station only project, and a project that combines both total station and GPS vectors.
The raw data les associated with this tutorial is located in the Carlson2008\Data folder, under the installation
folder on your computer (example: \Carlson2008\DATA).
Chapter 2. Tutorials 81
Lesson One - Processing an Assumed Coordinate System 2D Total Station Network
1 The easiest way to start the program is to select SurvNET from the Survey menu. This opens the SurvNET
window and program.
2 The rst step is to open an existing project or create a new project. We will open an existing project. Choose
Open Project from the File menu. Navigate to the \Carlson2008\DATA\ folder and open the SurvNetTut01 project.
3 Learning the meaning and implications of the different project settings is the most critical initial step in learning
how to use SurvNET. Let's review the different project screens. Choose Project from the Settings menu.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 82
Least Squares Settings
4 The Network Least-Squares Settings dialog box is displayed. In this dialog, the different settings required for
the Least Squares reduction are available in the different tabbed dialog boxes. When all of the settings are set
as desired, press OK to save the changes to the project settings, or press Cancel to return to the raw data editor
without saving any project settings. For the purpose of this tutorial, the Coordinate System settings tab should look
as follows before proceeding to the next step. To use an assumed coordinate system, the 'Local' Coord. System
needs to be checked, and the 2D,1D Adjustment Model must be chosen. When using a local coordinate system,
the distance units are not important other than for display purposes in the report. Computing elevation factors and
performing Geoid modeling is not applicable to assumed datums. Notice that in this example we are not performing
a vertical adjustment.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 83
For more information on the content of this dialog box section, please review the SurvNET chapter of this manual.
5 Choose the 'Input Files' tab. This is the section of the Settings dialog box where you dene the data les
that make up the project. You can have multiple raw les in a single project. The ability for multiple raw les allows
exibility in collecting the data and processing large projects. It is typically easier in a large project to analyze
and edit subsets of the total project, before combining all the data for a nal adjustment. Notice that since we are
working in a local coordinate system and using the 2D,1D Adjustment Model, GPS vectors cannot be incorporated
into this project.
Note: The sample tutorial project has the input raw le in the default data folder of C:\Carlson2008\DATA.
If you have a different data directory, then set the correct data le by highlighting the default le, pick Delete and
then pick Add and select SurvNetTut01.rw5 from your data folder.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 84
6 Choose the Preprocessing tab to review the least squares preprocessing settings. For the purpose of this tutorial,
the Preprocessing settings should look as follows before proceeding to the next step. Preprocessing consists of
reducing and averaging all the multiple measurements, applying curvature and refraction correction, reducing the
measurements to grid if appropriate, and computing unadjusted traverse closures if appropriate. Much of the data
validation is performed during the preprocessing step.
For more information on the content of this dialog box section, please review the SurvNET chapter of this manual.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 85
7 Choose the Standard Errors tab to review the standard error settings. The standard error settings should look as
follows before proceeding to the next step. Standard errors are an estimate of the different errors you would expect
to obtain based on the type equipment and eld procedures you used to collect the raw data. For example, if you are
using a 5 second theodolite, you could expect the angles to be measured within +/- 5 seconds (Reading error).
For more information on the content of this dialog box, please review the SurvNET chapter of this manual.
8 Choose the Adjustment tab to review the Adjustment settings. The Adjustment settings should look as
follows before proceeding to the next step. The Adjustment settings affect how the actual least squares portion of
the processing is performed. Additionally, from the screen the user can set whether ALTA reporting is performed.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 86
9 Choose the Output Options tab to review the output settings. For the purpose of this tutorial, the Output Options
settings should look as follows before proceeding to the next step. These settings apply only to the output of data
to the report les. These settings do not affect computational precision. Press OK to return to the main SurvNET
screen.
General Rules For Collecting Data for Use in Least Squares Adjustments
Chapter 2. Tutorials 87
Least squares is very exible in terms of how the survey data needs to be collected. Generally speaking,
any combination of angles and distances, combined with a minimal amount of control points and azimuths, are
needed. This data can be collected in any order. But there needs to be at least some redundancy in the measurements.
Redundant measurements are measurements that are in excess of the minimum number needed to determine
the unknown coordinates. Redundancy can be created by including multiple GPS, and other control points, within
a network or traverse. Measuring angles and distances to points in the network that have already been located
create redundancy. Running additional cut-off traverses, or additional traverses to existing control points, creates
redundancy. Following are some general rules and tips in collecting data for least squares reduction.
Backsights should be to point numbers. Some data collectors allow the user to backsight an azimuth not
associated with a point number. SurvNET requires that all backsights be associated with a point number.
There has to be at least a minimum amount of control. There has to be least one control point. Addi-
tionally, there needs to be either one additional control point or a reference azimuth. Control points can
be entered in either the raw data le, or there can be a supplemental control point le containing the
control point. Reference azimuths are entered in the raw data le. The control points and azimuths do not
need to be for the rst points in the raw le. The control points and azimuths can be associated with any
point in the network or traverse. The control does not need to be adjacent to each othere. It is permissi-
ble to have one control point on one side of the project, and a reference azimuth on the other side of the project.
At least one of the control points needs to be occupied. There may be situations where no control point is
ever occupied in the network, but only backsighted. In these situations, a preliminary value for one of the
occupied points needs to be computed and entered as a oating point control point.
Some data collectors do not allow the surveyor to shoot the same point twice using the same point number.
SurvNET requires that all measurements to the same point use a single point number. The raw data may need
to be edited after it has been downloaded to the ofce computer to insure that points are numbered correctly.
The majority of all problems in processing raw data are related to point number problems. Using the same
point number twice to different points, not using the same point number when shooting the same point,
misnumbering backsights or foresights, and misnumbering control points are all common problems.
It is always best to explicitly dene the control for the project. A good method is to put all the control for a
project into a separate raw le. A big source of problems with new users is a misunderstanding in dening
their control for a project.
Some data collectors may have preliminary unadjusted coordinates included with the raw data. These coordi-
nate records should be removed from the raw le. The only coordinate values that should be in the raw le
are the control points.
When a large project is not processing correctly, it is often useful to divide the project into several raw data
les and debug and process each le separately as it is easier to debug small projects. Once the smaller
projects are processing separately, they can be combined for a nal combined adjustment.
Reviewing and Editing the Raw data
10 To review or edit the raw data, choose the Edit Raw Files command from the Tools menu.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 88
11 If there are problems with the raw data, such as point numbering problems or incorrect rod heights, the raw
data can be edited from this dialog. See the section on the raw data editor in the Carlson documentation to learn the
details of the editor. Review the following Standard Errors and Control Points section before exiting the raw data
editor.
Standard Errors and Control Points
The default standard errors for points are dened in the Standard Errors sheet of the Settings dialog box. There are
times when the default values may need to be overridden. For example, the control may be from GPS and the user
has differing standard errors for his various GPS points. Or maybe some of the control points were collected with
RTK methods, and other GPS points collected with more accurate static GPS methods. Standard error for individual
points can be inserted into the raw data le. The following is the menu option used to insert standard errors into the
raw le. Notice in the above raw data le that points TR1 and TR100 are the control points for this project. Also,
notice there is a standard error record, CSE, preceding the control points.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 89
The CSE record has the character '!' in the N,E,& Z eld. The character '!' designates that all following control
points will be xed. Points that are xed will not be adjusted during the adjustment. Placing a very small standard
error on a control point is almost equivalent to xing the point. Points can also be designated to be oating points by
using the '#' character. The only practical use of creating a oating point is if SurvNET cannot compute preliminary
coordinates because no control point is occupied. The surveyor can compute a preliminary value for one of the
occupied points, and insert that point as a oating point. The oating point will be adjusted, and no weight will be
given to the oating coordinate values.
Standard error records effect all the records that follow the standard error record. To revert the standard er-
rors back to the default values, a CSE record can be inserted containing the '
*
' character. In the following example,
point TR1 has been designated as a xed point. TR100 has a north standard error of .02 and and east standard
error of .01. Following the TR100 point record there is a CSE record containing the '
*
' character. So, if there were
any control points further down in the raw data le they would use the default standard errors as set in the project
settings dialog box.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 90
There may be times when non-control standard errors need to be overridden for certain measurements. For example,
if xed tripods were used for backsights and foresights for part of the traverse, and hand-held rods were used for
another portion of the traverse, it would be appropriate to have differing 'Rod Ctr' standard errors for the different
sections of the raw data.
Standard errors for angles and distances can also be inserted into the raw data le using the Add menu op-
tions Setup Standard Error and Measurement Standard Error. The standard errors set by these inserted records
override the default standard errors. In the following example, a setup standard record, SSE record, has been
inserted in record 12. The SSE record effects all setup data that follow until another SSE record is inserted. In the
following example, the foresight rod centering error is set to .005, the total station centering error is set to .005, the
total station meaure-up error is set to .005 and the foresight measure-up error is set to .005.
The following is another example where it would be appropriate to insert a measurement standard error record,
MSE, into the raw data. If two different total stations with different accuracy specications were used to collect the
data, it would be approriate to have different standard errors for the different sections of the raw le, depending
on which total station was used to collect the data. In the following example, a MSE record has been inserted for
record 27. The horizontal pointing and reading error has been changed to 5 seconds, and the vertical pointing and
reading error has been changed to 10 seconds. The inserted MSE record will effect all following raw data until
another MSE is inserted.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 91
Least Squares Processing
12 After exiting the raw data editor, we are ready to perform the least squares adjustment. From the Process menu,
choose the Network Adjustment option.
The least squares adjustment is performed, and the results from the adjustment are displayed. If the solution
converged correctly, the report should look similar to the following window. If there were errors or the solution did
not converge, an error message dialog will be generated.
If there are errors, you will need to return to the raw data editor to review and edit the raw data. Since the tutorial
example should have converged, we will next review the reports generated by the least squares adjustment. There
are four windows created by the least squares program during processing. These les include the .err le, which
contains any errors or warnings that were generated during processing. The .rpt le is the primary least squares
report le summarizing the data and the results from the adjustment. An .out le is created containing a listing of
the nal coordinates. There is also a Graphics window that is displayed. The graphic window is temporary and
useful only for seeing the results of the survey. To bring up the Graphics window, choose under the Window menu
the Graphics command, or click the View Graphics icon on the toolbar.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 92
Relative Error Ellipses
Relative error ellipses are a statistical measure of the expected error between two points. Regular error ellipses are
a measure of the absolute error of a single point. Some survey accuracy standards such as the ALTA standards
state the maximum allowable error between any two points in a survey. Relative error ellipses can give you
this information. There is a more detailed ALTA reporting feature in SurvNET. See the manual for additional
information on creating an ALTA report.
13 Press the Relative Error Ellipse toolbar icon button, or choose, off of the Tools menu, Relative Error Ellipse.
Enter TR3 and TR7 in the From Pt. and To Pt. elds. Press OK to calculate. The dialog box should look as follows.
At the 95% condence level there should only be around .02 feet of error between points TR3 and TR7. If you need
to compute relative error ellipses for sideshots make sure the ''Enable sideshots for error ellipse'' toggle is set in the
Adjustment tab of the Settings/Project dialog box.
Review of the Least Squares Report
Chapter 2. Tutorials 93
14 In this section, the different sections of the least squares report are explained. If the Least Squares Report is not
already showing, choose the Window menu and select the Least Square Report item. The report viewer has tabs to
quickly access different sections of the report.
Preprocessing and Header Information
The following excerpt from the report shows the header information and the preprocessing results. The header infor-
mation consists of the date and time, the input and output le names, the coordinate system, the curvature/refraction
setting, maximum iterations, and distance units.
During the preprocessing process, multiple angles are reduced to a single angle and multiple slope distances, vertical
angles, HI's, and rod heights are reduced to a single horizontal distance and vertical difference. During this process
the horizontal angle, horizontal distance, and vertical difference spreads are computed. If the spreads exceed the
tolerance settings from the Settings dialog box, then a warning message is displayed showing the high and low
measurement and the difference between the high and low measurement.
Unadjusted Measurements
The following excerpt from the report shows the unadjusted measurements. Measurements consist of some combi-
nation of control X, and Y, horizontal distances, horizontal angles, and azimuth measurements. These measurements
consist of a single averaged measurement. For example, if multiple distances were collected between two points
during data collection, only the single averaged measurement is used in the least squares adjustment.
Also, standard errors for the measurements are displayed in this section of the report. The standard errors are
computed from the standard error setting in the Settings dialog box using error propagation formulas. The standard
error of an angle that was measured several times would typically be lower than an angle that was measured only
once.
If the data had been adjusted into NAD 83 coordinates both the ground distances and the grid distances would be
displayed. The grid, elevation, and combined factor would also be displayed in this section of the report.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 94
Adjusted Coordinates
The next section of the report shows the nal adjusted coordinates. Additionally, the computed standard errors of the
coordinates are displayed. If this project was reduced to NAD 83, the nal latitude and longitudes are also displayed.
Error ellipses computed to the 95 percent condence interval are also displayed.
Adjusted Measurements
The following section from the report shows the nal adjusted measurements. This section is one of the most
important sections to review when analyzing the results of the adjustment. In addition to the adjusted measurement,
the residual is displayed. The residual is the amount of adjustment applied to the measurement. The residual is
computed by subtracting the unadjusted measurement from the adjusted measurement.
The standard deviation of the measurement is also displayed. Ideally, the computed standard deviation and residual
and the standard error displayed in the unadjusted measurement would all be of similar magnitude. The standard
residual is a measure of the similarity of the residual to the a-priori standard error. The standard residual is the
measurements residual divided by the standard error displayed in the unadjusted measurement section. A standard
residual greater than 2 is marked with an ''
*
''. A high standard residual may be an indication of a blunder. If there
are consistently a lot of high standard residuals it may indicate that the original standard errors set in the Settings
dialog box were not realistic.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 95
Statistics
The next section displays some statistical measures of the adjustment including the number of iterations needed for
the solution to converge, the degrees of freedom of the network, the reference variance, the standard error of unit
weight, and the results of a Chi-square test.
The degree of freedom is an indication of how many redundant measurements are in the survey. Degree of freedom
is dened as the number of measurements in excess of the number of measurements necessary to solve the network.
The standard error of unit weight relates to the overall adjustment and not to an individual measurement. A value
of one indicates that the results of the adjustment are consistent with the a priori standard errors. The reference
variance is the standard error of unit weight squared.
The chi-square test is a test of the ''goodness'' of t of the adjustment. It is not an absolute test of the accuracy of
the survey. The a-priori standard errors which are dened in the project settings dialog box or with the SE record in
the raw data le are used to determine the weights of the measurements. These standard errors can also be looked at
as an estimate of how accurately the measurements were made. The chi-square test merely tests whether the results
of the adjusted measurements are consistent with the a priori standard errors. Notice that if you change the project
standard errors and then reprocess the survey the results of the chi-square test change, even though the measurements
themselves did not change.
In our example the chi-square test failed at the 95% signicant level. Our example failed the chi-square test on
the low end, 52.6 is less than 60.5. Failing on the low end indicates that our data is actually better than expected
compared to our a-priori standard errors. If we were to decrease the pointing and reading standard error in the
Settings screen by 5-10 seconds we would probably pass the chi-square. Also notice that if you change the standard
errors by only 5-10 seconds and reprocess the data the nal coordinates will not change signicantly.
Sideshots
Chapter 2. Tutorials 96
If the ''Enable sideshots for relative error ellipses'' is not set in in the Adjustment screen of the project settings
screen, sideshots are computed separately after the adjustment is completed.
If the project had valid elevation benchmarks and measured HI's and rod heights the project could have been dened
to adjust elevations. When using the 2D/1D least squares model the horizontal and the vertical adjustments are
separate least squares adjustment processes. As long as there are redundant vertical measurements the vertical com-
ponent of the network can also be reduced and adjusted using least squares. In the vertical adjustment, benchmarks
are held xed.
This is the nal step in the adjustment. The nal adjusted coordinates are now stored in the current project point
database and can now be used for mapping and design.
Lesson Two - Processing a 3D Network With Both Total Station Data and GPS
Vectors
In this lesson we will process a project that contains both GPS vectors and total station measurements.
1 Following is the opening SurvNET window. The rst step is to open the project for lesson two. Choose the
File/Open Project.. option. Navigate to the \Carlson2008\Data\ subdirectory and open the SurvNetTut02 project.
2 Let's review the project settings. Go to Settings/Project.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 97
In order process GPS vectors, the coordinate system must be set to 'SPC 1983' with the appropriate state plane zone.
The 'Coordinate System Adjustment Model' must be set to the 3D Model. With the 3D model, horizontal units and
vertical units must be the same in regards to output and total station raw data. Geoid modeling may or may not be
important depending on the extent of the project and the accuracies required. The most accurate results are typically
obtained by using a 'Geoid File' set to GEOID03.
The project raw data is dened from the 'Input Files' settings screen. Notice that the units need to be specied for
both the GPS vector data and the total station raw data. Typically, but not always, GPS vectors are in meters while
Chapter 2. Tutorials 98
the total station and the nal output may need to be in feet. Also make sure that the correct GPS vector format is
correct. Some GPS formats are binary and cannot be edited easily. Sometimes it is needed to edit the GPS vectors
usually in terms of point numbers.
Note: The sample tutorial project has the input raw le in the default data folder of C:\Carlson2008\Data. If you
have a different data directory, then set the correct data le by highlighting the default le, pick Delete and then
pick Add and select GPSAndTS.cgr (C&G format raw le) from your data folder. Do the same for the GPS Vector
les of GPSAndTS1.gps and GPSAndTS2.gps.
Though this tutorial does not cover the topic, it is from this screen that you would dene the traverse le needed to
compute either GPS loop closures or totals station traverse closure. See the manual for further details.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 99
Notice the standard error settings related to GPS. The GPS instrument centering error can be dened. The vector
standard error is a factor that can be used to increase the standard errors as dened in the GPS vector les.
None of the settings in this screen are specic to processing GPS vectors. See the manual for details on the settings
in the 'Adjustment' dialog box.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 100
None of the settings in this screen are specic to processing GPS vectors. See the manual for details on the settings
in the 'Output' dialog box. Press the OK to return to the main SurvNET dialog box.
3 Following is the main SurvNET window. To process the data chose the Process/Network Adjustment option.
The project should process and converge and the following windows should be displayed.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 101
Let's review sections of the report that are unique to the processing of GPS vectors and the 3D model.
Notice that now that we are working with a specic datum instead of an assumed coordinate system that lati-
tude/longitude, state plane coordinates and geocentric coordinates are all displayed.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 102
In the above unadjusted observations section of the report, notice that distances have been converted to mark to mark
distances. Note that vertical angles are now treated as measurements in the 3D model. And lastly, notice that the
GPS vectors are also displayed. The GPS vectors are displayed as delta X,Y,&Z in the geocentric coordinate system.
In the above adjusted coordinate section of the report, notice that the grid, elevation, and combined factor are
displayed with the adjusted geographic coordinates.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 103
In the above adjusted measurements section the adjusted measurements are shown along with their residuals,
standard residuals and standard deviation.
This completes the Lesson 3 tutorial title SurvNET.
Lesson 4: Field to Finish for Faster Drafting
In this lesson, you will make a plat using eld to nish techniques, with the help of the Startup Drawing Wizard.
1 Launch Carlson, or, if you are already in the program, select the File menu, and select New to start a new drawing.
Save your existing drawing rst, if you'd prefer. If you are asked to use a template, choose carlsonxx.dwt, where xx
is the last two digits of the AutoCAD release that you are working with. For example, for AutoCAD 2006, you will
select carlson06.dwt.
The rst of several Startup Wizard dialog boxes appears. If the Startup Wizard does not appear, then go to the
Settings menu, choose Congure and then select General Settings. In the General Settings dialog, click Use Startup
Wizard in the upper-left and click OK. Then open a new drawing again.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 104
Once in the Startup Drawing Wizard, click Set at the top of the dialog box, and enter in a new Drawing Name. Since
this is Lesson 3, call the new drawing Plat3.
Verify that the other settings match the settings shown above, and click Next. You will see the Startup Wizard Data
Files dialog. This dialog box is used to specify where to store data, and the existing point information source. Set
Plat3.crd as the new CRD le name.
Our source is the same le as in Lesson 2, Plat.txt. This is an ASCII le, so click Next, and in the new dialog box
click the option to Select Text/ASCII Files. In the next dialog box, titled Text File to Read, choose plat.txt from the
\DATA folder, and then click Open.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 105
The Text/ASCII File Format dialog appears again, and the format of the points appears in the Preview Window, for
verication, as shown below. Be sure that to the right of Draw Point, that Draw-Locate Pts is selected. Set the other
options as shown. Click OK.
The points are then copied into the le Plat3.crd. If you repeat this exercise, and again use the le name Plat3.crd,
you will be asked:
[O]verwrite w/new coordinates, overwrite [A]ll, or use number <55>: A (for all)
In either case, when you correctly complete the process, the following dialog box appears:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 106
Then this Drawing Import Wizard dialog box appears:
Choose the Field to Finish option, and click Next. If you receive a le selection dialog titled Specify Field Code
Denition File, choose the le called ''Carlson.d''. A dialog box now appears with a warning that some codes have
two descriptions.
The command is asking whether these codes are to be treated as two separate descriptions, or as one description that
has a space in it. Choose the default (Split all multiple codes), to tell the command that codes with spaces are really
two separate descriptions, and click OK.
The Draw Field to Finish dialog box appears. Choose the options as shown here. Then click Additional Draw
Options.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 107
This displays a dialog box that provide many additional options, as shown below.
You want to draw all 1 through 54. Make sure the other options are set as shown above. Click OK twice.
Draw Field to Finish now draws the points and linework. Got to View, and then Extents to show the points, as well
as the linework and point symbols. Draw Field to Finish saves you many manual steps. Your plat is shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 108
2 To understand how the above drawing was created, select Draw Field to Finish again from the Survey menu, and
then select the Edit Codes/Points button from the dialog box. This take you to the Field to Finish dialog box.
The display window shows a list of point codes, such as IP for iron pin and FL for fence line, that are converted to
special symbols and linetypes by Draw Field to Finish. For an example of how the codes are used, look at the sewer
line running from point 52 to 53 to 54 (the southernmost point), which is based on a eld code of MH. Select MH
for Manhole, as shown above, and then click Edit. The following dialog box is displayed.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 109
MH has several attributes that are used by Draw Field to Finish, based on the settings shown above. Draw Field
to Finish draws a manhole using the symbol SPT34. It draws a sewer line with the letter S for sewer. It places the
manhole on layer SEWER, and plots a text description of ''MANHOLE'' underneath the symbol. (Descriptions can
be upper or lower case.) When you are done looking at the MH eld code denition dialog, click OK.
Other codes have fewer attributes. LP is set only to draw a symbol and text (Light Pole), but not to draw linework.
FL, for fence line, is set to draw linework but not corner symbols or points descriptions. A code's attributes depend
on the entries in the Set Linetype, Set Symbol, Description and Entity Type options.
The ''Carlson.d'' Field to Finish code table is provided with the Carlson software. This table shows one possible
system, but with far too many codes for a eld crew to remember. You can make your own table by choosing the
Code Table Settings option from the Field to Finish dialog box, then choose the Set button at the top right. Then
select the New or the Existing tab from the top of the Specify the Code Denition File dialog box, in order to create
or select a different code table (.FLD) le.
3 Use the Layer ID command, located under Inquiry, to verify the layers of the various plotted entities. Select Layer
ID. Pick on the fence line, the road and the utility line, and notice the different layers (FENCE, EOP, UTILITY).
You should study the layers in a drawing before deciding what to freeze and thaw. To reduce clutter on the screen,
select the Layer Control command from the View menu. (The appearance of this dialog box might differ from what
you see. It varies, depending upon what AutoCAD version is in use.)
Chapter 2. Tutorials 110
Freeze the PNTS layer, the SPOT layer, and the PNTELEV layer by turning the sun into a snowake. Then click OK.
4 Now you will do some drawing cleanup. Note that a single property line is drawn from point 8 to 9 to 10 and to
15. The chord from point 10 to 15 should be an arc. You will erase the segment from 9 to 10 and from 10 to 15, so
that you can re-draw it, establish the tangent, then draw the arc and nish back at point 1.
To eliminate part of a polyline, select the Edit menu, then select the Polyline Utilities command, then Remove
Polyline, and then click Remove Polyline Segment.
Break polyline at removal or keep continuous [<Break>/Continuous]: press Enter for Break
Select polyline segment to remove: Pick the segment from 9 to 10, then the segment from 10 to 15, then press
Enter to end
To draw the correct polyline, use the 2D Polyline command under the Draw menu. If you prefer to type in
the command, enter 2dp, which stands for 2D Polyline.
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 9
[Arc/Close/Distance/Follow/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 10
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: A
[Radius pt/radius Length/Arc length/Chord/Second pt/Undo/<Endpoint or point number>]: 15
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 1
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter
Now erase the plotted traverse line that makes a ''V'' near the left side of the drawing. Then use the 4-Sided Building
command you learned in Lesson 2 to create the other two sides of the shed, located in the upper middle of the screen,
near point 17. The end result, except the house, is shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 111
5 Much of the text in the above drawing, such as tree sizes and types, the manhole text, and the light pole text, can be
used in the nal drawing. But some of the text, such as the text plotted for iron pins and poles, can be fully described
in the Legend without the redundancy of plotting to the screen. If you use the Erase command to remove the iron
pin and pole text, the entire point will be erased because the attributes are grouped with the point. Instead, use the
Erase Point Attributes command under the Points menu.
Select Point No., Elev, or Desc to Erase: Pick the 3 poles and the 4 iron pins
6 Next, you will use Extend by Distance command to create a building. The building will be less complex than the
building you created in Lesson 2, but you will learn the ''t'' and ''c'' options , in addition to ''l'' for left and ''r'' for
right. Under Edit, choose the Extend command. Select the By Distance option. Pick the western side of the small
line segment west of the 12'' pine and north of the driveway. Follow the prompts:
Pick line or polyline to extend:
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): T50
''T'' or ''t'' means ''total'' distance or ''to'' the distance - so extend ''to'' 50 feet total.
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): L62.5
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): L35
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): L30
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): R15
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): C
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): press Enter
The Extend by Distance ''T'' option for total distance solves the dilemma of making an existing line, of
unknown length, extend to an exact known length.
7 Use the Twist Screen command to position the plat on the sheet. Not every drawing can be plotted ''due North.''
Sometimes North needs to be rotated so that property lines and important features run nearly left-to-right or
top-to-bottom on the plotted page, for a better t. In this drawing, you want the western line from point 8 to point 9
to run left-to-right on a sheet that will be plotted in landscape style (longer left-to-right than top-to-bottom). Under
the View menu, select Twist Screen, then Line, Polyline or Text.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 112
Pick a line, polyline or text to make horizontal: Pick the western line from point 8 to point 9, closer to point 9
Now the drawing appears as shown below:
Notice that the north indicator (referred to as the USCICON), at the lower left, displays the rotation.
8 Now select Twist Point Attributes, under the Points menu, to twist the point descriptions and point numbers back
to a left-to-right rotation.
Twist by [<Twist screen>/Azimuth/Entity segment/Follow polyline]? press Enter
Enter angle relative to current twist screen <0.0>: press Enter
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? press Enter
Select Carlson Software points.
Select objects: ALL press Enter
The points then twist back orthogonal to the screen, reading once again left-to-right.
9 The remaining descriptions associated with the points can be used in the nal drawing, but they should be moved
slightly for a better appearance. For example, the tree descriptions would look better if they were not inside the tree
canopies.
Under the Points menu, select Move Point Attributes - Single. The steps of the command are: pick text, pick the new
text position, press Enter, press Enter. Then the command repeats. Notice how the text ''ghosts'' as it moves, which
helps you place it in the best position. Try to duplicate this result:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 113
10 Because of the earlier Twist Screen command, the E's in the electric utility polyline are upside down. Choose the
Text command, from the Edit menu, and select the Flip Text option. Select the text to ip.
Select objects: pick the upside down E's individually while holding down the Shift key
11 To label the dimensions of the building automatically, you must rst activate the Auto Label Closed Polyline
Exterior function. To make this a permanent setting, under the Settings menu, select Congure, then Survey Settings,
and then Survey Text Defaults. Change the dialog box as shown below:
Click OK, and Exit back out. Select Building Dimensions from the Annotate menu, which is under the Survey Text
command. Pick on the house. If the text overwrites the inside corner of the house, use the Move command (under
the Edit menu, or type M for Move at the command prompt) and move the 30' dimension beneath the line.
12 To automatically annotate bearings and distance, as well as arcs, select the Auto Annotate command from the
Annotate menu. When the dialog box appears, under the Lines tab, select the options you would like to use so
that the bearings and distance labels appear as you would like. Then pick the three polylines that fully dene the
perimeter: the fence line, the polyline containing the arc, and the lower polyline, which is still the western polyline
although you have twisted the screen so that it runs along the lower portion of the drawing. Use the Move command
to move the bearing and distance labels to avoid overwriting other features.
When you move the lower distance label, 404.90' to the left, you want to move perfectly level to the screen, since
this was the line you used to twist the screen, and it runs perfectly left-to-right. To do this, press the function key F8
to activate Ortho. Then pick 404.90' and move it to the left, picking its nal position. Repeat this for the S 1705'38''
E bearing. After you move these items, press F8 again to turn off Ortho. Sometimes you will load a drawing from
another client or source, and the Ortho setting has been left on. This may initially confuse you during the Move
commands. Press F8 to deactivate Ortho. Notice that F8 works even with Twist Screen active.
13 Auto Annotate typically centers the arc annotation above and belowthe arc, which causes the arc data to overwrite
the surveyed edge-of-pavement (EOP) polyline. You want to erase both the arc annotations, and use the Label Arc
option of the Annotate Arc command to force both the arc length and radius to be drawn beneath the arc.
At the command line, enter E for Erase.
Select objects: enter WP, then pick as shown below
Chapter 2. Tutorials 114
Press Enter when the selection set is complete. There is no ''close'' option for window polygon and crossing polygon
selections.
For the new annotation, under the Annotate menu, select the Annotate Arc command, then the Label Arc option.
Then select the arc from the screen. The Label Arc Settings dialog box appears:
You want to locate the arc text inside the arc, on positions 1 and 2. Position (Row) 1 is just under the arc, and 2 is
under 1. Be sure they are both Inside. Fill out the dialog box as shown above, and click OK.
The new arc text might overwrite the 8'' Pine, so, if it does, use the command Move Point Attributes - Single, in the
Points menu, to relocate the 8'' Pine description.
With the annotations placed in new positions, your drawing should be similar to the one shown below. Move your
Chapter 2. Tutorials 115
annotations to match this drawing.
14 To label the area of the lot, rst select the Area Defaults command from the Area/Layout menu. Set the Square
Units (s.f.) to the nearest whole unit (no decimals) and the Other Area Labels to 2 decimal places. Then click OK
to exit the dialog box. Select the Area by Lines & Arcs command from the Area/Layout menu, and pick the three
polylines individually, while holding down the Shift key, that dene the property perimeter. Press enter, and locate
the text to the left of the 12'' Pine.
15 Before completing the nal formatting of your drawing, you need to do some minor cleanup, using procedures
you learned in Lesson 2.
You don't want point 16, the PL point, to show in the nal drawing. Use the Layer ID command, under the Inquiry
menu, to verify the layer of point 16, which should be MISC. Freeze MISC using the Freeze Layer command on the
View menu, and pick point 16. Freeze the point numbers using the Layer Control command on the View menu, and
freeze the layer PNTNO.
16 To insert an A1, 8-1/2 x 11 border and title block, with the orientation landscape (not portrait), select the Title
Block command from the Settings menu. You will see this dialog box.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 116
Be sure these above selections match your own. Click OK. For the insertion point, select a point at the very
lower-left of the screen, so that your drawing plan entities t inside the border and somewhat nearer to the top. Pick
your screen location. You will then be prompted for the attributes of the title block. Fill them in and click OK.
If you prefer, you can use the Move command, pick the title block and two border perimeters, and move them.
Never move the drawing, because you will change the coordinates if you do. Move the drawing only if changing the
coordinate locations does not matter.
17 Select the Draw Legend command, under the Annotate menu, select the Existing tab, choose the .lgd le that
you saved in Lesson 2, and click Open. Then select Draw and OK, to close out the dialog boxes that follow, and
then click Exit.
Pick an upper-left location point in the available space to the lower-left of the plat. If you did not save a legend in
Chapter 2. Tutorials 117
Lesson 2 (or you skipped Lesson 2), follow the steps in that lesson. Use the Scale Point Attributes command, under
the Points menu, and scale up the oak tree symbol in the Legend by a factor of 1.5.
Select the Survey Text command from the Annotate menu, then select Survey Text Defaults. Change the Offset
Dimension Text alignment to Horizontal. (It may have been set to Parallel in Lesson 2.) Click OK. Now select the
Offset Dimensions command from the Annotate menu, under the Survey Text command, and pick the lower right
corner of the building, then the lower-most property line (in the current twist screen position). This labels the offset
dimension horizontal to the current twist screen.
Pick the Draw North Arrow command, under the Annotate menu, and select and nd the north arrow symbol that
is shown in the gure below. Change the Symbol Size Scaler, if necessary, and click Specify Rotation On-Screen.
Click OK. Then pick an appropriate location and press Enter. Note how the arrow draws due north, respecting the
twist screen.
Choose the Draw Barscale command, under the Annotate menu, and pick a location near the lower-left portion of
the drawing.
Your drawing should now look similar to this:
18 Select the Hatch command from the Draw menu.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 118
Select the SOLID pattern from the pulldown list, then click the Select Objects button. Pick the house and the shed,
and press Enter twice.
19 To offset the EOP Polyline, rst try using the Standard Offset command under the Edit menu, and try offsetting
the edge-of-pavement polyline that runs roughly parallel to the sewer line. You will see an error message because
that object is a 3D Polyline, created by the Draw Field to Finish command.
To offset a 3D Polyline, you must use a command specically designed to offset 3D Polylines. Under the Edit
menu, select 3D Polyline Utilities, and slide over to Offset 3D Polyline.
Enter the offset method [<Interval>/Constant/Variable]: press Enter
Vertical/<Horizontal offset amount>: 30
Percent/Ratio/Vertical offset amount <0>: press Enter
Select a polyline to offset (Enter for none): pick the EOP polyline
Select side to offset: pick out and away from parcel, for the other side of the road
20 Before you add a title to the drawing, create a text style for the title. Choose Set Style in the Draw menu, found
under Text.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 119
Click New, and name the style Title. Choose the font named romant.shx, and then change the oblique angle to 10
degrees as shown. Click Apply, then click Close. Now, to create the title, type Dtext at the command line. Make
sure that TITLE is the current text style.
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: C
Specify center point of text: pick a point near the top-right of the screen
Specify height <8.00>: 20
Specify rotation angle of text <E>: pick a point to right of rst point with <Ortho on>, dynamically stretch right
Text: Farmer Survey
Text: August 15, 2006
Text: press Enter
Select the Text Enlarge/Reduce option of the Text command under the Edit menu. Enter a Scaling Multiplier of .8
and pick the date you just entered.
21 Verify your drawing scale using the Drawing Setup command under Settings. Your drawing should have a
scale of 100 with a Text Plot Size of 0.08. Change the Text Plot Size to 0.06 to shrink the the building dimensions.
Then label the house ''2-Story'', ''Farm House'' (2 lines of labeling), select the Leader with Text command under the
Annotate menu.
Options/Pick Arrow Location: pick near or on the left side of the house
To point: pick off to the left
Next point (Enter to end): press Enter
Text: 2-Story
Text: Farm House
Text: press Enter
Pick anywhere on the leader. You see two grip squares (usually yellow), one on the left side and one of
the right side. Pick on the right grip nearest the house. Move your cursor. Note how the arrow moves. Pick
again for the new location, and note how the arrowhead and leader are now located and angled to your specications.
22 Select the Triangulate & Contour command from the Surface menu. The Contour tab of dialog box should be
lled out as shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 120
Click on the Selection tab and ll out to match the following:
Click on the Labels tab and match the following dialog:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 121
Click OK.
Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select objects: press Enter
Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select objects: Pick the house and the shed. Since these objects have now been lled, the selection may be a
little more tricky. We could (actually should) have placed the solids on their own layer and froze the layer before
beginning the contour command. But we can use the fact that Carlson is ltering the objects to get around the
problem. When prompted to select the objects, issue the C (for crossing) option, then pick a box that crosses the
edge of the lled polylines. Carlson will accept the polyline but reject the ll.
Select the points and breaklines to Triangulate. Select a right-to-left window of the property. A right-to-left
selection behaves as a crossing, which means that any object that is touched by the window or included inside the
window is selected. (A left-to-right selection is a window selection, which means that only objects that are fully
enclosed by the window are selected.)
Select objects: pick Window location
Other corner: pick other location
Select objects: press Enter to end
Pick the coordinate le that contains the points, plat3.crd, and click Open.
Reading points ...
Range of Point Numbers to use [<All>/Group]: press Enter
Wildcard match of point description<
*
>: press Enter
If the triangulation lines and faces were drawn, freeze them now. Next, pick the lower-left elevation ''502''
contour near the end. The grips are displayed. The grips near the contour end can be used for stretching. Straighten
out the end of this contour line.
**
STRETCH
**
Specify stretch point or [Base point/Copy/Undo/eXit]: pick a grib and pick a point
**
STRETCH
**
Specify stretch point or [Base point/Copy/Undo/eXit]: prck another grib and pick a point
Chapter 2. Tutorials 122
Press Enter. Clicking the right button on your mouse is the equivalent to pressing enter.
The nal drawing will look similar to this:
This completes this Lesson 4 tutorial titled Field to Finish for Faster Drafting.
Lesson 5: Intersections and Subdivisions
1 Click the icon for Carlson and start up Carlson Software from Windows. Once in the program, exit the Startup
Wizard if it appears.
2 Once in Carlson, click Open under the File pulldown menu. Look for the le Plat4.dwg and click on it. When
it lights up blue, as shown below, it will appear in the Preview Window at right. It should look like the open-sided
property shown here. Plat4.dwg is found within the WORK folder of Carlson. You search for the le as you typically
would in Windows, clicking the yellow ''Up one level'' button to go to the parent folder of the current folder, or by
clicking the adjacent down arrow to nd the desired path in the full tree of folder locations.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 123
Now click Open to select and open the le Plat4.dwg.
3 Enter & Assign a Starting point for the Street Centerline. Select Draw-Locate Points, found under the Points
pulldown, and obtain the dialog shown below:
Click off the prompting and labeling for Descriptions, Elevations and Locate on Real Z Axis (make them blank as
shown). Up top, change the symbol to SPT10 by picking Select at the very top of the dialog, and choosing symbol
SPT10 from the dialog of symbol choices (not shown here). Also, verify that Automatic Point Numbering is clicked
on, that the Starting Point Number is 1, that the layer is PNTS. Match these entries (which are mostly the default
Chapter 2. Tutorials 124
conditions) and click Enter and Assign at the lower left.
Prompting will appear at the bottom of the screen. We will enter the starting point as follows:
Enter North(y): 4809.17
Enter East (x): 4391.28
The program will recognize that you have not yet started a coordinate le, so click the New tab and enter the File
Name as Plat4.crd (which should be the default). If you enter Plat4, you do not need to enter the extension .crd.
The program will add extensions automatically. You will see this:
Click Open. You will be prompted again:
Enter North(y): press Enter (for no more points; we are done)
4 Traverse from PI to PI (to the two endpoints of our centerline). Select Traverse under the COGO menu, or
alternately just enter T at the command line. (T is a hot key. Other hot keys are I for Inverse and SS for Sideshot).
Reply to the prompts as follows:
Traverse, Line OFF, RAW FILE OFF
Exit/Options/Arc/Points/Line/SideShot/Inverse/Angle-Bearing Code <7>: 1
Enter Bearing Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: 58.1848
Points/<Distance>: 736.73
N: 5196.15 E: 5018.19 Z: 0.00
Exit/Options/Arc/Points/Line/SideShot/Inverse/Angle-Bearing Code <1>: E (to exit)
You could keep on traversing, but we will stop here to review. You have created point 2, traversing NE from point
1. To review, code 1 is for NE, 2 for SE, 3 for SW, 4 for NW, 5 for Azimuth, 6 for Angle Left, 7 for Angle Right, 8
for Deection Left and 9 for Deection Right. This is the standard way that traverses and sideshots are entered in
Carlson with a code entry (followed by Enter), then the angle or bearing entry (followed by Enter). Lesson 1, the
Entering a Deed lesson, presented another method, where the angle and bearing are together in the form of 158.1848.
That is a rare form, designed to save keystrokes, and used primarily only in Enter Deed Description. Now you have
been exposed to both!
5 Line On/Off. Click Line On/Off, under the COGO menu, to turn on simultaneous linework with traversing. This
command toggles on and off each time you click it, with the On status indicated by a check mark. Now repeat the
Chapter 2. Tutorials 125
Traverse command. Try T for Traverse this time, entered at the command line.
Traverse, Line ON, RAW FILE OFF
Exit/Options/Arc/Points/Line/SideShot/Inverse/Angle-Bearing Code <1>: 2
Enter Bearing Angle (dd.mmss) <58.1848>: 75.0627
Points/<Distance>: 553.69
N: 5053.85 E: 5553.28 Z: 0.00
Exit/Options/Arc/Points/Line/SideShot/Inverse/Angle-Bearing Code <2>: E (to exit)
6 Draw a Polyline from Point 1 to Point 2, and connect the segments with Join Nearest. We could have turned
linework with traverse on before we got started, but now we will do it after-the-fact. So choose 2D Polyline under
Draw. Some users like to simply type in 2DP at the command line that starts the Polyline command, also.
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 1
[Arc/Close/Distance/Follow/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: 2
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter (to end)
Now we have two line objects. The rst, from point 2 to point 3 is a pure Line. The second, from point 1 to point 2,
is a true Polyline (even though it is only one segment long). It is ofcially a LWPOLYLINE, a lightweight polyline.
This can be veried by picking it using the List command under Inquiry. Polylines are linked combinations of one
or more line segments that behave as one unit. We encourage use of polylines versus lines because they offset as
a unit, will take on a thickness or width, are easier to select and have superior editing capabilities. A line can be
turned into a polyline by picking Polyedit under Edit, picking the line, and answering Y to the question ''Do you
want to turn it into one? <Y>''. To join the polyline and line objects into a single polyline, choose the very useful
command Join Nearest, found under Edit.
The defaults are good. Just click OK. Now pick the polyline from 1 to 2 and the line from 2 to 3, and then hit Enter
for no more.
Now, see the grips on the new polyline by picking it with the cursor. See how the whole thing highlights? That is
proof that it is joined up as a polyline.
7 Design a Curve with a 500' Radius. Under Draw, pick Arc and slide over to 2 Tangents,Radius.
Radius of Arc <0.00>: 500
[nea] Pick Point on 1st Tangent Line: Pick on the 1st polyline segment closer to point 2
[nea] Pick Point on 2nd Tangent Line: Pick on the 2nd polyline segment close to point 2
The arc draws in, and the centerline remains a polyline, now with 3 segments.
8 I for Inverse. Entering I for Inverse, at the command line, is a handy way to get on a point to begin another traverse.
Practice inversing. Enter I. Inverse from point 1, then to point 2, then to point 3 then back to 1. But you can also
Chapter 2. Tutorials 126
inverse (go to) a snapped position on a line or polyline, such as the midpoint of an arc. Let's do that, because we
want to traverse south from the midpoint of the arc. Enter I, for Inverse.
Calculate Bearing & Distance from starting point?
Traverse/SideShot/Options/Arc/Pick point or point number: MID (for midpoint snap) of Select the arc
Traverse/SideShot/Options/Arc/Pick point or point number: T (for traverse)
Traverse, Line ON, RAW FILE OFF
Exit/Options/Arc/Points/Line/SideShot/Inverse/Angle-Bearing Code <2>: press Enter
Enter Bearing Angle (dd.mmss) <75.0627>: 10.11
Calculated Bearing (Qdd.mmss): 210.1100
Points/<Distance>: 400
Exit/Options/Arc/Points/Line/SideShot/Inverse/Angle-Bearing Code <2>: E (to exit traverse)
Notice that you can transition from inverse, to traverse, to sideshot, etc. with these COGO options. We were
in inverse, but we did T for traverse, and could have done I for inverse to return to inverse. This cuts down on
keystrokes, and adds to the sense of uidity of the software.
9 Turn a Line into a Polyline with Polyedit. The command Offsets & Intersections requires pure polylines, not lines,
to execute. So, since we had Line On with the last traverse, we have created a line. To use this in street design, we
need to convert it into a polyline. Select Polyedit under the Edit pulldown menu.
Select polyline or [Multiple]: Pick the side road line
Object selected is not a polyline
Do you want to turn it into one? <Y> press Enter
Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype gen/Undo]: press Enter
10 Offsets & Intersections. Under the Area/Layout menu, select Offsets & Intersections.
Select all PRIMARY road polylines.
Select objects: Enter(we will consider both these subdivision streets secondary)
Select all SECONDARY road polylines.
Select objects: Hold down the Shift key and pick the main centerline
Select objects: With shift key still down, pick the side road
Select objects: Enter (for no more)
Chapter 2. Tutorials 127
The street intersections are presented in a dynamic dialog as shown above. Try experimenting with different radii
under the Secondary Roads column, then clicking Calculate. The streets will re-draw in the upper graphical area.
But after experimenting, change the four values under Secondary Roads to those shown (ignore Primary Roads
those don't apply here), and click Calculate. Then click Finish 2D. Note the drawn-out street intersection.
Now select Layer ID under the Inquiry menu. Pick on the outside polyline (it is layer ROW). Pick on the next
polyline in from the outside (it is layer EOP). For example, if you had clicked off EOP under the Draw column in
the above dialog, the edge-of-pavement polyline would not have drawn.
11
Standard Cul-de-Sac. Under Area/Layout, select Cul-de-Sacs. You may want to zoom into the area of the bottom
center, near point 4. When nished with the procedure below, zoom back out.
Prompting:
Select all offset polylines to end with cul-de-sac.
Select objects: Do a crossing selection from right to left across the lower side road, selecting all 5 polylines (ROW-
L, EOP-L, CL, EOP-R, ROW-R)
Select objects: press Enter (for no more)
Pick cul-de-sac center projection onto centerline: END (type end for endpoint snap)
Pick near the endpoint of the centerline of the lower side road near point 4. However make sure the pick is on the
centerline polyline, or the routine will say the centerline not found.
This brings up the following dialog:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 128
Again, you can change the Fillet Radius and the Outside Radius on the EOP or ROW, hit Calculate, and check out its
effect. (Don't make the Outside radii too small or it will fail Calculate if there is no workable solution). Set values
as shown above. Then click on Finish 2D.
12 Teardrop Cul-de-Sac. Now select the Cul-de-Sacs routine again, under Area/Layout.
Select all offset polylines to end with cul-de-sac.
Select objects: Do a crossing selection pick from right to left across the right main road, selecting all 5 polylines
(ROW-L, EOP-L, CL, EOP-R, ROW-R)
Select objects: Enter(for no more)
Pick cul-de-sac center projection onto centerline: END for endpoint snap Pick endpoint of the centerline of the
lower side road near point 3
For a teardrop cul-de-sac, ll out the dialog as follows, then click on Calculate and Finish 2D.
Teardrop cul-de-sacs allow moving vans and other large vehicles more turning room, and have been popular in the
Chapter 2. Tutorials 129
Cincinnati area, for instance. Our drawing now appears as shown below, with the exception of the lled reference
dots.
13 Let's make a layer called LOTS using Layer Control found under View. It's a good idea to create a layer and set
it current before beginning the design process. Select Layer Control and obtain the following dialog:
Click on for New layer. When Layer1 highlights, as shown at bottom of list, type over it with LOTS, then click
under the Color column and change the color to Magenta. Then click the (Set) Current button up top to make this
layer current. Then click OK to exit the dialog.
Next, we will use Break at Selected Point, found in the Edit menu.
The Lot Layout routine under Area/Layout works nicely with reasonable polylines that run roughly parallel. Our
goal is to make 1-acre lots. Lots of zigs, zags, and jogs in the polylines cause the perpendicular offset logic to fail to
Chapter 2. Tutorials 130
nd a solution (lots will radiate perpendicular from the front polyline in Lot Layout). Not only should the front and
back lines run opposite each other, but they should end at some point before the calculation runs into difculty with
impossible math.
The outer R-O-W polyline currently runs left-to-right, goes around both cul-de-sacs and returns right-to-left in one,
connected polyline. We need to break it near where the lled dot is pointing. It should be easy to lay out lots along
the upper portion of the subdivision, as long as we stop to break the R-O-W polyline before it turns and runs back
through the lower, more complex frontage and back property portions.
Under Edit, select Break, and slide over to At Selected Point. You will select using the lled dots, shown on the plan
above, as references.
Select Line, Arc, or Polyline at break point: Pick near the lled dot on the outer boundary polyline.
Repeat the command for the ROW polyline.
Select Line, Arc, or Polyline at break point: Pick the far right end of the Teardrop cul-de-sac R-O-W polyline.
To prove you have broken the polylines in two, click on the R-O-W polyline on the south side (only the south
portion should highlight), then click on the north R-O-W polyline (which we will use as our frontage polyline in the
command Lot Layout). Then press the ESC key twice, which gets rid of the grips, as does zooming or panning.
14 Select Lot Layout under Area/Layout. A dialog appears:
Fill out as shown. In particular, click off Apply Remainder Equally to All Lots (if it is on) so that we force 1.000
acres lots and don't just get equal lots of some size such as 1.0017 (because the remainder lot that would not t was
added onto all lots).
Making Closed Polylines means that our side lines will be doubled up, each lot sharing a side line. Click OK.
Select front polyline: Pick north R-O-W
Select back polyline: Pick northernmost polyline the back property line.
The 1.00 acres lots are laid out as far as is possible. You may get a small lot at the end of the row, which you would
erase.
15 Applications of Reverse Polyline. We can get one more lots from Lot Layout, by doing the lower R-O-W at the
left side of the drawing, and picking the southern back polyline. Let's try. Select Lot Layout under Area/Layout.
Use same dialog entries. Select the front polyline as the southern edge of the road R-O-W, near the left side of the
drawing. Select the back polyline as the southern property line. Oops! Nothing drew. It was unable to calculate.
It turns out that the direction of the polyline is important. The southern R-O-W polyline starts way off to the right,
Chapter 2. Tutorials 131
so the program was not even considering where we were looking! We need to reverse the direction of the southern
R-O-W polyline so it starts on the left side. Select Reverse Polyline, found under the Edit pulldown, sliding over
from Polyline Utilities. It prompts:
Select polyline or line to reverse: Pick the southern R-O-W polyline.
The polyline now reverses direction, goes left-to-right, and shows phantom direction lines (which are automatically
removed when the command ends). Now repeat the Lot Layout command as outlined in the beginning of Step 15,
and we get one new lot out of the exercise, as shown below. If you get a second wedge shaped lot, erase it.
16 Break at Intersection. The lower back property line is still continuous. We can work with it in small pieces rather
than as one big polyline. Say we want to break it as the inside corner identied by the arrow above. To do this, select
Edit pulldown, Break, sliding over to At Intersection. Prompting:
Select Line, Arc, or Polyline to Break: Pick the south property line
[app on] Pick Intersection to break at: Move the cursor to the intersection point indicated above, look for the INT
snap to appear as you approach the exact corner (which is an intersect), then click there.
17 Draw a Polyline from the corner indicated by the lled dot to the beginning of the R-O-W arc, also indicated by
a lled dot in the previous graphic. Select 2D Polyline under Draw.
Pick point or point numbers: End (type in end for the endpoint snap)
of ..Pick the inner back property corner
Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: End (type in end for the endpoint snap)
of ..Pick the beginning of the Arc (it will show endpt when you get close to the true start of arc)
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: Enter (to end)
18 Area by Interior Point. We have just created a new lot, but the lot is not dened by one, single, closed polyline.
If we want to verify its area, however, we can still use the command Area by Interior Point. Select Area by Interior
Point under Area.
Pick point inside area perimeter: Pick inside our new lot
SQ. FEET: 40997.2 SQ. YARDS: 4555.2 SQ. MILES: 0.0
ACRES: 0.9412 PERIMETER: 830.5026
Pick area label centering point: Press Enterhere to avoid labeling.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 132
The lot is less than one acres. We will set as a goal to extend its lower boundary to the right to obtain one acre. That
is accomplished by using the command Hinged Area. But Hinged Area works best if we have a nice, closed polyline
for the new lot. We can get one using the command Boundary Polyline.
19 Boundary Polyline. At the command line, type in BPOLY (or BOUNDARY). When the dialog appears, pick
New.
Then pick all the polylines that surround our new lot. Then after you hit Enter to Select objects, this same dialog
returns. Then you select Pick Points and pick inside the lot. This creates a new closed polyline, in the current, LOTS
layer (magenta).
20 Select Hinged Area under the Area/Layout pulldown.
Dene area by points or closed polyline [Points/<Linework>]? press Enter (for linework)
Select polyline segment to adjust: Pick on the right-side line
Select hinge point [endp]: Pick on the upper right hinge point (see arrow)
Keep existing polyline [Yes/<No>]? N
Area: 40997.20 S.F, 0.9412 Acres
Remainder/Acres/<Enter target area (s.f.)>: A (for acres)
Remainder/SF/<Enter target area (acres)>: 1.0
The new lot draws, as shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 133
21 Next, use the Erase command to remove the segment that is pointed to above with the text Click on This Side.
22 Make 2 More Lots with Polyline command. Instead of using Draw, 2D Polyline, we will use the straight
AutoCAD polyline command. At the command line, enter PL.
Specify start point: END (type in the endpoint snap)
of Pick the endpoint (which is the lower right corner of the new lot).
Current line-width is 0.00
Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: PER(type in the perpendicular snap)
to Pick on the R-O-W polyline to the right.
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: press Enter(to end)
Now for the second lot. Referring to the drawing below, repeat the PL command, and answer as follows:
Specify start point: NEA (enter the nearest snap)
of Pick on the property line anywhere near the circled point 1(no need to be exact)
Current line-width is 0.00
Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: PER (type in the perpendicular snap, which when
intersecting arcs means radial to the arc)
to Pick on the R-O-W polyline near circled point 2.
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: ENTER (to end)
The drawing appears below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 134
23 Issue the Break at Intersect command, and break the back property polyline and the cul-de-sac R-O-W polyline
at the intersections with our newly drawn polyline from step 22. Repeat this command, and break the back property
polyline at the lled dot to the right of the ''Sliding Side Area'' label below.
24 Repeat Lot Layout with the same entries as before. The front and back polylines to select are shown below, along
with the results. This gives us 2 more usable lots.
Next, use the 2D Polyline command to generate a segment (above the ''Sliding Side Area'' label below) that runs
from the ENDpoint of the corner to a point PERpendicular to the R-O-W line. Then use BPOLY to create a closed
boundary inside it.
Erasing the original segment you placed is a little tricky since the newly formed polyline is on top. When two pieces
of geometry lie on top of each other, Carlson will take the one created last. Issue the Erase command, then hold
down the control key while picking the segment above the ''Sliding Side Area'' label. When the single segment
highlights, press enter to erase it, leaving the boundary polyline.
25 Sliding Side Area. Because we have a small closed polyline, we can investigate another area command, the
Chapter 2. Tutorials 135
Sliding Side Area. As shown in the graphic above, we want to slide the north side of the last, smaller lot parallel
to its current bearing such that the lot will contain 1.00 acres. Select Sliding Side Area under the Area/Layout
pulldown.
Dene area by points or closed polyline [Points/<Linework>]? press ENTER
Select polyline segment to adjust: Pick the north side of the lot above (shown here containing the words Sliding
Side Area)
Keep existing polyline [Yes/<No>]? press ENTER
Area: 20375.30 S.F, 0.4678 Acres
Remainder/Acres/<Enter target area (s.f.)>: A (a for acres)
Remainder/SF/<Enter target area (acres)>: 1.0
26 Complete the remaining Lots. Using the 2D Polyline command, under Draw, use endpoint snaps and perpendic-
ular snaps (end and per) to draw the nal 3 polylines, shown below marked 1, 2 and 3 for reference.
It may not be the most aesthetic subdivision, but we applied a lot of tools making it. But we're not done. There's
some real automation ahead.
27 Create Points from Entities. We have designed a subdivision, in effect, without point numbers. This is the
beauty of CAD. But we need to make point numbers in order to stakeout the subdivision. To do this, select Create
Points from Entities, under COGO. The following dialog appears:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 136
Set the starting point number to 5, verify the dialog as shown, and click OK. A second dialog, covering what entities
to capture, appears next. Stick with the default settings and click OK.
When it asks, Select objects, type in All. Press Enter for no more selections, and Enter again. All the point numbers
for stakeout are created.
28 Number the lots, clockwise from the upper left, using the command Sequential Numbers. Under Draw, select
Sequential Numbers. This dialog appears:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 137
Choose the circled text and click OK.
Set the text size (height) to 16 and the starting text value to 10, as shown. Then click OK.
Pick point at center of label or type Polylines to label: Pick near the center of the rst upper left lot.
Pick point for label alignment: Press F8 for <Ortho on> Pick to the right.
Now pick near the center of all of the lots, going clockwise.
When done, and back to the command line, press F8 again to set Ortho off.
The resulting drawing, with point numbers, is shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 138
29 Lot File by Interior Text. Ofcial lot les can be created whenever a lot number or name exists within a lot as
the sole text (other text may be present but could be frozen). So we will play it safe and rst freeze the point number
layer. Before we do, take note of the point number assigned to the NW corner of Lot 10. In our case, it is point 64
(it may be different in your case, depending on how you selected the objects in the command Convert Entities to
Points).
Under View, select Freeze Layer and pick on one of the point numbers. Now go to the Area/Layout pulldown, select
Create Lots and slide over to select Lot File by Interior Text.
A dialog box will appear. Be sure that is says Block Name 1. Click OK.
Select lot lines, polylines and text.
Select objects: Pick the lots and the lot numbers
The Lot Files will be created. Before we look at the Lot Files, let's nish up and do area annotation on the upper
lots, by the command Area by Interior Point.
Note: If we had not made points at all lot corners, using Convert Entities to Points, the Lot File by Interior Text
would make point numbers. This is the reason for the prompt: Starting point number. If points are found, no new
ones are created. Lot les must have points at all the corners.
30 Area by Interior Point. Select Area Defaults, under Area/Layout, and cancel the square feet plot, leaving only
the area plot to 3 decimal places. Set as shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 139
Now choose Area by Interior Point, under the Area/Layout pulldown menu, and pick inside Lots 10 through 16, as
shown below:
31 Select Lot Manager, under Area/Layout, and the following Lot Editor dialog appears:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 140
Pick on Lot 10 and click Report. This will lead to the Lot Report dialog box.
Be sure that your setting are as shown above, and then click Lot Report.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 141
This dialog is typical of the many Carlson Standard Report Viewer dialogs, rst introduced in Carlson CES. You
can click on 1 or more lines, highlight them and hit the delete key on the keyboard, and these lines will delete. You
can edit lines directly in the dialog. You can also save the report to disk with the Save icon shown above. To exit,
click the Exit icon.
32 The Edit Current (lot) option within the Lot Editor dialog box can be used to describe a lot by different point
numbers, or to assign a lot to a different block. This is explained here and shown below for reference purposes only.
Click Lot Manager under the Area/Layout pulldown menu. You will see the Lot Editor dialog as shown in Step 31.
First, make sure that a .lot le is open. If it is not, open one. Then, under Selection, select a lot to edit. Click Edit
Current. You will get this dialog. Note the graphic display in the lower half, which map the Points listed above.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 142
33 Re-Drawing Lots after Editing Points. Let's assume you actually changed the point numbers that dene Lot 10.
That would cause the lot to draw differently. Also, you could simply alter the coordinate values of a point in the
current lot le. That would also cause the lot to draw differently. Let's take the latter approach. Remember point
64? It is the NW corner of lot 10 (in our case your's may be different as stated above). So select Edit Points under
the Points pulldown menu. A spreadsheet appears. Scroll down to point 64 (or whatever point is your NW corner of
Lot 10).
Click on the Northing and edit it to 5050. This is for illustration purposes. In reality, you might be ne-tuning your
Chapter 2. Tutorials 143
subdivision design points. As long as the same points dene the lots, you are, in effect, making a ready-made new
drawing. Now select at the top of the dialog File, then Save and Exit.
34 Draw the Lot File. Before we draw the lot le, save your drawing by selecting Save under the File pulldown
menu. Then choose New, exit the Startup Wizard (if it appears), and go straight to Lot Manager, found under the
Area/Layout pulldown menu. Lot Manager provides the tools for drawing lot les to the screen.
Click the Existing tab. Select the plat4 lot le and click Open. Now select your existing crd le that you created
earlier. In the next dialog, called Lot Editor, shown below, choose all lots by clicking Select All. Then click Draw.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 144
Accept the defaults and click OK to the Draw Lots dialog box. This leads to the Auto-Annotate dialog, shown below.
Use the settings shown here. Click OK.
Next comes the Area Defaults dialog, as seen in Step 30. Fill out exactly as shown in Step 30.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 145
Click OK and then Exit. This leads to the plot shown below, created entirely from stored Lot Files, and showing our
revision of Lot 10.
This completes this Lesson 5 tutorial titled Intersections and Subdivisions.
Lesson 6: Contouring, Break Lines and Stockpiles
1 Click the icon for Carlson and start-up AutoCAD/Carlson from Windows.
2 Once in Carlson, exit out of the Startup Wizard (if it appears) and click Open under the File pulldown menu. Look
for the le Mantopo.dwg and click on it.
3 Select Triangulate & Contour from the Surface pulldown menu (within the Survey module). Click the Contour
tab. Let's target contours at a 1-unit interval, and contour the area of points. You will see this dialog:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 146
Make all settings as shown (most of them are the default). We want to make sure that the Contour Interval (top right)
is set to 1. Also, be sure to set the Index Interval to 5. Click OK.
Select the points and breaklines to Triangulate.
Select objects: Do a bottom right to upper left crossing selection by picking just to the left of the small, stockpile
contour map, near the bottom of the screen, and then picking the upper left of the screen (capturing all points).
Select objects: Enter(for no more)
A dialog box appears. Select Mantopo.crd as your crd le. Click Open and the points will be read from the crd le.
Range of Point Numbers to use [<All>/Group]: Enter (to accept All)
Wildcard match of point description <
*
>: Enter
Contours are drawn, but notice the unacceptable wavy look around the perimeter an area which is meant to be a
ditch.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 147
Type in U for Undo and press Enter until the new contours (at left) disappear and you are back at the command
prompt.
4 Field-to-Finish: From within the Survey module, under the Survey pulldown menu, select Draw Field-to-Finish.
You will be prompted for the CRD le to process. Choose the Existing tab, then select MANTOPO.CRD, which
resides in Carlson's data folder, and click Open. The Draw Field to Finish dialog appears.
At the lower left of the Draw Field to Finish dialog, click Edit Codes/Points. The Field to Finish dialog appears.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 148
On the left side of the Field to Finish dialog, under the heading Code Table, there is an option called Code Table
Settings. Click on it. You will see this dialog:
As you can see at the top of the Code Table Settings dialog, the default Field to Finish code denition (.FLD) le is
Carlson.d. We want to make a new code table because the coordinate le for the eld survey includes special
coding (17 and 18) for ditch lines and top of banks.
You can react and adjust to whatever a eld crew uses by making a new eld-to-nish table that can load up the
codes right from whatever descriptions were used in the eld. To do this, click Set at the upper-right of the Code
Table Settings dialog, then choose the New tab (for new le) and you might name it Mantopo, as shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 149
Click Open. You will be taken to the previous dialog.
Notice how \DATA\Mantopo.d is now listed at the top. Click OK. You will return to the main Field to Finish
table, completely empty, as shown below:
Chapter 2. Tutorials 150
Now, jump start the table by choosing the option Code Table by CRD (located in the lower left of the dialog). Choose
Append.
In this lesson, we only care about code 17 and 18, so highlight all of the others (by holding the CTRL key down and
picking them), then choose Cut. Now highlight both 17 and 18 as shown below.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 151
Pick the middle Edit button. Another dialog appears.
Click the Entity button for yet another dialog, shown below. Make all settings as shown in this box. We will turn
them both into 3D polylines (which will act as break lines or barrier lines for contouring). Accept the 3D Polyline
choice by clicking OK, then hit Exit, which will take you back to the Field to Finish dialog.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 152
The last steps are to rst to save the Field-to-Finish (.FLD) le Mantopo by clicking the Save button. Then click
Draw (lower right) to draw the 3D polylines. You will see the following dialog which allows you to control the
details of what to draw. Make sure lines is the only entity to be drawn, not points or symbols. Take a quick look at
Additional Draw Options by clicking that button. Make sure that the Point Label Settings are set so that you can see
the points properly. Click OK to both dialog boxes.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 153
The following drawing is created. All the ditch lines and top of bank lines, because they were coded 17 and 18, are
drawn in one quick procedure.
5 Because the eld crew did not use start and stop logic (e.g. appending 7 or some agreed upon code to a description
could end a polyline and start another), some polylines connect that should not. In particular, the line pointed to
near the NW corner is clearly crossing the ditch line. It must be removed. Choose the Edit pulldown, then Polyline
Utilities, Remove Polyline, then Remove Polyline Segment.
Break polyline at removal or keep continuous [<Break>/Continuous]? Enter
Chapter 2. Tutorials 154
Select polyline segment to remove: Select the polyline segment to the right of point 127. You will recognize this
as a long segment running from point 127 to point 50.
Select polyline segment to remove: Enter(for no more)
6 Return back up to the Surface Menu, pick Triangulate & Contour, and set the standard contour interval to 1 (as
before), but specify Draw Index Contours. Set the index interval to 5. Then do a right-to-left crossing selection as
before (avoiding the stockpile at the lower right). Select the Mantopo.crd le again.
Now we get excellent contours, with a sharply dened ditch. Under View, do Freeze Layer and pick on a point. The
points will freeze.
Here is the improved drawing, helped out by 3D polylines, which, if selected, act as break lines, which were
produced by Draw Field-to-Finish.
7 Delete Layer. Let's say that now you don't want the break lines on there. You don't want to even freeze them, you
want to fully delete them. There is a command for that under Edit. Pick Erase, sliding over to Erase by Layer. This
dialog appears.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 155
If you know the layer names, you can just type them in. If you know where they are but not their names, then
click on Select Layers from Screen. If you'd recognize the layer name if you saw it in a list, click Select Lay-
ers by Name. Click on Select Layers by Name and pick 17 and 18, then OK twice. Notice the change in the drawing.
8 Explode. Inserted Drawings need to be exploded. Do a View pulldown, option Window and window in on the
stockpile at the lower right of the drawing. If you type E to Erase, and try to erase any aspect of the stockpile, the
whole stockpile will erase all features. That is because the Stockpile was another drawing inserted into this drawing.
Sometimes other drawings that are inserted are referred to as Blocks. In any case, this stockpile block, or inserted
drawing, needs to be exploded. Explode just breaks it up into its unit objects which then start to behave normally.
Select Explode under Edit and slide over to Standard Explode. Then pick the stockpile. It is now a set of normal
objects.
It's also worth noting that while the block has been exploded, it still exists in the drawing as a block denition.
This means that now that it's exploded it is taking up twice the amount of storage space in the drawing. As such,
you should purge the drawing of the unused block, or turn on the explode toggle when inserting one drawing into
another. As a basic rule, if it's a symbol, don't turn on the explode toggle; if it's a complete dialog, turn it on.
9 Change Elevations. Let's assume our stockpile drawing is too high and should be lowered in elevations by 540
units. To best see the effect of this command, bring back the points by selecting Thaw Layer, under View. Now
select the Edit pulldown, then Change, then Elevations.
Ignore zero elevations [<Yes>/No]? Enter
Type of elevation change [Absolute/<Differential>]: D
Change Layer for changed entities [Yes/<No>]: Enter
Positive number increases, negative number decreases elevation.
Scale/Elevation difference <0.00>: -540
Hit Enter twice.
Select objects: Do a lower right pick to upper left pick (automatic crossing) selection.
Select objects: Enter (for no more)
Notice in the drawing below how everything has change elevation, including the points, but with the exception of
the contour text.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 156
Do the command List Elevation under the Inquiry pulldown, pick on an index contour, and notice how the elevation
has indeed changed. Repeat step 7 and delete the layer Ctext, so as to remove the 5 index contour elevations, which
are no longer accurate.
10 Volumes by Layer. One of the signature commands of Carlson, Volumes by Layer will produce accurate volumes
without making any les. The only prerequisite is that the existing and nal surfaces exist on the drawing in separate,
distinct layers. It is also very important to have a drawn inclusion perimeter to pick and dene where the volumes
are being calculated. In our example, the original ground will be the 3D polyline connecting points 1 through 15,
and everything else above will be the nal ground (including the 3D perimeter itself).
Select Volumes by Layers. This command is found under the Grading menu, within Volumes by Grid Surface.
Pick Lower Left limit of surface area: Pick below and to the left of the stockpile, but as close as possible to the
stockpile without clipping it in the window. You want to totally include it, but with little wasted margin.
Pick Upper Right limit of surface area: Pick above and to the right of the stockpile.
A dialog appears:
We will stick with the defaults, as shown. Notice that we are using 50 grid cells within our window, and since our
window was not a perfect square, the cell sizes are not whole numbers. (In this example it is 6.88 x 5.77. You my
have slightly different sizes). Seeing this, if we wanted 5 x 5 cell size, we could click the Dimensions of a Cell
option and set the size to 5 x 5. Hundreds or thousands of cells in both directions will increase calculation time.
You can experiment with more cells, or if you prefer, smaller cells (which makes more cells), and see when you get
diminishing returns in terms of accuracy changes. After a while, tighter, smaller cell sizes don't add any value to the
precision of the calculation. Click OK.
Then pick the layers that dene the existing ground (Perimeter) and the layers that dene the nal ground (Perimeter,
Barrier, Ctr, Ctrindex).
Then click OK. Notice how the Perimeter layer is common to both. If you want to be a master of volumes, remember
this as a mantra: The perimeter should be a 3D polyline in a distinct layer, common to both surfaces. A stockpile is
just a special case in that sometimes the 3D perimeter is all you know about the base surface.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 157
When asked to Select objects, do a right-to-left (crossing) selection of the entire stockpile area. Lastly, you will be
asked for the inclusion perimeter (pick the white perimeter polyline) and the exclusion perimeter (none). This leads
to a exible reporting and output dialog:
Elevation Zone Volumes, for example, would produce volumes in any desired increment from the base of the stock-
pile going up. If the stockpile consists of coal (80 lbs/c.f.), then Report Tons can be clicked on and a Density value
entered.
Click OK, and the basic report is produced, as seen below. We did not include the points in the nal layer. Since
there is a high point, for example, the top of the stockpile, the points would lift the volumes up slightly.
Click the Exit icon to return to the command prompt.
11 Stockpile Volumes. Our Stockpile is naturally well-suited for applying the simplest volume command of all
Stockpile Volumes. It requires that the 3D perimeter polyline for the stockpile be placed in a layer called Perimeter
which ours is. So let's try it.
Select Calculate Stockpile Volume found under the Grading pulldown menu.
Material density lbs/ft3 (Enter for none): 80
Ignore zero elevations [<Yes>/No]? Enter
Reading points ...
Select Stockpile perimeter polyline: Crossing select (right-to-left picks) the entire stockpile area.
The grid resolution dialog (note that it is still at 50x50) appears again. Click OK. Done. A report is generated.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 158
This completes the Lesson 6 tutorial: Contouring, Break Lines and Stockpiles.
Chapter 2. Tutorials 159
AutoCAD Overview 3
This chapter explains the essentials of using AutoCAD including command entry, selection sets and layers. Since
Carlson Software in built on the AutoCAD OEM engine, it is helpful to know the AutoCAD basics. Several of the
Carlson Software command are native AutoCADcommands and many others have an AutoCADstyle user-interface.
160
Issuing Commands
Virtually all commands in Carlson Software have three or more ways they can be initiated. The two most common
are the menu and the toolbar , but the command line can many times be a very easy method of working through
commands. Using the menu and toolbar should be second nature to Windows users, so this section will mainly focus
on the command line usage in Carlson Software.
Command Line Prompt-Command:
Carlson Software has a command line prompt where commands are ''issued'' and the status of a command is reported.
When you select a command from the menu or toolbar, that command name is sent to the command line and is
executed. Before most commands can begin, all other commands must be terminated. The exceptions are referred
to as transparent commands. The easiest way to see if no commands are running is to look at the command line. If
it displays Command: no commands are currently in progress.
Enter
When you are required to press the Enter key in Carlson Software, you can use the Enter key on the keyboard or you
can press the spacebar or click the right mouse button.
Pressing the Enter key will perform different operations depending on your location within Carlson Software. If you
are in the process of running a command, the Enter key will end the command (if there are no available options) or
it will select one of the options available (see below). If you are at the command line Command: prompt, pressing
the Enter key will repeat the last command.
Right Mouse Button
As mentioned above, the right mouse button can be used as enter. However, you can set the right mouse button
to perform different functions. The control for the Right Mouse Button behavior is in the Mouse Click Settings
command. When you click the right mouse button, you will get a drop down list of the options and can select the
desired one. Move the cursor the desired option and click on it with the left mouse button.
Getting Out of a Command-Esc
For commands that provide no options, the Enter key (or spacebar or right mouse button) will end the command you
are using. Also, when a command is issued in Carlson Software, this action will also automatically end the previous
command. However, there are exceptions to these two rules.
To avoid any problems with using the above methods to end a command, you can press the Escape (Esc) key. For
example, if the command line displays something other than Command: or if a command you want to run does
not start because you are using another command, you will want to end the command and return to the command
prompt. Using the Escape (Esc) key will accomplish this every time.
Note: Some commands have several optional levels which will require the escape key to be pressed more than once.
If you accidentally select a location on the screen and start a selection window, the command prompt will prompt
for another corner. Either select another point on the screen to nish the selection (not advised) or press the Esc key
to return to the Command: prompt.
Commands Option
When any command is issued, the command line acts as a status bar that will show the available options and ''ask''
for input from you.
Chapter 3. AutoCAD Overview 161
When there are options for the command you are currently running, these options will be shown on the command line
with capital letters in the option name. To use one of the options, type the capital letter(s) at the prompt. For example,
if you issue the Zoom command, the command prompt will show All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/...<Realtime>: To
select the Dynamic option, type D at the command line, then press the Enter key. If you do not input an option and
just hit enter, you will be selecting the option that appears in the <> brackets. For the example shown, that is the
Realtime Zoom option.
Transparent Commands
Several commands in Carlson Software can be run transparently. This means that they can be performed while
another command is running. For example, if you are in a command and are trying to select something in the
drawing but it is too small to see, you can use the zoom command transparently. Zoom to the area where the object
is, then select the object without ending the initial command. The most commonly used commands are the View
commands of Zoom and Pan, and the Properties commands including the Layer dialog box.
To issue a transparent command, type an ' (apostrophe) before the command name. For example, 'Z would be
transparent zoom. Note that many commands will automatically be assumed to be transparent if they are issued
from the toolbar while another command is running.
When you are in a command that is running transparently, this will be indicated with a >> at the far left of the
command line preceding any options or other text. When a transparent command is complete, you will return to the
command you were previously running. If you are in a transparent command and want to end the command to get
back to the command prompt, you will need to press the Esc key twice.
Note: If you select a View command while running another command, the other command will not end. You will be
running the View command transparently. This is one of the exceptions to the rules for ending a command. If you
do not want to run the View command transparently, you need to complete the other command or end it by pressing
the Esc key.
General Commands
Enter
When you are required to press the Enter key in Carlson Software, you can use the Enter key, the spacebar on the
keyboard or click on the right mouse button.
Repeating Commands
When you press the Enter key at the command line Command: prompt, you will repeat the last command.
Cancel
The Escape key (Esc)key can be used to cancel any command. Some commands may require pressing the Escape
key more than once.
Command Options
The command line changes as a command is running. When there are options available for the command you are
running, they will display at the command line. To select one of the options, type the capital letter(s) in the name of
the option and press the Enter key.
Chapter 3. AutoCAD Overview 162
Selection of Items
Most commands in Carlson Software require the selection of objects. When you need to select objects, the command
line will prompt Select objects:. When you are at this prompt, your next step will be to create a selection set. While
creating the selection set, the prompt Select Objects: repeats and you can continue to select objects until you press
the Enter key, at which time the command you are using will continue and use the objects selected. If you are
selecting object for an Eagle Point Software command, the objects selected will be then used for that command.
Selection Sets
There are several ways to create a selection set from the Select objects: prompt. With all selection methods, the
number of objects selected will be displayed in the command line along with any objects that were duplicated.
Following are the most commonly used methods for creating a selection set:
Single
A single selection is made when you move the object selection target to an object on the screen and click on it. The
selected object will highlight and the select objects prompt will return. The cursor changes to a small square when
the command line displays Select objects:.
Window
A Window will select all objects completely inside of the rectangle drawn. Create a window by selecting a point
on the view screen and then moving the cursor right. The window will display as a solid rectangle. You can also
create a window by typing W at the select object prompt. In this case you can move the cursor to the left to create
the window.
Crossing
A crossing will select all objects within the rectangle as well as those touched by the rectangle. If you select a point
on the view screen and move the cursor to the left, you are creating a crossing. The crossing will display as a dashed
rectangle. You can force a crossing by typing C at the select objects prompt, allowing you to move the cursor to the
right and create the crossing.
Previous
After you select several objects, they will be temporarily stored as a selection set. Should you want to re-use the
same objects that were selected by the last command, you can type P at the Select objects: prompt.
Remove
If you select incorrect objects, you can type R to remove objects from the selection set. When you are in Remove
mode, the prompt will be Remove objects:. Click on the objects that you do not want to include in your selection.
To return to select or add mode, type A at the command line.
Grips
Objects may also be selected before issuing the command and receiving the Select objects: prompt. This selection
will turn on Carlson Software ''grips.'' Grips appear as small blue squares in the drawing. All objects with grips will
be used when a command is issued. Grips are turned on similar to selecting objects as described in the previous
section, but with the command line at the Command: prompt, not the Select Objects: prompt. You can select
Chapter 3. AutoCAD Overview 163
single objects by clicking on an object with the standard cursor or you can select multiple objects by clicking in the
view where there are no objects, then creating the window (right) or crossing (left). To remove grips, press the Esc
key twice.
Using Grips
Grips can also be used to edit or change the location of objects in the drawing. Move your cursor to a grip and click.
You should notice the cursor ''snap'' to the grip. The grip will turn from blue to red. The object grip is now attached
to the cursor so you can move the object to the desired location and release it by clicking again.
Properties and Layers
Properties dene how an object in Carlson Software is stored. One of the most common properties is the Layer.
Layers can be turned off or frozen so the objects on that layer are hidden from the view of the drawing. Layers
that are turned off can still be selected while frozen layers are essentially removed from the working set of the
drawing. After layers are turned off or on, a redraw (which is done automatically) will update the view. A redraw
of a le is a rather quick process. After a frozen layer is thawed, a regeneration may be required to update the view.
Regenerations on large les may take a considerable amount of time depending on your hardware.
Layer Dialog Box
The Layer dialog box provides control of the drawing layers. You can turn layers on, off, freeze or thaw them,
change the layer color and linetype, set the current layer, add new layers, delete layers, etc. To perform any of these
functions, click on the Layers button .
In the Layer dialog box, you can highlight several individual layers to performactions on at once by holding down the
Control key and clicking on the desired layers. You can also highlight a continuous range of layers by highlighting
one layer, holding down the Shift key, and clicking on another layer. All layers between the two will be selected. To
select all of the layers, hold down the CTRL key and press A on the keyboard.
Layer Drop List
To turn layers on/off or freeze/thaw, you can also use the drop list on the toolbars. When you click on the symbols
in the list, the layer's status will be changed appropriately.
Setting Current Layer
The current layer will be the one shown in the Layer drop list box. You can change the current layer by selecting the
desired current layer from the drop list. You can also use the Set Current Layer button and select an object on the
layer. The layer the object is on will become the current layer. Finally, you can highlight a layer in the Layer dialog
box and click on the Current button to make the highlighted layer current.
You cannot freeze the current layer, but you can turn that layer off (not recommended).
Changing Properties
To change the properties of an object in the drawing, use the Properties button on the toolbar or the Change command
from the command line. This command will allow you to change the layer an object is on, the color or linetype of
the object. The color and linetype can be set to bylayer or to a specic setting. Bylayer means that when the property
for a layer is changed, so does the property for the object. For example, the specic setting of an object may be the
color blue. No matter what color you set for the layer the object is on, that object will be blue.
Chapter 3. AutoCAD Overview 164
Properties Toolbar
If this toolbar (or any toolbar) is not displayed, you can open it using the Toolbars dialog box. Type toolbars at the
command line.
Layer
The Layer dialog box is used to modify layers properties (color or linetype) or status (on/off, freeze/thaw).
Key-in: LA or ddlmodes
Toolbar:
Current Layer
The Current Layer is the layer that you are on and will be working with. The Current Layer is the one shown in the
Layer drop list. For example, in the above toolbar illustration, the Current Layer is Water.
Toolbar:
Change
The Change command allows you to modify the properties of an object, such as layer and color.
Key-in: CH
Toolbar:
Chapter 3. AutoCAD Overview 165
File Menu 4
The Carlson Software programs share some of the same pull-down menus, such as File, Edit, View, Draw, Settings
and Points. Within each program, the other pull-down menus, typically, are specic to the that program. The com-
mon pull-down menus contain general commands that are applicable within all programs. Many of these commands
are AutoCAD commands which are described in your AutoCAD Reference manual. The Carlson commands located
in the more common pull-down menus are explained in the next sections.
All the options on the File menu not described here are AutoCAD commands, which are discussed in the AutoCAD
Reference Manual.
166
New
This command allows you to create a new drawing le. This routine denes the settings for a new drawing. You
can start a new drawing le by selecting New, and then picking a template le. SURV.DWT is the default template
le for use in Carlson Survey. After choosing the template, click the Open button at the lower-right. Next, you will
either see the New Drawing Wizard dialog box or you will be taken to a blank screen. Should you use the wizard, a
new drawing name will need to be chosen in order to get to the next step.
There are two methods that you can use to create a new drawing. One is this New command. The other is Open,
also under the File pulldown menu. If you need to open an existing drawing, use the OPEN command, under File,
then choose an existing le name.
The opening dialog, Select Template, lists all template les that currently exist in the drawing template le location.
Choose a le to use as a starting point for your new drawing. A preview image of the selected le is displayed to the
right. If the wizard is in use, the following options will be available to you in the New Drawing Wizard dialog. The
New command starts a new drawing using default settings dened in either the surv.dwt or surviso.dwt template,
depending on the measurement system you've chosen. You cannot modify the surv.dwt or surviso.dwt templates.
To start a new drawing based on a customized template, see Use a Template.
Chapter 4. File Menu 167
English: This option starts a new drawing based on the Imperial measurement system. The drawing is based on the
surv.dwt template, and the default drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is 12 9 inches.
Metric: This option starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement system. The drawing is based on the
surviso.dwt template, and the default drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is 429 297 millimeters.
The New command creates a new drawing using the settings dened in a template drawing you select. Template
drawings store all the settings for a drawing and may also include predened layers, dimension styles, and views.
Template drawings are distinguished from other drawing les by the .DWT le extension. They are normally kept
in the template directory. Several template drawings are included with Carlson Survey. You can make additional
template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing le names to .DWT.
Pulldown Menu Location: File
Keyboard Command: new
Prerequisite: None
Open
This command allows you to open an existing drawing le. Carlson TakeOff displays the Select File dialog box (a
standard le selection dialog box). Select a le and click Open.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: OPEN
Close
This command allows you to close the current drawing. Carlson TakeOff closes the current drawing if there have
been no changes since the drawing was last saved. If you have modied the drawing, the program prompts you to
save or discard the changes. You can close a le that has been opened in Read-only mode if you have made no
changes or if you are willing to discard changes. To save changes to a read-only le, you must use the SAVEAS
command.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: CLOSE
Save
If the drawing is named, Carlson TakeOff saves the drawing without requesting a le name. If the drawing is
unnamed, the program displays the Save Drawing As dialog box (see SAVEAS) and saves the drawing with the le
name you specify. If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS command to save the changed le under a different
name. This command allows you to save the drawing under the current le name or a specied name
Chapter 4. File Menu 168
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: SAVE or QSAVE
Save As
This command allows you to save the current drawing and assign the le name which allows you to give an
unnamed drawing a le name or rename the current drawing. You can also use this command to save the current
drawing to a different le format. You can save a drawing to an earlier version of the drawing format (DWG) or
drawing interchange format (DXF), or save a drawing as a template le. Choose the format from Files of Type in
the Save Drawing As dialog box.
If you save the le as a drawing template, the program displays the Template Description dialog box, where you can
provide a description for the template and set the units of measurement.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: SAVEAS
Page Setup
This command allows you to congure your drawing for plotting. The Page Setup dialog box has the same options
as the Plot dialog box. See the PLOT command below for a detailed description of options.
Menu Location: File
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: PAGESETUP
Plot Preview
This option displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper. To exit the print preview, right-click and
choose Exit. This command is the same as the Full Preview option under Plot.
Menu Location: File
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: PREVIEW
Plot
This command allows you to plot a drawing to a plotting device or le.
Carlson TakeOff displays the Plot dialog box. Choose OK to begin plotting with the current settings and display the
Plot Progress dialog box.
1 The Plot dialog box includes the tabs, Plot Device and Plot Settings, and several options to customize the plot.
Layout Name: This option displays the current layout name or displays ''Selected layouts'' if multiple tabs are
selected. If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the Layout Name shows ''Model.''
Save Changes to Layout: This option saves the changes you make in the Plot dialog box in the layout. This
option is unavailable if multiple layouts are selected.
Page Setup Name: This option displays a list of any named and saved page setups. You can choose to base the
current page setup on a named page setup, or you can add a new named page setup by choosing Add.
Add: This option displays the User Dened Page Setups dialog box. You can create, delete, or rename named
page setups.
Chapter 4. File Menu 169
2 Under the Plot Device Tab you can specify the plotter to use, a plot style table, the layout or layouts to plot, and
information about plotting to a le.
Plotter Conguration: This eld displays the currently congured plotting device, the port to which it's connected
or its network location, and any additional user-dened comments about the plotter. A list of the available system
printers and PC3 le names is displayed in the Name list. An icon is displayed in front of the plotting device name
to identify it as a PC3 le name or a system printer.
Properties: The option displays the Plotter Conguration Editor (PC3 Editor), where you can modify or view the
current plotter conguration, ports, device, and media settings.
Hints: This option displays information about the specic plotting device.
Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments): This option sets the plot style table, edits the plot style table, or creates a
new plot style table.
Name: This option displays the plot style table assigned to the current Model tab or layout tab and a list of the
currently available plot style tables. If more than one layout tab is selected and the selected layout tabs have different
plot style tables assigned, the list displays ''Varies.''
Edit: This option displays the Plot Style Table Editor, where you can edit the selected plot style table.
New: This option displays the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, which you can use to create a new plot style table.
Plot Stamp: This option places a plot stamp on a specied corner of each drawing and/or logs it to a le.
On: This options turns on plot stamping.
Settings: This option displays the Plot Stamp dialog box, where you can specify the information you want applied
to the plot stamp, such as drawing name, date and time, and plot scale.
What to Plot: This eld denes the tabs to be plotted.
Current Tab: This option plots the current Model or layout tab. If multiple tabs are selected, the tab that shows
its viewing area is plotted.
Selected Tabs: This option plots multiple preselected Model or layout tabs. To select multiple tabs, hold down
CTRL while selecting the tabs. If only one tab is selected, this option is unavailable.
Chapter 4. File Menu 170
All Layout Tabs: This option plots all layout tabs, regardless of which tab is selected.
Number of Copies: This option denotes the number of copies that are plotted. If multiple layouts and copies are
selected, any layouts that are set to plot to a le or AutoSpool produce a single plot.
Plot to File: This option plots output to a le rather than to the plotter.
File Name: This option species the plot le name. The default plot le name is the drawing name and the tab
name, separated by a hyphen, with a .plt le extension.
Location: This option displays the directory location where the plot le is stored. The default location is the
directory where the drawing le resides.
[...]: This option displays a standard Browse for Folder dialog box, where you can choose the directory location
to store a plot le.
3 Under the Plot Settings Tab you specify paper size, orientation, plot area and scale, offset, and other options.
Paper Size and Paper Units: This eld displays standard paper sizes available for the selected plotting device.
Actual paper sizes are indicated by the width (X axis direction) and height (Y axis direction). If no plotter is selected,
the full standard paper size list is displayed and available for selection. A default paper size is set for the plotting
device when you create a PC3 le with the Add-a-Plotter wizard. The paper size you select is saved with a layout
and overrides the PC3 le settings. If you are plotting a raster image, such as a BMP or TIFF le, the size of the plot
is specied in pixels, not in inches or millimeters.
Plot Device: This eld displays the name of the currently selected plot device.
Paper Size: This eld displays a list of the available paper sizes.
Printable Area: This eld displays the actual area on the paper that is used for the plot based on the current paper
size.
Inches: This option allows you to specify inches for the plotting units.
MM: This option allows you to specify millimeters for the plotting units.
Drawing Orientation: This option species the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support
landscape or portrait orientation. You can change the drawing orientation to achieve a 0-, 90-, 180-, or 270-degree
Chapter 4. File Menu 171
plot rotation by selecting Portrait, Landscape, or Plot Upside-Down. The paper icon represents the media orientation
of the selected paper. The letter icon represents the orientation of the drawing on the page.
Portrait: This option orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the
page.
Landscape: This option orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the
page.
Plot Upside-Down: This option orients and plots the drawing upside down.
Plot Area: This option species the portion of the drawing to be plotted.
Layout: This option plots everything within the margins of the specied paper size, with the origin calculated
from 0,0 in the layout. Available only when a layout is selected. If you choose to turn off the paper image and layout
background on the Display tab of the Options dialog box, the Layouts selection becomes Limits.
Limits: This option plots the entire drawing area dened by the drawing limits. If the current viewport does not
display a plan view, this option has the same effect as the Extents option. Available only when the Model tab is
selected.
Extents: This option plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects. All geometry in
the current space is plotted. TakeOff may regenerate the drawing to recalculate the extents before plotting.
Display: This option plots the view in the current viewport in the selected Model tab or the current paper space
view in the layout.
View: This option plots a previously saved view. You can select a named view from the list provided. If there are
no saved views in the drawing, this option is unavailable.
Window: This option plots any portion of the drawing you specify. If you select Window, the Window button
becomes available. Choose the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to
be plotted or enter coordinate values.
Plot Scale: This option controls the plot area. The default scale setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout. The default
setting is Scaled to Fit when plotting a Model tab. When you select a standard scale, the scale is displayed in Custom.
Scale: This option denes the exact scale for the plot. The four most recently used standard scales are displayed
at the top of the list.
Custom: This option creates a custom scale. You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches or
millimeters equal to the number of drawing units.
Scale Lineweights: This option scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify
the linewidth of printed objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale.
Plot Offset: This eld species an offset of the plotting area from the lower-left corner of the paper. In a layout,
the lower-left corner of a specied plot area is positioned at the lower-left margin of the paper. You can offset the
origin by entering a positive or negative value. The plotter unit values are in inches or millimeters on the paper.
Center the Plot: This option automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the paper.
X: This eld species the plot origin in the X direction.
Y: This eld species the plot origin in the Y direction.
Plot Options: This eld species options for lineweights, plot styles, and the current plot style table. You can
select whether lineweights are plotted. By selecting Plot with Plot Styles, you plot using the object plot styles that
are assigned to the geometry, as dened by the plot style table.
Plot object lineweights: This option plots lineweights.
Plot with Plot Styles: This option plots using the plot styles applied to objects and dened in the plot style
table. All style denitions with different property characteristics are stored in the plot style tables and can be easily
attached to the geometry. This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of AutoCAD.
Chapter 4. File Menu 172
Plot Paperspace Last: This option plots model space geometry rst. Paper space geometry is usually plotted
before model space geometry.
Hide Objects: This option plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layout environment (paper
space). Hidden line removal for model space objects in viewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide property in
the Object Property Manager. This is displayed in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
Full Preview: This option displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper. To exit the print preview,
right-click and choose Exit.
Partial Preview: This option quickly shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the
paper size and printable area. Partial preview also gives advance notice of any warnings that you might encounter
when plotting. The nal location of the plot depends on the plotter. Changes that modify the effective plot area
include those made to the plot origin, which you dene under Plot Offset on the Plot Settings tab. If you offset the
origin so much that the effective area extends outside the preview area, the program displays a warning.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: PLOT
Import Xref to Current Drawing
This command allows you to import external reference les (Xrefs) into the current drawing. Before Xrefs are
imported, the drawing data from the Xrefs can be viewed but not modied. This import routine has a simplier
method for importing than the Xref Manager command. A list is shown of the Xrefs that are attached to the current
drawing. If the Xref le is not found, you can pick the Set Path button to locate the drawing le. To import an Xref,
highlight the le name and Pick Import.
Prerequisite: les to import
Keyboard Command: import xref
Xref Manager
Attaches, overlays, lists, binds, detaches, reloads, unloads, renames, and modies paths to external references
(Xrefs) in the current (or host) drawing. Displays the Xrefs in the drawing in a tree view or a list view. You
can use the F3 and F4 keys to switch between list view and tree view.
Chapter 4. File Menu 173
List View: Displays a at listing of the attached Xrefs and their associated data. You can sort the list of references
by name, status, type, le date, le size, or the saved path and le name.
Reference Name: Lists the names of the Xrefs as stored in the denition table for the drawing. Status:
Shows whether the Xref is loaded, unloaded, unreferenced, not found, unresolved, orphaned, or marked for
unloading or reloading.
Loaded: Currently attached to the drawing.
Unloaded: Marked to be unloaded from the drawing once the Xref Manager is closed.
Unreferenced: Attached to the drawing but erased.
Not Found: No longer exists in the valid search paths.
Unresolved: Cannot be read by AutoCAD.
Orphaned: Attached to another Xref that is unreferenced, unresolved, or not found.
Size: Shows the le size of the corresponding reference drawing. The size is not displayed if the Xref is unloaded,
not found, or unresolved.
Type: Indicates whether the Xref is an attachment or an overlay.
Date: Displays the last date the associated drawing was modied. This date is not displayed if the Xref is unloaded,
not found, or unresolved.
Saved Path: Shows the saved path of the associated Xref (this is not necessarily where the Xref is found).
Tree View: Displays a hierarchical representation of the Xrefs, displaying the relationships between Xref deni-
tions. Tree view shows the level of nesting relationship of the attached Xrefs, whether they are attached or overlaid,
and whether they are loaded, unloaded, marked for reload or unload, or not found, unresolved, or unreferenced.
Attach: Displays the External Reference dialog box if an external reference is selected or displays the Select Ref-
erence File dialog box if no external reference is selected.
Detach: Detaches one or more Xrefs from your drawing, erasing all instances of a specied Xref and marking
the Xref denition for deletion from the symbol table. Only the Xrefs attached or overlaid directly to the current
drawing can be detached; nested Xrefs cannot be detached. Carlson TakeOff cannot detach an Xrefreferenced by
another Xref or block.
Reload: Marks one or more Xrefs for reloading. This option rereads and displays the most recently saved version
of the drawing.
Chapter 4. File Menu 174
Unload: Unloads one or more Xrefs. Unloaded Xrefs can be easily reloaded. Unlike detaching, unloading does not
remove the Xref permanently. It merely suppresses the display and regeneration of the Xrefdenition to improve
performance.
Bind:Displays the Bind Xrefs dialog box Xref. The Bind option makes the selected Xrefand its dependent symbols
(such as blocks, teXreft styles, dimension styles, layers, and linetypes) a part of the current drawing.
Found At: Displays the full path of the currently selected Xref. This is where the Xref is actually found and is not
necessarily the same as the saved path.
Browse: Displays the Select New Path dialog boXref (a standard le selection dialog boXref), in which you can
select a different path or le name.
Save Path: Saves the path, as it appears in XrefFound At, to the currently selected Xref.
Prompts
Command: Xref
Overlay Xref ''example1'': ..\..\..\..\Program Files\Carlson TakeOff
2004\WORK\example1.dwg
''example1'' loaded: G:\oem4\src2\work\example1.dwg
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Command: Specify opposite corner:
Select objects: Enter
Prerequisite: multiple les
Keyboard Command: Xref
Import LandXML File
The Import LandXML File routine provides a mechanism where land-based data from other software applications
(including Carlson Software) can be brought into a project and used for analysis and/or design purposes. To import
a LandXML le, a series of dialog boxes are presented:
Select LandXML File: Specify the name of a LandXML le you wish to import.
Chapter 4. File Menu 175
LandXML Units: Indicates the Units of Measure associated with the incoming LandXML le (see the Unit Differ-
ences item below).
Point Protection: When enabled, you are prompted for a course of action if an existing LandXML le you've
selected contains COGO points that have the same number(s) as those that already exist in the drawing. When
disabled, existing point data in the project is updated with the values from the LandXML le.
Destination File Method: This option allows you to indicate how the incoming data le(s) are named as they are
imported.
Load Surfaces into Surface Manager: When enabled, this option will automatically add surface model (TIN) data
into the Surface Manager and graphically represents (draws) the surface model/contours according to the current
settings found in the Triangulate & Contour command.
Use Old FLT Triangulation File Format to Import Surface Data: When enabled, the older ASCII-based Carlson
*
.FLT le format will be used in place of the newer and more efcient
*
.TIN le format.
Save All Existing Ground Proles from One Centerline to the Same File: When enabled, collections of existing
ground proles associated with a particular centerline are combined into a single
*
.PRO le.
Change Directory: This option allows you to adjust the folder location where the new data les will be written.
Import from LandXML: Enable or disable various entries that should used to produce the data les found within
the LandXML le.
Unit Differences: If the Units of Measure specied in the LandXML le are different than those found in Drawing
Setup, you will be prompted for a course of action.
Chapter 4. File Menu 176
Manning's ''n'': If you are importing sewer data from a LandXML le and if the LandXML le does not carry
Manning's ''n'' values, you will be prompted to specify a default Manning's ''n'' value for all incoming sewer entities
that don't already have a Mannings ''n'' value.
Import Structures: If you are importing sewer data from a LandXML le and structure values specied in the
LandXML le do not exist in the Structure Library, you will be prompted to indicate the structure(s) that should
be imported into the Structure Library. Use standard Windows click, shift+click and/or ctrl+click functionality to
select multiple structures at the same time.
Skip Invisible Triangles: This option applies to importing TIN surfaces from Civil 3D. When this option is active,
triangles marked by Civil 3D as invisible or excluded are not imported.
Note:
The LandXML initiative is being driven by the land development industry as an acceptable means to share and
transfer land data rather than the traditional graphical representation of that data. It also provides an effective
means for transferring a variety data (points, centerlines, proles, surface models, sewer data, etc). Another
advantage of LandXML is that the LandXML data structure is CAD and software vendor neutral (meaning
you don't have to own or use the CAD or software product used by your data provider).
Visit http://www.landxml.org for additional information on the uses and acceptance of the LandXML initia-
tive.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): File > LandXML
Keyboard Command: landxml import
Prerequisite: A LandXML le to import
Export LandXML File
The Export LandXML File routine provides a mechanism where data can be sent from Carlson Software into a
LandXML le for use in other applications that support the LandXML data specication. To generate a LandXML
le, a series of dialog boxes are presented:
Chapter 4. File Menu 177
Export to LandXML: This option allows you to individually select the desired Carlson Software data le(s) that
should be included in the LandXML le.
Project Data Files: This option allows you to quickly select the various data les associated with, and dened by a
Carlson Project (
*
.prj) le.
Select LandXML File: Specify the name of a LandXML le you wish to create.
Include Files Referenced in Select Files: When enabled, this option will automatically add other les that are
referenced by the selected le. As an example, the le produced by the Carlson Road Network command references
TINs, Centerlines, Proles, etc, and adding the single Road Network le will also add the referenced le(s) into the
Export to LandXML File dialog box.
Export to LandXML File: Add, remove (using standard Windows click, shift+click and/or ctrl+click functional-
ity) or otherwise organize the data le(s) that is to be incorporated into the LandXML le.
Change Directory: This option allows you to adjust the folder location from where selected data les should be
referenced (often used for project revision purposes).
Report: Create a report (suitable for le transmission or archival purposes) of the le(s) selected to be incorporated
into the LandXML le.
Chapter 4. File Menu 178
LandXML Units: Specify the desired Units of Measure that reect the outgoing data.
Point Protection: When enabled, you are prompted for a course of action if an existing LandXML le you've
selected contains COGO points that have the same number(s) as those being selected for the LandXML le. When
disabled, point data you've selected for the LandXML le are automatically written to (or updated into) the existing
LandXML le.
Exported Element Protection: When enabled, you are prompted if existing data (such as a centerline) in a
LandXML le should be updated with data of the same name that you have selected for the LandXML le.
Precision: Set the desired level of precision for each of the various measurement categories.
Proles:
There are two major different types of proles in LandXML: ProfSurf and ProfAlign. ProfSurf is typically an
existing surface that is usually created using existing surface data. The data for this type of prole it is stored in
a series of station-elevation values as a representation of a PntList2D list. ProfAlign is for a design prole. The
data for this type of prole is stored in LandXML elements starting from the simplest one: PVI element, CircCurve
element, ParaCurve element, etc.
Carlson differentiates the two types mentioned above by using the prole type in the Carlson .pro le: Generic =
ProSurf, Road = ProAlign.
Note:
The LandXML initiative is being driven by the land development industry as an acceptable means to share and
transfer land data rather than the traditional graphical representation of that data. It also provides an effective
means for transferring a variety data (points, centerlines, proles, surface models, sewer data, etc). Another
advantage of LandXML is that the LandXML data structure is CAD and software vendor neutral (meaning
you don't have to own or use the CAD or software product used by your data provider).
Chapter 4. File Menu 179
Visit http://www.landxml.org for additional information on the uses and acceptance of the LandXML initia-
tive.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): File > LandXML
Keyboard Command: landxml export
Prerequisite: Carlson project data les to convert
Import RoadXML File
The Import RoadXML File routine provides a mechanism where road-based data from other software applications
(including Carlson Software) can be brought into a project and used for analysis and/or design purposes. The
program supports centerline and prole data in Trimble style RoadXML format. To import a RoadXML le, a series
of dialog boxes are presented:
Select RoadXML File: The standard File Selector dialog box prompts you identify an existing RoadXML (
*
.RXL)
le you wish to import. The following dialog box is then displayed:
RoadXML Units: Indicates the Units of Measure associated with the incoming RoadXML le (see the Unit Differ-
ences item below).
Destination File Method: This option allows you to indicate how the incoming data le(s) are named as they are
imported.
Change Directory: This option allows you to adjust the folder location where the new data les will be written.
Import from RoadXML: Enable or disable various entries that should used to produce the data les found within
the RoadXML le.
Chapter 4. File Menu 180
RoadXML Units: RoadXML les are always in metric units. If the current drawing units as set in Drawing Setup
are not metric, then you will be prompted whether to apply a scale factor. Note: Visit http://www.road-xml.org for
additional information on the RoadXML initiative.
Pulldown Menu Location: File > Import
Keyboard Command: roadxml import
Prerequisite: A RoadXML le to import
Export RoadXML File
The Export RoadXML File routine creates a RoadXML RXL le using Carlson format centerline and prole les.
This RoadXML le can be used for data exchange with other applications that support the RoadXML data speci-
cation such as Trimble. To generate a RoadXML le, a series of dialog boxes are presented:
Current Drawing Data Files: This option selects the various data les associated with , and dened by the Drawing
Explorer command.
Project Data Files: This option allows you to quickly select the various data les associated with, and dened by a
Carlson Project (
*
.prj) le.
Selected Data Files: This option allows you to individually select the desired Carlson Software data le(s) that
should be included in the RoadXML le. This is followed by:
Select RoadXML File: Use the standard File Selector dialog box to specify a new or append to an existing Road-
XML le. This is followed by:
Chapter 4. File Menu 181
Include Files Referenced in Select Files: When enabled, this option will automatically add other les that are
referenced by the selected le. As an example, the le produced by the Carlson Road Network command references
TINs, Centerlines, Proles, etc, and adding the single Road Network le will also add the referenced le(s) into the
Export to RoadXML File dialog box.
Export to RoadXML File: Add, remove (using standard Windows click, shift+click and/or ctrl+click functional-
ity) or otherwise organize the data le(s) that is to be incorporated into the RoadXML le.
Change Directory: This option allows you to adjust the folder location from where selected data les should be
referenced (often used for project revision purposes).
Report: Create a report (suitable for le transmission or archival purposes) of the le(s) selected to be incorporated
into the RoadXML le.
Chapter 4. File Menu 182
RoadXML Units: The Units of Measure are displayed for the RoadXML le about to be created.
Exported Element Protection: When enabled, you are prompted if existing data (such as a centerline) in a Road-
XML le should be updated with data of the same name that you have selected for the RoadXML le.
Precision: Set the desired level of precision for each of the various measurement categories.
Pick the Export button to complete the creation of the RoadXML RXL le.
RoadXML Units: RoadXML les are always in metric units. If the current drawing units as set in Drawing Setup
are not metric, then you will be prompted whether to apply a scale factor.
Indicate the desired action of what should occur if the units of the RoadXML do not match those of the current
drawing.
Note: Visit http://www.road-xml.org for additional information on the RoadXML initiative.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): File > LandXML/RoadXML
Keyboard Command: roadxml export
Prerequisite: Carlson project data les to convert
Chapter 4. File Menu 183
Import Google Earth File
The Import Google Earth File command allows you to insert a KML (Keyhole Markup Language or alternatively
a KMZ) le of points (KML Placemark), polylines (KML Path) and closed polylines (KML Polygon) into your
drawing. Throughout this discussion, KML will be used to also describe KMZ les unless explicitly noted.
Import Lines and Polygons: When this option is selected, KML Path and Polygon entries will be placed into the
drawing as open or closed polylines, respectively.
Import Points: When this option is selected, KML Placemark entries will be placed into the drawing and active
coordinate le.
Point Protect: When enabled, existing points in the active coordinate le will not be over-written.
Use Folders as Layers: When enabled, KML Folder entries will be used to create layer names in CAD and the
supported KML options described above will be placed onto the layer that conforms the the Folder to which they
belong.
Default Layer: The supported KML options described above that are not contained in a KML folder will be placed
into the specied layer.
Note:
Placemarks, paths or polygon entries that have an altitude value specied will be imported at the proper ''Z''
elevation in the CAD drawing.
KML or KMZ les can be specied for the import process.
Prompts
Google Earth File to Read: Select a previously saved KML or KMZ le.
To import a Google Earth image into your drawing, use the Place Google Earth Image command.
To import a Google Earth terrain data into a Carlson TIN (surface model), use the Place Google Earth Image
command.
To export content from your drawing to a KML le, use the Export Google Earth File command.
Pulldown Menu Location: File > LandXML/RoadXML/Google Earth
Keyboard Command: kmlread
Prerequisite: A KML or KMZ le with Placemark, Path and/or Polygon information, an active coordinate le with
an established projection zone through Drawing Setup.
Export Google Earth File
The Export Google Earth File allows you to produce a KML (Keyhole Markup Language or alternatively a KMZ)
le of points, polylines, text, solids, images, lines and arcs for rendering in other mapping and GIS applications such
as Google Earth and Google Maps. Throughout this discussion, KML will be used to also describe KMZ les unless
explicitly noted.
Chapter 4. File Menu 184
Drape on Google Terrain (2D): When this option is selected, entities written to the KML le will have an Altitude
setting of ''Clamped to ground.''
Use Elevation from the Drawing (3D): When this option is selected, entities written to the KML le will have an
Altitude setting of ''Absolute.''
Include Selected Points: When enabled, this option exports selected Carlson point information to the KML <Place-
mark><Point>...</Point></Placemark> tag structure.
Include Selected Text: When enabled, this option exports selected Text and MText entities to the KML <Place-
mark><Point>...</Point></Placemark> tag structure.
Include Layer Information: When enabled, this option organizes exported information based on the layer of each
entity, with each CAD layer becoming a KML <Folder>...</Folder> entry with the color of the group taking the
general color of the CAD layer.
Shade Closed Regions: When enabled, all closed polyline regions (e.g. building pads, ponds, etc) will be ll-
shaded.
Include Solids and Images: When enabled, Solid entities and Images are included in the KML as <Place-
mark><Polygon>...</Polygon></Placemark> and/or <GroundOverlay>...</GroundOverlay> tags, respec-
tively.
Export to KMZ Format: When enabled, the KML le is written to the more compact (zipped) KMZ version of the
standard KML le format.
Display Results in Google Earth: When enabled, the results of the KML are passed to and automatically opened
with Google Earth.
Share Results through Dropbox: When enabled, the results of the KML are passed to a personal DropBox account.
Linework Opacity: Use the horizontal slider control to indicate the desired level of opaqueness that should be
applied to linework entities. A lower opacity results in increased entity transparency and is helpful for viewing
underlying map data found in applications such as Google Earth.
Solids and Images Opacity: Use the horizontal slider control to indicate the desired level of opaqueness that should
be applied to Solids and Image entities. A lower opacity results in increased entity transparency and is helpful for
viewing underlying map data found in applications such as Google Earth.
Note:
When the Use Elevations from the Drawing (3D) option is selected, be aware that elevation values lower than
the Google Earth terrain may be obstructed in the Google Earth display.
Attribute information (e.g. Number, Elevation, Description) of selected Carlson points are also written to the
KML and will display in the ''balloon'' when a point is picked in the Google Earth display or data hierarchy.
The formatting of any selected MText entities is not propagated into the KML/KMZ le.
Chapter 4. File Menu 185
When the Shade Closed Regions toggle is enabled, note that all closed polyline regions will become ll shaded
and may lead to undesired results for items such as closed contours.
When Image entities are included, the size of the image itself is incorporated into the KMZ le and my
signicantly swell the size of the KMZ le which may result in lengthy load times into other applications.
To have results posted to Dropbox, the Dropbox Application for Windows must be rst installed to your PC
using its default folder specication for the location of shared/synchronized folders/les.
When prompted for the name of the KML/KMZ le to write, the appropriate KML or KMZ le extension
based on the Export to KMZ Format toggle will be added to the le if the le extension is not specied.
Arcs and polylines with arcs are converted into chord segments that closely approximate the arc(s).
Other entities not supported for direct export to a KML le (e.g. circles, ellipses, splines, multilines, etc), can
be rst turned into polylines with the Entities to Polylines command.
The graphical symbology of any/all items sent to the KML le can be manually modied via the Google Earth
interface.
Prompts
Select points, polylines, text, solids, images, lines and arcs to write.
FILter/<Select entities>: Select the desired entities and press Enter when complete.
To import a Google Earth image into your drawing, use the Place Google Earth Image command.
To import a Google Earth terrain data into a Carlson TIN (surface model), use the Place Google Earth Image
command.
To import KML content into your drawing, use the Import Google Earth File command.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): File LandXML/RoadXML/Google Earth
Keyboard Command: kmlwrite
Prerequisite: Points, lines or polylines in the drawing with an established projection zone through Drawing Setup.
Write Polyline File
This command creates a polyline le that contains the point data of the select polylines. The objects supported by
this tool include polylines, arcs and lines. If you want to include text, you must use the Text Explode To Polylines
command found in the Edit menu to convert the text to polylines before running this command. Several different
output formats are supported.
The Carlson format (.PLN) is a text le format that is used by some Carlson commands and by machine control
(Carlson Grade, Dozer 2000, GradeStar) for the plan view. Each polyline begins with a line of ''POLYLINE, Color
number, etc''. Then the points for the polyline are listed on separate lines in X,Y,Z format.
The DTM and Idan formats create linework les for the DTM and Idan programs.
The MicroStation format (.txt) can be imported into MicroStation. This format has the coordinates as space delimited
for each polyline point. There is an extra column with a 1 or 0 where 1 species the start of a new polyline.
The Moss format creates a INP le for the MX/MOSS Genio program.
The Peabody format is a company specic format for Peabody Energy.
The Topcon format creates a Topcon LN3 le.
Note:
The former Google (KML) output option has been been moved to the dedicated Export Google Earth File
command.
Prompts
Polyline le format [<Carlson>/DTM/Idan/MicroStation/MOSS/Peabody/Topcon]? Specify the desired output
option by specifying the CAPITALIZED option or press Enter for the <default> option.
Chapter 4. File Menu 186
Polyline File to Write dialog: Create a new le or Append to Existing. If the Carlson option was selected, the
following dialog then appears:
Use Polyline File for Grid File Utilities macro: When enabled, the option will write a polyline le that can be
used with Grid File Utilities for inclusion/exclusion perimeters.
Specify Exclusion/Warning Polylines: When enabled, this option applies to machine control for warning areas.
Specify WorkZone Polylines: When enabled, this option applies to machine control for working areas.
Reduce Polyline Vertices: When enabled, this option applies the Reduce Polyline Vertices to the polyline vertices
before writing the le..
Offset Cutoff: Indicate the allowable offset distance (essentially the middle ordinate distance of a 3-point arc) that
would allow the middle vertex between two other vertex locations to be removed.
Include Z coordinate in polyline le: When enabled, this option controls whether the elevation(s) (or ''Z'' value)
of the selected polyline vertices are written to the polyline le.
Decimals: Indicate the desired amount of precision for the coordinate values that should be written to the le.
Select polylines, lines and arcs to write.
FILter/<Select entities>: Pick the entities to process press Enter when complete.
Sample Polyline File:
POLYLINE,51,0,0.0,CONT|V-STRM-PIPE
5375168.9320,3932304.7050,0.0000
5375193.3310,3932211.6150,0.0000
POLYLINE,150,0,0.0,CONT|V-BRKL
5375026.8800,3932090.0480,962.8334
5375062.3960,3932105.7540,961.5399
5375075.5640,3932115.7940,961.1595
5375079.0150,3932128.0920,961.1532
5375081.6860,3932159.7840,961.6147
5375086.6920,3932195.6480,962.6206
etc.
Pulldown Menu Location: File > Export
Keyboard Command: polywrite
Prerequisite: Polylines in the drawing
Draw Polyline File
This command draws polylines from the selected polyline le. This command supports the following formats:
Carlson (.PLN), Agtek (.WRL), CAICE (.SRV), Digital Line Graph (.DLG, .OPT), Idan (.DIS), MicroStation
(.TXT), MOSS (.INP, .PRN), Peabody (.PLY) and Topcon (.LN3 and .TXT). For formats that contain only geometry
without layer names, the polylines are drawn in the current layer.
Chapter 4. File Menu 187
Prompts
Polyline le format [<Carlson>/Agtek/Caice/DLG/DTM/Idan/MicroStation/MOSS/Peabody/Topcon]? press
Enter for Carlson default
Polyline File to Read Dialog select existing .PLN le
Pulldown Menu Location: File->Import
Keyboard Command: polydraw
Prerequisite: A polyline le
Clipboard
This command allows for different cut, copy, and paste options.
Cut
To cut objects to the Clipboard.
Select the objects you want to cut.
From the Clipboard command, choose Cut.
The objects are available to be pasted into other Windows applications.
Copy
To copy objects to the Clipboard.
Select the objects you want to copy.
From the Clipboard command, choose Copy.
Copy with Base Point
To copy objects to the Clipboard. When the objects are pasted into a drawing, the program places them relative to
the specied base point.
Select the objects you want to copy.
From the Clipboard command, choose Copy with Base Point.
Specify the base point.
Paste
The objects currently on the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing at the specied insertion point.
From Clipboard command, choose Paste.
Paste as Block
The objects currently on the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing as a block at the specied insertion point.
From Clipboard command, choose Paste as Block.
Chapter 4. File Menu 188
Paste to Original Coordinates
The objects currently on the Clipboard are pasted into the drawing using the coordinates from the original drawing.
From Clipboard command, choose Paste to Original Coordinates.
Drawing Cleanup
The Drawing Cleanup dialog box allows you to perform many functions that x common errors, and it removes
unnecessary data found in many drawing les. It also converts incompatible data into useful entities. This command
offers many lters that audit the drawing le and allows you to select which options and settings you want to use.
A report of the cleanup results will be displayed upon completion. Always save your le when the drawing cleanup
routine is complete.
Set UCS to World Coordinates
This sets the UCS (user coordinate system) to the world coordinate system (WCS). Carlson works exclusively in the
world coordinate system and there is no way to change this setting. In CAD, it is possible to change the coordinate
system from WCS. If you receive a drawing in which the coordinate system is not set to world, click this on to
restore the UCS.
Convert Architectural Inches Units To Decimal Feet
Chapter 4. File Menu 189
Drawings are sometimes in architectural units, i.e. inches, when the unit of measurement was intended to be in feet.
This routine will change the units from inches into feet and then scale the drawing by 1/12.
Import Xrefs To Current Drawing
This routine allows you to import any 'found' external reference les (Xrefs) into the current drawing. If the path is
not found, the Xref le will not be brought into the drawing. To set the Path for any unfound Xrefs, run Import Xref
to Current Drawing under File.
Remove Layers With No Entities
Drawings work with a ''BYLAYER'' concept meaning that layer denitions dene the drawing. For example, the
layer named EOP might be used to display polylines at the Edge Of Pavement in the drawing. Many times extra
layers get dened by a user but not used to display any objects. This function removes any layers dened in the
drawing that are not being used.
Rename Layers With Wildcards
Layers with wildcard characters such as ''
*
'' can interfere with Carlson layer matching functions. This routine
renames layers by replacing any wildcard characters with an underscore '' ''.
Remove Unused Blocks, Linetypes and Styles
This functions removes this unused information from the drawing.
Remove Zero Length Linework
This function seeks out and removes any linework denition that have zero length. Point nodes are not removed.
Remove Duplicate Linework
This function nds any duplicate linework in the drawing and removes all but one set.
Remove Duplicate Points
This function searches the drawing (but not the .CRD le) for points with the same northing, easting and elevation.
The tolerances for considering points to have the same coordinate are set to the right. To be counted the same
coordinate, both the northing/easting and elevation must be within the tolerance distance.
Remove Overlapping Polyline Loops
Polylines that completely overlap themselves are broken into two different polylines.
Join Linework With Same Endpoint
This function nds common endpoints on linework on common layers with common elevations and joins the
linework into a continuous polylines. This is very helpful for future selection sets.
Convert Splines, Multilines and Regions Into Polylines
Some CAD applications utilize Spline Object Denitions and Regions, Carlson utilizes basic polyline/polygon def-
initions. This function nds any Splines and/or Regions dened in the drawing and re-denes them as simple
polylines or polygons.
Convert Lines, Arcs, Circles, Ellipses, 3DFaces and Solids Into Polylines
By converting Lines, Arcs, Circles, Ellipses, 3D Faces, and Solids into Polylines, you can use the variety of Polyline
commands available in Carlson.
Convert LDD-AEC Contours and Points Into Carlson Format
Drawings created in the Land Development Desktop CAD program can contain special objects known as LDD-AEC
contours that dene their topographic contour display. This function locates those special objects and re-denes
them as simple 2D polylines retaining their elevation values.
Convert Entities With Extrusion To World Coordinates
Drawings created in the Land Development Desktop CAD program can contain special objects known as LDD-AEC
contours that dene their topographic contour display. This function locates those special objects and re-denes
Chapter 4. File Menu 190
them as simple 2D polylines retaining their elevation values.
Erase Blank Text Entities
This function removes any text boxes dened in the drawing that are not being used.
Erase Hatch Entities
Carlson offers many hatch display options, however hatch entities have no 3D value. This function removes all hatch
entities in the original drawing to help reduce the size and clutter of the drawing le.
Remove Arcs From Polylines - Offset Cutoff
This function replaces arcs in polylines with a series of short chord segments. The purpose is to prepare the polylines
for modeling since arcs need to be converted into segments to be part of the triangulation model. The density of chord
segments is controlled by the offset cutoff. This cutoff represents how much the polyline can move horizontally.
A smaller cutoff will result in more chord segments. The option for 3D Only controls whether only polylines at
zero elevation or both zero and elevated polylines get processed. Sometimes you may want to leave the arcs in zero
elevation polylines when these polylines represent road alignments and are not part of the surface model.
Reduce Polyline Vertices - Offset Cutoff
This function utilizes a pre determined offset amount and removes unnecessary polyline vertices that fall within the
offset amount.
Set Negative Polyline Thickness to Zero
This function sets the thickness property of polylines to zero for polylines with negative thickness.
Set Elevations Outside Range to Zero and Elevation Range
This function comes with a ''Scan DWG'' option that audits the elevation range in the drawing le. Once the min-
imum and maximum elevation range has been set, manually or by a scan, all objects that fall outside the set range
are moved to elevation zero. All objects at zero elevation do not contribute to the 3D model.
Entities To Process...
This allows you to run the command for the entire drawing or for a selected set.
Default
This allows you to return to the Carlson Drawing Cleanup default settings.
Final Report
This example report displays the results of drawing cleanup. Like all reports in Carlson, this report can be saved to
a text le, sent directly to your printer, or pasted onto the screen ad text entities.
Chapter 4. File Menu 191
Pulldown Menu Location: File
Keyboard Command: dwg cleanup
Prerequisite: None
Audit
This command scans your current drawing and looks for any corruption and has the option to x any errors.
Prerequisite: none
Keyboard Command: audit
Recover
This command opens a drawing le and scans it for errors. Use this command if Carlson TakeOff crashes while
using the regular Open command.
Prerequisite: none
Keyboard Command: recover
Remove Reactors
This command removes the reactor links from the selected points, text, polylines and lines. This disables the links
for points to the coordinate (.CRD) le, annotation with linework and linework with points. Note that is General
Settings there is a section called Object Linking. This is the specic section that contains the options for creating
these reactors to the drawing entities. Reactors can be turned off for entities created later by clicking off the four
link options in General Settings. To get to this dialog go to Settings > Congure > General Settings.
Chapter 4. File Menu 192
Prompts
Select entities to remove reactors from:
Select objects: pick the entities
Pulldown Menu Location: File > Drawing Utilities
Keyboard Command: delreact
Prerequisite: Entities with reactors
Remove Groups
This command is used to ''ungroup'' selected entities that, prior to using this command, were part of a group. For our
purposes, we might more specically be referring to Carlson's Point Entity Grouping feature. A group is a named
selection set of objects. This routine removes selected entities from groups. It is especially useful when dealing with
our Carlson points.
More on Point Entity Grouping: As mentioned in the Points chapter, remember that for each point, the point attribute
block, node, and symbol can be bound together. This means that if you choose to use the Move command (or other
CAD tools) the entire collection moves together. This is done using the grouping functionality in AutoCAD or
IntelliCAD. To disable this system altogether, go to Congure, choose General Settings, and turn off the toggle for
Group Point Entities. If you need to temporarily disable grouping in a drawing, you can use the AutoCAD toggle
for grouping, which is Ctrl-A. Holding down the Ctrl key, and pressing the letter A on the keyboard, activates this
two-way toggle, with the current status echoed to the command prompt area.
Prompts
Select entities to remove from groups.
Select objects: select entities
Pulldown Menu Location: File > Drawing Utilities
Keyboard Command: rmgroup
Prerequisite: Entities in group(s)
Translate Layers
This command renames layers using a lookup table with pairs of original and renamed layer names. This command
can be used to convert the layers for a drawing from another source to match your layer standards. The layer
names are entered in a spreadsheet. The Add, Insert, Delete and Sort buttons work on the spreadsheet rows. The
Report button makes a report for the layer assignments. The SaveAs and Load functions store and recall the layer
assignments to a .LTF le for sharing the settings or keeping different sets of layer assignments.
Chapter 4. File Menu 193
Pulldown Menu Location: File > Drawing Utilities
Keyboard Command: translayers
Prerequisite: None
Remove XData
This command removes the xdata (Extended Entity Data) from the selected entities. Many Carlson routines add
xdata to entities in order to add extra program specic information to them. Carlson programs use the xdata to
make entities more intelligent. For example, when you draw a centerline (.cl) as a polyline, xdata is attached to
the polyline that stores the reference of the .cl le name. Then if you double-click the polyline, then the program
can read the xdata to know the polyline is a centerline and launch the centerline editor. By removing the xdata, the
entities revert to regular CAD entities which is useful if you want to detach these entities from the program links.
Prompts
Select entities to remove extended entity data from.
Select objects: pick the entities
Pulldown Menu Location: File > Drawing Utilities
Keyboard Command: xxdata
Prerequisite: Entities with xdata
Purge
Displays a tree view summary of all named objects that can and can't be purged in the current drawing. The View
Items You Can Purge and View Items You Cannot Purge options toggle the dialog box display, showing different
options and tree view summaries.
Chapter 4. File Menu 194
Items Not Used in Drawing: Displays a tree view of all named object categories (blocks, layers, and so on) in the
current drawing. A plus sign appears next to the object category names that you can purge. Clicking the plus sign
or double-clicking an object category expands the tree view, displaying all unused named objects that exist for the
category. To purge all unused named objects, select All Items in the tree view, and choose Purge All. To purge a
specic named object category, select the category in the tree view, and choose Purge.
Conrm Each Item to Be Purged: Displays the Verify Purge dialog box when you purge an item.
Purge Nested Items: Removes all unused named objects from the drawing even if they are contained within or
referenced by other unused named objects. The Verify Purge dialog box is displayed, and you can cancel or conrm
the items to be purged.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: purge
Chapter 4. File Menu 195
Edit Menu 5
In addition to powerful CAD engine editing commands, the Carlson Edit menu has the additional commands which
are explained in this section. Commands that are pure AutoCAD or IntelliCAD are not detailed here. They can be
found in the CAD manual.
196
Undo
This command allows you to reverse the effect of previously issued commands.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: U
Redo
This command allows you to reverse the effects of the previous UNDO command.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: REDO
Erase Select
This command allows you to remove objects from a drawing.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ERASE, E
Erase by Layer
This command will ERASE all the entities on the specied layers but will not delete these layers from the drawing.
The command prompts for the layer name to erase and then erases all entities on that layer. In addition to typing in
the layer name, you can also specify a layer to delete by picking an entity on that layer. To select layers by picking,
rst click the Select Layers from Screen button and then select the entities on the layers to be deleted. The Select
Layers by Name button allows you to choose a layer name from a list of layers in the drawing. You can also
specify which types of entities to erase. For instance, if you have both linework and points on the same layer and
you want to erase only the linework, you can click off All and check Line and Polyline. The Save and Load buttons
save and recall the layer names.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 197
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Erase
Keyboard Command: ldel
Prerequisite: Something to erase
Erase by Closed Polyline
This tool is used to clean up drawing geometry at the extents of a polyline boundary. It provides options to erase
adjacent geometry as well as trim geometry crossing the fence of the polyline.
First, select the boundary polyline. Only one can be selected. Designate the desired options in the following dialog.
The top section of the dialog allows you to toggle which object types should be affected by the operation. Note that
some of the objects, such as text and inserts, cannot be trimmed.
In the middle of the dialog is a toggle that determines whether to prompt for objects to process. If you want to isolate
the drawings contents to that of the selected polyline, turn this toggle on. Note that all geometry in the drawing is
effected, even geometry that is outside of the current viewport. Many users will prefer to turn this toggle off, so that
they can be prompted to manipulate the geometry.
The bottom row allows you to choose whether to erase all the entities on the inside or outside of the polyline.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Erase
Keyboard Command: erasepline
Prerequisite: Entities and a closed polyline
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 198
Erase Outside
This command erases all the entities outside of a user specied window. This can be useful if you somehow place
entities way outside your drawing limits and want to easily erase them.
Prompts
Pick 1st corner of window to erase outside of: Pick point location
Pick 2nd corner: Pick second point location
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Erase
Keyboard Command: eraseout
Prerequisite: Entities to erase
Temporary Erase
This command erases the selected entities while keeping track of their data to allow restoring them. To unerase
the entities, simply run the command again. The program keeps track of the erased data only during the current
drawing session. If you exit the drawing, the entities cannot be restored when the drawing is opened again.
Prompts
Select entities for temporary erase.
Select objects: pick entities to erase
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Erase
Keyboard Command: terase
Prerequisite: Entities to erase
Move
This command allows you to displace objects a specied distance in a specied direction.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: MOVE, M
Standard Copy
This command copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a
document or drawing as an OLE object.
You can also use CTRL+C to run this command. If the cursor is in the drawing area, Carlson TakeOff copies the
selected objects to the Clipboard. If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window, the program copies the
selected text to the Clipboard.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: COPY
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 199
Copy To Layer
This command is used to copy a selected entity or entities and put the copy in a specied layer. Once copied to the
chosen layer the entity or entities will take on the characteristics of that layer (color, linetype, etc.).
Prompts
Select entities to copy.
Select objects: select entities
Select Layer dialog select a layer from list and click OK
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Copy
Keyboard Command: copy2layer
Prerequisite: Entities to be copied
Copy Polyline Section
This command is used to copy a portion of a polyline, at specied points, and put the copied portion onto another
layer. The portion of existing polyline that is being copied still remains as part of the original entity (with no break)
, while the new portion, with its chosen layer designation, is a new polyline.
Prompts
Select polyline to copy: Pick a polyline
Select rst break point along polyline: Pick location on the polyline
Select second break point along polyline: Pick the second location on the same polyline
Layer name <CTR>: wall
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Copy
Keyboard Command: copy pl
Prerequisite: Polyline to be copied
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 200
Standard Offset
This command creates a new object at a specied distance from an existing object or through a specied point.
Offset does not support 3D polylines. Use Offset 3D Polyline to offset these entities.
Prompts
1 Specify offset distance or [Through] <Through>: Press Enter
The Through option allows you to screen pick the location of the offset. You can also enter a value for the interval
of the offset.
2 Select object to offset or <exit>: select entity
3 Specify through point: pick point
Menu Location: Edit
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: OFFSET
Variable Offset
This is a command to offset a polyline, with different offset amounts for each polyline segment of the same polyline.
The offset distances can be variable, and you choose between a Line or a Point method at the command line.
Prompts
Vary offsets by line segments or at points [<Line>/Point]? press Enter
Select a polyline to offset (Enter for none): pick polyline
Select side to offset: pick a point on the side to offset to
As you go from segment to segment, you can enter in different offset values for each line segment.
Enter the segment horizontal offset <0.000>: 56
Enter the segment horizontal offset <56.000>: 33
Enter the segment horizontal offset <33.000>: 12
Select a polyline to offset (Enter for none): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Offset
Keyboard Command: VOFFSET
Prerequisite: A polyline to offset
Offset To Layer
This is a command to offset a polyline and put the offset polyline into a separate layer from the original polyline.
Prompts
Offset to layer <0>: ROW
Enter the offset amount: 20
Select object to offset: pick a polyline to offset
Specify point on side to offset: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Offset
Keyboard Command: offset layer
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 201
Prerequisite: Linework to offset
Offset to Area
This command offsets a polyline by a distance that results in creating the specied target area. The source polyline
should represent the frontage on the area. There is an option to connect the sides between the source and offset
polylines to make a closed polyline.
Before and after Offset to Area
Prompts
Pick line or polyline to offset: pick a polyline
Select side to offset: pick a point on the offset side
Keep existing polyline [Yes/<No>]? press Enter
Create closed polyline [<Yes>/No]? press Enter
Acres/<Enter target area (s.f.)>: 90000
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Offset
Keyboard Command: offset area
Prerequisite: polyline to offset
Multiple Offsets
This command applies the same offset multiple times in series from the original polyline.
Prompts
Specify offset distance <20.0000>: 25
Enter Number of Repetitions <1>: 3
Select object to offset or <exit>: pick a polyline to offset
Specify point on side to offset: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Offset
Keyboard Command: offset mult
Prerequisite: Linework to offset
Buffer Offset
This command offsets a polyline, and maintains a xed distance from the original polyline by placing an arc on
convex corners. The standard Offset command can actually have a distance greater than the offset at corners. In
the example shown, the distance between the corners of the original and offset polylines is 70.01, while the offset
distance is 50.0. Buffer Offset makes an offset polyline that doesn't exceed the offset distance. This is useful when
you want an offset that goes no further than the offset distance, such as wetland offsets. Later versions of AutoCAD
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 202
can achieve the same effect using the standard Offset command by changing the system variable OFFSETGAPTYPE
to 1.
Prompts
Enter the offset amount: 50
Select object to offset: pick the original polyline
Specify point on side to offset: pick a point on the side to offset to
Regular Offset Buffer Offset
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Offset
Keyboard Command: boffset
Prerequisite: A polyline to offset
Standard Explode
This command allows you to break a compound object into its component objects.
Results differ depending on the type of compound object you're exploding. The following is a list of objects that can
be exploded and the results for each.
All Explodable Objects: Produces object geometry that may look the same, but the color, linetype, and
lineweight of the object may change.
Block: Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the
block exposes the polyline or nested block object, which must then be exploded to expose its individual objects.
Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z scales
(nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into unexpected objects.
When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that cannot be exploded, they are collected into an anonymous
block (named with a ''
*
E'' prex) and referenced with the nonuniform scaling. If all the objects in such a block
cannot be exploded, the selected block reference will not be exploded. Body, 3D Solid, and Region entities in a
nonuniformly scaled block cannot be exploded.
Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the attribute values and redisplays the attribute denitions.
2D and Lightweight Polyline: Discards any associated width or tangent information.
Wide Polyline: Places the resulting lines and arcs along the center of the polyline. TakeOff discards any associ-
ated width or tangent information.
3D Polyline: Explodes into line segments. Any linetype assigned to the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting
line segment.
Text Explode to Polylines: Explodes polylines depending on the font used for various annotations, this can
make the resulting polylines more efcient in terms of vertex count.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 203
Leaders: Explodes into lines, splines, solids (arrow heads), block inserts (arrow heads, annotation blocks),
Mtext, or tolerance objects, depending on the leader.
Mtext: Explodes into text entities
Multiline: Explodes into lines and arcs.
3D Solid: Explodes planar surfaces into regions. Nonplanar surfaces explode into bodies.
Region: Explodes into lines, arcs, or splines.
Body: Explodes into a single-surface body (nonplanar surfaces), regions, or curves.
Polyface Mesh: Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object. Two-vertex meshes explode into a line. Three-
vertex meshes explode into 3D faces.
Circle Within a Nonuniformly Scaled Block: Explodes a circle within a nonuniformly scaled block into el-
lipses.
Arc Within a Nonuniformly Scaled Block: Explodes an arc within a nonuniformly scaled block into elliptical
arcs.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: EXPLODE, X
Block Explode
This command retains the values of attributes when a block is exploded. The standard Explode command changes
the attribute values back to the attribute type. For example, using Explode, a Carlson point block would become
PNTNO, PNTELEV, PNTDESC. Block Explode would keep the point attribute values, such as 10, 1000.0, EP. The
layer names of the exploded block attributes can be either the insert layer of the parent block or the original attribute
layers from the block denition.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit
Keyboard Command: explode2
Prerequisite: A block to be exploded
Trim
This command allows you to trim objects at a cutting edge dened by other objects.
Prompts
1 Select cutting edges ...
Select objects: pick entity
2 Select object to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]: select entity to be trimmed
Project: You can project the object to be trimmed in order to trim objects that do not intersect.
Edge: You can project the trimming edge in order to trim objects that do not intersect.
Undo: This option allows you to undo the above projections.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: TRIM, TR
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 204
Extend To Edge
This command allows you to extend an object to meet another object.
Prompts
1 Select boundary edges ...
Select objects: pick entity
2 Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: pick entity
You have the option of trimming or projecting objects and edges.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: EXTEND
Extend to Intersection
This command extends the end points of two lines and/or polylines, at the same time, to their intersection point.
Prompts
Select rst line or polyline to extend: pick a line or polyline
Select second line or polyline to extend: pick another line or polyline
Before Extend to Intersection
After Extend to Intersection
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Extend
Keyboard Command: extint
Prerequisite: Two lines or polylines
Extend Arc
This command extends an arc entity.
Prompts
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 205
Pick arc to extend: select an arc entity
Break Arc at Extension [Yes/<No>]? N Answering Yes will create a new arc starting at the end of the existing
arc.
Enter or pick the distance to extend: 5 This extends the arc 5 units
Enter or pick the distance to extend ('U' to Undo): press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Extend
Keyboard Command: extarc
Prerequisite: An arc
Extend by Distance
This command extends a line or polyline, or creates new lines or polylines off of an existing one. By specifying a
distance, a new segment of the line or polyline can be drawn from the current position. The current position and
direction along the line or polyline is indicated by an arrowhead. Extend by Distance starts by selecting an existing
line or polyline. Initially, the current position will be the closest vertex to where the line or polyline was selected.
Extending from the endpoint of a polyline will add a new point to that polyline, while extending from any other
point will create a new polyline.
There are two modes of operation: draw mode (D) and move mode (M). When in draw mode, extending will draw
line or polyline segments. In move mode, the current position arrowhead can be moved without drawing segments.
The orientation of the current position arrowhead can be changed with the Right, Left, and Angle commands.
The second prompt for this command offers numerous options in the form of key letters. These key letters are listed
below along with their full names and actions. The list of the Extend by Distance commands are:
# - Number: Distance to draw or extend
A# - Angle change: Rotates pointer by specied number of degrees
A - Align: Rotates pointer to align with segment
B - Bearing: Sets pointer direction by bearing in format: Qdd.mmss with Q- quadrant, d-degrees, m-minutes,
s-seconds (e.g. 130.1005 is NE 30 degrees, 10 minutes, and 5 seconds)
C - Close: Closes the polyline
D - Draw Mode: Actions draw or extend the line or polyline
E - Extend to Edge: Extends to intersection with a selected line or polyline
I - Input mode: Toggles distance input between decimal feet and feet-inches
L - Left rotate: Rotates counterclockwise 90 degrees
M - Move Mode: Actions only move the pointer
N - Next: Moves pointer forward to next point
O - Open: Opens the polyline
P - Previous: Moves pointer backward to previous point
R - Right rotate: Rotates clockwise 90 degrees
S - Switch: Reverses pointer direction
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 206
T# - Total distance: Sets current segment to specied distance
U - Undo: Undo the last Extend by Distance command
Z - Zoom mode: Toggles auto-zoom between on/off
? - Info: Displays lengths of current polyline
H - Help: The Help option also displays this Extend by Distance Commands list.
Press <Enter>: Ends the routine
The result of using the Info (?) feature
Prompts
Select line or polyline to extend: select line or polyline near the place to extend
Enter or pick distance to draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): 50 The line is extended by 50 units.
Use the Pick option to pick a distance.
Pick/Horizontal Distance to Extend ([Enter] for new line): R Rotate right 90 degrees.
Enter or pick distance to draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): 50 The line is extended by 50 units.
Use the Pick option to pick a distance.
Enter or pick distance to draw (A,B,C,E,I,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Z,?,Help): press Enter
Extend another (<Yes>/No)? No
Note: R50 and L10 can be used to go right 50, left 10, etc.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 207
The result of using the Help (H) option
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Extend
Keyboard Command: extender
Prerequisite: An existing line or polyline with at least one segment from which to start.
Break by Crossing Polyline
This tool is used to break drawing geometry at the edge of a polyline boundary. It provides options to change the
layers of the interior and exterior geometry after it is broken.
First, select the boundary polyline. Only one can be selected. Then select the polylines and lines to be clipped. You
will be prompted for options on specifying the layers for the newly broken geometry. Respond with a ''Y'' if you
want to specify a new layer, then enter the new layer name. If the layer name does not exist, it will be created.
Prompts
Select the clip edge polyline: pick a closed polyline
Select the polylines and lines to be clipped.
Select Objects: pick the entities to break
Specify layer names for Inside segments (Yes/<No>)? Yes
Enter a layer name for the Inside segments <0>: press Enter
Specify layer names for Outside segments (Yes/<No>)? Yes
Enter a layer name for the Outside segments <0>: Final
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 208
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Break
Keyboard Command: clipline
Prerequisite: A closed polyline
Break Polyline at Specied Distances
This command allows you to pick a polyline and break it at a specied distances along the polyline. Following the
prompts below, the beginning of the polyline in the illustration was broken into three 55-foot segments.
Prompts
Select polyline to break: select polyline
Total Distance: 779.429 This is the length of the polyline reported.
Distance Along Polyline For Break: 55.0
Distance Along Polyline For Break (Enter to end): 110
Distance Along Polyline For Break (Enter to end): 165
Distance Along Polyline For Break (Enter to end): press Enter
3 polyline breaks created.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Break
Keyboard Command: breakpl
Prerequisite: A polyline
Break at Intersection
This command will break a line, arc or polyline at the intersection of another line, arc or polyline. In many cases
this command is used in conjunction with the Area by Lines & Arcs command. In order to get the correct area of a
gure, it is often necessary to break it from adjoining lines.
Prompts
Select Line, Arc, or Polyline to Break
Select object: select object to break
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 209
[int on] Pick Intersection to break at: pick intersection point
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Break
Keyboard Command: breakat
Break, Select Object, 2nd Point
>
This command allows you to break an object by selecting theobject, then the second break point. The rst break
point is the point whereyou select the object.
Prompts
1 Select object: selectentity to break
2 Specify second break point or[First point]: select second break point
Break, Select Object, Two Points
This command allows you to break an object by selecting theobject, then two points. First select the object, then the
program will promptyou to select two points that dene where the object will be broken.
Prompts
1 Select object: selectentity to break
2 Specify second break point or[First point]: First
3 Specify rst break point: pick rst point
4 Specify second break point: pick second point
Break, At Selected Point
This command allows you to break an object by selecting the object. Only one pick is necessary since TakeOff both
selects the object and treats the selection point as the break point.
Prompts
1 Select object: select entity to break
Select an object to break
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: BREAK
Change Properties
This command allows you to change certain properties of existing objects.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 210
1 In the Change Properties dialog box, you must choose the properties to modify.
Color: This option allows you to change the color of the object.
Layer: This option allows you to change the layer of the object.
Linetype: This option allows you to change the linetype of the object.
Linetype Scale: This option species the linetype scale factor for the new linetype.
Thickness: This option species the distance to extrude the object above or below its elevation.
Note: The Properties command allows you to modify entity specic properties such as the radius of a circle or the
height of a text entity.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: DDCHPROP
Change Elevations
This command will change the elevation of selected entities. It can move the entity to a specied elevation from its
current elevation (absolute) or do a differential change by adding or subtracting a value from its current elevation. If
Carlson points are selected, their attribute text and z axis coordinate are changed.
Prompts
Ignore zero elevations (<Yes>/No)? press Enter If you answer No, then entities with elevation 0 will be changed.
[A]bsolute or [D]ifferential Change <A>: A
Elevation to change to: 125 By using the Absolute option all entities selected are changed to the elevation 125.
Select Entities for elevation change.
Select objects: C
First corner: pick a point
Other corner: pick a point
Select objects: press Enter
If Carlson points are selected, the command warns:
This command DOES NOT change the elevations in the Coordinate le!
Use Coordinate File Utilities menu option F to update the le.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Change
Keyboard Command: chgelev
Prerequisite: Something to change
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 211
Change Attribute Style
This command will globally change the text style of attributes on the drawing. This can be very useful if all the label
styles (such as the point symbol attribute labels) on a drawing must be changed to accommodate a different plotting
specication. The default STYLE used for the point symbol attributes is PTXT.
Under Existing Style, select the style that is currently applied to the attributes you want to change. If you are unsure
of the existing text style, select the Pick Attr button, then pick an existing attribute on the screen. When the dialog
returns, the text style applied to that attribute will be selected in the list.
Select the New Style that you want to apply to the attributes.
Enter a New Height for the attributes. An entry of zero (0) will not modify the existing height.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Change
Keyboard Command: chgattr
Prerequisite: You may want to use the LIST command to check the current Text size.
Change Style
This command will globally change the style and height of text on the drawing. This can be very useful if all the
text sizes on a drawing must be changed to accommodate a different plotting scale.
Under Existing Style, select the style that is currently applied to the text you want to change. If you are unsure of
the existing text style, select the Pick TEXT button, then pick an existing text entity on the screen. When the dialog
returns, the text style applied to that text entity will be selected in the list.
Select the New Style that you want to apply to the text.
Enter a New Height for the text. An entry of zero (0) will not modify the existing height.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 212
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Change
Keyboard Command: chgstyl
Prerequisite: Text entities
Change Colors
This command is designed to change the original color of existing entities in the drawing to a different color. This
is done using the Change Colors dialog. You must match up the original colors of original entities to the preferred
colors that they will change to. These ''destination colors'' are directly to the right of the original colors in the dialog
(on the same row). You then click OK and select the specic entities on-screen that you want changed. This routine
changes all entities in the drawing that you have chosen and that have an original color that has been changed. Do
your dialog box color selections and matching up rst, followed by OK. Then select the entities.
Prompts
Change Colors dialog Create your color change schemes and click OK.
Select entities to change colors.
Select objects: select entities
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 213
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Change
Keyboard Command: chgcolor
Prerequisite: Entities whose colors are to be changed
Change Block/Inserts Rotate
This is a command to set the angle of blocks by various methods. This command optionally can change the rotation
of a block by twist screen angle, azimuth, entity segment or by follow polyline. It will work with Carlson point
symbol blocks, or any block. For example, you may receive a drawing from another rm, insert it in, and then want
to change the rotation.
Prompts
Twist by [<Twist screen>/Azimuth/Entity segment/Follow polyline]? press Enter
Enter angle relative to current twist screen <0.0>: 30
Select Symbols to Rotate. pick symbol
Select objects: 1 found
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Change > Block/Inserts
Keyboard Command: TWISTSYM
Prerequisite: None
Change Block/Inserts Substitute
This command is used to replace selected block(s) with a different block. The command optionally can change the
size and rotation angle. This command will work with Carlson point symbol blocks, or any block. For example, you
may receive a drawing from another rm and want to replace certain inserts with inserts of your own specication.
In the dialog shown, we are replacing the block named NASTAR with a block named COHNORTH, which will be
inserted at 50 scale and zero rotation.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 214
Existing Block: Select the block name to be replaced. If the block name is unknown, choose the Select from Screen
button, then select the block from the current drawing.
Replace With: Select the block that will replace the existing block. You may choose from the list of dened blocks,
select an existing block from the current drawing, choose a point symbol from the standard Carlson point library, or
select a drawing le.
Retain Size and Rotation: When checked, the new block will retain the size and rotation values from the old block.
New Size: Available if Retain Size and Rotation is not checked. Enter the size for the new block.
New Rotation Angle: Available if Retain Size and Rotation is not checked. Enter the rotation angle for the new
block.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Change > Block/Inserts
Keyboard Command: chgblk
Prerequisite: None
Change Block/Inserts Resize
This command resizes blocks inserts while maintaining their insertion position. When prompted to select objects,
choose the inserts to resize. Note that this routine does not rescale attributes that may be associated with the selected
inserts.
Prompts
Scaling Multiplier <0.5>: Enter the size scale factor.
Select symbols and blocks to scale.
Select objects: select entities
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Change > Block/Inserts
Keyboard Command: sizeblk
Prerequisite: block/inserts in drawing
Pivot Point Rotate by Bearing
This command allows you to rotate the selected entities from the drawing. The rotation angle is dened by the
difference between a reference line and an entered bearing or azimuth. The reference line is dened by two points
that can be picked on the screen or entered by point number.
Prompts
Select entities to rotate.
Select objects: select the entities
Base pivot point ?
Pick point or point number: 2 The program then reads the coordinate value for pt#2 from the current CRD le.
Reference Bearing point ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Reference Bearing N 44d31'1'' E The program then displays the reference bearing dened by the two points
selected.
Azimuth/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 245.3030 Enter an A to input an Azimuth or enter the bearing. The above
response is a bearing of South 45 degrees, 30 minutes, and 30 seconds East. The program then rotates the database
to the new bearing.
If Carlson Points are selected the program warns:
This command DOES NOT change the coordinates in the CooRDinate le!
Use CooRDinate File Utilities menu, Update CRD from Drawing.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 215
This warning applies if the points entities are not linked to the CRD le. This link option is set in the Congure
command.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Rotate
Keyboard Command: brot
Prerequisite: None
Rotate by Pick
This command allows you to move objects about a base point using a point as a rotation reference.
Prompts
1 Select objects: pick entities
2 Specify base point: pick point on screen as reference
3 Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: rotate to desired location
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ROTATE
Entity Insertion Point Rotate
This command allows you to rotate the selected entities where the rotation pivot point for each entity is the insertion
point of the entity. The rotation angle will follow one of the following alignments: Twist screen, Azimuth, Entity
Segment, Follow or Pick. This routine processes TEXT, MTEXT and INSERT entities only.
Prompts
Rotate by [<Twist screen>/Azimuth/Entity segment/Follow/Pick]? F
Select polyline to follow: pick a polyline
Select Entities to Rotate.
Select objects: pick entities to rotate
Flip text for twist screen [Yes/<No>]? Y
Rotating ....
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Rotate
Keyboard Command: ss twist
Prerequisite: Entities to rotate
2D Scale
This command will scale selected entities using a specied scale factor and base point. This 2D Scale method differs
from the 3D Scale method in that it only scales the entities in the x,y coordinates and does not change the elevations
of the entities. A case for using 2D Scale is when the x,y coordinates are in architectural units of inches and the
elevation is in feet and you want to convert the x,y coordinates to feet. When the entities are at zero elevation, then
2D Scale makes no difference and it is better to use 3D Scale because it is faster.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 216
In the dialog shown here, you have the ability to determine what is scaled: the entire drawing or a selection set. If
you choose Select Objects, you will be prompted to select the entities to scale after clicking the OK button. The
Base Point acts as the center of the scaling operation and remains stationary. The base point you specify identies
the point that remains in the same location as the selected objects change size.
There are two methods for scaling entities: by Units Conversion or by a Customized Scale Factor. The dialog above
shows one application of this routine, converting a drawing from architectural (Inches) to decimal units (US Feet)
when the architectural units have the drawing x,y coordinates in inches and the elevations in feet. In this case, 2D
Scale can be used to apply a 1/12 scale factor (0.08333333) to convert the inches to feet for the x,y coordinates and
leave the elevations unchanged.
If the scale you want to apply is not a standard conversion, a manual scale can be entered by checking on the Use
Customized Scale Factor checkbox. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and
1 shrinks the object.
To scale a drawing by a known distance on the plan (which is often the case when working with PDF imports) select
the Screen Pick button. This will prompt you to pick the beginning and ending points along a known distance (like
the bar scale above). The program will then report the current distance of the segment (in this example 40.073) and
allow you to enter in the desired distance (which is 40 in this case).
The program will then calculate the proper Scale Factor to apply to the selection set.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 217
Select entities to scale.
FILter/<Select entities>: Select the entities whose size should change and press Enter to complete the selection
process.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Edit Scale
Keyboard Command: scscale
Prerequisite: None
Scale
This command allows you to enlarge or reduce selected objects equally in the X, Y, and Z directions.
Prompts
1 Select objects: pick entities
2 Specify base point: pick point on screen as reference
3 Specify scale factor or [Reference]: scale to desired size
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: SC
Edit Text
This command allows you to edit text and attribute labels.
1 Select Text to Edit: select the text
You can modify text in provided text eld.
Prerequisite: Text
Keyboard Command: EDITXT
Text Enlarge/Reduce
This command will scale text entities up or down in size. The routine prompts for a scale multiplier and a selection
set of text objects. If you want to enlarge the text enter a value greater than one. If you want to reduce text enter a
decimal fraction such as .5. This would reduce the text size by 50%. This command is very useful if you have set up
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 218
your drawing for one plotting scale and decide to change to a new plotting scale. The Change Text Size command
can alternatively be used to set the text size to a specic value.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Prerequisite: Text entities to be changed
Keyboard Command: txtenl
Rotate Text
This command sets the rotation of the selected text to the current twist screen, an entered azimuth, or to align with
a line or polyline. The text keeps the same insertion point and justication. The Twist Screen option sets the text
rotation to align horizontal with the current twist screen. With the Azimuth option you can enter the angle or pick
two points to dene the text rotation. The Entity segment aligns the text with a selected line or polyline segment.
The Follow option aligns the text with the closest polyline segment.
Prompts
Rotate by (<Twist Screen>/Azimuth/Entity segment/Follow/Pick)? press Enter
Enter angle relative to current twist screen <0.0>: 23
Select Text to rotate.
Select objects: select the text
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: twisttxt
Prerequisite: Text
Move Text with Leader
This command moves an existing text entity and creates a leader from a picked point to the new text location. The
routine keeps track of the original text location and has an option to restore the text to the original without the
leader. To use the Restore function, type R at the Command prompt. Also, to access the options for this command,
type O for Options at the Command prompt.
Prompts
Select Label to Move (O for Options,R for Restore): pick any text entity
Pick start point for leader: pick the point where to draw the leader arrowhead
Pick end point for move: pick the end of the leader where to move the text
Select Label to Move (O for Options,R for Restore): O
When Options is chosen the ''Move Text With Leader Options'' dialog allows the user to customizer the leader and
label drawing settings:
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 219
Minimum Leader Length Scaler: If the distance of the move is less than this value, a leader will not be drawn.
Draw Horizontal Leader Tick: When checked, a horizontal leader tick will be drawn from the end of the leader
towards the annotation.
Leader Offset Scaler: This is used to set the distance from the end of the leader and the annotation.
Use Separate Leader Layer: This allows the user to place the leader on a separate layer from the annotation.
Keep Label Alignment: This option keeps the original text angle. Otherwise the leadered text is orientated
horizontally to the current twist screen.
NOTE: The leader scaler units (Minimum Leader Length Scaler and Leader Offset Scaler) are multiplied by the
current horizontal scale value which is set under Drawings Setup.
Select Label to Move (O for Options,R for Restore): R
Select Label to Restore: pick a text that had been moved with the ''Move with Leader'' command previously.
The selected label will be restored to its previous state.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: movetext
Prerequisite: Text entity to move.
Change Text Font
This command can change multiple text entities to a user specied style. The routine prompts for a selection set of
TEXT and/or MTEXT objects. Once the selection is made, the Select Style dialog appears. You can then select a text
Style Name, such as MONO or ROMANS, that you would like to change to. Click OK. To the right on Style Name,
you can enter a style name that does not exist. If you do, it will be created for you using the font with the same name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: chgtxtstyle
Prerequisite: Text entities to be changed
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 220
Change Text Size
This command will change the size of the selected text objects to the user specied size. The Text Enlarge/Reduce
command also changes text size. The difference is that this routine sets the text to an absolute size whereas Text
Enlarge/Reduce scales, or relatively changes, the text size.
Prompts
Select the text to size.
Select objects: select the text
Enter new text size: enter value
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: chgtxtsize
Prerequisite: Text entities to be changed
Change Text Width
This command changes the width of the selected text entities, after a new width factor is entered. The insertion
point of each text entity is maintained as the routine lengthens or shortens the text.
Effect of different width factors on the same text line
Prompts
Select the text to change.
Select objects: select text entities
Enter new width factor <1.0>: enter new width factor
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: chgtxtwidth
Prerequisite: Text entities to be changed
Change Text Oblique Angle
This command allows you to change the text oblique angle on existing text in the drawing. The oblique angle for a
specic text style is dened during the creation of the style. The default value for the oblique angle for text styles
is 0 until dened to another value by the user. When changing the oblique angle, a minus (-) sign in front of the
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 221
angle indicates a backward slant and a positive value results in a forward slant. Remember that the reference base
point for the oblique change is always 0 degree. This means that if an existing text string has an oblique angle of
20, changing the oblique angle to 25 will not add 25 degrees to the existing 20 degree oblique resulting in a text
oblique angle of 45 degrees, but rather a 25 degree oblique will be established by referencing 0 oblique as the base,
and then slanting the text to 25 degrees. This works the same for slanting text backward as well as forward. Below
is an example showing original text created with the default oblique angle of zero, then changed to a backward slant
of 20 and a forward slant of 25 degrees.
Prompts
Select the text to change.
Select objects: Select text to change oblique angle on. Note that one or more text strings can be selected. When all
desired text has been selected, press Enter.
Enter new oblique angle <0.0>: Enter the desired oblique angle.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Prerequisite: Text entities to be changed
Keyboard Command: chgtxtoblique
Flip Text
This command will change the alignment of text entities by 180 degrees.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: iptext
Prerequisite: Text entities to be changed
Split Text into Two Lines
This tool allows you to break a single line of TEXT into two separate lines. First, select the text string you would
like to break. The Text Break dialog then appears. Initially, the slider is all the way to the right. Begin dragging it
toward the left until it reaches the point where the split is at the desired position. Then choose OK to complete the
break operation.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 222
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: txtbrk
Prerequisite: Text entity to break
Text Explode To Polylines
This command converts the selected text into polylines. This function is generally used when preparing a plan view
le for machine control, before using the Write Polyline File command.
Prompts
Select text to be EXPLODED.
Select objects: select the text
Substitute With Simple Font [<Yes>/No]? Y
1 text object(s) have been exploded to lines.
The line objects have been placed on layer 0.
Reading the selection set ...
Joining ...
Converting ...
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: textexp
Prerequisite: Text
Add Prex/Sufx To Text
This command simply adds a prex and/or sufx to the selected text entities. The strings to add are specied in a
dialog. Then you select the text entities to update.
Prompts
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 223
Add Prex/Sufx To Text dialog
Select text to process.
Select objects: pick the text entities
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Prerequisite: Text entities to be changed
Keyboard Command: txtwrap
Remove Spaces From Text
This command removes leading and/or trailing spaces from the selected text entities.
Prompts
Trim all spaces from text on [Right/Left/<Both>]: press Enter
Select text to process.
Select objects: pick the text entities to process
Trimmed spaces from 1 text entities.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: txtrmspace
Prerequisite: Text entities
Line Up Text
This command lines up the selected text entities along either a horizontal or vertical line position.
Before and after Line Up Text
Prompts
Line up text on [Horizontal/<Vertical>]: press Enter for Vertical
Pick vertical position: pick a point
Select text to process.
Select objects: select the text to process
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: txtlineup
Prerequisite: Text
Join Text Entities
This command combines two text entities by appending the second text to the rst. The Words join method puts a
space between each text. The Letter join method appends without a space.
Prompts
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 224
Select rst text line: pick a text entity
Select text to add to rst text line: pick a text entity
Join type as [Words/<Letters>]: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: txtjoin
Prerequisite: Text entities
Replace Text
This command will replace one text string with another. For example, if the text LEGEL is on a drawing, you could
use this command to replace it with LEGAL. In AutoCAD 2000 and later, the command Find and Replace Text
includes more options, including replacing partial strings and searching attributes and MTEXT.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Text
Keyboard Command: chgtext
Prerequisite: Text entities to be changed
2D Align
This command will align (translate, rotate and scale) the selected objects using two pairs of source and destination
control points. The difference between the rst source point and rst destination point determines the translation
amount. The difference between the angle and distance from the rst and second source points compared to the
angle and distance from the rst and second destination points determines the rotation and scale. The scale part
of the alignment is optional. This 2D Align function is the same as the standard Align function except that this
2D Align function does not use elevations so that the alignment is always in 2D. The control points can be screen
picked or entered by point numbers.
Before and after 2D Align
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 225
Prompts
Select entities to align.
Select objects: pick entities to process
First Source Point?
Pick point or point number: pick point 84
First Destination Point?
Pick point or point number: pick point 18
Second Source Point?
Pick point or point number: pick point 85
Second Destination Point?
Pick point or point number: pick point 19
Scale factor: 1.00434258
Scale objects based on alignment points [Yes/<No>]? Y
This command DOES NOT change the coordinates in the CooRDinate le!
Use Coordinate File Utilities menu, Update CRD File from Drawing.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Align
Keyboard Command: scalign
Prerequisite: None
Standard Align
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
You use ALIGN to move, rotate, or scale objects into alignment with other objects. Add source points to the objects
you want to align, and add destination points to the objects to which you want the source objects to align. You can
add up to three pairs of source and destination points to align an object.
The rst set of source and destination points denes the base point for the alignment. The second set of points
denes the angle of rotation.
When you select three point pairs, you can move and rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other objects.
If you use two source and destination points to perform a 3D alignment on nonperpendicular working planes, you
get unpredictable results.
After you enter the points, Takeoff prompts you to scale the object. The program uses the distance between the rst
and second destination points as the reference length to which the object is scaled. Scaling is available only when
you are aligning objects using two point pairs.
Prompts
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 226
1 Specify rst source point: pick point
2 Specify rst desitination point: pick point
3 Specify second source point: pick point
4 Specify second desitination point: pick point
5 Specify third source point or <continue>: Press Enter
6 Scale objects based on alignment points? [Yes/No] <N>: Press Enter
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ALIGN
Fillet
This command allows you to round and llet the edges of objects. You can enter a radius for rounding (default
radius is 0). You can also trim an object that extends beyond the intersection.
FILLET rounds or llets the edges of two arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, splines, or xlines with
an arc of a specied radius. FILLET trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the llet arc. If the selected lines
do not intersect, Carlson Survey extends or trims them so that they do. FILLET also rounds or llets the edges of
3D solids.
If both objects you want to llet are on the same layer, the program creates the llet line on that layer. Otherwise,
the program creates the llet line on the current layer. The same is true for the llet color, lineweight, and linetype.
You can llet line segments of a polyline that are adjacent, nonadjacent, intersecting, or separated by one segment.
If they are nonadjacent, the polyline segments are extended to accommodate the llet. If they are intersecting, the
polyline segments are trimmed to accommodate the llet. To create a llet, the polyline segments must converge
within the drawing limits when limits checking is on.
The result is a single polyline that includes the llet as an arc segment. All the properties of this new polyline, such
as its layer, color, and linetype, are inherited from the rst polyline selected.
Filleting an associative hatch whose boundary is dened by lines removes hatch associativity. Carlson Survey
maintains associativity when the boundary is a polyline.
Prompts
1 Select rst object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim]: select entity
2 Select second object: select entity
Menu Location: Edit
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: FILLET
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 227
Mirror
This command allows you to create a mirror image copy of objects. The two specied points become the endpoints
of a line about which the selected objects are reected. In 3D, this line orients a mirroring plane perpendicular to
the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line.
Prompts
1 Select Objects: select objects to be mirrored
2 Specify rst point of mirror line: pick point
3 Specify second point of mirror line: pick point
4 Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <No>: Press Enter
Menu Location: Edit
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: MIRROR
Properties Manager
Carlson Survey displays the Properties window. The Properties window is the main method for viewing and modi-
fying properties of AutoCAD objects.
There are some general properties common to all objects. These include Color, Layer, Linetype, Linetype Scale,
Plot Style, Plot Style Table, Lineweight, and Thickness. All other object properties are specic to the type of entity.
In the example below, a line has been selected. In addition to the properties mentioned above, you may modify the
X, Y, and Z coordinate for each endpoint. Notice that you may not directly modify the delta, length or angle. These
are read-only properties. Obviously, modifying either end point will cause these values to change.
The Properties window can be docked in the drawing area. Right-click the Properties window and choose Allow
Docking or Hide to undock or hide it.
You can enter commands and work in Carlson Survey while the Properties window is open.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 228
When you select an object in the drawing area, the Properties window displays the properties of that object. If you
select multiple objects, the Properties window displays all the properties they have in common.
Object properties are displayed either alphabetically or by category, depending on the tab you choose. To modify
properties using the Properties window select the object whose properties you want to change and use one of the
following methods:
Enter a new value
Select a value from a list
Change the property value in a dialog box
Use the Pick Point button to change a coordinate value
The Select Objects button in the Properties window provides access to the full complement of selection methods,
such as Fence and Crossing Polygon, from the Command prompt. You choose Select Objects, select the desired
objects using any selection method, and press ENTER. The properties common to the selected objects are displayed
in the Properties window. You can then modify the properties of the selected objects in the Properties window or
you can make other changes to the selected objects by entering an editing command.
In the next example, 3 circles have been selected. Each circle has a different radius, color and linetype. Notice that
these three elds do not show a default value. Remember, when multiple objects are selected, only their common
properties are shown.
This last illustration shows how the properties window can be docked inside the main application window
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 229
Menu Location: None
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: Properties
Entities to Polylines
This command converts selected lines, arcs, circles, 3DFaces, ellipses, splines, multilines, regions and solids into
individual polylines. Use Join Nearest to convert adjoining lines and arcs into continuous polylines.
Prompts
Select lines, arcs, circles, 3DFaces, ellipses, splines, multilines, regions
and solids to convert.
Select objects: select entities
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: topline
Prerequisite: lines, arcs or other entities to convert
Reverse Polyline
This command reverses the order of the line and/or arc segments of a POLYLINE. This can be useful in conjunction
with the commands Station Polyline, MXS by Polyline, Prole from Surface Model or CL File from Polyline, since
the polyline must be plotted in the direction of increasing stations. If it is more convenient to draft a polyline in
one direction do so and then use the Reverse Polyline command to change its order. Temporary arrows along the
polyline are drawn to graphically show the new polyline direction.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 230
Prompts
Select the Polyline to Reverse: pick a point on polyline
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: revpline
Prerequisite: A polyline
Reduce Polyline Vertices
This command removes points from a polyline, without signicantly changing the polyline. The offset cutoff is the
maximum amount that the polyline can move horizontally and vertically when removing a point. For example, in a
polyline with three points in a straight line, the middle point can be removed without changing the polyline. This
command is explained further in the Triangulate & Contour command.
Prompts
Enter the offset cutoff <0.1>: .5
Select polylines to reduce.
Select objects: pick polylines
Processed polylines: 1
Total number of vertices: 10
Number of vertices removed: 1
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: reduce
Prerequisite: A polyline
Densify Polyline Vertices
This command adds vertices to the selected polylines at the specied interval. These points are interpolated between
existing points in the polyline. This command is the opposite of Reduce Polyline Vertices.
Prompts
Select polylines to densify.
Select objects: select polylines
Point interval <10.0>: press Enter
Testing Entity> 1
Added 17 points to 1 polyline.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: densepl
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 231
Prerequisite: A polyline
Smooth Polyline
This command smooths the selected polylines using a modied Bezier method that makes the smooth polyline pass
through all the original points and only smooths between the original points. The looping factor controls smoothing
amount. A higher factor gives more looping. This command is explained further in the Surface menu section.
Prompts
Enter the looping factor (1-10) <5>: 7
Enter the offset cutoff <0.05>: press Enter This is the same reducing lter described above.
Select polylines to smooth.
Select objects: pick polylines
Smoothed 1 PolyLines
Total original vertices: 9 Total nal vertices: 50
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: smoothpl
Prerequisite: A polyline
Draw Polyline Blips
This command will draw temporary markers, ''blips'', at each polyline vertex. This allows you to identify the actual
location of each vertex. The Blips are temporary. Any change to the viewport (pan, zoom, regen) will make the
blips disappear. In later versions of AutoCAD, you can also click on the polyline to activate the grips which will
remain visible during and after viewport changes.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 232
Prompts
Select polylines to draw blips.
Select objects: select polyline(s)
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: plblip
Prerequisite: A polyline
Add Intersection Points
This command adds points into lines or polylines where there are intersections. This can be useful for other com-
mands such as Auto-Annotate. For example in the drawing shown, Add Intersection Points adds points to the bound-
ary polyline where the lot lines intersect. Then Auto Annotate for the boundary polyline will label the boundary
distance along each lot. This routine does not add intersection points on arcs.
Prompts
Select lines and polylines to check.
Select objects: pick lines or polylines
Reading the selection set ...
Adding intersection points ...
Added 3 intersection points.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Edit Polyline
Keyboard Command: addint
Prerequisite: Polylines or lines
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 233
Add Polyline Vertex
This command adds points into a polyline. First you select the polyline to modify. The existing polyline vertices are
marked and then you can pick or enter the coordinates for the new point(s). A new point is inserted into the polyline
at the nearest polyline segment. On a 3D polyline, the elevation of the new vertex will be calculated for you. You
can continue to pick points to add. Press Enter when you are done.
Prompts
Select polyline to add to: pick a polyline
Pick or enter point to add: pick a point
Select polyline to add to: press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Edit Polyline
Keyboard Command: addpl
Prerequisite: A polyline
Add Polyline Arcs
This command replaces a series of short chord line segments in a polyline with an arc segment. This applies where
you want to have a true arc instead of a series of line segments. In some cases, the CAD drafting has the arcs drawn
as a series of short chords. Another application is to create an arc out of a series of connected survey points along
the curve. The routine works by searching for a series of polyline vertices that t within the specied tolerance with
a best t curve.
The options dialog allows you to set the layer for the new polylines. Otherwise the original polyline layer is used.
There is an option whether to keep or erase the original polylines. The Snap Tolerance is the maximum offset
allowed between the original points and the arc.
Prompts
Add Arcs to Polylines dialog
Select polylines to process.
Select entities: pick the polylines
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Edit Polyline
Keyboard Command: addplarc
Prerequisite: polyline
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 234
Add Point by Two Slopes
This command inserts a vertex into a 3D Polyline between two points based on the slopes specied for these two
points on polyline.
Prompts
Select polyline to process: select a polyline
Select rst point on polyline: select a point on polyline
Enter percent slope from rst point: -1.0
Select second point on polyline: select a second point on polyline
Enter percent slope from second point: -1.0
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > 3D Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: plzslopes
Prerequisite: 3D Polylines
Edit Polyline Vertex
This tool allows you to make changes in the coordinates of vertices on all polyline types. Upon execution, you will
be asked to select a polyline to edit. Upon selection, a temporary marker will be placed at all of the vertices of
the polyline, making them easy to distinguish. You must then pick near the vertex you wish to edit. The following
dialog appears.
At the top of the dialog it identies the type of polyline as being 2D or 3D. In the case of 2D polylines, it allows
you convert the polyline. You have the ability to type in new northing, easting or elevation values. You can also
determine the 3D coordinate position by using distances and slope to/from adjacent points. As you change the
values in the dialog, new values for derivatives are being calculated. For example, if you change the horizontal
distances, the coordinates will change.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 235
Prompts
Select polyline to edit: pick a polyline
Pick point on polyline to edit: pick a point to be modied
Edit Polyline Vertex dialog click ''Pick Position''
Pick vertex position: pick a new location for the vertex
Edit Polyline Vertex dialog click OK
Make changes as needed. You will see the polyline vertices relocated based upon the new picked positions and
coordinate changes. Use Previous and Next to move along the polyline. Note the dialog values changing.
Select polyline to edit (Enter to end): press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: editpl
Prerequisite: A polyline
Edit Polyline Section
This command revises a segment of a polyline. Begin by picking a point on the polyline where you want to start
editing. Then pick new points for the polyline. When nished picking new points press Enter, and then pick a
point on the polyline to connect with the new points. The polyline segment between the start and end points is then
replaced with the new points.
Prompts
Select polyline to edit: pick the polyline at the place to start editing
Pick intermediate point (Enter to End): pick a point
Pick intermediate point ('U' to Undo, Enter to End): pick a point
Pick intermediate point ('U' to Undo, Enter to End): press Enter
Pick reconnection point on polyline: pick the polyline at the place to join
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 236
Edit this contour by picking new points
Contour with segment replaced with new points
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Edit Polyline
Keyboard Command: editpl2
Prerequisite: Polylines
Remove Duplicate Polylines
This command analyzes the selected polylines and erases any duplicate polylines found. They must be exactly the
same for one to be deleted.
Prompts
Select lines, arcs and polylines to process.
Select objects: select linework to process
Reading the selection set ...
Removed 1 duplicate linework entities.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Remove Polyline
Keyboard Command: rmduplwork
Prerequisite: Polylines that have duplicates
Remove Polyline Arcs
This command replaces arc segments in polylines with chords. Removing arcs is a prerequisite to some Carlson
commands that don't handle arcs, such as Break by Closed Polyline and Make 3D Grid File. This process can add
many vertices to the polyline. The Offset cutoff is the maximum any point on the arc will be allowed to shift.
Prompts
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 237
Select polylines to remove arcs from.
Select objects: pick polylines
Offset cutoff <0.5>: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Remove Polyline
Keyboard Command: rmarc
Prerequisite: polyline with arcs
Remove Polyline Segment
This command removes the user specied segment from a polyline. A polyline segment is the section between two
vertices of the polyline. There are two options for removing the segment. Either the two vertices of the removed
segments are averaged together to keep polyline continuous, or the segment is left missing in the polyline, which
creates two separate polylines. The keywords Continuous and Break respectively identify these two options. The
rst image is of the Original Polyline. The second is with the Continuous Removal option. The third is using the
Break Removal option.
Prompts
Break polyline at removal or keep continuous (Break/<Continuous>)? press Enter
Select polyline segment to remove: pick point on polyline
Select polyline segment to remove: press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Remove Polyline
Keyboard Command: removepl
Prerequisite: A polyline
Remove Polyline Vertex
This command removes vertices from a polyline. First you select the polyline to modify. The existing polyline
vertices are marked and then you pick near the vertex you wish to delete. You can continue to pick vertices to delete,
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 238
press Enter when you are done.
Prompts
Select polyline to remove from: pick point on polyline
Pick point to remove: pick point
Pick point to remove (Enter to end): press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Remove Polyline
Keyboard Command: rmvertex
Prerequisite: A polyline
Create Polyline ID Labels
This command labels the selected polylines with either the entity ''Handle'', which can be seen with a list, or with
unique text numbers, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.. When using the Text option, the following window appears to choose
the text settings.
Prompts
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 239
Select Polylines to label.
Select objects: pick polyline
Label polylines by Text or Handles [Handles/<Text>]? press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: label polys
Prerequisite: A polyline
Change Polyline Width
This command sets the width of the selected polylines. In later versions of AutoCAD, the command PEDIT can also
modify the width of multiple polylines.
Prompts
New width <1.0>: 2
Select Polylines/Contours to change width of:
Select objects: pick polylines
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Edit Polyline
Keyboard Command: cwidth
Prerequisite: A polyline
Set Polyline Origin
This command sets the starting vertex of a closed polyline. Simply pick the polyline and then pick near the point to
set as the starting point.
Prompts
Select Polyline: pick a polyline
Pick Near New Origin Point: pick a point on the polyline to be the starting point
Processing ...
Select Polyline: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Edit Polyline
Keyboard Command: plchgorg
Prerequisite: A closed polyline
Remove Polyline Arcs
This command replaces arc segments in polylines with chords. Removing arcs is a prerequisite to some Carlson
commands that don't handle arcs, such as Break by Closed Polyline and Make 3D Grid File. This process can add
many vertices to the polyline. The Offset cutoff is the maximum any point on the arc will be allowed to shift.
Prompts
Select polylines to remove arcs from.
Select objects: pick polylines
Offset cutoff <0.5>: press Enter
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 240
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Remove Polyline
Keyboard Command: rmarc
Prerequisite: polyline with arcs
Change Polyline Elevation
This command changes the elevations of polylines and can be used to set the elevations of contour polylines. The
routine begins at a specied elevation and prompts for a selection set of polylines to set to the elevation. Then the
routine repeats using the last elevation plus the elevation increment. Enter an empty selection set to exit the routine.
Prompts
Starting elevation <0.0>: 500.0
Contour interval (negative for down) <1.0>: 5.0
Select polylines to set to elevation 500.0.
Select objects: pick the polylines
Select polylines to set to elevation 505.0.
Select objects: pick the polylines
Select polylines to set to elevation 510.0.
Select objects: Press Enter
Keyboard Command: setcelev
Prerequisite: polylines
Check Elevation Range
This command analyzes a selection set of polylines, and highlights the ones that fall outside of a specied elevation
range. There is an option to set the polylines that are outside of the range to zero. Every polyline vertex that is
outside of the range will be highlighted with an X.
Prompts
Enter elevation range minimum: 0
Enter elevation range maximum: 4900
Select polylines to check.
Select objects: pick polylines to process
Found 1 polylines outside of elevation range.
Set polylines outside elevation range to zero elevation [Yes/<No>]? N
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 241
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: checkpl
Prerequisite: Polylines with elevations
Highlight Non-Tangent Polylines
This command highlights selected polylines that have non-tangent lineworks. For every non-tangent polyline,
an arrow is pointed to the rst non-tangent point, and the non-tangent angle and the coordinates of the point are
reported at the command line.
Prompts
Select polylines to check.
Select objects: 1 found
Select objects: 1 found, 1 total
Select objects: press Enter to end
Polyline non-tangent by 3215'26'' at 1540.41,-182.05
Highlighted 1 non-tangent polylines.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities > Check Polylines
Keyboard Command: highlight nontangent
Prerequisite: Polylines
Highlight Crossing Plines
This command highlights selected polylines that are crossing in the drawing and have different elevations at the
crossing. Every intersection point where the polylines cross are marked with a temporary X. A report is provided at
the end where the X and Y of the intersection points are displayed with the two Z values and the Z difference. The
command has the ability to repair crossing polylines by inserting a vertex in each polyline at the intersection and
assigning a common elevation at this intersection.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 242
Prompts
Select polylines to check.
Select objects: pick polylines to process
Ignore zero elevations [<Yes>/No]? press Enter for Yes to lter out polylines at zero elevation
Reading points ... 1677
Finding points on breaklines ...
19 crossing polylines are highlighted.
Use Report Formatter [Yes/<No>]? press Enter for No. Use the Report Formatter to customize the report layout
or export to Excel.
Minimum delta Z to report <0.0>: 2
Add polyline vertices at intersections [Yes/<No>]? Y
Set 3D polyline to crossing contour elev or average elevs [Set/<Average>]? press Enter for Average. The
Set option applies to crossing polylines where one polyline is a 3D polyline with varying elevations and the other
polyline is a contour polyline with a xed elevation. For this case, the Set method will hold the elevation of the
contour polyline and set the 3D polyline elevation to match the contour. The Average method sets the elevation of
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 243
the intersection point as the average of the crossing polyline elevations at that point.
Maximum delta Z to average <1.0>: press Enter. This option will only add the intersection point with the
averaged elevation if the elevation difference is less than this tolerance.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: xing plines
Prerequisite: Polylines with elevations
Highlight Unclosed Polylines
This tool will evaluate polylines you select and highlight those that are open. It also provides options to close all or
selected polylines from those found.
First select all polylines to evaluate. The tool will then display those that are open in a highlighted appearance. You
will be offered an option to close all or selected polylines. If you wish to close all the open polylines, choose the All
option. If you choose the Selected option you will be prompted to pick which polylines you want to close. As you
pick each polyline it will be closed.
Prompts
Select the polylines to check.
Select objects: pick polylines to process
Open polylines are highlighted.
Close all or selected polylines [All/<Selected>]? S
Pick polyline to close: press Enter to end or select polylines
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: unclosed
Prerequisite: A polyline
Offset 3D Polyline
This command allows you to offset a 3D polyline entity in both the horizontal and vertical directions. There are
ve offset methods. The Interval method applies one horizontal and one vertical offset to all the vertices of the
polyline. The Constant method has a horizontal offset and sets the elevation of the polyline to one constant eleva-
tion. The Variable method allows you to specify each horizontal and vertical offset individually either by polyline
segment or for each point. The vertical offset can be specied by actual vertical distance, percent slope or slope ratio.
The surface method allows to offset/project a 3D polyline entity on to a surface (tin;t;grd) based on cut and ll
outslope ratio.
The multiple method allows multiple offsets of a 3D polyline with separate layers. User can add, insert and delete
offsets rows and set individual layers. The option Progressive Offsets draws offsets progressively, i.e. successive
offsets uses last drawn offset as base.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 244
Prompts
Enter the offset method [<Interval>/Constant/Variable/Surface/Multiple]: press Enter
Vertical/<Horizontal offset amount>: 15
Percent/Ratio/Vertical offset amount <0>: 10
Select a polyline to offset (Enter for none): select a 3D poly
Select side to offset: pick a point
Select a point on the graphics screen that is in the direction of the side of line to offset.
Select a polyline to offset (Enter for none): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > 3D Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: offset3d
Prerequisite: Plot the 3DPoly lines to use for selection.
Fillet 3D Polyline
This command llets two segments of a 3D polyline with the given radius. The standard FILLET command does
not support 3D Polyline entities. Since 3D polylines cannot have arcs, this command draws the llet arc as a series
of short chords. The elevations along the curve are interpolated from the 3D polyline.
Prompts
Fillet corner of a polyline or intersection of two polylines [<Corner>/Intersection]? press Enter
Enter llet radius <10.00>: press Enter
Select a corner point on polyline: pick 3D polyline near meeting point of two segments
Select a corner point on polyline: pick 3D polyline near meeting point of two segments
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 245
Select a corner point on polyline: press Enter (to end command)
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > 3D Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: llet3d
Prerequisite: 3D polyline
Join 3D Polyline
This command joins 3DPOLY entities into a single 3D polyline entity.
Prompts
Select the 3D polyline to join: pick a 3D polyline
Select the other 3D polyline to join: pick a 3D polyline that has a common endpoint with the rst
3 segments added to the polyline.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > 3D Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: join3d
Prerequisite: Plot the 3DPoly lines to use for selection
Add Points At Elevation
This command inserts vertices into a 3D Polyline at a specic elevation, or elevation interval, by interpolating
between existing elevations in the polyline.
Prompts
Add single elevation or elevation interval [Single/<Interval>]? press Enter
Enter Elevation Interval: 50
Select 3D polylines to process. pick 3D polyline(s)
Select objects: 1 found
Select objects:
Processing polylines ...
Added 10 points to polylines.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > 3D Polyline Utilities
Keyboard Command: addplz
Prerequisite: 3D Polylines
3D Polyline by Slope on Surface
This command creates a 3D polyline at a user-specied slope. The user picks the starting point and then the polyline
continues along the surface at the slope until it reaches a point where the maximum slope at the point is less than
the design slope. The surface is dened by a grid or TIN le which must be created before running this routine.
Applications for this command include designing haul roads or ditches.
Prompts
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 246
Enter the polyline layer <SLOPE ROAD>: press Enter
Select the Grid File dialog
Reading row> 51
Extrapolate grid to full grid size (Yes/<No>)? Y
Limiting length for polyline (Enter for none):
Pick origin point of 3D polyline: pick a starting point
Direction of 3D Polyline (<Up>/Down)? press EnterThe slope must go either uphill or downhill.
Direction of 3D Polyline facing up slope (<Left>/Right)? R Imagine facing uphill. Do you want the polyline to
go to the left or right?
Enter the design slope: 10 This value is in percent slope.
Pulldown Menu Location: 3D Data
Keyboard Command: surfpl
Prerequisite: Existing surface le
Join Nearest
This command joins lines, arcs and/or polylines together. While the PEDIT-Join command requires the endpoints to
match, Join Nearest will allow you to join entities whose endpoints do not exactly meet. You specify the maximum
separation distance to join, along with other options, in the dialog box shown below. Also you can join many
entities at once.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 247
Max Separation to Join: Entities whose endpoints are spaced apart greater than this value will not be joined. You
may use the pick button to specify this value by picking two points on the screen.
Max Deection Angle (degrees): This option will not join any lines if the angle between them is greater than this
angle in degrees.
Connection Method: Determines how to connect the endpoints. See the illustration below.
1. Average Endpoints Together: New vertex will be located at midpoint between two original endpoints (see
illustration below on left).
2. Directly Connect Endpoints: Original endpoints are connected with new segment (see the middle illustration
below).
3. Fillet with Radius Zero: Same as the FILLET command using zero radius (see the illustration on right).
Convert Lines and Arcs Into Polylines: When checked, automatically converts lines and arcs into polylines. If not
checked, lines and arcs are joined but remain separate entities.
Join Across Intersections: This option applies to cases where more than two linework endpoints come together
such as a Y intersection. In these cases, there are multiple possible connections. When this option is on, the program
will automatically choose one of the possible connections. Otherwise, the program will not connect any of them.
Join Only Identical Widths: When checked, only polylines with the same width will be joined.
Join Only Identical Layers: When checked, only entities on the same layer will be joined.
Join Only Common Elevations: When checked, only endpoints located on the same elevation will be joined.
Different Layer Prompt: When Join Only Identical Layers is off, then this option will prompt for which layer to
use when it nds a connection between two different layer names.
Different Elevation Prompt: When Join Only Common Elevations is off, then this option will prompt for which
elevation to use when it nds a connection between two different elevations.
Elevate Zero Elevations When Joined To Elevated: This option applies when joining a combination of linework
at elevation and linework at zero elevation. When checked, zero elevation vertices will get assigned the elevations
from connected neighboring vertices.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 248
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit
Keyboard Command: nearjoin
Prerequisite: Lines or polylines to be joined
3D Entity to 2D
This command changes a 3D Line, Arc, Circle, Polyline, Insert or Point to 2D, i.e. an entity with the elevations of
the endpoints at the same Z coordinate. When the program detects a 3D polyline with all vertices with the same
elevation, there is an option to convert to a 2D polyline with this elevation. Otherwise, the entered elevation here is
used.
Prompts
Select/<Enter Elevation <0.00>: press Enter
Select Lines, Arcs, Circles, Polylines, Inserts and Points for elevation change.
Select objects: pick a 3D polyline
3DPOLY to 2DPOLYLINE
Number of entities changed> 1
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit
Keyboard Command: 3dto2d
Prerequisite: None
Select by Filter
This command can be used to build a selection set of objects inside a drawing based on layer and entity type. There
is a dialog to dene the lters. Select the layer(s) on the left you wish to select, then turn on the toggle(s) for the
entity types to consider. There is an option to lter by entity color. Also, the size and style lters can be used for
text entities. The program then builds a selection set of those objects that resides on those layers. Then to use this
selection set in other commands, enter ''P'' for previous at the ''Select objects:'' prompt.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 249
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Selection Sets
Keyboard Command: fsel
Prerequisite: None
Select by Elevation
This command builds a selection set of entities that are greater than, less than or in between a specied elevation
that you enter in on the command line. Entities selected, based upon this elevation criteria, go into a selection set.
With the Window selection method, the entities must be entirely inside of the inclusion area to be included in the
selection set. With the Crossing selection method, an entity is added to the selection set if any part of the entity is
inside the inclusion area.
Prompts
Select by greater, less or between elevations [<Greater>/Less/Between]? press Enter
Enter elevation for greater than: 19
Ignore zero elevations [<Yes>/No]? press Enter
Select objects to build selection set. pick objects
Processing selection set ...
Built selection of 120 objects for elev more than 19.00.
To use type 'P' at Select objects: prompt.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Selection Sets
Keyboard Command: zselect
Prerequisite: Entities
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 250
Select by Block
This command builds a selection set of blocks by using a block name lter. The block name to match is specied in a
dialog with a list of all the block names in the drawing. Either pick from the list or use the Select From Screen button
to get the block name by picking a block in the drawing. After selecting the block name, pick OK and the program
will report how many of those blocks were found in the drawing and put into the selection set. This selection set is
then ready to use at the next command with a select objects prompt. To use the selection set, type 'P' at the select
objects prompt.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Selection Sets
Keyboard Command: selblk
Prerequisite: Blocks
Select by Area
This command builds a selection set using inclusion and/or exclusion closed polylines. Entities within the inclusion
polylines are selected and entities within the exclusion polylines are not selected. With the Window selection
method, the entity must be entirely inside the inclusion area and entirely outside the exclusion area to be included in
the selection set. With the Crossing selection method, an entity is added to the selection set if any part of the entity
is inside the inclusion area.
Prompts
Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none:
Select objects: pick the closed polyline
Select objects: press Enter
Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select objects: press Enter
Type of selection (Window/<Crossing>)? press Enter
Select objects to build selection set.
Select objects: All These selected objects are checked with the inclusion/exclusion polylines.
Select objects: press Enter
Built selection set with 43 objects.
Command: Erase
Select objects: P To use previous selection set created by Select by Area.
43 found
Select objects: press Enter
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 251
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Selection Sets
Keyboard Command: ssgetarea
Prerequisite: Closed perimeter polylines
Select by Length
This command builds a selection set of linework objects in the drawing based on linework length. The length lter
can be setup to get linework greater than or less than the specied value, or between two length values. After
specifying the length criteria, the program prompts for selecting the linework to check. The program then builds a
selection set of those objects that pass the length lter. Then to use this selection set in other commands, enter ''P''
for previous at the ''Select objects:'' prompt.
Prompts
Select by greater, less or between lengths [<Greater>/Less/Between]? press Enter
Enter length for greater than: 1000
Select objects to build selection set.
Select objects: pick linework to lter
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Selection Sets
Keyboard Command: lenselect
Prerequisite: None
Select Similar
This command creates a selection set of all entities in the drawing with properties that match the selected entity.
The properties lter uses the entity type and layer name. To use this selection set in other commands, enter ''P'' for
previous at the ''Select objects:'' prompt.
Pulldown Menu Location: Edit > Selection Sets
Keyboard Command: selectsim
Prerequisite: None
Image Frame
This command controls whether TakeOff displays the image frame or hides it from view.
Because you select an image by clicking its frame, setting the image frame to off prevents you from selecting an
image.
Prompts
1 Enter image frame setting [ON/OFF] <current>: enter an option or Press Enter
On: Displays image frames so you can select images.
Off: Hides image frames so you cannot select images.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: IMAGEFRAME
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 252
Image Clip
This command allows you to create new clipping boundaries for an image object.
Prompts
1 Select image to clip: select the edge of an image
2 Enter image clipping option [ON/OFF/Delete/New boundary] <New>: enter an option or Press Enter
The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object.
On: Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously dened boundary.
Off: Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame. If you reclip the image while clipping is turned
off, the program automatically turns clipping back on. The program prompts you to delete the old boundary even
when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.
Delete: Removes a predened clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image.
New Boundary: Species a new clipping boundary. The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal, and consists
only of straight line segments. When dening a clipping boundary, specify vertices within the image boundary.
Self-intersecting vertices are valid. Rectangular is the default option. If you use the pointing device to specify a
point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt, the program interprets the point as the rst corner of a rectangle.
3 Enter clipping type [Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: enter P or Press Enter
Polygonal: Uses specied points to dene a polygonal boundary.
Specify rst point: Specify a point
Specify next point or [Undo]: specify a point or enter u
Specify next point or [Undo]: specify a point or enter u
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: specify a point, or enter c or u
You must specify at least three points to dene a polygon.
If the image already has a clipping boundary dened, TakeOff displays the following prompt:
Delete old boundary? [No/Yes] <Yes>: enter N or Press Enter
If you choose Yes, the program redraws the entire image and the command continues; if you choose No, the com-
mand ends.
Rectangular: Species a rectangular boundary by its opposite corners. TakeOff always draws the rectangle
parallel to the edges of the image.
Specify rst corner point: specify a point
Specify opposite corner point: specify a point
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: IMAGECLIP
Image Adjust
This command controls the display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of images.
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 253
The Image Adjust dialog box controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness, contrast, and fade
settings of the selected image. Adjusting these values changes the display of the image but does not change the
image le itself.
Brightness: Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image. Values range from 0 through 100.
The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast.
Moving the slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider to the right increases the value.
Contrast: Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect, of the image. Values range from 0 through 100.
The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Moving the slider to the left
decreases the value; moving the slider to the right increases the value.
Fade: Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the
more the image blends with the current background color. A value of 100 blends the image completely into the
background. Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting, the
background color for fade is white. Moving the slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider to the right
increases the value.
Image Preview: Displays a preview of the selected image. The preview image updates dynamically to reect
changes to the brightness, contrast, and fade settings.
Reset: Resets values for brightness, contrast, and fade to default settings (50, 50, and 0, respectively).
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: IMAGEADJUST
Chapter 5. Edit Menu 254
View Menu 6
In addition to powerful CAD display and view commands, the Carlson View menu has some additional commands.
The commands in the top section effect the screen display size and location, and the bottom section commands
change layers.
255
Redraw
This command refreshes the display in the current viewport.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: R
Regen
This command regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: REGEN
Zoom - Window
This commands zooms to display an area you specify by two opposite corners of a rectangular window.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ZOOM, W
Zoom - Dynamic
This command zooms to display the generated portion of the drawing using a view box. The view box represents
your viewport, which you can shrink or enlarge and move around the drawing. Positioning and sizing the view box
pans or zooms the viewport, lling it with the image inside the view box.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ZOOM, D
Zoom - Previous
This command zooms to display a previous view. You can restore up to 10 previous views.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ZOOM, P
Zoom - Center
This command zooms to display a window you dene by picking a center point and a magnication value or height.
A smaller value for the height increases the magnication. A larger value decreases the magnication.
Prompts
1 Specify center point: pick a point
2 Enter magnication or height <226.66>: enter a value
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ZOOM, C
Chapter 6. View Menu 256
Zoom - Extents
This command zooms to display the drawing extents. You can use Zoom Extents transparently, but it always regen-
erates the drawing.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ZOOM, E
Zoom IN
This command increases the zoom factor of the current viewport by a factor of 2.0.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ZOOM, 2.0x
Zoom OUT
This command decreases the zoom factor of the current viewport by a factor of 0.5.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: ZOOM, 0.5x
Zoom Selection
This command zooms the display to t the selected entities. For example, if you run Viewpoint 3D and your viewport
only shows two small dots of entities that are far apart, then you can use Zoom Selection to select the entities of one
of these dots and quickly zoom the display to these entities.
Prompts
Select objects to zoom onto:
Select objects: select entities
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: zoom on
Prerequisite: Entities
Zoom Points
This command centers the screen to a user-specied point. The point can be specied by either the point number or
description. The command searches the current coordinate (.CRD) le. Besides centering the screen, the magni-
cation can also be changed. The default value is the current magnication. To zoom in, enter a smaller value and to
zoom out, enter a greater value.
Prompts
Find by point number or description [<Number>/Desc]? N
Point number or range of point numbers to nd <1>: 2079
We want to nd point number 2079
Magnication or Height <179.50>: press Enter
Accept the default zoom magnication
Chapter 6. View Menu 257
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: zoompnt
Prerequisite: A .CRD le
Pan
This command moves the drawing display in the current viewport. The cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding
down the pick button on the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current location relative to the viewport
coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the cursor.
When you reach a logical extent (the edge of the drawing space), a bar is displayed on the hand cursor on the side
where the extent has been reached. Depending on whether the logical extent is at the top, bottom, or side of the
drawing, the bar is either horizontal (top or bottom) or vertical (left or right side).
When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the pick button, move the cursor to another
location in the drawing, and then press the pick button again to pan the display from that location.
To stop panning at any time, press Enter or ESC.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: P
3D Viewer Window
This command views in 3D, the selected 3D faces, blocks, polylines, lines and points. This routine uses the OpenGL
graphics library for rendering, which gives it superior performance. Some of its features include the ability to zoom
in and out, pan, rotate around the X,Y,Z axis and shade in user-positioned lighting. Press the right mouse button and
drag to zoom the display.
Chapter 6. View Menu 258
Ignore Zero Elevations: When checked, the 3D viewer ignore entities at zero elevation.
Color By Elevation: This will color the contours or 3D faces by elevation. The elevation scale legend is displayed
on the left of the window and can be adjusted via the Color By Elevation Scale controls.
Display Sky: Creates a sky dome of 3D faces around the site that is colored blue with some clouds. In order to see
the sky, your view point must be below the sky dome. This feature is only available when the software-only graphics
mode is turned off under Carlson Congure General Settings.
Vert. Scale: Sets the vertical scale factor for the 3D viewer. Relatively at surfaces can be exaggerated by increasing
the vertical scale.
Control Action
This control represents position of the sun in the sky if
looked from above. Therefore, the position of the sun in
the center means that the sun is in a zenith, and position
near the edge of the circle means that the sun is near the
horizon. To move the sun, simply drag it to a newlocation,
or click on the new location. The slide bars on the sides
are the intensity and brightness of the display.
Zooms In.
Zooms Out.
Switch to Pan mode. Click and drag to pan.
Switch to Rotation mode. When the cursor is placed near
the outer edge of the view, a ''Z'' cursor is presented that
permits rotation around the Z-axis. When the cursor is
placed further into the interior of the view, an ''X,Y'' cursor
is presented that permits the tilt angle of the view to be
adjusted.
Chapter 6. View Menu 259
Switch to initial view.
Zoom Previous.
Toggles shading on and off for 3DFACE entities selected
for the scene. The shading of a 3DFACE is dependent
on its ''normal'' direction and is further controlled by the
Shading Mode control.
This is an inquire tool. Point the arrow to any entity to
display entity data including the layer, type, elevation and
length. Double-clicking an entity permits additional ac-
tions to be performed on the entity including the ability to
change the layer of the entity and/or setting the entity to
an elevation of zero (0).
Resets the 3D view to plan.
Switch to Dynamic Zoom mode.
Additional Visualization Controls
Rotation Axis: Permits the use of ''slider'' controls to orient the view in the X, Y and/or Z axis direction(s).
Fixed Views: Permits the the view to be displayed from one of six different directions:
1. Custom - The view is shown at the current user-specied direction.
2. Plan View - The view is shown from directly over the site, looking straight down. This is the same as the
Reset to Plan button.
3. NE - The view is shown from the Northeast looking to the Southwest in a downward direction.
4. SE - The view is shown from the Southeast looking to the Norththwest in a downward direction.
5. SW - The view is shown from the Southwest looking to the Norththeast in a downward direction.
6. NW - The view is shown from the Northwest looking to the Southeast in a downward direction.
See the Common Controls discussion for additional information.
Chapter 6. View Menu 260
Display Axis Icon: This controls whether to show the X/Y/Z axis icon in the lower left of the graphic window.
Display Bounding Box: This controls whether to display a 3D box around the limits of the data.
Display Orbit: Shows a graphic guide in the viewer for controlling the view angle and position using the mouse
movements similar to the AutoCAD Orbit routine.
Apply Surface Smoothing: This option controls the shading of 3D faces either at by the normals of each 3D faces
or smoothed by transitioning with neighboring 3D faces.
Display Triangle Edges: Shows the edge lines for triangles for visualizing the triangles that make up a surface.
When active, there is a setting to control the color for these edges.
Display Surface Names: Shows the le names in the viewer for the surfaces currently being viewed.
Display Vertical Scale: This controls whether to display the current vertical scale in the graphic window.
Display Non-Surface Entities: This controls whether to display entities that have been tagged as ''non-surface'' by
the Tag Non-Surface Entities or Points commands.
Control Action
Sets the drawing view to match the view shown in the 3D
viewer window.
This button sets the view position and target position by
coordinates:
Settings Controls
The positions can be entered in the edit boxes or use the respective Pick > button to pick a point in the drawing.
The program will pick up the height of the surface for picked points and then the height above the position can be
entered. For example to check sight distance, the view position could be a point on a road and height could be the
driver eye height and the target position and height could be the object to check.
Color By Elevation Scale: These three colors are used for the Color By Elevation option. The program will
interpolate between these colors for the color scale.
Saved Views: This option allows for naming and saving a 3D view for easy recall later. Named views can be
selected from the pull-down and the active view can be deleted from the list.
Chapter 6. View Menu 261
Block Model Objects: This option has three choices when loading block model entities:
1. Leave as Points
2. Render - It will apply to all face objects such as a TIN or GRD.
3. Prompt Each Time
Block Model Layers: This will display the block color scheme. Colors of the blocks can be turned on or off to view
blocks in the middle.
Shading Mode: When the Shading control is enabled, the rendering of the shaded 3DFACE entities (usually used
to represent a surface model) will vary based on:
1. Shade Front - Shades only the ''positive'' normal direction.
2. Shade Back - Shades only the ''negative'' normal direction.
3. Shade Both - Shades both the ''positive'' and ''negative'' normal directions.
Use Dynamic Text: This controls whether text objects resize based on the current zoom level or stay the xed size
according to their text size in the drawing.
Chapter 6. View Menu 262
Control Action
Permits a Carlson Surface Model to be added in to the
tree-list (also available as a Surfaces right-click action).
Permits aadditional visibility and rendering control on the
selected item as described below.
Model Controls
Within the ''model'' tab is a ''tree-view'' of the various entities that comprise the view along with the listing of layers
upon which the entities are found. Click on the ''+'' symbol to expand the branches of the tree (or click on the ''-''
symbol to collapse a branch). Use a Right+Click action on a given item for additional display control:
Visibility: Permits the layer or entity to be temporarily hidden from the view.
Color: Permits the color of the layer or entity to be temporarily changed. The Color By Elevation option must be
disabled to show the designated color.
Opacity (Surfaces): Use the horizontal slider control to indicate the desired level of opaqueness that should be
applied to a surface. A lower opacity results in increased surface transparency and is helpful for viewing sub-surface
Chapter 6. View Menu 263
utilities such as Storm Sewer pipes and manholes.
Texture (Surfaces): When enabled, a material (e.g. grass) can be applied to the view simulation.
Control Action
The Clip Plane control permits portions of the view to be
hidden from view by adjusting the position of the slider.
This is helpful for producing quick ''section'' views of the
data being shown in the view.
This function exports the graphic display to an image le.
Several different image le formats are supported includ-
ing bmp, png, jpg, xpm and gif. There is a Export Image
Selections dialog to choose the image resolution and color
depth.
Allows the data in the view to be saved to an external 3DX
le for subsequent re-use. Use the Saved View option to
re-load a desired view.
Allows a previously saved 3DX le to be re-loaded into
the current view.
This function outputs the image to a report. For
AutoCAD-based congurations, the report format (PDF
or DWF) is specied via the Carlson Congure Gen-
eral Settings.
Exit the 3D viewer window.
Common Controls
To quickly view just a surface le, use the Surface 3D Viewer command.
To visualize a site with animated vehicle controls, use the Surface 3D Fly-Over command.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): View
Keyboard Command: cube
Prerequisite: Entities to display
Surface 3D Viewer
This command is identical to the 3D Viewer Window, except that this one loads a Carlson Grid GRD, TIN or FLT
le. After the le is selected, the same viewer documented in 3D Viewer Window appears.
Chapter 6. View Menu 264
To entities within the DWG le (and optionally, Carlson surface les), use the 3D Viewer Window command.
To visualize a site with animated vehicle controls, use the Surface 3D Fly-Over command.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): View , Civil Surface 3D Views
Keyboard Command: cube surface
Prerequisite: Carlson surface (TIN, FLT, GRD) to display
Surface 3D FlyOver
This command allows you to view a self guided animation of following a path through a 3D surface model. There
are two variations to this command. When the command is started, you must specify whether you want to use a
surface model from le or screen entities.
Surface model from le: Using this method, you can select either a triangulation (.TIN) le or a grid (.GRD) le,
then you have the option of following a polyline or following a ''free'' path. If you choose the polyline method, then
the animation is limited to following the polyline. If you choose the ''free'' path method, you rst specify two points
to obtain a starting direction, the while inside the viewer you can point the animation in any direction.
Screen entities: Using this method, you must select a 3D polyline to follow. The animation is limited to following
the polyline.
After making the above selections, the 3D graphics window is opened. The main window is for the animation, the
smaller upper right window shows you the overall plan view, and the smaller window located at middle right shows
you the current elevation, slope and azimuth. While following a ''free'' path, you will have a 3rd small window
located at lower right which shows you the amount of roll at your current position.
Chapter 6. View Menu 265
This button raises the elevation of your viewing position. This button lowers the elevation of your
viewing position. This button turns your viewing position to the left. This button turns your viewing
position to the right. This button allows you to zoom in and out. This button allows you to rotate
the main animation window in any X, Y or Z direction. This button allows you to pan. This button
toggles shading on and off. This button starts the animation in the main window. This button stops
the animation. This button exits the 3D Surface FlyOver command Control for position of the
light source, viewed from above.
Prerequisite: Surface Model and optionally a 3D Polyline
Keyboard Command: yby
Viewpoint 3D
This command allows you to dene 3D view settings.
Chapter 6. View Menu 266
1 Under Set Viewing Angles, you must set the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system
(WCS) or a user coordinate system (UCS).
Absolute to WCS: This option sets the view direction relative to the WCS.
Relative to UCS: This option sets the view direction relative to the current UCS.
2 You must specify the viewing angles.
X Axis: This eld species the angle from the X axis.
XY Plane: This eld species the angle from the XY plane. You can also use the sample image to specify
viewing angles. The black arm indicates the new angle. The red arm indicates the current angle. Specify an angle
by selecting the inner region of the circle or half-circle. Selecting the bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to
the value displayed in that region.
Set to Plan View: This option sets the viewing angles to display the plan view relative to the selected coordinate
system.
Prerequisite: None.
Keyboard Command: DDVPOINT
Twist Screen: Standard
This command will twist the screen orientation to where something other than the north direction is toward the
top of the screen/drawing. It does not do a coordinate rotation, the drawing coordinates remain unchanged. Use
commands on the
*
Points
*
menu, such as Rotate Points and Translate Points, if you want to do a coordinate rotation
or translation.
Prompts
This routine prompts for the twist angle then adjusts the screen and cross-hairs to that angle. This is a modication of
the DVIEW command. The twist angle is always measured counterclockwise with 0 degrees being to the east/right.
Pulldown Menu Location: View > Twist Screen
Keyboard Command: twist1
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 6. View Menu 267
Twist Screen: Line Pline or Text
This is a variation of the previous command that allows you to select a line, polyline, or text in your drawing that
you want to be aligned parallel to the east-west direction of the graphics screen. Think of the entity you select as a
pointer or arrow that will point in the east direction of the screen after you select it. Select the line, polyline, or text
closest to the end point which you want to be the horizontal or east direction of the screen.
Prompts
Pick a line, polyline or text to make horizontal: pick a line or polyline
Pulldown Menu Location: View > Twist Screen
Keyboard Command: twist2
Prerequisite: None
Twist Screen: Surveyor
This command is another variation of twisting the screen that allows you to input an angle/azimuth that you want
to be aligned parallel to the east-west direction of the graphics screen. Entering zero would align due north with
respect to real world coordinates to the east or horizontal direction of the graphics screen. The Grid Projection Angle
button prompts for a base point and sets the angle to the grid mapping angle. To use this option, the grid projection
must be assigned in the Drawing Setup command.
Pulldown Menu Location: View > Twist Screen
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: twist3
Restore Due North
This command twists the screen to make due north vertical. When the grid projection is specied under the
Drawing Setup command, this command will prompt for whether to use grid north or geodetic north. When the grid
Chapter 6. View Menu 268
projection is not set, this routine automatically twists to grid north.
Prompts
Twist to Grid North or True Geodetic North [<Grid>/True]? press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: View > Twist Screen
Keyboard Command: twist4
Prerequisite: None
Twist To 3D View
This command orients selected text, symbols and point attributes to face the current viewpoint. Typically, text and
points are drawn to face up to plan view. When viewed in 3D from the side, this text can be hard to read. This
command makes this text readable for the current view. Before running this command, the 3D view should be set
by commands like Viewpoint 3D or Orbit. The entities are oriented to the current view by setting the extrusion
values for the entities.
Prompts
Select points, symbols and text to twist.
Select objects: pick entities
Pulldown Menu Location: View > Twist 3D Entities
Keyboard Command: twist3d
Prerequisite: Entities to view
Restore World View
This command is the companion to the Twist To 3D View command. This command resets entities so that they face
up in plan view.
Prompts
Select points, symbols and text to restore.
Select objects: pick entities
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: untwist3d
Prerequisite: 3D Entities
Display Order
This command allows you to change the display order of objects by repositioning an entity from either the back-
ground to the forefront of the drawing view or from the forefront to the background of the drawing view.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: draworder
Chapter 6. View Menu 269
Layer Control
This command allows you to manage layers and layer properties.
This Layer Properties Manager dialog box makes a layer current, adds new layers to the layer name list, and renames
an existing layer. You can assign properties to layers, turn layers on and off, freeze and thaw layers globally or by
viewport, lock and unlock layers, set plot styles for layers, and turn plotting on and off for layers. You can lter
the layer names displayed in the Layer Properties Manager, and you can save and restore layer states and properties
settings.
1 Under Named Layer Filters, you determine which layers to display in the list of layers. You can lter layers
based on whether they're xref-dependent, or whether they contain objects. You can also lter layers based on name,
visibility, color, linetype, lineweight, plot style name, whether they are plotted, or whether they are frozen in the
current viewport or in new viewports.
[...]: This button displays the Named Layer Filters dialog box.
Invert Filter: This option displays layers based on the opposites of the criteria you select when you are using a
named layer lter. Layers that t the inverse criteria are displayed in the layer name list.
Apply to Object Properties Toolbar: This option displays in the Object Properties toolbar only layers that
match the current lter. The layer list tooltip on the Object Properties toolbar displays the lter status of layers in
the drawing. (To display the layer list tooltip, position the pointing device over the layer list on the Object Properties
toolbar.)
New: This option creates a new layer. After you choose New, the list displays a layer named LAYER1. You
can edit this layer immediately. To create multiple layers quickly, you can select a layer name for editing and enter
multiple layer names separated by commas. If you create a new layer, the new layer inherits the properties of the
currently selected layer in the layer list (such as Color, and On/Off state). To create layers with default settings,
make sure that there are no selected layers in the list or that you select a layer with default settings before beginning
layer creation.
Current: This option sets the selected layer as the current layer. The CLAYER system variable stores the layer
name.
Chapter 6. View Menu 270
Delete: This option deletes selected layers from the drawing le denition. You can delete only unreferenced
layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block
denitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers. Layers that don't contain objects (including objects in
block denitions), are not current, and are not xref-dependent can be deleted by using the PURGE command. Be
careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering
standards.
Show/Hide Details: This option controls whether the Details section is displayed in the Layer Properties Man-
ager.
Save State: This option displays the Save Layer States dialog box, in which you save layer state and layer
properties settings of all layers in a drawing. You can choose which layer states and properties you want to preserve.
You save a layer state by assigning it a name.
Restore State: This option displays the Layer States Manager, in which you can manage named layer states.
2 The Layer Properties Manager dialog box displays all layers and their properties. To modify a property, click its
icon. To quickly select all layers, right-click your pointing device and use the shortcut menu. The following are the
layer properties you can modify:
Name: This eld displays the names of the layers. You can select a name, and then click and enter a new name.
On/Off: This eld turns layers on and off. When a layer is on, it is visible and available for plotting. When a
layer is off, it is invisible and not plotted, even if Plot is on.
Freeze/Thaw in All Viewports: This eld freezes and thaws layers in all oating viewports. A frozen layer
is invisible and excluded from regeneration, hiding objects, rendering, and plotting. A thawed layer is visible and
available for regeneration, hiding objects, rendering, and plotting.
You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN, and many other operations, improve object selection performance,
and reduce regeneration time for complex drawings. TakeOff does not display, plot, or regenerate objects on frozen
layers. Objects on frozen layers do not hide objects and are not rendered.
You can freeze layers in all viewports, in the current viewport, or in new viewports.
Freeze layers that you want to be invisible for long periods. When you thaw a frozen layer, the program regenerates
and displays the objects on that layer. If you switch between visible and invisible states frequently, use the On/Off
setting.
Lock/Unlock: This eld locks and unlocks the layers. You cannot select or edit objects on a locked layer.
Locking a layer is useful if you want to view information on a layer for reference but do not want to edit objects on
that layer.
Color: This eld changes the color associated with the selected layers. Clicking the color name displays the
Select Color dialog box.
Linetype: This eld changes the linetype associated with the selected layers. Clicking any linetype name displays
the Select Linetype dialog box.
Lineweight: This eld changes the lineweight associated with the selected layers. Clicking any lineweight name
displays the Lineweight dialog box.
Plot Style: This eld changes the plot style associated with the selected layers. If you are working with color-
dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot change the plot style associated
with a layer. Clicking any plot style displays the Select Plot Style dialog box.
Plot/Don't Plot: This eld controls whether the selected layers are plotted. If you turn off plotting for a layer,
the objects on that layer are still displayed. Turning off plotting for a layer affects only visible layers in the drawing
(layers that are on and thawed). If a layer is set to plot, but is currently frozen or off in the drawing, TakeOff does
not plot the layer. Turning off plotting for layers containing reference information such as construction lines can be
useful.
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 6. View Menu 271
Keyboard Command: LAYER
Set Layer
This command allows the user to change the current layer to a different layer by picking an entity on that layer.
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: lset
Prerequisite: None
Change Layer
This command allows you to change the layer of a group of entities by selecting the group of entities. The layer
name to assign can be either typed it or read from an existing entity by picking an entity that is on the layer that you
want to change the group to.
Prompts
Select entities to be changed.
Select objects: pick entities
The Select Layer dialog appears select a layer from the list, or select Screen Pick
If Screen Pick is chosen,
Pick entity with layer to change to: pick another entity This assigns the selected entities to the layer of this entity.
or
Enter new layer name or pick entity with layer (Enter/<Pick>)? E
Enter new layer name: FINAL This assigns the selected entities to the FINAL layer.
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: lchg
Prerequisite: None
Freeze Layer
This command will freeze layers by picking entities on that layer. The entity selection is done by selection set for
selecting one or more entities.
Chapter 6. View Menu 272
Prompts
Select entities on layers to be frozen.
Select objects: pick entities
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: loff
Prerequisite: None
Freeze Layer By Pick
This command will freeze layers by picking entities on that layer. The entity selection is done one at a time. As
entities are selected, the layers are frozen.
Prompts
Pick entity on layer to be frozen: pick an entity
Freezing layer
Pick entity on layer to be frozen (U-Undo,Enter to end): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: pickoff
Prerequisite: None
Thaw Layer
This command thaws the layers frozen by the Freeze Layer command.
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: lon
Prerequisite: None
Isolate Layer
This command freezes all the layers except the ones you select an entity on. The program prompts to see if you
would like to retain the POINT layers which keeps the Carlson point layers from freezing. By default, these layers
include PNTNO, PNTMARK, PNTDESC, and PNTELEV.
Prompts
Select objects on layers to isolate.
Select objects: pick entities
Retain POINT layers [Yes/<No>]? Press Enter
Chapter 6. View Menu 273
Isolate the wall layer by picking one wall line
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: isolate
Prerequisite: None
Restore Layer
This command thaws the layers that were frozen by the Isolate Layer command.
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: restore
Prerequisite: None
Thaw/On All Layers
This command turns on and thaws all layers in the drawing.
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: loa
Prerequisite: None
Lock Layers
The Lock Layers command will lock the layers for the layers of the selected entities.
The Unlock Layers command will unlock the layers for the layers of the selected entities.
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: laylock, layunlock
Prerequisite: None
Save/Restore Layer State
The Save Layer State command stores to a le all the layers in the drawing and their current status of color,
freeze/thaw, on/off, and linetype. The layer state le has a .LAY extension. Later versions of AutoCAD include the
Chapter 6. View Menu 274
ability to save and restore layer states, found in the layer dialog box.
The Restore Layer State command sets the drawing layers and their status from the layer information in a layer state
le (.LAY le). If a layer from the layer state le does not exist in the drawing, the program will create the layer.
Besides the Carlson format, the Land Desktop layer state format, which is also uses a .LAY extension, is supported
by this command.
Pulldown Menu Location: View
Keyboard Command: savelay, restlay
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 6. View Menu 275
Draw Menu 7
Many of the Draw Menu commands are CAD commands for creating entities in your drawing. Carlson commands
that are part of the Draw menu are documented here. Any items not appearing in the Carlson manual are CAD
commands that can be referenced in the AutoCAD or IntelliCAD manual.
276
Line
This command allows you to draw a line entity by picking points on the screen or by supplying the coordinate values
using the point number and associated coordinates stored in the current coordinate le. The Line command links the
line with the points when the line is drawn using point numbers if the Link Linework with Points option is turned
on. This option is set under General Settings in the Congure command in the Settings menu. With links active,
changing a point with a command like Move Points automatically updates the line. This command always draws 2D
lines with a zero elevation.
Prompts
1 Pick point or point numbers: 1-3
You may enter a single point number or a range of point numbers
2 Undo/Distance/<Pick point or point numbers>: 16
3 Undo/+/-/Close/Distance/<Pick point or point numbers>: 35
4 Undo/+/-/Close/Distance/<Pick point or point numbers>: +
The + or - activates an additional prompt option that allows you to plot line segments at a 90 degree deection angle
from the last line.
5 Perpendicular Distance Right: 80
6 Undo/+/-/Close/Distance/<Pick point or point numbers>: -
The + or - activates an additional prompt option that allows you to plot line segments at a 90 degree deection angle
from the last line.
7 Perpendicular Distance Left: 105.12
8 Undo/+/-/Close/Distance/<Pick point or point numbers>: D
The distance option allows you to input a distance for the next line segment. The position of the cursor determines
the angle.
9 Enter distance: 174.32
10Undo/+/-/Close/Distance/<Pick point or point numbers>: C
The close option draws a line segment back to the original starting point
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: 2DLINE
2D Polyline
A Polyline is a complex CAD entity comprised of one or more line and/or arc segments. One way to draw a polyline
is to use the Command: line, pulldown menu or toolbar to execute the standard CAD command PLINE. While its
elevation isn't necessarily zero, a polyline is 2-dimensional or at.
The Carlson version of the PLINE command, 2D Polyline, is available from the Draw pulldown menu,
from the Draw toolbar or at the Command: line (2DP) and provides many more options than the standard CAD
version of the command. Unless disabled, the Polyline 2D Options dialog box will appear after starting Carlson's
2D Polyline command.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 277
Show Options on Startup: When this option is enabled, the Polyline 2D Options dialog box will display
automatically upon starting the 2D Polyline command. If disabled, the command runs strictly from the Command:
line.
Elevation: Set the elevation of the polyline to be drawn.
Offset from Centerline: If this option is enabled, an additional option, Offset, is available from the Com-
mand: line. Issuing the ''Offset'' option allows you to draw a new polyline using Station and Offset entry from an
existing polyline or existing Centerline (.CL) le.
Skip Inline Vertices for Extend: This setting applies to the ''Extend'' option with the Total Distance Sub-
Menu option. If enabled, an existing vertex will dissolve when lengthening a 2D Polyline segment.
Auto-Zoom Mode: This setting provides 3 options for Auto-Zoom: Never, Proximity or Always. The
''Never'' setting requires you to manually Zoom or Pan to keep the current polyline vertex centered in the drawing
screen. The ''Proximity'' setting will activate the ''Proximity Level'' setting and will automatically re-center the view
only if the current polyline vertex is within a certain distance of the limits of the drawing area. The ''Always'' option
will automatically re-center the view after each new polyline vertex is added.
Annotate Closed Pads: Enabling this option will activate the ''Settings'' button. The ''Settings'' button dis-
plays the Label Pad Elevations dialog box where you can specify label settings for the pad and other vertical offset
elevations. For instance, you can label both the Finished Floor Elevation and the SubGrade elevation of a building
pad at the same time using this command. See additional information on the Label Pad Elevation command.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 278
In the ''Polyline Properties'' section of the dialog box you have several alternatives for specifying the layer, color
and linetype of the newly created polyline.
Use Current Drawing Properties: Select this option if you want the layer, color and linetype of the newly
created polyline to match those currently set in the drawing.
Layer: Use this setting to manually assign the layer for the newly created polyline. You can type in the
new layer name, use the ''Select'' button to choose an existing layer from the drawing's layer list or use the ''Pick''
button to select an entity in the drawing and match its layer.
Set Color: Use this button to manually specify a color for the newly created polyline.
Width: Specify the width of the newly created polyline.
Linetype: Use the ''Select'' button to manually specify a linetype for the newly created polyline.
Select Code: This option allows you to set the layer, color and linetype of a new polyline by using the
properties assigned to a Field to Finish eld code. The eld code is selected from an existing Field Code table
(.FLD) le that has been previously specied in the Point Defaults dialog box.
Prompts
Command:2dp
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Offset/OPtions/<Pick point or point numbers>]: screen pick a point
[Arc/Close/Distance/Follow/Offset/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: screen pick a point
Segment length: 202.55, Total length: 202.55
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Offset/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: screen pick a point
Segment length: 179.73, Total length: 382.28
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Offset/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: screen pick a point
Segment length: 127.45, Total length: 509.73
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Offset/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter
Command:
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 279
Options and SubMenu Options
Once all settings have been specied and the ''OK'' button is picked, the options shown below are available from the
Command: line. To issue any of these options, simply type in the capitalized portion of the Option at the Command:
line and press Enter. The default option is always shown between angle brackets < Default >.
Continue: This option allows you to select an existing polyline to which you'd like to add more line or arc
segments. When prompted to ''Select a polyline to continue or extend:'', you may pick anywhere on the existing
polyline and the new segment will begin at the ending vertex nearest your cursor. New line or arc segments can
be added by screen-picking or using the options at the Command: line. Once nished adding segments, they are
automatically joined to the original polyline.
Extend: This option gives you many ways to lengthen or shorten an existing polyline using the abbreviated
SubMenu options shown below. Some of these options create additional segments at the end of the existing polyline
and some allow you to change the length of the ending segment of the polyline. When prompted to ''Select a
polyline to continue or extend:'', you may pick anywhere on the existing polyline and the ''Extend'' will occur at
the ending vertex nearest your cursor. Once nished Extending, the new segments are automatically joined to the
original polyline.
[I / R / L / S / T / A / B / E / U / X / Help / <Enter or Pick Distance>]
I - Input mode - This option toggles the distance input between feet & inches (will prompt rst for feet,
then prompt again for inches) and decimal feet.
R - Right rotate - From the ending vertex, turns the pointer 90-degrees to the right and then prompts for a distance.
L - Left rotate - From the ending vertex, turns the pointer 90-degrees to the left and then prompts for a distance.
S - Switch direction - From the ending vertex, turns the pointer 180-degrees and then prompts for a distance.
T - Total distance - Prompts you to ''Enter total distance (100.00)'' and displays the current length of the segment in
parentheses. If a number smaller than the current distance is entered, this option will shorten the existing segment.
If a number larger than the current distance is entered, this option will lengthen the existing segment. This option is
also affected by the Skip Inline Vertices for Extend setting in the Polyline 2D Options dialog box. If ''Skip Inline
Vertices for Extend'' is enabled, then the existing vertex will be dissolved when lengthening a segment. If the setting
is not enabled, then the existing vertex will be left intact and an additional segment will be created inline.
A - Angle change - From the ending vertex, prompts you to ''Enter Angle (ddd.mmss):'' to turn the pointer by a
specied angle and then prompts for a distance.
B - Bearing/Azimuth/Turned/Deection - From the ending vertex, this option allows you to set the pointer direction
by specifying an Angle. The Angle format is Qdd.mmss and there are a variety of ways to use the ''Q'' value to
specify the Angle. See here for more.
E - Extend to edge - Extends current segment to another line or entity
U - Undo - Undo last action
X - Quit extend mode - Returns to normal 2D Polyline Draw mode
Help - Displays the descriptions of the Extend options
Enter or Pick Distance - Distance to extend the current segment
Follow: This option allows you to trace all or a portion of an existing polyline. After issuing the ''Follow''
option, you are prompted to ''Select the polyline to Follow:'' and then to ''Specify the rst follow point:''. After
snapping to a starting point on the polyline, you are asked whether you want to ''Interpolate follow vertices
elevations?''. With this being a 2D Polyline, the answer to this is most likely ''NO''. You will then be prompted to
specify the ''Last follow point or follow distance:'' where you can snap to another point on the polyline or type in a
distance to trace the existing polyline.
Offset: With the ''Offset'' option, you will rst be prompted to select an existing polyline or select an exist-
ing Centerline (.CL) le. Next, you will be asked to ''Specify starting station:'' where you will enter the station
number of the rst polyline vertex. Then, you will be prompted to ''Enter Station'' and ''Enter Offset'' for each vertex
of the new polyline. Note: To have this option available, you must place a check next to Offset From Centerline in
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 280
the Polyline 2D Options dialog box.
Pick Point or Point Numbers: This is the default prompt for the command. From here you can set a new
polyline vertex by screen picking, entering coordinates in X,Y format or entering a point number from the
associated Coordinate (.CRD) le.
Arc/Line: New polyline segments can be either an Arc or a Line segment. If the last polyline segment
drawn was a LINE, then the ''Arc'' option will be shown as an available option; however, if the last polyline segment
drawn was an ARC, then the ''Line'' option will be available.
When in the ''Arc'' mode, there are many additional SubMenu options available to you for creating an arc
segment within the new polyline. The options are generated directly from the standard CAD version of the PLINE
command and include Radius Point, Radius Length, Arc Length, Chord and Second Point (Point on Curve).
Close: This option will create a new Line or Arc segment back to the starting vertex of the polyline and re-
sults in a closed polyline.
Distance: This option allows you to rst enter a distance for the new Line segment and then to specify the
direction using one of three methods: Cursor, Line or Angle.
Cursor - This method will draw the polyline segment in the direction of your cursor position.
Line - This method prompts you to select a line or polyline segment to which it will draw a parallel segment.
Angle - This method prompts you for an Angle to determine the direction of your new polyline segment. The Angle
format is Qdd.mmss and there are a variety of ways to use the ''Q'' value to specify the Angle. See here for more.
Undo: Undo the last drawn polyline segment.
Angle Entry Methods
The Angle format is Qdd.mmss where: Q=quadrant/angle, d=degrees, m=minutes and s=seconds.
The Quadrant/Angle can be specied as:
1=NE (NorthEast)
2=SE (SouthEast)
3=SW (SouthWest)
4=NW (NorthWest)
5=AZ (AZimuth)
6=AL (turned Angle-Left)
7=AR (turned Angle-Right)
8=DL (Deection angle-Left)
9=DR (Deection angle-Right)
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw
Keyboard Command: 2DP
Prerequisite: None
3D Polyline
A 3D Polyline is a specialized version of a polyline that can have different elevation at every vertex.
The 3D Polyline command is available from the Draw pulldown menu, from the Draw toolbar or at the
Command: line (3DP). Unless disabled, the Polyline 3D Options dialog box will appear after starting Carlson's 3D
Polyline command.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 281
Show Options on Startup: When this option is enabled, the Polyline 3D Options dialog box will display
automatically upon starting the 3D Polyline command. If disabled, the command runs strictly from the Command:
line.
Prompt for Elevation/Slope: When this option is enabled, the elevation for each new vertex will be displayed
as a prompt, giving you an opportunity to override that value by typing in a new elevation. When disabled, the
elevation to be assigned to each new vertex is displayed but you are not given a chance to assign a different elevation.
Prompt for Coordinate Point Elevations: This option only applies if you specify a point number from an
associated Coordinate (.CRD) le to establish the X,Y,Z values for a new 3D Polyline vertex. When this option is
enabled, the elevation for each new vertex will be displayed as a prompt, giving you an opportunity to override that
value by typing in a new elevation. When disabled, the elevation to be assigned to each new vertex is displayed but
you are not given a chance to assign a different elevation.
Elevation Adder: Use this setting to add a constant elevation value to all default elevation values.
Check Elevation Range: Enabling this option allows you to monitor elevations assigned to 3D Polyline
vertices and issue a warning (with options to correct) if the elevation falls outside the specied range. If the
proposed elevation of a 3D Polyline vertex falls outside the range specied, the Warning: Elevation Range dialog
box is displayed. The Warning: Elevation Range dialog box allows you to assign a new elevation to the vertex,
adjust the acceptable range of elevations or turn OFF monitoring of elevations.
Use Surface Model From File: Selecting this option allows you to use a Surface Model (.TIN, .GRD, .FLT) le to
determine the elevation for each new 3D Polyline vertex.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 282
Skip Inline Vertices for Extend: This setting applies to the ''Extend'' option with the Total Distance Sub-
Menu option. If enabled, an existing vertex will dissolve when lengthening a 3D Polyline segment.
Auto-Zoom Mode: This setting provides 3 options for Auto-Zoom: Never, Proximity or Always. The
''Never'' setting requires you to manually Zoom or Pan to keep the current polyline vertex centered in the drawing
screen. The ''Proximity'' setting will activate the ''Proximity Level'' setting and will automatically re-center the view
only if the current polyline vertex is within a certain distance of the limits of the drawing area. The ''Always'' option
will automatically re-center the view after each new polyline vertex is added.
In the ''Polyline Properties'' section of the dialog box you have several alternatives for specifying the layer,
color and linetype of the newly created polyline.
Use Current Drawing Properties: Select this option if you want the layer, color and linetype of the newly
created polyline to match those currently set in the drawing.
Layer: Use this setting to manually assign the layer for the newly created polyline. You can type in the
new layer name, use the ''Select'' button to choose an existing layer from the drawing's layer list or use the ''Pick''
button to select an entity in the drawing and match its layer.
Set Color: Use this button to manually specify a color for the newly created polyline.
Width: Specify the width of the newly created polyline.
Linetype: Use the ''Select'' button to manually specify a linetype for the newly created polyline.
Select Code: This option allows you to set the layer, color and linetype of a new polyline by using the
properties assigned to a Field to Finish eld code. The eld code is selected from an existing Field Code table
(.FLD) le that has been previously specied in the Point Defaults dialog box.
Prompts
For A 3D Polyline With A Specied Elevation At Each Vertex:
Command: 3dp
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]: screen pick a point
Interpolate/Object/<Elevation> <0.00>: 150.50
Z: 150.50
[Arc/Close/Distance/Follow/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: screen pick a point
Percent/Ratio/Elevation/Degree/Object/Osnap[.]/Next point or elevation<Interpolate>: 155.25
Z: 155.25, Hz dist: 324.63, Slope dist: 324.66, Slope: 1.5% Ratio: 68.3:1
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: screen pick a point
Percent/Ratio/Elevation/Degree/Object/Osnap[.]/Next point or elevation<Interpolate>: 148.12
Z: 148.12, Hz dist: 272.88, Slope dist: 272.98, Slope: -2.6% Ratio: -38.3:1
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter
Command:
For A 3D Polyline With Interpolated Elevations At One or More Vertices:
Command:3dp
[Continue/Extend/Follow/Options/<Pick point or point numbers>]: screen pick a point
Interpolate/Object/<Elevation> <0.00>: 91.73
Z: 91.73
[Arc/Close/Distance/Follow/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: screen pick a point
Percent/Ratio/Elevation/Degree/Object/Osnap[.]/Next point or elevation<Interpolate>: screen pick a point
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 283
This point elevation will be interpolated upon completion.
Percent/Ratio/Elevation/Degree/Object/Osnap[.]/Next point or elevation<Interpolate>: screen pick a point
This point elevation will be interpolated upon completion.
Percent/Ratio/Elevation/Degree/Object/Osnap[.]/Next point or elevation<Interpolate>: screen pick a point
This point elevation will be interpolated upon completion.
Percent/Ratio/Elevation/Degree/Object/Osnap[.]/Next point or elevation<Interpolate>: 94.44
Z: 94.44, Hz dist: 79.39, Slope dist: 122.88, Slope: 0.8% Ratio: 122.4:1
[Arc/Close/Distance/Extend/Follow/Line/Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>]: press Enter
Command:
Note that the difference between this and the previous example is that, instead of entering an elevation for
each vertex, we are screen picking another new vertex. Each time we neglect to enter an elevation we are notied
that, ''This point elevation will be interpolated upon completion.'' After we specify ''94.44'' as the elevation of the
last vertex, the slope of the interpolated segments is calculated using the total elevation change and the total length
of all interpolated segments. Now, the elevations of all vertices can be determined and set based on the resulting
slope.
Options and SubMenu Options
Once all settings have been specied and the ''OK'' button is picked, the options shown below are available from the
Command: line. To issue any of these options, simply type in the capitalized portion of the Option at the Command:
line and press Enter. The default option is always shown between angle brackets < Default >.
When starting a new 3D Polyline, the initial set of options assist you in setting the X,Y location of the rst
vertex:
Continue: This option allows you to select an existing polyline to which you'd like to add more line or arc
segments. When prompted to ''Select a polyline to continue or extend:'', you may pick anywhere on the existing
polyline and the new segment will begin at the ending vertex nearest your cursor. New line or arc segments can
be added by screen-picking or using the options at the Command: line. Once nished adding segments, they are
automatically joined to the original polyline.
Extend: This option gives you many ways to lengthen or shorten an existing polyline using the abbreviated
SubMenu options shown below. Some of these options create additional segments at the end of the existing polyline
and some allow you to change the length of the ending segment of the polyline. When prompted to ''Select a
polyline to continue or extend:'', you may pick anywhere on the existing polyline and the ''Extend'' will occur at
the ending vertex nearest your cursor. Once nished Extending, the new segments are automatically joined to the
original polyline.
[I / R / L / S / T / A / B / E / U / X / Help / <Enter or Pick Distance>]
I - Input mode - This option toggles the distance input between feet & inches (will prompt rst for feet,
then prompt again for inches) and decimal feet.
R - Right rotate - From the ending vertex, turns the pointer 90-degrees to the right and then prompts for a distance.
L - Left rotate - From the ending vertex, turns the pointer 90-degrees to the left and then prompts for a distance.
S - Switch direction - From the ending vertex, turns the pointer 180-degrees and then prompts for a distance.
T - Total distance - Prompts you to ''Enter total distance (100.00)'' and displays the current length of the segment in
parentheses. If a number smaller than the current distance is entered, this option will shorten the existing segment.
If a number larger than the current distance is entered, this option will lengthen the existing segment. This option is
also affected by the Skip Inline Vertices for Extend setting in the Polyline 3D Options dialog box. If ''Skip Inline
Vertices for Extend'' is enabled, then the existing vertex will be dissolved when lengthening a segment. If the setting
is not enabled, then the existing vertex will be left intact and an additional segment will be created inline.
A - Angle change - From the ending vertex, prompts you to ''Enter Angle (ddd.mmss):'' to turn the pointer by a
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 284
specied angle and then prompts for a distance.
B - Bearing/Azimuth/Turned/Deection - From the ending vertex, this option allows you to set the pointer direction
by specifying an Angle. The Angle format is Qdd.mmss and there are a variety of ways to use the ''Q'' value to
specify the Angle. See here for more.
E - Extend to edge - Extends current segment to another line or entity
U - Undo - Undo last action
X - Quit extend mode - Returns to normal 3D Polyline Draw mode
Help - Displays the descriptions of the Extend options
Enter or Pick Distance - Distance to extend the current segment
Follow: This option allows you to trace all or a portion of an existing polyline. After issuing the ''Follow''
option, you are prompted to ''Select the polyline to Follow:'' and then to ''Specify the rst follow point:''.
After snapping to a starting point on the polyline, you are asked whether you want to ''Interpolate follow
vertices elevations?''. After answering Yes or No, you will then be prompted to specify the ''Last follow point or fol-
low distance:'' where you can snap to another point on the polyline or type in a distance to trace the existing polyline.
Options: This will display the Polyline 3D Options dialog box.
Pick Point or Point Numbers: This is the default prompt for the command. From here you can set a new
polyline vertex by screen picking, entering coordinates in X,Y format or entering a point number from the
associated Coordinate (.CRD) le.
After setting its location, the next set of options help you calculate the elevation of the initial vertex:
Interpolate: This option will set the elevation of the vertex by calculating the slope between other vertices
of known elevation.
Object: This option allows you to ''Select an elevation label or a point on a polyline:'' to set the elevation of the
vertex. Elevation labels such as ''FFE: 124.85'' or ''Z: 124.85'' can be selected.
Elevation: This is the default option and prompts you to type in the elevation for the vertex.
For subsequent 3D Polyline vertices, several options are added to assist you in setting the X,Y location of
each new vertex:
Arc/Line: New polyline segments can be either an Arc or a Line segment. If the last polyline segment
drawn was a LINE, then the ''Arc'' option will be shown as an available option; however, if the last polyline segment
drawn was an ARC, then the ''Line'' option will be available.
When in the ''Arc'' mode, there are many additional SubMenu options available to you for creating an arc
segment within the new polyline. The options are generated directly from the standard CAD version of the PLINE
command and include Radius Point, Radius Length, Arc Length, Chord and Second Point (Point on Curve).
Close: This option will create a new Line or Arc segment back to the starting vertex of the polyline and re-
sults in a closed polyline.
Distance: This option allows you to rst enter a distance for the new Line segment and then to specify the
direction using one of three methods: Cursor, Line or Angle.
Cursor - This method will draw the polyline segment in the direction of your cursor position.
Line - This method prompts you to select a line or polyline segment to which it will draw a parallel segment.
Angle - This method prompts you for an Angle to determine the direction of your new polyline segment. The Angle
format is Qdd.mmss and there are a variety of ways to use the ''Q'' value to specify the Angle. See here for more.
Undo: Undo the last drawn polyline segment.
After setting subsequent vertices, several more options are added to help you calculate the elevation of each
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 285
new vertex:
Percent: This option allows you to specify the slope in Percent format (3%) from the previous vertex.
Ratio: This option allows you to specify the slope in Ratio format (for 3:1, enter 3) from the previous vertex.
Degree: This option allows you to specify the slope angle in decimal degree format (dd.dddd) from the previous
vertex.
Osnap[.]: Using the [.] will toggle Running OSNAP settings ON or OFF.
Angle Entry Methods
The Angle format is Qdd.mmss where: Q=quadrant/angle, d=degrees, m=minutes and s=seconds.
The Quadrant/Angle can be specied as:
1=NE (NorthEast)
2=SE (SouthEast)
3=SW (SouthWest)
4=NW (NorthWest)
5=AZ (AZimuth)
6=AL (turned Angle-Left)
7=AR (turned Angle-Right)
8=DL (Deection angle-Left)
9=DR (Deection angle-Right)
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw
Keyboard Command: 3DP
Prerequisite: None
Circle
This command allows you to draw a circle.
Prompts
1 Pick center point or point number or [3P/2P/TTR]: pick point or specify option
3P: This option draws a circle based on three points on the circumference.
2P: This option draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter.
TTR-Tangent, Tangent, Radius: This option draws a circle with a specied radius tangent to two objects.
2 Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: enter a value
Sometimes more than one circle matches the criteria specied in the command. The circle whose tangent points are
closest to the selected points is drawn.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: SCIRCLE
3 Point
This command draws an arc between three points. The rst point is the PC, the second is a point on the arc and the
third is the PT. The points can either by picked on-screen or specied by point number.
Prompts
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 286
Pick PC point or point numbers: 101 (For point number 101.)
Pick Second point or point number: 102
Pick PT point or point number: 103
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 3PA
Prerequisite: None
PC, PT, Center
This command draws an arc between the PC point, radius point and PT point. The points can either by picked
on-screen or specied by point number. Given these points, the arc can be drawn clockwise or counterclockwise.
The program shows one direction and asks if it is correct. If you need the arc to go the other direction, enter No.
Prompts
Pick PC point or point number: 101
Pick Radius point or point number: 102
Pick PT point or point number: 103
Is the direction of this arc correct ? No/<Yes>: N
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: pca
Prerequisite: None
PC, PT, Tangent
This command ts a curve between beginning and end points (PC, PT) given a tangent-in. The tangent-in is
specied by selecting a line entity. The PC and PT points are screen picked.
Prompts
Pick tangent-in: pick a line entity
Pick point PC: pick a point
Pick point PT: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: tangpcpt
Prerequisite: Tangent line
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 287
PC, Radius, Chord
This command draws an arc, given the PC point, radius length, chord length and chord bearing. The PC point can
either by picked on-screen or specied by point number. Given these points, the arc can be drawn clockwise or
counter-clockwise. The program shows one direction and asks if it is correct. If you need the arc to go the other
direction, enter No.
Prompts
Radius of Arc <-40.00>: 500
PC Start Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Chord bearing or chord endpoint (<Bearing>/Point)? Press Enter
Enter Bearing (Qdd.mmss) <90.0000>: 145.1041 (for NE 45d10'41'')
Chord Length <200.46>: 200
Is this arc in the correct direction (<Yes>/No)? Press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: srcb
Prerequisite: None
PC, Radius, Arc Length
This command draws an arc given the PC point, radius length, and arc length. The PC point can either by picked
on-screen or specied by point number. Given these points, the arc can be drawn clockwise or counterclockwise.
The program shows one direction and asks if it is correct. If you need the arc to go the other direction, enter No.
Prompts
Pick PC Point or point number: pick a point
Pick Radius point or point number: pick a point
Arc length <5.00): 150
Is this arc in the correct direction (<Yes>/No)? press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: pra
Prerequisite: None
2 Tangents, Radius
This command ts a curve between two tangent lines by entering a known radius. It prompts for the radius and then
prompts to pick points on the two tangent lines.
Prompts
Radius of Arc <300.000>: press Enter
[nea] Pick Point on 1st Tangent Line:pick a point
[nea] Pick Point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 2tanlin
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 288
2 Tangents, Arc Length
This command ts a curve between two tangent lines and a known arc length. It prompts for the arc length then pick
the P.I. (intersection of tangent lines) and points on the two tangent lines.
Prompts
Arc Length <100.00>: press Enter or enter distance
[int on] Pick P.I. of curve: pick intersection of tangent lines
[nea on] Pick pnt on 1st Tangent Line: pick a point
[nea on] Pick pnt on 2nd Tangent Line: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 2tanlal
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
2 Tangents, Chord Length
This command ts a curve between two tangent lines and a known chord length. It prompts for the chord length,
the P.I. and points on the two tangent lines.
Prompts
Chord Length <100.00>: press Enter
[int on] Pick P.I. of curve: pick a point
[nea on] Pick Point on 1st Tangent Line: pick a point
[nea on] Pick Point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 2tanlcl
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
2 Tangents, Mid-Ordinate
This command ts a curve between two tangent lines and a known middle ordinate. It prompts for the middle
ordinate length, the Point of Intersection and points on the two tangent lines.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 289
Prompts
Middle Ordinate <50.00>:press Enter
[int on] Pick P.I. of curve: pick a point
[nea on] Pick Point on 1st Tangent Line: pick a point
[nea on] Pick Point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 2tanlmo
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
2 Tangents, External
This command ts a curve between two tangent lines and a known external secant distance. It prompts for the P.I.
and points on the two tangent lines then the external distance.
Prompts
[int on] Pick P.I. of curve: pick a point
[nea on] Pick Point on 1st Tangent Line: pick a point
[nea on] Pick Point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick a point
External Distance <50.00>: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 2tanlex
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
2 Tangents, Tangent Length
This command ts a curve between two tangent lines and a known curve tangent length. It prompts for the tangent
length, P.I. and points on the two tangent lines.
Prompts
Tangent Length <50.00>:press Enter
[int on] Pick P.I. of curve: pick a point
[nea on] Pick Point on 1st Tangent Line: pick a point
[nea on] Pick Point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 2tanltl
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
2 Tangents, Degree of Curve
This command ts a curve between two tangent lines by entering a known degree of curve. It prompts for the degree
of curve and then prompts to pick points on the two tangent lines.
Prompts
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 290
Degree of Curve (ddd.mmss) <5.0000>: press Enter
Dene by [C]hord or [A]rc length <A>: press Enter
[nea on] Pick Point on 1st Tangent Line: pick a point
[nea on] Pick Point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 2tanldo
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
2 Tangents, Through Point
This command creates an arc by tangents in/out plus a pass through point on the arc.
Prompts
Pick tangent-in: pick a line entity
Pick tangent-out: pick another line entity
Pick point on the arc: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 2tanpt
Prerequisite: 2 tangent lines
Tangent, PC, Radius, Arc Length
This command draws a curve from a perpendicular tangent line with a known radius and arc length. It prompts for
the radius, the arc length and then to pick the P.C. start point of the curve (endpoint of previously drawn tangent
line) and a point along the tangent line.
Prompts
Precede radius with - sign for curve to the left.
Radius of Arc <15.00>: 55
Arc Length <25.00>: 30
PC Start Point ?
Pick point/<point Number>: 14
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Desc
14 4869.06 4390.3 10.00
[nea on] Pick point along perpendicular tangent line: pick a point on tangent line
Radius Point Coordinates: (4355.2 4911.4 0.0)
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: sral
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 291
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
Tangent, PC, Radius, Tangent Length
This command draws a curve from a perpendicular tangent line with a known radius and tangent length. It prompts
for the radius, the tangent length and then to pick the P.C. start point of the curve and a point along the tangent line.
Prompts
Precede radius with - sign for curve to the left.
Radius of Arc <300.0000>: press Enter
Tangent Length <236.0000>: press Enter
PC Start Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
[nea on] Pick point along perpendicular tangent line: pick a point
(5270.39 4840.36 0.0)
Radius Point Coordinates: (5251.37 4534.71 0.0)
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: srtl
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
Tang, PC, Radius, Chord Length
This command draws a curve from a perpendicular tangent line with a known radius and chord length. It prompts
for the radius, the chord length and then to pick the P.C. start point of the curve and a point along the tangent line.
Prompts
Precede radius with - sign for curve to the left.
Radius of Arc <300.0000>: press Enter
Chord Length <25.0000>: press Enter
PC Start Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
[nea on] Pick point along perpendicular tangent line: pick a point
(5142.38 4911.57 0.0)
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 292
Radius Point Coordinates: (5221.51 5209.63 0.0)
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: SRCL
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
Tang, PC, Radius, Delta Angle
This command draws a curve from a perpendicular tangent line with a known radius and delta angle. It prompts for
the radius, the delta angle and then to pick the P.C. start point of the curve and a point along the tangent line.
Prompts
Precede radius with - sign for curve to the left.
Radius of Arc <300.00>: press Enter
Enter Delta Angle <90.00>: press Enter
PC Start Point ?
Number/<Pick point>: pick a point
[nea on] Pick point along perpendicular tangent line: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: srda
Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
Compound or Reverse
This command draws a compound or reverse off an existing curve. It prompts whether the curve is reverse or
compound, for the P.C. start point (endpoint of an existing arc) and the known radius. Then the user selects the
other known from the choices of tangent length, arc length, chord length or delta angle and enters that value. This
command can be confused and malfunction if there is another entity such as a point symbol at the P.C. (If this
happens, freeze the PNTMARK layer or temporarily erase the point symbol.)
Reverse curve off an existing curve
Prompts
[end on] Select ARC at PC Start point of the curve: pick a point
Type of curve [<Compound>/Reverse]: press Enter
Enter the Radius: 300
Dene arc method [Tangent/Chord/Delta/<Length>]: press Enter
Enter the arc length: 236
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 293
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: srcr
Prerequisite: Tangent arc should be drawn before execution
3-Radius Curve Series
This command is used to best t a series of three curves with different radii between 2 tangents. The ''Offsets from
the Tangents'' is the distance perpendicular to the tangent from both ends of the second curve.
Offset from the tangents is the x value
Prompts
Please pick two tangents...
Pick rst tangent: pick a point
Pick second tangent: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: 3curves
Prerequisite: Two tangents
Best Fit Curve
This command draws an arc between two endpoints with a radius that is derived from sampling points. Least-
squares is used to nd the radius for the closest arc that passes through these points. After specifying the points,
the program calculates the best-t arc and shows the results in the dialog show here. You can toggle each point for
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 294
whether to include in the calculations. When a point is toggled off for processing, it is not used to calculate the
best-t arc but the residual is still reported. Use the Remove button to remove a point both from calculation and
reporting. You can also modify the radius. After picking OK, the arc is drawn in the current layer and there is a
report.
Prompts
Starting Point ?
Pick point or point number: 46
Ending point ?
Pick point or point number: 50
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? press Enter
Select Carlson Software Points.
Select objects: W Use window to select a group of points. After selecting all the points to sample, end selection by
pressing Enter.
Best Fit Arc
Coordinate File> C:\sample\PLAT.CRD
Source Coordinates
Point# Northing Easting Residual
46 4573.478 5647.688 -0.059
47 4618.180 5667.428 0.177
49 4669.960 5671.494 -0.211
50 4707.039 5664.138 0.093
Residuals Standard Deviation: 0.148
Average Residual: 0.135
Circle Center: 4657.233,5516.647
Radius: 155.580
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: btcrv
Prerequisite: Points for sampling should be drawn before execution.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 295
Curve Calc
This Curve Calculator command displays a dialog box with a series of edit boxes that are lled in with the values of
a curve. You can input two known values and the program calculates the other values. One of the known values must
be the radius or the delta angle. The 3 Points option allows you to simply select three on-screen point locations. All
of the elds will immediately be lled in after the picking of the third point. Optionally, you can also input point
numbers from a coordinate le.
Roadway or Railroad: Allows you to choose which type of curve you would like information on. Toggling between
the two, after data is entered, will reveal different values.
Select: Allows you to select an arc from the drawing. The information for the selected arc is displayed in the dialog
box.
3 Points: Allows you to specify three points on the screen to dene an arc. The information for this dened arc is
displayed in the dialog box.
Plot: Allows you to plot the currently dened arc in the drawing.
Clear: Clears all edit boxes in the dialog.
Prompts
Curve Calculator dialog Enter at least two values, as described above
The dialog box rst pops up without any data in the elds. The above dialog graphic is a result of entering in the
radius and the arc length values of a known curve, then the Enter or Tab key.
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: curvecalc
Prerequisite: None
Spiral Curve
This command plots a spiral curve. The user must provide the P.I. (point of intersection), the length of spiral and the
radius length of the simple curve. The command will plot a symmetrical spiral or a spiral in or spiral out (choose
the S option for the rst prompt if you only want to plot a spiral out). If you have an unsymmetrical spiral then
plot a spiral in using the T or P option then use the S option to plot the spiral out. The command plots a polyline
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 296
to represent the spiral as line segments at the resolution specied by the user. You can use the Calculate Offsets,
Station Polyline/Centerline or Offset Point Entry commands, found in the Centerline menu, to calculate points and/or
stations and offsets from the spiral.
Prompts
Spiral method [TS/ST/<PI>] press Enter
PI Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick intersection of tangent lines
TS Direction point (tangent in) ?
Pick point or point number: pick point along tangent in line
ST Direction point (tangent out) ?
Pick point or point number: pick point along tangent out line
Tangent in direction= N 56d24'9'' E Azimuth= 56d24'9''
Tangent out direction= S 65d9'1'' E Azimuth= 114d50'59''
Overall Delta= 58d26'50''
Point calculating distance resolution <10.0>: press Enter
Length of Spiral <350.0>: press Enter
Radius of simple curve (precede with - sign if curve to left) <954.93>: 954.93
Degree of curve: 6d0'0''
Theta of Spiral= 0.18325951 (radians) 10d30'0'' (dd.mmss)
Distance along tangent line from TS to SC= 348.82
Distance offset from tangent line to SC= 21.33
(k) Shift along tangent line of PC= 174.80
(p) Shift offset from tangent line of PC= 5.34
Distance from PI to TS= 712.00
North(Y) of TS= 4583.08 East(X) of TS= 4244.46
North(Y) of SC= 4758.34 East(X) of SC= 4546.82
North(Y) of Offset PC= 4675.36 East(X) of Offset PC= 4393.02
[P]lot spiral or
[I]ntermediate distances for staking (deection angle calc) <P>: press Enter
Point calculating distance resolution <10.0>: 5 Enter the resolution at which you would like the line segments of
the representative polyline plotted.
North(Y) of Radius Pt= 3879.96 East(X) of Radius Pt= 4921.44
<press [Enter] for symmetrical spiral out>/[D]elta of simple curve: press Enter If you want a spiral in only
enter D then input the delta angle of the curve.
Simple Curve Delta= 37d26'50'' Length of Arc= 624.12
North(Y) of CS= 4805.10 East(X) of CS= 5158.11
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Arc
Keyboard Command: spiral
Prerequisite: For a symmetrical spiral, draw the tangent in and tangent out lines. For spiral in or out only, draw the
tangent line in or out.
Draw Box Around Text
This command draws a rectangle to enclose the selected text. This rectangle is drawn as a polyline in the current
layer. The options dialog has Gap Factor which controls the offset from the text to the polyline. The factor is
relative to the text size. The Round Corners option llets the corners of the box.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 297
Prompts
[Options/<Select text>]: pick the text to box or type O for the options dialog.
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Text
Keyboard Command: txtbox
Prerequisite: Text entity
White Solid Behind Text
This command draws a white solid rectangle to highlight the selected text. The display order for the solid is set be-
hind the text and the solid is drawn on the current layer. This command is only useful when the text itself is not white.
Prompts
Select text: pick the text to highlights
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Text
Keyboard Command: txtwhite
Prerequisite: Text entity
Trim Linework Through Text
This command trims linework that crosses text. After selecting the text to trim with and entering a buffer offset
around the text, the program automatically nds any crossing linework and trims.
Prompts
Select text: pick the text to trim with
Enter gap <0.5>: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Text
Keyboard Command: txttrim
Prerequisite: Text entity and linework
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 298
Insert Symbols
This command inserts symbols from the symbol library into the drawing. The symbol library may be edited using
the Edit Symbol Library command.
In the Insert Symbols options dialog, choose a symbol by entering the Symbol Name or by picking the Select
button which brings up the Select Symbol dialog. The default Symbol Category choices are Points, Trees and Map
Symbols. You may select a category by choosing the Symbol Category dropdown list. Within each category, use the
scroll bar to view all of the symbols. The Prompt For Rotation option will add a prompt for each symbol rotation.
The Rotate By Centerline option will prompt to select linework and then rotate the symbols to make them parallel
to the nearest linework. The Symbol Rotation Angle is applied relative to horizontal of the current twist screen or to
the nearest linework angle when Rotate By Centerline is active. The Erase Existing Symbols options apply if you
specify a symbol location that already has a symbol on it. There are also settings for the symbol layer name and
size. The Prompt For Attributes option applies to symbols that have attribute denitions. When active, this option
will prompt for the attribute values in a dialog.
The Select Code option is an alternate way of selecting the symbol by Field-to-Finish code name. The Field-to-
Finish code table to use is set with the Points->Point Defaults command. Besides setting the symbol name, the code
lookup method also sets the layer. For example, instead of picking a symbol like SPT5 and setting the layer name to
''TRAVERSE'' for an iron pin symbol, the select code method would set the symbol name and layer by picking the
code name/description of ''IPS''/''Iron Pin Set'' from the code list. So the code method is a way to handle drawing
standards.
After the options dialog, the program prompts at the Command line for the symbol locations. The locations can
be specied by picking points, specifying point numbers in the current coordinate (.CRD) le or by entering the
northing and easting. Using the Select entities option, symbols can also be placed on arcs, faces, points, text, lines
and polylines. Selecting the Enter coords option allows you to insert the symbol by entering a easting, northing and
elevation in x,y,z order.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 299
Appears at start of command
Appears when Select (symbol) is chosen
Select entities dialog box
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 300
Prompts
Insert Symbols dialog Choose parameters and click OK
Options/Select entities/Enter coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: pick a point
Options/Select entities/Enter coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 5-10 Inserts symbols at points 5-10 from
the current coordinate le.
Options/Select entities/Enter coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: S
Insert Symbols dialog
Select arcs, faces, points, text, lines and polylines. select objects
Options/Select entities/Enter coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Symbols
Keyboard Command: ptsym
Prerequisite: None
Insert Multi-Point Symbols
This command allows you to locate symbols using multiple insertion points. Up to three insertion points can be
dened for an individual symbol. When dening only two insertion points for a particular symbol, the symbol will
be scaled and rotated. With three insertion points dened, the symbol is rotated and scaled in both the X and Y
directions. The two point insertion denition will aid in the drawing of tree symbols with a specic drip line width.
For instance, a surveyor could locate the tree and then locate the drip line, two shots for each tree, and allow the
program to size the tree symbol accordingly so that the map will have various tree symbol sizes that reect the actual
eld conditions.
The multiple insertion points are dened in the Field to Finish codes. The Insert Multi-Point Symbols command
reads the Field to Finish code table and nds all of the codes with multi-point symbol denitions. Then you can
select from these codes for the symbol to draw. Both the two and three point insertion denitions can aid with the
insertion of concretes and buildings symbols during nal drawing preparations and design phases of a project.
Here are the various steps to dene two point and three point insertion point symbols. First, you must decide on
the symbol to use for the desired code, as well as the specic placement points for the symbol. Once a symbol has
been chosen, open the desired symbol drawing. To do this, identify the symbol name and then locate the symbol
by its drawing name under the SUP sub-directory found under the Carlson installation directory. Next, determine
the placement points for the symbol. As shown below, the placement points for the BLD code symbol, which will
be explored later in this section, were determined by identifying X and Y values of the desired placement points by
using the id command and specifying the end points of the lines.
Next, the symbol insertion points must be dened in the Field to Finish code table (.FLD) le. To do this, open your
FLD le by choosing Draw Field to Finish under the Survey pulldown. Then select a particular code from the list
of codes displayed in the Field to Finish dialog box. Edit it by highlighting the code and picking the Edit button, or
dene a new code with the Add button. Either choice will display the Edit Field Code Denition dialog. In the Edit
Code Denition dialog, choose the desired symbol for the code by pressing the Set Symbol button and selecting
the desired symbol. Next, select the Symbol Pts button. This brings up a dialog called Dene Symbol Placement
Points. Here is where you dene the symbol by three points. You do this by entering an X and Y coordinate and
a description for the symbol. Enter the X and Y values for each placement point into the appropriate elds. The
description elds are used as the prompts when placing the symbol in the drawing. A two insertion point symbol is
dened in the same way. An example is the Symbol Pnts denition for the code TREE. The placement points for the
Tree code symbol were determined by opening the symbol drawing and nding the X and Y values at the insertion
points. The center of the large circle was chosen for Point 1 and the East Quadrant was chosen for point 2. In both
cases osnaps were used in picking the points.
Now that we have the codes dened, let's go through the Insert Multi-Point Symbol command and see the results.
The command starts with a dialog that lists all the codes with Multi-Point Symbols dened. At this point you can
select the symbol to draw. The symbol size applies only to using one point to place the symbol. When two or more
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 301
points are used, the symbol is scaled to t the points. Let's look at the BLD code three point insertion denition.
Shown below are three points that represent a building pad. We want the building to be exactly the same dimensions
dened by the point locations.
The three point PAD and the tree with drip line examples follow. We start by specifying the building pad codes.
Prompts
Insert Multi-Point Symbol Dialog
Choose a symbol to draw. In this example, the Pad symbol is a 3 point multi-symbol.
Specify LTFNT PAD point.
Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 15
Specify LT REAR PAD point.
Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 16
Specify RT REAR PAD point.
Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 17
Insert another BLD symbol [<Yes>/No]? N
Insert Multi-Point Symbol Dialog
Choose a symbol to draw. In this next example, the Tree symbol is a 2 point multi-symbol. Now specify the location
of the trunk and the drip line by point number.
Specify Trunk Location point.
Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 1
Specify Drip Line Point.
Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 13
Insert another TREE symbol [<Yes>/No]? N
From the Field to Finish routine
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 302
Two points symbol placement for TREE
Three points for building PAD
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 303
Two point tree with drip line
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Symbols
Keyboard Command: multsym
Prerequisite: Field to Finish le (.FLD) with codes dened with Multi-Point Symbols
Hatch
This command allows you to ll an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern.
The Hatch command rst denes the boundaries of the area you want to hatch, either by computing a region or
polyline boundary from a specied point within an enclosed area, or by using selected objects as boundaries. It then
lls the boundaries with a hatch pattern or a solid color. You can create an associative hatch, which updates when
its boundaries are modied, or a nonassociative hatch, which is independent of its boundaries. You can preview any
hatch and adjust the denition.
Due to the large number of combinations of geometry that you can hatch, editing hatched geometry can produce
unexpected results. In this event, delete the hatch object and rehatch.
The Boundary Hatch dialog box denes the boundary, pattern type, pattern properties, and attributes for hatch
objects. Use the Quick Tab to work with hatch patterns and quickly create a hatch. Use the Advanced Tab to
customize how TakeOff creates and hatches boundaries.
1 Under the Quick Tab you dene the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.
Type: This eld sets the pattern type.
Pattern: This eld lists the available predened patterns. The six most recently used predened patterns appear
at the top of the list. The Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Predened.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 304
[...]: This button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box, in which you can view preview images for all
predened patterns at once to help you make a selection.
Swatch: This eld displays a preview of the selected pattern. You can click the swatch to display the Hatch
Pattern Palette dialog box.
Custom Pattern: This eld lists the available custom patterns. The six most-recently used custom patterns appear
at the top of the list. The Custom Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Custom.
Angle: This eld species an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS.
Scale: This option expands or contracts a predened or custom pattern. This option is available only if you set
Type to Predened or Custom.
Relative to Paper Space: This option scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Using this option, you
can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout. This option is available only from a
layout.
Spacing: This option species the spacing of lines in a user-dened pattern. This option is available only if you
set Type to User Dened.
ISO Pen Width: This option scales an ISO predened pattern based on the pen width you choose. This option is
available only if you set Type to Predened and set Pattern to one of the available ISO patterns.
2 Under the Advanced Tab you dene how TakeOff creates and hatches boundaries.
Island Detection Style: This option allows you to specify the method for hatching objects within the outermost
hatch boundary. If no internal boundaries exist, specifying an Island Detection style has no effect. Because you can
dene a precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use the Normal style.
The illustrations that accompany each style show how the program hatches a group of three nested boundary objects
in each case.
Normal
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 305
Hatches inward from the outer boundary. If the program encounters an internal intersection, it turns off hatching
until it encounters another intersection. Thus, areas separated from the outside of the hatched area by an odd number
of intersections are hatched, and areas separated by an even number of intersections are not.
Outer
Hatches inward from the outer boundary. The program turns hatching off if it encounters an internal intersection.
Because this process starts from both ends of each hatch line, the program hatches only the outermost level of the
structure and leaves the internal structure blank.
Ignore
Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.
Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause hatching discrepancies.
The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area
while you specify points or select objects to dene your boundaries.
Object Type: This option allows you to specify whether to retain boundaries as objects, and species the object
type TakeOff applies to those boundary objects. Object Type controls the type of the new boundary object. TakeOff
creates the boundary as a region or a polyline. This option is available only if you select Retain Boundaries.
Retain Boundaries: This option adds the temporary boundary objects to the drawing.
Boundary Set: This eld denes the set of objects TakeOff analyzes when dening a boundary from a specied
point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to dene a boundary. By default,
when you use Pick Points to dene a boundary, the program analyzes all objects visible in the current viewport. By
redening the boundary set, you can disregard certain objects when dening boundaries without having to hide or
remove those objects. For large drawings, redening the boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because
the program examines fewer objects.
New: This option prompts you to select the objects that dene the boundary set. When you choose this option,
the dialog box temporarily closes, prompting you to select objects. TakeOff includes only the hatchable objects you
select when it constructs the new boundary set. TakeOff discards any existing boundary set, replacing it with the
new boundary set dened by the objects you select. If you don't select any hatchable objects, the program retains
any current set. Until you exit the Hatch command or create a new boundary set, TakeOff ignores objects that do
not exist in the boundary set when you dene your boundaries using Pick Points.
Island Detection Method: This option allows you to specify whether to include objects within the outermost
boundary as boundary objects. These internal objects are known as islands.
Flood: This option includes islands as boundary objects.
Ray Casting: This option runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then traces the boundary
in a counterclockwise direction, thus excluding islands as boundary objects.
3 In the Boundary Hatch dialog box, you set the options the dene the selection set.
Pick Points: This option determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area. How TakeOff
detects objects using this option depends on the selected Island Detection Method on the Advanced tab. For example,
if the Island Detection Method is Flood, the program detects objects within the outermost boundary as islands and
includes them in the boundary denition. The Island Detection Style (which you also set on the Advanced tab) then
determines how to hatch the detected islands. When you choose Pick Points, the dialog box closes temporarily, and
the program prompts for point specication.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 306
Select Objects: This option allows you to select specic objects for hatching. The dialog box closes temporarily,
and the program prompts you for object selection. When you dene your boundaries using Select Objects, the
program does not detect interior objects automatically. You must select the objects within the selected boundary
to hatch those objects according to the current Island Detection Style (which you set on the Advanced tab). Each
time you choose Select Objects, the program clears the previous selection set. While selecting objects, you can
right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last or all selections, change
the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch.
Remove Islands: This option removes from the boundary denition any of the objects that the program detects
as islands when you use Pick Points. You cannot remove the outer boundary.
View Selections: This option temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently dened boundaries
with the hatch settings that you last previewed. This option is unavailable when you have not yet specied points or
selected objects.
Inherit Properties: This option hatches specied boundaries using the hatch properties of one object. After
selecting the associative hatch object whose properties you want the hatch to inherit, you can right-click in the
drawing area and use the shortcut menu to toggle between the Select Objects and Pick Internal Point options to
create boundaries.
Double: For user-dened patterns, this option draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees to the original
lines, creating a crosshatch. This option is available only if you set Type to User Dened on the Quick tab.
Associative: This option creates an associative hatch, meaning that the hatch is updated when you modify its
boundaries.
Nonassociative: This option creates a nonassociative hatch, meaning that it is independent of its boundaries.
Preview: This option temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently dened boundaries with
the current hatch settings. This option is not available when you have not yet specied points or selected objects to
dene your boundaries.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: BHATCH
Raster Image
This command allows you to manage raster images.
1 The Image Manager dialog box lists all the image les attached to the current drawing. You can view the parame-
ters and details for selected images. You can attach new image les and detach, locate, reload, and unload existing
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 307
images.
List View: This button lists the image denitions attached to the drawing. Each image name appears only once
regardless of how many times you attach (insert) the image. You can sort the list of images by name, status (loaded,
unloaded, or not found), size, type (TIFF, for example), date, or the saved path and le name. By default, TakeOff
displays the list alphabetically by image name.
To select multiple images, hold down SHIFT or CTRL while selecting items.
To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a specic column, click that column's heading.
To change the width of the column, drag the line between the column headings to the right or left. The program
saves and restores the settings when you reopen the dialog box.
To change an image name, select it and then click it again, or select it and then press F2. You cannot edit names
of images that reside in external references (xrefs). Image names can include up to 255 characters and can contain
letters, digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or TakeOff. The image name
can be identical to the le name, but changing the image name does not change the le name.
Tree View: This button displays all the image denitions and the levels of nesting of images within xrefs. The top
level of the tree view shows images that you attached directly to the drawing, images nested in block references, and
the names of externally referenced drawings containing images. The names of the images attached to the externally
referenced drawings appear nested within the drawing at the next tree level. To insert a copy of an already attached
image, select it, and then choose Attach.
Tree view lists the image names only (not le names) and lists the image name just once, regardless of how many
times you attach (insert) the image.
You can edit an image name by selecting it and then clicking it again, or by selecting it and then pressing F2.
However, you cannot select more than one image at a time.
Attach: This option displays the Select Image File dialog box. When you unload and then reload an image, the
program draws that image on top. Images remain loaded or unloaded from one drawing session to the next.
Detach: This option removes the selected image denitions from the drawing database and erases all the associ-
ated image objects from the drawing and from the display.
Reload: This option loads the most recent version of an image or reloads an image that was previously unloaded.
Reloading does not control whether the image is displayed, but it ensures display of the most current image.
Unload: This option unloads image data from working memory without erasing the image objects from the
drawing. It is recommended that you unload images no longer needed for editing to improve performance. An
unloaded image cannot be displayed or plotted. You can selectively load and unload individual images from a
working list of images associated with the drawing le.
Details: This option opens the Image File Details dialog box, which displays the image name, saved path, active
path, le creation date and time, le size and type, color system, color depth, width and height in pixels, resolution,
default size in units, and a preview image.
Image Found At: This eld shows the path of the selected image. If you select multiple images, this eld remains
blank. The path shown is the actual path where the image resides.
Browse: This option opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard le selection dialog box). The path you
select appears under Image Found At.
Save Path: This option stores the new path information. Press ESC while editing the path to restore the old path.
If the program cannot nd the referenced image in the new path, the image's status changes to Not Found. If you
do not choose Save Path after editing the path, the program uses the original image path the next time you load the
drawing.
2 Under the Image dialog box, you can attach an image.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 308
3 In the Image dialog box, you must rst identify the image and the path.
Name: This eld identies the image you have selected to attach, either from the Select Image File dialog box
(an unattached image) or from the list of previously attached images. To add another instance of an image le that
is already attached, select the image name from the list and choose OK.
Browse: This option opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard le selection dialog box). If Show
Preview is selected, the program displays a preview of the selected le.
Retain Path: This option saves the path of the image le with the image denition. If Retain Path is not selected,
only the image name is saved and TakeOff searches the Support File Search Path.
4 Under Insertion Point, you must specify the insertion point for the selected image. Specify On-Screen is the
default. The default insertion point is 0,0.
Specify On-Screen: This option directs input to the command line or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen
is cleared, enter the insertion point in X, Y, and Z.
X: This eld sets the X coordinate value.
Y: This eld sets the Y coordinate value.
Z: This eld sets the Z coordinate value.
5 Under Scale, you must specify the scale factor of the selected image. Specify On-Screen directs input to the
command line or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The default
scale factor is 1.
6 Under Rotation, you must specify the rotation angle of the selected image. If Specify On-Screen is selected, you
may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value
on the command line. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default
rotation angle is 0.
Prerequisite: Raster image
Keyboard Command: IMAGE
Place Image by World File
Function
This function allows you to insert Geo-Referenced TIF les into AutoCAD drawings. This process requires the
presence of an accompanying TFW le. The TFW le contains information about the location and scaling of the
actual raster image TIF le. This eliminates the guesswork in inserting, moving, and rotating raster images to the
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 309
project area. You begin by selecting the TFW or JGW le to process. If the related TIF le is present in the same
directory, the image will be inserted into the proper coordinates.
Prompts
Select World File: choose existing .TFW or .JGW le
Keyboard Command: geotiff
Prerequisite: None
Draw Standard Item
Overview Draw Standard Items
The CAD Standards feature in Carlson Software is a collection of commands allowing you to create, manage and
draw standardized Symbols, Linework and Annotation entities that are stored in a Standards Database le (.sdb).
All of the commands can be found under the Item sub-menu of the Draw menu or on the Draw Item toolbar.
The Draw Item toolbar, shown below, has icons for the Draw Item, Set Data Source and Exit Drawing
Standards commands. In addition, these commands are all accessible from the Draw menu. The
Item Standards Manager command is only accessible through the Draw menu.
The Item Standards Manager command launches the Standards Draw Manager palette. This palette has
a right-click shortcut menu allowing you to Insert, Modify, Delete and otherwise manage Items stored in the
Standards Database le (.sdb). Other than the shortcut menu, this palette is identical to the Standards Draw palette.
The rst time you launch the Item Standards Manager in a drawing session, you will be prompted to
''Select Drawing Standards Data Source''. Carlson includes two Standards Database les (.sdb) with the in-
stallation: the Carlson NCS SurveyCivil.sdb which is a fully populated database based on the US National
CAD Standard and empty.sdb which is a functional, but empty, database with which to start a new Standard
Database. Updates and additions to the .sdb les provided by Carlson Software will be posted to this website:
www.carlsonsw.com/cadstandards.html.
Using the Draw Standard Item command, the CAD User can access the Standards Draw palette and place
standardized Symbols, Linework and Annotation in the drawing. Prior to adding Standard Items to the drawing, the
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 310
CAD User will load the appropriate Standards Database le (.sdb) using the Set Data Source command.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Draw > Draw to Standard
Keyboard Command: Varies
Prerequisite: Varies
Draw Standard Item
The Draw Standard Item command activates the Standards Draw palette. This palette is essentially the same as
the Standards Draw Manager palette except that it does not have the Standards management commands available
in the right-click shortcut menu.
The rst time you launch the Draw Standard Item command in a drawing session, a dialog box will prompt you
to ''Select Drawing Standards Data Source''.
The Standards Data Source can be loaded by specifying a Universal Data Link le (.udl) or a Standards Database le
(.sdb). Carlson includes two Standards Database les (.sdb) with the installation: the Carlson NCS SurveyCivil.sdb
which is a fully populated database based on the US National CAD Standard and empty.sdb which is a functional,
but empty, database with which to start a new Standard Database. Updates and additions to the .sdb les provided
by Carlson Software will be posted to this website: www.carlsonsw.com/cadstandards.html.
After specifying the data source, the Draw Standard Item command is automatically issued. If you wish
to Draw a Standard Item in your drawing at this time, you can specify the Standard Item to be drawn either by
typing its QuickKey in at the Command: Line or by selecting a similar Standard Item currently existing in the
drawing.
If you do not know the QuickKey of the Standard Item you wish to draw and do not have a similar Item in
the drawing, press the Enter key to nish the command and return to the Command: prompt. You can now access
the Standards Draw palette by hovering over the Draw Standard Item icon on the Draw Item toolbar.
By default, the Standards Draw palette automatically hides within the Draw Standard Item icon. Hover-
ing over this icon will display the palette. Once displayed, the palette may be dragged to a new location and
re-sized. Since the palette is fully transparent, it can be ''parked'' in the drawing area and not interfere with other
drafting tasks. The palette is also ''transparent'' with regards to command execution in that other commands are able
to run while the palette remains open and available for use.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 311
Items in the Standards Draw palette are organized into Folders and given commonly referred-to, descriptive
names. Dening these Items and other management tasks are done through the Items Standards Manager.
A Standard Item can include any one or a combination of 3 types of entities: Symbols, Linework and An-
notation (with or without a Leader). Next to each Item in the palette is an icon graphic that indicates the type of
entities dened for that Standard Item.
This icon, is shown for a Standard Symbol Item.
This icon, is shown for a Standard Linework Item.
This icon, is shown for a Standard Annotation Item.
You may also see one of these icons representing a combination of entity types:
Because many Standard Items will be sized based on the scale of
the drawing, it is important to set the ''Horizontal Scale'' in the Carlson Drawing Setup dialog box before drawing
Standard Items into your drawing. If Standard Items are drawn and scaled according to the ''Horizontal Scale'', the
''Horizontal Scale'' setting is saved with the entity. In other words, changes to the ''Horizontal Scale'' of the drawing
will not affect existing entities. This is true of Symbols, Annotation and Leader components.
There are 3 methods you can use to place Standard Items in your drawing:
Select Object - This option is enabled when starting the Draw Item command from either the Draw Item
toolbar or the Draw menu. When prompted at the Command: Line, you can select any Standard Item that has
been previously drawn in the drawing and will then be able to place a new instance of that Item.
Quick Key - This option is enabled when starting the Draw Item command from either the Draw Item toolbar
or the Draw menu. When prompted at the Command: Line, type in the QuickKey shortcut for the Standard
Item you wish to draw.
Standard Draw palette - After the Data Source has been loaded, you can access the Standard Draw palette
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 312
by hovering over the Draw Item icon.
To Draw a Standard Item using the Item menu in the palette, navigate through and left-click the Standard Item to be
drawn. Assuming the Standard Item has a Symbol, Linework and Annotation component, you will see, generally,
the following series of prompts. Note that, depending on the various options that have been set for each Item, the
prompts may vary.
Start Point: Using the left-mouse button, select the location for the rst Symbol component. This point will also be
the rst endpoint of the Linework for this Item. If you do not wish to have a Symbol inserted at this point and only
wish to draw the associated Linework, hold the ALT key when specifying the Start Point to proceed on to the next
Endpoint.
Rotation Angle: If you have placed a Symbol, specify its Rotation Angle. If you have set the Symbol Rotation
option to ''Fixed'', you will not be prompted for this Rotation Angle.
If you Insert a Symbol having non-Constant attribute values, you will be prompted through a dialog box to dene
the attribute values:
Halfwidth/Width/CLose/LEngth/Open/Undo/Arc Endpoint of line: Select the next Endpoint of the line segment
or specify one of the other Polyline command options before picking the Endpoint. If you do not want to draw a
Linework segment at this time, press Enter to skip this step and continue on to place Annotation.
Rotation Angle: Specify the Rotation Angle for the next Symbol. Again, depending on the Symbol Rotation options
you have set, you may or may not receive this prompt.
The prompts will continue to alternate between ''Rotation Angle'' and ''Endpoint of Line'' until you have reached the
end of your Linework. When you have specied your nal Endpoint and the Rotation Angle of your nal Symbol,
right-click to continue on to place Annotation.
Displacement/Identify or <\P>key in alternative text: This is the prompt for your rst Annotation entity.
The Item's Label is used for default Text content. To override the default Text, simply type in the alterna-
tive Text at the Command: Line. If you need a 2nd line of Text, use ''\P'' to designate the 2nd line of text.
For instance, entering ''TWO STORY\PWOOD FRAME'' would result in the following Text string in the
drawing: Also, left-clicking on any other Text entity will update your current Text
value to match the Text that was selected. And, holding the ALT key while left-clicking on any other Text entity
will add the value of that Text entity as a 2nd line of Text to your current Text value.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 313
Once you have nished entering the Text, press Enter to nish Text entry. Left-click in the drawing to
place the Text.
Rotation angle/Identify or <\P>key in alternative text <0.0000>: Type in a Rotation Angle for the text or
left-click to specify the desired angle.
Leader Start Point: Left-click to specify the location of the arrowhead part of the Leader. If you do not want a
Leader, you can right-click to skip the Leader and proceed on to place the next Text entity.
Next Leader Point: Left-click to specify the next Endpoint of the Leader. You will continue being prompted for
''Next Leader Point:'' until you right-click or Enter to nish drawing the Leader.
After you have nished drawing the rst Annotation entity (with or without a Leader), you will continue to be
prompted to place additional Annotation and Leaders. Right-click or press Enter to nish the command.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Draw > Draw To Standard
Keyboard Command: drawitem
Prerequisite: Populated Standards Database le (.sdb)
Set Drawing Standards Data Source
The Set Drawing Standards Data Source command allows you to browse to and associate a Standards database
le with your active drawing. Doing so enables you to use the Draw Item command to place Standard Items into
your drawing.
This command will accept selection of either a Standards Database le (.sdb) or Universal Data Link le
(.udl) that points to the .sdb le. Carlson includes two Standards Database les (.sdb) with the installa-
tion: the Carlson NCS SurveyCivil.sdb which is a fully populated database based on the US National CAD
Standard and empty.sdb which is a functional, but empty, database with which to start a new Standard
Database. Updates and additions to the .sdb les provided by Carlson Software will be posted to this website:
www.carlsonsw.com/cadstandards.html.
This command is available from the Draw menu and the Draw Item toolbar as shown
below. Pulldown Menu Location(s): Draw > Draw to Standard
Keyboard Command: setitem
Prerequisite: Standards Database File (.sdb)
Item Standards Manager
The Item Standards Manager command launches the Standards Draw Manager palette. This palette has
a right-click shortcut menu allowing you to Insert, Modify, Delete and otherwise manage Items stored in the
Standards Database le (.sdb). Other than the shortcut menu, this palette is identical to the Standards Draw palette.
The rst time you launch the Item Standards Manager in a drawing session, a dialog box will prompt you
to ''Select Drawing Standards Data Source''.
The Standards Data Source can be loaded by specifying a Universal Data Link le (.udl) or a Standards
Database le (.sdb). The .udl le is a le that ''points'' to an .sdb le. CAD Managers may prefer to allow users
access to the database through the Universal Data Link le (.udl). This allows the CAD Manager to limit access to
the Standards Database le (.sdb) by storing it in a non-shared location. The CAD Manager can set ''read only'' or
''read/write'' permissions for the .udl le so as to limit editing access to the protected data stored in the .sdb le.
Carlson includes two Standards Database les (.sdb) with the installation: the Carlson NCS SurveyCivil.sdb
which is a fully populated database based on the US National CAD Standard and empty.sdb which is a functional,
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 314
but empty, database with which to start a new Standard Database. Updates and additions to the .sdb les provided
by Carlson Software will be posted to this website: www.carlsonsw.com/cadstandards.html.
After specifying the data source, the CAD Standards feature is launched in ''CAD Management'' mode and
the Draw Standard Item command is automatically issued. If you wish to place a Standard Item in your drawing at
this time, you can simply continue the Draw Standard Item command as usual. However, if you need to perform
any management tasks to the database, use the Enter key to nish the command and return to the Command:
prompt. You can then access the Standards Draw Manager palette by hovering over the Draw Standard Item
icon on the Draw Item toolbar.
By default, the Standards Draw Manager palette automatically hides within the Draw Standard Item
icon. Hovering over this icon will display the palette. Once displayed, the palette may be dragged to a new location
and re-sized. Since the palette is fully transparent, it can be ''parked'' in the drawing area and not interfere with other
drafting tasks. The palette is also ''transparent'' with regards to command execution in that other commands are able
to run while the palette remains open and available for use.
Once displayed, right-clicking inside the Standards Draw Manager displays a menu containing the Standards
Database management commands.
New Item Folder
Use this command to create a new folder or sub-folder in which to store Standard Items.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 315
Name: The common name for Items in this Folder. The Folder Name is limited to 32 characters.
Description: Additional descriptive information about this Folder. The Folder Description is limited to 32 charac-
ters.
Characteristic: Distinguishing characteristic of this Folder. The Folder Characteristic is limited to 32 characters.
The ''Name'', ''Description'' and ''Characteristic'' of each new Folder can be organized and named using any consistent
naming convention that makes sense for your ofce. The dialog also allows you to specify a ''Prex'' and ''Sufx''
for both the ''Description'' and ''Characteristic'' of each new Folder. The ''Prex'' and ''Sufx'' values shown in the
example above have been set as parentheses ( ) and brackets [ ]. You can set the Default values for ''Prex'' and
''Sufx'' in Item Database Preferences.
Label: This is a read-only value dened by combining the Folder Name, Description and Characteristic.
Quick Key: This value is not used or set for Folders.
Scale: This read-only value displays the current ''Horizontal Scale'' as specied in Carlson Drawing Setup.
Import Symbol Library
This command allows you to import a collection of blocks into the database as Standard Symbol Items. Default
Scale, Attribute Properties and Rotation can be set for all symbols when importing to the database. For this
command, all blocks should be saved out to individual Drawing les (.dwg) in a common blocks folder. And,
contrary to accepted CAD practice, the blocks should be drawn on their standard layer instead of layer 0.
For instance, according to our standard, symbol SSWR-08 should reside on layer V-SSWR-STRC. If I in-
tend to import this symbol into the database using the Import Symbol Library command, the symbol SSWR-08
should reside in its own drawing le named SSWR-08.dwg and should be drawn on layer V-SSWR-STRC in that
Drawing le.
Except as noted above with regard to layers, all Symbols should be drawn according to the guidelines set
forth in the Best Practices section of this document.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 316
Scale: Because the default X, Y and Z scale factors correspond to the current ''Horizontal Scale'' setting in Carlson
Drawing Setup, these values should all be set to ''1'' when dening Standard Symbol Items to the database.
Select the ''Fixed'' options for X, Y and Z Scales if you wish to manage the Symbol size solely by these values. Do
NOT select the ''Fixed'' options if you want the Symbol size to vary depending on the ''Horizontal Scale'' setting of
the drawing.
Properties: For blocks having dened attributes, use the settings here to Allow Moving, Rotating and Masking of
attributes.
Rotation: Default Rotation for Symbols can be specied as ''First'', ''Fixed'' and ''Previous''. The ''First'' option will
prompt for a Rotation angle for the rst Symbol and then will automatically Rotate all subsequent Symbols to the
same angle as the rst. The ''Fixed'' option will use the Rotation angle as specied for the original Symbol. The
''Previous'' option will prompt for the Rotation angle of each Symbol that is placed, but will default to the Rotation
angle of the previously placed Symbol.
Browse for Folder: Browse to and select the folder containing the Symbols to be imported. After importing
Symbols from a folder, the database will automatically add the folder to the list of ''Additional Support Paths'' as
specied in the Item Database Preferences. In order to insert the Symbol into other drawings in the future, the
source drawing le containing the original Symbol/Block denition must be found in a Support Path.
Export Layer Library
Use this command to export all layers and associated properties (color, linetype, etc.) to a Layer Library le (.la).
Export Field to Finish
Use this command to export all Standard Items to corresponding eld codes in a Field to Finish le (.d).
Insert Item
Use this command to dene a Standard Item to the Standards Database le (.sdb). If you wish to store the new
Standard Item in a Folder, you must rst select and highlight the Folder, then right-click and select Insert Item
from the shortcut menu. If you do not want the new Standard Item saved in a Folder, simply right-click anywhere in
the palette and select Insert Item. Once Items have been created, you can simply ''drag and drop'' Items from one
Folder to another as needed.
A Standard Item, when dened to the database, can include any one or a combination of 3 types of entities:
Symbols, Linework and Annotation (with or without a Leader). If more than one of any type (2 Symbols, for
instance) are selected, you will be prompted to select the ONE entity to be used for the Standard Item denition.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 317
Prior to Inserting a new Standard Item, all entities should be drawn according to the guidelines set forth in
the Best Practices section of this document.
Select Objects: Select the entities that comprise the new Standard Item to be dened.
Name: The common name for this Item. The Item Name is limited to 32 characters.
Description: Additional descriptive information about this Item. The Item Description is limited to 32 characters.
Characteristic: Distinguishing characteristic of this Item. The Item Characteristic is limited to 32 characters.
The ''Name'', ''Description'' and ''Characteristic'' of each new Item can be organized and named using any consistent
naming convention that makes sense for your ofce. The dialog also allows you to specify a ''Prex'' and ''Sufx'' for
both the ''Description'' and ''Characteristic'' of each new Item. The ''Prex'' and ''Sufx'' values shown in the example
above have been set as parentheses ( ) and brackets [ ]. You can set the Default values for ''Prex'' and ''Sufx'' in
Item Database Preferences.
Label: This is a read-only value dened by combining the Item Name, Description and Characteristic.
Quick Key: This is a nickname for the Standard Item. The Quick Key is used with the Draw Item command and
allows you to specify the Standard Item to be drawn from the Command: line.
Scale: This read-only value displays the current ''Horizontal Scale'' as specied in Carlson Drawing Setup.
Symbol tab
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 318
Scale: Because the default X, Y and Z scale factors correspond to the current ''Horizontal Scale'' setting in Carlson
Drawing Setup, these values should be set to ''1'' when dening Standard Symbols to the database.
Select the ''Fixed'' options for X, Y and Z Scales if you wish to manage the Symbol Size solely by these values. Do
NOT select the ''Fixed'' options if you want the Symbol Size to vary depending on the ''Horizontal Scale'' setting of
the drawing.
Properties: For blocks having dened attributes, use the settings here to allow Moving, Rotating and Masking of
attributes.
Rotation: Default Rotation for Symbols can be specied as ''First'', ''Fixed'' and ''Previous''. The ''First'' option will
prompt for a Rotation angle for the rst Symbol and then will automatically Rotate all subsequent Symbols to the
same angle as the rst. The ''Fixed'' option will use the Rotation angle as specied for the original Symbol. The
''Previous'' option will prompt for the Rotation angle of each Symbol that is placed, but will default to the Rotation
angle of the previously placed Symbol.
Linework tab
Linetype: This read-only value reects the Linetype of the Linework element. Using a ''ByLayer'' value allows for
maximum exibility in the future.
Scale and Width: The Scale and Width settings shown here reect the Linetype Scale and Width of the entity
selected. These values can be modied and can also be specied as ''Fixed''.
Select the ''Fixed'' option for ''Scale'' if you wish to manage the Linetype Scale of the entity solely by this
value. Do NOT select the ''Fixed'' option if you want the drawing's LTSCALE setting to control the Linetype Scale
of each entity.
Note: The ''Fixed'' option here applies to the Current Entity Linetype Scale and not the global LTSCALE
that we are accustomed to changing based on the scale of the drawing. For the LTSCALE to behave in its traditional
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 319
fashion, it requires the Current Entity Linetype Scale value be set ''Fixed'' to ''1''.
Select the ''Fixed'' option for ''Width'' if you wish to manage the Width of the entity solely by this value.
Do NOT select the ''Fixed'' option if you want the Width of the linework to be scaled by the ''Horizontal Scale'' of
the drawing.
Closed: Select this option if the Linework is to be forced to be a ''Closed'' polygon.
Offset Items - Insert: This button can be used to draw multiple Linework Items parallel to one another. When
dening Offsets, you will Insert one Linework Item to the database and then specify the other Linework Items to be
drawn parallel to the original Item. The Offset Linework Items do not have to be drawn at the correct Offset. After
each Offset Item has been selected, you will be prompted to specify the Offset distance from the original Item.
For instance, in addition to dening separate Standard Items for ''Back of Curb'', ''Gutter Line'' and ''Edge of
Pavement'', you might also dene a Standard Item named ''Standard 30'' Curb'' that combines all three Standard
Items.
First, use the Insert Item command and select the ''Back of Curb'' Item as the rst Item.
Next, pick the Offset button and select a ''Gutter Line'' Item that has been previously drawn in the drawing.
You'll be prompted at the Command: Line to specify the Offset Distance from the original Item. This value can also
be added or changed in the dialog box. The Offset Distance for the ''Gutter Line'' would be 0.5, representing a 0.5'
wide curb.
Next, pick the Offset button again and select an ''Edge of Pavement'' Item that has been previously drawn in
the drawing. Again, you'll be prompted at the Command: Line to specify the Offset Distance from the original
Item. The Offset Distance for the ''Edge of Pavement'' would be 2.5, representing a 2.5' wide curb with gutter.
After being added as Offsets, both of these values should be marked as ''Fixed'' because their Offset values
should not change based on the ''Horizontal Scale'' of the drawing.
Offset Items - Delete: After selecting an Offset, pick this button to delete the Offset from the Standard Item.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 320
Annotation tab
Style: This read-only value reects the Text Style of the Annotation element.
Height and Width Factor: The Height and Width Factor settings shown here reect the Text Height and Width
Factor of the entity selected. While both the Height and Width Factor can be modied, the Width of the text is a
read-only, computed value. You also have the option of specifying the Height as ''Fixed''.
Select the ''Fixed'' option for ''Height'' if you wish to manage the Height of the entity solely by this value.
Do NOT select the ''Fixed'' option if you want the Height to vary depending on the ''Horizontal Scale'' setting of the
drawing.
Rotation: Default Rotation for Annotation can be specied as ''First'', ''Fixed'' and ''Previous''. The ''First'' option
will prompt for a Rotation angle for the rst Annotation entity and then will automatically Rotate all subsequent
entities to the same angle as the rst. The ''Fixed'' option will use the Rotation angle as specied for the original
Annotation entity. The ''Previous'' option will prompt for the Rotation angle of each Annotation entity that is placed,
but will default to the Rotation angle of the previously placed entity.
Leadered: Select this option if you wish to have the ability to place a Leader with each instance of your Annotation.
The Leader option is only available if you selected both a Text/MText entity and a Leader entity when Inserting the
Item to the database. The read-only value to the right reects the Dimension Style of the Leader entity selected.
Mask: Select this option if you wish to have each instance of Annotation ''masked'' using a WIPEOUT entity. If
selected, the ''Height Offset'' option becomes active allowing you to control the size of the WIPEOUT.
Modify Item
Right-click on any Item or Item Folder and select Modify Item to make changes.
Delete Item
Right-click on any Item or Item Folder and select Delete Item to remove the Item from the database.
Item Database Preferences
Right-click in the palette and select this command to manage Item Description and Characteristic Prex and Sufx
values and also to Add or Delete ''Additional Support Paths''.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 321
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Draw > Draw to Standard
Keyboard Command: congItem
Prerequisite: Populated Standards Database le (.sdb)
Item Standards Manager - Best Practices
Once Standard Items have been dened to your Standards Database, many properties of those Items cannot be
modied. For instance, if you have dened an Annotation entity having a Left justication to your database and
later realize it should have Center justication, it cannot be changed. To correct it, you must rst delete the Standard
Item from the database, create a Text entity with the correct justication and then re-Insert the Item to the database.
Therefore, it is recommended that you create a ''Source Drawing'' to help you plan, set up and dene the
Standard Items to be added to your Standards Database.
The Source Drawing should contain small clusters of entities organized according to the Standard Items to be
dened. For each Standard Item to be dened, all of the Symbol, Linework and Annotation entities comprising that
Item should be drawn or inserted into the Source Drawing.
The Symbols, Linework and Annotation entities used to dene Standard Items should be drawn at 1:1 and
should have Color and Linetype set to ''ByLayer''. These entities should reside on their standard layers and be
drawn with the appropriate text styles, text heights, text justication, linetypes and dimension styles. Only one type
of Standard entity can be dened for a Standard Item. For instance, only one Symbol can be dened per Standard
Item.
Before drawing or inserting the components of the Standard Items into the Source Drawing, set the ''Hori-
zontal Scale'' in Carlson Drawing Setup to 1:1. This ensures that new ''Horizontal Scale'' settings will be applied
correctly when these Standard Items are drawn into new drawings.
A representative sample of a Source Drawing is shown below. A few notes:
A new Item named ''Exis Sanitary Sewer'' will be created and will have a Symbol, Linework and Annotation
component. The Symbol resides on layer V-SSWR-STRC. The Linework resides on layer V-SSWR-PIPE.
The Text and Leader reside on layer V-SSWR-TEXT. Text/MText entities and their associated Leaders are
considered ONE Annotation entity when dening to the standards database.
Notice that the Symbol does not have to be positioned at the endpoint of the Linework when dening as
Standard Items. The Symbol will automatically be placed at each vertex of the Linework when it's drawn into
the drawing.
All Text except for that on layer V-SSWR-LABL is drawn with a height of 0.08 and is Left justied. The Text
on layer V-SSWR-LABL has a height of 0.12 and is Center justied.
There are 3 different Symbols to be dened as Items to the database. One may be named, ''Exis Manhole'',
another ''Exis Cleanout'' and the other ''Exis SS Manhole''. All 3 Symbols reside on layer V-SSWR-STRC.
Note that the same block, the ''MH'' Symbol, will be dened to the database twice as a component of two
different Standard Items - ''Exis Sanitary Sewer'' and ''Exis Manhole''.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 322
When being dened, Symbol entities should be drawn at 1:1 (plotted text height).
The Layer of the Symbol entities will be dened to the Standards database; however, because the Color and
Linetype of the Symbol were dened as ''ByLayer'', when placed into a new drawing on the dened layer, the new
Symbol Item will follow the Color and Linetype settings of that layer in the new drawing.
Symbols can be dened with or without a Leader.
Symbols and their associated Leaders are considered ONE Annotation entity when dening to the standards
database.
Make sure to use the QLEADER command to ensure Symbol and Leader associativity.
The Dim Style of the QLEADER entity will be dened to the Standards database.
Standard Symbol components can be dened having a ''Fixed'' size or the size can be scaled according to
the ''Horizontal Scale'' of the drawing.
If Symbol components are drawn and scaled according to the ''Horizontal Scale'', the ''Horizontal Scale'' set-
ting is saved with the entity. In other words, changes to the ''Horizontal Scale'' of the drawing will not affect existing
entities. This is true of Symbols and Leader components.
When dening Symbols/Blocks, it is helpful to include a WIPEOUT entity behind the Symbol so that un-
derlying Linework is hidden without changing its geometry.
Symbol/Block denitions can contain Text and/or Attributes.
When creating a Standard Symbol Item containing Attributes, you can select the options for ''Allow Move''
and ''Allow Rotate'' to easily move and rotate each Attribute independently of the other block entities.
Using Attributes inside of Symbol/Block denitions allows for additional data storage in each block. For in-
stance, when Attributes are used, data that is valuable to a GIS can be stored with each Block/Symbol.
When dening Attributes inside Symbol/Block denitions, set the ''Constant'' ag to keep the Default Value
for the Attribute. If the ''Constant'' ag is not set, you will be prompted for a new Attribute Value each time the
Symbol is inserted.
When dening Attributes inside Symbol/Block denitions, use the pipe symbol '''' to provide a drop-down
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 323
box with optional Attribute Values. For instance, a Sanitary Sewer Structure may have a label dened by an
Attribute having Default Value, ''MHCOSS''. Note that this does not work if the ''Constant'' ag is set for the
attribute.
Upon insertion, you are given a dialog prompting you to Dene Attribute Values by selecting from the available
options:
The Layer of the Linework entities will be dened to the Standards database; however, because the Color and
Linetype of the Linework entities were dened as ''ByLayer'', when placed into a new drawing on the dened layer,
the new Linework Item will follow the Color and Linetype settings of that layer in the new drawing.
To manage Linetype Scale using the LTSCALE command, the Scale value of ''1'' must be set to ''Fixed''
during the Insert Item or Modify Item commands.
Using the Offset option, you have the ability to draw multiple Linework Items parallel to one another.
Annotation elements may be dened using DTEXT or MTEXT commands but will always be placed as MTEXT
entities in the drawing.
When being dened, Text or MText entities should be drawn at 1:1 (plotted text height).
The Text Style, Height and Justication of the Text or MText entities will be dened to the Standards database.
The Layer of the Text or MText entities will be dened to the Standards database; however, because the
Color and Linetype of the Annotation were dened as ''ByLayer'', when placed into a new drawing on the dened
layer, the new Annotation Item will follow the Color and Linetype settings of that layer in the new drawing.
Annotation elements may be dened with Leaders or without.
Text/MText entities and their associated Leaders are considered ONE Annotation entity when dening to the
standards database.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 324
Make sure to use the QLEADER command to ensure Annotation and Leader associativity.
The Dim Style of the QLEADER entity will be dened to the Standards database.
Standard Annotation components can be dened having a ''Fixed'' Height or the Height can be scaled ac-
cording to the ''Horizontal Scale'' of the drawing.
If Annotation components are drawn and scaled according to the ''Horizontal Scale'', the ''Horizontal Scale''
setting is saved with the entity. In other words, changes to the ''Horizontal Scale'' of the drawing will not affect
existing entities. This is true of Text and Leader components
Exit Drawing Standards
The Exit Drawing Standards command closes the Standards Draw palette and the Standards Database le (.sdb).
This command can be accessed from the Draw menu and the Draw Item toolbar as shown below.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Draw > Draw To Standard
Keyboard Command: exititem
Prerequisite: Active Standards Database le (.sdb)
Draw By Example
This command prompts you to pick an entity and then starts the appropriate draw command to begin creating another
one of the selected type of entity. The properties such as layer and color of the original entity are used for creating
the new one. For example, if you pick a polyline, this command will start the Pline command. Likewise if you pick
text, this command will begin the Text command using the layer and style of the selected text.
Prompts
Pick Object for Command: pick an entity
The remaining prompts depend on the type of the selected entity.
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw
Keyboard Command: drawbyex
Prerequisite: Entities
Sequential Numbers
This command draws a text label and then increments to the next value for additional labels. The label can
optionally be placed inside a circle, square or other symbol. The size of the symbol adjusts to t the label size.
In the dialog, specify the Text label. The text Prex and Sufx are optional. The Text Size Scaler is the text
size in paper units that gets multiplied by the horizontal scale from Drawing Setup to set the text drawing size. The
Justication setting controls the text justication mode. When Auto Increment Labels is checked, the value entered
in the Text eld will be incremented by the value in the Increment eld. The Group Label With Symbol option
will make a group of the label text and symbol. When Prompt for Alignment Every Time is checked, you will be
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 325
prompted for the alignment angle for each label, otherwise the alignment from the rst label is automatically used
for the other labels.
The label is drawn by combining the Prex, Text and then Sufx into one text label. When placing multiple labels,
the text portion of the label will increment by the value in the Increment eld. For example, this command could
be used to quickly label a series of boundaries by setting the Prex to ''Perimeter'' and the Text eld to the starting
number. Then pick points inside the boundaries to label as ''Perimeter 1'', ''Perimeter 2'', etc.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 326
Prompts
Select Symbol for Numbers dialog select your symbol
Sequential Numbering Options dialog make your choices
Pick point at beginning of label: pick a point
Pick point for label alignment: pick a point to the right of the rst point
Pick point at beginning of label: press Enter to end the routine
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw
Keyboard Command: numbers
Prerequisite: None
Arrowhead
This command draws an arrowhead at the end of the selected line or polyline.
Prompts
Enter the arrow size <5.00>: press Enter
Pick a line or pline to add arrow: pick a line or polyline
Pick a line or pline to add arrow (Enter to End): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw
Keyboard Command: arrowhd
Prerequisite: None
Curve - Arrow
Curve - Arrow can be used to draw a section of contour line or create leader pointer lines. Curve - Arrow draws
a Bezier curve through user specied points. After choosing endpoints, each time an intermediate points is picked
the curve will be redrawn through all the points. There is an option to draw an arrowhead at the starting point. This
routine also has a Zorro option which creates a Z leader curve. The Draw Text option will make the program prompt
after the leader points for a text label to place at the end of the leader.
Prompts
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 327
Pick a starting point: pick a point
Pick an ending point: pick a point
Pick an intermediate point (U to Undo): pick a point
Pick an intermediate point (U to Undo): press Enter
Examples of Curve - Arrow
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw
Keyboard Command: carrow
Prerequisite: None
Leader With Text
This command will draw a straight leader between two points, with an arrow at one end and optional text at the
other. The options dialog is displayed at the start. To skip this dialog, turn off the Show Options On Startup toggle.
Then on the command line, entering O for Options will show the options dialog. To quickly change the label size,
enter S for Size at the command line.
In the options dialog, Text Position chooses between automatically placing the label next to the leader end point
or picking the label position. For Text Justication, you can set a specic justication or use the Automatic option
which uses either Left or Right justication depending on whether the leader end is left or right of the leader start.
Text Rotation chooses between having the label horizontal to the current view or prompting for the label angle.
The Hide Drawing Under Labels option uses a wipeout to hide drawing entities behind the leader labels. There are
settings for the layer and style for the label.
The Text Input can either be entered with prompts after the leader points at the command line or selected from a
prepared list. The prepared list is a way to quickly create leaders for common labels. To prepare the label list, use
the Add, Edit and Remove buttons. Use the Save and Load buttons to save the preset labels to a .CALL le.
Prompts
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 328
Options/Size/Pick Arrow Location: pick a point
Text location: pick a point
Text: Leader With Text
Text: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Leader
Keyboard Command: LDR
Prerequisite: None
Special Leader
This command draws a curved leader line like the one shown. With this routine you can also choose to enter in
multiple lines of text, not just a single line. The arrow size is determined by the Symbol Plot Size setting, found in
the Drawing Setup command. On the command line, selecting Ofor Options will provide you with more customizing
choices to make.
Prompts
Options/Pick Arrow Location: pick a point Pick point where leader arrow will start.
Text location: pick a point
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 329
Text: Monument
Text: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: sleader
Prerequisite: None
Callout Leader
This command draws a triangle shaped leader and a label inside a box. There is a dialog to enter the label string,
style, size and colors. The leader is drawn in the current layer.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 330
Prompts
Callout Leader Settings dialog
Pick callout point: pick a point for point of leader
Pick textbox corner: pick a point for position of label
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Leader
Keyboard Command: callout ldr
Prerequisite: None
Bold Curve Leader
This command draws a thick curved leader with an arrowhead. This leader is created by picking three points.
Prompts
Starting point: pick a point
End of arrowhead: pick a point
Pick end point of leader: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Leader
Keyboard Command: site leader
Prerequisite: None
Flow Leader
This command draws a wavy leader line with an arrowhead. The size of the arrowhead is set by the symbol size
scaler in Drawing Setup.
Prompts
Starting point: pick a point for arrow end of leader
Ending point: pick a point for tail end of leader
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw > Leader
Keyboard Command: owline
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 331
Boundary Polyline
This is a streamlined analog of the AutoCAD command Boundary. The Carlson version is faster and works in many
cases where Boundary fails. Boundary Polyline supports a snap tolerance, which means that you may specify a
maximum gap to close when creating a closed polyline.
To create closed polylines from any existing linework, simply select all entities you would like to use and specify
desired snap tolerance. Then click inside openings you would like to trace and the routine will generate correspond-
ing closed polylines. The duplicate polylines are detected and not created, so that clicking more than once in the
same area does not change anything. These new polylines are always created in the current layer. Layers of the
original linework do not matter.
Prompts
Select polylines: pick an entities to be used
Enter snap tolerance or press Enter for none:
Pick an internal point: pick the points to enclose
These three polylines are created from original linework by clicking at shown locations
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw
Keyboard Command: boundpl
Prerequisite: Entities
Shrink-Wrap Entities
This command creates a closed polyline which encloses a given set of entities. The resulting polyline is created in
the current layer. The program works on either point entities or polylines. For points, the program creates a closed
polyline through the points around the perimeter of the area dened by the points. For polylines, the shrink-wrap
polyline follows the outside border of the selected polylines. The polylines that are processed have to be connected
to be shrink-wrapped. The snap tolerance is the maximum gap that will be joined to make the closed polyline. For
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 332
open polylines, as in the bottom gure, the Gap method works better, as it jumps across the gaps and connects the
end points.
Prompts
Shrink-wrap across gaps or bounded linework only [<Gap>/Bound]? G
Shrink-wrap layer <FINAL>:
Select points and linework to shrink-wrap.
Select objects: select entities to process
Reading points... 46
Inserted 46 points.
Inserted 23 breakline segments
Perimeter reduction level 0-3 (0-None, 3-Most) <2>: 2
Reduce Perimeter Pass: 1 Removed: 5
Reduce Perimeter Pass: 2 Removed: 3
Reduce Perimeter Pass: 3 Removed: 4
Reduce Perimeter Pass: 4 Removed: 2
Reduce Perimeter Pass: 5 Removed: 1
Reduce Perimeter Pass: 6 Removed: 0
Create 2D or 3D Polyline [<2D>/3D]? 2D
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw
Keyboard Command: swplines
Prerequisite: Entities
Polyline by Nearest Found
This command draws a polyline by connecting points using a nearest found method. The points to connect
can be specied either by entering point numbers or picking POINT entities on the screen. The nearest found
method draws a polyline by starting at one of the points and then connecting to the closest of the remaining points.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 333
Then a remaining point that is closest to one of the polyline end points is added until all points are part of the polyline.
Prompts
Polyline By Nearest Found dialog
Select point from screen or by point number (<Screen>/Number)? press Enter
Select points.
Select objects: pick points
Pulldown Menu Location: Draw
Keyboard Command: plnear
Prerequisite: Points
Drawing Block
This command allows you to create a block denition from objects you select.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 334
1 In the Block Denition dialog box, you must rst name the block. The Name eld, names the block. The name
can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used
by Microsoft Windows and Carlson Survey for other purposes. The block name and denition are saved in
the current drawing. You cannot use DIRECT, LIGHT, AVE RENDER, RM SDB, SH SPOT, and OVERHEAD as
valid block names.
2 Under Base Point, you must specify a base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
X: This eld species the X coordinate value.
Y: This eld species the Y coordinate value.
Z: This eld species the Z coordinate value.
Pick Point: This option allows you to temporarily close the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base
point in the current drawing.
3 Under Objects, you specify the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete the selected
objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block.
Retain: This option retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create the block.
Convert to Block: This option converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you create
the block.
Delete: This option deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block.
Select Objects: This option dismisses the Block Denition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects
for the block. When you nish selecting objects, press Enter to redisplay the Block Denition dialog box.
Quick Select: This option displays the Quick Select dialog box, which denes a selection set.
Objects Selected: This option displays the number of selected objects.
4 Under Preview Icon, you determine whether to save a preview icon with the block denition and specify the source
of the icon.
Do Not Include an Icon: This option species that no icon is created.
Create Icon from Block Geometry: This option creates a preview icon to be saved with the block denition
from the geometry of the objects in the block.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 335
5 In the Block Denition dialog box, you must describe and link the block.
Insert Units: This eld species the units to which the block is scaled when it is inserted.
Description: This eld species the text description associated with the block denition.
Hyperlink: This button opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box, which you can use to associate a hyperlink with
the block denition.
Menu Location: Draw
Prerequisite: Drawing entities.
Keyboard Command: BLOCK
Write Block
This command allows you to write objects or a block to a new drawing le.
The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on whether nothing is selected, a single
block is selected, or objects other than blocks are selected. For example, if you have a single block selected when
you open the Write Block dialog box, the Source radio button is set to Block.
1 Under Source, you write selected blocks and objects out as a le, and specify insertion points.
Block: This option species an existing block to save as a le. Select a name from the list.
Entire Drawing: This option selects the current drawing as a block.
Objects: This option species objects to be saved as a le.
2 Under Base Point, you must specify a base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
X: This eld species the X coordinate value.
Y: This eld species the Y coordinate value.
Z: This eld species the Z coordinate value.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 336
Pick Point: This option allows you to temporarily close the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base
point in the current drawing.
3 Under Objects, you specify the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete the selected
objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block.
Retain: This option retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create the block.
Convert to block: This option converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you create the
block.
Delete from drawing: This option deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block.
Select objects: This option dismisses the Block Denition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects
for the block. When you nish selecting objects, press Enter to redisplay the Block Denition dialog box.
Quick Select: This option displays the Quick Select dialog box, which denes a selection set.
Objects Selected: This option displays the number of selected objects.
4 Under Destination, specify the name, location, and unit value used for the objects in the le.
File Name: This eld species a le name that the block or objects will be saved to.
Location: This eld species the drive and directory path for the le.
Insert Units: This eld species the unit value to be used when the new le is inserted as a block. Enter 0 (zero)
if you do not want to scale the drawing to a specic value as you insert it.
Prerequisite: Drawing entities
Keyboard Command: WBLOCK
Insert
This command allows you to place a named block or drawing into the current drawing.
1 In the Insert dialog box, you specify the block to insert and dene the position for the inserted block. The last
block you insert during the current editing session becomes the default block for subsequent uses of this command.
Name: This eld species the name of a block to insert or the name of a le to insert as a block.
Browse: This button opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard le selection dialog box) where you
can select a block or a le to insert.
2 Under Insertion Point, you specify the insertion point for the block.
Specify On-Screen: This option species the insertion point of the block using the pointing device.
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 337
X: This eld sets the X coordinate value.
Y: This eld sets the Y coordinate value.
Z: This eld sets the Z coordinate value.
3 Under Scale, you specify the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X, Y, and Z scale
factors inserts a mirror image of a block.
Specify On-Screen: This option species the insertion point of the block using the pointing device.
X: This eld sets the X coordinate value.
Y: This eld sets the Y coordinate value.
Z: This eld sets the Z coordinate value.
Uniform Scale: This option species a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates. A value specied for X is
also reected in the Y and Z values.
4 Under Rotation, you specify the rotation angle for the inserted block.
Specify On-Screen: This option species the rotation angle of the block using the pointing device.
Angle: This eld sets a rotation angle for the inserted block.
5 You can explode the block and inserts to the individual parts of the block. When you select Explode, you specify
only an X scale factor.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: DDINSERT
Chapter 7. Draw Menu 338
Inquiry Menu 8
Shown here is the Carlson Inquiry menu. The top section contains detailed inquiry commands. The lower section of
the menu includes report and le editing commands.
339
List
This command lists the object type, object layer, andX,Y,Z position relative to the current user coordinate system
(UCS) and whether the object is in model space or paper space.
The List command reports color, linetype, and lineweight information if these items are not set to BYLAYER. The
thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero. Z coordinate information denes the elevation. If the extrusion
direction of the entry differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS, the List command also reports the extrusion
direction in UCS coordinates. The List reports additional information related to the specic object selected.
Prompts
Command:
LIST
Select objects: 3 found, 1 group
Select objects:
BLOCK REFERENCE Layer: ''PNTS''
Space: Model space
Handle = 1F3D
Group =
*
A1
''SPT4''
at point, X=6135023.7190 Y=2190074.2098 Z= 800.0000
X scale factor 5.0000
Y scale factor 5.0000
rotation angle 0d0'0''
Z scale factor 5.0000
BLOCK REFERENCE Layer: ''PNTS''
Space: Model space
Handle = 1F4D
Group =
*
A1
''SRVPNO1''
at point, X=6135023.7190 Y=2190074.2098 Z= 800.0000
X scale factor 5.0000
Y scale factor 5.0000
rotation angle 0d0'0''
Z scale factor 5.0000
ATTRIBUTE Layer: ''PNTNO''
Space: Model space
Handle = 1F4E
Style = ''PTXT''
Font le = TXT
center point, X=6135023.7190 Y=2190077.9598 Z= 800.0000
height 5.0000
value 1
tag PT#
rotation angle 0d0'0''
width scale factor 1.0000
obliquing angle 0d0'0''
ags normal
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 340
generation normal
ATTRIBUTE Layer: ''PNTELEV''
Space: Model space
Handle = 1F4F
Style = ''PTXT''
Font le = TXT
start point, X=6135031.2190 Y=2190071.7098 Z= 800.0000
height 5.0000
value 800
Prerequisite: an entity
Keyboard Command: LIST
Point ID
This command reports complete information pertaining to a Carlson point. Although similar in function to the
AutoCAD ID command, this routine is much more detailed. With this command, you are given the point number, as
well as the northing, easting and elevation coordinates. You also are given the point description, and you are shown
the name and the location of the coordinate le for the point.
Prompts
Pick point or point number: 255
PointNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
255 4379.83 4265.48 19.01 GROUND/SHOT
N: 4379.83 E: 4265.48 Z: 19.01
PT#: 255 CRD File: c:\Carlson2008\data\mantopo.crd
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: PT ID
Prerequisite: None
Layer ID
This command reports the layer name of the selected entity.
Prompts
Pick entity to read layer: pick an entity
Layer: FINAL
Pick entity to read layer: press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: layerid
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 341
Layer Report
This command generates a report containing all the layers dened in the drawing. Along with the layer names, the
report includes the number of entities on each layer, and the color, linetype and lineweight for each layer.
Layer Report
Drawing: C:\sample\example1
Layer Name Entity Count Color Linetype Lineweight
0 5 White CONTINUOUS
AREA PERIM 0 White CONTINUOUS
AREATXT 0 Magenta CONTINUOUS
BL 8 White DASHED
BL-LAB 76 Red CONTINUOUS
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: reportlayer
Prerequisite: None
Layer Inspector
This command is used to inspect and work with layers in the drawing. This command is ideal when you are working
on a very dense and complex drawing which has many layers and you want to review the entities on different layers.
In some cases, there will be layers that you would want to erase. Another scenario might be that you'd like to
highlight a layer that is hard to nd and see.
The Layer Inspector command has a dialog that docks to the bottom of the drawing window which keeps the
drawing window visible while running the command. On the left of the dialog is a list of all the layers in the
drawing. To inspect a layer, highlight the layer name from this list. You can inspect multiple layers at a time
by selecting multiple layers in the list using the Shift and Ctrl keys while picking in the list. When a layer is
selected, the Entity Count reports how many entities in the drawing are set to that layer. The Zoom toggle will
zoom the drawing window to the extents of the entities on the layer. The Isolate toggle will freeze all other layers.
The Highlight toggle will highlight all the entities on the layer. The Restore View On Exit will set the drawing
window to the original position when Layer Inspector was started. The magnify and arrow buttons are used to
zoom in/out and pan the drawing window. The Rename button allows you to rename the layer. The Erase Entities
button will erase all the entities on the layer. The Purge button will purge the layer from the drawing which is only
available when there are no entities on the layer. The Current button sets the layer as the current layer for the drawing.
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: layer inspect
Prerequisite: None
Drawing Inspector
This command reports object properties to you as you move the cursor over an entity. You can simply move the
pointer over an entity and the selected property will be displayed either in a pop-up window next to the pointer
and/or on the status bar, depending on the selected option. Drawing Inspector is a transparent command that can
run while other commands are running. Once Drawing Inspector is started, it will stay active even while running
other commands until you turn it off. To turn off Drawing Inspector, run the command again to toggle it off by
pick Drawing Inspector from the Inquiry pull-down menu or from the toolbar or by typing the command name, or
right-click and choose Turn off Drawing Inspector. The options for this command are set in the menu that pops
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 342
up by clicking the right mouse button. The available properties are: Layer Name, Elevation, Azimuth-Distance,
Bearing-Distance, Point Data, Text Data, Curve Data, 3D Face Data, Polyline Data and Polyline Blips.
In the Drawing Inspector menu, you can choose one or more properties to display.
Display Layer Name: Allows you to display the layer name of the entity.
Display Entity Type: Allows you to display the type of the entity (ie. TEXT or POLYLINE).
Display Elevation: Allows you to display the elevation of the entity.
Display Azimuth-Distance: Allows you to display the azimuth and distance of a line.
Display Bearing-Distance: Allows you to display the bearing and distance of a line.
Display Point Data: Allows you to display the coordinate data of point.
Display Text Data: Allows you to display the attributes of text.
Display Curve Data: Allows you to display the radius, arc length, chord length and delta angle of a curve.
Display Polyline Data: Allows you to display the end point elevations, horizontal distance, slope distance and slope
ratios.
Display 3D Face Data: Allows you to display the Z elevations at the face corners.
Display Polyline Blips: Allows you to displays temporary blip plus marks at the vertice locations of polylines.
Display Polyline Direction: Allows you to displays temporary arrows to show the direction of polylines.
In the Drawing Inspector menu, you can also choose how the property information is reported.
Enable Highlighting: Allows you to highlight the object that the Drawing Inspector is reporting.
Enable Tag Display: Enables you to view the information next to the cursor on the screen.
Show Data On Status Bar: Enables you to view the information on the status bar, in the lower corner of the screen.
Use Default Cursor: When enabled, only the drawing cursor shows. When disabled, the mouse pointer is also
shown.
Report In High Precision: When enabled, displays 8 decimals on distance and 4 decimal seconds on angles.
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 343
Example of Drawing Inspector reporting
Bearing-Distance using the Tag Display
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: inspector
Prerequisite: None
List Elevation
This command displays the elevation of a polyline or line. With a 3D polyline, the elevation ofthe 3D polyline at
the pick point is reported along with the elevation of each vertex. See also,the Drawing Inspector command on the
*
Inq-Set
*
menu.
Prerequisite: an entity
Keyboard Command: LSTELEV
Bearing & 3D Distance
This command reports the slope distance, slope ratio, bearing, azimuth and vertical angle between two 3D points.
Pick or enter the coordinates of two points or select a line or polyline segment to calculate between the segment
endpoints.
Prompts
Specify bearing-distance from (Line/PLine/<Points>)? press Enter
Pick point or enter point number: pick a point
Pick second point or enter point number: pick a point
Horiz Dist: 233.4 Slope Dist: 233.4 Elev Diff: 0.0 Vert Ang: 0d0'0''
Slope: 0.0% 0.0:1 Bearing: S 71d15'37'' W Azimuth: 198d44'23''
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: 3DIST
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 344
Find Point
This command can be used to nd a point in the current CRD le with a certain point number or description. For
example, if you entered RAD
*
the command would plot a preview arrow at all the points that have the letters RAD
as part of the description. i.e. RADPT1, RADPT2, RADPT3, etc. This command is not case sensitive (test is
considered the same as TEST). Matching points are highlighted on the graphics screen with the preview arrow and
listed on the text screen.
Prompts
Find by point [N]umber or [D]escription <N>: press Enter
Point number or range of point numbers to nd <1>: 8
*
10
8 4856.75 4747.20 0.00
9 4909.25 4648.37 0.00
10 4223.30 4545.46 0.00 RADPT
If you respond with D for the rst prompt the program prompts:
Conforms to AutoCAD's wild card matching.
Point Description(s) text to search for <>: rad
*
Searching le C:\Carlson/DATA/LOT.CRD for point descriptions matching RAD
*
...
7 4817.02 4662.73 0.00 RADPT
10 4223.30 4545.46 0.00 RADPT
Point(s) found 2
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: fpnt
Prerequisite: None
Calculator
The Carlson Calculator command uses a convenient pop-up calculator with three tabs for a standard calculator,
scientic calculator and conversion calculator. The standard calculator does basic math calculations using expres-
sions such as +, -, / and
*
. The scientic calculator has angle and other functions. The conversion calculator has
feet-metric and angle conversions including radians. The standard and scientic calculators support RPN. Here is
how RPN works:
1+2 = 3
- type value 1 + Enter
- type value 2 + Enter
- type +
X = 3.
Standard Calculator
Most basic calculations can be performed using this tab in the calculator. Memory functions are also available.
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 345
Scientic Calculator
Values can be entered on the X register. The values can be rolled up and down with the up and down arrow keys and
the Roll and RollD buttons on the dialog. The Enter key nishes the entry of a number and pushes the stack. The C
on the touch screen clears an entry. Additional functions on the screen can be obtained through touching the scroll
[<] and [>] area of the screen.
Conversion Calculator
This mode provides for conversion between many units. Enter a value in any eld and press Enter to nd the
conversion value. The following units are available in Feet, Meters and International Feet Degrees, Minutes, Seconds
and Gons/Grads and Decimal Degrees.
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 346
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: cscalc
Prerequisite: None
Curve Info
This command displays information about a curve/arc. The curve can be dened by an arc entity or polyline arc
segment or by selecting three points on the arc. The three points can be dened by point number or picked on the
screen. The curve data is displayed in the text window with an option to be displayed in the Standard Report Viewer.
Click Exit to return to the graphics window.
Prompts
Dene arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: select the arc entities
Endpoint: (4923.81 5193.15 0.0)
Other Endpoint: (5168.27 5274.03 0.0)
Radius Point Coords: (5126.6 4990.09 0.0)
Chord Bearing: N 71d41'33'' E
Chord Azimuth: 71d41'33''
Delta angle in radians: 0.9304628295
RoadWay Degree of Curve: 19d57'56''
RailRoad Degree of Curve: 20d4'4'' Chord Crv Length: 265.66 Excess: 1.36
External: 34.13 Mid Ord: 30.50 Tangent: 144.06
Delta: 53d18'42''
Chord: 257.49
Length: 267.02
Radius: 286.97
Display curve data in report viewer [Yes/<No>]? Y
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 347
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: cinfo
Polyline Info
This command reports the length and elevation of the selected polyline or line.
Prompts
Pick Polyline or Line: pick a polyline or line
Polyline length: 7702.75 Slope distance: 7702.75 Avg elev: 1700.00 Avg slope:
0.00%
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: polylen
Prerequisite: None
Angle Info
This command reports the interior and exterior angles dened by two joining line segments or by three points. The
coordinates, angles and distances of the line segments are also reported. The report is display in the standard report
viewer.
Angle Information
Point# Northing Easting
Start Point: 11 4728.73 5660.09
Corner Point: 12 4684.89 5624.99
End Point: 13 4664.02 5690.60
Bearing Distance
First Side: S 3840'56'' W 56.16
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 348
Second Side: S 7221'16'' E 68.85
Interior: 6857'48''
Exterior: 29102'12''
Prompts
Dene angle by, Points/<select line or polyline>: P for points
1st Point?
Pick point or point number: 11
2nd (Corner) Point ?
Pick point or point number: 12
3rd Point?
Pick point or point number: 13
Interior: 6857'18'' Exterior: 29102'42''
Angle Info Report Viewer
1st Point (Enter to end)?
Pick point or point number: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: ainfo
Prerequisite: None
Display-Edit File
This command allows you to edit or review an ASCII/text le. Files are displayed in the Standard Report Viewer
section of this manual.
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: scedit
Prerequisite: A le to edit
Display Last Report
This brings up the last report generated by any Carlson command that uses the standard report viewer.
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: report up
Prerequisite: A previously viewed report
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 349
Load Saved Report
This brings up the Report Formatter for the report data le saved previously by the Report Formatter.
Pulldown Menu Location: Inquiry
Keyboard Command: load report
Prerequisite: A saved report
Chapter 8. Inquiry Menu 350
Settings Menu 9
Shown here is the Carlson Software Settings menu. The top section contains the commands most important
for setting up the drawing. You should run Drawing Setup prior to beginning your drawing. Additional setup
and settings features are found in the middle section. The last section of the menu includes AutoCAD settings
commands, including the System Variable Editor.
351
Drawing Setup
This command allows you to specify drawing parameters, including the plotting scale, size of symbols, label
annotation size, and the angle mode.
Specify English 1in=?ft or Metric 1m=?m as the unit mode to use. This affects the prompting and reports.
When you are working on a drawing in English units, one unit equals one foot. In metric, one unit equals one
meter.
Specify the Horizontal Scale of the drawing. For example, if the horizontal scale is set to 50, then 1'' = 50' is
your drawing scale.
The Symbol Plot Size value is a scaler that represents the size on the plot. The Drawing Units are determined
by multiplying the scaler by the horizontal scale. In English mode the scaler represents the plotted size in
inches. In Metric mode, this value is the plotted size in centimeters. The Drawing Units eld shows the result
of the Symbol Plot Size value (the scaler) multiplied by the horizontal scale.
The Text Plot Size value is a scaler that represents the size on the plot. The Drawing Units are determined by
multiplying the scaler by the horizontal scale. In English mode the scaler represents the plotted size in inches.
In Metric mode, this value is the plotted size in centimeters. The Text Plot Size is not entered in Drawing
Units. The Drawing Units eld shows the result of the Text Plot Size value (the scaler) multiplied by the
horizontal scale.
The Line Type Scaler option sets the linetype scale by multiplying this scaler by the horizontal scale.
Angle Mode-Bearing sets reporting to bearing mode for any of the inquiry commands. (Modies the settings
in the AutoCAD UNITS command.)
Angle Mode-Azimuth sets reporting to north based azimuth mode for any of the inquiry commands. (Modi-
es the settings in the AutoCAD UNITS command.)
Angle Mode-Gon sets reporting to gon mode for any of the inquiry commands. (Modies the settings in the
AutoCAD UNITS command.)
Angle Mode-Other lets the user determine angle mode by using the AutoCAD UNITS command.
Coordinate System is an optional setting to dene the drawing coordinate system. The coordinate system
settings are used in commands like List Points and Label Lat/Lon to report geodetic coordinates from the
drawing coordinates. The Grid System setting applies to drawing coordinates that are in a grid projection
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 352
system such as state plane coordinates. The Projection list selects the grid projection from the list of
supported projections. Along with the Projection, there are selections for the zone and datum to use with
the projection. When the drawing setup is in English mode, there is a projection setting for whether the feet
are in US Feet or International Feet units. The Local System setting applies to all other coordinate system
beside grid projections. The Dene Localization button has settings to dene the transformation from local
coordinates to grid coordinates. With a localization dened, you can work in a drawing in local coordinates
and still report lat/lon. The localization denition contains pairs of local and grid coordinates that dene
the transformation. See the section on Localization under the Coordinate File Utilities command for more
information. The Project Scale Factor is multiplied by the x,y coordinates when converting between drawing
and geodetic coordinates.
Projection: There are several built-in projection including State Plane 83, State Plane 27 and UTM. Also
on the Projection list is an item for More Pre-Dened as well as User-Dened projections. This expanded
Pre-Dened selection includes the projections used in SurvCE which has hundreds of projections including
the US County projections for Minnesota and Wisconsin (WCCS and WISCRS) as well as from around the
world. When you pick Pre-Dened, a dialog shows a list of recently selected Pre-Dened projections.
You can pick from this recently used list, or pick the Add Pre-Dened to select from the built-in list.
The Add From File button reads in a projection saved to a le by this routine or by SurvCE CSL or ESRI PRJ. The
Edit button allows you to change the name or parameters of a projection. The Remove function removes a projection
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 353
from the list of recently used projections. The Add User-Dened routine denes a projection by setting the ellipsoid,
choosing the method and entering the parameters. There are over 25 built-in ellipsoids to choose from such as Clarke
1880. You can also manually enter the ellipsoid values. The projection denition includes the 7 parameter Helmert
transformation to go from WGS-84 to the user datum. There are over 20 projection types to choose from such as
Transverse Mercator. After selecting the projection type, there are edit elds for each of the parameters for the
selected projection. The Test button brings up a calculator to enter a lat/lon and report the projection coordinates as
a way to test that the projection parameters are entered correctly and are working.
Besides Drawing Setup, these projection functions are also used in the Coordinate Transformation function in
Coordinate File Utilities.
Project Name and Job Number are optional elds that are used in the header for reports.
Report Distance Scale Factor is used to show distances in a second system besides the drawing units. For
example, this factor can be used to report distances in meters when the drawing is in feet, or it can be used to
report grid distances when the drawings is in a ground coordinate system. This factor is applied in commands
that have an option to label/report a second scaled distance such as the Inverse command and Annotate De-
faults that applies to the angle/distance label routines. The scale factor can be entered directly into the edit
box or calculated using the Set button which has feet-meters conversions as well as combined scale factor
calculations for grid-ground factors. See the Scale Points command for more information on calculating the
combined scale factor.
The Set Text Styles button creates text styles in the drawing for the current drawing Horizontal Scale with
the specied Font Name and list of Style Names and Text Size Scalers. For example, when the Horizontal
Scale is set to 50 and there is a Style Name of L80 with Text Size Scaler of 0.08 in the list, then this function
will create a text style in the drawing called L80 with the text height of 4 (50
*
0.08).
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 354
The Set Paper button allows you to draw a rectangle on the screen that represents the edge of your paper.
After you have set the horizontal scale, press the Set Paper button and the Set Paper dialog appears.
The Layout option lets you specify landscape or portrait paper orientation. Landscape layout is where
the width of the page is greater than the height of the page. Portrait layout is the opposite.
The Paper Size option allows you to specify the paper size. The numbers in parenthesis represent
drawing units and will be multiplied by the horizontal scale to determine the rectangle to be drawn. If
you select the Other option, you will be prompted on the command line for the horizontal and vertical
sizes of the paper.
Prompts (for Set Paper)
Pick or Type lower left corner point for border <(5000.00 5000.00 0.0)>: pick a point
Erase existing Set Paper boundary [<Yes>/No]? Y This prompt only appears if there is an existing paper bound-
ary in this drawing.
Set Limits [Yes/<No>]? Y If you answer Yes to Set Limits, drawing limits are enabled, and AutoCAD restricts
the coordinates you can enter to within the paper boundary. Drawing limits also determines the area of the drawing
that can display grid dots, and the minimum area displayed by the Zoom All command on the View menu. To turn
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 355
drawing limits off, type in LIMITS on the command line and set to Off.
Drawing Setup also sets the AutoCAD dimension scale (DIMSCALE) and linetype scale (LTSCALE) to the Hori-
zontal Scale.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: setup
Prerequisite: None
Set Project/Data Folders
This command sets the project work folder, the data folder and the settings folder to use as the default folders for
your Carlson drawing and data les. The PROJECT folder is the top-level folder for all the data sub-folders with
all the les for the project. The DATA folder contains project specic data les such as coordinate (.CRD), prole
(.PRO) and centerline (.CL) les. The SETTINGS folder contains program settings les that can apply to multiple
projects such as Field-To-Finish Code Tables (.FLD) and Draw Prole Settings (.PFS). These folders are the defaults
where the le selection dialogs will start in. When selecting les, you can change to another folder at any time.
Data Folder Setup: This grouping of controls provides varying levels of sophistication towards how data les
associated with a given project are stored and organized on your computer system. Three options are provided:
Project Folder - Data les are organized and stored (by default) into a user-denable sub-folder structure and
this option is often used by larger organizations that have teams of employees working on a project. Selecting
this option enables the Project Sub-Folders Setup and Data Type Sub-Folders buttons.
Drawing Folder - Data les are stored (by default) into the same folder where the current project drawing has
been directed and this option is often used by mid-sized or smaller organizations who seek only basic data
organization.
Fixed Folder - Data les are stored (by default) into a single folder and might be used by smaller organizations
who do not require any type of data organization.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 356
Project Sub-Folders Setup: Click this button to create a folder structure (see the sample below) that is created
when a new project is created. The list of project folders can be customized at any time but modications to the
folder structure will only occur on projects that are created after the modication(s) to the Project Folder list.
Data Type Sub-Folders: Clicking this button allows the various types of data les produced by Carlson to be
assigned to a folder identied with the Project Sub-Folders Setup command as illustrated below. File types that
are not assigned to a sub-folder are stored (by default) in the current project folder. The following controls allow
you to organize your data le types:
Control Action
Creates a new data type sub-category.
Removes the selected data type sub-category. Any data
types that have been assigned to the sub-category are sub-
sequently migrated into the Misc Data-Types category.
Allows the selected data type sub-category to be renamed.
Category Controls
Move To: Associates the selected data type(s) with a data type sub-category. Use standard Windows click,
shift+click and/or ctrl+click functionality to select multiple data types at the same time.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 357
Assign Folder: Assigns the selected data type(s) to a project sub-folder. Use standard Windows click, shift+click
and/or ctrl+click functionality to select multiple data types at the same time.
Load: Loads a previously saved Data Type Sub-Folder (.DSF) le.
Save As: Saves the current Data Type Sub-folder conguration to a Data Type Sub-Folder (.DSF) le.
Report: Allows the contents of the current Data Type Sub-folder conguration to be sent to a report.
Edit Sub-Folders: Initiates the Project Sub-Folders Setup command.
Startup Project/Data Folder: Indicate or use Set button to assign the start-up (or default) Project Folder location
(when using the Project Folder option) or the start-up Data Folder location when using either the Drawing Folder or
Fixed Folder option.
Current Project Folder: This setting is the top-level project folder for the current drawing.
Current Data Folder: This setting is the default data folder for the current drawing.
Reassign Data Folder: This function shows a list of all the folders used for data les associated with the current
drawing. You can select a folder from this list and switch to another folder location which re-associates the data
les. This function applies to projects that have been moved in the le system.
Clear Data Folder History: This function removes the association of all data les with the current drawing. The
effect is to go back to defaults for data le selections.
Use Data Folder For Settings: When enabled, this option sets the Settings folder to match the Data folder which,
in effect, combines the Settings and Data folders into one folder.
Startup Settings Folder: This folder is the default Settings folder for new drawings.
Current Settings Folder: This folder is the Settings folder for the current drawing.
Project File: Indicate or use Set button to specify the Project Settings (.PRJ) le associated with the current drawing.
The Project Settings le is a collection of drawing names (e.g. BaseMap.dwg, Roads.dwg, Parcels.dwg, Sewers.dwg,
etc) that belong to the same project. This collection of drawings is used by Project Explorer to manage the drawings
and data les for the current project and must be specied if the Carlson Data Depot service is to be used. If the
current drawing is not associated with a project, then this setting will be blank.
Data Depot Type: The Carlson Data Depot is a document management system to allow tracking of the changing
states of les and projects over time and merge the contributions from multiple users providing data integrity, pro-
ductivity and accountability for the managed products. Carlson Software supports the following version control
systems:
1. Subversion - a free, open-source version control system.
2. ProjectWise - software developed and produced by Bentley Systems.
Setup: Before proceeding, refer to the Carlson Data Depot section for information on how to install and properly
prepare your preferred document management system. Once this has been completed, click this button to complete
the Data Depot Settings.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 358
Server Location (Subversion): Indicate the path for the appropriate location (often a shared server drive) where the
le edits and updates are tracked (e.g. le:///C:/svnrepo). For Windows users, note the triple-slash convention. For
a more extensive write-up on available options, refer to Subversion in Action - Chapter 1. Fundamental Concepts.
Server Location (ProjectWise): Indicate the ProjectWise server and datasource where the le edits and updates
are tracked (format is server-name followed by a colon '':'', followed by the datasource name, e.g. esri:pwtest). See
your ProjectWise Administrator for the name of your ProjectWise servers and datasources.
Automatic Check-Out on Startup: This option will check for any updates for the project and associated le on
the server while opening the drawing. If there is a new version of a le is found it is automatically updated to match
the current version on the server. User will be prompted if an older version or conicting versions of le are found.
Use Automatic Project Folder Name: When a project is updated or initially accessed with the get prj from depot
command, this option will automatically map the project to a folder with the same name as the repository project
name under your Startup Project Folder. For example, if your Startup Project Folder is named ''C:\Carlson Projects\''
and the repository project is named ''My Test Project'' the get prj from depot will use ''''C:\Carlson Projects\My Test
Project\'' as the local Current Project Folder.
Include User Name in Project Folder Name: When ''User Automatic Project Folder Name'' is enabled this option
will also be enabled.When a project is updated or initially accessed with the get prj from depot command, this
option will automatically map the project to a folder with the same name as the repository project name, plus your
user name under your Startup Project folder. For example, if your Startup Project Folder is named ''C:\Carlson
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 359
Projects\'', your user name is ''Betsy'' and the repository project is named ''My Test Project'' the get prj from depot
will use ''''C:\Carlson Projects\Betsy\My Test Project\'' as the local Current Project Folder.
Set Read-Only File Attribute for Drawings Not Locked by the Current User: This option will prevent the user
from being able to save drawings for which he/she is not the lock owner. This prevents the user from getting into
situations that may cause potential loss of data at check-in time.
Automatic Check-In Changes: If any le under project is updated or edited, it will be automatically checked-in to
the repository.
Automatic Upgrade Read-Only to Edit: If a le is checked-in by the current user, the le is upgraded to Edit
Mode (locked) for that user for further editing opportunity.
Revert to Read-Only After Upgrade from Edit: If a le is checked-in by the current user, the le is reverted to
Read-only Mode (unlocked) so that other users can further edit the le.
Once the Data Depot has been congured, you can assign a project to the Data Depot via the Project Explorer
command.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Settings
Keyboard Command: settmpdir
Prerequisite: None
Drawing Explorer
The Drawing Explorer command presents a list of all Carlson data les that are made in association with a drawing
and are tracked in DrawingName.ini. If a drawing was not made in Carlson or does not have a companion .INI le,
then Drawing Explorer will not display any les. The Drawing Explorer will also not show any data les if the
drawing is not saved. Once data les are created such as a coordinate (.CRD) le, then Drawing Explorer will track
these les. Drawing Explorer helps manage drawing-related data.
The Drawing Explorer is shown as a docked dialog on CAD window with les shown as ''tree view under different
categories. These le categories are fully customizable and can contain multiple le types. The drawing name is
shown as root of the tree view with le categories as its children. The le types associated with a category are listed
as children of that category. The data les used with the drawing are listed under respective le type or in subfolders
of the project folder specied using the Set Project/Data Folders command. The data les used as current les are
shown with bold font.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 360
The Drawing Explorer allows user to view/manage data les associated with the currently opened drawing by al-
lowing him to add, remove, report, and change directory of these les. A mouse right-click can also be used to add
and remove any data le/le type/le category from the Explorer.
The Add button allows adding a le under the category or le type that is currently selected in the tree view. If the
drawing le name is selected, the user is allowed to add any type of le to the Explorer and le will be added to
the corresponding category. Removes the selected le(s) along with any ''child'' (subordinate) les from the
drawing. The underlying le(s) are not physically deleted or removed from the hard-drive, they are merely removed
from the Drawing Explorer. Creates a report through the Report Formatter Options dialog box. The Report
Formatter can be used to move to the Available entries on the left to the Used area on the right. When coupled with
the Up/Down options to control the order, highly customized reports can be generated and saved for subsequent use.
Click the Display to obtain the report. The Change Directory option allows you to instruct Carlson Software to
re-direct the location for les from an old folder location to a new folder location. This option is helpful if project
data les are manually moved to a new folder location. The Settings button allows you to create Categories of
le types and assign data les to a particular Category and assign how project data les are presented in the Project
Explorer. The Refresh button re-reads the current Project le along with the various Drawing le settings and
updates the Project listing appropriately. Exits from the Project Explorer command. Displays the on-line help.
The option to show preview allows user to see the preview of currently selected data le in a small preview window
at the bottom of the Explorer dialog.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 361
The List Data Files settings are used in Project Explorer to list les according to drawing les in the project of by
project.
Right-Click Command Execution: The Drawing Explorer also allows execution of functions associated with a le
type. Right-clicking on any le type or data le brings up menu for the commands associated with that le. If the
command requires the le during execution, the selected data le will be used to run that command. For example,
in the gure below, Example1.grd will be used to run the Draw 3D Grid File command and the program will not
prompt for the grid le to be drawn.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): File > Project
Keyboard Command: dwgxplore
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 362
Project Explorer
This tool is used for management of a complete project. A project can contain multiple drawings, and each drawing
within that project can contain multiple associated data les.
Think of the Project Explorer as the trunk of the hierarchical tree structure that develops into a project as illustrated
below:
As you work in a drawing, Carlson keeps track of the les that you create (such as TIN and coordinates les). These
are related to the drawing and you can use the Drawing Explorer to manage them. The Project Explorer is used to
manage multiple drawings. In the following illustration, two views of the same Project are displayed:
By Drawing - shown on the left.
By Project - shown on the right.
Control Action
Adds a drawing and its data le(s) into the project.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 363
Removes the selected le(s) along with any ''child'' (sub-
ordinate) les from the project. Note that removing a data
category or le at the ''project'' level also removes the cat-
egory or le at the ''drawing'' level.
Creates a report through the Report Formatter Options di-
alog box. The Report Formatter can be used to move to
the Available entries on the left to the Used area on the
right. When coupled with the Up/Down options to control
the order, highly customized reports can be generated and
saved for subsequent use. Click the Display to obtain the
report.
The Change Directory option allows you to instruct Carl-
son Software to re-direct the location for les from an old
folder location to a new folder location. This option is
helpful if project data les are manually moved to a new
folder location.
The Settings button allows you to create Categories of le
types and assign data les to a particular Category and
assign how project data les are presented in the Project
Explorer.
The Refresh button re-reads the current Project le along
with the various Drawing le settings and updates the
Project listing appropriately.
Exits from the Project Explorer command.
Displays the on-line help.
Project Explorer Controls
The project history/log report le can be generated using Report button. The Project Explorer tracks all the data
les used with the project. The report function also uses the data le information logged with the Carlson Data
Depot. The program allows you to report all revisions or only the last commit on all project les from Carlson Data
Depot. The information reported include project le, drawing name, le category, le path, le name, le type, date,
time, size, revision, author, date committed and commit message along with project properties (i.e. company name,
project name etc). Here's a sample report.
Company Name : Carlson
Project Name : Data Depot
Project Description : Date Depot Description
Project Due Date : Jun 11, 2010
File Name File Type Size Revision Author Date Committed Message
EXAMPLE1 Centerline Files (.cl) 376 16 Carlson.User 05/10/10 16:50:30
EXAMPLE1 Coordinate Files (.crd) 116480 29 Carlson.User 05/10/10 16:51:08
EXAMPLE1 Grid Files (.grd) 99568 12 Carlson.User 05/10/10 16:50:18
NEWTRI Triangulation Mesh Files (.tin) 63822 25 Carlson.User 05/10/10 16:50:59
ROADS Profile Files (.pro) 64 21 Carlson.User 05/10/10 16:50:45
Linking a project to the Carlson Data Depot requires that you properly congure the Data Depot through the Set
Project/Data Folders command and then open a drawing and assign it to a Project (.PRJ) le. If a project is not
linked to the Data Depot, a question mark is overlaid on all the les and folders under that project as shown:
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 364
To link a project to the Data Depot, perform the following steps:
1. Right click on the Project File name (the ''trunk'' of the Project Explorer tree) and select Link to Data Depot
command:
2. This will bring up the ''Project to Link to'' window. The window you see depends upon whether you are using
SVN or ProjectWise as your Data Depot Repository.
(a) SVN: This window shows the existing projects under the repository, if any. A new project folder can
be created under Carlson Data Depot Repository by using the Create Folder button. Sub-folders can be
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 365
created by using the Create Folder button while top folder selected. Select the folder you want to create
the project under and click OK:
(b) ProjectWise - Step 1: This window shows the existing projects under the repository, if any. A new
project folder can be created by right clicking on the ROOT entry of the repository tree:
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 366
(c) ProjectWise - Step 2: Name the new project, select it from the list and click the OK button.
3. This will prompt you to Add to Data Depot window where you can enter a log message to identify what you
are doing. This information will be added to the history log. Click OK to start adding les to the project
repository:
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 367
4. A status window will appear showing the message for les that have been tasked to be added to the repository:
5. Once the les are linked to the Data Depot, the status/icon in the tree view is changed:
When new les are created inside the project, they are shown as not linked to the Data Depot (using the question
mark icon) and can later be linked to the Data Depot by right clicking and using the Add to Data Depot command.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 368
Data Depot File Status
The following shows the icons used in the Project Explorer tree for representing the state of les in the Data Depot:
Data Depot Commands
Add Existing Files: Allows the user to select an existing data le from local storage which will be added to the
project and the Data Depot. The data le will be associated (placed under) the currently selected drawing.
Remove: Removes the selected le from the project without removing it from the Data Depot.
Properties: Brings up the system le properties dialog.
Add to Data Depot: Incorporates the selected le(s) into the Data Depot.
Update from Data Depot: Gets the last committed version of the selected le(s) from the Data Depot.
Update XREF's: Gets the last committed version of any XREF les associated with the selected drawing.
Commit to Data Depot: Incorporates locally modied/locked le(s) that are already part of the Data Depot into
the Data Depot.
Purge Local Copies: Deletes the selected le from the local storage leaving it in the Data Depot and the project.
The local copy can be restored later by using the ''Update from Data Depot'' command.
Edit Mode (Lock): Locks the selected le(s) for local editing and prevents others from modifying the le(s). If the
drawing or data le is newer in the Data Depot than on local storage this command will be disabled.
Read-Only Mode (Unlock): Unlocks the selected le(s) so that they may be edited by others.
History: Displays the history log of changes made to the selected le.
Clean (project level only): ''Cleans'' the project of items that don't exist in both the Data Depot and local storage.
Once the project has been added to the Data Depot, it can be quickly updated or accessed by other users and be
ready for use via the Get Project from Data Depot command:
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 369
Notes on locking/unlocking project les when using Subversion repository
Subversion locking of the le is specic to the specic working folder - the le in a particular checked out set
of les. Same user working on another copy of le in different folder or on different computer will not own the
lock. External subversion clients have additional lock functionality which not exposed through Carlson Data Depot
interface for purposes of simplicity. These clients will have options for stealing lock (placing the lock on le already
locked at different location or by different user) and forcing lock (unlocking a lock placed at different location or
by different user). In a productive collaborative environment such design allows on one hand to prevent accidental
editing of the le which is locked by another user and causing a situation when one of the users has to abandon
his changes, but on the other it allows to move forward if le is locked accidentally and le needs to be re-locked
elsewhere.
In the case when this design is not sufciently strict, it is possible to override this behavior by implementing
server-side hooks which change the default behavior. Here is the example of pre-unlock script for VisualSVN which
limits lock overrides to original user or to user called Administrator:
@echo off
setlocal
set REPOS=%1
set RPATH=%2
set USER=%3
set SVNLOOK=%PROGRAMFILES%\VisualSVN Server\bin\svnlook.exe
set TMPFILE=%temp%/lockinfo
rem Creating a temporary file with output of the lock, filtering everything
except owner out
''%SVNLOOK%'' lock ''%REPOS%'' ''%RPATH%'' | find ''Owner'' > %TMPFILE%
rem Parsing the file looking for owner name only
FOR /F ''usebackq tokens=2'' %%A IN (%TMPFILE%) DO set LOCK OWNER=%%A
del %tmpfile%
if ''%LOCK OWNER%''=='''' goto GOOD
if ''%LOCK OWNER%''==''%USER%'' goto GOOD
rem Only Administrator can break the lock
if ''Administrator''==''%USER%'' goto GOOD
echo ''Permission denied! Ask Administrator for assistance'' 1>&2
endlocal
exit 1
:GOOD
endlocal
exit 0
Simply paste this script into the hook window by going into VisualSVN Server Manager, right-clicking over
repository, All Tasks, Manage Hooks, double-click pre-unlock hook.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): File > Project
Keyboard Command: prjxplore
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 370
Data Depot
The Carlson Data Depot is a document management system to allow tracking of the changing states of les and
projects over time and merge the contributions from multiple users providing data integrity, productivity and ac-
countability for the managed products. Also, having a central project repository helps with data back-up eliminating
the fear of losing data due to local drive failures. The Carlson Data Depot protects against productivity loss due to
re-implemented work, not only avoiding losses of data, but also making each user's work readily available to other
users on the project. The general process for implementing your preferred document management system is:
1. Install and initialize one or more of the version control software products listed below.
2. Instruct Carlson Software to utilize one of these services by establishing the needed settings in the Set
Project/Data Folder command.
3. Assign a project to the Data Depot through the use of the Project Explorer command.
4. Subsequently open or update any Data Depot project through the use of the Get Project from Data Depot
command.
Carlson Software supports the following version control systems:
Subversion - a free, open-source version control system.
ProjectWise - software developed and produced by Bentley Systems.
Subversion is a powerful revision control system which is actively evolving and is part of Apache web-server project
The home page of this project is http://subversion.apache.org/, with a book on setup, use and administration
available in print and online at http://svnbook.red-bean.com/.
Carlson Software supports Subversion release 1.5.6 or newer.
While there multiple ways to setup Subversion repository and connect to it, the most typical scenario is set-
ting up Subversion server and connecting to it through the web-server. Local directory setup is also available, but
not useful in group environments. Running the shared directory on the network should not be attempted since it
could lead to the repository corruption and permanent data loss.
Setting up a Subversion server on Windows host
For users who run Windows on their host there is a nicely integrated front-end to a standard Subversion server
(included): VisualSVN server (http://visualsvn.com/server/). There are two licenses available for commercial users:
free basic edition and reasonably priced enterprise edition with additional features larger sites will nd attractive.
This document will concentrate on install of the basic edition.
Download and run the VisualSVN install
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 371
Select option to install VisualSVN server
Specify repository directory where the data will be stored. This should be secure and backed up location since this
is where the data will be stored. The server port and https:// setting are standard and most users will want to leave
them untouched. The authentication setting is a matter of the site preference. Enterprise edition of VisualSVN
offers additional authentication options like using Microsoft Active Directory server.
Upon completion of the install the manager interface will be displayed. Create a new repository by right-
clicking on the Repositories:
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 372
Give new repository a name. You may choose to have several repositories, each containing data of the similar kind
or covering an area of your business. Do not toggle on ''Create default structure'' since these folders will be created
under a particular project.
Create users and set passwords (if using Subversion's own user authentication)
Run ''Manage security'' command by right-clicking over whole repository to set defaults or right-clicking on specic
folder to set specic permissions:
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 373
Add users or user-groups and set specic permissions for the folder you selected:
This completes the server side installation of Subversion.
Setting up a Subversion server on Linux host
Subversion is a project which was born on Unix platform, so it is fairly straightforward to setup and run on the
Linux host. Specic details may vary for different distributions, but
below is a quick summary of steps for Redhat or CentOS based hosts, which should at least point you in the right
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 374
direction.
Install needed packages
The following packages should be installed:
httpd - Apache web server for access to the subversion
subversion - the Subversion command line and administration tools
mod ssl - support for secure connections
mod dav svn - integration between the Apache and Subversion
Create repository folder
Run the following command to congure the Subversion le structure:
svnadmin create fs-type fsfs /var/lib/subversion/repos
where 'fsfs' refers to the type of the le storage being selected and last argument is the future location of the
repository data les on the system.
Congure Apache to be handle Subversion calls
Apache conguration le httpd.conf is typically located in /etc/httpd/conf folder. Please modify it to contain a
section like this:
<Location /repos>
DAV svn
SVNParentPath /var/lib/subversion/repos
AuthType Digest
AuthName ''Subversion''
AuthDigestdomain /repos/
AuthUserFile /var/lib/subversion/svn passwd
Require valid-user
SSLRequireSSL
</Location>
Restart Apache server. This should let you reach your Subversion server with URL like this:
https://server name/repos.
User control
The conguration above assumes the authentication for the domain ''Subversion'' handled by Apache itself. Much
more powerful options are available, but since these are standard Apache features, plenty of documentation for is
readily available.
To add new users, please use the following command:
htdigest -c /var/lib/subversion/svn passwd ''Subversion'' user name
where -c is for ''create'' and only should be used rst time. Supply user name for whom the password is being set.
The permissions are controlled by the svnserve.conf typically located in /etc/subversion directory. The equivalent
conguration to the Windows example above would look like this:
[Projects:/]
Carlson.Readonly=r
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 375
Carlson.User=rw
For further documentation please refer to the book mentioned above or to the numerous Subversion resources
online.
Creating a local Subversion Repository
The Windows MSI installer with the basic win32 client binaries can be downloaded at:
http://www.collab.net/downloads/subversion/
Running this installation le installs the required binaries to create the Subversion repository on the server or local
machine under ''C:\Program Files\Subversion'' using the default options.
To create the Subversion repository:
1. Click the Windows Start > Run and then type cmd into the resulting dialog box as shown below and click
OK:
2. At the DOS prompt, navigate to the Subversion install directory by typing:
cd ''C:\Program Files\Subversion'' and press the Enter button to complete this step as shown above.
3. To create the Subversion repository under the ''C'' drive, type:
svnadmin create c:\svnrepo and press the Enter button to complete this step as shown above. This will create
a ''svnrepo'' folder under the ''C'' drive (c:\svnrepo); see the Notes section below for important information.
The path and the name of the repository could be path to a network drive as well. For setting up a Subversion
Repository on the server, refer to the http://subversion.tigris.org documentation.
4. Type the word exit and press the Enter button to dismiss the DOS window and complete the command as
shown above.
Note: Once you have created a Subversion Repository, do not add, delete, or modify les in the Repository folder
unless you know how to avoid corrupting the repository
Setting Subversion URL in Carlson
In order to connect Carlson to Subversion repository, please go to Settings, Congure Carlson, Project/Data Folders
settings. Set the project type to Subversion and click Setup button. Specify server location like
le:///c:/svnrepo
for local example above, or
https://server name/repos
for network server as described above. Other URL types supported by Subversion for the scenarios beyond the
scope of this document are permitted as well.
Accessing Subversion through a GUI Client
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 376
There are various graphical-user interface (GUI) client applications available for accessing the SVN repositories on
the Internet for free:
RapidSVN
SmartSVN
TortoiseSVN
ViewVC
WebSVN
Once a supported document management system has been properly installed and congured for each computer
work-station, continue with the Data Depot conguration by initiating the Set Project/Data Folder command.
Please see your ProjectWise Administrator for instructions on conguring ProjectWise Datasources.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): None
Keyboard Command: None
Prerequisite: None
Store Project Archive
This command will zip and archive an entire project. The archive contains the current drawing le (.dwg) and all
the associated data le such as the surfaces. The data les associated with the current project can be reviewed with
the Drawing Explorer command. Besides project data les, images and xref's attached to the dwg are also included.
The format of the archive le is a standard .zip le which can be used by WinZip. This le can be sent to someone
who can unzip it and use all the same les. The current dwg must have a name before running this command.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings > Project
Keyboard Command: zip project
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 377
Prerequisite: A named dwg
Extract Project Archive
This command will unzip an archive le that has been previously created with the command Store Project Archive.
It prompts for the directory to unzip to. If any of the les already exist in the folder it is extracting to, there is a
window prompting to overwrite the les.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings > Project
Keyboard Command: unzip project
Prerequisite: A project le that has been zipped (ZIP)
Preferences
This command opens the Options dialog box where you can customize the settings in CSI related to the CAD engine.
Some settings are available in this command that are not applicable to CSI, these settings are not documented below.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 378
Files Tab
Under the Files Tab, you specify the directories in which the program searches for support, driver, menu, and
other les. Generally, you will never need to modify any of the settings found here. Advanced users may want to
view/modify the following:
Automatic Save File Location: This is the location that CSI will save drawings when it performs an automatic
save.
Temporary Drawing File Location: This is the location that CSI writes and stores any temporary drawings during
the current drawing session.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 379
Display Tab
Under the Display Tab, you specify settings related to the graphics and text display.
1 Window Elements
Display scroll bars in drawing window: Specify weather or not to show the scrollbars in the drawing window.
Colors: Use this command to change colors for items such as drawing background, and text background.
Fonts: Use this command to change the font for text displayed on the command line and in the text window.
2 Display resolution
Arc and circle smoothness: Controls the smoothness of circles, arcs, and ellipses. A higher number produces
smoother objects, but CSI requires more time to regenerate, pan, and zoom the objects. The default setting is 100,
and the maximum setting is 20000
Segments in a polyline curve: Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each polyline curve. The
default setting is 8.
3 Display performance
Apply solid ll: Specify whether or not to show ll for hatches and wide polylines.
Show text boundary frame only: Displays the frames for text objects instead of displaying the text objects
4 Crosshair size: Specify the crosshair size in percentage of screen size.
5 Layout elements: These options are not applicable to CSI
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 380
Open and Save Tab
1 File Save
Save as: Specify the le formats used when saving a le with SAVE and SAVEAS.
Save a thumbnail preview image: Species whether an image of the drawing should be displayed in the Preview
area of the Select File dialog box.
Incremental save percentage: Sets the percentage of potential wasted space in a drawing le. When the specied
percentage is reached, CSI performs a full save instead of an incremental save. Full saves eliminate wasted space.
If you set Incremental Save Percentage to 0, every save is a full save.
2 File Open
Number of recently used les to list: Controls the number of recently used les that are listed in the File menu
for quick access. Valid values are 0 to 9.
Display full path in title: Displays the full path of the active drawing in the drawing's title bar, or in the CSI title
bar if the drawing is maximized.
3 File Safety Precautions
Automatic save: Saves a copy of your drawing automatically at the interval you specify. See Automatic File Save
Location above to specify where the drawing should be saved.
Minutes between saves: Species how often the drawing is saved when using Automatic Save
Create backup copy with each save: Species whether a backup copy of a drawing is created when you save the
drawing. The backup copy is created in the same location as the drawing
Maintain a log le: Species whether the contents of the text window are written to a log le. To specify the
location and name of the log le, use the Files tab in the Options dialog box
File extension for temporary les: Species a unique extension for the current user to identify temporary les in
a network environment. The default extension is .ac$.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 381
4 External References: (These options apply to external referenced drawings, you cannot create external references
with CSI, but you can open drawings that have external references).
Demand Load Xrefs: Controls demand loading of xrefs.
Retain changes to Xref layers: Saves changes to layer properties and states for xref-dependent layers.
Plotting Tab
1 Under Default Plot Settings For New Drawings, you control default plotting settings for new drawings.
Use As Default Output Device: Sets the default output device for new drawings. The list displays any plotter
conguration les (PC3) found in the plotter conguration search path and any system printers that are congured
in the system.
Use Last Successful Plot Settings: Sets the plotting settings according to the settings of the last successful plot.
Add or Congure Plotters: Displays the Autodesk Plotter Manager (a Windows system window). You can add
or congure a plotter with the Autodesk Plotter Manager.
2 Under General Plot Options, you control options that relate to the general plotting environment.
Keep the Layout Paper Size If Possible: Uses the paper size specied on the Layout Settings tab in the Page
Setup dialog box under the File menu as long as the selected output device can plot to this paper size. If the selected
output device cannot plot to this paper size, the programdisplays a warning message and uses the paper size specied
either in the plotter conguration le (PC3) or in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer.
Use the Plot Device Paper Size: Uses the paper size specied either in the plotter conguration le (PC3) or in
the default system settings if the output device is a system printer.
OLE Plot Quality: Determines the quality of plotted OLE objects. The values are Line Art, Text, Graphics,
Photograph, and High Quality Photograph.
Use OLE Application When Plotting OLE Objects: Launches the application used to create the OLE object
when plotting a drawing with OLE objects. You can use this option if you want to optimize the quality of plotted
OLE objects. This setting is saved in the drawing. You can also control this option by using the OLESTARTUP
system variable.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 382
Hide System Printer: Controls whether Windows system printers are displayed in the Plot and Page Setup dialog
boxes under the File menu. This option hides standard Windows system printers only. You can control the size of
the list of devices in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes by moving a device's PC3 le out of the Plotters directory
and its subdirectories.
3 Under Default Plot Style Behavior, you control options related to plot style behavior in all drawings. Changing
the default plot style behavior using the Options dialog box does not affect the current drawing.
Use Color Dependent Plot Styles: Uses color-dependent plot styles in both new drawings and drawings created
in earlier versions of Autodesk products. Color-dependent plot styles use the numbers from the color index to create
a plot style table with a .ctb le extension. Each color is dened by a name or number ranging from 1 to 255. You
can assign each color number to a different pen on a pen plotter to achieve different property settings in the plotted
drawing. If this option is selected, a plot style is created for each color setting. If you want to change the default
plot style behavior for a drawing, select this option or Use Named Plot Styles before opening or creating a drawing.
Changing the default plot style behavior using the Options dialog box affects only new drawings or drawings created
in an earlier release of an Autodesk product that have never been saved in CSI 2000 format. This setting is saved
with the drawing. Once a drawing is saved with either setting, it cannot be changed
Use Named Plot Styles: Uses named plot styles in both new drawings and drawings created in earlier versions of
Autodesk products. CSI plots the drawing according to the property settings you specify in the plot style denition.
The plot style is dened in the plot style table attached to the layout or viewport. Named plot style tables are les
with the le extension .stb.
Default Plot Style Table: Species the default plot style table to attach to new drawings. A plot style table is a
le with a .ctb or an .stb extension that includes and denes plot styles. If you are using color-dependent plot styles,
this option lists all color dependent plot style tables found in the search path as well as the value of None. If you are
using named plot styles, this option lists all named plot styles tables.
Default Plot Style for Layer 0: Sets the default plot style for Layer 0 for new drawings. The list displays the
default value Normal and alphabetically displays any plot styles dened in the currently loaded plot style table.
Default Plot Style for Objects: Sets the default plot style that is assigned when you create new objects. The list
displays a BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and Normal style, and it alphabetically displays any plot styles dened in the
currently loaded plot style table.
Add or Edit Plot Style Tables: Displays the Autodesk Plot Style Table Manager (a Windows Explorer window).
You can create or edit plot style tables with the Autodesk Plot Style Table Manager.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 383
System Tab
1 Current Pointing Device can only be set to Current System Pointing Device. Do not change this setting.
2 General Options include the following:
Single-drawing compatibility mode: Allows CSI to work with one drawing at a time. Leave this checked.
Display OLE properties dialog: Controls the display of the OLE Properties dialog box when inserting OLE
objects.
Beep on error in user input: Species whether CSI should sound an alarm beep when it detects an invalid entry.
Allow long symbol names: If this is checked, symbol names such as layers can be 255 characters long.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 384
User Preferences Tab
1 Windows Standard Behavior
Windows standard accelerator keys:
Shortcut menus in drawing area:
Right-click Customization:
2 Priority for Coordinate Data Entry
Running object snap: Species that running object snaps override coordinate entry at all times. Not Recom-
mended
Keyboard entry: Species that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps at all times.
Keyboard entry except scripts: Species that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps, except in scripts.
3 Object Sorting Methods determines the sort order of objects. Generally speaking, objects are displayed in the
order they were created. This means that newer objects will display on top of older objects. Use the Display Order
commands on the View menu to change the display order.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 385
Drafting
1 AutoSnap Settings
Marker: Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker. The marker is a geometric symbol that displays the
object snap location when the crosshairs move over a snap point on an object.
Magnet: Sets the AutoSnap magnet on or off. The magnet is an automatic movement of the crosshairs that locks
the crosshairs onto the nearest snap point.
Display AutoSnap tooltip: Controls the display of the AutoSnap tooltip. The tooltip is a text ag that describes
which part of the object you are snapping to.
Display AutoSnap aperture box: Controls the display of the AutoSnap aperture box. The aperture box is a box
that appears inside the crosshairs when you snap to an object.
2 Tracking Settings
Display polar tracking vector: Sets polar tracking behavior on or off. With polar tracking, you can draw lines
along angles relative to a drawing command From or To point.
Display Tracking tooltip: Controls the display of the AutoTrack tooltip. The tooltip is a text ag that displays
the tracking coordinates.
3 AutoSnap Marker Size allows you to set the display size for the AutoSnap marker. Values range from 1 to 20
pixels.
4 Aperture Size allows you to set the aperture size. The size of the aperture determines how close to a snap point
you can be before the magnet locks the aperture box to the snap point. The smaller the aperture, the closer you must
be to the snap point to activate the magnet.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 386
Selection Tab
1 Selection Modes
Noun/verb selection: Allows you to select an object before starting a command.
Use Shift to add to selection: Adds or removes an object to the selection set when you press SHIFT and select
an object.
Press and drag: Draws a selection window by selecting a point and dragging the pointing device to a second
point.
Implied windowing: Initiates the drawing of a selection window when you select a point outside an object.
Object grouping: Selects all objects in a group when you select one object in that group. Control-A also toggles
this setting.
Associative Hatch: Determines which objects are selected when you select an associative hatch. If this option is
selected, boundary objects are also selected when you select an associative hatch.
2 Grips
Enable Grips: Controls whether grips are displayed on an object after you select it.
Enable Grips within blocks: Controls how grips are displayed on a block after you select it
Unselected grip color: Determines the color of an unselected grip.
Selected grip color: Determines the color of a selected grip.
3 Pickbox Size controls the display size of the pickbox. The pickbox is the object selection tool that appears in
editing commands. The default size is set to 3 pixels; values range from 0 to 20.
4 Grip size controls the display size of grips. The default size is set to 3 pixels; values range from 1 to 20.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 387
Congure
This command allows you to set up the default settings that are used each time you start a new drawing, or load an
existing drawing.
NOTE: When using Carlson products with an ''embedded AutoCAD OEM engine'' (e.g. Carlson Survey with
Embedded AutoCAD or Carlson Takeoff with Embedded AutoCAD), only a subset of the various conguration
commands will be available.
Load: This command permits a previously saved conguration (CFG) le to be loaded into the software and is
useful for propagating corporate standards to groups or individuals within an organization.
SaveAs: This command ''packages'' up all current conguration settings and permits them to be saved to a named
conguration (CFG) le that can be shared with users of Carlson Software.
General Settings Drawing Setup
Project/Data Folders Startup Settings
Survey Settings Surface Settings
Section-Prole Settings Hydrology Settings
Mine Note Settings Mining Settings
Takeoff/SiteNet Settings Localization Settings
Table of Contents
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 388
Use Startup Wizard: When enabled, a dialog-based ''wizard'' interface is used for the creation of a new project
Generate Report Log: When enabled, output from several commands will be accumulated in a report buffer.
Commands that output to the report log include Inverse, Traverse, Curve Info, etc. Also, any report that is displayed
in the standard report viewer is also added to the report log. While activated, the report log resides in the lower left
corner of the desktop as a minimized title bar that shows how many lines are in the report buffer. To view the report
log, pick on the maximize icon on this title bar. You can also view the report log by running the Display Report Log
function in the Inquiry menu. The report log can be edited, saved to a le or printed. To quickly turn the report log
on and off, you can type REPORT at the command prompt.
Save Drawing INI Files: When enabled, an .INI with the same name as the DWG le will be created to store
associations used to populate the content of the Drawing Explorer command.
Ignore Zero Elevs: This option will ignore any entities with a zero elevation. It is used for many commands, such
as Triangulate and Contour or Make Grid File.
Use South Azimuth: Turning on this option will use a South Azimuth instead of a North Azimuth as the basis for
0.
Use Dview Twist Angle: This will use the screen Twist Angle dened with the command DVIEW. This is similar
to Twist Screen.
Set DIMSCALE to Drawing Scale: This will set the dimension scale to match the drawing scale.
Set AUNITS to Drawing Angle Mode: This will set the DWG angular units to match the angle mode established
under Drawing Setup.
Set PDSIZE to Symbol Size: This will set the PDSIZE scale to match the symbol size dened in Drawing Setup.
Set INSUNITS to Unitless: This will set the INSUNITS (Insertion Units) CAD system variable to Unitless (IN-
SUNITS=0) when the drawing is opened.
Set MENUBAR on Startup: When enabled, the Carlson Menu associated with the Carlson icon (usually on the PC
Desktop) will be loaded. Otherwise, use the Carlson Menus command to select the desired menu.
Set UCS to World on Startup: When enabled, drawings with a User Coordinate System (UCS) other than World
will have the UCS set to World.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 389
Set LTSCALE on Startup to Drawing Setup: When enabled, the linetype scale (LTSCALE) variable will be set
to the Horizontal Scale dened under Drawing Setup.
Force Software-only OpenGL Driver: When enabled, commands that use OpenGL functionality (such as 3D
Viewer Window) on computers with older video cards that don't offer extensive hardware acceleration will attempt
to render the information with any available random-access memory (RAM).
Invoke Item Placement on CAD Standards Load: When enabled, the Draw Standard Item (Draw Draw to
Standard) command will be launched immediately following the loading of a CAD Standards Data Source.
Use Annotative Text: (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) When enabled, text (usually placed through the Annotate
Menu commands) will use scale-able annotative properties.
Support All Drawing Scales: (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) When enabled, text placed as annotative entities
will make use of all annotation scales currently dened within the drawing.
Coordinate Report Order: You can choose the traditional North-East format, or reverse these in reports with an
East-North format.
Date Format: You can control the display of dates in Carlson reports with this drop-down menu. The default is
''Windows Setting'' which allows you to control it with Windows Control Panel. Several other common formats are
available.
Formatted Document Type: (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) Use this option (for commands such as 3D Viewer
Window to establish the type of document produced by the command.
Report Viewer: This option chooses between the Carlson Report Viewer, Windows Notepad and Microsoft Word
for the viewer to use for reports that the Carlson commands generate.
AutoCAD Menu: (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) This option chooses which AutoCAD menu to load when
picking the AutoCAD menu from the Carlson Menus toolbar or from the Settings Carlson Menus pull-down
menu. When AutoCAD Map is installed, there are different layouts of the Map menu to choose from. When
Autodesk LandDesktop is installed, those menus are available.
Object Linking: The Object Linking section contains options for creating additional ''intelligence'' on Carlson-
placed entities:
Link Points with CRD File - (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) When enabled, points placed into the draw-
ing will be given a ''reactor'' so that any change to the entities such as MOVE or ROTATE will update the
coordinates in the CRD le.
Link Linework with Points - (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) Line and polyline entities that are drawn by
point number (including those placed via Draw Field-to-Finish such that a positional change to a linked point
will automatically update the linework.
Link Labels with Linework - (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) When enabled, direction and/or distance
labels assigned to physical linework entities will get updated if the underlying line is changed.
Link Linework with Centerlines - (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) For linework that has been used to
create a Carlson Centerline, changes to the linework will update the corresponding centerline (CL) le.
Group Point Entities - When enabled, the three entities of a Carlson point (attribute block, symbol and node)
become linked as a single entity. For each point, selecting any one of these entities selects all three entities
for the point. NOTE: This setting is not the same as the ''Point Group'' functionality as found under the Point
Group Manager command.
Maintain CRD History File - When enabled, changes to a point are tracked into a ''history'' le. These
changes can be accessed via the History button found under the Edit Point Attributes command.
Database Format: The Database Format chooses between Microsoft Access 97 or 2000 (and higher) format.
This database format applies to creating new database (.MDB) les in the GIS module, the drillhole database and
the Export to Microsoft Access option in the Report Formatter.
Coordinate File Format: Carlson can be congured to utilize a variety of coordinate le formats:
Carlson Numeric Only - Point numbers cannot contain letters and must be in the range from 1 to 99999.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 390
Carlson Alphanumeric - This format allows letters in the point numbers and the point ''number'' can be up
to 9 characters in length. Any combination of letters and numbers is acceptable.
Carlson SQLite - Based on the Structured Query Language (SQL) database format, this CRDB format allows
alphanumeric combinations of point number and descriptions up to 255 characters in length.
C&G Numeric - This format of the C&G division supports up to 5 digits, with a 65000 point limit.
C&G Alphanumeric - This format of the C&G division supports up to 10 characters, with no limit to the
number of points.
Simplicity ZAK: - This is the Simplicity Systems ''Sight Survey'' coordinate le format.
MS Access Database (LDT) - This is a Microsoft Access database used by Autodesk Land Desktop. The le
is typically named ''points.mdb'' and is typically found in a Land Desktop project \COGO subdirectory. The
point identier limitation is established by the database structure, which has a default of 255 characters.
Remove Arcs: Since 3D polylines do not allow true arcs, the program represents arcs in 3D polylines as a series of
short chords. The Remove Arcs settings control the spacing of these arcs:
Max Offset - Sets the maximum difference between the chords and the original arcs as shown in the image
above. This method is similar to the Reduce Polyline Vertices command.
Chord Len - Sets the length of the chord segments that replace the original arc.
Digitizer Puck Layout & View: There are two main formats for the digitizer puck. They are numbered 1 and 2.
Selecting the View button brings up the window showing the two formats.
Use Mouse: This option allows you to use the mouse instead of the digitizer puck for the digitize commands.
Auto Tablet On for Digitize Commands: This option will activate the tablet when using the digitize commands.
Auto Tablet Off for Digitize Commands: This option will de-activate the tablet when using the digitize commands.
Several settings under Drawing Setup are used to establish the default values provided in the Startup Wizard and are
identical to those discussed in Drawing Setup. There are a few additions, such as Vertical Scale, Point Prompt-Label
Settings, Point Number Settings and Vertical Angle Mode.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 391
There is also the ability to maintain two different sets of defaults (English and Metric). The user can maintain a
comfortable set of settings for either unit system, especially if they constantly switch back and forth. Also added was
support for meters/metres, tons/tonnes and various date representation which can be accessed via the Localization
Settings button.
Please refer to the Set Project/Data Folder command for complete information.
These options are used for starting Carlson. Defaults are set here, and will be used at the beginning of each session.
Template Name: This is the drawing template le that will be used when starting a new drawing. The Browse
button allows for selecting a new le.
Carlson Launch Folder: This is the folder where Carlson projects would be stored by default. The Browse button
allows for selecting a new folder location.
Prole Name: This is the AutoCAD/IntelliCAD Prole that will be used when working in Carlson.
AutoCAD command switches: This turns off the AutoCAD ''splash'' screen upon launching the program. The
/nologo takes the splash screen out of the start-up procedure. See AutoCAD documentation for other switches that
are available for use.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 392
AutoCAD product to run: (AutoCAD Only) This is the AutoCAD version and avor (Map or LDT, etc.) that
Carlson is installed for, and will run with.
No menu resetting: (AutoCAD Only) This controls whether to set the Carlson menu as the main customization le
on startup or to keep the current main customization unchanged.
CG Survey Menu: Indicate whether to add-on the C&G Survey pull-down menus to the standard Carlson Survey
menus. The Compact mode has all the C&G commands in a single pull-down menu. The Expanded mode has all
eight C&G pull-down menus that C&G ''stand-alone'' used to have.
Initial Traverse/Sideshot Angle Mode: This sets the default angle mode for these COGO commands.
Show Occupy and Backsight Points on Status Bar: This is an option for the COGO Inverse command.
Automatic Raw File On: This is equivalent to toggling on the COGO Raw File On/Off automatically when the
drawing is opened.
Automatic Line On: This is equivalent to toggling on the COGO Line On/Off automatically when the drawing
is opened.
Automatic Point Object Snap On: This is equivalent to toggling on the Settings Point Object Snap On/Off
automatically when the drawing is opened.
Most of the Surface/Triangulate &Contour commands will remember the settings and parameters used fromdrawing
to drawing. There are some in this screen that will be used for gridding and modeling.
Inverse Distance/LeastSquares Modeling Parameters: The modeling methods of Inverse Distance and Least
Squares are similar ways to create a grid from datapoints or drillholes. It is not recommended to use these methods
for gridding contour or breaklines. Triangulation is better for that. These methods need a search radius dened.
Anything past this distance from one data point to the next will be ignored for inuence. The Max Samples are the
number of data points that will be used to inuence each data point. The area is broken into 4 quadrants. The Min
and Max Quadrant are the numbers of data points that will be used in each quadrant.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 393
Specify Grid Resolution As: There are two ways to create a grid le. Once the boundary has been selected, the
cells need to be determined. Number of Cells in X and Y will divide the boundary up into the specied number of
cells. These will then be odd shaped rectangles, with the size calculated by the boundary dimensions and the number
of cells. The Dimensions of Cells is the more commonly used method. This will allow for a set cell size for the X
and Y directions. Most of the time the grid cells should be square, where you set the size.
Grid Precision: This is the number of decimals that are stored in the grid le.
Draw Contours Max Number of Rechecks for Crossings: Routines that generate contours check for any crossings
that can occur from smoothing or reduction options. When a crossing is found, the smoothing or reduction factors
are reduced and then the contours are rechecked in case that adjustment causes a new crossing. This option can be
used to decrease the number of rechecks in case your dataset is large and you don't want to take the time for these
checks.
This conguration box is used mainly for text and drafting settings. Items such as text size scalers and station types
are set here and will apply to the current and/or future drawings. These are very self explanatory and are up to the
user to set if something other than the defaults is desired.
Stage-Storage File Format: Indicate the format of the Stage-Storage File to be used in Carlson Hydrology.
These options are settings for prompting when entering the Mine notes. They are simply turned on or off for
customized mine note entry. The Spad and Offset symbol sizes are set here for drawing in CAD. The layers for
pillars and the Perim for underground mine design are set here. They can be customized so the program will
recognize specic layers for commands such as volumes by grid or average, and calculating the extraction ratios.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 394
This is the conguration screen for default settings used with the Mining Modules. Each item is detailed below.
Inverse Distance/Least Squares/Triangulation Search Radius, Samples and Quadrants: The modeling methods
of Inverse Distance and Least Squares are similar ways to create a grid from datapoints or drillholes in that they use
the same settings. It is not recommended to use these methods for gridding contour or breaklines. Triangulation is
better for that. These methods need a search radius dened, while triangulation just uses the search distance to nd
the next data point to triangulate to. Anything past this distance from one data point to the next will be ignored for
inuence. The Max Samples are the number of data points that will be used to inuence each data point. The area
is broken into 4 quadrants. The Min and Max Quadrant are the numbers of data points that will be used in each
quadrant.
Fill in Missing Strata Above/Below Existing Strata (Seam Stacking/Conformance): This important setting is
used for gridding and modeling from drillholes. It does two things. The rst item it controls is to ll in missing
strata. For example, if a drillhole does not go deep enough to penetrate a deep seam, or a drillhole is drilled down
in a valley or low spot, it will either ll in (carry the seam through the hole) or pinch it out at the hole. NONE will
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 395
not ll it in, meaning it will pinch the seam out at the shallow or partial hole. ALL will not pinch the seams out at
the shallow or partial hole. Seam-Specic will use the Dene Strata settings where the marker and target beds are
dened. The second modeling concept this controls is conformance. In these same partial holes where certain seams
are not encountered, when it lls them in, it controls how it behaves. NONE will let each seam do want they want,
independent of any other seam. ALL has all the seams looking at each other and they all conform to each other.
Seam-Specic will use the Dene Strata settings where the marker and target beds are dened there. The marker
bed is the ''main'' seam and other seams will conform to it. There can be more than one marker seam. There is also a
hierarchy for conformance, so if the main marker seam is not present, then the next marker seam in line will prevail.
Calculate Strata Pinchout and slide bar: This setting determines if the thickness of a seam is pinched out when
it does not occur in a drillhole. Turn it on to activate pinchout. If a seam is not present, it will pinch it out using
that drillhole. If it is off, it will carry the seam through the hole where the seam is not encountered. The slide bar
determines the distance between the drillholes for pinchout. Near zero will pinch the seam closer to the hole where
it does not appear. Non-zero will pinch the seam closer to the drillhole where it does appear. Most of the time,
the best estimate is to leave it in the middle, where it will pinch the seam half way between the holes. It is also
recommended to have the pinchout turned on when making thickness grids. This will model the thickness properly.
But, when modeling the bottom elevation of a seam, turn OFF pinchout. If it is on, many times it will bring the
elevation of the seam up to the next seam to pinch it out. Turning the off for elevation grids will keep them down
where they belong. Then just add the thickness and the bottom elevation to obtain the roof elevation grid.
Pinchout Zero Thickness: This setting will recognize a zero thickness entry in a drillhole and treat it as a pinchout
for modeling. Normally, the zero entry is treated as a zero value, and the seam would go to zero just at the hole, and
not before. Treating a zero value in a drillhole as a pinchout, will treat it as if it wasn't in the drillhole, and the seam
will be pinched out using the pinchout slide bar settings above, instead of just going to zero right at the hole.
Pinchout Key Only: This setting will apply the pinchout settings to just the Key seams in the drillholes. The
NonKey seams will model as if the pinchout setting is off.
Restrict Pinchout to Drillhole Elevation Range: This setting provides the option to control where the seam will
pinchout. If there is a shallow hole, and a seam is running beneath it, this setting will pinchout the seam if it is off.
If it is on, then the seams will only pinchout if they pass through the elevation range of the drillhole. This is useful
if it is desired to pinch out a seam that passes above or below the elevation range of the drillholes.
Include Strata Name in Bed Composite: This will add the strata name to the bed name when running the bed
composite commands, such as Split Bed by Parameters.
Process Only Strata with Beds: This setting is used mostly when duplicate strata appear in a drillhole. It will only
model with strata that have a bed name, ignoring those that don't. This useful in a situation where only the KEY
strata have a bed name. It will ignore all the NONKEY strata, and just model the KEY strata. This can be used when
modeling geology such as lignite or bentonite, where thin seams have bed names and the overburden, partings and
interburdens do not.
Prompt for Advancement Pline for Quantities: When running the quantity routines in the standard mining mod-
ule, turning this on will prompt for the Advancement pline for quantities.
Composite Bed Qualities by Density: When modeling the quality attributes from drillholes, and they are sampled
at multiple intervals, by default, they are averaged by thickness and that one value will be used for gridding. This
option will weigh the quality attribute by a Density value instead of thickness. the Density attribute needs to be in
each drillhole and the name is entered in the box to the right. It is usually DENSITY, and is in pounds per cu. ft or
kg/cu m.
Use Strata Limit Lines: When using Strata Limit Polylines for modeling, this needs to be turned on for the program
to use them, even if they are on screen. If just using Strata Limit Polylines for modeling, this needs to be turned on
or the program will not use them, even if they are on screen. If just this one setting is on, then you will be prompted
to select them for all commands.
Auto Select All Strata Limit Lines: Turning this on will automatically select all the Strata Limit Polylines for all
commands that use them. They will not have to be selected each time.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 396
Process Only Strata with Beds: This setting is used mostly when duplicate strata appear in a drillhole. It will only
model with strata that have a bed name, ignoring those that don't. This useful in a situation where only the KEY
strata have a bed name. It will ignore all the NONKEY strata, and just model the KEY strata. This can be used when
modeling geology such as lignite or bentonite, where thin seams have bed names and the overburden, partings and
interburdens do not.
Process Only Strata with Denition: This option will process and model only the strata and beds that are dened
with the Dene Strata command that creates the
*
.SDF le. If the seam is not on this list, then it will be ignored for
processing and modeling.
Dip Angle Method: The Direct method simply applies the dip angle of the sample to the depth of the sample. The
Minimum Curvature method looks at two adjacent samples at a time and calculates assuming the samples lie on a
circular arc. The Min Curvature From Bottom method considers the sample point to be at the bottom of the sample
and pairs this point with the dip from the previous sample. The Min Curvature From Top method considers the
sample points to be at the top of the sample and pairs this point with the dip from the next sample.
StrataCalc Drillhole Selection Method: This setting denes how the program will prompt for modeling the geol-
ogy. If it is set to On-Screen Drillholes, then that will be what the program is looking for when modeling. If this
setting is set to StrataCalc File, then the program will prompt for the presaved StrataCalc le with the extension of
*
.STC. This le is created in the Geology Module, under the StrataCalc menu.
Underground Room/Pillar Settings: The following settings are used for the series of commands for placing coal
sections to calculating end of month volumes.
Use 0 Values for Blank Entries in Coal Sections: When using the Coal Sections in the standard mining module, if
a value is blank, this option will assign a 0 value instead of a blank or Null value.
Draw Coal Sections Z at Thickness: This option will draw the coal sections symbol at the Z value of the actual
thickness. So if the coal section has a thickness of 5 feet. When it draws it in the drawing, it will have a Z value of
5. This is useful for contouring or gridding the coal sections with standard Civil commands.
Prompt for Advancement Pline for Quantities: When running the quantity routines in the standard mining mod-
ule, turning this on will prompt for the Advancement pline for quantities.
Report Format for Quantities by Avg/Grid Methods: This setting determines the report format from the quantity
commands in the standard mining module. Standard is the regular text editor. Column puts them in columns in the
editor and Formatter will use the powerful Report Formatter.
Key Material Name: This is the name of the KEY material you are mining. For example, enter in COAL or
LIMESTONE or GOLD, or whatever ore you are mining.
Bed Name Sufxes: KEY, TOP, PARTING & BOTTOM: These settings allow for custom naming of the Bed
Name extensions the program adds to the bed names when it does the processing and modeling. The default settings
are KEY, TOP, PARTING & BOTTOM. These can be customized, such as replacing TOP with OB.
SDPS Directory: This is the directory that the SDPS program (Subsidence Deformation Prediction System) is
installed in, if it is on the computer.
Use Map Object Data as Properties: This setting will use the AutoCAD Map data as the information stored for
the Property and Owner when using those named polylines in the drawing. If this is not set, then the program will
use the standard Owner and Property names assigned as normal.
These options are used for the Construction module and SiteNet commands in the Civil module.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 397
Extrapolate Surface To Boundary Perimeter: When this is check ON surfaces are extended and volumes are
calculated out to your boundary perimeter. When this is checked OFF surfaces and calculations end at the extents
of your design data.
Use Existing Surface To Extrapolate Design: When this is checked ON surfaces and volumes are calculated to
the extents of your existing data.
Use Binary Triangulation File Format: This option sets the format for the surface model les as either binary or
ASCII. The binary format has a .tin le name extension and loads about twice as fast and has about 50% less le
size than ASCII. The ASCII format has a .t extension and is the legacy format used by other Carlson products and
Softdesk.
Minimize Flat Triangles: This option reduces the occurrence of ''at'' (or more precisely, horizontal) triangles. Flat
triangles often occur when creating surface models from contour data. The Minimize Flat Triangle option will swap
triangulation edges when possible to switch at triangles to sloped triangles.
Reduce Triangulation Surfaces: This causes edges within the selected surface TIN mesh to be collapsed to reduce
the number of triangles, edges, and points within the mesh while having a minimal impact on the overall shape of
the mesh.
Reduce Offset Distance: This setting is used by the Reduce Triangulation Surfaces command to set the reduction
tolerance. Specify the maximum average distance that any point can be moved outside of the plane of any triangle
that connects to that point. Values might range from .01 to .1 for most purposes.
Surface File Sufxes: These settings allow you to change the le names for the surfaces generated by the program:
-og - This is the default name for the original ground surface before adjustments.
-ze - This is the default name for the original ground surface after subgrade zone adjustments.
-ex - This is the default name for the original ground surface after subgrade zone and topsoil adjustments.
-bs - This is the default name for the initial design surface before adjustments.
-zn - This is the default name for the design surface after subgrade zone adjustments.
-fn - This is the default name for the design surface after subgrade zone and topsoil adjustments.
-ox - This is the default name for the over-excavate surface after subgrade zone and topsoil adjustments.
Automatic Update Colors: This refreshes colors in your drawing as they change (i.e. elevating entities, setting
layers for different Targets, etc). If your drawing is very large and is slow to automatically refresh you may want to
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 398
toggle this off and use the Update Colors For Set Elevations command under View when you want/need to see the
color changes.
Assign Colors By Target: This option allows you to set the Existing, Design, and Other layers to any color you
dene.
Assign Colors By Elevation: This option allows you to set the color for entities needing elevations.
No Elevation Entities Color: Indicate the color entities with no elevation (Z=0) should be assigned to when their
layer is classied as ''Original'' or ''Design''.
There are literally hundreds of default settings that can be set with this dialog. The categories that can be selected
from are:
The Settings for each Category will display all of the items that can be setup for default values. The Default value
is set in the Conguration Default Value box. The corresponding Metric or English default values are set here,
allowing for easy switching between the two systems.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Settings
Keyboard Command: cong scad
Prerequisite: None.
Carlson Settings Explorer
The Carlson Settings Explorer dialog box allows you to view, manage and report the values for all settings in all
commands in all Carlson Software programs.
The left-side of the dialog is a tree-view showing ''Carlson Software'' as the top item in the tree. Then, each
Carlson Program or module is included as a sub-item under ''Carlson Software''. The Menus are then displayed as
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 399
sub-items under each Carlson Program. And then the Commands in each Menu are listed as sub-items of the Menu.
The right-side is a spreadsheet view and is populated depending on the item(s) selected and highlighted in
the tree-view. Selecting and placing a checkmark next to an item at one of the upper levels of the tree structure will
select that item and all its sub-items.
The spreadsheet view shows the following columns for a command:
Setting - Prompt for the settings in the dialog or at Command: line
Value - Current value
Default - Default value for the setting
Ini Name - Carlson internal le name for the command
Data Type - Description of the value for this setting
Select/Unselect: If you pick and highlight an item in the tree-view that is un-checked, this button displays ''Select''.
If the selected item is already checked, this button displays ''Un-Select''. After an item is selected and highlighted,
picking the ''Select'' or ''Unselect'' button will place or remove the checkmark next to that item and all its sub-items.
Select All: Use this button to place a checkmark next to all items and sub-items in the tree-view.
Clear All: Use this button to clear checkmarks from all items and sub-items in the tree-view.
Show Selected Only: Select this option to display - in spreadsheet view - only those settings that have checkmarks
next to them in the tree-view.
Filter: Using a Filter will display only those settings containing the text string specied as the Filter. for instance,
Filtering with the word ''elevation'', returns the following results:
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 400
Find: Use this option to search for a string of text. First, enter the text to be found and then pick the button to the
right to execute the search.
Show Modied Only: Select this option to display only those settings whose current value, as shown in the ''Value''
column, is different from the default value shown in the ''Default'' column.
Show Layers Only: Select this option to display only those settings whose value in the ''Data Type'' column is
specied as ''Layer''.
Report: Use this button to prepare a report of all selected settings using Carlson's Report Formatter.
Load: Use this button to Load settings from a Carlson Conguration File (.cfg).
Save: Use this button to Save settings to a Carlson Conguration File (.cfg).
Restore: Use this button to Restore selected settings to their Default value.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: setxplore
Prerequisite: None
Settings File Manager
The Settings File Manager provides an organized view of all Carlson Software Settings les that have been saved in
a specied ''Settings'' folder. By default, the initial folder displayed is the ''Startup Settings Folder'' as specied in
the Project Setup dialog box.
The various Settings les are displayed in a tree structure based on their corresponding Carlson Software
program. If the current Settings for any command match the Settings found in a Settings le, the le name will
show up in a Bold font. Because Conguration Files (.cfg) are collections of many Settings les, they cannot be set
Current and will not show up in Bold font.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 401
Set Current: After selecting one of the various Settings les, use this button to set that le current. Files that have
been set ''Current'' will show up in a Bold font. Only one le of any Setting type can be set Current at one time.
And, because Conguration Files (.cfg) are collections of many Settings les, they cannot be set Current and will
not show up in Bold.
Change Settings Folder: Use this button to browse to and select a folder in which Carlson Software settings have
been stored.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Settings
Keyboard Command: setmanager
Prerequisite: None
Mouse Click Settings
This command can be used to make custom mouse click preferences. It allows you to set the preferred functionality
of your mouse wheel and mouse buttons.
The Middle Button Click options apply to a 2-button wheel mouse (with the wheel acting as the middle button) or
a 3-button mouse. Choose between using the middle mouse wheel for real-time pan, or to show an Object Snap
pop-up menu. The mouse wheel can also be clicked and depressed for panning, and it can be used for zooming in
and out by scrolling with the wheel.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 402
In the lower section of the dialog, you can determine how the right mouse button will operate. For the right button,
there are different levels of pop-up menus that can be activated. With all these menus off, the right button will be
used like Enter on the keyboard.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: clickset
Prerequisite: None
Toolbars
This command allows you to display and hide toolbars. Click on a toolbar name and press the Show or Hide button.
Show: Turns on the selected toolbar. If the toolbar is already visible, then this does nothing.
Hide: Turns off the selected toolbar. If the toolbars is already hidden, then this does nothing. If the toolbar is
oating, you can also turn it off by clicking the x in the upper right corner.
Exit: Exits this command
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: TBARCFG
Prerequisite: None
Edit Symbol Library
This command allows you to customize the symbol library. For a printout of the default symbols, get the
symbols.pdf in the Carlson Projects folder. The default library has hundreds of 2D and 3D symbols including
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 403
National CAD Standard (NCS) symbols and MassDOT standard symbols.
Categories are a way for grouping symbols by type for your own convenience in symbol selection. A new category
is added by clicking on the ''Add Category'' button. An edit eld then appears in the tree view on the left and waits
for you to enter the category name. The input is nished by pressing the Enter key.
The category may be populated by creating a new symbol from selected entities in the drawing, by specifying
drawing (.DWG) les, or by moving existing symbols from one category to another.
To create a new symbol, open a drawing which has the entities to be used in the symbol. The symbol should be
drawn at unit size (scale 1:1) because Carlson will scale the symbol by the current drawing scale when the symbol is
used. Highlight the category for the symbol and click on the ''Create Symbol'' button. A dialog appears for entering
the new symbol name. Next, specify the le name for the symbol. The le name has a .DWG extension and would
usually reside in the Carlson SUP directory, but you may use another path. Then the program will prompt you to
select the entities from the drawing for the symbol. An insertion point for the symbol must also be picked.
The ''Import Symbols'' button brings up a le selection dialog which allows you to select multiple les to be added
to the current category (to select multiple les use Shift or Control keys along with the mouse). If the les you
select are not in the Carlson SUP directory, the program will offer an option of copying them there. There are also
Import Library and Export Library buttons.
By default, the symbol description is the same as le name. The description for the symbol or category name may be
changed by highlighting that name and clicking on ''Rename'' button, the name being edited is then placed into edit
mode. To move a symbol into a different category, select the symbol to be moved on the tree and click an ''Up'' or
''Down'' button as many times a needed to reach the desired category. The symbols are sorted alphabetically within
each category, while categories are remaining in the order placed to allow the more frequently accessed categories
be on top.
Note: The symbol library is stored in an ASCII le named symbols.dta in the Carlson \USER directory.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: editptsym
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 404
Layer Library
This feature serves as an expanded version of the Layer Manager and also as a layer standards manager. In addition
to allowing the user to sort layers into easily recognizable groups called Layer Categories, this feature can also be
used to import layers from a text le and to compare and match layers in the library to the current drawing.
Once populated, layers from the Library can be called from commands such as 2D Polyline and 3D Poly-
line for layer and property assignment. Also, the Item Standards Manager is able to export layers from the items
database to the Layer Library.
The Layer Library has two areas of the dialog box: the Layer Category List on the left and the Layer List on the
right.
Layer Categories: Layer Categories are shown as a list in a tree view in the left-hand pane of the dialog box.
Categories can be re-ordered by dragging and dropping to a different position in the list or by using the
Move Up, Move Down, Move Left and Move Right arrow buttons. Other buttons above the Layer Category list
also enable the user to Add, Remove and Rename Categories.
Also, right-clicking on a Category in the list displays a shortcut menu allowing the user to access many of
the same commands as the buttons along the top and bottom of the dialog box.
Layers: Layers in a selected Category are shown as a list in spreadsheet view in the right-hand pane of the dialog
box.
The default column-headings for the Layer List are Name, Description, Color, Line Type, Line Weight, Plot
Style and Plot/No Plot. Additional column-headings may be added using the Extra Fields button at the bottom of
the dialog. Using the Add Layer (plus) and Delete Layer (minus) buttons, layers can be easily added and removed
from a particular Category. The Move To button can also be used to change a layer to a different Category.
Clear All: This button removes all the Layer Category and Layer denitions.
Save As and Load: These buttons can be used to create and restore Layer Library settings using a Layer Library
Settings (.LA) le. There are a few default .LA les in the Carlson Projects\Settings folder that you can load for
National CAD Standard (NCS) layers and MassDOT standard layers. The current layer library denitions are stored
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 405
in the USER folder in a le named layerstd.dta.
Extra Fields: This button allows the user to dene up to ten extra text elds (column headings) for a layer. These
elds can then be used as import elds or displayed in a report.
Report: This button uses the Report Formatter to allow the user to compile and display a report containing all
Layer Categories and Layers in the Library. The Report Formatter can also be used to export the data to a Microsoft
Excel (.XLS or .XLSX) le.
Import: This button gives the user two options for Importing layers into the Layer Library.
The Drawing Layers option simply copies all layer
denitions from the current drawing into the Library after prompting the user to select the destination Category.
The Text File option allows the user to select an existing Text (.TXT, .DAT, or .CSV) le containing stan-
dard layer denitions to populate the Library. Note that Microsoft Excel provides an option to save an Excel (.XLS
or .XLSX) le as a Text le. Follow the steps below to Import layers from a text le.
1. Pick the Import button.
2. Pick the Text File (txt;dat;csv) button. This opens the Text File Import Options dialog box.
3. At the top of the Import Options box, select the le format type such as ''Comma-Separated'' or ''Tab Separated''.
4. If the top-line of the Text le contains column headings, pick the option to ''Use rst row for column headers''.
5. If the Text le contains one or more lines of text above the layer and property data, use the text box next to ''Skip''
to specify the number of rows at the top of the text le to be ''Skipped'' before importing the list of layers.
6. If headers are not included in the Text le, use the drop-down at the top of each column heading in the spreadsheet
view to specify the column's data type such as ''Name'', ''Color'' or ''Linetype''.
7. Pick the Continue button and specify the Category into which the new layers are to be Imported.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 406
Create: After selecting a Layer Category, the user can pick this button to create all the layers for that Category in
the Drawing.
Compare DWG: This button is used to Compare drawing layers and their associated properties such as color,
linetype, lineweight and plot style to the standard Library denition for those layers. This feature will report how
many layers matched exactly, how many had a different set of properties and how many non-Standard layers were
found. It will also list the non-standard layers which are those dened in the drawing but not in the Library.
Match DWG: This button is used to alter the properties of drawing layers to match the properties of layers dened
in the library, or vice versa. After picking the Match DWG button, this dialog box displays:
Pick the Library to DWG button to alter the drawing layers to conform to the Library denitions.
Pick the DWG to Library button to alter the Library denitions of the layers to conform to those set in the
drawing.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings Layer Library
Keyboard Command: layerlib
Prerequisite: None
Title Block
This command draws a border and title block for the selected sheet size. At the top of the dialog, choose your
horizontal scale and sheet size. The
*
other
*
choice at the bottom of each list will allow you to add your own scale
or size if yours is not listed. Anything added to these lists will be retained for future use. Next, choose either
''landscape'' or ''portrait'' format. A blue rectangle next to this choice shows you the difference. Below this, you can
choose what layer to draw the border and title block on. The margins to use are specied next at the bottom of the
dialog. On the right hand side of the dialog. you can choose from several title blocks. As you choose each one, a
preview will be shown below this list. This routine looks for all drawings named ''tblock'' in the \SUP directory. If
you want to add your own title block, simply create a new drawing (or copy an existing one) in the \SUP directory
and give it a name that starts with tblock. Example: tblock22.dwg and tblock-Jones.dwg are both valid names for
this routine, but ''MyTitleblk.dwg'' is not. After you have made all your decisions in the dialog box, press OK.
Depending on your current zoom level, your drawing may be zoomed out to allow you to see the entire area that
will be covered by the drawing border. At this point, you have the border attached to your cursor and it is waiting
for you to pick a point for insertion. As soon as you do this, a secondary dialog will appear for you to ll out the
attributes associated with the particular title block you selected.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 407
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 408
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: tblock
Prerequisite: Set horizontal scale in Drawing Setup
Mortgage Block
This command draws a personalized title block for a mortgage survey. You may select an 8
1
2
'' x 11'' sheet, an 8
1
2
''
x 14'' sheet, or dene your own sheet size. The dialog box allows the user to edit all block information and input
unique data for every layout. The mortgage block drawing is called from the mortgage.dwg le located in the \sup
directory and can be easily opened and edited within AutoCAD, allowing for the user to alter the size, text, or any
other aspect of the drawing to t the user's particular needs. However, this is usually unnecessary since the original
.dwg le places this block for a standard 8
1
2
x 11 ratio drawing. In addition to the block, the user can include the
inputs and prescribed text for a Flood Note, which is placed in the bottom left hand corner of the drawing. You
may also select a custom drawing le for your ood note. All inputs are saved and recalled from a mortgage.ini le
located in the \User directory.
The LIMITS of the drawing can be set to the lower left and upper right corners of the border. After the title block is
drawn, the contents can be edited using the Attribute Edit command under the Edit menu.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 409
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: mortgage
Prerequisite: Set horizontal scale in Drawing Setup
Rescale Drawing
This command globally resizes selected text, symbol and block entities within the drawing by comparing the existing
drawing scale factor to a new scale factor. Entities are scaled from their individual insertion points. Lines and
polylines are not scaled.
Prompts
Old Horizontal Scale: 20
New Horizontal Scale: 30
Select text, symbols, dimensions and blocks to scale.
Select objects: select objects by window, crossing or by typing ''all'' at the command prompt, and press Enter
41 found
Select objects: press Enter
Number of symbols and blocks changed> 7
Testing Entity> 41
Number of text entities changed> 20
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 410
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: scaledwg
Prerequisite: Drawing entities to be scaled
Set/Reset X-Hairs
Set X-Hairs sets the crosshairs either to align with the selected line or polyline or to a user-specied slope. Reset
X-Hairs restores the crosshairs alignment to horizontal.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings > Crosshairs
Keyboard Commands: setxhairs, resetxhairs
Prerequisite: Line entity
Tablet Calibrate
This command executes the routine to perform calibration of the digitizer tablet to the drawing. There are two meth-
ods of calibration: Known Reference Points, and Drawing Scale with New Reference Points, which are explained in
detail below. The Calibrate routine must be used prior to using the Digitize Contours command.
Before proceeding, please refer to the Settings menu, then go to Congure and General Settings. Then look at the
Digitizer Puck Layout section for the selection of the correct puck layout.
Tablet Calibration
Known Reference Points uses two known coordinates for reference points on the drawing. When this option is
selected, the elds for coordinate info activate. Enter the known northing and easting values for the reference points
from the info on the drawings in the appropriate elds and pick the Pick button. Pick the points from the drawing
on the tablet. Furthermore, Carlson saves the coordinates of the two reference points for future calibrations and
displays them on the Tablet Calibration Dialog the next time it is accessed, so if you are working in the same
drawing, you can use the Known Reference Points method with the saved coordinates to digitize back to your
previous coordinates. For greater calibration accuracy, choose two points that are farther apart rather than closer
together.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 411
Drawing Scale with New Reference Points is very convenient when you don't know the precise coordinates of
the entities on your drawing. The user must specify the drawing scale from the plan. This method establishes a
coordinate system relative to the position of the plan on the digitizer board. In addition to the drawing scale, you
are required to enter a random coordinate for the rst reference point, the default coordinate is (1000,1000). You
then pick the Pick button and pick the point on the drawing to assign the specied coordinate to. The program will
compute the coordinate of the second reference point that you pick based on the rst point. The coordinates of these
two reference points would be saved and will be display in the Tablet Calibration Dialog as Known Reference
Points the next time you calibrate the tablet, so you can digitize back to the previous coordinates if you are working
on the same drawing, even though you may have moved or rotated your drawing on the digitize board.
Prompts
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 412
Tablet Calibration Dialog
Specify the Calibration Methods. If you select Drawing Scale method, enter the drawing scale and the coordinate of
the rst reference point. Otherwise enter the exact coordinates of the rst and second reference points.
Pick rst reference point: pick a point
Pick second reference point: pick another point
Pulldown Menu Locations: Settings > Tablet Calibration
Keyboard Command: digsetup
Prerequisite: Afx a drawing to your digitizer tablet. Have a digitizer board and a puck connected to your
computer, and have Wintab driver installed. The digitizer has been correctly set up. Select the puck layout in
Congure .
Save/Load Tablet Calibration
A common problem with calibrating maps on a large format digitizer is that if you leave the current drawing session,
AutoCAD forgets the tablet calibration. Tablet save can be used to save the calibration when a drawing is taped down
properly. This calibration le can be restored at any time later and be accurate so long as the drawing did not move
on the tablet.
Save Conguration Procedure:
1) Command: TABSAVE
2) Designate lename (
*
.TCF) to save conguration into.
Restore Conguration Procedure:
1) Command: TABREST
2) Select lename (
*
.TCF) to restore conguration from.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings > Tablet Calibration
Keyboard Commands: tablet1, tablet2
Prerequisite: None
Set UCS to World
This command sets the UCS (user coordinate system) to the world coordinate system (WCS). Carlson TakeOff
works exclusively in the world coordinate system and there is no way to change this setting. In AutoCAD, it is
possible to change the coordinate system from WCS. If you receive a drawing in which the coordinate system is not
set to world, use this command to restore the UCS.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: UCS WORLD
Units Control
The Drawing Units dialog box controls coordinate and angle display formats and determines precision.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 413
1 Under Length, you specify the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units.
Type: This eld sets the current format for units of measure. The values include Architectural, Decimal, Engi-
neering, Fractional, and Scientic. The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feet-and-inches displays and
assume that each drawing unit represents one inch. The other formats can represent any real-world unit.
Precision: This eld sets the number of decimal places for the current units display.
2 Under Angle you specify the current angle format and the precision for the current angle display.
Type: This eld sets the current angle format.
Precision: This eld sets the precision for the current angle display.
TakeOff uses the following conventions for the various angle measures: decimal degrees appear as decimal numbers,
grads appear with a lowercase g sufx, and radians appear with a lowercase r sufx. The degrees/minutes/seconds
format uses d for degrees, ' for minutes, and '' for seconds, for example:
123d45'56.7''
Surveyor's units show angles as bearings, using N or S for north or south, degrees/minutes/seconds for how far east
or west the angle is from direct north or south, and E or W for east or west, for example:
N 45d0'0'' E
The angle is always less than 90 degrees and is displayed in the degrees/minutes/seconds format. If the angle is
precisely north, south, east, or west, only the single letter representing the compass point is displayed.
Clockwise: This option calculates positive angles in the clockwise direction. The default direction for positive
angles is counterclockwise.
When the program prompts for an angle, you can point in the desired direction or enter an angle regardless of the
setting specied for Clockwise.
3 Under Drawing Units for TakeOff DesignCenter blocks, you can control the unit of measurement used for block
insertions. A block created in units that differ from the units specied in this option is scaled and inserted in the
specied units. Select Unitless to insert the block as is and not scale the block to match the specied units. Source
content units and Target drawing units settings in the User Preferences tab of the Options dialog box under the
Settings menu are used when Insert Units are not dened.
4 Sample Output displays an example of the current settings for units and angles.
Direction displays the Direction Control dialog box described below.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 414
A The Base Angle determines where 0 degrees is located when the program calculates angles. The base angle sets
the direction of the base angle. These options affect the entry of angles, object rotation angles, the display format,
and the entry of polar, cylindrical, and spherical coordinates. Choose East, North, West, or South, or choose Other
to indicate an alternative direction. The default direction for the zero angle is East. In TakeOff, the base angle is
relative to the orientation of the user coordinate system.
East: Sets the base angle to east (default is zero degrees).
North: Sets the base angle to 90 degrees north.
West: Sets the base angle to 180 degrees west.
South: Sets the base angle to 270 degrees south.
Other: Sets a direction different from the points of the compass.
Angle: Sets the angle. Available only when Other is selected.
Pick an Angle: Uses the pointing device to dene the angle based on the angle of an imaginary line connecting
any two points you specify. Available only when Other is selected.
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: UNITS
Point Object Snap
When this toggle is turned on, you can move your cursor near a Carlson point and snap to the actual coordinates of
the point without having to use the AutoCAD NODE snap. Point Object Snap can be used alone to display the point
information or it can be turned on and used during other commands. In the example illustration, the 2DP command
(2D polyline) has been started and the rst point picked was point number 2074. As the cursor nears point number
2067, the point snap marker appears and the point information is displayed, click the mouse and the next polyline
vertex will snap to the coordinates of point 2067.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 415
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: 'pointsnap
Prerequisite: None
Aperture Object Snap
The Drafting Settings dialog box sets object snap modes.
1 Under Object Snap, you set object snaps.
Object Snap On: This option turns running object snaps on and off. The object snaps selected under Object
Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. This setting is also controlled by the OSMODE system variable.
Object Snap Tracking On: This option turns object snap tracking on and off. With object snap tracking the
cursor can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command. To
use object snap tracking, you must turn on one or more object snaps.
2 Under Object Snap Modes, you turn on running object snaps.
Endpoint: Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, spline, region,
or ray or to the closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face.
Midpoint: Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, solid, spline,
or xline.
Center: Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
Node: Snaps to a point object.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 416
Quadrant: Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
Intersection: Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, spline,
or xline. Intersection snaps to the edges of regions and curves, but does not snap to the edges or corners of 3D solids.
Extended Intersection snaps to the imaginary intersection of two objects that would intersect if the objects were
extended along their natural paths. Carlson Survey automatically turns on Extended Intersection when you select
the Intersection object snap mode. You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent
Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. Intersection and Extended Intersection work with
edges of regions and curves, but not with edges or corners of 3D solids.
Extension: Causes a temporary extension line to display when you pass the cursor over the endpoint of objects,
so you can draw objects to and from points on the extension line.
Insertion: Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, a shape, or text.
Perpendicular: Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline,
ray, solid, spline, or xline. Carlson Survey automatically turns on Deferred Perpendicular snap mode when the
object you are drawing requires you to complete more than one perpendicular snap. You can use a line, arc, circle,
polyline, ray, xline, multiline, or 3D solid edge as an object from which to draw a perpendicular line. You can use
Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such objects. When the aperture box passes over a
Deferred Perpendicular snap point, the program displays a Snaptip and marker.
Tangent: Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc. Carlson Survey automatically turns on
Deferred Tangent snap mode when the object you are drawing requires you to complete more than one tangent snap.
For example, you can use Deferred Tangent to draw a line that is tangent to two arcs, polyline arcs, or circles. When
the aperture box passes over a Deferred Tangent snap point, the program displays a marker and Snaptip. If you use
the From option in conjunction with the Tangent snap mode to draw objects other than lines from arcs or circles, the
rst point drawn is tangent to the arc or circle in relation to the last point selected in the drawing area.
Nearest: Snaps to the nearest point on an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, point, polyline, spline,
or xline.
Apparent Intersection: Apparent Intersection includes two separate snap modes: Apparent Intersection and
Extended Apparent Intersection. You can also locate Intersection and Extended Intersection snap points while
running Apparent Intersection object snap mode is on. Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent intersection of
two objects (arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, spline, or xline) that do not intersect in
3D space but may appear to intersect in the drawing display. Extended Apparent Intersection snaps to the imaginary
intersection of two objects that would appear to intersect if the objects were extended along their natural paths. You
might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 417
at the same time. Apparent and Extended Apparent Intersection work with edges of regions and curves but not with
edges or corners of 3D solids.
Parallel: Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever Carlson Survey prompts you for the second point
of a vector. After specifying the rst point of a vector, if you move the cursor over a straight line segment of another
object, the program acquires the point. When the path of the object you create is parallel to the line segment, the
program displays an alignment path, which you can use to create the parallel object.
Clear All: This option turns off all object snap modes.
Select All: This option turns on all object snap modes.
Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: OSNAP
Prerequisite: None
System Variable Editor
The AutoCAD/IntelliCAD engine stores the values for its operating environment and some of its commands in
system variables. Each system variable has an associated type: integer, real, point, switch, or text string. This
command allows you to list or change the values of system variables.
List Box: Contains a list of the variables associated with the currently running version of AutoCAD. There are
more items than will display on the list box, use the scroll bar to move up and down through the list. Picking on
an item in the list box makes it the current item, causing the information about the item to be displayed, and can be
affected by most of the edit commands explained below.
Edit Field: When an item on the list box is picked, its current setting is displayed in the edit eld. If you intend to
make changes in an item, use standard editing procedures including the use of arrow keys and/or pointer movements
to make changes. Once changes have been made, you must use the CHANGE options explained below to effect
changes. Pressing enter at the edit eld will have no effect on the item in the list. If the item selected is a read-only
variable, the edit eld will be grayed-out and will not allow input.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 418
Description: When an item on the list box is picked, its denition is referenced and displayed in this eld. This
can be a benet in learning the uses of the assorted system variables. This is a display only eld, so you can't change
the description given.
Under Type Group, the type of variable will be displayed indicated by one of the radio buttons. Each of these types
are explained below for your benet. For additional information on variable types used by AutoCAD, obtain and
consult a source of AutoCAD documentation.
Integer: Dened as a whole number in the range from -32767 to +32768, no decimal value accepted.
Real: Dened as a real number in the range from -1.797E+308 to +1.797E+308, with extreme decimal accuracy
maintained.. Some real variables have a smaller range than previously stated.
String: Dened as a sequential array of characters in the range from 0 to 65535 characters, with a range of ASCII
(0-255). Numbers can be included in strings, even though they have no mathematical signicance.
2D Point: Dened as a list of two real numbers in the range from -1.797E+308 to +1.797E+308 separated by a
comma, having extreme decimal accuracy maintained. Always maintain the X,Y format, one (and only one) comma
must be used, separating the X and Y.
3D Point: Dened as a list of three real numbers in the range from -1.797E+308 to +1.797E+308 separated by
commas. While editing a 3D point, you must always maintain the X,Y,Z format, two (no less or no more), commas
must used, separating the X and Y and Z values.
Under Range Group, the variable displayed will usually have a range displayed. The FROM value indicating the
minimum, and the TO value being the maximum value accepted.
Under the Store Group, depending on the type of variable, AutoCAD may store the value in the drawing or the
conguration le, or it may not be stored. Each of these types are explained below for your benet.
Not Stored: Some variables, such as PLATFORM and CDATE, are not stored because they are system interde-
pendent.
In Drawing: Most variables are stored in the drawing, making the drawing format more personal than just a
database of objects. This allows you to open a drawing and have it behave just as though you had never left it.
In Cong: These are variables that remain the same regardless of the drawing opened. APERTURE and PICK-
BOX are just two examples of variables stored in the conguration le.
Under Access Group, depending on the type of variable, AutoCAD may not allow you to make changes to it. Each
of these types are explained below.
Read Only: Some variables, such as PLATFORM and CDATE, are read-only and therefore cannot be changed.
Read-Only variables are marked and the edit eld will be grayed indicating that you can't change the variable.
Read/Write: Most variables are read/write and can be changed. These variables are marked and the edit eld
will be active so you can change the variable.
Under Binary Group, depending on the type of variable, the value may be off or on, yes or no. If the variable type is
not binary, this group will be grayed out entirely.
Off (0): Indicate an off condition. Some variables, such as ATTREQ, are simply on or off toggles. You may
change a binary item by clicking in this group to change the variable, or changing the value in the edit eld.
On (1): Indicate an on condition. Binary variables are simply on or off toggles. Their range is from 0 to 1. You
may change a binary item by clicking to change the variable, or changing the value in the edit eld.
Control Buttons - These buttons are the main controls in the use of the Variable Editor. Each buttons purpose is
explained below.
OK: Used to accept the changes made during the variable editing process, returning you to the command prompt
with changes in effect.
Cancel: Used to cancel the changes made during the variable editing process, returning you to the command
prompt without the changes in effect.
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 419
Load: Used to load a saved set of system variables. This allows you to create a drawing, save the system
variables, open a second drawing, and load those variables into that drawing. Read-only variables are skipped.
Save: Used to save the current system variables to a disk le. All system variables are stored to the le, even
those that are marked as read-only.
Print: Used to print the current system variables. After choosing this option, you will prompted for an output
lename, then the program will proceed to write the system variables to the le. This le can be loaded into any
editor or word processor, edited and printed.
Variable Buttons - These buttons are used to control the changes in variables, while using the Variable Editor. Each
buttons purpose is explained below.
Change: Used to execute the changes typed into the edit eld. You must use this button, simply pressing enter
will not make the change.
Restore: Used to cancel the changes typed into the edit eld. If you make a mistake or change your mind while
making changes in the edit eld, press this button to restore the edit eld to the value before editing.
Status: Used to determine if the program will echo the status of changes being made to the command area. If
this toggle is on, any changes made from the dialog will echo the change. Also if a stream of change commands is
being read from a le, and the toggle is on, the changes taking place will be displayed.
Note: This command displays many more system variables than are found in the Systems Variable Chapter, which
contains a list of supported system variables. Modication of any system variable other than the supported ones
found in the Systems Variable Chapter is done at your own risk, and may result in program errors requiring a
re-installation of Carlson.
Pulldown Menu Location: Settings
Keyboard Command: VAREDIT
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 9. Settings Menu 420
Points Menu 10
All of the routines in this menu operate on points in a Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le. Coordinate les are binary
les that contain point numbers, northings, eastings, elevations and descriptions. The Carlson coordinate database
(.CRDB) is based on SQLite and supports point numbers and descriptions up to 255 characters. Alternately, C&G
CRD and CGC les, LandDesktop MDB les or Simplicity Systems ZAK les can be used in place of the Carlson
CRD le. All routines in this menu will read from, and write to, these types of point data les. At any given time,
there can only be one active coordinate le. If a command is initiated that requires a coordinate le while one is
not one set, Carlson will prompt for a coordinate le name. From that point on, this is the current coordinate le.
Another coordinate le can be used by choosing Set Coordinate File or Open CRD File in Coordinate File Utilities.
Whenever you asked for point numbers, you can enter any combination with commas and dashes or type ALL to use
all points. For example 1-3,7,20-23 would act on points 1,2,3,7,20,21,22,23. Coordinate les have either numeric
or alphanumeric point numbers. Alphanumeric point numbers consist of nine or less digits and letters (i.e. point#
7A). The type of point number format is set when the coordinate le is created. This setting is found under General
Settings in Carlson Congure. This setting only affects new coordinate les.
Each point is drawn by three entities:
1. point block
2. point node
3. symbol
The point block is an INSERT entity with PNTNO, PNTELEV and PNTDESC attributes. These attributes represent
the point number, elevation and description respectively. The point node is a POINT entity and is used for picking
the point with the NODE snap. The point node is also used as the X, Y, Z coordinate in Triangulate & Contour. The
421
symbol can be any symbol dened in the Symbol Library (use SPT0 for no symbol). Since points use Carlson point
symbols, the CAD system variables PDMODE and PDSIZE should usually be set to 0.
The points in the drawing can be linked to their coordinates in the coordinate le. The link updates the coordinate le
when a point is modied in the drawing. For example, when points are moved with the Rotate Points command, their
coordinates will be automatically updated in the coordinate le. To update the coordinate le without this automatic
link, you can run the command Update CRD File from Drawing in Coordinate File Utilities. The linking option
is called Link Points with Coordinate File (currently only available in AutoCAD) and can be set under General
Settings in Carlson Congure. This setting does not affect points currently in your drawing, only points drawn after
you change this setting.
Each point in the coordinate le has room for a 32 character description. To have a longer description, an associated
point note le can be used. The note le has the same le name as the coordinate le with a .NOT extension and is
stored in the same directory as the coordinate le. For example, survey.not would be the note le for survey.crd.
The note le is a text le that stores a point number together with the additional notes for the point. There is no limit
to the length of the note. Notes can be added to points using the Edit Points command. The List Points command
can be used to print out the notes.
For each point, the point attribute block, node, and symbol can be bound together into a ''grouped'' entity. This
means that if you choose to use the Move command (or other CAD tools) the entire collection moves together. This
is done using the grouping functionality.
To disable this system altogether, navigate to Carlson Congure > General Settings and turn off the toggle for
Group Point Entities. If you need to temporarily disable grouping in a drawing, you can use the AutoCAD toggle
for grouping, which is Ctrl-A (holding down the 'Ctrl' key and then pressing the letter 'A' on the keyboard activates
this two way toggle and the current status will be echoed to the Command prompt area).
Carlson points include additional information on each element that makes up the point collection (attribute block,
node and symbol). This information allows Carlson to know such things as which coordinate (.CRD) the point came
from. Commands like Drawing Inspector can then display the point information for the point entities. This also
makes it easier for Carlson to identify which drawing objects belong to a point, making commands like Edit Point
Attributes a ''double-click'' pick association instead of a selection set.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 422
Point Defaults
This command sets Carlson point options.
Descriptions: Specify whether you are prompted for a point description when creating points and whether the point
descriptions are labeled in the point block.
Elevations: Specify whether you are prompted for a point elevation when creating points and whether or not the
point elevation is labeled with the point.
Prex/Sufx: Indicate a desired prex or sufx that should be included with the elevation label.
Locate on Real Z Axis: When checked, points are drawn at their actual elevation, otherwise, points will be drawn
at Z=0.
The following tables illustrate the effects of Elevation vs. Real Z settings:
Elevations Yes Real Z Yes
Picked Point Labels point, Prompts for elevation Uses elevation for z coordinate
Point Number Labels point, No Prompt Uses z coordinate from le
Effects of Elevation Settings - Scenario 1
Elevations Yes Real Z No
Picked Point Labels point, Prompts for elevation Uses 0 for z coordinate
Point Number Labels point, No Prompt Uses 0 for z coordinate
Effects of Elevation Settings - Scenario 2
Elevations No Real Z Yes
Picked Point Labels point, No Prompt Uses z coordinate of picked point
Point Number Labels point, No Prompt Uses z coordinate from le
Effects of Elevation Settings - Scenario 3
Elevations No Real Z No
Picked Point No Label, No Prompt Uses 0 for z coordinate
Point Number No Label, No Prompt Uses 0 for z coordinate
Chapter 10. Points Menu 423
Effects of Elevation Settings - Scenario 4
Attribute Layout ID: Controls the location of the point number, elevation and description. Up to 10 attribute
layouts (0 through 9) are available. See Carlson Knowledgebase Article 779 (Customized Carlson Point Attribute
Layouts) for examples and steps of different attribute layout congurations.
Symbol Name: Enter the default symbol name to use. You may also pick the Select Symbol button to select a
symbol from the Symbol Library.
Prompt for Symbol Names: When checked, you will be prompted for each symbol name instead of using the
default symbol.
Use Field to Finish: Allows you to use the code denitions from the designated Feature Library Denition (FLD)
table specied below. For example, when creating a point with description of ''FH'' (for Fire Hydrant), Carlson
would look up ''FH'' in the Field to Finish table and will use the eld code denitions to establish the parameters of
the point being created instead of the denitions dened in within Point Defaults.
Point Numbers: When this toggle is OFF, no point number will be created and no points will be stored in the active
coordinate le.
Automatic Point Numbers: When enabled, point numbers are numbered sequentially from the Start Point Number.
If the Start Point Number eld is set to 0, no point will be plotted. An exception to this is when you use the Draw-
Locate Points command and use the Range option, then a point entity is plotted. When disabled, commands that
locate new points will prompt for the point number.
Start Point Number: Specify the starting point number to use.
Layer for Points: Specify the default layer name for Carlson points.
Vertical Angle Mode: Specify how Carlson should prompt you for vertical angles. None means ''Do not prompt.''
This applies to creating points with commands such as Traverse. The vertical angle is used to calculate the point
elevation.
Separate Layers: Specify settings for point attribute layers:
None - The point number, elevation and description use the layer names PNTNO, PNTELEV and PNTDESC,
respectively.
Points - The point number, elevation and description layers are composed by concatenating the point layer
and the string NO, ELEV, and DESC. For example, if the point layer is UTIL then the attribute layers will be
UTILNO, UTILELEV and UTILDESC, respectively.
Symbols - The point symbol layer is composed by concatenating the point layer and the string MARK. For
example, if the point layer is UTIL then the symbol layer will be UTILMARK.
Both - The point symbol, point number, elevation and description layers are composed by concatenating the
point layer and the string MARK, NO, ELEV, and DESC respectively. For example, if the point layer is UTIL
then the symbol/attribute layers will be UTILMARK, UTILNO, UTILELEV and UTILDESC.
Auto Zoom Center for New Points: When checked, the drawing will perform a ''Zoom Center'' around new points
to keep the display centered around the current working area during the new point creation process.
Use Annotative Points: (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) When enabled, points (usually placed through the Draw
Field-to-Finish or Draw-Locate Points commands) will use scale-able annotative properties.
Support All Drawing Scales: (AutoCAD-based platforms, only) When enabled, points placed as annotative entities
will make use of all annotation scales currently dened within the drawing.
Table: This option lets you specify the Feature Library Denition le (FLD) used by the Use Field to Finish controls
specied above.
GIS File: This option lets you specify a GIS le to be used when creating new points. The GIS le contains a list
of elds to prompt for. For each point that is created, the program will prompt for these elds and store the results
to the note le (.not) associated with the current coordinate le.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 424
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Points
Keyboard Command: ptsetup
Prerequisite: None.
Draw-Locate Points
The Draw-Locate Points dialog box allows you to insert either new or existing points into the drawing. You can
create new points either by picking points on the screen, or by entering northing and easting coordinates. You can
also place existing points by entering point numbers which reference the current coordinate le. You are prompted
to choose a coordinate le if no coordinate le is current.
The Coordinate File at the top of the dialog shows the current le which can be changed with the Set button.
The name of the symbol le is displayed in Symbol Name. You can choose a different symbol by clicking Select.
The selected point symbol is displayed on the right.
Symbol Rotation Azimuth is the rotation angle that is used for the point symbols. This angle is used in a counter-
clockwise direction relative to the current twist screen.
Layer by Description inserts the points in the layer named by the point description. Using Layer by Description
organizes the points by description and allows for layer management. For example, you can use the Isolate Layers
command to show only points on a certain layer. If you include an invalid layer character in the description, the
layer name stops at the bad character. A point description of ''UP / 105'' would use layer ''UP'', for example. The
Layer Prex is added to the beginning of the layer name. For example, a Layer Prex of ''PT '' and a point with the
description ''EP'' would use the layer ''PT EP''. Layer Prex is optional. It allows all the point layers to be grouped.
Draw Nodes Only inserts only a point entity (the node) and not the point block and symbol. This option is most
useful when you have a lot of points to insert, because inserting only the nodes is faster than inserting nodes with
the point block and symbol. Commands such as Triangulate & Contour and Make 3D Grid File can use these points,
and do not need the point block and symbol.
Selecting Elev Text Only draws text of the point elevation without the point block, symbol, or node. The decimal
place of elevation text is placed at the northing and easting point location.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 425
Locate within Polyline inserts only the points that are inside a closed inclusion polyline. The command prompts
you to select a closed inclusion polyline and as well as an optional exclusion polyline. All the points in the current
coordinate le are checked. Any points that are located within the inclusion polyline and outside the exclusion
polyline are drawn.
Locate within Distance inserts only the points that are within a specied distance from a reference point. The
command asks you for the reference point and the search distance. All the points in the current coordinate le are
checked. Any points that are located within the search distance of the reference point are drawn.
Locate within Window/Coord Range inserts only the points that are within the specied window or range of
northing, easting, and elevation. The command prompts for the minimum and maximum northing, easting, and
elevations. These values default to the actual minimum and maximum in the coordinate le. Then the command
prompts for the point number range of points to check. The points that fall in both the point number range and the
coordinate range are drawn.
Under Point Prompt-Label Settings, you determine attributes for which you will be prompted.
Descriptions determines whether you are prompted for descriptions for each point when creating new points. When
you are placing both new and existing points, Descriptions determine whether this attribute is labeled with the point
inserts.
Notes works with the note le (.not) associated with the current coordinate le. The note le contains unlimited
point descriptions in addition to the xed 32-character point descriptions in the coordinate le. When you create
points with Notes on, the command will prompt for point notes to be stored with the point. When you draw existing
points with Notes on, any notes for the points are drawn as text entities below the point description.
Elevations determines whether you are prompted for elevations for each point when creating new points. When
you are placing both new and existing points, Elevations determine whether this attribute is labeled with the point
inserts.
Use '+' labels the positive elevations with a leading '+'. For example, ''+159.43''.
Use '-' labels the negative elevations with a leading '-'.
Locate on Real Z Axis determines if the points are placed at their elevations or at zero elevation.
Label Zeros will label points with zero elevation when the Elevations option is on. Otherwise only points with
nonzero elevation will be labeled.
Elevation Prex/Sufx set the prex and sufx labels to apply for the elevation labels.
Elevation Integers controls the number of digits to display to the left of the decimal point for the elevation label.
The All setting will show the full elevation digits. The other settings allow you to limit the number of digits to
display for the purpose of reducing the amount of space the elevation labels take up in the drawing. For example, if
a site is in the 4000 foot elevation range, then this setting could be set to three digits (000) and an elevation of 4321
would be labeled as 321.
Elevation Decimals sets the number of decimals to the right of the decimal places for the elevation labels.
Under Point Number Settings, you determine how points will be numbered.
Point Numbers determines whether the complete point block is drawn or just the symbol and node. When you
create new points with Point Numbers off, no points are stored in the current coordinate le, and only the point
symbol and node are drawn. When you draw existing points with Point Numbers off, the point attribute block is not
drawn and only the point symbol and node are drawn.
Automatic Point Numbering applies to creating new points. With this option active, the command will use the
Starting Point Number for the rst new point. The next point number is automatically incremented. Before storing
the point, the command checks whether the point number is used. If the point number is used and point protect is
on (set in the Coordinate File Utilities command), then the command will prompt for another point number or to
overwrite the point. With Automatic Point Numbering off, the command will prompt for the point numbers.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 426
Determine how the points are to be displayed and in what layer.
With Wildcard match of pt description, you can display only points with specic descriptions. This can be thought
of as a lter. For example, entering IP would display only points that are labeled with the description IP, or Iron Pin.
The default is the asterisk (
*
). This will display all points regardless of description.
Layer Name allows you to designate a layer for the points to be displayed. You can enter a new name, CLAYER,
or choose an existing layer by clicking Select Layer. Entry of CLAYER selects the current layer. A Carlson Survey
point consists of a block insert with attributes, a point symbol, and a point entity. The point entity is used for
picking the point by OSNAP Node in other commands. The block insert includes a point number, elevation, and
description. These attributes are in the PNTMARK, PNTNO, PNTELEV, and PNTDESC layers. The points are
also in an overall layer as specied in this dialog box. This layer setup allows you to freeze a group of points by
the main layer name or freeze point attributes for all the points in the drawing. For example, freezing layer ''PNTS''
would freeze all the points in this layer. Freezing layer ''PNTELEV'' would freeze the point elevation attribute for
all the points.
The Erase Duplicates option will erase existing point entities that match the point numbers currently being drawn.
Fix Overlapping Point Attributes will detect point number, elevation and description attributes that overlap with
other points. Rules can be applied to rearrange the point attributes to avoid the overlaps. A point overlap manager
then steps through each overlap for review or manually moving the attributes.
Symbol Size Scaler controls the size of the point symbol and Text Size Scaler controls the size of the point at-
tribute labels. The scalers are multiplied by the Horizontal Scale from Drawing Setup to set the size in drawing units.
Match Properties prompts to select an existing point entity and then the program sets the settings in the dialog
such as layer and symbol to match the selected point.
Draw Range will draw existing points from the current coordinate le. The Draw Range button will prompt for the
point numbers to draw.
Draw All will draw all the points in the coordinate le, and then zoom the extents of the display to show the points.
Draw Point Group will draw a point group with settings that are established in the Point Group Manager.
Enter and Assign can be used to create new points using the point northing and easting. When a grid projection is
dened in Drawing Setup, then there is an option to enter the points using latitude/longitude.
Screen Pick allows you to create points by picking the point coordinate on the screen. For example, you could set
the Object Snap to EndPoint and pick the end point of a building polyline to create a point at the building corner.
Prompts
To create a new point:
Draw-Locate dialog choose Screen Pick
Pick point to create: pick a point
Select/<Enter Point Elevation <0.00>: Enter elevation Press S to select text to set elevation.
Enter Point Description <>: Enter
N: 5106.57 E: 4901.96 Z: 0.00
Enter/<Select text of elevation>: Select text entity that denes elevation of point.
To locate a point in the coordinate le (point number 3 in this example):
Draw-Locate Point dialog choose Draw Range
Point numbers to draw: 3
Points Drawn> 1
Chapter 10. Points Menu 427
Locates point 3.
Point numbers to draw: 1-2
Points Drawn> 2
Locates a range of points. From 1 to 2.
Point numbers to draw: Enter
Keyboard Command: lpoint
Prerequisite: A CRD le and you may want to execute Drawing Setup (see the Setting menu) to set the scale and
size.
List Points
This command generates a report of point numbers, northings, eastings, elevations and descriptions.
Selection Method-Range allows you to specify the points to list by point number range
Selection Method-Area allows you to select a closed polyline to list all of the points inside of that polyline.
Selection Method-Selection Set allows you to specify the points to list by selecting them from the drawing.
Range of Points: If you are using the Range method, specify the range of points to list here. To quickly specify all
points, click the All button.
Point Group allows for the selection of a specied group or multiple groups for listing. Standard windows selection
tools, ctrl and shift keys, can be utilized for selecting groups.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 428
Description Match: Can be used to lter the point list. For example, entering ''EP'' for the Description Match
would only list those points with a description of ''EP''. An asterisk (
*
) is the default setting, it matches any character
sequence, meaning no ltering occurs.
Report Coordinate Range: When checked, the point list will include the minimum and maximum northing, easting
and elevation.
List Point Notes: When checked, any additional point notes assigned to the points will be included in the point list.
Point notes can be entered using the Input-Edit Point command found in Coordinate File Utilities.
Use Report Formatter: When checked, you may customize the elds and layout of the point report using the
Report Formatter. The Report Formatter can also be used to export the point report to Excel or Access.
Double Space Between Points: When checked, the report will be double spaced.
The point list report is displayed in the Standard Report Viewer which can print, draw and save the report le.
This report viewer cannot be used to edit the coordinate le. Instead use the Edit Points command in the Points menu.
Example of List Points Report:
List Points Report
File> C:\Carlson2008\DATA\POINTS.CRD
Job Description>
Job Number> 0.000 Job Date> 06/01/2002
PointNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
1 5355.240 5000.000 91.8 CP2
2 5000.000 5000.000 90.0 CP2
1000 5355.236 5000.000 91.8 CK
1001 4941.911 4622.029 91.4 FPC
1002 4952.629 4642.818 90.6 FH
1003 4959.931 4634.440 89.8 TOE1
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: listpt
Prerequisite: Points in a coordinate le or on the screen
Chapter 10. Points Menu 429
Import Text/ASCII File
This command converts point data from an ASCII text le into the current Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le. Each line
of the text le can contain any combination of point number, northing, easting, elevation and description. All point
information should be on one line with the values separated by a comma, space or other delimiter. Under the Source
File Format setting you can choose from some specic formats or User-Dened. For User-Dened, the format of
the text le is specied in the Coordinate Order eld where the value identiers are listed with the appropriate
delimiters. For example:
For a text le with northing, easting, elevation and comma delimiters:
5100.0,5150.5,485.1
5127.1,5190.3,487.3
The Coordinate Order would be:
Y,X,Z
For a text le with point number, easting, northing, elevation, description and space delimiters:
1 5000.0 5000.0 490.3 TRAV
2 5030.4 4930.5 495.5 TRAV
The Coordinate Order would be:
P X Y Z D
Common formats can be selected from the Common Format List. All the lines in the text le should contain only
point data and any header lines should be removed. To read the text le, pick the Select Text/ASCII File button
and choose the le to read. Then the selected le is displayed in the Preview Window to help with lling out the
Coordinate Order. When the Coordinate Order is set, click OK to read the text le. The Wild Card Descriptions
Match allows for only point with matching descriptions to be imported. With Point Protect active, the program will
check if a point number already exists in the CRD before importing the point. If a point conict is found, you can
either assign a new point number or overwrite the old point. The Value to Add to Point Numbers allows you to
renumber the points as they are imported. The Header Lines to Skip value is the number of lines not to be processed
at the start of the text le. The Point Group To Assign option will create a point group with the specied name for
the coordinate le containing the point numbers imported with Import Text/ASCII File.
Multiple les can be imported at once. To do this, toggle on the Enable Process Multiple Files option. After
selecting the Text/ASCII Files button, you can select multiple les by using the Shift or Ctrl keys while picking
les. You can also run Select Text/ASCII Files multiple times allowing for selection of les located in different
locations. The les to import are listed in the top scroll display window. The point data from all the import les
can be stored to the current CRD le or to separate les for each import le. The separate le option will name the
resulting CRD les with the same name as the import le with a .CRD le extension. For example, the import le
job125.txt would create job125.crd. The CRD le will be created in the same location as that of the selected text
le to import.
Under Process Options, there are choices for selecting the coordinate le to store the imported points. The Current
option uses the current coordinate le that is active in the drawing. This coordinate le name is shown at the bottom
of the dialog. The Prompt For Another option uses the standard le selection dialog to select the le. The Name
Another By Input File uses a coordinate le name with the same name as the input le except for a le extension of
.CRD.
The special formats of Leica .d45/.gsi/.raw les, TDS .cr5 les, Topobase .ro les, Geodimeter .obs/.raw/.are les,
Laser Atlanta .txt les, Trimble .pos les, Zeiss .txt les, Traverse PC .trv les, Maptech, Benchmark .dat les,
CAICE/Caltrans .tss les, NLS MMH360 .360 les, EMXS .xng les, and Cadvantage .cog les can be directly
imported by choosing that File Format at the top of the dialog.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 430
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: readpt
Prerequisite: A text le to read
Export Text/ASCII File
This command outputs point data from the current Carlson coordinate le to an ASCII text le formatted according
to a variety of options presented in the form of a general dialog.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 431
Format. Specify the type of le to write from the drop down list. There are several variations on point number,
northing, easting, elevation and descriptions as well as specic formats for Leica, Geodimeter, Zeiss, Maptech,
D45, Cadvantage, Multiplane and SDMS CTL formats. In addition there is a User-Dened Format option to dene
the order of the elds output. When using the User-Dened format, after selecting OK, the User-Dene Export
Format dialog will appear. On this dialog, specify the order of the elds by dening a number sequence in each
eld. You can skip elds and omit data in the output le by leaving None in the sequence eld for this data:
Selection. There are three Selection Methods provided for the data to export. Notes associated with the points may
be included in the export by enabling the check box. Specify either Range, Screen Points or Screen Entities in the
Selection Field. A Range selection is a user specied range such as 1-10,30-50. A Screen Points selection is made
by selecting points from the screen area. The Screen Entities option allows for selection of polylines, lines, arcs,
points, faces, inserts and text to export point data from. When the Screen Entities option is selected, the following
dialog box will display allowing for the specication of the type of entity to export data from:
Chapter 10. Points Menu 432
Delimiter. Select the desired eld delimiter of the export le as either Comma or Space from the drop down list. If
a header line is to be included, enable the check box.
Number of Decimal Places. Select the desired number of digits to be included in the mantissa of all output
ordinates.
Location Filter. Choose from lter methods of within inclusion perimeter polyline, by coordinate window or center
within radius from a center point.
Wild Card Descriptions Match. A description lter is also available for exporting only points from the range or
selection set with certain descriptions.
Export Multiple Crd Files. Enable this check box to specify multiple CRD les to apply the selection criteria
against. If enabled, an additional dialog will be presented from which you can browse, select, and remove as many
CRD les as desired.
Point Group. Displays the Point Group manager dialog from which you may dene, modify, and select one or
more Point Groups to dene the points to be included in the export.
After selecting the OK button, a nal dialog appears that allows you to specify a new le or to append data into an
existing le. The standard le selection dialog allows you to specify the export le name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: writept
Prerequisite: A Coordinate File (.CRD)
Set Coordinate File
This command allows the user to set the name of the active coordinate le. This le is used by different commands
that compute, store and recall point coordinates. Carlson coordinate (.CRD) les are binary les that contain point
numbers, northings, eastings, elevations and descriptions. Alternately, C&G CRD & CGC les, LandDesktop MDB
les or Simplicity Systems ZAK les can be used in place of the Carlson CRD le. These les are stored by default
in the congured data subdirectory. When prompted for the name, if you type in a path name the le will be stored
in the specied path. If you don't specify a path then the default path that is congured in the Congure command,
found under Settings, will be used.
When executed, the command defaults to the Existing tab for selection of an existing le. You may select a le
from the list of Recent Folders, or choose the Browse button to go to a specic location on your computer. To create
a new le, select the New tab and enter the name of the le in the le name eld provided. Use the Browse button
to specify the desired location to save the le.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 433
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: setcrd
Prerequisite: None
CooRDinate File Utilities
This command allows you to manipulate the coordinates stored in a coordinate (.CRD) le. One of the most impor-
tant commands is the Update CRD File from Drawing which allows you to update the le after editing the drawing
with commands such as Erase, Move, Rotate or Change Elevations. Another handy option is the Draw Entities by
Point Number which allows the user to input point number ranges and plot Lines, Arcs, Polylines or 3D polylines.
Coordinate les have either numeric or alphanumeric point numbers. Alphanumeric point numbers consist of nine
or less digits and letters (i.e. point number 7A). The type of point number format is displayed at the top title bar of
the main dialog. Another coordinate format is the Carlson coordinate database (.CRDB) which is based on SQLite
and supports point numbers and descriptions up to 255 characters.
In addition to running the routines through the dialog, many routines have command names that you can enter
at the Command: prompt, create a Quick Key, or put into a toolbar. Here are these command names and their
corresponding dialog button names:
setcrd: Open CRD File
listpt: List Points
delpt: Delete Points
readpt: Import Text/ASCII File
writept: Export Text/ASCII File
scalept: Scale Points
transpt: Translate Points
rotatept: Rotate Points
alignpt: Align Points
cfuelev: Elevation for Points
cfureport: Point Number Report
cfuduplicate: Duplicate Points
cfucompare: Compare Points
Chapter 10. Points Menu 434
cfuhistory: Point History
cfucopy: Copy/Merge CRD File
cfuupdatedwg: Update Drawing from CRD File
cfuupdatecrd: Update CRD File from Drawing
cfudesc: Description for Points
cfutransform: Coordinate Transformation
Open CRD File: Allows the user to switch to another le. When you exit Coordinate File Utilities this will be the
current le that you work with in Carlson.
Copy/Merge CRD File: This command allows for the copying of entire CRD les, or parts of CRD les, to
a new or existing les. This can be used to make a backup of your coordinate le, and it can also be very
valuable in coordinate le manipulation. For example, if a certain range of points from one CRD le was
also required in the active CRD le, this command would be used to simply copy the required range into the
active CRD le. There are two options when rst executing the command. These options are whether to import
points from another le to the current (active) CRDle, or to export the current (active) coordinate le to another le.
Once this option has been decided, a prompt for the le to copy From or TO, will be displayed. Here simply specify
the correct le.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 435
Next there's a dialog to specify the range of points to transfer and some options. Here specify the points to copy.
Point numbers and ranges can be entered together, for example, 1-3,10,15 would result in points 1 through 3 and
points 10 and 15 being copied. The Description Match can be used to lter the points to transfer only the points
with matching description. The default of
*
will transfer all the points in the range. The Store Non-Conicting
Point Automatically will set the transfer action as Store for all transfer points that don't have a point protect conict.
The Skip Merge Dialog If No Conicts will skip the next dialog when there are no point protect conicts.
Next there's the Merge Points Manager dialog that shows the Source Coordinate File on the left (where the point
data is being copied from) and the Target Coordinate File on the right (where the point data is being written to).
Conict cases are when the same point number exists in both les with different coordinates. The action choices
for conicts are to Overwrite, Skip or Renumber. For renumber, you can either renumber with the next available
point number in the target le or to the highest point number in the target le plus one. Non-conict cases are when
the source point number does not exist in the target le. The action choices for non-conicts are to Store or Skip.
You can assign actions by picking on the Action eld in the spreadsheet or by entering in a Point Range to apply
and picking an action button. The Show Matching Points toggle will show points with matching point data in both
les. Otherwise only point with differences are shown. The Next Conict button will highlight the spreadsheet and
set the Point Range to the next point that needs an action assigned. Similarly, the Previous Conict sets focus to
a lower point number that needs an action. The History button shows the point history for the selected point. The
Report button creates a list points report. The Current Merge Status reports the number of unresolved and resolved
points. When all the unresolved points are resolved by assigning actions, you can pick OK.
Convert CRD File Format: This allows you to convert the current CRD le from numeric format to alphanumeric
format or vice versa. This routine will also change crd les to and from different software formats. These formats
include Carlson SQLite (.CRDB), C&G, Microsoft Access (.MDB) in same format as AutoDesk Land Desktop,
Chapter 10. Points Menu 436
and Simplicity (.ZAK). The current format of the active coordinate le will be displayed as well as the options for
the new le format. This command only changes the format of the active coordinate le.
Map Points from 2nd File: This routine adds point to the current CRD le from points stored in a second CRD
le. The points to copy are specied by numbers one at a time. Prompts for the destination point number (number to
create in current crd le) and source point number (point number to be copied from second crd le) will be displayed.
Import Text/ASCII File: This routine converts point data from a text le into the current coordinate (.CRD) le.
See the Import Text/ASCII File command in this chapter for more information.
Export Text/ASCII Text File: This routine outputs point data from the current coordinate (.CRD) le to a ASCII
Text le. See the Export Text/ASCII File command in this chapter for more information.
Edit Header: Enter or edit the job information associated with the coordinate le. The elds include Job
Description, Job Number and Job Date. This information will appear on the List Point report. Non-digit characters
are not allowed in the Job Number eld.
Compress CRD File: Removes unused point numbers by renumbering high point numbers into the unused spaces.
For example, for an original le with points 1,2,105,107,108,109 would be compressed to 1,2,3,4,5,6.
Coordinate Transformation: Transforms coordinates between local, state plane 27, state plane 83, lati-
tude/longitude, Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) and many other projections including user-dened. Works
on individually entered coordinates, by range of point numbers and with on-screen entities. For converting
between state plane 27 and 83, Carlson calls upon NADCON from the National Geodetic Survey to apply the
latitude/longitude adjustment.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 437
The Transformation Type is used to dene the Source Coordinate and Destination Coordinate formats. Settings
for Lat/Long Datum, Lat/Long formats (dd.mmss or dd.dddd), Projections, State Plane Zones and coordinate units
are dened in the Transformation Type dialog. The format of this dialog will change depending upon the type of
transformation requested.
For Grid to Grid transformations, the program converts between state plane projections as well as other pre-dened
and user-dened. When converting between pre-dened/user-dened projections, the program automatically
converts the source grid coordinate to latitude/longitude and then to the destination grid coordinate. This method of
using latitude/longitude works for converting between projections that share the same datum.
Example Lat/Long to Grid dialog
For all Transformation types, there are three options for inputting the data to be transformed. Data can be selected
from the screen by using the Screen Entities. If a range of points or a particular point is desired, the Point
Numbers option would be used. Manual entry of coordinates to transform one at a time is accomplished with the
Enter Coordinates option. The coordinates can be typed in or use the Input Point Number option. Output Point
Number is an option to store the results in the coordinate le.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 438
For all transformations there are two output options when using point numbers as the input data. Overwrite
Existing Coords replaces the original coordinate values with the new coordinate values after transformation. New
Point Numbers will retain the original coordinate data and point numbers and create new point numbers with the
revised coordinate data after transformation.
When transforming a Local Coordinate System, there are two options for dening the transformation as shown in
the next dialog.
The Align by Two Pairs of Points option uses two pairs of source and destination coordinates. The rst pair denes
the translation as the difference between the source and destination northing and easting.
This destination point is also the pivot point for rotation. Rotation can be entered directly or dened by a second
pair of points where the bearing between the rst and second source points is rotated to align with the bearing from
the rst and second destination points. There is an option to also apply scaling. The scaling holds the angle between
points and adjusts the distances by the scale factor. The scale factor is calculated for each point as the elevation
Chapter 10. Points Menu 439
factor at the rst source point times the grid factor at the rst destination point averaged with the elevation factor at
the transform point times the grid factor at the transform point.
The Least-Squares Best-Fit option is used when there are more than two pairs for translation points. Since two
pairs of points are sufcient to dene the translation and rotation, more than two pairs of points provides more than
enough information.
Over Determination by Plane Similarity is used to nd the least squares best t transformation for all the
given source and destination points. Besides doing a translation and rotation, this option will also scales the
points during the transformation. The Rigid Body Transformation also does a best t least squares transfor-
mation, but applies only translation and rotation with no scale. The Helmert 7-Parameter method can also be
used for local transformations. The 7-Parameter Values can be calculated fromcontrol points or entered by the user.
The Add button is used to dene the source and destination coordinates for the points that dene the transformation.
Pressing this button brings up the following dialog box.
The Edit button is used to edit existing data.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 440
The Delete button removes the source and destination pairing from the transformation setup.
The Process On/Off button allows source and destination pairings to be turned on and off. This is useful when
wanting to inspect different results using different pairings.
The Optimize option chooses which point pairings would yield the best transformation results by turning off the
processing of pairings with higher residuals. This minimizes the average residual for the control points.
The Report option displays a report of the transformation point pairings, their residuals, processing status,
transformation scale and avg. residual.
The Load and Save options allow for saving and recalling local coordinate transformation pairings and settings.
Draw Entities by Point ID: Draw Lines, Arcs, 3DLines, Polylines or 3DPolys by dening a range of point numbers.
Prompts
Plot Entities by Point Number
Type of entity, Arc/Polyline/3dpoly/2dline/Exit/<Line>: P This response causes the program to plot polylines.
Example: 1
*
4-7-10
*
12-5-8' would draw lines from point number's 1 through 4 then to 7, to 10 through 12,
then to 5 to 8. (limit 132 characters)
Undo/<Enter point numbers or ranges>: 1
*
10-20
*
30
The program draws a polyline from point number 1 through 10 to point number 20 through 30.
New Last Point Number: This option sets the highest point number in the CRD le. All points above this number
are erased.
Swap Northing-Easting: This option allows you to swap northing and easting coordinates for any selected range
of points. What was the northing of an existing coordinate point, or range of points, becomes the easting. And the
easting(s) becomes the northing(s).
Point Entry CRD File Links Manager: When points are created in the drawing, the program records the source
coordinate le for the points. The coordinate le names assigned to the point entities links the point entities back
to the coordinate le. These links are used by routines that process the point entities and then need to reference the
coordinate le such as Move Point which selects a point entity and updates the coordinate le. This routine checks
all the point entities in the drawing and lists all the linked coordinate les. You can use the Assign button to set the
coordinate le assigned to point entities which is useful when the coordinate le has been moved after the points
were drawn. Use the Unlink button to remove the link.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 441
Update Drawing from CRD File: This function updates the position of Carlson points in the drawing to match
the position stored in the coordinate le. This command also has options to erase and draw points. For the
erase option, points are erased from the drawing if the point number does not exist in the coordinate le. For
the draw option, if a point number in the CRD le does not exist in the drawing, then this point is drawn using
the settings from the dialog. The number of points modied, erased and drawn is reported at the end of the command.
Update CRD File from Drawing: This function allows you to select all or some of the points in the drawing and
add or update them to the .CRD le. The points can be ltered with AutoCAD's Select Objects: selection mechanism
and/or wild card matching of the point descriptions. The Update Point Descriptions option determines whether the
point descriptions from the drawing will be stored to the CRD le. Use this command to update the le after a
global edit such as Move, Rotate, Renumber Points, Change Elevations, Erase, etc. This routine directly reads Leica
(Wildsoft), Softdesk, Geodimeter, InRoads, Land Development Desktop, and Eagle Point point blocks.
List Points: List the points stored in the .CRDle. See the List Points command in this chapter for more information.
Delete Points: Deletes points in the coordinate (crd) le by point number or description.
Screen Pick Point: Pick a point on the graphics screen and it's coordinate values are added to the coordinate (crd)
le. Prompts for point number, elevation and description will be displayed. This command does not plot a point,
point attributes or point symbol. Use the command Draw-Locate Points command to do this.
Scale Points: This option multiplies the point northing, easting, and elevation by the scale conversion factor. You can
Chapter 10. Points Menu 442
use this routine for metric-English conversion. See the Scale Points command in this chapter for more information.
Translate Points: This option translates a range of points based on entered delta x and delta y, entered coordinates
or translation point numbers. See the Translate Points command in this chapter for more information.
Rotate Points: This option rotates a range of points based on entered degrees or rotation, entered azimuths, entered
bearings or rotation point numbers. See the Rotate Points command in this chapter for more information.
Align Points: This option does a translate based on a source point and destination point and then rotates to align the
rst source point and a second source point with the rst destination point and a second destination point. See the
Align Points command in this chapter for more information.
Description for Points: This routine modies the point description eld with the user-specied text for a range of
point numbers. There is an option to update the description attributes of the points in the drawing in addition to
updating the coordinate le.
Elevation for Points: This routine modies the elevation of the specied points. The Absolute method sets the
elevations to the specied value. The Differential method adds the value to the current elevations. The Scale method
multiplies the current elevations by the value.
Point Number Report: This routine lists the used and the unused point numbers in the CRD le.
Duplicate Points: This function searches the CRD le for points with the same northing, easting and elevation. The
tolerances for considering points to have the same coordinate are set in the dialog separately for northing/easting
and elevation. To be counted the same coordinate, both the northing/easting and elevation must be within the
Chapter 10. Points Menu 443
tolerance distance. The duplicate points can be erased or only reported. For the erase option, the rst point number
is kept and any higher point numbers with duplicate coordinates are erased from the CRD le.
Compare Points: This function compares the coordinates in the .CRD le with either the coordinates for the
matching point numbers in the drawing le, with matching point numbers from another CRD le or with different
point numbers from the same CRD le. A report is created for any differences that shows the point numbers and
the differences. The difference can be reported as a bearing and distance between the two points, as distance
North/South and East/West or as the delta-X and delta-Y. There is an option whether to include the point coordinates
in the report. The Create Point Groups option creates point groups of ''Missing From Drawing'' and ''Changed
Points'' for any points that have this status. Use the Point Group Manager routine to check on these point groups.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 444
Example Bearing-Distance format Compare Points Report
Renumber Points: This option renumbers points in the user-specied range starting from a new point number. The
old point numbers are erased. The condense points will renumber such that there are no unused point numbers in
the renumbered range. Otherwise the spaces between the points is maintained. In the example shown, renumbering
1-25 with points 1,2,24,25 to starting point number 101 will result in points 101,102,103,104 if condense is on or
101,102,124,125 if condense is off.
Input-Edit Point: Enter or edit the coordinate values or the description of a point. The Notes section is for
adding optional point notes which are additional point descriptions. The standard description eld is limited to 32
characters. Under notes, any number of lines of text can be assigned to the point. A list box shows the lines of
notes. To add a note line, pick a blank line in the list box and then type in the note in the edit box belong the list box
and press Enter. To edit a note, highlight the line in the list box and edit the text in the edit box.
Point History: All changes to the coordinate le will record the commands performed on this coordinate le and
the status of the points themselves. This makes up the coordinate le history. The history can then be reported by
point number or by command. All of the changes can be rolled back. It is important to note that if maintaining
such a history le is your objective, in the Settings > Congure > General Settings dialog you must make sure that
Maintain CRD History File is checked.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 445
The Disable History Feature button at the top of the dialog shown above is a toggle device. It should be clicked
if you prefer not to build the point history le. Clicking it a second time changes it back to saying Enable History
Feature. You can also choose Delete History File to delete the le altogether. By clicking any point from the list,
as shown in the Points tab example above, and then selecting History, you will be given the history for that specic
point. Double-clicking on any command shows the details. Clicking on Details also shows the selected command's
details. Undo thru Selected will undo the effect of all of the commands up through and including the selected
command. The changes from the undo command are themselves then added to the command list and can be undone
in the future.
Point Protect Toggle: This option, located at the bottom-left of the main Coordinate File Utilities dialog, toggles
point protection on and off. With this option on, when attempting to store a point with a point identier (point
number) that already exists in the current coordinate le, the following dialog will be displayed.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 446
Overwrite with new coordinates will update the existing point number with the new location of the point.
The Use Another Number eld displays the point number that will be used if the Use Another Number option
is selected. This number will depend upon the option chosen from the Another Number From settings. If Next
Available is chosen, the next available number will be displayed in the Use Another Number Field. If there are
number gaps in the coordinate le this number will not be the next highest number in the le. For example if points
1-10 and 20-30 exist in the crd le leaving a gap from 11-19, the Next Available number would be 11. If the desired
point number, in this example, is 31, then the option of End of File would be selected.
The Overwrite All and Renumber All options apply when more than one point with the same number exists in the
coordinate le. These options are helpful when importing points into existing CRD les.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: cfu
Prerequisite: None
Point Group Manager
This command is used to create point groups based on inclusion and exclusion lters. The manager can perform
various functions on these point groups. Also point groups can be referenced by group name in other commands
such as Field to Finish and Data Collection.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 447
Groups Pulldown
Create Point Group:
This routine creates point groups. When selected, the New Point Group dialog box is displayed.
Group Name is the name of Point Group to create.
Description is the description of Point Group to create.
Use the Include Tab to dene the lters to be applied when creating the point group. Inclusion rules are applied
before the exclusion rules.
When Include All is toggled on, all points in the coordinate le will be included in the selection.
When Point List is toggled on, an option of dening the point list can be selected or the point numbers can be
manually entered in the edit box. The points retain the order entered in the edit box which can be used in other
point functions that process points where the order matters such as Legal Description. The Edit button brings up a
spreadsheet editor for the point list and there is a ag for each point for whether the point is a radius point. This
radius point ag is used in routines that process points for a polyline or perimeter such as Legal Description.
DWG: Select allows for manual selection of the points to include from the drawing. The points must be drawn on
the screen prior to using this option. All standard AutoCAD selection tools, are available for selection of the points.
DWG: Add Within Circle allows for selection of the points to include by a user dened circle. The circle is dened
by specifying the center and radius of the circle. The radius can be dened by entering in a numeric value or by
picking on the screen. Points must be drawn to the screen prior to using this option.
DWG: Add Within Polyline allows for the selection of points to include by referencing a closed polyline. All
points located within the closed polyline will be included in the selection. Prompts for the inclusion polyline and the
exclusion polyline will display. The inclusion polyline limits of the selection area. The exclusion polyline denes
the area to exclude within the inclusion polyline. Points must be drawn to the screen prior to using this option.
CRD: Select allows for manual selection of the points to include from a point list. Standard window selection tools
are available for selecting the points to include.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 448
CRD: Add Within Circle allows for selection of the points to include by a user dened circle. The circle is dened
by specifying the center and radius of the circle. The radius can be dened by entering in a numeric value or by
picking on the screen. The points do NOT have to be drawn to the screen prior to selection.
CRD: Add Within Polyline allows for the selection of points to include by referencing a closed polyline. All
points located within the closed polyline will be included in the selection. Prompts for the inclusion polyline and
the exclusion polyline will display. The inclusion polyline limits of the selection area. The exclusion polyline
denes the area to exclude within the inclusion polyline. The points do NOT have to be drawn to the screen prior to
selection.
Elevation Range allows for the selection of points within a specied elevation range to be included in the group.
The minimum and maximum elevations can be entered manually in their respective data elds. The minimum and
maximum values can also be specied by the Set By Selection and Set From List options.
Set By Selection allows for selection of points to include in the group from the drawing. The points must be drawn
to the screen prior to using this selection method. Standard AutoCAD selection methods are available.
Set From List allows for selection of points to include in the group from a point list. Standard Windows selection
tools are available with this option.
The Description option allows for a selection of points to include based upon the description of the point. The
description to lter for can be entered in the data eld or by using the Set By Selection and/or the Set From List
options described above.
The Exclude Tab allows for dening rules that pertain to the points to be excluded from the Inclusion selection.
After dening the inclusion rules for the group, the options on the Exclude tab can be used to lter for points to
exclude from the group. For example, if the inclusion rules call for all points within the elevation range of 8 to 12,
an exclusion rule can be set to exclude the points on elevation 9 or with the description tree. The options on this tab
work exactly like the options on the Include tab. Please refer to the Include tab denitions for further instruction.
Save Changes saves the point group to the group name specied based upon the Inclusion and Exclusion rules
specied.
Cancel Changes discards specied rules and changes and goes back to the Point Group Manager dialog.
Edit Point Group:
This function allows for editing of existing point groups. From the list of available groups, highlight the group or
groups to edit. When complete with the rst group, if more than one is selected, selecting the Save Changes option
will save the changes to the active group and switch to the next group in the selection set.
From the Groups pulldown, select Edit Groups, the Edit Group dialog box will now appear.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 449
See Create Point Groups for further denitions of the available options.
Delete Point Group:
This deletes specied groups for the existing group list. One or more groups can be deleted at one time.
Copy Point Group:
This routine creates a new point group by copying the currently highlighted group. This allows you to modify an
existing group denition and create a new group.
Import Point Groups:
This allows for importing lters from point group manager settings of other coordinate les. This is a useful
option when coordinate les are going to contain same point group names with the same lters. This option only
brings in the lters into the point group manager, it does not import actual points into the coordinate le by group
name. Existing points in the active coordinate le that meet the lter denitions of the imported point groups will
automatically be added to the corresponding group.
Points Pulldown
Insert into Drawing:
This routine draws the points in the group in the drawing. Individual points or point ranges can be selected from the
group to be erased from the drawing. For example points 264-275 and point 298 contained in group Wet Lands are
tagged to be erased from the drawing in the following gure.
The symbol to be used and the attribute layout are determined by the Point Default Settings. The symbol size and
the point attribute size are determined by the settings in the Drawing Setup routine.
Erase from Drawing:
This erases specied point group/groups or specied points from within the group from the drawing.
Erase from Coordinate File and Drawing:
This erases the points in the specied group/groups or specied points from within the group from the drawing and
will also permanently delete the points from the CRD le. You will be prompted with a warning as follows:
Chapter 10. Points Menu 450
Selecting Yes will complete the command and erase the points from the screen and also the coordinate le. Selecting
No will cancel the command leaving the drawing and the coordinate le unchanged.
Report:
The routine will generate a point list of the points contained in the selected group/groups or specied points from
within the group.
Highlight:
This routine highlights the specied objects in the drawing. This makes them distinguishable from the other points
on the screen.
Freeze:
This routine freezes the points like the Points->Freeze Points command.
Thaw All:
This routine thaw the points like the Points->Thaw Points command.
Draw 2D Line:
This routine draws a 2d polyline between the points contained in the group/groups or between specied points in a
group.
Export:
This command exports the selected group/groups or the specied point(s) or range of points from within the group
to various formats. The available formats are ASCII/Text, Carlson Software CRD and C&G CRD les.
When ASCII/Text is selected, the Export Text/ASCII File dialog box will be displayed. Please refer to the Export
Text/ASCII File section of the manual for more information.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 451
The CRD-Carlson software command writes the selected group/groups or the specied point(s) or range of points
within the group to a new Carlson formatted CRD le.
Specify the le name of the CRD le to create and press save.
CRD-C&G writes the selected group/groups or the specied point(s) or range of points within the group to a new
C&G formatted CRD le.
Specify the le name of the CRD le to create and press save.
Button Functions
The series of buttons at the bottom of the main dialog do the same functions as the routines in the Groups pull-down
menu except the Move Up and Move Down which are only available as these buttons. The Move Up/Down simply
change the display order of the groups in the list. The Import function brings in group denitions from either
another coordinate le or from a C&G Points List File.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: pgm
Prerequisite: A coordinate le
Edit Points
This command edits point data in the current coordinate le or within a point range. The current coordinate le can
be set with the Set Coordinate File command. Edit Points shows all the points in the coordinate le. New points
can be added and points can be deleted by using the Insert and Delete keys.
The Group option allows you to edit subset collection of points as dened by Point Group Manager. This Group
method is a way to lter the points by point range, elevation range or description.
This tool also lets you edit notes associated with each point. While the standard point description is limited to 32
characters, the drawing notes are not. When you click on a given point, you can add numerous lines of notes about
that point in the bottom of the dialog. Keep in mind that these notes are stored in a separate le with the extension
''.not'' having the same name as the CRD and residing in the same folder.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 452
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: editpt
Prerequisite: None
Erase Points
This command erases Carlson points inserts from the drawing. The points to erase can either be selected from the
screen or specied by point number, point number range or by point group. Erasing a Carlson point will erase the
three entities that make up a Carlson point: the point symbol, point attributes, and point node. There is an option to
skip erasing the point symbol in case you want to leave the symbols in the drawing. The points may optionally be
erased from the coordinate le. As long as the points are not deleted from the coordinate le, they can be redrawn
with Draw-Locate Points or Field-to-Finish.
Prompts
Select points from screen, group or by point number [Screen/Group/<Number>]? press Enter
Point numbers to erase: 1-5
Delete points from coordinate le [Yes/<No>]? press Enter
Delete point symbols [<Yes>/No]?press Enter
Erasing Carlson Points ....
Number of points erased> 5
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: DELPT
Prerequisite: Carlson points to be erased
Freeze Points
This command freezes Carlson points to hide them from view without erasing them. Use the Thaw Points command
to show the points again. This command works similar on points as Freeze Layers works on layers. The points to
freeze can be selected by point number range, point group, inclusion/exclusion perimeter polyline areas, or screen
selection. There is a dialog to choose the method and specify a description match lter.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 453
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: freezept
Prerequisite: Carlson points to freeze
Thaw Points
This command thaws Carlson points that were frozen with the Freeze Points command to show the points in the
drawing again. This command works similar on points as Thaw Layers works on layers.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: thawpt
Prerequisite: Frozen Carlson points
Translate Points
This command translates points in a coordinate le from one coordinate position to another. The delta X, Y, and
Z can be entered directly or calculated from original and destination coordinates. The original and destination
coordinates can be entered directly, specied by point number, selecting the point number from a point list by
selecting the list icon, or selected from the screen by selecting the pick icon. Once these points have been specied,
the Delta X,Y,Z, if Process Elevations is checked ON, elds will be lled in with their calculated values. Any points
in the drawing will be updated automatically in addition to updating the coordinate le.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 454
Dene Translation By Angle/Distance requires a specied direction, Northeast (NE), Southeast (SE), Southwest
(SW), Northwest (NW) or Azimuth (AZ) along with a specied distance in order to perform a translation. Once the
direction and distance are entered, the Delta X,Y,Z will be calculated. This is a useful command when you know
that the job needs to shift, for example, to the Northeast 25 degrees for a distance of 100 feet. Here you would
simply type in 25 in the Angle (dd.mmss) eld, choose NE in the Type eld and then enter the distance of 100 in the
Distance eld.
With Process Elevations checked, all elevations will be translated by the specied or calculated Delta Z value.
This option is very useful in correcting point elevations after performing a survey with assumed elevations and
then later surveying into a benchmark with known true elevation. In this case only the Delta Z value, use (-) to
indicate a lower correction, and the range of points to translate would be required for a translation. For example if
the entire job needed to be lowered by 5', the Delta Z would be dened as -5 and the Range of Points dened as ALL.
Ignore Zero Elevations is only available when Process Elevations has been chosen. With this option checked ON,
all points with an elevation of 0 will be ignored resulting in no translation taking place on these points.
With Translate Screen Entities checked ON, after specifying the point range or group to translate and selecting OK
on the dialog box the following command line prompt is displayed:
Select objects to rotate (points excluded):
At this prompt select the objects on the screen, polylines, lines, arc, etc., to also translate and press enter. The
translation of the points and screen entities will be completed.
Various Output Options for the translated points are available.
Overwrite Existing Coordinates will overwrite the existing coordinate points with the new translation coordinates
thus changing the coordinate values in the existing crd le.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 455
New Point Numbers will assign new point numbers to the translated coordinate points and leave the original co-
ordinate points unchanged and present in the coordinate le. When using this option, on the Range of Points to
Translate dialog, there is a Value to add to point numbers eld. In this eld, enter the value to add to the point
numbers. For example if the existing point numbers are 1-20, and the value to add is 100, the resulting new point
numbers will begin at 101 and end at 120.
New CRD File will place the translated coordinates in a new crd le. After selecting OK to the range of points
to translate dialog, the Coordinate File to Create dialog will appear. On this dialog enter the name of the new crd
le and select save. The original crd le will remain unchanged and the new le will contain the points with the
translated coordinates.
Specifying the points to be translated is accomplished either by specifying a Range of Points (1-20,33,36-40....) or
by Point Groups. If using the Point Group option, the Select Point Group(s) dialog box will be displayed allowing
for the selection of the Group(s) to rotate.
The Description Match option only translates points with the description(s) specied in this eld.
Undo Last Translation restores the points to their previous location before translation. It is important to note that
if Translate Screen Entities has been checked to restore the translated objects to their previous location will require
the use of the undo command located in the Edit pulldown.
The AutoCAD command MOVE can be used to translate points on the screen but this does not update the coordinate
le unless you have the option Link Points with CRD File turned ON in Congure . (Note: This toggle must have
been turned ON prior to locating the points). If you do use the MOVE command and the CRD le needs updating,
run the command Update CRD le From Drawing found in Coordinate File Utilities.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: transpt
Prerequisite: points in a coordinate le
Rotate Points
This command rotates points in a coordinate le. The degrees of rotation can be entered directly or calculated from
original and destination bearings or azimuths.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 456
The Rotation Pointwill remain unchanged while the points specied for rotation rotate around it. This point can be
specied by using the List button to pick from a list of points contained in the coordinate le, or from the screen by
using the Pick button. The rotation point can also be dened by a coordinate value by manually entering in the X
and Y values of the point. This point must be dened before the rotation will take place.
The Original Bearings/Azimuths and Destination Bearings/Azimuths can be entered directly or specied by
point numbers. If using a pair of points to dene the original bearing and then specifying the destination bearing
by entering in the desired Bearing/Azimuth, the From and To Pt# elds should be left blank in the destination
bearing/azimuth settings. Use the From and To Pt# elds in the Destination Bearing/Azimuth when you want
to make a direction or Bearing/Azimuth between two existing points match the Bearing/Azimuth between two
other existing points within the le. For example, to make the bearing between points 10-12 match the bearing
between points 25-26, the Original Bearing/Azimuth could be dened as From Pt#10 To Pt#12 with the Destination
Bearing/Azimuth dened as From Pt#25 To Pt#26.
With Rotate Screen Entities checked ON, after specifying the point range or group to rotate and selecting OK on
the dialog box the following command line prompt is displayed:
Select objects to rotate (points excluded).:
At this prompt select the objects on the screen, polylines, lines, arc, etc., to also rotate and press enter. The rotation
of the points and screen entities will be completed.
Various Output options for the rotated points are available.
Overwrite Existing Coordinates will overwrite the existing coordinate points with the new translation coordinates
thus changing the coordinate values in the existing crd le.
New Point Numbers will assign new point numbers to the translated coordinate points and leave the original
coordinate points unchanged and present in the coordinate le. When using this option, on the Range of Points
to Translate dialog, there is a Value to add to point numbers eld. In this eld, enter the value to add to the point
numbers. For example if the existing point numbers are 1-20, and the value to add is 100, the resulting new point
numbers will begin at 101 and end at 120.
Specifying the points to be rotated is accomplished either by specifying a Range of Points (1-20,33,36-40....) or by
Point Groups. If using the Point Group option, the Select Point Group(s) dialog box will be displayed allowing for
the selection of the Group(s) to rotate.
The Description Match option only rotates points with the description(s) specied in this eld.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 457
The points that have been specied for rotation that are present in the drawing will be graphically updated to their
new location in addition to an automatic update of the coordinate le.
Undo Last Rotate restores the points to their previous location before rotation. It is important to note that if Rotate
Screen Entities has been checked to restore the rotated objects to their previous location will require the use of the
undo command located in the Edit pulldown.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: rotatept
Prerequisite: points in a coordinate le
Align Points
This command translates a specied Range of Points or Points Group(s) based on a source point and destination
point and then rotates to align the rst source point and a second source point with the rst destination point and a
second destination point. The command basically combines the Translate and Rotate Point commands. To specify
a Range of Points to align, enter the range to align or select a point group(s) by selecting the Point Group button.
Each of the Translation and Rotation points, both Source and Destination points, can be entered manually or picked
from the point list by selecting the List button.
When Align Screen Entities is checked, after specifying the point range or group to align and selecting OK on the
dialog box the following command line prompt is displayed:
Select objects to rotate (points excluded): At this prompt select the objects on the screen, polylines, lines, arc
etc., to also align and press Enter. The alignment of the points and screen entities will be completed.
When Ignore Zero Elevations is checked, all points with an elevation of 0 will be ignored in the alignment.
Undo Last Align restores the points to their previous location before alignment. It is important to note that if Align
Screen Entities has been checked to restore the aligned objects to their previous location will require the use of the
Chapter 10. Points Menu 458
undo command located in the Edit pulldown.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: alignpt
Prerequisite: Points in a coordinate le
Scale Points
This command scales points in a coordinate le. The northing, easting and optionally the elevation are multiplied
by the specied scale factor. You can use this routine for Metric-English conversion or a specic conversion by
choosing the Use Customized Scale Factor option and specifying the desired Scale Factor in the edit box.
Specify the Range of Points to scale by entering in a range or group to scale. You can access the group dialog box
by typing ''group'' in the range of points eld.
The Description Match option only scales points with the description(s) specied in this eld.
The Scale Factor is to be entered in manually when using a customized scale factor. If converting from standard
measurement units, feet to meters, meters to feet, US Feet to International Feet, etc., the scale factor will be
calculated and entered automatically. If a combined scale factor is required for converting from ground to grid and
grid to ground coordinates, this value can be calculated by using the Calculate Combined Factor option. This
calculation process begins with the Calculate Scale Factor dialog shown below.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 459
The Projection Type must be specied as either State Plane 83 or State Plane 27 as well as what state plane Zone
is required.
The available Coordinate Units are Metric, US Feet and International (Intl) Feet. The correct unit must be specied
before calculating the combined scale factor.
The Range of Numbers to Process should be used to select the points to be used in order to calculate the combined
scale factor. This does not specify what points are going to be scaled by the resulting scale factor. These points can
be selected from a list by selecting the List button.
Scale Direction determines which way the scale factor will be calculated. A scale for Ground to Grid or Grid to
Ground can be calculated and applied.
Pressing the Calculate button will calculate and then display the combined scale factor on the dialog box. To accept
this value as the customized scale factor to use to scale the points in the coordinate le, press the OK button.
The Report option displays a report showing specied information. This information is specied by using the
report formatter found throughout the program. Simply choose the information you wish to display and the order to
be displayed. For further instruction and information on the Report Formatter please refer to the Report Formatter
section of this manual.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 460
With Align Scale Entities checked ON, after specifying the point range or group to scale and selecting OK on the
dialog box the following command line prompt is displayed:
Select objects to scale (points excluded):
At this prompt select the objects on the screen, polylines, lines, arc, etc., to also scale and press enter. The points
and screen entities will be now be scaled and updated graphically and in the active coordinate le.
With Use Customized Scale Factor Off, various conversions can be performed by specifying the Source Coordi-
nate units and the Destination Coordinate units. This is a quick and easy way to perform Metric/English conversions.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: scalept
Prerequisite: points in a coordinate le
Move Points
This command allows you to move Carlson points, one at a time by selecting any part of the point. Each Carlson
point is made of three entities: a POINT entity, a symbol, and a point attribute block with the point number,
elevation and description. This routine updates the X,Y of the point and not the Z. To update the elevation, use
commands such as Edit Point Attributes or Translate Points. All these parts of the point are moved together with
this routine. Any point moved using this command will result with the original source coordinate le (which is not
necessarily the current coordinate le) updated with the new position of the point. Setting the Link Points with
CRD File from Carlson Congure->General Settings is not necessary because the coordinate le is always updated
since the Move Points command has built-in smarts to lookup the coordinate le for the selected point entity. The
Link Points settings applies to generic CAD commands like the regular Move command.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: mpnt
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Chapter 10. Points Menu 461
Edit Point Attributes
This command will edit the attributes of a Carlson point, such as the symbol type, point number, elevation and
description. When this command is invoked, the command line will prompt the user: Select point to edit (Enter
to end). At this point, you can select any part of the point including the symbol, elevation, point number or the
description. Next, a dialog will appear as shown.
To change the symbol, either type in a new symbol name in the edit box, or choose the ''Select Symbol'' button
where you can choose from a list of symbols. To change any of the other properties of the point, simply change or
replace the contents of the edit box with the new information. Both Drawing Description and CRD File Descriptions
are displayed. When a change to the Drawing description is made, this change will not be reected in the coordinate
le. This allows the change of a description that is dened in the Field to Finish (d) table for a particular code.
If a change is made in the CRD File description, it will be reected in the coordinate le. Take note that if the
CRD le description is changed, running Field to Finish will change the denitions for the point(s) changed. If you
change the point number to a number that already exists in the current CRD le, and point protect is ON, you will
be prompted [O]verwrite w/new coordinates, overwrite [A]ll, or use number <1000>:. You can choose to use
the next available point number in the CRD le (this is the default), or overwrite the point number. The properties
that you modify, with the exception of Drawing Description, will update the current CRD le. All modications
will update screen entities. Selecting the History button will bring up another dialog box that displays the point
history of the point chosen. A history of the point will be listed, but only if, under General Setting, the Maintain
CRD History File had been set to ON (selected) for the coordinate le that you are working with. With the CRD
History feature of Carlson, all point changes can be rolled back.
You may also choose to use the AutoCAD DDATTE command to change the attributes of a point. If you do this,
then the CRD le will not be updated and if you change the elevation attribute, the point will not change its current
Z location.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: editpnt
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Chapter 10. Points Menu 462
Edit Multiple Pt Attributes
This function allows you to modify the properties of multiple point attributes at the same time. This command
gives you complete control over the Carlson point attributes that are present in the drawing. Changes can be made
to each attribute the point number, elevation, description or symbol all in one motion. For example, you could
rotate the elevation text of some points to 45 degrees, change the height of the description text for all the points in
the drawing, or change the layer for a particular attribute. Once this command is chosen, the entry Edit Multiple
Points dialog, a smaller box, appears. Here you can determine your point selection method. There is also an option
for description matching.
After the selection of the points to change, click OK, and the subsequent, larger Edit Multiple Points dialog boxes
will appear. The number of points selected will be shown at the top of the dialog boxes.
Edit Multiple Points dialog
For each attribute, you can change any number of the properties, including the layer, height and rotation.
These dialogs will reect the current status of each attributes properties. If, for example, you select 10 points, and
5 of them have the elevation rotation set at 45 degrees, and the other 5 are set at 0 (zero) degrees, then the rotation
edit eld will say
*
varies
*
to let you know that the properties of the points you selected are not the same. Here is an
example of the dialog box.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 463
The X location refers to the distance in the X direction from the center (or insertion point) of the point symbol. The
Y location refers to the distance in the Y direction from the center (or insertion point) of the point symbol.
The Layer refers to the layer of the individual attribute, not the entire attribute block. To change the layer of the
entire attribute block, use the Attribute Block Layer option. The Height is expressed in real units (generally feet
or meters), not plotted size. The Rotation angle is expressed in absolute decimal degrees. The Color can be set
ByLayer or to a specic color. The Point Entity Layer refers to the layer that the node of the point resides. The
required layers can either be typed in manually, or the Select button can be used to pick from the existing layers in
the drawing. If a new layer is desired, simply type in the name of the new layer and it will be created automatically.
Use the layer property manager to edit the properties of this new layer, if required. The Visibility setting allows for
attributes to be shown or hidden in the drawing.
To change a point symbol, check on the Symbol tab and use the select button to choose the desired symbol. On the
Point Entity tab, the Attribute Layout ID refers to the attribute layout style dened in Point Defaults or Field to
Finish code denitions. This option allows you to change the particular layout with one of the other available styles
or to a customized style if dened. The Pick buttons allow you to pick two points to dene a distance (or angle in
the case of Rotation). If you want to select a line to dene a distance or angle, select two points on the line with the
appropriate OSNAP.
Select the attribute to edit, make the necessary changes to this attribute and then move on to the next attribute if
required. Changes made to the attributes are remember individually, which allows for switching back and forth
though the attributes until the command is completed. After completion the new settings for the point attributes will
be retained until changed or redrawn on the screen.
The Sync Layer/Height function sets the layer or height for some or all the attributes. The layer and height can be
entered manually or pick an existing attribute to get the value. The Save and Load functions are a way to store and
recall all the point display settings to a .PT le for having different point styles to reuse or share.
Example sequential use of Edit Multiple Points dialog
Again, the number of points selected will be shown in the dialog title. Let's now dene the changes for each attribute
individually. In the following example, suppose we want to rotate the elevation text to a 45 degree angle, move the
description to the right and change the symbol. First, click on the Elevation for the Attribute to Edit. Now, select the
Rotation option and type in 45. The dialog box should be as below.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 464
Now, select the Description option for the Attribute to Edit. Select the X location from the Items to Change. Enter
1.50 in the box. This value makes the description line up better with the rotated elevation. The dialog should be as
below:
Now, for the nal change, select the Symbol for the Attribute to Edit. We want to actually change the point symbol.
To do this, toggle on the option to change the symbol by clicking in the box beside the word Symbol. Next, press
the Select button and select symbol SPT5. The dialog should be as below:
Chapter 10. Points Menu 465
At this point we are ready to select the OK button to perform the changes. The following image shows the points
before and after the changes.
Before and After Changes
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: modpnts
Prerequisite: Points drawn on the screen
Move Point Attributes Single
This command allows the user to move Carlson point attributes (including the point number, elevation or description)
one at a time.
Prompts
Select Point Number, Elevation, or Description to Move: select point attribute
Pick new location: pick point
Pick new angle: pick new angle or press Enter
Chapter 10. Points Menu 466
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: movepnt
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Move Point Attributes with Leader
This command allows the user to move Carlson point attributes (including the point number, elevation or descrip-
tion), and to draw a dynamic leader to the point node. Leaders and arrowheads may be customized by selecting
Options at the command line. The attributes are always justied left or right depending on which side the leader
starts.
Prompts
Select Point Label to Move (O for Options, R for Restore): select point attribute
Pick label position: pick point
Select another Point Label to Move (O for Options, R for Restore, Enter to End): O
Minimum Leader Length Scaler: Species the minimum length, in terms of multiples of the attribute block's
height, that the leader must be.
Draw Horizontal Leader Tick: Species whether or not to draw a terminating tick (a short horizontal line segment
sometimes referred to as a ''hook line'').
Draw Arrowhead: Species whether or not to draw an arrowhead at the end of the leader that points to the point
entity.
Minimum Leader for Arrow Scaler: Species the minimum length of the leader, in terms of multiples of the
attribute block's height, that the leader must be before an arrowhead is placed on it.
Arrow Size Scaler: A scale factor to apply to resize the arrowhead symbol.
Leader Offset Scaler: A distance indicating the desired offset from the point node to the tip of the leader.
Use Separate Leader Layer: Species whether or not to use a layer other than that of the identied point for the
leader. Use the Select button to choose an alternative layer for the leader.
Select another Point Label to Move (O for Options, R for Restore, Enter to End): R
Select Point Label to Restore: pick label
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: movepntleader
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Chapter 10. Points Menu 467
Scale Point Attributes
This command will scale point attribute text (number, elevation and descriptions) and point symbols up or down in
size. The routine prompts for a scale multiplier and a selection set of objects. If you want to enlarge, enter a value
greater than one. If you want to reduce, enter a decimal fraction such as .5. This would reduce the text size by
50%. This command is very useful if you have set up your drawing for one plotting scale and decide to change to a
new plotting scale. This command has the added benet that it will adjust the point attributes and symbols to a new
screen twist angle.
Prompts
Scaling Multiplier <0.500>: 2.5 This response would enlarge the point attributes and symbols by 250 percent.
Scale symbols only, point labels only or both [Symbols/Labels/<Both>]? press Enter
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? press Enter
Select Carlson Software points. pick a point
Select objects: Specify opposite corner: pick a point
Scaling Carlson Software Point Attributes ....
Number of entities changed> 174
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: pntenl
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Erase Point Attributes
This command allows you to erase point attributes like the number, elevation or description individually by picking
on the attribute to erase.
Prompts
Select Point No., Elev, or Desc to Erase: select point attribute
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: erasepnt
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Twist Point Attributes
This command will rotate the orientation of the text of Carlson point attributes (point #, elevation, description)
and/or point symbols. The Twist Screen option aligns the point attributes to appear horizontal in the current twist
screen. The Azimuth option allows you to enter an azimuth or pick two points to align the point attributes. The
Entity Segment option aligns the point attributes by the selected line or polyline segment in the direction the entity
is drawn. The Follow Polyline option aligns the point attributes by the polyline segment that is closest to the point.
Prompts
Twist by [<Twist screen>/Azimuth/Entity segment/Follow polyline]? F for follow
Attributes to twist [<All>/Symbol/Name/Elevation/Description]? press Enter
Select reference polylines to follow.
Select objects: pick a polyline
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? select Enter
Chapter 10. Points Menu 468
Select Carlson Software points.
Select objects: pick the Carlson point inserts
Point attributes aligned by Follow Polyline option of Twist Point
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: twistpts
Prerequisite: None
Resize Point Attributes
This command sets the size of the selected point attributes (point number, elevation, description) and point symbols.
This command is similar to Scale Point Attributes, but instead of scaling the size by a factor, all the select points are
set to the same specied size. Points can also be chosen based upon Point Groups.
Prompts
Enter point attribute and symbol size <4.0>: press Enter
Scale symbols only, point labels only or both [Symbols/Labels/<Both>]? press Enter
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? press Enter
Select Carlson Software points.
Select objects: pick the point entities
Finding Carlson Software Point Attributes ....
Number of entities changed> 10
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: sizepnt
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Fix Point Attribute Overlaps
This command is to be used to adjust point attribute labels to avoid overlapping labels. It applies adjustment
methods based upon user-specied ordering and tolerances. The command steps you through any remaining
overlaps in an Overlap Manager, which includes the capability to manually move labels. This point overlap feature
is also available within the Draw-Locate Point and Field To Finish commands.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 469
Methods: There are different methods of automatically solving a point attribute overlap. The methods will be
applied in order from top to bottom on the Used Methods list. Unused methods appear on the Available Methods
list. The methods are:
Alternate Layout ID 0-9
These methods will simply apply the specied attribute layout ID and then check to see if the attributes of the point
in question still overlap. The different attribute layout IDs can be seen in the Point Defaults command on the Points
menu.
Flip Individual Attributes
This method tests each attribute (point #, description, and elevation) by ipping it or mirroring it the other side of
the point. The mirror is the vertical axis of the text that goes through the point entity. This method is not applied to
points that have a leader.
Slide Individual Attributes
This method tests each attribute (point #, description, and elevation) by sliding it back and forth. The maximum
distance the attribute will be moved is the horizontal length of the text. This method is not applied to points that
have a leader.
Rotate (If Only One Attribute)
This method is applied if there is only one point attribute, either point #, description, or elevation. The one attribute
is rotated around the point entity to see if the point overlap can be xed.
Offset Attribute Block
This method is arguably the most powerful method and can solve any overlap by moving the attribute block far
enough. See Offset Options below for a description of the options that can be used with this method.
Offset Options: These are the options that apply to the Offset Attribute Block method of automatically solving
point attribute overlaps.
Maximum Offset Scaler: This species the maximum distance, in terms of multiples of the whole attribute block's
height, that the attribute block may be offset from the point entity.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 470
Use Leader: Species whether or not a leader should be drawn when offsetting the attribute block.
Minimum Leader Length Scaler: Species the minimum length, in terms of multiples of the height of an attribute's
text, that the leader must be.
Draw Arrowhead: Species whether or not to draw an arrowhead at the end of the leader that points to the point
entity.
Minimum Leader for Arrow Scaler: Species the minimum length of the leader, in terms of multiples of the height
of an attribute's text, that the leader must be before an arrowhead is placed on it.
Arrow Size Scaler: Species a scale factor to be applied to control the size of the arrowhead if drawn.
Leader Offset Scaler: Species the length, in terms of multiples of the height of an attribute's text, that the leader
arrowhead should be offset from the point.
Use Separate Leader Layer: If enabled, allows the user to dene a different layer on which to place the resultant
leader.
Use Selection Set for Points: Check this checkbox to be given the option of selecting which points in drawing to
x overlaps with. If not checked, then all the points in the drawing are used.
Avoid Linework Conicts: Check this checkbox to prevent point attributes from overlapping linework in addition
to other point attributes.
Review Remaining Overlaps: Check this checkbox to have the Overlap Reviewer dockable dialog come up after
the automated process nishes. The Overlap Reviewer allows for reviewing the automated xes as well as tools for
manually xing any remaining overlaps. See Overlap Reviewer below for more information.
Skip Resolved Overlaps: Check this checkbox to skip overlaps that were automatically resolved and to only
review unresolved overlaps. If not checked, then both resolved overlaps and unresolved overlaps will be available
for review. This option only applies if Review Remaining Overlaps is on.
Overlap Reviewer
The Overlap Reviewer will come up after automatic overlap xing if the Review Remaining Overlaps checkbox
was checked. This tool displays how many points were found, how many overlaps were xed, which overlap is
currently being viewed, how many overlaps there were total, and the point # of the current overlap. Use the First,
Last, Back, and Next buttons to navigate forwards and backwards through the list of overlaps. Use the Move Block
and Move Attrs buttons to manually move either the entire attribute block or individual attributes.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 471
Pan and Zoom Controls: Use the buttons on the top to help zoom in and out and pan the drawing around. You can
also use the standard mouse controls for panning and zooming.
First, Last, Back, and Next: These buttons allow you to step through each overlap or to jump to the rst or the
last.
Status: This drop-down list indicates the status of the current overlap. open means that the overlap has not been
xed yet. resolved means that the overlap has been xed. ignore can be chosen by you to remove the overlap from
the list.
Restore: Restores the attributes of the current point to their original location and rotation from before the Fix Point
Attribute Overlaps command was run.
Move Block: Allows you to move one or more attribute blocks in the drawing. See the documentation for Move
Point Attributes with Leader command in the Points menu.
Erase Attrs: Allows you to erase selected point attributes.
Move Attrs: Allows you to move and rotate one or more individual attributes in the drawing. See the documentation
for Move Point Attributes command in the Points menu.
Auto-Zoom: Check this checkbox to automatically zoom and pan the view as each overlap is viewed.
Prompts
The following prompt will be displayed if the Use Selection Set for Points checkbox is on and OK is pressed.
Select the points to x overlaps with: pick the Carlson point inserts
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: overlappts
Prerequisite: Points in the drawing
Trim by Point Symbol
This command will trim lines and polylines that pass through the selected point symbols such that the lines do not
appear within the symbol. This should be a last step because this routine explodes the points and modies the lines
and polylines by trimming which makes these entities unusable by some of the other COGO routines.
Prompts
Select Carlson Software point symbols to trim against.
Select objects: select the point symbols
Chapter 10. Points Menu 472
Before Trim by Point Symbol
After Trim by Point Symbol
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: trimpts
Prerequisite: Carlson point symbols
Change Point LayerColor
This command changes the layer and optionally the color of Carlson points. The points are initially put in the layer
set in Point Defaults. The symbol, point number, elevation and description are in the layers PNTMARK, PNTNO,
PNTELEV, and PNTDESC. To change the point attribute colors, this routine creates new attribute layers based on
the new layer name. For example if the new layer name was TRAV, then the resulting layers would be TRAVMARK,
TRAVNO, TRAVELEV and TRAVDESC. These new layers can be given different colors. To select an attribute
color, pick on the color button. To permanently change attribute colors, edit the drawing SRVPNO1.DWG in the
Carlson SUP directory. To permanently change a symbol color, edit the symbol drawing itself.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 473
The selection of the points to change can be accomplished in three ways. A number range selection would require
the input of the range of points to change. An example would be 1-20,25,30, 32-36. Points groups can also be used
as a selection method. Simply specify the point group name to change, when prompted, and all the points included
in that group will be changed. The nal selection method is that of Pick Points. Using this method a prompt to
select objects is displayed. When prompted select the points to change from the screen.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: pntchg
Prerequisite: Carlson points displayed in the graphic drawing window
Renumber Points
This command will edit the point number attributes of a group of Carlson points. The command prompts for the user
to enter the point number difference. Enter the positive or negative amount you would like to have added/subtracted
from the current value. After selecting the point to change, a prompt to delete the old point number is displayed. If
yes is chosen the old point number is deleted from the CRD le, if no is selected the old and new point numbers are
retained in the le. This results in one coordinate position represented by two point numbers.
The following illustrates number changes from point 4, 5 and 6 to 104, 105 and 106. This prompt sequence retains
both numbers in the CRD le. If the intent is to renumber and delete the original points 4, 5 and 6, then Yes would
be selected when prompted to Delete old point numbers.
Prompts
Positive number increases, negative number decreases Point number.
Point Number difference <1>: 100 This response would add 100 to the current point number value.
Select Carlson Software Points for Point Number change.
Select objects: select a point number or a group of points by window or crossing
Delete old point numbers from le [<Yes>/No]? Choose correct response. In this example the response was N,
leading to the following.
PT#: 6 changed to PT#: 106..
PT#: 5 changed to PT#: 105..
PT#: 4 changed to PT#: 104..
Number of entities changed: 3
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: renumpt
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Explode Carlson Points
This command can be useful if you need to send your drawing to another rm who does not have AutoCAD/Carlson.
Drawing transfer problems occur when the recipient does not have the same block/inserts dened or available. This
command explodes all blocks and replaces the Carlson point attributes with TEXT entities of the same value. After
the points have been selected, a prompt for the layer name for each point attribute will be displayed. Point Numbers,
Point Elevations and Point Descriptions can be put on user specied layers, or the default for each prompt can be
selected. Caution: After using this command, the link between the points and the coordinate le are destroyed and
you can no longer extract the attributes from the drawing. If you want to use this command but retain your point
information, follow these steps:
Chapter 10. Points Menu 474
1. Save your drawing
2. Run this command to explode the points
3. Execute the SAVEAS command and save the drawing as a different name (you can also choose DXF format if
you wish).
4. Exit the drawing without saving.
Prompts
This command will explode selected Carlson Software point blocks and replot the attributes as Text entities!
The resulting points will NOT be useable by most Carlson Software commands!!!!
Select Carlson Software Points to Explode. select points
Layer Name for Point Numbers <PNTNO>: press Enter
Layer Name for Point Elevations <PNTELEV>: press Enter
Layer Name for Point Descriptions <PNTDESC>: press Enter
Number of entities changed> 345
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: explode scad
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Convert Surveyor1 to CRD
This command will convert a Surveyor1 coordinate le to the current Carlson format.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: SURVEYOR2CRD
Prerequisite: A Surveyor1 coordinate le
Convert CRD to TDS CR5/Convert TDS CR5 to CRD
These commands convert coordinate le formats between a Carlson CRD le and a TDS CR5 le. Both of these le
formats are binary which require these special routines. These commands will prompt for the le names to process.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Commands: crd cr5, cr5 crd
Prerequisite: A CRD or CR5 le
Convert CRD to Land Desktop MDB
This command converts a Carlson CRD le into an Autodesk Land Development Desktop (LDD) point database
le in Access MDB format. The LDD point database always has the le name of POINTS.MDB. So, to specify
the LDD le to create, you only need to specify the directory/path and not the le name. This path corresponds
to the LDD project directory. The conversion program has point protect, so that if a point number from the CRD
le already exists in the LDD le, you then will be prompted to skip or replace the point. Once the command is
executed, the following dialog is displayed. On this dialog, specify the Carlson CRD le to convert as well as the
LDD (MDB) le to append, if existing, or create if creating a new LDD (MDB) le.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 475
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: crd ldd
Prerequisite: A .CRD le
Convert Land Desktop MDB to Carlson Points
This command converts an Autodesk Land Development Desktop (LDD, also referred to as LDT) point database
le into a Carlson CRD le. The LDD point database always has the le name of POINTS.MDB and is stored in
the LDD project directory. Once the command is executed, the following dialog is displayed. On this dialog, spec-
ify the LDD le to convert as well as the Carlson CRD le to append, if existing, or create if creating a new CRD le.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: LDD crd
Prerequisite: An LDD point database le
Convert Civil 3D to Carlson Points
This command converts Civil 3D point entities into Carlson format point entities. When running in AutoCAD,
the Civil 3D Object Enabler from Autodesk is used to read the Civil 3D point entities. This object enabler
must be installed before running this routine. The installation for the object enabler is located under Support at
www.autodesk.com. When running in IntelliCAD, this routine uses a conversion program from the Open Design
Alliance to read the Civil 3D point entities.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: c3d crd
Prerequisite: Civil 3D points in the drawing
Chapter 10. Points Menu 476
Convert Carlson Points to Land Desktop
This command converts a Carlson CRD le into a Land Desktop point le. To do this, you must specify the existing
Carlson CRD points to convert. You have the option of selecting all points, or selecting on-screen the specic points
you'd like to convert.
Prompts
Convert all or selected points [All/<Selected>]? press Enter
Select Carlson Software Points to convert:
Select objects: pick rst point for window selection method
Select objects: pick second point
Processing Carlson Software point...
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: pt aec
Prerequisite: A Carlson CRD le
Convert Land Desktop to Carlson Points
This command converts Land Desktop point entities into Carlson format point entities. The Land Desktop Object
Enabler from Autodesk is used to read the Land Desktop point entities. This object enabler must be installed before
running this routine. The installation for the object enabler is located under Support at www.autodesk.com. Be sure
to match the version of the object enabler with the Land Desktop version used to create the drawing.
Prompts
Convert all or selected points [All/<Selected>]? all. Choose which points to convert.
Point position method [Insertion/<Database>]? press Enter. Choose between the drawing insertion points or the
point database for the point locations.
Locate points on Real-Z Axis [Yes/<No>]? press Enter. Choose between creating the points at their elevation or
at zero.
Convert point markers to symbols [<Yes>/No]? press Enter. Choose between using a point symbol or the
PDMODE.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points
Keyboard Command: ldd crd
Prerequisite: LDT points in the drawing and the LDT Object Enabler
Convert Softdesk to Carlson Points
This command converts Softdesk point blocks in the drawing to Carlson point blocks. These point block formats
are similar and converting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes. Softdesk points can also be read
into the current CRD le by using the command Update CRD File from Drawing in Coordinate File Utilities, this
updates the CRD le without modifying the screen entities.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: 2surv
Prerequisite: Softdesk points
Chapter 10. Points Menu 477
Convert Carlson Points to C&G
This command converts a Carlson CRD le into a C&G Point le.
Specify the existing Carlson CRD to convert by selecting the Open Carlson CRD File button. Specify the existing
C&G CRD le to write to, or the new C&G CRD le to create, by selecting either Open C&G CRD le or Create
C&G CRD le. Press OK and the conversion is completed.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: crd2cg
Prerequisite: A Carlson CRD le
Convert C&G to Carlson Points
This command converts C&G Points into a Carlson CRD le.
Specify the existing C&G File to convert by selecting the Open C&G CRD File button. Specify the existing Carlson
CRD le to write to, or the new Carlson CRD le to create, by selecting either Open Carlson CRD le or Create
Carlson CRD le. Press OK and the conversion is completed.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: cg2crd
Prerequisite: A C&G point le
Convert Carlson Points to Simplicity
This command will convert Carlson points to Simplicity.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 478
Select Carlson CRD le to convert by selecting the Open CRD le button.
Specify the existing Simplicity le to write to, or the new Simplicity le to create, by selecting either Open
Simplicity File or Create Simplicity File. Press Export and the conversion is completed.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: crd zak
Prerequisite: A Simplicity point le
Convert Simplicity to Carlson Points
This command converts Simplicity Points into a Carlson CRD le.
Specify the existing Simplicity File to convert by selecting the Open Simplicity File button. Specify the existing
Carlson CRD le to write to, or the new Carlson CRD le to create, by selecting either Open CRD File or Create
CRD File. Press OK and the conversion is completed.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: zak crd
Prerequisite: A Simplicity point le
Convert Leica to Carlson Points
This command converts LisCad or Leica point blocks in the drawing to Carlson point blocks. These point block
formats are similar and converting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes. Leica points can also be
read into the current CRD le by using the command Update CRD File from Drawing in Coordinate File Utilities.
This updates the CRD le without modifying the screen entities.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 479
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: 2surv3
Prerequisite: Leica points
Convert Geodimeter to Carlson Points
This command converts Geodimeter point blocks in the drawing to Carlson point blocks. These point block formats
are similar, and converting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes. Geodimeter points can also be read
into the current CRD le by using the command Update CRD File from Drawing in Coordinate File Utilities. This
updates the CRD le without modifying the screen entities.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: 2surv4
Prerequisite: Geodimeter points
Convert Carlson Points to Ashtech GIS
This command converts Carlson point blocks in the drawing to Ashtech GIS point blocks. After executing the
command, you will be prompted to select the points to convert. When using this command, the setting ''Group Point
Entities'', found under General Settings of the Congure command (Settings menu) should be unchecked (turned
off).
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: 2ashtech
Prerequisite: Carlson Points
Convert Carlson Points to Softdesk
This command converts Carlson point blocks in the drawing to Softdesk point blocks. These point block formats
are similar, and converting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: 2soft
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Convert CAICE KCM to Carlson CRD
This command converts a CAICE .KCM point database le to a Carlson CRD le.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: kcm2crd
Prerequisite: CAICE KCM le
Convert PacSoft CRD to Carlson CRD
This command converts a PacSoft CRD le to a Carlson CRD le. PacSoft stores the point descriptions to a
separate coordinate descriptor le having an extension of PTD. This le should be present in the same directory as
the CRD le to convert. Prompts for the PacSoft CRD le to convert, and the Carlson CRD le to create, will be
displayed. Once both les have been specied, the following dialog box will be displayed.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 480
The No Coordinate Conversion option converts the le format while leaving the coordinate values unchanged.
Convert From Meters to Feet will assume the coordinates in the selected PacSoft crd le are metric, and will
convert the coordinate values to US Feet.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: pacsoft2crd
Prerequisite: PacSoft crd le
Convert Carlson Points to Eagle Point
This command converts Carlson point blocks in the drawing to Eagle Point point blocks. A prompt for the Eagle
Point version to convert to will be displayed.
Specify the appropriate version and then select the OK button. You will then be prompted to select the Carlson
points to convert. These point block formats are similar, and converting only requires reordering and renaming the
attributes.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: 2eds
Prerequisite: Carlson points
Convert Eagle Point to Carlson Points
This command converts Eagle Point point blocks in the drawing to Carlson point blocks. These point block formats
are similar, and converting only requires reordering and renaming the attributes. Eagle Point points can also be read
into the current CRD le by using the command Update CRD File from Drawing, found in Coordinate File Utilities.
This updates the CRD le without modifying the screen entities.
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Convert Point Format
Keyboard Command: 2surv2
Prerequisite: Eagle Point points
Chapter 10. Points Menu 481
Search Published Control
The Search Published Control command allows you to search published control mark data freely available on the
National Geodetic Survey (NGS) web-site (http://www.ngs.noaa.gov) and optionally store the retrieved information
to the active coordinate le.
Map Tab: Use the Map tab to navigate to a location bounded by a viewing window no greater than 2 degree of
latitude by 2 degree of longitude. The limits of the current view are shown at the lower right of the Map tab (see
below). To navigate to the area of interest:
''zoom'' using the slider control on the left side of the Map tab, or,
''zoom'' using the mouse wheel, or,
''zoom window'' by holding the Shift key and while left-clicking two points to dene a rectangular area, or,
''pan'' by left-clicking and dragging the image to the desired position in the Map tab.
Type: Select the type of the NGS markers that are to be returned.
Order: Select the positional order of accuracy of the NGS markers that are to be returned.
Stability: Select the elevational stability of the NGS markers that are to be returned.
Symbol Size: Use the horizontal slider to adjust the symbol size of the NGS markers.
Triangle = horizontal control, elevation unknown
Circle = vertical control (benchmark), hz position usually scaled
Triangle with circle = 3D position, all dimensions measured.
Search for Control: Click on this button to initiate the search for NGS control markers that satisfy the search
criteria.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 482
Note:
The Search Survey Control dialog box is re-sizeable and contains re-sizeable controls.
Order - For additional information on Order accuracy, reference
http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/faq.shtml#WhatHARN: Horizontal A-order stations have a relative accuracy
of 5 mm +/- 1:10,000,000 relative to other A-order stations. Horizontal B-order stations have a relative
accuracy of 8 mm +/- 1:1,000,000 relative to other A-order and B-order stations. Additional information can
also be viewed at http://gpsinformation.net/main/ngs-accuracy.html.
Stability - For additional information on marker Stability, reference
http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/AERO/Genspecs A/Volume%20A Attachment%201-6.pdf: Stability code A
= expected to hold an elevation. Examples: rock outcrops; rock ledges; bedrock; massive structures with
deep foundations; large structures with foundations on bedrock; or sleeved deep settings (10 feet or more)
with galvanized steel pipe, galvanized steel, stainless steel, or aluminum rods.
Stability code B = probably hold an elevation. Examples: unsleeved deep settings; massive retaining walls;
abutments and piers of large bridges or tunnels; unspecied rods or pipe in a sleeve less than 10 feet; or
sleeved copper-clad steel rods.
Stability code C = may hold an elevation but subject to ground movement. Examples: Metal rods with base
plates less than 10 feet deep; concrete posts (3 feet or more deep); large boulders; retaining walls for culverts
or small bridges; footings or foundation walls of small to medium-size structures; or foundations such as
landings, platforms, or steps.
As NGS markers are retrieved, left-click on the marker itself to see summary information about the marker.
To retrieve the NGS datasheet with additional information about the marker, left-click on the Identier hy-
perlink. To close a ''balloon'' marker on the Map tab or an NGS datasheet, left-click on the ''X'' icon of the
balloon or datasheet tab, respectively.
If any NGS datasheet tabs are open and the OK button is clicked on the dialog box, you will be prompted if
the open NGS markers should be saved to the current coordinate le.
Prompts
Save selected stations to coordinate le? Indicate your preference if the opened NGS control marks should be
saved to the current coordinate le.
Chapter 10. Points Menu 483
Pulldown Menu Location: Points > Point Utilities
Keyboard Command: searchcontrol
Prerequisite: Internet connection
Chapter 10. Points Menu 484
Survey Menu 11
This chapter provides information on using the commands from the Survey pulldown menu, in order to download
data from data collectors, process raw data and prepare plats. The rst sections of the pulldown provide information
on working with data collectors, editing and processing raw data and drawing Field to Finish. Carlson SurvNET
is Carlson's Network Least Squares Reduction (NLSA) program. Below that there are complex deed creation and
linework commands. The bottom portion of this menu provides features for creating cut sheets, polyline data and
other survey important requirements.
485
Data Collectors
This command does two main functions for a variety of popular data collectors. First, this command transfers
(uploads and downloads) data between the data collector and Carlson. Second, this command converts data formats
between the data collector format and the Carlson format. So, if you already have the data le on the computer, you
can skip the transfer function and just perform the conversion function.
The transfer function does the conversion at the same time. In most cases, the download from the data collector
produces a raw (.RW5) le (eld notes) and/or a coordinate (.CRD) le (coordinate points). Several of the download
programs have an option to automatically run the Edit-Process Raw Data File command after downloading raw
data. You can also send, or upload, a coordinate (.CRD) le. The dialog shown here appears when the menu
command is selected.
Carlson SurvCE: For Carlson Software data collection programs SurvCE and SurvStar. This button produces the
SurvCOM dialog and program.
Prepare Geoid for SurvCE: Creates a subset of a geoid as a .GSF le to load into SurvCE.
CG Field: For CG Field programs.
Magellan/Thales FastSurvey: For Magellan and Thales FastSurvey data collectors.
Surveyors Assistant: For data collectors running Surveyors Assistant software (Corvallis MC2, MC5 and Pentax
SC5).
Sokkia SDR: For SDR2 through SDR 33 and other collectors that have a SDR format like the Trimble.
Sokkia G2: Specically for the SDR2.
TDS: For data collectors that use TDS software (Ranger, HP48, HP95, Husky FS-2 & FS-3, Corvallis MC-V and
TOPCON FS2, FC95 and FC48).
SMI: For SMI data collectors on the HP48.
Leica: For Leica GIF-10 module, GeoCOM for older Leica and DBX for newer Leica instruments.
Nikon: For Nikon DTM and DR-48 total stations.
Geodimeter: For the Geodimeter Geodat collector.
Topcon 210/310/220/GPT2000: Supports these Topcon models.
MDL Laser: For MDL Laser instruments.
General Kermit Transfer: For general transferring using Kermit.
Carlson SurvCE
Note: In the following text, the term SurvCE will apply to SurvCE, SurvStar, and Sokkia G2
Connect the serial cable. Select Data Transfer from the on the handheld. Choose Carlson/Carlson Survey Download.
This leads to a File Transfer screen on SurvCE, which says ''Awaiting Connection''. All the action is on the PC side.
There is no time delay in this handshake. It will wait for the PC program to catch up. When you connect the cable
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 486
from SurvCE to the PC, Microsoft ActiveSync may interfere and say ''Connect to PC?'' If you get this question,
say No or otherwise terminate the Microsoft ActiveSync linkage. Start the Carlson portion of this link by choosing
Survey, Data Collectors, then the SurvCE option. If connection is automatically established, SurvCE will display,
''Connected to PC''.
If only the left side of the screen displays data, then you do not yet have a connection. Press the Connect button
located at the bottom left of the le transfer dialog. The transfer program will respond with Retrieving File List.
Once the le list has been retrieved, the left side of the dialog box will show les located in the specied path on the
PC and the right side of the dialog displays the les located in the designated path on the remote. You can change
directories by scrolling to the top of the le list and choosing Up One Level (just like in Windows).
To transfer one or more les, simply select or highlight the desired les and select the transfer button. More than one
le can be transferred from the remote to the PC or from the PC to the remote during the transfer process. Standard
Windows selection options apply. For example, selecting one le and then while pressing the shift key on the PC,
selecting another le deeper on the list will select all the les in between the rst and last selected. You can also
select the rst le to transfer and press and hold down the shift key and use the down arrow to specify the range of
les to transfer. Pressing and holding the control key on the keyboard allows for the selection of multiple les in
any selection order, by picking the les with the left mouse button.
After the les have been selected, press the transfer button. When the transfer is complete, the program will return
a ''Transfer Complete'' message, and will then proceed to update the le lists on the PC and the Remote.
The following information describes the buttons on the bottom row of the SurvCOM dialog box. The button name
is on the left in bold:
Connect: After selecting Data Transfer in SurvCE, press this button to start the connection. Once connection is
made, the status line on the
le transfer utility dialog box will show Connected to the remote machine.
Transfer: Pressing this button transfers selected les from either the Remote to the PC, or the PC to the Remote.
Set Path: This option allows for the specication of the desired source and destination drives and folders for both
the PC and the Remote device. For example, if you were downloading, or copying les from the Remote device
to the PC, to specify a source path on the remote device, select the Remote Machine toggle and then type in the
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 487
desired path in the path eld. To specify a destination path on the PC, select the Local PC toggle and type in the
desired path the path eld. When a change to either path is made, the transfer utility will retrieve a new le list from
the specied paths.
Make dir: This option allows for creation of directories on both the PC and the Remote device. Specify the
hardware on which to create the directory and then enter the directory name.
Delete: This option allows you to delete the tagged les. To delete a le, select the le to delete by clicking on the
le, press the delete button at the bottom of the dialog. Conrm deletion by selecting the appropriate response on
the Delete File dialog.
Rename: To rename a le, click on the le to rename and select the rename button at the button of the dialog. On
the dialog that displays type in the new name and press the OK button.
Options: This command allows you to set various options for data transfer. The dialog shown below will appear.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 488
Transfer Type: Choose USB for transferring over a USB cable. Choose 9-Pin for transferring over a 9-pin serial
cable. Choose Ext Drive for transferring to another folder on your computer or a drive connected to your computer
such as a USB storage drive or memory card.
Com Port: You must select which com port on the PC to use when using the 9-Pin transfer type.
If you are transferring data via a USB port, set the com port to ActiveSync, see the Options section below for
procedures to change com ports. To transfer data using an USB port a connection between the Remote and PC
using ActiveSync is required. In ActiveSync verify that the ''Connect Settings'' have been set to ''Allow serial cable
or infrared connection to this Com port'' and Allow USB connection with this desktop computer. This will allow for
connection using an USB port or a COM port connection. Both will use ActiveSync to transfer data between devices.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 489
File Mask: You must select a le ltering syntax. This lter allows for the setting of specic le types to display.
For example if you only wanted to see CRD les the lter would be
*
.CRD.
Directory Sort: You must select how to sort the list of les.
Display Special Files: Toggle whether or not you should see special les.
Conrm Overwrite: Check this to conrm before overwriting les.
Baud Rate: You must choose the baud rate for transferring data.
Protect Remote Files: Check this to protect les on the mobile device.
Archive RW5 Files: With this option set to YES, when downloading rw5 les, a second copy of the le will be
made with a .SC5 extension to serve as an archive of the original rw5 le.
Geoid: This command will carve out a portion of the Geoid 99, EGM96, Canadian CGC2000, Canadian HT2.0,
Canadian HT 1.01, Australian GDA94, Great Britain OSG-MO2 and Geoid 2003 grid les, and send it to SurvCE.
Since these geoid grids are very large, this carves out a precise portion of it and avoids overloading the memory on
the remote device running SurvCE. You will be prompted for the directory on the PC of the source Geoid grid le,
the approximate latitude and longitude of the job, and the size of the area desired in miles, kilometers or degrees of
latitude and longitude. To dene a Geoid area, make sure that this criteria is met:
1. Specify the location of the geoid grid les.
2. Specify the geoid type.
3. Enter the latitude and longitude near the center of the job area.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 490
4. Specify the Grid size either in miles, km (kilometers), or deg (degrees).
5. Name the grid le.
The le will be transferred to the data collector and place in the appropriate place for use.
F2F conv: This converts the more thorough and detailed Carlson eld code le (for eld-to-nish work,
*
.FLD) to
the more simplied Feature Code List that runs in SurvCE (
*
.FCL). The Feature Code List in SurvCE (not SurvStar
or Field) handles Linework (on or off), Line Type (2D or 3D), Layer (= Code) and Full Text (Description). Select
the Carlson eld code (
*
.FLD) to convert, the conversion takes place and the le is transferred and located in the
correct location for use in the data collector.
Send Pnts: This option allows for the uploading of a user specied point number range out of the selected crd le
to unload. Use the Select button to specify the crd le to upload. The Remote File Name will default to the name of
the crd le selected to upload. You can change this name if needed. Specify the Point Range to Send and select the
OK button.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 491
Exit: This command will exit the File Transfer Utility
The following information describes the buttons on the Data Collection Programs dialog box that come after the
Carlson SurvCE button, moving from left to right and then from top to bottom. The command/button name is on the
far left margin, in bold:
Prepare Geoid for SurvCE
This function creates a .GSF (Geoid Separation File) for SurvCE from a built-in geoid. Most geoids are very large
and this routine carves out a subset of the geoid by specifying a center position and area size. The geoid data les
are not included in the regular install since they are so large. Instead, the program automatically downloads them as
needed from the Carlson server. You can also install them separately by running the CarlsonGeoidGrids.exe from
the Support->Other Downloads on www.carlsonsw.com.
CG Field
To transfer data to and from data collectors using CGField software, rst make sure that the Baud Rate is set to
9600 and the Parity is set to NONE then follow the steps outlined below.
Receiving a Coordinate File from CGField
CGField:
1) Go to the UTILS menu and select Option 1, C&G Transfer.
2) Select Option 4, ''Send Coords''
3) Select the Coordinate le to send.
Stop here in CGField and go to Carlson.
Carlson:
Leave the FILE elds blank.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 492
Press the ''Download Coordinates'' button to ready Carlson to receive the le.
Stop here in Carlson and go back to CGField to complete the transfer process.
CGField:
Select the points to send
1) For All points
2) To select Blocks of points.
3) From .PTS le (the set of points in a Batch Point File).
The coordinates will be transferred. After the transfer is complete, you will be asked for the CRD le name. The
C&G CRD le will automatically be converted to a Carlson CRD le. With Point Protect on, the routine will check
the coordinate le for existing point data before downloading the point from the data collector.
Receiving a Raw Data File from CGField
CGField:
1) Go to the UTILS menu and select Option 1, C&G Transfer.
2) Select Option 2, ''Send Raw Data''. Stop here in CGField and go to Carlson.
Carlson:
Leave the FILE elds blank.
Press the ''Download Raw'' button to ready Carlson to receive the le. Stop here in Carlson and go back to CGField.
CGField:
Select the raw data le to be sent. The transfer will begin.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 493
The C&G .RAW le will be transferred and saved in the data folder. After the transfer is complete, you will be
asked for the RW5 le name. The RAW le will be automatically converted to a Carlson RW5 le.
Receiving an ASCII le from CGField
This will allow you to transfer a C&G report le (RPT) or an ASCII NEZ le to Carlson.
CGField:
1) Go to the UTILS menu and select Option 1, C&G Transfer.
2) Select Option 6, ''Send ASCII''. Stop here in CGField and go to Carlson.
Carlson:
Leave the FILE elds blank.
Press the ''Download ASCII'' button to ready Carlson to receive the le. Stop here in Carlson and go back to CGField.
CGField:
Select the ASCII le to send.
After the transfer is complete, you will see the le in the Carlson editor. You can then select FILE and SAVE (or
SAVEAS) to save the ASCII le.
Sending a Coordinate File to CGField
CGField:
1) Go to the UTILS menu and select Option 1, C&G Transfer.
2) Select Option 3, ''Receive Coords'' to ready the data collector. Stop here in CGField and go to Carlson.
Carlson:
Leave the FILE elds blank.
1) Press the ''Upload (Send Carlson File)'' button.
2) Select the Coordinate le.
3) Select the points to send.
4) Press the ''Start Transfer'' button.
CGField:
Carlson will send the le name to CGField and a coordinate le with the same name will be automatically created
or opened in CGField.
If the le exists you will be asked how you want to handle duplicate points:
1) Overwrite
2) Don't Overwrite
3) Ask for each Point
The point transfer will begin.
Convert CG .RAW to Carlson .RW5
This utility allows you to convert a C&G raw data le to a Carlson raw data le. Select the C&G .RAW le to
convert. Then enter the le name of the destination Carlson RW5 le.
Thales/FastSurvey You will be taken directly to the SurvCOM dialog, similar to the Carlson SurvCE process.
Surveyor's Assistant
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 494
Download
From the Surveyor's Assistant data collector, go to the Transfer routine from the main menu. Fill out the transfer
screen as follows:
Direction: OUTPUT
Format: LIETZ
Data: Coordinate or All Data
Port: COM1 or COM2 Ckh Hold: NO
Protocol: NONE
You should also check the settings under the PORT menu. Typical port settings are baud=9600, parity=none,
data=8, stop=1 and handshake=XON/XOFF. Now in Carlson, run Data Collection in the Survey menu and choose
Surveyor's Assistant. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Then click the Download button and
within 10 seconds go back to Surveyor's Assistant and press GO. The le transfer should now go. If the All Data
option is used, then the Leitz format will contain both coordinate and raw data. The coordinate data is converted
to a Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le and the raw data is converted to a Carlson raw data (.RW5) le. When the
transfer is complete, the program will ask you for the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le to create if you haven't already
specied a le name in the dialog. With Point Protect on, the routine will check the coordinate le for existing point
data before downloading the point from the data collector.
Upload
Point data from the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le can be uploaded into the Surveyor's Assistant. First go to the
Transfer routine on the main menu. Fill out the screen as follows:
Direction: INPUT
Format: LEITZ
Port: COM1 or COM2
Protocol: NONE
Go back to Carlson and choose Surveyor's Assistant from the Data Collection command in the Survey menu.
Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. In the Carlson dialog, pick the Select File button next to
the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) File edit box and choose the coordinate (.CRD) le to send. Then click the Upload
button. A dialog now allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload. Before clicking the OK button for
range of points, go to the Surveyor's Assistant and hit the GO function key. The Surveyor's Assistant is now waiting
to receive so return to Carlson and click OK on the range of point dialog. The le transfer should now go.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 495
Sokkia SDR
This routine applies to the Sokkia SDR-20, SDR-22, SDR-31 and SDR-33 as well as other collectors that have SDR
format transfer such as the Trimble and C & G.
Download
From the SDR data collector, go to the Communications routine from the main menu. Choose Data Format SDR.
Next hit the Send function key. Then choose Select Jobs. From the list of jobs, highlight the job to transfer and set
it to Yes with the arrow keys. Now in Carlson, run Data Collection in the Survey menu and choose Sokkia/SDR.
Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Then click the Download button and within 10 seconds
go back to SDR and press OK. The le transfer should now go. The SDR format contains both coordinate and raw
data. The coordinate data is converted to a Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le and the raw data is converted to a Carlson
raw data (.RW5) le. The original SDR transfer le is stored on the computer as a RAW le. When the transfer is
complete, the program will ask you for the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le to create if you haven't already specied
a le name in the dialog. With Point Protect on, the routine will check the coordinate le for existing point data
before downloading the point from the data collector.
The SDR-33 has different modes for storing and transferring data. In coordinate mode, the download will create
points in the coordinate (.CRD) le and the raw data (.RW5) le will only contain some basic header lines. In the
raw data mode, the download will create all the measurement data in the raw le and no points will be created in
the coordinate (.CRD) le. For this raw data mode, you will need to run Edit-Process Raw Data File in the Survey
menu to calculate the points from the raw data. The third mode in the SDR-33 creates both raw data in the raw data
(.RW5) le and points in the coordinate (.CRD) le. The Include Time Stamps in Notes option sets whether all
the date-time records for each point are put in the raw data (.RW5) le as description records. The Include Point
Attributes in Notes option will store SDR code 13(AT) codes to the point note (.NOT) for the coordinate (.CRD) le.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 496
Upload
Point data from the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le can be uploaded into the SDR. First go to the Communications
routine on the SDR main menu. Choose Data Format SDR. Go back to Carlson and choose Sokkia/SDR from the
Data Collection command in the Survey menu. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. In the
Carlson dialog, pick the Select File button next to the Carlson CRD File edit box and choose the coordinate (.CRD)
le to send. Then click the Upload button. Then a Sokkia Options dialog appears for setting the job parameters for
the le to be created on the collector. Be sure to choose the Distance Unit that matches your coordinate (.CRD) le
(meters, US feet or international feet). Click OK and the next dialog now allows you to specify the range of point
numbers to upload. Before clicking the Start Transfer button for range of points, go to the SDR and hit the Receive
function key. The SDR is now waiting to receive so return to Carlson and click Start Transfer on the range of point
dialog. The le transfer should now go.
Communication Settings
Besides matching the baud rate between Carlson and the collector, make sure that the collector is set to word length
of 8 and 1 stop bit under the communication settings.
Print File
The Receive Sokkia Print File downloads a print report from the SDR33 data collector. This le is only used for
printing report purposes in Carlson. This le is not used by Carlson to generate coordinate (.CRD) les or raw les.
The rst step is to choose Data format=Printed in the Communications menu of the SDR33. Next pick the Receive
Print File button in Carlson. Then on the SDR33 choose the Send function and select a job to send. At this point the
le is transferred. After downloading, the job report is displayed in the Carlson standard
report viewer.
Example of Sokkia Printed Format:
SDR33 V04-04.25 (C) Copyright 1998 Sokkia May-29-80 23:39 01/29/1999
Angle Degrees Dist Feet
Temp Farenht Coord N-E-Elev
JOB TRAV Point Id Alpha (14)
Atmos crn No C and R crn No
Record elev Yes Sea level crn No
POS TP 1 North 10050.000 East 10000.000 Elev 0.000
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 497
POS TP 2 North 10000.000 East 10000.000 Elev 0.000
POS TP 3 North 9515.636 East 9551.975 Elev 37.611
Code T3
POS TP 403 North 4967.527 East 5074.632 Elev 0.000
NOTE TS Jan-01-80 00:14
**
End of report
**
Sokkia G2 This routine takes you directly to the SurvCOM dialog, similar to the Carlson SurvCE process.
TDS
Download [HP-48 and Husky]
In the TDS program, go to the File Transfer routine. Choose the type of data to transfer (CRD or RAW). Next
pick the Send function key. Stop here on the TDS and go to Carlson to run Data Collection in the Survey
menu and pick TDS. Make sure that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Then pick the Download
button. The Carlson program will now wait to receive the TDS le. Within 10 seconds select the le to send
on the TDS. The le should be transferred now. When the transfer is complete, the program will ask you
for the Carlson le to create if you haven't already specied a le name in the dialog. With Point Protect on,
the routine will check the coordinate le for existing point data before downloading the point from the data collector.
Download [Ranger and Windows CE]
In the TDS program, go to the Transfer routine and pick the Send File function. Set the ''Connecting To'' eld to
HP-48. Make sure that the COM port, baud rate and parity are set correctly and then pick OK. In the Type eld of
the le selection dialog, choose Coordinate Files or Raw Files. Stop here on the TDS and go to Carlson to run Data
Collection in the Survey menu and pick TDS. Make sure that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Then
pick the Download button. The Carlson program will now wait to receive the TDS le. Within 10 seconds select
the le to send on the TDS and pick OK in the TDS dialog. The le should be transferred now. When the transfer is
complete, the program will ask you for the Carlson le to create if you haven't already specied a le name in the
dialog. With Point Protect on, the routine will check the coordinate le for existing point data before downloading
the point from the data collector.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 498
Upload [HP-48 and Husky]
A Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le can be converted to a CR5 le and uploaded into TDS. Start in the TDS program,
by going to the File Transfer routine. Then move back to Carlson and run Data Collection in the Survey menu and
pick TDS. In the Carlson dialog, enter a TDS File name. This name should not include the drive and directory path
or le extension. For example, if the coordinate (.CRD) le is c:\scadxml\data\simo2.crd then the TDS File name
could be just SIMO2. Next pick the Select File button next to the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) File edit box and
choose the coordinate (.CRD) le to send. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Now pick the
Carlson Upload button. A dialog now allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload. Enter the range of
points but before clicking the Start Transfer button go to TDS and hit the Receive function key. Within 10 seconds
go back and click the OK button on the range of points. The le should then transfer.
Upload [Ranger and Windows CE]
A Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le can be converted to a CR5 le and uploaded into TDS. Start in the TDS program,
by going to the Transfer routine and pick the Receive File function. Set the ''Connecting To'' eld to HP-48. Make
sure that the COM port, baud rate and parity are set correctly and then pick OK. Then move back to Carlson and
run Data Collection in the Survey menu and pick TDS. In the Carlson dialog, enter a TDS File name. This name
should not include the drive and directory path or le extension. For example, if the coordinate (.CRD) le is
c:\scadxml\data\simo2.crd then the TDS File name could be just SIMO2. Next pick the Select File button next to
the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le edit box and choose the coordinate (.CRD) le to send. Check that the COM
port and baud rate are set correctly. Now pick the Carlson Upload button. A dialog now allows you to specify the
range of point numbers to upload. Enter the range of points and click the Start Transfer button.
SMI
Download
To send point data from the SMI data collector, go to the le transfer routine by typing [More] [NXT] [TOPC]
[COMM]. In SMI version 6 or later, type [Job][KERM][SEND]. Also in version 6, make sure that the rst function
key reads [NE] and not [XY] in the [Job][KERM] screen. Otherwise the coordinate northing and easting will be
reversed. The [NE] stands for North-East coordinate order which is the format that Carlson expects. Also in the
[Job][KERM] screen, make sure that the second function key reads [COMM] and not [SPACE]. The [COMM] stands
for comma separators. Then enter the rst point to send followed by the last point to send but before pressing Enter
for the last point go to Carlson. Run Data Collection in the Survey menu and choose SMI. Check that the COM port
and baud rate are set correctly. Then click the Download button and within 10 seconds go back to SMI and press
Enter for the last point to send. The le transfer should now go. When the transfer is complete, the program will ask
you for the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le to create if you haven't already specied a le name in the dialog. With
Point Protect on, the routine will check the coordinate le for existing point data before downloading the point from
the data collector. To send raw data, use the [Print][Raw] routine in SMI along with the same Carlson procedure
used for point data.
Upload
From the SMI data collector, go to the le transfer routine by typing [More] [NXT] [TO48] [COMM]. In SMI
version 6 or later, type [Job][KERM][RECV]. Also in version 6, make sure that rst function key reads [NE] and
not [XY] in the [Job][KERM] screen. Otherwise the coordinate northing and easting will be reversed. Then enter
the rst point to send followed by the last point to send. Next enter the job name but before pressing Enter go to
Carlson and run SMI under Data Collection in the Survey menu. In the Carlson dialog, specify the same job name
as entered in SMI. Next pick the Select File button next to the Carlson CRD File edit box and choose the coordinate
(.CRD) le to send. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Then click the Upload button. A
dialog now allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload. Enter the same range of points as entered
on the SMI. Go back to SMI and hit Enter for job name followed by clicking the OK button for range of points in
Carlson. The le transfer should now go.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 499
Leica
There are three types of Leica transfers: GIF-10, GeoCom and DBX.
Choose newer Leica instruments, choose Leica DBX on rst dialog. Then there
is a choice between Import and Export.
For Import, select the folder that contains the Leica DBX data. Typically the Leica DBX data is on a memory card
that is inserted into the computer and gets assigned a drive name by Windows. Use the Set button to browse to
this Leica DBX drive or folder. Then the program shows a list of the Leica projects in that folder. The Import
Measurements With Points function reads the Leica data into Carlson CRD and RW5 les. The Import Points Only
reads the Leica data into a Carlson CRD le and brings in attribute data to the Carlson NOT le. The Import GPS
Points function imports the Leica data into a Carlson RW5 le for GPS measurements.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 500
For Export, select the folder to store the Leica DBX data to using the Set button. Enter in a job name for the new
job in the Leica Job Name edit box. There are three types of project data that can be exported. The Points export
converts a Carlson coordinate le to Leica format. The Road export converts Carlson proles and centerlines to
Leica format. The Surface export converts a Carlson TIN le to Leica format.
For GIF-10 and GeoCom, choose All Others on the rst dialog Then the choice for GIF-10 or GeoCom is set in the
Equipment Type eld on the main dialog. For transferring with the Leica instruments, the GeoCom program shows
a dialog of the available COM ports on your computer. On the rst time that you transfer to an instrument, you will
need to pick the Instruments button and register the instrument from the list. Pick the Port Settings button to make
sure that the communication settings match the instrument.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 501
To download a le with GeoCom, make sure that the instrument is ON and connected to the computer by serial
cable. The instrument also needs to be in GeoCom mode. Then pick the Download in the Carlson dialog. In the
GeoCom program, open the computer COM port that the instrument is connected to by picking the '+'. Then open
the Memory Card and GSI folders. Next select the le to transfer and click the OK button. With Point Protect on,
the routine will check the coordinate le for existing point data before downloading the point from the data collector.
To upload a le with GeoCom, specify the le name to be created on the instrument in the Leica File eld and pick
the Upload button in the Carlson dialog. Then the program will prompt for the range of points to transfer. Fill out
the range and pick the Start Transfer button. Then the GeoCom program will start. Open the computer COM port
by picking the '+'. Then open the Memory Card folder and highlight the GSI folder and click OK.
The upload and download le transfer works with the GIF-10 data collector. The GIF-10 communication settings
should be the following:
Baud: 9600
Parity: NONE
Protocol: NONE
Stop Bit: 1
End Mark: CR/LF
Connected As: Some computers use DCE and others use DTE
Download
From the GIF-10, go to the le transfer routine. Then go to Carlson and run Data Collection in the Survey menu and
choose Leica. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Then click the Download button and within
10 seconds go back to GIF-10 and select the le to send. The le transfer should now go. When the transfer is
complete, the program will ask you for the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) le to create if you haven't already specied
a le name in the dialog. With Point Protect on, the routine will check the coordinate le for existing point data
before downloading the point from the data collector.
Upload
From the GIF-10 data collector, go to the le transfer routine. Then go to Carlson and run Leica under Data
Collection in the Survey menu. In the Carlson dialog, specify the job name in the Leica File eld. Next pick the
Select File button next to the Carlson coordinate (.CRD) File edit box and choose the coordinate (.CRD) le to send.
Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Then click the Upload button. A dialog now allows you
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 502
to specify the range of point numbers to upload. Before clicking the OK button for range of points, go to GIF-10
and start the receive by highlighting Receive and pressing the Run button. The GIF-10 now shows the available job
numbers. Choose a job to receive the transfer using the arrow buttons and then press the Run button.
Converting
Carlson supports raw and coordinate data collected using three different Leica Operation Codes: Wildsoft and 10-
20-30-40 as well as the newer LISCAD. Moreover, data could be in the GSI8 format or the newer GSI16 format.
Some example les are shown here.
GSI8 format data le using LISCAD Operation codes:
WILD GIF-12
410149+00000001 42....+00005003 43....+00005.42 44....+00005.25 45....+00005000
110150+00005000 21.324+35959480 22.324+09238590 31..01+00228271
410151+00000005 42....+00010100
110152+00005001 21.324+35156390 22.324+09303500 31..01+00133532
410153+00000005 42....+00070100
410154+00000014 42....+00000ELM
110155+00007082 21.324+34739450 22.324+09322050 31..01+00137685
410156+00000005 42....+00070102
GSI16 format data le using LISCAD Operation codes:
*
110001+0000000000000001 84..11+0000010000000000 85..11+0000003000000000
86..11+0000000001000000 87..11+0000000000005170
*
410002+0000000000000009 42....+0000000000000001 43....+000010000000.000 44....+000003000000.000
45....+000000001000.000
*
410003+0000000000000001 42....+0000000000000001 43....+000000000005.330 44....+000000000000.000
*
410004+0000000000000004 42....+00000000178.1530
*
410005+0000000000000003 42....+0000000000000002 43....+0000000000000001
*
110006+00000000000000RO 21.324+0000000017815300 22.324+0000000008424260
31..01+0000000000000000
*
410007+0000000000000100
*
410008+0000000000000012 42....+000000000005.090
*
110009+0000000000000002 21.324+0000000000831230 22.324+0000000008130270
31..01+0000000000089996
*
110010+0000000000000002 21.324+0000000018831230 22.324+0000000027829250
31..01+0000000000089996
*
110011+00000000000000RO 21.324+0000000035815170 22.324+0000000027539300
31..01+0000000000000000
GSI8 format data le using Wildsoft Operation codes:
410001+00000001 42....+00000013 43....+00000000 44....+00000012 45....+00981101
410002+00000002 42....+00000013 43....+00005.42 44....+00000012 45....+00000000
410003+00000032 42....+00000500 43....+00004.26 44....+00000012 45....+00000000
410004+000000TP 42....+00000000 43....+00000000 44....+00000000 45....+00000000
110005+00000501 21.124+00000000 22.104+09136260 31...1+00000000 51..0.+0012+000
110006+00000502 21.124+03741320 22.104+08915570 31...1+00246818 51..0.+0012+000
110007+00000503 21.124+03915180 22.104+08919040 31...1+00251956 51..0.+0012+000
110008+00000504 21.124+06530420 22.104+08839360 31...1+00113998 51..0.+0012+000
Leica raw les usually have a .RAW or .GSI extension. The primary difference in the GSI8 and GSI16 formats is
that information is contained in data blocks of 16 characters in the GSI16 format, while it is contained in blocks
of 8 characters in the GSI8 format. Leica instruments make it possible to have both the GSI8 as well as GSI16
data formats in the same raw le. However, lines with the GSI16 format data will always start with an asterisk (
*
)
character, to distinguish them from the GSI8 format. There is no distinction between Leica raw les collected in the
Wildsoft and LISCAD operation codes.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 503
Supported Wildsoft codes:
1: Start Job
11: Assign Coords
12: Coord Offset
13: Target Height
14: Add to Tgt Ht
15: Add to Meas Dist
2: Occupy Point
21: Occupy Saved Point
3: FS to Trav Pt
31: FS to Single Pt
32: Radial Sideshots
33: Sets of Angles
4: Closing Pt
41: Closing Angle
50: BS to Benchmark
51: FS to Turn Pt
52: BS to Turn Pt
53: FS to Benchmark
60: Save Point
61: Recall Point
62: Compare Point
63: Remark
Supported LISCAD codes:
1: New instrument setup
2: New target height
3: Sets of directions
4: Fixed azimuth
5: Feature code
6: Measured offset
8: Line creation for sub-codes 1 (straight string), 2 (curved string) and 6 (arc by 3 points)
9: Fixed coordinates
11: Close string
14: Additional description
20: Start of job
27: Feature code
90: Split feature code
100+: Descriptions
The Convert button can be used to convert any Leica format le into a Carlson format le. For example, if you
have a Leica PCMCIA card then there is no serial cable transfer to do. Instead use the Convert routine to make the
Carlson raw data (.RW5) and coordinate (.CRD) les. Since there is no distinction between Wildsoft and LISCAD
les, the user must know in advance which format has been used in the le. Then, select that particular option
(Wildsoft, 10-20-30-40 or LISCAD) under the ''Coding System'' option at the bottom of the dialog box, as shown in
the previous page. Another option that the user needs to choose is the order in which foresight-backsight readings
have been recorded in the raw le, BFFB or BFBF, as explained in the dialog box. Then, the user can simply pick
the ''Convert'' button and the program prompts for the input'' Wild/Leica File'' (raw le), and the output'' Carlson
RW5 le'' and ''Carlson CRD le'', if they are not already lled.
Nikon
Download
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 504
First choose the equipment and data type under the Transfer Type list. Also check that the communication and data
format settings match your collector. Then click the Download button and follow the on-screen directions. When
the transfer is complete, the program will ask you for the Carlson coordinate le (.CRD) and raw le (.RW5) to
create if you haven't already specied a le name in the dialog. With Point Protect on, the routine will check the
coordinate le for existing point data before downloading the point from the data collector. The original data from
the collector is stored in a le name with the same name as the coordinate le except with a .TRN extension. For
example, job5.crd would have job5.trn.
Upload
Pick the Select File button next to the Carlson CRD File edit box and choose the CRD le to send. Check that the
COM port and baud rate are set correctly and then click the Upload button. A dialog now allows you to specify the
range of point numbers to upload. Set the points and then click the Start Transfer button. The le transfer should
now go.
Convert Nikon to Carlson
The Convert button will translate the Nikon raw le format (.TRN or .RAW) into Carlson coordinate (.CRD) and
raw (.RW5) les.
Portion of typical Nikon le format:
MP,1,,5000.0000,5000.0000,0.0000,T/1
CO,31-Oct-1999 11:42:38
ST,1,,2,,0.0000,0.00000,0.00000
SS,3,0.0000,152.1510,359.59590,90.44100,11:43:38,T/2
SS,4,0.0000,127.5560,0.06040,90.40110,11:44:45,CON
SS,5,0.0000,97.1820,2.19580,90.52460,11:45:43,CON
Geodimeter
Download
From the Geodimeter data collector, go to the le transfer routine by pressing the PRG (Program) key and entering
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 505
program 54. Then choose Imem (option 1) as the source. Next choose the le type to send as either Job (measure-
ment data) or Area (point data). The Geodimeter will then prompt for the job name. Next enter Serial (option 3) as
the destination. A conrmation screen appears showing the serial port settings. Here are some typical settings:
COM=1,8,0,9600
Before pressing enter (ENT key), go to Carlson and run Data Collection in the Survey menu and choose
Geodimeter. Then click the Download button and within 15 seconds, go back to the Geodimeter and press
Enter. The le transfer should now go. When the transfer is complete, the program will ask you for the Carlson
coordinate le and raw le to create if you haven't already specied a le name in the dialog. With Point Protect on,
the routine will check the coordinate le for existing point data before downloading the point fromthe data collector.
Upload
In Carlson, run Geodimeter under Data Collection in the Survey menu. Pick the Select File button next to the
Carlson CRD File edit box and choose the CRD le to send. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly
and then click the Upload button. A dialog now allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload. Enter
the points to send but before clicking OK, go to the Geodimeter data collector. Start the le transfer routine by
pressing the PRG key and entering program 54. Then choose Serial (option 3) as the source. The Geodimeter will
display the serial port settings. Check these values and press enter. Next choose Area (option 2) as the destination.
Then enter the job name. The Geodimeter is now listening for data. Quickly go back to Carlson and click OK on
the points to send dialog. The le transfer should now go
Convert
The Convert button will translate the Geodimeter raw le format (.OBS) into Carlson coordinate (.CRD) and raw
(.RW5) les.
Communication Settings
If the Geodimeter is not communicating with Carlson, run function 79 on the Geodimeter and make sure that it is
set to 4. This setting is for the transfer message end of sequence format.
Supported Geodimeter Codes
The following Geodimeter codes are processed when converting the Geodimeter raw le. All other codes are
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 506
recorded as descriptions in the Carlson rw5 le.
0=Info
1=Data
2=Station No
3=Instrument Height
4=Point Code
5=Point Number
6=Signal Height
7=Horizontal Angle
8=Vertical Angle
9=Slope Distance
11=Horizontal Distance
17=Horizontal Angle
18=Vertical Angle
21=Horizontal Reference Angle
30=Atmospheric Correction
37=Northing
38=Easting
39=Elevation
40=Delta North
41=Delta East
42=Delta Elevation
45=Correction To Bearing
46=Standard Deviation
50=Job Number
51=Date
52=Time
53=Operator
54=Project Id
55=Instrument Id
56=Temperature
60=Shot Id
61=Activity Code
62=Reference Object
70=Entered Radial Offset
71=Entered Angle Offset
72=Calculated Radial Offset
73=Calculated Angle Offset
74=Air Pressure
Portion of typical Geodimeter le format
5=108
4=13POC
6=5.000
7=238.0708
8=89.2236
9=440.39
37=767.42
38=4626.07
39=699.795
Topcon 210/310/220/GPT2000
This command supports these above Topcon models.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 507
MDL Laser
The MDL Laser outputs a raw le of angles, distances and codes as one long string of data which can be converted
into a Carlson raw data (.RW5) le. There is no coordinate data in the MDL raw le. So you need to run
Edit-Process Raw File to calculate coordinates from the raw data. The Download button will transfer the MDL raw
data from a BDI logger.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 508
Kermit
Kermit can be also used for transferring les with accuracy. The dialog looks like this:
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: datacolt
Prerequisite: None
Edit-Process Raw Data File
This program reads or creates a raw data (.RW5) le that contains various lines of data (records) that could be likened
to a surveyor's eld book. You can specify point coordinates, job information, notes, and the angles and distances
that make up traverse or sideshots records. Once the raw data is created or read it can be processed/reduced to
coordinates that are stored in the current coordinate (.crd; .cgc; .mdb; .zak) le.
The raw le can also be created or appended using the Locate Point, Traverse, Sideshot, and Inverse commands on
the COGO menu. To store the data inputs from these commands into a raw le, rst toggle on the Raw File ON/OFF
command on the COGO menu. It is possible to always have the raw data le open to store data inputs. To enable
this option, choose Congure from the Settings menu, then choose Survey Module, then choose General Settings.
Turn on the Automatic Raw File toggle in this dialog.
The raw les created by TDS data collector programs are also compatible without conversion. The command Data
Collectors on the Tools menu has options for reading other data collectors native le formats and converting them
to raw data (.RW5) format. Within the raw data editor, the File menu includes an import menu for converting raw
data from other formats.
When you select the Edit-Process Raw Data File command you are prompted to specify the name of the raw data
(.RW5) le. The current coordinate le is used automatically. To change the current coordinate le, use the Set
Coordinate File command in the Points menu before starting this command. If no coordinate le is current, the
program will prompt you to set the current coordinate (.CRD) le.
Edit-Process Raw Data File uses a spreadsheet for editing the raw data as shown. Each row of the spreadsheet
is represented by a number located at the far left side of the editor. Various messages and reports often reference
possible problems with the data by this row number. Each row of the spreadsheet represents one record of data.
There are 14 types of data records. The type of data record is shown in the rst column. Different record types use
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 509
different numbers of columns. Whenever the data record type changes between rows, a record header is added to
the spreadsheet that describes each column of data in the following row. To edit the raw data, simply highlight the
cell and type in the new value. To change the type of record, pick on the down arrow in the rst column and choose
a new data type from the list. To delete a row, highlight any cell in the row and hit the Delete key or choose Delete
Row from the Edit menu. Records can be added pressing the Insert key, pressing the down arrow key from the last
line in the spreadsheet, or by choosing one of the add records from the Add menu.
The different record types are described below.
TR (Traverse)
The traverse record contains the occupied point number, foresight point number, angle mode, horizontal angle,
distance, vertical angle and description. When processed, this record will calculate and store the coordinates for
the foresight point. Traversing also moves the setup by making the traverse foresight point the next occupied point
and the traverse occupied point becomes the next backsight point. The different angle codes are NE for northeast
bearing, SE for southeast, SW for southwest, NW for northwest, AZ for azimuth, AL for angle left, AR for angle
right, DL for deection angle left and DR for deection angle right. To set the angle code, pick on the Code down
arrow and choose from the list. The horizontal and vertical angles should be entered as dd.mmss. For example,
45.2305 is 45 degrees, 23 minutes and 5 seconds. The vertical angle can be shown as vertical angle (0 degrees
level), zenith angle (90 degrees level) or elevation difference. The vertical angle mode is set in the Display menu.
The distance mode is also set in the Display menu as either slope or horizontal distance. The description eld is
used as the foresight point description.
SS (SideShot)
The sideshot record is the same as the traverse record except that sideshot does not move the setup.
HI (Instrument and Rod Height)
This record sets the instrument and rod heights used in elevation calculations. This record should precede any
traverse and sideshot records that you want the heights applied to.
BK (BackSight)
The backsight record contains the occupied point number, backsight point number, backsight azimuth and the set
azimuth. This record should precede any traverse and sideshot records that use this setup. If no backsight point is
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 510
entered, the program uses the backsight azimuth to turn angles from. The Set Azimuth is the circle reading of the
instrument when sighting the backsight. A Set Azimuth of zero is the default.
PT (Store Point)
The store point record consists of a point number, northing, easting, elevation and description. When processing,
this data will be stored as a point in the coordinate le. If the rst Occupied point and/or the initial Backsight point
are not dened in the coordinate le set for processing to, both points will need to be added to the rw5 le as PT
(Store Point) records.
DS (Description)
The description record is an additional note that appears in the spreadsheet editor and printouts. This record can
contain various information that is recorded in data collectors during eld operations. This data can vary from user,
temperature and general data to each line of data associated with ''Set Collection''. When ''Sets'' of data collected
using various brands of data collection software is converted/imported into the raw editor, the actual measurements
made during the spinning of the angles and distances are recorded as DS records and the mean value of the angle
and distance is recorded as a SS record. DS records are not used in processing.
CL (Closing Shot)
The closing shot record is the traverse record where the foresight point is the closing point for the traverse. This
record is used by the adjustment commands in the Process menu. There should be only one CL record in each
Traverse loop (Name Record) in the raw le. If there is no CL record, the process adjustment routines will
prompt for which shot is the closing shot. The closing shot can also be dene in the eld by using special codes
dened in the Open Settings found under the File pulldown within the editor. Please refer to the ''Open Settings''
documentation below for more information on these codes.
AB (Angle Balance)
The Angle Balance record is the measurement data observed that closes the angles of the traverse. Typically this
record is the measurement data recorded from the closing shot to the initial backsight point. The backsight could be
either external or internal to the traverse. Angle Balance routine in the Process menu uses this record and compares
the angle between the occupied point and foresight point of this record with a user-specied reference angle. There
should be only one AB record in the raw le. If there is no AB record, then the Angle Balance routine will prompt
for which shot to use as the angle balance.
CL + AB (Closing Shot and Angle Balance)
This record is used as both the closing shot and angle balance records.
FD (Foresight Direct)
The foresight direct is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set. When the program nds one the of direct-
reverse measurement records, it will look for the other three records to complete the set.
FR (Foresight Reverse)
The foresight reverse is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set.
BD (Backsight Direct)
The backsight direct is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set.
BR (Backsight Reverse)
The backsight reverse is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set.
EL (Elevation Only)
This record sets the elevation in the CRD le for the specied point number. Often used when an existing point
with good vertical control is being traversed through. Using this record type for the point would keep the elevation
from changing on the existing point regardless of the measurement data.
AZ (Azimuth Only)
Applies to SurvNET, the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 511
CSE (Control Standard Error)
Applies to SurvNET, the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine.
SSE (Set-up Standard Error)
Applies to SurvNET, the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine.
MSE (Measurement Standard Error)
Applies to SurvNET, the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine.
NAME (Traverse Name)
This record acts as an identier for the group of records that make up a traverse. All the records after the NAME
record belong to that traverse up to the next NAME record or the end of the le. This record allows you to have
multiple traverses in one raw le. When running one of the Process commands, the program will bring up a list of
all the traverse names. Simply choose which traverse to process. If you have only one traverse in the raw le, then
you don't need the NAME record.
GPS
This record contains the Latitude and Longitude of a point as measured by GPS surveying equipment using Carlson
SurvCE data collection software. This record has additional information tied to it such as localization les, geoid
les, coordinate projection systems etc. This record has its own processing routine in the Process pulldown within
the editor. Processing procedures are discussed in the Process (Compute Pts) pulldown documentation.
Raw Data Editor Pulldown Menus
File Menu
Open RW5 File
This command prompts for a rw5 le to load into the editor.
New RW5 File
This command clears the editor spreadsheet.
Save RW5 File
This saves the rw5 le. If the le hasn't been named you will be prompted for the le name and the location to
save the le. After you perform the rst save, this command acts as a quick save and saves the le to the name and
location specied during the initial saving of the le.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 512
Save RW5 As
This command saves the raw editor data in the spreadsheet to a rw5 le and always prompts for le name and
location to save.
Open CRD File
This command prompts for an existing coordinate le to set as the active coordinate le for the raw editor.
New CRD File
This command prompts for a new coordinate le to set as the active coordinate le for the raw editor. The coordinate
data will be initialized as empty.
Save CRD File
This command saves the current coordinate data in the raw editor to the current coordinate le.
Save CRD As
This command saves the current coordinate data to a specied coordinate le name.
Report/Print
There are three types of reports: Raw Data, Coordinates and Summary. A sample of the raw data report is shown
below. This report shows the data from the raw editor spreadsheet. The Coordinates report lists the point data (point
number, northing, easting, elevation, description) from the current coordinate le. The summary report groups the
traverse, sideshot and store point numbers along with a list of the setups and the shots from each setup.
Raw File> c:\data\survey.rw5
CRD File> c:\data\survey.crd
Note
Survey Example
PntNo Northing Easting Elevation Desc
1 5000 5000 100 START
OcPt BsPt SetAzi
1
InstHgt RodHgt
5.32 6.0
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
TR 1 2 AR 268.5330 711.420 89.4050 P2
InstHgt RodHgt
5.43 6.0
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
TR 2 3 AR 262.5448 457.760 89.3236 P3
InstHgt RodHgt
5.4 6.0
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
TR 3 4 AR 208.5710 201.310 89.1803 P4
TR 4 5 AR 247.1657 497.120 88.5235 P5
TR 5 6 AR 277.4835 223.980 90.2926 P6
TR 6 7 AR 92.4113 233.880 90.2746 P7
InstHgt RodHgt
5.42 6.0
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
TR 7 8 AR 261.2756 387.250 91.4405 CLOSE
SS 7 19 AR 289.3456 112.450 91.3423 SS1
Report/Print Settings
This dialog has settings for the report functions. The Use Report Formatter option allows for customized reports
and exporting to Excel. The Use Distance Scaler allows for reporting distances in different units. For example, the
survey distances could be in US Feet and then use a scale factor to report the distances in chains.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 513
Import
These routines convert raw data from other formats into the current Carlson RW5 format. The converted raw data
will be added to the end of any existing data in the editor. In many cases, the raw data le to import can be
downloaded directly from the data collector or instrument using the Data Collectors command. The following
supported formats (along with their standard le extension) are listed here. Some Sample File Formats are listed at
the end of this section.
C&G (.CGR;.RAW;.TXT;
*
)
CalTrans (.DMP)
Carlson (.RW5)
EFB (.RAW;.OBS) Electronic Field Book
Fieldbook (.FBK): From Softdesk, Land Development Desktop or Civil 3D. The import handles the following
record types:
AD
AZ / AZM / AZIMUTH
B / BRG / BEARING
BEG / BEGIN
BS / BACKSITE / BACKSIGHT
C3
END
F1
FC1
NE / NEZ
PRISM
STN / STA / STATION
ZD
Geodimeter (.OBS; .RAW; job;
*
)
Horizon (.RAW)
LandXML (.XML): LandXML is the industry standard data format for exchanging project data. It can contain any
number of different data types including surfaces besides raw measurements.
Leica (.GSI; .RAW; GRE): This reads the Leica raw le in Wildsoft, Liscad, 10-20-30-40, C&G, or GeoComp
format. There are options to specify direct-reverse shot order if any and to convert from International Feet to Leica
US Feet.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 514
Maptech (.FLD)
MDL Laser (.CDS)
Nikon (.TRN; .RAW)
PC Cogo (.BAT)
SDMS (.prj;
*
)
SMI (.RAW)
Sokkia SDR (.SDR; .RAW;
*
)
StarNET (.DAT) The import handles the following StarNET record types: E - Elevation record
C - Coordinate record
B - Bearing / Azimuth record
M - Measurement record
SS - SideShot record
TB - Begin Traverse record
T - Traverse record
TE - End Traverse record
DV - 3D Distance Record (creates a slope distance/zenith angle record)
D - 2D Distance Record (creates a horizontal distance)
A - Horizontal Angle Record (creates an angle-only record)
V - Zenith Angle record (creates a zenith angle-only record)
When parsing these records, if a measurement, coordinate or azimuth has standard errors assigned to it, then
standard error records are created in the RW5 le so none of that information is lost. The import also handles the
following DOT commands:
.ORDER - Species point order (AtFromTo or FromAtTo) in the measurement record, and/or the order of
NORTH/EAST or EAST/NORTH in control records.
.DELTA - Species whether the data is SlopeDist/Zenith or HDist/VDist. The default is SD/ZE.
.2D / .3D - Species the data format. Without this information the elds can be confused while parsing.
SurvCOGO (.RAW or .TXT)
SurvCE Archive (.SC5) When downloading a rw5 le from SurvCE using SurvCOM, there's an option to copy the
rw5 le to a sc5 le as a read-only backup.
Survis (.RAW)
TDS (.RW5; RAW)
Topcon (raw;
*
)
Trimble (.dc)
3TA5 (.TXT)
Zeiss (.DAT)
Export
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 515
These routines convert the Carlson raw data (.RW5) le to other formats. The following le formats are supported.
CalTrans (DMP)
dgDialog (.DGD)
Fieldbook (.FBK): This export routine provides an option to ''Setup Fieldbook Codes''. This allows the user to
substitute the raw description contained in the rw5 le with the eldbook code used in AutoDesk Land Desktop or
Civil 3D.
FL DOT (.OBS)
GPS Data (.TXT;
*
)
LandXML (.XML)
Leica (.GSI)
MOSS (.MOS)
RMGeo (.txt)
SDMS (.PRJ) This export routine provides an option to ''Setup SDMS Codes''. This allows the user to substitute the
raw description contained in the rw5 le with the SDMS codes used in SDMS program.
SFN: This format is used in the Netherlands.
Sokkia (.SDR)
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 516
TDS (RW5;RAW)
Topobase (PO)
VA Dot (TOP)
WinCMM (.LSA)
Open/Save Settings
This option allows for dening codes that represent the closing shot and angle balance shot of a traverse. These
codes can be entered in the description of a point while in the eld. When the rw5 is opened in the raw le
editor, the measurement data containing the closing shot code will be set to a CL record and the measurement data
containing the angle balance code will be set to an AB record. This allows for quick processing of the survey data
and saves the time spent setting up the le for processing.
Exit
Exits the raw le editor.
Edit Menu
Undo:This command undoes the last data entry or the last copy, cut or delete command performed on keyboard
entered data only. This will not undo a change to the Type or Code columns, nor a cut or copy command to a row.
Cut:Standard windows cut command. Removes data from editor and places it in the windows clipboard.
Copy:Standard windows copy command. Copies selected data to windows clipboard.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 517
Delete: Deletes selected data or row of data. Will not delete headers if data is present below the header.
Find: Tool to search and nd a particular word, letter, numeric value or a combination of all. Provides options to
Match whole word only and/or case. Allows for a up or down directional search from the active cell in the editor.
The Point Number Search allows you to search for occupy or foresight point numbers.
Replace: Tool to search and replace a particular word, letter, numeric value of a combination of all. Options
to Match whole word only and /or case is provided for the search criteria. Provides further options to Replace
individual items one at a time or to Replace All.
Go To: Tool to advance the focus of the active cell to a specied line number.
Delete Row: This command deletes the row containing the active cursor or cell. You can delete a row by placing
the cursor in any of the cells in the row that you wish to delete, or by picking on the row number at the far left of
the editor.
Modify Measurements: This option allows for a change in distance, horizontal angle, vertical angle or lat/lon by a
specied amount for the entire le or for a specied point number or line number range.. To modify a measurement,
choose which eld to modify, enter the change in either distance or angle in dd.mmss format. The Distance Factor
method multiplies the distances by the specied value which can be used to convert distance units between feet and
meters or to apply a scale factor. The Lat/Lon/Z Delta can be used to adjust GPS records in case of a shift due to
adjusting the base position. Next choose how to apply the modication. If all is selected, the change will be applied
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 518
to all records in the specied eld. If By Point Number is chosen, enter the point number or range of numbers in the
Range of Points eld. If by Line Number is chosen, then dene the area for the change by specifying the Starting
and Ending line.
Convert Points To Notes Records: This function converts point (PT) records to note (DS) records. This leaves the
information of the point coordinates in the rw5 le as display only and without having the point coordinates stored
to the coordinate le when the le is processed. The point data in the DS records can be converted back to PT
records by picking the Code eld in the spreadsheet and switching DS to PT.
Edit Coordinate File: This option allows for editing and/or listing of the coordinate data in the active coordinate
le. The active coordinate le is displayed in the Header of the raw data editor. This routine brings up the edit point
dialog and allows editing of the points one at a time.
Display Menu
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 519
Angles:This option chooses the angle format between degrees/minutes/seconds (dd.mmss) and Gons-400 decimal
degree circle (dd.dddd). This setting applies to the angles in the spreadsheet editor as well as the angle format for
reports. There is also a separate setting to Show Decimal Seconds which use edit and process angles to the nearest
tenth of a second (dd.mmsss).
Vertical:The options contained in this menu allow for specifying the type of vertical measurement information you
will input or is contained in the rw5 le. The Vertical Angle selection assumes the barrel or scope of the instrument is
level when reading 0 (zero). With this setting, the vertical component of a measurement record will have a header of
VertAng. The Zenith Angle selection, most commonly used, assumes the barrel/scope to be level when reading 90.
Using this setting results in a header of ZenithAng. Elevation difference displays the elevation difference between
the occupied and foresight points. If the Distance option is specied as Slope, this elevation difference will be used
to calculate the horizontal distance of the measurement. The header for this record is ElevDiff. The None selection
assumes all distances are horizontal distances and removes the vertical component for a measurement from the
editor. Switching modes can be performed at any time.
Distance: This option controls the display of either
Slope or Horizontal Distances. Changing the display results in the distance data adjusting to reect the correct
value for the selection made. The Vertical data, VertAng, ZenithAng or VertDiff, is used to convert the distance
value when changing this display option.
Graphics: The Raw Data Editor uses an optional graphics win-
dow to display the points and traverse lines in real time. As data is entered or edited, the graphics window will be
updated to show the conguration or new conguration of the traverse. The option of whether to show sideshots is
also available. When a cell is selected, the traverse or sideshot line in the display window will change to the color
yellow for a graphical reference. The graphics window is toggled on or off from the Display Graphics Window
menu inside the raw le editor.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 520
Graphics>On: Turns the graphics window on.
Graphics>Off: Turns the graphics window off.
Graphics>Show Sideshots: Controls the display of the sideshot data in the graphics window. Figure 1 shows the
graphics window with sideshots on. Figure 1A shows the graphics window with sideshots off.
Figure 1 Sideshots On
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 521
Figure 1A Sideshots Off
Graphics>Zoom Mode: Within the graphics window, real time zoom is available. To zoom in press and hold the
left mouse button and drag in the direction of the + symbol. To zoom out, press and hold the left button and drag in
the direction of the - symbol.
Graphics>Pan Mode: Real time pan is available within the graphics window. To pan, set the graphics window to
pan mode, then press and hold the left mouse button and then drag to desired position.
Graphics>Resize Text: With the this option on the text becomes smaller/larger in the view when you zoom in/out.
Graphics>Fixed Text Size: With this option on, the text stays a xed size while zooming in and out.
Spreadsheet Colors: This option allows for the assignment of colors to record types. To change/dene the color
for a particular record, select Spreadsheet Colors from the Display pulldown within the raw editor. From the Color
Settings dialog select the record to edit by clicking on the select button next to the desired record.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 522
The color slide beside the select button shows the current setting for the record. After selecting the record, the Select
Color dialog box will be display. Select the Set button next to the desired color for the record.
Display>Hide Row: This option allows for hiding single or multiple rows. This could be used to prevent crucial
information from being accidentally altered during editing of data or data entry. Hiding a record does not exclude it
from processing. To hide a record click on the row number at the far left of the editor. The entire row of data will
highlight, now select the Hide Row option. Multiple rows or data can be selected by selecting the rst row of data
to hide then while holding down the shift key on the keyboard, select the last row to hide. All rows in between these
two selections will be highlighted, now select Hide Row. When a row or rows of data are hidden, the row numbers
will reect the hidden rows. For example, Figure 2 below shows a multiple selection of rows 10-17 to hide. Figure
2A shows the editor with the rows hidden. Notice that the row numbers indicate hidden rows by showing a gap from
rows 9-18.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 523
Figure 2
Figure 2A
Show Row:This option shows rows that have been hidden. To show hidden rows, the row above the rst hidden row
and the row below the last hidden row must be selected by using the shift key selection method described in Hide
Row above. After selecting the appropriate rows, select the Show Row option. Figure 2B shows the selection of
rows 9 & 18 in order to show the hidden rows 10-17. Figure 2C shows the editor after the Show Row option has
been selected.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 524
Figure 2B
Figure 2C
Hide By Point Numbers: This function prompts for a range of point numbers and then isolates records containing
those point numbers by hiding all other records. This feature is useful to focus on certain point numbers in a large
le.
Hide Selected Rows: This function hides the rows that are currently highlighted. To highlight multiple rows, pick
in a cell with the mouse and then hold the Shift key while picking a cell on another row.
Show Selected Rows: This function unhides rows previously hidden by the Hide Selected Rows function.
ShowAll Rows: This function unhides rows previously hidden by the Hide Selected Rows or Hide By Point Numbers
functions.
Hide Description Records:This option controls the visibility of the Description records contained in a rw5 le. The
description record is an additional note used to store useful information in addition to typical point data. Sometimes
these records clutter the raw le and make it hard to review actual survey data. The ability to control the description
record visibility is a useful tool when reviewing survey data.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 525
Show Description Records: This option shows (unhides) description records contained in the rw5 le.
Hide Record Headers: This option hides the in-line headers such as the PntNo, OcPt, FsPt, etc. The editor contains
''Smart Headers'' that changes with the type of data that is in the active row. These headers are not in-line and are
always displayed at the top of the editor. Figure 2D shows the editor with the record headers hidden and the Smart
Header active. Row #21 contains the active cell, the automatic header at the top of the editor shows traverse (TR)
record headers.
Figure 2D
Add Menu
Traverse: Adds a traverse record (TR) to the spreadsheet editor. The new record will be insert above the row that
contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the le. If so, you will be prompted to insert above or below
the current row.
SideShot: Adds a sideshot record (SS) to the spreadsheet editor. The new record will be insert above the row that
contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the le. If so, you will be prompted to insert above or below
the current row.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 526
Backsight: Adds a backsight (BK) to the spreadsheet editor. The new record will be insert above the row that
contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the le. If so, you will be prompted to insert above or below
the current row.
Instrument Height: Adds an instrument height (HI) record to the editor. This record contains both the instrument
and rod height setting.
Point: Adds a point (PT) record to the editor. Provides options to either add a Blank Point Record or Import From
Coordinate File.
Inserting a blank record allows for manual input to dene the coordinates for the point. Import From Coordi-
nate File imports the coordinate values from an existing point or range of points contained in the coordinate le.
Enter the point number or range of points and select OK. The points will be read into the rw5 le at the top of the le.
COGO Command: Adds COGO Command (CC) record with a eld to specify the command (Translate, Rotate,
Scale or Align) and a eld for entering the parameters. The COGO commands are executed in sequence as the rw5
le is processed from top to bottom by any of the process methods in the Process menu. The COGO commands are
all transformation commands that are applied to the points in the current coordinate le. The following list is the
syntax of the COGO commands:
Translate: Range Dx Dy Dz Process Zero Z
Rotate: Range Angle Base Y Base X
Scale: Range Scale Base Y Base X Use Z
Align: Range From1 To1 From2 To2
All the parameters are entered into one spreadsheet cell next to the COGO function. The parameters use space
separators. The following list is the parameter denitions:
Range: point numbers
Dx: delta easting (X)
Dy: delta northing (Y)
Dz: delta elevation (Z)
Process Zero Z: toggle for whether to process points with elevation of zero (0=No, 1=Yes)
Angle: rotation angle in dd.mmss format
Base Y: base point northing
Base X: base point easting
Scale: scale factor
Use Z: toggle for whether to scale the elevations (0=No, 1=Yes)
From1: point number of rst source point
To1: point number of rst destination point
From2: point number of second source point
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 527
To2: point number of second destination point
For example, to translate points 1-10 by a delta Z of 6.0 while ltering out zero elevation points, set the parameters
for the COGO Translate record as ''1-10 0 0 6.0 0''.
Elevation: Adds an elevation (EL) record to the editor. The new record will be insert above the row that contains
the active cell unless this row is the last row in the le. If so, you will be prompted to insert above or below the
current row.
Note: Adds a note (DS) record to the editor. Note records are for information display and do not effect processing
except for two special notes which are:
Elevation: 2D
Elevation: 3D
These special notes set the elevation mode for processing for the records that follow the note. The raw editor starts
in 3D mode. The ''Elevation: 2D'' note will switch processing to 2D mode and the ''Elevation: 3D'' note will switch
the mode back to 3D. In 2D mode, the processing will not set the elevations in the coordinate le.
Data On/Off: Adds a data on/off (DO) record to the editor. This record toggles the raw data between processing
on and off modes. The raw data starts in processing on mode. Working from top to down, when a DO record is
reached, the processing mode is turned off. Then next DO record will turn processing back on, and so on. Data
records that are in processing off mode and skipped when running the routines in the Process menu.
Traverse Name: Adds a traverse name (Name) to the editor. The new record will be insert above the row that
contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the le. If so, you will be prompted to insert above or below
the current row.
GPS: Adds a GPS record to the editor. The new record will be insert above the row that contains the active cell
unless this row is the last row in the le. If so, you will be prompted to insert above or below the current row.
Reference Azimuth: Applies to SurvNET, the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine.
Control Standard Error: Applies to SurvNET, the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine.
Setup Standard Error: Applies to SurvNET, the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine.
Measurement Standard Error: Applies to SurvNET, the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment
routine.
Process (Compute Pts) Menu
This menu contains tools to process raw data by various methods. The calculated coordinates, and notes if specied,
are stored to the active specied coordinate le. The coordinate le can be specied using Set Coordinate File,
under the Points pulldown within the drawing screen, or from the Tools menu of the editor, discussed later in
this section. The options for processing are specied within either the Process Options dialog box or the Closure
Options dialog box, depending upon . This dialog box is displayed before processing data, using any of the available
methods, with the exception being the Least Squares method.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 528
Multiple Measurements To Same Point: This option sets the method of how to handle multiple measurements to
the same point. There are three available options, Use Last, Average or Use First. Use last uses the last measurement
to calculate the position of the point. Average uses the average of all the measurements for the position calculation
and Use Last takes the last measurement to the point as the data to use.
Use Backsight Reciprocals: The Backsight Reciprocal options treat reciprocal measurements ''special''. A foresight
to point 15 from a setup on 14, followed by a backsight from 15 to 14, makes a pair of ''reciprocal'' measurements.
The backsight ''reciprocal'' measurement can be ignored for its impact on recalculating the occupied point (None
Option), or the elevation of component of the reciprocal measurements can be averaged (Average Elevation option),
or both the elevation and distance can be averaged (Average Elev & Dist) to recalculate the setup (occupied point)
coordinates.
Calculate Elevations: This option determines whether the elevations of the points will be calculated and written to
the coordinate le. Options of whether to calculate All elevations or just the Sideshots Only are provided.
Direct-Reverse Vertical Angles: Specify whether to balance all or process the direct-reverse shots and use only the
foresight direct shot.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 529
Report Angle Format: Species the angle format for the report. The By File option makes the report use the angle
format in the raw data (.RW5) le.
Calculate Elevations: This option controls which point elevations will be calculated. For example, if the tra-
verse point elevations have already been adjusted and you need to recalculate the sideshot elevations, then use the
SideShots Only option.
Report SideShots: Specify whether to include the sideshot data in the process results report.
Point Protect: This option will check the coordinate (.CRD) le for existing point data before processing. If the
foresight point number for any traverse or sideshot record already is a stored coordinate in the coordinate (.CRD)
le, then the program shows a list of conicting point numbers. You can either continue processing and overwrite
the coordinate (.CRD) le coordinates with the calculated raw le coordinates or cancel the processing to go back
to the editor to change foresight numbers.
A report of the conicting point numbers can be generated to the standard report viewer in Carlson by selecting the
Report option on the Point Protect dialog box. From the report viewer, the report can then be printed, sent to the
screen or saved to a le.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 530
Create Point Notes: This option will generate a note (.NOT) le named after the coordinate le. The note le
contains additional descriptions for points. With this option active, the text from all note records (DS records) will
be stored to the note le for the foresight point number preceding the note records.
Calculate Grid Scale Factor at Each Setup: This option will calculate a scale factor for each TR and SS record.
This scale factor is calculated as the average of the scale factors at the occupied and foresights points. At these
points the scale factor is calculated as the projection grid factor multiplied by the elevation factor which is the
earth radius divided by the elevation plus the earth radius [SF = Grid Factor
*
(Earth Radius / (Elevation + Earth
Radius))]. In order to calculate these projection grid factors, the traverse coordinates must be in grid coordinates.
When this option is selected, the program will prompt for the projection and zone to use. The elevation for the
scale factor can be adjusted by the geoid height using the geoid specied in the Geoid To Apply list. The geoid
height is added to the point elevation to adjust the elevation value used in the scale factor equation. The geoid
surface les are not installed by default due to the large size of these les. To install the geoids to use with this op-
tion, go to the Carlson Software webpage and download the Geoid Grid Files fromthe Support->Downloads section.
Report Each State Plane Scale: This option becomes available if the Calculate State Plane Factor at Each Setup
has been selected. With this option on, the scale factor at each point will be shown in the process results report.
Scale Factor: This value is multiplied by the horizontal distance for the traverse and sideshot records. This factor
can be use to transform from ground to grid coordinates. This factor does not effect elevations.
Correct for Earth Curvature: This option adjusts the calculated points for the effect of the Earth's curvature.
Typically this adjustment is small and adjusts the elevation more than the horizontal.
Report Angle Format: This option controls the angle format displayed on the process result report. The option of
By Raw File will display the angles in the format that is contained in the raw le. The Bearing option will display
the angle in a bearing format. The Azimuth option will display the azimuth of the measurement and the Angle
Right option will display the angle right measurement of the observation.
Decimal Places for Report: This option controls the number of decimal places for the reported data.
Report Closure: This option determines whether the closure report will be displayed after processing. If processing
a topo survey where the traverse has not been closed, then turn this toggle off for quick processing..
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 531
Report Sideshots: Controls whether the sideshot data is shown on the process report.
Reference Closing Point: This is an optional eld for entering the coordinates to compare the ending traverse
point with. This reference closing point is used to calculate the closure. Without using this option the program will
by default use the starting coordinate as the reference closing point.
Report Output: There are three report output options contained in the raw editor, the Standard Report Viewer, the
Custom Report Formatter and the Tabular Report Viewer. Each is documented below.
The Standard Report Viewer is the default report viewer throughout the program. Any routine that generates a
report has this option and the data contained in the report depends upon the routine executed. The report viewer
is also a text editor. It allows for addition and deletion of text in order to customize the report for printing or for
saving to a particular format for a le. Options to print, send to the screen in the drawing window as text or save to
a le are available.
The Custom Report Formatter allows for customization of the process results by selecting the elds and the layout
of the elds to display. The settings can be saved to a format name and recalled when needed. Options to Delete,
Export and Import saved Formats are also available.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 532
To create a report, select data from the Available list and then select the Add button. This will populate the Used
eld with the selected data. Standard window selection methods can be used when selecting the data to report.
Holding the ctrl key while selecting data allows for making random selections. Holding the shift key while selecting
data will select the rst item picked, last item picked and all items between.
The Tabular Report Viewer displays a report viewer consisting of tabs. Each tab organizes and displays different
data depending upon the process option chosen. The process results using the No Adjust method results in three
tabs the Report Header, Unadjusted Data and the Store Points tabs. Each of these tabs display different information
which corresponds to the tab title. Using an adjustment method results in ve tabs. In addition to the three listed
above, an Angle Balance and Compass Closure tab is added. From the Tabular Report Viewer, the Standard Report
Viewer can be switched to by pressing the Report option at the bottom of the dialog. This is useful when wanting to
combine all tabs into one report for printing or saving to a le. An example of a Tabular Report for a compass rule
adjustment is shown below.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 533
Processing Methods
No Adjust: No Adjust means that no angle balance or traverse adjustment will be applied. Options are specied in
the Process Options dialog. After picking OK for the process options dialog, a Traverse Points dialog appears for
entering the starting and ending point numbers.
The program reads the raw le to set the defaults for these point numbers which are used to calculate the closure.
The difference between the ending point and the reference closing point is the closure error and the sum of the
traverse distances from the starting to the ending point is used as the total distance traversed. After picking OK for
the second dialog, the program starts processing the raw le from the top record down. The result is displayed in the
Standard Report Viewer which can save, print or draw the report.
Angle Balance: This process method applies an angle balance to the traverse lines when calculating the coordinates.
The angle balance takes the angular error divided by the number of traverse lines and adjusts the angle of each
traverse line by this amount. The angular error is the difference between the angle balance shot and a reference
angle. The angle balance shot is specied as a type AB or CL+AB record in the raw le. If no AB record is found
in the raw le, then the program will prompt for which traverse shot to use as the angle balance shot. The angle
from the angle balance shot is calculated as the angle from the occupied point to the foresight point. The reference
angle can be specied as a bearing, azimuth or by two point numbers in the dialog shown.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 534
The angle balance report shows the unadjusted points, the unadjusted closure, the angular error, the adjusted points
and then the adjusted closure. Typically but not always, applying the angle balance correction will improve the
traverse closure.
Compass, Crandall, Transit: These process methods apply the selected rule to the traverse lines when calculating
the coordinates. After adjusting the traverse, the sideshots are also recalculated. The closure error is calculated as
the difference between the closing shot and a reference point. The closing shot is specied as a type CL or CL+AB
record in the raw le. If no CL record is found in the raw le, then the program will prompt for which traverse shot
to use as the closing shot. The foresight point is used as the closing coordinate. The reference point can be specied
by point number or by entering the northing, easting and elevation. The process results report shows the unadjusted
points, closure error, adjustments to each traverse point and adjusted point.
Prepare Least Squares Data: From the raw le data, this routine makes initial calculations for the coordinate points
in the traverse.
This data, along with the control point coordinates and the angle and distance measurements, is stored to a data le
with the same name as the current RW5 le except with a .LSQ extension (ie: survey.lsq goes with survey.rw5).
The constraints of the routine are:
All angle readings must be in angle right mode.
The coordinates of the starting and the ending points must be known.
The routine begins with a dialog for specifying the reference closing coordinates and any scale factors to apply to
the distance measurements. The Reference Closing Point is the last point in the traverse, whose coordinates must be
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 535
known. If an angle balance shot is used in the traverse, the Reference Angle Balance Angle must also be specied,
either as a value or as the angle between known points.
Since angles and distances have errors of different magnitudes, they are normalized using weights, based on the
accuracy and condence with which these quantities have been measured. There is a dialog for specifying the
estimated measurement errors. The Reading Error is the horizontal angular error in the instrument. For example,
for a ''5-second'' instrument this error would be 5. The Pointing Error accounts for several factors in the horizontal
angle reading including accuracy lining up the crosshairs on the target, the target size and the optical quality of the
instrument. The Target and Instrument Centering Errors are the distance off the point due to faulty centering. The
EDM Constant Error is the accuracy of the instrument distance measurements. The EDM Scaler Error is entered in
parts per million for the increased error in longer measurements. These settings can be saved and loaded as a way
to store settings for different equipment.
The program will calculate the weights for each distance and angle measurement using these measurement errors.
The control points, points to adjust, distance and angle measurements with weights are reported. You can edit these
measurements and weights using the Edit Least-Squares Data routine or go directly to the Process Least-Squares
Data routine.
Edit Least Squares Data: This routine edits the points, measurements and weights stored in the .LSQ le associated
with the current RW5 le. The editor works through the dialog shown. You can edit, add or remove the control
points, adjust points, angle measurements or distance measurements. The program does not check that the editing is
valid. So you need to make sure that your changes keep a good set of least-squares data (i.e. don't delete a needed
control point). The Distance Error button allows you to set the distance standard error weights for all the distance
measurements to the same value. Likewise the Angle Error button sets the standard error weights for all the angle
measurements.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 536
Least-Squares Input Data:
Control Points
Point# Northing Easting
1 5000.000 5000.000
8 5000.000 5000.000
Distance Observations
Occupy FSight Distance StdErr
1 2 711.409 0.018
2 3 457.745 0.017
3 4 201.295 0.017
4 5 497.024 0.018
5 6 223.972 0.017
6 7 233.872 0.017
7 8 387.073 0.017
Angle Observations
BSight Occupy FSight Angle StdErr
7 1 2 268d53'30'' 7.617''
1 2 3 262d54'48'' 6.869''
2 3 4 208d57'10'' 15.194''
3 4 5 247d16'57'' 14.222''
4 5 6 277d48'35'' 12.262''
5 6 7 92d41'13'' 15.818''
6 7 8 261d27'56'' 12.991''
7 1 S 01d59'18'' E 0.001''
Process Least Squares Data
This routine applies a least-squares adjustment to the data stored in the .LSQ associated with the current raw data
(.RW5) le. The closing errors are distributed among the other points, using the ''Method of Least Squares'' (Ref :
Wolf, P.R. and Ghilani, C.D., 1996, ''Adjustment Computations'', John Wiley and Sons, NY,Third Edition). After
the adjustment, the rest of the raw le is processed to recalculate the sideshots. There is an option to draw standard
error ellipses around the adjusted points. The ellipse axes are multiplied by Ellipse Scale Factor to make the ellipse
larger for easier viewing.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 537
The least-squares process report shows the input data and the results. For each point, the amount adjusted and the
standard error in X and Y are reported. The Reference Standard Deviation is based on the sum of the residuals
and the initial estimated standard errors. The Chi-Squares test is a goodness-of-t test that checks the reference
standard deviation with the least-squares model. If this test fails, there may be a blunder in the measurement data or
the initial estimated standard errors were too low or too high.
Stadia Processing Method: Provides functionality to process Stadia surveying notes. Stadia sighting depends on
two horizontal cross-hairs, known as stadia hairs, within the telescope. These hairs are parallel to the horizontal
cross-hair and are equally spaced above and below it. The distance between the two stadia hairs is known as the
intercept. The distance from the instrument to the rod is 100 times the intercept. For example, an intercept of 3.10
would represent a distance of 310 (3.10 X 100). For entering in stadia notes, you would enter the horizontal angle,
the distance (entered as the intercept X 100) and the vertical angle.
GPS: The process GPS routine allows for reduction of GPS records that reside in a raw (
*
.RW5) le from latitude,
longitude and WGS84 Ellipsoid Height to State Plane or local coordinates. When selected, the GPS Settings dialog
will appear as shown below.
GPS>Projection Type:
Denes the datum coordinate system to be used for converting the latitude, Longitude and WGS84 Ellipsoid height
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 538
collected from the GPS receiver into Cartesian coordinates. The supported projection types are State Plane 83, State
Plane 27, UTM, Lat/Long, Great Britain-OSGB36, Australia, New Zealand-NZGD2000, New Zealand-NZGD49,
and France NTF-GR3DF97A. A User-Dened option is also available for dening a user projection.
The supported geoids include: Geoid99 (USA), Geoid03 (USA), EGM96 (World), GDA94 (Australia), CGG2000,
HT 2.0, HT HT 1.01 (Canada) and )SGM02 (Britain). GeoUser-Dened projections are supported. To dene a new
projection select the Dene Projection option. This will bring up the following dialog.
Enter a name for your system (e.g. PRVI for Puerto Rico/Virgin Islands), then select a Projection type and enter the
appropriate parameters. Note that all latitude and longitude values are in Degrees Minutes and Seconds (dd.mmss)
and False Northing and False Eastings are always presented in meters. Dene a Datum shift by selecting the
Select Datum radial button. You may select a predened Ellipsoid or set your own parameters by typing in a new
ellipsoid name in the Ellipsoid eld and entering values for a and 1/f. When you enter in a new Ellipsoid name,
the Datum name eld will be blank. The values for Dx, Dy, Dz, Rx, Ry, and Rz and scale are ''to WGS84''. If the
values you have are ''fromWGS84'', simply reverse the sign of each value (positive becomes negative and vice versa).
You may save your system to a ''udp'' le. To Load a user dened coordinate system from a le, select the Load
radial button. A list of user dened systems will be displayed. Select the desired system and press OK.
GPS>Zone: for State Plane projections, you must select the correct state zone that you are working in. For UTM,
the Automatic Zone option will have the program automatically user the program automatically use the correct
UTM zone for your location. Otherwise for UTM, you can manually set a specic UTM zone. This manual option
applies to working on the border between zones and you want to force the program to always use one of those
zones.
GPS>Use Alignment File For Localization: With this option toggle on, a prompt for the Alignment File to
Process will be displayed. This le is typically created by SurvCE (Carlson's Data Collection System) using the
Localization routine or by Carlson Field Using the Align to Local Coordinates routine. This le (
*
.DAT) contains
the parameters to transform the derived State Plane coordinates to the dened local coordinates.
At the end of the process, the coordinates will be written to the current coordinate (
*
.crd) le and a report will be
presented in the Carlson editor for saving or printing purposes.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 539
GPS>Transformation: The transformation in the align Local Coordinates command can either be by plane
similarity or rigid body methods. The difference is that the rigid body method does a transformation with a
translation and rotation and without a scale The plane similarity does a rotation, translation and scale. This option
only applies when two or more points are used in Align Local Coordinates or the Localization routine in SurvCE.
GPS>One Point Alignment Azimuth: This option applies to the rotation when using one point in Align Local
Coordinates or the Localization routine in SurvCE. For this alignment method, the state plane coordinate is
translated to the local coordinate. Then the rotation can use either the state plane grid or the geodetic as north. No
scale is applied in this transformation. The state plane and geodetic true north diverge slightly in the east and west
edges of the state plane zone. This option allows you to choose which north to use.
GPS>Two Point Alignment Method: There are two option when using this method, Fit & Rotate and Rotate
Only. Fit & Rotate will use the second point in the localization le for direction and scaling. The Rotate Only
option allows you to use the second point in the localization le for direction but not for scaling. When using the
Rotate Only option, any scale factor entered in the Project Scale Factor will be used.
GPS>Project Scale Factor: For most applications, the Scale Factor should be set to 1.0. The scale factor
represents the ''combined'' grid/elevation factor that reduces ground distances to grid. After converting the
LAT/LONG from the GPS records to state plane coordinates and applying the coordinate alignment (Localization)
le, the Project Scale Factor is applied as the nal adjustment to the coordinates. This adjustment is used on the
X, Y, and not the Z. The Project Scale Factor is applied by dividing the distance between the coordinate and a
base point by the Project Scale Factor. The coordinate is then set by starting from the base point and moving
in the direction to the coordinate for the adjusted distance. The base point is the rst point in the alignment
(Localization) le. If there are no points specied in the alignment le, then 0,0 is used as the base point. If using
an alignment le (Localization File) this value will be automatically calculated and displayed. Manual entry of
a scale factor is also permitted and is often used with the Two Point Alignment Method when a scale factor is known.
GPS>Geoid to Apply: The supported geoids include: Geoid99 (USA), Geoid03 (USA), EGM96 (World), GDA94
(Australia), CGG2000, HT 2.0, HT HT 1.01 (Canada) and SGM02 (Britain).
This option will account for the geoid undulation in determining the orthometric elevation of the measurement.
The denition of the geoid model as currently adopted by the national Geodetic survey is the equipotential surface
of the Earth's gravity eld which best ts, in a least squares sense, global mean sea level. Orthometric elevation
measurements are used in survey calculations. In order to convert ellipsoid heights (He) as measured by GPS into
orthometric elevations (E0), you must provide for a correction between the GPS-measured ellipsoid (reference
ellipsoid) and a constant level gravitational surface, the geoid. This corrections is the geoid undulation (Ug). The
formula is He=Eo + Ug.
Carlson applies the Geoid model by subtracting the Geoid undulation from the GPS elevation. The resulting
elevation is then used and displayed. In practice, the Geoid model is most applicable to two types of alignment
scenarios. One of these types is when setting up the base over a know point and having no alignment control points.
The other is when there is one alignment control point. When using multiple alignment control points, the Geoid
model is not as important because Carlson can model the elevation difference which can generally pick up the local
Geoid undulation.
GPS>Units: Coordinates can be reduced into one of three available units, Metric, US Feet or International Feet.
Process>Process Settings: This option allows for the setting of user preferences and tolerances to be used during
processing and generation of reports.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 540
Multiple Measurement Settings: These options provide control for managing how multiple measurements to the
same point are handled and reported.
Distance Tolerance Horizontal and Vertical: Allows for user input of desired tolerance values for multiple
measurements. Exceeded tolerances will be displayed on the process results report. With the Report Residuals
option ON, the residual values of the measurements will be shown on the process results report.
The data to be averaged can be either the Distance Measurements or the Coordinates.
Backsight Orientation Settings: This option will take multiple backsight measurements for an occupation and
computes a least squares orientation for the instrument. There is also an option to compute and correct for the
instrumental collimation error from the available measurements if both direct and reverse readings to one or more
stations in the same set have been recorded. The program uses the BD (backsight direct) and BR (backsight
reverse) records to identify the measurements to process. You can backsight different targets. The targets do need
to have known coordinates either as points in the current coordinate le or as SP records in the raw le. The
measurements can be complete with angles and distance, and they can be partial with only angles or only distance.
When this option is active, the calculated backsight orientation will override the SetAzi eld in the BK (backsight)
record for the setup. The process report will include all the measurements used, the residuals and the resulting
backsight orientation. The least-squares routine will also calculate the occupied station coordinate by resection if
possible from the measurements and the report includes this calculated position along with the reference position
and residuals. This calculation of the occupy point is used only for a check for the report and does not effect the
occupy coordinate for processing. Note that if the occupied station position is unknown, there must be sufcient
measurements to at least three known reference stations to support the resection and orientation solution. Here is an
example of the raw data and the report.
Raw Data
PntNo Northing Easting Elevation Desc
71 4998.1900 5199.8200 125.0000 PK
22 4770.1200 5192.5000 90.0000 PK
2 4900.2700 5007.3100 75.0000 PK
53 5345.8600 4799.0400 150.0000 PK
1 5000.0000 5000.0000 100.0000 PK
InstHt RodHt
5.000 1.000
OcPt BsPt Azi SetAzi
1 000'00'' 000'00''
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 541
BD 1 71 AR 031'09'' 200.930 8400'06'' PK
InstHt RodHt
5.000 2.000
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
BD 1 22 AR 5003'22'' 300.120 9229'02'' PK
InstHt RodHt
5.000 3.000
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
BD 1 2 AR 8548'25'' 103.580 10506'37'' PK
InstHt RodHt
5.000 4.000
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
BD 1 53 AR 23950'24'' 403.000 8301'04'' PK
BR 1 53 AR 5950'31'' 403.001 27658'56'' PK
InstHt RodHt
5.000 3.000
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
BR 1 2 AR 26548'38'' 103.581 25453'23'' PK
InstHt RodHt
5.000 2.000
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc
BR 1 22 AR 23003'39'' 300.121 26730'58'' PK
InstHt RodHt
5.000 1.000
OcPt FsPt HorzAngle SlopeDist
ZenithAng Desc
BR 1 71 AR 18031'16'' 200.931 27559'54'' PK
Multiple Backsight Orientation
OcPt BsPt Azimuth SetAzi
1 0000'00'' 26959'57''
Orientation Standard Deviation: 0.000
Instrument Height: 5.000
Occupy Point Northing Easting Elevation
Reference 5000.000 5000.000 100.000
Calculated 5000.000 4999.999 100.000
Delta 0.000 0.001 -0.000
Standard Dev 0.003 0.003 0.000
Target Points Northing Easting Elevation Rod Height
71 4998.190 5199.820 125.000 1.000
22 4770.120 5192.500 90.000 2.000
2 4900.270 5007.310 75.000 3.000
53 5345.860 4799.040 150.000 4.000
Measurement Hz Angle Residual Zenith Hz Dist Residual
71 031'09'' -000'04'' 8400'06'' 199.830 -0.001
22 5003'22'' 000'01'' 9229'02'' 299.838 -0.003
2 8548'25'' -000'02'' 10506'37'' 99.999 -0.002
53 23950'24'' 000'03'' 8301'04'' 400.011 -0.006
53 5950'31'' -000'04'' 27658'56'' 400.012 -0.007
2 26548'38'' -000'15'' 25453'23'' 100.000 -0.003
22 23003'39'' -000'16'' 26730'58'' 299.839 -0.004
71 18031'16'' -000'11'' 27559'54'' 199.831 -0.002
Check Point Settings: These options provide user controls for survey check points. With Report Check Points
ON, any point coded as a check point in the raw data le, will be reported. When selected the Check Point Code
and Distance Tolerance elds become active and allow for editing. The Check Point Code is a user specied code
entered in during the survey that tells the program to check the coordinates of a particular point with the coordinates
of another point. This code is congurable by the user. An example of a point description coded as a Check Point
would be as such, ''trav =8''. This description tells the program that the description of the point is ''trav'' and to check
the coordinates of the this point with that of point #8. The Distance Tolerance Horizontal and Vertical are user
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 542
specied tolerances for the check point. If either of these tolerances is exceeded it will be reported on the process
results report.
Instrument/Rod Height Ranges: These settings are used to check the instrument and rod heights when the raw
le is processed. The program will report warnings if there are any heights that exceed the specied min/max ranges.
Angle Only Measurements: The Combine Elevations Method applies to points calculated from Angle Only
measurements. Angle Only points are calculated as part of the processing for the No Adjust, Compass, Crandall,
Transit and Angle Balance process methods. To calculate points from Angle Only measurements, there needs to be
multiple SS records with horizontal and vertical angles and no distance with the same target foresight point number
from setups at different occupy points. The elevations can be set as the average from the multiple measurements,
using the highest measured elevation, or using the lowest measured elevation. For example, to survey the top of a
tree, you could have a SS to foresight point 99 from occupy point 1 with a horizontal and vertical angle and another
SS to foresight point 99 from occupy point 2 with a horizontal and vertical angle. Then point 99 can be calculated
by angle-angle intersect which determines the horizontal distances from 99 back to occupy points 1 and 2. These
distances are then used with the vertical angles and occupy point elevation to calculate the elevation at point 99.
Store Point Records: These options control how any store point (PT) record is handled during processing of the
raw data le. There are three options for storing Store Point (PT) records, Never, Always, and When CRD Empty.
Never prevents any Store Point (PT) Record Report in the raw le from being written to the crd le. With this
option on no existing point in the crd le would be overwritten. Always will write to the coordinate le and will
overwrite any existing point with the same number of the Store Point (PT) records. The When CRD Empty option
will only write Store Point (PT) records to the coordinate le when it is empty. Report Store Points displays all
store points in the process results report. The Hold Store Points option will hold the coordinate values for the store
point record when measurements are taken to the store points. This will prevent the coordinates of the point from
changing if measurements to the point dictate a change in coordinate position.
Direct-Reverse Settings:
Direct-Reverse Vertical Angles: This option determines how to handle direct-reverse vertical angle mea-
surements when processing. Balance Direct-Reverse will take the mean of the direct-reverse measurements and
use this value when processing the le. Direct Only will only use the direct measurement to the point for processing.
Foresight-Backsight Measurements: Balance Foresight-Backsight allows for averaging in the Foresight and
backsight measurements when using direct-reverse sets. The Foresight Only option will average the foresight
measurements only of a direct-reverse set.
Horizontal Angle Tolerance (Seconds): This is the tolerance that the angle measured by the direct measurements
and the angle measured by the reverse measurements in a direct-reverse set must fall within.
Flip Angle Tolerance (Seconds): User specied value for the acceptable difference in measured horizontal angles
determined from the direct (BD-FD) and reverse (BR-FR) observations.
Distance Tolerance: User specied tolerance for the difference in distance measurements to the same points. When
this value is exceeded on a measurement, it will be displayed on the process results report.
Measurements To Control Points: The Store To Current Coordinate File option applies when a control
coordinate le is used in addition to the active coordinate le. When processing the raw le, measurements to point
numbers that are in the control coordinate le will not be stored into the active coordinate le when this option is
on.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 543
Drawing Points and Linework: This option controls the drawing of points and linework using Field to Finish. It
differs from the draw traverse and sideshot lines under the Tools Menu of the Raw Editor by using a eld to nish
code table (
*
.d) to dene how the points and linework are to be drawn and layerized. There are three settings for
this option, Manual, Auto and Prompt. Manual means that the le will not be processed using the eld to nish
codes and no points or linework with be drawn upon existing the raw editor. The Auto option will use the current or
last used eld to nish le (
*
.d) to draw the points and lines on the drawing screen when the raw editor is existed.
The option of Prompt will give the option to draw the points and lines to the screen. With this setting specied, the
following prompt will be displayed when existing the editor.
Tools Menu
Direct-Reverse Report: This routine creates a report of direct and reverse shots along with the resulting averaged
shots. Any tolerance specied in the Process Settings>Direct-Reverse Settings section, that is exceeded will be
displayed in this report. The residuals are the difference between the measurement and the nal average. If the
current spreadsheet display mode for distances is set to horizontal, then the report will show horizontal distances.
Otherwise, the report uses slope distances.
Reduce Direct-Reverse: This routine processes the direct and reverse shots and simplies the raw le by replacing
the sets of direct and reverse shots with the resulting average traverse record.
Update Raw from Points: This routine is used to update the raw data based upon the coordinates of the points
contained in the coordinate (
*
.crd) le. For example if the raw data has been processed using the compass rule
adjustment method, the points in the crd le are now adjusted. However the raw data remains unchanged. If a record
of the rw5 le reecting the angles and distances between the points after an adjustment has been ran is desired,
this routine can be run thus updating the raw data to reect the adjusted angles and distances. Another application
for this routine is that of building a rw5 le for future processing and adjustment. For example if a point le or text
le has been received from another engineering rm or fellow surveyor and you would like to build a rw5 le for
future reference and processing this option can also be used to accomplish this. The rw5 le would be set up with
the occupied points, foresight points and the desired angle type to use specied for the traverse. This would be all
the manual entry of the data necessary. After creating the ''shell'' of the traverse then run the update raw from points
routine and the raw data, as contained in the coordinate le, will be imported into the rw5 le thus lling out the
horizontal angle, distance and vertical components specied.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 544
Find Bad Angle: This routine applies the angular error to each traverse record one at a time. The adjusted traverse
record that improves the closure the most is reported as the Bad Angle. The angular error is the difference between
the angle balance shot and a reference angle.
Append Another Raw File: This routine prompts for another raw data (.RW5) le which is read and the data added
to the end of the existing raw data (.RW5) le. For example, if you are editing the raw le from the rst days work
and have a separate raw le with a second days work, you can use this routine to add the second raw data to the rst
raw le.
Draw Traverse-Sideshot Lines: This routine draws lines for all the traverse and sideshot records. Sideshot
Traverses are traverses that do not lead to the closing or ending point. There are different layers so that the lines
can be drawn with different colors. This command does not process the raw le. Instead it reads the raw le and
for each traverse and sideshot record, the program looks up the coordinates for the occupied and foresight points
in the CRD le. So it may be necessary to run Process>No Adjust before running this routine. With the Erase
Previous Traverse-Sideshot Lines toggled on, any previous linework drawn using this method will be erased from
the drawing screen before drawing the lines again.
Renumber Points: This routine renumbers points in the raw le. This applies to all point numbers including: TR,
SS, and PT records.
Range of Points to Renumber: Enter in the range of points to change, ie 1-4.
Line Number to Begin Renumbering: This corresponds to the line number located at the far left or the raw data
editor. Enter the line number to begin the renumbering.
Line Number To End Renumbering: This also corresponds to the line number located at the far left on the raw
data editor. Enter the line number to end the renumbering. If the range of numbers specied does not occur between
the beginning line number and the ending line number, no changes will be made.
Numbers to Add to Point Numbers: Enter in the value to add. This number will be added to the existing point
number to create the new point number. For example, if the number to add is 10 and the existing point numbers 1
and 6, the new renumber points will be 11 and 16.
Point Groups: This option can be used to organize the survey data into point groups. There are three op-
tions for the creation of point groups, Create All Point Group, Create Traverse Point Group and Create
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 545
Sideshot Point Group. The Create All Point Group option, creates a user specied group containing all of
the points dened in the rw5 le. Create Traverse Point Group creates a user specied group containing only
the points dened in the traverse records (TR) of the rw5 le. The Create Sideshot Point Group creates a user
specied group that contains only the points dened in the sideshot records (SS) of the rw5 le.
Format of the raw data (.RW5) le
The Carlson raw data format is a comma delimited ASCII le containing record types, headers, recorded data and
comments. The format is based on the RW5 raw data specication, with the exception of angle sets. Angle sets are
recorded as BD, BR, FD and FR records to allow reduction of all possible combinations. Essentially, these records
are identical to a sideshot record.
Backsight Record
Record type: BK
Field headers:
OP Occupy Point
BP Back Point
BS Backsight
BC Back Circle
Sample(s):
BK,OP1,BP2,BS315.0000,BC0.0044
Line of Sight Record
Record type: LS
Field headers:
HI Height of Instrument
HR Height of Rod
*
*
GPS heights may be recorded to phase center or ARP depending on GPS make.
Sample(s):
LS,HI5.000000,HR6.000000
LS,HR4.000000
Occupy Record
Record type: OC
Field headers:
OP Point Name
N Northing (the header is N space)
E Easting (the header is E space)
EL Elevation
Note
Sample(s):
OC,OP1,N 5000.00000,E 5000.00000,EL100.000,CP
Store Point Record
Record type: SP
Field headers:
PN Point Name
N Northing
E Easting
EL Elevation
Note
Sample(s):
SP,PN100,N 5002.0000,E 5000.0000,EL100.0000,PP
Traverse / Sideshot Record / Backsight Direct / Backsight Reverse / Foresight Direct / Foresight Re-
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 546
verse
Record type: TR / SS / BD / BR / FD / FR
Field headers:
OP Occupy Point
FP Foresight Point
(one of the following)
AZ Azimuth
BR Bearing
AR Angle-Right
AL Angle-Left
DR Deection-Right
DL Deection-Left
(one of the following)
ZE Zenith
VA Vertical angle
CE Change Elevation
(one of the following)
SD Slope Distance
HD Horizontal Distance
Note
Sample(s):
TR,OP1,FP4,AR90.3333,ZE90.3333,SD25.550000,CP
SS,OP1,FP2,AR0.0044,ZE86.0133,SD10.313750,CP
BD,OP1,FP2,AR0.0055,ZE86.0126,SD10.320000,CP
BR,OP1,FP2,AR180.0037,ZE273.5826,SD10.315000,CP
FD,OP1,FP3,AR57.1630,ZE89.4305,SD7.393000,CP
FR,OP1,FP3,AR237.1612,ZE270.1548,SD7.395000,CP
GPS
Record type: GPS
Field headers:
PN Point Name
LA Latitude (WGS84)
LN Longitude (WGS84, negative for West)
EL Ellipsoid elevation in meters
*
Note
*
GPS heights may be recorded to phase center or ARP depending on GPS make.
Sample(s):
GPS,PN701,LA42.214630920,LN-71.081409184,EL-21.8459,C
P /Brass Disk
Alphabetical listing of Record Types
BD Backsight Direct
BK Backsight
BR Backsight Reverse
FD Foresight Direct
FR Foresight Reverse
GPS GPS Position in Lat (dd.mmss) Lon (dd.mmss - Negative for West) and WGS84 Ellipsoid Elevation in meters
Alphabetical listing of Field Headers
AD Azimuth Direction ( 0 for North, 1 for South)
AL Angle-Left
AR Angle-Right
AZ Azimuth
BC Back Circle
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 547
BP Back Point
BR Bearing (this eld will be recorded as N123.4500W)
BS Backsight (when back point is not dened)
CE Change Elevation
DL Deection-Left
DR Deection-Right
DT Local Date (MM-DD-YYYY)
E Easting (the header is E space)
EC Earth Curvature (0 for off, 1 for on)
EL Elevation (GPS value is ellipsoid elevation in meters)
EO EDM Offset
FE Foresight Elevation
FP Foresight Point
HD Horizontal Distance
HI Height of Instrument
HR Height of Rod
LA Latitude
LN Longitude
N Northing (the header is N space)
OC Occupy Point Coordinates
OP Occupy Point
PN Point Name
SD Slope Distance
SF Scale Factor
TM Local Time (HH:MM:SS)
UN Distance Unit (0 for feet, 1 for meter, 2 for
US feet)
VA Vertical Angle
ZE Zenith
Note
Traverse Examples
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 548
This rst example is a closed traverse with an internal backsight of azimuth 178d0'42''
Use the functions under the Add menu to create and ll out the raw le as shown here.
Notice that the record from point 7 to 8 is set as a CL+AB record. This tells the program that point 8 is the closing
point and that the angle from 7 to 8 is the closing angle. For traverse adjustment, the closing reference point is 1
and the closure error is the difference between point 1 and point 8. For angle balance, the reference closing angle is
358d0'42'' (178d0'42'' + 180). The angle balance error is the difference between this reference angle and the angle
from points 7 to 8.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 549
Now let's process using Compass adjustment with Angle Balance. Choose Compass under the Process menu and ll
out the dialogs as shown.
First half of process report:
Process Results 05/23/2002 10:06
Raw file> c:/scadxml/data/example.rw5
CRD file> C:/scadxml/DATA/example.crd
Scale Factor: 1.00000000
Correct for Earth Curvature: OFF
Starting Point 1: N 5000.00 E 5000.00 Z 100.00
BackSight Azimuth: 17800'42''
Point Horizontal Zenith Slope Inst Rod Northing Easting Elev
No. Angle Angle Dist HT HT
Description
2 AR268.5330 89.4050 711.32 5.32 6.00 5038.43 5710.27 103.29
P2
3 AR262.5448 89.3236 457.76 5.43 6.00 4587.89 5791.20 106.36
P3
4 AR208.5710 89.1803 201.31 5.40 6.00 4397.30 5726.43 108.22
P4
5 AR247.1657 88.5235 497.12 5.40 6.00 4363.08 5230.59 117.37
P5
19 AR289.3456 91.4405 112.45 5.40 6.00 4471.32 5260.88 113.36
SS1
6 AR277.4835 90.2926 223.98 5.40 6.00 4586.54 5245.67 114.85
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 550
P6
7 AR92.4143 90.2746 233.88 5.40 6.00 4613.25 5013.33 112.36
P7
8 AR261.2756 91.4405 387.25 5.42 6.00 5000.09 4999.97 100.06
CLOSE
Closure Results (Before Angle Balance)
Starting Point 1: N 5000.00 E 5000.00 Z 100.00
Closing Reference Point 1: N 5000.00 E 5000.00 Z 100.00
Ending Point 8: N 5000.09 E 4999.97 Z 100.06
Azimuth Error : 34138'22''
North Error : 0.09061
East Error : -0.03007
Vertical Error: 0.05953
Hz Dist Error : 0.09547
Sl Dist Error : 0.11251
Traverse Lines> 7
SideShots> 1
Horiz Dist Traversed: 2712.29
Slope Dist Traversed: 2712.62
Closure Precision: 1 in 28409
Remainder of process report:
Compass Closure
Adjusted Point Comparison
Original Adjusted
Point# Northing Easting Northing Easting Dist Bearing
2 5038.445 5710.269 5038.440 5710.294 0.025 S 7946'08'' E
3 4587.914 5791.222 4587.907 5791.263 0.042 S 7946'08'' E
4 4397.319 5726.469 4397.310 5726.517 0.049 S 7946'08'' E
5 4363.044 5230.628 4363.032 5230.693 0.067 S 7946'08'' E
6 4586.509 5245.681 4586.496 5245.755 0.075 S 7946'08'' E
7 4613.178 5013.335 4613.163 5013.416 0.083 S 7946'08'' E
8 5000.017 4999.905 5000.000 5000.000 0.097 S 7946'08'' E
Max adjustment: 0.097
Starting Point 1: N 5000.00 E 5000.00 Z 100.00
BackSight Azimuth: 17800'42''
Point Horizontal Zenith Slope Inst Rod Northing Easting Elev
No. Angle Angle Dist HT HT
Description
2 AR268.5326 89.4050 711.34 5.32 6.00 5038.44 5710.29 103.29
P2
3 AR262.5434 89.3236 457.76 5.43 6.00 4587.91 5791.26 106.36
P3
4 AR208.5704 89.1803 201.30 5.40 6.00 4397.31 5726.52 108.22
P4
5 AR247.1657 88.5235 497.09 5.40 6.00 4363.03 5230.69 117.37
P5
19 AR289.3456 91.4405 112.47 5.40 6.00 4471.28 5260.97 113.36
SS1
6 AR277.4839 90.2926 223.99 5.40 6.00 4586.50 5245.75 114.85
P6
7 AR92.4130 90.2746 233.88 5.40 6.00 4613.16 5013.42 112.36
P7
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 551
8 AR261.2758 91.4405 387.27 5.42 6.00 5000.00 5000.00 100.06
CLOSE
Shown above is the resulting process report. The angle balance had an error of 39 seconds which was divided
among the 7 traverse sides. The Compass Closure shows how each traverse point was adjusted and then the resulting
adjusted angles and distances.
Here is another layout of the last example that shows an external backsight setup. In this case there are two known
points. Point 1 is the starting point and point 21 is the initial backsight. The setup could also use a backsight azimuth
(ie north azimuth for example) instead of a backsight point number.
The closing record setup has changed from the last example. In this example, the shot from 7 to 8 is the closing shot
with point 8 as the closing point. The closing reference point is still point 1. The angle balance shot is from 8 to 9
and the reference angle is from 1 to 21.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 552
Example of an open traverse
The traverse starts from the known point 1 and ends at the known point 14. In this case there is no angle bal-
ance shot. The closing shot is from3 to 4 with point 4 being the closing point. Point 14 is the closing reference point.
The closing record setup has changed from the last example. In this example, the shot from 7 to 8 is the closing shot
with point 8 as the closing point. The closing reference point is still point 1. The angle balance shot is from 8 to 9
and the reference angle is from 1 to 21.
Here is an example of an open traverse.
Compass Report from Open Traverse example:
Process Results
Raw file> d:/scdev/data/tsurvey.rw5
CRD file> d:/scdev/data/tsurvey.crd
Compass Closure
Adjusted Point Comparison
Original Adjusted
Point# Northing Easting Northing Easting Distance Bearing
2 5013.76 5711.18 5013.78 5711.13 0.047 N 63d21'19'' W
3 4560.69 5776.42 4560.72 5776.35 0.078 N 63d21'19'' W
4 4372.46 5705.08 4372.50 5705.00 0.091 N 63d21'19'' W
Point Horizontal Vertical Slope Inst Rod Northing Easting Elev
No. Angle Angle Dist HT HT
Description
2 AR133.5324 89.4050 711.27 5.32 6.00 5013.78 5711.13 103.29
3 AR262.5506 89.3236 457.74 5.43 6.00 4560.72 5776.35 106.36
4 AR208.5712 89.1803 201.30 5.40 6.00 4372.50 5705.00 108.22
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 553
The traverse starts from the known point 1 and ends at the known point 14. In this case there is no angle balance
shot. The closing shot is from 3 to 4 with point 4 being the closing point. Point 14 is the closing reference point.
Portion of typical Sokkia/SDR raw data le:
00NMSDR20 V03-05 Jan-22-98 19:14 122211
10NMW970709A
13CPSea level crn: N
02TP00015000.000005000.0000085.63500005.22000000PK-FD
08KI00035000.000005192.9200081.7450000MN-SET
07TP0001000390.00000000.00000000
09F100010003193.10000092.40416660.00000000MN-SET
09F100010100193.00000091.31388880.00000000SN-REC
Portion of typical Wild/Leica raw data le:
410001+000000SB 42....+00000000 43....+00000000 44....+00000000 45....+00000000 110002+00000002
21.124+35959590 22.104+08748240 31...1+00000000 51..0.+0012+000 110003+00000003
21.124+00000000 22.104+08748240 31...1+00267075 51..0.+0012+000 110004+00000004
21.124+00420390 22.104+08702570 31...1+00168234 51..0.+0012+000 110005+00000005
21.124+26029130 22.104+09311370 31...1+00206133 51..0.+0012+000 410006+000000IP 42....+00000000
43....+00000000 44....+00000000 45....+00000000 110007+00000006 21.124+25827090 22.104+09504550
31...1+00106228 51..0.+0012+000 110008+00000007 21.124+27151500 22.104+09312240 31...1+00106066
51..0.+0012+000
Portion of typical SMI raw data le:
CM Denitions: SS: Side Shot; TR: Traverse; OC: Occupied Coordinates;
PC: Point Coordinates; CM: Comment; OS: Occupied Station;
TS = time stamp; e = electronic; m = manual; CM TS TUE 04/09/91 09:41:25P
PC 1 5000.00000 5000.00000 0.00000
SS e HI:4.000 HR:5.000 PIPE/F
0 1 2 BAZ:0.00000 AR:0.00040 ZA:91.24330 SD:92.020
SS e HI:0.000 HR:0.000 BC/BR FRAME 1ST
0 1 3 BAZ:0.00000 AR:28.47220 ZA:91.20250 SD:65.240
Portion of typical PC COGO raw data le:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 554
*
NEW SET UP INST. AT 1 359 59 59 ON 4
L ANG 1000 4 1 77 18 52 4.44
*
1000 WALL# 283.22
L ANG 1001 4 1 55 44 28 9.8
*
1001 WALL# 283.28
L ANG 1002 4 1 38 37 8 15.89
*
1002 WALL# 283.48
L ANG 1008 4 1 27 18 34 123.82
*
1008 WALL# 287.75
Portion of typical Nikon raw data le:
MP,NOR,,5000.0000,5000.0000,100.0000,1
CO,Temp:111F Press:29.9inHg Prism:666 23-May-2000 10:30:36
ST,NOR,,1,,5.0000,0.0000,0.0000
SS,1,5.0000,131.0605,91.3744,88.4935,10:36:15,CL1
SS,2,5.0000,137.6770,90.2923,88.5236,10:36:50,CL1
Portion of typical MDL/Laser raw data le:
D052097F04P52I494P01P02
H32473V-0639R016202P03
H06687V-0706R014936P91
H03840V-0483R017380
Portion of typical Geodimeter raw data le:
50=HAWTHORN
54=19398
23=3222
2=1
37=1000.00
38=5000.00
39=700.000
Portion of typical Survis raw data le:
OCCUPY PNT
621 616 5.140
148.36076
10255015.7245 3790987.2398 87.6695 ir
10255535.8009 3790669.8100 100.3900 ir
COMMENT
Thu Apr 08 08:14:14 1999
BACKSIGHT
0.00000 90.33400 609.4200 11.900 ir
SIDESHOT
1 0 0
18.47550 90.55000 17.4200 5.300 TP:gps1
Portion of typical Fieldbook raw data le:
NE 32 10696.4141 10043.5613 ''SN-SET''
AZ 32 27 0
STN 32
BS 27
AD 27 0.00000 NULL ''SN-SET''
AD 33 183.23250 183.660 ''SN-SET''
Portion of typical SurvCOGO raw data le:
19100 , 0 , 19101 , 5 , 5.25 , 4.7 , 35.15 , 550 , 91.23 ,START
19101 , 19100 , 19102 , 5 , 5.15 , 4.7 , 35.15 , 120.23 , 88.34 ,
19102 , 19101 , 19103 , 5 , 5.2 , 4.7 , 125.1444 , 180.41 , 90 ,
19103 , 19102 , 19104 , 5 , 5.2 , 4.7 , 125.15 , 240.03 , 90 ,
19104 , 19103 , 19105 , 5 , 5.3 , 4.7 , 315.15 , 305.5 , 90 ,IRON PIN
19105 , 19104 , 19106 , 5 , 5.4 , 4.7 , 215.15 , 140.35 , 90 ,IRON PIN
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 555
19106 , 19105 , 19107 , 5 , 5.05 , 4.7 , 215.15 , 200 , 90 ,TACK IN FENCE
19107 , 19106 , 19108 , 5 , 5.2 , 4.7 , 300.23 , 400 , 90 ,
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: rawedit
Prerequisite: None
Edit-Process Level Data
This command is for entering and calculating level data. It has a spreadsheet editor for entering the level measure-
ments, and the level calculations are updated as the data is entered. There is also a processing and reporting feature.
Carlson Software supports two level le formats:
LEV Files: The .LEV le is the old format. You can still edit and process les in this format. The LEV
format only supports differential levels, single and three-wire. The LEV le has 5 record types:
1) SR - Start Record. Contains the starting benchmark measurement.
2) TP - Turning point record, contains the backsight and foresight to the turning point.
3) LV - Side Shot (or level) record. Contains the foresight measurement to the point.
4) ER - End Record, contains the measurement to the ending benchmark.
5) Note/Comment - starts with two dashes
TLV Files: The TLV le format can contain Differential and/or Trig-Level data. This is Carlson's new for-
mat and is supported by SurvCE (Carlson data collection program). The TLV le has the following record types:
1) H1 - First header record contains project information
2) H2 - Second header record contains date, time, temperature and pressure information
3) BM - Benchmark record, contains the point number, elevation and description of the benchmark.
4) LS - Rod height, only used with TRIG-LEVEL data.
5) BS- Backsight measurement. This record contains the backsight point number and measurement:
a) Differential data: VD and HD - Vertical Difference (rod reading) and Horizontal Distance
b) Trig data: SD/ZE - Slope Distance and Zenith Angle
6) FS - Foresight measurement. This record contains the foresight point number and measurement.
a) Differential data: VD and HD - Vertical Difference (rod reading) and Horizontal Distance
b) Trig data: SD/ZE - Slope Distance and Zenith Angle
7) Note/Comment - starts with two dashes
This routine runs the
*
.TLV /
*
.LEV le editor and le report functions.
LEV File Editor:
If you are creating a new .LEV le, you must choose either single-wire or three-wire for your level format data
entry preference.
Three Wire leveling, or precise leveling, is a process of direct leveling wherein three cross hairs, or threads, are read
and recorded rather than the single horizontal cross hair. Note below, in the sample three-wire editor graphic, the
additional columns representing top and bottom readings.
The commands starts by asking you, with a dialog box, to select an existing level le (.LEV) to process or to select
a name for a new level le. The below examples are using existing les. Once this choice is made the small, Level
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 556
Format dialog appears.
Format choice box
Regardless of whether you choose Single or Three Wire, the Level Editor appears in its own window. Below we see
the editor displaying the contents of two existing les of level information. One is single wire and the other is three
wire. The pulldown menus are the same for both, as described below in detail.
In the spreadsheet, the background color of the cells indicate the data type. White cells are for user-specied values.
Blue cells are program calculated values. Black cells are data elds that aren't used by the level record for that row.
Level File Editor - sample Single Wire data
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 557
Level File Editor - sample Three Wire data
File->Settings
File: Standard File routines - Open, Save, Save As, Settings, Print and Exit. Settings brings up a dialog where you
can adjust the 3-wire tolerance and distance values. Open will allow you to open up another existing .LEV le.
File->Import: This routine imports Carlson .LEV format, Leica level data in .GSI or .XML format, TDS .RAW
format, Topcon or Trimble .DAT format into the level editor.
File->Settings: This function has a setting for whether to use the Report Formatter for the Print function. The
Report Formatter allows for customized reports and output to Excel. Without the Report Formatter, the Print function
creates an automatic report.
Edit: Cut, Copy, Paste and Go To. Go To will take you to the row of your choosing.
Add: These options provide the standard level run routines. Details on each and a graphic of the pulldown follow.
Tools: This pulldown is for adjusting and storing elevations.
The Add and Tools pulldowns at the top of the editor provide the following features:
Level Editor - Add pulldown menu
Level Start (SR): Starts the level run, usually with a know starting elevation or benchmark.
Level Turning Point (TP): Turning point procedure for leveling.
Level Side Shot (LV): For entering leveling side shots.
Level End (ER): Enter your value.
Note: You can add a note, or comments, into the editor as you move through the level run.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 558
Level Editor - Tools pulldown menu
Adjust Elevations: This function will do a simple adjustment of your level data and place the adjusted elevations in
the Adjusted Elevation column. If you are running 3 wire level loop the corrections will be inversely proportionate to
the distance between the measurements. If you are running a single wire level loop, the corrections will be averaged
by the number of turns.
Store Elevations to Coordinate File: It is important that the point numbers in the level le match the point numbers
in the coordinate le. If you have an active coordinate le passed to the level editor, this option will be available to
you. The elevations calculated in the level le will be stored in the active coordinate le by matching point numbers.
The point must exist in the coordinate le before an elevation will be stored. After the elevations have been stored,
a report will show which points were stored and which ones were not. If adjusted elevations have been calculated,
they will be stored. If not, the unadjusted elevations will be stored.
Selecting Print (editor File menu) provided this Level File Report sample
Editor Columns:
Type: These are small pulldown menus with two-letter level procedure choices. The two letters are abbreviations
as indicated in the next dialog. These steps may be made with the Add pulldown or with this method. The options
are SR, TP, ER, LV and DS. DS stands for description shot.
Point # - Point number of measurement.
BS - Backsight rod reading
HI - Calculated height of instrument
FS - Foresight rod reading
Elevation - Elevation of point
Code: The code is used by SurvNet for network least-squares processing of networked level loops. The code can
be either EL or FE where EL is for calculated elevations and FE is for xed elevations. FE should only be assigned
to a START or END record (where you can enter the value for the adjusted elevation). If FE is assigned to an
intermediate record it is ignored. Here is how the FE records are used. Say you run from one benchmark to another
(point 1 to point 10). Point 1 and point 10 are the START and END records of the rst loop and both are FE records.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 559
Then you start another loop at point 5 (halfway between 1 and 10). This is not a benchmark and can be adjusted so
it should be assigned an EL code. Point 5 is the START record for the second loop. You run from point 5 to point
20 which is a benchmark. Point 20 is the END record and is assigned an FE code. When SurvNET processes the
le, it will hold points 1, 10 and 20, allowing all others to be adjusted, including point 5 (even though it is a START
record).
Adjusted Elevation - Adjusted elevation of point
Description - description of point
TLV File Editor:
TLV les can contain trig-level and/or differential level data. The editor will allow both type records in the same le.
Below is a sample Trig-Level TLV le:
Below is a sample Differential-Level TLV le:
Menu Options:
File Menu:
Open - Open an existing .TLV le.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 560
New - Creates a new TLV level le.
Save - Save changes
Save As - Save as different le name
Settings - Not used with TLV les.
Import - You can import the following level le formats: Leica GSI format, Leica XML format, and Trimble DAT
format.
Print - get hard copy printout of data.
Exit - Exit Level Editor Program
Edit Menu:
Clipboard: Cut, Copy, Paste
Go To - ''Go To'' will take you to the row of your choosing. Enter the row number.
Add Menu:
Add: These options allow you to add or insert a new record into the level editor.
Benchmark Record (BM): Point with known elevation.
Backsight Record (BS): Differential-level measurement to the backsight point.
Foresight Record (FS): Differential-level measurement to foresight point.
Backsight Record (BT): Trig-level measurement to the backsight point.
Foresight Record (FT): Trig-level measurement to foresight point.
Note: You can add a note, or comments, into the editor as you move through the level run.
Tools Menu:
Adjust Elevations: This function will do a simple adjustment of your level data and place the adjusted ele-
vations in the Adjusted Elevation column. If you have distances, either HD or SD for all your measurements, the
corrections will be inversely proportionate to the distance between the measurements. If you are running a single
wire level loop (VD but no HD), the corrections will be averaged by the number of turns.
Store Elevations to Coordinate File: It is important that the point numbers in the level le match the point
numbers in the coordinate le. If you have an active coordinate le passed to the level editor, this option will be
available to you. The elevations calculated in the level le will be stored in the active coordinate le by matching
point numbers. The point must exist in the coordinate le before an elevation will be stored. After the elevations
have been stored, a report will show which points were stored and which ones were not. If adjusted elevations have
been calculated, they will be stored. If not, the unadjusted elevations will be stored.
Editor columns
Measurement records will have the following columns:
Trig Level Record:
Type - Two character abbreviation that shows the record type:
BM - Benchmark
BS - Differential-level backsight record
BT - Trig-Level backsight record
FS - Differential-level foresight record
FT - Trig-Level foresight record
DS - Note or Comment
Point # - Point number of measurement.
RodHt - Rod reading
Zenith - Zenith angle
S.Dist - Slope Distance
HI/Elev - Elevation of HI if a backsight record, or the foresight point if a foresight record
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 561
Adjusted Elevation - Adjusted elevation of foresight point
Description - description of point
Differential Level Record:
Type - Two character abbreviation that shows the record type, same as above.
Point # - Point number of measurement.
V.Diff- Rod Reading
H.Dist - Horizontal Distance
HI/Elev - Elevation of HI if a backsight record, or the foresight point if a foresight record
Adjusted Elevation - Adjusted elevation of foresight point
Description - description of point
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: diglevel
Prerequisite: .LEV (level) le to process
Edit Process SDMS File
This command processes SDMS format raw data from PRJ les. There is a spreadsheet editor with the data tag,
value and description for each of the records. The processing functions are the same as the Edit Process Raw Data
command. See that section of the manual for a description of the processing functions. The Edit Process SDMS
command allows you to work with the SDMS raw data in its native format. Alternatively, you can run Edit Process
Raw Data and convert the SDMS PRJ le into a Carlson RW5 le.
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: sdmsedit
Prerequisite: None
SurvNET
SurvNet is Carlson's network least squares adjustment program. This program performs a least squares adjustment
and statistical analysis on a network of raw survey eld data, including both total station measurements and GPS
vectors. SurvNet simultaneously adjusts a network of interconnected traverses with any amount of redundancy. The
raw data can contain any combination of traverse (angle and distance), triangulation (angle only) and trilateration
(distance only) measurements, as well as GPS vectors. The raw data does not need to be in any specied order, and
individual traverses do not have to be dened using any special codes. All measurements are used in the adjustment.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 562
Entry Point:
Entry into the SurvNet program is easy. It can be accessed in two different ways. The easiest way to start the
program is to select SurvNet from the Survey menu. The other method is to start SurvNet from within the Raw Data
File editor. You get to this editor by selecting Edit-Process Raw Data File from the Survey menu. When in the
editor, selecting the Process (Compute Pts) menu and click SurvNet.
Survey menu shows the two ways to access SurvNet
Process menu inside of Raw Data File Editor
The Opening SurvNet Window
Following is the SurvNet start-up dialog box. This dialog box is displayed when SurvNet is rst started. SurvNet
is a project based program. Before performing a least squares adjustment an existing project must be opened or a
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 563
new project needs to be created. This opening dialog box allows the user to open or create a project on start-up. You
also can create or open a project from the 'Files' menu. Since all project management functions can be performed
from the 'Files' menu this start-up dialog box is a convenience. So, the 'Show this dialog box on start-up' can be
unchecked and the start-up dialog box will not be displayed when SurvNet is started.
Following is a view of the SurvNet main window with an existing project opened.
SurvNet reduces survey eld measurements to grid coordinates in Assumed, UTM, SPC83 SPC27, and a
variety of other coordinate systems. In the 2D/1D model, a grid factor is computed for each individual line
during the reduction. The elevation factor is computed for each individual line if there is sufcient elevation
data. If the raw data has only 2D data, the user has the option of dening a project elevation to be used to
compute the elevation factor.
SurvNet supports a variety of map projections and coordinate systems including the New Brunswick Survey
Control coordinate system, UTM, and user dened systems consisting of either a predened ellipsoid or a
user dened ellipsoid and one of the following projections, Transverse Mercator, 1 Standard Parallel Lam-
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 564
bert Conformal, 2 Standard Parallel Lambert Conformal, Oblique Mercator, and the Double Stereographic
projection.
A full statistical report containing the results of the least squares adjustment is produced and written to the
report (.RPT) le. An error report (.ERR) le is created and contains any error messages that are generated
during the adjustment.
Coordinates can be stored in a Carlson (.CRD) le, C&G (.CRD) le, Simplicity le or an LDD le. An
ASCII coordinate (.NEZ) le is always created that can be imported into most any mapping/surveying/GIS
program. The user has the option to compute unadjusted preliminary coordinates.
There is an option to compute traverse closures during the preprocessing of the raw data. Closures can be
computed for both GPS and total station traverses. Closure for multiple traverse loops in the same raw le can
be computed.
SurvNet can combine GPS vectors and total station data in a single adjustment. GPS Vector les from Leica,
Thales/Ashtech, Topcon and Trimble can be input, as can GPS les in the Carlson format.
SurvNet includes a variety of blunder detection routines. One blunder detection method is effective in de-
tecting if the same point number has been used for two different points. Additionally this blunder detection
method is effective in detecting if two different point numbers have been used for the same physical position.
This method also ags other raw data problems. Another blunder detection method included in SurvNet is ef-
fective in isolating a single blunder, distance or angle in a network. This method does not require that there be
a lot of redundancy, but is effective if there is only one blunder in the data set. Additionally, SurvNet includes
a blunder detection method that can isolate multiple blunders, distances or angles in a network. This method
does require that there be a lot of redundancy in the network to effectively isolate the multiple blunders.
Other key features include: Differential and Trig level networks and loops can be adjusted using the network
least squares program. Geoid modeling is used in SurvNet, allowing the users to choose between many
different Geoid models. The user can alternately enter the project geoid separation. There are description
codes to identify duplicate points with different point numbers. The user can specify the condence interval
from 50 to 99 percent.
SurvNet performs a least squares adjustment and statistical analysis of a network of raw survey eld data, including
total station measurements, differential level data and GPS vectors. SurvNet simultaneously adjusts a network
of interconnected traverses with any amount of redundancy. The raw data can contain any combination of angle
and distance measurements, and GPS vectors. SurvNet can adjust any combination of trilaterations, traverses,
triangluations, networks and resections. The raw data does not need to be in a linear format, and individual traverses
do not have to be dened using any special codes. All measurements are used in the adjustment.
General Rules for Collecting Data for Use in Least Squares Adjustments
Least squares is very exible in terms of how the survey data needs to be collected. Generally speaking, any
combination of angles, and distances combined with a minimal amount of control points and/or azimuths are needed.
This data can be collected in any order. There needs to be at least some redundancy in the measurements. Redundant
measurements are measurements that are in excess of the minimum number of measurements required to determine
the unknown coordinates. Redundancy can be created by including multiple GPS and other control points within a
network or traverse. Measuring angles and distances to points in the network that have been located from another
point in the survey creates redundancy. Running additional cut-off traverses or additional traverses to existing control
points creates redundancy. Following are some general rules and tips in collecting data for least squares reduction.
Backsights should be to point numbers. Some data collectors allow the user to backsight an azimuth not
associated with a point number. SurvNet requires that all backsights be associated with a point number.
There has to be at least a minimum amount of control. There has to be at least one control point. Additionally
there needs to be either one additional control point or a reference azimuth. Control points can be entered in
either the raw data le or there can be a supplemental control point le containing the control point. Reference
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 565
azimuths are entered in the raw data le. The control points and reference azimuths do not need to be for the
rst points in the raw data le. The control points and azimuths can be associated with any point in the
network or traverse. The control points do not need to be adjacent to each other. It is permissible, though
unusual, to have one control point on one side of the project and a reference azimuth on the other side of the
project.
Some data collectors do not allow the surveyor to shoot the same point twice using the same point number.
SurvNet requires that all measurements to the same point use a single point number. The raw data may need to
be edited after it has been downloaded to the ofce computer to insure that points are numbered correctly. An
alternative to renumbering the points in the raw data le is to use the 'Pt Number substitution string' feature in
the project 'Settings' screen. See the 'Redundant Measurement' section for more details on this feature.
The majority of all problems in processing raw data are related to point numbering issues. Using the same
point number twice for different points, not using the same point number when measuring the same point,
misnumbering backsights or foresights, and misnumbering control points are all common problems.
It is always best to explicitly dene the control for the project. A good method is to put all the control for a
project into a separate raw le. A big source of problems with new users is a misunderstanding in dening
their control for a project.
Some data collectors may have preliminary unadjusted coordinates included with the raw data. These coordi-
nate records should be removed from the raw le. The only coordinate values that should be in the raw le
are the control points. Since there is no concept of 'starting coordinates' in least squares there is no way for
SurvNet to determine which points are considered control and which points are preliminary unadjusted points.
So all coordinates found in a raw data le will be considered control points.
When a large project is not processing correctly, it is often useful to divide the project into several raw data
les and debug and process each le separately as it is easier to debug small projects. Once the smaller
projects are processing separately they can be combined for a nal combined adjustment.
SurvNet gives the user the option to choose one of two mathematical model options when adjusting raw data, the
3D model and the 2D/1D model.
In the process of developing SurvNet numerous projects have been adjusted using both the 2D/1D model and the
3D model. There are slight differences in nal adjusted coordinates when comparing the results from the same
network using the two models. But in all cases the differences in the results are typically less than the accuracy of
measurements used in the project. The main difference in terms of collecting raw data for the two different models
is that the 3D model requires that rod heights and instrument heights need to be measured, and there needs to be
sufcient elevation control to compute elevations for all points in the survey. When collecting data for the 2D/1D
model the eld crews do not need to collect rod heights and instrument heights.
In the 2D/1D model raw distance measurements are rst reduced to horizontal distances and then optionally to
grid distances. Then a two dimensional horizontal least squares adjustment is performed on these reduced hor-
izontal distance measurements and horizontal angles. After the horizontal adjustment is performed an optional
one-dimensional vertical least squares adjustment is performed in order to adjust the elevations if there is sufcient
data to compute elevations. The 2D/1D model is the model that has been traditionally been used in the past by non-
geodetic surveyors in the reduction of eld data. There are several advantages to SurvNet's implementation of the
2D/lD model. One advantage is that an assumed coordinate system can be used. It is not necessary to know geodetic
positions for control points. Another advantage is that 3D raw data is not required. It is not necessary to record rod
heights and heights of instruments. Elevations are not required for the control points. The primary disadvantage of
SurvNet's implementation of the 2D/1D model is that GPS vector data cannot be used in 2D/1D projects.
In the 3Dmodel rawdata is not reduced to a horizontal plane prior to the least squares adjustment. The 3 dimensional
data is adjusted in a single least squares process. In SurvNet's implementation of the 3D model XYZ geodetic
positions are required for control. The raw data must contain full 3D data including rod heights and measured
heights of instrument. The user must designate a supported geodetic coordinate system. The main advantage of
using the 3D model is that GPS vectors can be incorporated into the adjustment.
In the 2D/1D model it is allowed to mix 2D and 3D measurements. Elevations will be calculated only if there
is enough information in the raw data le to do so. Least squares adjustment is used for elevation adjustment as
well as the horizontal adjustment. To compute an elevation for the point the instrument record must have an HI,
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 566
and the foresight record must have a rod height, slope distance and vertical angle. If working with .CGR raw data
a 0.0 (zero) HI or rod height is valid. It is only when the eld is blank that the record will be considered a 2D
measurement. Carlson SurvCE 2.0 or higher allows you to mix 2D and 3D data by inserting a 2D or 3D comment
record into the .RW5 le. A 3D traverse must also have adequate elevation control in order to process the elevations.
Elevation control can be obtained from the supplemental control le, coordinate records in the raw data le, or
elevation records in the raw data le. The ''Adjust Elevations'' box in the project settings must be checked to adjust
the calculated elevations. If it is unchecked, elevations will still be calculated if the 3D data is available, but they
will not be adjusted.
SurvNet can also automatically reduce eld measurements to state plane coordinates in either the NAD 83 or NAD
27 coordinate systems. If a grid coordinate system is selected, the grid scale factor is computed for each individual
line during the reduction. The elevation factor is also computed for each individual line if there is sufcient elevation
data. If the raw data has only 2D data, the user has the option of dening a project elevation to be used to compute
the elevation factor.
A full statistical report containing the results of the least squares adjustment is produced and written to the report
(.RPT) le. An error report (.ERR) le is created and contains any error messages that are generated during the
adjustment. Coordinates can be stored in the following formats:
C&G numeric (
*
.crd)
C&G alphanumeric (
*
.cgc)
Carlson numeric (
*
.crd)
Carlson alphanumeric (
*
.crd)
Autodesk Land Desktop (
*
.mdb)
Simplicity (
*
.zak)
ASCII P,N,E,Z,D,C (
*
.nez)
A le with the extension .OUT is always created and contains an ASCII formatted coordinate list of the nal adjusted
coordinates formatted suitable for printing. Additionally an ASCII le with an extension of .NEZ containing the
nal adjusted coordinates in a format suitable for input into 3rd party software that is capable of inputting an ASCII
coordinate le..
SurvNet produces a wealth of statistical information that allows an effective way to evaluate the quality of survey
measurements. In addition to the least squares statistical information there is an option to compute traverse closures
during the preprocessing of the raw data. Traverse closures can be computed for both GPS and total station traverses.
This option has no effect on the computation of nal least squares adjusted coordinates. This option is useful for
surveyors who due to statutory requirements are still required to compute traverse closures and for those surveyors
who still like to view traverse closures prior to the least squares adjustment.
SurvNet works equally well for both Carlson users and C&G users. The primary difference between the two users
is that a Carlson user will typically be using an .RW5 le for his raw data and a C&G user will typically be using a
.CGR le.
SurvNet is capable of processing either C&G (.CGR) raw data les or Carlson (.RW5) raw data les. Measurement,
coordinate, elevation and direction (Brg/Az) records are all recognized. Scale factor records in the .CGR le are not
processed since SurvNet calculates the state plane scale factors automatically. The menu option 'Settings->Global
Settings' displays the following dialog box. If the 'Use Carlson Utilites' is chosen then the .RW5 editor will be
the default raw editor and Carlson SurvCom will be the default data collection transfer program. If the 'Use C&G
Utilities' is chosen then the C&G .CGR editor will be the default raw editor and C&G's data collection transfer
program will be the default data collection transfer program.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 567
Standard errors are estimated errors that are assigned to measurements or coordinates. Astandard error is an estimate
of the standard deviation of a sample. A higher standard error indicates a less accurate measurement. The higher the
standard error of a measurement, the less weight it will have in the adjustment process.
Although you can set default standard errors for the various types of measurements in the project settings of SurvNet,
standard errors can also be placed directly into the raw data le. A standard error record inserted into a raw data le
applies to all the measurements following the SE record.The standard error does not change until another SE record
is inserted that either changes the specic standard error, or sets the standard errors back to the project defaults.
The advantage of entering standard errors into the raw le is that you can have different standard errors for the
same type measurement in the same job. For example, if you used a one second total station with xed backsights
and foresights for a portion of a traverse and a 10 second total station with backsights and foresights to hand held
prisms on the other portion of the traverse, you would want to assign different standard errors to reect the different
methods used to collect the data.
Make sure the SE record is placed before the measurements for which it applies.
If you do not have standard errors dened in the raw data le, the default standard errors in the project settings will
be applied to the entire le.
Carlson Raw Data Editor:
The raw data editor can be accessed from the tool bar icon. Following is an image of the .RW5 editor. Refer to the
Carlson raw editor documentation for guidance in the basic operation of the editor. The following documentation
only deals with topics that are specic to the .RW5 editor and SurvNet.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 568
You can insert or add Standard Error records into the raw data le. Use the 'Add' menu option to insert standard
error records into the raw les.
SEc - Control Standard Errors
You can set standard errors for Northing, Easting, Elevation, and Azimuth using the 'Control Standard Error' menu
option. Azimuth standard errors are entered in seconds. The North, East and Elevation standard errors affect the PT
(coordinate) and EL (elevation) records.
You can hold the North, East and Elevation xed by entering a ''!'' symbol. You can allow the North, East and
Elevation to FLOAT by entering a ''#'' symbol. You can also assign the North, East and Elevation actual values. If
you use an ''
*
'' symbol, the current standard error value will return to the project default values.
North East Elevation Azim
! ! ! (Fix all values)
# # # 30.0 (Allow the N., E. & Elevation to Float)
0.01 0.01 0.03 5.0 (assign values)
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 569
* * * *
(return the standard errors back to project defaults)
When you x a coordinate point, the original value does not change during the adjustment and all measurements
will be adjusted to t the xed point. If you allow a value to oat, it will not be used in the actual adjustment, it will
just be used to help calculate the initial coordinate values required for the adjustment process. Placing a very high
or low standard error on a coordinate point accomplishes almost the same thing as setting the standard error as oat
or xed. The primary purpose of using a oat point is if SurvNet cannot compute preliminary values, a preliminary
oat value can be computed and entered for the point.
Direction records cannot be FIXED or FLOAT. You can assign a low standard error (or zero to x) if you want to
weight it heavily, or a high standard error to allow it to oat.
In the example below, the rst SEc record containing the '!' character and sets points 103, 204, and 306 to be xed.
The last SEc record contains the '
*
' character. It sets the standard errors for point 478 and any other points that
follow to the project settings. The Azimuth standard error was left blank.
Example:
North East Elev Azim
CSE ! ! !
PT 103 1123233.23491 238477.28654 923.456
PT 204 1124789.84638 239234.56946 859.275
PT 306 1122934.25974 237258.65248 904.957
North East Elev Azim
CSE
* * *
PT 478 1122784.26874 237300.75248 945.840
MSE - Measurement Standard Errors
You can set the standard errors for distances, horizontal angle pointing, horizontal angle reading, vertical angle
pointing, vertical angle reading, and distance constant and PPM.
''Distance'' - distance constant and measurement error, can be obtained from EDM specs, or from performing an
EDM calibration on an EDM baseline, or from other testing done by the user.
''PPM'' - Parts per Million, obtain from EDM specs, or from performing an EDM calibration on an EDM baseline,
or from other testing done by the user.
''Pointing'' - total station horizontal angular pointing error in seconds. This value is an indication of how accurately
the instrument man can point to the target. For example, you may set it higher in the summer because of the heat
waves. Or you may set it higher for total stations running in Robotic Mode because they cannot point as well as a
manual sighted total station.
''Reading'' - total station horizontal angular reading error in seconds. If you have a 10 second theodolite, enter a
reading error of 10 seconds.
''V.Pointing'' - total station vertical angular pointing error in seconds. This value is an indication of how accurately
the instrument man can point to the target. For example, you may set it higher in the summer because of the heat
waves.
''V.Reading'' - total station vertical angular reading error in seconds. If you have a 10 second theodolite, enter a
reading error of 10 seconds.
Example:
Distance Point Read V.Point V.Read PPM
MSE 0.01 3 3 3 3 5
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 570
You can enter any combination of the above values. If you do not want to change the standard error for a particular
measurement type, leave it blank.
If you use an ''
*
'' symbol, the standard error for that measurement type will return to the project default values.
SSE - Setup Standard Errors
These standard errors are a measure of how accurately the instrument and target can be setup over the points.
''Rod Ctr'' is the Target Centering error. This value reects how accurately the target prism can be set up over the
point.
''Inst Ctr'' is the Instrument Centering error. This value reects how accurately the instrument can be set up over the
point.
''Ints Hgt'' is the Instrument Height error. This value reects how accurately the height of the instrument above the
mark can be measured.
''Rod Hgt'' is the Target Height error. This value reects how accurately the height of the prism above the mark can
be measured.
Example:
Rod Ctr Inst Ctr Inst Ht Rod Hgt
SSE 0.005 0.005 0.01 0.01
You can enter any combination of the above values. If you do not want to change the standard error for a particular
measurement type, leave it blank.
If you use an ''
*
'' symbol, it will return the standard error to the project default values.
C&G Raw Data Editor:
You can set standard errors for control, measurements and instrument setup using the Insert->Standard Error menu
option:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 571
This will open a Standard Error dialog box:
This dialog allows you to create three types of standard error records: Control, Measurement, and Setup. You need
only enter the values for the standard errors you wish to set. If a eld is left blank no standard error for that value
will be inserted into the raw data le.
You can hold the North, East and Elevation xed by entering a ''!'' symbol (as shown above). You can allow the
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 572
North, East and Elevation to FLOAT by entering a ''#'' symbol. You can also assign the North, East and Elevation
actual values. If you use an ''
*
'' symbol (or press the ''Set Project Defaults'' button), the current standard error value
will return to the project default values.
In the above example, a Control Standard Error record (SEc) will be created:
Below are some sample values for control standard errors:
North East Elevation Azim
! ! ! (Fix all values)
# # # 30.0 (Allow the N., E. & Elevation to Float)
0.01 0.01 0.03 5.0 (assign values)
* * * *
(return the standard errors back to project defaults)
When you x a coordinate point, the original value does not change during the adjustment and all other measure-
ments will be adjusted to t the xed point. If you allow a value to oat, it will not be used in the actual adjustment,
it will just be used to help calculate the initial coordinate values required for the adjustment process. Placing a very
high or low standard error on a measurement accomplishes almost the same thing as setting a standard error as oat
or xed. The primary purpose of using a oat point is if SurvNet cannot compute preliminary values, a preliminary
oat value can be computed and entered for the point.
Direction records cannot be FIXED or FLOAT. You can assign a low standard error (or zero to x) if you want to
weight it heavily, or a high standard error to allow it to oat.
MSE - Measurement Standard Errors
You can set the standard errors for distances, horizontal angle pointing, horizontal angle reading, vertical angle
pointing, vertical angle reading, and distance constant and PPM.
''Distance'' - distance constant and measurement error, can be obtained from EDM specs, or from performing an
EDM calibration on an EDM baseline, or from other testing done by the user.
''PPM'' - Parts per Million, obtain from EDM specs, or from performing an EDM calibration on an EDM baseline,
or from other testing done by the user.
''Pointing'' - total station horizontal angular pointing error in seconds. This value is an indication of how accurately
the instrument man can point to the target. For example, you may set it higher in the summer because of the heat
waves. Or you may set it higher for total stations running in Robotic Mode because they cannot point as well as a
manual sighted total station.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 573
''Reading'' - total station horizontal angular reading error in seconds. If you have a 10 second theodolite, enter a
reading error of 10 seconds.
''V.Pointing'' - total station vertical angular pointing error in seconds. This value is an indication of how accurately
the instrument man can point to the target. For example, you may set it higher in the summer because of the heat
waves.
''V.Reading'' - total station vertical angular reading error in seconds. If you have a 10 second theodolite, enter a
reading error of 10 seconds.
Example:
You can enter any combination of the above values. If you do not want to change the standard error for a particular
measurement type, leave it blank. If you use an ''
*
'' symbol, the standard error for that measurement type will return
to the project default values.
The following SEm record will be created:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 574
SSE - Setup Standard Errors
These standard errors are a measure of how accurately the instrument and target can be setup over the points.
''Target Center'' is the Target Centering error. This value reects how accurately the target prism can be set up over
the point.
''Instrument Center'' is the Instrument Centering error. This value reects how accurately the instrument can be set
up over the point.
''Height of Instrument'' is the Instrument Height error. This value reects how accurately the height of the instrument
above the mark can be measured.
''Target Height'' is the Target Height error. This value reects how accurately the height of the prism above the mark
can be measured.
Example:
You can enter any combination of the above values. If you do not want to change the standard error for a particular
measurement type, leave it blank.
If you use an ''
*
'' symbol, it will return the standard error to the project default values.
The following SEs record will be created:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 575
There are several other features available in both the Carlson and C&G editors that are useful to SurvNet.
Insert Coordinate records from le - when inputting control into a raw data le, it is more convenient to read
the control point directly from a coordinate le than it is to manually key them in. The ''Insert Coordinates''
function allows you to select points in a variety of manner making it easy to select just control points. For
example, you can select points by description, code, point blocks, point number, etc.
C&G editor:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 576
Carlson Editor:
Data ON/OFF records - when trying track down problems, sometimes it is convenient to remove certain
sections of raw data prior to processing. Both the Carlson and C&G raw data editors have a special record
(DO record) that will turn OFF or ON certain areas of data. For example, when you insert a DO record all
data following that record will be turned OFF (it will be shown in a different color). When you insert another
DO record further down, the data following it will be turn back ON. It is simply a toggle.
In the C&G editor select Insert->Data On/Off. In the Carlson Editor select Add->Data On/Off
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 577
In the example below, the instrument setup at point 106 backsighting 105 was turned OFF.
One of the benets of SurvNet is the ability to process redundant measurements. In terms of total station data
redundant measurement is dened as measuring angles and/or distances to the same point from two or more different
setups.
It is required that the same point number be used when locating a point that was previously recorded. However,
since some data collectors will not allow you to use the same point number if the point already exists, we use the
following convention for collecting redundant points while collecting the data in the eld. If the point description
contains a user dened string, for example a ''='' (equal sign) followed by the original point number, we will treat that
measurement as a redundant measurement to the point dened in the description eld. The user dened character or
string is set in the project settings dialog. For example, if point number 56 has the description ''=12'', we will treat it
as a measurement to point 12 and point 56 will not exist. Make sure the Preprocessing Settings dialog box has the
Pt. Number Substitution String set to the appropriate value.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 578
Alternately, the point numbers can be edited after the raw data has been downloaded from the data collector.
Supplemental Control Files
In order to process a raw data le, you must have as a minimum a control point and a control azimuth, or two control
points. Control points can be inserted into the raw data le or alternately control points can be read from coordinate
les. Control points can be read from a variety of coordinate le types:
C&G or Carlson numeric (.CRD) les
C&G Alphanumeric coordinate les (
*
.cgc)
Carlson Alphanumeric coordinate les (
*
.crd)
Autodesk Land Desktop (
*
.mdb)
Simplicity coordinate les (
*
.zak)
ASCII (.NEZ) le
ASCII latitude and longitude (3D model only)
CSV ASCII NEZ with std. errors (only external control le that allows you to assign standard errors to specic
points).
SDMS (.ctl) control le
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 579
ASCII Geocentric Coordinates (.xyz) (Earth Centered Earth Fixed XYZ coordinate values)
The standard errors for the control points from a supplemental control le will be assigned the NORTH and EAST
standard errors from the project settings dialog box.
In the ASCII .NEZ le, the coordinate records need to be in the following format:
Pt. No., Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description<cr><lf>
103, 123233.23491, 238477.28654, 923.456, Mon 56-7B<CR><LF>
Each line is terminated with carriage-return <CR> and line-feed <LF> characters.
In the ASCII latitude and longitude le, the records need to be in the following format:
Pt. No., Latitude (NDDD.mmssssss), Longitude (WDDD.mmssssss), Elevation (Orthometric), Descrip-
tion<cr><lf>
FRKN,N35.113068642,W083.234174724,649.27<CR><LF>
Each line is terminated with carriage-return <CR> and line-feed <LF> characters.
The major advantage of putting coordinate control points in the actual raw data le is that specic standard errors
can be assigned to each control point (as described in the RAW DATA section above). If you do not include an
SE record the standard error will be assigned from the NORTH, EAST, and ELEVATION standard errors from the
project settings dialog box.
It is not allowed for the supplemental control le and the nal output le to be the same le. Since least squares
considers all points to be control points only control points should be in a supplemental control le.
The following graphic shows the main network least squares window. Most least squares operations are initiated
from this window.
Selecting the FILE menu option opens the following menu:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 580
A Project (.PRJ) le is created in order to store all the settings and les necessary to reprocess the data making up
the project. You can create a NEW project, or OPEN an existing project. It is necessary to have a project open in
order to process the data.
The ''Save Project As Default'' can be used to create default project settings to be used when creating a new project.
The current project settings are saved and will be used as the default settings when any new project is created.
The project settings are set by selecting Settings > Project from the menu, or pressing the SE icon on the tool bar.
The project settings dialog box has six tabbed windows, Coordinate System, Input Files, Preprocessing, Adjustment,
Standard Errors, and Output Options. Following is an explanation of the different project settings tabbed windows.
The Coordinate System tab contains settings that relate to the project coordinate system, the adjustment model and
other geodetic settings.
You can select either the 3D model or the 2D/1D mathematical model. If you choose 2D/1D mathematical model
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 581
you can choose to only perform a horizontal adjustment, a vertical adjustment or both. In the 3D model both
horizontal and vertical are adjusted simultaneously. The 3D model requires that you choose a geodetic coordinate
system. Local, assumed coordinate systems cannot be used with the 3D model. GPS vectors can only be used when
using the 3D model.
If using the 2D/1D mathematical model you can select Local (assumed coordinate system), or a geodetic coordinate
system such State Plane NAD83, State Plane NAD27, UTM, or a user-dened coordinate system as the coordinate
system. When using the 3D model you cannot use a local system.
Select the 'Horizontal Units for' output of coordinate values (Meters, US Feet, or International Feet). In the 3D
model both horizontal and vertical units are assumed to be the same. In the 2D/1D model horizontal and vertical
units can differ. The 'Horizontal unit' setting in this screen refers to the output units. It is permissible to have input
units in feet and output units in meters. Input units are set in the 'Input Files' tabbed screen.
If you choose SPC 1983, SPC 1927, or UTM, the appropriate zone will need to be chosen. The grid scale factor is
computed for each measured line using the method described in section 4.2 of NPAA Manual NOS NGS 5, ''State
Plane Coordinate System of 1983'', by James E. Stem.
If using the 2D/1D model and you select a geodetic coordinate system, you have a choice as to how the elevation
factor is computed. You can choose to either enter a project elevation or you can choose to have elevations factors
computed for each distance based on computed elevations. In order to use the 'Compute Elevation from Raw Data'
all HI's and foresight rod heights must be collected for all points.
If you choose a geodetic coordinate systemand are using the 2D/1Dmodel you will want to select ''Project Elevation''
if any of your raw data measurements are missing any rod heights or instrument heights. There must be enough
information to compute elevations for all points in order to compute elevation factors. For most survey projects it is
sufcient to use an approximate elevation, such as can be obtained from a Quad Sheet for the project elevation.
Geoid Modeling
If you are using either the 3D or the 2D/1D adjustment model using non-local coordinate system you must choose a
geoid modeling method. A project geoid separation can be entered or the grid model can be selected from a list of
models. The project must fall within the geographic range of the geoid grid les.
Geoid modeling is used as follows. Entering a 0.0 value for the separation is the method to use if you wish to ignore
the geoid separation. In the 2D, 1D model it is assumed that elevations entered as control are entered as orthometric
heights. Since grid reduction requires the data be reduced to the ellipsoid, the geoid separation is used to compute
ellipsoid elevations. The difference between using geoid modeling and not using geoid modeling or using a project
geoid separation is insignicant for most surveys of limited extents.
In the 3D model it is also assumed that elevations entered as control are orthometric heights. Since the adjustment is
performed on the ellipsoid, the geoid separation is used to compute ellipsoid elevations prior to adjustment. After the
adjustment is completed the adjusted orthometric elevations will be computed from the adjusted ellipsoid elevations
and the computed geoid separation for each point.
If you choose one of the geoid models from the list, the geoid separations are computed by interpolation with
data points retrieved from geoid separation les. The geoid separation les should be found in the primary the
installation directory. Grid les have an extension of .grd. These les can be downloaded from the Carlson website
(www.carlsonsw.com). If you pick a geoid model that is not on your computer, SurvNET will automatically connect
to the Carlson website and download the specic geoid model.
If you choose to enter a project geoid separation the best way to determine a project geoid separation is by using the
NGS on-line Geodetic Toolkit. Enter a latitude and longitude of the project midpoint and the program will output a
project separation.
Working With User-dened Coordinate Systems
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 582
SurvNet allows the creation of user-dened geodetic coordinate systems (UDP). The ability to create user-dened
coordinate system allows the user to create geodetic coordinate systems based on the supported projections that are
not explicitly supported by SurvNet. A SurvNet user-dened coordinate system consists of an ellipsoid, and a map
projection,. The ellipsoid can be one of the explicitly supported ellipsoids or a user-dened ellipsoid. The supported
map projections are Transverse Mercator, Lambert Conformal Conic with 1 standard parallel, Lambert Conformal
Conic with 2 standard parallels, Oblique Mercator, and Double Stereographic projection. User-dened coordinate
systems are created, edited, and attached to a project from the Project Settings 'Coordinate System' dialog box. To
attach an existing UDP le,
*
.udp, to a project use the 'Select' button. To edit an existing UDP le or create a new
UDP le use the 'Edit' button.
The following dialog box is used to create the user-dened coordinate system. The ellipsoid needs to be dened and
the appropriate map projection and projection parameters need to be entered. The appropriate parameter elds will
be displayed depending on the projection type chosen.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 583
Test - Use the 'Test' button to enter a known latitude and longitude position to check that the UDP is computing
correct grid coordinates. Following is the test UDP dialog box. Enter the known lat/long in the top portion of the
dialog box then press 'Calculate' and the computed grid coordinates will be displayed in the 'Results' list box.
Load -Use the 'Load' to load the coordinate system parameters from an existing UDP.
Save - Use the 'Save' button to save the displayed UDP. The 'Save' button prompts the user to enter the UDP le
name.
OK - Use the 'OK' button to save the UDP using the existing le name and return to the 'Coordinate System' dialog
box.
Cancel - Use the 'Cancel' button to return to the 'Coordinate System' dialog box without saving any changes to the
UDP le.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 584
If you need to dene an ellipsoid chose the 'User-Dened' ellipsoid option. With the user-dened ellipsoid
you will then have the option to enter two of the ellipsoid parameter.
Raw Data Files: Use the 'Add' button to insert raw total station les into the list. Use the 'Delete' button to remove
raw les from the list. All the les in this list are included in the least squares adjustments. Having the ability to
choose multiple les allows one to keep control in one le and measurements in another le. Or different les
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 585
collected at different times can be processed all at one time. If you have multiple crews working on the same
project using different equipment, you can have ''crew-specic'' raw data les with standard error settings for their
particular equipment. Having separate data les is also a convenient method of working with large projects. It is
often easier to debug and process individual raw les. Once the individual les are processing correctly all the les
can be included for a nal adjustment. You can either enter C&G (.CGR) raw les or Carlson (.RW5) les into the
list for processing. You cannot have both .CGR and .RW5 les in the same project to be processed at the same time.
Notice that you have the ability to highlight multiple les when deleting le.
Note that if you are processing Carlson RW5 total station les, you have the option of including GPS vectors that
can be collected by SurvCE and stored in the RW5 le. Alternatively you can select the RW5 le in the GPS vector
section. If the ''Include any GPS vectors'' option in the Total Station Data Files section is checked, the Base Point
records in the RW5 le will be brought in as control automatically. If you are processing the RW5 le in the GPS
vector section you must dene the control separately.
Level Raw Files: Differential and Trig level les can be entered and processed. Differential or Trig Level raw les
have an .TLV extension and are created using the Carlson level editor.
GPS Vector Files: GPS vector les can be entered and processed. Both GPS vector les and total station raw
les can be combined and processed together. You must have chosen the 3D mathematical model in the Coordinate
System tab in order to include GPS vectors in the adjustment.
Currently, the following GPS vector le formats are supported.
ASCII (StarNet): See below for more information on StarNet format. These les typically have .GPS extensions.
Ashtech/Thales 'O' les: Typically have .obn extensions and are binary les.
Carlson .RW5 (containing GPS vectors)
GeoLab IOB
LandXML, (
*
.xml)
Leica: Leica les are ASCII les.
NGS G-File
NGS G-File from OPUS report
Topcon (.tvf): Topcon .tvf les are ASCII les.
Topcon (.xml): Topcon also can output their GPS vectors in XML format which is in ASCII format.
Trimble Data Exchange Format (.asc): These les are in ASCII format
Trimble data collection (.dc): These les are ASCII.
Trimble LandXML, (
*
.jxl)
The following is a typical vector record in the StarNet ASCII format. GPS vectors typically consist of the 'from'
and 'to' point number, the delta X, delta Y, delta Z values from the 'from' and 'to' point, with the XYZ deltas being
in the geocentric coordinate system. Additionally the variance/covariance values of the delta XYZ's are included in
the vector le.
.GPS WEIGHT COVARIANCE
C PRS34452 1305780.345005 -4667085.299019 4132689.544939 0.005000 0.005000 0.005000 MON
C UCNJ 1305780.345005 -4667085.299019 4132689.544939 0.00000100 0.00000100 0.00000100 MON
G1 UCNJ-1000 8399.71318061 -4742.15645068 -8036.07224424 MNS
G2 3.939428e-006 2.474560e-005 1.160301e-005
G3 3.924536e-006 -3.360765e-006 -1.028503e-006
G1 UCNJ-1001 8328.15569476 -4796.59445569 -8072.25948922 MNS
G2 9.596618e-007 1.687749e-005 1.936038e-006
G3 1.176891e-007 -8.668020e-009 -4.798408e-006
The rst line denes what values are in the G2 and G3 records. It can be either GPS WEIGHT COVARIANCE (G2
is Variance, G3 is Covariance), or GPS WEIGHT STDERRCORRELATION (G2 is standard error, G3 is standard
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 586
error correlation). This line is optional; the default is COVARIANCE.
The next two lines are coordinate control records. These records are also optional. If used, they must be Geocentric
Coordinates (XYZ) in metric units. The format is as follows:
C PointName X Y Z StdErrX StdErrY StdErrZ PointDescription
The standard errors and point description are optional.
The GO record is a comment.
The G1 record includes the 'from' and 'to' point and the delta X, delta Y, and delta Z in the geocentric coordinate
system and an optional description of the rover point.
The G2 record is the variance (or standard error) of X,Y, and Z. The G3 record contains the covariance (or stan-
dard error correlation) of XY, ZX, and ZY. Most all GPS vector les contain the same data elds in different formats.
Use the 'Add' button to insert GPS vector les into the list. Use the 'Remove' button to remove GPS vector les from
the list. All the les in this list will be used in the least squares adjustments. All the GPS les in the list must be in
the same format. If the GPS le format is ASCII you have the option to edit the GPS vector les. The Edit option
allows the editing of any of the ASCII GPS les using Notepad. Typically, only point numbers or point descriptions
would be edited. The variance/covariance values are used to determine the weights that the GPS vectors will receive
during the adjustment and are not typically edited.
Supplemental Control File: The supplemental control le option allows the user to designate an additional
coordinate le to be used as control. The supplemental control les can be from a variety of different le types.
C&G or Carlson numeric (.CRD) les
C&G Alphanumeric coordinate les (
*
.cgc)
Carlson Alphanumeric coordinate les (
*
.crd)
Autodesk Land Desktop (
*
.mdb)
Simplicity coordinate les (
*
.zak)
ASCII (.NEZ) le
ASCII latitude and longitude (3D model only)
CSV ASCII NEZ with std. errors (only external control le that allows you to assign standard errors to specic
points).
SDMS (.ctl) control le
ASCII Geocentric (.xyz) (Geocentric coordinates XYZ in metric units)
Note: You will not be allowed to use the same le for supplemental control points and for nal output. Least squares
considers all points to be measurements. If the output le is also used as a supplemental control le then after the
project has been processed all the points in the project would now be in the control le and all the points in the le
would now be considered control points if the project was processed again. The simplest and most straight-forward
method to dene control for a project is to include the control coordinates in a raw data le.
The Preprocessing tab contains settings that are used in the preprocessing of the raw data.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 587
Apply Curvature and Refraction Corrections: Check this box if you wish to have the curvature refraction
correction applied in the 2D/1D model when reducing the slope distance/vertical angle to horizontal distance and
vertical distance. Curvature/refraction primarily impacts vertical distances.
Tolerances: When sets of angles and/or distances are measured to a point, a single averaged value is calcu-
lated for use in the least squares adjustment. You may set the tolerances so that a warning is generated if any
differences between the angle sets or distances exceed these tolerances. Tolerance warnings will be shown in the
report (.RPT) and the (.ERR) le after processing the data.
If you check the Extended Angle Sets & Distance Report option, all the sets will be shown with the dif-
ference between the high angle and low angle, and the difference between the high distance and low distance. If
this option is not checked ONLY the sets that exceed the tolerances will be shown in the report.
Horz./Slope Dist Tolerance: This value sets the tolerance threshold for the display of warnings if the dif-
ference between highest and lowest horizontal distance exceeds this value. In the 2D model it is the horizontal
distances that are being compared. In the 3D model it is the slope distances that are being compared.
Vert. Dist Tolerance: This value sets the tolerance threshold for the display of a warning if the difference
between highest and lowest vertical difference component exceeds this value (used in 2D model only).
Horz. Angle Tolerance: This value sets the tolerance threshold for the display of a warning if the difference
between the highest and lowest horizontal angle exceeds this value.
Vert. Angle Tolerance: This value sets the tolerance threshold for the display a warning if the difference
between the highest and lowest vertical angle exceeds this value (used in 3D model only).
Angle Set Spred Display: You can choose to see the splits of individual angles in each set (2 per set), or just the
splits of all the sets combined (high / low angle of all the sets combined).
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 588
Compute Traverse Closures: Traditional traverse closures can be computed for both GPS and total station tra-
verses. This option has no effect on the computation of nal least squares adjusted coordinates. This option is useful
for surveyors who due to statutory requirements are still required to compute traditional traverse closures and for
those surveyors who still like to view traverse closures prior to the least squares adjustment. This option is used to
specify a previously created closure le.
To use this option the user has to rst create a traverse closure le. The le contains a .cls extension. The traverse
closure le is a le containing an ordered list of the point numbers comprising the traverse. Since the raw data
for SurvNet is not expected to be in any particular order it is required that the user must specify the points and the
correct order of the points in the traverse loop. Both GPS and angle/distance traverses can be dened in a single
traverse closure le. More details on creating the traverse closure les follow in a later section of this manual.
Pt. Number Substitution String: This option is used to automatically renumber point names. Some data collectors
do not allow the user to use the same point number twice during data collection. In least squares it is common to
collect measurements to the same point from different locations. If the data collector does not allow the collection
of data from different points using the same point number this option can be used to automatically renumber these
points during processing. For example you could enter the string '=' in the Pt. Number Substitution String. Then if
you shot point 1 but had to call it something else such as 101 you could enter '=1' in the description eld and during
preprocessing point 101 would be renumbered as point '1'.
Standard errors are the expected measurement errors based on the type equipment and eld procedures being used.
For example, if you are using a 5 second total station, you would expect the angles to be measured within +/- 5
seconds (Reading error).
The Distance Constant, PPM settings, and Angle Reading should be based on the equipment and eld pro-
cedures being used. These values can be obtained from the published specications for the total station. Or the
distance PPM and constant can be computed for a specic EDM by performing an EDM calibration using an EDM
calibration baseline.
Survey methods should also be taken into account when setting standard errors. For example, you might set the
target centering standard error higher when you are sighting a held prism pole than you would if you were sighting
a prism set on a tripod.
The settings from this dialog box will be used for the project default settings. These default standard errors can be
overridden for specic measurements by placing SE records directly into the Raw Data File (see the above section
on raw data les).
If the report generated when you process the data shows that generally you have consistently high standard residuals
for a particular measurement value (angles, distances, etc.), then there is the chance that you have selected standard
errors that are better than your instrument and methods can obtain. (See explanation of report le). Failing the
chi-square test consistently is also an indication that the selected standard errors are not consistent with the eld
measurements.
You can set the standard errors for the following:
Distance and Angle Standard Errors
Distance Constant: Constant portion of the distance error. This value can be obtained from published EDM
specications, or from an EDM calibration.
Distance PPM: Parts per million component of the distance error. This value can be obtained from published EDM
specication, or from an EDM calibration.
Horizontal Angle Pointing: The horizontal angle pointing error is inuenced by atmospheric conditions, optics,
experience and care taken by instrument operator.
Horizontal Angle Reading: Precision of horizontal angle measurements, obtain from theodolite specs.
Vertical Angle Pointing: The vertical angle pointing error is inuenced by atmospheric conditions, optics, experi-
ence and care taken by instrument operator.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 589
Vertical Angle Reading: Precision of vertical angle measurements, obtain from theodolite specs.
Instrument and Target Standard Errors
Target Centering: This value is the expected amount of error in setting the target or prism over the point.
Instrument Centering: The expected amount of error in setting the total station over the point.
Target Height: The expected amount of error in measuring the height of the target.
Instrument Height: The expected amount of error in measuring the height of the total station.
Control Standard Errors
Direction (Bearing / Azimuth): The estimated amount of error in the bearing / azimuth (direction) found in the
azimuth records of the raw data.
North, East, Elev: The estimated amount of error in the control north, east and elevation values. You may
want to have different coordinate standard errors for different methods of obtaining control. For example, standard
errors of control derived from RTK GPS would be higher than control derived from GPS static measurements.
GPS Standard Errors
Instrument Centering: This option is used to specify the error associated with centering a GPS receiver over a
point.
Vector Standard Error Factor: This option is used as a factor to increase GPS vector standard errors as found in
the input GPS vector le. Some people think that the GPS vector variances/covariances as found in GPS vector
les tend do be overly optimistic. This factor allows the user to globally increase the GPS vector standard errors
without having to edit the GPS vector le. A factor of 0 is the default value and results in no change to the GPS vec-
tor standard errors as found in the GPS vector le. Acceptable values are 0 through 9. It is not a linear progression.
Differential Leveling Standard Errors
These setting only effect level data and are not used when processing total station or GPS vector les.
Avg, Dist. To BS/FS: This option is used to dene the average distance to the backsight and foresight during
leveling.
Rod Reading Error per 100 ft./m: This option is used to dene the expected level reading error.
Collimation Error: This is the expected differential leveling collimation error in seconds.
Standard Error Denition Files
The Standard error settings can be saved and then later reloaded into an existing or new project. Creating libraries
of standard errors for different types of survey equipment or survey procedures is convenient method of creating
standards within a survey department that uses a variety of equipment and performs different types of surveys.
Standard error library les (.sef) can be created two ways. From the 'Settings/Standard Errors' dialog box the 'Load'
button can be used to import an existing .sef le into the current project. A .sef le can also be created from the
existing project standard errors by using the 'Save As..' button.
Standard error les (.sef) can also be managed from the main 'Files' menu. Use the 'Edit Standard Error File' menu
option to edit an existing standard error le. Use the 'New Standard Error File' option to create a new standard error
le.
After choosing one of the menu options and choosing the le to edit or create, the following dialog box will be
shown. Set the desired standard errors and press the 'OK' button to save the standard error le.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 590
Maximum Iterations: Non-linear least squares is an iterative process. The user must dene the maximum number
of iterations to make before the program quits trying to nd a converging solution. Typically if there are no blunders
in the data the solution will converge in less than 5 iterations.
Convergence Threshold: During each iteration corrections are computed. When the corrections are less than the
threshold value the solution has converged. This value should be somewhat less than the accuracy of the measure-
ments. For example, if you can only measure distances to the nearest .01' then a reasonable convergence threshold
value would be .005'.
Condence Interval: This setting is used when calculating the size of error ellipses, and in the chi-square testing.
For example, a 95% condence interval means that there is a 95% chance that the error is within the tolerances
shown.
Enable sideshots for relative error ellipses: Check this box if you want to see the error ellipses and relative error
ellipses of sideshots. This checkbox must be set if you want to use the ''relative error ellipse inverse'' function with
sideshots. When turned off this toggle lters out sideshots during the least squares processing. Since the sideshots
are excluded form the least squares processing error ellipses cannot be computed for these points. When this toggle
is off, the sideshots are computed after the network has been adjusted. The nal coordinate values of the sideshots
will be the same regardless of this setting.
Large numbers of sideshots slow down least squares processing. It is best to uncheck this box while debugging your
project to avoid having to wait for the computer to nish processing. After the project processes correctly you may
turn on the option for the nal processing.
Note: Any sideshots that are selected for the ALTA report will automatically be included in the adjustment process
in order to calculate the error ellipses - even if this option is turned OFF. Even if you do not need ALTA report, this
is an easy way to get statistics on only selected sideshots which can greatly speed up the adjustment process.
Relative Err. Points File: The ALTA standards require that surveyors certify to the relative positional error between
points. Relative error ellipses are an accepted method of determining the relative positional error required by the
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 591
ALTA standards. The points that are to be included in the relative error checking are specied by the user. These
points are dened in an ASCII le with an extension of .alt. To select an .alt le for relative error checking use the
'Select' button and then browse to the le's location.
There is a section later in the manual that describes how to create and edit the .alt le.
Include ALTAtolerance report: Turn this toggle on if you wish to include the ALTAtolerance section of the report.
Allowable Tolerance, PPM: These elds allow the user to set the allowable error for computations. Typi-
cally the user would enter the current ALTA error standards, i.e. 0.07' & 50 PPM. Many states are adopting similar
certications to the ALTA standards. These certications may have different tolerances depending on the type of
survey (for example rural vs. urban).
See the later section in this manual for more detailed information on creating and interpreting the ALTA section of
the report.
These settings apply to the output of data to the report and coordinate les.
Display Precision
These settings determine the number of decimal places to display in the reports for the following types of data. The
display precision has no effect on any computations, only the display of the reports.
Coordinates (North, East, Elevation) - Chose 0-4 decimal places.
Distances - Chose 0-4 decimal places
Directions (Azimuths or Bearings) - nearest second, tenth of second, or hundredth of second.
Format
These settings determine the format for the following types of data.
Direction - Choose either bearings or azimuth for direction display. If the angle units are degrees, bearings are
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 592
entered as QDD.MMSSss and azimuths are entered as DDD.MMSSss. If the angle units are grads, bearings are
input as QGGG.ggggg and azimuths are input as GGG.ggggg.
Coordinate Display - Choose the order of coordinate display, either north-east or east-north.
Null Elevation - Choose the value for null elevations in the output ASCII coordinate NEZ le. The Null Elevation
eld defaults to SurvNet's value for NO ELEVATION. This is used to differentiate between NO ELEVATION (a
true 2D point) and ZERO ELEVATION (which is a vaild elevation)
Angle Display - Choose the units you are working in: degrees or gradians.
Coordinate File Output
These settings determine the type and format of the output NEZ le. An ASCII .NEZ and .OUT les are always
created after processing the raw data. The .OUT le will be a nicely formatted version of the .NEZ le. The .NEZ
le will be an ASCII le suitable to be input into other programs. There are a variety of options for the format of
the .NEZ le. Following are the different ASCII le output options.
P,N,E,Z,CD,DESC (xed columns); - Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc in xed columns separated by commas.
P,N,E,Z,CD,DESC; Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc separated by commas.
P N E Z CD DESC (xed columns); Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc in xed columns with no commas.
P N E Z CD DESC; Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc in xed columns with no commas.
P,N,E,Z,DESC (xed columns); Point,north,east,elev., desc in xed columns separated by commas.
P,N,E,Z,DESC; Point,north,east,elev., desc separated by commas.
P N E Z DESC (xed columns); Point,north,east,elev., desc in xed columns with no commas.
P N E Z DESC; Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc separated by spaces.
P,E,N,Z,CD,DESC (xed columns); - Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc in xed columns separated by commas.
P,E,N,Z,CD,DESC; Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc separated by commas.
P E N Z CD DESC (xed columns); Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc in xed columns with no commas.
P E N Z CD DESC; Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc in xed columns with no commas.
P,E,N,Z,DESC (xed columns); Point,east,north,elev., desc in xed columns separated by commas.
P,E,N,Z,DESC; Point,east,north,elev., desc separated by commas.
P E N Z DESC (xed columns); Point,east,,northelev., desc in xed columns with no commas.
P E N Z DESC; Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc separated by spaces.
CSV ASCII with Standard Errors
You can also set the output precision of the coordinates for the ASCII output le. This setting only applies to ASCII
les, not to the C&G or Carlson binary coordinate les which are stored to full double precision.
*
N/E Precision: number of places after the decimal to use for North and East values (0 -> 8) in the output NEZ
ASCII le.
*
Elevation Precision: number of places after the decimal to use for Elevation values (0 -> 8) in the output NEZ
ASCII le.
Output to Carlson/C&G coordinate les:
If you want to write the calculated coordinates directly to a C&G or Carlson coordinate le, check the ''Write to
Coordinate File'' box and select the le. You can choose the type of Carlson/C&G le to be created when you
'select' the le to be created. You may wish to leave this box unchecked until you are satised with the adjustment.
Following are the different available coordinate output le options.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 593
Output to Carlson/C&G Scaled Coordinate File:
You are also allowed to output coordinates to a second, scaled or ground, coordinate le. Check the ''Create
Scaled/Ground NEZ le'' box (see below):
If you are working with a LOCAL coordinate system, You will see the above options. You will only be al-
lowed to manually enter a scale factor. You can select the output le format and the output le.
If you are working in a non-local coordinate system (ie. 1983 State Plane), you will have the following
scaling options:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 594
You can either enter a scale factor or use the computed grid to ground scale factor. If you select to use the computed
scale factor, SurvNET will use the ''average combined scale factor'' as shown in the project report le.
You will also be required to enter the point number of the point you will be scaling around. This function
can also be used as a translation tool. You can either ''Use the Current NE values'' (no translation), ''Enter the new
NE values'' (desired N and E values for the scaling point), or ''Enter Translation Values'' (enter the actual delta-north
and delta-east values).
Overwriting exiting points:
*
NOTE: If coordinate points already exist in the CRD le, before a point is written, you will be shown the NEW
value, the OLD value, and given the following option:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 595
Cancel: Cancel the present operation. No more points will be written to the Carson/C&G le.
Overwrite: Overwrite the existing point. Notice that if you check the 'Do Not Ask Again' box all further duplicate
points will be overwritten without prompting.
Do not Overwrite: The existing point will not be overwritten. Notice that if you check the 'Do Not Ask Again' box
all further duplicate points will automatically not be overwritten - only new points will be written.
When you select Process >Network Adjustment from the menu, or select the NETWORK ICON on the tool bar, the
raw data will be processed and adjusted using least squares based on the project settings. If there is a problem with
the reduction, you will be shown error messages that will help you track down the problem. Additionally a .err le
is created that will log and display error and warning messages.
The data is rst preprocessed to calculate averaged angles and distances for sets of angles and multiple distances.
For a given setup, all multiple angles and distances to a point will be averaged prior to the adjustment. The standard
error as set in the Project Settings dialog box is the standard error for a single measurement. Since the average of
multiple measurements is more precise than a single measurement the standard error for the averaged measurement
is computed using the standard deviation of the mean formula.
Non-linear network least squares solutions require that initial approximations of all the coordinates be known before
the least squares processing can be performed. So, during the preprocessing approximate coordinate values for each
point are calculated using basic coordinate geometry functions. If there is inadequate control or an odd geometric
situations SurvNet may generate a message indicating that the initial coordinate approximations could not be com-
puted. The most common cause of this problem is that control has not been adequately dened or there are point
numbering problems.
Side Shots are separated from the raw data and computed after the adjustment (unless the ''Enable sideshots for
relative error ellipses'' toggle is checked in the adjustment dialog box). If side shots are ltered out of the least
squares process and processed after the network is adjusted, processing is greatly speeded up, especially for a large
project with a lot of side shots.
If the raw data processes completely, a report le, .RPT, a .NEZ le, an .OUT le, and an .ERR le will be created in
the project directory. The le names will consist of the project name plus the above le extensions. These different
les are shown in separate windows after processing. Additionally a graphic window of the network is displayed.
.RPT le: This is an ASCII le that contains the statistical and computational results of the least squares processing.
.NEZ le: This le is an ASCII le containing the nal adjusted coordinates. This le can be imported into any
program that can read ASCII coordinate les. The format of the le is determined by the setting in the project
settings dialog box.
.OUT le: The .OUT le is a formatted ASCII le of the nal adjusted coordinates suitable for display or printing
.ERR le: The .ERR le contains any warning or error messages that were generated during processing. Though
some warning messages may be innocuous it is always prudent to review and understand the meaning of the mes-
sages.
The following is a graphic of the different windows displayed after processing. Notice that with the report le you
can navigate to different sections of the report using the Tabs at the top of the window.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 596
If you have ''Write to Coordinate File'' checked in the output options dialog, the coordinates will also be written to a
.CRD le.
Inverse Button - The 'Inverse' button is found on the main window (the button with the icon that shows a line with
points at each end). You can also select the Tools->Inverse menu option. This feature is only active after a network
has been processed successfully. This option can be used to obtain the bearing and distance between any two points
in the network. Additionally the standard deviation of the bearing and distance between the two points is displayed.
The Relative Error Ellipse Inverse button is found on the main window (the button with the icon that
shows a line with an ellipse in the middle). You can also select the Tools > Relative Error Ellipse menu option.
This feature is only active after a network has been processed successfully. This option can be used to obtain the
relative error ellipse between any two points. It shows the semi-major and semi-minor axis and the azimuth of the
error ellipse, computed to a user-dene condence interval. This information can also be used to determine the
relative precision between any two points in the network. It is the relative error ellipse calculation that is the basis
for the ALTA tolerance reporting. If the 'Enable sideshots for relative error ellipses' toggle is checked then all points
in the project can be used to compute relative error ellipses. The trade-off is that with large projects processing time
will be increased.
The inverse functions are only allowed after the project has been processed.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 597
If you need to certify as to the ''Positional Tolerances'' of your monuments, as per the ALTA Standards, use the
Relative Error Ellipse inverse routine to determine these values, or use the specic ALTAtolerance reporting function
as explained later in the manual.
For example, if you must certify that all monuments have a positional tolerance of no more than 0.07 feet with 50
PPM at a 95 percent condence interval, rst set the condence interval to 95 percent in the Settings/Adjustment
screen. Then process the raw data. Then you may inverse between points in as many combinations as you
deem necessary and make note of the semi-major axis error values. If none of them are larger than 0.07 feet +
(50PPM
*
distance), you have met the standards. It is however more convienent to create a Reletive Error Points File
containing the points you wish to check and include the ALTA tolerance report. This report takes into account the
PPM and directly tells you if the positional tolerance between the selected points meets the ALTA standards.
Convert GPS File to ASCII
The purpose of this option is to convert GPS vector les that are typically in the manufacturers' binary or ASCII
format into the Carlson ASCII le format. The advantage of creating an ASCII le is that the ASCII le can be
edited using a standard text editor. Being able to edit the vector le may be necessary in order to edit point numbers
so that the point numbers in the GPS le match the point numbers in the total station le. The following dialog box
is displayed after choosing this option.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 598
First choose the le format of the GPS vector le to be converted. Next use the 'Select' button to navigate to the
vector le to be converted. If you are converting a Thales le you have the option to remove the leading 0's from
Thales point numbers. Next, use the second 'Select' button to select the name of the new ASCII GPS vector le
to be created. Choose the 'Convert' button to initiate the le conversion. Press the 'Cancel' button when you have
completed the conversions. The le created will have an extension of .GPS. Following are the different GPS formats
that can be converted to ASCII.
Ashtech/Thales 'O' les: Typically have .obn extensions and are binary les. Notice that you have the option to
remove the leading 0's from Thales point numbers, by checking the ''Remove leading 0's from Thales point numbers''
check box.
Carlson .RW5 (containing GPS vectors)
GeoLab IOB
LandXML (.XML): The landXML format is an industry standard format. Currently SurvNet will only import
LandXML survey point records. The conversion will not import LandXML vectors.
Leica: The Leica vector le is an ASCII format typically created with the Leica SKI software. This format is created
by Leica when baseline vectors are required for input into 3rd party adjustment software such as SurvNet. The SKI
ASCII Baseline Vector format is an extension of the SKI ASCII Point Coordinate format.
NGS G-File: National Geodetic Survey format.
NGS G-File from OPUS report: National Geodetic Survey format as used in the OPUS report
Topcon (.TVF): The Topcon Vector File is in ASCII format and typically has an extension of .TVF
Topcon (.XML): The Topcon XML le is an ASCII le. It contains the GPS vectors in an XML format. This format
is not equivalent to LandXML format.
Trimble Data Exchange Format (.ASC): The Trimble TDEF format is an ASCII le. It is typically output by
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 599
Trimble's ofce software as a means to output GPS vectors for use by 3rd party software.
Trimble Data Collection (.dc): The Trimble .dc format is an ASCII le. It is typically output by Trimble's data
collector. It contains a variety of measurements including GPS vectors. This option only converts GPS vectors found
in the .DC le.
Trimble LandXML, (
*
.jxl): This is Trimble's Land XML format.
The Trimble Data Collection (.dc) and Trimble LandXML (.jxl) formats allow you to bring in both GPS vectors
(creating a .GPS le) and Total Station data (creating a .RW5 le) at the same time.
Convert Level Files
The purpose of this option is to convert differential level les into C&G/Carlson differential level le format (TLV
les). At present the only level le formats that can be converted are the level les downloaded from the Topcon
and Leica digital levels.
However, the Level Editor has several IMPORT options which expands the types of les you can convert:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 600
Toolbars
Many of the most commonly used functions can be accessed using the toolbar. Following is an explanation of the
buttons found in the toolbar.
Create New Project - New project Icon.
Open an Existing Project - Open le Icon.
Save the Current Project - Disk Icon.
Print the Reports - Printer Icon.
Settings - Icon looks like a wrench. This takes you to the SETTINGS->STANDARD ERRORS tab.
Data Collector Transfer Program - This icon will run either the C&G Data Collector Transfer/Conversion
program or the Carlson SurvCom program. The C&G program allows you to transfer data from the data collector,
or convert the data collector le to a .CGR le format. It supports all major data collectors. The Carlson program
connects specically to the Carlson SurvCE data collector.
Edit Raw Data - This icon can be used to start either the .RW5 raw data editor or the .CGR raw data editor. If
your project has multiple raw data les, you will be shown a list and asked to select the le you wish to edit. The
appropriate editor will be called depending on what type raw les are dened in the project settings. If no raw le
or project has been specied the default raw editor as dened in the Settings->Global Settings menu option will be
executed. Any changes you make in the editor need to be saved before returning to SurvNet for processing.
Process Network - Icon looks like a spider web. Pressing this Icon will process and adjust the data and show the
reports.
Inverse - Icon has a line with points on each end..
Relative Error Ellipses - Icon has a line with points on each end and an ellipse in the middle.
Graphics - Icon that looks like an eye. This icon is active once a project has been opened.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 601
Report File: A report le consisting of the project name with an .RPT extension is generated after successfully
processing the raw data. The report le will be shown in a text window so you can analyze the data. You can pick
the ''Printer'' icon if you want a hard-copy. Following is an example of the results from a relatively simple network
adjustment using a local coordinate system.
Sample 2D/1D, Local Coordinate System Report File
===============================
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Mon May 08 10:16:16 2006
2D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files:
C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: ON
Maximum iterations: 10 , Convergence Limit: 0.002000
Local Coordinate System, Scale Factor: 1.000000
Horizontal Units: US Feet
Confidence Interval: 95.00
Default Standard Errors:
Distance: Constant 0.010 ,PPM: 5.000
Horiz. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Vert. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Total Station: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Target: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Azimuth: 5''
Coordinate Control: N:0.010, E:0.010, Z:0.030,
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 1, BS: 5, FS: 2
Low: 109-19'10.0'' , High: 109-19'17.0'' , Diff: 000-00'07.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 6
Low: 190-32'02.0'' , High: 190-32'10.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 3
Low: 096-03'48.0'' , High: 096-03'56.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 3, BS: 2, FS: 4
Low: 124-03'50.0'' , High: 124-03'56.0'' , Diff: 000-00'06.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 10
Low: 039-26'35.0'' , High: 039-26'45.0'' , Diff: 000-00'10.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 10, BS: 5, FS: 11
Low: 241-56'23.0'' , High: 241-56'35.0'' , Diff: 000-00'12.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 11, BS: 10, FS: 12
Low: 114-56'20.0'' , High: 114-56'34.0'' , Diff: 000-00'14.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 12, BS: 11, FS: 3
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 602
Low: 140-39'18.0'' , High: 140-39'31.0'' , Diff: 000-00'13.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 1
Low: 117-30'35.0'' ,
High: 117-30'50.0'' , Diff: 000-00'15.0''
Horizontal Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 324.15, High: 324.20, Diff: 0.04
Vertical Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 6.62, High: 8.36, Diff: 1.74
Vertical Distance from 3 to 4 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 11.46, High: 11.51, Diff: 0.05
Horizontal Distance from 12 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 144.64, High: 144.66, Diff: 0.02
HORIZONTAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
============================
Unadjusted Observations
=======================
Control Coordinates: 1 Observed Points, 0 Fixed Points, 0 Approx. Points
Sta. N: E: StErr N: StErr E:
1 658428.26 2150182.70 0.01 0.01
Distances: 14 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Dist. StErr
1 5 290.45 0.01
1 2 292.21 0.01
2 6 52.39 0.01
2 3 324.19 0.01
3 4 275.60 0.01
3 20 134.66 0.01
20 21 116.07 0.01
21 22 50.12 0.01
4 5 309.65 0.01
5 10 129.99 0.01
10 11 126.01 0.01
10 15 10.00 0.01
11 12 129.43 0.01
12 3 144.65 0.01
Angles: 15 Observations
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle StErr (Sec.)
5 1 2 109-19'13.5'' 7.7
1 2 6 190-32'06.0'' 26.2
1 2 3 096-03'52.0'' 7.3
2 3 4 124-03'53.0'' 7
.8
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' 12.8
3 20 21 180-15'26.0'' 17.6
20 21 22 183-26'45.0'' 31.2
3 4 5 093-02'11.5'' 7.5
4 5 10 039-26'40.0'' 10.4
5 10 11 241-56'29.0'' 15.6
5 10 15 056-23'10.0'' 125.0
10 11 12 114-56'27.0'' 15.5
11 12 3 140-39'24.5'' 15.3
12 3 2 325-54'30.0'' 9.5
4 5 1 117-30'42.5'' 7.7
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 603
Azimuths: 1 Observations
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing StErr (Sec.)
1 2 N 45-00'00.0''E 5.0
Adjusted Coordinates
====================
Adjusted Local Coordinates
Sta. N: E: StErr N: StErr E:
1 658428.26 2150182.70 0.02 0.02
2 658634.88 2150389.32 0.02 0.02
5 658554.12 2149920.92 0.03 0.02
3 658887.03 2150185.59 0.02 0.03
4 658863.61 2149910.99 0.03 0.03
20 658999.28 2150111.19 0.03 0.04
21 659096.31 2150047.49 0.04 0.05
10 658657.11 2150000.25 0.03 0.03
11 658636.21 2150124.52 0.03 0.03
12 658742.89 2150197.81 0.03 0.03
Adjusted Coordinates Error Ellipses, 95% CI
Sta. Semi Major Semi Minor Max. Error Az.
Axis Axis
1 0.05 0.05 S 29-26'39.4''E
2 0.07 0.07 N 45-00'00.0''E
5 0.08 0
.07 N 10-58'28.2''E
3 0.10 0.07 N 84-37'31.0''E
4 0.11 0.07 N 51-23'12.0''E
20 0.13 0.10 N 84-24'17.5''E
21 0.17 0.12 N 72-01'17.5''E
10 0.09 0.07 N 43-35'54.5''E
11 0.09 0.08 N 54-43'51.1''E
12 0.08 0.08 N 79-48'07.2''E
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
1 5 290.46 0.01 1.42 0.01
1 2 292.21 -0.00 0.40 0.01
2 3 324.17 -0.01 1.62 0.01
3 4 275.59 -0.01 1.11 0.01
3 20 134.66 -0.00 0.00 0.02
20 21 116.07 -0.00 0.00 0.02
4 5 309.65 0.01 0.64 0.01
5 10 130.00 0.01 0.97 0.01
10 11 126.01 0.00 0.16 0.01
11 12 129.44 0.01 0.98 0.02
12 3 144.66 0.01 0.94 0.02
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.01
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
5 1 2 109-19'19.2'' 5.7 0.7 9.9
1 2 3 096-03'43.4'' -8.6 1.2 9.2
2 3 4 124-03'48.1'' -4.9 0.6 10.1
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' -0.0 0.0 21.5
3 20 21 180-15'26.0''
0.0 0.0 29.7
3 4 5 093-02'12.8'' 1.3 0.2 9.3
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 604
4 5 10 039-26'37.1'' -2.9 0.3 14.4
5 10 11 241-56'27.5'' -1.5 0.1 21.2
10 11 12 114-56'39.8'' 12.8 0.8 21.8
11 12 3 140-39'40.8'' 16.3 1.1 20.3
12 3 2 325-54'33.8'' 3.8 0.4 13.2
4 5 1 117-30'56.6'' 14.1 1.8 9.9
Root Mean Square (RMS) 8.1
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
1 2 N 45-00'00.0''
E 0.0 0.0 8.4
Root Mean Square
(RMS) 0.0
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:6
Reference variance:2.84
Standard error unit Weight: +/-1.68
Failed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 significance level
1.237 <= 17.023 <= 14.449
Sideshots
=========
From To Bearing Dist. N E StDev. N StDev. E
2 6 N 55-32'06.0''E 52.39 658664.53 2150432.52 0.02 0.02
21 22 N 29-50'09.6''W 50.12 659139.78 2150022.56 0.04 0.05
10 15 N 86-00'28.6''W 10.00 658657.80 2149990.27 0.03 0.03
LEAST SQUARES VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
Mon May 08 10:16:16 2006
2D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files:
C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: ON
FIXED VERTICAL BENCHMARKS
Station Elevation
1 569.8500
POINTS TO BE ADJUSTED
Station
2,5,3,4,10,11,12
MEASUREMENT SUMMARY
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 605
From To Elev. Diff.
(unadjusted) StdErr
1 5 7.5040 0.0145
1 2 7.5659 0.0145
2 3 6.9843 0.0145
3 4 -11.4907 0.0146
4 5 4.3557 0.0145
5 10 2.2639 0.0143
10 11 1.0931 0.0143
11 12 0.3828 0.0143
12 3 3.3590 0.0144
STATISTICAL SUMMARY
Total Unknown Elevations:10
Tota
l Elev. Routes:12
Total Fixed BM's:1
Total non-fixed BM's:0
Degrees of freedom:2
ADJUSTED ELEVATIONS
Station Adjusted Elev Standard Dev.
1 569.8500 0.00000
2 577.4336 0.02465
5 577.3363 0.02465
3 584.4355 0.02915
4 572.9628 0.03070
10 579.6003 0.03341
11 580.6935 0.03641
12 581.0764 0.03519
ADJUSTED MEASUREMENT SUMMARY
From To Elev. Diff. Residuals
(adjusted)
1 5 7.4863 -0.0177
1 2 7.5836 0.0177
2 3 7.0019 0.0177
3 4 -11.4728 0.0179
4 5 4.3735 0.0178
5 10 2.2641 0.0001
10 11 1.0932 0.0001
11 12 0.3829 0.0001
12 3 3.3591 0.0001
Vertical Sideshots
Station Elevation
20 571.77
21 581.25
22 580.14
15 579.60
Pre-Process TAB:
Project Settings
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 606
The rst section of the report displays the project settings at the time the project was processed.
Tolerances
The second section of the report displays warning and error messages generated during the preprocessing of the raw
data. The primary messages displayed will be warnings when multiple angles, horizontal distances, and vertical
differences exceed the tolerance settings as set in the project settings. The low and high measurement and the
difference are displayed. It is prudent to pay attention to any messages generated in this section of the report.
Unadjusted Observations TAB:
The next four sections list the reduced and averaged, but unadjusted measurements that make up the network. Multi-
ple measurements of the same angle or distance are averaged to a single measurement. The standard error of multiple
averaged measurements is less than the standard error of a single measurement. When multiple measurements are
used, the standard error for the averaged measurement will be computed using the average of the mean formula.
The rst of the four sections is a list of the control coordinates used in the network adjustment. These coordinates
could have been read from the .RW5 or .CGR raw data le, or from the supplemental coordinate le. Notice that the
standard errors for the control points are displayed.
The second of the four measurement sections shows the distances and distance standard errors used in the adjustment.
These distances are horizontal distances computed from all slope distance and vertical angles for that distance,
including all foresight and backsight distances. The standard error settings used to calculate the nal distance
standard error include the distance standard error, the PPM standard error, the target centering standard error and the
instrument centering standard errors. The techniques and formulas used to calculate the nal distance standard error
are found in section 6.12 of the textbook ''Adjustment Computations, Statistics and Least Squares in Surveying and
GIS'', by Paul Wolf and Charles Ghilani.
The third of the four measurement sections shows the angles and angle standard errors used in the adjustment.
These angles are the averaged angle value for all the multiple angles collected. The standard error settings used
to calculate the nal angle standard error include the pointing standard error, the reading standard error, the target
centering standard error and the instrument centering standard errors. The techniques and formulas used to calculate
the nal angle standard error are found in section 6.2 of the textbook ''Adjustment Computations, Statistics and Least
Squares in Surveying and GIS'', by Paul Wolf and Charles Ghilani.
The fourth of the four measurement sections shows the azimuths and azimuth standard errors used in the adjustment.
Azimuths can only be dened as a direction record in the .RW5 or .CGR raw data le.
Adjusted Observations TAB:
The next three sections list the adjusted horizontal distance, horizontal angle, and azimuth measurements. In ad-
dition to the adjusted measurement the, residual, the standard residual and the standard deviation of the adjusted
measurement is displayed.
The residual is dened as the difference between the unadjusted measurement and the adjusted measurement. The
residual is one of the most useful and intuitive measures displayed in the report. Large residuals in relation to the
standards of the survey are indications of problems with the data.
The standard residual is the a priori standard error divided by the residual of a measurement. The a priori standard
errors are the standard errors of the measurements as displayed in the unadjusted measurement section. A standard
residual of 1 indicates that the adjusted measurement is consistent with the adjustment being made to the measure-
ment. One or a few measurements having high standard residuals, in relation to the rest of the standard residuals,
may be an indication of a blunder in the survey. When all standard residuals are consistently large there is likely an
inconsistency in the a priori standard errors and the adjustments being made to the measurements. In other words
the standard errors dened for the project are too small, in relation to the survey methods used.
The standard deviation of the measurement means that there is a 68% probability that the adjusted measurement is
within plus or minus the standard deviation of the measurement's true value.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 607
Additionally, the root mean square of each measurement type is displayed. The root mean square is dened as the
square root of the average of the squares of a set of numbers. Loosely dened, it can be described as an average
residual for that measurement type.
Statistics
The next section displays some statistical measures of the adjustment including the number of iterations needed for
the solution to converge, the degrees of freedom of the network, the reference variance, the standard error of unit
weight, and the results of a Chi-square test.
The degree of freedom is an indication of how many redundant measurements are in the survey. Degree of freedom
is dened as the number of measurements in excess of the number of measurements necessary to solve the network.
The standard error of unit weight relates to the overall adjustment and not an individual measurement. A value of
one indicates that the results of the adjustment are consistent with a priori standard errors. The reference variance is
the standard error of unit weight squared.
The chi-square test is a test of the ''goodness'' of t of the adjustment. It is not an absolute test of the accuracy of
the survey. The a priori standard errors which are dened in the project settings dialog box or with the SE record in
the raw data (.RW5 or .CGR) le are used to determine the weights of the measurements. These standard errors can
also be looked at as an estimate of how accurately the measurements were made. The chi-square test merely tests
whether the results of the adjusted measurements are consistent with the a priori standard errors. Notice that if you
change the project standard errors and then reprocess the survey the results of the chi-square test change,
even though the nal adjusted coordinates may change very little.
Adjusted Coordinates TAB:
If the adjustment of the network converges the next section displays a list of the nal adjusted coordinates and the
computed standard X, Y standard error. An interpretation of the meaning of the X, Y standard error, is that there is
a 68% probability that the adjusted X, Y is within plus or minus the standard error of the X, Y of its true value.
The next section displays the error ellipses for the adjusted coordinates. The error ellipse is a truer representation
of the error of the point than the X, Y standard error. The error ellipses are calculated to the condence interval as
dened in the settings screen. In this report the error ellipse axis is larger than the X, Y standard errors since the
error ellipses in this report are calculated at a 95% probability level as set in the Settings screens. The maximum
error axis direction is along the axis of the semi-major axis. The direction of the minimum error axis direction is
along the semi-minor axis and is perpendicular to the semi-major axis. If a point is located from a variety of stations,
you will most likely see that the error ellipse will approach a circle, which is the strongest geometric shape.
Sideshots TAB:
The next section displays the computed sideshots of the network. Sideshots are ltered out of the network adjust-
ment as part of the preprocessing process if the 'Enable Sideshots for Error Ellipses' toggle is OFF. Least squares
adjustment requires a lot of computer resources. Sideshots are ltered out to minimize the computer resources
needed in a large network adjustment. The sideshots are computed from the nal adjusted network points. The
results of the side shot computations are the same whether they are reduced as part of the least squares adjustment
or from the nal adjusted coordinates.
Elevation Report TAB:
The next part of the report displays the results of the vertical adjustment. In the 2D/1D model the horizontal and
the vertical adjustments are separate least squares adjustment processes. As long as there are redundant vertical
measurements the vertical component of the network will also be reduced and adjusted using least squares.
The rst section displays the xed vertical benchmarks used in the vertical adjustment. These points are xed and
will not be adjusted vertically. Next, is listed the points that will be adjusted as part of the vertical adjustment.
The following section displays the measurements used in the adjustment. The measurements consist of the vertical
elevation difference between points in vertical adjustment. The lengths between these points are used to determine
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 608
the weights in the vertical adjustment. Longer length lines are weighted less in the vertical adjustment than shorter
length lines.
The next section shows Statistical Information about the vertical adjustement. It lists the total number of unknown
elevations, the number of routes involved, the number of xed and non-xed benchmarks and the degrees of
freedom..
The next section displays the adjusted elevations and the computed standard deviations of the computed elevations.
Following the adjusted elevation section is a section displaying the nal adjusted elevation difference measurements
and their residuals. Finally, the computed side shot elevations are displayed.
State Plane Reduction Report le:
When reducing to a state plane coordinate system, there is additional information displayed in the report le.
First, notice the heading of the report. The heading indicates that the project is being reduced into the North Carolina
zone of the 1983 State Plane Coordinate System. The heading shows that the elevation factor is computed based on
a project elevation of 250 feet:
Sample 2D/1D, State Plane Coordinate System Report File
===============================
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Tue Mar 21 17:37:27 2006
2D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files:
C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: ON
Maximum iterations: 10 , Convergence Limit: 0.002000
1983 State Plane Coordinates, zone:3200 North Carolina
Elevation factor computed from project elevation,250.000000.
Elevation Units: US Feet
Horizontal Units: US Feet
Confidence Interval: 95.00
Project Geoid Height: 0.00
Default Standard Errors:
Distance: Constant 0.010 ,PPM: 5.000
Horiz. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Vert. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Total Station: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Target: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Azimuth: 5''
Coordinate Control: N:0.010, E:0.010, Z:0.030,
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 1, BS: 5, FS: 2
Low: 109-19'10.0'' , High: 109-19'17.0'' , Diff: 000-00'07.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 6
Low: 190-32'02.0'' , High: 190-32'10.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 3
Low: 096-03'48.0'' , High: 096-03'56.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 609
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 3, BS: 2, FS: 4
Low: 124-03'50.0'' , High: 124-03'56.0'' , Diff: 000-00'06.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 10
Low: 039-26'35.0'' , High: 039-26'45.0'' , Diff: 000-00'10.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 10, BS: 5, FS: 11
Low: 241-56'23.0'' , High: 241-56'35.0'' , Diff: 000-00'12.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 11, BS: 10, FS: 12
Low: 114-56'20.0'' , High: 114-56'34.0'' , Diff: 000-00'14.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 12, BS: 11, FS: 3
Low: 140-39'18.0'' , High: 1
40-39'31.0'' , Diff: 000-00'13.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 1
Low: 117-30'35.0'' , High: 117-30'50.0'' , Diff: 000-00'15.0''
Horizontal Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 324.15, High: 324.20, Diff: 0.04
Vertical Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 6.62, High: 8.36, Diff: 1.74
Vertical Distance from 3 to 4 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 11.46, High: 11.51, Diff: 0.05
Horizontal Distance from 12 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 144.64, High: 144.66, Diff: 0.02
HORIZONTAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
============================
Unadjusted Observations
=======================
Control Coordinates: 1 Observed Points, 0 Fixed Points, 0 Approx. Points
Sta. N: E: StErr N: StErr E:
1 658428.26 2150182.70 0.01 0.01
The first distance listing in the Unadjusted Observation section of the report
shows the unadjusted ground distances
Distances: 14 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Ground Dist. StErr
1 5 290.45 0.01
1 2 292.21 0.01
2 6 52.39 0.01
2 3 324.19 0.01
3 4 275.60 0.01
3 20 134.66 0.01
20 21 116.07 0.01
21 22 50.12 0.01
4 5 309.65 0.01
5 10 129.99 0.01
10 11 126.01 0.01
10 15 10.00 0.01
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 610
11 12 129.43 0.01
12 3 144.65 0.01
Angles: 15 Observations
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle StEr
r (Sec.)
5 1 2 109-19'13.5'' 7.7
1 2 6 190-32'06.0'' 26.2
1 2 3 096-03'52.0'' 7.3
2 3 4 124-03'53.0'' 7.8
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' 12.8
3 20 21 180-15'26.0'' 17.6
20 21 22 183-26'45.0'' 31.2
3 4 5 093-02'11.5'' 7.5
4 5 10 039-26'40.0'' 10.4
5 10 11 241-56'29.0'' 15.6
5 10 15 056-23'10.0'' 125.0
10 11 12 114-56'27.0'' 15.5
11 12 3 140-39'24.5'' 15.3
12 3 2 325-54'30.0'' 9.5
4 5 1 117-30'42.5'' 7.7
Grid Azimuths: 1 Observations
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing StErr (Sec.)
1 2 N 45-00'00.0''E 5.0
There is a new section displaying the reduced unadjusted grid
distances. The grid factor, the elevation factor, and the combined factor used
to reduce the ground distance to a grid distance are included in the listing:
Grid Distances: 14 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Grid Dist. Grid Factor Z Factor Combined Factor
1 5 290.41 0.99988685 0.99998804 0.99987490
1 2 292.18 0.99988686 0.99998804 0.99987491
2 6 52.38 0.99988689 0.99998804 0.99987494
2 3 324.15 0.99988692 0.99998804 0.99987497
3 4 275.57 0.99988695 0.99998804 0.99987500
3 20 134.65 0.99988697 0.99998804 0.99987501
20 21 116.06 0.99988700 0.99998804 0.99987504
21 22 50.11 0.99988701 0.99998804 0.99987506
4 5 309.61 0.99988691 0.99998804 0.99987495
5 10 129.97 0.99988688 0.99998804 0.99987493
10 11 125.99 0.99988689 0.99998804 0.99987494
10 15 10.00 0.99988690 0.99998804 0.99987494
11 12 129.41 0.99988690 0.99998804 0.99987495
12 3 144.63 0.99988694 0.99998804 0.99987498
The next section displays the reduced unadjusted horizontal angles with the t-T correction applied.
The t-T correction is generally a small correction. For most surveys of limited size the correction is
negligible. The t-T correction is displayed in seconds.
Grid Horizontal Angles: 15 Observations
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle StErr (Sec.) t-T
5 1 2 109-19'13.5'' 7.7 0.0
1 2 6 190-32'06.0'' 26.2 0.0
1 2 3 096-03'52.0'' 7.3 0.0
2 3 4 124-03'53.0'' 7.8 -0.0
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' 12.8 -0.0
3 20 21 180-15'26.0'' 17.6 -0.0
20 21 22 183-26'45.0'' 31.2 -0.0
3 4 5 093-02'11.5'' 7.5 -0.0
4 5 10 039-26'40.0'' 10.4 0.0
5 10 11 241-56'29.0'' 15.6 0.0
5 10 15 056-23'10.0'' 125.0 0.0
10 11 12 114-56'27.0'' 15.5 0.0
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 611
11 12 3 140-39'24.5'' 15.3 0.0
12 3 2 325-54'30.0'' 9.5 0.0
4 5 1 117-30'42.5'' 7.7 0.0
Adjusted Coordinates
====================
Adjusted Grid Coordinates
Sta. N: E: StErr N: StErr E:
1 658428.26 2150182.70 0.02 0.02
2 658634.86 2150389.30 0.02 0.02
5 658554.11 2149920.95 0.03 0.02
3 658886.98 2150185.59 0.02 0.03
4 658863.56 2149911.03 0.03 0.03
20 658999.20 2150111.20 0.03 0.04
21 659096.23 2150047.51 0.04 0.05
10 658657.08 2150000.27 0.03 0.03
11 658636.18 2150124.52 0.03 0.03
12 658742.85 2150197.81
0.03 0.03
In the Adjusted Coordinates section of the report there is a new section
displaying the latitude and longitude of the final adjusted points. Additionally
the convergence angle, the grid factor, the elevation factor, and the combined
factor are displayed for each point:
Adjusted Geographic Coordinates
Sta. Latitude Longitude Conv. Ang. Grid Factor Z Factor Combined Fact.
1 35-33'29.13143''N 78-29'42.16576''E 000-17'29.2'' 0.99988684 0.99998804 0.99987488
2 35-33'31.16445''N 78-29'39.65237''E 000-17'30.7'' 0.99988689 0.99998804 0.99987493
5 35-33'30.38930''N 78-29'45.32617''E 000-17'27.4'' 0.99988687 0.99998804 0.99987491
3 35-33'33.66835''N 78-29'42.10255''E 000-17'29.2'' 0.99988695 0.99998804 0.99987500
4 35-33'33.45055''N 78-29'45.42733''E 000-17'27.3'' 0.99988695 0.99998804 0.99987499
20 35-33'34.78212''N 78-29'42.99610''E 000-17'28.7'' 0.99988698 0.99998804 0.99987503
21 35-33'35.74495''N 78-29'43.76102''E 000-17'28.3'' 0.99988701 0.99998804 0.99987505
10 35-33'31.40380''N 78-29'44.35979''E 000-17'27.9'' 0.99988690 0.99998804 0.99987494
11 35-33'31.19087''N 78-29'42.85714''E 000-17'28.8'' 0.99988689 0.99998804 0.99987493
12 35-33'32.24222''N 78-29'41.96349''E 000-17'29.3'' 0.99988692 0.99998804 0.99987496
Adjusted Coordinates Error Ellipses, 95% CI
Sta. Semi Major Semi Minor Max. Error Az.
Axis Axis
1 0.05 0.05 N 17-17'30.9''E
2 0.07 0.07 N 45-00'00.0''E
5 0.08 0.07 N 10-58'14.5''E
3 0.10 0.07 N 84-37'33.3''E
4 0.11 0.07 N 51-23'11.9''E
20 0.13 0.10 N 84-24'34.6''E
21 0.17 0.12 N 72-01'28.4''E
10 0.09 0.07 N 43-35'55.4''E
11 0.09 0.08 N 54-43'48.7''E
12 0.08 0.08 N 79-47'56.6''E
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
1
5 290.43 0.01 1.42 0.01
1 2 292.17 -0.00 0.40 0.01
2 3 324.13 -0.01 1.62 0.01
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 612
3 4 275.56 -0.01 1.11 0.01
3 20 134.65 0.00 0.00 0.02
20 21 116.06 0.00 0.00 0.02
4 5 309.61 0.01 0.64 0.01
5 10 129.98 0.01 0.97 0.01
10 11 126.00 0.00 0.16 0.01
11 12 129.42 0.01 0.98 0.02
12 3 144.64 0.01 0.94 0.02
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.01
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
5 1 2 109-19'19.2'' 5.7 0.7 9.9
1 2 3 096-03'43.4'' -8.6 1.2 9.2
2 3 4 124-03'48.1'' -4.9 0.6 10.1
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' -0.0 0.0 21.5
3 20 21 180-15'26.0'' -0.0 0.0 29.7
3 4 5 093-02'12.8'' 1.2 0.2 9.3
4 5 10 039-26'37.2'' -2.8 0.3 14.4
5 10 11 241-56'27.5'' -1.5 0.1 21.2
10 11 12 114-56'39.8'' 12.9 0.8 21.8
11 12 3 140-39'40.8'' 16.3 1.1 20.3
12 3 2 325-54'33.8'' 3.8 0.4 13.2
4 5 1 117-30'56.6'' 14.1 1.8 9.9
Root Mean Square (RMS) 8.1
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes
StdDev(Sec.)
1 2 N 45-00'00.0''E -
0.0 0.0 8.4
Root Mean Square
(RMS) 0.0
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:6
Reference variance:2.84
Standard error unit Weight: +/-1.69
Failed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 significance level
1.237 <= 17.037 <= 14.449
Sideshots
=========
From To Bearing Dist. N E StDev. N StDev. E
2 6 N 55-32'06.0''E 52.38 658664.50 2150432.48 0.02 0.02
21 22 N 29-50'09.6''W 50.11 659139.69 2150022.58 0.04 0.05
10 15 N 86-00'28.6''W 10.00 658657.77 2149990.30 0.03 0.03
LEAST SQUARES VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
Tue Mar 21 17:37:27 2006
2D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files:
C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 613
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: ON
FIXED VERTICAL BENCHMARKS
Station Elevation
1 569.8500
POINTS TO BE ADJUSTED
Station
2,5,3,4,10,11,12
MEASUREMENT SUMMARY
From To Elev. Diff.
(unadjusted) StdErr
1 5 7.5040 0.0145
1 2 7.5659 0.0145
2 3 6.9843 0.0145
3 4 -11.4907 0.0146
4 5 4.3557 0.0145
5 10 2.2639 0.0143
10 11 1.0931 0.0143
11 12 0.3828 0.0143
12 3 3.3590 0.0144
STATISTICAL SUMMARY
Total Unknown Elevations:10
Total Elev. Routes:12
Total Fixed BM's:1
Total non-fixed BM's:0
Degrees of freedom: 2
ADJUSTED ELEVATIONS
Station Adjusted Elev Standard Dev.
1 569.8500 0.00000
2 577.4336 0.02465
5 577.3363 0.02465
3 584.4355 0.02915
4 572.9628 0.03070
10 579.6003 0.03341
11 580.6935 0.03641
12 581.0764 0.03519
ADJUSTED MEASUREMENT SUMMARY
From To Elev. Diff. Residuals
(adjusted)
1 5 7.4863 -0.0177
1 2 7.5836 0.0177
2 3 7.0019 0.0177
3 4 -11.4728 0.0179
4 5 4.3735 0.0178
5 10 2.2641 0.0001
10 11 1.0932 0.0001
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 614
11 12 0.3829 0.0001
12 3 3.3591 0.0001
Vertical Sideshots
Station Elevation
20 571.77
21 581.25
22 580.14
15 579.60
The 'Preprocess, compute unadjusted coordinates' option allows the computation of unadjusted coordinates. If there
are redundant measurements in the raw data, the rst angle and distance found in the raw data is used to compute
the coordinates. If a state plane grid system has been designated the measurements are reduced to grid prior to the
computation of the unadjusted coordinates. If the point is located from two different points the initial computation
of the point will be the value stored.
A variety of blunder detection tools are available that gives the user additional tools in analyzing his survey data
and detecting blunders. The standard least squares adjustment processing and its resulting report can often be used
to determine blunders. No blunder detection method can be guaranteed to nd all blunders. So much depends on
the nature of the network geometry, the nature of the measurements, and the intuition of the analyst. Generally, the
more redundancy there is in a network the easier it is to detect blunders.
There are three different methods that can be used to track down blunders in a network or traverse.
Option 1) Preprocess the raw data:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 615
The 'Preprocess the raw data' option validates the raw data. It displays angle and distance spreads as well as checks
the validity of the raw data. Traverse closures are computed if specied. It also performs a ''K-Matrix'' analysis. The
''K-Matrix'' analysis compares the unadjusted, averaged measurements with the computed preliminary measurements
(measurements calculated from the preliminary computed coordinates). This method will catch blunders such as
using the same point number twice for two different points. The report will be sent to the ERR le. The ERR le
will contain the tolerance checks, closures and the K-Matrix analysis. Following is an example of the report created
using the 'Preprocess the raw data' option. Notice that the rst section of the report shows the angle and distance
spreads from the multiple angle and distance measurements. The second part of the report shows the 'K-matrix
analyses.
Additionally there is a 'Point Proximity Report' section that reports pairs of different points that are in close proximity
to each other which may indicate where the same point was collected multiple times using different point numbers.
The 'Preprocess the raw data' option is one of the simplest and effective tools in nding blunders. Time spent
learning how this function works will be well spent. If the project is not converging due to an unknown blunder
in the raw data this tool is one of the most effective tools in nding the blunder. Many blunders are due to point
numbering errors during data collections, and the 'K-matrix' analysis and 'Point Proximity' search are great tools for
nding this type blunders.
=====================================
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT ERROR REPORT
=====================================
Tue Mar 21 16:04:32 2006
Input Raw Files:
C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Checking raw data syntax and angle & distance spreads.
Warning: Missing Vert. Angle. Assumption made as to whether it is direct or reverse.
1 5.00 180.00050 4
Warning: Missing Vert. Angle. Assumption made as to whether it is direct or reverse.
1 5.00 180.00070 5
Warning: Missing Vert. Angle. Assumption made as to whether it is direct or reverse.
1 5.00 180.00100 10
Warning: Missing Vert. Angle. Assumption made as to whether it is direct or reverse.
1 5.00 180.00020 11
Warning: Missing Vert. Angle. Assumption made as to whether it is direct or reverse.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 616
1 5.00 325.54320 2 H&T
Warning: Missing Vert. Angle. Assumption made as to whether it is direct or reverse.
1 5.01 145.54300 2 H&T
Warning: Missing Vert. Angle. Assumption made as to whether it is direct or reverse.
1 5.01 180.00020 12
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 1, BS: 5, FS: 2
Low: 109-19'10.0'' , High: 109-19'17.0'' , Diff: 000-00'07.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 6
Low: 190-32'02.0'' , High: 190-32'10.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 3
Low: 096-03'48.0'' , High: 096-03'56.0'' , Diff:
000-00'08.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 3, BS: 2, FS: 4
Low: 124-03'50.0'' , High: 124-03'56.0'' , Diff: 000-00'06.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 10
Low: 039-26'35.0'' , High: 039-26'45.0'' , Diff: 000-00'10.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 10, BS: 5, FS: 11
Low: 241-56'23.0'' , High: 241-56'35.0'' , Diff: 000-00'12.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 11, BS: 10, FS: 12
Low: 114-56'20.0'' , High: 114-56'34.0'' , Diff: 000-00'14.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 12, BS: 11, FS: 3
Low: 140-39'18.0'' , High: 140-39'31.0'' , Diff: 000-00'13.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 1
Low: 117-30'35.0'' , High: 117-30'50.0'' , Diff: 000-00'15.0''
Horizontal Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 324.15, High: 324.20, Diff: 0.04
Vertical Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 6.62, High: 8.36, Diff: 1.74
Vertical Distance from 3 to 4 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 11.46, High: 11.51, Diff: 0.05
Horizontal Distance from 12 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 144.64, High: 144.66, Diff: 0.02
K-Matrix Analysis.
Distance: From pt.: 4 To pt.: 5
Measured distance: 309.61 Initial computed distance: 309.65
Difference: -0.04
Distance: From pt.: 12 To pt.: 3
Measured distance: 144.63 Initial computed distance: 144.66
Difference: -0.03
Distance: From pt.: 5 To pt.: 6
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 617
Measured distance: 348.51 Initial computed distance: 523.29
Difference: -174.79
Angle: IP: 4 BS: 3 FS: 5
Measured angle: 093-02'11.5''
Initial computed angle: 093-01'45.1''
Difference: 000-00'26.4''
Angle: IP: 12 BS: 11 FS: 3
Measured angle: 140-39'24.5''
Initial computed angle: 140-40'32.6
''
Difference: -000-01'08.1''
Angle: IP: 5 BS: 4 FS: 1
Measured angle: 117-30'42.5''
Initial computed angle: 117-31'16.4''
Difference: -000-00'33.9''
Angle: IP: 5 BS: 4 FS: 6
Measured angle: 145-30'34.0''
Initial computed angle: 079-39'46.4''
Difference: 065-50'47.6''
Point Proximity Report:
Points 3 and 30 are within 0.05 of each other.
The problem with the above project was that point 6 was accidentally used twice for two separate side shots. Because
of the point numbering problem the project would not converge, using the regular least squares processing. The
'Preprocess the raw data.' option was then used. Notice in the K-matrix section the distance from 5 to 6 shows
a difference of 174.79' and the angle 4-5-6 shows a difference of 065-50'47.6''. Then notice that the other listed
differences are in the range of .02' for the distances and less than a minute for the angles. This report is clearly
pointing out a problem to point 6.
Note the point proximity report section. During data collection point number 30 was used as the point number when
the point was previously collected as point 3.
In the rst section of the report notice that there are several warnings concerning whether a horizontal angle
reading was collected in direct or reverse reading. The preprocessing software uses the vertical angle reading to
determine the angle face of the horizontal angle reading. If the vertical angle is missing the program makes its best
guess as to whether the angle was collected in direct or reverse face. Since all horizontal angle spreads in the report
are reasonable, the preprocessing software must have made the correct determination.
Option 2) Float one observation:
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 618
This option is useful in nding a single blunder, either an angle or distance, within a network or traverse. If there is
more than a single blunder in the network then it is less likely that this method will be able to isolate the blunders.
If the standard least squares processing results in a network that will not converge then this blunder detection
method will not work. Use the 'Preprocess the raw data' blunder detection method if the solution is not converging.
Also this method will only work on small and moderately sized networks. This method performs a least squares
adjustment once for every non-trivial measurement in the network. So for large networks this method may take so
long to process that it is not feasible to use this method.
With this method an adjustment is computed for each non-trivial individual angle and distance measurement.
Consecutively, a single angle or distance is allowed to oat during each adjustment. The selected angle or distance
does not ''constrain'' the adjustment in any way. If there is a single bad angle or distance, one of the adjustment
possibilities will place most of the error in the ''oat'' measurement, and the other measurements should have small
residuals. The potentially bad angle or distance is agged with a double asterisk (
**
). Since an adjustment is
computed for each measurement this method my take a long time when analyzing large data les.
The adjustments with the lowest reference variances are selected as the most likely adjustments that have
isolated the blunder. You have the choice to view the best adjustment, or the top adjustments with a maximum
of ten. In the above example we asked to see the top 5 choices for potential blunders. The results are shown in
the ERR le. Following is a section of the report generated where an angular blunder was introduced into a small
traverse. Notice the '
**
' characters beside the angle measurements. In this report the two most likely adjustments
were displayed. The blunder was introduced to angle 101-2-3. Angle 101-2-3 was chosen as the 2nd most likely
source of the blunder, showing that these blunder detection methods though not perfect, can be a useful tool in the
analysis of survey measurements. Notice how much higher the standard residuals are on the suspected blunders
than the standard residuals of the other measurements.
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
101 2 68.780 -0.006 0.608 0.008
2 3 22.592 -0.006 0.573 0.008
3 4 47.694 -0.002 0.213 0.008
4 5 44.954 -0.001 0.069 0.008
5 6 62.604 0.005 0.472 0.009
6 7 35.512 0.006 0.539 0.008
7 101 61.704 0.003 0.314 0.009
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.005
Adjusted Angles
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 619
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
7 101 2 048-05'06'' -5 0 21
101 2 3 172-14'33'' -2 0 27
2 3 4 129-27'44'' -222
*
7 56
**
3 4 5 166-09'59'' 11 0 25
4 5 6 043-12'26'' 22 1 21
5 6 7 192-11'52'' 12 0 25
6 7 101 148-38'19'' 8 0 25
Root Mean Square (RMS) 85
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
101 7 N 00-00'00''
E 0 0 4
Root Mean Square
(RMS) 0
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:3
Reference variance:0.78
Standard error unit Weight: +/-0.88
Passed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 significance level
0.216 <= 2.347 <= 9.348
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
101 2 68.781 -0.005 0.473 0.009
2 3 22.592 -0.005 0.512 0.009
3 4 47.690 -0.006 0.586 0.009
4 5 44.950 -0.005 0.523 0.009
5 6 62.605 0.006 0.607 0.009
6 7 35.512 0.006 0.560 0.009
7 101 61.708 0.006 0.614 0.009
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.006
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
7 101 2 048-05'22'' 11 0 24
101 2 3 172-11'03'' -213
*
7 58
**
2 3 4 129-31'23'' -3 0 29
3 4 5 166-09'48'' 1 0 26
4 5 6 043-12'11'' 6 0 21
5 6 7 192-11'50'' 10 0 27
6 7 101 148-38'24'' 13 0 27
Root Mean Square (RMS) 81
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
101 7 N-00-00'00''E -0 0 5
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0
Statistics
==========
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 620
Solution con
verged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:3
Reference variance:0.89
Standard error unit Weight: +/-0.94
Passed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 significance level
0.216 <= 2.675 <= 9.348
The blunder is most likely in the measurement containing the largest residual and standard residual. The observation
marked with
**
is the observation that oated. It is also most likely the measurement containing the blunder.
Option 3) Re-weight by residuals & std err:
This method is capable of detecting multiple blunders but one is more likely to nd the blunders if there is a high
degree of redundancy (network of interconnected traverses). The higher the degree of freedom the more likely this
method will nd the blunders. This method will not work if the standard least squares processing will not converge.
Use the 'Preprocess the raw data' blunder detection method if the network is not converging.
First, select the number of adjustments or passes you wish to make. Each time an adjustment is completed, the
measurements will be re-weighted based on the residuals and standard errors. Hopefully, after three or four passes,
the blunders will become obvious. The results are shown in the ERR le, look for the measurements with the highest
standard residuals. These measurements are more likely to contain blunders.
The theory behind this method is that after processing, the measurements with blunders are more likely to have
higher residuals and computed standard errors. So, in the next pass the measurements are reweighted based on the
computed residuals, with less weight being assigned to the measurements with high residuals. After several passes
it is likely that the measurements with the blunders have been reweighed such that they have little effect on the
network.
As a rule of thumb three or four passes are usually sufcient. Following is a section of the report showing the results
of the 'Reweight by residuals & std. err.'. This report was generated using the same data used in the earlier example.
Notice that it has agged the same two angle measurements.
The 'Reweight by residuals & std. err.' method performs a new adjustment for each pass. So, this method will take
longer than the standard least squares adjustment, but does not take near as long to complete processing as the 'Float
one Observation' method for larger networks.
Adjusted Observations
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 621
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
101 2 68.778 -0.009 0.827 0.014
2 3 22.588 -0.010 0.942 0.015
3 4 47.694 -0.002 0.208 0.009
4 5 44.954 -0.001 0.077 0.006
5 6 62.608 0.010 0.919 0.016
6 7 35.517 0.011 1.040 0.016
7 101 61.705 0.004 0.398 0.011
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.008
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
7 101 2 048-05'07'' -4 0 21
101 2 3 172-13'19'' -77
*
2 65
2 3 4 129-29'56'' -91
*
3 64
3 4 5 166-09'44'' -3 0 24
4 5 6 043-12'05'' 0 0 9
5 6 7 192-11'40'' -0 0 19
6 7 101 148-38'10'' -1 0 20
Root Mean Square (RMS) 45
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
101 7 N 00-00'00''E 0 0 2
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 1 iterations
Degrees of freedom:3
Reference variance:1.77
Standard error unit Weight: +/-1.33
Passed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 significance level
0.216 <= 5.322 <= 9.348
The blunder is most likely in the measurement containing
the
largest residual and standard residual.
Graphics
SurvNet provides a window that graphically displays the survey network. Additionally the user is able to display
error ellipses, and GPS vectors. The user has much control over how the network is displayed. The graphic tool is
a useful tool in debugging networks since the raw data can be displayed prior to adjustment. If there are problems
with the raw data the graphics often reect the problem. The actual graphics cannot be output or saved. The graphics
can be shown independent of whether the project has been processed.
The following snapshot shows a view of the graphic window. The graphic window can be accessed using the eye
icon on the main tool bar. A project must be opened before the graphic window can be displayed. The graphics
window will only display error ellipses after the project has been processed.
The tool bar in the graphics window contains buttons that allow the user to pan, zoom in, zoom out, zoom extents,
and zoom to a window. Additionally there is a button that allows the user to navigate to points in the .CGR raw data
editor. Also, there are buttons that will refresh the graphic, and change the graphic settings.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 622
Pan: Use this button to pan the graphics.
Zoom in: Use this button to zoom in on the graphics.
Zoom out: Use this button to zoom out on the graphics.
Zoom extent: Use this button to zoom to the extents of the graphics
Zoom to window: Use this button to zoom to the extents of a user picked window.
Pick Point. This button allows the user to navigate within the .CGR raw editor from the graphics window.
Currently this button serves no purpose when working with .RW5 data..
Settings: This buttons is used to change the graphic display settings.
Refresh: This button will refresh the graphic view. Graphics are generated from the saved raw data le. If
you make changes to the raw le in the raw editor you must save the le before the changes will be reected in the
refreshed graphic screen.
Following is a description of the options in the graphics setting dialog box, which is accessed using the tool
bar button.
Points Options
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 623
These settings determine how the different type control points are displayed in the graphics window. Different
graphic settings can be applied to standard control points, xed control points and oating control points. The
symbol node display can be controlled as to symbol type, symbol color, symbol size. The control point name can be
displayed and its size set from this setting dialog box.
The graphic pick radius denes a search radius. This radius is used when navigating the .CGR editor using the
graphic window. You can pick a point graphically and the cursor in the editor will go to the next eld containing
that point number. The radius is dened in terms of the distance units of the raw data le.
Trav/SS's Options
These settings determine how the network line work will be displayed for total station raw data. There are settings
for traverse data, side shot data, and azimuth control. The program considers any point that has only a single angle
and distance to it a side shot. The user can control the color of the traverse lines. The symbol node display can be
controlled as to symbol type, symbol color, symbol size. The point name can be displayed and its size set from this
setting dialog box.
Error Ellipses Options
These settings determine how the error ellipses will be displayed in the graphic window. Error ellipses will only be
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 624
displayed if there is a successful least squares adjustment. The display of the error ellipses is relative. The program
automatically determines a default relative error ellipse size. The user can modify the visual size of the error ellipses
using the track bar in the following dialog box. The user can also control the color of the error ellipse from the
following dialog box.
GPS Options
The settings in the following dialog box determine how GPS vectors will be displayed in the graphic window. The
user can control the color of the GPS vector lines. The symbol node display can be controlled as to symbol type,
symbol color, symbol size. The GPS point names can be displayed and their size set from this setting dialog box.
Some statutes and jurisdictions still require the computation of traditional traverse closures. SurvNet gives the
surveyor the ability to compute the closures of multiple traverses within a project as part of the preprocessing of the
project raw data. Closures for single or multiple traverses can be computed for a single project. Additionally, GPS
closures can be computed for GPS loops. To compute closures you must rst create a ''Closure'' le (.CLS). Closure
les dene the type of traverse loops that are to be computed and the point numbers that make up the traverse.
There are two options in the FILE menu that are used to create and edit the closure, .cls, les:
Open Traverse Closure File
New Traverse Closure File
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 625
After choosing the 'New Traverse Closure File' you will be prompted for a new le name. After choosing a le name
the following dialog box is displayed.
First enter the point sequence which denes the traverse in the bottom left edit box. Check the bottom check boxes
to set whether vertical closure and angle closures need to be computed. Then choose what type traverse is being
entered. When the bottom elds are correct press the 'Add' button and the traverse will be entered into the upper list
box.
If you need to edit one of the traverses in the top list box mouse click the traverse to be edited. The elds will be
entered in the lower edit elds. Make the appropriate edits, then click the 'Change' button to save the changes to the
upper list box.
Enter the points that dene the traverse. Points can be entered in the form:
1,23,30-35,45,23,1
A comma separates the point numbers. You can select a range (30-35) when the points are sequential. You
must start with the rst backsight point number and end with the last foresight point number. For example,
if you have a simple loop traverse with angle closure using points 1, 2, 3 and 4, it will be entered as ''4,1,2,3,4,1''
where 1 is the rst occupied point and 4 is the initial backsight.
You can turn the ''Angle Closure'' ON or OFF. If the angle closure is ON, you will be shown the total angu-
lar error and error per angle point. If the nal closing angle was not collected you can turn ''Angle Closure'' OFF
and only the linear closure will be computed.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 626
You can turn the ''Vertical Closure'' ON or OFF. If the vertical closure is ON, you will be shown the total
vertical distance closure.
In order to calculate the traverse closure, you must select the TRAVERSE TYPE. It can be:
Pt. to Pt. Trav. - A point to point traverse is a traverse that starts at a set of known coordinates and ends
at another known coordinate. This option assumes you start from two control points and tie into two control points
if an angle closure is desired and one control point if only a linear closure is desired. The rst backsight distance
and last foresight distance are not used in computing the linear closure. Following is an example.
100,101,2-5
In the above pt. to pt. list Pt 100 is the starting backsight point, Pt. 101 is the starting instrument point. Pt. 4 is the
ending instrument point and the foresight to the angle closure point is point 5. If a closing angle was not collected
the list would look as follows '100,101,2-4'.
Loop Trav., Int. Az. Ref. - A closed loop traverse that begins by backsighting the last interior point on the traverse.
Following is an example.
7,101,2-7,101
In the above example closed loop with angle balance list, point 7 is the backsight point and point 101 is the rst
occupied point. If the closing angle 6-7-101 was not collected the list would be entered as follows ' 7,101,2-7'
Loop Trav., Ext. Az. Ref. - A closed loop traverse that begins by backsighting an exterior point (point not on the
traverse).
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 627
100,101,2-7,101,100
In the above example loop with exterior reference and angle balance list, point 100 is the backsight point and point
101 is the rst occupied point. If the closing angle 7-101-101 was not collected the list would be entered as follows
' 100,101,2-7,101'
GPS Loop Closure: - GPS loop closures can be computed using this option.
A,E,F,A
In the above example GPS loop, closure will be computed from the GPS loop going from A-E-F-A.
GPS Point to Point Closure: - GPS Point to Point closures can be computed using this option.
A,E,D,B
In the above example the closure will be computed from the GPS traverse going from A-E-D-B. The starting and
ending points MUST be control points.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 628
After the closure, .CLS, le has been created the preprocessing project settings need to be updated to include
the closure le in the project. Following is a view of the settings screen that denes a closure le to be used in
preprocessing. Notice that the check box 'Compute Traverse Closure' is checked and a closure le has been entered
in the edit box eld. Notice that the 'Edit/Create' button can be used to edit an existing closure le or create a new
closure le.
When the data is processed, the closure reports will appear in the RPT and ERR les. You will notice that two
closures are shown, one with no angle balance and one with angle balance.
Following is an example of a closed loop traverse report:
Traverse Closures
=================
Traverse points:
103-118,43-44
Traverse starting and ending on different points;
Compute angle closure.
Compute vertical closure.
BS IP FS Angle FS H. Dist. FS V. Dist.
103 104 105 173-07'48.5'' 310.4921 -7.7483
104 105 106 167-48'21.5'' 253.4875 5.6291
105 106 107 200-52'46.0'' 381.4923 8.4877
106 107 108 149-09'05.5'' 410.5476 -16.6830
107 108 109 080-42'36.5'' 245.5731 9.4221
108 109 110 174-21'17.5'' 175.3848 -5.6971
109 110 111 201-42'21.5'' 367.0019 -11.8161
110 111 112 171-52'54.5'' 237.7809 7.5346
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 629
111 112 113 192-32'53.5'' 368.8402 -7.0329
112 113 114 171-30'59.0'' 338.0028 -19.1945
113 114 115 184-54'03.5'' 344.5010 16.3157
114 115 116 149-20'19.5'' 353.8460 7.5562
115 116 117 202-19'01.5'' 390.1123 -9.9180
116 117 118 112-36'32.0'' 293.9935 2.0060
117 118 43 146-06'36.5'' 411.3680 -7.7112
118 43 44 270-04'01.5''
Closing Az: S 47-39'47.8''W
Computed Closing Az: S 47-39'51.3''W
Total angular error: 000-00'03.5''
Angular error per point: 000-00'00.2''
Correct Ending Coordinates, North: 1400952.0140 East: 2241884.7010
Ending Coordinates, North: 1400951.7936 East: 2241884.8160
Error, N: -0.2204 E: 0.1150 Total: 0.2486 Brg: N 27-33'06.7''W
Distance Traversed: 4882.4241 Closure: 1: 19643
Correct Ending Elevation: 948.1710
Ending Elevation: 948.1203
Elevation Error: -0.0507
Closure After Angle Adjustment
103 104 105 173-07'48.3'' 310.4921 -7.7483
104 105 106 167-48'21.3'' 253.4875 5.6291
105 106 107 200-52'45.8'' 381.4923 8.4877
106 107 108 149-09'05.3'' 410.5476 -16.6830
107 108 109 080-42'36.3'' 245.5731 9.4221
108 109 110 174-21'17.3'' 175.3848 -5.6971
109 110 111 201-42'21.3'' 367.0019 -11.8161
110 111 112 171-52'54.3'' 237.7809 7.5346
111 112 113 192-32'53.3'' 368.8402 -7.0329
112 113 114 171-30'58.8'' 338.0028 -19.1945
113 114 115 184-54'03.3'' 344.5010 16.3157
114 115 116 149-20'19.3'' 353.8460 7.5562
115 116 117 202-19'01.3'' 390.1123 -9.9180
116 117 118 112-36'31.8'' 293.9935 2.0060
117 118 43 146-06'36.3'' 411.3680 -7.7112
118 43 44 270-04'01.3''
Closing Az: S 47-39'47.8''W
Computed Closing Az: S 47-39'47.8''W
Total angular error: 000-00'00.0''
Angular error per point: 000-00'00.0''
Correct Ending Coordinates, North: 1400952.0140 East: 2241884.7010
Ending Coordinates, North: 1400951.7739 East: 2241884.8363
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 630
Error, N: -0.2401 E: 0.1353 Total: 0.2756 Brg: N 29-24'26.1''W
Distance Traversed: 4882.4241 Closure: 1: 17715
Following is an example of a GPS loop closure report:
Traverse Closures
=================
GPS Loop Points:
A,E,F,A
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X: -0.0323 Y: -0.0162 Z: -0.0105
Closure error: 0.0376 Perimeter: 20229.3858
Precision: 1:537594
GPS Loop Points:
C,F,D,B,C
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X: -0.0121 Y: -0.0101 Z: 0.0002
Closure error: 0.0158 Perimeter: 41332.9807
Precision: 1:2622216
GPS Loop Points:
F,D,B,F
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X: -0.0022 Y: -0.0044 Z: 0.0097
Closure error: 0.0109 Perimeter: 30814.5047
Precision: 1:2833226
SurvNet provides the ability to generate reports that give the surveyor the information needed to determine if his
survey is within ALTA positional tolerances. It is required that the user dene which points are to be included in the
ALTA testing. The points to be included for ALTA testing are dened in an .Alt le.
There are two options in the FILE menu that are used to create and edit the ALTA, .alt, les:
Open ALTA, Rel. Err. Ellipse File
New ALTA, Rel. Err. Ellipse File
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 631
After choosing the ALTA le to be created or edited the following dialog box is displayed.
The above dialog box allows the user to dene the points to be included in the ALTA report processing. There
are two sections in the .RPT le created through the ALTA reporting. The following report shows the sections of
the ALTA report generated by the data in the dialog box. The rst section of the report displays only the relative
error ellipses between points. The point sequences used in this section come from the list on the right hand side
of the above dialog box. The second section of the report performs an ALTA tolerance test and displays only
those connections that fall outside of the ALTA tolerances (as set in the ADJUSTMENT tab of the SETTINGS
dialog box). The program rst checks the specic point sequences dened by the list on the right side of the dialog
box. The program then checks all the connections between all the points listed on the left hand side of the dialog box.
There can be many connections to check if the point list on the left hand side of the dialog box has a lot of
points. The user can limit the number of sequences to be displayed that fail the ALTA test by entering a number in
the ''Max. Connections to display'' eld.
Notice that you can enter points based on descriptions in the left hand list box. If you wished to check con-
nections between all points with TP, EIP, MON descriptions, enter the descriptions in the edit eld and press the
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 632
'Add' button. If TP, EIP, and MON represented traverse points, existing iron pipes and monuments then ALTA
testing would be performed on those point types.
After you have created the .ALT point le you need to set a few project settings. These settings dene the ALTA
tolerances, specify the .ALT le to be used, and dene the type of reporting to be generated. The 'Adjustment' tab
sheet within the project 'Settings', has a relative error ellipse section where the ALTA report settings are located.
All the ALTA reporting settings reside within the Relative Error Ellipse box.
The 'Rel. Err. Points File:' check box must be checked, and an .ALT le must be chosen to get an ALTA report. The
.ALT le denes which points will be included in the ALTA reporting. See the previous discussion on the creation
of the .ALT le if you are unsure of how to create an .ALT le.
Check the 'Include ALTA tolerance report' check box to create the ALTA tolerance checking report section. If an
.ALT le has been chosen then the relative error section of the report will always be generated.
Next make sure the appropriate tolerance and PPM has been dened. The ALTA standards dene their positional
standard as .07 plus 50 PPM. Additionally, the ALTA standards require that the computations be performed to a
95% condence. The condence interval is set in the 'Condence Interval:' edit eld.
The following is a sample ALTA report:
Relative Error and ALTA Tolerances
==================================
SPECIFIC CONNECTIONS: Tolerance of 0.070 + 50 PPM. at the 95% CI.
Actual Allowable Ratio
Sta. Sta. Dist. Semi Major Semi Major Actual/Allowable Semi Minor Max. Err. Az.
27 500 204.5030 0.0793 0.0802 0.9890 0.0588 S 85-06'32.2''E
500 502 66.8572 0.1132 0.0733 1.5432 0.0842 S 86-05'06.7''E
*
34 36 237.9748 0.0731 0.0819 0.8920 0.0731 N 00-00'00.0''E
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 633
ALL CONNECTIONS: Tolerance of 0.070 + 50 PPM. at the 95% CI.
All possible connections between the following points were checked:
505,506,507,508,509,510,511,512,513,514,515,516,517,518,519,520,521,522,523,524,525,550,551,552,553,554,555,556,
557,558,559,560
Actual Allowable Ratio
Sta. Sta. Dist. Semi Major Semi Major Actual/Allowable Semi Minor Max. Err. Az.
506 556 806.5402 1.0818 0.1103 9.8054 0.2586 S 86-37'40.4''E
507 556 827.2364 1.0832 0.1114 9.7268 0.2446 S 86-37'05.9''E
505 556 818.7994 1.0779 0.1109 9.7158 0.2386 S 86-48'24.5''E
508 556 854.9436 1.0836 0.1127 9.6108 0.2477 S 86-38'39.4''E
509 556 880.6338 1.0848 0.1140 9.5129 0.2489 S 86-45'39.4''E
521 556 798.2729 1.0387 0.1099 9.4500 0.2318 S 87-22'50.2''E
512 556 793.0518 1.0334 0.1097 9.4245 0.2127 S 87-21'38.9''E
517 556 907.2084 1.0856 0.1154 9.4106 0.2379 S 87-07'38.4''E
510 556 918.6572 1.0861 0.1159 9.3682 0.2525 S 86-52'46.5''E
516 556 935.1194 1.0885 0.1168 9.3228 0.2426 S 87-22'21.7''E
511 556 941.3134 1.0830 0.1171 9.2516 0.2283 S 87-33'40.2''E
518 556 962.0899 1.0893 0.1181 9.2231 0.2345 S 87-36'45.6''E
550 556 656.1441 0.9453 0.1028 9.1946 0.1952 S 87-09'41.3''E
515 556 978.6797 1.0882 0.1189 9.1495 0.2484 S 87-34'16.6''E
513 556 981.5606 1.0893 0.1191 9.1477 0.2452 S 87-42'02.1''E
514 556 985.2691 1.0895 0.1193 9.1349 0.2454 S 87-41'57.3''E
519 556 993.3973
1.0904 0.1197 9.1116 0.2388 S 87-32'58.7''E
504 556 1004.0126 1.0838 0.1202 9.0163 0.2643 S 86-11'23.8''E
520 556 1132.1493 1.0918 0.1266 8.6234 0.2423 S 87-17'23.7''E
524 556 1152.1979 1.0948 0.1276 8.5796 0.2993 S 86-39'15.0''E
551 556 530.9691 0.8252 0.0965 8.5471 0.1766 S 87-17'08.2''E
506 555 695.5978 0.8953 0.1048 8.5450 0.2389 S 86-24'27.4''E
556 800 1161.6986 1.0945 0.1281 8.5449 0.2766 S 86-03'20.2''E
503 556 1172.1735 1.0945 0.1286 8.5101 0.2767 S 86-03'36.5''E
522 556 1164.2729 1.0911 0.1282 8.5100 0.2546 S 86-47'21.4''E
If the ''Ratio Actual/Allowable'' is 1.0 or less, the positional tolerance of the two points have passed the ALTA
standards.
The rst part of the report labeled ''Specic Connections'' will show all selected connections whether they passed or
failed. If a connection failed an asterisk will be placed at the end of the line.
The second part of the report, labeled ''All Connections'' will only show the connections that ''failed'' (we chose to
see the worst 25).
If all the connections pass in the SPECIFIC CONNECTION section, you will also see this message in the report:
***
All Specic Connections passed
***
If all the connections pass in the ALL CONNECTIONS section, you will not see any error ellipses. You
will see the following message:
***
All connection combinations passed
***
GPS vector networks can be adjusted with the current version of SurvNet. This chapter will describe the processing
of a simple GPS network. Following is a graphic view of the GPS network that is to be adjusted. Points A and B are
control points. The red lines represent measured GPS vectors. Most GPS vendor's software can output GPS vectors
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 634
to a le as part of the post processing of GPS data.
When processing GPS vectors certain project settings are important. In the following settings dialog box notice that
the 3D-model has been chosen, and SPC 1983 with the appropriate zone has been chosen. The 3-D model and a
geodetic coordinate are required when processing GPS vectors. Though it is not require for GPS processing it is in
most cases appropriate to chose to do geoid modeling.
The following settings dialog box shows the raw les used in processing GPS les. A GPS vector le must be
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 635
chosen. GPS vector les from various GPS vendors are currently supported. Following are the formats currently
supported.
Coordinate control for the network can be in one of several les. The control can be located in the GPS vector le
itself. More typically, the control points can be regular coordinate records in the .RW5 or the .CGR le. The also
can be entered as 'Supplemental Control' in one of the available formats.
When the control coordinates are in the raw data le they are expected to be grid coordinates with orthometric
heights.
The supplimental control le formats support grid coordinates with orthometric heights, geographic coordinates
with orthometric heights, or geocentric coordinates with ellipsoid heights.
If the control coordinates are found in the GPS vector le, they are assumed to be Earth centered XYZ.
As shown in the dialog above, it is not unusual to have different distance units for GPS, total station data,
and control data. GPS vector data is usually in metric units but the total station raw le can be in US Feet. So, the
distance units must be specied for the different raw data types.
In the Preprocessing Settings dialog box the only important setting is the 'Compute Traverse Closures:' options.
If GPS loop closures need to be computed, the loop point numbers need to be entered into a closure le. See the
chapter on traverse closures to see how to create closure les.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 636
There are two GPS standard errors elds in the Standard Errors Settings dialog box. The GPS vector XYZ standard
errors and covariances do not need to be dened as project settings since they are found in the GPS vector data les.
Instrument Centering: This option is used to specify the error associated with centering a GPS receiver over a
point.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 637
Vector Standard Error Factor: This option is used as a factor to increase GPS vector standard errors as found in
the input GPS vector le. Some people think that the GPS vector variances/covariances as found in GPS vector
les tend do be overly optimistic. This factor allows the user to globally increase the GPS vector standard errors
without having to edit the GPS vector le. A factor of 0 is the default value and results in no change to the GPS vec-
tor standard errors as found in the GPS vector le. Acceptable values are 0 through 9. It is not a linear progression.
The following section shows the report generated by the least squares adjustment of the GPS network. Explanations
of the report are included in the report section and are in bold text.
===============================
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Mon May 08 13:03:02 2006
3D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files:
C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\gpsOnly\control.cgr
GPS File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\gpsOnly\chapt16.gps
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\gpsOnly\gpsOnlyl.RPT
Traverse File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\gpsOnly\gpsLoops.cls
Curvature, refraction correction: OFF
Maximum iterations: 10 , Convergence Limit: 0.002000
1983 State Plane Coordinates, zone:4803 Wisconsin South
Horizontal Units: Meters
Confidence Interval: 95.00
Project Geoid Height: 0.0000
Default Standard Errors:
Distance: Constant 0.010 ,PPM: 5.000
Horiz. Angle: Pointing 10.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Vert. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Total Station: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Target: Centering 0.010 ,Height: 0.010
Azimuth: 5''
Coordinate Control: N:0.001, E:0.001, Z:0.030,
GPS: Centering:0.000, Vector Err. Factor:1.0
3-DIMENSIONAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
The following section shows the unadjusted measurements that make up the network. The control coordinates
are displayed rst followed by the GPS vectors. The control coordinates are displayed as latitude/longitude,
SPC Grid XYZ, and geocentric XYZ. If geoid modeling is set both ellipsoid and orthometric elevations are
displayed, ellipsoid elevation in the latitude/longitude section and orthometric elevation in the SPC section.
The GPS vector section shows the unadjusted delta XYZ, variances and covariances of the vectors.
Unadjusted Observations
=======================
Control Coordinates: 0 Observed Points, 2 Fixed Points, 0 Approx. Points
Sta. Latitude Longitude Z (Ellip.) StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
A 43-15'46.28901''N 89-59'42.16399''W 1382.62 FIXED FIXED FIXED
B 43-23'46.36261''N 89-54'00.75701''W 1235.46 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Grid XYZ
Sta. N: E: Z (Geoid): StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
A 140291.2060 600402.2380 1382.62 FIXED FIXED FIXED
B 155110.5390 608083.9250 1235.46 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Geocentric XYZ
Sta. X: Y: Z: StErr X: StErr Y: StErr Z:
A 402.3510 -4652995.3008 4349760.78 FIXED FIXED FIXED
B 8086.0316 -4642712.8473 4360439.08 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 638
GPS Vectors: 13 Observations
From Sta. Delta X Variance Delta X Covariance XY
To Sta. Delta Y Variance Delta Y Covariance XZ
Delta Z Variance Delta Z Covariance YZ
A 11644.223 0.001969 -1.916E-005
C 3601.217 0.001875 1.904E-005
3399.255 0.001965 -1.904E-005
A -5321.716 0.0004316 -4.2E-006
E 3634.075 0.0003838 4.32E-006
3173.665 0.000401 -4.2E-006
B 3960.544 0.000461 -4.46E-006
C -6681.247 0.0005092 4.14E-006
-7279.015 0.0004504 -4.46E-006
B -11167.608 0.00054 -5.5E-006
D -394.520 0.0005442 5.7E-006
-907.959 0.000534 -5.44E-006
D 15128.165 0.0002922 -2.86E-006
C -6286.705
0.0003228 2.68E-006
-6371.058 0.0002616 -2.88E-006
D -1837.746 0.0002462 -2.38E-006
E -6253.853 0.0002554 2.44E-006
-6596.670 0.0002566 -2.42E-006
F -1116.452 0.0001495 -1.58E-006
A -4596.161 0.0001319 1.76E-006
-4355.906 0.0001523 -1.62E-006
F 10527.785 0.0005134 -4.5E-006
C -994.938 0.0004326 4.8E-006
-956.625 0.0004794 -4.54E-006
F -6438.136 0.0001889 -1.84E-006
E -962.069 0.0001992 2.08E-006
-1182.230 0.0001765 -1.78E-006
F -4600.379 0.0001866 -1.98E-006
D 5291.779 0.0001975 1.8E-006
5414.431 0.0002408 -1.98E-006
F 6567.231 0.0001329 -1.3E-006
B 5686.293 0.0001493 1.38E-006
6322.392 0.000121 -1.28E-006
B -6567.231 0.0001103 -1.26E-006
F -5686.303 0.0001495 1.22E-006
-6322.381 0.0001326 -1.26E-006
A 1116.458 0.0001324 -1.6E-006
F 4596.155 0.0001622 1.8E-006
4355.914 0.0001875 -1.64E-006
The optional Traverse Closure section shows the GPS loop closures for the GPS loops dened in the closure,
.CLS le.
Traverse Closures
=================
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 639
GPS Loop Points:
A,E,F,A
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X: -0.0323 Y: -0.0162 Z: -0.0105
Closure error: 0.0376 Perimeter: 20229.3858
Precision: 1:537594
GPS Loop Points:
C,F,D,B,C
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X: -0.0121 Y: -0.0101 Z: 0.0002
Closure error: 0.0158 Perimeter: 41332.9807
Precision: 1:2622216
GPS Loop Points:
F,D,B,F
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X: -0.0022 Y: -0.0044 Z: 0.0097
Closure error: 0.0109 Perimeter: 30814.5047
Precision: 1:2833226
Following are the nal adjusted coordinates. Included in the report are point grid factor, elev. factor and
the combined factor. Following the adjusted coordinates are the error ellipses, followed by the adjusted
measurements section.
Adjusted Geographic Coordinates
Adjusted Grid Coordinates, (Meters)
Sta. N: E: Z (Geoid): StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
C 145233.5553 612043.7117 1103.10 0.0062 0.0062 0.0060
E 145091.9380 595081.6888 914.98 0.0053 0.0053 0.0052
D 154179.9383 596919.0552 894.01 0.0051 0.0050 0.0052
F 146611.7860 601518.4564 1024.24 0.0029 0.0027 0.0028
Adjusted Geocentric Coordinates, (Metric)
Sta. X: Y: Z: StErr X: StErr Y: StErr Z:
C 12046.5807 -4649394.0824 4353160.06 0.0062 0.0062 0.0060
E -4919.3403 -4649361.2195 4352934.45 0.0053 0.0053 0.0052
D -3081.5836 -4643107.3693 4359531.12 0.0050 0.0051 0.0052
F 1518.8008 -4648399.1451 4354116.69 0.0027 0.0029 0.0028
Adjusted XYZ Coordinates Error Ellipses, 95% CI
Sta. Semi Major Semi Minor Max. ErrorAz. Elev.
Axis Axis
C 0.0161 0.0159 S 25-49'31.6''E 0.0157
E 0.0138 0.0137 S 29-24'51.2''E 0.0136
D 0.0133 0.0130 S 11-30'48.4''E 0.0135
F 0.0074 0.0070 S 05-18'52.7''E 0.0073
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 640
GPS Vectors: 13 Observations
From Sta. Delta X Residual StdRes StdDev
To Sta. Delta Y Residual StdRes StdDev
Delta Z Residual StdRes StdDev
A 11644.2435 0.0203 0.4581 0.0062
C 3601.2230 0.0065 0.1502 0.0062
3399.2795 0.0245 0.5521 0.0060
A -5321.7125 0.0039 0.1894 0.0053
E 3634.1005
0.0251 1.2810 0.0053
3173.6781 0.0129 0.6429 0.0052
B 3960.5330 -0.0112 0.5219 0.0062
C -6681.2418 0.0049 0.2181 0.0062
-7279.0098 0.0050 0.2378 0.0060
B -11167.6067 0.0009 0.0406 0.0050
D -394.5281 -0.0077 0.3288 0.0051
-907.9606 -0.0013 0.0568 0.0052
D 15128.1644 -0.0003 0.0194 0.0063
C -6286.7131 -0.0077 0.4275 0.0064
-6371.0592 -0.0009 0.0573 0.0061
D -1837.7566 -0.0107 0.6844 0.0056
E -6253.8502 0.0032 0.2006 0.0057
-6596.6687 0.0010 0.0619 0.0057
F -1116.4498 0.0025 0.2079 0.0027
A -4596.1557 0.0053 0.4606 0.0029
-4355.9139 -0.0077 0.6259 0.0028
F 10527.7799 -0.0053 0.2318 0.0061
C -994.9372 0.0005 0.0223 0.0061
-956.6272 -0.0026 0.1175 0.0060
F -6438.1411 -0.0047 0.3391 0.0050
E -962.0744 -0.0050 0.3507 0.0051
-1182.2367 -0.0062 0.4631 0.0050
F -4600.3844 -0.0057 0.4188 0.0047
D 5291.7758 -0.0027 0.1889 0.0048
5414.4321 0.0010 0.0615 0.0050
F 6567.2308 -0.0003 0.0220 0.0027
B 5686.2978 0.0052 0.4292 0.0029
6322.3917 -0.0000 0.0037 0.0028
B -6567.2308 0.0003 0.0248 0.0027
F -5686.2
978 0.0055 0.4474 0.0029
-6322.3917 -0.0110 0.9511 0.0028
A 1116.4498 -0.0079 0.6903 0.0027
F 4596.1557 0.0004 0.0321 0.0029
4355.9139 -0.0002 0.0128 0.0028
The nal section displays the statistic, followed by sideshots if there are any. Side shots would be a point that
has only a single GPS vector going to or from the point.
Statistics
==========
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 641
Solution converged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:27
Reference variance:0.26
Standard error unit Weight: +/-0.51
Failed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 significance level
14.573 <= 6.927 <= 43.195
Sideshots
=========
Processing a Total Station and a GPS Vector Network
Processing a GPS vector network together with conventional total station data is similar to processing a GPS network
by itself. The only difference in regards to project settings is that a raw data le containing the total station data needs
to be chosen as well as a GPS vector le. The project must be set up for the 3D model and a geodetic coordinate
system needs to be chosen. The total station must contain full 3D data, including all rod heights and instrument
heights measured. Following is a view of the Input Files Settings dialog box showing both a GPS vector le and a
total station raw data le chosen in a single project. It is not uncommon to have different distance units for GPS data
and total station data, so make sure the correct units are set for data types.
Following is a report generated from a project that combined GPS vectors and total station data. Notice that the
report is very similar to the GPS vector only project report. Explanations of the report are included in the report and
are in bold, normal text.
===============================
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Mon May 08 15:08:39 2006
3D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files:
C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\GPSCombined\rawCombined.cgr
GPS File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\GPSCombined\VectorJob.gps
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\GPSCombined\gpsCombined2D.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: OFF
Maximum iterations: 10 , Convergence Limit: 0.000200
1983 State Plane Coordinates, zone:0202 Arizona Central
Horizontal Units: Meters
Confidence Interval: 95.00
Project Geoid Height: -30.000
Default Standard Errors:
Distance: Constant 0.002 ,PPM: 5.000
Horiz. Angle: Pointing 0.6'' ,Reading: 0.0''
Vert. Angle: Pointing 2.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Total Station: Centering 0.001 ,Height: 0.002
Target: Centering 0.001 ,Height: 0.002
Azimuth: 5''
Coordinate Control: N:0.010, E:0.010, Z:0.030,
GPS: Centering:0.001, Vector Err. Factor:10.0
3-DIMENSIONAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Notice that in this example geoid modeling was used. Notice that the ellipsoid elevation is displayed with the
latitudes and longitudes. Orthometric elevations are displayed with the SPC83 grid coordinates.
Unadjusted Observations
=======================
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 642
Control Coordinates: 0 Observed Points, 2 Fixed Points, 0 Approx. Points
Sta. Latitude Longitude Z (Ellip.) StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
17 32-58'09.73116''N 112-47'13.55718''W 179.384 FIXED FIXED FIXED
12 33-04'44.24403''N 112-54'36.04569''W 194.299 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Grid XYZ
Sta. N: E: Z (Geoid): StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
17 218691.215 131994.035 209.384 FIXED FIXED FIXED
12 230946.179 120618.775 224.299 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Geocentric XYZ
Sta. X: Y: Z: StErr X: StErr Y: StErr Z:
17 -2074605.540 -4938403.868 3451206.784 FIXED FIXED FIXED
12 -2082621.133 -4927852.115 3461405.389 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Notice that in the 3-D model distances are not reduced to horizontal or grid. Slope distances are reduced to
mark to mark distances. A Mark to mark distance is the computed slope distance from the monument to
monument.
Mark to Mark Slope Distances: 8 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Dist. StErr
13 51 4013.947 0.022
51 52 2208.268 0.013
52 53 2202.068 0.013
53 18 2714.298 0.016
51 15 1601.219 0.010
52 15 2499.608 0.015
52 16 2639.678 0.015
53 16 2859.648 0.016
Notice that in the 3-D model distances vertical angles are considered as separate measurements. Vertical
angles have also been converted to mark to mark vertical angles.
Mark to Mark Vertical Angles: 8 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Vertical Ang. StErr (Sec.)
13 51 090-04'46.6'' 3.6
51 52 090-14'33.0'' 3.6
52 53 089-43'23.7'' 3.6
53 18 089-58'21.3'' 3.6
51 15 090-27'52.0'' 3.6
52 15 090-05'53.1'' 3.6
52 16 090-07'37.0'' 3.6
53 16 090-20'24.0'' 3.6
Horizontal Angles: 8 Observations
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle StErr (Sec.)
12 13 51 067-58'23.5'' 0.8
13 51 52 160-18'01.7'' 0.9
51 52 53 213-47'22.1'' 0.9
52 53 18 198-52'17.3'' 0.9
13 51 15 240-35'47.0'' 0.9
51 52 15 320-50'46.2'' 0.9
51 52 16 142-02'01.5'' 0.9
52 53 16 061-14'43.7'' 0.9
GPS Vectors: 8 Observations
From Sta. Delta X Variance Delta X Covariance XY
To Sta. Delta Y Variance Delta Y Covariance XZ
Delta Z Variance Delta Z Covariance YZ
12 -507.728 6.64E-005 7.231E-005
13 -5749.936 0.0002136 -1.914E-005
-8484.249 7.969E-005 -6.468E-005
12 5291.644 4.281E-005 4.478E-005
16 -4337.804 0.0001497 -1.252E-005
-3048.755 5.397E-005 -4.592E-005
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 643
13 4725.685 0.0001066 6.211E-005
15 -1175.977 0.0002265 -5.722E-005
1127.564 0.0001289 -9.329E-005
13 5799.369 5.779E-005 5.987E-005
16 1412.130 0.0001984 -1.63E-005
5435.492 7.569E-005 -6.123E-005
15 3797.625 0.0001611 0.0001685
17 -3625.824 0.001025 -8.94E-005
-2841.898 0.0003411 -0.000365
16 2723.952 6.601E-005 6.098E-005
17 -6213.925 0.0001595 -3.951E-005
-7149.837 0.0001187 -8.61E-005
16 3983.996 4.166E-005 3.668E-005
18 -2884.461 9.022E-005 -2.464E-005
-1679.646 6.868E-005 -4.835E-005
17 1260.043 3.331E-005 2.912E-005
18 3329.461 7.695E-005 -1.931E-005
5470.192 6.021E-005 -4.279E-005
Adjusted Geographic Coordinates
Adjusted Grid Coordinates, (Meters)
Sta. N: E: Z (Geoid): StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
13 220822.407 122293.821 205.469 0.011 0.006 0.007
51 222914.991 125719.002 200.982 0.013 0.008 0.028
52 224634.004 127105.001 191.980 0.011 0.009 0.028
53 225289.986 129206.984 202.983 0.011 0.008 0.032
18 225217.062 131920.203 204.850 0.008 0.005 0.007
15 222134.510 127117.007 188.195 0.013 0.008 0.011
16 227273.259 127147.034 186.643 0.007 0.004 0.006
Adjusted Geocentric Coordinates, (Metric)
Sta. X: Y: Z: StErr X: StErr Y: StErr Z:
13 -2083128.851 -4933602.055 3452921.136 0.006 0.011 0.007
51 -2079539.552 -4933856.880 3454699.821 0.008 0.013 0.028
52 -2077907.135 -4933512.881 3456146.639 0.009 0.011 0.028
53 -2075836.064 -4933996.021 3456717.919 0.008 0.011 0.032
18 -2073345.496 -4935074.401 3456676.978 0.005 0.008 0.007
15 -2078403.158 -4934778.040 3454048.691 0.008 0.013 0.011
16 -2077329.484 -4932189.930 3458356.627 0.004 0.007 0.006
Adjusted XYZ Coordinates Error Ellipses, 95% CI
Sta. Semi Major Semi Minor Max. ErrorAz. Elev.
Axis Axis
13 0.030 0.013 N 20-10'14.1''E 0.019
51 0.036 0.019 N 21-18'08.4''E 0.071
52 0.029 0.020 N 29-51'55.4''E 0.072
53 0.030 0.021 N 19-08'38.0''E 0.083
18 0.022 0.010 N 26-26'36.4''E 0.018
15
0.034 0.020 N 17-51'28.5''E 0.028
16 0.021 0.009 N 22-55'33.0''E 0.014
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 644
Adjusted Mark to Mark Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
13 51 4013.941 -0.005 0.244 0.013
51 52 2208.258 -0.011 0.803 0.010
52 53 2202.072 0.004 0.281 0.011
53 18 2714.316 0.018 1.146 0.011
51 15 1601.218 -0.001 0.072 0.008
52 15 2499.610 0.002 0.145 0.008
52 16 2639.683 0.005 0.357 0.008
53 16 2859.656 0.008 0.469 0.008
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.008
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
12 13 51 067-58'22.4'' -1.1 1.3 0.4
13 51 52 160-18'02.3'' 0.6 0.7 0.7
51 52 53 213-47'22.2'' 0.1 0.1 0.7
52 53 18 198-52'17.5'' 0.2 0.2 0.9
13 51 15 240-35'46.5'' -0.5 0.5 0.9
51 52 15 320-50'47.2'' 1.0 1.2 0.7
51 52 16 142-02'01.5'' -0.0 0.0 0.8
52 53 16 061-14'43.4'' -0.3 0.4 0.7
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.6
Adjusted vertical angles
From Sta. To Sta. Vertical Ang. Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
13 51 090-04'55.5'' -9.0
*
2.5 1.4
51 52 090-14'36.5'' -3.5 1.0 2.9
52 53 089-43'25.0'' -1.2 0.3 3.1
53 18 089-58'22.0'' -0.7 0.2 2.4
51 15 090-27'53.0'' -1.0 0.3 3.4
52 15 090-05'52.9'' 0.2 0.1 2.3
52 16 090-07'39.9'' -2.9 0.8 2.1
53 16 090-20'24.9'' -0.9 0.2 2.3
Root Mean Square (RMS) 3.6
GPS Vectors: 8 Observations
From Sta. Delta X Residual StdRes StdDev
To Sta. Delta Y Residual StdRes StdDev
Delta Z Residual StdRes StdDev
12 -507.7297 -0.0022 0.267 0.0061
13 -5749.9259 0.0102 0.699 0.0109
-8484.2524 -0.0037 0.409 0.0072
12 5291.6464 0.0028 0.430 0.0045
16 -4337.7947 0.0096 0.785 0.0074
-3048.7649 -0.0095 1.298 0.0055
13 4725.6931 0.0085 0.818 0.0080
15 -1175.9849 -0.0083 0.549 0.0115
1127.5557 -0.0086 0.754 0.0100
13 5799.3676 -0.0014 0.185 0.0060
16 1412.1252 -0.0048 0.339 0.0107
5435.4912 -0.0010 0.116 0.0073
15 3797.6184 -0.0067 0.524 0.0083
17 -3625.8277 -0.0034 0.107 0.0128
-2841.9072 -0.0093 0.505 0.0109
16 2723.9438 -0.0081 0.999 0.0045
17 -6213.9378 -0.0129 1.022 0.0074
-7149.8428 -0.0061 0.562 0.0055
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 645
16 3983.9875
-0.0082 1.268 0.0054
18 -2884.4705 -0.0092 0.965 0.0079
-1679.6485 -0.0024 0.290 0.0069
17 1260.0437 0.0003 0.049 0.0052
18 3329.4673 0.0063 0.719 0.0079
5470.1943 0.0021 0.276 0.0069
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 3 iterations
Degrees of freedom:27
Reference variance:1.32
Standard error unit Weight: +/-1.15
Passed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 significance level
14.573 <= 35.620 <= 43.195
Sideshots
=========
On the installation disk there are a variety of different least squares projects one can use to become familiar
with least squares and SurvNet. These projects are located in the C&G/Carlson application folder under the
\Data\SurvNet\ subdirectory.
When you open a project for review, you will need to check the project settings, input data les to see if the data
les show up. If they do not, you will have to re-select them.
Simple Traverse with Traverse Closure
This project is located in \Data\SurvNet\2DTraverse. The name of the project is Traverse. This project illustrated
a basic loop traverse with two control points and a known azimuth for control. This project also illustrates how to
obtain traditional closure information as part of the least squares report. The program uses the 2D/1D model and
uses a local coordinate system.
Traverse using State Plane Coordinates
This project is located in \Data\SurvNet\SPCTraverse. The name of the project is TravSPCUSFt. This project
illustrated a basic network with three GPS control points for control. This project is computed using the SPC83 NC
Grid coordinate system. The project is set up to generate traditional loop closure data. The program uses the 2D/1D
model. No elevations are computed or adjusted as there were no HI's or rod readings collected. Notice, that the
project uses two raw data les. One le contains the raw angle & distance data. The other raw data le contains the
control for the project.
Network with ALTA Reporting
The ALTA reporting project is located in \Data\SurvNet\ALTARpt. The name of the project is ALTARpt. This
project illustrates how to perform ALTA tolerance testing on points within a network.
GPS Network with GPS Loop Closures
The GPS network project is located in \Data\SurvNet\GPSNetwork. The name of the project is GPSOnly. This
project is a simple GPS network. In addition to the least squares computation and report, GPS loop closures were
generated for various GPS loops for this project.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 646
Level Network
The differential leveling project is located in \Data\SurvNet\LevelNetwork. The name of the project is network1.
This project is a simple differential leveling network.
Basic 3D Project
The basic 3D adjustment project is located in \Data\SurvNet\3DNetwork. The name of the project is pg08. This
project is a simple four point example network. Notice in the raw data that all set up records have an HI and all FS
readings have valid rod heights. Also note that there are valid vertical angles for every slope distance. Since the 3D
model is a true one process 3 dimensional adjustment, you must enter all valid slope distances and vertical angles.
Be aware that you cannot just enter a horizontal distance and a vertical angle of 90 from reduced eld notes when
adjusting using the 3D model.
3D Project Combining Total Station and GPS Vectors
The total station raw data combined with GPS vectors example is located in \Data\SurvNet\GPSandTtlSta. The
name of the project is GPSandTtlSta. This project illustrates a 3D model adjustment that combines both GPS vectors
and data from a total station. Since there is GPS data the 3D model must be used. Notice that the GPS vectors are
in meters but the total station data is in US feet and the output coordinates are in US feet. Always make sure your
units are correct for each data type especially when using the 3D model.
Resection
The total station raw data combined with GPS vectors example is located in \Data\SurvNet\Resection. The name
of the project is Resect. This project illustrates an angle and distance resection. There is no real difference in a
resection project than any other angle and distance network in terms of how the data is collected or how the project
is set up.
Draw Field to Finish
This command turns data collector eld notes into a nal drawing by matching the descriptions of the eld points
with user-dened codes. The points are brought into the drawing with attributes dened by the code, including the
layer, symbol, size and linetype. Draw Field to Finish also uses an improved coding method.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 647
Example drawing results using the example points and example code denitions
Two les are used in Draw Field to Finish - a coordinate le and a eld code denition le. The coordinate le
consists of point#, x,y,z points with text description elds. The description elds contain codes for the Draw Field
to Finish processing. An ASCII data le can be converted into a coordinate le using the Import Text/ASCII File
command. The eld code denition le denes the layer, symbol, size and other actions to apply with each code.
These le names are displayed at the top line of the Draw Field to Finish dialog box.
Draw Field to Finish can translate the eld points into Carlson points (also called coordinate geometry points
or cogo points) with a symbol, layer, and size dened by the code. The point settings of whether to label the
description, point number, and elevation and whether to locate the point at zero or at the real Z can be found in
the Additional Draw Options of the Draw Field to Finish dialog box. The Draw-Locate Points command has these
point settings stored separately in the Point Defaults menu. Draw-Locate Points provides a simpler method for
drawing points compared with Draw Field to Finish.
Field-to-Finish will layerize the points and linework according to the code denitions. If the layers to use are not
already dened, Field-to-Finish will create the necessary layers and assign different colors. To have the same colors
for these layers in all your drawings, dene the layers in the prototype drawing. The prototype drawing is the
default drawing that is loaded whenever a new drawing is created. To dene layers in the prototype drawing, save
your current drawing and then start a new drawing with the New command. Don't give the new drawing a name,
just click OK. Then dene the layers as desired with the Layer command. When you are done creating layers, use
the Save As command and change to Drawing Template (.DWT) under Save as Type. The default drawing template
that is used is named Carlson12.DWT. This template name will correspond to the version of AutoCAD that is being
used. You can overwrite this default template or make a new drawing template. If you make a new one, you may
want to edit the Carlson icon to use the new one. To edit the icon, highlight the icon with one click and then click
the right mouse button. Choose Properties and then Shortcut and change the drawing template name.
There are two different methods for connecting linework. One method creates line work by connecting points with
the same code. The linetype is dened by the code as either points only (no line work), lines, 2D polylines, both
2D and 3D polylines, or 3D polylines (breaklines). Distinct lines with the same code are dened by adding a group
number to the end of the code name in the data le. With this method, all points with the description CODE1 will
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 648
be one line while points with CODE2 will be another line. Both CODE1 and CODE2 use the denition for CODE.
For example, the code EP could be a code for edge of pavement that is to be connected as 3D polylines. If there are
two separate edge of pavement lines on the left and right sides of a road, all the points for the left side could have
the description EP1 and the points on the right side could be EP2.
The second method is the PointCAD format. This method also connects points with the same code. The difference
is that instead of using a number after the code for distinct lines, you use the same code with an additional code for
starting and ending the line. For example, +0 is used to start a line and -0 to end. So the coding for a segment of edge
of pavement could be EP+0, EP, EP, EP-0. Another special code that has been added to Field to Finish is +7, -7.
This 7 code will use the linetype denition of line, 2D polyline or 3D polyline dened by the Draw Field to Finish
code. For example, if EP is dened as a 3D polyline, then the coding EP+7, EP, EP, EP-7 will create a 3D polyline.
Otherwise codes like +0, -0, which is dened as start and end line, will draw EP as a line. Other PointCAD special
codes are: +4 starts a curved 2D polyline,
*
4 starts a closed curved 2D polyline, +1 begins a 3-point arc, +5 starts a
3D polyline,
*
5 starts a closed 3D polyline, +6 starts a 2D polyline,
*
6 starts a closed 2D polyline, +7 starts a line
whose type is specied by the eld code denition, -05 starts a curved 3D polyline section, -50 ends that section,
+8 starts a 2D and 3D polyline combination,
*
8 starts a closed 2D and 3D polyline combination, -08 starts a 2D and
3D polyline combination curved section, -80 ends that section. //, followed by a eld code, concatenates that eld
code's description on to the point's description. For example, OAK//04 might become LIVE OAK TREE 4'' if the
eld code OAK translates to LIVE OAK TREE and the eld code 04 translates to 4''.
The advantage to the PointCAD method is that you don't have to keep track of line numbers. For example, if you
are surveying 50 curb lines, the rst method would require you to use 50 distinct curb numbers. The advantage to
the rst method is that you don't have to use the start and end codes. Also the Nearest Found connection option
applies to the rst method.
Draw
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 649
Range of Points: Specify the range of points to draw.
Point Group: Specify the point group(s) to process.
Entities To Draw: The Points option draws only the points and point attributes. The Lines option draws only the
linework and the Symbols draws only the symbols. Any combination of these options can be processed as well as
individual processing of each entity.
Draw Within: These options are methods to lter the points to draw. The Polyline method prompts for a closed
polyline and only draws points inside this polyline. The Distance method uses a specied center point and distance
to only draw points within this circle. The Window/Coordinate Range prompts for lower left and upper right points
to dene the rectangular area to draw points.
Point Label Settings: Specify whether you want Draw Field to Finish to label the Point Numbers, Descriptions,
and/or Points Notes which are contained in the note (.NOT) le that is associated with the coordinate (.CRD) le.
Elevation Label Settings: Specify the elevation labeling options. The Label Zeros option will label the elevations
of points with z=0. Use Parentheses will place parenthesis around the elevation text. Use '+' and Use '-' will place
the appropriate symbol in front of the elevation.
Locate Points on Real Z Axis: Choose between locating all the points at real Z elevation, all at zero elevation or to
use the real Z setting as dened in the individual codes.
PC-PT Curve Type: Sets the method for drawing curves with more than 3 points. The Bezier option draws a
smooth polyline through all the curve points. The Sequential Arcs method draws multiple arcs with arc end points
at each of the curve points. These arcs are tangent to the preceding line segment. The Best Fit method creates a
single best-t curve for all the curve points between the PC and PT.
Adjust PC/PT for Arcs to be Tangential: This option will adjust the PC and PT polyline vertices to make the
curve tangential. The program will only adjust these points is the adjustment distance is less than the specied
tolerance. This option applies to cases where the tangents are well dened and the PC/PT are harder to survey
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 650
exactly.
Layer Prex: Optional layer prex added to all entities drawn with Draw Field to Finish.
Erase Existing Draw Field to Finish Entities: When checked, this option will erase from the drawing any old
entities created by previous Field-To-Finish runs before drawing the new entities.
In Range: This option only erases and redraws those Draw Field to Finish entities that are within the specied range
of points to process.
Creating Point Groups: Point Groups can be created in one or two different ways. Each eld code denition
can specify Point Group(s) that all point numbers that use that code will be added to. Multiple eld codes can use
the same Point Group name. Check the By Code Denition checkbox for that option. The second method is to
automatically create Point Groups for each code that is processed. Check the Automatically By Code checkbox for
that option. Ignore Code Sufx, if checked, will cause the codes to be considered after removing the numeric sufx.
For example, points with the EP10 and EP11 codes will both be automatically added to the Point Group named EP.
No matter how the Point Group is created, the Group Name Prex can be used to add a prex to the group name.
Note: if the Point Group already exists, it will be erased rst before being created again by either of these two
methods.
Creating Point Notes: These options append point notes to the coordinate le data for some of the data elds
processed by Field-to-Finish. These notes can then be used by other commands like List Points to report these
elds. For example, this enables List Points to report both the point coordinate le description as well as the point
drawing description as generated by Field-to-Finish.
Flip Text for Twist Screen: This option will rotate the point labels and symbol by 180 degrees when needed to make
them right-side up readable relative to the current twist screen drawing view. This option applies to the Rotate To
Line and Rotate special code (ROT).
Pause on Undened Codes: When checked, Draw Field to Finish will pause if it encounters a description that is
not dened in the code table.
Abort without drawing anything: This stops the command. Run Draw Field to Finish again to correct the code
table.
Use the default settings for this point: This option draws a point in the ''MISC'' layer with no linework. To set
your own default, dene a code called ''SC DFLT''.
Use default settings for all undened codes: This option will draw all undened codes in the ''MISC'' layer by
default or a user specied layer as dened in the ''SC DFLT'' code. A good way to check the data le for unmatched
descriptions is to use the Print Table command and choose the Data Points and Distinct Code options. This command
will print the different codes in the data le and identify any undened codes.
Preview Only: When checked, this option will temporarily draw the points and linework and allow you to review it
with zoom and pan.
Auto Zoom Extents: When checked, this will force a zoom extents after Draw Field to Finish is done.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 651
Report Codes/Points: This routine prints the code table or the data le to the screen, le, or printer. A useful option
here is to print the data le (CRD Points) and choose Sort by Codes which will group the data points by distinct
codes.
Edit Codes / Points: The Field to Finish dialog box allows you to load the coordinate and eld code denition
les, view and edit the code denitions, view and edit the coordinate le, view reports, and then return to the Draw
Field to Finish dialog box to process the les. The top section displays the code denitions. The bottom section
has three columns of functions each pertaining to controls for different elements of the command. The Code Table
section provides controls for settings, sorting and reporting of codes. The Code Denitions section provides tools
for the creation and editing of codes. The Feature Settings section provides controls for the special tree and pipe
feature types.
The code table editor has a list of categories and a spreadsheet of codes. The spreadsheet shows the codes for the
currently highlighted category. The category toolbar buttons allow you to add, remove, edit the names and change
the order of the categories. There are two xed categories. The Unassigned category shows any codes with blank
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 652
categories. The All category shows all the codes. You can control which elds are visible in the spreadsheet by
using the Column Options button. You can make edits to the elds in the spreadsheet or highlight a row and pick
the Edit button to bring up a dialog to edit the code.
Code Table
Code Table Settings: These options provide tools for dening the coding method to be used for processing of the
point data. Various import tools allow for the importing of codes from different software packages. Controls for
handling multiple codes are located on this dialog. All special codes can be replaced to other characters dened by
the user. The special codes are listed and edited on this dialog.
Set: Choose this button to specify a new code table. The name of the current table is shown in the eld to the right
of this button.
Process Carlson Coding: When checked, this option interprets and processes coordinate les based upon the
Carlson Coding method and data collection method.
Process Eagle Point Coding: When checked, coordinate les are processed based on the Eagle Point Data Collec-
tion method. When selected the Eagle Point Codes button becomes available for selection and displays the following
dialog. This dialog allows for customization of the eagle point special designators.
Currently the supported designators include, ''Field Code'', ''Point-On-Curve'', ''Close Line'', ''Line End'', ''Insert
Description'' and ''Bearing Close''. Also supported is the ability to recognize overwriting of descriptions just as
Eagle Point does by using the space separator instead of the ''Insert Description'' designator. Examples of supported
coding are as follows:
.TC Places a node and or line per the eld code library.
TC Places a node and or line per the eld code library.
-TC Species a point on a curve.
TC- Species a point on a curve.
..TC Stops the line.
TC! Stops the line.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 653
.TC+ Closes the line back to the starting point.
TC+ Closes the line back to the starting point.
.TC# Typically coded on the third corner of a rectangle to close the gure with having to locate the fourth corner.
TC# Typically coded on the third corner of a rectangle to close the gure with having to locate the fourth corner.
WV.W1 Places a node as specied by the code ''WV'' in the eld code library and then begins a line as specied by
code ''W'' in the eld code library.
.TC.EP.FL Results in three lines coming together.
TC1.TC2.TC3 Results in three lines coming together. All three lines are specied by the denition of the single
code ''TC'' in the eld code library.
TC.TC1 When used in conjunction with the ''Draw Field Codes Without a Sufx as Points Only'' toggle, ''TC'' will
be recognized as the node and ''TC1'' will be recognized as the line so that if the code ''TC'' in the eld code library
is dened as a polyline, line or 3D polyline, duplicate lines will not be unintentionally placed when this shot only
pertains to a single element. Keep in mind that all line work must have a numeric sufx when using this toggle.
TREE
*
OAK Result on screen would be: TREE OAK
TREE OAK
*
Result on screen would be: OAK TREE
TREE OAK Result on screen would be: OAK
TC1!.TC2-.VLT6# Stops ''TC1'', continues ''TC2'' as a point on a curve and closes VLT6 as a rectangle using the
''Bearing Close'' code.
Note: The use of the ''Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only'' toggle is recommended when using Eagle Point
Coding.
Process CAiCE Coding: When checked, coordinate les are processed based on the CAiCE Data Collection
method. Examples of supported coding are as follows:
169 is just the code 169.
145C10 is the code 145 and line #10.
169C25C is the code 169, line #25, and the point is on a curve.
172C12B is the code 172, line #12, and this point closes the line.
Process SDMS Coding: This option processes coordinate les based upon SDMS coding method. When active,
the program will prompt for an SDMS .PRJ le to process.
Split Multiple Codes:
Multiple codes are dened by including each code in the point description eld separated by a space. A single data
point can be used in different lines by assigning it multiple codes. For instance, a point might be part of both a
curb line and a driveway line with a description of ''CURB DRW''. Field-to-Finish uses spaces as the delimiter for
multiple codes. You should avoid spaces in the descriptions except for where multiple codes are intended or after
the ''/'' character. For example, a code for light post should not be ''LGT POST'' but instead should be ''LGTPOST''.
There are three options for the handling of multiple codes when encountered. The All option will split all multiple
codes and process each code based upon their code denition. When None is select both codes will be processed
based upon their code denition. If the Prompt option is checked on, when Field-to-Finish detects multiple codes
on a point the following dialog will be displayed with options for handling the codes.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 654
Import Land Desktop Desc Key: This option imports and converts a Land Desktop Description Key into a Carlson
Draw Field to Finish (d) code denition le. The Land Desktop Description Key le is a mdb le and is found in
the Land Desktop Project le path. It is located in the under the COGO/DescKey directory.
Import TDS Codes: This option imports TDS codes into the Carlson Field to Finish (d) code denition le.
Import Trimble Codes: This option imports Trimble .FXL le codes into the Carlson Field to Finish (d) code
denition le.
Import Eagle Point Codes: This option imports Eagle Point codes into the Carlson Field to Finish (d) code
denition le.
Import C&G Description Table: This option imports C&G code tables (tbl) into the Carlson Field to Finish (d)
code denition le.
Import Text/ASCII Codes: This option imports code denitions from a user-dened format. Each row in the text
le should represent one code. The program will prompt for the delimiter (ie. comma separated) that is used in the
text le and then for the eld type for each of the columns (ie. ''Layer'' or ''Description'').
Import GIS Feature Codes: This option imports features in a .GIS le from Dene GIS Features into F2F codes.
Import SurvCE Codes: This option imports a SurvCE Feature Code List (fcl) into a Carlson Field to Finish (d)
code denition le.
Export SurvCE Codes: This option creates a SurvCE Feature Code List (fcl) from the current a Carlson Field to
Finish (d) code denition le.
Draw Field Codes Without a Sufx as Points Only: This option is useful for when wanting to use a eld code
sometimes for linework and sometimes for just points but it is preferred to number the lines rather than using start
and stop codes. For example, if the eld code EP is dened to use the Line Entity type, then EP25 will be drawn as
a Line, however if just EP is used, no linework will connect to that COGO point.
Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only: When checked, and multiple codes are detected, only linework will be
drawn for the secondary codes. Points are only created based on the primary code. If you want symbols for all
multiple codes, then this setting should not be checked.
Max Delta-Height for Linework: Use this option to specify the maximum elevation difference that Draw Field to
Finish should draw any section of linework. This option is for use with 3d polylines and lines.
Max Length for Linework: Specify the maximum length that Draw Field to Finish should draw any section of
linework.
Stop Linework At Gap In Point Numbers: This option is a method for controlling the start and stop of drawing
linework. This method will automatically stop linework where there is a gap in the point numbers for the linework
code. For example, if there are points with code EP then points with code CL then more points with code EP, the
EP linework for the rst set of EP points will stop at the last EP before the CL points and then new EP linework will
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 655
start after the CL points.
GIS Special Codes: This option allows you to use GIS attribute for Field-to-Finish special coding. For a select
group of special codes, a GIS attribute can be assigned. When processing the points, if a point has GIS data for the
specied attribute, then that attribute value is used for the special coding. For example, you can have a GIS attribute
of COMMENT set to the Append Description special code. Then if a point has a GIS attribute for COMMENT, the
value of that COMMENT will be added to the description label for that point.
Substitution Codes: This option denes a lookup table for translations of the raw point descriptions. This
translation is done as a pre-processing step before the regular Field-to-Finish processing. For example, if you had
a substitution setup for ''25'' = ''EOP'', then a point description of ''25'' would get translated to ''EOP'' and then this
''EOP'' would be processed with Field-to-Finish. Use the Import and Export functions to load and save substition
codes to a comma separated text le.
Special Codes: This section allows you to substitute the existing predened special codes and characters with your
own. Draw Field to Finish recognizes several special codes. A special code is placed before or after the regular code
with a space separating the code and special code. Here is a listing of the default special codes and characters.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 656
Special Characters
The characters (
*
, -, +, /, and ) can be used and substituted in Draw Field to Finish. The way these characters
are used is that when the le is processed the description eld is searched for these characters. If the ''+'' symbol
was changed to ''-'' then the program would look for ''-'' and change it to ''+''. This is useful when a particular data
collector may not have all the symbols available. With these substitutions you can make a character that is provided
on the data collector generate the symbol needed. Multiple characters can also be used. For example '''' can be used
to in order to produce a ''/'' character or any of the characters listed above.
Special Codes
''/''
Carlson points in the drawing have point attributes including a description. When Field-to-Finish draws the points,
the point description from the coordinate le is processed to match a code. The code then denes the description
that is drawn with the point. For example, consider a code of ''UP'' with a description of ''POLE'' and a data point
with the description ''UP''. The data point description ''UP'' would be matched with the code ''UP'' and the point
would end up being drawn with the description ''POLE''. A special character ''/'' (the forward slash or divide key) can
be used for an unprocessed description to append. Everything after the ''/'' is added directly to the point description
and is not considered a code and no further substitution is done on it. For example, a data point with the description
''UP / 150'' with the same code ''UP'' denition above would be drawn with the description ''POLE 150''.
''\''
This special code takes the part of the description after the ''\'' and puts it as the prex before the point description.
For example, a data point with the description ''TR \ 24ft'' and a ''TR'' code denition with a description of ''Tree''
would be drawn with a description of ''24ft Tree''.
''//''
This special code causes text after the ''//'' to be interpreted as a eld code. That eld code's description is then
appended to the rst eld code's description. For example, if the eld code 02 has the description 2'' and the eld
code OAK has the description oak tree, then 02//OAK will result in the point having the description of 2'' oak tree.
If the ''/'' character has been replaced with a different character, for example with a & character, then the ''//'' code
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 657
would become ''&&''.
''\\''
This special code is the same as ''//'' except that eld code's description is then prexed instead of appended to the
rst eld code's description.
MULT
This code applies when the Split Multiple Codes under Code Table Settings is set to None and you want to override
this setting and explicitly spilt selected codes. Multiple codes apply to points with dual code denitions for drawing
two different style points or for connecting different linework to the same point. For example, if a point is both a
sidewalk and driveway corner, then the point description could be ''SW MULTDR''.
PC
This code begins a three point arc or a curved line when used with the ''PT'' code (see below). The point with this
special code is the rst point on the arc. The next point with the code is considered a point on the arc, and third point
with the code is the arc endpoint. For example (in point number, X, Y, Z, description format),
10, 500, 500, 0, EP PC - start curve
11, 525, 527, 0, EP - second point on curve
12, 531, 533, 0, EP - end point of curve
PT
This is a special code that can be used with ''PC'' to dene a curve with more than three points or a tangent two-point
curve. Starting at the point with the ''PC'', the program will look for a ''PT''. If the ''PT'' is found, all the points
between the ''PC'' and ''PT'' are used for the curve which is drawn as a smoothed polyline that passes through all
points and only curves the polyline between points. If no ''PT'' is found, then the regular three point arc is applied
as explained above. If no points are found between the ''PC'' and ''PT'', then the point prior to the ''PC'' and the point
after the ''PT'' are used to create tangents for the resulting curve.
CTOG
This special code toggles curve mode on and off. Instead of using PC to start a curve, you can use CTOG. Likewise,
instead of using PT to end a curve, you can use CTOG.
CLO
This code forces the lines drawn between a series of points with the same code to close back to the rst point with
the same code. For example, shots 1-4 all have the BLD description with the exception of point 4. Its description
is BLD CLO. This will force the linework drawn for the BLD code to close back to point 1 which is the rst point
with the description of BLD.
GAP
This special code makes a single segment break in the current linework. For example, if you have a curb polyline
that you want to break to skip over a driveway, then you could add the GAP code at the start of the driveway and
continue the curb as normal on the other side.
NE
This code represents no elevation. A point with this special code is located at zero elevation.
NOS
This code indicates that the point should be ''non-surface''; that is, that it should be ignored when contouring or
creating surfaces. This can also be controlled per-eld code by turning on the Non-Surface toggle in the Edit Field
Code Denition dialog box.
ZO
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 658
This code represents elevation only (Z-Only). A point with this special code is used at part of a 3D polyline for
elevating the 3D polyline without effecting the horizontal position of the polyline. For example, this code could
be used on a grade break point along a cube where only the elevation should change and not the horizontal alignment.
PHOTO
This code attaches a photo le to the point. The name of the photo le should be right after the PHOTO code. Use
the Image Inspector command to view photos attached to points.
Offsets: OH, OV, OFL, OFB
The codes ''OH'' and ''OV'' stand for offset horizontal and offset vertical. These offset codes apply to 2D and 3D
polylines. A single set of offset codes can be used to offset the polyline a set amount. For example,
10, 500, 500, 100, EP OH2.5 OV-.5
11, 525, 527, 101, EP
12, 531, 533, 103, EP
This would create a polyline connecting points 10,11 and 12 and an offset polyline with a 2.5 horizontal and -0.5
vertical offset. The direction of the horizontal offset is determined by the direction of the polyline. A positive
horizontal offset goes right from the polyline direction and a negative goes left. The horizontal and vertical offset
amounts apply starting at the point with the offset codes until a new offset code or the end of the polyline. Only one
horizontal and vertical offset can be applied to 2D polylines. For 3D polylines, multiple offset codes can be used to
make a variable offset. For example,
10, 500, 500, 100, EP OH2.5 OV-.5
11, 525, 527, 101, EP OH5.5 OV-.75
12, 531, 533, 103, EP OH7.5
This would offset the rst point horizontal 2.5 and vertical -0.5, the second point horizontal 5.5 and vertical -0.75
and the third point horizontal 7.5 and vertical -0.75.
When there are multiple ''OH'' codes for the same point, the polyline is offset multiple times.
The ''OFL'' code stands for offset left horizontal. The only difference with the ''OH'' code is that you don't have to
enter the ''-'' to go left.
The ''OFB'' code stands for offset both left and right horizontal. For example, if the points follow the center of a
ROW, the OFB code can be use to create the left and right edges of the ROW.
SZ
This code is used to set a different symbol size. There are several ways to use this code. It can take multiple scale
factors for different dimensions by putting an ID character after the factor.
SZ: If nothing follows the SZ code, then the next point with the same eld code as the current point will be used to
determine the size.
SZ#: The value of the new symbol size is specied after the SZ. This value is the actual size in drawing units. For
example, SZ2.
SZ#X: The value after the SZ is used to scale the symbol in the X dimension. For example, SZ2X.
SZ#Y: The value after the SZ is used to scale the symbol in the Y dimension. For example, SZ2Y.
SZ#Z or SZ#V: The value after the SZ is used to scale the symbol in the Z (Vertical) dimension. For example, SZ2Z.
SZ#H: The value after the SZ is used to scale the symbol in the X,Y (Horizontal) dimensions. For example, SZ2H.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 659
SZ#S: The value after the SZ is a symbol size scaler that get multiplied by the drawing horizontal scale to determine
the actual drawing units. For example, SZ0.2S.
The X, Y, Z, V and H can be combined. For example, to scale a symbol by 10 horizontally and 25 vertically, use
SZ10H25Z. Or to scale a symbol by 2 in the X direction and 4 in the Y direction, use SZ2X4Y.
When multiple SZ codes are used in the same point description, the symbol is drawn multiple times at the different
sizes. For example, a point description of ''TREE SZ5 SZ10'' will draw the tree symbol twice. One symbol will be
size 5 and the other size 10.
ROT
This code is used to set the rotation of the point symbol. If a point number follows the ROT code, then angle from the
current point to this point number is used for the rotation. For example, ''ROT45'' would rotate the symbol towards
point number 45. If there is no point number after the ROT code, then the rotation point is the next point number
with the same code as the current point or a companion code for the current code. ROT can also be used to rotate
towards an angle clockwise from north by using +' or -' in front of the number. For example ROT+45 rotates the
point symbol to the northeast and ROT-90 rotates the point symbol to the west.
SMO
This code is used to smooth the polyline.
AZI & DIST
The AZI and DIST codes are used together to locate an offset point. The AZI sets the offset azimuth and DIST sets
the distance. The values should directly follow the code. For example, AZI25 DIST4.2 would draw the point offset
4.2 at an azimuth of 25 degrees.
JOG
The ''JOG'' special code allows for additional points to be inserted into the line work at perpendicular or straight
offsets. Only offsets should follow the JOG code. Positive numbers indicate a jog to the right and negative numbers
indicate a jog to the left. Alternatively, ''R#'' and ''L#'' can be used where # is the distance to either the right or the
left. Finally, ''S#'' can be used to make an offset straight ahead by using a positive # or behind by using a negative #.
For example, ''BLDG JOG S10.1 R5 L12.2 L5 L12.2'' or equivalently ''BLDG JOG S10.1 5 -12.2 -5 -12.2'' advances
10.1 units and then draws a closed rectangle on the right hand side of an existing line. The offsets are always done
in the X-Y plane. If the current line is vertical, an offset to the right is along the positive X-axis.
JPN
The ''JPN'' (Join to Point Name) special code joins to the point named immediately after the code. For example,
''JPN205'' causes a line to be drawn from the current point to the point ''205''. JPN is designed to work for adding a
segment at the start of linework. So the point with the JPN code should be at rst segment of the linework.
NEAR
This special code sets the current polyline to Nearest Found connection order. This applies to codes that have the
Connection Order set to Sequential and you want to override this setting to Nearest Found for the current polyline.
RECT
The ''RECT'' special code causes a rectangle to be formed on a 2D or 3D polyline using one of two different methods.
If a number follows ''RECT'' (e.g., ''RECT10''), a rectangle will be drawn 10 units to the right of the last two points
ending on the point with the ''RECT'' code. Use a negative offset to place the rectangle on the left side (e.g., ''RECT-
2.5''). For example if locating the left side of a 10' rectangular concrete pad using the code conc for concrete, the
description of the two left points would be (conc) for the rst point and (conc rect10) for the second. If no number
follows ''RECT'', then the polyline will be closed by shooting right angles from the rst point of the polyline and the
current point and creating a new point where those two lines cross. This method requires three points be established
on the pad.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 660
LTF
The ''LTF'' (LineType Flip) special code switches the side for the linetype. This option applies to non-symmetrical
linetypes like the treeline or guard rail for when you want the linetype to face the other way.
CIR
The ''CIR'' special code causes the point to create a circle in one of three different ways. The rst way uses just the
current point as the center with the CIR special code followed immediately by the radius. For example ''CIR7.5''
will create a circle centered on this point with radius 7.5 and at the elevation of the current point. The second
method uses two points, the rst point specifying the center and the elevation, and the second point specifying the
radius. Only the rst point has the ''CIR'' special code and the second point is the next point with a matching eld
code. The third method uses 3 or more points that specify the perimeter of the circle in 2D with the rst point
specifying the elevation. For this method, the ''CIR'' special code is only on the rst point and the rest of the points
are the next points with matching eld codes.
The ''CIR'' code can be used with all of the linetypes including ''points only''. The circles are always parallel to the
X-Y plane. Any active linework for the code is ended before processing the ''CIR'' special code.
PointNo. Description
Method 1 (Single point at center with radius value)
82 PP CIR7.5
Method 2 (Point at center plus point at perimeter)
83 PP CIR
84 PP
Method 3 (Points on perimeter)
85 PP CIR
86 PP
87 PP
88 PP
89 PP
For Multi-Point 2ND Code
When used on the rst point of a multi-point symbol, the ''2ND'' code indicates that the second point of the sequence
(i.e., the next point after the current one) should be used as the second symbol insertion point for a multi-point
symbol. Please refer to Symbol Pts in the Edit Field Code Denition section below.
For Multi-Point 3RD Code
When used on the rst point of a multi-point symbol, the ''3RD'' code indicates that the third point of the sequence
should be used as the third symbol insertion point. The ''3RD'' code should be used with the ''2ND'' code. Please
refer to Symbol Pts in the Edit Field Code Denition section below.
3D Special Codes
Below are the special codes that can be used for the easy creation of 3D surfaces. The resulting 3D face entities can
be viewed in the Carlson 3D viewer by entering ''cube'' on the command line.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 661
FACE3D
Makes a triangle mesh of 3D face entities by triangulating points starting with the current point and continuing until
the line ends or another 3D special code is found. The points must be ordered along the perimeter. Although the
mesh will be built if the points are clockwise or counterclockwise along the perimeter, the visible side in the Carlson
3D viewer, ''cube'', is the clockwise side by default. On the Advanced tab, the shading mode may be set to Shade
both or Shade back if you would prefer to see both sides or just the counter-clockwise side.
HOLE3D
Makes an exclusion area within the triangle mesh identied by the point number following this code (e.g.,
''HOLE3D101'' will start a hole in point # 101). If no point number is given (''HOLE3D''), the exclusion area is
applied to the last mesh or if there is a mesh in the process of being constructed by the current sequence of points, it
is ended and the hole is applied to it. Note that a hole can only be applied to a mesh that was created by FACE3D
(not BLOCK3D or WALL3D). Note also that it can be difcult to predict what the ''last mesh'' was if it used a
different eld code since the points of the coordinate le are processed by order of eld code rst and then point
number. There is no limit to how many holes can be applied to a FACE3D mesh. The points of the hole itself are
not added to the FACE3D mesh; they are projected on to the best plane that contains the FACE3D mesh and then
the hole is cut-out.
Example 1:
2500 HOUSE1 FACE3D /front of house
2501 HOUSE1
2502 HOUSE1
2503 HOUSE1
2504 HOUSE1
2505 VENT1 HOLE3D2500 /applies 2505-2508 as a hole to last mesh that uses point #2500. So any point in the
range 2500-2504 would have the same effect.
2506 VENT1
2507 VENT1
2508 VENT1
Example 2:
2500 HOUSE1 FACE3D /front of house
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 662
2501 HOUSE1
2502 HOUSE1
2503 HOUSE1
2504 HOUSE1
2505 HOUSE1 HOLE3D /stops the above mesh and applies 2505-2508 as a hole
2506 HOUSE1
2507 HOUSE1
2508 HOUSE1
Example 3:
2500 HOUSE1 FACE3D /front of house
2501 HOUSE1
2502 HOUSE1
2503 HOUSE1
2504 HOUSE1
2505 WINDOW1 FACE3D HOLE3D2503 /applies 2505-2508 as a hole to above mesh 2500-2504 and starts a new
mesh using the WINDOW eld code.
2506 WINDOW1
2507 WINDOW1
2508 WINDOW1
Example 4 (same result as Example 3):
2500 HOUSE1 FACE3D /front of house
2501 HOUSE1
2502 HOUSE1
2503 HOUSE1
2504 HOUSE1
2505 WINDOW1 FACE3D /starts a new mesh using the WINDOW eld code.
2506 WINDOW1
2507 WINDOW1
2508 WINDOW1 HOLE3D2504 /makes the mesh 2505-2508 also be a hole in the mesh 2500-2504.
BLOCK3D
Makes a set of 3D faces to make a 3d block using the height value entered after the code (e.g., ''BLOCK3D2.3'' with
height 2.3). Heights can be positive or negative. With 3 points, makes a parallelogram base that is extruded up (or
down if height is negative) to form a 6-sided block, including top and bottom. With 4 or more points, makes a closed
polygon for the base that is then extruded by the height. The points can be laid out in clockwise or counterclockwise
order around the perimeter. The perimeter or base does not have to be a convex polygon.
WALL3D
Makes a set of 3D faces above the polyline using a height value entered after the code (e.g., ''WALL3D2.3'' with
height 2.3). The height can be negative if the points on the top of the wall have been shot. If no parameter exists,
then the height is determined by the distance from the current point to the next point. This is a signed distance so
the surveyor can shoot either the top of the wall or the bottom of the wall. Both sides of the wall will have triangles
and so both sides will always be visible in the Carlson 3D viewer ''cube''.
Example 5 6' high wall shot along the bottom:
2000 1000.000 1060.000 100.000 WALL1 WALL3D6.0 /wall 6'
2001 1100.000 1060.000 100.000 WALL1
2002 1100.000 1160.000 100.000 WALL1
Example 6 6' high wall, height specied by 1st to 2nd point, shot along the top:
2020 1100.000 1160.000 100.000 WALL2 WALL3D /height by 2nd pt
2021 1100.000 1160.000 106.000 WALL2
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 663
2022 1000.000 1160.000 106.000 WALL2
Load Default
This button sets the special codes to Carlson, Eagle Point, Geopak, InRoads or TMOSS defaults.
Code Table (continued)
Sort Table - This sorts the code table by either code name or layer.
Report Codes/Points - This routine prints the code table or the data le to the screen, le, or printer. A useful option
here is to print the data le (CRD Points) and choose Sort by Codes which will group the data points by distinct
codes.
Code Table by CRD - This command will create code table denitions based on the coordinate le eld descrip-
tions. This is useful when creating a code table from scratch.
Save: Saves the Draw Field to Finish eld code denition (.FLD) le.
Save As: Reacts the same as Save but allows for specication of le name and location to save to.
Code Denitions
Edit: If only one eld code is selected, then this command opens the Edit Field Code Denition dialog box. If
multiple eld codes are selected (by holding down the control key or shift key and clicking on the rows), then the
Multiple Set dialog box will open.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 664
The code denition dialog has three tabs: General, Symbol and Linetype. Here are the settings under General:
Processing ON: This toggle controls whether this code will be processed.
Code: This is the key name that identities the code and is matched with the eld data descriptions. It is
important to note that the
*
character, used in this eld, is regarded as a wildcard or ''match anything'' code. For
example, a eld code denition with the code dened as TREE
*
will be used for any raw description of TREE.
Raw descriptions of TREEA, TREE12, TREE, etc. will match the TREE code denition. This will always be the
case unless there is a more specic code is found. For example is there was a code TREEA in the code denition
le, then that code would be used instead of the TREE code.
Use Code Sequence: This species a sequence type code. Sequences are a way to simplify eld entry of a
sequence of codes. For example, a road cross-section could be SHD1 EP1 CL EP2 SHD2. Instead of entering these
different descriptions, one sequence denition can store these descriptions in order. Then just the sequence code
(such as RD) is used in the eld. The cross-section can be shot in left to right then left right order, right to left then
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 665
right to left order, or alternating left to right then right to left order. The alternating method is known as the Zorro
style. The one restriction is that the shots always start from a right or left edge. To set up a sequence, choose the
Sequence toggle in the Edit Code dialog. Then pick the Dene Code Sequence button. This brings up a dialog for
entering the sequence codes in order. These sequence codes should be dened as normal codes somewhere else in
the Draw Field to Finish code table (ie SHD as a 3D polyline). In the eld, the one template code is used for all the
cross-sections shots (ie RD for all the points). Then Draw Field to Finish will substitute this template code with the
sequence codes (ie substitute RD with SHD).
Resulting points and linework showing Zorro style template
Dene Code Sequence: This sets the code names that make up the sequence.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 666
Full Name: This is an optional eld that describes the code for viewing.
Description: This value is assigned to the point description attribute when the point is drawn. This descrip-
tion can be different than the eld description. An additional description can be added to a point by entering it after
a forward slash in the data description eld.
Use Raw Description: This option turns off the Description eld described above. Instead the points will
be drawn with their original unprocessed descriptions. The Attribute Block option applies to the point block with
point #, elevation and description elds. The Text Attribute applies to drawing the description as text. The format
of the description is controlled by the Attribute Format setting.
Main Layer: The point and line work for the code will be created in this layer.
Distinct Point Layer: When this toggle is selected, the line work is created in the layer dened in the
Layer eld and the points are created in the specied distinct point layer. For example, you could have DRIVEWAY
for linework and DRIVEWAY PNT for the points.
Dual 3D Polyline Layer: Displays the layer that the 3d polyline will drawn on when using an Entity Type
of 3D and 2D. The layer name can be typed in this eld.
Set 3D Layer: Sets the layer that the 3d polyline will drawn on when using an Entity Type of 3D and 2D.
The layer can be selected from the list or typed in at the bottom of the dialog box.
Attribute Format: This chooses the type of point entities to create. The Attribute Block format creates the
Carlson point entity which is block with attributes for point#, elevation and description. The Text Attribute format
creates text entities for each of the point attributes. When the Text Attribute format is selected, the Set button is
available where you can control which attributes to draw as text and the position, rotation, decimals, style, prex,
sufx and layer for each attribute. The Offset Scalers control the distance for the text from the point for the different
positions. These offset distances are calculated by multiplying the scaler by the horizontal scale for the drawing.
The Avoid Overlap With Block Attributes option expands the offset distance starting point from the point to the
bounding box that encloses the point block attributes.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 667
Also, for points notes and SurvCE GIS attributes, you can choose to all or selected elds. For selected, use the Add,
Edit and Remove buttons to build the list of elds to label. To specify the eld to label, the Sequence# method sets
the eld by its order position. For example, a sequence of 3 would use the third attribute for the point. The Name
method sets the eld to label by eld name such as HRMS.
For each eld, there are settings for the rotation, prex, sufx, position, decimals, layer and style. The deci-
mals setting applies to GIS elds that are real numbers.
Besides labeling attributes as text with this method, the Custom Attributes feature is a way to label attributes as
block attributes.
Separate Attribute Layers: This controls the layers of the point and symbol attributes. With ''None'' the
point layers are the standard layers, ''PNTNO'', ''PNTELEV'' and ''PNTDESC'', and the symbol layer is ''PNT-
MARK''. With ''Points'' or ''Both'' the point attribute layers begin with the layer for the code followed by the attribute
type. For example, the ''DWL'' code shown in this dialog has a layer name ''DRIVEWAY''. The point attributes
would then be ''DRIVEWAYNO'', ''DRIVEWAYELEV'' and ''DRIVEWAYDESC''. With ''Symbols'' or ''Both'' the
symbol attribute layer begins with the layer for the code followed by ''MARK''.
Attribute Layout ID: Controls the location of the point number, elevation and description. These attribute
layouts are dened in the drawings that are stored in the Carlson SUP directory with the le name of SRVPNO plus
the ID number (i.e. SRVPNO1.DWG, SRVPNO2.DWG, etc.). If you want to change the attribute positions for a
layout ID, then open and edit the associated SRVPNO drawing.
Point Groups: This eld is for the name of the point group that all points with this code will be added to.
If the points for this code belong to multiple point groups, you can specify multiple point group names in this eld
separated by commas. Under Draw in Additional Draw Options, there is an option whether to automatically use the
code name as the point group name or to use the name dened in the code denition.
Text Size Scaler: This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual size.
Set Color: The line work will be drawn in this color. The default is BYLAYER.
Entity Type: This denes the line entity to be created. Points only does not create any line work. 3D
Polyline can be used for breaklines. 3D and 2D entity type selection creates a 3d polyline in the layer spec-
ied in the Dual 3d polyline layer setting and a 2d polyline in the layer identied in the Layer setting. Since
3d polylines do not display linetypes, this is useful when needing linework in 3d for design work while also
needing to display linetypes for nal plotting of the drawing. This provides an easy and quick way to turn off all
2d polylines or all 3d polylines by using the layer control dialog or the appropriate toggles in the Draw Points dialog.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 668
Elevation Integers: This controls the number of digits to display to the left of the decimal point for the el-
evation label. The All setting will show the full elevation digits. The other settings allow you to limit the number
of digits to display for the purpose of reducing the amount of space the elevation labels take up in the drawing.
For example, if a site is in the 4000 foot elevation range, then this setting could be set to three digits (000) and an
elevation of 4321 would be labeled as 321.
Elevation Decimals: This controls the display precision for the elevation label.
Elevation Prex/Sufx: These set the prex and sufx for the elevation label per code. In the Draw func-
tion under Additional Draw Settings, there is an override to set the elevation prex/sufx for all the codes.
Locate Pts on Real Z Axis: This option will draw the points at the actual point elevation. Otherwise the
points are drawn at zero elevation. For example, you could turn this option off for the FH for re hydrant code to
drawn them at zero. Then the GND code could have this option on to draw the ground shots at their elevations.
Non-Surface: Entities created with this ag are ignored when contouring or creating surfaces regardless of
their elevation.
Companion Codes: This option allows different codes to connect when dened as line, polyline or 3d
polyline. For example, a main line power pole code may be dened as PP while a service utility pole may be
dened as UP. When processing Draw Field to Finish, it may be desired to connect all PP and UP codes together.
This could be accomplished by dening a companion for UP as PP and a companion code for PP as UP. Each code
needs to reference the other as a companion code.
Fixed Parameters: This option is a coding method where you specify a sequence of parameters that follow
the main code. There can be up to three parameters and these parameters can be an additional description or special
codes Size, Rotate, Azimuth, Distance or Offsets. The purpose for Fixed Parameters is to save keystrokes by not
having to enter the special code prex. For example, for a code TR for Tree along with a size 12 feet and description
of Oak, the special code description would be ''TR SZ12 // OAK''. With Fixed Parameters of Size and Description,
the description would be ''TR 12 OAK''.
Data Collection Codes: These settings apply to Carlson Field for turning on the Offset mode and Rotate mode
automatically by F2F code.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 669
Here are the settings on the Symbol tab:
Set Symbol: This is the point symbol for the code. The dialog allows you to select from the symbols de-
ned in the Symbol Library which is setup with the Settings->Symbol Library command. Besides the symbols
from the symbol library, you can also use any symbols that are dened as blocks in the current drawing by entering
the block name in the symbol edit box. To have a point without a symbol, use the Carlson symbol named SPT0
which represents ''no symbol''. Unit Symbol: This option will draw the point symbol at unit (1:1) scale. For
example, this option could be used for a symbol that is already drawn to actual dimensions such as a car symbol.
Random Rotate: This option will randomly rotate the symbol. For example, this option could be used for
tree symbols to have the trees drawn in various orientations.
Rotate To Line: This option applies to points that are part of Field-to-Finish linework. This option will
align the point attributes and symbol to the associated linework.
Symbol Size Scaler: This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual
size in the drawing. The horizontal scale can be set in Drawing Setup.
Custom Attributes: This feature allows you to use customized blocks that have customized attributes (the
tag/value pairs). This feature works for both point attribute blocks and symbols. For attribute blocks, Field-to-
Finish looks for attributes with the tags ''PT#'', ''ELEV2'', and ''DESC2''. The custom attributes feature allows you
to dene additional attributes in their custom blocks on a per-eld code basis. The dialog shows ve attributes at a
time. The number of attributes is unlimited. Use the Next and Back buttons to show more attributes.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 670
For an example, the custom block could have an attribute with the tag ''TREE SPECIES'' and there is a sep-
arate eld code for each species of tree. Each of those eld codes can specify the value that should be assigned to
the attribute that has the TREE SPECIES tag. Then when the points are drawn, the tree species is shown. Note that
the custom attributes must have their Constant and Preset properties set to ''no''. The custom attributes settings in F2F
should not use those tags that the software already handles (PT#, ELEV2, and DESC2), or the setting will be ignored.
The Values for the attributes can be xed strings that you enter in the dialog shown here. Or they can be dynamic
parameters including point#, northing, easting, elevation or description for the current point as well as a point note
or GIS attribute. To setup a parameter value, pick the Set button and then select the attribute. The Decimals setting
applies to elds that are real values.
Besides labeling as block attributes, the Attribute Format method of Text mode is a way to label the at-
tributes as text entities.
Symbol Points: For each code denition, the symbol insertion points can be dened with up to three points. To
dene the symbol insertion points, choose the Symbol Pts button in the Edit Code Denition dialog box. By default,
the symbol insertion is dened by one point at the symbol center (0,0). A one point insertion denition can be used
to insert a symbol offset from the center. With a two insertion point denitions, the program will rotate and scale
the symbol. For example, two insertion points can be used to insert a tree symbol to size the tree, where the rst
point is for the tree center and the second is for the drip line. With three insertion point denitions, the program
will rotate and scale the symbol in both X and Y. For example, three points can be used to insert a car symbol with
the rst point being the front drivers side, the second point as the back driver side (to rotate and scale the length)
and the third as the back passenger side (to scale the width). Besides the insertion point coordinates, you can dene
a description for each point which is used for the drawn point description and is used for prompting in the Insert
Multi-Point Symbol command and in Carlson Field data collection.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 671
Three Point Symbol Drawing
The coordinates for the insertion point denitions are for the symbol at unit size. To gure these coordinates, you
will need to open the symbol drawing (.DWG) le. By default, the symbols are located in the Carlson SUP directory.
For example to make an insertion point for the tree drip line, open the tree symbol drawing and nd the coordinate
at the edge of the tree symbol (in this case 0.5,0.0).
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 672
Two Point Symbol Drawing
Not all of the symbol insertion points need to be used when drawing the points. If a code denition has a three
insertion points, it is possible to use just the rst two or rst one. There are special codes to associate multiple
points to the same symbol. The rst code point is used as the rst symbol insertion point. The ''2ND'' code is used
to specify the second symbol insertion point. A point number can follow the ''2ND'' to identify a specic point.
Otherwise without the point number, the program will use the next point with the current code. The ''3RD'' code is
used to specify the third symbol insertion point and similar to the ''2ND'' code, a point number after the ''3RD'' is
optional. The ''2ND'' and ''3RD'' codes should be assigned to the rst point. For example, consider a code of ''CAR''
with a three point symbol insertion denition. If point #1 has a description of ''CAR 2ND 3RD'', then point #1 will
be used as the rst symbol insertion point and the next two points with the ''CAR'' description will be used as the
second and third symbol insertion points.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 673
Multi Point Symbol Drawing
Draw 2nd Symbol: This option creates a second symbol on each point. This additional symbol can be used to add
a 3D symbol to a 2D symbol used as the rst symbol. Besides selecting the symbol name, there are settings for the
symbol size and layer.
Here are the settings on the Linetype tab:
Set Linetype: Line work can be drawn in any of the special linetypes or with the linetype for the layer
(''BYLAYER''). There are three types of pre-dened linetypes: CAD, Entity and Continuous. The type is shown
as part of the linetype names in the list. The CAD linetypes are the default linetypes available in AutoCAD and
IntelliCAD. The Entity linetypes insert text or symbol entities at the linetype interval. These linetypes are the
same as used with the Annotate->Polyline To Special Line command. The Continuous linetypes dene a special
linetype in CAD and create continuous polylines with that special linetype. These linetypes are the same as with
the Annotate->Change Polyline Linetype command. Besides these pre-dened linetypes within Field-to-Finish,
you can also use any linetype that is dened in the drawing by entering that linetype name in the linetype edit box
or by picking the Select From Drawing button within the Set Linetype dialog. The spacing and size of the special
linetypes is determined by the CAD LTSCALE system variable and by the eld code settings Line Type Spacing
Scaler and Line Type Text Scaler. The special linetype ''hedge'' is drawn with a user specied width. You will be
prompted for this information when you select that linetype. The special linetype ''userdash'' is drawn with user
specied distances for the length of the dash and the length of the gap between dashes.
Line Width: This controls the width for the linework. Only applies to 2D polylines.
Linetype Text: This is the text that is used for the user-dened linetype. First use Set Linetype to either
Other E or UserDef C. Then this text will be used for the linetype. For example, if you have a code for a 8'' PVC
pipeline, then you could set this text to 8'' PVC.
Linetype Spacing Scaler: This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the CAD LTSCALE system variable
to give the distance between symbols in the line.
Linetype Text Scaler: This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the CAD LTSCALE system variable to
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 674
give the size of the text in a line.
Flip Linetype: This option switches the side for the linetype which applies to non-symmetrical linetypes like
the treeline or guard rail.
Smooth Polyline: This applies a modied Bezier smoothing to the polyline. The smoothed polyline will
pass through all the original points.
Hard Breakline: This will tag the 3D polylines created with this code as hard breaklines. In Triangulate &
Contour, contours are not smoothed as they cross hard barriers.
Connection Order: The points of a distinct code can be connected in their point number order or by near-
est found which makes the line by adding the next closest point.
Tie: When checked the linework drawn with this code will always close. For example if you have points 1,
2, 3, and 4 with the code BLDG and Tie is checked on for the code BLDG, then the linework will be drawn from
point 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 and then back to point 1, closing the gure.
Linework Description: This description is labeled along linework created by this code. The Set button
displays a dialog to control the layer, style and size for these labels. You can also set the label interval.
Set Template: For 3D polyline codes, this option allows you to assign a template (.TPL) le to the code. The code
points act as the centerline for the template and the program will drawn parallel 3D polylines for each break point
(grade ID) in the template. The template le is dened in the Civil Design module.
Select All: This option selects all the codes. This can be used when only wanting to process a couple of
codes. For example, use the select all option to select all the codes and then turn them off. Now select the codes for
processing and turn them on. Also it can be used to make a global change to all the codes.
Add: The new code denition is inserted in the list in the position after the currently selected one. If none
are selected for positioning, the new code is placed at the top. Only one code denition may be highlighted before
running this routine.
Copy: This option copies the denition of a selected code. It opens the Edit Field Code Denition dialog
and copies the denition of the selected code to the appropriate settings. It does not copy the name of the code. It is
a time saving tool to use when creating codes that are similar with only a couple of differences.
Cut: This command will remove the highlighted code denitions from the list and puts them in a buffer for
retrieval with Paste.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 675
Paste: This command will insert the code denitions put in the buffer by the Cut command. These codes
will be inserted after the row of the currently highlighted code or at the top.
Search: Allows you to search for a specic code in the list.
Coordinate File
Set CRD File: This command allows you to specify a coordinate (.CRD,.CGC,.MDB,.ZAK) le to process.
Edit Points: This command opens the Edit Points spreadsheet editor. See Edit Points for more details.
Draw: This command returns to the Draw Field to Finish dialog box.
Coding Examples
Under the Carlson Projects folder, there is an example that shows the different ways for linework coding along
with examples for many of the special codes. The examples are in f2f example.crd and f2f example.d. Here is a
breakdown of the features that the points illustrate.
Point 1: Point Entity by itself
Points 2-3: Using Begin code to start a line; end line using Begin code for next line
Points 4-5: Using Begin and End to start and stop linework
Point 6: Point Entity by itself after End code
Points 7-11: Linework by code dened as Polyline entity type; using End as break between linework
Points 12-15: Linework by code dened as Polyline entity type; using Begin as break between linework
Points 16-19: Linework by code dened as Polyline entity type; using # after code instead of Begin/End to separate
linework
Points 20-22: Linework by code dened as Polyline entity type without using Begin/End to start/stop linework
Points 24-26: 3 point curve using on PC code
Points 27-30: 3+ point curve using PC/Point codes
Points 32-33: 2 point tangent curve using PC/Point codes
Points 35-39: reverse curve using PC/Point codes
Point 40: Regular point without extra descriPointion
Point 41: Using // to use a code descriPointion as a sufx
Point 42: Using \\ to use a code descriPointion as a prex
Point 43: Using / to append a descriPointion
Point 44: Using \ to add a descriPointion as a prex
Point 45: Using ROT and a Point# to rotate to that Point#
Point 46: Using ROT and a value to set the rotation
Point 47: Using ROT by itself to rotate to the next Point#
Point 48: Regular point without rotation
Point 49: Using AZI and DIST codes to offset the point
Point 50: Using SZ with value to set size of symbol
Points 51-52: Using SZ by itself to size symbol by the distance to the next point
Point 53: Using SZ with 2 values to draw multiple symbols at those sizes
Points 54-55: Using 2ND code to size the symbol
Points 56-58: Using 2ND and 3RD codes to size the symbol in 2 dimensions
Points 59-62: Using CLO to close the linework
Points 63-64: Using RECT with two points and a value to create a rectangle
Points 65-67: Using RECT with three points to create a rectangle
Points 68-69: Using OH to offset right a xed amount
Points 70-73: Using OH on multiple points to offset various amounts
Points 74-75: Using multiple OH on the same point to offset polyline multiple times
Points 76-77: Using OH with negative value for offset to left
Points 78-79: Using OFL with value for offset left a xed amount
Points 80-81: Using OFB with value to offset both left and right a xed amount
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 676
Point 82: Using CIR to draw circle at specied radius
Points 83-84: Using CIR to draw circle using two points for center and perimeter
Points 85-89: Using CIR to draw best-t circle through points on perimeter
Points 90-91: Using JPN to join linework to another Point#
Points 92-95: Using SMO to create smoothed linework
Points 96-97: Using JOG to create additional linework segment extensions
Points 98-102: Using GAP to create a break in the linework
Points 103-106: Using LFT to switch linetype to left side
Points 107-109: Using WALL3D with specied height value
Points 110-112: Using WALL3D with height from 2nd point
Points 113-115: Using BLOCK3D with height and three points to dene parallelogram
Points 116-123: Using BLOCK3D with height and multiple points to dene perimeter
Points 124-128: Using FACE3D with multiple points to make a surface
Points 129-132: Using HOLE3D with multiple points to dene the perimeter of a hole in the FACE3D surface
Point 133: Using code denition with Attribute Format set to Text and only Elevation turned on with Label Decimal
On Point
PointCAD Coding
Field-to-Finish supports an early Carlson style of linework coding called PointCAD. The PointCAD codes use
numbers with +,-,
*
symbols as follows:
+0 Starts a regular 2D line (not a polyline) that is open.
*
0 Starts a regular 2D line that is closed.
+4 Starts a curved 2D polyline that is open.
*
4 Starts a curved 2D polyline that is closed.
+1 Begins a 3-point arc.
-0 or -1 or -3 or -4 or -5 or -6 or -7 Ends a line.
+5 Starts a 3D polyline that is open.
*
5 Starts a 3D polyline that is closed.
+6 Starts a 2D polyline that is open.
*
6 Starts a 2D polyline that is closed.
+7 starts line whose type (2D line, 2D polyline, 3D polyline) is specied by the point's eld code denition. If the
eld code denition is to use points, then a 2D line is started.
+2 Middle point of 3 point arc
-05 starts a curved 3D polyline section.
-50 ends a curved 3D polyline section.
+8 starts a 2D and 3D polyline combination that is open.
*
8 starts a 2D and 3D polyline combination that is closed.
-8 ends a 2D and 3D polyline combination.
-08 starts a 2D and 3D polyline combination curve that is open.
-80 reverts back to a straight 2D and 3D polyline combination.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 677
PointCAD linework coding examples
GIS Processing
With GIS processing activated, the entities created by Field-to-Finish are linked to a GIS feature name and
attributes. These GIS links can be used by the routines in the GIS module such as Input-Edit GIS Data.
GIS processing in Field-to-Finish starts with the GIS Table setting in the initial Draw Field To Finish dia-
log. The GIS Table is the .GIS le created by the Dene GIS Features command which denes the GIS feature
names and attributes. Setting the GIS Table is optional but useful. The GIS Table is used as the reference in the Set
functions for selecting a GIS feature name to assign to Field-to-Finish codes. Additionally, when processing the
Field-to-Finish codes, any associated attributes from the GIS Table will be attached to the entities. Also, attributes
generated from Field-to-Finish are added to the GIS Table. So using the GIS Table links the GIS module commands
with Field-to-Finish.
Each Field-to-Finish code has settings to assign GIS feature names. In the Edit Field Code Denition dia-
log, the GIS Setup button brings up a dialog for setting the GIS feature names and attribute options for the current
code. Since Field-to-Finish codes are capable of drawing both points and linework and GIS can have different
features for points and linework, there are separate settings for the GIS feature names for points and linework. For
example, a Field-to-Finish code UP for utility pole could be setup to draw both points with symbols at the poles and
polylines between these points. Then you could have different GIS feature names for the pole points and linework
with separate GIS attributes for each.
For Attributes to Create, these options create GIS attribute data which is stored in the database setup by the
GIS Settings command and linked to the entities created by Field-to-Finish.
SurvCE GIS Fields: This option uses the attribute data generated by SurvCE which is stored in a .vtt le with the
same le name as the current coordinate le except with the .vtt extension.
Field-to-Finish Code: This option creates an attribute named CODE with a value of the Field-to-Finish code name
(ie. UP).
Field-to-Finish Full Name: This option creates an attribute named FULL NAME with a value of the Field-to-Finish
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 678
Full Name (ie. Utility Pole).
Special Codes: This option creates attributes for Field-to-Finish special codes including OH (Offset Horizontal),
OV (Offset Vertical), SZ (Size), ROT (Rotation), AZI (Azimuth) and DIST (Distance).
Point Number: This option creates an attribute named POINT NAME with a value of the point number from the
coordinate le.
Drawing Description: This option creates an attribute named POINT DWG DESC with a value of the point
description for the point block created in the drawing.
Coordinate File Description: This option creates an attribute named POINT RAW DESC with a value of the point
description from the coordinate le.
Default Code Tables
Default code tables are installed under Carlson Projects\Settings including Carlson.d and the following DOT's:
CA, CO, FL, IA, IL, IN, LA, MA, MD, MN, MO, MS, NC, ND, NE, NY, OH, SD, SK, TX, WA and WI.
Pipe Surveys The Pipe Feature adds additional properties to the pipe of size, material and name. Also the
Pipe Feature allows for more labeling of the pipe parameters and ability to draw the pipe in 3D.
Important: The Pipe Settings apply to codes that are set to a Feature Type of Pipe. To set the Feature Type,
go to Edit Codes and then the General tab of the Edit Field Code Denition dialog.
When a code is tagged as a Pipe Feature, the prorgram looks for additional parameters
after the code. The parameters are separated by spaces in the point description and in the order of size, material and
name. For example, if code 'P' is dened as a Pipe Feature, then a description of 'P 8 PVC 31' would dene a pipe
point for an 8 inch pipe of material PVC and name of 31. These pipe parameters are optional. The program will use
the provided parameters and leave the rest blank.
To setup the label and draw options, pick the Pipe Setup on the main edit codes dialog. There are options
to label the pipe length, size, material, name and slope. Under Draw Pipe Type, there are different styles for drawing
the pipe line. The 3D Faces option draws the pipe in 3D at the pipe size. The Field-To-Finish option uses the
polyline type (2D or 3D) as dened by the Field-to-Finish code.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 679
Tree Surveys
Tree surveys can be coded simply by using general Field-to-Finish coding methods such as dening a code for
a tree (''OAK'') with a tree symbol and using the SZ special code for sizing the symbol. For tree survey specic
features, go to the Tree Survey button on the main edit codes dialog. This function brings up a dialog with tree
survey settings. The tree survey works with three attributes for each tree: trunk, drip and tag. Trunk is the diameter
of the tree trunk. Drip is the radius of the tree canopy. Tag is an id for the tree for reporting.
Important: The Tree Survey Settings apply to codes that are set to a Feature Type of Tree. To set the Fea-
ture Type, go to Edit Codes and then the General tab of the Edit Field Code Denition dialog.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 680
On the Tree Entry Options dialog tab:
Default Tree ID to Point ID: This option uses the point number for the tree tag unless the point description contains
a tree tag.
Begin Tree ID From: This is the number to start incrementing tree tags from in case the tree coding is missing tags
and you want to assign tags for reporting.
Draw Point Attribute Block: controls whether to draw the point block with the point #, elevation and description
attributes.
Draw Tree Table: This option makes the program prompt for whether to draw a tree table when the program nds
a couple points with tree codes. Otherwise, there must be many tree codes to have the program prompt for creating
a tree table.
Draw Circle for Trunk Diameter: creates a circle with the trunk diameter.
Draw Treeline by Drip Radius in Scale: shrinkwraps the tree driplines to get the overall treeline perimeter.
Draw Tree Symbol for Drip Radius in Scale: draws individual symbols for each tree using the symbols dened in
the code table and scaled by the drip size attribute.
Draw Tree Symbol by Factor of Trunk Size: draws individual symbols for each tree using the symbols dened in
the code table and scaled by the trunk size attribute multiplied by 12. For example, a 10'' trunk size is drawn as a
10ft symbol.
Draw Same Size Tree Symbol: draws individual symbols for each tree using the symbols dened in the code table
and at size of 6.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 681
On the Layer dialog tab, there are optional layer names for different types of tree entities to append either as a prex
or sufx to the layer from the code table.
On the Description Codes tab, there are setting to help identify the tree attributes in the point description. The
program looks for the trunk size, drip size, tag ID and height in the point description after the tree code. By default,
the program expects the attributes to be in the order of trunk size, drip size, tag ID and height. Here's an example
default order:
OAK 16 12 100 28
where OAK is the tree code from the code table, 16 is the trunk diameter, 12 is the drip radius, 100 is the tag ID and
height is 28.
If the attributes are in a different order, then the sufx/prex settings can be used to identify the attributes.
When the program nds a specied prex or sufx, that tells the program which attribute to use. For example, if the
Trunk Sufx is ''in'' and the Drip Sufx is ''ft'' and the Tag Prex is ''T'', then
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 682
OAK T100 16in 12ft
means tag ID of 100, trunk diameter 16 and drip radius 12 feet.
In addition to looking for the tree attributes in the point description, the program can also read these attributes from
GIS elds. On the GIS Attributes dialog tab, you can set the GIS eld names for the tree attributes.
On the Label tab, there are settings for the tree text labels for the size, offset from trunk center, style and location.
When creating a tree table, only the tag text is labeled. Otherwise, the label is drawn. The Label Description Setup
dialog sets which elds to include the the label, the eld order, prex and sufx.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 683
When Field-to-Finish draws entities, the program checks for codes set as tree features and applies the settings from
the Tree Survey dialog. When tree features are found, the number of trees are reported along with a prompt for
whether to draw a tree table. The tree table has the tag ID, code description and trunk diameter.
Here is an example with the following three points:
Point# Northing Easting Description
1 4994.73 4923.15 OAK 24 38 301
2 5034.59 4881.40 PINE 18 24 302
3 4987.32 4975.79 PINE 12 20 303
Dripline drawn as Treeline method along with a tree table.
Another feature of Tree Survey is the Tree Report under the Report Codes/Points function. The Report
Formatter option can be used to make a custom report and output to Excel or create a custom table in the drawing.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 684
Tree ID Botanic Name Trunk
T301 Oak 24''
T302 Pine 18''
T303 Pine 12''
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: d2n
Prerequisite: A data le of points with descriptions
Field to Finish Inspector
This command reviews entities in the drawing created by Field To Finish. Point descriptions can be edited and the
drawing is updated for both the point symbols and linework, using the Field To Finish coding.
Field to Finish Inspector docks a control panel dialog at the bottom of the screen which leaves the drawing view at
the top.
Code: Lists the eld codes that were found in the drawing. Clicking on a code causes the Instance list to show all
of the linework and points that use the selected code.
Instance: Lists the linework and points of the currently selected code.
Point: Lists the points that make up the currently selected linework or point in the Instance list.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 685
Go to Point#: Type in the point # to see in the drawing and then press this button to bring the point # into view. If
the point # is not in the drawing, then a message will be printed at the top of the dialog box. If the Zoom toggle is
on, then the point # will be brought to the center of the screen even if it was already visible on the screen. Likewise,
if Isolate or Highlight are on, then those options will be applied, too.
Zoom: Check this checkbox to make the Field to Finish Inspector automatically zoom and pan the drawing so that
the selected items in the above lists are viewable. Zoom is used on the Code and Instance lists. Pan is used for all
three lists.
Isolate: Check this checkbox to make the Field to Finish Inspector only display the selected items in the above lists.
Highlight: Check this checkbox to make the Field to Finish Inspector highlight the selected items in the above lists.
Restore View On Exit: Check this checkbox to make the Field to Finish Inspector restore the zoom and pan values
when you exit.
Desc: This edit box will display the description eld from the coordinate le used on the given point(s). If the
points do not all have the same description in the coordinate le,
*
varies
*
is displayed instead. If you type in a new
description and then click on Apply, the new description will be applied to the coordinate le and Field-to-Finish
will be used to process the coordinate le and update the drawing, including linework. Press the Code button to
place an existing eld code into this Desc edit box.
Code: Press this button to select a eld code from the current eld code denition (FLD) le. The following dialog
box is an example of what you will see. The Categories on the left are the categories that are dened in the current
eld code denition le. The list on the right is all of the eld codes in the selected category. Select (all categories)
to see all of the codes in all of the categories. The selected eld code will be placed in the Desc edit box.
Apply: Press this button to apply the modied description that is in the Desc edit box to the currently selected
points. The below dialog box will come up that lists exactly what will be changed. Optionally, the raw le that was
used to create the coordinate le will be updated as well. Press OK to continue. The description will be updated in
the coordinate le and then Field-to-Finish will be used to process that coordinate le and nally the drawing will
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 686
be updated to reect the changes.
Code: This button generates a user-dened report with elds for the point number, coordinate, feature name and
code. This report uses the Report Formatter to select which elds to include.
SAMPLE REPORT
Point# Code Full Name Feature Northing Easting Elevation Description
1 CM CONCRETE MONUMENT POINT 4922.730 5570.695 502.510 CM/(4'' DIAM)
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 687
2 CM CONCRETE MONUMENT POINT 4739.612 5499.121 506.050 CM
5 SHED SHED POLYLINE 4794.880 5495.289 505.110 SHED
6 SHED SHED POLYLINE 4771.855 5486.661 505.530 SHED
7 SHED SHED POLYLINE 4782.648 5457.861 505.820 SHED
11 18D 18'' TREE POINT 4889.990 5551.491 503.010 18D/OAK
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: f2f inspect
Prerequisite: Entities created by Field-to-Finish
Enter Deed Description
This command lets you enter line and curve data which is drawn and annotated as entered. When entering in data,
the bearing quadrant and bearing value is input on the same line. For example, a bearing of N45-10-30E would be
entered as 145.1030, where (1) represents the NE quadrant. The numeric codes for the quadrants are 1-4 beginning
with NE as (1) and continuing sequentially in a clockwise direction to the NW quadrant (4). Distance data can be
entered in Varas, Meters, Poles, Chains or US Feet. Curve data can be entered for Non-Tangent, Reverse-Tangent
and Tangent curves. Data used to dene curves includes but is not limited to Tangent Out Bearing, Radius data,
Chord Bearing, DeltaAng and Tangent Length. Prompting for curve data it determined by what curve denition data
is used. When you are nished, the closure and area of the gure is reported. The program has the option to Undo
the previous data entry in case you need to re-enter values. Also, the program auto-saves the data entered during the
command so that if the command is canceled and restarted, there's an option to resume entering data. The command
starts with the dialog shown here.
Line and Curve Layer: Specify the layer name for lines and arcs.
Points Layer: Specify the layer name for the points.
Traverse by: Select between entering bearings, azimuth, gons or point numbers. The points option recalls points
from the current coordinate (.CRD) le. The prompt option adds a prompt for each angle to specify the angle format.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 688
Point Format: Choose between creating Carlson points in the coordinate (.CRD) le at each point in the gure,
drawing descriptions only or having no point labels.
Apply Rotation: This option adjusts the entered bearings by the specied rotation.
Label Lines and Arcs: Specify whether the annotation should be drawn on the lines and arcs or should be added
to line and curve tables. The settings for the label styles are dened by the Annotate Defaults and Auto Annotate
commands. Please see those commands in the manual for a description of those settings. You can either specify
specic settings les from those commands or use the current settings which is the default.
Deed Name: Specify the beginning deed name. Only available when Store to Deed File is checked on.
Draw Linework: Specify whether or not to draw linework, if this is disabled then all annotation options are disabled
also.
Create Polyline: This option creates a polyline of the deed perimeter instead of individual line and curve entities.
Prompt for Descriptions: Specify whether or not the program should prompt you for point descriptions. If this is
not checked, then point descriptions are blank.
Prompt for Elevations: Specify whether or not the program should prompt you for point elevations. If this is not
checked, then point elevations are set to zero.
Plot Point Symbols: If the Point Format is set to Descriptions Only or None, this option is available. It will place
point symbols without creating points in the coordinate (.CRD) le.
Create Radius Points: When checked, radius points will be created for arcs. Radius points are given the description
RADPT.
Store to Raw Data (.RW5) File: When checked, data entered will also be written to a raw data (.RW5) le that can
be opened using the Edit-Process Raw Data File command. This le can be used to perform coordinate adjustments.
The Compass rule, Crandall rule, Transit rule, Angle balance adjustment and Least-square adjustment routines are
all available. See Edit-Process Raw Data File for more information.
Store to Deed File: When checked, data entered will be written to a deed (.PDD) le. This le can be processed
later to correct errors, create deed reports or to redraw the deed. To use this option, set the deed le name by picking
the Specify File Name button. Also set the Deed Name eld.
Prompts
Pick point or point number: 1
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
1 8000.00 12000.00 0.00
In this example the coordinate for point number one has already been stored in the current coordinate (.CRD) le
with the Draw-Locate Points command.
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 145.3035
Varas/Meters/Poles/Chains/<Distance(ft)>: 210.5 Enter P to input a distance in Pole format or C for Chains for-
mat.
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: C Enter C to traverse through a curve.
Tangent-out/Radius: R
Radius: 1103.5
Curve direction (Left/<Right>)? press Enter for right
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 689
Non-tangent/Reverse-tangent/Chord/Delta angle/Tangent/<Arc length>: N If the curve is tangent to the pre-
vious leg then enter the arc length, enter C for a chord length, D to enter the delta angle or T to enter the tangent
distance. In this example we have a non tangent curve so we entered N.
Curve direction input [<Chord>/Radial]?: C
Chord Bearing (Qdd.mmss): 245.2341
Length of Chord: 201.22
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 345.3218
Varas/Meters/Poles/Chains/<Distance(ft)>: 209.28
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 445.2348
Varas/Meters/Poles/Chains/<Distance(ft)>: 200.54
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: E Enter E to end the prompting and calculate the closure error.
Closure error distance> 1.35251089 Error Bearing> N 70d41'35'' E
Closure Precision> 1 in 607.63 Total Distance Traversed> 821.82
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: PDD
Prerequisite: None
Deed Reader
This command is used to extract deed line and curve data from the text of a deed. It shows the deed data in a
spreadsheet and also graphically. The deed data can be saved to a deed le, drawn and reported. A blank Deed
Reader dialog box appears as soon as the command is chosen.
The Text section if for entering in ASCII/TXT data for the deed. This can be accomplished by using the Paste
button at the bottom of the dialog, or loading a ling using the Load button. You can also type information directly
into this screen. Reader Warnings indicates irregularities in the deed text. The Result section is below that. This
section will give you a detailed, editable spreadsheet of the deed, which can be saved. At the very bottom of the
dialog is a section called Summary. Here is where you will see the mathematical and closure data for this deed
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 690
displayed.
Paste: This is for pasting in copied information.
Load: This option will load an existing deed text (.TXT) le. Here is an example.
Quick Settings: This option allows you to set up, in a speedy fashion, the detailed criteria for this Deed Reader
command.
Settings: A more formal settings feature, which is more methodical and dialog box driven.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 691
Draw: This option will provides you choices as to how the date will be translated to the drawing screen.
It is in the Draw Options dialog that you can make decisions as to how detailed and involved your drawing will be.
The Points section is key if you desire to have points created to a new coordinate le, or if you want to append an
existing one. In the Annotations section, if Label Lines and Arcs is clicked on, the next dialog that you see, after
choosing a point of origin, will be Auto-Annotate. Finally, click OK.
Prompts
Deed Reader dialog: enter in or load the deed text
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: read legal
Prerequisite: Deed text
Deed Linework ID
This command is used to report the deed name associated with selected linework. Since the Carlson deed commands
that draw deeds attach the deed name to the linework, this command will extract that information and list it out.
You can choose to select more than one deed linework entity before ending out of the command.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 692
Prompts
Select deed linework to identify: select deed linework
Deed Name: Out Lot3 - Carlson Property
Select deed linework to identify (Enter to end): select Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: deed id
Prerequisite: A deed name assigned to the entity
Deed Correlation
This command takes a set of eld and design/deed points and creates an inverse report, such as radial stakeout,
for each pair of points. The Align functions combine a translation and rotation to go from the survey points to the
deed points. The command includes a routine to nd the best point to hold and the best point to rotate to. This
command provides tools for the correlation of surveyed points with that of deed input points. Different points can be
specied as hold points, or rotation points, and provide a report showing the bearing and distance of all sides of the
traverse/deed, based upon the hold and rotation points. This allows for the review of different scenarios based upon
hold and rotation points. Perhaps two points in the eld are in good shape, and seem to meet all the descriptions
thereof. You decide to hold these two points as good, but you would like to see what holding these points will do
to each side/call of the tract/description. This is what this routine is designed to do. In addition to allowing user
specied trials of different hold and rotation points, the routine also provides a Find Minimum Rotation option that
will report which points specied as the hold and rotation points will result in the minimum rotation of all sides
of the tract/description. All points must be contained in the same coordinate le, and the points to be used in the
correlation must be specied as either Survey points or Deed points.
Edit: This button allows for editing of the highlighted/selected Survey and Deed point. Once selected the dialog
above is displayed allowing for changes to be made.
Add: Click this button to specify the points as either Survey or Deed points. Then ll out the Edit Points dialog as
desired.
Remove: This button will remove the highlighted/selected Survey and Deed points from the correlation setup. This
does not delete the points from the coordinate le.
Inverse Report: This generates a report showing the inverse data from each point, both survey and deed, to every
other point specied in the correlation set up. For example if there were four points in the survey points (1-4) then
the report would show inverse data from 1 to 2, 3,4; from 2 to 1,3,4; from 3 to 1,2,4 and from 4 to 1,2,3. This would
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 693
be the same for the corresponding deed points.
Compare Before Align: This option compares the survey information to the deed information.
Check Align: This option that allows for user specied hold and rotation points, and then reports the inverse data
of each side of the tract/description. The hold point and rotation point must be points from the specied survey
point group.
Find Min Align: Determines the hold and rotation points that would result in the minimum rotation to each side of
the tract/description. When selected the Minimum Deed Rotation Report is displayed.
Apply Alignment: This option can be issued after the Min Align criteria is set.
Save: Performs a quick save if the le has previously been saved.
Save As: This option prompts for a user specied le name and allows for a user specied location to save the le.
The le extension for the deed correlation le is dcf. When executing the program you have the option of using an
existing le or creating a new le for the deed correlation.
Exit: This button end the routine.
Help: This button displays the help topics relating to the Deed Correlation routine.
After specifying the hold and rotation points, the deed correlation report will display again, showing the bearing and
distance of each side of the tract/description.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 694
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 695
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: deed align
Prerequisite: A coordinate le (.CRD)
Process Deed File
This command contains several functions for deed (.PDD) les. A deed le consists of one or more deed descrip-
tions. Each deed description includes a deed name, starting coordinate and line/curve data. This deed data can be
created with the Enter Deed Description command. This command begins with the Process Deed File dialog.
Edit opens the Edit Deed dialog where you can view or modify the deed name, starting coordinates, or line/curve
data. Within this dialog the following commands are available.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 696
Add opens the Edit Deed dialog where you can add a new deed.
Remove removes the currently highlighted deed.
Draw draws the currently highlighted deed in the drawing and returns to the main dialog. The actual geometry will
not appear in the drawing until you exit Process Deed File. There is an option to label the deed using the settings
from the Annotate Defaults and Auto-Annotate commands.
Report generates a report for the currently highlighted deed. The report is displayed in the Standard Report Viewer
unless Use Report Formatter is active which allows for customized reports and Excel output using the Report For-
matter. For the Report Closure, the Start-End Coordinates option uses the difference between the starting and ending
coordinates to calculate the closure error. The Angle-Distance Precision option starts with the starting coordinate
and calculates each point in the deed using the angle and distance values from the report until the nal coordinate
which is compared to the starting coordinate to calculate the closure error.
Copy creates a new deed by copying the geometry of the highlighted deed.
Export saves the selected deed data (pdd) in raw le format (rw5) that can be used with Edit-Process Raw File.
Save saves the currently loaded deed (.PDD) le.
Save As allows you to save the currently loaded deed (.PDD) le to another le name.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 697
List selects the starting coordinate from a point selection list from the current coordinate le.
Pick allows you to screen pick the starting coordinate.
Order allows you to set the sequence of the columns in the spreadsheet editor.
Add allows you to add a new deed call (line or curve).
Remove removes the highlighted deed call.
Move Up/Down change the list order of the data records for the currently highlighted row.
Angle Format chooses between using one spreadsheet cell for the angle in dd.mmss format or using three cells
with dd, mm and ss in separate cells.
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: deed
Prerequisite: None
Legal Description Writer
The Legal Description Writer gives you the ability to create a detailed legal description from a polyline. This
description consists of calculated calls, point descriptions from Carlson points, and numerous user dened terms.
The programs values for these terms are easily replaced, and are stored as defaults with each use. When a scale
factor is specied under Drawing Setup, the Legal Description distances will apply the scale factor which is a way
to report grid distances from ground drawing coordinates or vice versa.
In addition to this command, you can also generate legal descriptions by point numbers with the Report function
within the Lot File Manager command.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 698
Legal Description Writer Dialog
This initial and primary dialog box is shown above, and described below.
Pick Boundary Polyline: This button is used to designate the polyline boundary used. The boundary should be a
closed polyline. Tools are provided in the Edit menu if you need to reverse the polyline or change its origin point.
You can also select multiple polylines to process at the same time by entering M for Multiple at the Select Boundary
Polyline prompt in this routine.
Pick Inside Boundary: This button is another way to designate the polyline boundary. With this method, the
boundary can be dened by multiple linework entities. You pick inside the boundary area and the program
will gure the boundary perimeter from the surrounding linework. This method uses the same technique as the
Draw->Boundary Polyline command. The boundary perimeter that the program nds is highlighted for visual
conrmation.
Pick Reference Lines: Used to select lines that tie into the polyline boundary used for the legal description. These
should be LINE objects that have one endpoint exactly the same as the beginning point of the boundary polyline.
If a Carlson point exists at the end of the line away from the boundary, the routine will pick up its description,
otherwise you will be prompted for the description. You can choose any number of reference lines, simply press
enter to conclude the selection of reference lines.
Point Group: This method denes the perimeter by a series of points from a group dened by the Point Group
Manager command. In Point Group Manager, a group can be dened as a point list including the ability to have
radius points.
Header File: This button and edit eld are used to designate the optional header text le. If a valid le is selected
it will be written into the top of the output.
Footer File: This button and edit eld are used to designate the optional footer text le. If a le is selected it will
be written at the end of the output.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 699
Output Options allows you to select where Legal Description Writer should send the output.
Report Viewer: The output is sent to the report viewer specied under Congure Carlson->General settings:
Carlson Standard Report Viewer, Windows Notepad or Microsoft Word.
Text File: The output is sent to an external text le as designated in the output le section described below.
Mtext Object: This creates a mtext object in the current drawing. Upon choosing OK you will be prompted for a
starting point (which is the upper left corner) and well as a second point that determines the width and angle. By
default ortho is turned on for this second point. Press the F8 key to toggle its status.
Output File: This button and edit eld are used to designate the necessary output text le. This le can then be
brought into your word processor and nalized. Note that the appearance of the output le can be affected by the
status of the 'Use Paragraph Format' toggle in the Legal Description's General settings.
Angle Specications
This section is used to establish the appearance of the bearings that are output with the description, and allows
detailed control over each aspect.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 700
Bearing Format: Designate the character or word used in each bearing direction. Standard values are the letters N,
S, E, or W. One possible option is the entire words NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, and WEST. It is important to keep in
mind that spaces are literal, meaning that if you don't have a literal space after N/S, and before E/W, a space will not
be formatted into the bearing. To use Azimuth, place a check in the Use Azimuth box and the General Prex will be
set to AZ.
1-Words Quads: For example bearings that are due NORTH, the default is to generate N 00 00' 00 E. If the 1-Word
Quads toggle is turned on, the program will substitute the single word (which you can change) for the direction, these
usually being NORTH, or DUE NORTH.
Symbols: This section allows you to designate the precision for bearings, as well as the symbols used. Turn on/off
the toggles for degrees, minutes, and seconds to control the precision. For example, if you wish to round to the
nearest minute, simply clear the toggle from the second eld. For each eld (degrees, minutes, seconds), you can
supply the character or word to be used. You can quickly ll in these elds with the two buttons to the right.
Line Segment Specications
This section is used to establish the terms used when the course of a call is a line segment, as is often the case.
Simply supply the beginning and ending terms for these line calls.
Curve Segment Specications
This large dialog is used to establish the terms and options used when creating the course of a curve. Basic options
include beginning and ending terms, as well as the words for left and right if chosen. In the large table of curve
options, you can choose the items you wish to report, in the order you want them to appear. Simply place a number
in the sequence eld indicating the items you wish to report, making sure that there are no duplicate numbers. In
the example below, the program would output the curve direction, arc length, radius length, chord bearing, and
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 701
chord length, radius length, chord bearing, and chord length, and in that order. Each eld can also have a unique
prex/sufx. There are four different possible phrases for the start of the curve description for whether the curve
is tangential, non-tangential, compound or reverse. The Radial In/Out for Non-tangent Only option applies to the
Radial In/Out elds and tell the program to only use these elds when the curve is non-tangent. Otherwise, these
elds are always used when the Radial In/Out elds are in the sequence.
Spiral Specications
This subdialog has the setting for reporting spiral portions of the boundary. In order to pick up the spiral, a centerline
(.CL) containing the spiral must be drawn using the Draw Centerline File command. Then the program will pick up
the spiral denition for any portion of the legal description boundary that follows the spiral on the centerline.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 702
Distance Specications
This subdialog is used to establish the terms and precision used when creating a distance for the course of a call.
The precision and sufx apply to curves as well. Simply choose the desired distance precision from the popdown,
and supply the beginning and ending terms for the line calls.
Note the availability of dual distance reporting. If you would like to report dual distances such as feet/metric, turn
on the toggle in the lower left corner of the dialog. Note that the primary units are the units set in the Settings
menu, Drawing Setup. If you have English set as your units in Drawing Setup, then the alternate units will be met-
ric. The opposite also applies. If your units in Drawing Setup is set to metric, then the alternate units will be English.
Description Specications
In the process of following the polyline denition for a boundary, the legal description writer can look for
descriptions of the points at the endpoints of the polyline. These can be extracted by setting the data source to the
corresponding point from the coordinate (.CRD) le, meaning the points do not have to be plotted on the screen. A
second option is point block, in which the program will read the information from the drawing, and not require the
presence of a coordinate (.CRD) le.
Prex: General term applied before the actual description.
Sufx: General term applied after the actual description.
Unknown: The text designated here will be placed in the description if the program does not nd a valid description
at that coordinate location. The words Unknown Point' may be used.
Tolerance: The point must be within this distance of the polyline vertex to use the description.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 703
General Specications
This dialog controls general specications which can affect the entire description. Each group of items are explained
in detail below.
Body of Description: Enter the beginning and ending terms for the description.
String Case: Choose the button corresponding to the string case conversion desired. If you want no changes
made, choose none. Choosing upper, lower, or proper case conversion will affect the case of all text throughout the
description, except bearing letters.
Report Sequence: This option controls the sequence to report the boundary segments either in the direction
of the polyline, clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Spell Out Numbers: This option writes numbers as words instead of digits. For example, a distance of 123 would
be written as one hundred twenty three.
Append Lines Output Format: If this toggle is on, the program will output the description without carriage
returns after each line. This approach makes a nice paragraph style when brought into a word processor with word
wrap. If the toggle is cleared, the program will place carriage returns at the end of each call.
Area
The legal description writer can output several types of areas. Basic options include beginning and ending terms. In
the large table of area options, you can choose the items you wish to report, in the order you want them to appear.
Simply place a number in the sequence eld indicating the items you wish to report, making sure that there are no
duplicate numbers. You can edit the prex/sufx for each and control decimal precision of each eld output.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 704
Reset: This option will reset all settings to their original default values.
Save: This option saves the legal description settings to a le. The le will be saved with an extension of (LGL).
Load: This option loads previously saved legal description (
*
.LGL) les.
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: legal
Prerequisite: Polyline boundary
Closure by Point Numbers
This command allows for traverse entry by point numbers, reports the closure and supports traverse adjustments.
Using an existing coordinate le, the traverse is dened by a series of point numbers. The angle and distance for
each traverse segment is calculated using the coordinates of the points. The traverse can be processed using all
adjustment routines. Refer to the Edit-Process Raw Data File command for more detail on adjustment procedures.
After selecting Closure By Point Numbers from the Survey menu, the Closure By Point Numbers dialog will appear.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 705
In this dialog shown above, add the point numbers that make up the traverse. This can be done by entering the point
number, a range of points, or a point group into the Point Number(s) eld. You can also choose points from a list
by clicking the List button. Once each point, or group of points, is entered, click the Add button. Continue in this
fashion until all of the point numbers are entered in. Clicking the Process button will display the Choose Process
Method dialog. Choose the desired process method.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 706
After selecting the process method for any of the adjustment methods, the dialogs and prompts will follow. They all
start out with an ''options'' dialog box. These dialogs are titled either Process Options or Closure Options, depending
on which process method you chose. The prompts that follow for any of the methods are subset of, and are very
similar to, the prompting found in the Edit-Process Raw Data File command. After you have made your selections
within these dialog boxes, click OK.
When you choose No Adjust of Angle Balance
When you choose Transit, Compass or Crandall
Each of the process methods will display a report that details the closure before the adjustment, and after the
adjustment. Options to save and print this report are available. After a review of the report, pressing Exit will
remove the report from the screen. At this point a Process Results dialog, prompting whether to Update points
in CRD le with adjusted coordinates, will appear. If you choose Yes, the active coordinate (.CRD) le will be
updated with the adjusted coordinates. Choosing No will leave the active coordinate (.CRD) le in its existing state,
with the coordinates unchanged. It is important to remember that the starting and ending point in this routine must
be a different point number. For example, if the traverse starts at point 1 and ends at point 1, then another point
number should be used for the tie in shot to point 1. This logic is different in Edit-Process Raw Data File, where
the starting and ending point can be the same point number.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 707
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: ptrawedit
Prerequisite: Coordinate (.CRD) le
Map Check by Pnts
This command allows you to check the closure of a gure and produce a report. The points used for the map check
should already be stored in a coordinate (.CRD) le, by using commands such as Traverse, Locate by Bearing,
Curves menu, Locate by Angle or perhaps a le from an electronic data collector.
Prompts
Table Description: Description
Beginning Point Number: 903
PointNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
903 4940.73 2490.40 0.00
eXit/Curve/<point number>: 904
PointNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
904 4850.89 2388.01 0.00
BEARING> S 48d43'58'' W Hz DIST> 136.21
eXit/Curve/<point number>: 905
PointNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
905 4699.39 2423.32 0.00
BEARING> S 13d07'04'' E Hz DIST> 155.56
eXit/Curve/<point number>: 906
PointNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
906 4653.59 2582.19 0.00
BEARING> S 73d55'04'' E Hz DIST> 165.34
eXit/Curve/<point number>: 910
PointNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
910 4941.88 2492.50 0.00
BEARING> N 17d16'54'' W Hz DIST> 301.93
eXit/Curve/<point number>: X
Closure error distance> 2.39476609 Error Bearing> N 6110'45'' E
Closure Precision> 1 in 316.96 Total Distance Traversed> 759.04
SQ. METERS: 30403.0 SQ. KILOMETERS: 0.03
HECTARES: 3.04 CUERDAS: 7.74 PERIMETER: 759.04
Pick area label centering point: pick point on screen for label text
Erase Polyline Yes/No <Yes>: N
Typical Map Check Report:
Map Check 04/19/2006 13:14
Description
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 708
COURSE BEARING DISTANCE PT# NORTHING EASTING DESCRIPTION
903 4940.73 2490.40
903-904 S 4843'58'' W 136.21 904 4850.89 2388.01
904-905 S 1307'04'' E 155.56 905 4699.39 2423.32
905-906 S 7355'04'' E 165.34 906 4653.59 2582.19
906-910 N 1716'54'' W 301.93 910 4941.88 2492.50
Closure error distance> 2.39476609 Error Bearing> N 6110'45'' E
Closure Precision> 1 in 316.96 Total Distance Traversed> 759.04
327253.1 SQ. FT.
7.51 ACRES
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: mc
Prerequisite: Current coordinate (.CRD) le
Mapcheck by Screen Entities
This command allows you to check the closure of a gure, and produce a report from the Distance and Bearing
labels in the drawing. The command works by prompting for a polyline and a sample of the text labels. Then the
program looks for text on the sample layer and matches the text labels to the polyline segments. The text to process
can be selected manually or automatically using an offset factor from the polyline. The Deed Reader command
is used here also, for extracting the deed line and curve data from the text of the deed. The deed data can then
optionally be saved to deed le.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 709
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 710
Prompts
Select linework to process: select polyline for the gure
Select sample text: select a label
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: textdeed
Prerequisite: Distance and Bearing labels
Cut Sheet
This command creates a report of the horizontal distance and elevation difference between points and a design. The
design elevation can be dened by a grid le, triangulation le, 3D polyline, section le, note le, road template
le, runway airway clearance or design points. The station and offset of the points can also be reported when a
centerline is applied.
The data for the cut sheet is shown in a spreadsheet. You can edit or enter data in all the elds except for the Cut/Fill
and Hz Error elds which are calculated. The cut sheet data can be saved and loaded with a .CUT le. The functions
for processing the data are in the pull-down menus. Here's an outline of a typical workow:
1. Import the survey data using Import > Points, or Import >SurvCE.
2. Assign the target design elevation using a method from the Grade menu.
3. If station-offset are needed, use a method from the Centerline menu.
4. Run Report > Create Report.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 711
5. Run File > SaveAs to save the cut sheet data.
File > Open: Loads data from a .CUT le.
File > New: Clears the spreadsheet.
File > Save: Saves the spreadsheet data to the current .CUT le.
File > SaveAs: Prompts for a .CUT le and saves the data.
File > Exit: Quits the program.
Edit > Delete Row: Deletes the currently highlighted spreadsheet row. You can also use the Delete key to delete
the current row.
Edit > Insert Row: Inserts a new row above the current row. You can also use the down arrow key from the last
row to add rows to the bottom of the spreadsheet, and use the Insert key to add a row above the current row.
Edit > Cut: Blanks out the data for the currently highlighted cells and puts this data into the Windows clipboard.
Edit > Copy: Copies the data for the currently highlighted cells into the Windows clipboard.
Edit > Paste: Puts data from the Windows clipboard into the spreadsheet starting at the currently highlighted cell.
Import > Points: Imports survey data from a coordinate le for the Point#, Northing, Easting, Survey Z and
Description elds of the spreadsheet. This function rst prompts for the coordinate le to import. Then there is a
dialog to choose whether to select the points by point number range, by selecting point entities from the drawing, or
by screen picking points. The Description Match and Ignore Zero Elevations are options for ltering out points.
Import > Note File: This method reads the survey data along with the grade elevation from the note (.NOT) le
that is associated with a coordinate le. For example, if the coordinate (.CRD) le is job3.crd then the note le
name is job3.not. In Carlson Software's data collection programs (SurvCE and Field), there is an option to store
stakeout data to the note le under the Stakeout options. When storing a point in the stakeout routines (using
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 712
SurvCE or Field), the target point number, coordinates and elevation can be stored to the note le. This results
with the as-staked coordinate stored in the coordinate (.CRD) le and the target coordinate stored in the associated
note le. The Cut Sheet report can display this stakeout data using the Stakeout Point Comparison report option.
The horizontal difference between the staked point and the target point can be reported in Bearing-Distance, Delta
X-Y or North-South-East-West format. Also, in SurvCE and Field, the elevation difference routines can record the
design grade elevation and station-offset to the note le when a point is stored to the coordinate (.CRD) le. This
grade data can be reported using the Grade Elevation Report option. The note le records that the Cut Sheet report
uses are TARGET X, TARGET Y, TARGET Z, TARGET DESC, TARGET PT, STATION, OFFSET, VOFF1 and
VOFF2.
Import > RW5 File: This method imports cut sheet data from a RW5 le of measurement data created by SurvCE.
The stakeout functions in SurvCE store all the data needed to ll out the whole cut sheet including the survey data,
design data and station-offset.
Import > SurvCE Cut Sheet: Imports data from a SurvCE Cut Sheet le (.CSV or .TXT). The setup for these cut
sheet les in SurvCE is under File > Job Settings > Stake > Cut Sheets.
Grade > Points: The reference points to compare can be in the same coordinate le or a separate le. The
reference/design points need to be matched with the survey points. The Match By Distance Tolerance method
matches the design point that is closest to the survey point and within the specied Match Tolerance. The Point#
Within Description method looks for the specied Point# Description Code in the descriptions of the design points
and gets the survey point number from the sufx of the description code. When the Point# Description Code is
found, the number after this code is used as the point# to match from the other le. For example, if description
code is ''PT'' and the description for point# 101 in the rst coordinate le is ''CURB PT303'', then point# 303 from
the second coordinate le is used for the match. For the separate le option, there is a third method to match points
between the les which is to use point numbers to match points between the les. The Match By Manually method
has a dialog for picking pairs of point numbers for the survey and design to add. The list of available survey points
to match with comes from points in the spreadsheet that have Point#, Survey Northing and Survey Easting but not
the design data.
Grade > Triangulation File: the design elevation is determined by the elevation of the triangulation surface at
each point.
Grade > Grid File: the design elevation is determined by the elevation of the grid surface at each point.
Grade > 3D Polyline: When using a 3D Polyline for the grade elevation, the program calculates the elevation
along the 3D polyline at the position perpendicular from the point selected. This calculated elevation is then
compared to the point(s) selected to determine the cut/ll values.
Grade > Cross Sections: With Section Files, the grade elevation is interpolated from the offset-elevation data in
the section le based on the station-offset of the point along the centerline. When using this method, a centerline
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 713
le (
*
.cl) must be specied for station-offset data.
Grade > Runway Clearance: This option denes the target surface as the airway clearance around a runway. This
method is for clearance reports for tree and building tops by comparing points to this runway clearance surface.
The runway surface is built from a 3D perimeter polyline of the runway along with slopes for the approach lanes
and runway sides. The runway sides are offset level from the runway perimeter for the specied distances before
starting the slopes. The parameters for the runway are dened in the dialog and illustrated in the graphic shown
here. The Write Runway Clearance Surface File creates a triangulation surface le that you can draw or inspect for
verication of a correct target surface.
Grade >Road Design: This option denes the grade elevation using road design les. For each point, the program
nds the station-offset for the point along the centerline and then applies the road design at that station to determine
the grade elevation. Grade to Process is used to dene the surface to use for the cut sheet comparison. These grades
are dened as Top Surface, usually nal grade, or subgrades and correspond to the dened grades and subgrades
within a template le. The required design les include a centerline (.CL) le, a template (.TPL) le, and a prole
(.PRO) le. There are also several optional design les such as Superelevation, Template Point Prole and Template
Point Centerline. The design les are created in the Civil Design module. Using the design les in Cut Sheet is
similar to the Process Road Design command.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 714
Centerline > Centerline File: This function assigns the Station and Offset elds in the spreadsheet by prompting
for a centerline le (.CL) and locating each point along the alignment.
Centerline > Polyline: This function assigns the Station and Offset elds in the spreadsheet by picking a polyline,
entering the starting station, and locating each point along the alignment.
Centerline > Points: This method denes the alignment by entering two points to dene a line.
Report > Create Report: This function display a report of the cut sheet data using the current report settings.
When Use Report Formatter is off, the report is shown directly in the standard viewer. Otherwise, the Report
Formatter dialog is shown for customizing the report and outputting to different formats such as Excel.
Report > Report Settings: There are several settings for the report including decimal precision, prex for cut and
ll and distance units. For the Horizontal and Vertical Tolerance, the report highlights any points that exceed these
tolerances. The Distance Format chooses between Angle-Distance, Delta X/Y, and North-South-East-West deltas.
The Cut/Fill Direction chooses whether to report cut/ll as Survey relative to Design or vice versa.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 715
The Report Statistics option reports the min, max, average and standard deviations of the deltas at the bottom of the
report.
The Design/Survey Data on Separate Rows option creates two rows in the report for each record with the
Design coordinate on one row and the deltas on the second row as shown here.
Point# Northing Easting Elevation Description Comment
229 499.997 1000.001 3.027
201 -0.005 -0.002 0.004 A
230 507.120 1000.158 2.929
202 -0.006 -0.003 0.001 B
231 515.694 1000.304 2.875
203 -0.005 -0.006 0.002
Draw > Draw Labels: This function uses the cut sheet data and draw settings to create labels in the drawing.
Draw>Label Settings: There are three types of labels to draw. The Mark Points Outside Tolerance draws a symbol
at each point that exceeds the tolerances setup in Report Settings. The Draw Delta Symbol draws a symbol to show
the direction of the delta X and delta Y along with the values. The Rotate Deltas By Centerline option prompts for a
centerline to align the deltas. Otherwise, the deltas are due north-south and due east-west. The Draw Label creates
text labels for cut/ll, delta-x, delta-y, horizontal distance error or description. There are settings for the sequence
order, prex, sufx, layer, style, size and position.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 716
View > Zoom Plan View: This function zoom centers the drawing on the currently highlighted point.
View > Prole: Creates proles connecting the survey and design points. The proles are shown in a graphic
preview dialog which has functions to save the proles to .PRO les.
View > Hide By Point Numbers: This function is a way to lter the spreadsheet by point numbers. The function
prompts for a range of point numbers and then only displays those points in the spreadsheet.
View > Hide By Description: This function is a way to lter the spreadsheet by description. Wildcard matching
applies to the user-dened description lter.
View > Show All Rows: This function shows all the spreadsheet rows including those hidden by the above
functions.
Examples of Cut Sheet reports comparing points are shown next.
Example 1: Cut Sheet comparing points to surface and using Report Viewer for report
1) Run Import > Points and select sample cusheet.crd from Carlson Projects. Select the points to import by range
as shown.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 717
2) Run Grade > Triangulation File and choose sample cutsheet.tin from Carlson Projects.
3) Run Centerline > Centerline File and choose sample cutsheet.cl from Carlson Projects. Now all the data is ready
for reporting.
4) Run Report > Report Settings and make sure the settings match the dialog shown here.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 718
5) The next steps will format the report. Run Report > Create Report which brings up the Report Formatter. Move
the Available elds over to the Used elds list as shown. Also, be sure that Widths by Field is toggled on.
6) On the Report Formatter dialog, pick the Settings tab and then the Attrib Options button which controls how the
values are formatted in the report. Then on the Attribute Options dialog, highlight Description and pick the Edit
button. On the Attribute Display Options dialog for Description, turn off Auto Width and set the Fixed Width to 18.
Then pick OK. Next highlight Comment in the list and pick Edit. Set the Fixed Width to 21 for Comment. Then
pick OK on the Attribute Options to nish the attribute edits.
7) On the Settings tab for Report Formatter, pick the Field Options button which setups up the report header and
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 719
footer. On the Field Options dialog, pick Import and select sample cutsheet.fds from the Carlson Projects\Settings
folder. Then pick OK.
8) On the Report tab for Report Formatter, pick the Report Viewer button. There is a dialog for setting the report
page size. Pick OK.
Next is a dialog for entering report elds for the report header as setup in the previous step with the Field Options.
Fill in the report elds and then pick OK.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 720
Now the report is displayed in the Report Viewer which can be printed or saved to PDF, MS Word or Excel.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 721
Example 2: Cut Sheet Report comparing points from the Current Coordinate File and with the Use Feet-Inches For
Cut/Fill options on.
Example 3: Cut Sheet Report comparing points from Another Coordinate le, reporting coordinates for the points.
Example 4: Steps for Comparing Points in Current Coordinate le and using Report Formatter Option to customize
report output to user preference.
1) Check on Use Report Formatter on the Cut Sheet Report dialog.
2) Specify points to compare by one of the four methods described above for comparing points within the current
coordinate le.
3) Select report content by highlighting the desired data from the Available list on the left side of the dialog box
and then pressing the Add button to place the selected data in the Used list. Standard window selection methods
using the Ctrl and Shift keys can be used to select more than one item at a time. After moving the selected data to
the Used window it may be necessary to move data up or down to obtain the desired order of your report. To do this
use the up and down arrows located on the left of the Used window.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 722
4) When the desired data has been specied in the Used window press the Display button at the bottom left of the
dialog. For more detailed information on using the report formatter see the Report Formatter section of this manual.
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: cutrprt
Prerequisite: A coordinate (.CRD) le
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 723
Set Point Elevations by 3D Polylines
This command assigns elevations to points by referencing 3D polylines. The station-offset is calculated for each
point to the nearest reference 3D polyline. The point must be within the specied Max Offset Tolerence in order
to be elevated. The elevation is calculated from the elevation of the reference 3D polyline at the station combined
with the specied percent slope times the offset plus the vertical offset. The Decimals setting is for the elevation
label of the point. The elevation for the coordinate le always uses full precision. The option to Link Elevations To
Polylines will update the point elevations when the reference polyline is changed.
Prompts
Options Dialog
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? press Enter
Select points to elevate.
Select objects: pick the points to elevate
Select reference 3D polylines.
Select objects: pick the reference 3D polylines
Elevating points...
Elevated 10 points.
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey and 3D Data in Civil
Keyboard Command: 3dpts 3dp
Prerequisite: 3D polylines
Set Point Elevations by Surface Model
This command assign elevations to points by a triangulation or grid surface model. For each of the points, the
routine looks up the elevation from the surface model at the point x,y location. The option to Link Elevations To
Surface Model will update the point elevations when the reference surface model is changed.
Prompts
Choose Grid or Tmesh le to process dialog choose existing GRD, TIN or FLT le
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? press Enter
Select points to elevate.
Select objects: pick the points to elevate
Elevating points...
Elevated 10 points.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 724
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey and 3D Data for Civil
Keyboard Command: 3dpts tin
Prerequisite: A surface model
Polyline Report
This command generates a report of angle-distance and curve data for all the points along the selected polyline.
The closure can be reported between the starting and ending points of the polyline. The polyline area can also be
reported. After starting the command, by pressing O for options various report options can be selected.
Polyline Report
Northing Easting Bearing Distance
4657.495 5452.844
N 4045'51'' E 84.323
4721.362 5507.902
Radius: 175.795 Chord: 249.282 Degree: 3235'33'' Dir: Right
Length: 277.088 Delta: 9018'35'' Tangent: 176.747
Chord BRG: N 8555'08'' E Rad-In: S 4914'09'' E Rad-Out: S 4104'26'' W
Radius Point: 4606.577,5641.050
4739.102 5756.552
S 2429'28'' E 122.817
4627.336 5807.466
S 7429'33'' W 199.062
4574.114 5615.650
N 6253'05'' W 182.885
4657.470 5452.866
Closure Error Distance> 0.03419 Error Bearing> N 4122'21'' W
Closure Precision> 1 in 25333.8 Total Distance> 866.174
Polyline Area: 47735.6 sq ft, 1.1 acres
Prompts
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 725
Options/Select polyline to report: pick a polyline
Standard Report Viewer Displays the report for the selected polyline.
Options/Select polyline to report (Enter to End): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey > Polyline Tools
Keyboard Command: plreport
Prerequisite: A polyline
Polyline to Deed File
This command generates a deed (.PDD) le from the geometry of a selected polyline. This le can be opened using
Process Deed File which allows you to edit the deed data and generate reports.
Prompts
Deed File To Write: choose le location and name
Select Polyline To Process: select polyline
Done.
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey > Polyline Tools
Keyboard Command: pl2pdd
Prerequisite: a polyline
Polyline to RW5 File
This command generates a raw data (.RW5) le for the selected polyline. This le can be opened using Edit Process
Raw Data File, which allows you to process the raw data (.RW5) le to generate coordinate points, calculate closure
and perform coordinate adjustments by the compass, crandall, transit and least squares adjustment routines.
Prompts
RW5 File to Write (Standard Windows File Selection Dialog): choose le location and name
Select Polyline To Process: select polyline
Done.
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey > Polyline Tools
Keyboard Command: pl2rw5
Prerequisite: a polyline
Compass Polyline Adjustment
This command applies a compass adjustment to a perimeter dened by a polyline. The command draws a new
polyline of the adjusted perimeter and creates a report. The closure error is the difference between the end point of
the polyline and the specied closing point that the program prompts for. For a closed loop adjustment, the closing
point is the starting point of the polyline. Here is an example report for a closed loop.
Compass Polyline Adjustment
Closure Results
Starting Point : N 4854.766 E 5357.221
Ending Point : N 4854.636 E 5357.533
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 726
New Point : N 4854.766 E 5357.221
Azimuth Of Error : N 6722'29'' W
North Error : 0.130
East Error : -0.312
Distance Error : 0.338
Distance Traverse: 1029.503
Closure Precision: 1 in 3050
Original Data
From To Angle Distance
4 5 S 1301'45'' E 392.218
5 11 N 4423'59'' E 296.297
11 N 6002'20'' W 340.987
Adjusted Point Comparison
Original Adjusted
Point# Northing Easting Northing Easting Dist Angle
4 4854.766 5357.221 4854.766 5357.221 0.000 N 9000'00'' E
5 4472.645 5445.645 4472.695 5445.526 0.129 N 6722'29'' W
11 4684.343 5652.952 4684.430 5652.744 0.226 N 6722'29'' W
4854.636 5357.533 4854.766 5357.221 0.338 N 6722'29'' W
Adjusted Data
From To Angle Distance
4 5 S 1300'50'' E 392.143
5 11 N 4422'56'' E 296.261
11 N 6002'29'' W 341.098
Prompts
Pick polyline for Compass Adjustment: pick polyline
Layer name for adjusted polyline <COMPASS>: press Enter
Reverse polyline [Yes/<No>]? press Enter
Pick new closing point: pick point
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey > Polyline Tools
Keyboard Command: compassadj
Prerequisite: A polyline
Grant Boundary Adjustment
This command applies a Grant Boundary Adjustment by rotating and scaling a polyline. Before running this
command, the grid projection must be set in Drawing Setup and a polyline must be drawn.
The Grant Boundary method is used to set lost corners on perimeters within public lands. Distances between the
record and measured are compared to dene a ratio for adjustments. A rotation is dened by the difference between
the record and measured bearings to preserve the angular relationship at the lost corners and to adjust the distance
at the same ratio through each lost corner.
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 727
Rotation: 8'42'' Scale: 1.004612115
Prompts
Pick polyline for Grant Boundary Adjustment: pick polyline
Layer name for adjusted polyline <GRANT>: press Enter
Reverse polyline [Yes/<No>]? press Enter
Pick new closing point: pick point
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey > Polyline Tools
Keyboard Command: grantadj
Prerequisite: A polyline
4 Sided Building
Often only one or two sides of a building are surveyed in the eld. This routine completes the building by drawing
the other sides. 4 Sided Building creates a parallelogram given two connecting lines, or given a polyline with two
segments. With two lines, there is an option to make the parallelogram as a polyline or as four lines. When only
one side is dened, the program will prompt for the building width. Besides using linework to dene the sides, you
can use points by entering P at the prompt to switch to points mode.
Prompts
Options/Points/<Pick a line or polyline>: pick a line
Pick another side (Enter for none): pick a line
Convert the lines into a polyline [<Yes>/No]? press Enter
Options/Points/<Pick a line or polyline>: press Enter
Entering O for options lets you choose whether or not to be prompted to set the new polyline width, and for whether
to default the width to make a square building with one sided input.
Pulldown Menu Location: Survey
Keyboard Command: 4sided
Prerequisite: A polyline with two segments or two adjoining lines
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 728
Cadastral Automated Plat Drafting (CAPD)
The CAPD program was developed by the BLM for geodetic mapping. Many of the CAPD features are available
in Carlson Survey as shown in the chart below. The workow in Carlson Survey starts with using Settings >
Drawing Setup to set the projection for the drawing. With the projection set, several commands are geodetically
enabled. There are specic geodetic commands such as Geodetic Traverse and there are general survey routines
with geodetic options such as Inverse, Area Defaults and Annotation Defaults.
CAPD Command Carlson Command Menu Location Description
ALIGNT TXTLINEUP Edit > Text > Line Up Text Used to align text
BAREA DEFAREA, PLAREA Area/Layout > Area De-
faults, Area By Closed Poly-
line
Computes area of a closed
gure
BBI BBINT COGO > Locate At Inter-
sect > Bearing-Bearing In-
tersect
Bearing-bearing intersection
BDI BDINT COGO > Locate At Inter-
sect > Bearing-Distance In-
tersect
Bearing-distance intersec-
tion
BDA, BDT AUTOANN Annotate > Auto-Annotate Bearing distance labels
BTRV IA Area/Layout > Inverse With
Area
Boundary traverse
CADINIT LDEF Annotate >Annotate De-
faults
Set up default layers, fonts,
line type.
CHELEV CHGELEV Edit > Change > Elevations Change elevations of entities
CMP COMPASSADJ Survey > Polyline Tools >
Compass Polyline Adjust-
ment
Compass adjustment
DBK BREAKAT Edit > Break > At Intersec-
tion
Break lines that cross using
grid coordinates
DBK2 GEODBK COGO > Geodetic > Dou-
ble Break
Geodetic double break lines
that cross
DDI DDINT COGO > Locate At Inter-
sect > Distance-Distance In-
tersect
Distance-distance intersec-
tion
DDSETANN, DS LDEF Annotate >Annotate De-
faults
Set up default layers, fonts,
line type
DL LDEL Edit > Erase > Erase By
Layer
Delete layer
DPROP GEODPROP COGO > Geodetic > Dou-
ble Proportion Line Division
Double proportion computa-
tion
EV RMVERTEX Edit > Polyline Utilities >
Remove Polyline Vertex
Delete vertex in polyline
FLIP FLIPTEXT Edit > Text > Flip Selected
Text
Flips text 180
FTCRV 2TANLIN Draw > Arc > 2 Tangents,
Radius
Fit curve
GETPRO SETUP Settings > Drawings Setup Set up projection
GID INVERSE COGO > Inverse Display geodetic coordinates
of points
GLBL LABLAT Annotate > Label Lat/Long Label geodetic coordinates
GMID GEOMID COGO > Geodetic > Mid-
dle Break
Breaks line at geodetic mid-
point
GPOINT LPOINT Points > Draw/Locate
Points
Input point by lat/lon/elv
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 729
GRIDRT TWIST4 View > Twist Screen > Re-
store Due North
Switch between true north
and grid north
INIDGEO READPT, POINTTBL Points > Import Text/ASCII
File, Annotate > Create
Point Table
Import points and create ta-
ble of points
IPG LABLAT Annotate > Label Lat/Long Create block of coordinates
IRRB GEOIRRB COGO > Geodetic > Irreg-
ular Boundary Adjustment
Irregular boundary adjust-
ment
ITRAV INVERSE COGO > Inverse Inverse between points
MEDLIN MEDOFF Edit >Offset >Median Off-
set
Create midline between 2
polylines
PRCRV CINFO Inquiry > Curve Info
List curve info
REV BRGQUAD Annotate > Flip Labels >
Switch Bearing Quadrant
Reverse bearing
SETSL PICKTXTSTYLE Draw > Text > Pick Text
Style
Sets style for text
SPROP GEOSPROP COGO > Geodetic > Single
Proportion Line Division
Single proportion breaks line
geodetically
TRAV GEOTRAV COGO > Geodetic >
Geodetic Traverse
Geodetic traverse for input
of bearings and distances
Chapter 11. Survey Menu 730
COGO Menu 12
This chapter provides information on using the commands from the COGO menu to perform coordinate geometry
operations in your drawing. The top section provide basic COGO routines, with optional quick keys. The bottom
section provides numerous survey functions, including the easy-to-use Visual COGO and also Numeric Pad COGO.
731
Inverse
This command reports the bearing/azimuth and horizontal distance between two points. The command prompts for a
series of points. Use the appropriate object snap mode to select the points from the screen, or use the point numbers
to reference coordinates stored in the current coordinate (.CRD) le. The results are then displayed. This command
is also used in conjunction with the Traverse and Sideshot commands to occupy and backsight two points. The last
two points you Inverse to are the Backsight and the Occupied point for the Traverse and Sideshot commands. An
attractive feature of Inverse is that you can enter T or SS within the command and go directly to Traverse or Sideshot.
Even a single S will transmit to Sideshot. Hotkeys are not case sensitive. Press [Enter] at the point prompt to end
the command.
You can also inverse around an arc by inversing to the Point of Curvature (PC), and then entering an A for Arc
option. The program will ask for the radius point, the curve direction left or right and the PT point. The curve data
is then reported. There is an unequal PC-Radius and PT-Radius distance check. The tolerance for this is set in the
Area Label Defaults command.
After picking the rst point, there is a keyboard option for Multiple which will prompt for a range of point numbers
to report as a sideshot inverse.
There are several input options for Inverse that are set by entering O for Options on the command line. Sideshot
inverse holds the current occupied point and calculates the bearing/distance to each entered point. The Pairs option
reports the bearing/distance between pairs of points and not for every entered point. For example, if points 1,2,11,12
were entered, the bearing/distance would be reported for 1,2 and 11,12 but not 2,11. The Auto Increment option
uses the next point number by just pressing Enter. To exit the routine with Auto Increment active, End must be
entered.
The Auto Zoom settings under Inverse Options will zoom the display as needed to have the occupied point or both
the occupied and backsight points visible. The Report Total Distance option displays a running total of all inversed
distances during the current run of the routine.
The Report Geodetic Mean Bearing option reports the geodetic bearing at the to point (forward), at the from point
(back) and the mean bearing. The geodetic distance is also report for the geodetic distance at zero elevation and
at ground elevation. The coordinates are converted to lat/lon using the projection setup under the Drawing Setup
command. The program reports that lat/lon, convergence angle and grid scale factor at the from and to points.
Here's an example for SP83 VT,
Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z)
218623.2996 485210.2502 0.0000
Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z)
218439.0529 487144.1875 0.0000
Bearing: S 8433'28'' E Horizontal Distance: 1942.6941325
Lat: 4301'05.81806'' Long: -7649'09.53807''
Convergence: N 0256'59'' E Scale: 1.0014892493
Lat: 4301'04.98404'' Long: -7648'43.45145''
Convergence: N 0256'41'' E Scale: 1.0014841465
Geodetic Forward Bearing: S 8730'28'' E
Geodetic Back Bearing: S 8730'09'' E
Geodetic Mean Bearing: S 8730'18'' E
Geodetic Distance: 1942.984 Zero Elev, 1942.984 Ground Elev
There are also several angle output options that are set at the second prompt in Options. The angle can be reported
as either Bearing, Azimuth, Gon or Angle Right. You can also specify to report angles with decimal seconds. The
distance settings include the number of decimals for distances, whether to report slope or horizontal distance and
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 732
whether to report distances in feet and inches format. The Report Total Distance option will report the cumulative
distance for all the inverses. The Report Delta X/Y will distances as delta north-south-east-west instead of angle and
distance. For Report Latitude/Longitude, the grid projection must be set in Drawing Setup. The Report Coordinates
option choose whether to report the northing, easting and elevation of the points. The Report Elevation Difference
option will report the delta Z between the pairs of points. The Report Second Scaled Distance option will report a
second distance value that is scaled from the rst distance value using the scale factor dened in Drawing Setup.
When the Second Scaled Distance option is on, there are settings for the sufx to use for both the rst and second
distance to help identify them separately in the report.
For instruction on how to insert either new or existing points into the drawing, see Draw-Locate Points in the Points
Commands section of the General Commands chapter.
Prompts
Calculate Bearing & Distance from starting point?
Traverse/SideShot/Options/Arc/Multiple/Pick point or point number: pick a point
Traverse/SideShot/Options/Arc/Multiple/Pick point or point number: 9
PtNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
9 4909.25 4648.37 0.00
Bearing: N 81d8'54'' E Azimuth: 81d8'54''
Horizontal Distance: 261.17407461
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Commands: inverse, i
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 733
Occupy Point
This command sets the occupied point and backsight angle for other COGO commands such as Traverse. For setting
the occupied point, you have the option of picking a point on the screen, entering coordinates at the command line
or typing in a point number that will be read from the current coordinate (.CRD) le. Four options are available for
determining the backsight direction: Azimuth, Bearing, None and Point. For the default Point option, you may pick
a point on the screen, input coordinates, or type a point number that will be read from the current coordinate le.
For the Azimuth and Bearing option, you enter the backsight angle in the selected format. The None option sets the
backsight to an azimuth of 0 (zero) or North. You can also set the occupied point by using the Inverse command.
If you inverse from point 3 to point 1, you have set point 1 as the occupied point and point 3 as the backsight. For
more information, see the Inverse command.
The current occupied point and backsight are shown in the lower right hand corner of the AutoCAD status bar just
below the command line.
Prompts
Set Occupied Point
Pick point or point number: pick a point (5000 5000 0.0)
Set backsight method [Azimuth/Bearing/None/<Point>]? press Enter
Set Backsight Point
Pick point or point number: pick a point (5184.76 5381.3 0.0)
For instruction on how to insert either new or existing points into the drawing, see Draw-Locate Points in the Points
Commands section of the General Commands chapter. This feature can be found in the Points pulldown of all
menus.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Commands: occpoint, op
Prerequisite: None
Traverse
This command allows the user to input any combination of turned angles, azimuths or bearings to dene a traverse or
gure. The command prompts for an Angle-Bearing Code which denes the angle or bearing type. This command
always occupies the last point it calculated and backsights the point before that.
Codes 1 through 4 dene the bearing quadrants:
1 = Northeast
2 = Southeast
3 = Southwest
4 = Northwest
The remaining codes dene as follows:
5 = a north based azimuth
6 = an angle turned to the left
7 = an angle turned to the right
8 = a deection angle left
9 = a deection angle right
For both the Angle-Bearing Code and the Distance prompt, the user can enter point-dened responses: two points
separated by an asterisk, as in 2
*
3 for the bearing (or distance) dened by 2 to 3. You can also add math expressions.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 734
For angles, 2
*
3+90 would deect 90 degrees right from 2 to 3. For distance, 2
*
3/2 would mean half the distance
of 2 to 3. You do not need to enter N before entering a number-dened distance. Just bring up the number inverse
prompt.
The command draws lines between located points (if the Line On/Off in the COGO menu is set to on) and plots the
points calculated and stores them in the current coordinate (.CRD) le if point numbering is On. The point settings
are dened in the Point Defaults command. If Point Protect is turned on, Traverse checks if the point numbers are
already stored in the le. Point Protect is set in the Coordinate File Utilities command.
There are Angle-Bearing code input options for Traverse that are set by entering O for Options. The Angle Right
option prompts for the angle right and skips the angle-bearing code prompt. The Azimuth option prompts for the
azimuth and skips the angle-bearing code prompt.
Prompts
Occupied Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
You will only be prompted for the occupied point the rst time you use the command.
Use the Inverse command to set the occupied and backsight points.
Exit/Options/SideShot/Inverse/Enter Azimuth (ddd.mmss) <>: o
Angle prompt angle right or azimuth only [Right/Azimuth/Prompt]? p
Exit/Options/Arc/Points/Line/SideShot/Inverse/Angle-Bearing Code <5>: press Enter Pressing Enter uses the
default angle right code.
Enter Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: 88.1324 You can also enter L or R to dene an angle 90 degrees Left or
Right.
Backsight Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Number inverse/<Distance>: 100
Select Coordinate (.CRD) File This dialog only appears if there is not a current coordinate (.CRD) le.
Exit/Options/Line/Side Shot/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <7>>: 14
*
9-45.2045 Uses the bearing dened by
point numbers 14 & 9 and subtracts the angle 45 degrees, 20 minutes, and 45 seconds. You can use a + or - in this
type of entry.
Number inverse/<Distance>: N (note: you can enter 14
*
9/2 here, as well)
Point number inverse (i.e. 10
*
20): 14
*
9/2 This causes the command to recall the distance from point number 14
to 9 and divide it by 2.
Exit/Options/Line/Side Shot/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <7>>: L
Select Line or Polyline that denes Bearing: select line that denes bearing
Number inverse/<Distance>: 100
Exit/Options/Line/Side Shot/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <7>>: E Enter E to end the command. Enter S or
SS to execute the Side Shots command or I to execute the Inverse command.
For instruction on how to insert either new or existing points into the drawing, see Draw-Locate Points in the Points
Commands section of the General Commands chapter. This feature can be found in the Points pulldown of all
menus.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 735
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Commands: T, Traverse
Prerequisite: None
Side Shots
This command allows the user to input any combination of turned angles, azimuths or bearings while remaining
on an occupied point. The command prompts for an Angle-Bearing Code which denes the angle or bearing type.
Codes 1 through 4 dene the bearing quadrants; 1 being North-East, 2 South-East, 3 South-West, and 4 North-West.
Code 5 is a north-based azimuth, 6 an angle turned to the left, 7 an angled turned to the right, 8 a deection angle left
and 9 a deection angle right. The command plots the points calculated and stores them in the current coordinate
(.CRD) le if point numbering is On. If Point Protect is turned On, Side Shots checks if the point numbers are already
stored in the le. All points calculated radiate from the occupied point. Use the Traverse, Inverse,or Occupied Point
commands explained previously to dene the occupied and backsight points. Options allows you to select your
angle entry method.
Prompts
Occupied Point ?
Pick point or point number: screen pick a point or enter a point number
Exit/Options/Traverse/Inverse/Enter Azimuth (ddd.mmss) <A>: O for options
Angle prompt angle right or azimuth only [Right/Azimuth/Prompt]? P for prompt
Exit/Options/Points/Line/Traverse/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <7>: 6 Code 6 for angle turned to left.
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Enter Angle (dd.mmss) <6>: 22.3524 Angle of 22 degrees, 35 minutes, 24 seconds.
Points/<Distance>: 120.91
Enter Vertical Angle (dd.mmss) <0.0000>: 88.2548
These prompts only come up if you have Instrument and Rod height prompting turned on.
Instrument Height <5.000>: 5.12
Rod-Target Height <5.120>: press Enter
Enter Point Description <>: Topo Shot
Exit/Options/Points/Line/Traverse/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <6> E
For instruction on how to insert either new or existing points into the drawing, see Draw-Locate Points in the Points
Commands section of the General Commands chapter. This feature can be found in the Points pulldown of all
menus.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Commands: sideshot, ss
Prerequisite: None
Enter-Assign Point
This command creates a point at the user-entered coordinates. The point is both stored to the current coordinate
(.CRD) le and drawn on the screen. The program will prompt for the northing and easting. This routine will
prompt for point number, elevation and description, depending on the settings in the Point Defaults command. Point
Defaults also allows you to set the point symbol and layer. Point Defaults is found under the Points pulldown.
Prompts
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 736
Enter North(y): 5000
Enter East(x): 5000
Select/<Enter Point Elevation <0.00>: Enter 100 for elevation, or press S and enter to select text to set elevation.
Enter Point Description <>: START
N: 5000.00 E: 5000.00 Z: 0.00
Enter North(y): press Enter to end
For instruction on how to insert either new or existing points into the drawing, see Draw-Locate Points in the Points
Commands section of the General Commands chapter. This feature can be found in the Points pulldown of all menus.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Commands: eapoint, ea
Prerequisite: None
Raw File On/Off
This menu selection toggles raw le (.RW5) creation. When this option is active, commands such as Traverse create
entries in the current raw data (.RW5) le. If Raw File is turned on, the pulldown menu option will have a check
mark character in the menu. A dialog will appear, allowing you to create a New, Append an existing, or Close the
.RW5 le.
To begin this routine, select the COGO pulldown and observe the Raw File (On or Off) toggle for check. Click the
command and the dialog appears.
New: Allows you to create a new raw traverse le (.RW5).
Append: Allows you to append an existing raw traverse le.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: openraw
Prerequisite: None
Line On/Off
This menu selection toggles line plotting on and off for the commands such as Traverse, Locate by Line Bearing,
etc.. If line drawing is turned on, the pulldown menu option will have a check mark character to the left of the
command.
Command: set lonoff
Line ON
Command: set lonoff
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 737
Line OFF
Checked (on)
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: set lonoff
Prerequisite: None
Visual COGO
This command contains COGO routines for Inverse, Occupy Point, Traverse, Side Shots and Enter-Assign Point.
Choosing Visual COGO from the COGO menu provides you with quick access to any one of ve main features of
the Visual COGO interface.
A dialog for command input docks on the side of the graphic window when any of the ve options from the
pulldown menu are selected. Points are drawn to the screen as they are created. Linework can also be drawn. CAD
and Carlson commands can be activated with the Visual COGO dialog active. This allows for quick switching
between Visual COGO commands and any other command. You can also switch between Visual COGO commands
within the dialog by entering the 2 character function name in any edit box. For example, from Visual COGO
Inverse, you can enter SS in the point number eld to switch to Side Shots.
The function names OC, EA, IN, TR and SS are also available as function buttons across the top of the dialog.
The second row of buttons are functions for zooming in/out and panning. The nal button brings up Visual Cogo
options. The Use Sound option is for whether to have sounds cues. The Prompt for Bearing/Azimuth Rotation
adds an additional angle input in the Sideshot and Traverse functions. This angle is added to the bearing or azimuth
angle input and is a way to handle North rotation where the orientation of the angles that your entering is different
than the target coordinate system.
Prompts
When in Visual COGO, you will have a very different user interface from other areas of Carlson. This user-friendly
screen will guide you through various COGO data entry procedures such as Inverse, Occupy Point, Traverse, Side
Shots and Enter-Assign Point. You will still be able to follow the command on the command line at the bottom of
your Carlson screen. Using Visual COGO is an alternative and easy method to entering in such information. The
top half of the COGO pulldown menu offers you the more traditional Carlson data entry method. Your results will
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 738
be the same.
IN (Inverse): This command reports the bearing/azimuth and horizontal distance between two points. The points
can be entered manually or by picking from a point list by picking on the list button. The resulting report of
bearing/azimuth is dependent upon the Angle Mode setting in the drawing setup options.
OC (Occupy Point): Used to specify the point number of the instrument setup point. The point can be specied by
manually entering in the point number in the Occupied Point data eld, or by selecting the List button and choosing
from the list of points contained in the coordinate le.
Backsight Method can be either by Point Number or by Azimuth. If angle right/left or deection right/left is being
used for traverse or sideshot entry, a backsight method must be specied. If using Bearing or Azimuth entry, no
backsight method is required. The Backsight Point can be specied by manually entering in the point number in
the Backsight Point data eld, or by selecting the List button and choosing from the list of points contained in the
coordinate le.
Instrument Height: Use this eld to set the height of the instrument.
Accept (F2): Selecting this button or pressing the F2 function key accepts the data entered in the elds above. After
accepting the data, until changed, the points specied will remain the occupied and backsight points. If the dialog
is exited without Accepting the settings the Occupied and Backsight points will have to be specied when the OC
dialog is revisited.
Exit: Cancels the command
TR (Traverse): This command allows data entry using any combination of turned angles, deections, azimuths or
bearings to dene a traverse or gure. This command always occupies, moves up to, the last point it calculated and
backsights the point before, or the previous occupied point.
Point Number: This is the number of the point to be created.
Rod Height: Height of target to be located.
The horizontal angle component can be input in various formats. The format label will change with the option
chosen. Choose the format by selecting the down arrow and picking from the list.
NE=Northeast
SE=Southeast
SW=Southwest
NW=Northwest
AZ=Azimuth
AL=Angle Left
AR=Angle Right
DL=Deection Left
DR=Deection Right
The vertical angle component can be input in various ways (the format label will change with the option chosen).
Choose the format by selecting the down arrow and picking from the list.
VA=Vertical Angle. Zero (0) degrees is level.
ZE=Zenith Angle. Ninety (90) degrees is level.
DZ=Elevation Difference. The difference in elevation either plus or minus from the instrument setup to the target.
The distance component can be entered as either Slope or Horizontal Distance. Choose the format by selecting the
down arrow and picking from the list.
SD=Slope Distance
HD=Horizontal Distance
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 739
Distance can be dened by Point Numbers by selecting the calculator button to the far right of Angle Right and
Slope Distance.
Additional mathematical calculations of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division can be performed on the
input distance by selecting the appropriate button and lling out the function dialog.
For example to add 25 to the Slope distance value on the traverse dialog, select the + button, enter 25 and then select
Done. The same steps apply to any of the other mathematical functions.
Side Shots: This command works in the same way as the traverse command. All the available options contained
in the traverse command are available in this command. The only difference in the commands is that the side shot
command does not move the setup point to last shot input. Refer to the traverse command for further details.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 740
Desc: Denes the description for the point to be created.
Create Point: Option whether to store the point to the CRD le and draw a point.
Draw Line: Option to draw line to the traverse point.
Preview (F2): Previews the traverse point location, without storing the point to the coordinate le.
Store (F3): Stores the traverse point based upon the entered data to the coordinate le.
Undo: After storing the point, the point can be deleted from the screen and coordinate le by selecting the undo
button.
Exit: Exits the Visual COGO command and closes the dialog box.
EA (Enter Assign): Use this function to enter and assign coordinate values for new and existing points.
Zooming and panning functions are also available from the Visual COGO dialog box:
Plus (+) magnier: Zooms the display window in. Use to view a area up close.
Minus (-) magnier: Zooms the display window out. This shows more of the drawing.
Left arrow: Pans the display window to the left.
Right arrow: Pans the display window to the right.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 741
Up arrow: Pans the display window up.
Down arrow: Pans the display window down.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Commands: vcogo inverse, vcogo setup, vcogo traverse, vcogo sideshot, vcogo store
Prerequisite: Coordinate le to process
Locate by Line Bearing
This command calculates and plots a line (if the Line On/Off is set to Line On) and point from an occupied point.
The bearing can be dened by picking two points, selecting a line, inputting two point numbers, or typing in a
bearing or azimuth. The command always occupies the last point calculated.
Prompts
Press [Enter] to use preview point/or select occupied point.
Pick point or point number: 14
PointNo. North(Y) East(X) Elev(Z) Description
14 4869.06 4390.31 0.00
Pick points that dene bearing.
Dene Bearing by, Line/Bearing/Numbers/<pick 1st point>: B
At this prompt the default is to pick the rst point that denes the bearing. If you pick a point, you are then prompted
for a second point. You can input B to type in a bearing or azimuth or L to select a line or polyline that denes the
bearing, or N to input two point numbers that dene the bearing.
[A]zimuth/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: A
Azimuth (ddd.mmss): 45.2349
Number inverse/<Distance>: 188.27
Enter Vertical Angle (dd.mmss) <0.0000>: press Enter
The horizontal distance is given.
Enter Point Description <stk>: press Enter
The coordinates are given.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate by Bearing-Ang
Keyboard Command: locbrg, lb
Prerequisite: None
Locate by Turned Angle
This command locates a point by turned angle and distance.
Prompts
Dene occupied & backsight points by [L]ine or [P]oints <P>: L
Select Line or Polyline near end point that denes occupied point: select line
Occupied point: (4078.44 4610.89 0.0)
Backsight point: (4390.31 4869.06 0.0)
Enter Angle (ddd.mmss) <45.2349>: 22.5632
Pick or Type Distance <188.27>: 40.32
Enter Vertical Angle (dd.mmss) <0.0000>: hit Enter
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 742
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate by Bearing-Ang
Keyboard Commands: turnang2, ta
Prerequisite: None
Locate by Azimuth
This command locates points by azimuth and distance. The AutoCAD text screen provides the horizontal distance
and coordinates.
Prompts
[Enter] to use preview point/ or Select occupied point ?
Pick point/<point Number>: endp of (pick a point)
Enter Azimuth (ddd.mmss) <22.5632>: 277.1259
Enter or pick Distance <40.32>: 104.39
Enter Vertical Angle (dd.mmss) <0.0000>: Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate by Bearing-Ang
Keyboard Commands: locazi2, az
Prerequisite: None
Locate by Bearing
This command locates points by bearing and distance. Additionally, the AutoCAD text screen provides the
horizontal distance and coordinates.
Prompts
[Enter] to use preview point or Select occupied point ?
Pick point/<point Number>: 24
PointNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
24 4922.37 4544.81 0.00
Enter Bearing (Qdd.mmss) <277.1259>: 435.2317
Enter or pick Distance <104.39>: 200
Enter Vertical Angle (dd.mmss) <0.0000>: Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate by Bearing-Ang
Keyboard Command: locbrg2, lg
Prerequisite: None
Locate by Delta
This command locates points by specied delta x, y, z from a reference point. The point style and whether to
prompt for a description is set in Point Defaults.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 743
Prompts
[Enter] to use preview point/ or Select occupied point ?
Pick point/<point Number>: pick a point
Delta Northing (dy): 23.45
Delta Easting (dx): 12.34
Delta Elevation (dz) <0.0>: press Enter
Enter Point Description <>: press Enter
N: 11687.04 E: 10095.31 Z: 0.00
Delta Northing (Enter to end): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate by Angle-Distance
Keyboard Commands: locdelta
Prerequisite: None
Pick Intersection Points
This command locates points at screen picked intersections. The object snap mode is set to intersection. This
routine is similar to the Locate Point command, with an additional check that makes sure there is an intersection at
the picked point. If there is not an intersection at the picked point, then no point is created.
Prompts
Pick Intersections Points dialog
APParent intersection on [<Yes>/No]: Y
This rst prompt is very important. Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent intersection of two objects (arc,
circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, spline, or xline) that do not intersect in 3D space, but may
appear to intersect in the current view. This allows you to locate a point at the theoretical intersection of two 3D
entities. You should answer No to this prompt if you want to ignore theoretical 3D intersections.
[app on] Pick intersection Point: pick a point
[app on] Pick intersection Point: press Enter to end
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 744
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate at Intersect
Keyboard Command: pickint
Prerequisite: Intersection of two entities
Linework Intersection Points
This command is used to create points at all of the intersections between selected linework entities.
Prompts
Select lines and polylines to process.
Select objects: Specify opposite corner: pick objects
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate at Intersect
Keyboard Command: ADDINTPTS
Prerequisite: None
Bearing-Bearing Intersect
This command locates a point at the intersection of two lines. The lines can be dened by picking two points,
selecting a line or typing in a bearing. After the lines are dened a point symbol is located at the point of
intersection. When a grid projection is dened in Drawing Setup, there is a prompt for whether to use the mean,
forward or back geodetic bearing.
Prompts
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 745
[Enter] to use preview point or select 1st Base point ?
Options/<Pick point or point number>: press Enter
Dene 1st angle by (Line/Points?Right/Azimuth/Bearing) <Bearing>: L
Select Line or Polyline that Denes 1st Bearing: select
Enter 1st Offset Distance <0.0>: press Enter
2nd Base point?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Dene 2nd angle by (Line/Points/Right/Azimuth/Bearing) <Line>: P
[Enter] to use preview point/or pick 1st point that denes 2nd bearing.
Pick point or Point number: pick point
2nd point that denes 2nd bearing ?
Pick point or Point number: pick a point
Enter 2nd Offset Distance <0.0>: press Enter
Enter/<Select text of elevation>: select
The point is then located at the computed point of intersection.
Bearing-Bearing Intersect example
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate at Intersect
Keyboard Command: bb
Prerequisite: None
Create Points from Entities
This command will create Carlson points on selected entities. The points are stored in the current coordinate (.CRD)
le and drawn on the screen. For arcs and polylines with arc segments, points are created at the radius points of the
arcs as well as the PC and PT.
In the rst options dialog, there are settings for the point attributes. To have points obtain their elevation from the
selected entities, unselect the Prompt for Elevations toggle and select the Locate on Real Z Axis toggle. After you
have specied the point options, a secondary dialog appears which allows you to specify the entity types to process.
Under the Description Settings, Prompt for Description At Each Point will prompt you at the command line for a
description for each individual point. Prompt Per Entity will ask you for a description per each highlighted entity.
Use Entity Layer for Description will assign the layer name to the description. When Entity Layer for Description
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 746
is checked, the layer name of the entity will be used as the description for the created point. Same Description For
All Points will prompt you for a single description for all points.
The second options dialog has processing settings. When Avoid Duplicates with Existing Pts is checked,
this routine will not create a point if a point with the same coordinates already exists in the current coordinate
(.CRD) le. The Draw New Points option creates point entities in the drawing. Otherwise, the new points
are only stored to the coordinate le. The Draw Existing Matched Points option applies to the Avoid Dupli-
cates option for the case when a duplicate is found in the coordinate le and not yet drawn. The Point Order
setting controls the sequence of the newpoint numbers to be in the order of selection or in a direction like left to right.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 747
Prompts
Create Points From Entities Dialogs Choose settings
Select arcs, circles, faces, points, text, lines and polylines.
Select objects: pick entities
Before and after using Create Points from Entities. Points are created at each endpoint and radius point.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: autopnts
Prerequisite: drawing entities
Distance-Distance Intersect
This command creates a point at the distance-distance intersection from two base points. The program prompts for
two distances and two base points. The two possible intersections (A,B) are shown on the screen. You can either
pick near the desired intersection or type in the letter A or B. The A intersection is clockwise from the rst point.
The Options choice brings up a small dialog that allows you to be prompted for angle method or for offsets, or both.
When a grid projection for the drawing is dened under Drawing Setup, the program will prompt for whether to use
the grid or geodetic distances.
Prompts
Select 1st base point
Options/<Pick point or point number>: 1
Points/<1st distance>: 46.72
Enter 1st Offset Distance <0.0>
Select 2nd base point
Pick point or point number: 2
Points/<2nd distance>: 38.96
Enter 2nd Offset Distance <0.0>: press Enter
Pick near solution or Enter [A] or [B]: pick a point
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 748
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate at Intersect
Keyboard Command: DD
Prerequisite: None
Bearing-Distance Intersect
The Bearing-Distance Intersect command prompts the user for a base point from which the known bearing
intersects. It then denes the bearing by one of three methods. The bearing can be dened by picking two points,
selecting a line with the same bearing or by typing in the bearing in the form of Qdd.mmss (similar to the Locate
by Bearing command). Next the user is prompted for a base point from which the known distance radiates. After
entering the known distance a circle is drawn radiating from the selected base point, and a line dened by the
bearing is extended to intersect the circle. The user then picks the correct point for the solution desired and a point
symbol is located at the selected intersection. The command then erases the temporary circle and line. The Options
choice allows you to be prompted for angle method or for offsets, or both.
When a grid projection for the drawing is dened under Drawing Setup, this command will prompt for whether to
use the grid bearing or geodetic mean, forward or back bearing. Also, the program will prompt for whether to use
the grid or geodetic distance.
Prompts
[Enter] to use preview point or select known Bearing base point
Options/Pick point or point number: pick point
Dene 1st bearing by (Line/Points/Azimuth/Bearing)<Bearing>: l
Select Line or Polyline that Denes Bearing: pick entity
Enter 1st Offset Distance <0.0>: press Enter
Known distance base point.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 749
Pick point or point number: pick point
Points/<Enter Distance>: 40.41
Enter 2nd Offset Distance <0.0>: press Enter
[int on] Pick Intersection point ([Enter] to cancel): pick point
Enter Point Number <55>: press Enter This prompt appears only if Automatic Point Numbering is turned off.
See Point Defaults
Enter Point Symbol Number <4>: press Enter This prompt appears only if point symbol prompting is turned on.
Symbol number 4 is located at the computed coordinate and labeled point number 55.
When Options (O) is selected
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate at Intersect
Keyboard Command: bdint
Prerequisite: None
Perpendicular Intersect
This command creates a point at the perpendicular intersection from an offset point to a line. This command
prompts for a base point from which the known bearing intersects. Then the bearing is dened by typing in the
bearing in the form of Qdd.mmss (similar to the Locate by Bearing command). Next the user is prompted for an
offset point.
Prompts
[Enter] to use preview point or select known Bearing base point
Pick point or point number: 1
Bearing (Qdd.mmss): 145.0000
Offset point.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 750
Pick point or point number: 51
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate at Intersect
Keyboard Command: perpint
Prerequisite: None
Tangent Intersect
This command creates a point at the tangential intersection from a point to another point and distance. This
command prompts for a base point and then the distance. Next there is a prompt for the second point. Since
there are two possible tangential solutions on the circle from the base point, the program displays the two possible
solutions and prompts for which one to use. To choose the solution, pick close to the solution point.
Prompts
[Enter] to use preview point or select known base point
Pick point or point number: 1
Points/<Enter Distance>: 25
Second point.
Pick point or point number: 51
Pick tangent point solution: pick a point
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 751
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate at Intersect
Keyboard Command: tangint
Prerequisite: None
2 Point - 2 Point Intersect
This command is similar to Bearing-Bearing Intersect except that in this command bearings are dened by specifying
two point numbers. In the example shown below, the rst two points specied are 3838 and 3839, the second pair
are 3841 and 3840. Point 3842 is located at the intersection.
Prompts
Specify 1st base point.
Pick point or point number: 3838
Specify 2nd point that denes 1st direction.
Pick point or point number: 3839
Specify 2nd base point.
Pick point or point number:3841
Specify 2nd point that denes 2nd direction.
Pick point or point number: 3840
Select/<Enter Point Elevation>: Enter value
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate at Intersect
Keyboard Command: bbint2
Prerequisite: None
Resection
This command calculates point coordinates given the angle and distance from two or three reference points. The Z
coordinate can also be calculated in addition to the X,Y. If you only need the 2D solution, then enter the instrument
and rod heights as 0.0, the zenith angle as 90 and the distance as the horizontal distance. The reference points are
specied by point number. These reference points need to be stored in the current coordinate (.CRD) le before
running this command.
After entering the reference point, there is a dialog to enter the horizontal angle, zenith angle and slope distance.
The horizontal angle is the horizontal azimuth or angle right from the unknown point to the reference point. In
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 752
the example, the backsight azimuth is 0 (due north), but this is not a requirement since the backsight can be any
angle. The program calculates the coordinate by averaging the distance-distance and angle-angle solutions. Since
there is redundant data, the nal calculated coordinate will differ slightly from the individual measurements. For
example, in a 3-point resection, there are two different distance-distance solutions (between the rst-second point
and between the second-third points). The program reports the difference between the nal coordinate and the
individual solutions as the residuals which act as an indicator whether the data is good. High residuals suggest a
problem with the input data. In the dialog that displays the nal coordinates and residuals, there is a button to store
the coordinates to the current coordinate (.CRD) le with a specied point number.
In the rst Resection dialog box, you can choose to use two or three reference points.
In the second Resection dialog box, you assign the reference point.
Point: You must enter the point number of your reference point. These reference points need to be stored in the
current coordinate le before you run this command.
Inst. Height: You must enter the instrument height.
Target Height: You must enter the target height.
If you need only the 2D solution, then enter the instrument and target heights as 0.0.
In the Manual Read dialog box, you must specify parameters for the calculation.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 753
Horizontal Angle: You must enter a horizontal angle from the resection to the reference points. The horizontal
angle is the horizontal azimuth, or angle right, from the unknown point to the reference point.
Zenith Angle: You must enter a zenith angle. For a 2D solution, set the zenith angle to 90 degrees.
Slope Distance: You must enter a slope distance from the reference points to the resection.
You are prompted for additional reference points and parameters.
The Resection Calculation dialog box that displays the nal coordinates and residuals. You can select the option to
store the coordinates in the current coordinate le with a specied point number.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Locate at Intersect
Keyboard Command: cresection
Prerequisite: Two or three reference points
Benchmark
This command is similar to the data collector routine, where a measurement with a total station is taken from an
unknown elevation to a known elevation foresight. The unknown elevation of the occupied point is then calculated
based on the measurement. Either the Occupied Elevation or the Instrument Height can be calculated. Note that a
check box is located at the bottom of the dialog box to ''Store Elev To Occupied Pt''. This will automatically change
the elevation of the occupied point.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 754
Prompts
Coordinate File to Process dialog If required, this dialog will appear and you must select a le.
Benchmark dialog Fill in variables, click Calculate
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: benchmark
Prerequisite: None
Numeric Pad COGO
Using only the keys on the numeric pad, this command does several COGO commands. The program cycles
through six prompts. Only respond to the prompts that apply and the program will perform the correct action. The
prompts are: First point? First angle? First distance? Second point? Second angle? Second distance?
To inverse, give a rst point and second point.
To traverse, give a rst point, rst angle and rst distance.
To do bearing-bearing intersect, give a rst point, rst angle, second point and second angle.
To do bearing-distance intersect, give a rst point, rst angle, second point, and second distance. Or give a rst
point, rst distance, second point, and second angle. The point is calculated at the closer intersection.
To do distance-distance intersect, give a rst point, rst distance, second point, and second distance. The point is
calculated at the rst intersection going clockwise from the rst point's distance circle.
Points can be screen picked or entered as point numbers that reference the current coordinate le. The last point is
used as a default when you press Enter at the prompt for the rst point. Which point is being used is indicated by a
ghost arrow pointer.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 755
Angles can be specied by picking two points or entering an angle code which begins with a single digit code
followed by the degrees and the minutes and seconds after a decimal point. The digits codes are (1 - Northeast, 2 -
Southeast, 3 - Southwest, 4 - Northwest, 5 - Azimuth). For example, Northwest 50d10'2'' would be 450.102.
Distances can be specied by picking two points or entering the distance value.
Prompts
Enter coords/Quit/<Pick 1st point or point number>: 5
Pick or Type 1st Direction by 2 Points: 145.0135 (Northeast 45d1'35'')
Pick or Type 1st Distance by 2 Points: 50.0
A point is created from the values for this traverse. The prompts for the second point don't appear because all the
information for this action is entered.
Enter coords/Quit/<Pick 1st point or point number>: press Enter to use the point created by the traverse.
Pick or Type 1st Direction by 2 Points: 50.0
Enter coords/Quit/<Pick 1st point or point number>: 4
Enter/Pick 2nd Direction by 2 Points: press Enter
Enter/Pick 2nd Distance by 2 Points: 75.0
This creates a point by distance-distance intersect.
Enter coords/Quit/<Pick 1st point or point number>: Q
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: ccogo
Prerequisite: None
Point on Arc
This command locates a point on an arc. You can select an arc entity, an arc polyline segment or enter three points to
dene an arc. After the arc is dened, the screen preview arrow shows the occupied point and the distance to solve
for is entered. The command then displays the curve information and locates/inserts a point symbol at the computed
point. When prompted for the distance, use a positive value if the distance is from the 1st endpoint (PC the one
highlighted by the screen preview arrow) and a negative value if from the 2nd endpoint (PT).
Prompts
Dene arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: pick arc or polyline arc segment Pick a point on the arc somewhere
near it's midpoint. The preview arrow points to the 1st endpoint.
Precede distance with minus sign if distance from 2nd endpoint.
Distance along arc from 1st point: 100
The command then plots a point at the computed distance.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 756
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Interpolate Points
Keyboard Command: ptarc
Prerequisite: None
Divide Between Points
This command divides the distance between two points and inserts one of the point symbols at the specied dis-
tances. It can also interpolate elevations (to interpolate the elevations, the points picked must be at their real Z axis
elevation).
Prompts
Interpolate elevations [Yes/<No>]? hit Enter
Point to divide-interpolate from?
Pick point or point number: 1
PointNo. Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z) Description
1 4252.76 4158.32 0.00
Point to divide-interpolate to?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Number of Segments-Divisions: 3
Enter Point Description <>:hit Enter
The command then locates two points.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Interpolate Points
Keyboard Command: divlin
Prerequisite: 2 points
Divide Along Entity
This command locates points along an entity such as a line, polyline, spline or arc. You must specify the number of
divisions.
Prompts
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 757
Interpolate Elevations [Yes/<No>]: press Enter
Select Entity to Divide: pick point on entity
Number of Divisions/Segments: 15
The command then locates 14 points.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Interpolate Points
Keyboard Command: divent
Prerequisite: 2 points if you want to interpolate elevations
Interval Between Points
This command creates points by interpolating at a horizontal distance interval between two control points. There is
an option for whether to interpolate the elevation or use zero for elevation. The point style and whether to prompt
for a description is set in Point Defaults.
Prompts
Interpolate elevations [Yes/<No>]? press Enter
Point to interpolate from?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Point to interpolate to?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Interval Distance: 50
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Interpolate Points
Keyboard Commands: ptintpt
Prerequisite: None
Interval Along Entity
This command creates points at a specied distance along an entity such as a line, arc, spline or polyline. The points
are listed out on the text screen, stored in the current coordinate (.CRD) le and drawn on the screen. For example,
you might use this command to locate lot corner points along a frontage line. When Break Entity at Points is
checked, the selected entity will be broken at every located point. When Create Point at Endpoint is checked, points
will also be located at the endpoints of the selected entity. Horizontal Distance Between Points allow you to specify
the distance between located points. There is also an option to create points on curved portions of the centerline
at a different interval than on tangent portions (to reduce chord lengths, a shorter interval may be suitable for curves).
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 758
For improved descriptions on the points, there is an option, in this main dialog, allowing you to determine whether
or not to label elevations on the new points. And for the purposes of describing the points, there is an option that
allows you to set the same description to all of the points. For more options related to points, see Point Defaults
under the Points pulldown.
Create Points at Endpoints turned on
Prompts
Select entity near endpoint which denes rst station.
[nea on] Select Entity to Interpolate Points: select entity
[nea on] Select Entity to Interpolate Points: Locating 13 Points
The command locates points along the selected entity.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Interpolate Points
Keyboard Command: ptint
Prerequisite: An entity
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 759
Line by Angle-Distance
This command draws a line from an occupied point at a given angle and distance, where the angle format supports
the standard 1-9 angle-bearing codes. It holds the current occupied point and calculates a line by angle-distance to
each entered point. As for the angle formats, the Options choice allows for angle right, azimuth only or prompt entry
(Right/Azimuth/Prompt) methods. The Prompt method allows you to enter the 1-9 angle-bearing codes.
Prompts
Occupied Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick point
Exit/Options/SideShot/Inverse/Enter Azimuth (ddd.mmss) <90.0000>: 112.3024
Points/<Distance>: 290
Exit/Options/SideShot/Inverse/Enter Azimuth (ddd.mmss) <112.3024>: O
Angle prompt angle right or azimuth only [Right/Azimuth/Prompt]? R
Exit/Options/SideShot/Inverse/Enter Angle (dd.mmss) <112.3024>: 88
Points/<Distance>: 300
Exit/Options/SideShot/Inverse/Enter Angle (dd.mmss) <88>: O
Angle prompt angle right or azimuth only [Right/Azimuth/Prompt]? P
Exit/Options/Points/Angle-Bearing Code <7>: Enter
Enter Angle (dd.mmss) <88>: 31.4340
Points/<Distance>: 419
Exit/Options/Points/Angle-Bearing Code <7>: E
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: travline
Prerequisite: None
Tangent Line from Circles
This command draws a line that is tangent to two circles or arcs. The circles can be dened either by picking the
radius point and entering the radius, or by selecting circle or arc entities. The tangent line can be drawn to either
outside on the left or right side, or across the middle between the circles from left to right or from right to left. The
line and the circles are drawn in the current layer. There is also an option to create two points at the ends of the
tangent line.
Tangent line Between two circles
Prompts
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 760
Tangent Line From Circles dialog
Pick center point of rst circle: pick a point
Pick rst radius: 25
Pick center point of second circle: pick a point
Pick second radius: 35
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: linecircle
Prerequisite: None
Building Offset Extensions
This command is used to calculate building corner offset points that are extensions of the building faces. This
command uses building perimeters that are drawn as closed polylines. The point are stored to the current coordinate
le and draw on the screen. There is a dialog for setting the parameters. The Offset Amount is the distance that
the offsets are extended past the end of the building line. The Starting Point Number is the point number to begin
storing from. The Point Description and Elevation are assigned to all the new points and the Point Layer is used for
all the drawn points. Offset points are always created as extensions of the building lines at the corners. Offset points
can optionally be created at the diagonals of corners and across to the other side of the building for inside corners.
In the rst example show here, Create Perpendicular Points is on. Points 101, 103, 104, 106, 107, 109, 110, 112,
115, 117, 118 and 120 are corner extension offset points. Points 102, 105, 108, 111, 116 and 119 are diagonal
points. Points 113 and 114 are across building points.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 761
In the second example, Create Perpendicular Points is off and the program only creates points on one side. Also on
this example, the Create 2nd Offsets option is on.
Prompts
Building Offset Extensions dialog
Select building perimeter linework.
Select objects: make selection
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: bldg pnts
Prerequisite: A polyline perimeter that represents a building
Radial Stakeout
This command creates a radial stakeout report using the current coordinate (.CRD) le. The program calculates the
azimuth, angle right, horizontal distance and/or slope distance for a range of points relative to an occupied point and
a backsight point.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 762
Occupied Point Number: Specify the occupied point number X and Y values will ll in automatically.
Backsight Point Number: Specify the backsight point number X and Y values will ll in automatically.
Maximum Hz Distance: This is the maximum horizontal distance from the occupied point that the program will
include in the report.
Range of points to Compute: Enter the range of points to be included in the stakeout report If you check Select
Points from Screen, this option is unavailable.
Select Points from Screen: This option allows you to select from the screen the points to be included in the
stakeout report.
Number of Decimal Places: Specify the display precision for the report.
Report Options: Specify the direction format that the report should use.
Report Slope Distance: When checked, the slope distance is included in the report in addition to the horizontal
distance.
Use Cut Sheet Format: When checked, adds columns to the report for Description, Hub Elev, and Elevation.
Results from clicking the List (point) button
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 763
Sample radial stakeout report:
Radial Stakeout
Occupied Point
2 7137.7248 9016.1417 500.000
Backsight Point
1 7075.7408 8875.7884 500.000
Backsight Azimuth= 246.1021
PtNo. Azimuth AngRight HzDist North(y) East(x) Elev(z)
3 261.0258 14.5237 74.061 7126.2022 8942.9830 500.000
4 262.4347 16.3327 113.032 7123.4208 8904.0181 500.000
5 281.1809 35.0748 137.858 7164.7435 8880.9572 500.000
6 301.4512 55.3452 82.296 7181.0342 8946.1639 500.000
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Commands: radstake, rs
Prerequisite: A coordinate le (.CRD le) with points
Section Subdivision
This command calculates and stores unknown corners that can be calculated given the data specied.
The Section number, Township and Range must be entered rst.
Next, specify the point IDs of corners that have been located in the eld.
Note: The choices in the Specify Field Located Corners section of the dialog merely make it more convenient to
enter the Section & Quarter corners and the 1/16th corners. This choice allows you to enter the corners in order
by just typing the point ID of a corner then just press enter to move to the next corner. You may enter any type of
corner located in the eld by changing the types of corners selection in the Specify Field Located Corners section.
Next, enter the government chainages as required.
The calculated points will be plotted on the screen and saved to the coordinate le.
For each calculated corner, the Saving Point dialog box will be displayed. Depending on the point default settings,
this dialog may allow you to accept or change the default point ID. Also, Depending on the point default settings,
the description and elevation may also be changed or accepted.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 764
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Section Corners
Keyboard Command: cg section subd
Prerequisite: Coordinate File
GLO Corner Proportioning
The GLO Corner Proportioning commands calculate section and 1/4 section corners by one, two, three or four way
control. GLO plats are the ofcial plats of the U.S. Government Land Ofce (GLO) executed after July 1946. The
Department of the Interior, Bureau of Land Management (BLM) is the successor agency to the GLO.
Geodetic Traverse
This command creates points by traversing by bearing and distance. The program starts by prompting for a starting
point. Then the bearing is entered as either grid bearing or geodetic bearing for mean, forward or backward. Then
the distance is entered either as grid distance or geodetic distance at mean elevation or zero elevation, and the
distance units can be either feet, meters or chains. The resulting point is then drawn using the point settings from
the Point Defaults command. Before running this command, the grid projection for the drawing must be dened in
the Drawing Setup command.
Prompts
Select 1st line to split: pick a line
Select 2nd line to split: pick a line
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 765
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Geodetic
Prerequisite: None
Keyboard Command: geotrav
Geodetic Single Proportion Line Division
This command breaks a line into two lines that have the same mean geodetic angle. The length of the rst new line
is proportional to the specied part distance relative to the total distance. Before running this command, the grid
projection must be set under Drawing Setup.
Prompts
Select a line near beginning point: pick a line
Enter Record Part Distance [Meters/<Feet>/Chains]: 500
Enter Record Total Distance [Meters/<Feet>/Chains]: 2000
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Geodetic
Prerequisite: A line
Keyboard Command: geosprop
Geodetic Double Proportion Line Division
This command is used to restore a lost corner from new measurements between four known corners with two
measurements each on intersecting meridianal and latitudinal lines. The program prompts for the four known
corner points to establish the retracement. Plus the program prompts for the four sets of record bearings and dis-
tances from the known points to the lost corner. The report then shows the calculated point along with the input data.
Double Proportion
Retrace Point Northing Easting
1st North-South 243758.936 471259.132
2nd North-South 252622.467 471144.220
1st East-West 248221.216 477033.581
2nd East-West 248208.591 464242.295
Record Bearing Distance
1st North-South N 0005'03'' W 4529.100
2nd North-South N 0109'48'' W 4335.400
1st East-West N 8934'32'' W 5821.300
2nd East-West S 8903'47'' W 6971.200
Northing Easting
New Point 248287.938 471213.134
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 766
Prompts
Pick First point for North-South line: pick a point
Pick Second point for North-South line: pick a point
Mean Bearing from Record (Qdd.mmss): 40.5027
Enter Record Distance [<Meters>/Feet/Chains]: 4529.1
Mean Bearing from Record (Qdd.mmss): 41.0948
Enter Record Distance [<Meters>/Feet/Chains]: 4335.4
Pick First point for East-West line: pick a point
Pick Second point for East-West line: pick a point
Mean Bearing from Record (Qdd.mmss): 489.3432
Enter Record Distance [<Meters>/Feet/Chains]: 5821.3
Mean Bearing from Record (Qdd.mmss): 389.0347
Enter Record Distance [<Meters>/Feet/Chains]: 6971.2
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Geodetic
Prerequisite: Grid projection under Drawing Setup
Keyboard Command: geodprop
Geodetic Double Break
This command breaks two crossing lines at their intersection such that the two segments of the rst line have the
same geodetic mean bearing and the two segments of the second line have the same geodetic mean bearing. Before
running this command, the grid projection must be set under Drawing Setup.
Prompts
Select 1st line to split: pick a line
Select 2nd line to split: pick a line
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Geodetic
Prerequisite: Two crossing lines
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 767
Keyboard Command: geodbk
Geodetic Middle Break
This command breaks a line into two lines that have the same mean geodetic angle and same geodetic length.
Before running this command, the grid projection must be set under Drawing Setup.
Prompts
Select line to split at geodetic midpoint: pick a line
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Geodetic
Prerequisite: A line
Keyboard Command: geomid
Irregular Boundary Adjustment
This command adjusts angle/distance courses between two control points. This adjustment applies to boundaries
that are not established as straight lines and are termed ''irregular''. A modied form of single proportionate
measurement is used by this method to restore the lost corners. To apply the geodetic lengths and angles with this
adjustment, the grid projection must be set under Drawing Setup before running this command.
For input, this command takes reference coordinates for the starting and ending points either by screen pick or by
point number. Then the record angles and distances between these two reference points are entered. The program
reports the input data, the recalculated points and the adjusted angles and distances.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 768
Prompts
Pick Starting point or point number: pick point
Pick Ending point or point number: pick point
Mean Bearing from Record (Qdd.mmss): 40.2200
Enter Record Distance [<Meters>/Feet/Chains]: 5314.46
Mean Bearing from Record (Qdd.mmss): 41.0220
Enter Record Distance [<Meters>/Feet/Chains]: 2846.75
Enter another record [Yes/<No>]? press Enter
Draw adjusted lines [<Yes>/No]? press Enter
Irregular Boundary Report
Retrace Point
Northing Easting
222637.518 477292.438
230796.636 477202.638
Record
Bearing Distance
N 0022'00'' W 5314.460
N 0102'20'' W 2846.750
New Point
Northing Easting
227950.882 477255.709
Adjusted
Bearing Distance
N 0023'46'' W 5313.490
N 0104'06'' W 2846.248
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Geodetic
Prerequisite: Two control points and record courses
Keyboard Command: geoirrb
One Way Control
This routine calculates section and 1/4 section corners by one way control. First, enter the point number for Point
A. This number can be entered in manually or picked from the screen by selecting the Pick radial button at bottom
right. In a like manner, the Bearing from A to B can be entered manually or by using the Pick radial button to
pick from the screen. The distance from A to X can be specied in the same manner as above. After selecting
OK, a dialog box will display where the Point number, description and elevation can be edited. The point default
settings determine the available data for editing. For example, if the option for Automatic Point Numbering is
turned off in the Point Defaults, then the eld for the point number will be grayed out. If elevations are turned off in
the point defaults, then the elevation eld with be grayed out. This also applies to the description of the point as well.
Prompts
GLO Proportioning One Way Control dialog
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 769
Saving Point dialog
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Section Corners > GLO Corner Proportioning
Keyboard Command: cg glo one way
Prerequisite: A coordinate le
Two Way Control
This routine calculates section and 1/4 section corners by two way control. Enter the point numbers for Point A
and B. These numbers can be entered in manually or picked from the screen by selecting the Pick radial button at
bottom right. In a like manner, the Record Chainages from A to X and from A to B can be entered manually or by
using the Pick radial button to pick from the screen. After selecting OK, a dialog box will display where the Point
number, description and elevation can be edited. The point default settings determine the available data for editing.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 770
For example, if the option for Automatic Point Numbering is turned off in the Point Defaults, then the eld for the
point number will be grayed out. If elevations are turned off in the point defaults, then the elevation eld with be
grayed out. This also applies to the description of the point as well. GLO is an acronym for Government Land Ofce.
Prompts
GLO Proportioning Two Way Control dialog
Saving Point dialog
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Section Corners > GLO Corner Proportioning
Keyboard Command: cg glo two way
Prerequisite: A coordinate le
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 771
Three Way Control
This routine works as the previous GLO Proportioning methods described. Fill out the required data elds on the
dialog box and select OK. After selecting OK, a dialog box will display where the Point number, description and
elevation can be edited. The point default settings determine the available data for editing. For example, if the option
for Automatic Point Numbering is turned off in the Point Defaults, then the eld for the point number will be grayed
out. If elevations are turned off in the point defaults, then the elevation eld with be grayed out. This also applies to
the description of the point as well. GLO is an acronym for Government Land Ofce.
Prompts
GLO Proportioning Three Way Control dialog
Saving Point dialog
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 772
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Section Corners > GLO Corner Proportioning
Keyboard Command: cg glo three way
Prerequisite: A coordinate le
Four Way Control
This routine works as the previous GLO Proportioning methods described. Fill out the required data elds
on the dialog box and select OK. After selecting OK, a dialog box will display where the Point number, de-
scription and elevation can be edited. The point default settings determine the available data for editing. For
example, if the option for Automatic Point Numbering is turned off in the Point Defaults, then the eld for the
point number will be grayed out. If elevations are turned off in the point defaults, then the elevation eld with be
grayed out. This also applies to the description of the point as well. GLO is an acronym for Government Land Ofce.
Prompts
GLO Proportioning Four Way Control dialog
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 773
Saving Point dialog:
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO > Section Corners > GLO Corner Proportioning
Prerequisite: A coordinate (CRD) le
Keyboard Command: cg glo four way
Solar Observations
This feature calculates true north and/or grid north bearings by solar observation. It uses the Local Hour Angle
(LHA) method. The routine calculates Ephemeris data, thus alleviating the necessity of obtaining a Solar Ephemeris.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 774
The True North option calculates the true north bearing to mark. This option requires no zone/ellipsoid information.
The True North & Grid North option calculates both true north and grid north bearings to north. The convergence
angle is also shown.
Note: There is a description of solar observation eld procedures at the end of this section.
True North Prompts
Calculate true north, or true north and grid bearing (<True north>/Grid Bearing: type T, press Enter
Choose eld method (Leading edge/Trailing edge/<Center>): choose method, press Enter
If a Roelofs prism is being used, the Center Method should be selected. If not, select one of the other options. The
Trailing Edge Method is the more popular of the two remaining methods.
Date of observation as MM/DD/YY or MM-DD-YYYY: For example 04/08/03.
Enter latitude of instrument point as DD.MMSS: For example 36.0545
Enter longitude of instrument point as DD.MMSS:
The following input loop will begin:
Obs. #1 - Time of observation as HH.MMSS: For example 15.3030
Enter angle to mark as DD.MMSS: Angle in the instrument when backsighting the mark.
Enter angle to sun as DD.MMSS: Clockwise angle from mark to sun.
The angle to the mark always has a default value of the last entered Angle to Mark. Each observation is numbered
and the true bearing to the mark will be calculated. There is not limit as to the number of observations that can be
made from a setup. After data entry is complete, press Enter.
The following options appear:
[Edit/Ok/Quit] <O>:
If you choose Edit, you will have the following options:
ADD/Change/Delete/eXit:
Add: Allows for addition observation data entry.
Change:
Allows editing of existing data. When selected a prompt for Enter observation to change will be displayed. Choose
which observation number to edit. You will then be prompted with the initial input prompts for the observation
again. The original input values will be the default values for each prompt. To change the value, simply enter new
data.
Once Delete: This will delete the specied observation data. Choose the observation number to delete.
eXit: This exits the change routine.
If you type 0 and Enter or just enter for OK, the bearings from all the observations will be averaged and
shown as well as the True Bearing. For example:
No. Time Angle-@-Mark Angle-to-Sun True-Brg-to-Mark
1 12.3030 000'00'' 2000'00'' N 7305'43''E
2 12.4456 000'00'' 2100'00'' N 7417'15''E
Average True Bearing: N 7341'29''E
True North & Grid Bearing Prompts
Type of calculation [True-north/true-north-and-Grid-bearing] <T>: G
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 775
The following dialog will be displayed.
Select the state in which the observations were made. All fty states are available, as well as PR for Puerto Rico and
UTM for Universal Transverse Mercator.
If the state is divided into zones, you will be prompted for the zone you are working in.
Enter zone (N,S): Enter the zone.
If you are using a UTM , you will see the following prompt:
Enter ellipsoid to use [GRS-1980/Other] <G>:
Type ''R'' and Enter or just Enter for Reciprocal attening, ''S'' and Enter for Semi-minor axis, or ''E'' and Enter for
ellipsoid ECC squared.
if you typed O and Enter for Other, you will see the following prompt:
Ellipsoid constant [Reciprocal attening/Semi-minor axis/ellipsoid ECC squared] <R>:
Depending on what was entered at the last prompt you will see one of the following prompts: Enter reciprocal
attening constant: Type the constant.
Enter semi-minor axis: Enter the axis.
Enter ellipsoid ECC squared constant: Enter the constant.
After entering the zone and ellipsoid information (if applicable) the date, latitude, longitude and time input loop will
begin (as described above for the True North calculation).
After data entry is completed the [Edit/Ok/Quit] <O>: prompt will be displayed (see the True North section for
more details on this prompt).
If you type 0 and Enter of just Enter for Ok, the information for all the observations is displayed along with the
Average True Bearing, Average Grid Bearing and the Convergence Angle as follows:
No. Time Angle-@-Mark Angle-to-Sun True-Brg-to-Mark
1 12.2222 000'00'' 2000'00'' N 7257'31''E
2 12.4444 000'00'' 2200'00'' N 7420'51''E
Average True Bearing: N 7339'11''E
Average Grid Bearing: N 7215'12''E
Convergency Angle: 123'59''
Field Procedures for the Local Hour Angle (LHA) method
This section explains Universal Time and then explains two ways of pointing, Trailing Edge Tangency and Roelofs
Prism.
Universal Time
The Universal Time can be obtained on certain radio bands. On the radio channel there will be a signal beep every
minute. Set a watch to the Universal Time or, when in the eld, start a stopwatch at the beep (for a known Universal
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 776
Time).
In order for the solar observation method to produce accurate results, it is essential that you record the precise
Universal Time for an observation. Thus, when making the eld observations, record the stopwatch elapsed time in
order to calculate the Universal Time or, if you set your watch to Universal Time, record the time directly.
Trailing Edge Tangency
While pointing at the ground mark, set the horizontal circle to read about 00-00-30, perfect pointing. With the scope
direct, record the horizontal circle reading to the mark.
Attach the eyepiece lter and sight the sun. After locating the sun, do the following:
Set the horizontal reticle line near the center of the sun's image with the vertical reticle line leading the trailing edge
of the sun (slightly right for a direct image).
Clamp the horizontal motion and watch the image of the sun as the trailing edge approaches tangency with the
vertical reticle line.
Stop the timer at the time of tangency.
Record the time and the horizontal circle reading.
Repeat the pointing for a total of four pointings in the direct position.
Unclamp the horizontal motion, rotate the instrument 180 degrees, plunge the scope, and then obtain data for four
reverse readings.
Unclamp the horizontal motion, point at the ground mark with the instrument reverse and record the horizontal
circle.
The timer must be checked-in on a radio signal. Some quartz regulated electronic watches are accurate for extended
periods of time, allowing several hours of check-in to check-out on the radio. Otherwise, most timers should be
started and stopped on a radio signal at the beginning and ending of the observation set.
Roelofs Prism
Attach Roelofs prism and sight the sun (you can center the shadow of the telescope between the standards as an aid
in locating the sun). Be sure that the hinged tube is closed when pointing at the sun. After locating the sun through
the scope, do the following:
Rotate the prism until the four overlapping images of the sun are symmetrical with the instrument's reticle lines.
Point on the ground mark with the instrument direct and the Roelofs prism tube swung open, perfect pointing on
the ground mark. Record the horizontal circle reading to the mark.
Point at the sun with the prism closed. After locating the sun, do the following:
Set the horizontal reticle line near the center of the sun's pattern with the vertical reticle line leading the center of
the moving pattern (slightly to right of the sun for direct optics).
Clamp the horizontal motion and watch the pattern move to the point of coincidence. This is the intersec-
tion of the vertical reticle line with the apex of the small dark square formed in the center of the pattern by the
overlapping parts of the four images formed of the sun.
Stop the timer at the moment of coincidence.
Record the time and the horizontal circle reading.
Repeat the pointing for a total of four readings in the direct position.
Unclamp the horizontal motion, rotate the instrument 180 degrees, plunge the scope, and then obtain data for four
reverse readings.
Unclamp the horizontal motion, point on the ground mark with the instrument reversed and record the angle on the
horizontal circle.
The timer must be checked-in on a radio signal. Some quartz regulated electronic watches are accurate for extended
periods of time, allowing several hours of check-in to check-out on the radio. Otherwise, most timers should be
started and stopped on a radio signal at the beginning and ending of the observation set.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: cg solar obs
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 777
Triangle Solutions
Triangle Solutions solves for the remaining sides and angles of a triangle given the known side and angles. The
upper case letters A, B and C represent the distances. The lower case letters a, b and c represent the angles. Distance
A is the leg of the triangle opposite the angle 'a'. Likewise, distance B and C are the legs opposite the angles of
'b' and 'c', respectively. Enter any three known values of the six possible parameters and the three unknowns will
be calculated and displayed. If you enter three angles, you will be shown proportional distances since there is an
innite number of distances that would solve a three angle triangle.
In this example, The sides A & B are known as is angle 'a'. After entering the three parameters, press the Solve
button and the remaining three will be calculated and shown. The area in acres or hectares and feet or meters will
also be calculated and shown. Press clear to enter data on a new triangle after the triangle has been solved. The
solution for each triangle area is then displayed at the command line. You may press F2 to display the command
line window and view the results
Side A Side B Side C Angle a Angle b Angle c
45.00 85.00 88.40 3000'00'' 7048'43'' 7911'17''
Area = 1878.550 sq. ft. (0.043 acres)
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: trianglesolutions
Prerequisite: None
Best Fit Point
This command calculates the average point from a selection of input points and reports the residual statistics. The
input points can be specied by point number, by point group or by screen selection. The program displays the
input points with residuals in a dialog where you can toggle on/off whether to include points in the average using
the Process On/Off button. The Remove button removes a point from the average and the residual report. There is
an option whether to output the average point to the current coordinate le. The option to delete all the input points
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 778
applies when there are several points that are meant to be the same point and you want to replace them with a single
averaged point. The command shows a report of the input points, residuals and average point.
Prompts
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? press Enter
Select Carlson Software Points.
Select objects: pick points
Best Fit Dialog
Sample Report:
Source Coordinates
Point# Northing Easting Elevation Residual
1 4024.912 5205.108 542.200 131.567
2 4062.104 5173.570 543.100 147.733
3 4126.711 5180.822 543.700 142.100
...
Residuals Standard Deviation: 37.128
Average Residual: 107.188
Average Point: 4091.142,5317.562,558.855
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: btpt
Prerequisite: Two or more points
Best Fit Circle
This command draws a least-squares best-t circle based on points on the perimeter. The program handles four or
more perimeter points. A design point for the circle center can optionally be specied as a reference to compare
with the best-t center in the report. The report shows the residuals for each point, the residuals standard deviation,
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 779
the difference between the design point and the circle center, and the circle parameters. The residuals are calculated
as the perpendicular distance from the point to the circle. The best-t circle can be calculated in 2D or 3D. In
2D mode, the elevation of the points is not used. In 3D mode, a best-t plane is calculated for the points. Then
the points are projected onto the plane and the best-t circle is calculated on this plane. Then the resulting circle
is projected back into world coordinates and drawn as a 3D polyline with short chords to represent the 3D circle
since CAD doesn't support a 3D circle entity. Applications for 3D circles are tunnel sections and architectural arches.
After specifying the points, the program calculates the best-t circle and shows the results in the dialog show here.
You can toggle each point for whether to include in the calculations. You can also modify the radius.
Prompts
Create 2D or 3D circle [<2D>/3D]? press Enter
Select points from screen or by point number [<Screen>/Number]? N
Point numbers: 2-6
Point numbers (Enter to continue): press Enter
Enter design center point# (Enter for None):
Sample Report:
Source Coordinates
Point# Northing Easting Residual
2 5253.198 5070.233 0.126
3 5246.623 5084.077 0.045
4 5232.963 5078.608 -0.131
5 5235.610 5065.105 0.217
6 5247.392 5064.165 -0.264
Residuals Standard Deviation: 0.174
Circle Center: 5242.678,5073.785 Radius: 10.977
Design Center Point#: 1
Design Center: 5242.718,5073.688
Center Distance Difference: 0.105
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 780
Best Fit Circle
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: btcir
Prerequisite: Four or more points
Best Fit Centerline
This command processes a group of points to compute the best tting centerline by least squares. The points can
be input from Carlson points or from vertices of a polyline. For points input, the points can be selected by screen
selection or point number range. Each line segment in the centerline is calculated by the best-t line method and
each arc segment is calculated by the best-t arc method. The line and arc segments are then made to be tangential.
In the process options dialog, the Snap Tolerance is the max offset from the point to the line or arc segment in
order to be counted as part of that segment. The Max Radius controls the maximum radius for arc segments that
the program will t to the data. The Create Tangents Only option skips the step of calculating the best-t arcs and
outputs only the lines. Arcs can be added later using routines like Fit Curve in the Input-Edit Centerline command.
The residual for each point is the perpendicular distance from the point to the best-t centerline. The results are
shown in a dialog and you can toggle each point for whether to include in the calculations. Points that are toggled
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 781
off are not used for calculating the centerline but are still used in the residual report. The Remove function removes
the point from both calculation and residual reporting.
Prompts
Input existing data from points or polyline [<Points>/Line]? press Enter
Select points from screen or by point number [<Screen>/Number]? S
Select Carlson Software Points.
Select objects: pick the centerline points
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: bestcl
Prerequisite: Group of points or a polyline to sample
Best Fit Line by Average
This command will t a line from a starting point by sampling a group of points. The routine averages the coordi-
nates of the sampling group then draws the best-t line. The program generates a report of the residuals, standard
deviation, line bearing and line distance. The perpendicular distance from each point to the line is reported as the
residual.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 782
Screen selection of lines almost in line with one another
Sample report of Best Fit Line by Average with a different group of points
Prompts
Starting point ?
Pick point or point number: pick starting point
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? press Enter
Select points.
Select objects: select group of points Select points using Window or Crossing. The line is then drawn to the
computed point.
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: btlin
Prerequisite: points to sample
Best Fit Line by Least Squares
This command will sample a group of points by screen selection or point number range, and then compute the best
tting line by least squares. There are options to best t with nothing held (None), to best t by holding a point, and
to best t by holding a bearing. All three options are shown below in the graphic. When holding a point, you are
prompted to enter the weight for the point. In this example, a weight of 1000 caused the line to pass to within 0.025
of point 111. With a weight of 5000, the line passed to within 0.005 of point 111. Increase the weight accordingly
to obtain the desired precision. When holding a bearing such as N45E, you are prompted to enter the bearing in
the form QDD.MMSS (e.g. 145.0000 or just 145). The program generates a standard report. The residual for each
point is the perpendicular distance from the point to the best-t line.
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 783
After specifying the points, the program calculates the best-t line and shows the results in the dialog show here.
You can toggle each point for whether to include in the calculations. Points with Process set to No and not used for
calculating the line but are still included in the report of residuals. Use the Remove button to remove a point both
from calculation and reporting.
The Create Two Parallel Lines option applies when the points are for two line that are meant to be parallel such as
a right-of-way. The program takes input for the distance between these two lines and then automatically sorts the
points between the two lines, reports the residuals for the two lines and draws the two lines.
Prompts
Select points from screen, group or by point number [<Screen>/Group/Number]? S
Select Carlson Software Points.
Select objects: pick the ve points
Point numbers (Enter to continue): press Enter
Parameter to hold [<None>/Point/Bearing]: P
Enter point number to hold:111
Enter weight for point: 5000
Sample Report:
Best Fit Line By Least Squares
Holding point 111: (5227.721,5149.482)
Coordinate File> c:\data\interval.crd
Source Coordinates
Point# Northing Easting Residual
109 5103.542 5182.098 10.050
110 5114.634 5191.928 6.921
111 5149.482 5227.721 0.005
112 5178.703 5268.237 0.400
113 5201.666 5312.602 8.129
Residuals Standard Deviation: 6.559
Bearing: N 53&Acirc;44'07'' E
Distance: 163.266
Pulldown Menu Location: COGO
Keyboard Command: btlinelq
Prerequisite: Group of points to sample
Chapter 12. COGO Menu 784
Centerline Menu 13
The Centerline menu provides commands for designing and editing centerlines and centerline les. Tools for
stationing, labeling and offsetting centerlines, along with Right of Way features, are also provided in this menu.
Additionally, there are many import and export conversion options to select from when you pick Centerline
Conversion.
785
Design Centerline
This command draws a centerline polyline and writes the centerline data in a centerline le. The rst step is
to specify a centerline (.CL) le name. Next in the Design Centerline dialog you can specify several options.
Centerline Layer is the layer name for the polyline. Tangents Layer is the layer name for the tangent lines drawn
from the centerline to the curve center. Max superelevation is used for determining the minimum recommended
radius. Setting the Prompting mode to Existing skips design questions such as design speed.
After the Design Centerline dialog, the program cycles through curve prompting until End is selected. There are
PC and PI modes for curve entry. In PC mode the arc's PC points are entered followed by the curve data. The
PC points can be specied by either picking the point, entering a distance or entering a station. In PI mode, the
arc's PI points are entered. Once the PI points determine two tangents, the program prompts for curve data for the
previous PI. Spirals can only be entered in PI mode. You can switch between arc and PI mode between curves on
the polyline. The arc curvature can be specied by degree of curve or radius. The minimum recommend radius is
based on AASHTO. The arc length can be specied by PT station, tangent length or arc length.
The Store Points in CRD File will create points in the current coordinate le for each design point on the centerline.
This option is also used for creating the SMI chain le within Centerline Utilities, since the SMI chain le requires
point numbers. To specify the coordinate le, choose Set Coordinate File in the Points menu.
Prompts
Centerline le to design Enter the .CL le name to create.
Design Centerline Dialog Choose your options and click OK.
Pick Point or Point number: pick a starting point or enter the starting point coordinates
For PC mode design:
Bearing/PI/End/Undo/<Pick Point or Point number>: pick the PC point
Bearing/PC/PI/End/Undo/<Pick Point or Point number>: PC
Enter Design Speed for curve <55.00>: 40
Minimum Recommended Radius = 426.67
View/Point/Degree of Curve/<Radius>: 500
Curve direction (Left/<Right>)? press Enter for right
Length to use (Station/Tangent/<Arc>)? press Enter for arc
Point/Station/Tangent/<Arc Length>: 200
Reverse/Compound Curve (Yes/<No>)? press Enter
PI/Distance/Station/<Pick PC or Point number>: D for distance
Point/Enter Distance: 180
Bearing/Line/Undo/End/<Continue PC>: press Enter
Enter Design Speed for curve <40.00>: press Enter
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 786
Minimum Recommended Radius = 426.67
Example of PC mode centerline design
View/Point/Degree of Curve/<Radius>: 500
Curve direction (Left/<Right>)? press Enter
Point/Station/Tangent/<Arc length>? 300
Reverse/Compound Curve (Yes/<No>)? press Enter
PI/Distance/Station/<Pick point or Point number>: D for distance
Point/Enter Distance: 140
Bearing/Line/Undo/End/<Continue PC>: E to end
For PI mode design:
Bearing/PI/End/Undo/<Pick Point or Point number>: pi
Pick Point or Point number (PI)<5098.50,3509.11>: pick the rst PI point
Type of curve [Spiral/<Circular>]? S for spiral
Enter Design Speed for curve <55.00>: 40
Minimum Recommended Radius = 426.67
View/Point/Degree of Curve/<Radius>: 500
Enter Number of Lanes <2>:
View/Enter Spiral Length In <204.8000>: 210
View/Enter Spiral Length Out <210.0000>: press Enter
Bearing/Pick next Point or Point number (PI): pick the next PI point
TS: 1+33.280
SC: 3+43.280
CS: 6+39.364
ST: 8+49.364
Bearing/Line/PC/Undo/End/<Continue PI>: press Enter
Type of curve [Spiral/<Circular>]? press Enter for circular
Enter Design Speed for curve <40.00>: press Enter
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 787
Example of PI mode centerline design
Minimum Recommended Radius = 426.67
View/Point/Degree of Curve/<Radius>: 500
Bearing/Pick next Point or Point number (PI): pick the last PI
PC : 9+35.900
PT : 16+34.283
Reverse/Compound Curve [Yes/<No>]? press Enter
Bearing/Line/PC/Undo/End/<Continue PI>: E to end
EndPoint : 18+37.121
Stations are printed for every PC, PT and end point in the design process.
Pulldown Menu Location: Centerline
Keyboard Command: centerln
Prerequisite: None
Input-Edit Centerline File
This command can be used to input a new centerline or edit an existing centerline (.CL) le. It is a dialog-based
alternative to Design Centerline and has the advantage of accepting whatever information you have on your center-
lines (coordinates, stationing, length of tangents and arcs, etc). For creating a new centerline, it is ideal for entering
data straight from highway design plans. For editing, this command allows you to change any of the geometric
properties of any of the elements of the centerline (lines, curves, spiral-only and symmetrical spiral-curve-spiral
elements), including the starting coordinates and station.
Starting this command launches the Centerline Input-Edit main dialog box. To edit an existing Centerline, you can
either pick the Load button and pick the .CL le, or pick the Screen Pick button and pick the polyline in the drawing
that represents the Centerline. The Centerline is then displayed in the graphics window of the dialog box. The
highlighted segment in the text window is also highlighted in the graphics window.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 788
Drag Action (Zoom and Pan): In the graphics window, hold the left mouse button down and move mouse to Pan,
roll the wheel to Zoom.
Zoom Drawing To Current Segment: This option zooms the drawing graphics to center on the centerline segment
currently highlighted in the dialog.
Hold Other PI Points When Change Starting Point: With this option active, all the existing PI's are held when
the starting coordinate is moved. Otherwise, all the PI's are moved by the same amount that the starting point is
moved.
Show Right of Way: This option shows any ROW's dened in the centerline in the graphic preview window.
Type of Curves: This setting chooses between roadway and railroad denitions for curve lengths.
Add: Adds a new element after the highlighted element. Prompts you for the type of the element to be added, Line,
Curve, Spiral-Only or Spiral-Curve-Spiral.
Edit: Allows you to edit the highlighted segment.
Remove: Removes the highlighted element from the centerline.
Up/Down: Moves elements in the table Up and Down in the list. For example, if this centerline ended with a
tangential line from the last curve, then was followed by a non-tangential line at 45d NE, moving the last element
up would create a line at 45d after the curve (non-tangential), and the formerly tangential line will remain tangential
and therefore continue at NE 45d.
Load: Loads an existing centerline (.CL) le for review or editing. After loading a centerline, the listbox in the
dialog shows a list of all the elements in the centerline, identifying them as either a line, curve, spiral only or full
spiral-curve-spiral element and reporting the ending station, northing and easting of the element.
Screen Pick: Allows user to pick a CL off the screen in the drawing to load into the editor.
Tools > Reverse: Reverses direction of Centerline.
Tools > Rotate: Rotates the centerline by the specied rotation angle and around the specied pivot point.
Draw: This button draws the centerline in the drawing on the specied layer.
Save: Saves the currently loaded centerline to a le, or will prompt you for a name if no name has been set.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 789
SaveAs: Prompts you for a le name for the saved le.
Fit Curve: Fits a circular curve element into the centerline after the line element that is currently selected.
Fit Spiral: Fits a spiral curve element into the centerline after the line element that is currently selected.
Point Numbers: This will create Carlson points along the elements of the centerline and store them to the current
CRD le. The new points will be numbered in sequence beginning with the rst available point number in the CRD
le.
Station Equations: At any number of locations on a centerline, you can set the back station and forward station for
the re-stationing of the centerline. The station equation dialog appears below:
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 790
If the Station Back is lower than the Station Ahead, then a ''gap'' is inserted in the centerline, where the stations jump
forward. If the Station Ahead is less than the Station Back, then an overlap occurs, where the common station range
is repeated.
ROW: This function edits the right-of-way denitions associated with the centerline. There can be multiple ROW's
assigned to the centerline for left and right sides as well as multiple on the same side. The function rst shows a list
of ROW's for the centerline where you can add, edit or delete.
When you add or edit a ROW, there is a second dialog for entering the stations and offsets that dene the ROW
relative to the centerline. Use negative offsets for left and positive for right.
Alternatively, the Enter Right of Way and Polyline to Right of Way commands are other ways to dene the
ROW's for a centerline.
Exit: Exits this routine, prompting to save changes if necessary.
The dialog for every type of element shows the point ID, the northing, easting and station of the start point of the
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 791
element. It then allows the user to modify or dene the parameters specic to the type of element. The following
are some of the things to remember about data entry in the centerline editor. These are valid for lines, curves and
spirals.
Wherever length of the element is to be entered, entering an expression of the type 123.5 - 93.7 would evaluate
the difference of the values. This is particularly convenient where only the stations of the start and end points
of the element are known.
When the station is specied, the program takes the length of the element as the difference between the station
of the start point of the element and the station specied.
All bearings should be specied by entering the angle between 0 and 90 degrees (in dd.mmss format) and
selecting the quadrant.
When entering the delta angle of a curve, only the absolute value (between 0 and 360 degrees) is to be entered.
The direction of the curve is to be explicitly set as right or left, the default being left. All angles are entered in
(dd.mmss) format.
Point numbers, when used, access their coordinates in the current .CRD le. If the point number specied has
no coordinates stored in the coordinate le, the point number is remembered for that particular location (say
the radius point of a curve or the SC point of a spiral). Then, when the .CL le is saved, the program creates
points for that location and stores them to the .CRD le with the specied point number.
The dialog for a Line allows the user to specify the line primarily by its length or station and its bearing. The line
can also be dened by its end point number or its coordinates. The bearing of a line can be changed if the Tangential
to the Previous Element toggle is not checked. By default, any line which follows a curve element is defaulted to
be tangential to it. To use a bearing different than that of the previous element, uncheck this toggle and enter the
bearing.
The dialog for the Curve allows the user to dene the curve primarily by its radius and delta angle or arc length.
The other parameters of the curve that can be edited are the bearing of tangent-out and the ''Station to'', which also
denes the arc length. The curve can also be specied by entering the coordinates or point numbers of its end point
(PT) and the radius point. Another way to specify the curve would be to enter the chord length or PT point station
and chord bearing. If the central PI point and a point on the forward tangent are known, then the curve can be
dened by entering both of these points and at least one other property of the curve (like radius, arc length, delta
angle). The point on the forward tangent can be any point that denes the tangent out direction including the next
PI point. If only the central PI point is known, then the tangent-out can be entered by bearing instead of by forward
tangent point. Central PI and forward tangent points are not displayed from the .CL le. They have to be entered
by the user and are valid only for that particular edit session; that is, they are not remembered the next time the
le is loaded. Curves are assumed to be tangent to the last element unless the Tangential to the Previous Element
checkbox is cleared.
The Curve Edit Mode option denes how the curve is accepted in the centerline. If the Hold PC point is checked on,
the radius is taken as xed and the delta angle of the curve is calculated based on some additional parameter. Hence,
the extent of the curve is unlimited. However, if the Hold PI points option is checked on, the bearing of tangent-out
of the curve is taken as xed and the radius is calculated based on some other parameter. In this case, the curve is
completely restricted within the central PI point and the bearing of tangent out. Hence, when the Hold PI points
option is checked on, the above parameters should also be dened to carry out the calculations.
The dialog for the Spiral-Curve-Spiral element allows the user to dene the spiral by entering either the various
parameters of the spiral (like the angles and lengths) or the coordinates or point numbers of its dening points: the
TS (Tangent-to-Spiral), SC (Spiral-to-Curve), Radius point, CS (Curve-to-Spiral), ST (Spiral-to-Tangent) and end
point (optional). While dening the spiral by its geometric properties, the program will accept the data even if the
information for the simple curve is given with zero spiral lengths. In this method, however, the central PI point of the
spiral MUST be specied (that is, it is always in Hold PI Points mode). The tangent out can be dened by entering
bearing or by specifying a point on the forward tangent. This forward tangent point can be the next PI coordinates.
The direction of the spiral-in and spiral-out elements would be the same as the direction of the simple curve (left
or right). The Spiral Denition setting chooses between Arc denition for clothoid spirals and Chord for 10-chord
spirals.
The spiral can be dened by several different parameters and the order that you enter data into the spiral dialog can
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 792
be important. There are two main sequences for entering data. The method to use depends on the spiral data that you
have. The rst method is to enter the radius of the simple curve, the spiral in and out lengths, the tangent bearing
out and the PI station. The second method is to make a Line segment coming up to the TS (tangent to spiral) point.
This Line segment should be added before creating the Spiral element. Then with the Spiral In point set to the TS
point, enter the radius of the simple curve, the spiral in and out lengths, the curve direction (left or right) and the arc
length of the simple curve. Then the rest of the spiral points will be calculated.
The Spiral Only element allows for exible transitions from curve to spiral to curve or line to spiral to curve or
between any combination of curve and line elements. The Spiral-Curve-Spiral element, for example, can be entered
as Line, Spiral Only, Curve, Spiral Only and Line, producing the same results. You can spiral from tangent to curve,
curve to tangent and curve of one radius to curve of another radius. You can also spiral from one endpoint to another
endpoint. To dene the spiral by sweep angle, use the Delta Angle eld. To dene the spiral by length, use the
Spiral Length eld. To dene the spiral by end point, ll in the min and max radius elds and then enter either the
End Point Pnt# or coordinates and the program will calculate the radius and spiral length to t that point.
Once all the elements of the centerline are dened, the le can be saved and then plotted using the Draw Centerline
File command.
Here is an example of a highway interchange ramp that involves a starting tangent and a spiral curve that goes
abruptly into a simple curve and then a nal tangent. Start by entering a starting Northing and Easting and starting
Station. The Start Point# is optional. Then the concept is that you click Add to add each subsequent element (line,
curve, spiral-curve-spiral or spiral only):
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 793
Line (Tangent) Segment: We want to enter the tangent segment length up to the TS (tangent to spiral). Enter in the
length (200.0), bearing (88.0732) and then the bearing quadrant (NW). Since the next spiral-curve-spiral element
can be based on a PI station, it is not necessary for this line segment to go up to the TS point. The purpose of this
line segment is to establish the tangent-in direction.
When OK is clicked, the routine will add the Line element as the rst in the list of complete centerline elements.
Next up is Curve-Spiral-Curve. Click Add.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 794
Spiral Segment: Though the dialog is complex (for total exibility), the key on a typical symmetrical spiral curve
is to enter four things: (1) the radius of the simple curve, (2) the spiral in and out lengths, and (3) the tangent-out
bearing. Everything else will calculate when you press Enter for the PI station.
Curve Segment: Add the next element and select curve. The Curve dialog appears. The key is to enter the Radius
Length (255), the Arc Length (150) and the Curve Direction. Everything else will calculate.
Final Line Segment: All you need to enter in the nal dialog for the line (tangent) segment is its length. All other
items will calculate when you press Enter.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 795
The completed centerline will appear as shown in the dialog and each element can be edited. Pick the Save button
to store this centerline data to a .CL le.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 796
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Centerline (Survey, Civil), Roads (Construction, Takeoff)
Keyboard Command: cledit
Prerequisite: - None -
Polyline to Centerline File
This command writes a centerline (.CL) le from a polyline in the direction the polyline was drawn. The Northing
and Easting for each vertex of the polyline is written to the centerline le and each arc in the polyline becomes a
circular curve. After selecting the polyline, the program shows the direction by drawing temporary arrows along
the polyline. To reverse the direction of the polyline, there is a keyword option R for Reverse at the Command line.
Also, the Reverse Polyline command can be used to switch the direction of a polyline.
For stationing the centerline, there is a Command line prompt for entering the station at the beginning of the
polyline and then using the polyline segment lengths for the rest of the centerline stations. Alternatively, there is a
keyword option E for Ending to specify the station at the end of the polyline and then back calculating the centerline
stations to the beginning using the polyline lengths.
In addition to being used as roadway/corridor ''baselines,'' a .CL le can also be used as the horizontal control for a
Template Point Centerline.
Note: To convert lines and/or arcs into a polyline, use the Entities to Polylines command or the Join Nearest com-
mand
Prompts
Centerline le to Write dialog Enter the .CL le name to create
Centerline station [Reverse/Ending/<Beginning: 0+00>]: Press Enter to accept the default station value speci-
ed or Type in the beginning station then press Enter
Select polyline that represents centerline: Pick the polyline that represents your centerline
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil > Centerline, Survey > Centerline, Field > Roads
Keyboard Command: clpline
Prerequisite: A polyline drawn in the direction of increasing station values.
Draw Centerline File
This command reads a centerline (.CL) le and plots it as a 2D polyline in the drawing at the proper coordinates.
First you are prompted for the layer name for the polyline to be created. There is also an option to specify whether
to draw PI lines and specify their length. The Label Centerline option draws station labels using a .STA settings le
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 797
created by the Save Settings function in the Station Polyline/Centerline command.
Next you are prompted for the le name of the centerline to plot.
The .CL le can be made with the following commands on the Design menu:Polyline to CL File, Input-Edit
Centerline or Design Centerline. Drawing the centerline le is a way to check the .CL le data graphically for
correctness. If a spiral exists in the .CL le, the spiral will be represented by polyline segments.
Prompts
Draw Centerline Options dialog
Centerline File to Draw le selection dialog Select the .CL le name to read and plot.
Pulldown Menu Location: Centerline
Keyboard Command: cl2pline
Prerequisite: a centerline le
Centerline Report
This command reads a centerline le and creates a report in the standard report viewer which can be written to a
le, a printer, or to your drawing. If the centerline le contains point numbers, then the report will include these
point numbers. If station equations are found, they are noted at the top of the report. The options dialog has settings
for the report format and type of the centerline. The Use Prole for Elevations Report option will prompt you for
a prole (.pro) le to add elevations to the report. The Report At Interval option will report stations, northing and
easting at the specied station interval. The Use Report Formatter option lets you choose the report format and has
output options for Excel.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 798
Here is an example report:
Centerline Report
Centerline File: C:\sample\setback 3.cl
Station Northing Easting Bearing Distance
0+00.000 4033.165 4379.271
N 1307'20'' W 92.076'
0+92.076 4122.836 4358.367 PC
Radius: 4196.621 4674.880 Radius Length: 325.000'
PI: 4159.044 4349.926 1+29.254 Tangent: 37.178'
Arc Len: 74.035' Delta: 1303'07'' Right Degree: 1737'46''
Chord Len: 73.875' Chord Brg: N 0635'47'' W
Radial-In: N 7652'40'' E Radial-Out: N 8955'47'' E
Tangential-In Tangential-Out
1+66.110 4196.222 4349.881 PT
Pulldown Menu Location: Centerline
Keyboard Command: clreport
Prerequisite: A centerline (.CL) le
Centerline ID
Centerline ID reports the centerline le name and location that is associated with an alignment polyline. The subject
polyline must have been created with either Design Centerline, Input/Edit Centerline, or Polyline to Centerline File.
When the routine is initiated and an alignment polyline is selected, the le associated with that polyline is reported
at the command line. Additional alignment polylines may be selected without re-entering the command, or Enter
may be pressed to exit the command.
Prompts
Select centerline polyline to identify: pick the polyline
Centerline Name: D:\SAMPLE.CL
Select centerline polyline to identify (Enter to end): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Centerline
Keyboard Command: CL ID
Prerequisite:A polyline created from a Design Centerline, Input/Edit Centerline, Polyline to Centerline File, or
Centerline File to Polyline.
Station Polyline/Centerline
This command will station a polyline or centerline le at a given interval distance. The options for this command
are set in the dialog shown below. After setting the options, click OK on the dialog and then pick the polyline or
select the centerline le. All settings can be saved as (.STA) les and loaded for reuse, and for storing multiple
stationing schemes. Polyline/Centerline station labels are also dynamic, and so will update when changes are made
in the geometry.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 799
Distance for Stations is the primary interval for stationing. On Curve allows for a different interval for curve
segments verses line segments.
Distance for Intermediate Stations is the intermediate interval for stationing. On Curve allows for a different
interval for curve segments verses line segments.
Beginning Station is the beginning station of the centerline for stationing.
Locate Even Stations labels the stations at the distance interval (i.e. 2+00, 3+00, etc.).
Locate Odd Stations labels the non-interval stations at the polyline/centerline end points and PC and PT points.
Locate User-Entered prompts you for individual stations to label.
Without the Increment Station Labels from Beginning Station option, the program increments the station labels
from zero. For example, if the station interval is 100 and the polyline starting station is 145, then the program will
label 2+00, 3+00, etc. With this option active, the station labels are incremented from the starting station. In this
example, the program would then label 2+45, 3+45, etc.
Label Deection Angles adds this annotation to the stationing. Settings for this are specied in the Label
Deections Setup, accessed by the Deections Setup button.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 800
When Specify Start/End Stations is checked, only the stations between and including the specied starting and
ending stations will be labeled. If locate centerline points and offset points are toggled on, only points within the
specied stations will be located.
When Erase Previous Station Labels is checked, previous station labels are erased when new ones are generated.
The PC/Spiral Setup PC button accesses the PC/Spiral Setup dialog, where settings are controlled for lines and/or
symbols and/or labels at the starting and ending (PC and PT) stations of an arc of the centerline as well as for the
spiral special stations (TS, SC, CS, ST).
Draw PC Lines controls whether lines are drawn from the PC and PT points.
When Label PC On Centerline is checked, the station of the PC and PT will be labeled on the centerline as well as
the PC and PT lines. When not checked only the PC and PT lines will be labeled.
Draw PC Symbols controls whether symbols are placed at these locations. If checked, the desired symbol is
selected by picking on the box to the right.
Label PC Radius controls whether this point is labeled.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 801
Max Length controls the maximum length for the PC lines to be drawn described above.
Back in the main Station Polyline/Centerline dialog box:
Draw PI Lines draws a 2 segment polyline in both tangent directions from the PI as a marker for the PI.
When Label PI Stations is checked, the PI station is labeled at the PI point.
When Locate PI Points is checked a point will be created at the PI of a horizontal curve graphically and
written to the active coordinate le.
When Label Station Text is checked, this command places station text along the polyline at the angle of the
corresponding segment. After toggling this option on, the Label Setup button will become available for selection.
Select it to congure the label settings as desired. Select the Marker Setup options to modify the size of the markers
for certain types of stations. See denitions following the dialog box.
Also under PC/Spiral Setup is Curve Table Setup which controls whether to draw data tables for
the curves and spirals. When this option is on, the program creates a data table with the selected elds for each
curve and automatically places each table to the outside of the curve.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 802
Label Setup
Text Layer is the user-specied layer for text labels to be drawn on.
Text Style is the user-specied text style for labels.
Decimals determines the number of decimal places of the stationing labels to be drawn for the odd stations
and user entered stations only.
Text Size Scaler determines the size of the station labels. This value multiplied by the horizontal scale setting
in Drawing Setup results in the size of the label. For example, if the horizontal scale is set to 100 and the text
size scaler is set to 0.10, the station labels will be 10 units.
Text Offset Scaler works like text size scaler above controlling the distance the text labels will be offset from
the centerline.
If the Flip Text For Twist Screen setting is checked and the drawing has been twisted using the twist screen
command, the label text will be ipped to read in the proper direction of the stationing.
Label Intermediate Stations: If the intermediate distance is the same as the station distance then no
intermediate station ticks or labels will be drawn. For example, with the above entries and 0+00 for the rst
station the stations will be labeled with descriptions as follows: 0+00 0+50 1+00 1+50, etc.
Station + at Tick Mark labels the station text along the polyline with the '+' of the station text at the station's
location on the polyline. See Marker Set up for marker size manipulation settings.
Horizontal Offset shifts the station label along the centerline.
Station Prex adds to the front of the station labels.
Remove Zeros removes the specied number of least signicant digits from the station label if these digits
are all zero.
Label Northing/Easting of Starting Point adds this label information, including prexes and/or sufxes as
specied.
Use Label Stations to specify whether to label the stations perpendicular or parallel to the centerline.
Specify the Position of the station labels, either above or below the centerline. This is only available when
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 803
labeling stations using the parallel option.
Align determines the alignment of the station label, either left or centerline, centered along the centerline or
to the right of the centerline. This option is only available when using the perpendicular option for station
labels.
The Marker Setup options control the size of markers for different station types as well as the layer the markers
will be drawn on. The Half Size Main options draw a perpendicular tick mark on only one side of the centerline.
Otherwise a full marker is drawn that goes of both sides of the centerline. There are separate Half Size options for
the main station interval, intermediate station interval and odd stations.
Specify whether to dene the Centerline By picking a 2D polyline or 3D polyline in the drawing or selecting a
centerline (.CL) le.
Using a 2D Polyline will result in horizontal distance stationing along the polyline.
Using a 3D Polyline will result in the slope distance stationing along the polyline.
Using a Prole Polyline uses a polyline on a prole grid where the X coordinate represents the station and
the Y coordinate represents the elevation. The station labels will use the distance along this prole polyline.
Using a CL File will result in horizontal distance stations as with the 2D Polyline option only a prompt for
the centerline to use will display.
Use Station Type to specify the stationing format to use.
Use Type of Curves to specify whether you are labeling a roadway curve (arc denition) or railroad curve (chord
denition).
Locate Centerline Points will locate points and store them in the current CooRDinate le.
Locate Radius Points will locate the radius points of any arc segments.
Starting Point Number determines the starting point number for the points to be located.
Vertical Exaggeration applies to Prole Polyline mode. This factor is the ratio between the horizontal and vertical
scales on the prole grid.
There are two ways to Set Elevations for the centerline points and offset points to be created.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 804
The 3D Polyline option gets the elevation of the point from a specied 3D Polyline within the drawing.
The Prole option will determine the elevation of the point based upon the same station in the prole le.
You will be prompted for the prole le to read for the elevation reference.
With the None option selected, no elevations will be determined for the points.
When Include Station in Description is checked, the station along the centerline will be included in the resulting
offset point.
Description Prex is an optional user-specied prex to be added to the point description.
Description Sufx is an optional user-specied sufx to be added to the point description.
When Label Sta Equations is checked on any station equation, contained in a centerline (
*
.cl) le will be labeled.
This option is only available when stationing a centerline le (
*
.cl).
Locate Offset Points will create points at the specied left and right offset distances from the centerline. Options
for setting the elevations and descriptions of the points are available from the Offset Setup dialog.
When Use Slopes is on, it makes available the Percent Slopes elds for dening the slope from centerline
both right and left for determining the elevations of the offset points.
Enter the desired Offsets left and right.
Enter the desired Percent Slopes from centerline to the left and right offset points.
The Vertical Offset is added to the elevation of the offset points.
Prompts
Station Polyline Dialog
Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations.
Select polyline that represents centerline: select a polyline
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 805
Closeup of Station + at Tick Mark option
Labels with Label PC on Centerline checked on
Labels set to perpendicular and Max Length of PC lines set to 75.0
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 806
Labels with Draw PI Lines, Label PI Stations and Locate PI Points all checked on
Labels using Centerline By 2D Polyline (Horizontal Station)
Labels using Centerline By 3D Polyline (Slope Station)
Pulldown Menu Location: Centerline
Keyboard Command: stapl
Prerequisite: A polyline or CL le
Label Station-Offset
This command will compute and label the station(s), offset(s) and elevation(s) of a selected point or group of points
or entities. Additional labels for the name(s) of the reference alignment(s) and description(s) can also be specied
and placed to further annotate the point(s) that are selected.
A common usage for using dual alignments and proles typically involves the alignment and prole of a road
coupled with the alignment and prole of a pipe/utility.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 807
1
st
/2
nd
Alignment: Specify the criteria for either one or two alignments that will be used for the label(s) that will
be placed into the drawing.
Use 2
nd
Alignment: Enable this toggle if multiple alignments are to be used for the label(s) that will be placed into
the drawing.
Name: Supply a label-friendly value for the name of the alignment (e.g. ''King Street'' or ''Water Main''). The
value(s) specied get assigned to the Alignment Label Field.
Centerline: Indicate the source (Polyline or Centerline File) for the reference alignment. If the Polyline option is
selected, you will be prompted to select the polyline(s) after the OK button is pressed. If CL File option is selected,
supply a valid path and lename for the centerline le or navigate to the le using the ''File Picker'' button shown
below. The Beginning Station will be determined from the selected Centerline File.
Beginning Station: Specify the beginning station of the centerline. The polyline should be drawn in the order of
increasing stations. This control is not used when you use a centerline (.CL) le to dene the centerline as the
starting station of the centerline is stored in the .CL le.
Vertical Reference: Indicate the source (3D Polyline, Prole File or Road Network) for the reference elevation.
With 3D Polylines, there will be an additional Slope Station available under the Label Fields in addition to the
regular horizontal distance station. If the Prole option is selected, supply a valid path and lename for the prole
le or navigate to the le using the ''File Picker'' button shown above. For the Road Network, specify the road
network (.rdn) le with the ''File Picker''. With the Road Network method, the program will nd the road design
surface elevation for the specied points using all the road network design les including proles, templates and
transitions.
Cross Slope (%): Indicate the slope as a percentage to ''travel'' from the Vertical Reference. A value of 0 (zero)
will not apply any cross slope from the reference elevation. Positive values will decrease the calculated elevation(s)
and negative values will increase the calculated elevation(s).
Vertical Adjustment: Indicate the desired amount of vertical displacement that should applied to the calculated
elevation. This is useful when deriving elevations for back or face of curb.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 808
Label Alignment: Specify whether the labels should be Horizontal on the screen, Vertical on the screen, Parallel to
the Centerline, Perpendicular to the Centerline, or user-specied by Picking.
Text Size Scaler: Determines the size of the labels. This value multiplied by the horizontal scale setting in Drawing
Setup results in the size of the label. For example, if the horizontal scale is set to 100 and the text size scaler is set
to 0.10, the labels will be 10 units.
Text Style: Specify the desired text style for the label.
Leader Segments: Specify the desired number of leader segments that should be allowed when constructing the
label.
Use Relative Leader: Indicate whether successive labels placed into the drawing should re-use the geometry of the
initial leader placed with the command.
Draw Leader Arrow: Indicate whether to draw an arrowhead on the leaders.
Draw At Fixed Position: After you pick the rst label position, the rest of the labels will be placed at this same
level. This option applies to the Vertical and Horizontal Label Alignment methods.
Label Fields: Use the green arrow buttons to specify the items that are to appear in the labels. As labels are ''moved''
from Available to Used, a Label Format dialog box particular to the label will appear that will allow for more precise
display control. To subsequently edit each item, use the Format Editor button as shown below.
Note:
The Row Number value is specied as the row starting closest to the leader with subsequent rows moving
further from the leader as shown in the gure below. Row 2 below the leader has been illustrated with the
Draw Box option enabled.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 809
Layers: Specify the layer of each item that comprises the label.
Max Offset to Calc: Specify the maximum offset to calculate.
Truncate Station at +: Removes the digits before the + in the station labels.
Station Type: Specify the stationing format to use.
Flip Text for Twist Screen: When this option is enabled, the label(s) will be ipped as necessary to adjust for the
use of Twist Screen.
Add to Existing Point Description: When picking points to label by point #, this option appends the label to point
description instead of creating a text label. The description is updated both in the coordinate le and for the point
description attribute in the drawing.
Type of Curve: Specify whether the centerline is for a roadway or railroad. Stationing for Roadway Curves is
measured along the curve length itself whereas stationing for Railroad Curves is measured along chord segments.
Save: Allows the current settings to be saved to a Station-Offset Settings (
*
.sos) le.
Load: Allows settings from a previously saved Station-Offset Settings (
*
.sos) le to be recalled for use.
Prompts
Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations.
Select Polyline Centerline (Alignment-1): Pick the polyline centerline This prompt will not appear if the Centerline
File option was specied.
Select 3D Polyline Prole (Alignment-2): Pick the polyline prole This prompt will not appear if the Prole File
option was specied.
Pick point or point numbers (SS for Selection Set,G for Group,Enter to End): Pick a point
Pick point to label: Pick a leader vertex point
Pick label alignment: Pick angle for the label This prompt will only appear if the Pick option was specied.
Pick point or point numbers (SS for Selection Set,G for Group,Enter to End): Press Enter
Real-time display of Station and Offset as you move the cursor.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 810
A sample label with a 2-segment leader.
Pulldown Menu Location: Centerline
Keyboard Command: offsta
Prerequisite: A polyline or centerline le.
Offset Point Entry
This command creates points along a centerline at specied stations and left and right offsets. The centerline can be
dened by a polyline, centerline (.CL) le or two points.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 811
The Store Points to Coordinate File option will store any points the current coordinate (.CRD) le. This includes
centerline points and offset points.
When Locate Points on Centerline is checked, the program will locate points along the centerline, otherwise just
the offset points will be created.
When Label Stations & Offsets is checked, the program will label the station-offset as the point description
attribute.
The Include Station-Offset In Description option will add the station and offset of the point into the point
description.
Beginning Station: Enter the Beginning Station of the Centerline.
Use Centerline from to specify whether to dene the centerline by picking a polyline in the drawing, selecting a
centerline (.CL) le, or using 2 points.
Use Reference Elevation to assign elevations to the points created when locating points on the centerline of offset
points. When using a 3D Polyline for the elevation reference, points will be created at the station entered and the
offsets specied with the elevation of the same station along the 3D polyline. The Prole option will do the same as
the 3D Polyline option only it will use a prole le for the elevation reference. You will be prompted for the prole
to use for the elevation reference. None simply creates 2d point data on elevation zero. The Reference Elevation
option is good for creating points along the centerline for nal grade elevation points. Prole to 3D polyline can be
used to transfer the prole data to the polyline before calculating the nal grade points.
Cross Slope %: This option is used to alter the elevations of the new points by applying either a Cross Slope
calculation or a Delta Z variable.
The Manual Entry option in Input Station-Offset from will prompt for the station and offset distances. The Read
File option will read the stations and offsets from a text le. The text le format with point number, station, offset,
elevation and description. The program handles station formats with or without the '+' (i.e. either 250 or 2+50). The
elevation and description are optional. The Read File option is a quick routine to convert a station-offset data le
into coordinates. The delimiter for the text le and the order of the elds are set in the dialog shown here.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 812
When Offset Prompt is set to Both Left-Right, the program will prompt for left and right offsets. If you respond
to an offset prompt with zero (0), no offset point is created. The Single Offset option will prompt for one offset per
station. Enter a right offset with a positive value and a left offset as a negative value.
Use Station Type to specify the stationing format to use.
Use Type of Curve to specify whether the curves are for a roadway or railroad.
Prompts
Offset Point Settings Dialog
Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations.
Select Polyline near endpoint which denes rst station.
[nea on] Select Polyline to Station-Measure: select a polyline
(5309.0 4845.0) Station: 0.00
(5526.0 4917.0) Station: 228.63
Distance from beginning station along centerline (Enter to end): 110
Starting Segment Station: 0.0 Ending Segment Station: 228.633
Working Line segment...(5413.4 4879.64 0.0)
Left offset distance <10.0>: 15
Right offset distance <15.0>: 20
Distance from beginning station along centerline (Enter to end): press Enter
Keyboard Command: offpts
Prerequisite: A centerline (.CL) le, polyline, or two points
Calculate Offsets
This command calculates the station and offsets of point coordinates relative to a centerline. The points to calculate
can be stored in a coordinate (.CRD) le or picked on the screen. As the crosshairs are moved, the station and offset
of the current position are displayed in real-time in a small window (see example).
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 813
Beginning Station: Specify the beginning station of the centerline. The polyline should be drawn in the order of
increasing stations. Not available when you use a centerline (.CL) le to dene the centerline.
Maximum Offset to Calc: This is the maximum distance from the Centerline for which offsets are calculated.
Report Offsets Ahead/Behind Centerline: When checked, this option shows offsets for points or picked points
located before the beginning station and after the ending station of the centerline.
Label Station and Offsets: When checked, the station offsets will be labeled in the drawing.
Sort Report by Stations: When checked, this option will report the station-offsets in station order no mat-
ter what order the points were calculated.
Report Point Coordinates: When checked, this option will include the point northing and easting in the report.
Report Point Notes: When checked point notes will be included on the calculate offset report.
Create Point Notes: When checked, the station and offset of the offset point will be created as notes and written to
a note le (
*
.not). This note le will have the same name as the crd le.
Use Report Formatter: When checked, the output of this command is directed to the Report Formatter which
allows you to customize the layout of the report elds and can be used to output the data to Microsoft&Acirc;
Excel or Microsoft&Acirc; Access. You must check this option on in order to use the Report Grade Elevation
From option.
Round Stations: When checked, this option will round the stations for the selected points on the report to the
Rounding Interval specied. For example if an offset point is located at station 1+01, and the rounding interval is
set to 10, then the report will show the offset point at station 1+00.
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 814
Left/Right Prex/Sufx: These settings are used with the offset label.
Store Station Text to CRD File: When checked, the station offset text is appended to point numbers that are
selected.
Report Grade Elevation From: When checked, this option will calculate an elevation for each point from a 3D
polyline, grid le (.grd) or triangulation (.t) le. To Use this option, the Report Formatter must be toggled on.
The grade elevation is reported and compared with the point elevation to report the cut/ll. For the 3D polyline
option, the grade elevation is calculated by nding the elevation at the point on the 3D polyline that is the nearest
perpendicular position from the offset point. The 3D polyline that is used for elevations does not need to be the same
polyline that is used as the centerline for the station-offset calculations.
Dene Centerline by: Specify whether to dene the centerline by picking a polyline in the drawing, selecting a
centerline (.CL) le, by a point and direction angle, or using 2 points. The polyline mode can be either 2D or 3D
for horizontal or slope distance stationing.
Station Type: Specify the stationing format to use.
Decimals: Specify the display precision for the stations and offsets.
Type of Curve: Specify whether the curves are for a roadway or railroad.
Prompts
Calculate Offset Settings Dialog
Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations.
Select Polyline near endpoint which denes rst station.
[nea on] Select Polyline Centerline: select polyline centerline
(5309.0 4845.0) Station: 0.00
(5526.0 4917.0) Station: 228.63
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
140 4889.13 5410.25 0.00 1+10.00L10.00
Station on Line> 1+10.00 Offset> 10.00 Left
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
141 4870.15 5416.55 0.00 1+10.00R10.00
Station on Line> 1+10.00 Offset> 10.00 Right
+ before station denotes point is ahead of line segment, - denotes beyond.
Pick point or point numbers (Enter to End): 22-28
Station Offset Description Elev Pt# North East
4+95.89L 15.48 Catch Basin 0.00 22 4811.00 4454.00
5+78.43L 58.18 Power Pole 0.00 23 4839.00 4548.00
6+77.26L 57.28 Power Pole 0.00 24 4868.00 4656.00
9+01.55R 16.81 Catch Basin 0.00 25 4745.00 4887.00
10+50.51L 25.39 Traffic Sign 0.00 27 4872.00 5043.00
4+03.48R 22.15 Light Pole 0.00 28 4657.00 4454.00
Pick point or point numbers (Enter to End): press Enter
Keyboard Command: calcoff
Prerequisite: A centerline (.CL) le, polyline or two points
Distance Between Two Entities
This command reports the average, minimum and maximum distances between two entities. For example, this
command can be used to nd the minimum distance between a right-of-way polyline and a property perimeter
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 815
polyline. The supported entities include polylines, lines and arcs. The reports the coordinates along the two entities
at the minimum and maximum distances.
Prompts
Select rst polyline, line or arc: pick a polyline
Select second polyline, line or arc: pick a polyline
Average distance 15.335
Maximum distance 50.592 at 1929333.693,231112.910 and 1929297.650,231148.413
Minimum distance 11.870 at 1929473.749,231310.277 and 1929465.293,231318.606
Pulldown Menu Location: Centerline
Keyboard Command: minmax2
Prerequisite: Two entities
Centerline Conversions
There are twelve Import options available in Carlson Civil to convert other applications' centerline les to Carlson
Civil centerline les (.CL), and seven Export options to convert Carlson Civil centerline les (.CL) to other
applications' formats. Each Import option prompts for the le to convert and the name of the new .CL le to
create, each Export option prompts for .CL le to convert and a le name for the new le. The import formats
include C&G Point Group .PTS, Geodimeter .ARE/.GEO/.RAW, GeoPak .OSD, Leica .GSI, MOSS .INP, SDMS
.ALI/.PRJ, Softdesk, Sokkia .SDR, ISPOL .ALI, CLIP .PLA, TDS .RD5 and Terramodel .RLN/.ALN. The export
formats include C&G Point Group .PTS, Leica .GSI, SMI .CH, Softdesk, Sokkia .SDR, Topcon .RD3, Trimble
.DC, TDS .RD5 and TDS .PL5.
For the TDS RD5, there is an option to include a prole along with the centerline. Also, there is an option to include
sections. When sections are included, the station data is included in the RD5 and the section grades are output to
TP5 les where each station has a separate le for the left and right sides. The TP5 les are created in the same
folder as the RD5.
For the Trimble DC, there are options to include a prole and sections along with the centerline.
Pulldown Menu Location: Centerline > Centerline Conversion
Keyboard Commands: geod2cl, geopak2cl, geopak2rd, wildcl2, moss2cl, sdms2cl, dcacl2, sdr2cl, ali to cl,
pla to cl, importrd5, tm2cl, wildcl1, smicl1, dcacl1, cl2sdr, cl to rd3, export rd5, tdscl1, export dc
Chapter 13. Centerline Menu 816
Area/Layout Menu 14
This chapter provides information on using the commands from the Area/Layout menu to calculate and label areas,
and also to set and dene lots. Commands for designing and drawing more complex congurations, such as cul-de-
sacs and intersections, are available here as well.
817
Area Defaults
This command allows you to specify default settings for area labeling. The Area Defaults dialog is divided into 3
tabs. The rst is the Label Fields and Settings tab. The top portion of the Label Fields and Settings tab contains
two listboxes which are used to control which of the possible ten area elds will be used for area labeling. You use
the Add and Remove buttons to control which elds will be included in area labels. You can also add to the Used
Fields list by double-clicking on items in the Available Fields list. The area label will include the values in the order
as specied in the Used Fields listbox. To change the order you use the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
When a grid projection is dened in Drawing Setup, the Available Fields with include geodetic areas where the
areas are adjusted by the projection. The Base Z from Drawing Setup is used for the elevation factor for this
adjustment.
Field Settings Dialog: To control the appearance of the elds in the drawing, use the Edit button to edit the high-
lighted item in the Used Fields list, or double click on a eld in the same list. This will call up the Field Settings
Dialog.
User Dened: The Field ''User Dened'' can be added to place a custom xed label in all areas. To control the value
and appearance of the custom label in the drawing, use the Edit button to edit the ''User Dened'' item in the Used
Fields list, or double click on a eld in the same list. This will call up the Field Settings Dialog. In this case the
''Value'' setting becomes the custom label.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 818
Scaled labels: The ''Scaled Sq. Feet'', ''Scaled Sq. Meters'', ''Scaled Acres'' and ''Scaled Permiter'' elds can be
used to include area labels that are scaled based on Drawing Setup ''Report Scale Factor''.
Text Style: This allows you to set a text style for the area labels. You can enter the name manually or use the Select
Style button to call up a dialog which presents a list of known text styles.
Text Size: This value is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual text size.
Text Layer: This allows you to assign a layer for the area text. You can enter the name manually or use the Select
Layer button to call up a dialog which presents a list of known layers.
Text Color: This allows you to to assign a color for the area text. Use the Select Color button to call up the standard
color picker dialog. To use the default for the Text Layer, select ByLayer.
Prex and Sufx: Although most area labeling uses the sufx, as in 1.25 Acres or 3.515 Hectares. But for those
who prefer a prex, as in Ac: 1.25, this routine can create that area labeling style automatically (see below for
example of results of using a prex with square feet and acres).
Justication: Use this to control whether the label eld is left, centered or right justied.
+/-: This allows you to display + or - in the Prex or Sufx of the area labels, or choose None.
Precision: Choose precision level for the currently selected eld.
Below the Available and Used Fields lists the following items for further controlling area label generation:
Use Commas in Labels: This allows you to use commas in the area labels.
Use MText: Check this box to turn on the use of MText for area labels. If this is checked all area labels will be
grouped into as few MText entities as possible. Area labels with different text styles, justication or layers will not
be combined into the same MText entity.
Erase Previous Labels: When checked, previous area labels for the area being relabeled will be erased.
Label Placement: When auto placement of area labels is used, the labels can be placed either at the centroid of
area or at the rear side. This is accomplished by selecting either the Center or Rear Side radio button, respectively.
When Center is selected the user can choose to have the labels oriented according to the side lines of the area
by checking the Align By Sides checkbox. When either Align By Sides or Rear Side is selected, the checkbox
Flip Text for Twist Screen can be selected to have the label rotated 180 degrees to present it in the best reading
orientation relative to the current Twist Screen rotation setting.
Draw Symbol Around Lot Description: When the Lot Description eld is included in the Used Fields list, the
user can check this checkbox to have a symbol drawn around the Lot Description eld. When this box is checked,
you specify the symbol name in the Symbol Name eld or click on the current symbol (drawn to the right) to
graphically choose the desired symbol. You specify the layer by entering the name in the Layer box or by clicking
on the Select button to choose from a dialog that presents all known layers.
Symbol Buffer Offset: By default, the symbol will be automatically scaled according to the text length and size of
the Lot Description value for the area. For additional control of symbol scaling, the user can enter a number in text
size units in the Symbol Buffer Offset box. This value will be added to the automatically generated default scaling
value.
Avoid Label Overlap: If this box is checked the area labels will be checked for overlaps after they are generated.
Please see the Overlap Manager documentation for more information.
Overlap Settings: Click this button to go to the Avoid Label Overlaps dialog where you can review or modify the
Overlap Manager settings. Please see the Overlap Manager documentation for more information.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 819
Table Process Settings Tab:
Use Area Tables: Use this control to determine whether area labels are sent to a table or not. Options are ''Never'',
''Always'' or ''By Scaler''.
To Table Area: When the user has selected ''By Scaler'' in the ''Use Area Tables'' list this item is enabled. When
''By Scaler'' is selected and the area is less than this minimum, the area label is sent to a table.
Area Reference Numbering: There are three different methods for setting the reference number: Next Available
will automatically use the lowest available number. Specied With Prompt will prompt you for a number for
each area. Specied with Auto Numbering will automatically use the lowest available number starting with the
specied number.
Auto Place Table References: When checked, will automatically place the area reference label according to the
settings for the area labels as specied in the Label Field and Settings tab (see above). Otherwise you will be
prompted to pick each label location manually.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 820
Area Commands Tab:
Max gap to join: You use this option during Area by Lines & Arcs command. When connecting lines and arcs that
dene the perimeter, the program will join endpoints if the distance between the two points is less than the specied
gap. Otherwise the program will report an error and will not report an area.
Prompt whether to retain polylines created by Area by Interior Point: When checked the user will be asked
whether to retain the polylines created by the ''Area by Interior Point'' command.
Polyline Layer: Will be enabled when ''Prompt whether to retain polylines created by Area by Interior Point'' is
checked to allow the user to select the layer that any such created polylines will be placed in.
Load/Save: These buttons save and recall all the Area Default settings to a .ARS settings le.
Tip: Keep in mind that changes in Area Defaults, if changed from the Area/Layout pulldown menu, only
apply to that work session. If changed within the Congure command, the changes apply to all new work sessions
as well.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 821
The results of using a prex with square feet and acres
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: defarea
Prerequisite: None
Inverse with Area
This command generates a report of the angle and horizontal distance between a series of points and calculates the
area of the closed gure dened by the points. The points can be entered individually or by selecting a point group
or linework entities. To use a point group, type G for Group at the rst prompt. To use a linework, type L for Line at
the rst prompt. For linework, a single closed polyline can be used or a series of connected lines, arcs and polylines
that are selected one at a time.
Curve data can also be entered and reported. The points can be either picked on the screen, or entered by point
number. You can also enter a range of point numbers (i.e. 1-9). The closure is reported using the total distance
inversed, and the difference between the starting and ending points, as the closure error.
At the rst command prompt, you can enter O for Options to bring up the command options. The Input Method
determines the default input mode for the rst command prompt. The Different Radius Tolerance checks that
the distance between the PC and radius point and the PT and radius point match for curves. The Linework Snap
Tolerance applies to the linework input mode and is used to check the distance between end points when connecting
two linework entities. The Report Closed By choosing between using the difference between the starting and ending
coordinates to calculate the closure error or angle and distance values in the report. The Apply Compass Rule
Adjustment will adjust the perimeter as a closed loop for the closure error. The Label Both Feet And Meters is
an option to report the distances in both feet and meters. The Report Stations option adds stations for each point
into the report. The Use Report Formatter chooses between the standard report or customizing the report. You
can also set the decimal precisions for the report and whether to report stations for the distances along the perimeter.
This command creates a polyline of the gure which can be erased or kept in the drawing. The Prompt To Draw
Perimeter Polyline and Polyline Layer settings apply to this polyline.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 822
The area can be labeled in the drawing using the settings from the Area Defaults command. If you don't want to
label the area, press Enter at the pick label point prompt.
Prompts
Options/Line/Group/<Pick Starting point or point number>: pick a point
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): pick a point
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): R for radius
Radius point number or pick point: pick a point
Curve direction [Left/<Right>]? press Enter
Pick End of Arc or point number (U-Undo,Enter to end): pick a point
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): pick a point
Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): pick a point
Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): pick a point
Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): press Enter
SQ. FEET: 27247.4 SQ. YARDS: 3027.5 SQ. MILES: 0.0
ACRES: 0.63 PERIMETER: 668.35
Pick area label centering point: pick a point
Erase Polyline Yes/No <Yes>: press Enter The command plots a polyline that represents the gure you dened if
you want to keep the polyline respond with No.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 823
Inverse with Area
CRD File> c:\data\newplat.crd
PNTNO BEARING DISTANCE NORTHING EASTING STATION DESC
903 4940.73 2490.40 0.00 StartPt S 4843'58'' W 136.21 904 4850.89 2388.01 136.21 S 1307'04'' E 155.56 905 4699.39 2423.32 291.77 S 7355'04'' E 165.34 906 4653.59 2582.19 457.11 RADIUS: 111.45 CHORD: 204.07 DEGREE: 0508'28'' DIR: LEFT LENGTH: 257.86 DELTA: 13233'53 TANGENT: 253.67 CHORD BRG: N 3947'59'' E RAD-IN: N 1604'56'' E RAD-OUT: S 6331'03'' W RADIUS PNTNO: 907 N: 4760.67 E: 2613.06 908 4810.37 2712.82 714.97 IP N 2628'57'' W 125.87 909 4923.03 2656.69 840.84 N 8355'30'' W 167.23 903 4940.73 2490.40 1008.07 StartPt
Closure Error Distance> 0.0000
Total Distance Inversed> 1008.07
AREA: 74664.6 SQ METERS
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: ia
Prerequisite: None
Area by Lines & Arcs
This command allows you to calculate the area of a perimeter or lot dened by lines, arcs, or polylines. Default
settings for this command are set in Area Defaults. One of these settings is Max gap to join. If there is a gap greater
than this value, the area is not reported, and the program will show where the gap is with a temporary X symbol.
The area data shows up on the text screen. You can then choose to plot the area information to the drawing, or, by
hitting Enter, just read it from the text screen.
Prompts
Select lines & arcs or polylines of perimeter for area calculation.
Select Objects: select lines and arcs or polylines
Lines and arcs are then joined together and the area calculated.
Pick area label centering point (Enter for none): pick a point
The area is then plotted at the point selected.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 824
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: joinarea
Prerequisite: Lines, arcs, or polylines to dene the area
Area by Interior Point
This command calculates and labels the area of the perimeter surrounding a picked interior point. The Boundary
Polyline command is used to nd the perimeter. Generally, this command will only work on closed or overlapping
objects. Use Area by Lines & Arcs for other applications. The settings for the area label and for whether to prompt
to create a closed polyline for the area are under the Area Defaults command.
Prompts
Pick point inside area perimeter: pick a point
Pick area label centering point (Enter for none): pick a point
The area is then plotted at the point selected.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: ptarea
Prerequisite: Set Area Defaults
Area by Closed Polylines
This command will calculate and report the area of single area and multiple area closed polylines. In the case
of multiple areas, the user can choose to have the areas totaled (Total Multiple Areas) into a single result or
to generate data for each area separately. Area by Closed Polyline will also automatically nd special Carlson
attributes attached to the polyline, in addition to capturing the area itself. These attributes will appear in the report,
which can be the standard report or which can be presented in the Report Formatter, which itself links to Excel
and Access. For example, property names and owner names, as applied to a polyline using the Mine modules,
will report out automatically using Area by Closed Polyline. The command ''Draw Lots from File...'' will apply
''extended entity data'' to the lot polylines, which includes the lot name, and this will also report out when using
Area by Closed Polyline. In addition, lot names, or any interior text whatsoever, can be captured and included in
the report. The plot of the area on-screen can be canceled if only the report is desired.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 825
Prompts
Select Area Polyline: select the area polyline
SQ. FEET: 64862.9 SQ. YARDS: 7207.0 SQ. MILES: 0.0
ACRES: 1.5 PERIMETER: 1018.7
Pick area label centering point (Enter for none): pick a location
When auto-placing labels at the rear of lots or when aligning labels by the sides of the lot the user will also be
prompted to pick one or more centerlines (Select the Centerline Polylines). The routine will nd the closest
centerline and use this to determine the location of the front and back corners of the area.
When additional interior text is selected, the standard report will include that text:
Polyline Area 11/17/2004 12:49
Polyline Area: 43560.0 sq ft, 1.00 acres
Polyline Perimeter: 838.35 ft
Text: 16 Sf: 43560.0; Ac: 1.00
In this case, the ''16'' refers to Lot 16, and appears in the report because the lot number and existing area labeling
were selected along with the polyline for the lot.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 826
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: plarea
Prerequisite: Set Area Label Defaults
Digitize Areas
This command allows for digitizing areas. This routine includes an option for drawing perimeter polylines.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: dig area
Prerequisite: A digitizer
Label Last Area
This command will label the last area calculated with one of the Area commands in the manner dened in the Area
Defaults dialog. The command prompts for a point where the label will be centered.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 827
Prompts
SQ. FEET: 50265.3 SQ. YARDS: 5585.0 SQ. MILES: 0.0
ACRES: 1.2 PERIMETER: 889.4
Lot Description <2>: 1
Pick area label centering point (Enter for none): pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lastarea
Prerequisite: Set Area Defaults, and use one of the Area commands to calculate an area.
Area Table Defaults
This command allows you to specify table elds and format settings for area tables. Whether the Area Commands
create an area table or label within the area is controlled by the Area Defaults command by the Use Area Tables
setting. With the Area Defaults and Area Table Settings prepared, the various Area Commands will create tables
according to the settings. When the Area By Closed Polylines routine is used to create the area table and the Link
Linework With Labels option is on under Congure Carlson->General Settings, then the area table values are
automatically updated when the polyline geometry is modied. Also, when using the Area By Closed Polylines
command with the Lot Description eld active for the table, the program prompts for an area description for each
polyline. The rest of the area table elds are calculated from the polyline geometry.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 828
The Area Table Defaults dialog is divided into 2 tabs. The Table Fields tab brings up the Table Settings panel
shown below. The area table option puts the area data in a table that is typically drawn outside the area and contains
area data for multiple areas. Each row in the table has the data for one area and includes a reference number. The
reference number is also labeled inside the area.
The Table Fields tab contains two listboxes which are used to control which of the area elds will appear in any
table rows that are generated for areas. You use the Add and Remove buttons to control which elds will be
included in area tables. You can also add to the Used Fields list by double-clicking on items in the Available Fields
list. The area table will include the values in the order as specied in the Used Fields listbox. To change the order
you use the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
Field Settings Dialog: To control the appearance of the elds in the table, use the Edit button to edit the
highlighted item in the Used Fields list, or double click on a eld in the same list. This will call up the Field Settings
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 829
Dialog.
Column Title: This will be the tile name used for the eld's column in the area table.
Text Style: This allows you to set a text style for the area labels. You can enter the name manually or use the Select
Style button to call up a dialog which presents a list of known text styles.
Text Size: This value is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual text size.
Text Layer: This allows you to assign a layer for the area text. You can enter the name manually or use the Select
Layer button to call up a dialog which presents a list of known layers.
Text Color: This allows you to to assign a color for the area text. Use the Select Color button to call up the standard
color picker dialog. To use the default for the Text Layer, select ByLayer.
Prex and Sufx: Although most area labeling uses the sufx, as in 1.25 Acres or 3.515 Hectares. But for those
who prefer a prex, as in Ac: 1.25, this routine can create that area labeling style automatically.
Justication: Use this to control whether the label eld is left, centered or right justied.
+/-: This allows you to display + or - in the Prex or Sufx of the area labels, or choose None.
Precision: Choose precision level for the currently selected eld.
Column Width/Auto: The default behavior is that the column width is automatically set for best t. The user can
override this value by unchecking the Auto checkbox and setting the column with in text size units.
The Table Settings tab brings up the Table Settings panel shown above. The area table option puts the area
data in a table that is typically drawn outside the area and contains area data for multiple areas. Each row in the
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 830
table has the data for one area and includes a reference number. The reference number is also labeled inside the area.
Table Parameters:
Total Area on Last Row: Select this to have a total row placed at the bottom of the table which will contain the
sum of all relevant table elds.
Label Layer: Use this to control the layer that the area table reference will be placed in. Use the Select button to
pick from a list of all known layers.
Label Color: Use this to control the color of the area table reference. Use the Select button to pick from a color
picker dialog. Select ByLayer to use the default color of the label layer.
Area Label Prex: Use this to control the prex of the area table references. Add a space after the prex to have
the prex and the reference number separated by a space if desired.
Label Text Style: Use this to set the text style of the area table reference. Use the Select button to pick from a list
of all known text styles.
Table Layer: This allows the user to set the layer that the table will be placed in. Use the Select button to pick
from a list of all known layers.
Table Color: This allow the user to set the color of the grid lines of the table. Use the Select button to pick from a
color picker dialog. Select ByLayer to use the default color of the table layer.
Area Table Title: To add a title row as the rst row of the area table, enter a table title here.
Title Text Color: This allow the user to set the color of the table title. Use the Select button to pick from a color
picker dialog. Select ByLayer to use the default color of the table layer.
Title Text Style: Use this to set the text style of the table title. Use the Select button to pick from a list of all known
text styles.
Title Text Size: Use this to control the size of the table title text.
Background Colors: The area table is broken into 5 zones in respect to background color. Each zone can have its
own unique background color. The zones are Title, Header, Contents1, Contents2 and Total. To set a background
color for each zone, rst the respective ''Use Table...Background Color'' box must be checked. This enables the
Select button, which is used to pick the respective background color from a color picker dialog. For the Contents
zone all contents rows can either have the same background color, or by setting up an ''Alternating Background
Color'', rows will have alternating colors.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout->Area Tables
Keyboard Command: defatab
Prerequisite: None
New Area Table
This command draws the column header labels for the Area Table commands. When prompted for the starting
point, the user may enter a coordinate or pick a point on the screen. This table becomes the active area table. Any
new area table entries will be added to this table until another table is created or the active table is changed with the
atabset command (menu item Area/Layout> Area Tables> Set Active Table).
Prompts
Starting point of area table: pick point
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout> Area Tables> Create New Table
Keyboard Command: atabnew Prerequisite: None
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 831
Set Active Area Table
This command allows the user to change the active area table. The table selected becomes the active area table.
Any new area table entries will be added to this table until another table is created or the active table is changed
with another invocation of this command.
Prompts
Select active Table: pick area table
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout> Area Tables> Set Active Table
Keyboard Command: atabset
Prerequisite: None
Edit Area Table Properties
This command allows the user to edit the properties of an area table.
Prompts
Select an area table to modify: pick an area table
After picking an area table the Area Defaults dialog will be displayed. Here you can change the settings of
the selected table. The changes will be reected once the user selects the OK button.
The Table Fields tab contains the Available Fields and Used Fields listboxes which are used to control which of the
possible ten area elds will be used in the area table. You use the Add and Remove buttons to control which elds
will be included in the table. You can also add to the Used Fields list by double-clicking on items in the Available
Fields list. The area label will include the values in the order as specied in the Used Fields listbox. To change the
order you use the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 832
Field Settings Dialog: To control the appearance of the elds in the table, use the Edit button to edit the
highlighted item in the Used Fields list, or double click on a eld in the same list. This will call up the Field Settings
Dialog.
Column Title: This will be the tile name used for the eld's column in the area table.
Text Style: This allows you to set a text style for the area labels. You can enter the name manually or use the Select
Style button to call up a dialog which presents a list of known text styles.
Text Size: This value is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual text size.
Text Layer: This allows you to assign a layer for the area text. You can enter the name manually or use the Select
Layer button to call up a dialog which presents a list of known layers.
Text Color: This allows you to to assign a color for the area text. Use the Select Color button to call up the standard
color picker dialog. To use the default for the Text Layer, select ByLayer.
Prex and Sufx: Although most area labeling uses the sufx, as in 1.25 Acres or 3.515 Hectares. But for those
who prefer a prex, as in Ac: 1.25, this routine can create that area labeling style automatically.
Justication: Use this to control whether the label eld is left, centered or right justied.
+/-: This allows you to display + or - in the Prex or Sufx of the area labels, or choose None.
Precision: Choose precision level for the currently selected eld.
Column Width/Auto: The default behavior is that the column width is automatically set for best t. The user can
override this value by unchecking the Auto checkbox and setting the column with in text size units.
The Table Settings tab brings up the Table Settings panel shown below.
Total Area on Last Row: Select this to have a total row placed at the bottom of the table which will contain the
sum of all relevant table elds.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 833
Label Layer: Use this to control the layer that the area table reference will be placed in. Use the Select button to
pick from a list of all known layers.
Label Color: Use this to control the color of the area table reference. Use the Select button to pick from a color
picker dialog. Select ByLayer to use the default color of the label layer.
Area Label Prex: Use this to control the prex of the area table references. Add a space after the prex to have
the prex and the reference number separated by a space if desired.
Label Text Style: Use this to set the text style of the area table reference. Use the Select button to pick from a list
of all known text styles.
Table Layer: This allows the user to set the layer that the table will be placed in. Use the Select button to pick
from a list of all known layers.
Table Color: This allow the user to set the color of the grid lines of the table. Use the Select button to pick from a
color picker dialog. Select ByLayer to use the default color of the table layer.
Area Table Title: To add a title row as the rst row of the area table, enter a table title here.
Title Text Color: This allow the user to set the color of the table title. Use the Select button to pick from a color
picker dialog. Select ByLayer to use the default color of the table layer.
Title Text Style: Use this to set the text style of the table title. Use the Select button to pick from a list of all known
text styles.
Title Text Size: Use this to control the size of the table title text.
Background Colors: The area table is broken into 5 zones in respect to background color. Each zone can have its
own unique background color. The zones are Title, Header, Contents1, Contents2 and Total. To set a background
color for each zone, rst the respective ''Use Table...Background Color'' box must be checked. This enables the
Select button, which is used to pick the respective background color from a color picker dialog. For the Contents
zone all contents rows can either have the same background color, or by setting up an ''Alternating Background
Color'', rows will have alternating colors.
Load/Save: These buttons save and recall all the Area Default settings to a .ARS settings le.
Tip: Keep in mind that changes made here only apply to the selected table. If properties are changed within the
Congure command, the changes apply to all new work sessions as well
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout> Area Tables> Edit Properties
Keyboard Command: atabedit
Prerequisite: An area table
Remove Area Table Rows
This command allows the user to remove rows from an area table. The routine will remove both the table row and
the table reference label from the drawing.
Prompts
Select a table row to delete: pick area table row
Consolidate table [<Yes>/No]? If consolidation is chosen, row numbers will be renumbered to close up the gap
created by this deletion. Consolidation will also update all relevant area table references in the drawing. If the user
chooses not to consolidate the table at this time, the atabx command (menu item Area/Layout> Area Tables>
Consolidate Table) can be used at any time to perform consolidation.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 834
The drawing above shows the table before row removal. In the drawing below, row 2 has been deleted without table
consolidation.
The drawing below shows the results of deleting the same row 2, only this time the user has chosen to perform table
consolidation.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout> Area Tables> Remove Row
Keyboard Command: atabdel
Prerequisite: None
Consolidate Area Table
This command allows the user to renumber area tables to eliminate numbering gaps left as the result of row
deletions or other means.
Prompts
Select a table to consolidate:: pick area table
Row numbers will be renumbered to close up the gaps in the selected area table. Consolidation will also update all
relevant area table references in the drawing.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 835
The drawing above shows the table before row removal. The drawing below shows the results of consolidating this
table.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout> Area Tables> Consolidate Table
Keyboard Command: atabx
Prerequisite: None
Tag Area Descriptions
This command is used to assign a description to a closed polyline. The description is stored with the polyline in the
drawing. This description is used for reports in routines like Area By Closed Polylines.
Prompts
Select polyline for area description: pick a polyline
Area description <AREA1>: West Pond
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Area Descriptions
Keyboard Command: tag area desc
Prerequisite: A closed polyline.
Identify Area Descriptions
This command reports area descriptions for the selected polylines. There are two methods. The Pick method reports
the area description for one selected polyline at a time. The Search method scans the whole drawing and highlights
polylines with area descriptions.
Prompts
Pick polylines to check or search drawing [<Pick>/Search]: press Enter
Select area description polyline: pick a polyline
Description: West Pond
Select area description polyline (Enter to end): press Enter
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 836
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Area Descriptions
Keyboard Command: id area desc
Prerequisite: A polyline with a tagged area description.
Untag Area Descriptions
This command removes an area description that has been assigned to a polyline.
Prompts
Select polylines to remove area description from.
Select entities: pick area polylines
Cleared 10 area descriptions.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Area Descriptions
Keyboard Command: untag area desc
Prerequisite: A polyline with a tagged description.
Hinged Area
This command can be used to determine the dimensions of a gure when the area is xed and three or more sides are
known. The gure can be dened by a closed polyline or by picking the known points and curves. The command
then prompts for the area to be solved for (in square units and acres).
Prompts
Dene area by points or closed polyline [Points/<Linework>]? press Enter
Select polyline segment to adjust: select a polyline segment
Select hinge point [endp]: Move the cursor around to nd a hinge point.
Keep existing polyline [Yes/<No>]? N
Area: 47104.31 S.F, 1.0814 Acres
Remainder/Acres/<Enter target area (s.f.)>: 48000
Polyline method
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: harea
Prerequisite: A closed polyline or at least one known side. Two direction lines should be drawn.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 837
Sliding Side Area
This command adjusts one side of a polyline to meet a specied area. The existing area can be dened by a closed
polyline or by picking each point in the perimeter. The desired area can be entered in either square feet or acres. The
area to adjust must be represented by a closed polyline. The program moves the selected segment of the polyline
in or out. There a few methods for dening the direction of the adjusted segment. With the Selected method, the
original direction of the segment is maintained. The Line method prompts to pick another line segment to dene
the direction. The Angle method uses an entered angle for the direction. The Points method prompts for two points
to dene the direction.
Prompts
Dene area by points or closed polyline [Points/<Linework>]? press Enter
Select polyline segment to adjust: pick a point on a closed polyline
Keep existing polyline [Yes/<No>]? press Enter
Dene new line by selected line, another line, angle or points [<Selected>/Line/Angle/Points]? press Enter
Area: 176044.14 S.F, 4.0414 Acres
Remainder/Acres/<Enter target area (s.f.)>: 17800
Linework Polyline method:
Original perimeter polyline on left, adjusted perimeter on right
Points method
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: ssarea
Prerequisite: A closed perimeter polyline
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 838
Area Radial from Curve
This command swings a line radial from a curve to reach a predetermined area. The existing area can be dened
by polylines or by picking each point on the perimeter. For the point method, the curve to radiate from should be
the last entity selected when dening the gure. For the polyline method, front and back polylines are used. The
computed line goes perpendicular from the front polyline and intersects the back polyline. This line is moved to
nd the target area. Both ends of the front and back polylines are connected to close the area. The options for the
polyline method are set in the dialog shown.
Prompts
Dene area by points or closed polyline [Points/<Linework>]? press Enter
Area Radial from Curve dialog Make choices and click OK.
Select curve to radiate from: pick the curve
Select back polyline: pick the back polyline
Lot Area: 9000.00 S.F., 0.2066 Acres
Point Method
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 839
Polyline Method
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: arearc
Prerequisite: An existing area dened by points or polylines
Bearing Area Cutoff
This feature allows you to cut a predetermined area from a closed gure using a cut-off line having a specied
bearing. The boundary intersected by the cut-off bearing line can be either a straight line or arc.
Enter area in ACRES [Sq. Feet/Done) <0.000000>: Enter the number of acres contained within the cut-
off area.
To change from acres to square feet, type S and <Enter>.
Note: if units are set to meters, the prompt will be:
Enter area in HECTORS [Square meters/Done].
Enter bearing of cutoff line <100.000000>: Enter the bearing of the cut-off line through the property us-
ing Qdd.mmsss format.
where:
Q = quadrant (1 = NE, 2 = SE, 3 = SW, 4 = NW)
dd = degrees
mm = minutes
sss = seconds (The third s indicates that, if desired, you can optionally specify seconds to the nearest 0.1 second)
Note: Trailing zeros need not be entered.
Place area to right or left of bearing line [Right/Left] <R>:
''Looking'' in the direction of the cut-off bearing allows you to determine which side is left or right. Type R and
<Enter> or just <Enter>for right. Type L and <Enter> for left.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 840
Method of dening the overall area to be divided [C&G Point-group/Manual-entry] <M>:
Type ''P'' and Enter if you wish to use a point group to specify the overall area or type ''M'' and Enter (or just press
Enter) to specify the overall area interactively.
Dening the overall area using a C&G Point Group:
If you have a C&G Point Group that denes the area to be divided and you choose to use the point group option,
you will then be asked to use a le dialog to browse to the point group le and select it.
Dening the overall area manually:
If you choose to type or pick the points dening the overall area individually, you will see the prompt:
Enter point ID or pick graphically [cLockwise/ccW/Polyline]: Specify a point ID or begin a curve by
typing L or W. Type P and enter to pick a polyline.
Note: if you choose to pick a polyline, it must be a closed polyline and all its vertices must have coordinates
matching points found in the coordinate le.
When specifying individual points, move around the parcel and pick or type in the points, in order, to dene
the overall area involved.
After all points have been entered, press Enter to end point input.
Calculate the Cut-off Line
No matter which method you use to specify the property being divided, once the overall tract is specied, the cut-off
line is calculated and the points at which the cut-off line intersects the tract boundaries are saved.
The Saving Point dialog (below) will be shown for each intersection point.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 841
Click the OK button to save the intersection point.
Depending on your settings for Auto Line Plot and Auto Point Plot on the Graphics tab of the C&G Op-
tions dialog box, you may see both the points and the cut-off line drawn on the screen.
This process can be repeated as many times as is necessary to further divide the overall area or to divide an-
other area.
Press <Esc> or ''D'' at the Enter area... prompt to end the command.
Prompts
Enter area in ACRES [Sq. Feet/Done) <0.000000>:
Enter the number of acres contained within the cutoff area or type ''S'' and Enter to use square feet or ''D'' and Enter
when done.
Enter bearing of cutoff line <100.000000>: Enter the bearing of the cut-off line through the property.
Place area to right or left of bearing line [Right/Left] <R>:
Type ''R'' and Enter or just Enter for right of line. Type ''L'' and Enter for left. The direction of the cut-off bearing
determines which side is left or right.
Method of dening the overall area to be divided [C&G Point-group/Manual-entry] <M>:
Type ''P'' and Enter if you wish to use a point group to specify the overall area or type ''M'' and Enter (or just press
Enter) to specify the overall area interactively.
for Manual entry:
Enter point ID or pick graphically [cLockwise/ccW/Polyline]: Specify the point ID or begin a curve by typing L
or W. Type P and enter to pick a polyline.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: baco
Prerequisite: Coordinate le.
Lot Layout
This command draws lots based on a front and back polyline. Starting from the front polyline, the program calculates
two lot side lines perpendicular from the front polyline that intersect the back polyline and create the specied lot
size. Lots are created along the front polyline in the order that the front polyline is drawn. If the front polyline needs
to be reversed, use the Reverse Polyline command found on the Edit menu. The direction of the back polyline does
not matter. The lots can be drawn as closed polylines or just the lot sides can be drawn. There is also an option to
automatically create all the possible lots at the specied area between the front and back polylines or to prompt for
each 0.4 acre lot.
In prompt mode, the program reports the remaining area between the front and back polylines and then asks for the
lot size. The lot size can be specied either by area or frontage along the front polyline.
The lots are sized to meet the specied area and also meet the minimum frontage and backlot distances. The
program starts by checking the lot area at the minimum distances. If this area is greater than the target, then the
lot is drawn at the minimum distance and the resulting lot area will be greater than the target area. Otherwise the
program will increase the frontage until the lot reaches the exact target area. The Use Frontage Setback Polyline
option allows you to use another polyline besides the actual frontage polyline for the minimum frontage indicator.
Typically, this Frontage Setback Polyline would be offset a set amount from the actual frontage polyline.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 842
Prompts
Lot Layout dialog
Select front polyline: pick a polyline
Select back polyline: pick a polyline
With prompt for each lot active:
Area remaining: 160326.88 S.F, 3.6806 Acres
Quit/Frontage/Enter lot area (Acres) <1.2269>: 1
Area remaining: 116766.88 S.F, 2.6806 Acres
Quit/Frontage/Enter lot area (Acres) <1.0000>: F
Enter Frontage <50.00>: 75
Lot Area: 37807.50 S.F., 0.8679 Acres
Area remaining: 78959.38 S.F, 1.8127 Acres
Quit/Area/Enter frontage <50.00>: A
Quit/Frontage/Enter lot area (Acres) <1.0000>: press Enter
Area remaining: 35399.38 S.F, 0.8127 Acres
Quit/Frontage/Enter lot area (Acres) <1.0000>: Q
Polylines for Lot Layout
The Front Polyline goes from right to left
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 843
Resulting lots numbered using Sequential Numbers
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotlay
Prerequisite: A frontage polyline and a backlot polyline.
Cleanup Lot Linework
This command nds any overshoots or undershoots in the lot linework. The Report Errors mode will report the
location of the errors in the standard report viewer. The Circle Errors mode will draw circles on the specied
layer around the errors. The you can use CAD functions to review these errors and make edits. The Adjust
Linework mode makes the program automatically adjust the linework coordinates to remove the errors as long as
the coordinates move less than the specied Tolerance.
Example of overshoot where lot line goes past intersection
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 844
Example of undershoot where lot line falls short of intersection
Prompts
Cleanup Lot Linework dialog
Select polylines to process.
Select objects: pick polylines
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Lot Layout Utilities
Keyboard Command: lotclean
Prerequisite: Linework
Set Linework Angles To Nearest Second
This command adjusts the coordinates of lines and polylines to set their bearings to the nearest second. This routine
eliminates decimal seconds for the linework. Here's an example inverse showing decimal seconds on a line before
running this routine.
Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z)
7054276.3676 11519401.0186 0.0000
7054104.6344 11519556.5360 0.0000
Bearing: S 42&Acirc;09'47.5207'' E Horizontal Distance: 231.6850115
Here's the inverse showing the bearing to the nearest second on the line after running this routine:
Northing(Y) Easting(X) Elev(Z)
7054276.3673 11519401.0182 0.0000
7054104.6344 11519556.5360 0.0000
Bearing: S 42&Acirc;09'48.0000'' E Horizontal Distance: 231.6850115
Prompts
Select lines and polylines to process.
Select objects: pick lines and polylines
Adjusted 1 polylines.
Maximum distance shift 0.000538
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 845
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Lot Layout Utilities
Keyboard Command: pl2sec
Prerequisite: Linework
Set Linework Intersections To Perpendicular
This command processes a set of polylines to nd any T-intersections and adjusts the polyline coordinates for any
polylines that are not exactly perpendicular. A use for this routine is to select a right-of-way polyline and connected
lot polylines that are meant to be perpendicular. To check polylines without adjusting, use the Edit > Polyline
Utilities > Check Polylines > Highlight Non-Perpendicular Intersections command.
Prompts
Select polylines to check.
Select objects: pick polylines
Adjusted 1 polylines to make perpendicular.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Lot Layout Utilities
Keyboard Command: pl2perp
Prerequisite: Polylines
Offsets & Intersections
This command takes a set of centerline polylines and calculates the series of offset polylines using the user dened
offset and llet radius values. The function recognizes primary and secondary roadways which allows for different
offsets and llet radii to be specied for each. Up to seven sets of offsets and radii can be dened for different
features such as edge of pavement, right-of-way, sidewalk, etc.. Each set also has a layer name and description. The
Pick button lets you set the layer name by picking an entity with that layer in the drawing. The description is for
your own information and is not used by the program.
Multiple centerline polylines can be processed together which allows for the creation of an entire set of roadway
offset polylines in one step. Intersections are calculated based on the centerlines selected and the llet radii are
applied at the intersections. The Smooth Interior and Exterior Corner options will llet bends in the offset polylines.
Otherwise turns without an arc in the original centerline will become straight corners in the offset polylines. The
results of the calculations for the given parameters may be previewed in the dialog. Zoom and pan are available by
clicking and dragging mouse on the preview image (zoom or pan mode is selected by a toggle). Once the satisfactory
offsets are calculated, they are inserted into the drawing by clicking on Finish2D button. The Finish 3D button opens
the Elevate 2D Polylines command, described in this chapter.
If it is preferable to handle intersections manually, you may run the command multiple times on non-intersecting
centerlines. Another alternative is to use the Offset command in the Draw menu and the Fillet command in the Edit
menu.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 846
Prompts
Select all PRIMARY road polylines.
Select objects: select polylines
Select objects: Enter
Select all SECONDARY road polylines.
Select objects: select polylines
Select objects: Enter
Calculating offsets for layer EOP...
Calculating offsets for layer ROW...
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: wayint
Prerequisite: Centerline polylines
Cul-de-Sacs
This command uses a polyline centerline and the offset polylines to create a cul-de-sac. These offset polylines can
be generated by the Offsets & Intersections command, or with the standard Offset command. The layer names of the
offset polylines must match the layer names set in the dialog.
To run this command, pick a set of polylines and point on roadway centerline where the cul-de-sac center is. For
cul-de-sacs with an offset center, pick a projection of that center onto the centerline and specify an offset distance
(positive value is offset to the right, negative - to the left). Like the Offsets and Intersections command, a preview is
shown of the cul-de-sac being designed. Any of the cul-de-sac parameters may be modied and reviewed before the
cul-de-sac is applied and the drawing is modied with the Finish 2D button. The Finish 3D button opens the Elevate
2D Polylines command described in this chapter.
Bend cul-de-sacs are created by selecting offset entities on one side of the centerline.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 847
Prompts
Select all offset polylines to end with cul-de-sac.
Select objects: make selections
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: stdcul
Prerequisite: A set of offset polylines and roadway centerlines.
Elevate 2D Polylines
This command allows to assign elevations to a selection of polylines based on elevations along supplied 3d centerline
and user-dened slopes. This routine calculates a distance from each vertex of 2D polyline to a specied 3D
reference polyline and uses that distance and slope to calculate a 3D offset to a corresponding point on 3D polyline.
You can specify either the original centerline to be a reference 3D polyline or use another set of offset polylines.
For example, you could specify the edge of pavement elevation to be relative to the curb elevation, while curb
elevation is calculated based on the centerline elevation. You can view the resulting road/intersection design in 3D,
making changes and updating picture on-the-y. Local sink points can be reported instantly by evaluating a resulting
triangulation to predict low points in the design leading to water retention.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 848
After selecting entities
Another road/intersection design, this time in 3D
Prompts
Select all offset polylines for the intersection.
Select objects: select entities
Select all 3D prole polylines.
Select objects: select entities
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: 3dintersect
Prerequisite: A set of offset polylines and roadway centerlines
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 849
Parking
This command draws a series of parking stalls. The command prompts for stall width and length, stall parking angle,
and side for stalls. Stalls can be located by the number of stalls in a direction, as many as t between two points, or
along a polyline.
Stall Layout Method: Indicate the method of stall creation whether it be a desired number of stalls or as many
stalls as can be t on an alignment.
Min Stall Width: Indicate the minimum width a stall can be when the Fit on Alignment option is specied.
Max Stall Width: Indicate the maximum width a stall can be when the Fit on Alignment option is specied.
Stall Width: Indicate the stall width when the Number of Stalls option is specied.
Number of Stalls: Indicate the desired number of stalls when the Number of Stalls option is specied.
Stall Length: Indicate the desired length of each stall.
Side for Stalls: Indicate the side to which the stall lines should be placed.
Stall Placement Method: Indicate the method by which the stall direction should be determined whether it be
between two picked points or along an existing graphical alignment.
Layer: Specify the layer on which parking lines should be placed or click the Set button to choose an existing layer.
Prompts
Starting Point?
Pick point or point number: Pick a point
Ending Point?
Pick point or point number: Pick a point
Created 10 stalls.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil Area/Layout Layout Utilities, Survey Area/Layout Layout Utilities
Keyboard Command: parking
Prerequisite: None.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 850
Set Back Measure-Move
This command can be used to measure the perpendicular distance of 1 or 2 points to 1 or 2 lines. This can be helpful
in placing buildings for proper setback from lot lines. After selecting the lot lines and the building, the command
allows you to drag the building while a real time display on the side-bar menu shows the perpendicular distances to
the lot lines. After experimenting you can press T to type in the values to move to. The second line and point are
optional.
Prompts
Select 1st Lot line to measure perpendicular from.
Select object: select line
Select 2nd Lot line to measure perpendicular from ([Enter] for none).
Select object: select line
Select entity to move at 1st point to measure from:
Select object: ENDPOINT of (Pick a point on polyline.)
Pick a 2nd point on entity to measure from ([Enter] for none). END of (Pick a point.) Pick another endpoint of
the polyline representing the building.
Drag-Pick new Location or [T]ype in Move distance(s) [C] to Cancel: T Either drag the building to a location
and press the pick button on your pointing device or press T to enter the distances.
You may have to use a negative distance to move to the proper side of lot line!
Distance from 1st line: 10
Distance from 2nd line: 20
The building is then moved to your specication.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: setback
Prerequisite: Lot lines and polyline representing the building should be plotted.
Draw Lot Setback
This command draws closed polylines inside lots to represent the building setback offsets. Before running this
command, the lots need to be draw as closed polylines. The command starts with a dialog for entering the setback
offsets and the layer for the new setback polylines. The Front to CL Max Offset is used to determine which lot
edges are frontage. The program will prompt to select CL reference polylines and lot edges that are within this
offset from these CL polylines are considered frontage edges. The Front Setback is applied to the lot frontage
edges. The Side Setback offset is applied to lot edges that have only one of their ends within the frontage offset.
The Back Setback offset is applied to all other lot edges.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 851
Prompts
Lot Setback Polylines dialog
Select reference centerline polylines.
Select objects: pick the polylines
Select lot polylines to setback.
Select objects: pick the polylines
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lot setback
Prerequisite: Lot and CL polylines
Footprint Creator
Footprint Creator is a command that allows for the creation of a library and placement of building footprints. The
command is run from the Area/Layout menu and found in the Layout Utilities sub menu. The command inserts
footprint drawings and uses the layering scheme in them to place the footprints with options. Footprint Creator
allows the person producing plans to include optional aspects of designs such as; locating the garage left and right
and including details such as driveways. Labeling tools are provided should it be desired that elements of the
footprints are called out in the plans.
Command Operation
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 852
The command starts with a dialog that allows for the selection of a footprint by a number of characteristics.
These are region, model and elevation. Placement of the the garage is able to be left or right. There is also a
message board function that allows for team members to share information with each other about use and updates
to footprints. For operation of the command select Next.
Footprint drawings may contain optional elements to be included upon placement. In this case an option is a master
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 853
suite. This is read from the source drawings layering convention. To place an option select it by single clicking and
choose the Add button. To remove it select it from the Selected Options pane and then select the Remove button.
The Remove All button does just that and allows you to restart the selection of options.
There are two options that control if the footprint will include an enclosure line or simply place the footprint as
drawn in the source drawing. The list options toggles will annotate the options either by leader, in a list or both.
Use the back button should you realize a different footprint is needed.
Select the next button to select further options.
Porches and Bay Windows
The source drawing's layering scheme is used to allowfor the placement of porches and bay windows. The command
reads the drawing and displays any porches or bay windows available. If none are included this pull down will be
blank.
Excavation Lines
Excavation lines are also read from the source drawing. If none are included this pull down will be blank.
Driveways
The source drawing can also include driveways. Again, if none are present in the drawing this pull down will be
blank.
Add Special, Remove Special, Remove All
The Add Special, Remove Special and Remove All buttons will add the options selected. Remove them individually
or remove them all.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 854
Create Footprint
When ready to place the footprint select Create Footprint. You will be prompted to select an insertion point.
Pick an insertion point:
Congure
To congure Footprint Creator select the Congure button on the rst dialog. This must be coordinated with the
drawings and directory structure for them in order for the command to work properly.
Footprint Conguration Manager
The Footprint Folder is the folder where all of the sub folders for footprints will be located. The Model
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 855
Data and Elevation Data Files by default will be located in your Settings folder. Each footprint is stored in a folder
with a name that corresponds to elements of the footprint. A footprint is included with the Carlson installation. It is
0999-Edgemont KY.dwg and is located in a folder named 0999-Edgemont KY under the settings folder.
Layers are included that are read by the command to determine which elements of the drawing are place
when the command is run.
Other layers that can be used are those related to excavation. They require a layer that includes EXC fol-
lowing the rst to numeric characters and the dash. Layers with OPT are standard Options. They must be preceded
by 00- as shown. Layers that include the Elevation name can be selected during command operation.
Model Data
To create or edit Models select the Model Data button.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 856
The Model Code is a four digit code that will be the rst four characters of the folder and drawing le
name. This is followed by a dash and then the Model Name which is followed by a space and then the Region Code.
The command matches the Region Code to the Region Name for display in the dialog box for Region. The Notes
are purely descriptive.
Add Model Data
To add a model select the Add button.
The Model Code is four numeric characters. The Model name can be alpha or numeric. The Region Code
is a two character designation. The Region Name matches up with the Region Code and can be alpha or numeric.
The notes are descriptive and are there purely to help understand information about the Model. To edit an existing
Model select the Model and then select the Edit button. To save a Model for modication, select the Model and then
select the Save As button. Should the list of models become extensive, use the Search button to locate the model
desired.
Elevation Data Manager
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 857
To create or edit Elevation Data select the Elevation Data button.
The operation of this dialog is nearly identical to the Model Data Manager dialog. The Code and Name re-
late to layers in the source drawing.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout - Layout Utilities
Keyboard Command: createfp
Prerequisite: Footprint drawings in properly named folders with layering convention matching the command
conguration.
Fit Structure
The purpose of the Fit Structure feature is to place a structure (or the footprint) within a bounding polygon. For
example, a house foundation - the footprint - within the limits of the setback lines of a lot - the bounding polygon.
The user can easily insert a structure footprint within a lot or bounding polygon near its nal location. The
footprint then it can then be conveniently rotated and/or translated, in user denable increments, to the exact
position desired.
Footprint Templates
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 858
The template, a full scale denition of a structure's footprint, must be dened prior to placing it within the bounding
polygon.
Templates are not AutoCAD drawings but they can be imported from AutoCAD drawings.
The data specifying the dimensions of a template is stored in a binary format and cannot be manipulated without
using the Template Manager. Once a template is placed in the drawing, it becomes a C&G footprint polyline. Since
it is a C&G polyline, it can be queried and manipulated using ordinary AutoCAD and CGSurvey commands.
Template Manager
The Template Manager is used to manage the templates for the various projects you work on. For example, the
various house footprints used in a given subdivision can be dened as templates. The templates can then be placed
in a lot in an ''as'' or ''reverse'' orientation and reused as many times as necessary. You can use the Template Manager
to dene templates directly or import the templates from existing AutoCAD drawings.
The Template Manager allows you to organize your templates within projects. You can name the projects in
a meaningful way then import the templates into the project ''folder''.
When you choose the Fit Structure feature from the Cogo menu for the rst time, a dialog warns you that you have
no templates dened then brings up the Template Manager.
In the dialog below you will notice that there is nothing listed under the Projects item. This means that you will
have to either create a template or import one from an existing drawing.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 859
Creating a Template:
To create a new template, click the Create button. This brings up a dialog that allows you to congure the simple
drawing in which you will create a template. This dialog allows you to specify the name of the project, the name
of the template and asks about the approximate overall size of the template. If the structure template is made up
of right angle segments you may want to specify a snap grid to aid you in laying out the template. You should be
aware that the create template method
should only be used for very simple templates and that it does not allow you to edit the structure once it is added to
the Template Manager.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 860
When you are done conguring the create template drawing interface, click OK and you will be see an empty
AutoCAD screen upon which you can draw the template. The template is merely a closed polyline. The C&G
Polyline by Points interface is used but in this case there will only be normal AutoCAD points picked (also known
as graphic points designated as GR-PT). The polyline must be closed - so use the C for Close command line option
for the last line segment in the template. Once you enter the Close option keyword for the polyline you are working
on, the drawing window closes and the template is imported into the Template manager as shown below.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 861
Note: You must click on the template name in order to see its shape in the window on the right and to choose it as
the current template.
Importing a Template
The Create template method is only useful for very simple templates. For more complicated templates and projects
with multiple structures, it is recommended that you use the Import method. To import a template you must create a
separate drawing, then draw all of your templates at full scale on the layer specied for templates (see Fit Structure
Setup).
Create a separate template drawing
Begin the importing of a template by creating a new drawing le as a repository for all the structure template
drawings used in a specic project. For this example we will create a new drawing named Mitchell Estates
bldgs.dwg. This le will only contain the structure template drawings for this project.
Select the CAD File menu then select the menu New item
You may be asked to choose a drawing template (not to be confused with the structural template polylines you are
about to create). It is generally easiest to use the default acad.dwt drawing template but you may also specify one
of your own choosing.
In this new drawing create a layer having the name specied in Fit Structure Settings and make this layer
current. You can accomplish this by using the CAD Layer Manager. To open the Layer Manager, from the Format
menu choose the Layer menu item.
In the new drawing, draw the templates (house footprints for example) you will be using in your project. A
structure template must be a closed polyline and may contain arc segments.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 862
Draw the individual house footprints. It is recommended that you use either the C&G Polyline by Points feature or
use the standard CAD PLINE command - on the Draw menu choose 2D Polyline.
You could also use the C&G Quick Traverse feature to traverse around the building However, if you use
Quick Traverse to create the footprint you must then convert the C&G lines created by Quick Traverse to polyline.
To do this you can use a utility on the CGTools menu, Join Nearest.
Once you have created the templates needed, close and save the template drawing le. You can come back
to this drawing at anytime and add or modify templates as needed.
Note: If you change a template in the original template drawing, you must be re-imported using the Tem-
plate Manager. First, use the Template Manager's Delete feature to delete the old template, then re-import the
changed template from your template drawing le.
Placing a Footprint:
Return to the original drawing into which you wish to insert the footprint. In this example Mitchell Estates.dwg will
be used to place structure footprints within lot setbacks.
Select the Fit Structure menu item.
If this is the rst time you have run the command and no templates have been specied, you will be in-
formed of this by a warning dialog. Click OK in the warning dialog and the Template Manager will come up.
If you have inserted a template prior to running this command, the following prompt will be seen at the
command line:
Choose a structure template
[Set template/Current-template (Wilson)/Mirror-current/Done] <C> :
Select ''S'' for Set template to bring up the Template Manager.
The Template Manager
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 863
As mentioned earlier, the Template Manager is used to manage the structure templates you use for your various
projects. In the left hand pane the projects and their associated templates are arranged similar to the directories
in the Windows Explorer. On the right pane is a drawing showing an unscaled representation of the shape of
the currently highlighted template. The highlighted template becomes the current template when you Close the
Template Manager. The following describes the Template Manager functions in more detail.
Delete button: This allows you to delete a Project or an individual template.
Create button: This allows you to generate a template ''on-the-y'' while in the current drawing le. This method
of creating templates should only be used for the simplest of templates. In most cases it is recommended that you
import pre-drawn templates from other existing drawings.
When the Create button is selected, the Add A Template dialog appears (shown earlier).
Name of Project: enter a new name or press the down arrow to select from existing projects.
Name of Template to Add: enter a new name or press the down arrow to select from existing projects.
Approximate Overall Dimensions of Template:
enter an approximate length and width. Make sure this overall dimension will include the entire template so you
will be given enough room to draw the template - too large is better than too small.
Grid:
If you wish to have a snap grid as a drawing aid when you create a template, check the Use grid to aid in drawing
the template checkbox and set the grid interval. You need not use a grid but it is useful in creating simple
rectangular templates.
Click OK to begin creating the template. To create the template, pick the desired locations for the various
building corners. Be sure to close the structure perimeter by typing C and Enter. After closing the template polyline
you will be returned to the Template Manager.
Import button:
clicking this button allows you to import the template from another drawing le. As described earlier, you should
create a separate template drawing. In that drawing draw the required templates as closed polylines. The templates
may contain arcs.
When you select the Import button a dialog (shown earlier) comes up asking you to enter or select a Project Name
and to specify the Name of Template to Add.
The Project Name can be anything you wish but is often the name of the subdivision or the client name.
The template name can also be anything you wish. It should generally reect the type or style of structure the
template represents.
After lling out the project and template names and clicking OK, a le dialog will be displayed. Choose
the drawing le you created earlier containing the template(s) you wish to import.
After closing the le dialog the template drawing will be shown and you will be asked to choose the tem-
plate polyline. When you pick the template polyline its geometry is stored in a special le reserved for template
information and you will be returned to the Template Manager.
If you highlight the newly imported template on the left hand pane it becomes the current template and you
should see it displayed in the right hand pane.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 864
If you wish to import another template just repeat these steps as many times as necessary.
By highlighting the template name it is made the current template. You may choose to mirror the current
template on the Y axis by checking the Mirrored checkbox. All you need do now is click the Close button to close
the Template Manager and place the footprint in the drawing.
Fit Structure Example
The following le names will be used when describing the following example:
Coordinate File: Mitchell Estates.crd
Drawing File: Mitchell Estates.dwg
Template Drawing File: Mitchell Estates bldg.dwg
Note: The template drawing le may have several templates in the same drawing le. For example you
may have a subdivision with many different house footprints.
Import the templates
Open the subdivision drawing le, in this case; Mitchell Estates.dwg, and the associated coordinate le: Mitchell
Estates.crd.
The subdivision drawing should already exist and you should have already dened the bounding polygons within
which the structures are to be placed. These bounding polygons can be dened either by polylines (arcs are allowed)
or lines and arcs. The lots and setbacks (bounding polygons) can also be dened using a C&G Point Group or
Groups.
Once the subdivision drawing is open and has been prepared for the placement of structures choose Fit
Structure from the menu.
If you have not run the Fit Structure command and set a current template in this drawing session, the Template
Manager dialog will appear.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 865
The rst task will be to create a project and import templates from the template drawing le, Mitchell Estates
bldg.dwg.
Select the Import button and ll in the project name and template name.
In this example the subdivision name is Mitchell Estates and the house model being added to the template list is the
Wilson.
Next a drawing le dialog will be displayed. Highlight the template drawing le (in this case Mitchell Estates
bldg.dwg) and click the Open button and use the cursor to choose the polyline representing the template to be
imported.
After choosing the template polyline, you will be returned to the Template Manager. You will notice that
the template you just chose has been added to the template manager under the project you selected. To see its shape
and make it the current template, click the template name under the current project.
You may continue to add templates as required. Click Close to begin placing the template in the subdivision drawing.
After the Template Manager closes you will return to the main drawing and see the following prompt:
Pick the lot within which the structure will be placed [cg-Point-group/Done] <pick>:
Pick a polygon or a series of lines that dene a closed lot boundary or setback within which you wish to place the
structure. Type P and Enter to use a C&G point group le to dene the bounding polygon.
Place the structure in the bounding polygon
Once you have specied the bounding polygon you will be asked to place the structure near its nal location in the
bounding polygon. Move the structure near its desired location using the mouse and click the left mouse button to
place it at that location. Once you have picked the approximate location for the structure you will then be allowed
to rotate and move the structure to its exact nal location.
Note: If you need to adjust a template further once it has been placed within the bounding polygon and you have
exited the Fit Structure command, you can run the Fit Structure command again and pick the existing structure
instead of using a template.
Adjust the structure
After placing the structure in the bounding polygon you will see the following prompt at the command line:
Adjust structure [Move/Step-move/step-Rotate/roTate/rot-Ninty/Parallel/On-boundary/setUp/Done] <D>:
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 866
You are now at the stage were the structure can be adjusted to its nal desired location with relationship to
the setback lines and its orientation with respect to the street and other features.
In all the commands used to adjust the structure, the distances to the bounding polygon may be displayed at
the appropriate corners of the template (see example below). You may turn this distance display on or off or view
or change other t structure parameters using the setUp option (type U and Enter at various the prompts).
Move:
Type M and Enter to ''drag'' the structure around using the mouse cursor - similar to when you rst placed the
structure in the bounding polygon. This option is only meant for moving the structure in a gross, imprecise way and
thus allow you to place it near its nal location. After using this option the structure can be more nely adjusted
using one of the other options described here.
Step-move:
To move the structure up, down, left or right, using the arrow keys on the keyboard, type S and Enter. The following
prompt will appear:
Press arrow keys to move 1.000 dwg units [setUp/Done] <D>:
Now you can use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the structure by steps in the X and Y directions.
The distance moved per keystroke is indicated at the command line - in this case the structure moves 1 unit each
time you press an arrow key. To change the per step increment, type U for setUp. This brings up the Fit Structure
Setup dialog, allowing you to change the Translation Step setting (see below).
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 867
Click OK to return to the Adjust Structure command line.
Step-Rotate:
If you type R and Enter for step-Rotate you can then use the up and down arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the
structure by small rotational steps.
The following prompt will appear:
Use down/up arrow keys to rotate 1000'00'' clockwise/ccw [setUp/Done] <D>:
Rotate:
To rotate the structure, type R and Enter. The following prompt will appear:
Rotate structure to desired orientation: [setUp] <pick>:
Use this option to rotate the structure by moving the mouse. Left clicking will place the structure at the
current rotated orientation. This method of rotation is not precise and is thus useful only for gross rotational
movements.
rot-Ninty: Type N and Enter to rotate the structure 90 degrees in a clockwise direction.
Parallel:
Type P and Enter to rotate the structure so that one of its sides is parallel to a specied line segment on the bounding
polygon.
First, select the side of the bounding polygon that you wish to be parallel to a selected side of the structure.
Next, select the side of the structure that is to be parallel to the previously selected line on the bounding polygon.
After picking the side on the structure the structure will be rotated into position.
Note: If the rotating the structure about its geometric center to make the selected sides parallel to one an-
other will cause an encroachment, an error message will be displayed, no changes will be made, and you will return
to the Adjust Structure ... prompt.
On-boundary:
Type O and Enter to choose a point on the structure that is to touch a selected point on the bounding polygon. This
is accomplished by translation only.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 868
Pick the point on the bounding polygon where you want the structure to touch: Pick the point where
the structure touches the bounding polygon.
Choose the point on the structure that you want to touch the bounding polygon: Pick the point on the structure
that touches the bounding polygon.
If choosing a structure corner as the point to touch the bounding polygon, you should use the end point
snap. If you do not use end point snap, the translation of the point picked to the bounding polygon will likely cause
the corner of the structure to encroach. You can specify end point snap when picking the point on the structure
by typing in ''end'' and Enter at the prompt, then you merely need to pick a point on the structure near the desired
corner to actually specify the corner point.
Note: If the translating the structure to make the selected point touch the bounding polygon at the selected
point would cause an encroachment, an error message will be displayed, no changes will be made, and you will
return to the Adjust Structure ... prompt.
Completing the adjustment process
Once you are satised with the location of the structure type D and Enter and you will see the following prompt:
Creating structure coordinate points:
Enter description for structure corner points <footprint pt>:
You can accept the default description shown in brackets by pressing Enter or you may type in a description
that will help you identify this particular structure and lot.
The corner and any radius points for the current location of the structure are stored in the current coordinate le
and, if Auto plot points is ON, the points are drawn.
After storing the points for the previously placed structure you will see the following prompt:
Choose a structure template [Set template/Current Template/Mirror current/Done] <C>:
Press Enter or C and Enter if you wish to repeat the process and place the current structure template in the
same or another bounding polygon.
If you wish to place a mirrored (''reverse'') version of the current structure template in a bounding polygon, type M
and Enter.
If you wish to place a different structure in a bounding polygon, type S and Enter to bring up the Template Manager,
allowing you to pick a new template.
If you are done placing templates for now, type D and Enter for Done.
At any time you may adjust an existing structure by choosing Fit Structure. If there are existing structures in the
drawing, it will be detected and the following the prompt will appear at the command line:
Pick existing structure to adjust or choose a structure template.
[Set-template/Current-template(Wilson)/Mirror-current/Done] <C>:
At this prompt you can use the mouse to pick an existing structure to adjust. You can now use any of the
adjustment methods described above to further rene the location of the structure. After the adjustment process is
complete the coordinate le is updated to reect the adjusted locations of the structure's corner and radius points.
Note: When you pick an existing structure, any plotted corner point symbols are temporarily removed to fa-
cilitate the adjustment process. Once you are done adjusting the existing structure, these points are re-plotted at
their new adjusted locations
At this prompt you may also choose to place a new structure in a bounding polygon. To use a different
template, type S and Enter to bring up the Template Manager and allow to choose the desired template. If you
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 869
have already placed a template in the current drawing session, the prompt will indicate the current template. By
typing C and Enter or just pressing Enter you can choose to place the current template in a bounding polygon or
you can type M and Enter to place a mirrored version of the current template:
Prompts
Template Manager dialog: create or choose a template to place within a bounding polygon (a lot)
Add a Template dialog: Used in conjunction with the Template Manager dialog to add a template to a given project.
if you have already specied a template to use but no templates have been placed in the drawing:
Choose a structure template
[Set template/Current template (Wilson)/Mirror-current/Done] <C> : Type ''S'' and Enter to bring up the
Template Manager dialog. Type ''C'' and Enter or just Enter to use the current template. Type ''M'' and Enter to
mirror the current template. Type ''D'' and Enter when done placing templates.
if a structure/template exists in the drawing or you have already specied a template to use:
Pick existing structure to adjust or choose a structure template.
[Set-Template/Done] <S>: To adjust an existing structure pick it on the screen. Type ''S'' and Enter or just Enter
to bring up the Template Manager dialog to choose a new template. Type ''D'' and Enter when done.
after you set a new template or chose to use the current one:
Pick the lot within which the structure will be placed [c&g-Point-group/Done] <pick>: pick the polyline or a
series of lines that dene a closed polygon within which the structure template will be placed. Type P and Enter to
specify the bounding polygon using a C&G Point Group le.
Place the structure near its nal location in the bounding polygon <pick>: Drag the structure template to the
desired location and click the left mouse button to place the structure.
after you place a template or pick one to adjust:
Adjust structure [Move/Step-move/step-Rotate/roTate/rot-Ninty/Parallel/On-boundary/setUp/Done] <D>:
Type ''M'' and enter to move the structure. Type ''S'' and Enter to use the arrow keys to move the structure in
predened steps. Type ''T'' and Enter to use the cursor to rotate the structure. Type ''R'' and Enter to rotate the
structure template a predened number of degrees using the up and down arrow keys. Type ''N'' and Enter to rotate
the structure 90 degrees clockwise. Type ''P'' and Enter to translate and rotate the structure template parallel to a
side of the bounding polygon. Type ''O'' and Enter to move the structure template so a chosen point on the structure
touches a chosen point on the bounding polygon. Type ''U'' and enter to use the Setup dialog to change the step
sizes, layer names and other conguration items for the t structure command.
when saving the structure coordinate points:
Enter description for structure corner points <footprint pt>: Specify a description for the structure template
corner points to be saved in the coordinate le or just press Enter to use the default description.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Layout Utilities
Keyboard Command: cg t structure
Prerequisite: coordinate le, pre-drawn bounding polygon (lines and arcs or a polyline)
Lot Network Settings
This command displays a dialog for the current Lot Network Settings which species the lot network name, road
network name, label settings, setback settings, hatch settings, building placement settings, lot type settings and lot
area tolerance.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 870
Lot Network: Click Select for the Lot Network name and choose the Lot Network le (.ltn).
Road Network: Click Select for the Road Network name and choose the Road Network le (.rdn).
Starting Lot Name: Indicate the starting Lot Name. As Lots are created, the trailing digit will be incremented by a
value of 1.
Lot Area Tolerance: When creating lots to a target area, the program will nish adjustments when the area is within
this tolerance of the target.
Automatic Label Updates: Enable this option if Lot labels should automatically update themselves if a Lot is
altered or adjusted.
Edge Direction: Select an option to have new Lot lines drawn either Away From Frontage or Toward Frontage.
Default Lot Type: Settings in this section of the dialog box will be applied to all new Lots created using the
''Default'' Lot type.
Lot Line Layer: Specify a new layer or click Select to choose an existing layer for newly created Lot lines
Label Lines and Arcs: Enable this option if you want this routine to label the newly created lines and arcs at the
time new Lots are generated. For Line/Curve Label Settings, you can click Select to specify the Auto Annotate
settings le (.aan) or click Edit to make changes to the Auto Annotate settings. For General Label Settings, you
can click Select to specify the Annotation General Settings le (.adf) or click Edit to make changes to the Annotate
Defaults settings.
Label Areas: Enable this option if you want this routine to label the areas at the time new Lots are generated. For
Area Label Settings, you can click Select to specify the Area Defaults le (.ars) or click Edit to make changes to the
Area Defaults settings. For Area Table Settings, you can click Select to specify the Area Table Settings le (.atb) or
click Edit to make changes to theArea Table Defaults settings.
Draw Setbacks: Enable this option if you want this routine to draw Setback lines at the time new Lots are generated.
Click Settings to adjust the Setback Settings as desired.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 871
Draw Hatch: Enable this option if you want this routine to draw a Hatch pattern inside Lots at the time new Lots
are generated. Click Settings to adjust the Hatch Settings as desired.
Building Placement Settings: Click the Building Placement Settings button to specify the values that should be
followed when building pads are placed using the Lot Network routines.
Lot Setback Parameters: Adjust the front, side and back Setbacks as desired.
Draw Building Pads: Enable this option to draw building pad polylines.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 872
Building Polyline Layer: Specify the layer on which building pad polylines should be drawn or click the Select
button to choose an existing layer.
Draw Building Symbols: Enable this option to draw building symbols (blocks).
Building Symbol Layer: Specify the layer on which building pad symbols should be placed or click the Select
button to choose an existing layer.
Symbol: Click the Select button to specify the name of the building symbol.
Building Pad Width: Specify the width of the building pad polyline.
Building Pad Depth: Specify the depth of the building pad polyline.
Building Pad Setback: Specify the distance behind the Setback line at which to place building pad polylines. Enter
''0'' to have building pad polylines placed directly on the Setback.
Additional Building Pads: Click the Add button to create additional building pads, the Edit button to modify
existing building pads and the Remove button to delete building pads.
Note:
When building pad creation is enabled, the initial Building Pad dimension will be attempted. If the initial
building pad cannot be placed due to Lot size/placement restrictions, subsequent building pads in the Addi-
tional Building Pad list will be attempted.
LotNet sample showing setbacks and examples of varying building sizes.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 873
LotNet sample showing 3D building symbol.
Additional Lot Types: Settings established in this section of the dialog box allow you to create additional types
of Lots in order to apply different Line/Curve, Area, Area Table, Setback, Hatch and Building Placement Settings
according to their specied Lot Type. Additionally, running a Lot Network Report will break out Lot data based on
Lot Type andLot Network Inspector will display Lot Type.
Add, Edit and Remove: Use these buttons to create additional Lot types, edit or remove existing Lot types.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet cong
Prerequisite: None.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 874
Lot Network Boundary
These are a collection of commands to assign and verify the site boundary for lot network.
Set Boundary: Sets the site boundary. It must be a closed polyline.
Highlight Boundary Perimeter: Indicates the boundary to the user by highlighting it.
Hatch Boundary Perimeter: Indicates the boundary to the user by hatching it.
Erase Hatch Boundary: Erases the hatched boundary for the user.
Clear Boundary: Deletes the boundary designation from the polyline.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet limit, lotnet highlight limit, lotnet hatch limit, lotnet hatch erase, lotnet untag limit
Prerequisite: None
Tag Sub-Area
This command provides the ability to establish ''exclusion'' areas (such as wetlands or drainage ponds) that limit
where Lots or Lot Setbacks from the Lot Network routines can be created.
Prompts
Select polyline for sub-area: Pick a closed polyline that denes the sub-area.
Area Category: Provide the name of a general category for the sub-area.
Area Description: Provide a more specialized description for the sub-area.
Note:
If a Sub-Area is created after a Lot Network has been processed, the existing Lot lines are kept and any
associated setback lines are updated to honor the Sub-Area.
If a Lot Network is processed after a Sub-Area has been created, the newly created Lots will honor the Sub-
Area(s).
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil Area/Layout Lot Network Sub-Areas, Survey Area/Layout Lot
Network Sub-Areas
Keyboard Command: tag subarea
Prerequisite: A closed polyline.
Untag Sub-Area
This command removes the from the selected polyline(s) the Sub-Area Category and Description information placed
with the Tag Sub-Area command.
Prompts
Select sub-area polylines to remove sub-area tag.
Select objects: Pick the polyline(s) whose Sub-Area information you wish to clear and press Enter when complete.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil Area/Layout Lot Network Sub-Areas, Survey Area/Layout Lot
Network Sub-Areas
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 875
Keyboard Command: untag subarea
Prerequisite: A closed polyline with appropriate Sub-Area data.
Identify Sub-Area
This command displays the Sub-Area Category and Description information found on polylines tagged with the Tag
Sub-Area command and reports it to the Command prompt.
Prompts
Pick polylines to check or search drawing [<Pick>/Search]: Press Enter to individually select Sub-Area poly-
lines or Type S and press Enter to search the entire drawing.
Select sub-area polyline: Pick the polyline whose Sub-Area information you wish to identify and press Enter when
complete.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil Area/Layout Lot Network Sub-Areas, Survey Area/Layout Lot
Network Sub-Areas
Keyboard Command: id subarea
Prerequisite: A closed polyline with appropriate Sub-Area data.
Report Sub-Area
This command displays the Sub-Area Category and Description information found on polylines in the drawing that
have been tagged with the Tag Sub-Area command and reports the information to the standard Report Viewer.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil Area/Layout Lot Network Sub-Areas, Survey Area/Layout Lot
Network Sub-Areas
Keyboard Command: report subarea
Prerequisite: A closed polyline with appropriate Sub-Area data.
Hatch Sub-Areas
This command places a hatch pattern into polylines in the drawing that have been tagged with the Tag Sub-Area
command.
Prompts
Hatch Name: Type in the name of a valid hatch pattern. A sample of the pattern will appear near the ''Select Pattern''
control.
Automatic Hatch Scale: Disable this toggle to manually control the size/density of the hatch pattern.
Hatch Scale: Specify the size of the hatch pattern. Larger Scale values create a less dense pattern.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 876
Select Pattern: Use a visual dialog box approach to select a hatch pattern. The name of the hatch pattern selected
displays in the Hatch Name control.
Select Color: Use a visual dialog box to specify the color of the hatch pattern.
Note:
Any previous hatch patterns placed by the Hatch Sub-Areas command are rst erased from the drawing.
Hatch patterns are placed onto the LOTNET HATCH SUBAREA layer.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil Area/Layout Lot Network Sub-Areas, Survey Area/Layout Lot
Network Sub-Areas
Keyboard Command: hatch subarea
Prerequisite: A closed polyline with appropriate Sub-Area data.
Erase Sub-Areas Hatch
This command removes the hatch pattern(s) placed with the Hatch Sub-Areas command.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil Area/Layout Lot Network Sub-Areas, Survey Area/Layout Lot
Network Sub-Areas
Keyboard Command: erase subarea hatch
Prerequisite: A Sub-Area with an appropriately placed hatch pattern.
Label Sub-Areas
This command displays the Sub-Area Category and Description information found on polylines tagged with the Tag
Sub-Area command and uses the current text style to place the information as text into the drawing.
Prompts
Text Size <4.00>: Press Enter accept the specied text size or Type an alternate numeric text size and press Enter.
Label area size [Yes/<No>]? Choose whether or not the area of the Sub-Area(s) should be labeled in the drawing.
Layer name <LOT SUBAREA>: Press Enter to accept the layer name specied or type in the desired layer name
and press Enter when complete.
Note:
To remove Sub-Area Labels from the drawing, use the Lot Network Settings command.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil > Area/Layout > Lot Network Sub-Areas, Survey > Area/Layout > Lot
Network Sub-Areas
Keyboard Command: label subarea
Prerequisite: A closed polyline with appropriate Sub-Area data.
Input-Edit ROW Offsets
This command denes the ROW offsets for the Road Network for Lot Networks. The ROW offsets are for the
frontage polylines to the left and right of the centerlines. Besides the ROW, you can also dene additional offset
polylines to be drawn. These additional offset polylines do not effect the lot network.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 877
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet row
Prerequisite: None
Lot Network Road Network
This command develops the linework, geometry and labeling for subdivision, commercial and industrial sites by
using the familiar Road Network interface and pre-dened settings. The program docks a dialog on the left of
the screen identifying the geometry settings and all road les and leaves an active CAD screen and command
line. You can save drawings and run virtually any standard AutoCAD command while within the docked dialog.
Once you identify centerlines for the road network, the program detects intersections and end segments suitable
for cul-de-sacs, and through input of design parameters for offset criteria, cul-de-sac dimensions and intersection
transitions, the program will process the complete geometry layout, with output options including creating Lot les
for later reference and a variety of labeling options for such items as Areas, Distances and Bearings. The road
network settings are saved in a .RDN le.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 878
Before running the Road Network, use the following procedure to setup the lot labeling settings and site
boundary. Click the Lot Network Settings button. Note that you can use the Area/Layout Menu pulldown to
access these commands as well. Select or create a lot network settings le. Next, select the Set Boundary icon.
Select a closed polyline for the boundary around your site. Next select the Road Network icon. When prompted,
select the .RDN le from the Existing tab. This is where the centerlines involved for the subdivision will be dened
and added to the Road Name area of the panel. These centerlines are standard Carlson .CL les. Click a centerline
and choose Edit. If a CRD le is requested choose or create a .CRD le. The Edit Road dialog appears. The
centerline can be selected here and these centerlines can be edited on the y if needed. For ROW Offsets, we are
using the Row-OFF-a.Row le. Click Edit. The ROW offsets dialog displays. Use the defaults of 45' left and right
and note that additional graphics can be automatically generated by hitting Add and entering additional values,
names and layers. Hit Exit.
Note also that Optional Input les can be attached to the process for roadway widenings based on the stan-
dard Carlson Road design tools of the same name. This is where a polyline indicating where the roadway template
ID's should be tapered or widened is developed into a Centerline le and attached to the roadway template involved.
Refer to the Road Design documentation for this information. Hit OK to close the Edit Road dialog. These settings
can be set and altered for each road in the network.
Next click on one of the intersections you may have and select Edit Intersection. In the Edit Intersection dialog, the
intersection's radii can be set. Click on the Front Left or Front Right to verify this. Hit OK when ready.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 879
The program can also develop cul-de-sacs for the subdivision, although this example doesn't require one. To see
how it works, click Add under Cul-de-sac's area of the panel. The Select Road for Cul-de-sac dialog appears. Select
the road for the Cul-de-sac and the Edit Cul-de-sac dialog opens. Then as shown in the gure, choose whether the
cul-de-sac occurs at the beginning or ending of the roadway, provide a cul-de-sac radius and let radius and any
other criteria to develop the graphics as desired. Since we do not have a cul-de-sac in this example we will skip this
step.
Next select Settings at the bottom of the Road Network panel. The Radius is the default for new intersections. The
radius for any existing intersection can be modied by selecting the intersection in the list and picking the Edit
button. The Create Lots setting draws linework for lots for the specied geometry parameters. Otherwise, only the
ROW polylines are drawn.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 880
Use a radius of 25.0 and turn on the Create Lots toggle and click Settings. Set the values as shown in the Create Lot
Settings dialog below. Then hit OK and OK to exit.
Prompt For Each Area: This option will pause to prompt for the target area as each lot is created.
Target Lot Area: The new lots will have this area +/- the Lot Area Tolerance under Lot Network Setting plus any
effect from handling the Remainder.
Minimum Frontage: Controls the minimum lot perimeter length along the ROW.
Use Setback For Minimum Frontage: This option bases the Min Frontage check at the specied Frontage Setback
from the ROW.
Minimum Lot Depth: This setting is the min distance from the ROW to the back of the lot for the lot side lines.
Maximum Lot Depth: This setting is the max distance from the ROW to the back of the lot for the lot side lines.
Minimum Back Distance: This setting is the min distance along the back of the lot perimeter between the two lot
side lines.
Interior/Back Reduce Offset: For interior boundaries generated by the program between lots, this option reduces
the number boundary vertices. A vertex is removed if it doesn't effect the boundary by more than the specied offset
amount. This method is similar to the Reduce Polyline Vertices command.
Edge Method: The lot sides can be created perpendicular to the frontage ROW, back boundary or at a specic angle.
Remainder: This option determines how to handle any remaining area that is less than the target area after tting as
many lots as possible. The Create Separate End Lot will make a lot with this remainder area. The Apply Equally
to All Lots will spread the extra area to all the lots. The Add To Last Lot will add the remainder to the last lot
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 881
created making it larger than the target area. The Create Back Lot Edge makes a back lot edge that meets the target
area at min frontage.
Lot Type: Sets the lot type for the new lots.
Check Building Placement: Checks that the building footprints t within the lots for the specied setbacks.
Lot Setback Parameters: These setting offset the lot perimeter inward for different sides of the lot.
Min Setback Area: This option checks that the lot area within the setbacks is at least this much.
In the Road Network panel click Save or Saveas to save these settings for your own experimentation.
Now Click Process to begin the lot layout. You will notice the ROW's and EOP's being generated, followed
by the lot lines. Then areas are labeled and setbacks are created. Finally, the lotlines are labeled with distances,
bearings and arc data.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet rdn
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 882
Prerequisite: centerlines and a site boundary polyline
Lot Network Linework
The following commands allow for the Lot Network to be manipulated after the processing. The commands
allowing this are:
Adds a ROW polyline into the model. By clicking this command, the software asks for the user to select
the new ROW polyline. It then reprocesses the site based on this new ROW data and relocates the EOP for this
portion of the roadway.
This command adds a lot edge to the model. The software may request a Lotnet Settings le and if so cre-
ate or select it. The software prompts with: Select Edge linework to add to model: Select the polyline you drew in
the lot representing the new lot edge. The software reprocesses the site based on this new data and redevelops the
lot layout accordingly.
This takes a property line out of the model. Select the edge in question when prompted.
This command allows for adding a new property corner to an existing lotline. Simply select the lot edge in
question and then pick the point to be added using a snap or other means.
This command allows for moving a lot corner.
This command allows for eliminating a lot corner. Simply select the lot edge in question and then the cor-
ner to be removed.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: Lotnet Add Row, Lotnet Add Edge, Lotnet Remove Edge, Lotnet Point Add, Lot-
net Point Edit, Lotnet Point Remove
Prerequisite: None
Lot Network Subdivide Area
This command subdivides an area into smaller parcels. The command displays the Create Lot Settings dialog. Once
all settings are values have been entered, click on the OK button.
Next you are prompted to Pick inside area to subdivide:
Next, the right-of-way adjacent to your area to subdivide is highlighted. You are prompted to Pick end of
frontage to start lots: . Use your left mouse button to pick a point near one end of the highlighted right-of-way.
New lots will be created starting from this end of the right-of-way.
Note: All previously created lots will be re-drawn and re-labeled if the setting for ''Automatic Label Up-
dates'' has been toggled ON in the LotNet Settings dialog box.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 883
Method: The Automatic method will create the lots within the area according to the parameters in the dialog. The
Prompt For Each Area method will prompt you to specify the area for each lot as it is created. The Prompt For
Each Frontage will prompt you to specify the frontage for each lot as the method to size the lots.
Target Lot Area: This setting establishes the minimum lot area for each lot created using this command. Target
Lot Area can be specied using Acres or Square Footage.
Minimum Frontage: This setting establishes the minimum width, along the front Right of Way, of the newly
created lots.
Use Setback for Minimum Frontage Enabling this option measures the minimum frontage at the setback location
instead of along the front Right of Way.
Frontage Setback: This setting establishes the distance off the front right-of-way for the front setback.
Minimum Lot Depth: This setting establishes the minimum depth of new lots created with this routine.
Maximum Lot Depth: This setting establishes the maximum depth of new lots created with this routine.
Minimum Back Distance: This setting establishes the minimum width of the rear lot line. Setting this to ''0'' allows
for a pie-shaped lot.
Interior/Back Reduce Offset: This setting establishes the maximum distance interior or back lot lines can be
shifted or trimmed in order to meet other setback rules.
Edge Method: This setting establishes the angle between the front right-of-way and new lot lines. You are able to
specify that new lot lines be drawn: Perpendicular to ROW, Perpendicular to Back Lot Line or at a Specic Angle.
Remainder: This setting allows you to distribute the area that is left over after creating new lots. The remaining
area can be distributed using one of several methods: Apply Equally to all Lots, Create Separate End Lot, Add to
Last Lot and Create Back Lot Edge.
Lot Type: This setting allows you to specify the Lot Type for new lots created using this routine. Lot Types are
dened in the LotNet Settings dialog box.
Check Building Placement: This setting allows you to establish front, side and back setback distances for building
placement along with a minimum allowable area for front setback. Building sizes are dened in the LotNet Settings
dialog box.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 884
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet subdivide area
Prerequisite: None
Size Lot by Frontage
This command provides the ability to resize a Lot associated with the current Lot Network .LTN le based on a
user-specied amount of Lot Frontage.
Prompts
Pick inside lot to adjust: Identify the interior portion of a Lot whose Frontage is to be adjusted.
Select lot edge to adjust: Choose a side Lot edge that is common to two Lots. The Current Area and Current
Frontage of the selected Lot is reported.
Frontage (ft): Type in the new Frontage amount and press the Enter button.
Note:
To specify an alternate .LTN le, use the Lot Network Settings command.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil Area/Layout Lot Network Areas, Survey Area/Layout Lot Network
Areas
Keyboard Command: lotnet ssfront
Prerequisite: A processed set of Lots and their graphical entities created by the Lot Network routines.
Lot Network Sliding Side Area
In this routine a lot side can be altered to reect a new target area. It will hold its angle and slide along the front
and back lot lines until it has achieved the desired area. When running the routine, Select the lot in question when
asked to pick inside lot to adjust and then select the lot edge to adjust. Then the prompt asks Acres/<Enter Target
Area(sf)>: Type in the desired area you are trying to obtain and the system computes it.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet ssarea
Prerequisite: None
Lot Network Hinged Area
In this routine a lot side can be altered to reect a new target area. It will hold a lot corner and pivot, or rotate until
it achieves the desired area. The procedure is as follows:
Pick inside lot to adjust: Select a point inside the lot to modify.
Select lot edge to adjust: Select the edge that will move.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 885
The routine will report the current area to you and then ask for your desired area.
Current Area: 22494.5 SF 0.516 Acres
Acres/<Enter Target Area (sf)>: 10000
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet harea
Prerequisite: None
Lot Network Labels
These are a collection of commands to draw lot network area, line and arc labels.
Deletes the labels in the model and re-labels the linework based on the LTN le settings.
Deletes the labels in the model and re-labels the linework.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet update, lotnet redraw
Prerequisite: None
Lot Network Report
This command generates a report with a summary of the areas and number of lots in the lot network model. When
the Summary Only option is off, the report also include the area, perimeter and frontage for each lot. For a detailed
report of the lot data including the lot corner coordinates, output the lot network to a .lot le and run the Report
function inside Lot File Manager. The Use Report Formatter option allows for customized reports and output to
different formats such as Excel. Otherwise a standard report is generated.
Lot Network Report
File: C:\Carlson Projects\Clearwater Oaks.ltn
Total Area: 20.520 acres, 893839.8 sf
Lot Area: 17.600 acres, 766648.4 sf
ROW Area: 2.920 acres, 127191.3 sf
Other Area: 0.000 acres, 0.0 sf
Number of Lots: 50
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 886
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet report
Prerequisite: None
Lot Network Inspector
This command shows a dynamic report of the lots as the cursor passes over them. The program has a small dialog
that shows the lot number, area, perimeter, frontage and Lot type.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet inspector
Prerequisite: a lot network
Check Lot Network Parameters
This command compares area and frontage of Lots associated with the current Lot Network le (.ltn) against
user-specied area and frontage values.
Enabling the ''Check ROW Offsets'' option will also check for proper right-of-way distances using a speci-
ed centerline le (.cl) or (.rdn) le.
A detailed report is generated that displays the Lots that meet or do not meet the area and frontage minimums along
with the coordinates of points along Lot frontage that violate the right-of-way value specied.
Minimum Lot Area: Specify the smallest acceptable area a Lot can be to ''pass the test'' and the appropriate unit of
measure.
Minimum Frontage: Specify the smallest allowable amount of street frontage the Lot must have in order to ''pass
the test.''
Check ROW Offsets: This setting allows you to specify the full right-of-way width for the road dened by the
centerline le (.cl) you specify.
Note:
To specify an alternate .LTN le, use the Lot Network Settings command.
To ''browse'' over lots already in a drawing, use the Lot Network Inspector command.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 887
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Lot Network Utilities
Keyboard Command: lotnet check
Prerequisite: A processed set of Lots created by the Lot Network routines.
Find Lot Name
This command displays a temporary indicator in the drawing showing the location of a Lot associated with the
current Lot Network .LTN le.
Note:
To specify an alternate .LTN le, use the Lot Network Settings command.
To ''browse'' over lots already in a drawing, use the Lot Network Inspector command.
Prompts
Lot Network File to Process dialog Locate an existing .LTN le
Lot name to nd: Type in the Name (usually the Lot Number) of the Lot you wish to locate and press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil Area/Layout Lot Network Utilities, Survey Area/Layout Lot
Network Utilities
Keyboard Command: lotnet nd
Prerequisite: A processed set of Lots created by the Lot Network routines.
Lot Network Renumber Lots
This command allows you to renumber the lot number for selected lots. The program prompts for the Starting Lot
Name: where the new value can be types, such as 200 for the new starting number. It then says Pick point inside lot
to start renumbering: so you would pick inside the desired lot. The routine then asks for the Next direction point for
renumbering: and you must pick into the next lot to continue or cross over several lots in one pick to include all of
those lots in the renumbering process.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet renum
Prerequisite: a lot network
Lot Network - Assign Lot Type
This command allows you to assign a new Lot Type to Lots in a Lot Network by dragging a line across the Lots to
be re-assigned.
Note: Lot Types must have already been dened through the LotNet Settings dialog box.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 888
Prompts
Set Lot Type dialog: Select the ''Default'' or other pre-dened Lot Type.
Pick a point inside lot to start re-assigning: Use the left-mouse button to drag a multi-segmented line across all
the Lots to be re-assigned to the selected Lot Type. Press Enter to nish.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout Lot Network Utilities
Keyboard Command: lotnet type
Prerequisite: A lot network and pre-dened Lot Types
Lot Network Output To Lot File
This command will develop a .LOT le containing the points to dene the lots. The points are stored into the
current coordinate le. The .LOT le by the collection of Lot File commands including Lot File Manager.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotnet lotle
Prerequisite: a lot network
Set Lot File
This command sets the lot (.LOT) le name that other lot routines will automatically reference. The lot (.LOT) le
stores a list of lots with each lot being a list of point numbers which reference coordinates stored in a coordinate
(.CRD) le.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: setlot
Prerequisite: None
Design Lot
This command creates lot denitions that are stored in a lot (.LOT) le. The lots are dened by entering a sequence
of point numbers. The point numbers reference coordinates from the current coordinate (.CRD) le. Each lot has a
lot name and block name. The lots are not required to be closed perimeters and can also be used to represent other
linework such as centerlines. Curves are entered by rst specifying the PC point number, then type R for radius and
enter the radius point number followed by the PT point number.
Prompts
Lot Name <1>: 105
Block Name <1>: press Enter
Lot Starting Station <0.0>: press Enter
If the gure that you are entering is a centerline, then you could use this as the starting station of the centerline.
Starting point number: 17
Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 18
Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 19
Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): R
Radius point number: 20
Use large included angle for curve (Yes/<No>)? press Enter
End of curve point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 21
Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 22
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 889
Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 17
Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): press Enter
Enter another lot (<Yes>/No)? N
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Create Lots
Keyboard Command: mklot
Prerequisite: Points in a coordinate (.CRD) le
Polyline to Lot File
This command will create lot (.LOT) les from selected polylines. The lots are dened by the series of point
numbers. This command will create point numbers in the current coordinate (.CRD) le for each point in the
polylines. Before creating a point number, the program will check to see if the point coordinates are already in the
coordinate (.CRD) le and will use the existing point number if found. Each lot has a lot name and block name.
Lots are not required to be closed perimeters and can also be used to represent other linework such as centerlines.
Prompts
Polyline To Lot File Options Dialog enter in values
After entering in the Starting Point Number, points will be automatically numbered starting from this value.
Select lot polyline: pick a polyline
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 890
Select lot polyline:
Lot Name <LOT 19>:
Created 3 lot points.
Select lot polyline (Enter to end):
Lot Name <LOT 20>:
Created 3 lot points.
Select lot polyline (Enter to end):
Lot Name <LOT 21>:
Created 3 lot points.
Select lot polyline (Enter to end):
Select lot polyline: pick a polyline
Lot Starting Station <0.0>: press Enter
Lot Name <106>: press Enter This defaults to the next available name.
Block Name <1>: press Enter
Lot Starting Station <0.0>: press Enter
Created 7 lot points.
Select lot polyline (Enter to end): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Create Lots
Keyboard Command: pl2lot
Prerequisite: A polyline
Lot File by Pick Interior
This command is used to create a lot by picking a point, and having the program gure the enclosing linework. The
linework do not need to be closed themselves but selected together they should dene closed areas. All the lots will
have the same block name as entered and all lots will be assigned a starting station of 0.0.
The lots are dened by the series of point numbers. This command will create point numbers in the current coordi-
nate (.CRD) le for each point in the bounding polylines. Before creating a point number, the program will check to
see if the point coordinates are already in the coordinate (.CRD) le and will use the existing point number if found.
This command works well in conjunction with Lot File Manager. Once a lot (.LOT) le containing 1 or more lots
is created, all lots can be redrawn automatically, with annotation, using Lot File Manager. Furthermore, since the
lots are drawn from point numbers, if the point numbers for the lot corners are moved, the lots can be redrawn to the
new point positions using Lot File Manager. If a point number is at the corner of four lots, moving that one point
number will update all four lots.
Polylines and text to convert into 3 lots
Prompts
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 891
Starting point number <8>: press Enter Points will be automatically numbered starting from this value.
Select lot polyline: pick a polyline
Block Name <1>: press Enter
Select lot lines, polylines and text.
Select objects: select the polylines and text
Select objects: press Enter
Created 3 lots.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Create Lots
Keyboard Command: txt2lot
Prerequisite: Polylines and text
Lot File by Closed Linework
This command creates lot denitions from the selected polylines, lines and arcs. This command is similar to Lot File
By Interior Text. The difference is that this routine does not process text for the lot names. Instead this command
nds all the closed areas from the selected linework and then automatically names the lots.
For each lot, the program stores a series of points to the lot le. In the options dialog, there are settings for the
point number, point description and whether to order the points clockwise around each lot. The Draw Points option
will create point entities besides storing the points to the current coordinate le. The Starting Lot Name is used for
assigning the lot names which then get incremented by one for each other new lot.
Prompts
Lot File By Closed Linework dialog
Select lot lines and polylines.
Select objects: select linework
Created 3 lots.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Create Lots
Keyboard Command: lwork2lot
Prerequisite: Polylines, lines or arcs
Lot File by Interior Text
This command creates lot denitions from the selected polylines and text. For each text entity, the program nds
the bounding polyline around the text. The text is used as the lot name. The polylines do not need to be closed
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 892
themselves but selected together they should dene closed areas. Multiple lots can be created at once with this
command. All the lots will have the same block name as entered and all lots will be assigned a starting station of
0.0.
The lots are dened by the series of point numbers. This command will create point numbers in the current coordi-
nate (.CRD) le for each point in the bounding polylines. Before creating a point number, the program will check to
see if the point coordinates are already in the coordinate (.CRD) le and will use the existing point number if found.
This command works well in conjunction with Lot File Manager. Once a lot (.LOT) le containing 1 or more lots
is created, all lots can be redrawn automatically, with annotation, using Lot File Manager. Furthermore, since the
lots are drawn from point numbers, if the point numbers for the lot corners are moved, the lots can be redrawn to the
new point positions using Lot File Manager. If a point number is at the corner of four lots, moving that one point
number will update all four lots.
Polylines and text to convert into 3 lots
Prompts
Starting point number <8>: press Enter Points will be automatically numbered starting from this value.
Select lot polyline: pick a polyline
Block Name <1>: press Enter
Select lot lines, polylines and text.
Select objects: select the polylines and text
Select objects: press Enter
Created 3 lots.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Create Lots
Keyboard Command: txt2lot
Prerequisite: Polylines and text
Lot Manager
This command combines input, edit, draw and report lot capabilities into one command.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 893
Main Dialog
In the main dialog, there is a spreadsheet list for the lot names along with the block name, lot type and group
assignment for each lot. You can edit these values directly in the spreadsheet. There are also function buttons as
follows:
Open: selects another Lot File to process.
Save: saves the lot data to the current lot le.
SaveAs: prompts for another le name to save the lot data to.
View: The View options control drawing effects when you highlight lots in the spreadsheet list.
Zoom Current: zooms the display view to include the selected lot.
Highlight Current: highlights the perimeter of the selected lot as a dashed line.
Hatch Current: lls in the selected lot with a hatch.
Restore View on Exit: on leaving Lot Manager, this option sets the display to the original position before running
Lot Manager.
Lot Selection: Many of the functions such as Draw process only the lots that are in selected mode. You
can toggle which lots are selected with the buttons in the Selection spreadsheet column. You can also use the
buttons in the Selection section to select the lots to process.
Select All: marks all the lots as selected.
Clear All: unselects all the lots.
Invert Selection: ips currently selected lots to unselected status and currently unselected to selected status.
Load Selection: sets the current selection status from a .LSS le.
Save Selection: saves the current selection status to a .LSS le.
Add: creates a new lot. The new lot name is automatically generated by incrementing from the highest lot
name.
Remove: deletes the currently selected lots.
Copy: creates new lots as copies of the currently selected lots.
Edit Current: brings up a dialog editor for the highlighted lot (see below).
Move Up/Down: changes the order of the highlighted lot in the list.
Sort By Block: sorts the lots by block name order rst and then by lot name within each block.
Sort By Lot: sorts the lots by lot name only without using the block name.
Clockwise Order: sets the order for the lot points for the selected lots as either clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Point Group: creates a point group for the lot points of the selected lots.
Draw: draws the selected lot perimeters and annotation (see below).
Report: reports the selected lots (see below).
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 894
Original Coordinates Utilities: has methods for tracking lot coordinate transformations of the current coordinates
relative to the original coordinates.
Export: output selected lots to a new lot le as a way to make a subset lot le.
Edit
This dialog allows you to edit the lot name, block name, group, coordinate le, starting station, ending station and
the point numbers that dene the lot. A curve is specied by the PC, radius point and PT point numbers. The
Large Arc option indicates a curve with an included angle greater than 180 degrees. The Select button allows you
to specify a new name or location for the coordinate le associated with the lot.
Add: adds a new point to the lot.
Remove: removes the highlighted point from the lot.
Move Up/Down: changes the order of the highlighted point in the list.
Reverse: reverses the order of the points.
Set POB: sets the point of beginning, starting point, to the currently highlighted point.
Draw
The Draw routine allows you to draw polylines for the lot perimeters as well as annotate the lot linework and areas.
Draw Lot Polylines: The Closed Polylines method creates a closed polyline for each lot. The Lines and Arcs
method draws the sides of the lots as a series of lines and arcs. The advantage of the Closed Polylines method is that
each lot is completely dened by the closed polyline. The advantage of the Lines and Arcs method is that there are
no overlapping entities for common borders between lots. With the Lines and Arcs method, the program draws the
common border entities only once. The layer for the polylines is set by the Lot Type which is dened in Dene Lot
Attributes. If the Lot Type is not dened, then the polyline are drawn in the current layer.
Label Lines and Arcs: Labels the bearing, distance, and curve data using the Auto-Annotate command. See Auto-
Annotate for more details.
Label Areas: Labels the area, and optionally the name of the selected lots using the Area Settings dialog. See Area
Defaults for more details.
Hatch Areas: Hatches the lot areas.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 895
Create Esri MSC Attributes: Denes an Esri MSC format lot feature in the drawing with the lot attributes.
Erase Previous Entities: Erases lot polylines and labels from earlier runs of Draw to avoid duplicates.
Report
The Report routine has several types of reports.
Report Areas Only: When checked only the lot name, block name, and area are included in the report.
Report Stations: Controls whether to report the distance along the lot perimeter.
Report Elevations: Controls whether to report the elevation from the coordinate le for each lot point.
Report Point Descriptions: Controls whether to report the description from the coordinate le for each lot point.
Report Station/Offset To Reference CL: This option prompts for a CL le that is used to calculate stations and
offsets for each of the lot points to include in the report.
Add Page Break between Lots: Formats the report so that each lot denition begins on a new page when printed.
Use Report Formatter: When checked, the report is output to the Report Formatter where it can be customized as
well as exported to Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Access. See Report Formatter in for more details.
Report Closure By: If the Start/End Coordinates method is used, closure error distance is typically 0 (perfect
closure-you end where you start). If the Angle/Distance Precision method is used, then the actual bearings and
distances (computed from the coordinates) in the report are used, and due to the rounding used to present the
bearings and distances, minute closure errors will occur which will be reported.
Report Precision: Specify the decimal precision for reporting coordinates, distance and angles on the report. The
precision for the areas is dened in the Area Defaults command.
Unequal Radius Tolerance: When reporting the curve data for a lot, the two radial lengths are compared. If the
difference in their length is more than this value, it is noted on the report.
Check Lot Report: Checks that the area for all the lots assigned to a Group Block-Lot add up to the area of the
area of the enclosing group lot.
Lot Report: Creates a report using the report settings.
Legal Description Report: Writes a legal description using the same routine as the Legal Description Writer
command. See the Legal Description Writer section of the manual for more details.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 896
Lot Report
Lot File: C:\sample\CivilDemo.lot
CRD File: C:\sample\CivilDemo.crd
LOT 55 OF BLOCK 1, TYPE: LOT
PNT# Bearing Distance Northing Easting Station
36 3374.827 4631.668 0.000
Radius: 642.845 Length: 85.660 Chord: 85.597 Delta: 0738'05''
Chord BRG: S 6007'05'' W Rad-In: N 3341'58'' W Rad-Out: N 2603'53'' W
Radius Pt: 8 3909.649,4274.994 Tangent: 42.894 Dir: Right
Tangent-In: S 5618'02'' W Tangent-Out: S 6356'07'' W
Non Tangential-Out
41 3332.181 4557.451 85.660
N 2603'53'' W 175.000
42 3489.384 4480.558 260.660
Radius: 467.845 Length: 62.341 Chord: 62.295 Delta: 0738'05''
Chord BRG: N 6007'05'' E Rad-In: N 2603'53'' W Rad-Out: N 3341'58'' W
Radius Pt: 8 3909.649,4274.994 Tangent: 31.217 Dir: Left
Tangent-In: N 6356'07'' E Tangent-Out: N 5618'02'' E
Non Tangential-In Non Tangential-Out
37 3520.420 4534.571 323.001
S 3341'58'' E 175.000
36 3374.827 4631.668 498.001
Closure Error Distance> 0.00032 Error Bearing> N 7014'59'' E
Closure Precision> 1 in 1550913.7 Total Distance> 498.001
LOT AREA: 12950.1 SQ FT OR 0.3 ACRES
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: editlot
Prerequisite: None
Lot Inspector
This command activates a small pop-up window that when you place your pointer into a lot le area, the details of
that lot le will be displayed in the Lot Inspector window.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 897
Prompts
Move pointer inside lots (Pick to edit, Enter to End) hover crosshairs above lot(s)
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotinspector
Prerequisite: None
Right-of-Way Crossing Table
This command will create a table using user selected information and user dened table features. A polyline is
selected that crosses one or more lots. Lots must be dened in a Lot le prior to running the command. In the
following example the polyline is labeled as a Pipeline.
When the command is started the user is presented with the Lot Crossing Settings dialog box. There two tabs; Label
Fields and Settings and Table Settings.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 898
Available Labels: This is the list of information that may be included in the table.
Used Labels: These are the items that have been selected to be in the table. They are placed in the table in the order
listed. The green up and down arrows will move used labels up or down in the list.
Add: Clicking the Add button will add the highlighted labels in the available list to the used list.
Remove: Clicking the Remove button will remove labels highlighted in the used list and display in the available
list.
Setup: Setup opens the Field Settings dialog for the Used Label that is highlighted.
OK: Clicking the OK button will proceed to the selection of the crossing polyline.
Cancel: ends the command with no table being created.
Load: Loads previously saved settings so table created match previous tables.
Save: Saves the settings as currently displayed for use on future tables.
Help: Load this le.
Sheet Width (in): This value denes the width of the table. If set too small the text in the table will overlap.
Table Layer: Select an existing layer to draw the table on using the Select button or use a new layer by typing the
name in the edit eld.
Table Color: The use can specify a color for the table gridlines using the Select button. Bylayer will use the color
assigned to the Table Layer for the grid lines.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 899
Table Title: A title can be specied for the table by typing the desired title in the Table Title eld. See example
below.
Title Text Color: This species the color for the Table Title text.
Title Text Style: This species the text style for the Table Title text. Be sure the style specied is dened in your
drawing.
Title Text Size Scaler: This species the plotted height of the Table Title text. The table is drawn in model space.
The height of the text in model space is the Text Size Scaler multiplied by the horizontal scale in Drawing Setup.
Use Table Tile Background Color: This option allows the user to specify a background color for the Table Title.
Use Table Header Background Color: This option allow the user to specify a background color for the Table
Header row.
Use Table Contents Background Color: This option allows the user to specify a background color for body of the
table.
Use Table Contents Alternating Background Color: If the Table Contents Background color is being used, This
option allows the user to specify a second color to use on alternating rows of the table body.
The Field Settings dialog box is opened by double-clicking a Used Label or highlighting a Used Labels and clicking
the Setup button.
Row Title: Row Titles are the Used Labels that were selected Label Fields and Settings tab.
Text Style: This species the text style to be used for the current row text. You may use the Select button to choose
a text style. Be sure the selected text style is loaded in the drawing.
Text Style Scaler: This species the plotted height of the current row text. The table is drawn in model space. The
height of the text in model space is the Text Size Scaler multiplied by the horizontal scale in Drawing Setup.
Text Color: This species the color for the current row text. You can use the Select Color button to choose the
color from a pallet. Bylayer uses the color of the Table layer for the text.
Prex: This places the user provided prex text with the row entries. An example would be prexing lot numbers
with the word Lot.
Sufx: This places the user provided sufx text with the row entries. An example would be using ft for feet as a
sufx for a length.
Justication: Users can specify, Left, Center or Right text justication.
Calculated Numeric Values
Table numeric values that are calculated, like area or lengths, have the two following controls in addition to those
listed above.
+/-: Users may specify a +/- be used as a prex or sufx. The default is None, not used.
Precision: Decimal precision for calculated numeric values can be set to zero and up eight decimal places.
OK: Saves changes and closed the Field Setting dialog box.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 900
Cancel: Closes the Field Settings dialog box without saving changes.
Help: Accesses this documentation.
Prompts
Pick a polyline for lot crossings: Select polyline crossing lots
Starting Station <0.0 >: Enter desired starting station
Ending Station <1642.88> Accept full length or enter ending station to process a part of the polyline.
Pick location for report table: Select location in drawing for table
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Survey Module: Area/Layout > Lot File Utilities > Right of Way Crossings Table
Keyboard Command: lotcross
Prerequisite: Polyline and Lot File
Dene Lot Attributes
This command allows the user to dene the Lot Type, Lot Attributes and Point attributes. With the use of the
opening Lot Attribute Denitions dialog box, shown below, this routine allows you to edit, add, remove or reposition
all of these denition types. You can save the selected data to a new Lot Attribute Denition le (LTD). You are
also able to load an existing LTD le to work with.
The Lot Types section of the dialog lists out the Lot Type and the layer associated with it.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 901
You can set up different lot types and a layer. When the lots are drawn, the layer name is used per lot type. Also,
Lot Types are used in the lot report. There are also Lot Attributes, which are additional elds that you can dene
for the lots, such as deed number. And there is also Point Attributes.
Edit/Add: Both the Edit and the Add buttons bring up the same Lot Type dialog, shown here. You can edit an
existing lot or add a new one.
The Lot Attributes section asks for the Name and to enter the Data Type.
Edit/Add: Edit or add the name of the lot attribute. Choose from one of the four options for Data Type: Real,
Integer, String or Document.
Similarly, the Point Attributes section also asks for the Name and to enter the Data Type.
Remove: Any of the Remove button will remove a lot type, lot attribute or point attribute from the list above it,
depending upon which Remove button you use.
Up/Down (all three): Types and attributes can be repositioned.
Track Original Coordinates: This option will track the original coordinates of the lot so that this record may be
kept for your future usage and needs.
Load: A Lot Attribute Denition le (LTD) can be loaded.
SaveAs: A new Lot Attribute Denition le (LTD) can be saved.
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout
Keyboard Command: lotattr
Prerequisite: None
Import Lot File From MDB Database
This command will import a lot le from a Microsoft Access database le (.MDB) format.
Prompts
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 902
Database File to Import dialog select existing .MDB le
Lot File to Write dialog select existing or create a new .LOT le
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Lot File Utilities
Keyboard Command: lotimport
Prerequisite: A lot (.LOT) le
Export Lot File to MDB Database
This Lot File Utilities command will export a lot le to a Microsoft Access database le format.
Prompts
Lot File to Export dialog select existing .LOT le
Database File to Write dialog select existing or create a new .MDB le
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Lot File Utilities
Keyboard Command: lotexport
Prerequisite: A lot (.LOT) le
Export Lot File To Old SurvCADD
This Lot File Utilities command will export a Carlson lot le to SurvCADD .LOT le format.
Prompts
Source Lot File to Export dialog select existing .LOT le
Destination Lot File To Write dialog create a new .LOT le
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Lot File Utilities
Keyboard Command: lotexport2
Prerequisite: A lot (.LOT) le
Set CRD File for Lot Files
This command allows you to set the coordinate (.CRD) le that is associated with any number of lot (.LOT) les.
This can be useful if the name or location of the coordinate (.CRD) le is changed. In the Set CRD for Multiple
Lots dialog, press the Select .LOT les button to select any number of lot (.LOT) les. They are added to the list.
Next, press the Select .CRD le button. After you have selected the les, press the Process button.
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 903
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Lot File Utilities
Keyboard Command: lotscrd
Prerequisite: Existing lot (.LOT) le(s)
Lot File to Centerline
This command creates a centerline (.CL) le from a lot (.LOT) le. Since the lot denitions contain a series of
points and a starting station, the lot (.LOT) le contains the necessary data to create a centerline. The Select Lot to
Convert dialog lists the available lot names in the current lot (.LOT) le. Select a single lot to process, then specify
the centerline (.CL) le name to create.
Prompts
Centerline File to Write dialog enter new centerline (.CL) le name
Select Lot to Convert dialog select a lot from the list
Pulldown Menu Location: Area/Layout > Lot File Utilities
Keyboard Command: lot2cl
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 14. Area/Layout Menu 904
Annotate Menu 15
These menus include commands for labeling lines with bearing/azimuth and distances, special lines, coordinates,
curves, curve tables and line tables. The precision of labeled distances and coordinates are set and controlled with
the Annotate Defaults command.
905
Annotation Defaults
This command sets the defaults for the annotation menus and controls the way various annotation commands work.
Some of these defaults can be changed globally by running Congure command, which changes the le COGO.INI
so that every time you start Carlson, the new defaults are set. When this menu option is selected the Annotate
Defaults dialog appears.
This dialog is broken into 5 tabs: General, Angle, Distance, Serial Lines and Parallel Lines.
General Tab
This tab is used for settings that apply to all annotation types.
Horizontal Scale: This is the horizontal scale for the current drawing. This value can also be set by using the
Drawing Setup command on the Settings menu.
Text Size Scaler: This value is multiplied by the horizontal scale value to set the text size units.
Text Offset Scaler: This value multiplied by the horizontal scale denes the distance that an annotation label is
placed from its dening line.
Line Type Spacing: Species the distance between the symbols on special line types.
Line Type Text Scaler: This value multiplied by the horizontal scale species the size of the symbols of special
line types.
Arc Length Label: Species the prex label for arc length labels.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 906
Arc Text Spacing Factor: This variable controls how close letters will be spaced when labeling arcs. The lower the
number, the closer the spacing. The higher, the farther apart. (The suggested range between 0.8 and 1.5)
Use MText: This option creates the labels as MText instead of standard Text entities.
Label Flip Tolerance (degrees): Gives extra tolerance for label ipping for readability. Labels draw in the
north-west quadrant that are within this number of degrees to due-north will be drawn upside down.
Previous Labels: Species if previous labels for the for the set of linework being annotated are kept or deleted.
Setting values are Retain, Erase, Prompt Before Erasing.
Draw Leaders to Endpoints on Lines: This option creates leader lines (crow's feet) between the distance
annotation and the line segment endpoints as shown below. These leaders are used to help identify the endpoints
that were used to create the distance label.
Distance Labels Only: When checked, leaders will not be drawn unless
the label includes a distance.
Leader Size Scaler: This option determines the maximum length for leaders. The size in drawing units will be the
Leader Size Scaler multiplied by the Horizontal Scale (for example, 0.5x50=25). If the line segment is too short, the
leader is shortened to t.
Height Scaler: This option controls the height of the leader.
Offset Scaler: This option controls the distance between the line endpoints and the leader endpoints.
Arrow Scaler: This option controls the arrowhead size for leader styles with arrows.
Leader Style: This option determines which of the ve styles of endpoint leaders to use. The ve styles are:
Arrow-Arc, Arc-Arrow, Arc-Only, Dash-Dot and Dashed.
Leader Layer: This option determines the layer for drawing the leader.
Draw Leaders to Endpoints on Arcs: This option creates leader lines (crow's feet) between the arc segment
endpoints as shown below. These leaders are used to help identify the endpoints that were used to create the arc label.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 907
Leader Size Scaler: This option determines the maximum length for leaders. The size in drawing units will be the
Leader Size Scaler multiplied by the Horizontal Scale (for example, 0.5x50=25). If the arc segment is too short, the
leader is shortened to t.
Offset Scaler: This option controls the distance between the arc endpoints and the leader endpoints.
Leader Style: This option determines which of the ve styles of endpoint leaders to use. The ve styles are:
Arrow-Arc, Arc-Arrow, Arc-Only, Dash-Dot and Dashed.
Leader Layer: This option determines the layer for drawing the leader.
Report Delta Angle as 1/2 Actual Angle: The angle value in the label will be 1/2 the actual angle.
Angle Tab:
This tab is for settings that apply to angle labels:
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 908
Angle Layer: This species the layer to be used for angle labels.
Angle Text Style: This species the text style to be used for angle labels.
Bearing Prex and Sufx: Species the prex and sufx text for azimuth labels.
Azimuth Prex and Sufx: Species the prex and sufx text for azimuth labels.
Bearing Annotation Precision: Specify the display precision for bearing labels.
Angle Separator: Choices are Symbol, Hyphen, Space, Other. When Other is chosen the Deg. Min. and Sec.
elds are enable to allow the user to enter custom angle separators.
Bearing Direction Method: Choose the orientation of the bearing. This controls how lines selected for bearing or
azimuth annotations will be referenced.
Toward Picked End: If this option is chosen, the line will be labeled in the direction of the endpoint that is closest
to the point where you selected the line.
Away from Picked End: This labels the line in the direction away from the closest endpoint.
North Only: This option controls whether bearing annotations will always be labeled in the north quadrants (NE
or NW) and never in the south quadrants.
East Only: This option controls whether bearing annotations will always be labeled in the east quadrants (NE or
SE) and never in the west quadrants.
By Linework: This option labels the line in the direction that the line was drawn.
Label Geodetic Mean Angle: Instead of labeling the direct coordinate bearing between two points, this option
labels the geodetic mean angle which is the average of the geodetic bearings at the two points. This method converts
the drawing coordinates to lat/lon and calculates the convergence angles for both points. The projection must be
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 909
dened under Settings->Drawing Setup.
Strip Spaces in Bearing Labels: This option causes the spaces in bearing labels to be removed.
Add Spaces in Bearing Labels: This option puts spaces between the degree, minutes, and seconds numbers.
Strip Zero Minutes and Seconds: This option shortens the label by dropping either seconds and or minutes and
seconds when they are equal to zero.
Bearing Quadrant Labels: These settings control the labels for the north/south prex and east/west sufx for
bearing labels.
Label Cardinal Angles by Name: When checked, the user is allowed to enter the labels that will be used for each
of the four cardinal angles.
Draw Bearing Leaders: This option creates a direction arrow with the bearing annotation as shown below.
Position Leaders To Side: This option draws the bearing leader to the right side of the bearing label. Otherwise
the leader is drawn above the label.
Distance Tab
This tab is for settings that apply to distance labels:
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 910
Distance Layer: This species the layer to be used for distance labels.
Distance Text Style: This species the text style to be used for distance labels.
Distance Prex and Sufx: These specify the prex and sufx that are added to distance annotations.
Decimals: The decimal places can be set to a specic number or set to match the CAD units which are set by the
LUPREC system variable.
Distance In Inches: This controls the precision for inches from 1/2 to 1/256th of an inch when the Distance Units
is set for inches.
Distance Type: This controls whether to label grid distances or geodetic distances at zero or mean elevation. The
geodetic distances require the grid projection to be set in Drawing Setup.
Distance Units: This species the units used for distance labels. Choices are Decimal, Chains, ''Feet and Inches''
and Both.
2nd Scaled Distance Options: This option labels determines if a 2nd scaled distance is included in distance labels.
This 2nd distance is scaled by the Report Scale Factor set in the Drawing Setup dialog. Choices for this option are
''Label 1st Only'' (label distances in current drawing units only), ''Label 1st and 2nd'' (label distances in both current
drawing units and scaled by the Report Scale Factor) and ''Label 2nd Only'' (label distances scaled by the Report
Scale Factor Only). There are separate settings for the 2nd Distance for the label prex and sufx and decimal places.
Label: This variable will be assigned as a sufx to the second scaled distance label.
Drop Trailing Zeros in Distances: This option allows you to drop trailing zeros on distance labels.
Series Lines Tab
This tab is for settings that apply to Series Lines labels (See the section ''Auto Annotate'' for a detailed de-
scription of series line handling).
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 911
Text Size Scaler: This value is multiplied by the horizontal scale value to set the text size units for serial lines.
Text Offset Scaler: This value multiplied by the horizontal scale denes the distance that an annotation label is
placed from its dening line for serial lines.
Angle Layer: This species the layer to be used for angle labels on serial lines.
Angle Text Style: This species the text style to be used for angle labels on serial lines.
Distance Layer: This species the layer to be used for distance labels on serial lines.
Distance Text Style: This species the text style to be used for distance labels on serial lines.
Parallel Lines Tab
This tab is for settings that apply to Parallel Lines labels (See the section ''Auto Annotate'' for a detailed
description of parallel line handling).:
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 912
Text Size Scaler: This value is multiplied by the horizontal scale value to set the text size units for parallel lines.
Text Offset Scaler: This value multiplied by the horizontal scale denes the distance that an annotation label is
placed from its dening line for parallel lines.
Angle Layer: This species the layer to be used for angle labels on parallel lines.
Angle Text Style: This species the text style to be used for angle labels on parallel lines.
Load/Save: Choose these options to load an existing annotation defaults le (.ADF) or save a new one, which will
contain your current selections.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: LDEF
Prerequisite: None
Auto Annotate
This command allows you to select a group of lines, arcs and/or polylines to be labeled. It allows for any
combination of line and distance labeling, and also any combination of arc labeling.
You can position the features of the labels, once in the Auto-Annotate dialog, by using the Row, Side, Order,
Orientation and Position Types options, all found under Lines tab. For Arcs, you can select the Arcs tab and
determine the type of auto-annotating you would prefer for arc entities. As you select different options, you can
see the changes in the preview display of the entry dialog. You will select the Angle Format in terms of Bearing,
Azimuths and Gons and there is an important feature that allows you to avoid label overlaps. This is done by
applying specic, user-dened settings. When labeling arcs, there are options to set the label prexes for curve
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 913
annotation. The Settings button will bring you to the Annotation Defaults dialog, as explained in a previous section.
Defaults will restore the prior settings.
Apply Label Settings by Layer brings up another dialog box which allows you to import from le, or load,
predetermined congurations. There is an option to have different label settings applied by layer. Apply Label
Settings By Layer allows you to set, load, and save your preferred variables.
The Avoid Label Overlap option can bring up a special dialog called the Overlap Manager. This screen, which
contains extra tools for, as an example, sliding or stacking the labels that are overlapping and conicting with
drawing entities, gives you the real-time ability to move along the plan and make your corrections. This also will
help you to avoid overlapping with other labels, text, symbols and linework including fence and utility lines. In
this Overlap Manager, docked on the left side of the screen. it is recommended that you use the Back and Next
button frequently in order to review, adjust and correct your drawing.
Auto-Annotate dialog starts with the Lines (tab).
Angle/Distance: Allows you to enter the what row the Angle label is on, what side and the order of the label on the
linework. The same applies for Distance labels. Notice the preview display changing.
Row: Using numbers (1 or 2), or choosing None, you can determine the order and appearance of the descriptions.
Note the change in the preview display.
Side: Choose inside or outside of the line.
Order: If you determine that the annotations are to be on the same row and same side of the line, then you must
pick the order in which they will appear, from left to right.
Justication: This option gives the ability to left or right justify labels at ends of line or center justify the labels.
Orientation: This offers this choice between parallel or perpendicular with regards to the labels' orientation to the
line being labeled.
Position Types: Determined how each label is placed in relationship to the line and the other label.
Angle Format: Bearing, azimuths or gons are the choices.
Combine Common Angles: This allows the user to reduce label clutter by minimizing labeling of serial and
parallel linework. Choices are Off, Series, Parallel and ''Series and Parallel''. Series common angles are those where
serially connected linework share the same angle. Common series angles are labeled at the mid-point of the series
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 914
of connected line segments. When series common angles are selected they may be drawn stacked on the same side
as the distance labels or on the opposite side from the distance labels. Also, for serial common angles the total
distance may be included in the label. Parallel common angles are those where adjacent areas share parallel lines
that include the line that bisects the areas. In this case, only the outer-most lines of the set of parallel lines will be
labeled with the angle.
The common angle labels have separate settings for layer, style, size and offset. Please see the section ''Annotate
Defaults'' for information on how to control these settings.
The following example shows the results of combining common serial labels, including totaling of the distances:
The following example shows the results of combining common serial and parallel labels:
Compress Labels for Short Lines: When angle and distance labels are being placed on the same side and row, this
feature allows the user to place the label on different rows in the case that the label will not t on the line otherwise.
The options are Off, ''Angle Above, Distance Below'', ''Distance Above, Angle Below'', ''Stacked Angle-Distance''
and ''Stacked Distance-Angle''.
Add Space Between Angle and Distance Labels: When angle and distance labels are being placed on the same
side and row, this feature allows the user to have the angle and distance labels spread apart from each other as
allowed by the length of the line being annotated.
Use Line Tables: Line tables are sometimes preferred as they keep the drawing linework clean and free of labeling.
Choices are Always, Never or By Scaler. If By Scalar is chosen ''To Line Table Scaler'' is enabled.
To Line Table Scaler: If the length of the line is less than this minimum, the line is labeled as a line table entry.
The To Line Table Scaler is relative to the current horizontal scale and represents the length of the line in plotted
inches.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 915
Starting Table Number: User choice. You might change this because perhaps you have another group of line
labels, in table form, in the drawing. Line table entries are numbered sequentially beginning at the line Starting
Table Number. The location for the line table can be picked if there is no current table. Otherwise, Auto Annotate
will add to the end of the current line table. To set the location for the current line table, run the Table Header
command in the Annotate > Line/Curve Table menu.
Auto-Annotate dialog box, by selecting the Arcs tab, displays the options for auto-annotating arcs. The columns
are described, followed by the rest of the options.
Label: Here you might alter slightly the defaults by entering a letter or acronym that will represent to type of
calculation. Or you could leave it alone.
Row: Using numbers, or choosing None, you can determine the order of the descriptions, and determine whether
or not some might be left off altogether.
Side: Choose inside or outside of the arc.
Order: If you determine that the annotations are to be on the same row and same side of the curve, then you must
pick the order in which they will appear, from left to right.
Label Chord Angles in: Bearing, azimuths or gons are the choices.
Type of Curve: Choose between Road and Rail.
Flip Text on Arcs that Open to the North: Clicking here might make for a easier to read nished plan. User
preference.
Use Symbol for Delta Angle Label: The popular and traditional triangle-shaped symbol can be used, instead of
the letter D, or any other letter(s).
Combine Common Radii: This allows the user to reduce label clutter by minimizing labeling of connected arc
segments that share a common radius and center point. When selected, only one radius label will be generated for
such arc segments. The following shows an example where a curve made of three arc segments is labeled with only
one radius label. The radius label is placed offset to the mid-point of the combined arcs.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 916
Use Arc Tables: Curve tables are sometimes preferred as they keep the drawing linework clean and free of labeling.
Choices are Always, Never or By Scaler. If By Scalar is chosen ''To Curve Table Scaler'' is enabled.
To Curve Table Scaler: The To Curve Table Scaler applies when the Type of Arc label options is not set to Curve
Table. If the length of the arc is less than this minimum, the arc is labeled as a curve table entry. The To Curve Table
Scaler is relative to the current horizontal scale and represents the length of the arc in plotted inches.
Starting Table Number: The Starting Table Number is the starting number for the rst line entered in the Curve
Table. Curve Table entries are numbered sequentially from the curve Starting Table Number. The location for Curve
Tables can be picked if there is no current table. Otherwise, Auto Annotate will add to the end of the current Curve
Table. To set the location for the current Curve Table, run the Table Header command in the Annotate >Line/Curve
Table menu.
Stack Labels: Stacked labels are sometimes preferred as they can help reduce label overlapping. Choices are
Always, Never or By Scaler. If By Scalar is chosen ''To Stack Scaler'' is enabled.
To Stack Scaler: When Stack Labels is set to ''To Stack Scaler'' this control is enabled. If the length of the arc is
less than this minimum, the arc is labeled as a stacked label. The To Stack Scaler is relative to the current horizontal
scale and represents the length of the arc in plotted inches. The Stack Settings button is enabled when Stack Labels
is set to Always or By Scaler. This button brings up the Stack Arc Labels which displays the options for creating
stacked arcs labels. The columns are described, followed by the rest of the options.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 917
Label: Here you might alter slightly the defaults by entering a letter or acronym that will represent to type of
calculation. Or you could leave it alone.
Row: Using numbers, or choosing None, you can determine the order of the labels, and determine whether or not
some might be left off altogether.
Label Chord Angles in: Bearing, azimuths or gons are the choices.
Side: Choose inside or outside of the arc.
Type of Curve: Choose between Road and Rail.
Flip Text on Arcs that Open to the North: Clicking here might make for a easier to read nished plan. User
preference.
Use Symbol for Delta Angle Label: The popular and traditional triangle-shaped symbol can be used, instead of
the letter D, or any other letter(s).
Draw Leader for Stacked Labels: When checked, a leader will be drawn from the stacked label to the mid-point
of the arc.
Stack Label Offset: This value multiplied by the horizontal scale denes the distance that an annotation label is
placed from its dening arc.
Align Text With Chord: Determine whether the stacked label is oriented horizontally (unchecked) or in the
direction of the chord (checked).
Auto-Annotate dialog commands, common to both Lines and Arcs.
Apply Label Settings By Layer: See the Label By Label Settings dialog and details below.
Avoid Label Overlap: See dialog and details below.
General Settings: Brings you to the A ate Defaults dialog.
Layer Settings: Apply Label Settings By Layer option must be clicked in order to activate. You will then see the
Label By Layer Settings dialog.
Overlap Settings: Avoid Label Overlap option must be clicked in order to activate. Brings up the Avoid Label
Overlap dialog.
Reset to Defaults: This returns you to the default label values.
Point Group: This function prompts for a point group to use for the input data to annotate. The program uses the
series of points to dene the lines and arcs to annotate.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 918
Load: You can load an existing .AAN le.
We will now say, for example, that with linework only to label in the drawing we run this routine. We rst decide
to go without the Avoid Label Overlap feature. This can be done by unclicking this option in the Auto-Annotate
dialog. We will say that there is a fence line cutting through our property line, the property lines being the lines that
we want to auto-annotate. In going without Auto Annotate's overlap protection, we perform Auto Annotate and we
see that there is an overlap, with the labels running into the property lines and the fence line.
Panning and zooming the screen shows the problems we confront. Now, run Auto annotate again, but this time click
ON the Avoid Label Overlap feature. Then click Overlap Settings button which brings up a dialog as shown below.
This program and this specic dialog box has many different methods for xing the overlaps. We will choose the
different methods to apply.
First, we will choose Slide. This slides the labels along the linework. We can even choose a maximum amount of
slide and other related parameters. We will also turn on the Stack method. The Avoid Linework Conicts feature
pertains to that fence line we have. Finally, click OK. Now can pick the linework. Note that you do not need to
erase the existing auto annotate labels ahead of time. This command will remember that those labels were created
with this command. It will simply replace the entire group of labels with the new auto annotate labels.
The result, with overlap detection on, is that this routine xed 7 out of 7 of the conicts. It slid some of the labels
over and stacked others. You can also run Auto Annotate Overlap with manual mode. To do this, remove the
automatic options (such as Stack, Slide, etc.) and click View Remaining Overlaps After Applying Rules ON. Say
OK. It docks the Overlap Manager on the left side of the screen.
You can then x the conicts with this Overlap Manager by using the different methods presented in this new
window. This manager will highlights the conicts, it will, for example, slide to the next conict and allow you to
pick a new position. Hit the Next several times. Again, stack one, slide another over, and perform other changes.
Then choose Close.
Also, remember that depending on the linework layer, you can even have different annotation styles. There is also
an option to have different label settings ''by layer''. These decisions are made by using the Label By Layer Settings
dialog options. To get to this dialog, click on the Layer Settings button at the bottom of the Auto-Annotate dialog.
Label By Layer Settings option and dialog.
Layer: Select a layer from the existing list of layers. If the linework you select and to be labeled is on this layer, the
parameters that you set in this dialog will be reected in all labels.
Auto-Annotation Settings: Select an existing Annotation Settings le (AAN) by clicking the File button on the
right. Or stick with the defaults.
Auto-Defaults Settings: Select an existing Default Settings File (ADF) by clicking the File button on the right. Or
stick with the defaults.
Load: Select this option in order to load an existing layer le (LAY) to load.
Avoid Label Overlap option and dialog.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 919
Overlap Settings dialog
Available Methods: Your choices. Pick from these.
Used Methods: Different ways in which this routine attempts to resolve the label overlaps. The overlap resolution
attempt methods are applied in the order listed here.
Slide: If this is selected then the labels will be moved parallel to your linework until they do not overlap. The
labels will not move past the end of the linework or the Max Slide which you determine.
Offset: will move your labels perpendicular to your linework as far as you set the Max Offset.
Table: Replaces your labels with a numbers and create a table of the numbers with the corresponding labels.
Reorient: If chosen, the labels will change orientation in the plain view to avoid overlapping.
Flip: It will ip your label onto the other side of the linework.
Stack: It will stack or unstack the text of your labels to avoid overlapping.
Move Area Labels: This method, which only applies to area labels, will attempt to move the area label to the
closest place within the area that doesn't overlap with any other labels. You can control the move interval (distance
between move attempts) and total number of move attempts by setting the values ''Interval (multiples of text
height)'' and ''Max Move Attempts'' in the ''Move Area Labels Parameter'' section:
You can use any combination of these commands by using the add/remove button. You can also determine the order
in which the command tries a method by using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. If a solution is not found by
using the rst method then the next method is used in descending order.
Add/Remove: Some methods you might prefer not to use.
Slide/Offset Parameter (multiples of text height): These are variable that help you to slide or offset the label(s)
in question.
View Remaining Overlaps After Applying Rules: This option will help you to see what still needs treatment.
View Last Overlap File: When it is checked, the Overlap Manager will return to the previous labels that were
under review.
Skip Resolved Overlaps: When it is unchecked, the Overlap Manager will display all the labels that were moved
by the command as a nal check to you.
Restore Original Zoom: This will restore the zoom you were previously at before running the command.
Avoid Linework Conicts: This is an extra precaution for when linework conicts exist.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 920
If there is a conict, the following Overlap Manager dialog appears on the screen. It zooms to the conict and
provides you with the necessary tools to resolve the issues that need to be addressed. Many of the choices selected
in the earlier dialog boxes can be modied yet again in the Overlap Manager, in your quest for a clean looking
drawing. Within this special window you can zoom, pan, move to the next conict, and perform many other tasks.
The Overlap Manager screen appears as a docked dialog window to the left of the main screen.
The Overlap Manager can be used to manually check and change label overlaps. The current overlap item will be
have a yellow box drawn around it to help make it clear which item is the one currently being worked on. If you
check on ''View Remaining Overlaps After Applying Rules'' then any remaining overlaps will be zoomed in on and
you will have the ability with the Overlap Manager to ip through and x or ignore the unresolved labels. When
the current overlap item is an area label, only the Move and Table button will be enabled as these are the only two
manual methods that can be applied to these types of labels. For line and curve labels, all methods will be enabled.
Prompts
Auto Annotate Dialog Choose settings and click OK.
Select Lines, Arcs, and/or Polylines to Annotate.
Select Objects: pick entities. Select the group of lines, arcs and/or polylines you want to annotate.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: autoann
Prerequisite: Lines, arcs or polylines to annotate
Custom Label Formatter AD
This command allows you to customize the labeling for lines and polylines. You are rst prompted to select a line
or polyline to label, given the existing defaults currently set. The linework is shown as labeled on the screen. The
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 921
command line, shown below, also offers you an important choice called Options. When you type 'O' for options the
below dialog box appears. In this dialog, there are three columns at the top of the dialog, along with other features.
On the command line, there is also a choice called Format (F), which allows you to enter quick-key style keywords
for quickly changing the label format. See below for these
Row: This column allows you to stack the data in different ways. You can place more than one item in the same
row. If None is selected, then that item will not be displayed.
Side: This column allows you to place each item either inside or outside of the line or polyline.
Order: This column determines the order of items when they are placed in the same row.
General Settings: This button brings you to the Annotate Defaults dialog, see 'Annotate Defaults' for more.
Reset To Defaults: This button restores the default settings shown above.
Load/Save: You may also Load and Save different label congurations with the corresponding buttons.
Prompts
Options/Format/Points/<Select line or polyline>: select entity
Options/Format/Points/<Select line or polyline>: O
Custom Line Label dialog choose your preferences and click OK
You can decide to go into the Option dialog at the start of the command, or after your initial labeling. If you use the
Format command line option, you will be asked to enter the Format command. The choices are:
B = bearing
A = azimuth
G = gon
D = distance
R = next row
= switch side of line
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Angle/Distance
Keyboard Command: annline
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 922
Prerequisite: An arc to label
Draw End Point Leaders
These three commands draw a pair of leaders (crow's feet) at the ends of the line or polyline segment. The segment
can be selected from a line, polyline or pair of points. The leaders are drawn above or below the line or polyline,
or you can pick a side, depending on which Endpoint Leader command is run. The Pick Side command gives you
the ability to place the crow's feet on a selected side of the line or polyline. Controls to customize the look of the
endpoint leaders are accessed through the Annotate Defaults command in the Annotate menu. The Leader Size
Scaler determines the maximum length of the leader. If the line segment is too short, the leader is shortened to
t. The actual length of the leader in drawing units is calculated by multiplying the leader scaler by the drawing
horizontal scale (i.e.. 0.5
*
40=20). The Offset Scaler sets the distance that the leader head is off the line endpoint.
There are four leader styles to choose from: Arc with Arrow, Arc Only, Dash-Dot-Dash and Dashed. Endpoint
leaders can be drawn together with bearing/distance annotation by having the Draw Leaders to Endpoints option on
under Annotate Defaults. This Draw End Point Leaders command allows you to add the leaders as another step.
Prompts
Dene line by [Points/<select line or polyline>]: Select a line or polyline.
If you wish to dene by points, enter ''P'' at this prompt and pick points on the screen, or type in point numbers. If a
coordinate (.CRD) le has not been previously loaded, a dialog will open to allow you to select a coordinate (.CRD)
le to process. While using the Point selection method, the last point picked in the selection is stored in default
brackets. So if you are working around a boundary, simply press enter to accept the defaults for the rst point and
move ahead to the next point.
Arc with Arrow Endpoint Leader
Dashed Endpoint Leader
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: crowft
Prerequisite: None
Dynamic Annotation Note
Bearing and distance annotations can be linked to the linework, such that the annotations will automatically update
if the linework is changed. For example, if a line is moved with the AutoCAD Move command, the bearing label
will update. This link can be found, and toggled on and off, under Object Linking in Congure > General Settings.
Congure is in the Settings menu. The link is established between the label and the line, or polyline, when the label
is created by commands such as Auto Annotate, Line Table or Bearing Distance. There are no links for annotation
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 923
created using the Points option. To update bearing annotation without using the dynamic annotation, use the Global
Reannotate command in the Annotate menu. To remove the links between the annotation and the linework entities,
use the Remove Reactors command, found under File > Drawing Utilities.
Fix Label Overlaps
This command allows you to x label overlaps, where a conict exists, for lines, arcs and polylines. You are
immediately taken to the Avoid Label Overlap dialog. Here you can realign your labels by using a variety of
optional methods. When the setting are to your liking, click OK. The command line then prompts you to select the
entities for which to resolve annotation conicts. Once you have selected your entities and hit Enter, this routine
nds the conicts and xes the label overlaps.
If Slide is selected then the labels will be moved parallel to your linework until they do not overlap. The labels will
not move past the end of the linework or the Max Slide which you determine.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 924
Offset will move your labels perpendicular to your linework as far as you set the Max Offset.
Table will replace your labels with a numbers and create a table of the numbers with the corresponding labels.
If Reorient is selected then the labels will change orientation in the plain view to avoid overlapping.
Flip will ip your label onto the other side of the linework.
Stack will stack or unstack the text of your labels to avoid overlapping.
Move Area Labels will attempt move overlapping area labels to the closest place to the original position that does
not overlap with other labels. The distance between move attempts and the number of move attempts is controlled
by the Interval and Max Move Attempts settings of the Move Area Labels Parameter section.
You can use any combination of these commands by using the add/remove button. You can also determine the order
in which the command tries a method by using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. If a solution is not found by
using the rst method then the next method is used in descending order.
The Overlap Manager can be used to manually check and change label overlaps. If you check on ''View Remaining
Overlaps After Applying Rules'' then any remaining overlaps will be zoomed in on and you will have the ability
with the Overlap Manager to step through and x or ignore the unresolved labels. When the current overlap item
is an area label, only table and move buttons will be enabled as these are the only methods that apply. For line
and curve label overlaps, the buttons for all methods will be enabled. Once a label is moved with the ''Move with
Leader'', only Table, Default and ''Move with Leader'' will be enabled. The Default button can be used to restore the
label back to its original state.
When View Last Overlap File is checked, the Overlap Manager will return to the previous labels that were under
review.
When Skip Resolved Overlaps is unchecked, the Overlap Manager will display all the labels that were moved by
the command as a nal check to you.
Restore Original Zoom will restore the zoom you were previously at before running the command.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 925
Prompts
Select Lines, Arcs, and/or Polylines for which to resolve annotation conicts:
Select objects: select entities
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: annconf
Prerequisite: Annotation conicts
Switch Bearing/Azimuth Quadrant
This command switches the Bearing quadrant label or adds 180 to an Azimuth label. For example, N9032'16''E
would be replaced with S9032'16''W or AZ 7817'18'' would be replaced with AZ 25817'18''. This routine changes
bearing text to read as if the bearing were in the opposite direction.
Prompts
Pick Bearing or AzimuthText: pick text
Pick Bearing or Azimuth Text: press Enter to end
Examples of switch bearing/azimuth quadrant
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 926
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Flip Labels
Keyboard Command: brgquad
Prerequisite: bearing or azimuth label
Mirror Selected Labels
This command rotates a group of text 180 degrees and maintains the same text position. Use this command to rotate
any text. Ignores all entities in the selection set except text.
Before Mirror Labels
After Mirror Labels
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Flip Labels
Keyboard Command: ipset
Prerequisite: Text to rotate
Mirror and Flip Selected Labels
This command mirrors the label to the other side of the labeled segment. At the new location, it then ips the label
back to its original orientation. Use this command to manipulate any text. It ignores all entities in the selection set
except text.
Before Mirror & Flip Labels
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 927
After Mirror & Flip Labels
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Flip Labels >
Keyboard Command: MFLIP LABELS
Prerequisite: Text to rotate
Flip Last Label
This command ips the last text drawn 180 degrees. Use this command to rotate your last annotation.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Flip Labels
Keyboard Command: ip
Prerequisite: Text to ip
Flip ON/OFF
When activated, the bearing and distance text will be rotated 180 degrees when drawn.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Flip Labels
Keyboard Command: p
Prerequisite: None
Move Label with Leader
This command allows the user to make a leader label out of a selected angle/distance label.
Prompts:
Select Label to Move (O for Options,R for Restore): pick an angle or distance label.
Pick end point for move: pick the end point of the move (end of leader).
Select another Label to Move (O for Options,R for Restore,Enter to End): pick another angle or distance label
if desired.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 928
Before Move
While moving the label, the user is shown where the leader and label will be drawn
After Move is Completed
Select Label to Move (O for Options,R for Restore): O
When Options is chosen the ''Move Label With Leader Options'' dialog allows the user to customizer the leader and
label drawing settings:
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 929
Minimum Leader Length Scaler: If the distance of the move is less than this value, a leader will not be drawn.
Draw Horizontal Leader Tick: When checked, a horizontal leader tick will be drawn from the end of the leader
towards the annotation.
Leader Offset Scaler: This is used to set the distance from the end of the leader and the annotation.
Use Separate Leader Layer: This allows the user to place the leader on a separate layer from the annotation.
Align Label to Linework: When selected the orientation of the label will be parallel to the linework. Otherwise
the label is orientated horizontally.
NOTE: The leader scaler units (Minimum Leader Length Scaler and Leader Offset Scaler) are multiplied by the
current horizontal scale value, which was set in the auto annotation dialog.
Select Label to Move (O for Options,R for Restore): R
Select Label to Restore: pick an angle or distance label that had been moved with the ''Move with Leader''
command previously.
The selected label will be restored to its previous state.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate with Leader
Keyboard Command: annlead
Prerequisite: Angle or distance label to move.
Bearing with Leader
This command places the bearing of a line or polyline segment at a point, then plots a user specied leader line to
point to the dening line or polyline. There is the ability for multi-segment leaders, and the option to align the label
horizontal to the current view or parallel to the linework.
Prompts
Options/Points/<Select line or polyline>: select entity
Pick point to start leader: pick a point near the entity
Label Position: pick a pointSelect the point where to place the label.
Options/Points/<Select line or polyline>: O
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 930
When Options (O) is chosen
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate with Leader
Keyboard Command: brglead
Prerequisite: None
Distance with Leader
This command labels the distance of a line or polyline segment at a point then draws a user specied leader line to
point to the dening line. There is the ability for multi-segment leaders, and the option to align the label horizontal
to the current view or parallel to the linework.
Prompts
Dene distance by, Points/<Select line or polyline>: select a line
Pick point to start leader: pick a point near the line
Label Position: pick a point
Dene distance by, Points/<select line or polyline>: press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate with Leader
Keyboard Command: distlead
Prerequisite: None
Bearing-Distance with Leader
This command places the bearing and distance of a line or polyline at a point and then plots a user specied leader
line which points to the dening line or polyline. There is the ability for multi-segment leaders and the option to
align the label horizontal to the current view or parallel to the linework.
Prompts
Options/Points/<Select line or polyline>: select entity
Pick point to start leader: pick a point near the entity
Label Position: pick a pointSelect the point where to place the label.
Options/Points/<Select line or polyline>: O
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 931
When Options (O) is chosen
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate with Leader
Keyboard Command: bdlead
Prerequisite: None
Distance-Bearing with Leader
This command labels the distance and bearing of a line at the end of a user-specied leader which points to the
dening line. The line can be specied by two points or by selecting a line or polyline entity. There is the ability for
multi-segment leaders and the option to align the label horizontal to the current view or parallel to the linework.
Prompts
Options/Points/<Select line or polyline>: select entity
Pick point to start leader: pick a point near the entity
Label Position: pick a pointSelect the point where to place the label.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate with Leader
Keyboard Command: dblead
Prerequisite: None
Azimuth-Distance with Leader
This command places the azimuth and distance label of a line or polyline at a point, and then plots a user specied
leader line which points to the dening line or polyline. There is the ability for multi-segment leaders and the option
to align the label horizontal to the current view or parallel to the linework.
Prompts
Options/Points/<Select line or polyline>: pick entity
Pick point to start leader: pick point
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 932
Label Position: pick location
Options/Points/<Select line or polyline>: O
Label Leader Settings dialog make selection
When Options (O) is chosen
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate with Leader
Keyboard Command: azilead
Prerequisite: None
Flip Selected Labels
This command rotates a group of text 180 degrees. Use this command to rotate any text. The command ignores all
entities in the selection set except text.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Flip Labels
Keyboard Command: ip labels
Prerequisite: Text to rotate
Global Reannotate
This command updates bearing and/or azimuth labels for when the lines and polylines associated with the labels
have been rotated after the bearings and/or azimuths were labeled.
Prompts
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 933
Select One Bearing/Azimuth Text Before Rotation: pick a bearing or azimuth label
Pick line associated with old bearing/azimuth: pick the line or polyline for the selected label
Select All or specic objects to reannotate (<All/Objects)? press Enter to update all text
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: globalre
Prerequisite: Bearing or azimuth labels and lines or polylines
Survey Text Defaults
This dialog box routine sets up the defaults for the Building Dimensions, Offset Dimensions and Adjoiner Text
commands.
Building Dimensions allows you to set text specications for building dimensions.
Layer: Allows you to set the layer for the building text.
Text Style: Allows you to set the text style for the building text.
Text Size Scaler: This value multiplied by the horizontal scale determines the actual text size.
Decimal Places: Allows you to set the display precision for the building dimensions. The AutoCAD Units option
sets the decimals to match the current drawing precision (LUPREC system variable).
Drop Trailing Zeros: Allows you to truncate trailing zeros from dimensions.
Characters To Append: Allows you to set characters to add to reported dimensions.
Offset From Line: Allows you to set the offset distance from the line to the dimension text.
Auto Label Closed Pline allows you to choose between automatically labeling the Interior or Exterior or closed
polylines. You may also choose none.
Offset Dimension Text allows you to set text specications for offset dimensions.
Layer: This option allows you to set the layer for the offset text.
Text Style: This option allows you to set the text style for the offset text.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 934
Text Size Scaler: This value multiplied by the horizontal scale determines the actual text size.
Arrow Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the arrow scaler to determine arrowhead size.
Decimal Places: This option allows you to set the precision for the offset dimensions. The AutoCAD Units option
sets the decimals to match the current drawing precision (LUPREC system variable).
Drop Trailing Zeros: This option allows you to truncate trailing zeros from dimensions.
Label as Feet and Inches: This option allows you to use feet and inches.
Characters To Append: This option allows you to set characters to add to reported dimensions.
Offset From Line: This option allows you to set the offset distance from the line to the dimension text.
Text Alignment allows you to align text either parallel to the line or horizontally in the drawing.
Position allows you to determine if you are to pick the location of the text, or if the text is automatically positioned
in the drawing.
Adjoiner Text allows you to set text specications for adjoiner text.
Layer: Allows you to set the layer for the adjoiner text.
Text Style: Allows you to set the text style for the adjoiner text.
Text Size Scaler: Allows you to set the text scaler to determine text size.
Justication: Allows you to set the text justication. See the AutoCAD Reference Manual for details on each
justication choice.
Dimension Line Type allows you to determine the line style to use for dimensions.
Single Arrow Line: Draws a line with an arrowhead from the dimension text to the gure.
Dual Arrows Line: Draws dual arrowhead.
Standard Line: Draws a line with no arrowhead from the dimension text to the gure.
Curved Leaders: Draws a curved line with an arrowhead from the dimension text to the gure.
Dimension Only: Draws the dimension text with no line.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Survey Text
Keyboard Command: svtextdf
Prerequisite: None
Offset Dimensions
This command labels the perpendicular distance between a point and a line or polyline. The point can be a building
corner or other object. The endpoint snap is on by default for picking this point, although you may choose another
snap mode manually. There is also an option for arrow only on end of line. The text layer, size, style and the
dimensioning method are set in the Survey Text Defaults command, found in Settings >Congure >Survey Settings.
Prompts
[end on] Pick Bldg/Object Corner: pick a point
Pick Line To Offset From: pick a line or polyline
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 935
Offset Dimensions showing perpendicular distances from corners to property lines
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Survey Text
Keyboard Command: dimentxt
Prerequisite: Line or polyline
Building Dimensions
This command labels the length of line and polyline segments. The label is located in the middle of the line or
polyline segment. The options for Building Dimensions are set in the Survey Text Defaults dialog. This dialog is
found in Settings > Congure > Survey Settings. One option in Survey Text Defaults labels all the segments of a
closed polyline with one pick of the polyline. Otherwise, the procedure is to pick a line or polyline segment and
then choose an alignment. Depending where the alignment point is picked, the label is drawn either perpendicular
or parallel, above or below the line.
Prompts
Pick Line or Polyline: pick line or polyline segment to label
Pick Alignment: pick point as shown
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Survey Text
Keyboard Command: bldgtext
Prerequisite: Line or polyline
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 936
Adjoiner Text
This command draws text that is aligned with the selected line or polyline segment. The layer, style, size and
justication for the text is set in the Survey Text Defaults command, found in Settings > Congure > Survey
Settings. To align text that is already drawn, use the Rotate Text command found in the Edit menu.
Prompts
Pick Line or Polyline: pick a line or polyline for alignment
Starting point: pick a point to start the text
Text: MAIN STREET
Adjoiner Text aligns text with a line or polyline
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Survey Text
Keyboard Command: adjntext
Prerequisite: Line or polyline
Draw Grid
This command will plot a plan view grid at a user specied distance and optionally label the northing and easting
coordinates of the grid. This command takes in consideration the current screen twist angle in which case it prompts
for three corner points. After selecting the corner points the dialog below will appear. The title block is assumed
right justied to the lower right corner of the grid denition points. After changing any of the settings select the OK
button to plot the grid.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 937
Grid Interval: The distance between each grid line.
Horizontal Scale: Reports the scale of the current drawing. This can also be set using the Drawing Setup command
in the Settings menu.
Grid Format: The Ticks Only option will draw tick marks instead of grid lines. Selecting the Ticks Only option
activates the Tick Size option for sizing the tick marks. There is also a Full Grid and Perimeter option.
Layout of Ticks: This option places the ticks throughout the interior of the grid work or just on the perimeter of the
grid boundary.
Use '-' for Negative Coordinates: This option labels the negative grid coordinates with a '-'.
Label Grid: Selecting this Grid Text Setting option labels the grid coordinates.
Use Split Coordinates Layout: Puts the thousands digits above the grid line and the hundreds digits below the grid
line
Text Size Scaler: This scaler, multiplied by the Horizontal Scale, determines text size.
Offset Scaler: This scaler, multiplied by the Horizontal Scale, determines the offset for text.
Avoid Title Block Area: This Title Block Exclusion option will allow you to not draw grid lines or tick marks in
the title block area. It is for making sure that the grid does not overwrite the title block.
Pick Title Block Corner: This option prompts you to pick the corner of the title block to determine where the grid
lines and ticks will be omitted.
X Dimension Scaler: This is the horizontal dimension of the title block. This option is automatically lled in when
the Pick Title Block Corner option is selected.
Y Dimension Scaler: This is the vertical dimension of the title block. This option is automatically lled in when
the Pick Title Block Corner option is selected.
Label Prex North: This option is for assigning a prex to the northing grid line and tick mark coordinates.
Label Prex East: This option is for assigning a prex to the easting grid line and tick mark coordinates.
Prompts
Pick or Type Lower Left Corner Point: endp of (pick point)
Pick or Type Upper Right Corner Point: endp of (pick point) Select the corners of your border in which you want
the grid plotted.
Draw Plan View Grid Dialog
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 938
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: dgrid
Prerequisite: None
Stack Label Arc
This command draws a small table of curve data. Unlike the command Label Arc, instead of tting the text on the
arc, this command lines the data up in rows. The command prompts to select an arc, dene the arc by three points,
or type O for Option to display the dialog shown here. For each type of arc value, you can specify the label and
the sequence number. Under Label Options, the Stack Label Arc data table will display the values in the order by
sequence number. There are also settings to justify label left or right.
Under Label Options, the data table will display the values in order based upon sequence number.
Arc Length: Select a label prex and a sequence number.
Radius: Select a label prex and a sequence number.
Delta Angle: Select a label prex and a sequence number.
Chord Angle: Select a label prex and a sequence number.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 939
Chord Length: Select a label prex and a sequence number.
Tangent: Select a label prex and a sequence number.
Degree of Curve: Select a label prex and a sequence number.
External: Select a label prex and a sequence number.
Radial Bearing-In/Out: Select a label prex and a sequence number.
Label Chord Angles in allows you to set how the chord and radial angles are labeled as azimuth, bearing or gon.
Label Curve Angles in allows you to set how the delta angle and degree of curve are labeled as de-
gree/minute/second or gon.
TheType of Curve option determines the type of curve.
Roadway: The length is determined as the true length of the curve.
Railroad: The length is adjusted based on 100-foot chord segments.
Flip Labels controls whether the text is drawn upside down in the current twist screen view.
The Use symbol for Delta Angle option uses a delta triangle symbol for the prex.
Draw Leader Horizontal Tick draws a short horizontal line at the label end of the leader.
Align Text With Chord sets the angle of the text to match the chord angle. Otherwise, the text is draw horizontal
to the current twist screen.
Justify sets the alignment for the text as left, center or right.
General Settings shows Annotation Defaults which has settings such as Text Size Scaler which apply to this
routine.
Reset To Defaults puts the settings back to built-in defaults.
Load and Save functions store and recall the settings to an .ANS le. This is a way to share a label style with others
or manage different styles.
Prompts
Options/Points/<Select arc>: P The P option causes the command to prompt for points on the arc. This can be
useful for labeling sub-arcs such as lot corners of a cul-de-sac.
Pick point or point number for Endpoint of arc: pick a point
Pick point or point number for Radius: pick a point
Pick point or point number for Other Endpoint: pick a point
Direction of curve [Left/<Right>]? press Enter for right
Pick stack label point (Enter for none): pick a point
Pick point to start leader at ([Enter] for none): pick a point
To point: pick a point
Options/Points/<Select arc> (Enter to end): press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate Arc
Keyboard Command: slabarc
Prerequisite: an arc entity or arc points
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 940
Draw Legend
This command draws a legend based on a legend denition le. After choosing the legend denition (.LGD) le
to use, a dialog displays the current denitions. The legend denition le consists of descriptions assigned to text,
symbols, linetypes and hatch patterns. The default legend that is included with Carlson is called legend.lgd.
Edit edits a denition, select it and then click on the Edit button. This brings up the Symbol Denition dialog box.
Item Type: Each item can be either a simple text label or a symbol from the drawing.
Text Name: This is the legend label associated with the specied Description.
Symbol Name designates the symbol to draw in the legend. You can either type in the symbol name or choose
it from a slide library by picking the appropriate Select button.
Description is the name of the symbol.
The Hatch Scale and Color options are used if the symbol uses a hatch pattern.
Include in Legend: This option corresponds to the Include column on the Legend Denitions dialog box.
Not all the dened entries need to be drawn. An entry will be drawn (shown as Yes) if the Include in Legend
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 941
box in the Symbol Denition dialog box is checked.
Select Point Symbol: This option displays a slide library of point symbols to choose from.
Select Drawing Linetype: This option displays a linetype name list to choose from.
Select Library Linetype: This option displays a slide library of linetypes to choose from.
Select Hatch Pattern: This option displays a slide library of hatch patterns to choose from.
Add inserts a new denition to the denitions. To insert a new denition, pick an existing denition and click on
the Add button. The new denition is added immediately following the existing denition.
Add from Drawing adds entries to the legend table for each different symbol that is selected from the drawing.
Remove removes the selected denition.
On switches the Include eld in the selected denition to Yes.
Off switches the Include eld in the selected denition to No.
On/Off by Drawing prompts you to select symbols from the drawing. Symbols found will be turned on, all others
will be turned off. This helps you create a legend that includes only symbols found in the drawing.
Description by Field-to-Finish uses the description from the Field-to-Finish code denition for symbols that match
the code symbol.
Sort sorts the denitions alphabetically and numerically.
Draw draws the included denitions as a legend.
Report uses the Report Formatter to make a customized report of the names and descriptions in the legend.
Move Up: This option moves the selected denition up one row. Legend entries are drawn in the order that they are
dened.
Move Down moves the selected denition down one row. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the
order that the symbols will be drawn.
Save saves the legend le as its original le name.
Save As saves the legend le to a new le name.
Exit exits the command back to the drawing window.
Draw opens the Draw Legend dialog.
Text Size sizes the text in the legend. It defaults to the value from Drawing Setup in the Setting menu.
Symbol Size defaults to the value from Drawing Setup in the Settings menu.
Hatch Size sizes the hatch pattern scaler.
Line Size sizes the lines in the legend.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 942
Layer Name denes the layer for the legend.
Draw Legend Title draws the following text ''Legend: These standard symbols will be found in the drawing.''
Prompts
Specify Legend Denition File Dialog choose the le to process
Legend Denitions Dialog
Draw Legend Dialog
Enter or pick upper left point for legend: pick a point
Sample legend created by Draw Legend
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: legend
Prerequisite: None
Draw North Arrow
This command inserts a north arrow symbol. You can select from several styles of arrows, and you can add your
own by using the Edit Library button which is similar to the Symbols Library command. The north arrow symbol
library is stored in the narrow.dta le in the USER folder.
Prompts
Draw North Arrow Dialog choose an arrow symbol, layer and other variables
Specify insertion point: pick a point
X scale factor <1> / Corner / XYZ: press Enter
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 943
Y scale factor (default=X): press Enter
Rotation angle <0d0'0''>: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: narrow
Prerequisite: None
Draw Barscale
This command draws a barscale at the user-specied scale. The command options are set in the dialog shown here.
The Horizontal Scale controls the size and labels for the barscale. For example, enter 50 for 1 inch = 50 feet in
English mode. The Barscale Style chooses between different barscale formats.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 944
Prompts
Draw Barscale options dialog
Pick location for barscale: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: barscale
Prerequisite: None
Create Point Table
This command draws a table of the coordinate data of the points from the current coordinate (.CRD) le using
different methods displayed at the top of the dialog. The command displays the dialog shown below for setting all of
the point table options. At the top of the dialog enter the range of point numbers to label, do a Screen Pick or select
a Point Group(s). You can also specify the order and format of the table columns. If you do not want to include a
data type, set the Sequence number to blank. The Northing/Easting Format can be set to Degress/Minutes/Seconds
for when the coordinate le contains latitude and longitude. The Max Rows Per Column setting makes the program
start a new table when the specied max points is reached.
Prompts
Point Table Generator Dialog
Building Data List ... Done.
Table Upper Left Corner: pick a point
Generating Table... Done.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 945
Typical Point Table
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Point Table
Keyboard Command: pointtbl
Prerequisite: A coordinate (.CRD) le
Update Point Table
This command prompts you to select an existing point table. The program then reads the settings from this table
and displays these settings in the same dialog used in Create Point Table. You can change any of the table format
options. The program will also update the table to reect any changes to the coordinate (.CRD) le.
Prompts
Select existing point table: pick anywhere on the point table or select points from the screen
Point Table Generator Dialog
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Point Table
Keyboard Command: pointtblupd
Prerequisite: An existing point table, .CRD le
Table Defaults
This command sets the format for line and curve tables. Line and curve tables are commonly used in situations
where:
1. The amount of line/curve annotation in the drawing itself makes the drawing look too ''cluttered,'' and/or
2. The length(s) of the line(s)/curve(s) are too short for the annotation label being placed
You specify the label and table attributes in the Line/Curve Table Defaults dialog:
Label Text Layer: Click the Set button or specify the layer of the annotation which is applied to the line/curve
itself.
Label Text Style: Click the Set button or specify the text style of the annotation which is applied to the line/curve
itself.
Label Text Size: Specify the text size of the annotation which is applied to the line/curve itself.
Line Label Prex: Specify a prex which should be inserted prior to each line number. The prex can be an
alpha-numeric string.
Line Table Title: Specify a caption for the line table.
Table Text Layer: Click the Set button or specify the layer of the annotation which is inserted to the line/curve
table.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 946
Table Text Style: Click the Set button or specify the text style of the annotation which is inserted to the line/curve
table.
Table Text Size: Specify the text size of the annotation which is inserted to the line/curve table.
Row Height Factor: Indicate a positive, non-zero multiplier of the Table Text Size to help adjust spacing for each
row in the table.
Curve Label Prex: Specify a prex which should be inserted prior to each curve number. The prex can be an
alpha-numeric string.
Curve Table Title: Specify a caption for the curve table.
Set Line Table Labels: See the expanded Set Line Table Labels section below.
Set Curve Table Labels: See the expanded Set Curve Table Labels section below.
Prompt for Label Location: When enabled, this option prompts you to pick the location for the label placed onto
the line/curve itself. If this is disabled, the location is chosen automatically.
Label Symbol: Select a geometric shape that is placed around the label that is applied to the line/curve itself.
Line Table Distance: Indicate how distances for the lines are reported:
Horizontal: The distance displayed is only the horizontal distance, even if the selected entity has different
''Z'' values at either end of the line.
Slope: The distance measured is the slope distance, used mostly for 3D polylines to get their true length.
Label Angles in: Indicate how the line direction is labeled:
Azimuth: The angles are reported as azimuths.
Bearings: The angles are reported as bearings.
Gons: The angles are reported as gons.
Automatic Table Update: Indicate if labels in the table should be re-sequenced:
On: This option renumbers the other table entries and the associated labels in the drawing if a new (but
previously used number) is specied for the table. For example, if a line table contained lines #1-5 and a line
#4 was added, the new line #4 would be inserted into the table and the previous lines #4 and #5 would be
updated to #5 and #6. The L4 and L5 labels on the lines would also be updated to L5 and L6.
Off: You must manually pick the entry location and update the labels.
Label Alignment: Indicate the method by which the label is oriented on the line/curve itself:
Horizontal: This option places the label horizontal to the current screen alignment, as dened by the various
Twist Screen commands (Standard, Line, Polyline or Text, Surveyor or Restore Due North).
Parallel: This option will orient the label parallel to the line or curve chord.
Use Table Entity: When enabled, Line and Curve Tables can be further manipulated with the Split Table, Merge
Tables and Edit Table Values commands.
Combine Equal Rows: When enabled, lines or curves that share identical geometry with other lines and curves can
assume the number of the equivalent line/curve. As an example, if a line 100 feet long on a bearing of N 9000'00''
E is assigned a label of L3 and additional lines with this geometry are labeled, you will have the option of re-using
the L3 label for these additional lines. In other words, a single label reference in the table can correlate to many
identical entities in the drawing and can keep the overall length of the line/curve table to a minimum.
Display First Row with Table Reference: When enabled, an additional reference item from the Line/Curve Table
will be placed alongside the label number assigned to the line/curve itself.
Curve Options: Indicate the order in which curve labels shall be inserted into the curve table. Entries left blank
(empty) will not be listed in the curve table.
Load: Loads a previously saved collection of Line/Curve Table Default values (
*
.LCT) into memory.
Save: Saves the current Line/Curve Table Default values to a
*
.LCT le.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 947
Selecting the Set Line Table Labels option allows you to control the label, column width, text justication and
displayed precision for the options selected in the Line Table Distance and Label Angles In controls.
With the above settings, you might nd the Line Table more aesthetically pleasing as it produces the following
example:
The prex exibility and the fact that the text used for the column header can be changed, means that line and curve
tables can be plotted in any language. For example, in Puerto Rico survey plats are typically submitted in bearings,
in meters and in Spanish. For that location, the table could be recongured as shown here:
This would lead to the following line table (see the Notes section below for additional information):
Essentially identical to the Set Line Table Labels command, the Set Curve Table Labels command allows you
to control the label, column width, text justication and displayed precision for the options selected in the Curve
Options control.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 948
Note:
Changing the distance sufx to ''m'' (or omitting any sufx by making it blank) is accomplished in the more
general command of Annotate Defaults.
Reporting distance units in a unit of measure different from that of the current project is accomplished via the
Drawing Setup Report Distance Scale Factor option and the Annotate Defaults command.
Physical changes to the lines/curves will trigger label updates if the Link Labels with Linework option (if
available) is enabled under Carlson Congure General Settings.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Annotate Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: tdef
Prerequisite: None
Table Header
This command draws the column header labels for the Curve Table and Line Table commands. When prompted for
the starting point, the user may enter a coordinate or pick a point on the screen. The starting point location that the
curve or line table command defaults to is one row below the start of the header labels.
Curve table header (C option)
Prompts
Type of table [Line/<Curve>]? C
Starting point of Curve table text <(6585.0 -704.0 0.0)>: pick point
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: tabhead
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 949
Set Table Position
This command sets the position for adding line table entries. The next line table rows will start from this point. To
add to an existing table, pick a point at the lower left of the existing table.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: set tbl
Prerequisite: None
Curve Table
This command will compute curve data and draw it in tabular form using the settings specied in Table Defaults.
The program computes the curve data from an arc entity, an arc segment of a polyline or from specied points on
an arc. The curve data includes radius, length of curve, chord length, chord bearing, tangent and delta or included
angle. The current curve table numbers are remembered between drawings. The user is prompted for curve number
(default is sequential starting with 1) and the starting point of the table. The curve is labeled with a C#, where #
is the sequential curve number. After picking the starting point of the table, the placement point for the other table
entries will default to the next position and you can just press Enter unless you want to relocate the table. The Auto
Annotate command can also create curve tables. Use the Table Header command to draw the column header of the
curve data names.
Prompts
Dene arc by, Points/<Select arc or polyline>: pick an arc
Enter curve number <1>: press Enter
Starting point of curve table text <(5000,5000)>: pick a point in a clear area of the drawing
Dene arc by, Points/<Select arc or polyline>: pick another arc
Enter curve number <2>: press Enter
Starting point of curve table text <(4030,4490)>: press Enter to use next position
Dene arc by, Points/<Select arc or polyline>: press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: arctabl
Prerequisite: None
Line Table
This command will compute line data and draw it in tabular form, using the settings specied in Table Defaults.
The program computes the bearing and distance from a line, polyline segment or between points. The current line
table numbers are remembered between drawings. The line is labeled with a L#, where # is the sequential number
of the line picked. The bearing and distance will then be drawn in tabular form similar to the previous Curve Table
command. The Auto Annotate command can also create line tables. Use the Table Header command to draw the
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 950
column header of the line data names.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: linetabl
Prerequisite: None
Railroad Curve Table
This command is exactly like Curve Table, except the curve data is calculated for Railroad curves. See the Curve
Table command for more details.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: rr curvetbl
Prerequisite: None
Edit Table Properties
This command allows the user to edit the properties of an entity based line or curve table.
Prompts
Select a line or curve table to modify: pick an entity based line or curve table.
If the table is not an entity based line or curve table the message ''Error: You did not select an Entity based
line or curve table.'' is displayed and control is returned to the previous prompt.
After picking an entity based line or curve table the Line/Curve Table Defaults dialog will be displayed.
Here you can change the settings of the selected table. Change the settings for either line or curve tables depending
upon the type of table selected. The changes will be reected once the user selects the OK button.
Text Layer and Text Style determine the layer and style of the line/curve table text. The distance for line
tables can be labeled in horizontal or slope distance. The Automatic Table Update option will automatically insert
the entry into the line or curve table. The auto update will renumber the other table entries and the associated labels
in the drawing. For example, if a line table had lines #1-5 and a line #4 was added, then the new line #4 would be
inserted into the table and the previous lines #4 and #5 would be updated to #5 and #6. The L4 and L5 labels on the
lines would also be updated to L5 and L6. Without the automatic update option, the entry location must be picked
and the labels updated manually. The Label Alignment determines the orientation of the L# or C# that is labeled on
the line or curve. Horizontal will make the label horizontal to the current twist screen and Parallel will draw the
label parallel with the line or curve chord. The Line and Curve Label Prex sets the text before the number that is
drawn in the table and on the line or curve (i.e. ''L3'' or ''Line3''). The Curve Options species which curve data to
include in the table and the order. You specify the label and table attributes in the Line/Curve Table Defaults dialog.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 951
Label Text Layer: determines the layer of the line/curve text.
Label Text Style: determines the style of the line/curve text.
Label Text Size: determines the size of the line/curve text.
Line Label Prex: determines the prex for each line.
Line Table Title: draws a title row at the top of the line table with this string.
Table Text Layer: determines the layer of the line/curve table text.
Table Text Style: determines the style of the line/curve table text.
Table Text Size: determines the size of the line/curve table text.
Curve Label Prex: determines the prex for each curve.
Curve Table Title: draws a title row at the top of the curve table with this string.
Prompt for Label Location: prompts you to pick the location to label each line or curve. If this is not selected, the
location is chosen automatically.
Under Line Table Distance, the method for measuring distance is specied.
Horizontal: The distance measured is only horizontal, even if the line is a 3D polyline.
Slope: The distance measured is the slope distance, used mostly for 3D polylines to get their true length.
Under Label Angles in, the type of angle is selected.
Azimuths: The angles are reported as azimuth.
Bearings: The angles are reported as bearings.
Gons: The angles are reported as gons.
Under Automatic Table Update, the option automatically inserts the entry into the line or curve table. The auto
update renumbers the other table entries and the associated labels in the drawing. For example, if a line table
contained lines #1-5 and a line #4 was added, then the new line #4 would be inserted into the table, and the previous
lines #4 and #5 would be updated to #5 and #6. The L4 and L5 labels on the lines would also be updated to L5 and
L6. If you set the Automatic Table Update to Off, you must manually pick the entry location and update the labels.
If Automatic Table Update is set to On, the table is updated automatically whenever the line is modied.
Label Alignment determines the orientation of the L# or C# that is labeled on the line or curve. Horizontal will
make the label horizontal to the current screen alignment, Parallel will draw the label parallel to the line or curve
chord. Under Curve Options, you specify which curve data to include in the table and the order.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 952
Use Table Entity: will use single block for the whole table. Otherwise, each row is a separate block.
Combine Equal Rows: will use the same line or curve number when the data exactly matches an existing row in
the table. For example, if two line segments have the same bearing and distance, then they would both get the same
line# (ie. ''L5'').
Display First Row With Table Reference: When there is room on the line or arc, this option will label both the
number and the rst column data value from the table on the line or arc. For example, if the rst curve table column
is for radius and the arc length is big enough to t the label, then the program would label both the curve # and the
radius (ie. ''C5 R=100.0'').
Selecting ''Set Line Table Labels'' will lead you to the Line Table controls, as ''Set Curve Table Labels'' (see graphic
at end of this command page) leads to the Curve Table controls. For elds that apply to the Report Scale Factor
from Drawing Setup, there is a second Scaled Label name for the table header. This scale factor can be used for
reporting both grid and ground or both english and metric distances. The options in ''Set Line Table Labels'' are
shown below:
With the above settings, for example, the Line Table appears as shown below. For improved ''aesthetics'', you might
prefer to change the Bearing justication to ''Center'', for example.
To save space, you can reduce the size of the ''Distance'' column from 11.5 to 10. Note that using the Line Label
Prex option, L1 and L2, for example, can read Line1 and Line2, and for that, you may want to expand the
''Width'' setting for the Line column. The prex exibility, and the fact that the text used for the column header
can be changed, means that line tables and curve tables can be plotted in any language. In Puerto Rico, for
example, surveys are typically conducted in bearings, in meters and in Spanish. For that location, the table could be
recongured as shown here:
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 953
This would lead to the following line table:
Note that changing the distance sufx to ''m'' (or omitting any sufx by making it blank) is accomplished in the
more general command Annotation Defaults.
Finally, below we see the dialog that appears when you choose Set Curve Table Labels.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: tabedit
Prerequisite: An entity based line or curve table.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 954
Delete Table Elements
This command erases rows from line or curve tables. The table entries following the removed rows are automatically
repositioned and renumbered. The line or curve labels on the linework in the drawing are also updated.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: del tbl
Prerequisite: Line or curve tables
Edit Table Values
The Edit Table Values permits the modication of any of the text labels found within a Line or Curve table created
with the Use Table Entity option enabled under Line/Curve Table Defaults. This is commonly desired when subtle
adjusts are desired on the content within a Line/Curve table.
Add: Adds a blank line to the end of the spreadsheet control.
Insert: Inserts a blank line immediately preceding the currently selected line in the spreadsheet control.
Delete: Removes the currently selected line from the spreadsheet control.
Report: Sends the current content of the spreadsheet control to the Standard Report Viewer.
Save As: Exports the current content of the spreadsheet control to an XLS le compatible with most spreadsheet
applications, including Microsoft Excel.
Through the use of the Insert and Delete commands along with standard Windows Copy (Ctrl+C) and Paste (Ctrl+V)
functionality, it is possible to return the list above into a normal-order list as illustrated below:
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 955
Note:
Changes to the direction or length values DO NOT change the direction or length of the corresponding line
or curve entity in the drawing!
Prompts
Select an entity table to modify: Graphically select any portion of a table that is to be edited
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Annotate Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: edittbl
Prerequisite: A line or curve table created with the Use Table Entity option enabled under Line/Curve Table De-
faults
Split Table
The Split Table command allows you to break a Line or Curve table created with the Use Table Entity option
enabled under Line/Curve Table Defaults. This is commonly desired when a table is too lengthy to t in its entirety
on a plat. Splitting the table into two or more smaller tables allows the tables to be independently positioned on the
plat. For example:
Becomes:
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 956
Note:
In the example above, the initial table was rst split at ''L2'' and then again at ''L3''.
Split tables can be re-assembled through the use of the Merge Tables command.
Prompts
Select row of table to perform split on: Graphically select the last row of the table that is to be retained in the
original table
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Annotate Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: splittbl
Prerequisite: A line or curve table created with the Use Table Entity option enabled under Line/Curve Table De-
faults
Merge Tables
The Merge Tables command allows you to combine two Line tables or two Curve tables into a single table. Both ta-
bles in the merge must have been created with the Use Table Entity option enabled under Line/Curve Table Defaults.
For example:
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 957
Can become:
Note:
In the example above, table ''L1'' was merged with table ''L4'' and then the modied ''L1'' table was merged
with table ''L3''.
Table numbers can be re-ordered through the use of the Edit Table Values command.
Prompts
Select rst table of merge: Graphically select the rst of two tables that should be combined together
Select second table of merge: Graphically select the second of two tables that should be combined together
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Annotate Line/Curve Table
Keyboard Command: splittbl
Prerequisite: Two or more line or curve table created with the Use Table Entity option enabled under Line/Curve
Table Defaults. Each table in the merge must contain the same number of columns as the other table.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 958
Label Arc
This command labels the arc data along the arc between the endpoints of the arc. The curve information is also
displayed. The format for the label is set in the dialog shown here. For each arc data value, you can specify the
label, the row number, and the side of the arc it will appear on. If a row number is left blank, then that value is not
labeled. There is a choice of labeling inside or outside of the arc. Annotation is drawn as a block. The advantage of
this is that the characters, rather than being individual entities, are plotted as a single entity that can be moved and
edited as a unit. You would need to explode the ''blocked'' text in order to edit the text. A toggle button determines
whether the user wants to ip the text on arcs that open to the top of the drawing.
Prompts
Dene arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: select arc
After selecting the arc or polyline arc segment the command displays the dialog below. Select the OK button and
the arc is labeled with the current settings of the dialog.
Examples of Label Arc (above and below)
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 959
Example of Stack Label Arc
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate Arc
Keyboard Command: labarc
Prerequisite: Arc or polyline should be drawn before execution
Custom Label Formatter
This command allows you to customize the labeling for arcs. You are rst prompted to select an arc to label, given
the existing defaults currently set. The arc is shown as labeled on the screen. The command line, shown below, also
offers you an important choice called Options. When you type 'O' for options the below dialog box appears. There
are four columns at the top of the dialog along by other features.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 960
Label: This rst column allows you to set the prex that will go before your arc data.
Row: This column allows you to stack the data in different ways. You can place more than one item in the same
row. If None is selected then that item will not be displayed.
Side: This column allows you to place each item either inside or outside of the arc.
Order: This column determines the order of items when they are placed in the same row.
Flip Text on Arcs that Open to the North: When this is checked text will be orientated according to the open side
of your arcs instead of being orientated according to the plain view.
Use Symbol for Delta Angle Label: Allows you to use the triangle symbol for delta as the label instead of plain
alphabetic or numeric representation.
General Settings: This button brings you to the Annotate Defaults dialog, see 'Annotate Defaults' for more.
Reset To Defaults: This button restores the default settings shown above.
Load/Save: You may also Load and Save different label congurations with the corresponding buttons.
Prompts
Options/<Select arc>: select entity
Options/<Select arc>: O
Custom Arc Label dialog choose your preferences and click OK
You can decide to go into the Option dialog at the start of the command and after your initial labeling.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate Arc
Keyboard Command: annarc
Prerequisite: An arc to label
Draw Text On Arc
This command draws text that aligns with an arc or polyline arc segment. Each letter of the text is drawn as a
separate text entity that is rotated to align with the arc at that point. These text letters are automatically grouped
together as an anonymous block. This command starts with the Create Text on Arc dialog. This command draws
text that aligns with an arc, beginning at a picked point. Each letter of the text is drawn as a separate text entity that
is rotated to align with the arc. These text letters are automatically grouped together as a block. The text string, text
height, and text style are set in the Create Text on Arc dialog box.
Text String: Specify the text to label on the arc.
Text Height: Specify the text height. The default value is obtained from the text height specied in Drawing Setup.
The value set here is retained throughout the drawing session.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 961
Text Style: Choose an existing text style from the list of dened styles.
Select text offset on screen: When checked, the program will prompt you for offset. You can set the text offset
from the arc by graphically picking the offset point on the screen. When this option is not checked, the Text Offset
eld described below becomes available to specify a known offset distance.
Text Offset: If the above setting is not selected, specify the Text Offset here. A positive value denotes an offset
distance inside the arc, while a negative value denotes an offset distance outside the arc.
Is base of text towards radius point?: This option determines whether the base of the text should face the radius
point of the arc. It orients the text to the curve. Examples showing the results of different settings follow.
Example 1 - Offset distance specied on screen and base of text away from radius point.
Select Arc or Polyline segment: pick Arc or Polyline segment to place text on.
Select Text Offset: pick the desired offset distance from arc
Select Text Placement: pick a point, select the desired position to draw the text. Note that the text remains visible
on the screen and attached to the ''rubber banding cursor''so that various positions can be inspected before specifying
the placement point. The graphic below shows this aspect of the command.
Note that the ghosted text is located along the mid point of the arc. If no offset distance is specied or picked from
the screen, the text will be placed at this point. An offset of zero puts the text directly on the arc.
Example 2 - Offset distance specied in dialog and base of text towards radius point.
Select Arc or Polyline Arc Segment: pick Arc
Select Text Placement: pick point
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 962
Note that the prompt for offset distance was skipped because the offset distance was input on the dialog box. Simply
select the text placement point resulting in the graphic below.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate Arc
Keyboard Command: textarc
Prerequisite: An arc entity
Draw Text on Tangent
This command is identical to Draw Text on Arc, except that the text is not curved to t the arc. You are presented
with this dialog box. Fill in the text, decide on the other options, click OK, and then follow the prompts.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate Arc
Keyboard Command: textarctan
Prerequisite: Arc or polyline arc segment
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 963
Edit Text on Arc or Tangent
This command allows you to edit text created by the Draw Text on Arc or Draw Text on Tangent command. You
can change the text string, text height and text style. The program prompts you to select the Text on Arc entity, then
displays the same dialog used in Draw Text on Arc.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate Arc
Keyboard Command: editarctext
Prerequisite: text entity as described above
Fit Text Inside Arc
This command ts text between two points picked along an arc. Text is curved to t the arc using individual text
entities, which can only be edited one at a time. The Draw Text on Arc command creates an text entity that can
be edited using Edit Text on Arc or Tangent. It will optionally display information about the selected arc. If you
choose to display the curve data, you will be prompted to pick the endpoints of the arc in a clockwise manner. When
prompted, enter the text you want drawn inside the arc.
Prompts
Pick points in a clockwise direction.
[nea on] Start Point on arc for text: pick point on arc to start text Notice that the Nearest snap is turned on by
default.
[nea on] End Point on arc for text: pick point on arc to end text Notice that the Nearest snap is turned on by
default.
Enter text for inside of arc: MEADOWVIEW LANE
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate Arc
Keyboard Command: inarc
Prerequisite: An arc entity
Fit Text Outside Arc
Same as the previous command except this command ts text on the outside of the arc.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Annotate Arc
Keyboard Command: OARCT
Prerequisite: An arc entity
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 964
Change Polyline Linetype
This command changes the linetype of polylines or lines to the linetype selected from the dialog. True AutoCAD
linetypes are created and applied to the selected entities, compared to other commands, such as Polyline to Special
Line and Special Line/Entity, which break the polyline into segments. The spacing between linetype symbols and
the symbols size are controlled by the Line Type Spacing and Symbol Size Scaler settings in the dialog. The Gap
Size Scaler controls the size of the break in the line for the linetypes that have a break like UserDef and Arrow B. To
select a linetype from the dialog, pick on the linetype image. Use the Next button to see more linetypes. At the end
of the list of linetypes, there are two special choices. The UserDef choice lets you enter your own text string into a
linetype, and the Wingdings choice lets you insert any Wingdings font character into a linetype. Consult Windows
documentation for a listing of Wingdings characters.
Prompts
Select Linetype dialog select linetype and adjust other variables
Select items to change.
Select objects: pick the polylines
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 965
Linetype styles available using Change Polyline Linetype
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line Types
Keyboard Command: pltype2
Prerequisite: Polylines
Polyline to Special Line
This command converts polylines into special lines by adding the appropriate symbol onto the polyline, such as
railroad, hedge, stonewall or telephone lines. Carlson has dened several line types as shown below. You can create
custom lines by selecting the Other '?' which then prompts you for the text label to use. The size and spacing are set
by the Spacing Scaler and Symbol Size Scaler settings. For some of the linetypes, this routine breaks the polyline
using the Gap Size Scaler in order to t in the symbol. Broken polylines cannot be used by the Area command,
and are difcult to edit.
The Change Polyline Linetype command is another linetype method that creates actual AutoCAD linetypes that are
applied to the selected entities.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 966
Prompts
Select Carlson Linetype dialog
Select the polyline(s) to convert.
Select objects: pick the polylines
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line Types
Keyboard Command: pltype
Prerequisite: Polylines
Polyline to Tree Line
This command changes a polyline into a series of semicircles for representing a tree line.
Prompts
Side for arcs on polyline direction? (<Left>/Right) press Enter
Enter the segment distance <10.0>: press Enter
Select the polylines to convert.
Select objects: pick one or more polylines
Before and After Polyline to Tree Line
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 967
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line Types
Keyboard Command: maketree
Prerequisite: Polyline
Add Zig to Polyline
This command draws a [not-to-scale] style zig to a polyline. First pick the polyline and then pick a position on the
polyline to draw the zig.
Prompts
Zig size <4.0>: press Enter
Select polyline to add zig: pick a polyline
Pick or enter point to add zig: pick a point along the polyline
Select polyline to add zig: press Enter to end
A zig in a polyline
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line Types
Keyboard Command: addzig
Prerequisite: Polyline
Add Culvert to Polyline
This command adds culvert style brackets to both ends of the selected polylines.
Prompts
Culvert symbol size <4.0>: 12
Select polylines to add culvert symbols.
Select objects: pick the polylines
Culvert symbols added to polyline
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line Types
Keyboard Command: drwcvert
Prerequisite: Polyline
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 968
Sketch Tree Line
This command draws a tree line as you move the cursor. At the rst prompt, you can type O for Options and set
the Interval Scaler which controls the spacing of the bubbles. Also at the rst prompt, you can type P for Polyline
and then select an existing polyline to convert into a tree line. At the end, there is an option to ip the side for the
bubbles in case they came out on the opposite side.
The resulting tree line after you pick point to end
Prompts
Pick First Point [Options/Polyline]: pick a point
Sketch treeline (pick point to end): slowly move the cursor and pick a second point to end the routine
Reverse direction [Yes/<No>]? press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line Types
Keyboard Command: treeline
Prerequisite: None
Special Line/Entity
This command breaks a line, arc or polyline and inserts a string of text or a block at an interval. It can be used to
draw fence lines, utility lines, tree lines or any line which can be constructed by inserting a text or block entity. The
command prompts to select an entity then the distance between inserts. Next, the user selects whether to insert text
or a block, and whether to enter the distance or length to be broken out of the entity. If the user enters a 0 distance for
the break distance, then the entity is not broken. If a distance greater than 0 is entered, then this distance is divided
in half and broken out of the entity on both sides of the point at which the insert distance measures the entity.
If the user elects to insert text, the command prompts for the text to be inserted. Next, choose whether you want the
text Middle or Center aligned, and whether you want to have the text ipped so it does not appear upside down. See
the AutoCAD Reference Manual for more information on justication options. The size of the text is controlled by
the text size setting in Drawing Setup.
If the user elects to insert a block, the command prompts for the block name. The size of the block is controlled by
the symbol size setting in Drawing Setup. Considering that almost anything can be made into a block, such as raster
images, wipeout entities, etc., this is a very powerful command.
Alternatives to this command are Polyline to Special Line and Change Polyline Linetype.
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line Types
Keyboard Command: speent
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 969
Prerequisite: None
Guard Rail
This command adds box symbols along a polyline to generate a guard rail. See the command Change Polyline
Linetype also.
Prompts
Pick Polyline/Last: pick a polyline
Left/Right: L for Left
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate > Line Types
Keyboard Command: grail
Prerequisite: Polyline
Label Angle
This command will label and report the interior, exterior and deection angles between two directions. The angles
can be dened by three points, or by two line or polyline segments that have a common endpoint. An example
of labeling interior and exterior angles is shown below. The Both option will label interior and exterior angles
simultaneously.
Prompts
Dene angle by, Points/<select line or polyline>: pick a polyline segment
Select adjoining line or polyline: pick another polyline segment
Interior: 72d39'46'' Exterior: 287d20'14''
Angle to label [<Interior>/Exterior/Both/Deection/None]? press Enter
Typing B for Both labels both the interior and exterior angles.
Dene angle by, Points/<select line or polyline>: press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: labang
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 970
Label Coordinates/Elevation
This command will label a coordinate on the screen. You can choose to label the northing and easting, the Z
elevation, or all three properties. The point can be picked on screen, or specied by point number from the current
coordinate (.CRD) le. Options include drawing a box around the label, labeling both feet and meters, setting the
layer name for the label, setting the display precision, deciding whether or not to use a leader and selecting a change
in the symbol used to mark the point. You can also set the text prex and sufx for the label. Additionally, you can
locate a label on Real Z Axis. The Label With Inches option labels with whole feet and inches for the decimal part.
The Label Style chooses between labeling with a leader, with a symbol or along the x/y axis.
Label Along Axis
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 971
There is also an option to label the Delta X, Y and/or Z between two points, which is called Label Delta
Between Two Points. When this option is clicked On, and after the prompt, you will rst click two points
locations. The label, with the delta value(s), will then be placed precisely in between these two pick locations. If,
for example, the North, East and Elevation button is chosen, the resulting label will show the N, E and Z delta values.
The Save and Load buttons save and recall all the settings for this command to .LCE les. This is a way to manage
different label styles for different mapping standards and to share between users.
Prompts
Label Coordinates/Elevation dialog
Point to Label ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Point to Label (ENTER to End)?
Pick point or point number: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: labcoor
Prerequisite: None
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 972
Label LatLong
This command will label the latitude and longitude of a selected point. The program will convert the northing
and easting of the input points to latitude and longitude. There is an option to include elevation in the labels.
The coordinate system for the drawing coordinates must be dened in Drawing Setup before running this command.
First, the program displays a dialog box with options to set the sizes, to set label prexes, to set the display precision,
to draw a box around the label and to change the symbol used to mark the point. When Draw With Leader is active,
the program prompts for the point to label and then the label location and draws a leader between these points. When
Draw With Leader is off, the specied symbol is drawn at the point and the label is drawn automatically to the size.
The Prompt For Label Angle option prompts for the label rotation instead of automatically drawing the label
horizontal. For the Use Attribute Block option, the symbol must be a block with three attributes for the latitude,
longitude and elevation that the program will place and ll out the attributes instead of creating text labels. After
the options dialog, the program prompts for the points to label. As you move the cursor, the program display the
latitude/longitude in real-time.
Prompts
Label Latitude / Longitude dialog
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Pick point or point number: press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: lablat
Prerequisite: Dene coordinate system in Drawing Setup
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 973
Label Curb Flow Elevations
This command labels top of curb and/or bottom of curb (owline) elevations with a leader along an alignment. The
data to label comes from Carlson points and alignment is dened by a selected polyline. The program reads all the
points in the drawing and then you select which descriptions to use the top of curb labels and which to use for the
bottom of curb labels.
There are separate settings for the top and bottom to control the label prex, sufx and decimals. The Tolerance
setting is the maximum distance between a point to label and the polyline. The Leader Bearing determines how
the Leader Angle is applied: Relative adds the angle to the alignment polyline and Absolute means based on the
orientation of the screen. The Text Horizontal Offset Scaler controls the distance between the alignment polyline
and the label. The Text Vertical Offset Scaler controls the buffer offset between the leader line and the label. The
User Leader Entities option chooses between drawing the leaders as polylines or as leader entities. The Elevate
Annotations setting controls whether the labels are created at their elevation or at zero.
Prompts
Top Curb Descriptions pick descriptions to label for top of curb
Bottom Curb Desciprionts pick descriptions to label for bottom of curb
Pick a polyline to annotate (Enter to End): pick a polyline
Pick side for owline (Enter to End): pick a side
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: celev
Prerequisite: points with elevations and descriptions, and alignment polyline
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 974
Replot Descriptions
This command will create user specied text entities at the location of selected point descriptions.
Prompts
This command will Search for a certain Point Description and plot
New text on the current layer with current style.
Attribute Text to Search for <>: STK
New Text to plot <>: Stake Fnd
Select objects: Select Carlson points
Select objects: press Enter
Number of Text Entities Plotted: 4
Points with description STK
Found four STK descriptions and created four text entities
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: plotdesc
Prerequisite: Points with descriptions must be plotted. Set the layer and text style that you require.
Textbox
This command allows you to draw a shaded, shadow text box around a selection of Text or Mtext. The size of the
shading and the optional leader are determined by the height of the text that is selected.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 975
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: textbox
Prerequisite: Text or Mtext entities
Label Offset Distances
This command labels the distances of a point to one or two lines. The rst distance is between the point and an
east-west line. This distance is labeled as either north or south of the line. The second distance is between the point
and a north-south line. This distance is labeled as either east or west of the line. The distances are labeled with a
leader and a description of the point.
Prompts
Pick 'E-W', Left to Right Property Line (if any)
Pick Line or Polyline (Enter for None): pick the polyline
Pick 'N-S', Top to Bottom Property Line (if any)
Pick Line or Polyline (Enter for None): pick the polyline
Pick Offset Point, (N) for Number, <E> to Exit: pick a point
Pick point to start leader at: pick a point at or near the offset point
To point: pick an alignment point for the label
To point: press Enter
Pick Offset Point, (N) for Number, <E> to Exit: press Enter to End
Pulldown Menu Location: Annotate
Keyboard Command: ofab
Prerequisite: Polyline or Line
Label Elevations Along Pline
This command labels point elevations and aligns with a polyline based on settings shown in the dialog. These
settings can be divided into ve groups.
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 976
Label Settings: The Source of Elevations are read from Carlson points drawn on the screen, polyline vertices,
elevations of grade break vertices and can also be picked on the screen. The Side for Labels is relative to the
direction the polyline is drawn. Labels can be aligned horizontally, parallel or perpendicular to the polyline or
according to the picked alignment. The Offset distance scalar offsets the label from the actual point.
Text Settings: The labels with be drawn on Layer with selected Style. The Text size scalar is relative to the
current horizontal scale, which is set in Drawing Setup. These scalers are multiplied by the horizontal scale to
obtain the actual drawing units. The number of Integers and Decimals can also be specied along with Prex and
Sufx for the main elevation label.
Leader Settings: The Leader Settings are used to Draw Leader with Arrowhead on the leader Layer with length
of leader equal to Leader Scaler. The option Draw text above leaderextends the leader tick to the length of the
label.
Additional Settings: Draw box around label draws box around the elevation label. Flip text for twist screen
changes the text direction if the text is drawn upside down. If the option Ignore zero elevation is on zero elevation
labels will be ignored. The Carlson points or picked points are beyond Maximum offset to use will be ignored.
Additional Offset Settings: If the Additional offset is other than 0, it will be labeled with Prex and Sufx using
the other text settings on the next line of main elevation label.
The overlapping labels can be moved using Move Elevation Labels command to remove the overlap.
Prompts
Label Elevations Along Polyline dialog
Select alignment polyline: pick a polyline
Select points to label.
Select objects: pick the points
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 977
The alignment polyline with points to label is shown
Pulldown Menu Location: 3D Data->Label Polylines
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 978
Keyboard Command: elevlab
Prerequisite: Polyline and points
Chapter 15. Annotate Menu 979
Surface Menu 16
The Surface menu, shown below, has many commands for triangulation, contouring, volumes, prole design and
much more.
980
Triangulate & Contour
At the heart of nearly every land design project is at least one terrain model. These models go by several names
and one of the most common is that of a ''TIN'' or Triangulated Irregular Network; another common name is that
of a ''DTM'' or Digital Terrain Model. Since accurate representations of a surface model are signicantly important
to most land development projects, having a thorough understanding of the Triangulate & Contour controls is very
important.
Surface models are generally comprised of combinations of the following general data types:
Points - Most surface models are comprised of points whose coordinates (x,y,z) contribute to the formation
of triangular planes that connect three points that are in close proximity to one another. Within Carlson, most
points come from the Draw Field to Finish command and/or the Draw-Locate Points command. Points can be
selectively ltered from the triangulation engine through the use of the Tag Non-Surface Points command.
Breaklines - Breaklines (or ''fault lines'') are used to control the connection sequence between four points
which results in two triangles. Common uses of breaklines include ravines, ditches, berms and other areas
where distinct grade discontinuity occurs. The ''leg'' of a triangle can travel along a breakline but cannot cross
the breakline. Breaklines must be in the form of 3D polylines or simple lines whose vertices or endpoints
dene a valid ''Z'' elevation. Acommon problemrelated to breaklines is when two breaklines cross one another
in 3D space. In these situations, an impasse results and will result in a ''crossing breakline'' report. Within
Carlson, most breaklines come from the Draw Field to Finish command and/or the 3D Polyline command.
Breaklines fall into one of two general categories:
''Soft'' breaklines - Unless otherwise specied, all breaklines are considered ''soft'' breakline. The na-
ture of soft breaklines allows a degree of contour smoothing across the breakline itself resulting in a
''weathered-'' or natural-looking contour.
''Hard'' breaklines - Breaklines tagged as ''hard'' breaklines prevent contour smoothing through the break-
line. Hard breaklines are generally used to represent man-made terrain breaks that commonly occur
during excavation and construction. Breaklines can be changed to hard breaklines through the use of the
Tag Hard Breaklines command.
Breaklines and other triangulate-able entities can be selectively ltered from the triangulation engine through
the use of the Tag Non-Surface Entities command.
Inclusions - Inclusions (or ''boundaries'') are used to identify the entities that can be used for triangulation and
multiple inclusion regions can be selected for a given surface model. Entities that fall outside of an inclusion
boundary and are not otherwise bound by a different inclusion boundary are ignored by the triangulation
engine. Inclusion regions must be in the form of a closed 2D or 3D polylines. Within Carlson, most inclusion
polylines come from the Shrinkwrap Entities command.
Exclusions - Exclusions (or ''void regions'') are the antithesis of Inclusions and are used to prevent triangulation
from occurring between points that are bound by an Inclusion region. Common uses of exclusion regions
include building footprints and free-standing water limits (e.g. ponds). Entities that fall inside an exclusion
region are ignored by the triangulation engine. Exclusion regions must be in the form of a closed 2D or 3D
polylines. Within Carlson, most exclusion polylines come from the Boundary Polyline command and/or the
3D Polyline command.
Carlson provides a programming interface for these le types and also offers a third le type (
*
.GRD) for the
representation of terrain data. See the Notes section for additional details.
The Triangulate tab provides options and settings that control the creation and analysis of the TIN itself.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 981
Draw Triangulation Lines: When enabled, the program will draw the triangulation using simple line entities at the
appropriate elevation(s). Use the Select button or specify the layer for these lines.
Draw Triangulation Faces: When enabled, the program will draw the triangulation using a collection of 3D Face
entities. These 3D Faces can then be used rendering routines such as HIDE and SHADE or in Carlson routines such
as 3D Viewer Window, 3D Surface Fly-Over and Slope Zone Analysis. Use the Select button or specify the layer
for these 3D Faces.
Draw Slope Arrows: When enabled, slope arrows are created within the triangles indicating the downhill dip
direction as illustrated below.
Clicking the Setup button yields the Draw Slope Arrow Settings dialog box.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 982
Arrow Layer: Indicate the layer to which the slope arrows are to be placed.
Size Scaler: Indicate a positive, non-zero value for the scale factor that should be applied to the slope arrows.
Draw Slope Percent Label: When enabled, the slope value (in percentage) of the triangle is labeled onto the slope
arrow. Specify the desired unit sufx (e.g. ''%'') to apply to the end of the numerical value that is calculated from the
TIN triangle(s).
Label Decimals: Indicate the amount of precision that is to be displayed on the slope label.
Min Area to Label: Indicate the smallest allowable triangle size that can be used for the slope percentage labels.
Write Triangulation File: When enabled (strongly suggested), an external surface model le is created which can
subsequently be used for volume calculations, the creation of proles, cross-sections and graded pads. Carlson
currently provides two le types to store the DTM data created by the Triangulate & Contour routine:
1.
*
.TIN - The TIN le format is the default and preferred le format due to its compact le size and organi-
zational efciency. The Carlson TIN format is governed by Carlson and is in a binary (non-human readable)
format.
2.
*
.FLT - The FLT le format is a legacy ASCII-based (human-readable) le format and is used in some older
machine control applications.
Use Inclusion/Exclusion Areas: When enabled, the program will prompt you for inclusion and exclusion polylines
and prevents the use of the Shrink-Wrap Perimeter Reduction option. These are used to further control the area of
activity for triangulation and contouring. The inclusion and exclusion polylines must be closed polylines and when
used, must be drawn before using Triangulate & Contour. It is suggested that the height of the Command: line
display must be set to show at least two lines so that the additional prompts can be easily viewed. Refer to the Notes
section for additional information on Inclusion/Exclusion polyline selections.
Shrink-Wrap Perimeter Reduction: This option produces an inferred Inclusion region around the data to be
selected and mimics the results of the Shrinkwrap Entities command.
Ignore Zero Elevations: When enabled, this option will lter out all data points and entities at an elevation of zero
from the triangulation data set.
Specify Input/Output Elevation Range: If you would like to manually set the range over which to contour, select
either or both of the aforementioned toggles. One controls the triangulation of the source data and the other for the
contour output. The program will automatically contour from the lowest elevation in the data set up to the highest
at the increment specied in Contour Interval.
Minimize Flat Triangles: When enabled, this toggle instructs the triangulation ''engine'' to iterate through the tri-
angulation permutations to minimize the occurrence of ''at'' (or more precisely, horizontal) triangles. Flat triangles
often occur when creating surface models from contour data. In this scenario, the often used Delaunay triangulation
algorithm may produce unrealistic results. The Minimize Flat Triangle option will perform additional permutations
of the triangulation network through the use of the Surface Manager >Swap Edge routine in an attempt to maximize
the number of ''sloped'' triangles. Another option that produces similar results is the Interpolate Ridges and Valleys
option.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 983
Before: Surface made from an existing contour map with Minimize Flat Triangles disabled.
After: The same surface with Minimize Flat Triangles enabled. Note the better dened ravine and ridge denitions.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 984
Difference: A Cut/Fill Color Map showing the regions of signicant triangulation difference between the ''Before''
scenario and the ''After'' scenario of ''Minimize Flat Triangles.''
Erase Previous Contour Entities: In the event that a TIN needs to be recreated and Carlson-produced contours are
in the drawing, three options exist that allow you to control whether or not the contour data should be removed from
the drawing:
Off - All existing Carlson-generated contours are left intact in the drawing. If these contours satisfy all of the
triangulation requirements, they can be utilized by the Triangulation algorithm.
Current Surface - Only the Carlson-generated contours that are associated with the active Triangulation le
are removed from the drawing.
All Contour Entities - All Carlson-generated contours are removed from the drawing, regardless of the surface
model that created them.
Pick Reference Plane: When enabled, this option allows you to contour an overhang or cliff by changing the refer-
ence plane to a side view. The reference plane can be specied by using the View>Viewpoint 3D>View command
(see the AutoCAD/IntelliCAD Help menu for additional details) or by specifying three data points on the cliff (two
along the bottom and one at the top).
Highlight Breaklines: When enabled, this routine highlights breaklines in the triangulation network by drawing the
triangulation lines along breaklines in yellow.
Interpolate Ridges and Valleys: The intent of this routine is similar to, and is the pre-cursor of the Minimize Flat
Triangles option. When enabled, this option inserts ''best-guess'' breaklines into the drawing which are subsequently
used in the triangulation process in an attempt to minimize at, horizontal triangles.
Interpolate Summits and Pits: When enabled, this option creates additional triangulation in a summit or pit situ-
ation to more accurately represent existing ground conditions from a surface model created from contour entities.
Since the tops of hills and the bottom of pits are often not shown on existing ground contour maps, this option often
helps improve the accuracy of existing terrain conditions.
Simplify Surface: When enabled, this option reduces the digital size of a surface without signicantly compromis-
ing the integrity or accuracy of the surface itself. The most common application to enable this option is when using
very large datasets, such as smoothed contours. Its use is less applicable to design surfaces or surfaces based on
surveyed points, but it can still be utilized.
Elevation Method: When enabled, this option reduces the size of the surface le by analyzing the difference in
elevation between each vertex of the TIN and the vertices directly surrounding it, assigning a numerical weight or
value to each vertex. If it is determined that the calculated weight for a particular vertex is less than the Tolerance
factor, the vertex is a candidate for removal. The number of vertices removed is directly proportional to the Tolerance
factor, so the higher the Tolerance factor, the more vertices are removed and vice versa.
Preserve Breaklines: When enabled, this option analyzes the TIN by focusing on the edges; calculating the angular
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 985
difference between adjacent triangular faces. If the angular difference between edges is greater than the specied
Breakline Angle, it is considered to be a breakline, and it is preserved. If its angular difference is determined to
be below the Breakline Angle, it becomes a candidate for removal. In that case, the Weight factor is applied to
the corresponding vertex, adjusting its original value. If the resulting value is still below the Tolerance, it is then
removed. The number of vertices removed is inversely proportional to the Weight factor, so the greater the Weight
factor. The fewer vertices that are removed, the lower the Weight factor, the more vertices that are removed.
A good rule-of-thumb that can be used when deciding whether or not to use these options is:
If the surface contains no man-made features, use Simplify Surface option (with or without the Elevation
Method option).
If the surface contains man-made features, such as roads, use both Simplify Surface and Preserve Breaklines.
Max Triangle Mesh Line Length: Two bounds are provided to limit the length of the ''legs'' within a triangulation
network. Based on the available data, if the edge length of a triangle exceeds the respective bound, the triangle will
not be formed:
Exterior: This value applies to triangulation lines around the perimeter of the triangulation area.
Interior: This value applies all the other triangulation lines. Generally you would have the Exterior value
larger than the Interior value.
Draw Contours: When enabled, the program will draw contour lines using the designated settings after triangula-
tion process is complete. Otherwise, only the designated Triangulation operations are performed. If this option is
disabled and contours are subsequently desired, use the Contours from TIN File command.
Interval Method: Indicate the desired elevation(s) for contours to be drawn:
Contour by Interval: Specify the desired interval (e.g. every 2 feet) into the Contour Interval eld.
Contour an Elevation: Specify a desired elevation (e.g. a oodplain elevation or other unique elevation of
interest) and set the desired value into the Contour Interval eld.
Contour Layer/Index Layer: Specify the layer to which the contours/index contours are to be drawn.
Contour Interval/Index Interval: Specify the interval to which the contours/index contours are to be drawn.
Contour Line Width/Index Line Width: Specify the line width to be applied to the contours/index contours.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 986
Draw Index Contours: When enabled, index (or ''major'') contours will be created with independent characteristics
from the regular contours.
Min Contour Length: Specify the minimum linear threshold that should be used to draw contours.
Apply Outlier Reduction Filter: When enabled, this option attempts to remove ''the jaggies'' which tend to occur
along long, thin triangles.
Reduce Vertices: When enabled, this option attempts to remove extra vertices from the contours using the Offset
Distance value. The result of this action is often a signicant reduction in vertex locations along the contour resulting
in a more efciently-sized and compact drawing le.
Offset Distance: Specify the maximum allowable distance for shifting the original contour line in order to reduce
vertices. The reduced contour will shift no more than this value, at any point, away from the original contour line. A
lower value will decrease the number of vertices removed and keep the contour line closer to the original. A higher
value will remove more vertices and allows the contour to shift further from the original location.
Reduce Before Bezier Smoothing: When enabled, this option attempts to remove extra vertices from the contours
before they undergo Bezier Smoothing using the Offset Distance value.
Contour Smoothing Method: Indicate the desired amount of smoothing (often used for existing, natural ground
conditions to simulate a ''weathered terrain'' effect) that should be applied to the contours:
No Smoothing: This option is often used for proposed, man-made surface considerations where the terrain
has been shaped with earth-moving equipment. For applications where a ''nature-emulated'' man-made terrain
is desired, refer to the Carlson Natural Regrade documentation.
Bezier Smoothing Factor: This option holds all the contour points calculated from the triangulation and only
smooths between the calculated points.
Polynomial Smoothing: This option applies a fth degree polynomial equation through the contour data
points for a smooth transition between the triangulation faces.
Subdivisional Surfaces: When enabled, adjust the horizontal slider to indicate the degree of triangular subdivisions.
This causes each triangle in the triangulation surface model to be subdivided into (x + 1)2 triangles, where x
= Subdivision Generations. The mathematically generated sub-triangle vertices are raised or lowered to provide
smoother contours. More generations increase the smoothness of the contours but incur increased processing time.
Although this algorithm does not produce ''crossing contours,'' it can result in undesired contours in terrain scenarios
such as where graded slopes abruptly transition to nearly horizontal slopes (e.g. the sides and bottom of a detention
pond).
Bezier Smoothing Factor: Adjust the horizontal slider to obtain a preview of how much smoothing can be expected
at each setting. Sliding the bar to the left results in a lower setting which have less looping or less freedom to curve
between contour line points. Likewise, moving the slider to the right results in a setting that increases the looping
effect. Note that too much smoothing applied in some situations can result in crossing contours.
Highlight Depression Contours: When enabled, use the Setup button to establish general conguration settings for
depression contours.
Layer: Specify the layer to which the depression contours are to be drawn.
Tick Size Scaler: Indicate the relative scale factor that should be applied to the depression ticks.
Tick Interval Scaler: Indicate the desired interval scaler which controls the spacing of the depression ticks.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 987
Line Width: Specify the line width to be applied to the depression contours.
Hatch Zones: When enabled, this option will create hatching between the contours based on elevation zones. The
following dialog will open allowing the user to specify the hatch type and color for each elevation zone. The entire
elevation range of selected data is displayed under Current Values.
Auto: Opens the following dialog, allowing for automatic conguration of the range of elevations in each zone,
assigning of colors and hatch patterns, and the scale.
Starting Zone: Sets the zone with which to begin the application of the setting dened in this dialog. For Instance,
if the Starting Zone was set to 10, the settings denitions applied here wouldn't affect Zones 1-9, but would start at
Zone 10.
Set Values: Enables the Starting Value and Value Interval elds, which allowthe user to specify the starting elevation
for the given zone and set the zone increment.
Starting Value: Sets the elevation of the beginning zone to dene.
Value Interval: Sets the elevation increment for subsequent zones.
Set Colors: Enables the Starting Color and Color Increment elds.
Starting Color: Sets the starting color number based on the standard CAD color chart.
Color Increment: Sets the color number to increase for subsequent zones. So if the increment was set to 5, and the
starting color was 60, the next color would be 65, 70, and so on.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 988
Set Pattern: Sets the hatch pattern for the dened zones.
Set Scale: Enables the Scale option.
Scale: Sets the scale for the selected hatch pattern.
Clear: Clears the all of the Elevation elds in the dialog.
Load: Loads previous settings from a saved .pat le.
Save: Saves the current setting conguration to a .pat le.
Label Contours: When enabled, contours will be labeled based on the settings below. If this option is disabled and
further contour annotation is desired, utilize the Contour Elevation Label command.
Label Layer: Specify the layer name for intermediate contour labels. To only label index contours, enable the Label
Index Contours Only option.
Index Label Layer: Specify the layer name for index contour labels.
Label Style: Specify the text style that will be used for the contour label text.
Label Integers controls how many digits to label to the left of the decimal. For example, if all contours are in the
5000's, then setting for three digits would label the 5280 contour as 280.
Label Decimals: Specify the amount of precision to display on the contour labels.
Label Text Size Scaler: Specify a relative text size scale factor to be applied to the label(s).
Use Commas adds a comma into the labels for the thousands place such as ''5,000'' instead of ''5000''.
Min Length to Label: Specify the desired minimum length of contours that should be annotated. In other words,
Contours whose length is less than the value will not be labeled.
Positive/Negative Contour Prex: Indicate a desired string of prex text (e.g. Elev= ) that is to precede the positive
and/or negative contour elevations, respectively.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 989
Positive/Negative Contour Sufx: Indicate a desired string of sufx text that is to follow the positive and/or
negative contour elevations, respectively.
Break Contours at Label: When enabled, the contour lines will be broken and trimmed at the label location for
label visibility. As an alternative to physically placing a gap into the contour, consider using the Hide Drawing
Under Labels option.
Break Buffer Offset: Specify the offset distance which determines the gap between the end of the trimmed contour
line and the beginning or ending of the text.
Draw Box Around Text: When enabled, a rectangle is drawn around the contour elevation labels.
Box Buffer Offset: Specify the offset distance which determines the gap between the box and the beginning or
ending of the text.
Label At Centerline Offset: When creating contours and subsequent plan sheets for roads, enable this option to
position the labels at a xed offset from a centerline. The program automatically uses any polylines in the drawing
that are tagged as centerlines. To check whether a polyline is a centerline, use the Centerline ID command. To create
a centerline polyline from a centerline le, use the Draw Centerline File command.
Draw Broken Segments: When enabled, the segments of contours that have been broken out for label visibility will
be redrawn as independent segments. To join these segments back into the contour, use the Join Nearest command.
Layer: Specify the layer that is to receive the newly drawn broken segments.
Label Contour Ends: When enabled, the ends of ''open'' contours will be labeled.
Label Index Contours Only: When enabled, only the index contours are labeled. This option is active only when
Draw Index Contours has been selected in the Contour tab.
Hide Drawing Under Labels: When enabled, a ''Wipeout'' entity is placed with the annotation label that will create
the appearance of trimmed segments at the contour label, even though the contour line is still fully intact. This
feature provides the user with the best of both worlds; you have clean looking contour labels yet the contour lines
themselves remain contiguous. This feature will also hide other entities that are in the immediate vicinity of the
contour label.
Align Text with Contour: When enabled, the contour elevation labels will be rotated to align with their respective
contour lines.
Use MText: When enabled, contour labels are created using the MText entity type. Otherwise, the standard DText
entity type is used.
Draw On Real Z Axis: When enabled, the contour labels are placed at the same ''Z'' (elevation) value of the contour
itself. When disabled, the contour labels are placed at a ''Z'' (elevation) value of 0 (zero).
Align Facing Uphill: When enabled, the contour elevation labels will still be rotated to align with their respective
contour lines, but the labels will be placed in such a manner that the top of the text label will always be toward the
uphill side of the contour.
Internal Label Intervals: Indicate the desired method for contour labels within the contour itself:
Label Intervals: This option will label each contour with a set number of labels.
Distance Interval: This option allows you to specify an interval distance between labels.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 990
Filter Selection By Inclusion/Exclusion Areas: This option lters out selected entities from the triangulation
that are outside the surface area dened by the inclusion/exclusion perimeter polylines. Otherwise, all the selected
entities are used for triangulation and then the triangulation is trimmed at the inclusion/exclusion perimeters.
Whether to prompt for inclusion/exclusion perimeters is specied on the Triangulate Tab.
Specify Selection Options: When enabled, indicate the type(s) of entities that are to be used during the triangulation
process. This is an excellent method of ''ltering out'' unwanted entity types or enabling the use of desired entity
types.
CAD Points, Lines, 2D Polylines, 3D Polylines, 3DFaces, Elevation Text and Inserts (blocks) are standard CAD
entities types.
Carlson Point Inserts refer to Carlson points (such as those placed with the Draw Field to Finish command or which
utilize the Carlson ''SRVPNO
*
'' family of blocks with point number, elevation, and description attributes).
Spot/Bottom Elevation Inserts include text entities that start with 'X'.
From File: When enabled, allows you to triangulate from the points in an external coordinate (.CRD) or ASCII le.
This option also provides access to the use of Point Groups as a data source.
An Error Log is generated if the triangulation routine nds vertical conicts between breaklines or other surface
entities and displays the conicts in a ''docked dialog box.'' Three types of conicts are reported (each conict type
is listed into its own category):
1. Crossing Breaklines - Indicates the common X,Y location of two breaklines that do not share a common ''Z''
elevation.
2. Vertical Edges - Indicates that two entities or vertexes of differing elevations have the same x-y location, thus
forming a vertical plane to another point.
3. Breakline T-Intersections - Indicates that a third entity is abutting another entity, but the second entity doesn't
have a vertex at the point of intersection.
Click the ''+'' sign beside a category to display the individual conicts within that category and click the ''-'' sign
to collapse the list. When a line item error is selected, a highlighted arrow is temporarily placed in the drawing
to indicate the exact location of the specic conict. Zoom functionality allows the user to more closely inspect
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 991
the specic problem area, and if needed a marker can be drawn or a report generated for an individual conict or
conicts.
Zoom To: Centers the display on the location of the error without affecting the zoom resolution.
Zoom In: Increases the ability to see detail.
Zoom Out: Decreases the ability to see detail.
Report One/All: This option toggles between ''One'' and ''All'' depending whether a single line item conict or an
entire category is selected from the error log. An error report is generated listing the x-y position and the elevation
difference of the entities in conict.
Draw One/All: This option toggles between One and All depending whether a single conict or a category is
selected from the list. This option draws an ''X'' symbol at each selected conict.
Settings: Indicate the desired conguration settings for the error log:
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 992
Tolerances: Indicate the lowest elevation difference threshold that should be reported for Crossing Breaklines,
Vertical Edges and Breakline T-Intersections, respectively.
Layer Name: Specify the layer name for the ''X'' entities drawn with Draw One/All option. This also sets the layer
name for the Draw Lines option.
In the case of crossing polylines, Draw Lines will trace over the polylines responsible for the conict.
Symbol Size: Specify the size of the ''X'' symbol that is drawn to delineate the selected errors. This will determine
the actual size of the symbol in the drawing. This value is not multiplied by the horizontal drawing scale.
Note:
When selecting Inclusion/Exclusion polylines, you may select any number of Inclusion polylines and any
number of Exclusion polylines. Selecting multiple Inclusion polylines results in ''islands'' of terrain data
within a given TIN le.
If Triangulate & Contour reports zero points found and fails to do anything when you're using Carlson points,
then those points are probably located at zero elevation. To x this problem, make sure that Carlson Point
Inserts is toggled on in the Selection tab. This will enable Triangulate & Contour to read the elevation from
the elevation attribute of the point.
For those experienced in programming, Carlson offers a DTM API (Application Programming Interface)
which provides functions that can be used to access and manipulate information stored within a DTM le.
In surface situations where a series of rectangular grid cells are desired, explore the Make 3D Grid File
command.
Prompts
The following are the most often encountered prompts:
Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select entities: Select the desired closed polylines that form the bounding inclusion area(s) of the surface model
and press Enter when complete.
Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select entities: Select the desired closed polylines that form the regions(s) of the surface model where triangulation
should not occur and press Enter when complete.
Select the points and breaklines to Triangulate.
Select entities: Select the desired entities from CAD using standard CAD selection methods and press Enter when
complete.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Surface (Survey, Civil, Hydro, Construction, Field, Natural Regrade), Takeoff >
Surface Tools
Keyboard Command: tri
Prerequisite: ''Triangulate-able'' entities in the drawing (dened by the Selection Tab) and/or an external point le.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 993
Contour from TIN File
This command creates contours directly from a TIN le (.t or .tin) without the need to have the TIN drawn on
the screen. The routine starts by opening the dialog for Triangulate and Contour, allowing the user to specify
triangulation, contour and label settings. After pressing OK on the initial dialog, a second dialog opens, allowing
for the selection of the TIN le from which to create the contours.
See the Triangulate and Contour section in the manual for a detailed description of each of the settings.
Prompts
Fill out the Triangulate and Contour Dialog information with the desired options.
Select the desired TIN le and choose Open.
Loading edges...
Loaded 1994 points and 5944 edges
Created 3936 triangles
Removed 9 disconnected edges.
Reading points... 0
Contouring elevation 497
Inserted 1926 contour vertices.
The user may be prompted for additional information depending on settings used in the Triangulate and Contour
dialog box.
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Contour from...
Keyboard Command: cntrTIN
Prerequisite: A TIN le (.t or .tin)
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 994
Draw Triangular Mesh
This command draws a triangulation (.t or .tin) le as either 3D LINES or 3DFACEs. Since 3DFACE entities can
be shaded within the 3D Viewer Window or 3D Surface FlyOver, or with the AutoCAD 3D Orbit command, this is
an excellent tool for visual surface inspection. 3D Lines cannot be shaded.
Triangulation (.t or .tin) les can be created by Triangulate & Contour.
Prompts
Select TMESH File to Draw
Choose a triangulation (.t or .tin) le from the le selection dialog. You are then prompted for options:
If using Inclusion/Exclusion Perimeters, you will be prompted to select them as the routine executes.
Loading edges...
Loaded 198 points and 234 edges
This Triangulation mesh was drawn as 3DFaces with the Draw Triangular Mesh command, and then colorized by
elevation within 3D Viewer Window
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Draw Surface
Keyboard Command: drawtri
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 995
Prerequisite: A triangulation (.t or .tin) le
Contour ID
Contour ID reports the routine and source data used to generate the selected contour polyline.
Prompts
Select contour polyline to identify: pick a polyline
Surface Name: Triangulate & Contour by screen entities
Select contour polyline to identify (Enter to end): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface->Modify Contours
Keyboard Command: CTR ID
Prerequisite: a contour polyline
Highlight Index Contours
This command will move contours of a specied interval to another layer. This allows the user to change the color
or width of a certain interval. This is useful if all the contours had been generated on a single layer, and you wish to
display the index contours differently based on a new layer setting.
Prompts
Layer name of existing contours <CTR>: press Enter
Layer name for highlight contours <NCTR>: press Enter
Select Contours to Highlight.
Select objects: Select contours using any standard selection methods.
Select objects: press Enter to conclude selection. The program then sorts and displays the High and Low interval
of the selected contours.
Contour increment to highlight: 10
Starting Highlight at elevation <98.0>: 100
Ending Highlight at elevation <152.0>: 150
Assuming we had drawn 1 foot intervals, the above example would move the contours on elevations 100, 110, 120,
130, 140 and 150 to the layer NCTR.
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Modify Contours
Keyboard Command: indexctr
Prerequisite: Contours should be plotted and visible on the screen.
Highlight Depression Contours
This command highlights depression contours by changing their layer, color, and adding tick marks. A depression
contour is a closed contour line that leads to a local minimum such that there are no contour lines with a higher
elevation within the contour. This routine nds the depression contours out of the selected polylines. The depression
contours are highlighted, and the user selects which ones to label.
Prompts
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 996
Layer name of existing contours <CTR>: Enter
Layer name for depression contours <DCTR>: Enter
Width for depression contours <1.0>: Enter
Tick Interval for depression contours <50.00>: Enter
Tick Size for depression contours <6.0>: Enter
Select the existing contours.
Select objects: Select all the contour polylines, even the contours that aren't depression contours.
Select objects: press Enter to conclude selection. The program then sorts and displays the high and low elevations
of the selected contours.
Reading the selection set ...
Locating the depression contours ...
Highlight all or selected depression contours [All/<Selected>]? A The ''All'' option changes all contours
identied as depression contours to the specied layer and adds tick marks. The ''Selected'' option highlights all
contours identied as depression contours and then user is prompted to select which ones to change to specied
depression contour layer and add tick marks to.
Drawing the depression contours ...
Highlighted depression contours
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Modify Contours
Keyboard Command: depress
Prerequisite: Contours should be plotted and visible on the screen.
Contour Elevation Label
This command can be used to simultaneously create elevation labels on a group of contour polylines at elevation.
First the command starts with a dialog with the label options. Then to place the labels, pick two points crossing
the contour polylines at the desired label location. The program will nd all the contour polylines that intersect
the picked line (dened by the two picked points) and will place labels at the intersection point of each contour.
A second crossing line can be initiated immediately, so multiple areas can be quickly labeled while remaining in
the command. Alternatively, you can type P for Polyline at the Command prompt and select a polyline. Then
the program nds all the intersections between the selected polyline and the contours and places labels at these
intersections. The actual ''z'' elevation of the contour line determines the label value.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 997
Label Layer species layer name for the contour labels that will be created.
Label Style species the text style to be used for labels.
Horizontal Scale is used in conjunction with the Text Size Scaler to determine unit height of the contour labels.
Text Size Scaler is a scaler that will be multiplied by the horizontal scale to set the actual text height of the labels
in AutoCAD units.
Integers controls how many digits to label to the left of the decimal. For example, if all contours are in the 5000's,
then setting for three digits would label the 5280 contour as 280.
Decimals sets the decimal precision for the labels to be created.
Label Position determines the label position in relation to the contour polyline.
On Contour centers the label on the contour line.
Above Contour places the label above the contour line. If this option is used, the options for Break Contours
at Label and Draw Broken Segments become inactive.
Ignore Zero Elevation Polylines enables the routine to lter out all entities with an elevation of zero.
Hide Drawing Under Labels activates a text wipeout feature that will create the appearance of trimmed segments
at the contour label, even though the contour line is still fully intact. This feature provides the user with the best
of both worlds; you have clean looking contour labels, yet the contour lines themselves remain contiguous. This
feature will also hide other entities that are in the immediate vicinity of the contour label.
Align Facing Uphill makes the label parallel to the contour and ips the label so that it reads facing uphill.
Otherwise, the labels are made to face up relative to the current screen view. When this option is on, the program
prompts for a triangulation surface le that should match the surface the contours represent.
Use Commas adds a comma into the labels for the thousands place such as ''5,000'' instead of ''5000''.
When Align Text with Contour is checked, contour elevation labels will be rotated to align with their respective
contour lines.
When Break Contours at Label is checked, the contour lines will be broken and trimmed at the label location for
label visibility.
When Draw Broken Segments is checked, segments of contours that are broken out for label visibility will be
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 998
redrawn as independent segments. Specify the layer for these broken segments in the box to the right of this toggle.
Label Contour Ends creates labels off the ends of the contours.
Label By Distance places the labels by distance along the contour. The user is not prompted for screen picks of
contour crossing when this option is used.
Interval sets the distance interval to be used between labels on each contour.
When Draw Box Around Text is checked, a rectangle will be drawn around the elevation labels. The Offset Scaler
controls the size of the rectangle.
The Draw On Real Z Axis chooses between creating the text entities at the elevations of the contours or at zero
elevation.
The Use MText chooses between creating MText and DText label entities.
Label Index Only: When checked, only Index contours are labeled.
Prompts
Contour Label Options Dialog Opens Select the desired options and press OK.
Dene a line which slices the contours at the desired label locations.
Pick 1st point (P-Polyline, Enter to end): pick a point
Pick 2nd point: pick a point
By selecting two points the contour lines that cross the line dened by the two points are labeled.
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Contour Labels
Keyboard Command: gclabel
Prerequisite: polylines with elevation (contour polylines)
Move Label Along Contour
This command slides an existing contour label along a contour, maintaining its alignment with the contour. After
moving the label, you can type F for Flip at the Command prompt to rotate the label orientation by 180. The label
must have originally been created with the Break Contours at Label option Off. If the option to Hide Drawing
Under Labels was used when the label was created, the wipeout will move with the label when using this command.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 999
In addition to moving a label, an existing label can be copied and placed at a new position along the con-
tour by using the Copy option at the rst prompt.
Prompts
Copy/<Select contour label to move>: Pick label
Pick new contour label position:Move mouse to relocate label
Flip last/<Select contour label to move (Enter to end)>: press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Contour Labels
Keyboard Command: move ctr label
Prerequisite: generated contour labels
Volumes By Triangulation
Volumes By Triangulation is a volume method that compares two triangulation networks. This method is different
from the grid based volume routines (Volumes By Layer, One Surface Volumes, Two Surface Volumes, Stockpile
Volumes, etc.) and the cross section volume routine (Calculate Section Volume). Volumes by Triangulation calculates
faster in most cases than the other methods, and it is the most accurate because it uses true TIN to TIN prismoidal
volumes. This added accuracy in general is very small. The grid resolution is usually sufcient to model the surface
for the grid based volumes. The Volume By Triangulation accuracy applies well when there is a feature like a 5 foot
wide ditch. Then the grid resolution would need to be less than 5 feet to model the ditch which might be difcult on
a large site.
The disadvantage to this routine is that it lacks the output options that help the analysis of the volume such as
Difference Contours. Also Volumes by Triangulation does no extrapolation and stops calculating volume at the
perimeter of the smaller of the two triangulation networks. Volumes By Triangulation is better when used with point
data instead of contour data because contour data requires triangulating all the contour polylines as breaklines which
creates a large triangulation network and is slower.
The triangulation networks to compare are dened in .tin or .t les that are created by Triangulate & Contour with
the Write Triangulation File option. Note that while both le formats are supported, the newer binary triangulation
le format (.tin) is twice as fast to load and save, and half the size, of the .t triangulation le format. For this
reason, the .tin le format is recommended. Before using this command, run Triangulate & Contour twice to create
an triangulation (.TIN or .FLT) le for each surface. The volume calculation is limited by either the extent of the
triangulation networks or by an inclusion/exclusion perimeter(s). These perimeters must be closed polylines.
Output data includes area, tons by density, average thickness, shrink and swell, ratio, and total volume.
Shrink/Swell Factors
An optional aspect of the Volumes by Triangulation routine is the ability to supply either a Cut ''Swell'' Factor and/or
a Fill ''Shrink'' Factor to the results of the volume calculation. Having a solid understanding on the ramications of
each factor is important for determining how (and when) the values should be used for earthwork considerations.
The factors are commonly expressed as decimal differences from the ''factor neutral'' value of 1.00. In most cases,
surface models are representations of what currently exists in the eld or what is desired to exist after construction.
Consider the following examples:
Excavating a Pit
Suppose you are given the task of designing a below ground storage pit. Based on your design surface model, the
amount of Cut has been determined to be 1,000
C.Y.Cut Swell Factor > 1 (example 1.15)
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1000
Supplying a Cut Swell Factor greater than 1 would usually be taken to mean ''How much volume will my 1,000
C.Y. of material occupy when it comes out of the ground?'' With a 15% swell factor (1.15) applied, the 1000 C.Y.
of excavated material would now occupy 1,150 C.Y. of space.
Cut Swell Factor < 1 (example 0.85)
Supplying a Cut Swell Factor less than 1 would usually be taken to mean ''How much volume will 1,000 C.Y. of
material occupy in this hole when it has been compacted?'' With a 15% compaction factor (0.85) applied, the 1000
C.Y. of material getting compacted would now occupy 850 C.Y. of the hole space.
Working with a Stockpile
Suppose you have a stockpile of material that is suitable for building purposes. Based on your design surface model,
the amount of material has been determined to be 1,000 C.Y.
Fill Shrink Factor > 1 (example 1.10)
Supplying a Fill Shrink Factor greater than 1 (see NOTE below) would usually be taken to mean ''How much
volume would this 1,000 C.Y. of material occupy if it were picked up and deposited elsewhere?'' With a 10% swell
factor (1.10) applied, the 1000 C.Y. of stockpile material would occupy 1100 C.Y. of space.
Fill Shrink Factor < 1 (example 0.90)
Supplying a Fill Shrink Factor less than 1 would usually be taken to mean ''How much volume will 1,000 C.Y. of
stockpile material occupy when it has been compacted?'' With a 10% compaction factor (0.90) applied, the 1000
C.Y. of material getting compacted would now occupy 900 C.Y. of the hole space.
Note:
In a design Fill scenario (such as a berm), often it is desired to know how much material would need to be
brought in at a given compaction factor to occupy the design ll. To determine this value, use the following
equation:
Fill Factor = 100.0/(100.0 - shrink percentage), using 15% shrink as an example,
Fill Factor = 100.0/(100.0 - 15.0) = 1.17647
Prompts
Select EXISTING Surface Triangulation File Choose an .t or .tin le
Select FINAL Surface Triangulation File Choose an .t or .tin le
Select Inclusion polylines.
Select objects: select objects that form a perimeter around the area of study
Select Exclusion polylines.
Select objects: select objects that form an exclusion area within the area of study
Cut Swell Factor: Supply an appropriate factor by which the calculated Cut volume should be multiplied.
Fill Shrink Factor: Supply an appropriate factor by which the calculated Fill volume should be multiplied.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1001
Use Report Formatter: Choose between customizing the report and using the standard report.
Volume Units and Area Units: Choose the units to include in the report.
Calculate Elevation Zone Volumes: This option calculates cut/ll volumes within elevation ranges. The ranges
use a specied elevation interval and can start from the top or bottom.
Report Tons: Enable this option to report the tonnage of Cut material and Fill material based on the material density.
Density: Indicate the average material density.
Write TIN Difference: Enable this option to create a TIN based on the elevation difference between the EXISTING
surface and the FINAL surface.
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil > Surface > Volumes by Triangulation, Survey > Surface > Volumes by
Triangulation
Keyboard Command: trivol
Prerequisite: Two .t or .tin les
Triangulation File Utilities
This command allows you to modify TIN surfaces in a variety of different ways, then allows for 3d viewing and
shading of the modied surface and nally for saving the le with a choice of output formats. The focus of the
routine is to elevate or lower the TIN or selected areas within the TIN, merge TINs with other surfaces, or use data
from other TIN les to apply to the current TIN. Operations can be performed on the entire TIN or just on user
selected Inclusion and/or Exclusion areas. The routine will automatically rework the TIN network for conformation
to a selected boundary, say a building outline. In the case of said building, a value of 10 could be subtracted from
the building outline. This will drop all of the triangulation within the outline by 10', thus creating a model of the
excavated area for the building. The modied TIN can then be saved to a new le, which could be used to compute
an excavation volume with Volumes by Triangulation. This routine does not allow for manual reconguration of the
TIN network. This is performed under Surface Tools, also in the Contour pulldown menu. This routine also includes
conversions to and from TIN les, DXF les and 3D Face entities.
Begin with the dialog shown here. First select a TIN model. You may choose between an .t or .tin le, a DXF le
(that includes 3DFACE entities), or 3DFACE entities in the current drawing. Specify the subject area by choosing
inclusion or exclusion perimeters, then press the next button.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1002
Load TIN File: Allows you to specify a triangulation (.t or .tin) le to load.
Load DXF File: Allows you to specify a DXF le to load. Only loads 3DFACE entities from the selected DXF le.
Select 3D Faces: Allows you to select 3DFACE entities from the current drawing. This also includes rectangular
3d faces from a plotted grid.
Pick Bounding Polylines: Allows you to select any inclusion/exclusion perimeter(s). When this button is selected,
the user is taken back to the drawing and prompted to select the perimeters. Press Enter when the selections are
nished to return back to the dialog.
Fast TIN Intersect: When checked, this command will perform a simple and fast check for overlapping triangles,
so is the preferred choice in most cases. However, if problems with the TIN are suspected, this option should be
unchecked, so that a complete and thorough check and repair of the TIN is performed.
Fill-in-holes: When checked, any missing triangulation or gap in the surface will be automatically lled in with
additional triangles. This option has to be set before loading the TIN le to take effect.
Region Mode: This option deals with nested or overlapping boundaries. When checked, AutoCAD hatch pattern
logic is applied, in which all nested boundaries are used in an alternating fashion, so that an Inclusion Boundary
within an Exclusion Boundary is still recognized. If this option is not checked, everything within an Exclusion
Boundary is ignored.
Next: Press this button to proceed to the next dialog after all selections have been made .
The next dialog allows you to perform mathematical operation(s) on the loaded TIN. Each operation is described
below. Keep in mind that generally these operations are to be performed on an area inside your inclusion perime-
ter (but excluding anything inside your exclusion perimeters). If you do not specify any perimeters, the desired
operation/s will be performed on the entire TIN.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1003
Add Value: Prompts for a value to Add to the subject area of the TIN.
Subtract Value: Prompts for a value to Subtract from the subject area of the TIN.
Multiply Value: Prompts for a value to Multiply to the subject area of the TIN.
Divide Value: Prompts for a value to Divide to the subject area of the TIN.
Add TIN: Raises the subject area of the current TIN by the elevation value from a second user selected TIN le.
This function is most applicable to applying a strata thickness TIN.
Subtract TIN: Lowers the subject area of the current TIN by the elevation value from a second user selected TIN
le.
Min TIN: This does a comparison between the current TIN and a second user selected TIN le, and applies the
lower value of the two TINs to the subject area.
Max TIN: This does a comparison between the current TIN and a second user selected TIN le, and applies the
higher value of the two TINs to the subject area.
Merge TIN: Merges the current subject TIN into a second user-specied TIN le. There are three methods:
Current TIN inside/Second TIN outside boundary: This method is only available when Bounding Polylines are
selected in the rst Triangulation File Utilities dialog. The current TIN will be used inside the boundary polylines
and the second TIN is used everywhere else. The current TIN le should be the smaller of the two surfaces since the
subject le will be joined or merged into the second le. For example, to merge a pad design into existing ground
with this method, choose the pad design as the current TIN, pick the pad perimeter as the bounding polyline and
use existing ground as the second TIN.
Second TIN inside/Current TIN outside boundary: This method uses the second TIN inside the boundary and
the current TIN everywhere else. The outline of the second TIN is used as the boundary if no bounding polylines
where selected in the initial dialog. For example, to merge a pad design into existing ground with this method,
choose the existing ground as the current TIN and choose the pad design as the second TIN.
Wipe, combine and repair Current TIN where overlaps Second TIN: This method removes triangles from the
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1004
current TIN for areas that overlap the second TIN. Then the second TIN is added into the current TIN surface and
the gap between the current and second TINs is triangulated to stitch them together. This method is useful when the
two TINs don't have matching have elevations on their common boundary. Then this method will create a transition
zone between the TINs.
Enhance Flats: This routine eliminates at triangles by adding a data point inside the triangle at a different
elevation to subdivide the triangle. The elevation of this point is calculated based on the slopes of the neighboring
triangles.
Translate: Moves the TIN points by the specied delta x, y and z.
Rotate: Rotates the TIN points by the specied rotation angle around a base point.
Scale: Scales the TIN points by the specied scale factor from a base point. The scale can be applied to
just the x,y of the TIN points or the z too. The scale can be used to convert a TIN between feet and meters.
Offset: Performs a perpendicular offset (from the face/s) to the TIN surface by the specied amount. The
routine offsets each point in the tin vertically by looking at the slopes that connect to the point. For points at slope
transition points such as at the bottom of a ditch, these corner points are effected by both slopes which means the
program can't hold either exactly. To hold both slopes exactly would require changing the x/y position of the tin
points which this routine doesn't do to avoid more complications. So if the offset surface needs to exactly hold the
slopes, then use another method like drawing cross sections for the surface, offsetting these sections, creating 3d
polylines from the sections and modeling the 3d polylines.
Simplify: Causes edges within the Tin mesh to be collapsed to reduce the number of triangles, edges, and
points within the mesh while having a minimal impact on the overall shape of the mesh. There are two methods.
Elevation Difference looks at the effect of removing a point from the Tin. The point is removed if the elevation
difference between the original point and the updated Tin is less than the tolerance. The Edge Cost method looks at
the effect of removing an edge from the Tin.
Tolerance: This setting is used by the Simplify command described below. Specify the maximum average
distance that any point can be moved outside of the plane of any triangle that connects to that point. Values might
range from .01 to .1 for most purposes.
Passes: For elevation difference, this is the number of times the program will check through all the points.
Hold Breaklines: Further analyzes the TIN by focusing on the edges, calculating the angular difference be-
tween adjacent triangular faces. If the angular difference between edges is greater than the specied Breakline
Angle, it is considered to be a breakline, and it is preserved. If it's angular difference is determined to be below
the Breakline Angle, it becomes a candidate for removal. In that case, the Breakline Weight factor is applied to
the corresponding vertex, adjusting it's original value. If the resulting value is still below the Tolerance, it is then
removed. The number of vertices removed is inversely proportional to the Breakline Weight factor, so the greater
the Breakline Weight factor, the fewer vertices that are removed, the lower the Breakline Weight factor, the more
vertices that are removed.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1005
TIN Statistics: Generates a report of the TIN statistics, including number of points, edges, and triangles, and
minimum and maximum Z value.
Subdivide: Subdivides triangles to make them more equilateral.
Set New Elev: Sets all TIN faces in the subject area to the elevation specied.
Set NULLs to Elev: Sets all NULL values in the subject area to the elevation specied.
Set Elev to NULL: Sets all of the elevation values in the subject area to NULL.
Set Elev by Surface: Sets all TIN faces within the subject area to the elevations from a second surface le within
the same area. You will be prompted to select a second TIN le or grid le. Only areas common to both surfaces
will be applied to the subject TIN.
Output Options: The following three options determine what part or parts of the TIN modications that will be
saved to the new TIN le. If the entire TIN is to be saved, all three options should be toggled on.
Insides: If this is the only option checked, only changes made to the TIN within the inclusion perimeter will
be saved. TIN entities outside of the perimeter will not be saved to the named le.
Border: When the routine re-works the TINto t around a perimeter, a small horizontal offset is automatically
applied to prevent the formation of vertical faces. The Border function will save changes made to TIN in this
offset area.
Outsides: If this is the only option checked, TIN entities inside of the inclusion perimeter will not be saved
to the named le. Everything outside of the perimeter will be saved.
Save As TIN: Saves the current TIN as an .t or .tin le.
Save As DXF: Saves the current TIN as a .dxf le. This format can be used by many other CAD programs.
Draw As 3DFaces: Draws the current TIN as 3D Faces in the current viewport. The Layer window is used to
specify the layer that the faces will be created in.
Converts the left mouse button to a zoom function. Hold the button down and move the mouse up or down
to zoom in and out.
Converts the left mouse button to a rotate function. Hold the button down to rotate the view in any X, Y or
Z direction. When the XY appears in the window, the rotation will occur relative to the XY axis. When the mouse is
moved toward the outer perimeter of the window, the XY will change to a Z. Holding the button down while the Z is
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1006
visible will rotate the drawing on the Z axis. Converts the left mouse button to a pan function. Hold down
on the button while moving the mouse to pan. Holding down the mouse wheel will also serve as a pan function in
any of the above modes.
Toggles shading on and off. Restores the graphics to plan view. Reverses the effects of all
operations performed on the TIN and reverts it back to its original status. This icon exits the routine. If the
TIN has been modied, you will be prompted to save.
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface
Keyboard Command: TINUTIL
Prerequisite: 3D Faces, a TIN le or a DXF le.
Surface Manager
The Surface Manager toolkit allows the user to modify pre-dened triangulated surfaces, making real-time mod-
ications and updates to contours and associated TIN (Triangulated Irregular Network) denitions. Functionality
includes swapping TIN lines, adding breaklines to the surface, adding or removing points, adjusting point eleva-
tions, removing TIN lines, drawing or removing contour lines and labels, re-contouring at a different interval or
with different label settings, etc. Contour lines are automatically updated to reect any changes made to the TIN. A
surface must be named and saved by of one of the surface modeling routines (in the Triangulate tab) as a prerequisite
to using the Surface Manager tools.
All of the tools available in the Surface Manager are also available in the Surface>>Triangulation Surface Manager
y-out menu, as shown in this gure. Their functions are identical but require a surface to be set current. Changes
made apply only to the current surface.
The Surface Manager dialog box contains the following options:
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1007
Set Current designates a surface as current for editing with various surface tool functions, such as modifying TIN
lines, setting a new contour interval, labeling contours, etc.
Add allows you to add a surface by selecting a surface model le (.TIN or .FLT).
Remove allows you to remove a surface from the list of stored surfaces.
Rename allows you to rename a surface.
Copy creates a copy of the TIN le and adds the copy as a new entry.
Edit allows you to perform various TIN-related modications to the current surface. Using the Edit function will
activate the command line, where the user will be prompted with the following options:
Add Point (AP) adds a triangulation point to the network by picking a point from the screen. The pick must be
inside an existing triangle. The elevation for the selected point is interpolated from the surrounding TIN network.
This is a good method for adding additional triangulation to the surface in a sparse area. Also, a new elevation can
be specied for the picked point. This function does not create Carlson points, and the point will not be saved to the
.CRD le.
Remove Point (RP) removes an existing triangulation intersection from the TIN network. The affected triangulation
re-adjusts to compensate for the missing intersection. Contours update accordingly.
Move Point (MP) is a combination of removing a point and adding it at a new location.
Add Breakline (AB) adds a breakline to the surface by picking beginning and ending points on the screen. The
endpoint snap automatically turns on. Only one breakline can be created at a time. The TIN network will
recongure to follow the new breakline and update the contours. This does not create 3d polylines in the drawing.
Add Entities (AE) adds a number of points and breaklines into the selection set by selection of existing entities into
the current surface.
Swap Edge edges (SW) swaps common TIN edges to create two different triangles from the original triangle
conguration. Contours automatically update to reect changes made to the TIN. Some common edges may not be
swapped because of the orientation of the two triangles.
Set Elevation (SP) Sets a new elevation for a specied TIN intersection. The affected TIN is adjusted and the
contours are updated.
Remove Tri (RT) removes a TIN line from the surface by picking a TIN line or selecting an interior point. Contours
are removed from the affected area.
Hide Tris (ST) turns the TIN network on and off.
Point addition/removal and elevation-related changes made to the TIN are only reected in the surface le and
the contours resulting from that surface le. Point changes are not saved to the .CRD le and 3D linework is not
updated in the drawing. Use traditional methods to update these entities if desired.
Prompts
The command line will prompt as follows:
Add Pnt(AP),Remove Pnt(RP),Move Pnt(MP),Set elev(SP),Add Breakline(AB),
Add Entities(AE), SWap edge(SW),Remove Tri(RT),Show/Hide Tris(ST), Press Enter when done.
Adding points, Pick point or enter keyword: Type in the two letters of the function to be performed and press
enter.
Add Points
Add Pnt(AP),Remove Pnt(RP),Move Pnt(MP),Set elev(SP),Add Breakline(AB),
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1008
Add Entities(AE), SWap edge(SW),Remove Tri(RT),Show/Hide Tris(ST), Press Enter when done.
Adding points, Pick point or enter keyword: Press Enter to accept the default mode of Adding Points. Pick a
point inside the TIN model at the desires location. The default elevation will be interpolated from the TIN model.
Enter the elevation of new point [559.112171]: 560
The surface will be recalculated using the input data.
Remove Points
Add Pnt(AP),Remove Pnt(RP),Move Pnt(MP),Set elev(SP),Add Breakline(AB),
Add Entities(AE), SWap edge(SW),Remove Tri(RT),Show/Hide Tris(ST), Press Enter when done.
Adding points, Pick point or enter keyword: RP Pick close to the area that you want an elevation point removed.
Add Breakline
Add Pnt(AP),Remove Pnt(RP),Move Pnt(MP),Set elev(SP),Add Breakline(AB),
Add Entities(AE), SWap edge(SW),Remove Tri(RT),Show/Hide Tris(ST), Press Enter when done.
Adding points, Pick point or enter keyword: AB
Pick near the 1st point of breakline: Pick a point
Pick near the 2nd point of breakline: Pick a point When adding a breakline, OSNAP Endpoint will default on.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1009
Swap Triangle Edge
Add Pnt(AP),Remove Pnt(RP),Move Pnt(MP),Set elev(SP),Add Breakline(AB),
Add Entities(AE), SWap edge(SW),Remove Tri(RT),Show/Hide Tris(ST), Press Enter when done.
Adding points, Pick point or enter keyword: SW
Please select an internal edge to swap: Select desired edge.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1010
Set Point Elevation
Add Pnt(AP),Remove Pnt(RP),Move Pnt(MP),Set elev(SP),Add Breakline(AB),
Add Entities(AE), SWap edge(SW),Remove Tri(RT),Show/Hide Tris(ST), Press Enter when done.
Adding points, Pick point or enter keyword: SP
Pick near the point to have elevation set: Pick near point 34.
Enter new elevation of the point [597.200000]: 600
Remove TRI Line
Add Pnt(AP),Remove Pnt(RP),Move Pnt(MP),Set elev(SP),Add Breakline(AB),
Add Entities(AE), SWap edge(SW),Remove Tri(RT),Show/Hide Tris(ST), Press Enter when done.
Adding points, Pick point or enter keyword: RT
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1011
Remove TRI Fence
Removes all triangles crossed by the fence chain
Add Pnt(AP),Remove Pnt(RP),Move Pnt(MP),Set elev(SP),Add Breakline(AB),
Add Entities(AE), SWap edge(SW),Remove Tri(RT), Remove Tri by Fence (RF),Show/Hide Tris(ST), Press
Enter when done.
Adding points, Pick point or enter keyword: RF
Pick beginning of fence:
Pick next point of fence or press Enter to nish:
Pick next point of fence or press Enter to nish:
Pick next point of fence or press Enter to nish:
To conclude the Surface Edit mode, press Enter at the end of the internal command sequence. This will return to the
Surface Manager dialog. If user presses Escape key instead, the following dialog is displayed:
this prevents accidental data loss in case of unintentional use of Esc key.
Properties allows the user to alter the drawing display properties for TIN lines, contours and labels for the selected
surface. Applicable dialogs from Triangulate and Contour are used to provide a full set of options. When accessed,
settings for the current surface display conguration are set. To make a modication, simply specify the desired
change and press ok. For instance, if Draw Triangulation Lines was checked on, unchecking the box and pressing
ok will redraw the surface without the TIN lines. If the contours were drawn at 1 foot intervals, setting the interval
value to 2 and pressing OK will redraw the contours at 2 foot intervals. Refer to the Triangulate and Contour
section of the manual for a more detailed explanation of the options below.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1012
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1013
Done exits the Surface Manager and saves any modications performed to the surface/s updating the .t or .tin le.
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Triangulation Surface Manager
Keyboard Command: surface mgr
Prerequisite: A triangulated (non-grid) surface
Make 3D Grid File
This command creates a grid (.GRD) le which serves as a surface model for use in many of the other Surface
routines. The program internally makes a triangular network of the data points (if Triangulation is selected as the
modeling method) and then interpolates the elevation values of a rectangular grid at the specied grid resolution.
Data points can be either points, inserts, lines, or polylines. Lines and polylines are treated as breaklines in the
triangulation.
Gridding as a means of modeling surface features is generally less favorable than triangulating as the surface
is dened only at the intersection of the grid lines. This can lead to inaccuracies around local features such as
ditches or curb lines, since the grid resolution must be small enough to adequately capture the changes in these
local regions. Contrast this with Triangulated Networks which carry all this information at every point along the
features. Gridding can, however, be useful for modeling large sites in general trends such as watershed analyses and
large-scale volume computations.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1014
Grid superimposed over triangulated features
The grid location is specied by rst picking a lower left corner and then an upper right corner. The screen cannot
be twisted when this is done because grids always run north-south and east-west.
The dialog box sets the range of elevations to process, modeling method and grid resolution. Each of these items is
described below.
Source Data: This option selects the type of data to use for griding. The Screen Entities option processes
selected 3D entities from the drawing including points, lines, polylines, 3D faces and inserts. The Coordinate
File and Text File options read point data from the selected le. These methods are useful for large datasets
that would take extra memory and time to draw as points in the drawing. For the Text File, the program will
prompt for the order of the elds and the delimiter. The Triangulation File option will interpolate the grid
elevations from the selected triangulation surface.
Range of Elevations/Values to Process: Entities with elevations or values outside the range to process are
ignored and will not be used for the griding.
Modeling Method: The modeling method almost always should be triangulation for surface topographic grid
les. Polynomial, inverse distance, kriging and linear least squares apply to random data points for surfaces
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1015
like underground features, usually sourced by such methods as drillholes, data tables, etc.
Triangulation Mode: When using Triangulation and Polynomial methods, There are four triangulation
modes: AutoDetect, Triangulation Only, Intersection with Triangulation and Intersection Only.
Auto Detect method automatically chooses between the Triangulation Only and Intersection with Trian-
gulation methods. If the selected surface entities are primarily made of polylines, then the Intersection
with Triangulation method is used. Otherwise the Triangulation Only method is used.
Triangulation Only method builds a triangulation surface out of all the selected points, lines and poly-
lines. All lines and polylines are treated as breaklines. Grid node elevations are calculated based on the
triangulation.
Triangulation with Subdivision method uses the subdivisional surfaces modeling method. This option
causes each triangle in the triangulation surface model to be subdivided into an average of three smaller
triangles per subdivision generation. This gives a much smoother surface model, where instead of one
triangle, there are now three or more.
Intersection Only method goes directly to the Steepest Intersection method using the selected lines and
polylines. The Steepest Intersection method is used to assign the grid node elevations from the linework
of the triangulation lines and the selected lines and polylines. The triangulation step is skipped and any
selected point data is not used. This method can be used for making grids out of polylines such as a
contour map as long as the surface is dened just by contour polylines without needing spot elevation
points. Skipping the triangulation step makes this method a lot faster especially for large les.
Use Inclusion/Exclusion Areas: This option will prompt for inclusion and/or exclusion perimeter polylines
and will only assign grid cell elevations within these areas and leave the rest of the grid cells as Null.
Grid Resolution: The grid resolution is specied by either the number of grid cells or by the size for each
grid cell. It is usually best to set the Dimensions of a Cell to a known size, and the program will calculate the
''number of cells in X and Y.'' While the program can handle really large grids with no limit, a general rule of
thumb is to keep the total number of grids cells under 500,000 (about 700 by 700 cells) to limit the processing
time. The grid location and resolution can also be specied by using the position/resolution from an existing
grid le. In this case, the location and resolution of the new grid will match those of the selected grid le
which is useful for routines that require two grid les with identical locations and resolutions.
No elevations are calculated on grid cells that extend beyond the extent of the data. The gure shows an example
of how the grid is calculated to the limits of the data points. Extrapolation can be used to calculate elevations for
the grid cells that are beyond the data limits. When there are grid cells with no elevation in a grid (.GRD) le,
many routines will prompt Extrapolate grid to full grid size? Extrapolation lls in all the grid cells. The method
to extrapolate uses a safe calculation that tends to average out or level the extrapolated values. So extrapolated grid
areas are not as accurate as grid areas within the limits of the data. Grid File Utilities can be used to apply and
save extrapolation to a grid le. The Plot 3D Grid command can then draw the grid le so that you can see the
extrapolation.
A Carlson grid (.GRD) le has the following format:
Line 1 is the lower left Y coordinate
Line 2 is the lower left X coordinate
Line 3 is the upper right Y coordinate
Line 4 is the upper right X coordinate
Line 5 is the X direction grid resolution
Line 6 is the Y direction grid resolution
The rest of the lines are the Z values of the grid intersects starting from the lower left moving in the left to right
direction and ending at the upper right. If the intersect has no value, the letter 'N' is saved instead of the Z value for
Null values. An example is shown in the Display-Edit Report dialog.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1016
Griding from Contour Maps
Agrid le can be created fromcontours represented as polylines with elevation. The programcalculates the elevation
of each grid corner by looking for contour intersections in eight directions (N, S, E, W, NE, SE, SW, NW) and then
interpolating the elevation between the two steepest intersections.
To accurately model the surface, it might be necessary to add entities in addition to the contour polylines. For
one, spot elevation points can be added for the high and low points. Otherwise the grid model might plateau at
the last contour. Also 3D breaklines need to be added on long narrow ridge and valley contours because in these
areas the program will nd the same contour when it looks for intersections in the eight directions. When all eight
intersections are the same contour, the interpolated grid elevation equals the contour elevation instead of rising up
the ridge or dipping in the valley. The 3D breaklines force interpolation along the ridge or valley. To draw these
polylines, set the OSNAP to Nearest and run the 3D Polyline command. Then draw the polyline by picking the
contour polylines where the breakline crosses them. Another way to quickly create breaklines is to rst draw 2D
polylines. Then convert these polylines into 3D polylines with the Screen option in the 2D to 3D Polyline by Surface
Model command found on the 3Dpoly menu. There is also an automatic way to draw these breaklines. Under 3D
Data, use the command: Create Ridge polylines from Contours.
Prompts
Grid File to Create File Selection Dialog
Enter a name for the grid le.
Use position from another le or pick grid position [<Pick>/File]?
Pick Lower Left grid corner <8111.88,3985.08>: pick a point for the lower left limit of the grid
Pick Upper Right grid corner <8366.88,4195.08>: pick a point
Make Grid File dialog box
In this dialog, you specify the grid resolution and whether or not to include data points with zero elevations. You
can specify the resolution by entering the number of grid cells in the X and Y directions. By the Dimensions option,
you to set the X and Y size for each grid cell.
Reading points ...
Select points, lines, polylines and faces to grid from.
Select objects: Specify opposite corner: 1075 found
Select objects:
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1017
Reading points ... 980
Finding points on breaklines ...
Ignored 2729 duplicate points.
Inserting breaklines 3480 ...
Triangulating points ... 980
Assigning grid values> 1800
Writing grid le: C:\Carlson 2008\WORK\example1.grd
Pick the Lower Left grid corner: pick a point for the lower left limit of the grid
Pick the Upper Right grid corner: pick a point
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface
Keyboard Command: mkgrid
Prerequisite: Entities that dene the surface
Draw 3D Grid File
This command draws the 3D grid mesh of the chosen grid (.GRD) le. Each grid cell can be drawn as a 3D Face
entity, Polyface mesh, Text or temporary lines. 3D Faces and Polyface Meshes can be viewed/used in the following
commands: 3D Viewer Window, Viewpoint 3D, Hide, Shade, 3D Surface FlyOver, and Slope Zone Analysis.
If Use Vertical Exaggeration is checked, grid elevations are multiplied by the value specied.
Exaggeration Method species whether to use an Absolute exaggeration method or Relative to Base, which uses
the specied base elevation.
Specify the type of entities to draw in Draw Method. 3D Faces are described above. The Preview Only option
draws the grid using temporary vectors. This method provides a much faster way to view the grid. However these
temporary vectors are erased when the viewport is modied. This means as soon as you execute zoom, redraw,
regen or plot, this grid will disappear. You can quickly redraw the grid by typing in VG for View Grid at the
command prompt. Polyface Mesh is similar to 3D Faces except it is a single entity. The Text option will label the
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1018
grid elevation at the grid corner. The text is placed center justied over the grid corner. To reduce clutter, there is an
option to skip rows and columns.
Specify the layer for the grid entities in Layer Name.
Specify the initial viewing direction in View.
When Color by Elevation is checked, the grid will be colored based on a table of user-dened elevation ranges and
the assigned colors. There is also an option to subdivide the grid cells at the color zone transitions. This is simi-
lar to the Elevation Zone Analysis command. Use the Specify Elevation Zones command to dene ranges and colors.
When Draw Side Faces is checked, the program will draw vertical faces around the perimeter of the grid. The side
faces will be drawn vertically from the grid perimeter to the Sides Base Elevation. You may optionally specify the
Sides Base Elevation, it defaults to 0.00.
When checked, Reverse Face Order changes the direction of the points for a grid cell from clockwise to counter-
clockwise. The order applies to shading the grid cell in 3D render viewers such as the 3D Viewer Window command.
The grid cell will only appear shaded when viewing the grid cell from the clockwise side. Viewing from the other
side will show a wire frame. The default is to show the shaded side from the top-down view. This option allows you
to draw the grid so that the underside of the grid is shaded.
When checked, Draw Corners Only will draw the side lines only at the grid corners. Otherwise side lines are drawn
down each perimeter grid cell.
When checked, Extrapolate Grid to Full Size draws the entire rectangular surface of the grid.
When Use Inclusion/Exclusion Perimeters is checked, it allows you to select inclusion and exclusion areas. Only
grid cells inside the inclusion polylines will be drawn. Grid cells inside the exclusion polylines will not be drawn.
When checked, Subdivide Grid Around Inclusion Perimeter subdivides grid cells that are partially inside and
outside the perimeter into smaller resolution grid cells.
Drawn grid le using inclusion perimeter and side faces option
viewed with Viewpoint 3D
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Draw Surface
Keyboard Command: plotgrid
Prerequisite: a grid (.GRD) File
Two Surface Volumes
Two Grid Surface Volumes calculates the cut and ll volumes between two surfaces modeled by grid (.GRD) les.
These two grid les must have the same location and resolution. To create the grid les, use the Make 3D Grid File
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1019
routine. When creating the second grid le, choose Use position of another le and select the rst grid le. Using
the position of the rst grid le sets the location and resolution of second grid to match the rst.
There are several other routines that calculate volumes based on grid les. Grid based volumes can be calculated
by One Grid Surface Volumes, Volumes by Layer, Stockpile Volumes, and Pond/Pit Volumes. These routines have
special prompting and calculate the grid surfaces and volume in one step.
Volumes by Two Surface Volumes has three steps:
1. Creating the rst grid le with Make 3D Grid File
2. Creating the second grid le with Make 3D Grid File
3. Running Two Grid Surface Volumes
One advantage to this command is that you have more output options to help analyze volumes.
Besides grid based volumes, volumes can also be calculated between triangulation surfaces using the Volumes by
Triangulation commands. Cross section end area is another volume method that is used by the Calculate Sections
Volume command in the Civil Design module.
There are also options to specify inclusion and exclusion areas. When inclusion areas are specied, only the volume
within this inclusion area is calculated. Important: Whenever possible you should use a polyline that represents
the limits of disturbed area as the inclusion perimeter. Volumes within an exclusion area are not included in the
calculations. Inclusion and exclusion areas are represented by closed polylines and must be drawn prior to calling
this routine.
If the grid contains grid cells that have no elevations, you have the option to extrapolate elevations from the grid
cells with elevations. When you choose not to extrapolate, no volume is calculated for the grid cells left without
elevations. In general, extrapolation is not very accurate and should be avoided whenever possible. Sometimes you
may get small amounts of cut in stockpiles that should only be ll, or small amounts of ll in pits that should only
be cut. These extraneous quantities are due to extrapolation at the border and should be small enough to be ignored.
When inclusion or exclusion polylines are used, the program will automatically extrapolate the grids. In addition to
writing a volume report to the le, printer or screen, there are several volume report options.
Write Difference Grid File creates a grid (.GRD) le of the elevation difference of the two grid les.
Draw Difference Contours creates a contour map of the difference or depth between the two grid les.
Draw Elevation Difference in Each Cell plots the elevation difference at the grid corners which is the same as the
Elevation Difference routine.
Draw Volume in Each Cell plots the calculated volume for each grid cell and is an excellent way to verify the
volume calculation. If a cell contains both cut and ll, both values will be plotted.
Calculate Elevation Zone Volumes calculates the cut and ll between different elevation ranges.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1020
Draw Cut/Fill Color Map lls each grid cell with different shades based on the average cut or ll in the cell. Red
shades are used for cut and blue for ll. There is an option to draw a color legend. You can subdivide the grid cells
at zone transitions. Also, there is an option to control the zone intervals and range.
Use Report Formatter allows you to customize the report by choosing the elds to report and their order. Also the
report formatter can be used to output the report data to Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Access.
Process Another Area with Current Grids runs Two Surface Volumes again using the same grid les but different
inclusion/exclusion polylines. This option saves the step of reloading the grid les to calculate volumes from the
same grids for multiple areas.
The Cut Swell Factor value is multiplied by the cut volume in the report.
The Fill Swell Factor value is multiplied by the ll volume in the report.
Report Tons allows you to enter the material density and the program will report the cut and ll tons in addition to
volume.
Given two accurate grid (.GRD) les, this routine will calculate accurate volumes. To verify the volume calculation,
it is a good idea to check the grid (.GRD) les either by drawing them with Draw Surface >> Draw 3D Grid File
and viewing them with the 3D Vieweror by contouring the grids with the Contour Grid File command.
Existing surface
Final surface contours with a closed polyline
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1021
Contours from the Draw Depth/Difference Contours option. Cut contours are red, ll contours are blue, daylight
contours are green. This is a good way to check that both surfaces are modeled correctly and to verify the volumes.
Sample Two Surface Volumes report:
Volume Report
Comparing Grid: C:\scad2006\data\simo.grd
and Grid: C:\scad2006\data\final.grd
Lower left grid corner : 186551.67,57624.98
Upper right grid corner: 186828.81,57897.09
X grid resolution: 75, Y grid resolution: 75
X grid cell size: 3.70, Y grid cell size: 3.63
Total inclusion area: 37016.71 sq ft, 0.850 acres
Cut to Fill ratio: 1.14
Cut (C.Y) / Area (acres): 3642.35
Fill (C.Y) / Area (acres): 3182.70
Cut vol: 83570.89 cubic ft, 3095.22 cubic yards
Fill vol: 73024.56 cubic ft, 2704.61 cubic yards
Prompts
Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none:
Select objects: pick a closed polyline for the limits of disturbed area
Select objects: press Enter
Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none:
Select objects: press Enter
Specify Base Grid File Selection Dialog
Choose a grid (.GRD) le to process.
Extrapolate grid to full grid size (Yes/<No>)? press Enter If you enter Yes to this prompt, surface elevations will
be computed for any grid cells that have null elevations.
Sample report from the Calculate Elevation Zone Volumes option:
(Calculates the cut and ll in different elevation ranges at a user-specied interval and beginning at a user-specied
starting elevation.)
Volumes by elevation zone
Zone 20.00 to 30.00
Cut volume : 0.30 cubic ft, 0.01 cubic yards
Fill volume: 107.90 cubic ft, 4.00 cubic yards
Zone 30.00 to 40.00
Cut volume : 4.88 cubic ft, 0.18 cubic yards
Fill volume: 73021.14 cubic ft, 2704.49 cubic yards
Running total:
Cut volume : 5.18 cubic ft, 0.19 cubic yards
Fill volume: 73129.05 cubic ft, 2708.48 cubic yards
Zone 40.00 to 50.00
Cut volume : 65044.26 cubic ft, 2409.05 cubic yards
Fill volume: 0.25 cubic ft, 0.01 cubic yards
Running total:
Cut volume : 65049.44 cubic ft, 2409.24 cubic yards
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1022
Fill volume: 73129.29 cubic ft, 2708.49 cubic yards
Zone 50.00 to 60.00
Cut volume : 17786.85 cubic ft, 658.77 cubic yards
Fill volume: 0.00 cubic ft, 0.00 cubic yards
Running total:
Cut volume : 82836.29 cubic ft, 3068.01 cubic yards
Specify Final Grid File Selection Dialog
Choose a grid (.GRD) le to process.
Extrapolate grid to full grid size (Yes/<No>)? press Enter
Volume Report Options dialog
This shows a grid drawn by Plot 3D Grid File and volume values drawn by the Draw Volume in Each Cell option
of the Two Surface Volumes routine. Cut appears as negative and ll as positive. Notice that cells bordering cut and
ll regions contain a little of both.
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Volumes By Grid Surfaces
Keyboard Command: volcalc2
Prerequisite: Two grid les
Volumes By Layer
This is the easiest yet still equally accurate method for calculating volumes. For this command, volumes are
calculated in one step by a simple window of the area, selecting the items, and calculate.
First, you must specify the grid location and resolution. The grid location should enclose the area for volume
calculations. Next the program asks for the layer names of the entities for the base and nal surfaces. You designate
the layers to use for each surface either by typing the layer names or by picking from the screen, then during the
routine you select the entities to use. You may safely use the keyword ALL to select the entities, since you have
pre-dened the layers to use, and all those entities not on the specied layers will be ltered out. These entities, for
use in modeling the surfaces, can be points, lines (such as triangulation lines), 2D polylines (such as contours), and
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1023
3D polylines (such as breaklines).
Inclusion and exclusion perimeters may optionally be specied to limit the volume calculation area on the grid.
An inclusion perimeter should be used if there is a closed polyline for the limit of the disturbed area. Then the
program internally generates grids of the surfaces from the entities on the corresponding layers and then calculates
and reports the volume. The main disadvantage to this routine is that it doesn't have the special output options of
Two Grid Surface Volumes such as Depth Contours.
Prompts
Command: layervol
Pick Lower Left limit of surface area: pick lower left corner of grid
Pick Upper Right limit of surface area: pick upper right corner of grid
You are then prompted to designate layers:
Press Select Layers from Screen to show the routine which layers to use by selecting sample objects from those
layers.
Select entities on layers of Existing surface. select sample object(s)
Select objects: Specify opposite corner: 3 found
Select objects: press Enter to conclude selection.
Select entities on layers of Final surface. select sample object(s)
Select objects: Specify opposite corner: 10 found
Select objects: press Enter to conclude selection.
Reading points ...
Select surface entities on corresponding layers.
Select objects: all lters out those objects not on designated layers
85 found
Select objects: press Enter to conclude selection.
Reading points ... 9396
Assigning grid values> 5300
Pass> 28 Null Z values left> 0
Writing grid le: C:\Documents and Settings\. . .\USER\grid1.grd
Assigning grid values> 5300
Pass> 43 Null Z values left> 0
Writing grid le: C:\Documents and Settings\. . .\USER\grid2.grd
Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none: select inclusion perimeter
Select objects: 1 found
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1024
Select objects: press Enter to conclude selection.
Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select objects: press Enter for none.
Reading cell> 5346
Pass> 28 Null Z values left> 0
Reading cell> 5346
Pass> 43 Null Z values left> 0
Pre-processing grid cells ....
Processing cells ...
Select point for color legend (Enter for None): press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Volumes By Grid Surfaces
Keyboard Command: layervol
Prerequisite: Entities that dene both the base and nal surfaces.
Spot Elevations By Surface Model
This command will calculate the Z coordinate of any point that falls within the surface model. Use this command to
calculate the elevations for points of a design for slope staking or for putting spot elevations on a topography map.
The calculated points can be stored in the current coordinate (.CRD) le. A surface model is either selected from a
grid (.GRD) or triangulation (.TIN or FLT) le or internally calculated from the existing entities on the drawing.
Spot elevations can be calculated at various user-specied points or at a specic interval. For random spot elevations,
the user picks or enters the X,Y coordinates for each spot elevations. The elevation at the current position of the
crosshairs is displayed in real-time in a small window. For interval spot elevations, the alignment for the intervals is
dened by a polyline that must be created before starting this routine.
Prompts
Source of surface model (File/<Screen>)? press Enter Use the File option to select a grid (.GRD) or a triangula-
tion (.TIN or .FLT) le.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1025
Layer for points <POINTS>: press Enter
Add spot points to Coordinate File (Yes/<No>)? Yes This option stores any points created in this routine to a .crd
le and draws Carlson point entities.
Draw nodes only (Yes/<No>)? press Enter This prompt only appears if Add points to Coordinate File is off. This
option either draws only POINT entities or an X mark and elevation text.
If you specied the use of a le for the surface model, you are then prompted to select the surface model le.
If you specied the use of Screen entities, you are prompted for:
Pick Lower Left limit of Surface area:
Pick Upper Right limit of surface area:
then the following dialog box appears with the settings to make a 3D Grid le:
For picked point spot elevations:
Random spot elevations or interval along pline (<Random>/Interval)? press Enter
Enter or pick point (Enter to end): pick a point
Enter or pick point (Enter to end): press Enter
For spot elevations along a polyline:
Random spot elevations or interval along pline (<Random>/Interval)? Interval
Pick the centerline polyline: pick a polyline
Interval along polyline <50.0>: 25
Number of left offsets <0>: 1
Enter left offset interval <25.0>: 10
Number of right offsets <0>: 2
Enter right offset interval <10.0>: press Enter
Spot Elevations with Add to Coordinate File off
and Draw Nodes Only off
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1026
Interval spot elevations for points 1-32
''Random'' spot elevations for points 33-37
Pulldown Menu Location: 3D Data
Keyboard Command: spotelv
Prerequisite: Surface entities or a grid (.GRD) le
Tag Hard Breakline Polylines
This command tags polylines with a description so that Triangulate & Contour can identify these polylines as hard
breaklines. The tag is invisible and doesn't change the polyline. Triangulate & Contour will not smooth the contours
as they cross these hard breaklines, even with contour smoothing turned on. For example you could tag 3D polylines
that represent a wall or a curb so that the contours go straight across without smoothing curves. If contour smoothing
is turned off, this tag had no effect.
Prompts
Select hard breakline polylines. (For no smoothing in Triangulate & Contour)
Select objects: Select breaklines to tag
Select objects: press Enter to conclude selection
Set 14 polylines as hard breaklines.
Pulldown Menu Location: 3D Data >> Hard Breaklines
Keyboard Command: hardbrk
Prerequisite: Polylines
Untag Hard Breakline Polylines
This command removes hard breakline description tags from polylines. These tags are used by Triangulate &
Contour to identify polylines as hard breaklines. Contours are not smoothed as they cross these hard breaklines,
even with contour smoothing turned on. This routine untags polylines so that contours are smoothed across them.
If contour smoothing is turned off, hard breaklines have no effect.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1027
Prompts
Select polylines to remove hard breakline tag from.
Select objects: select polylines
Pulldown Menu Location: 3D Data >> Hard Breaklines
Keyboard Command: softbrk
Prerequisite: Polylines with hard breakline tag
Import Google Earth Surface
In addition to providing a graphical method for displaying feature-rich data located anywhere on the globe, Google
Earth also provides the ability for software applications to extract its underlying terrain data. While the elevational
accuracy of the Google Earth surface should be considered extremely coarse, it might be suitable for large-scale
watershed modeling studies, preliminary land-planning studies or ''proof-of-concept'' preliminary designs.
When extracting terrain data from Google Earth, it is important to keep ''diminishing returns'' in mind. As an
example, a land surveyor might perform a traditional grid-based topographic survey by sampling the land every 50
feet. Although a 25 foot grid spacing would yield more accurate results than a 50 foot grid, it would typically take
at least twice as long to survey. Harvesting terrain data from Google Earth operates in a similar fashion:
1. The Google Earth ''project area'' is identied and the limits of the site are calculated
2. Horizontal and vertical ''sample'' intervals are established
3. Terrain data is gathered at each identied sample location and used to form a surface model
Consider the following example. Based on the physical screen size of the Google Earth application and the ''zoom''
(or ''view'') resolution of a project site, the following values (summarized at the bottom of the dialog box) were
returned:
Unit
Horizontal Vertical
Feet 1637 966
Pixels 1366 809
Feet/Pixel 1.19 1.19
Google Earth View Area
In the sample above, the total area is calculated and displayed (0.1 mi
2
) along with the desired ''projection'' systemfor
our project site. Although it might be desired to sample every pixel in this project... 1,107,270 = (1366+1)
*
(809+1),
in all, the ''point of diminishing return'' would be quickly reached and could clog Google servers with extraneous
terrain requests; see the NOTE section below.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1028
Spatial Reference: Displays the spatial reference coordinate projection system of the current drawing. The projec-
tion can be set using the Drawing Setup command.
Extent - Current Google Earth View: Gets the overall dimensions of the Google Earth session and displays the
results in both pixels and the appropriate units of measure.
Extent - Current Drawing View: Gets the overall dimensions of the current CAD view and displays the results in
both pixels and the appropriate units of measure.
Extent - Select from Drawing: Sets the overall dimensions of the Google Earth session to conform with a drawing
window from CAD and displays the results in both pixels and the appropriate units of measure.
Pixel Sampling Interval: Allows the ability to indicate how often a pixel row or column should be sampled for
terrain elevation. Smaller intervals result in higher total samples and longer processing time.
Consider the following ''sample'' diagram:
Referring back to our horizontal and vertical samples shown in the dialog box above, we are requesting:
Requesting
Horizontal Vertical
Pixel Interval 15 15
Samples 92 = Int(1366/15)+1 54 = Int(809/15)+1
Sample Every 17 ft (approx.) = Int(1637/92) 17 ft (approx.) = Int(966/54)
Google Earth Sampling
The resulting total samples 4968 = (92)
*
(54) and it is recommended that this value be at or below the Google Earth
session threshold of 5000.
Note:
In an effort to protect their servers from abuse, Google will rapidly return 5,000 sample requests per Google
Earth session and then ''throttle down'' the remaining sample requests to about 1 per second. In the example
above but with a sample interval of 1H and 1V, the terrain surface would be completed in a little over 12 days,
18 hours. For this reason, it is strongly suggested that the horizontal and vertical sampling intervals be set so
that the sample result is at or below the 5000 sample threshold.
The Import Google Earth Surface routine fetches terrain data in real-time from the Google servers and requires
an Internet connection to proceed. In the event that an Internet connection is not available, the following error
message may be displayed: ''Failed to initialize Google Earth. Please ensure Google Earth client software is
functional and online''
It bears repeating that the terrain data returned by Google Earth should only be used for illustrative or proof-
of-concept purposes only!
To import a Google Earth image into your drawing, use the Place Google Earth Image command.
To import KML content into your drawing, use the Import Google Earth File command.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1029
To export content from your drawing to a KML le, use the Export Google Earth File command.
Prompts
Identify rst corner: Identify one corner of a drawing window that should be used to set the Google Earth display
Identify opposite corner: Identify the opposite corner of a drawing window that should be used to set the Google
Earth display
Pulldown Menu Location: Civil > Surface > Import/Export Surface, Survey > Surface > Import/Export Surface,
Takeoff > Tools > Import/Export, Construction > Import/Export
Keyboard Command: gesurface
Prerequisite: Coordinate projection system, Functioning version of Google Earth with Terrain enabled, Internet
connection
Design Pad Template
This command creates design slopes from a perimeter polyline at specied cut/ll slopes to reach existing ground.
This routine can be used to design building pads, pits, roads, ditches, stockpiles, etc. The design is drawn as 3D
polylines for the cut/ll slopes and for the daylight perimeter where the design meets existing ground.
Before beginning this routine, you must have drawn the polyline representing the outside edge of the feature to
model. The edge is drawn as a polyline which can be either a 2D or 3D closed or open polyline. For a 2D polyline,
the program will prompt for an elevation for the pad perimeter. With a 3D polyline, the pad perimeter is set to the
elevations of the 3D polyline. For an open polyline, the program will prompt for the side for the design. With a
closed polyline, the program designs the slopes either outward or inward depending on the settings in the dialog.
Under Source of Slope Target Surface Model, choose between a Surface File (.GRD, .FLT, .TIN), Screen Entities,
or a specic Elevation. If using Screen Entities, the routine internally calculates a gridded model, the limits of which
are specied by screen picks. Make sure that the grid area covers the entire area for the pad including room for the
cut/ll slopes.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1030
For closed pad perimeters, there is a Slope Direction from Closed Plines option to draw the slopes inward or
outward from the perimeter. The outward method starts the slopes at the design elevation of the perimeter and
projects out to intersect the existing surface. The inward method projects the slopes inside to reach the grid surface
or a set elevation. Outward sloping would be used for such things as building pads, parking lots, etc. where the
interior remains as a dened surface. Inward sloping would be used for such things as the top edge of an excavated
pit or pond where the interior side slopes project downward at the specied slopes until reaching the original ground
surface.
The Slope Projection Perpendicular To option applies to sloping pad perimeters. The Pad Polyline method
creates the user-specied slope perpendicular to the pad perimeter. The Slope Direction method accounts for the
slope of the pad perimeter and makes the nal surface to match the user-specied slope. For example, if the pad
perimeter is at a 10% slope and the ll slope is at 2:1, then the Pad Polyline method would create ll slopes that
are 2:1 perpendicular to the pad while slightly steeper (1.96:1) for the actual slope that goes in the slope direction
with the effect of the sloping pad perimeter. For the same case except with the Slope Direction method, the re-
sulting slope perpendicular to the pad is less steep (2.04:1) while the actual slope in the slope direction is exactly 2:1.
Under Design Slope Format, choose between Ratio, Percent, Degree or Template. The use of a Template allows
for complex slopes to be applied, and is also an alternative approach to road design. The template (.TPL) le is
created in the Design Template routine in the Roads menu. When using a template, the pad perimeter represents
the centerline. One way to create the pad perimeter for the template is to use the Prole to 3D Polyline command
which converts a 2D centerline to a 3D polyline using a design prole. With a template, the program uses not only
the cut and ll slopes from the template le but also draws all the template grade points such as edge of road, curb
and ditch. The subgrade, superelevation and template transition options of the template le are not used in this
command. These options are only applied in the Process Road Design command. The grade points are drawn as 3D
polylines parallel with the centerline. Cross section 3D polylines that include the grade points are also drawn at the
specied interval.
The Force Cut option will try the cut slope to nd a catch point even when the pad perimeter starts out in ll. This
is possible when the existing ground is rising faster than the cut slope. Likewise the Force Fill option will try the
ll slope to nd a catch point when the pad starts out in cut.
The Process Multiple Pad Polylines option allows you to process multiple pad perimeter polylines at a time
instead of a single pad perimeter. The program will prompt for a selection set of pad perimeter polylines and then
cycle through and run the design on each one. There will be one nal report for the earthworks for all the pads. The
Setup function allows you to specify different cut/ll slopes by layer and also to set the processing order by layer.
For example, in the case of processing both building pads with a shallow slope and ditch polylines at a steeper
slope, you could set up the processing order to do the building pad rst and the ditch last so that the ditch cut slopes
will carve out any overlap with the building ll slopes. These pad layer slope and order assignments can be saved
and loaded from a .PAD le.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1031
Use Another Surface for Pad Interior will bring up a prompt for another Surface le (.GRD, .FLT, .TIN) to use for
the design surface within the starting pad perimeter. Otherwise the program will model the pad interior by straight
interpolation from the starting pad perimeter elevations. For example, if a building pad has a starting pad perimeter
at a set elevation and the pad is supposed to be at, then this option is not needed. This option is needed in a case
where you are designing a pit and the starting pad perimeter is a 3D polyline that follows an undulating pit bottom
surface. The pad design will model the pit side slopes. In order to model the undulating bottom of the pit, you need
the Use Another Surface for Pad Interior option to select a surface that models the pit bottom.
Use Different Slopes for Separate Sides allows you to specify different slopes for different sides of your pad
polyline. If this is toggled ON, the Assign Pad Cut/Fill Slopes dialog is invoked, where you can create multiple
Slope Groups along the Pad Template polyline and set the Cut and Fill design ratios for each.
Use Slope Pad Design allows you to set a cross slope amount for the top of the pad. You will be prompted to
screen pick two points that designate the slope direction. For automatic balancing of cut/ll quantities, you will be
prompted to nd the optimal slope and slope direction.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1032
Draw Slope Direction Arrows draws an arrow on the outslopes that points in the downhill direction. Arrows on ll
slopes are drawn as solid lled.
Solid Cut Arrows allows you to choose between drawing the cut arrows as solid lled or as wire frame.
Round Exterior Corners holds the outslopes around the corners. Otherwise the side outslopes stay straight until
they meet at the corners as shown in the gure.
Erase Previous Pad Entities erases drawing geometry created with this command previously.
When Draw Side Slope Polylines is ON, Design Pad Template will draw 3D polylines perpendicular to the pad
perimeter from the pad to the catch point.
Color Side Polylines assigns different colors to Cut and Fill Side Polylines to make them easier to distinguish.
Example of pit design for option of Use Another Grid for Pad Interior
Pad corner without round corners option
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1033
Pad corner with round corners option
Side Polyline Spacing species the interval at which to draw the Side Slope Polylines. Besides at the interval, side
slope polylines are also drawn at grid corners.
Corner Delta Angle is the delta angle in degrees between side slope polylines to span the delta angle around
exterior corners.
Cut volume is multiplied by the Cut Swell Factor in the nal volume report.
Fill volume is multiplied by the Fill Shrink Factor in the nal volume report.
The Contour Pad option draws contours on the pad. At the end routine, a dialog lets you set the contouring options.
Usually you should specify a new contour layer and turn off smoothing.
The Write Final Surface option creates a surface model of the pad using the elevations of the pad within the
disturbed area polyline and using the original ground surface everywhere else. At the end of the routine, the
program will prompt for the surface le name to create.
The Trim Existing Contours Inside Pad option trims existing contours inside the disturbed limits of the pad.
You must specify the Pad Layer Name that the pad 3D polylines will be drawn on.
There is an option to calculate volumes for the pad design. The volumes are calculated by comparing the existing
surface with the pad design. The inclusion perimeter for the volume calculation is the daylight perimeter polyline
which represents the limits of disturbed area. The existing surface model is dened by the existing surface le
(.GRD, .FLT, .TIN) or screen entities selected at the beginning of the command. The pad design surface is calculated
by making a surface from the pad 3D polylines including the starting pad perimeter, the side polylines and the
daylight perimeter.
Besides calculating the volumes in the Design Pad Template routine, you can also calculate the volumes with the
Two Surface Volumes command, or the Volumes by Triangulation command. Two Surface Volumes works with two
grid les, Volumes by Triangulation works with two TIN les. The design surface for Two Surface Volumes can be
the nal output surface from Design Pad or you can create a design surface with Make 3D Grid File using the 3D
polylines created in Design Pad. You could also create a TIN surface of the design surface using Triangulate and
Contour. Some of the reasons to use either the Two Surface Volumes command or the Volumes by Triangulation
command are that these volume routines have more output options (cut/ll color maps, etc.) and you can check the
volumes by plotting or contouring the surface les. Also, you can combine several pads and other nal surfaces
by running Make 3D Grid File or Triangulate and Contour and then use these volume commands to calculate the
overall site volumes.
The design is drawn as 3D polylines and the earthwork volumes are calculated. Before ending, the program allows
you to adjust the design by changing the pad elevation, slopes and offset. The program can nd the cut/ll balance
by automatically adjusting the pad elevation. If adjustments are specied, the pad polylines are redrawn and the
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1034
volumes recalculated.
A few Key things to note:
1. If the Source of Slope Target Surface Model is set to a Surface File, and the surface le used is a grid le, then
the surface produced from the designed pad will be a grid surface and a grid le (.GRD).
2. If the Source of Slope Target Surface Model is set to a Surface File, and the surface le used is a TIN le,
then the surface produced from the designed pad will be a triangulated surface and a TIN le (.TIN).
3. If the Surface used as a Target Surface is listed in the Surface Manager, the prompt seen in the Design Pad
Template command is whether or not to Update the Surface, which is the Target Surface, so if you say ''Yes,''
your Existing Ground Surface will now essentially contain the designed pad. So if you want to maintain an
unedited version of Existing Ground, you may want to start with a copy of the Existing Ground Surface.
4. If the Surface used as a Target Surface is not listed in the Surface Manager, the prompt seen in the Design Pad
Template command is whether or not to create a new surface of the combined surfaces.
5. If you respond ''Yes'' to the prompt about whether to contour the designed pad, the contouring dialog box has
an option of whether to write the designed pad as a new surface, which will be only the area within the limits
of the new design, not the entire Target Surface and design pad surface combined.
Prompts
First you are presented with the Design Pad Template dialog box.
If the Source of Slope Target Surface Model is set to a Surface File, you will rst be asked to:
Pick the top of pad polyline: select perimeter polyline
Then the Select Slope Target Surface dialog box is presented. Choose the Slope Target Surface le, pick Open. You
then proceed to enter the slope parameters of the pad...
If the Source of Slope Target Surface Model is set to a Screen Entities, you will rst be asked to:
Pick Lower Left limit of pad disturbed area: pick lower left These prompts appear for the Screen Entities surface
model method.
Pick Upper Right limit of pad disturbed area: pick upper right Be sure to pick these limits well beyond the area
of the top of pad polyline in order to make room for the outslopes.
Make Grid File Dialog After selecting the limits of the disturbed area the program will generate a 3D grid that
represents the surface. Specify the grid resolution desired and select OK.
Then,
Pick the top of pad polyline: select perimeter polyline
Then proceed to enter the slope parameters of the pad...
Enter the ll outslope ratio <2.0>: 2.5
Enter the cut outslope ratio <2.0>: 2.5 After entering outslopes slope ratios, a range of elevations along the pad
top will be noted.
Enter the pad elevation <29.54>: 39
Calculate earthwork volumes (<Yes>/No)? press Enter
Report Viewer Reports cut/ll volume.
Adjust parameters and redesign pond (Yes/<No>)? press Enter
Write nal surface to grid le (Yes/<No>)? press Enter
Trim existing contours inside pad perimeter (Yes/<No>)? press Enter
Contour the pad (<Yes>/No)? press Enter
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1035
Existing contours with top of pad perimeter polyline
Pad template with contours
3D view of pad with DTM of surface and triangulation faces of pad
Template to apply in Design Pad Template
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1036
Existing surface with 3D polyline centerline
Result of Design Pad Template showing template grade polylines,
cross section polylines, cut/ll slopes, and nal contours
Viewpoint 3D view of Design Pad Template
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1037
Design Pad Template can also handle self-intersecting side slopes
Viewpoint 3D view of intersecting side slopes
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface
Keyboard Command: pad
Prerequisite: A pad perimeter polyline and surface entities or a surface le for an intercept target.
Convert LDD Contours
This command allows you to convert Autodesk Land Desktop contours (known as AECC CONTOUR objects) into
polylines. You must have the AEC Object Enabler installed before using this command. If you do not have the
object enabler installed, download the latest version from http://www.autodesk.com.
Note: If no object enabler is installed, opening a Land Desktop drawing with contours will display large boxes
for each contour, essentially outlining the extents of each one. In this case you will need to download the object
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1038
enabler. If the object enabler is installed, contours will appear normally, and you can use this command to convert
them to standard lwpolylines or you can use the Explode command. The Carlson Convert LDD Contours command
is preferable only in the fact that it will search the drawing for AECC CONTOUR objects and convert only those,
while an Explode command could inadvertently explode other entities that you do not wish to be exploded.
You can use the List command to determine if contours are polylines or AECC Contour objects. Here is an example
listing:
AECC CONTOUR Layer: ''CONT-MJR''
Space: Model space
Handle = 429
Major Contour Interval
Elevation: 1005.00
Smoothing: None
Number of Vertices: 48
Open
Length: 560.25
Constant width: 0.00
Style Name: Standard
Prompts
Select AEC Contours to convert
Select objects: pick the AEC contour entities
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Import/Export
Keyboard Command: aec cntr
Prerequisite: AEC Contours to convert
Export Topcon Grid or TIN File
The Export Topcon TIN File command writes a Topcon TIN le (.TN3) from a Carlson triangulation le (.TIN,
.FLT). The routine rst prompts for the Carlson le and then the Topcon le.
The Import Topcon TIN File command creates a Carlson Tin le (.TIN, .FLT) from a Topcon triangulation le
(.TN3). The routine rst prompts for the Topcon le and then the Carlson le.
The units (Feet or Meters) for the triangulation le are the current units set in Drawing Setup.
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface > Import/Export Surface
Keyboard Command: topcon tin, tn3 to tin
Prerequisite: A triangulation le
Slope Zone Analysis
This command calculates the surface area of a site in different slope zone ranges. This command can use either a
surface model le, (.TIN, .GRD, or .FLT), or 3D Face drawing entities, which can be generated by the Plot 3D Grid
File command, the Draw Triangular Mesh command, or the Draw Triangulation Faces option of Triangulate &
Contour. For each slope zone, the 3D Faces can be hatched with any AutoCAD hatch pattern, including the SOLID
pattern, or left empty with the NONE pattern.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1039
This command can also generate contours of the slope zones based on the calculated slope at each point of the
3D Faces. The slopes can vary greatly between neighboring points. When contoured directly, these slope data
points produce incoherent contours. Instead this routine applies a ltering algorithm that reduces the noise. There is
another option to output a grid le of the slope values.
There are also options to specify inclusion and exclusion areas. When inclusion areas are specied, only the slope
area within the inclusion polyline is calculated. Slope area within an exclusion polyline are not included in the
calculations. Inclusion and exclusion areas are represented by closed polylines and must be drawn prior to calling
this routine. Without inclusion and exclusion polylines, all the slope area of each selected 3D Face is used.
Prompts
Source of surface model: [File/<Screen>]? F for File
Slope Zone Options dialog box. Choose whether to Draw Slope Zone Contours, whether to Output Grid File of
Slope, and Slope Format. Pick OK
Select surface model le.
Dene Ranges dialog. Specify the slope zones, colors and patterns from lowest to highest. Pick OK.
Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none: select perimeter(s) or press Enter
Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none: select perimeter(s) or press Enter
Report is generated.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1040
If you choose to draw Slope Zone Contours, the Contour Options dialog box is presented.
Note: If you choose to use Screen entities instead of a surface model le, you are prompted whether to:
Apply hatch patterns to grid cells [Yes/<No>]? and
Freeze grid layer after processing [Yes/<No>]?
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1041
Surface contours
3D Faces from a grid surface model
3D Faces created by Triangulate & Contour with the Draw Triangulation Faces option
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1042
Slope zone contours
Slope zones that follow the surface contours using the triangulation 3D Faces
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1043
Hatched slope zone contours created from the grid 3D Faces
Pulldown Menu Location: Surface >> Slope Analysis
Keyboard Command: szone
Prerequisite: Surface model le (.TIN, .GRD, or .FLT), or 3D Faces entities
Quick Prole
This command allows you to create a prole in one step. The alignment for the prole can be dened using picked
points, a centerline le or a polyline. The surface for the prole can be dened by 3D screen entities, 3D polyline
or surface les (grid or triangulation).
Screen Entities: The program creates the prole by nding the intersections of the centerline with 3D linework
entities in the drawing. There's an option for whether to ignore entities at zero elevation.
3D Polyline: Creates a prole using a selected 3D polyline. The polyline vertex elevations are used for the prole
elevations and the prole stations are from the lengths of the polyline segments.
Surface File: This option allows you to use one or two grid or triangulation surfaces. There's also an option to
Show Pipe Crossings which will nd and display pipe crossings from sewer networks and 3D polylines tagged as
pipes. The sewer network can be created in the Hydrology module. To tag a 3D polyline as a pipe, use the Assign
Pipe Data To Polyline command.
Since picked points are the default for the horizontal alignment, the command is as quick as select surface
type (screen or le), then Pick, Pick, Enter and view. The resulting prole is displayed in a graphic dialog box
with real time data reporting. As the crosshairs are moved across the prole in the window, the station, elevation
and slope data corresponding to the current crosshair location appear in the lower right of the window. A second
crosshair on the plan view corresponds to crosshair movement along the prole so the user knows exactly where
the current prole point is on the plan view. Also the Adjust Alignment function allows you to drag a horizontal
alignment point and update the prole in real-time.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1044
Vertical Exaggeration: Determines the amount of vertical exaggeration for the prole in the window.
Drag Action: Determines whether the right mouse button functions as ''Zoom'' or ''Pan'' in the prole window.
Grid Ticks Only: Instead of the full graph as shown above, Grid Ticks only plots only ticks along the horizontal
and vertical axis near the station and elevation text.
Adjust Alignment: Allows you to pick a horizontal alignment point and while moving it, the proles are updated
in real-time. You can also select a horizontal alignment segment and move the whole alignment position. The
Adjust Alignment function is only available when surface les are used as the source of the surface model.
Save: Writes the current prole data to a .PRO le.
Draw: This draws the prole with grid in the drawing. The user has options for horizontal and vertical scales and
the layer of the prole. The Draw Prole command includes more options for drawing the prole. In order to use
this command, you must rst create a .PRO le using the Save command described above.
Print: This makes a graphic report of the prole in either PDF or DWF format as selected under Settings-
>Congure.
Exit: Exits this command.
Help: Opens on-line help.
Note that the Draw option will exit the Quick Prole command after the drawing is complete. A typical completed
drawing, in this case with two surfaces, is shown below. Note also that the horizontal stationing text offset follows
the setting in the Draw Prole command itself.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1045
Prompts
Pick starting point (CL-Centerline, P-Polyline): screen pick alignment points for prole
Pick second point: pick next point
Pick next point (Enter to end): press enter to end
Tested 58 of 58 Entities Intersects found> 33
Dialog Box
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles
Keyboard Command: quickpro
Prerequisite: 3D screen entities or surface le
Prole from Surface Entities
Prole from Surface Entities creates a prole from contours, triangular mesh, and other 3D drawing entities. The
method is to draw a polyline as the prole centerline. Then the prole is derived from the intersections of this
polyline with the 3D entities. For added accuracy in pulling the prole, include the triangular mesh as well as the
contours.
File: Displays the name of prole to be created.
Beginning Station: Specify the beginning station for the prole.
Interpolate Endpoint Elevations from Beyond Prole Extents: When checked, the program will look past the
ends of the centerline for additional intersections with 3D entities. These additional intersections will then be used
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1046
to interpolate the elevation at the starting and ending station of the centerline.
Extrapolate Endpoint Elevations to Extents of Prole: This option uses the slope of the last two elevation points
of the prole and calculates the elevation of the endpoint from this slope.
Station by another reference centerline: When checked, the program will prompt you to pick another centerline
polyline. The intersection points along the rst centerline are then projected onto the second centerline. The prole
then stores the elevation of the intersection with the station along the second centerline.
Breakpoint Descriptions from Layers: When checked, breakpoint descriptions are assigned based on layer name
of surface entities. These descriptions are used in routines such as Input-Edit Prole and Prole Report.
Ignore Zero Elevation Lines in Surface Model: When checked, any zero elevations selected in the surface model
are ignored.
Prole Offsets: Specify optional offset proles. Enter offsets separated by a space. Example: 30 -30 (to create 30'
left and 30' right offset proles). After entering the offset values, press TAB to select le options described below.
Offset Proles to: Specify whether offsets proles should be created as separate prole (.PRO) les, or included
in a single prole (.PRO) le. Only available if you specify Prole Offsets above. Offset proles are automatically
named by combining the prole name and the offset. For example, if the prole is named NATGRD.PRO and you
create a 30' right offset prole, it will be named NATGRD30.PRO.
Prompts
Prole File to Write dialog Specify a new prole le (.PRO) name to create.
Prole from Surface Model dialog Make choices, click OK.
Polyline should be drawn in direction of increasing stations.
CL File/<select polyline which represents the prole centerline>: pick the centerline (Do not press Enter.)
Select Lines, PLines, and/or 3DFaces that dene the surface for proling.
Select objects: C (for crossing and window everything the centerline crosses) or All (to select all objects on the
drawing)
Keyboard Command: prosm
Prerequisite: A polyline centerline and surface lines and polylines.
Prole from Grid or Triangulation Surface
This command creates a prole (.PRO le) from a centerline polyline and a surface model stored in a 3D grid le
(.GRD) or triangulation le (.TIN or .FLT). The polyline denes the alignment of the prole and the grid denes
the surface.
After selecting the reference surface le, there is a Prole Options dialog with these options:
Link Prole To Triangulation: This option will update the prole whenever the reference triangulation is
modied.
Type of Centerline: This setting chooses the type of stationing for centerline curves.
Station by Another Reference Centerline: This option uses a second reference centerline for the stationing of the
prole. The main centerline is used to nd the elevations on the surface and then these main centerline positions are
projected onto the reference centerline to get the stationing. The reference centerline needs to extend along the full
range of the picked polyline in order to project correctly and capture offsets along the entire length of the picked
centerline.
Prole Offsets: In addition to creating the prole along the centerline, you can also create proles offset left and
right.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1047
Prompts
Choose Grid or Triangulation le to process Select existing .GRD, .TIN, or .FLT le.
Prole Options dialog.
Choose PROle le to Write dialog Enter a prole le (.PRO) name to write.
Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations.
CL File/<Select polyline that represents centerline>: select a polyline
Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations.
CL File/<Select Reference centerline polyline>: select a polyline
CL File/<Select Reference centerline polyline>: press Enter
Reference CL starting station <0.0>: press enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Create Prole From ...
Keyboard Command: progrid
Prerequisite: A .GRD grid le, .TIN, or .FLT tmesh le
Prole from Points on Centerline
This command creates a .PRO le from points and a centerline that is represented by a polyline or centerline le.
The elevations of the prole are derived from the elevation of the points and the stationing for these prole points is
calculated from the distance along the centerline. The points must be within the offset distance from the polyline in
order to be included in the prole. The prole is created by projecting the points perpendicular onto the alignment
to determine the station and the elevation comes from the point elevation. The polyline or centerline should be
drawn (or dened) in the direction of increasing stations. The points can be selected from point entities in the
drawing (Screen), by point numbers from the current coordinate le (Numbers), or by point group as dened by the
Point Group Manager (Group).
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1048
Prompts
PROle le to Write dialog box: Enter a new prole le name to write.
CL File/<Select polyline that represents centerline>: pick a polyline or choose C for Centerline
Select Centerline le if Centerline option is used. If the desired points are further from the centerline, enter a larger
maximum offset tolerance.
Note: for all selected points, the points should be located on the real Z axis.
Select the Carlson points along the centerline.
Select objects: Select the point entities.
Keyboard Command: profpts
Prerequisite: A polyline centerline and points
Input-Edit Prole File
Similar to the Input-Edit Road Prole command, this command features a spreadsheet type editor and handles a
variety of prole (.PRO) congurations. Besides editing a prole, this routine can be used to just view the contents
of a prole.
The command starts by prompting for the prole le to edit. Alternately, you can run Input-Edit Prole by double-
clicking on a prole polyline that is drawn on a prole grid.
The opening dialog below shows the layout of this editor. At the top of the dialog, you can dynamically see the
prole and vary its appearance by using zoom and pan. The station, elevation and slopes are also shown at the lower
left of the dialog which update/track with the movement of the cursor. There are between ve and nine possible data
elds in a prole depending on the type of prole that has been selected.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1049
Prole Name: This name is optional and often used when multiple proles are stored in a prole (.PRO) le and
graphically generated using the Draw Prole command.
Add Row: Adds a new row into the prole after the current row.
Remove Row: Removes the current row.
Type of Prole: There are 6 types of .pro les and the spreadsheet columns will change to match the data elds for
the selected prole type:
Generic - Generic proles have station, elevation and description elds.
Road - Road proles include the Generic controls and adds a vertical curve eld. For an asymmetrical vertical
curve, enter the left and right side values separated by a dash in the spreadsheet cell. For example, a 200'
vertical curve with 50' to the left of PVI and 150' to the right would be entered as ''50-150''.
Sewer - Sewer proles include the Generic controls and adds step up, pipe size, pipe thickness, manhole
elevation and manhole ID elds.
Pipe - Pipe proles include the Generic controls and adds a pipe size eld.
Crossing - Crossing proles are for pipe crossings along the centerline. Besides station and elevation, the
crossing data points also have the pipe size. The crossing elevation is for the bottom elevation of the pipe.
The crossing prole data points are not connected.
Circular - Circular proles are the same as Road proles except the vertical curve is circular instead of
parabolic.
Edit Slope To Change: This setting controls which eld to update when the slope is modied in the spreadsheet.
Reference Prole Select: Selects a reference prole and displays it in the prole graphic view immediately.
Sag-Crest Points: When editing a road prole, its sag/crest points are shown here.
Through Pt: This button lets user to make the road prole pass through a certain point.
Vertical Exaggeration: Changes the look of the prole.
Check Stations: Reports prole information at the specied stations. The Check Stations are not stored in the
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1050
prole; they are merely used as a design/analysis tool for viewing the elevations at certain stations while adjusting
the prole data.
Speed Tables: This button is enabled only when you edit a road prole. Please refer to the documentation on
Input-Edit Road Prole for the information on Vertical Speed Tables.
Next: Used for navigation when editing a .PRO le containing multiple proles, loads the next prole.
Previous: Used for navigation when editing a .PRO le containing multiple proles, loads the previous prole.
Load: Used for loading another, existing .PRO le for editing.
Save: Saves the prole using the current prole le name. The current prole le name is displayed in the top title
bar of the dialog box.
SaveAs: Allows you to save the prole under a different prole le name.
Calc PI: This function calculates a station/elevation point given two existing station/elevation points and slopes
from them. The values are entered in this dialog. When you pick Calculate, the program nds the intersection of the
grade lines. Then pick OK and the calculated PVI is added to the prole.
Report: Creates a report of current prole.
Undo: Reverts the last action in the editor.
Settings: Opens the settings dialog.
Hold Next Slopes: When editing a prole elevation, this option will maintain all the slopes after the edit point by
adjusting the elevations. Otherwise, the elevations for the rest of the prole points are held and the slope from the
edit prole point to the next prole point is adjusted.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1051
Hold Current Elevation: When you change a PVI's station or elevation, if this toggle is on, its slope out will be
changed and the elevation of the next PVI is held, otherwise its slope out is held and the elevation of the next PVI
will be changed.
Use K-Value: Toggles between displaying K-Value and Sight Distance in the fth column for road proles.
Show Slope When Zoom In: This option allows to display the slopes on the long enough prole segments when
zoom in.
Grid Ticks Only: Toggles between displaying the grid and grid ticks in the graphic box.
Set Grid Interval: This option allows you to control the elevation grid spacing in the graphic preview. When this
option is off, the program automatically gures the elevation grid interval.
Enable Additional Invert-In Fields for Sewer Proles: When editing a sewer prole, this option allows you to
display an extra invert-in column for in-coming pipes. The invert-in elevations are separated by commas.
Enable Cradle Fields for Sewer Proles: When editing a sewer prole, this option allows to display cradle above
and cradle below columns.
Grid Mode: The Dynamic option will update the grid interval labels when you zoom in or out of the prole image.
The Static option will keep the grid interval labels static.
Tools: Opens the Tools dialog.
Translate: Globally adds or subtracts value to stations and/or elevations within the specied range of stations. while
Scale will apply the specied scale factor to stations and/or elevations within the specied range of stations.
Scale: Applies the specied scale factor to stations and/or elevations within the specied range of stations.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1052
Reduce: Reduces the prole points by the Offset Cutoff value.
Reverse: Reverses the direction of the stationing for the prole.
Cradle Setup: Sets up the cradles for sewer proles. The cradle parameters are different with different pipe sizes
and are dened in the Pipe Size Library. You can either use library data or specify new values here.
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles
Keyboard Command: profedit
Prerequisite: None
Draw Prole
Draw Prole is a exible routine for drawing a prole anywhere in the drawing. The prole can be placed in a
layout tab or in the model space of the drawing. It may be drawn with or without a grid or with just tick marks. The
vertical curve annotations for a road prole and manhole annotations for a sewer prole, may also be drawn. Draw
Prole uses the prole information that is stored in .PRO les. It is also able to use a reference centerline stored in a
.CL le. Once the prole is drawn using Draw Prole, the design and labeling routines of the Proles dropdown are
applicable to the prole. Please note, several of the options presented in the following dialogs will depend on the
type of unit system being used, metric or english. Options such as text sizes, sheet dimensions, and scaling factors
may vary from the examples shown here.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1053
The command is run from the Civil Module and the Prole menu. To create a prole you must rst add a prole(s)
to work with. This is done by selecting the Add button.
All the proles used in your current project will be displayed and available for use. If you wish to use a
prole from another project or folder you can use the Browse button to nd and select it. Select the prole you want
to use and then select the Open button.
To set a reference centerline, you can select the Set button to the right of the Reference CL: None area on
the Select Proles to draw dialog. Select the centerline le from those listed in the right pane for the current project
or use the Browse button to navigate to another project's centerline les. Select the centerline le to use and then
select the Open button.
With the Prole(s) selected and a Reference CL set, you can now begin the prole creation process. If you
want to Add Multiple proles at once use the Add Multiple button. If you want to remove a prole from the list use
the Remove button. The Clear button will clear the dialog. If you want to label stations that are signicant for the
project use the Special Stations button.
The Save Set and Open Set buttons allow you to save the Set of information here and reload the Set at a
later time.
When the Select Proles To Draw dialog has been set up, select the OK button to move on to sheet setup.
Draw Grid
The Draw Grid option controls whether or not the grid and axis elevations for the prole are drawn. The Setup
button launches the Grid Setup dialog. Here you can control numerous settings for how the grid, general text and
stationing are drawn.
Horizontal Grid: Enter a value of how often grid lines should be displayed to coincide with the station values along
the horizontal axis of the grid.
Horizontal Major Grid: Enter a value of how often major (or ''heavy'') grid lines should be displayed to coincide
with the station values along the horizontal axis of the grid.
Station Text: Indicate how often station text labels should appear along the horizontal axis of the grid.
Vertical Grid: Enter a value of how often grid lines should be displayed to coincide with the elevation values along
the vertical axis of the grid.
Vertical Major Grid: Enter a value of how often major (or ''heavy'') grid lines should be displayed to coincide with
the elevation values along the vertical axis of the grid.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1054
Elevation Text: Indicate how often elevation text labels should appear along the vertical axis of the grid.
Grid Direction: Proles can be drawn Left to Right (the default) or Right to Left. Although most proles are drawn
left to right, if you have a road that runs East to West and you wish to draw the prole stationing beneath the actual
road stationing, then choosing a Right to Left prole may be appropriate.
Vertical Grid Adder to Top: This adds the specied amount of grid to the top of the prole.
Bottom: This adds the specied amount of grid to the bottom of the prole.
Grid Style: This selects the type of Grid to generate. The choices are Grid Lines, Ticks Only, Ticks and Dots, Ticks
and Checks.
Draw Vertical Bar on Right: This option places the vertical label bar on the right of the grid, as opposed to the
left.
Label Scale: Click on this option and you obtain a scale drawn at the lower left corner of the prole. Click the
Setup button to establish the desired Scale labels and placement values.
Label Stations: Disable this option if you do not want station labels to be placed along the grid.
Label Station Equations: Disable this option if you do not want station equation labels to be placed along the grid.
Label Base Elevation: Labels the low elevation on the sheet. The setup dialog allows for prex and sufx for the
text, size of text, layer and number of decimals to display.
Station Type: Indicated the preferred style of station formatting.
Station Text Orientation: This option allows you to specify the orientation of the station text shown along the
bottom of the prole. The example below shows both options:
Use Partial Labels for Intermediate Stations: Enable this toggle if the ''full station'' content to the left of the ''+''
symbol should be omitted at intermediate stations. This is useful for large station values where intermediate station
labels are desired. When enabled (assuming 100' station values), an intermediate station such as 1023+50 would
simply be annotated as +50.
Increment Station Text from Beginning Station: Enable this option if you wish to have the station text labels be
relative to the starting station value. For example, if the starting station value is 0+23.68 and the Station Text interval
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1055
is 50, station labels of 0+73.68, 1+23.68, 1+73.68, etc, would be generated.
Label Elevations: Disable this option if you do not want elevation labels to be placed along the grid.
Draw Elevation Bar: Click on this option if you desire to have a vertical barscale displayed. It will run up and
along the left-most vertical grid line of the prole, unless the Draw Vertical Bar on Right option is selected.
Draw Elevation Labels Only On Left Side: Enabling this option eliminates elevation labels on the right side of
the prole.
Draw Grid Line Under Elevation Labels: Enabling this option extends the grid lines underneath the elevation
labels.
Elev Text Vertical Justify: Indicate vertical justication for the elevation labels.
Offset Elevation Text: This option offsets the left-side vertical axis text using the specied Offset Scale.
Offset Station Text: This option offsets the horizontal axis Station text by the specied Offset Scale, allowing
the insertion of elevation or other information above the stationing. It is often used in conjunction with the Label
Horizontal Axis options.
Stack Prole Grids: This option allows to stack prole grids for multiple proles. In the Setup dialog, all proles
in the multiple prole le are listed and you can choose which one goes to rst grid, which one is second and so on.
Grid Vertical Spacer: Indicate the amount of vertical space between successive grids.
Link To Files
This setting allows you to link to the proles and alignment. There are three options, Off, Prompt and Auto. If the
proles or alignment change, the proles associated with them will either do nothing if the Link To Files is Off,
prompt for an update if it is set to Prompt or automatically update if set to Auto.
Draw Sheet
Plan Only, Prole Only, or Plan and Prole sheets can be created. The options within Sheet Setup become available
when this toggle is checked on. Select Setup to access the Sheet Setup dialog.
Choose Space: Indicate whether sheets are to be drawn to Paper Space (also known as a Layout) or to Model Space.
When the Model Space option is selected a toggle for how the sheets are created is enabled. They can be displayed
in Paper Space or Model Space. If the Paper Space toggle is used the sheet will be drawn in Model Space but with
Paper Space units.
Layout Name: Enter a name for the paper space ''tabs'' to be assigned to each layout for each sheet. The program
will automatically divide the plan view and the prole view into sheet layouts, and if the length of the prole extends
beyond a single sheet, then multiple layouts are created, with the layout name ID incremented by 1.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1056
Note:
The ''Tile Sheets'' toggle needs to be disabled for the auto-incrementing functionality.
If either the Start Station in Layout Name or the End Station in Layout Name options are enabled, the Layout
Name eld will be disabled as the Layouts will get named automatically.
If you enter ''ms'' to go to model space within a Layout tab, you can pan to alter the plan view position. However, it
is best to zoom in/out and edit within the Model tab. The Layout tabs appear at the bottom of the screen, along with
the ''Model space'' tab to go back to standard plan view:
Start/End Station in Layout Name: These options allow you to include starting and ending station in the Layout
Names.
Add Layouts to Current Layout Set: This option allows you to add the layouts created to an existing layout set
that was previously generated using the Layout Set Manager. You will need to specify the name of the layout set.
Add Layout Name To File Name For Output To Drawing: When the option to Output To Separate Drawing is
on, this option will create a separate DWG le for each layout by adding the layout name to the main DWG le
name.
Block Name: This is the drawing name for the plan and prole sheet to be inserted. The Set button can be used to
change the block name. Carlson provides a standard plan and prole border in the form of prole.dwg located in the
working folder of %AppData%\Carlson Software\...\Sup\. You may wish to revise prole.dwg and add your
company logo, and re-save it as prole1.dwg. Alternatively, you could add your own complete version of a Plan
and Prole sheet block/border. Be aware that the Draw Right to Left option in Draw Grid is superseded when Draw
Sheet is enabled. Note that the Sheet mode will re-orient the centerline left to right, which may cause text (such as
the stationing) to plot upside down, until you use the Flip Text command.
Set Sheet Attributes: This button allows you to specify the values used by any attributes associated with the sheet
block. These can be entered manually in the Set Sheet Attributes dialog.
You can use the Set button to the right of any eld to set that eld to a preset value pulled from the drawing
information.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1057
Sheet Width: This is the prole width, in inches, on the sheet.
Lower Left Offset X/Y: Indicate the offset value(s) for the insertion point of the sheet in CAD units. This option
allows user-dened Block Names to be properly positioned relative to the remainder of entities placed through the
Draw Prole command.
Draw Prole Grid Lines: Enable this option if your Block Name does not contain prole grid lines and if you want
prole grid lines to appear on the sheet.
Draw Plan/Grid to Full Sheet Width: Enable this option if you want to have ''partial'' sheets (typically found at
the end of a Plan & Prole Sheet run) occupy the full width of the sheet.
Sheet Contains: This drop list allows the selection of which type of sheet to generate. The choices are Plan and
Prole, Plan Only or Prole Only.
Plan View Lower Y: This sets the lower position of the paper space window for the plan view. With Lower Y set to
9 (inches above the base of the sheet) and Top Y set to 21, there is a 12 inch vertical window, running the full Sheet
Width (typically 30 to 32). This window for the plan view can be expanded or reduced with these settings.
Top Y: This sets the top vertical limit for the plan view window, measured in inches from the bottom of the plan and
prole sheet.
Plan/Prole Gap: Indicate the amount of vertical separation between the Plan portion of the sheet and the Prole
portion of the sheet.
Draw North Arrow in Plan View: This draws a North Arrow in plan view. Click the North Arrow Settings button
to establish the desired North arrow and placement information.
Draw Plan View Borders in Model Space: This draws the borders in Model Space which can be useful or orienting
text and other labels to the orientation of the sheet. When this option is selected, use the Layer text box or Set button
to choose the layer on which the borders will be drawn.
Plot at 1:1: With this clicked on, the sheet will be paper size, designed to be plotted at 1:1. A 30-inch prole sheet
will measure 30 units, even though the centerline and prole may be 1500 feet in length. If the Scale 1:1 option is
turned on, then you cannot check the distances of features using commands such as Bearing and Distance on the
Inquiry menu, because the distances will be scaled down by a factor equal to the drawing scale (for example, at
1''=50', the reduction in scale factor is 1/50 or 0.02). You can set the absolute starting coordinate for the 1:1 scaled
plot by setting the Sheet Lower X and Sheet Lower Y values. With this clicked off, the prole will drawn full size,
with a 1500-foot prole measuring 1500 feet.
Fit Each Vertical: With this option turned on, the program will size the prole grid to t within the vertical space
on the prole sheet. With this option off, the prole grid is sized to t the elevation range of the prole.
Tile Sheets: If clicked on, only one Layout is created in paper space, and all sheets appear in this single Layout as
tiles of individual sheets, much like the tiles mode of viewing les within Windows Explorer.
Label Match Line: When clicked on and multiple sheets are plotted with plan view option on, a match line will
plot in the plan view.
Overlap STA In multiple plan and prole sheet plotting, after the rst sheet, all subsequent sheets will have the rst
2 stations in common with the last 2 stations on the previous sheet, if the Overlap Station option is turned on. For
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1058
example, if the last 2 stations are 3+10 and 3+20 on sheet 1, then sheet 2 will start with 3+10, then 3+20, with this
option turned on. With this option turned off, if the rst sheet ends with 3+20, then the second sheet would begin
with 3+20.
Draw Horiz Axis Elev
This option creates elevation labels along the horizontal axis. Pick Setup to access the Horizontal Axis Elevations
settings dialog. A preview of the labels will be shown to the right of the settings. If the preview does not match the
settings, click the Update Preview button.
Linear and Curve Interval: Indicate how often the prole elevation labels should be placed along the horizontal
axis of the sheet. The Curve Interval applies within vertical curves and the linear applies everywhere else.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1059
Draw Tick and Tick Height: This option draws a line at the specied height at each station for the elevation
labels.
Existing/Final Grade: Indicate the appropriate prole, precision, text scale, layer, style, prex, sufx and color for
the text labels.
Text Layout: Indicate whether the text labels should be oriented vertically or horizontally.
Label Offset Scale: Indicate the distance from the horizontal axis for the labels. If the value is negative, the labels
are placed above the horizontal axis.
Elevation Difference Options: If both existing grade and nal grade are to be drawn, you may choose to also label
the Cut/Fill depth value that separates the existing and nal proles at each station.
Draw Horiz Label Box
This option draws a boxed area either above or below the prole. It is best used in standard Draw Grid mode, with
Draw Sheets clicked off. Pick Setup to access the Horizontal Label Box Setup dialog which has a list of available
elds to label. To label a eld, highlight the eld from the Available list and pick the Add button. Then use the
Up/Down buttons to order the elds in the Used list.
Offset: This controls how far to offset the label box from the prole. This value is a scaler that is multiplied by the
prole horizontal scale.
Draw Vertical Lines: This option draws lines from the data point on the prole to the label in the box.
Draw Box Lines: This option draws the row and column lines for the label box.
Use the Edit button to set parameters for the label in the box. The Label 2nd Row option creates another
row for the eld.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1060
An example of the resulting plot is shown here:
Draw Slope Labels
When enabled, this option allows you to detail additional slope information onto selected proles.
Indicate the desired prole(s) whose slope annotation you'd like to control and click on the Setup button for expanded
criteria.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1061
Draw Break Point Sta
When enabled, this option will label station values along the prole line above each break point in the prole. Pick
Setup to access the Break Point Station Setup dialog.
Draw Break Point Elev
When enabled, this option will label elevation values along the prole line at each break point in the prole. Pick
Setup to access the Break Point Elevation Setup dialog.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1062
Draw Break Point Desc
When enabled, this option will label descriptions along the prole line at each break point in the prole. Pick Setup
to access the Break Point Description Setup dialog.
Draw Break Point Elev Diff
When enabled, this option will label elevation difference values along the prole line at each break point in the
prole relative to a reference prole (e.g. existing grade). Pick Setup to access the Break Point Elevation Difference
Setup dialog.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1063
Reference Prole: Indicate the prole that should be used as the point of comparison for the break point locations.
Decimal Shift Right: Indicate the number of places to shift the decimal point to the right. For example, if a
traditional elevation difference was calculated to be 1.234 and the Decimal Right Shift value is set to 1 (a factor of
10), the reported elevation difference would be shown as 12.34.
Break Point Leader/Symbol Setup
Click this button to establish if it desirable to have a leader and/or break point symbol used in conjunction with the
Draw Break Point Sta and/or Draw Break Point Elev options.
Draw Road Intersections
When enabled, this option will label the location(s) of any road(s) from an identied Road Network that intersect
the main road.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1064
Draw Linework Crossings
This option draws labels for linework that crosses the reference centerline. The reference centerline is set in the rst
Draw Prole dialog where the proles to draw are selected. The setup dialog for Linework Crossings has a list of
layers. The program will nd intersections between the reference centerline and linework on these specied layers.
For each layer, there is a Description which is used for the label on the prole. Besides labeling these descriptions
for the crossings, the program includes the station along the reference centerline at the crossing. In the options
dialog, there are settings to control the layer, style, color, size, decimal places for the station label, label position and
whether to draw a vertical line from the label to the prole.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1065
Output to Separate Drawing
When enabled, this option draws the prole(s) to a separate drawing. Click the Set button to specify the
name/location of the external drawing. Suggested uses for this feature are when prole-only sheets need to be
generated and provided to others for detail or construction purposes.
Link To Files: This setting controls the linkage of the plotted prole(s) to the actual prole le(s) (.PRO), deter-
mining how changes to the le affect the plotted prole(s):
Off - Changes to an underlying prole le do not trigger a change to its drawn prole.
Prompt - Changes to an underlying prole le trigger a prompt if its drawn prole should be updated.
Auto - Changes to an underlying prole le result in an automatic change to its drawn prole.
Match Line Elevations: For high relief proles that might otherwise extend up and into the plan view portion of
the drawing, the Match Line Elevations option can be used to break the prole and redraw the remaining portion
vertically shifted to remain in the prole portion of the sheet.
Elevation Range: This is the range of elevations that is used in conjunction with the Match Line Elevation option. If
the range is exceeded (that is, if the range greater than 40), the program will break the prole and draw the remainder
with a separate vertical axis range.
Road Labels
This button opens Vertical/Circular Curve Settings dialog. From a wide variety of available labels, you are able to
create your own label selections very conveniently. Each label can be edited individually through the Setup button.
You can specify the prex, sufx, symbol style, decimal places, text orientation and position, etc, in the Edit Label
dialog.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1066
Draw PVI 'V': You can choose to draw either a full tangents style PVI 'V' point, or a partial tangents style, or
nothing.
Label Placement: This setting determines where to place the vertical curve labels. There are six options: Pick
Single Row, Pick Individual Position, Auto Place Above Highest PVI Point, Specify Offset from Grid Top, Offset
from Curve - Aligned, Offset from Curve - Horizontal.
Label Offset from Grid/Curve: Indicate the distance from the Grid or Curve when the Label Placement option is
set to Offset from Grid Top or Offset from Curve, respectively.
Draw Horizontal Dimension Lines: This option draws horizontal lines connecting the PVC and PVT of all vertical
curves.
Draw Vertical PVC & PVT Lines: This option draws vertical lines emanating from the PVC and PVT of all
vertical curves.
Label PVI When VC=0: When vertical curve length is 0, no label is created unless you choose this option and then
the PVI label would be shown.
Draw Slope Direction Arrow: Draws an arrow to indicate slope direction.
Arrow Direction: You can choose from Prole Direction, Uphill Slope Direction and Downhill Slope Direction.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1067
Draw Vertical Interval Labels: This option labels the intervals of the vertical curve section. In its setup dialog,
you can specify the intervals, distance from the vertical curve to put the labels, decimal places to display the interval
stations and elevations, symbol settings and label settings.
Here is an example of a road prole.
EOP Prole Setup
This button allows you to establish the criteria for drawing and labeling Edge of Pavement (EOP) proles:
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1068
Begin/End Front Curb Return: Enter a description for the front curb return.
Begin/End Back Curb Return: Enter a description for the back curb return.
Include Road Name: Enable this control if you'd like the road name included with the edge of pavement prole.
Draw VC Labels for EOP Proles: When enabled, this option will label vertical curves found in edge of pavement
proles.
Draw Curb Return Length Label: When enabled, this option will label the length of curb returns. Use the Setup
button to specify and control the display settings.
Draw Curb Return Elevation Labels: When enabled, this option will label the elevations of curb returns. Use the
Setup button to specify and control the placement and display settings.
Pipe Crossing Labels
This button opens Pipe Crossing and Link Label Options dialog, which contains all the settings for drawing a pipe
crossing type or prole, or the pipe crossings when pipes or sewer networks in the drawing are intercepted by a
prole to be drawn.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1069
Pipe Symbol: Options to show pipe crossing in circle, square, or based on the pipe shape.
Text Rotation: Labels can be drawn either horizontally or vertically. This option becomes disabled when the Draw
Annotations with Leader option is enabled.
Label Prex/Sufx: Indicate labels that should precede and/or follow the pipe information.
Label Decimals: Decimal places of the labels.
Label Station/Elevation/Size/Name/System Name: Options to label the parameters or not.
Station Crossings By Another Centerline: This option will make new stations by referencing the prole to another
centerline, for example a road centerline.
Draw Pipe Crossing On-The-Fly: When this option is chosen and there are pipes or sewer networks drawn in the
drawing, the program will prompt to select a reference centerline that represents one of the proles to be drawn to
detect the pipe crossings. Any pipe crossings found would be drawn with other proles.
Draw Parallel Pipes Within a Swath Width: When this option is chosen and there are pipes or sewer networks
drawn in the drawing, the program will prompt to select a reference centerline that represents one of the proles to
be drawn to detect if there's any pipe segments that are within a swath width along the prole. Any pipe segments
found would be drawn with other proles.
Draw Annotations with Leader: When enabled, this uses a leader in conjunction with pipe labels.
Draw Annotations with Vertical Line: When enabled, this uses a vertical line and orientation to indicate the
location of the pipe crossing being labeled.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1070
Show Pipe Thickness: When enabled, this draws the pipes in prole using double lines to indicate the thickness of
the pipe. The area between the lines can be cross-hatched.
Link Label Settings: Settings to determine how to draw link labels.
An Example of Pipe Crossings On-The-Fly
An Example of Parallel Pipes Within a Swath Width
Lateral Connection Labels
These settings apply for proles create from a Sewer Network from the Hydrology module that contains lateral
structures. There are several lateral data elds available for labeling. Use the Add/Remove buttons to make the
list of elds to label. Use the Setup button to set the prex and sufx for each eld, and control whether the
eld is labeled on a separate row. There are settings to choose the symbol on the pipe at the lateral station, the
text orientation, whether to draw a vertical line at the lateral station, set the label position and offset, set the text
justication and whether to draw a leader from the pipe to the label.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1071
Sewer/Pipe Labels
This button opens Draw Sewer/Pipe Options dialog.
General Tab
The sewer structure or pipe prole labels can be drawn in the following four styles:
Draw Horiz Axis Annotations: Labels structure or pipe prole along the horizontal axis.
Draw Annotations Above Rim: Creates structure or pipe prole labels above the rim of manholes.
Draw Extended Pipe At Beginning/End: Draws the pipe beyond the beginning or the end by a specied length.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1072
Here is an example of using the Data Table option for the labels:
Draw Annotations Below Invert: Creates structure or pipe prole labels below the rim of manholes.
Draw Annotations with Leader from Rim Position: Creates structure or pipe prole labels with a leader from
manhole's rim position.
Draw Annotations with Leader from Invert Position: Creates structure or pipe prole labels with a leader from
manhole's invert position.
Draw Annotations with Attribute Block: Inserts blocks with attributes for the structure or pipe labels.
Each style has a setup dialog to specify which labels are to be created and in what order. For labels with leaders,
you can setup the leader styles.
Tick Mark for Station: Draws a tick mark at every station.
Project Invert In/Out Elev at Manhole Center: The Invert In/Out elevations are not the actual values, but are
projected elevations to the manhole center.
Station Manholes by Another Centerline: This option will make new station for each manhole by referencing the
prole to another centerline, for example a road centerline.
Draw Sump: When enabled, specify the height of the sump to be drawn into the sewer prole.
Draw Base: When enabled, specify the base height to be drawn into the sewer prole.
Label Precision: Click on the Label Precision button to set the amount of precision used for sewer station, elevation,
length and slope labels.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1073
Manhole Tab
On this tab, you are able to specify how to label the manhole name and how to draw the manholes.
Draw Manhole Name: Enable this option and select the desired geometric shape that shall circumscribe the man-
hole name. If selected, enter any desired prex or sufx for the labels.
Draw Manhole Sides Down To Invert: Closes the manhole at pipes.
Manhole Rim Elevation Prompt: Ignores the manhole's rim elevation and prompts to enter new values.
Manhole Rim Offset Prompt: Prompts to enter the offset value and adds the offset to the manhole's rim elevation.
Manhole Width Prompt: Enable this option to prompt for the top width of the manhole.
Manhole Bottom at Pipe Slopes: Enable this option to prompt for the bottom width of the manhole.
Draw Manhole Separate from Pipe Polylines: Enable this option to draw the shape of the manhole as a separate
polyline from that of the pipe.
Draw Vertical Line Through Manhole Center: Draws a vertical line through the manhole center from rim to
bottom of prole grid.
Draw Drop Across As Vertical On Uphill Side: If a step up is used, draws this as a vertical line on the higher side
of the structure.
Drop Across Manhole: Adds a step up to the invert-in elevation.
Taper Format, Manhole Dimensions: When drawing from a prole le created with the Design Sewer/Pipe Prole
command, these parameters are used to dene the manhole shape and dimension. When drawing from a prole
created from Network in the Hydrology module with commands such as Export to Proles, these Draw Prole
settings are ignored and the dimensions come from the Network instead. The taper settings are used for transitioning
between different manhole top and bottom widths. The Top Taper Offset sets the distance from the top of the
manhole to the point that the taper will end. The Fixed Taper Height determines the overall length of the tapered
section.
In this example image, all the manholes have Top Width of 2 and Bottom Width of 4. Manhole #1 has Top Taper
Offset of 2 and Fixed Taper Height of 0. Manhole #2 has Top Taper Offset of 100 and Fixed Taper Height of 0.
This large Top Taper Offset is greater than the manhole depth so that the taper runs the full length of the manhole.
Manhole #3 has Top Taper Offset of 3 and Fixed Taper Height of 1.
Pipe Tab
Here you can choose to label pipe in a very exible order. Each label has a setup function which species the label
prex and sufx, decimal places, row number and etc.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1074
Label Layer: Set the layer for the labels.
Label Style: Set the text style and size of the text.
Pipe Distance Method: Label either the center to center distance or the actual distance of the pipe.
Pipe Slope Method: Choose from three common methods of calculating pipe slope.
Pipe Label Position: Choose from along the pipe, along the axis or inside the pipe.
Pipe Material: Indicate the type of material used for the pipe.
Draw Pipe Thickness: When selected, draws pipes in prole as double lines indicating the thickness of the pipe.
This option also allows for cross hatching of the double lines.
Label Pipe Distance as Station Along Horiz Axis: This option creates pipe distance labels as the station style
along the horizontal axis. Click the Setup button to access the labeling method and style.
Draw Flow Arrows: Indicate if arrows should be drawn illustrating the direction of ow.
Draw Cradle Lines: If the sewer prole contains cradle data, this option would draw cradle lines above and below
the pipe segments.
Draw Pipe Label as MTEXT: When enabled, text labels will be drawn as a multiline text (MTEXT) entity.
Fit Pipe Label Between Structures: When enabled, this option will ensure that pipe labels will fall within a
structure-to-structure distance.
General Settings
Layers
The Layers button has the layer names for the prole lines, prole grid and general labels.
Colors
The Colors button has the colors for the prole lines, prole grid and general labels.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1075
Text Settings
The Text Settings button has the text style and size scalers for prole grid and general labels. The size scalers are
multiplied by the prole horizontal scale to determine the text size in drawing units. The Double-Click Text Link
Prole Settings controls whether double-click on the prole text in the drawing brings up the Draw Prole Settings
for that text or runs the action set in the CAD such as edit text.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1076
Linetypes
The Linetypes button has linetype settings for the prole line and prole grid. There are also settings for drawing a
prole legend of the prole lines.
Back
Allows you to return to the previous dialog box to alter or adjust the information it provides.
Load Settings
Loads a saved collection of Draw Prole settings, saved in a (.PFS) le.
Save Settings
Saves all Draw Prole settings in a (.PFS) le.
Prompts (may vary based on Settings)
Polyline should be drawn in direction of increasing stations.
CL File/<Select pipe crossings on-the-y or parallel pipes centerline>: Pick a polyline upon which to base the
stationing or Type C to select an existing Centerline .CL le and then press Enter
Centerline Starting Station <0.0>: Press Enter to accept the default station value specied or Type in the begin-
ning station then press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location(s): Civil > Proles, Survey > Surface, Field > Roads
Keyboard Command: drawprof
Prerequisite: A prole .PRO le
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1077
Prole to 3D Polyline
This command converts a 2D polyline centerline into a 3D polyline that follows the elevations of the prole. Hor-
izontal and vertical curves are represented as a series of polyline segments since 3D polylines cannot contain arcs.
Prole to 3D Polyline can be combined with other commands for plan-view road design as follows:
1. Draw 2D polyline centerline.
2. Prole from Surface Model - to create existing surface prole.
3. Design Road Prole - to design the nal prole with vertical curves.
4. Prole to 3D Polyline - create a 3D polyline of the road centerline.
5. Offset 3D Polyline - offset the 3D polyline centerline left and right by the horizontal and vertical distances.
6. Design Pad Template - run twice for left and right polylines of road to tie into surface at specied cut and ll
slopes. This creates the limits of the disturbed area. Or use Join Nearest, Direct Connect Endpoints, to create a
closed loop pad with one run of Design Pad Template for simple ramps, driveways and access roads.
7. Triangulate & Contour - draw nal contours using road 3D polylines.
8. Volumes - use any of the volumes commands to calculate cut and ll volumes.
Prompts
Layer Name for 3D Polyline <3DPROF>: press Enter
Select prole centerline polyline: pick a polyline
Station by another reference centerline [Yes/<No>]? N for no. This option will prompt for a second centerline
to use for stationing.
Enter the starting station <0.0>: press Enter
Select Prole File
Starting station of centerline <0.0>: press Enter
Erase centerline (Yes/<No>)? Y This option will erase the original 2D polyline centerline.
Example of road design in plan-view with Prole to 3D Polyline
Keyboard Command: proto3dp
Prerequisite: A .PRO le and a centerline polyline
Prole To Points
This command creates Carlson points along a horizontal alignment polyline using a prole le to compute the point
elevations. The created points are stored in a coordinate (.CRD) le and can also be drawn on screen in the layer
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1078
specied by the user. Station text, prole name, and special points (vertical and horizontal PC's and PT's) can be
stored in the point description depending on user settings.
Create points at Prole special points: Includes vertical PC and PT points.
Create points at Centerline special points: Includes horizontal PC and PT points.
Create points at Station Intervals: Allows you to specify intervals for point creation.
Interval On Line Segments: Specify station interval for line segments.
Interval On Curve Segments: Specify station interval for curve segments.
Station to Begin Intervals: Specify station to start intervals.
Prompt For Additional Odd Stations: Any station can be entered to create additional points with elevations de-
rived from the prole.
Create Points on Centerline: When checked, points will be created on the centerline.
Create Left Offset Points: When checked, left offset points will be created. Specify the offset in the edit box.
Create Right Offset Points: When checked, right offset points will be created. Specify the offset in the edit box.
Vertical Offset of Prole: Specify the vertical offset. Enter zero for no vertical offset.
Plot Points: When checked, points will be plotted in the drawing, otherwise points are only added to the current
coordinate (.CRD) le.
Include prole name in point descriptions: When checked, the prole name will be used as the prex on
the point description. For example, if the prole name is DESIGN.PRO, then the point description might be
DESIGN 0+63.37.
Decimal Places: Specify the display precision for points that are plotted in the drawing. This setting does not affect
the coordinates stored in the CRD le.
Centerline by: Click either Polyline or CL File.
Type of Centerline: Click either Roadway or Railroad.
OK: Specify les.
Prompts
Select Coordinate File to Process
If the current coordinate is set, it is used automatically without this prompt.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1079
Select prole centerline polyline: pick a polyline
Starting station of centerline <0.0>: press Enter
Station by another reference centerline [Yes/<No>]? N for no. This option will prompt for a second centerline
to use for stationing. With this option, the rst centerline is used for locating the points and the second reference
centerline is used for locating the prole stations. So the rst centerline represents where the points are created (ie.
the edge of pavement) and the second centerline represents the prole location (ie. the road CL).
Choose Prole to Process dialog Specify a prole name.
Starting point number <1>: press Enter This defaults to the point number after the highest one currently in the
CRD le.
Station for additional point (ENTER to end): press Enter This option will create a point at the specied station.
Prompt occurs only if option is specied in dialog.
Points created along prole centerline using elevations from the above road prole
Keyboard Command: pro2pts
Prerequisite: A .PRO le and a centerline polyline
Prole Conversions
There are eleven Prole Conversion commands, all of which are listed below. The rst nine in the list are Import
Prole commands. These commands allow you to convert a single prole le from their respective program to the
Carlson prole (.PRO) format. For each, you are prompted to select the le to be imported, then provide a Carlson
prole le name. Underneath each of the nine brief descriptions shown are, in bold, the prompts that you see in
dialog box form and/or on the command line.
The last two commands listed below are Export Prole commands. They allow you to convert a single Carlson
prole (.PRO) le to Softdesk (.TXT) format, or a single Carlson prole (.PRO) le to Leica (.GSI) format. You are
prompted to select the Carlson prole le, then provide a name for the Softdesk or Leica le.
Import Columnar Text
Allows you to Import a comma or space delimited text le to create a prole (.PRO) le.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1080
Import CAiCE Prole
Allows you to convert a single CAiCE (.KCP) prole le to the Carlson prole (.PRO) format. You are prompted to
select the CAiCE le, then provide a Carlson prole le name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Command: caice2pro
Import Leica Prole
Allows you to convert a single Leica prole (.GSI) le to the Carlson prole (.PRO) format. You are prompted to
select the Leica le then provide a Carlson prole le name.
Choose Leica/Wild File to Read dialog Select existing le.
Choose Prole to Write dialog Select le name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Command: wildpro2
Import MOSS Prole
Allows you to convert a single MOSS prole (.INP) le to the Carlson prole (.PRO) format. You are prompted to
select the MOSS le then provide a Carlson prole le name.
Choose MOSS Prole File to Read dialog Select existing le.
Choose Prole to Write dialog Select le name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Command: moss2pro
Import Softdesk Prole
Allows you to convert a single Softdesk prole (.TXT) le to the Carlson prole (.PRO) format. You are prompted
to select the Softdesk le then provide a Carlson prole le name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Command: dcapro2
Import Sokkia/SDR Prole
Allows you to convert a single Sokkia/SDR (.SDR or .RAW) prole le to the Carlson prole (.PRO) format. You
are prompted to select the Sokkia/SDR le, then provide a Carlson prole le name.
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1081
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Command: sdr2pro
Import Spanish ALZ Prole
Allows you to convert a single Spanish ALZ prole (.INP) le to the Carlson prole (.PRO) format. You are
prompted to select the Spanish ALZ le and then provide a Carlson prole le name.
Choose CLIP File to Read dialog Select existing .ALZ le.
Choose Prole to Write dialog Select le name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Command: alz to pro
Import Spanish RAS Prole
Allows you to convert a single Spanish RAS prole (.RAS) le to the Carlson prole (.PRO) format. You are
prompted to select the Spanish RAS le and then provide a Carlson prole le name.
ISPOL File to Read dialog Select existing .RAS le.
Choose Prole to Write dialog Select le name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Command: ras to pro
Import Terramodel Prole
Allows you to convert a single Terramodel (.RLN) prole le to the Carlson prole (.PRO) format. You are prompted
to select the Terramodel le, then provide a Carlson prole le name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Command: tm2pro
Export Softdesk Prole
Choose Prole File to Read dialog Select existing .PRO le.
Choose Softdesk File to Write dialog Enter new Softdesk le name.
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Command: dcapro1
Export Leica Prole
Choose Prole File to Read dialog Select existing .PRO le.
Choose Wild File to Write dialog Enter new .GSI le name.
GSI le format [<8>/16]? press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: Proles > Prole Conversions
Keyboard Commands: wildpro1
Chapter 16. Surface Menu 1082
GIS Menu 17
The GIS menu shown below has commands for managing and reporting data attached to drawing entities.
1083
GIS Database Settings
This command sets the current GIS Features and GIS Data Format. The GIS Features le (.GIS) denes the GIS
features and the attributes for each feature. This le is set by the Dene GIS Features command.
The Data Format denes where the GIS data will be stored. For Single File Type Database, the data is stored in an
external database in either SQLite format (.DB) or MicroSoft Access (.MDB). The Esri MSC Data stores the GIS
data within the drawing le in a format that both Carlson and Esri use. Starting with ArcGIS 9.3, Esri added support
for MSC which makes the DWG le a type of geodatabase with the feature denitions, GIS data and geometry all
stored in the le.
Prompts
GIS Setting dialog Click both le buttons and select new or existing les.
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: gis cong
Prerequisite: None
Dene GIS Features
This command creates the Feature/Attribute data structure, or schema, for GIS functionality. The structure is stored
in a special Carlson le with a (.GIS) le extension. A feature, such as a manhole, can have multiple attributes, such
as Number of rungs, Type of material, Number of inlets, etc. Features can be organized into Categories: Utilities,
Roads, Properties. The Category designation is an arbitrary way of organizing the features. Features and attributes
can be imported from another Carlson GIS Features le, Field to Finish, Esri MSC data within the drawing, Trimble
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1084
FXL or from older Carlson Template Database MDB les.
Features and attributes can of course also be dened ''from scratch'' in the Dene GIS Features dialog box.
1) The rst eld to set is the GIS le you are working with. Use the File menu to create a new (.GIS) le or open an
existing one for editing.
2) Next, set up one or more Category Names, using the Category menu. GIS feature codes can be categorized (e.g.
STRUCTURES, UTILITIES, ROAD FEATURES, etc.). At least one category must be created.
3) Next, dene Features, using the Feature menu. e.g. A category such as UTILITIES might have features such as
manholes, light poles, re hydrants, water valves, etc.
4) Lastly, dene the attributes for the Feature. Each attribute has:
a) a Name
b) a Full Name, or Prompt
c) a Type - Integer, Character or Real
d) a Default Value - these can be preset, or read from a list of automatically generated values using the Default
button
e) optionally, a List of values to pick from. Use the List Values button to build a list
f) whether the attribute is required
g) whether the attribute Value can be eld Edited, appears as Read Only, or is Hidden
h) whether the value used is restricted to the list
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1085
Geometry Settings
At the bottom of the dialog box the user can specify the geometry settings for each feature, whether it is a
line or point feature, what layer it is to be drawn on, what block to use to represent it, what text style to use, and
what linetype to use.
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: def template
Prerequisite: None
Input-Edit GIS Data
This routine creates, reviews and appends GIS data linked to entities stored in the drawing.
The GIS Smart Prompting dialog has a spreadsheet format for editing the data elds. The GIS table to process
is selected in the pull-down list in the upper right of the dialog. The GIS tables that are available depend on
the tables that are dened in the current template database. Use the GIS Database Settings and Dene Template
Database commands to setup the tables. Once you select a table to process, the elds for that table are displayed in
a spreadsheet format. If a eld is related to a eld in another table in the database, a ''+'' character is shown next to
the eld name. Picking the ''+'' will open another dialog box with the related data in the other table. The data in this
related table is not editable, only the data in the initial linked table.
The bottom portion of the dialog has features for attaching images to the entity. Existing image les (BMP, JPG or
GIF) can be linked by choosing the New option. The Update option will replace the current image with a newly
selected image. The Delete option will remove the current, attached image. The Capture button will take a shot in
the eld using a congured camera and then attach the image to the entity. Different digital cameras can be used by
picking Pick or Set Camera.
The Input-Edit GIS Data command is an excellent way to simply review the data associated with an entity. If the
entity has GIS data, the banner line at the top of the dialog will display ''Entity has GIS Data''. If not, the banner
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1086
line will display ''Entity has no GIS Data''. Even when the entity has no data, the default values for the prompts will
appear. Pressing OK will assign this data to the entity. To avoid assigning data to the entity (if it has none), press
Cancel. Alternately, you can use the commands GIS Inspector Settings, followed by GIS Data Inspector, to review
the data with no possibility of editing or inputting data in the process.
There are three methods for selecting the drawing entities to process: S for Select, P for Pick and N for Number:
Select Object method: With this method, you pick the drawing entity to process the data attached to that entity.
When selecting a Carlson point, the point number is used to link to the database.
Pick method: For this method, you pick inside a closed polyline to process the data attached to that polyline.
Number method: Here you simply input the point number from the current CRD le to process.
Prompts
Select object (Number/Pick/<Select>): P
Pick a point inside polygon (Select/Number/<Pick>): pick a point
GIS Smart Prompting dialog make selections
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: gisdata
Prerequisite: MDB GIS prompting must be created in Dene Template Database and points or entities must exist
to link GIS information to.
GIS Inspector
This command displays all or portions of the data attached to drawing entities in real-time. Howmuch of the attached
data is displayed is set by the command GIS Inspector Settings. When you move the cursor over an entity with GIS
data, selected elds are displayed in a tooltip box next to the cursor. For data attached to closed polylines, you can
move the cursor anywhere inside the polyline to show the data. Polylines that are closed will highlight with a solid
ll as you inspect each one. Open polylines, such as road centerlines, will highlight with a solid ll generated along
the length of the polyline. The solid ll color for all highlighting is set in GIS Inspector Settings.
The routine starts by prompting you to select entities. The entities that you select will be used by GIS Inspector.
In the case of a large drawing, this selection allows you to limit the entities for inspector to a local area instead of
having to process the whole drawing. Then after reading the entities, you can move the cursor around the drawing to
inspect the GIS data. You can also use the arrow, page up and page down keys to pan and zoom the display. Pressing
enter ends the routine.
Prompts
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1087
Select objects: select entities with attached data
Arrow keys=Pan; PageUp/Down=ZoomOut/In;
Zoom=Pick left-lower and right-upper corner;
Move pointer over entity with Gis Data (Enter to End): move cursor over entities with data; press Enter to end
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: gis inspector
Prerequisite: MDB GIS Prompting must be created in Dene Template Database and entities must have linked
GIS information.
GIS Inspector Settings
This command sets up the elds to be displayed when using GIS Data Inspector. Each GIS table code can have
different display options stored in the GIS Inspector Settings command.
GIS Inspector Settings reads all the points and entities with GIS information currently linked in the drawing and
displays a list of the linked data tables under the Available GIS Table column. When a GIS Table code is highlighted
(i.e. 0001 or Road), the elds for this GIS table are displayed to the right in the Select Fields column. Up to 6
elds or lines of GIS data can be dened for display for each GIS code table, including one picture. To add a eld
to the display list, double-click on the eld name. To remove a eld from the display list, highlight the GIS table to
remove from and then use the Clear Settings buttons. The Last Option button will remove the last eld to display
from the current GIS table. The Picture Name will remove the image from the display list. The Entire Line button
removes all the elds from display for the current GIS table.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1088
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: set inspector
Prerequisite: MDB GIS Prompting must be created in Dene Template Database and points or entities must have
linked GIS information.
GIS Query/Report
This command applies a user-dened query on a data table or related tables with the database. Records in the table
that pass the query can be reported or the associated entities can be highlighted in the drawing. The Query Using
option in the main dialog box sets the source of the data table to process as either GIS data attached to selected
drawing entities or from the current Output MDB le.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1089
The query is dened in the dialog shown here. To add a query, enter a new query name in the in the space underneath
Current Query. If there is already a name there, just highlight and type over it with a new name, then hit Clear All
to clear out existing query lines and get full access to all Feature Names.
The top portion of the dialog contains a list of the query parameters. To add a parameter, select a Feature Name
from the pop-up list. The available features will either be all the features found in the GIS links of the drawing or
all the features from the Output MDB le depending on the Query Using option. Once the feature is specied, the
Field Name pop-up list contains all the available elds in the feature. Choose a eld from this list. Next choose the
operator (=, >, etc.) from the operator list. The Value pop-up list contains all the different values for that eld that
are found in the current data set. You can either select one of these values or type in another value into this eld. If
a Field Name relates to another Feature, when you select that Field, an additional button will appear allowing you
to add a query parameter from the related feature.
When all the parameter values are set, pick the Add
Parameter button. Once a feature is selected and add a parameter is added, the Feature Names list becomes unavail-
able because any additional query parameters must come from that feature, or relate through that primary feature.
When all the parameters are dened for the query, you can save these settings by lling out a name Current Query
eld and then picking the Save button. This query can be recalled later by highlighting the query name and clicking
the Load button. The Delete button removes the highlighted query. The Save, Load and Delete functions operate on
the current set of queries active in the program. The Save To File and Load From File functions read and write the
collection of queries to a .QRY le for managing different sets of queries and sharing with others.
Pick the Execute button to process the query. The Mark Screen Entities option will set the color of entities with GIS
data that match the query to the specied color. The Build Selection Set option creates a selection set of the entities
that pass the query. To use this selection set in other commands, enter ''P'' for previous at the ''Select objects:''
prompt. With the Generate Report option, the program will bring up the Report Formatter which allows you to
choose the elds to include in the report and the report format. If the Highlight Screen Entities option is on, then
the program will highlight the entities with GIS data that pass the query. Point entities are highlighted by drawing
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1090
a box around the point and polylines are highlighted by solid ll. Shown here is the report for all manholes with a
Condition of Good.
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: gis query
Prerequisite: MDB le with data or entities with linked GIS information
Label GIS Polyline: Closed Polyline Image
This command draws images inside the selected closed polylines with attached GIS image les. Images can be
assigned to polylines by the Input-Edit GIS Data command.
The program starts by selecting closed polylines in the drawing with GIS data. Then a dialog appears for specifying
the image to draw. This dialog displays a list of all the GIS table names found in the selected polylines. First choose
a table to process. Then the image elds dened for this table are displayed in the lower list. Only one image can be
draw inside the polyline. The Erase Images button will erase any existing images inside the selected polylines. The
settings can be saved to and recalled from a GIS settings le (.gsf) using the Save and Load buttons. Once all the
settings are ready, pick the Draw button to draw the images. The images are drawn in the centroid of the polylines.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1091
Example of images drawn inside closed polylines
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS >Label GIS Polyline
Keyboard Command: display polygon image
Prerequisite: Closed polylines with linked GIS images
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1092
Label GIS Polyline: Closed Polyline Data
This command draws text labels for the specied elds inside the selected closed polylines with attached GIS data.
The program starts by selecting closed polylines in the drawing with GIS data. Then a dialog appears for specifying
the elds to label. This dialog displays a list in the upper left of all the table names found in the selected polylines.
First choose a table to process. Then the elds dened for this table are displayed in the lower left list. To add a eld
to the label, highlight the eld name and pick the > button. The elds names in the lower right list are the elds to
be labeled in order. Use the Up and Down buttons to change the eld order. The Erase Labels option will erase any
existing eld labels inside the selected polylines. The settings can be saved to and recalled from a GIS settings le
(.GSF) using the Save and Load buttons. Once all the settings are ready, pick the Draw button to create the labels.
The labels are drawn center justied in the centroid of the polylines.
Label Closed Polyline Data result of country name and population elds
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1093
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS > Label GIS Polyline
Keyboard Command: display polygon image
Prerequisite: Closed polylines with linked GIS information
Label GIS Polyline: Open Polyline Data
This command draws text labels for the specied elds along the selected polylines with attached GIS data. The
program starts by selecting polylines in the drawing with GIS data. Then a dialog appears for specifying the elds to
label. This dialog displays a list in the upper left of all the table names found in the selected polylines. First choose
a table to process. Then the elds dened for this table are displayed in the lower left list. To add a eld to the label,
highlight the eld name and pick the > button. The elds names in the lower right list are the elds to be labeled
in order. Use the Up and Down buttons to change the eld order. The Erase Labels option will erase any existing
eld labels for the selected polylines. The settings can be saved to and recalled from a GIS settings le (.GSF) using
the Save and Load buttons. Once all the settings are ready, pick the Draw button to create the labels. The labels are
drawn along the polylines.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1094
Example of text labels along polylines with GIS data
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS > Label GIS Polyline
Keyboard Command: label arc text
Prerequisite: Polylines with linked GIS information
Create Links
This command makes GIS links between blocks in the drawing and a database table using a key eld that is in both
the block attributes and the database table. Both the block entities and database records must exist before running
this routine.
The routine starts by prompting you to select the block entities to process. Then a dialog appears for choosing the
block attribute and table to link. The current template and output database le names are shown at the top of the
dialog. Use the GIS Database Settings command to set these le names before running Create GIS Links. The
dialog lists all the block names that were found in the entity selection. Choose a block name to process. Then in
the lower left of the dialog, there is a list of the attributes for the selected block. Highlight the attribute name that
contains the point ID key eld for the blocks and then pick the Select First Key Value button. For each block entity,
the program will use the value of this attribute to link to the record in database table. This value is matched to the
database record using the PT ID database table eld. For example, a block with an attribute value of 402 for the
specied attribute name will be linked to the database record with a value of 402 in the PT ID eld.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1095
Next, the database table needs to be specied to either one xed table name or to table names dened by a block
attribute. A list of the available tables in the current output database is displayed. To link all the blocks to one table,
highlight the table name from the list and pick the Select Second Key button. Or to link the blocks to various table
names based on a block attribute, highlight the attribute name and pick the Select Second Key button. This attribute
value for the blocks will then need to contain the database table name. For example, consider a block for electric
utility data with two attributes: ID and TABLE. The ID is a number to use as the rst key and the TABLE is the
table name (i.e. POLE, BOX). Once the key elds are set, pick the OK button to create the links.
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: create links
Prerequisite: Block entities with attribute IDs and a database table with matching IDs.
Erase Links
This command removes all the GIS links from the selected entities (polylines, blocks, etc.).
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: erase links
Prerequisite: Entities with GIS links
Audit Links
This command checks the GIS links for the selected entities in the drawing to make sure that the template database,
output database and table exist. Any invalid links can be erased from the entities or be xed by selecting another
database or table. For example if a database le (.mdb) has moved to another directory, then you can use this
command to specify the new location.
The routine starts by prompting you to select the entities to check. If no errors are found, then the routine is done.
When there are errors, a dialog box appears. Each GIS link is dened by a template database, output database and
table. For each combination of these three settings that have an error, this dialog displays the template database,
output database and table name from the entities. The number of GIS link combinations with errors is shown in
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1096
Table Used for Links eld (i.e. 1 of 2). The template database is shown at the top. If the template database link
is broken, then use the Select New Template MDB button to assign another template database le. The output
database also has a Select New Output MDB to set the output database le. In the lower left of the dialog is a list of
the table names from the output database. You can choose the table to use for the link from this list. The Fix Links
for Current Table button will assign the template database, output database and table name from the dialog to all
the selected entities. The Erase Links from Table button will remove these broken links from the entities. The Go
to Other Table button will process the next GIS link combination with errors.
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: audit links
Prerequisite: Entities with GIS links
Import SHP File
The Import SHP File command converts ESRI SHP les into Carlson drawing entities and can also optionally write
the available attribute data to an external Access MDB le and create GIS links between the drawing entities and
the records in the database. Use the Geometry with GIS Data Import Option to accomplish this. Use the Geometry
Only Import Option to just draw the linework. If you don't need the data, this option is much faster.
The Import SHP File dialog displays the Output MDB le to add data to and the source SHP le to be imported.
SHP les are similar to entities in one layer in CAD. You must specify the table name to store the data in the MDB
database and the layer name for the entities to be created. Typically these names are the same or near equivalent as
the SHP le name. Once these names are entered, the Import Polylines from SHP button becomes available. Pick
this button to import the SHP les entities and database. You can also assign elevations by a specied data attribute.
There are primarily three types of ESRI SHP les: Points, Arcs and Polygons. Each will provide different options
on Import. Once the SHP le is selected, Carlson detects the data contents of the le and sets the dialog options
for importing either polygons, arcs or points. Carlson GIS also supports the use of three other types of SHP les:
PointM, PolylineM and PolylgonM.
Both Arc and Polygon SHP les are brought into Carlson as polylines in the drawing, with attribute data stored in
an external Access .MDB database le if that option is selected.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1097
Point SHP les are imported in a three step process. The rst step uses the Import SHP File command to create a
coordinate le (.crd) for the points in the SHP le and a corresponding table in the output MDB le for the points
database. The second is to use Draw Locate Points to draw the points from the CRD le into the drawing. The third
step uses Create Links to select the points in the drawing and link the database to these plotted points.
Note: If the SHP le you are Importing is in a different Projection or Units than that specied in the Drawing Setup,
then a transformation will occur during Import, as long as the (.PRJ) Projection le is present with the SHP set of
les. If there is no (.PRJ) le with the SHP, then no transformations will occur.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1098
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: import shp
Export SHP File
This command creates a SHP le from the selected entities in the drawing. After selecting entities to be converted, a
dialog shows the number of Points, Polylines (Arcs) and Closed Polylines (Polygons) found in the drawing selection
set. Those Points, Arcs and Polygons with database information linked are displayed with their database table names.
Any Points, Arcs and Polygons without linked database information display as unknown.
Highlight the Point, Arc and Polygon tables to output or selects Export All to select all entities including the UN-
KOWN entities to export into SHP les. The Export SHP File commands outputs all entities selected into SHP les
with the same name as their table name into a subdirectory selected. Also Points can be stored in the ESRI Arcview
database as 3D X, Y and Z coordinates when Include Z Coordinates is toggled on. SHP les do not have arc entities.
So the export routine will convert arcs and polyline arcs into a series of small chords segments. The Offset Cutoff
eld sets the maximum horizontal shift allowed between the original arc and the chord segments.
These SHP les can be imported into ESRI's Arcview product. Database GIS links in Carlson are converted to SHP
les by storing the GIS database information into DBF les for ESRI's Arcview product to read and link to.
Prompts
Specify Name for SHP File dialog select .SHP le name
Select objects select entities
Export Carlson Entities to SHP File dialog choose settings, click OK
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1099
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: export shp
Prerequisite: None
Import GIS Data from SurvCE
This command reads GIS attribute data collected with SurvCE and Imports it into the drawing and embeds it within
the point blocks in the drawing as Esri MSC that can be read directly by ArcGIS. The setup is to have a coordinate
le (.CRD) set current, the points drawn in the drawing, an applicable attribute denition le (.GIS), and a le that
is storing the attribute values (.VTT), that was created by SurvCE. You are prompted to pick the GIS le, and then
the data from the VTT is imported and embedded within the matching point blocks in the drawing.
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: survce2msd
Prerequisite: GIS le, CRD le, VTT le, points in drawing
Export GIS Data to SurvCE
This command is used to set up a SurvCE Feature Code Library (.FCL) with attributes from points in a drawing
with Esri MSC data.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1100
In this dialog box, the coordinate le is specied, as well as the Field to Finish le being used. The name of the
SurvCE FCL le is then specied. Picking OK prompts the user to select the points in the drawing with Esri MSC
data.
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: msd2survce
Prerequisite: CRD le, FLD le, points in drawing with MSC
Export DWG File with Esri MSC
This command is used to create a new drawing le that contains Esri MSC Feature data.
The drawing is scanned for MSC data and further, which are new entities with MSC, which are entities with edited
geometry, and which are entities with edited attributes. The user species which are to be included in the new
drawing le. On OK, a new drawing le name is specied.
The drawing is scanned for MSC data and the list is populated with represented Feature Classes. You can
select which ones to include in the Export (Export Yes/No column). The check boxes at the bottom allow you to
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1101
choose whether to Export the unmodied entities for the selected Features, new entities, entities with CAD edits,
such as Trim, Extend, Move, etc, and entities with edited attributes. On OK, a new drawing le name is specied.
There is also a Report function to review the changes and to make a record of these transactions.
One possible application of this command is to create a DWG from ArcGIS with its Export to CAD tool,
open the drawing in Carlson and edit it, and then use this command to send the edits back to ArcGIS as a new DWG
with MSC.
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: export msd
Prerequisite: drawing with MSC
Image Inspector
This command views images and documents attached to entities. At the start, the program highlights all entities that
have attached images or documents. When you move the cursor over these entities, the attached image or document
name is displayed in a window. If you click within the image window, the program will start the image application
editor that is setup for your system. For documents, click on the document name to start the document application.
This application, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, depends on your Windows system setup. Also while moving
the cursor over drawing entities, you can use the up/down arrows to resize the image. When multiple images or
documents are attached to the same entity, use the left/right arrows to cycle through the images.
Prompts
Arrow keys Up/Down=Image Size; Left/Right=Cycle Images; Pick Image=Open Image
Move pointer over entity with image (Enter to End): press Enter
Car image displays in upper-left of drawing when cursor is over car symbol
Pulldown Menu Location: Images
Keyboard Command: view image
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1102
Prerequisite: drawing entity with attached image
Place Camera Symbol/Image
Prompts
Image File To Process: choose .TIF le
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Tools
Keyboard Command: maketfw
Prerequisite: TIF image le
Import MrSID Images
This command allows you to select one or more image les in the MrSID format (.SID) and have them converted to
either a (.TIF) or (.JPG) le format. Corresponding World les are also created.
Pulldown Menu Location: Images
Keyboard Command: import mrsid
Prerequisite: .SID le
Place Image by World File
This routine is intended for users of Carlson products that do not have the AutoCAD Map platform. If you have the
Map extension available, it is recommended that you use the tool provided.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1103
This function allows you to insert Geo-Referenced TIF les into the drawings. This process requires the presence
of an accompanying TFW le. The TFW le contains information about the location and scaling of the actual raster
image TIF le. This eliminates the guesswork in inserting, moving, and rotating raster images to the project area.
You begin by selecting the TFW or JGW le to process. If the related TIF le is present in the same directory, the
image will be inserted into the proper coordinates.
Prompts
Select World File: choose existing .TFW or .JGW le
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Tools
Keyboard Command: geotiff
Prerequisite: None
Attach Image to Entity
This command attaches image and document les to a drawing entity. The possible le formats are .pdf, .doc, .bmp,
.jpg and .gif. Any type of drawing entity can be used such as polyline, points or symbols. To run the command,
rst pick an entity on the screen. Then a dialog appears for selecting the image or document. First set the image
directory and then highlight the le name. A graphic of the image should appear in the preview window. Then click
Attach Selected Image/Doc.
The Capture New Image button can be used to trigger an attached digital camera to take an image. The
Pick Camera and Set Camera buttons can be used to congure the camera to use.
Multiple images or documents can be attached to the entity by picking Attach Selected Image/Doc or Capture New
Image multiple times. To cycle the images in the preview, use the Next and Prev buttons. Use the Remove Attached
Image to remove the image shown in the preview. Use Remove All Attached Images to clear all images from the
entity.
The View Attached Image/Doc button will display in the preview window any image already attached to the entity
instead of the selected image le. Also any image already attached to the selected entity is displayed in the Current
Image eld at the top of the dialog when nothing is selected in the le list.
Prompts
Select object to attach symbol to: pick an entity
Attach Image to Object Dialog
Done.
Select object to attach symbol to: press Enter
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1104
Pulldown Menu Location: Images
Keyboard Command: set image
Prerequisite: A drawing entity and an image or document le
Dene Note File Prompts
This command allows the user to create a .GIS le for use in several other routines in Carlson GIS and other Carlson
Software products, such as SurvCE or SurvStar.
The program starts with the main Dene Note File Prompts dialog, as shown below. The Load button allows the user
to load an existing GIS le for editing or review. The list box shows the various data capture items in the GIS le,
showing the eld name, the prompt, the default value and the various options for that eld. The Edit button allows
the user to edit the highlighted eld. The Add button allows the user to add new elds after the highlighted eld.
The Move Up and Move Down allow the user to change the order in which elds appear in the GIS le, while the
Remove button completely removes the highlighted eld. The Save button saves the GIS le that is currently being
edited, while SaveAs allows the user to save the current GIS le under a different name. The Quit button checks to
see if the current GIS le is saved and quits the routine.
When the Edit or Add button is clicked, the dialog box shown here appears, allowing the user to enter and edit data
with respect to a particular eld in the GIS le. The Field Name is a unique identier of the eld in the GIS le and
hence a GIS le cannot have repeated eld names. The Prompt is what appears at the command prompt while waits
for user input. The Default Value is the value that would be used among various options, if the user presses Enter at
the command prompt without typing anything in response to the prompt. The list box, Options for value, contains a
list of options that can be selected for the particular eld. A new option can be added to the list or removed from the
list by clicking the appropriate button. The Add Option button brings up a small dialog and accepts the option to be
included in the list. Press OK to accept the values set here. At the minimum, the Field Name and Prompt must be
specied.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1105
Dene Note File Prompts dialog Load a le, or change variables as required.
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: defnote
Prerequisite: None
Database File Utilities
This command is designed to import GIS data from SurvCE, GISCE and FAST Survey les, as well as from user-
dened text/ASCII le elds. It also exports data from Carlson Note les (.NOT or .VTT) to Microsoft Access
(.MDB) database tables. The .NOT extension is used when data transfers from desktop. The .VTT extension les
are data transfers from data collector.
Note les are associated with Coordinate les (.CRD) and contain additional data for point numbers. For example,
the Coordinate le for a manhole point could contain the point number, northing, easting, elevation and 32 character
description, while the corresponding note le for that point contains additional data on the manhole such as diameter,
depth, condition, etc.. A Carlson Note le for a Coordinate le will have the same name as the Coordinate le,
except with a .NOT or .VTT extension instead of the .CRD extension (e.g. PARK.NOT goes with PARK.CRD). The
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1106
Carlson Note le is a text le which consists of a point number (PT ID) followed by eld names with values. This
group of point number and elds can also have a GIS FILE name, which is used to identify this group of elds.
This GIS FILE name comes from the Note le prompting denition le (.GIS), which denes the eld names for
the group and is created in the Dene Note File Prompts command.
You can select the Note le to process by using the Import Note File button. The program will then list all the
GIS FILE names that were found in the Note le. If a set of data for point number does not have a GIS FILE name,
then this group will appear in the list as UNKNOWN.
The name of the Microsoft Access database to add the data to is the output database le, listed at the top-left of the
Database File Utilities dialog. You can change the output database by using the Open Database button and selecting
an existing database, or by clicking New Database to create a new database. The database tables will automatically
have the same name as the GIS FILE. This dialog also allows you to preview and edit a spreadsheet editor, which in
turn allows you to modify values in the table. Each set of note le data for a point is displayed on one row with the
corresponding record from the database shown on the next row. You can export the Note le data and create a new
Access database .MDB le, in Access '97 format or in Access 2000 format, by doing a SAVEAS into .MDB format.
You can rename and delete a table as well.
Database File Utilities can be combined with the Create Links command to make GIS links between the point entities
in the drawing and the Microsoft Access database records. The point entities can be drawn with the Draw/Locate
Points or Field to Finish commands.
Initial dialog at start of command with primary functions
Available Table from Output Database: Selection list. Pick a table from the Output Database.
Import Note File: Imports a Carlson Note File (.NOT).
Import SurvCE/GISCE/FastSurvey GIS File: Imports a SurvCE/GISCE/FastSurvey Note File.
Import ASCII File: Imports ASCII le.
Open Database: Opens Access database .MDB le.
New Database: Creates a new Access database .MDB le in Access '97 format or in Access 2000 format.
Preview/Edit Table: Displays a spreadsheet editor, allowing you to preview/edit values from table.
Rename Table: For renaming a table as needed.
Delete Table: For deleting a table as needed.
Current Table: Displays the selected table from above list.
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1107
Dialog seen after choosing Import ASCII File and selecting le name
Pulldown Menu Location: GIS Data
Keyboard Command: noteutil
Prerequisite: A note le (.NOT from desktop or .VTT from data collector)
Chapter 17. GIS Menu 1108
CGSurvey Module 18
1109
CGFile
Current Information
The Current Information Dialog Box contains information on:
Drawing: displays the current drawing le Path, Name, Scale, and Units
Coordinate File: displays the current coordinate le path and names.
File Type: This will display the current Coordinate le type.
The le types are:
C&G Numeric (.CRD) (PT #: 126)
C&G Alpha-Numeric (.CGC) (PT #: RW126)
Carlson Numeric (.CRD) (PT #: 126)
Carlson Aloha-Numeric (.CRD) (PT #: RW126)
Description Length: Numbers of character in the description
Total Points: Total number of points in the le
High Point: The highest point number stored
Points Used and Points Available: displays the block or blocks of points used or available in the coordinate le
currently open.
Other Files: Displays the les that are currently open:
Data Path: displays the current default path and coordinate le name
Description Table: displays the current default path and description table
Print: displays the current default path and Print le name
Raw: displays the current default path and RAW le name
Map Check: displays the current default path and Map Check le name
Cross Section: displays the current default path and Cross Section le name
TIN: displays the current default path and TIN le name
Pulldown menu Location:CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command:INF, cg current info
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1110
Prerequisite: None
Coordinate Files
Opening Closing and Saving
Choose Coordinate Files from the CGFile pull-down menu.
New
The New allows you to create a new coordinate le.
Prompts
Follow these steps: CGFile > Coordinate Files > New Coordinate File
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1111
Save in: Browse to folder location
Enter the name of the coordinate le you wish to create: File Name: Hickory farms
Press enter or press Save Button
NOTE: The directory displayed is the Data Path is the directory as set from the tool bar:
CG-Tools > CG Options > Data Path Options
NOTE: The description length for the new le just created will be set based on the current description length setting
in the:
CG-Tools > CG Options > General
NOTE: You will not be able to change the description length once the new le ia created. You must set the
description length prior to creating the new le. You can however move the points to another le that has a longer
description length
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File > Coordinate Files
Keyboard Command: OPNC, CG NEW COORD
Prerequiste: None
Open
The Open menu item allows you to open an existing .CRD or .CGC le. Only one coordinate le can be open at a
time in a given drawing.
Prompts
To open an existing coordinate le follow these steps:
In the le dialog box (Shown below),
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1112
Browse to folder location
select or Highlight the coordinate le you wish to open by clicking on it
Click the Open button
NOTE: The default directory is the ''Data'' directory below the directory where CG-SURVEY was installed. You
can change the default directory by choosing:
CG-Survey > Tools > CG Options... - Data Path tab.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File > Coordinate Files
Keyboard Command: OPC, CG OPEN COORD
Prerequiste: an existing coordinate le
Close
To close an open coordinate le
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File > Coordinate Files
Keyboard Command: OPC, CG OPEN COORD
Prerequiste: Coordinate File Open
Save As
As new points are stored in a coordinate le, the le is automatically updated. If you are concerned that the changes
to be made to the coordinate le may not be correct, you should use the Save As option to make an extra copy of
the le before making any changes. This option allows you to save the open coordinate le under a different name.
The new le becomes the current le. The original le will remain unchanged.
Prompts
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1113
To Save As the open coordinate le under a new name, select: > CGFile > Coordinate File > Save As
Browse to Folder Location:The Save Coordinate File As dialog box will display the default directory as
set in the Data Path Options,
Enter the name : of the new le for the coordinates to be saved to.
Press Save Button: Save or Press enter
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File > Coordinate Files
Keyboard Command: SCF, CG FILE SAVEAS
Prerequiste: None
Export Coordinates to ASCII
This menu item allows you to export coordinate les to an ACSII (American Standard Code for Information
Interchange) le format. ASCII les are a simple text format and can be read by almost all word processors and
text editors.
Prompts
To export coordinates to an ASCII le, follow these steps: > CGFile > Coordinate File > Export Coordinates to
ASCII File
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1114
If a coordinate le is not currently open, the Open Coordinate File dialogue box will appear., select the le.
You will be prompted at the command line to select the points you wish to export:
Add points from coordinate le. (Enter When Done) (All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/ Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select):
After choosing the set or sets of points you wish to export, press until the following dialogue box appears.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1115
Enter a new le name or select an existing ASCII le and click the Save button. Next, select an ASCII le format
(see the ASCII File Formats section of this chapter for an explanation of each format):
Select the OK button to export your coordinate points.
ASCII FILE CONVERSION FORMATS
NOTE: In the following formats the point code can be placed in the rst two characters of the description eld,
followed by a semicolon. The description will follow the semicolon. You can export and import ASCII les in the
following formats:
STANDARD (Point #, North, East, Elevation,''Desc'')
2,5054.76393,9777.75761,103.70000,''gs''
3,5098.69743,9783.82411,105.20000,''gs''
4,5158.78043,9773.74111,105.67000,''gs''
5,5205.11493,9777.40661,106.25000,''gs''
CLM (PNT Point # Easting Northing)
PNT 2 9777.75761 5054.76393
PNT 3 9783.82411 5098.69743
PNT 4 9773.74111 5158.78043
PNT 5 9777.40661 5205.11493
Autocogo (Point # Easting Northing Elevation Desc)
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1116
2 9777.75761 5054.76393 103.70000 gs
3 9783.82411 5098.69743 105.20000 gs
4 9773.74111 5158.78043 105.67000 gs
5 9777.40661 5205.11493 106.25000 gs
MTI (Point #, Easting, Northing, Elevation,''Desc'')
2,9777.75761,5054.76393,103.70000,''gs''
3,9783.82411,5098.69743,105.20000,''gs''
4,9773.74111,5158.78043,105.67000,''gs''
5,9777.40661,5205.11493,106.25000,''gs''
Standard (without description quotes) (Point #, North, East, Elevation, Desc)
2,5054.76393,9777.75761,103.70000,gs
3,5098.69743,9783.82411,105.20000,gs
4,5158.78043,9773.74111,105.67000,gs
5,5205.11493,9777.40661,106.25000,gs
Abacus/MTI (Point #, Northing, Easting, Elevation)
2,5054.76393,9777.75761,103.70000,''12;gs''
3,5098.69743,9783.82411,105.20000,''12;gs''
4,5158.78043,9773.74111,105.67000,''12;gs''
5,5205.11493,9777.40661,106.25000,''12;gs''
Surv-A-Soft (Code Northing Easting: Desc/Elevation'')
6 0 ''VER 2''
-1 0.00000 0.00000 '' ''
2 5054.76393 9777.75761 ''103.70000''
2 5098.69743 9783.82411 ''105.20000''
2 5158.78043 9773.74111 ''105.67000''
2 5205.11493 9777.40661 ''106.25000''
2 5253.39243 9779.12911 ''110.47000''
The Surv-A-Soft le structure is as follows:
The rst line of the le is a header line with the following information:
The total number of points is placed in the code eld.
Zero (0) is placed in the northing eld.
''VER 2'', etc. is placed in the easting eld.
After the header line each line species a coordinate point. The line number minus one is the point number.
The code eld has three possible values:
Value Explanation
-1 no coordinate point
2 elevation (in description eld)
1 description (in the description eld)
Since .CRD and .CGC les can have both an elevation and description, when converting them to an ASCII
Surv-A-Soft le one of the following will occur depending on the elevation value:
If the point has an elevation it will be placed in the description eld. If there is no elevation, the description
will be placed in the description eld.
Star
*
Net (Point # Northing Easting Elevation Desc)
2 5054.76393 9777.75761 103.70000, gs
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1117
3 5098.69743 9783.82411 105.20000, gs
4 5158.78043 9773.74111 105.67000, gs
5 5205.11493 9777.40661 106.25000, gs
USER DEFINED
Upon selecting User Dened format, the following dialog box will appear:
As the name implies you can create a format specic to your conversion needs.
Using an Existing User Dened Format To select an existing User Dened format, do the following: Press the Read
File button. Select an existing user dened format from the dialog. The elds in the dialog box will automatically
be updated. Select OK to accept the format.
Creating a User Dened Format: There are 5 basic pieces of information that can be dened in a user dened
format. Point number Northing (required) Easting (required) Elevation Description (Code can also be part of the
description eld) There are two types of user dened formats '' Character Separated Fields Character Separated
Fields means that each eld of information is separated by a character, often times a comma, but any ASCII character
can be used. Fixed length Fields Fixed length elds means that you dene the number characters for each eld item.
The elds can be in any order
Field Order
Point Number 4
North 3 (required)
East 2 (required)
Elevation 1
Description 5
NOTE: Coordinate values will be rounded based on the setting in the Rounding Options dialog box.
If the point number eld is not assigned a value, the line number will be the point number. Select the Field Type
(Character Separated or Fixed Length) and follow the appropriate instructions below:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1118
Character Separated User Dene Export File
>Go to CGFile >Select Coordinate les >Select Export to ASCII At the command line you will be prompted to
select points:
Add points from coordinate le. (Enter when Done) (All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/ Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select):
After selecting the point set or sets to export press return
Select or name the le to store the converted points.
Set the conversion format to ''User Dened Format'' The following dialog box allows you to dene the attributes of
the points being converted.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1119
For this example Character Separated Fields has been chosen as the Field Type.
Points........... -> 1
North........... -> 2
East............. -> 3
Elevation..... -> 4
Description -> 5
So the line data will be: Point # , North, East, Elevation, Description
Empty Field Values: It's necessary to distinguish between a eld that has no value and a eld that has ''0'' as a
value. In coastal areas ''0'' is a valued elevation and in some cases ''0'' could actually be a coordinate value. By
dening empty eld values with a value that cannot be miss-understood for a valid value, a conversion process will
not produce invalid data.
Character Values:
1st & 2nd Field Separators, these are the ASCII characters that dene the elds within a line.
1st & 2nd Line Terminator; these are the ASCII characters that dene separate lines
Description Markers; An ASCII character that surrounds the description such as quotation marks.
Code Separator; Allows you to designate the ASCII character that separates the Code information from the
Description information. In the example above the Character values are set as follows:
1st Field Separator: 44 (which is a comma)
2nd Field Separator: -1 (none used)
1st Line Terminator: 13 (carriage return)
2nd line Terminator: 10 (line feed)
Description Marker: -1 (none used) Code Separator: -1 (none used)
This example would read as follows: 1,5000.0000,10000.0000,954.63,MH
The following is a list of all of the ASCII codes and the respective values.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1120
2nd Field Separator: You may however dene two separators. For example, you can use a carriage return and line
feed if you wish to have each eld on its own line: 1 <CR> <LF> (Point number)
1000.000 <CR> <LF> (Northing)
1000.000 <CR> <LF> (Easting)
954.56 <CR> <LF> (Elevation)
MH <CR> <CF> (Description)
NOTE: Do not use a character as a separator if it appears in any of the elds. For example, if your record
looks like this:
1 1000.000 1000.000 954.56 MH <CR><LF>
Then the period (.) character cannot be used as a separator because it is used in the northing, easting and
elevation elds. Pressing the View ASCII Codes button will show you the 256 valid characters that can be used in
an ASCII le. The table shows each character, with its integer value to the left of it.
NOTE: Character number 26 cannot be used as a eld separate because it marks the End of File (EOF).
Fixed Length Field User Dene Export File:
>Go to CGFile >Select Coordinate les
>Select Export to ASCII Select points. (Enter When Done) (All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/ Pt-
group/Limits/Radius/Select):
At the command line you will be prompted to Select Points After selecting the point set or sets to export
press return Select or name the le to store the converted points.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1121
Set the conversion format to ''User Dened Format''
The dialog box below allows you to dene the attributes of the points being converted.
For this example Fixed Length Fields has been chosen. In this case the order is set at:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1122
Points........... -> 1
North........... -> 2
East.............-> 3
Elevation..... -> 4
Description -> 5
So the line data will be:
Point # - North-East-Elevation-Description But unlike Character Separated Fields, the information sets will be
dened by their placement on the text line, rather than a separating character.
Empty Field Values: It is necessary to distinguish between a eld that has no value and a eld that has ''0'' as
a value. In many cases around coast lines ''0'' is a contour elevation and in some cases ''0'' could actually be a
coordinate value. By dening empty eld values with a value that cannot be miss-understood for a valid value, any
conversion process will not produce questionable data.
Character Values: 1st & 2nd Field Separators, do not apply, separators are dened by spacing.
1st & 2nd Line Terminator; do not apply, separators are dened by spacing.
Description Markers; An ASCII character that surrounds the description such as quotation marks.
Code Separator; Allows you to designate the ASCII character that separates the Code information from the
Description information. In the example above the Character values are set as follows:
1st Field Separator: Do not apply
2nd Field Separator: Do not apply
1st Line Terminator: 13 (carriage return)
2nd line Terminator: 10 (line feed)
Description Marker: -1 (none used)
Code Separator: -1 (none used)
This example would read as follows:
1 5000.0000 10000.0000 954.63 MH <CR> <LF>
The rst 8 spaces are the reserved for the point number The next 16 are reserved for the northing The next 16 are
reserved for the easting The next 16 are reserved for the elevation The next 20 are reserved for the description Then
a (carriage return) and a (line feed)
The following is a list of alll of the ASCII codes and the respective values.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1123
NOTE: Do not use a character as a separator if it appears in any of the elds.
Description Markers: If you have a description eld, you may wish to use a Description Marker.
This is a character that surrounds the description. For example, a description surrounded by quotes:
23,1056.789,2345.769,982.345,''MH'' <CR> <LF>
If you are not using a description marker, enter -1 in the Description Marker box
Code Separator: If you have a description eld, and want the rst characters of the description eld to be a C&G
point code, you can enter the decimal value of the character that separates the point code from the description. This
allows you to transfer both the point code and the description to an ASCII le. For example, using a semicolon as a
code separator: 23,1056.789,2345.769,982.345,''MH; Inv Elev -9.23'' <CR><LF>
If you are not using a code separator, enter -1 in the Code Separator box.
No Northing Value and No Easting Value
If the ASCII le does not have a point number eld, the No Northing and No Easting values are mandatory. The
record number will be used as the point number. This means that skipped point numbers will be lled with false
northing, easting and elevation values.
Here is an example of a le with a record that has no point number eld (assume you entered -999999 in
the No Northing, No Easting and No Elevation boxes):
1056.789,2345.769,982.345,MH<CR><LF>Point 1
-999999, -999999, -999999, <CR><LF> No Point 2
2356.679,2455.645,992.678,MH<CR><LF>Point 3
2786.799,5645.789,984.234,MH<CR><LF>Point 4
No Elevation Value You must place a value in this box. When converting a C&G point to an ASCII point,
this value will be placed in the elevation eld of the ASCII point if a C&G point with ''No Elevation'' is encountered.
When converting an ASCII point to a C&G point, if ''No Elevation'' is encountered in the ASCII point then ''No
Elevation'' will be placed in the elevation eld of the C&G Point.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1124
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File > Coordinate Files
Keyboard Command: EXC, CG EXPORT COORDS
Prerequiste: None
Import ASCII File into Coordinates
This option allows you to import the contents of an ASCII le into a coordinate le.
Prompts
Follow these steps: > CGFile > Coordinate Files > Import ASCII File Into Coordinates
If a coordinate le is already open, the ASCII le will be imported into it, if a coordinate le is not open you will
be prompted to open an existing le or create a new coordinate le.
Select the ASCII format that is being imported and how to handle duplicate points.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1125
The points will be imported and displayed on the screen.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File > Coordinate Files
Keyboard Command: IMC, CG IMPORT COORDS
Prerequiste: None
Close Raw File
To close the current raw data le, select CGFile from the main menu and then select Close RAW File.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command: CLR, CG CLOSE RAW
Prerequiste: Raw File OPEN
Close Map Check File
To close the current map check le, select CGFile from the main menu and then select Close Map Check File.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command: CLM, CG CLOSE MAP
Prerequiste: Mapcheck le Open
CGDos Drawings
Before opening a CGDOS drawing you must choose the ''setup'' option to provide information needed for opening
the PL!/PL2 les.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1126
This feature allows you to import a CGDOS PL1/PL2 le and convert it to a standard CAD drawing. This is similar
to a DXF conversion, but in addition to simple converting the graphics, this feature also retains the C&G data. That
means that after the conversion is nished the drawing le is still referenced to the coordinate le. If you query a
line it tells you what coordinate le the graphic was created from, the points that line is drawn from, the layer and
line stop information just like query did in the CGDOS. This means you can continue working on the job after the
conversion in a manner that is familiar to you as it was in CGDOS.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command: None
Prerequiste: CGDos Drawings>Setup
Open Dos Drawing
If the current drawing le you are in has any graphics the following dialog box will appear. This is meant to prevent
you accidentally placing the PL1 drawing on top of another existing drawing le.
Selecting will bring up the following dialog box that will allow you to select the PL1 le to be converted to a standard
CAD drawing.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1127
After selecting the le to be converted, if you look at the command line you will see that the program is going
through the PL1 le and converting the drawing entities one at a time to make them conform to the C&G format.
This means all of the C&G data is maintained so the new drawing is still linked to the coordinate le it was created
from. Also during this conversion process any of the CGDOS
*
.INS les (inserts) will be converted to standard
CAD blocks and be added to the CG list of available inserts. Meaning all of the inserts you were accustomed to
using in the CGDOS product will now be a part of the CG Survey program.
Prompts
Select a
*
.PL1 drawing le from browse le dialog box: Select le & click on OPEN button
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command: None
Prerequiste: CG-Survey > File > CGDos Drawings>Setup completed properly
Setup DOS Dwg
The rst dialog asks you to give the path to the CGDOS Program Files and the path to CGDOS Inserts.
When this is set properly, any Insert used in the DOS PL1 le will be converted to a block and stored in the
C&G symbols folder: These inserts will also be listed in the insert library when you go to: CGDraw > Drawing
Settings > Active Symbol NOTE: Currently those inserts converted from the CGDOS PL1 les will not be shown
graphically in the CGSurvey Active Point Symbol dialog box but they will appear in the symbols list and thus can
be selected for use from the list.
Prompts
Select a Location for CGsurvey Program from browse le dialog box: Pick Browse button
Select a Location for Insert les from browse le dialog box: Pick Browse button
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command: None
Prerequiste: None
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1128
Convert Old CG Dos Level File to New Format
This option converts old C&G DOS level les (les with a .LEV extension) to the new CGSurvey level le format
(les with a .LEV extension).
Prompts
Select CGFile from the main menu.
Select Convert Old C&G DOS Level File to new Format from the pull-down menu.
From the le dialog box, select the le to convert:
Click the OPEN button to convert the le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command: CVL, CG CONVERT DOS LEVEL FILE
Prerequiste: None
Convert Old CG Dos Raw File to New format
This option converts old C&G DOS raw les (les with a .RAW extension) to the new CGSurvey raw le format
(les with a .CGR extension).
Prompts
Select CGFile from the menu bar.
Select Convert old C&G Raw File to new format from the pull-down menu.
From the le dialogue box, select the le to convert:
Click the OPEN button to convert the le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CGFILE
Keyboard Command: CVR,
*
CG CONVERT RAW
Prerequiste: None
Convert Old CG Dos Cross Section File to New Format
This option converts old C&G DOS Cross Section les (les with a .EW extension) to the new CGSurvey earthwork
les format (les with a .CEW extension).
Prompts
Select CGFile from the menu bar.
Select Convert Old C&G Cross Section File to new format from the pull-down menu.
From the le dialog box, select the le to convert: Click the OPEN button to convert the le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command: CVX, CG EW CONVERT FILE
Prerequiste: None
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1129
Convert Old CG Dos Template File to New Format
This option converts old C&G DOS Template les (les with a .TPL extension) to the new CGSurvey earthwork
les format (les with a .CTP extension).
Prompts
Select CGFile from the menu bar.
Select Convert Old C&G Cross Section File to new format from the pull-down menu.
From the le dialog box, select the le to convert:
Click the OPEN button to convert the le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command: CVT, CG EW CONVERT TEMPS
Prerequiste: None
Empty Print File
Choosing this menu item will remove all the text now in your print le.
You should empty the print le periodically so that it does not use too much of your disk space and become difcult
to view and print.
Note: If user wishes to change the Printer.Txt le name or choose a different location. see CG-Survey >
CG Options... - Output Tab
Pulldown menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command:EPF, cg df
Prerequisite: Set print le name and path in CG-Survey > CG Options... - Output Tab
Print View Print File
While computations are taking place a Print File is being maintained showing all computations. This le is saved in
the text le specied in the Output Options dialog box below
This text le may be edited, printed or viewed from any text editor or any word processor. (Note: For further
explanation on Output Printing Settings please consult CGTools Menu)
After choosing the Print/View Print File menu item, the print le will be opened using the Windows text editor
WordPad. To print the whole le, use the printer icon or the Print menu item on the WordPad File menu. To print a
portion of the print le, you must highlight the portion you wish to print, then choose File > Print. On the General
tab of the Print dialog box click the Selection radio button then click the Print button to print the highlighted text.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1130
NOTE: Print Preview is also available on the WordPad File menu.
You can choose whether to use the Windows Notepad or Wordpad to view and print the print le by going to the
CG-Survey > CG Options... menu and clicking the Output tab then clicking on either the Notepad or Wordpad
radio buttons in the Print File Viewer section of the dialog (shown below).
Pulldown menu Location: CG-Survey > File
Keyboard Command:VPF, CG VIEW PRINT FILE
Prerequisite: Set print le name and path in CG-Survey > CGOptions... - Output Tab
CGTrav
Quick Traverse
This feature allows you to utilize the keyboard and the mouse to perform a traverse using points and data found in
the drawing and the coordinate le. There is no raw data entry associated with Quick Traverse. The Quick Traverse
feature has no ability to adjust the resulting traverse. If you wish to adjust coordinates, you could create a raw
data le using the CGEditor - on the CGTrav menu - then use the Reduce Traverse feature, also on the CGTrav menu.
NOTE: If you wish to check the closure of a plat from bearing and distance data, use the CGEditor to cre-
ate a map check le, then use the Reduce Map Check File feature on the CGTrav menu.
Prompts
During the process of entering data for the Quick Traverse feature you will see the prompt:
[aZimuth/Bearing/Deection/Side shot/cUrve/Closure/horiz. distaNces]
At this prompt you may:
Change the type of angular input between Horizontal Angle, Azimuth and Bearing modes at any time.
Change how distances are specied as either slope distance and vertical angle or horizontal distance and vertical
distance.
Turn the vertical angle input on or off.
Traverse around tangent and non-tangent curves.
Switch from Traverse to Side shot mode.
Traverse mode: automatically occupy the foresight point.
Side shot mode: continue to occupy the current instrument point until you change to
Traverse mode: and thus occupy another point.
Note: There are several settings found in the C&G Options dialog box that should be set or checked prior
using the Quick Traverse feature:
The default values for the initial traverse input modes are set in the Traverse Options.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1131
If you wish to calculate or enter elevations, check the Elevations : ON checkbox and choose Enter Elev.
Or Calculate Elev. as desired in the Global Options tab. If you are calculating elevations, make sure the Vertical
Angles ON checkbox is checked on the Traverse Options tab.
Quick Traverse Example
In this example the mode is set to traverse and elevations are on and are to be calculated.
After choosing Quick Traverse from the CGTrav menu you will be asked to enter the following informa-
tion:
Instrument point: for the example enter 1 (assuming that the currently open coordinate le has a point in
it with a point ID of 1).
Backsight point: for the example enter 2.
[aZimuth/Bearing/Deection/Side shot/cUrve/Closure/slope distaNces.]
Enter horizontal angle <0.0000>:
Since elevations are on and set to calculate so you will be prompted for the following:
If you selected H.I. as Plus-Up on the Traverse Options tab, the coordinates and elevation of the instrument point
will be read from the le and you will be prompted for the instrument height (H.I).
If no elevation is found, you will be prompted to enter the ground elevation at the instrument point and then
the H.I.
If you selected H.I. as Elevation in the Traverse Options dialog box, you will be asked to enter the actual
elevation of the instrument scope.
Backsight Point: If you are turning angles or deection angles instead you will be prompted for the back-
sight point.
Rod Height: With Calculate Elevations on you are prompted to enter the prism height.
You will be prompted for the horizontal angle (or deection angle)
If you need to change the prism height <esc> and you will be prompted for a new prism height, if you
<esc> again you will be prompted for a new instrument point.
Angle data entry
Instrument point: 1
Back site: 2
aZimuth/Bearing/Deection/Side shot/cUrve/Closure/slope distaNce.] S
Enter horizontal angle <0.0000>:
When you are entering Quick Traverse data you have the options to change the angular input method. To
change the angular input mode, enter the upper case letter seen in the prompt for the method of entry you want to
change to and press <Enter>. The prompt should then change to reect your choice.
Note: You need not use the shift and type a capital letter to choose a command line option. For example, to
change to Side shot mode you can type either s or S.
The method that is currently set will not be shown as an option in the command line prompts. For example,
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1132
if you type s and <Enter> for Side shot mode, the prompt will change to include Traverse and Side shot will no
longer be available since you have chosen it as the current mode.
Traversing a curve
The Traverse routine allows you to traverse both reverse and compound curves.
Note: You will not be allowed to traverse around a curve if calculate elevation is selected.
If you type U and <Enter> for cUrve, the following dialog box appears: U
Enter any two of the curve components.
Identify the curve bearing as Chord if the angle, deection, bearing or azimuth about to be entered is to the
PT.
Identify the curve bearing as Radius if the angle, deection, bearing or azimuth about to be entered is to the
radius point.
Click the Clockwise box if the curve is clockwise. If this box is not checked, the curve is considered to be
counterclockwise.
If there is a previous traverse leg, check the Tangent Curve checkbox if the curve is tangent to the previous leg. If
this checkbox is not checked, the curve is assumed to be non-tangent.
When you have entered the required data: click the OK button.
The input multiplication factor is applied to the curve data you enter (radius, arc length, chord, etc.).
At the next prompt, if the curve is a non-tangent curve, enter the angle, deection, bearing or azimuth
from either the PC to the PT or the PC to the radius point (depending on whether you set Curve Bearing to Chord
or Radius). If the curve is tangent to the previous traverse line you will not be asked for the angle and distance.
The curve data will be calculated and shown at the command line:
Bearing and distance from the PC point to the radius point.
Bearing and distance from the radius point to the PT point.
Bearing and distance from the PC point to the PT point.
Other curve information.
The radius and PT points will be stored in coordinate le using the STORING POINT prompt.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1133
Closure
At the prompt: aZimuth/Bearing/Deection/Side shot/cUrve/Closure/slope distaNce.]
Enter horizontal angle <0.0000>:
Type C and <Enter> to view closure information for the traverse to the current foresight.
Slope/Horizontal Distance Data Entry
If you have selected Slope Dist/Vert. Angle in the Traverse Options tab or switched to slope distances by typing N
and <Enter> at the command line, enter the slope distance. Otherwise, enter the horizontal distance.
Note: The following steps are required only if Vertical Angles ON is checked on the Traverse Options tab
or if Calculate Elev. was selected on the Global Settings tab.
For slope distance - vertical angle:
Enter the vertical angle.
Depending on the settings in the Traverse Options tab enter one of the following:
Zenith (zero up)
Nadir (zero down)
Transit (zero level)
Transit vertical angles can be full circle (0 - 360), or positive for up and negative for down.
For horizontal distance - vertical distance:
Enter the vertical distance.
Pulldown Menu Location: CGTrav
Keyboard Command: QTR, CG QTRAV
Prerequisite: Open Coordinate File
Edit Raw File
The Edit Raw File feature allows you to use the CGEditor to create a new raw data le, append to an existing raw
data le, or edit an existing raw data le. For further and complete information on using the Edit Raw File see the
chapter on CGEditor in the Tools section.
CGEditor General Information
The CGEditor is an integral part of preparing les for use in C&G applications. The CGEditor is a very powerful
tool. You can open multiple data les of any supported le type and edit the les as needed. The CGEditor has a full
complement of tools for searching and replacing and navigating within a le. It will also allow you to cut or copy
records from one le and paste them into another le in order to merge les, move data between phases of a job, etc.
The CGEditor can create and/or edit six types of data les used by C&G:
Raw Data Files
Raw data les contain information pertaining to a eld traverse. Raw data les are typically downloaded from the
data collector and converted to the C&G raw data le format. These les have the extension .CGR.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1134
Map Check Files
Map Check les contain bearing, distance and curve information and are typically used to calculate the closure of a
deed description. These les have the extension .CGM.
Cross Section Files
Cross Section les contain one or more cross sections identied by their station along the alignment. Each cross
section record has the percent grade dened for its left and right slopes. Following the ''Station'' record are several
''Point'' records containing the elevations and offsets of the points along the cross section. Cross section les consist
of a pair of les; the main data le has the extension .CEW and the index le has the extension .CEX.
Template Files
Template les are merely cross section les that represent a standard cross section and can be used to generate
other cross section les. However, unlike cross section les, template les use an integer ID instead of a station to
uniquely identify each template. Like cross section les, the percent grade is dened for the left and right slopes
of each template and there are a set of ''Point'' records specifying the template elevation at a given offset. The
centerline elevation at offset 0.00 is typically set to 0.00. Template les consist of a pair of les; the main data le
has the extension .CTP and the index le has the extension .CTX.
Point Group Files
Point Group Files (formerly called batch point les) are simply a list of point numbers that can dene a group of
points, a lot/parce of landl, or an alignment. These are ASCII les and have a .PTS extension.
Coordinate Files
CGSurvey supports many different coordinate le formats:
C&G .CRD/.IDX - C&G numeric coordinate les
C&G .CGC/.CGX - C&G alpha-numeric coordinate les
Carlson .CRD - Carlson coordinate le format, numeric and alpha-numeric
Simplicity .ZAK - Simplicity coordiante le
LDT - MDB - Land Desk Top coordinate le
Pulldown Menu Location: CGTrav\Edit Raw File
Keyboard Command: ET, CG EDIT RAW
Prerequisite: Open Raw File
Data Collector Transfer
The Data Collector Transfer program allows transfer of data to and from the data collector. The program may also
be used to convert raw data and coordinate les to the supported formats.
There are two variables that affect the interaction between your data collector and CGSurvey. One is the
data collector itself and the other is the software you use in the data collector. This section provides information on
the use of data collectors and software that will interact with CGSurvey.
NOTE: This manual is not a substitute for your data collector manual.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1135
GENERAL INFORMATION ON USING DATA COLLECTORS
Before using the data collector program, make sure the correct data collector, communication port and communica-
tion parameters have been selected in the Settings dialog box.
Direction of Transfer:
Choose either ''Data Collector to Computer'' or ''Computer to Data Collector''.
Data Collector and Computer Transfer Options
Instructions: Press the STEP 1 button. Depending on the type data collector, type le and direction of transfer, this
option will give you step by step directions on how to proceed.
The Transfer dialog is divided into two sections, left and right. The left part of the dialog box pertains to
''Data Collect Options'' such as le source, le format and the le being transferred. The right part of the dialog box
pertains to the Desk Top ''Computer Options'' . Below are instructions for setting both.
Data Collector Options
Pressing the triangle to the right of the edit box will bring up the list of data collectors to choose. From the list
select the type of data collector being used.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1136
Use Data Collector:
Check this box to transfer data to/from the data collector. You can also transfer to/from a le in the selected data
collectors format.
Use Disk File:
Check this box if the data is in computer le. The data le must be formated for the data collector selected.
File Name:
If you are importing from a le, or exporting to a le, or are connecting to a data collector that requires a le name
for transfer, the File Name edit eld will be active. To select the le path click on browse. In the le dialog box
specify the path and le name of the le to be opened. select or enter the path and le name of the le desired le.
Transfer Coordinates with Raw:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1137
Some eld software allows unadjusted coordinates to be carried in the raw le as the eld data is collected. This
checkbox gives you the option to transfer this data or not. If you do not want approximate coordinates that were
calculated in the eld to be confused with control when processing the raw data, leave this box unchecked.
Computer Options
File type: Choose the le type you are transferring/converting. Example: Raw Data, Coordinate, ASCII, etc.
File Format: C&G will import and export several types of le formats for both Raw and Coordinate les.
Supported Raw Data File Formats:
New CGR .....................
*
.cgr
Old C&G ........................
*
.raw
OBS................................
*
.obs
Geolab ........................
*
.iob
StarNet .......................
*
.dat
SDR2x .......................
*
.dat
SDR33 .......................
*
.dat
Supported Coordinate File Formats:
C&G AlphaNumeric ...............
*
.cgc / cgi
C&G ..............................
*
.crd / idx
Carlson AlphaNumeric .............
*
.crd
Carlson Numeric ......................
*
.crd
ASCII ...........................
*
.nez
ASCII ...........................
*
.asc
Geolab ...........................
*
.neo
StarNet...........................
*
.pts
SDR2x ...........................
*
.dat
SDR33 ............................
*
.dat
Simplicity..............................
*
.zak
LDT.................................
*
.mdb
Description Table:
To use a description table check ''Use Description Table'' box.
You have the ability to use multiple description tables. Examples of that might be:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1138
State DOT
Boundary
As-Built
Topography
Each of these could have different codes and descriptions and this option would allow you to choose which
description table to use for the reduction of this le. To change the description table click the ''Browse'' button and
select the TBL le.
Below is an example of a description table:
When using a description table, any INTEGER numbers in the description eld of the data coming from the data
collector will be replaced by the description in the table. For example, if your description is ''13 5'', the description
put in the coordinate or raw data le will be ''CL CMP''.
Transfer
Instructions: The instructions window will guide you step by step through the transfer routine. It will tell you what
to do on the data collector, and in what order.
Transfer: Once all of the settings are set correct, clicking on the TRANSFER button will begin the transfer between
the data collector/le and the desktop.
The Current Status window at the bottom of the Transfer Dialog will indicate the status of the transfer.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1139
Settings
At the bottom middle of the main screen is the ''Settings'' button. The settings control communications, data units
and output data path.
Data Collector
The Data Collector dialog box allows you to select a short-list of data collectors you are transferring to and/or from.
When you select the down button to the right of the data collector shown and the ''Show Defaults only'' box is
unchecked, you will see the complete list of all the data collectors that C&G interfaces with.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1140
You also can create a Default List, This default list should consist of the various data collectors your company may
have and/or interface with on a daily basis.
You can use the Show Defaults only check box to limit the data collectors which may be selected from the
Data Collector list on the main Data Collector Transfer Screen. If this box is checked, only those data collectors
you have specied for the default list will be show.
To add a data collector to the default data collector list:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1141
First make sure the Show Defaults only box is unchecked. Next Select a data collector from the list by scrolling
up and down the list using the arrow keys. When the new data collector is selected, make sure the communication
parameters are correct to the data collector. Once the settings are correct, click Add DC button Now click the Save
List to save the changes to the list.
When through setting all of the typical data collectors you may use, check the Show defaults only check
box and only those instruments and settings will be displayed for your selection.
To remove a data collector from the default list:
Make sure the Show Defaults only is checked.
Highlight the data collector you whish to remove from list
Click on the Remove DC
Click on the Save List button
Chose OK and verify that the data collector is no longer in the default listing.
Communications
The Communication box allows you to set the following parameters:
Port
Baud rate
Parity
Word length
Stop bits
When a data collector is selected, C&G reads a list of default settings and compares it to the settings currently
shown. If the current settings are different than those recommended the defaults will be displayed and a Set
Recommended button will be displayed. This allows you to automatically set the recommended communication
parameters for your data collector.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1142
The Measurement portion of the Settings dialog box pertains to the units of Raw and Coordinate data input.
Angle Mode........................... Degrees or Grads
Direction Mode....................... Bearing or Azimuth
Azimuth Direction:............... North or South
Vertical Input......................... Zenith, Nadir or Horizontal
Distance..................................Foot or Meter
Foot Denition....................... U.S. or International
Coordinate Position............... North-East or East-North
Description Length................ 1 to 100 characters
The Description Table portion of the Settings dialog allows you to select the default description table.
As mentioned earlier you can have multiple description tables, here is where you would select the description table
to use.
The Use Description Table option, when checked , will replace any integer description found in the raw data le
with corresponding description found on the description table. When this check box is not checked data will be
transferred without translation.
Default Path for Output Files Allows you to set the
default location for storing transferred les
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1143
Receiving Coordinates from Data Collectors:
There is a point protection feature in place when bring coordinates into an existing coordinate le from a data
collector. If the point already exists, and if the coordinate values are different, you will see the following dialog
box.
You will have the following options:
Overwrite: overwrite existing point
Do Not Overwrite: skip point
Overwrite, Do Not Ask Again: Overwrite all existing points
Do Not Overwrite, Do Not Ask again: Bring in only new points
Transfer Options
Depending on the type of data collector that you are using, you will be able to perform some of the following
functions:
Receive raw data from the data collector or le.
Send raw data to the data collector or le.
Receive coordinates from the data collector or le.
Send coordinates to the data collector or le.
Send a program to the data collector.
Execute a program on the data collector.
Delete les on data collector
View and/or Select les on data collector
Format data area on the data collector
As data is received from a particular data collector or le, it is converted to a .CGR or .CRD le (or other
supported format).
Data that is sent to the data collector is converted from the .CGR or .CRD format to the data collector format.
When data is received from a data collector, a read-only le in the data collectors native format is created and
stored on the computer. If it is a raw data le, it has a .R$$ extension. If it is a coordinate le, it has a .C$$ extension.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1144
Select Points
When transfering coordinates to the data collector you may choose which points are to be transfered. The default is
ALL points. When you click on the Select Points button the following dialog box comes up.
Change le select from: Click the le button to select the coordinate le that you want transfer coordinates
from. Choose Points: This option allows you to se-
lect groups of points to be included from the le you have opened, usingthe C&G selection options.
All Points: All Points in the le will be selected.
Block: select blocks of Points.
Desc: select points by their description.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1145
Match Case: Case sensitive compare.
Match Whole Word Only: If your description is BOC this box is NOT checked, points with the descriptions BOC,
BOC1, BOC2, etc. would all be included. If the box were checked, only points with the description BOC would be
included.
Code: selec points by Code
.
Match Case: Match the case of the text
Match Whole Word Only: If checked, in the above example, only AB would be selected. Descriptions of AB1,
ABC and ABB would not.
Elevation: select points by elevation
Low Value:
Point ID: Point Number
Elevation: elevation at point
High Value:
Point ID: Point Number
Elevation: elevation at point
If a point number is entered in the point ID box the elevation for that point will be used for either the high
or low elevation. You may however enter an elevation only.
In Radius: select all the points within a given radius.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1146
If a point number is entered in the point ID box, the northing and easting of that point will be used for the center of
the search circle. To manually enter a northing and easting, leave the Point ID box empty and enter the values for
the northing and easting of the circle. Enter the radius for the search circle.
In Rectangle: Select all the points within a given rectangle.
If a point number is entered in the point ID box, the northing and easting of that point will be used for that corner of
the rectangle. To manually enter a northing and easting, leave the Point ID box empty and the northing and easting
values. The two points dened the diagonal corners of the rectangle.
Choice: This option allows you to choose to include or exclude points previously in the C&G select point
dialog box. Example:
In the choose points dialog box: select by Desc
Then type: GS as the description
in the choice dialog box: select Exclude
Any point that has ''GS'' in the description eld will be removed from the selection set.
Total selected Points: the total number of points selected is shown in the lower right hand corner of the di-
alog box.
Default Column Width: The columns have a default width. If you have changed the width of a column, say
NORTHING, you may press this button to go back to the defualt widths.
The remainder of this section discusses specic data collectors and software.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1147
CG-Field & FieldPlus Data Collectors
Establish a connection between the data collector and desktop computer with a standard 9-Pin serial cable, USB
cable, Bluetooth, etc. Check the settings as shown above.
Download a Description Table
You can transfer the desktop description table directly to the CG-FieldPlus data collector. The table will be placed
in the data collector's DC DESC.TBL le. CG-Field will let you use codes without a description table. Simply
delete the DC CODES le from the data collector and use the code numbers to enter descriptions. When you
transfer the le to the desk top, the codes will automatically be replaced with the appropriate description. (This
allows you to combine codes.) For example, if you enter [1 20 30], in the description eld on the data collector
when the transfer takes place these numbers will be read from the desk top description table and converted to the
corresponding description, such as [BL
*
TC SW].
Receiving Raw Data from CG-Field
NOTE: When uploading raw data from a data collector using CG-FieldPlus , a read-only le in the original
CG-Field format is created on the computer (in the data directory) with a .R$$ extension.
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Set transfer method to Data Collector to Computer.
Data Collector Type; CGFIELD+
Use Data Collector:
Transfer Coordinates with raw: -yes or no (your choice)
File Type: Raw Data
File Format: C&G (
*
.cgr)
File Name: enter the path and name where the le is to be stored or click on the ''Browse'' button and select the
path.
Description Table: enter the path where the Description Table is stored or click on the ''Browse'' button and select
the path
Select Transfer when all settings are correct.
On the data collector Utils menu, select:
1:C&G Transfer
2:Send Raw Data
Enter or select the raw data le
The le will be transferred.
NOTE:CG-Field uses only 2-character point codes. If you have CGSurvey set for 4-character point codes,
the CG-Field le will be converted to a 4-character format but it will still have the correct 2-character code. If you
download the same le back to the data collector, the downloaded le will be correct if you did not add any codes
that actually consist of 4 characters.
Receiving Coordinate File from CG-Field
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Transfer Data Collector to Computer
Data Collector:CGFIELD+
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1148
Use Data Collector:
File Type: Coordinate
File Format: C&G (
*
.crd) or C&G (
*
.cgc)
File Name: enter the path where the le is to be stored or click on the ''Browse'' button and select the path.
Description Table: enter the path where the Description Table is stored or click on the ''Browse'' button and select
the path
Press Transfer when all settings are correct.
On the data collector Utils menu, select:
1:C&G Transfer
3:Send Coords
Select Points
All points
Blocks of points
From points le
The le will be transferred.
NOTE: In any transfer routine it is important to prepare and have ready the device that will be receiving
data rst.
Sending Coordinate File to CG-Field
On the data collector Utils menu, select:
1:C&G Transfer
3:Receive Coords
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Transfer: Computer TO Data Collector
Data Collector: CGFIELD+
Use Data Collector:
File Type: Coordinate
File Format: C&G (
*
.crd) or C&G (
*
.cgc)
File Name: enter the path where the le is to be stored or click on the ''Browse'' button and select the path.
Check the Select Points settings:
This tool allows you to select what group or groups of coordinates are transferred to the data collector.
Press Transfer: when all settings are correct.
NOTE: You should not download a le containing a 4-character code to your data collector. You will be
warned that the last 2 characters of the code will not be sent. This means that a code of 1584 will be received as 15.
Receiving ASCII File from CG-Field
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Transfer Data Collector to Computer
Data Collector: CGFIELD+
Use Data Collector:
File Type: ASCII
File Name: enter the path where the le is to be stored or click on the ''Browse'' button and select the path.
Select Transfer when all settings are correct.
On the data collector Utils menu, select:
1:C&G Transfer
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1149
6:Send ASCII
File Name With Extension
File:
Transfer Name:
******
.
***
<Enter>
Sending ASCII File to CG-Field
On the data collector Utils menu, select:
1:C&G Transfer
5:Receive ASCII
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Transfer Computer to Data Collector
Data Collector: CGFIELD+
Use Data Collector:
File Type: ASCII
File Name: enter the path where the le is to be stored or click on the ''Browse'' button and select the path.
Select Transfer when all settings are correct.
The following are examples of typical data collection transfer settings. There will be cases with certain models or
manufactures where special instructions will be required and C&G will provide those as needed.
There three different dialog boxes involved with data collection transfer:
C&G Data Collection Transfer (shown above)
Settings
Description Table Editor.
The function and settings for each of these is described in detail in the previous pages.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1150
The examples shown on the following pages show transfers directly from and to data collectors. These
same transfer routines will also work with les that have been downloaded to the desktop computer.
File Conversion Utility
To convert data from les check the Use Disc File box and either hand enter the path and name or click on ''Browse''
and search for the le location.
These les need to be in the correct data le format.
Receiving Raw Data
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Select Data Collector to Computer
Data Collector: (select data collector from list)
Check Use Data Collector:
Transfer Coordinates with raw: -yes or no (your choice)
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1151
File Type: Raw Data
File Format: C&G (
*
.cgr)
File Name: enter the path where the le is to be stored or click on the ''Browse'' button and select the path.
Press Transfer: when all settings are correct.
Begin transfer from data collector
Receiving Coordinate Data
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Select Data Collector to Computer
Data Collector: (select data collector from list)
Use Data Collector:
File Type: Coordinate
File Format: C&G (
*
.crd) or C&G (
*
.cgc)
File: enter the path to store the le or click on the Browse button and select the path.
Description Table: enter the path where the Desc Table is located or click on the Browse button and select the path.
Press Transfer: when all settings are correct.
Begin transfer from data collector
NOTE: In any transfer routine it is important to prepare and have ready the device that will be receiving
data rst.
Receiving ASCII Data
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1152
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Select Data Collector to Computer
Data Collector: (select data collector from list)
Use Data Collector:
File Type: Coordinate
File Format: ASCII (
*
.nez)
File: enter the path to store the le or click on the Browse button and select the path.
Description Table: enter the path where the Desc Table is stored or click on the File button and select the path.
Select Transfer: when all settings are correct.
Begin transfer from data collector
Sending Coordinate Data
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1153
Prepare Data collector to receive Coordinate le
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Select Computer to Data Collector
Data Collector: (select data collector from list)
Use Data Collector:
File Type: Coordinate
File Format: C&G (
*
.crd) or C&G (
*
.cgc)
File: enter the path to le or click on the Browse button and le
Check the Select Points setting:
Press Transfer: when all settings are correct.
Sending ASCII File
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1154
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Select Computer to Data Collector
Data Collector: (select data collector from list)
File Type: ASCII
File: enter the path to store the le or click on the bROWSE button and select the path
Press Transfer: when all settings are correct.
Sending Description Table
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1155
On the desk top data collection transfer dialog box, set the following:
Select Computer to Data Collector
Data Collector: (select data collector from list)
File Type: Description Table
File: enter the path to store the le or click on the File button and select the path
Press Transfer: when all settings are correct.
SurvCE Data Collector
You can receive coordinates and raw data from the data collector, or send coordinates to the data collector. Make
sure SurvCE is selected as the data collector.
Receive Coordinates from SurvCE
On the desktop, click on ''Data collector to Computer'': select SurvCE as the Type data collector.
Set FILE TYPE to Coordinate: and select the desired File Format.
On the Data Collector, Select FILE >DATA TRANSFER: Choose Carlson/C&G Transfer.
On the desktop, select BROWSE button next to the FILENAME eld: You will see the coordinate les that are
on SurvCE.
Select the File you wish to download: and press OK.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1156
Press the Transfer button. If you do not have a destination FILE NAME selected, you will see the following
dialog:
In this case, the le already exists, If you press OK the coordinates will be written to the existing le. Point
Overwrite Protection will allow you to select which points you wish to bring in. You can decide individually
whether you want to overwrite a point or not, or you can select overwrite ALL points, or you can select to bring in
ONLY new points.
A le with the same name and a C$$ extension will also be created with the data that came directly from
survCE in survCE's format. This le is ready-only and can be archived for legal purposes.
Receive Raw Data from SurvCE
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1157
On the desktop, click on ''Data collector to Computer'': select SurvCE as the Type data collector.
Set FILE TYPE to Raw Data: and select the desired File Format.
On the Data Collector, Select FILE >DATA TRANSFER: Choose Carlson/C&G Transfer.
On the desktop, select BROWSE button next to the FILENAME eld: You will see the raw data les that are
on SurvCE.
Select the File you wish to download: and press OK.
The selected raw data le will be transferred and converted to the selected format. A le with the same
name and a R$$ extension will also be created with the data that came directly from survCE in SurvCE's format.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1158
This le is read-only and can be archived for legal purposes.
Send Coordinates to SurvCE
Select Computer to Data collector. Make sure the Data Collector TYPE is set to SurvCE: select the le to be
set to SurvCE (N DRUIDH.crd). If you do not select a destination name, it will be sent to the same named le as
the source.
If you do not want to send ALL the points, but need to select specic point: press the SELECT POINTS button
and choose the point to transfer.
On the data collector select FILE>DATA TRANSFER: Choose Carlson/C&G Transfer
On the Desktop, Press the TRANSFER BUTTON: The selected coordinates will be transfered.
If the le already exists on SurvCE, ou will see the following dialog:
You have the following choices:
Overwrite the existing le
Skip the le (do nothing)
Rename the le
Merge the points.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1159
If you select the Merge option, you will see Carlson's standard merge dialog:
This dialog allows you to x all conicts prior to transfering the points.
TOPCON DATA COLLECTORS
Use Topcon cable A-5 if your computer has a 25-pin serial port, or Topcon cable A-16 if your computer has a
9-pin serial port. When uploading raw data from a Topcon/TDS data collector, a read-only le in the original
data collector format is created on the computer (in the data directory) with a .R$$ extension. When you send the
description table to a Topcon/TDS data collector, only the rst 999 descriptions will be sent.
FC1 DATA COLLECTOR
For the transfer program to be able to access any data in the FC1, it must be stored in the FC1 using the Program
2 supplied with the FC1 transfer software. First locate the necessary cables to connect the FC1 to your computer.
(your dealer should be able to help you with this).
NOTE: Currently, the only programs that are supported are ET1 and GTS3, which are supplied with the
system.
Follow these instructions:
Select either ET-1 or GTS-3 when prompted. Once you have loaded Program 2 into the FC1, you may enter your
eld data in either of two ways. The rst way, is by connecting the FC1 to your total station and let the total station
record angular and distance measurements for you by using the ET1 (GTS3) section of the FC1 program. The other
way is to use the Manual Entry section of the program to store all of your eld data directly through the FC1's
keyboard.
Collecting Data using the FC1
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1160
(The following steps will be followed no matter which data entry method you use):
1) Set up data recording mode in the FC1.
2) Enter job information: job name, operator, instrument number, date, temperature, pressure.
3) Enter instrument point information: point number, H.I., backsight point, angle in instrument to backsight.
4) Enter foresight point information: point number, rod height, horizontal and vertical angles, distance.
5) If there are other foresights from the same instrument point, repeat step 4; or if you have another instrument
setup, go to step 3; or if you are through, go to the end of the program.
NOTE: Never press the <skip> key when the FC1 is asking for data. Only use the <skip> key to by-pass
''go to'' options (see step 5 below).
Automatic Recording of Data
1) To set up the recording mode, have the FC1 connected to the ET1 (GTS3), and turned on. Wait until the left side
of the display says READY.
If the right side of the display says PRG>2, then you are ready for step 1A.
Otherwise, press these keys: <func>, <#>, <Enter> and then go to step 1B below.
A) Press the <F1> key.
B) When the display says GOTO 7 ET1-PROG? (''GOTO 7 GTS3-PRG''), press the <Enter> key.
2) Enter any name you want for the job-id:
Enter the name of the operator.
Enter the instrument number.
Enter the date, temperature, and pressure.
3) Sight the backsite point with the instrument:
Enter the instrument point number.
Enter the instrument height (H.I.).
Enter the backsight point number.
Press <Enter> for the rod height.
Press <Enter> when the display says REC MODE 2 (REC V/H< MODE? on GTS3).
When the display says MODE>, press <2> and the ET1 should send angular information to the FC1.
4) Turn to the foresight.
Enter the foresight point number, and press <Enter>.
Enter a description for the foresight and press <Enter>.
Enter the foresight rod height and press <Enter>.
When the REC MD3-DR/2R (REC SD/V/HMODE?) message appears, press <Enter>, then choose mode 3 if
you are entering a direct angle.
If this is your second angle to that foresight, then you may use mode 2 to record angles only.
5) After step 4, then you should see this message in the display: GOTO 18 FS.PT#?. If you wish to turn more
angles from the current instrument point, then press <Enter>, and go back to step 4.
-or-
Press <Skip>. The next message will be GOTO 13 INST.PT? If you want to record another instrument set-up,
then press <Enter>.
-or-
Press <Skip>. The next message is, GOTO 8 OPER.? To change operators, press <Enter>, and go to step 2.
-or-
Press <Skip>. The next message is, GOTO 53 END? To end input for this job, press <Enter>.
Steps on Manual Recording of Data
1) To set up the recording mode, have the FC1 turned on. Wait until the left side of the display says READY.
If the right side of the display, says PRG>2 then you are ready for step 1A.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1161
Otherwise press these keys: <func>, <#>, <Enter> and go to step 1B.
A) Press the <F1> key.
B) When the display says GOTO 7 ET1-PROG? (GOTO 7 GTS3-PRG): press the <skip> key.
When the display says GOTO 30 MANUAL?: press the <Enter> key.
2) Enter any name you want for the job-id:
Enter the name of the operator:
Enter the instrument number:
Enter the date, temperature, and pressure:
3) Enter the instrument point number:
Enter the instrument height (H.I.).
Enter the backsight point number:
Enter the rod height if desired:
Enter the angle in the instrument: when the backsight was taken.
Enter the vertical angle and distance: if desired.
4) Turn to your foresight. Enter the foresight point number, and press <Enter>.
Enter a description for the foresight and press <Enter>.
Enter the foresight rod height and press <Enter>.
Enter the horizontal angle, slope distance, and vertical angle to the foresight.
5) After step 4, then you should see this message in the display: GOTO 43 FS. PT#?
If you wish to turn more angles from the current instrument point, then press <Enter>, and go back to Step 4.
-or-
Press <Skip>. The next message will be GOTO 36 INST.PT? If you want to record another instrument set-up,
then press <Enter>.
-or-
Press <Skip>. The next message is GOTO 31 OPER.? To change operators, press <Enter>, and go to step 2.
-or-
Press <Skip>. The next message is GOTO 1 MENU? To go to the menu for another job, press <Enter>.
-or-
Press <Skip>. The next message is END. Press <Enter> to end entry for this session.
Receive Data from FC1
Once you have your data stored in the FC1, you must upload it to the computer.
Select the Receive Raw Data function. If you have already dumped the data stored on the FC1 to a com-
puter le (in the Topcon format), you may choose to receive the data from the le. Enter the le name that contains
the data, and the le name for the .CGR le.
NOTE: To power your FC1 while sending data to the computer, you must plug the power cable into the
signal port at the top of the FC1 and toggle the FC1's power switch to EXT.
TOPCON PROPAC DATA COLLECTOR
To enable the Propac to collect raw data in a format Suitable for CG-Survey's data transfer program the CG program
must be installed on the 71B. To load the software: connect the Propac to the computer com port.
Follow the directions to download.
You may store the CG program in a freeport on the 71B. This has several advantages, the main one being it will not
be lost if the batteries die.
Under the Propac options choose Load CG Program Into Propac.
On the 71B :
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1162
Type Freeport(.01) and key <Endline>.
Type COPY CG TO :PORT(.01) and key <Endline>.
For ROM Versions Prior to 1.75
Type DEF KEY 'f7',''USER @ RUNCG'': and key <Endline>.
For ROM Versions 1.75 or Later
Type DEF KEY 'f7',''USER @ CONT PRGM2'': and key <Endline>.
This will set up the raw data collection program to run on the Propac when the yellow function key
and the <7>key are pressed. Unless something happens to the 71B, you should not need to reinstall the CG-Field
program again.
Now delete the CG-Field program from the main memory of the Propac by typing PURGE CG:MAIN and
key <Endline>. The program is still stored in the freeport.
To use the CG-RAW data program, turn the Propac on and type RUN PRO then key <Endline>.
From the KEYS prompt press the yellow function key then the <7> key. This will start the CG program, then
just follow the prompts.
The CG raw data program is the only one needed on the Propac other than the Propac options already avail-
able. If you are collecting coordinates and elevations instead of raw data, simply follow the Propac instructions.
To transfer the collected data to and from the computer, choose the Propac option you wish and follow the
directions on the screen.
If you have already downloaded the data stored on the Propac to a computer le (in the Propac format), you
may choose to receive the data directly from the le. Enter the le name that contains the data, and the le name for
the .CGR le (raw data le) or .CRD le (coordinate le).
FC-4 DATA COLLECTOR
The C&G data collector transfer program can accept data that was collected from the FC-4 in either the traverse
mode or topo mode. It can receive coordinates from the FC-4 and also send coordinates to the FC-4 for stakeout.
The CG data collector transfer program supports most the valid methods of collecting data in the traverse or topo
mode of the FC-4 (including the ability to collected direct and reverse angles). Refer to the FC-4 users manual to
learn the different methods of data collection supported by the FC-4.
Special Features - When translating the FC-4 le to a raw data le using the C&G data collector
transfer program:
1) If an FC-4 record is not used, the record will be placed in the raw data le as a comment with the message Not
Used appended. No FC-4 record will be ignored. For example,
*
123 Not Used
2) Remarks (''R'' records) will be placed in the raw data le as a comment record.
3) Coordinates will be placed in the raw data le as a coordinate record, (C 23 10000.0000 10000.0000 923.24 'TP).
4)When using the FC-4 Benchmark function, the following will be placed in the raw data le:
A) The benchmark coordinates.
B) The measurements to the benchmark as a foresight point.
5) When using the FC-4 Angle-Offset function the following will be placed in the raw data le:
A) A comment line saying the next line is an angle/offset and showing the 1st and 2nd angle recorded to the point.
B) A foresight record combining the rst distance measurement and the 2nd angle measurement.
6) When using the FC-4 Distance-Offset function the following will be placed in the raw data le:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1163
A) A comment line saying the next line is a distance/offset and showing the slope distance, vertical angle and offset
distance measured to the base point.
B) A foresight record with a new slope distance and vertical angle calculated from the above information.
7) When using the FC-4 Perpendicular-Offset function the following will be placed in the raw data le:
A) The foresight record to the base point.
B) A comment line saying the next line is a perpendicular offset and showing the offset forward/backward, the
offset left/right and the offset up/down.
C) A foresight record with a new horizontal angle, slope distance and vertical angle calculated from the
above information.
NOTE: If there is no left/right offset, data will not convert correctly to a CG-SURVEY raw data record.
For example, if the Perpendicular Offset routine is used to locate a point away from the instrument but on the same
line, the resulting data record will use the wrong horizontal angle.
8) Backsight azimuths are transferred to the .CGR le as reference azimuths.
When a le is rst created on the FC-4 the user will be prompted for some header information. When the
data is transferred to the computer, the C&G data collection transfer program will use the job-id as the le name for
the raw data le created on the computer.
To prepare the data collector and computer for data transfer, connect the A-5 or A-16 cable to the serial port
of the FC-4 and to the appropriate serial port of the computer. Make sure the correct data collector comm port has
been chosen in Settings Dialog.
Choose the appropriate menu option on the FC-4, then follow the instructions and answer the prompts as
they appear on the screen. Once the raw data has been downloaded into the computer the raw data can be edited,
reduced and printed out from the Traverse/Input Edit program.
If you have already downloaded the data stored on the FC-4 to a le on the computer, you can transfer the
data using the ''Use Disc File'' command
TOPCON and TDS
Transferring Data
On the C&G Data Collector Transfer screen set the data collector option to:
Check Settings to make sure all options are set correctly
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1164
Note: See opening section of this chapter for detailed instructions on the Settings dialog box and on sending and
receiving les.
Sending Description Table to 48 When sending the description table (DC CODES le) to the 48, the fol-
lowing occurs:
A new le (DESCRIPT.TXT) is created in the data directory on the computer.
The rst 200 descriptions are duplicated from the DC CODES le.
After that, the rst 100 descriptions are reproduced 7 times with the following mapping
codes preceding the descriptions:
201 - 300 BL
*
(DESC)
301 - 400 EL
*
(DESC)
401 - 500 CL
*
(DESC)
501 - 600 CF
*
(DESC)
601 - 700 OC
*
(DESC)
701 - 800 PC
*
(DESC)
801 - 900 PT
*
(DESC)
The DESCRIPT.TXT le is then sent to the 48.
TOPCON CR2 CARD READER
Data collected and stored using the Topcon Card Reader is in the same format as data on the FC-4. All data format
rules for the FC-4 apply here.
Set-Up
Card Read Preparation. Before using the card reader it is necessary to set the two DIP switches on the bottom of the
unit to the settings described below. The direction on the switch which is marked 'OFF' is really a '1'. You should
read the attached label, not the switches.
The CR2 should be set as follows:
Baud: 19200
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1165
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1
Word: 8
SW1 DIP Switch: Set the communication parameters
SW2 DIP Switch: Sets other parameters
Use the interface cable supplied with the CR2 unit and plug it into the comm port on the computer. Make sure you
select the Topcon CR2 data collector and the correct comm port.
The Card Reader program allows:
1) Receive raw data from the CR2 or from a CR2 le.
2) Receive coordinates from the CR2 or a CR2 le.
3) Send coordinates to the CR2.
4) Send or receive a description table to CR2.
5) Receive description table.
6) Send or receive ASCII les from the CR2.
7) Send an executable (EXE) le to the CR2.
8) Catalog (or directory) of all les on CR2.
9) Delete les on the CR2.
10) Format cards for the CR2.
Receiving Data from the CR2
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1166
You may receive raw data les (.R), coordinate les (.N), ASCII les or description table from the CR2. All les
on the CR2 of the type you wish to receive will be shown on the screen
Raw Data
Coordinates
ASCII
Description Table
Receiving Data from a CR2 File
If you have already downloaded the data stored on the CR2 to a le on the computer, you may choose to receive the
data from the le.
Sending Data to the CR2
You may send coordinate (.CRD) les, ASCII les, EXE les or description table to the CR2. Select the le you
wish to send. You may not send a le to the card reader that already exists on the CR2. You must delete the le
rst. The.CRD les will be converted to .N les. ASCII les will be transferred without conversion, (make sure the
le you are transferring is a true ASCII le).
EXE les
Programs with .EXE extensions can be transferred to the CR2. These les will be transferred with a .X extension.
Note: See opening section of this chapter for detailed instructions on the Settings dialog box & information
on sending and receiving les.
Catalog: The catalog function will show you all existing les on the Topcon Card Reader.
Deleting Files:All les on the CR2 will be shown on the screen. Select the le you wish to delete. Be careful, once
the le is deleted it is gone forever.
Format: The format function will allow you to format a card, making it ready to accept (store) data. If the card is
already formatted, you will be warned that all information on the card will be lost, be careful.
SOKKIA (LIETZ) SDR2 DATA COLLECTOR
General Information
Use the cable supplied with the SDR2 data collector to plug into your computers serial port.
When uploading or downloading to or from the computer, turn the switch on the cable toward the word
PRINTER. If this does not work, turn the switch toward the word COMPUTER and try again. If you still have
trouble please call us.
In order to use the Lietz SDR2 data collector with the transfer program, there are 4 areas that you must
consider: (1) Entering data into the data collector in a format that can be sent to your computer, (2) the transfer
program itself, (3) sending calculated coordinates back to the data collector, and (4) the data collector code
conversion table which converts numeric codes for points into English-language descriptions as the data is sent to
the computer.
Sokkia (Lietz) data collectors allow you to enter attribute data. To use attribute data with
CG-SURVEY, it must be appended to the description records in the following format:
DESCRIPTION [attribute name] attribute
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1167
For example: PIPE [Diameter] 18''
Entering Data into the Data Collector
Note: that all of the following assume that you have a Getting Started book and Operator's Manual from the Lietz
Company.
1) To begin a new job, press <clear> until Select operation appears in the display. Press the <Menu> key.
When JOB appears in the display, press <Enter>, and enter the job name and scale factor.
2) To enter eld data, press <clear> until Select operation appears in the display. Press the <Prog>. When
Traverse appears in the display, press <Enter> and begin traversing.
2a) You may use the TOPO program rather than the Traverse program. If you use this program, you must
use the R option when sending data to your computer. The ''Transferring Field Data to the Computer'' section of
this contains more about this.
Note: The coordinates that you enter for the rst instrument point are for the internal use of the SDR2, and
can be changed when your eld data gets to the computer.
Note: When recording your rst backsight information, simply enter an azimuth from the instrument point
to the backsight (0.0000 will do). The azimuth information is also only used internally in the SDR2. You can
change all of that as you reduce your eld notes on the computer.
Note: At each instrument setup, the rst angle recorded must be to your backsight. Your instrument may be
''zeroed'' or not, but when the Traverse Reduction program runs, it will subtract the backsight angle from the
foresight angles.
Transferring Field Data to the Computer
If you have already dumped the data stored on the SDR to a computer le (in the SDR format), you may choose
option to receive the data from the le. Enter the le name that contains the data, and the le name for the .CGR
le (raw data le) or .CRD le (coordinate le).
Before data can be transferred in either direction between the computer and the SDR2, you must set up the
transfer parameters in the SDR2. Once these have been set, they will not change, until you change them again. You
do not have to set them each time. (The only parameter that you may wish to change is the baud rate.)
In our tests, the computer can receive data from the SDR2 at 4800 baud, its fastest speed, but the SDR2
could only receive points at 1200 baud. For fastest transmissions to and from the SDR2, you might wish to change
this parameter in the SDR2.
The SDR-22 and SDR-24 data collectors will send to the computer at 9600 baud and receive data from the
computer at 4800 baud.
1) Set up parameters by pressing <clear> until the message Select operation appears in the SDR2
display. Then, press <Menu>. Press the up or down arrow until Parameters appears in the display, then press
<Enter>. You can then go from one parameter to the next by pressing the up or down arrows. When a parame-
ter you wish to change shows on the display, press the <Edit>key, and change it. (See the SDR2 operator's manual.)
These parameters must be in effect:
Baud: 4800 (or 1200 for sending to the SDR2, see above discussion.)
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1168
Parity: not set
Word length: 8
Checksum: N
Coords: N-E-Elev
2) After the parameters have been set, simply connect the SDR2 to the computer, and select the transmis-
sion option. (On the Lietz transfer cable, there is a switch that must be set to DTE.)
3) Choose the same baud rate at the computer as you selected in the SDR2 parameters. When the
computer says Waiting for data..., press <clear> on the SDR2 until Select operation shows in the display
window. Press the <Menu> key. Press an up or down arrow key until Comms output shows in the display, then
press <Enter> on the SDR2. Answer <N> if you do not wish to send all jobs. Then enter the job that you do wish
to send. (See the SDR2 manual for a complete discussion of this process.)
4) The SDR2 should then send its information to the computer.
Note: As each job record is encountered in the computer will ask you for a le name to store the data in.
You may press <Enter> to use the same name as was used in the SDR2 or enter another name. You must use a
valid DOS name (all numbers and letters of 8 or less characters will be ne.)
Attribute data collected by the SDR (13AT records) is appended to the descriptions as follows: DESC[Attribute
Name]Attribute
Example: PIPE[diameter]18''
Transferring Coordinates to the SDR2
Be careful of the units when transferring coordinates. For example, if the SDR2 is set to Metric Mode, the SDR2
will automatically convert the coordinates from feet to meters. Before you can transfer coordinates to the SDR2,
you must rst set up the transfer parameters in the SDR2. Refer to the rst part of the previous section for details
about how to do this. Then:
1) Ready the SDR2 by pressing <clear> until Select operation appears on the display. Press the <Menu>
key. Then press the up or down arrows until Comms input appears on the menu. Press <Enter>.
2) Select the Send Coordinates option and press Transfer.
3) Select the coordinate le onthe computer.
4) Choose which coordinates to send.
SOKKIA (LIETZ) SDR33 DATA COLLECTOR
The SDR33 works the same as the SDR2. In Equipment Options there are two SDR33 choices, because when
creating a new job on a SDR33 the format is determined by setting the Point ID eld to Numeric (4) or Alpha (14).
SDR33 4-Pt
To transfer data to CG-SURVEY, select this setting if your SDR33 is set to Numeric (4). The highest point number
allowed is 9,999.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1169
SDR33 14-Pt
The C&G
*
.cgc les allow 10 character Alphanumeric point numbers. While C&G
*
.crd les allow only 5 digit
numeric point numbers. To transfer a SDR33, set to Alpha (14), the le format setting must be set to
*
.cgc.
Note: See opening section of this chapter for detailed instructions on the settings dialog box and on sending and
recieving les.
LEICA (WILD) GRE3/GRE4 AND GIF-2 INTERFACE
Set Up for GRE3/GRE4
Select the Wild: GIF-2 under Equipment Options. Before transferring data from the GRE3/4 to your computer, you
must rst set up the transfer parameters in the GRE3. To do this follow these steps on the GRE3/4:
1) <Set> <Mode> <7><0> <Run> <4><8><0><0> <Run> <Run>
(Sets the baud rate to 4800. If you wish, you may leave it at 2400, which is the
rate the T2000 needs to communicate with the GRE3/4.)
2) <Set> <Mode> <7><1> <Run> <2> <Run> <Run>
(Sets even parity.)
3) <Set> <Mode> <7><2> <Run> <1> <Run> <Run>
(Use protocol.)
4) <Set> <Mode> <7><3> <Run> <0> <Run> <Run>
(<CR> only.)
5) <Set> <Mode> <7><4> <Run> <2> <Run> <Run>
(ACK/NAK + <CR>.)
6) <Set> <Mode> <4><0> <Run> <4> <Run> <Run>
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1170
(DDD.MMSSS).
7) <Set> <Mode> <4><1> <Run> <1> <Run> <Run>
(Feet).
8) <Set> <Form> <.> <Run> <Rec>
(for the T2000)
-or-
<SET> <FORM> <+/-> <.> <RUN> <1> <1> <RUN> <REC>
(for the T1000)
Note: The above parameters do not ''go away'' when the GRE3/4 is switched off. They will stay the same
until you change them or re-initialize everything.
Note: See opening section of this chapter for detailed instructions on the Settings dialog box & information
on sending and receiving les.
Switch Settings/Cable
Option 1
GIF-2 Switches Cable Conguration
= X GRE-3/4 Computer
S1 < 2 < > 3
S2 < 3 < > 2
S7 < 7 < > 7
5 <
(Jump 5, 6, 8, 20) 6 <
8 <
20 <
Option 2
GIF-2 Switches Cable Conguration
= X GRE-3/4 Computer
S1 < 2< > 3
S2 < 2 < > 2
S7 < 3 < > 7
7 <
5
(Jump 5, 6, 8, 20) 6 <
8 <
20 <
Data Collection Format for GRE3, GRE4, GIF-10
The transfer program expects your data to be in a specic format. To get your data in this format, follow these steps.
1) To begin a new job enter a ''CODE 1'' block into the GRE3/4. Example:
RDY [CODE]
CODE [1]
I1 ? [RUN]
your job number (Example: 87001)
[RUN]
I2 ? job date (Example: 091687 for Sept. 16, 1987)
[RUN]
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1171
I3 ? [REC]
2) Dene the rst automatic point number for your rst foresight. Example:
RDY [SET]
SET [NR0]
S NR [2] for point number 2 as rst foresight.
[RUN]
3) At each instrument point, enter a ''CODE 2'' block into the GRE3/4. Example:
RDY [CODE]
CODE [2]
[RUN]
I1 ? [instrument point number] EX: [1] for instrument point 1.
[RUN]
I2 ? [instrument height] EX: [550] for 5.50 feet.
[RUN]
I3 ? [REC]
Note: Each instrument point ''CODE 2'' block must be followed by a measurement
reading to your backsight. You will probably need to change the point number
for the backsight by:
RDY [NR]
NR [point number] EX: 4 for backsighting point 4.
[RUN]
THEN:
RDY [MEAS]
REC [REC]
-or-
ALL on T1000 will store in GRE3/4
4) Record your foresights. If necessary, change the rod height and/or the description of the foresight.
Use ''CODE 3'' or ''CODE 4'' to do this. Both codes are essentially the same, but one asks for the description rst
and the other asks for the rod height rst, allowing you to skip the second entry by pressing [REC] rather than
entering a value (see the third example below). This step may be skipped if you do not wish to change either rod
height or description from the previous entry.
Example 1:
RDY [CODE]
CODE [3] Code 3 = description, rod height
[RUN]
I1 ? [0][1] Description = 01 (must be 2 digits)
[RUN]
I2 ? [5][5][0] Rod height = 5.50 feet
[RUN]
I3 ? [REC]
See following section on Setting-up Description Codes.
Example 2:
RDY [CODE]
CODE [4] Code 4 = rod height, description
[RUN]
I1 ? [5][5][0] Rod height = 5.50 feet
[RUN]
I2 ? [1][0] Description = 10 (must be 2 digits)
[RUN]
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1172
I3 ? [REC]
Example 3:
RDY [CODE]
CODE [3] Code 3 = description, rod height
[RUN]
I1 ? [1][2] Description = 12 (must be 2 digits)
[RUN]
I2 ? [REC] (leave the rod height the same)
5) Take your measurement (make sure that the point number is correct rst):
RDY [MEAS]
REC [REC]
6) Now, go to step 4 for another foresight or to step 3 for another instrument set-up:
Uploading from Data Collector to the Computer
If you have already dumped the data stored on the GIF-2 to a computer le you may choose to receive the data from
the le. Enter the le name that contains the data. After you have collected your eld data, connect the GRE3/4
to your computer. Then select the receive option on the computer. The baud rate in the computer must match the
baud rate in the GRE3/4. After selecting the baud rate on the computer, follow the steps on the screen to initiate
transmission.
Those steps are:
1) Connect the GRE-3/4 to the computer, turn it on, and wait for RDY to show on
the display.
2) Put the GRE-3/4 in upload mode by pressing <Data> on the GRE-3/4.
3) Press <GoTo>, press <Run>, and wait for the GRE-3/4 to display D CD.
4) Press <Send> and press <Run> on the GRE-3/4.
After the computer detects the end of transmission, it will begin to format the data in a usable form. When
each job record is encountered (CODE 1), you will be prompted to give the computer the name that you want to
enter the le name for that job.
Sending Coordinates to the GRE-3/4
From the Menu, select the send coordinates option. The baud rate in the computer must match the baud rate in the
GRE3/4. Initiate transmission on the GRE-3/4 by doing the following:
Note: See opening section of this chapter for detailed instructions on the Settings dialog box & information
on sending and receiving les.
1) On GRE-3/4, SET MODE 80 <Run> 2 <Run> <Run> to select le 2.
2) On GRE-3/4, SET MODE 81 <Run> <#blocks> <Run> <Run> to dimension
le 2.
3) Press any key to continue:
4) Next, select the points you wish to send: The transmission will begin.
LEICA (WILD) GIF-10 INTERFACE
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1173
Note: (Refer to data collection format GRE3 within this section)
Receiving Raw Data from GIF-10 Interface:
Select the receive raw data option on the computer. If you have already dumped the data stored on the GIF-10 to a
computer le (in the Wild format), you may choose receive the data from the le. Enter the le name that contains
the data.
The baud rate in the computer must match the baud rate in the GIF-10. Do the following on the GIF-10:
1) Set the comm parameters as follows:
Baud: (your choice)
Parity: EVEN
Protoc: ACK/NAK
Stop Bit: 2
End Mark: CR
Connected AS: DTE
2) Put the GIF-10 in upload mode by selecting <Send> on the GIF-10.
3) Press <Run> on the GIF-10 and select the le you wish to send.
4) Press <Run> on the GIF-10.
Sending Coordinates to the GIF-10 Interface:
Select the send coordinates option. The baud rate in the computer must match the baud rate in the GIF-10. Do the
following on the GIF-10:
1) Create receive le in GIF-10 now.
2) Put the GIF-10 in download mode by selecting Receive on the GIF-10.
Select the points you wish to send. The transmission will begin.
Note: See opening section of this chapter for detailed instructions on the Settings dialog box & information
on sending and receiving les.
LEICA (WILD) GIF-10/WS
This is a Wild GIF-10 interface that will accept data in the same format as WildSoft. You will be asked for the
Observation Pattern when the le is transferred. This pattern can be either BS-FS-FS-BS or BS-FS-BS-FS. As
with WildSoft, codes 101 and above will be treated as descriptor codes. Code 100 will be subtracted from the
descriptor code and that description will be read from CG-SURVEY's description table. So 101 is description 1,
102 is description 2, and so forth.
The following table shows acceptable WildSoft data collection codes:
WildSoft Data Collection Codes
Code Function
1 Start Job
2 Occupy a Point
3 FS to Traverse Point
11 Assign Coordinates
13 Target Height
14 Add to Target Height
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1174
21 Occupy Saved Point
31 FS to Single Point
32 Radial Sideshots
33 Sets of Angles
63 Remark
101+ Descriptions
LEICA (WILD) GIF-10/WS2
This is the exact same interface as the GIF-10/WS except 100 is not subtracted from the descriptor code.
LEICA (WILD) GIF-10/TOPOS
This is a Wild GIF-10 interface that will accept data in the same format as the Canadian software TOPOS. To
select this format, choose GIF-10/TOP from the data collector choices in the Equipment Options. The following
information explains the format.
These six Wild codes are used:
Code Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Rectype
91 Job Name Date Temperature Pressure New Job
10 Label # HI Instrument Pt.
20 Label # RH Backsight Pt.
30 Label # RH Trav. Pt.
40 Label # RH Side Shot Pt.
2 Label # RH Offset Angle SS
1) If RH (rod height) is 999 it will be considered no value (do not calculate elevation for this point).
2) The Label# (point description number) can contain up to eight characters. The rst four and last four will be
read as separate descriptions. For example, if Label# is 00210034, then description 21 will be pulled from the
description table and description 34 will be pulled from the description table. If 21 is BL
*
and 34 is TC, then the
resulting description will be BL
*
TC.
3) Point numbers are taken from measurement records. A measurement record will follow code 10, 20, 30, and 40
records. For example: In this example, there is a side-shot record (40), a point label description (71), a rod height
(2.150), and a point number (332).
4) If an offset distance is placed in Field 3 of a side-shot record, the measured angle will be shown in a comment
line prior to the data record with the newly calculated angle.
5) If a comment is placed in eld 4 of a side-shot record, the comment will be appended to the point's de-
scription. example: If the label# is 25 and the comment is 150, description 25 (lets say TREE) will be pulled
from the description table and the comment will be appended to the description, giving TREE 150 as the description.
Leica Data Pro:
You are allowed to read and write to the Leica Data Pro formatted GSI les. There is no communication directly
with the Leica Total stations.
GEODAT 122/124 DATA COLLECTOR
In order to use the Geodat 122 or 124 data collector with the transfer program, there are three areas that you
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1175
must consider: (1) entering data into the data collector in a format that can be sent to your computer, (2)
the transfer program itself, and (3) the data collector code conversion table which converts numeric codes to
more readable descriptions when the data is sent to the computer. The following section describes how to
enter your data into the data collector. The next section will then give you some information about how to trans-
fer the data. The data collector code conversion table can be changed with menu selection E from the program menu.
Entering Data into the Data Collector
1) Each individual job stored in the Geodat's memory should begin with a job
identier. To enter a job identier, follow these steps:
a) Press the <Info> key.
b) At the prompt ''inFo='' enter a job number, like this: inFo=87001<Ent> (<Ent> means to press the <Ent>
key.)
c) At the prompt ''dAtA='' enter the date like this: Example: dAtA=050187<Ent> (for 05/01/87)
2) For each instrument location, you must enter an instrument point identier.
Follow the following steps to do this:
a) Press the <Stn> key.
b) At the ''Stn='' prompt enter you instrument point number like this: Stn=1<Ent> (for instrument point 1)
c) At the ''iH='' prompt enter the instrument height, like this: iH=5.5<Ent> (for 5.5 feet)
d) Next the prompt ''PCod='' will appear on the display. At this time, enter your backsight point, just
like the foresights in the next step. You may enter ''0'' (zero) for all of the elds except:
''Pno='' (enter the backsight point number)
''Hor='' (enter the angle in your instrument when you take the backsight.)
3) Recording foresights. You are now ready to record a foresight:
a) At the ''PCod='' prompt enter the point code for your foresight like this: PCod=10<Ent>(for point code 10)
Note: The point code will be used to assign a description to your foresight. The description that is associ-
ated with each code is up to you. Use the ''Edit data collector code table'' program to set up your codes before
uploading your data to the computer.
b) At the ''Pno='' prompt enter your foresight point number like this: Pno=2<Ent> (for point number
2)
c) At the ''SH='' prompt enter the rod height of your foresight like this: SH=5.5<Ent> (for 5.5 feet)
The next three elds may be entered manually or may be automatically stored by your instrument.
d) At the ''Hor='' prompt enter the horizontal angle to your foresight like this: Hor=65.1253<Ent> (for 65
degrees, 12 minutes, and 53 seconds.)
e) At the ''ELE='' prompt enter the vertical angle to your foresight like this: ELE=90.1215<Ent> (for 90
degrees, 12 minutes and 15 seconds)
f) At the ''diSt='' prompt enter the slope distance to your foresight like this: diSt=100.128<Ent> (for 100.128
feet)
Now, go to step 2 for a new instrument point, or step 3 for another sight from the current instrument point.
Note: If you have already dumped the data stored on the 122/124 to a computer le (in the 122/124 format), you may
choose to receive the data from the le. Enter the le name that contains the data, and the le name for the .CGR le.
Receive Data from Data Collector
Select the receive raw data option.
1) Before you upload your data, make sure that the description table is current.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1176
2) Before you initiate the upload program, you must rst dene the upload parameters for the Geodat. To do
this, follow the steps outlined below.
3) This should not have to be done each time. The values that you enter should stay the same until you change
them.
a) Press the <f>, the <1>, the <0> and the <Ent> keys. (For function 10.)
b) Answer the baud rate question like this: bAud=1200<Ent> (for 1200 baud you can use 300 baud, but it will
take longer to transfer your data.)
c) Make sure that ''Eob='' looks like this: Eob=0123456789<Ent>
d) Make sure that the ''StArt='' prompt looks like this: StArt=035<Ent>
e) Make sure that the ''StoP='' prompt looks like this: StoP=000<Ent>
f) Make sure that the ''ErrCodE='' prompt looks like this: ErrCodE=037<Ent>
g) Make sure that the ''nuLLS='' prompt looks like this: nuLLS=000<Ent>
GEODAT 126, 400, 500 AND INTERNAL MEMORY THEODOLITES
These Geodat data collectors use the following data entry format:
Instrument Point Setup
Labels Explanation
*
2 Instrument Point
3 Height of Instrument
*
62 Backsight Point
21 Backsight Angle
6 Backsight Rod Height
7 Horizontal Angle to Backsight
8 Vertical Angle to Backsight
9 Slope Distance to Backsight
*
Indicates required code
Note: Pcodes (label 4) cannot be used anywhere except in foresight records.
Note: The order of the instrument point setups is not important.
Foresight Points
Labels Explanatation
*
5 Foresight point
6 Backsight rod height
*
7 Horizontal angle to backsight
*
8 Vertical angle to backsight
*
9 Slope distance to backsight
4 Pcode (Description)
*
Indicates required code
Note: Foresight points must begin with either a Pcode (label) or a foresight point (code 5). The order of
the remaining parameters is not important.
Label 4 (Pcodes) are placed in the description eld of the raw data le. If you cannot get the entire point
description into a single Pcode, we allow you to use multiple Pcodes for an individual point.
Example: 4 = Manhole,
4 = Inv. -10.23,
4 = 12'' Conc.Pipe
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1177
The resulting point description is: Manhole, Inv. - 10.23, 12'' Conc.Pipe If the Append Info Records to
Pcode toggle is on, info records (label 0=) that directly follow a Pcode (label 4=) will be appended to the Pcode
prior to being placed in the point description.
Example: 4 = Manhole,
0 = Inv. -10.23,
0 = 12'' Conc.Pipe
The resulting point description is: Manhole, Inv. - 10.23, 12'' Conc.Pipe
GEODAT 126 DATA COLLECTOR
I. The Cable
Your cable should be made as follows:
NC - No connection.
Geodat 126 (male)Computer 25 Pin
2 .......................................... 2 (TxD)
3 .......................................... 3 (RxD)
7 .......................................... 7 (S.GND)
5-NC -5 (CTS) jumper 5-6-8-20
6-NC -6 (DSR)
8-NC -8 (CD)
20-NC -20 (DTR)
Geodat 126 (male)Computer 9 Pin
2 .......................................... 3 (TxD)
3 .......................................... 2 (RxD)
7 .......................................... 5 (S.GND)
5-NC -8 (CTS) jumper 8-6-1-4
6-NC -6 (DSR)
8-NC -1 (CD)
20-NC -4 (DTR)
II. Set Protocol 2 and 5; Set Format 2
Be sure the INT./EXT. switch is set to INT. if you are not connected to an external power source. Be sure the on/off
switch is in the on position.
Set protocol by using program 51 in the Geodat.
Protocol 2 Protocol 5
1: 9600 1: 9600
2: 2 2: 2
3: 7 3: 7
4: 2 4: 2
5: 10 5: 10
6: 0 6: 0
7: 0 7: 0
8: 0 8: 0
9: 0 9: 0
10: 0 10: 0
11: 0 11: 0
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1178
12: 0 12: 0
13: 0 13: 0
14: 1.13 14: 1.13
15: 0 15: 0
16: 3.371310 16: 3.371310
Set format by using program 50 in the Geodat.
Format 2
1: 1
2: 80
3: 13
4: 15
III. Data Storage in the Geodat 126
Raw data is gathered into job les using the pre-programmed UDS's in the Geodat 126. Call us if you wish to create
others.
To use the existing programs, begin by choosing program #10. This sets up the header information and rst
instrument/backsight points. For foresights, choose program #0 if you are carrying elevations or program #1 for
horizontal locations only. Use program #11 to change instrument set-ups. These programs are explained on page
8:4 in the Geodat manual.
Coordinates are transferred from and into area les.
Special numeric point codes may be used. These codes are converted to alphanumeric descriptions as the
data is received from the Geodat 126. The codes are dened in the description table.
IV. UDS Requirements
The initial testing of the Geodat 126 was done using the standard UDS's supplied with the Geodat 126. If you wish
to try using your own, these rules apply:
1) A measurement must end with label 9. (See sample UDS's 0, 1, 2, 3.)
2) Each Job. No. le must begin (1st record) with ADM type data (see sample UDS
10). This sequence must end with label type 74 - Air Pressure.
3) Each instrument station sequence must end with Hz. Ref. (Label 21). See the UDS 11 in Geodat 126 manual for
sample.
Select the receive/send option from the computer menu and follow the prompts. If you have already dumped the
data stored on the DR-2 to a computer le (in the DR-2 format), you may choose to receive the data from the le.
Enter the le name that contains the data, and the le name for the .CGR le (raw data le) or .CRD le (coordinate
le).
GEODAT 400 DATA COLLECTOR
Setting up the Geodat 400 for use with the transfer program:
1) Set protocol 0 (as shown below).
2) Set format 0 (as shown below).
Be sure the on/off switch is in the on position. Set protocol by using program 51 in the Geodat eld instru-
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1179
ment.
Protocol 0
1: 9600
2: 0
3: 8
4: 1
5: 10
6: 0
7: 1
8: 17
9: 19
10: 0
11: 0
12: 0
13: 0
14: 1.13
15: 0
16: 1.04
Line 7 implements software handshaking between the 400 and the MS-DOS computer by using a value of
1. When the value of item 7 is 0, then no software handshaking is done.
Line 8 is given a value of 17 which is the Xon value used for the communication handshaking.
Line 9 is given a value of 19 which is the Xoff value used for the communication handshaking.
Set format by using program 50 in the Geodat eld instrument.
Format 0
1: 1
2: 80
3: 324:
4
*
Note: It is important that the values above be set as we show them or our software can not communicate
with the Geodat 400 Data Recorder.
If you have already dumped the data stored on the 400 to a computer le (in the 400 format), you may
choose to receive the data from the le. Enter the le name that contains the data, and the le name for the .CGR
le (raw data le) or .CRD le (coordinate le).
Uploading Raw Data to the Computer
After you have collected your eld data, connect the Geodat 400 to your computer. Select the receive raw data
option. The baud rate in the computer must match the baud rate in the Geodat 400. Do the following:
1) Connect the 400 to the computer, turn it off, then on.
2) Make certain that you have selected the correct protocol and format.
3) Enter name of Geodat job le.
Download Coordinates into 400 Area File
Select the send coordinates option.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1180
Select the points to send.
Ready the 400 with the following steps:
1) Connect the 400 to the computer, turn it off, then on.
2) Make certain that you have selected the correct protocol and format.
3) Enter name of Geodat area le.
The coordinates will be transferred.
Get Coordinates from 400 Area File
Receive coordinates from 400 Area File
The baud rate in the computer must match the baud rate in the 400. Do the following:
1) Connect the 400 to the computer, turn it off, then on.
2) Make certain that you have selected the correct protocol and format.
3) Enter name of Geodat area le.
The transmission will begin.
GEODAT 500 DATA COLLECTOR
Setting up the Geodat 500 for use with the transfer program:
1) Set protocol 0 (as shown below).
2) Set format 0 (as shown below).
Be sure the on/off switch is in the on position.
Set protocol by using program 51 in the Geodat eld instrument.
Protocol 0
1: 9600
2: 0
3: 8
4: 1
5: 10
6: 0
7: 1
8: 17
9: 19
10: 0
11: 0
12: 0
13: 0
14: 1.13
15: 0
16: 1.04
Line 7 implements software handshaking between the 500 and the MS-DOS computer by using a value of
1. When the value of item 7 is 0, then no software handshaking is done.
Line 8 is given a value of 17 which is the Xon value used for the communication handshaking.
Line 9 is given a value of 19 which is the Xoff value used for the communication handshaking. Set format
by using program 50 in the Geodat eld instrument.
Format 0
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1181
1: 1
2: 80
3: 32
4:
*
Note: It is important that the values above be set as we show them or our software can not communicate
with the Geodat 500 Data Recorder.
The C&G Data collector Transfer dialog box has an addiional option for the GEODAT 500 collector, as
shown below. the show DC les:
This Option actually reads and displays the data les on the GEODAT 500 data collector. From the display options
you can select to view all les, just coordinate les or just raw les.
If you have already dumped the data stored on the 500 to a computer le (in the 500 format), you may
choose to receive the data from the le. Enter the le name that contains the data, and the le name for the .CGR
le (raw data le) or .CRD le (coordinate le).
You can also delete les from the GEODAT 500. Be careful, once the les is deleted it is gone forever.
When you have the les selected, you want to transfer, select exit.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1182
The Geodat 500 program allows:
1) Receive raw data from the Geo 500
2) Receive raw data from a le.
3) Receive coordinates from the Geo 500.
4) Receive coordinates from a le.
5) Send coordinates to the Geo 500.
6) Catalog (or directory) of all les on Geo 500.
7) Delete les on the Geo 500.
Receiving Data from the 500
You may receive raw data les (M=), or coordinate les (I=). All les on the 500 of the type you wish to receive
will be shown on the screen (for example, all I= les for coordinate).
1) Select the le you wish to receive. Raw Data (Job Files)
2) After the raw data le is transferred, you will be asked to select the le name it will be stored under on
the computer. The default value will be the same name with a .CGR extension. Coordinates (Area Files)
3) After the coordinate le is transferred, you will be asked to select the le name it will be stored under on
the computer. The default value will be the same name with .CRD/.IDX extensions.
Sending Data to the 500
You may send coordinate (.CRD) les to the 500. All coordinate les on the computer will be shown on the screen.
Select the le you wish to send.
1) You may select the only the coordinates that you wish to send (you do not have to send the entire le). Catalog
2) The catalog function will show you all existing les on the Geodat 500.
Deleting Files
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1183
All les on the 500 will be shown on the screen.
1) Select the le you wish to delete. Be careful, once the le is deleted it is gone forever.
2) Press <Esc> if you do not want to delete a le.
GEODIMETER TOTAL STATIONS WITH INTERNAL MEMORY
You can select Geodat 500 and interface directly with any Geodimeter that has internal memory. To transfer data
from a Geodimeter Total Station with internal memory, do the following:
1) In Equipment Options, select Geodat 500 as the data collector and run data collection program.
2) Use Geotronix cable #571136756. Connect RS232 on computer to RS232 on Geodimeter with cable.
3) Power on Geodimeter and turn off compensator with Function 22 as follows:
Key
<F> (Function)
<22>
<Ent> (Enter)
<0>
<Ent>
Then press <Ent> until P0 is displayed on Geodimeter screen.
4) Set the END character to 4 with Function 79 as follows:
Key
<F> (Function)
<79>
<Ent> (Enter)
<4>
<Ent>
5) Intitiate comm port on Geodimeter as follows:
Key
<Mnu> (menu)
<4> (data com)
<1> (select device)
<2> (serial)
<Yes> (serial on)
<1.8.0.9600> (com=) skip if already set
<Ent> (enter)
<0> (table no=)
<Ent>
<No> (REG. key?)
<No> (Slave ?)
6) You may now select all options on the computer menu for data collection transfer with the Geodimeter.
See Geodat 500 instructions for data transfer (disregard formatting procedures).
SMI 48 ENHANCED DATA COLLECTOR
The SMI interface routine works only with SMI Enhanced Cards. Use the interface cable supplied with the SMI
unit (plugs into the comm port on the computer).
SMI 48 transfer Versions 5
Receiving Data
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1184
If you have already dumped the data stored on the SMI to a le on the computer, you may choose to receive the data
from the le.
Receiving Raw Data from the SMI
Select the Receive raw data option on the computer. On the SMI, select TOPC and then RAW. The transfer will
begin. The le name will be shown on the screen after the transfer is complete. You may enter a new le name if
you wish. Our reduction program does not allow a raw data le with mixed angle types (for example: azimuths,
angles right, deections, etc.). When you are collecting data on the SMI, stick to one angle type. You can mix
distance types if you wish (slope/zenith, horizontal/vertical).
Receiving Coordinates from the SMI
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1185
1) Select the Receive Coordinates option on the computer: On the SMI select TOPC and then SMI.
2) On the SMI, enter the rst and last point numbers you wish to send: The transfer will begin.
Sending Coordinates to the SMI
1) On the SMI select TD48 and the SMI.
2) Select the Send Coordinates option on the computer. You will be asked if you wish to send descriptions.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1186
The answer to this question depends onwhether the SMI coordinate le you are sending to is a 15 byte le (no
descriptions) or a 30 byte le (descriptions).
3) On the computer, select the points you wish to send. When the selection set is complete, press <T> for
transmit. The transfer will begin.
SMI 48 transfer Versions 6, 7 & 8
Receiving Raw Data from the SMI
1) Get the C&G Transfer Program ready to receive raw data: Press Transfer
2) On the SMI data Collector select [PRINT]: set the soft-key to [WIRE]
Receiving Coordinates from the SMI
1) Get the C&G Transfer Program ready to receive raw data and Press Transfer
2) On the SMI data Collector select [JOB]. then [KERM]: set the soft-key to [NE] and [COMM]. select [SEND]
and then select the points to transfer.
Sending Coordinates to the SMI
1) On the SMI data collector select [JOB] the [KERM]: set the soft-key to [NE] and [COMM]. select [RECV].
2) Congure the C&G Transfer Program to send Coordinates: select the points to be sent and press TRANSFER
Nikon Data Collection Transfer
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1187
Receiving Raw Data from the Nikon Total Station:
1) Get the C&G Transfer Program ready to receive raw data and Press Transfer
2) On the Nikon select [MENU]. Select option [SET] and then option [COMM].Set ''Ext.Comm:'' to Nikon. Set
the communication parameters to match those in the C&G transfer program.
3) From the Main Menu on the Nikon select ''Comms'' and ''Download'': select format: NIKON and Data:
RAW
4) Press ENTER to send.
Receiving Coordinates Data from the Nikon Total Station
1) Get the C&G Transfer Program ready to receive raw data and Press Transfer
2) On the Nikon select [MENU]. Select option [SET] and then option [COMM]. Set ''Ext.Comm:'' to Nikon. Set
the communication parameters to match those in the C&G transfer program.
3) From the Main Menu on the Nikon select ''Comms'' and ''Download'': select format: NIKON and Data:
COORD.
4) Press ENTER to send.
Sending Coordinates Data from the Nikon Total Station
1) On the Nikon select [MENU]. Select option [SET] and then option [COMM].Set ''Ext.Comm:'' to Nikon. Set
the communication parameters to match those in the C&G transfer program.
2) From the Main Menu on the Nikon: select ''Comms'' and ''Upload Data''. Press ENTER to receive.
3) Congure the C&G Transfer Program to Send Coordinates: select the points to be sent and press TRANS-
FER.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey>CGTrav>Data Collector Transfer
Keyboard Command:DC, CG DATA COLLECTOR
Prerequisite: Check Cable Connection & Communication Parameters
Reduce Traverse
The Reduce Traverse feature allows you to reduce a raw data le, with or without adjustment, and thus create a
coordinate le or append to an existing coordinate le.
NOTE: Before you reduce a traverse, check the traverse settings on the Traverse Options tab of the C&G
Options dialog.
Select the type of adjustment to use: (Compass, Least Squares, etc..)
Adjust Angles: (off/on)
Balance Elevations: (off/on)
If you are adjusting a 3-D traverse, make sure Elevations are turned on: ON
Once the traverse options are set properly you can proceed with traverse reduction.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1188
Select Reduce Traverse from the CGTrav menu.
If a raw data le is already open, it will be used. If not, a dialog box will appear prompting you to open a raw data
le.
If a coordinate is already open it will be used. If one is not opened you will be prompted to open one. You can
select an existing le or type in the name of a new le to create.
NOTE: One coordinate le may be used with many raw data les. For example, you may store the coordi-
nates reduced from an initial boundary traverse (raw data le) in a newly created coordinate le. If you do
additional location or traverse work with the control created by the original traverse, this additional work may be
placed in new raw data les and reduced to the same coordinate le.
If the raw data le does not have traverse codes (see the CGEditor chapter) a dialog will appear asking you
which type to use. There are three types of traverses that can be processed. These are shown in the following gure:
The following gures show examples of the three traverse types. The H.I. and rod height entries are optional (if
Elevations are on). These are examples of a single distance/angle entry. Each type traverse may be placed in a
separate raw data le and reduced into a single coordinate le. However, with the use of special codes you can
combine traverses in a single raw data le (See the CGEditor chapter).
Traverse Reduction Types:
Closed Loop Traverse
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1189
Closed Loop Traverse Beginning and Ending at Ending at Known points
Shows above is closed traverse beginning on two known points (1 and 2) and ending on two known points (4 and 5).
With this type of traverse, both a linear and angular closure can be calculated.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1190
Closed Loop Ending on One Know Point
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1191
Shown above is a traverse that begins on two known points, or a single known point and a back sight azimuth, and
ends on one known point.
This situation sometimes occurs when you begin on two known points (or a single known point and a back sight
azimuth) and end on one known point. In this case only a linear closure is possible.
In order to reduce this type of traverse you must use the CGEditor to enter data not gathered in the eld.
Points 2 and 4 are the known beginning and ending points.
Points 100 and 101 do not exist.
We have entered a back sight reference bearing (N 25 23' 25'' E) from 2 to 100.
Line 8 is a dummy setup (we never setup on point 4 and back sighted point 8.
Line 9 shows a dummy angle to the dummy point 101.
Reduce the traverse as a closed Traverse Beginning and Ending on Known Points.
When the traverse is reduced you will have to enter one of the following:
The coordinates of point 101
The bearing from point 4 to 101.Or press <esc> for no angular closure.
If you choose no angular closure, the traverse will be reduced but will report only a linear closure. The ad-
justment will be made assuming no angular error.
Open Traverse
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1192
An Open Traverse is either an open ended traverse which ties into no known points or a le containing only side
shots. In both cases no adjustment is possible.
Note: The data shown in the CGEditor views accompanying the four illustrations include instrument height
(HI) and rod height entries. However, if you have elevations turned off, these entries are optional. Also, the
examples use single distance and angle entries but multiple measurements are allowed.
In these gures each traverse has been placed in a separate raw data le. However, with the use of special
codes you can combine multiple traverses in a single raw data le.
Notes on Traverse Types and Reduction
Closed and Azimuth Traverses: If you are running azimuth traverses, the angle to the side shot is calculated and
stored instead of the azimuth. After the traverse has been reduced and adjusted, the angles are used to calculate the
side shot coordinates. Thus the side shots are always relative to the instrument point and backsight point used in
their location. The rst azimuth in the raw data le will be considered a reference azimuth and will be held.
Reducing Loop Traverses:
If there is at least one reference bearing in the raw data le being reduced you will not be asked for a starting
bearing. If the instrument point coordinates at the rst reference bearing exists, you will not be asked to enter the
starting coordinates or elevation. The traverse reduction will begin from the rst reference bearing in the raw data
le, not necessarily the rst instrument point.
If you have more than one reference bearing in the raw data le, the angular closure and adjustments will
be from one reference bearing to the next. In other words, all reference bearings will be held as correct, and any
angle adjustment will be done from one to the next. This feature was designed for those surveyors who perform
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1193
Solar or Polaris observations at intermediate traverse stations, and wish to hold the observed bearing at those
stations (the bearings will of course change when the coordinates are adjusted, unless you use Crandall's Rule
which does not change bearings)..
Reducing Open Traverse:
Any Reference Bearings found in the raw data le for an Open traverse will be ignored (except the starting reference
bearing/azimuth to the back sight point).
Traverse Reduction: Closed Loop
If the rst instrument point in the raw data le does not exist, you will be asked to enter the coordinates for
that point. If the rst back sight point in the raw data le does not exist and you do not have a reference bear-
ing/ azimuth to the back sight point in the raw data le, you will be given the choice of entering one of the following:
Back sight point coordinates
Bearing from the rst instrument point to the rst back sight point
If you are processing a Closed Traverse that Begins and Ends on known points, and the last (tie) instrument point in
the raw data le does not exist, you will be asked to enter the coordinates for that point. If the last foresight point
in the raw data le does not exist and you do not have a reference bearing/azimuth to the foresight point in the raw
data le, you will be given the choice of entering one of the following:
Foresight point coordinates
Bearing from the last instrument point to the last foresight point (the last instrument and foresight point are the tie
points necessary for linear and angular closure calculations).
Note: The bearing from the rst instrument point to the rst back sight point, and the bearing from the last
(or tie) instrument point to the last (or tie) foresight point will be treated as reference bearings (held xed). These
four points will not be adjusted. If there are any reference bearings in the raw data le, the angular closure and
adjustments will be from one reference bearing to the next, just as in Loop Traverses.
Since you may have many foresights from the instrument tie point (side shots), you will be asked to enter
which foresight point you will be tying into (unless there are no side shots at the last instrument point).
The traverse will begin by the coordinates found in the coordinate le for the rst instrument point and
backsight point (coordinate values can be placed directly into the raw data le). The traverse will then be calculated.
When the traverse is nished, the coordinates for the last instrument point and foresight point in the raw data le
will be read from the coordinate le (or raw data le) in order to calculate the angular, vertical and horizontal closure.
If Elevations are ON you will be shown the elevation control found in the Raw Data and Coordinate les
that pertains to your traverse. If no elevation control is found none will be shown and you will have to ADD control.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1194
Your elevation control can be anywhere in the traverse. It does not have to be on the rst point.
You will have the following option at the command line:
Point Elevation
1 500.00
[Add/Change/Delete/Go/aBort]: <G>g
Select Add to add points to elevation control: A
Select Change to change the elevation assigned to a point in the elevation control: C
Select Delete to remove a point from the elevation control: D
Select Go to calculate elevations: G
Select aBort to quit without calculating elevations B
Select the appropriate option and the elevations will be calculated based upon the supplied informa-
tion.
At this point you will get two closure reports:
The rst report is before angle adjustment:
**********
Closure Report
**********
Total angular error: -000'06''
Angular error per point: -000'01''
Correct Ending Coordinates, North: 5000.00000 East: 5000.00000
Ending Coordinates, North: 5000.04008 East: 5000.00421
Error, N: 0.04 E: 0.00 Total: 0.04 Brg: S 0559'43''W
Distance Traversed: 2470.51 Closure: 61308
The Second Report is after angle adjustment:
**********
Closure Report
**********
Total angular error: 000'00''
Angular error per point: 000'00''
Correct Ending Coordinates, North: 5000.00000 East: 5000.00000
Ending Coordinates, North: 5000.04314 East: 5000.01593
Error, N: 0.04 E: 0.02 Total: 0.05 Brg: S 2016'08''W
Distance Traversed: 2470.51 Closure: 53721
Following the angular adjustment the reduced traverse will be displayed:
Adjusted by Least Squares
Bearing Distance Northing Easting Elevation Pt ID Code Description
5000.00000 5000.00000 500.00 1 1 TP1 2
N 0000'00''E 242.12 5242.12397 5000.00000 496.39 2 1 tpns
N 7441'24''E 199.78 5294.87495 5192.69243 467.97 3 1 tpns
N 0022'42''W 148.48 5443.34679 5191.71202 460.90 4 1 tpns
N 0435'35''W 310.32 5752.67444 5166.86125 458.07 5 1 tpns
S 8311'32''W 300.98 5716.99780 4868.00744 473.72 6 1 tpns
S 8409'21''W 290.03 5687.46658 4579.48877 472.10 7 1 tp hole
S 1325'02''E 137.70 5553.52582 4611.44085 484.33 8 1 tpns
S 0529'41''E 234.70 5319.90709 4633.91387 501.54 9 1 tpns
S 1252'27''E 308.42 5019.23837 4702.63376 517.34 10 1 tpns
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1195
S 8617'54''E 297.99 5000.00000 5000.00000 500.00 1 1 TP1 NAIL
Sq. Feet: 341547 Acres: 7.8
Once the traverse is reduced the side shots will be computed and displayed:
Side Shots
Angle Distance Northing Easting Elevation Pt ID Code Description
Inst.Pt.: 1 Bs.Pt.: 10
14815'53'' 123.43 5058.01266 5108.95161 489.96 47 3 ipf1otp
9753'24'' 46.81 5045.85154 5009.40500 499.25 48 2 ip4rb
1733'40'' 96.60 5035.03240 4909.97367 506.27 49 2 ipf4rb
Inst.Pt.: 2 Bs.Pt.: 1
25533'17'' 93.22 5265.37939 5090.27763 480.73 25 4 ipf1\2'' ctp
14629'54'' 17.38 5256.61928 4990.40516 500.49 26 4 ipf1\2'' ctp
Inst.Pt.: 3 Bs.Pt.: 2
29701'47'' 18.33 5276.92239 5188.96820 468.73 27 4 ipf1#ctp
Inst.Pt.: 4 Bs.Pt.: 3
1021'19'' 65.64 5378.69600 5180.33917 466.55 28 4 ipf1ctp
15923'20'' 63.27 5502.41856 5169.04898 461.70 29 3 ipf1otp
11352'33'' 138.30 5498.48975 5064.87673 483.03 30 4 ipf1\2'' ctp
11347'52'' 186.84 5517.60975 5020.26008 489.30 31 9 y
29156'23'' 100.21 5406.52118 5284.90634 455.81 32 9 y
29904'02'' 111.18 5389.97593 5289.24079 455.88 33 4 ipf1ctp
Inst.Pt.: 5 Bs.Pt.: 4
3933'59'' 47.28 5713.93615 5139.76338 458.30 34 4 ipf1ctp
26033'36'' 119.08 5781.54910 5282.38627 464.12 35 2 ipf4rb
7251'12'' 136.19 5702.23225 5040.36168 469.98 36 4 ipf1\2ctp
Inst.Pt.: 8 Bs.Pt.: 7
3247'04'' 103.73 5651.38227 4645.83837 475.70 37 9 nf
15046'50'' 209.58 5399.34540 4753.39990 512.22 38 9 y
10448'11'' 144.87 5550.02257 4756.26507 497.59 39 9 y
Inst.Pt.: 10 Bs.Pt.: 9
15621'56'' 66.78 4965.56171 4742.36495 517.21 46 9 stk
**********
Elevation Calculations - Elevations Adjusted
**********
Elevations from Points: 1 -> 1
Vertical Err: -0.01, Distance Traversed: 2470.51
The calculate points will be stored in the coordinate le. There is an overwrite protection built into the
software. If a point already exists in the coordinate le you will have the following options:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1196
CANCEL: will terminate the process of storing coordinates.
OVERWRITE : will overwrite the existing point.
DO NO OVERWRITE: skip to the next point. If you have the ''Do Not Ask Again'' box checked, OVERWRTE
will overwrite all points without asking,
DO NOT OVERWRITE: will only write NEW points to the coordinate le.
Traverse Reduction: Open Traverse/Side Shots
When reducing these types of traverses, no adjustments are possible. The coordinates for instrument points and
back sight points will be pulled from the coordinate le (or raw data le) and used to calculate and store the
foresights. This option allows you to occupy newly created points.
Coordinates of back sight points will be calculated only if a distance has been entered to the back sight
point and the back sight point does not exist in the coordinate le.
If you are back sighting a point that does not exist in the coordinate le and the raw data le does not con-
tain a reference bearing or azimuth to the back sight point, you will be given the choice of entering one of the
following:
Coordinates of the back sight point
Bearing from the instrument point to the back sight point
If you choose to enter the bearing and there is no distance to the back sight point in the raw data le (thus
making it impossible to calculate its coordinates), and you later occupy that point, you will be asked to enter the
real coordinates of the point.
If you are backsighting a point that does exist, and you have a distance measurement to the backsight point
in the raw data le, we will show a warning if the inversed distance from the coordinate le does not match the
measured distance within the tolerances set in the CGTools->Global Options->Traverse Options dialog.
A table will be printed containing the following:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1197
Side Shots
Angle Distance Northing Easting Elevation Pt ID Code Description
Inst.Pt.: 1 Bs.Pt.: 10
14815'53'' 123.43 5058.01266 5108.95161 489.96 47 3 ipf1otp
9753'24'' 46.81 5045.85154 5009.40500 499.25 48 2 ip4rb
1733'40'' 96.60 5035.03240 4909.97367 506.27 49 2 ipf4rb
Angle Adjustments
If you have set Adjust Angles in the Traverse Options dialog box, all angles will receive equal adjustment. If there
is more than one reference bearing, the angles will be adjusted equally between reference bearings. You will be
shown the closures before and after the angle adjustment.
NOTE: If you are going to use the Least Squares Adjustment, you should not adjust the angles. Angular
adjustment is part of the Least Squares Adjustment process.
Elevation Adjustment
If you have set Adjust Elevations in the Traverse Options dialog box, the elevations will be adjusted in proportion
to the lengths of the lines (the longer the line, the more the adjustment).
Least Squares, Crandall's and Compass Rule
If you select any of these adjustment options the coordinates will be adjusted with the appropriate method.
Find Bad Angle
If you have a bad angular closure, select Find Bad Angle in the Traverse Options dialog box instead of an adjustment
type. This function will not create or store any coordinate points.
NOTE: This option cannot be used with Azimuth Traverses.
You will see the following report:
Total angular error: 0&oslash;00'07''
Angular error per point: 0&oslash;00'01''
Correct Ending Coordinates, North: 10000.00000 East: 10000.00000
Ending Coordinates, North: 10000.05876 East: 9999.95840
Error, N: 0.05876 E: -0.04160 Total: 0.07200 Brg: S 3517'49''E
Distance Traversed: 1492.10800 Closure: 20725
Instrument point: 1, Error: 0.07200, Closure: 20725
Instrument point: 2, Error: 0.08249, Closure: 18089
Instrument point: 3, Error: 0.08284, Closure: 18013
Instrument point: 4, Error: 0.07542, Closure: 19785
Instrument point: 5, Error: 0.06751, Closure: 22103
Worst Closure: 18013
Average Closure: 19620
Possible bad angle at instrument point: 5, Closure: 22103
In the above example, there were 5 traverse points. The traverse is reduced ve times, beginning at each
traverse point. The starting instrument point that produces the best closure is shown as having the bad angle. All
closures are shown.
OTHER METHODS OF TRAVERSING
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1198
Every surveyor has his own unique methods when it comes to traversing. This section describes and shows
examples of four additional entry methods.
Notice in the sample traverses there is a distance and vertical angle recorded for each foresight and back
sight. This is optional, but you need at least one distance to each foresight.
Where both foresight and back sight distances are recorded, distances will be averaged when reduced
Side shots may be entered along with traverse information. You may turn more than one angle to side shots
if you wish.
A description and/or code only needs to be entered once for a given foresight point.
Single Position with Direct and Reverse Angles
Perform this method as follows:
Shoot the back sight.
Turn to a foresight.
Record the angle and distance.
Plunge the instrument.
Take another reading (reversed) to the foresight. You may do this to traverse points and side shots.
Turn back to the back sight with the instrument reversed.
Record another angle to the back sight.
The nal angle in each set for each instrument point must be a reverse reading to the back sight.
The angle in the instrument for the rst back sight will be subtracted from the rst angle to each foresight. The
nal (reverse) angle to the back sight will be subtracted from the second angle to each foresight. The two resulting
angles will then be averaged to give you an angle to the foresight. All distances recorded will be averaged.
Single Positions with Multiple Direct and Reverse Angles
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1199
Entering multiple sets of direct and reverse angles is very much like the preceding example where 1 direct and
reverse set was entered. The only thing to remember is that each direct and reverse pair is a set. When another set is
entered, it begins with a back sight direct angle (recorded like a foresight), has direct angles and reverse angles to the
foresights, and ends with a reverse angle to the back sight. Do not begin a new instrument point for the second set,
merely record a new back sight angle and continue with the procedure through each foresight, and end with another
reverse angle to your back sight.
Azimuth Traverses
Azimuths are entered into a le with the azimuth to each foresight entered in the Foresight data entry line at the
azimuth column.
NOTE: If you are running a Closed Loop Traverse, a reference azimuth must be placed at the last instru-
ment point if you wish to adjust the angular error.
The reference azimuth is the correct azimuth from the last instrument point in the raw data le to the rst
instrument point (or last foresight).
Traverse with Doubled Angles
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1200
Each new instrument setup requires a 0 to the back sight. The rst angle to the foresight is the single angle. This
angle is locked into the gun and the back sight is retaken. The second angle to the foresight is the doubled angle.
You can double angles to side shots.
Loop Traverse Beginning and Ending on External Reference Azimuths
This type of traverse occurs frequently. The example below shows a Loop Traverse that begins on an external
reference azimuth and ends on an external reference azimuth. Even though this traverse closes on itself, it must be
reduced as a Closed Traverse Beginning and Ending at Known Points.
Point 100 is a dummy point on the azimuth line. Line 3 shows a reference bearing from point 1 to 100 (negative
means from ip to bs) of S00-00-00E.
Line 16 shows the same reference bearing.
Point number 100 need not exist in the coordinate le and will not be calculated, but a dummy backsight and
foresight point number must be entered into the raw data le.
Use Of Reference Bearings and Azimuths
Reference Bearings and Azimuths are entered by Adding or Inserting a Reference Bearing data entry line. For
example:
DR 1-2 123.4523
The direction from point 1 to point 2 is N23-45-23E.
Reference bearings and azimuths are optional (except for Closed Loop Azimuth Traverses). If a reference bearing
is used, that direction will be held during the reduction process. More than one reference bearing may be used. The
data below shows a raw data le using multiple reference bearings:
The previous data represents a loop traverse. If you choose to adjust angles, all angles will be adjusted
from one reference bearing to the next (angles 1-5, 6-1). Angular closure information will also be shown from one
reference bearing to the next. See the Reduction section of this chapter for more specic information on the use of
reference bearings with different types of traverses.
Except for an initial reference bearing to the back sight point, reference bearings will be ignored for Open Traverses
(no adjustments are available).
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1201
Multiple Traverse Codes in a Single File
This sample is of a raw data le that contains multiple traverse codes in a single le: ET end main loop traverse
Scale factors are placed after Instrument Point data entry lines. Any text following a LT, CT, OT or ET marker is
used for comments. Notice that the codes MUST precede the rst instrument setup that begins the traverse.
The Foresight Tie Point in the previous example is necessary because there is a side shot (point #25) at the end of
the Closed Traverse. The reduction routine does not know whether you are tying into point 25 or point 2
Pull Down Menu Location:CGTrav\ Reduce Traverse
KeyBoard Command:RT, CG REDUCE RAW
Prerequisite:Open Raw le
*
.CGR
Edit Map Check File
The map check program is used to enter or edit deed and map information for checking closures and to assist with
evaluating data from other sources for a job you are working on.
Note: for further and complete information on using the Mapcheck editor, see the chapter on CGEditor in
the Tools section.
Pulldown Menu Location: CGTrav/Edit Mapcheck File
Keyboard Command: EM, CG EDIT MAP
Prerequisite: None
Reduce Map Check File
If a map check le is not open, a le dialogue box will appear, allowing you to open an existing map check le.
If you wish the coordinates to be adjusted, select the type of adjustment in the Traverse Options dialog box. If a
coordinate le is not open, a le dialog box will appear allowing you to open one.NOTE You may use the same
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1202
coordinate le as often as you wish. Make sure the correct coordinate le is open.
Next Enter Point values: the starting Point number, Northing and Easting and the ending Northing and Easting:
The map data will then be reduced and the coordinates stored in the coordinate le. Overwrite protection is in place
in case the points already exist in the coordinate le. If a point already exists in the coordinate le you will have the
following options:
CANCEL: will terminate the process of storing coordinates.
OVERWRITE :will overwrite the existing point.
DO NO OVERWRITE: skip to the next point. If you have the ''Do Not Ask Again'' box checked.
Overwrite will overwrite all points without asking, and Do Not Overwrite will only write NEW points to the
coordinate le.
The initial closure information will by shown. For example:
Correct Ending Coordinates, North: 5000.0000 East: 5000.0000
Ending Coordinates, North: 5071.8346 East: 4894.7441
Error, N: 71.83 E: -105.26 Total: 127.43 Brg: S 55&oslash;41'15''E
Distance Traversed: 1308.19 Closure: 10
A full report including acreage may be viewed by pressing the F2 key to view the CAD Text Window. You
may also view/print the display le.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1203
Pulldown menu Location:CGTrav
Keyboard Command:RDM, CG REDUCE MAP
Prerequisite: Open Coordinate File
Visual Map Check
This routine allows you to graphically pick the Call Text (Bearings and Distance) from a drawing and perform a
Map Check Closure.
Prompts
First you will be asked: Pick Point of Beginning: You can enter the beginning point number, or graphically pick
the point on the screen.
Next: Pick Bearing Text for Leg 1 (ask Reverse is ON) [Off/Done]<Done>: Graphically pick the text
with the Bearing. If ''ask Reverse'' is turned ON, you will be allowed to reverse the direction of the bearing after it
is selected:
Next: Pick Distance Text for Leg 1: Graphically pick the text with the distance. You will see:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1204
If you select YES, you will go to the next leg. If you select NO: you will be asked to pick the Bearing and distance
for Leg 1 again.
After selecting all the Calls: press ENTER for DONE. You will have the option:
If you select YES, the information: you selected will be placed in a Map Check File. You will be asked to select
the CGM le.
Next: Enter the starting and ending coordinates for the traverse.
The map data will then be reduced and the coordinates stored in the coordinate le. Overwrite protection is
in place in case the points already exist in the coordinate le. If a point already exists in the coordinate le you will
have the following options:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1205
CANCEL: will terminate the process of storing coordinates.
OVERWRITE: will overwrite the existing point.
DO NO OVERWRITE: skip to the next point. If you have the ''Do Not Ask Again'' box checked, OVERWRTE
will overwrite all points without asking, DO NOT OVERWRITE: will only write NEW points to the coordinate le.
Below is a sample Report:
Correct Ending Coordinates, North: 10000.00000 East: 10000.00000
Ending Coordinates, North: 9586.74896 East: 9586.74832
Error, N: -413.25104 E: -413.25168 Total: 584.42568 Brg: N 4500'00''E
Distance Traversed: 1492.10700 Closure: 3
Adjusted by Least Squares
Bearing Distance Northing Easting Elevation Point ID
10000.00000 10000.00000 900.00000 1
S 5819'27''W 146.64772 9922.99352 9875.19793 2
N 0519'46''W 299.65818 10221.35627 9847.36450 3
N 7317'06''W 156.24457 10266.29428 9697.72179 4
S 0435'43''E 226.90862 10040.11507 9715.90113 5
S 6419'20''E 371.14929 9879.29253 10050.39763 900.00000 1
Sq. Feet: 814183.13568 Acres: 18.69107
Pulldown menu Location: CGTrav
Keyboard Command:VM, cg visual mapcheck
Prerequisite: Call Text must be diplayed to select
Create StarNet File
This option converts a raw data le to the Star
*
Net (.DAT) format. The raw data le will be preprocessed. During
conversion, multiple distances and angles will be averaged and compared to the maximum ranges set in the Traverse
Options dialog box. To use this option properly, you must know how Star
*
Net works. You should be familiar with
all Star
*
Net codes and commands.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1206
NOTE: This manual is not a substitute for the Star
*
Net manual.
Below is a sample raw data le that contains three different traverse types. This raw data le can be re-
duced using CG-SURVEY or written to a Star
*
Net le for reduction with Star
*
Net, both without any editing.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1207
The coordinate formats (C code) are the same for Star
*
Net and CG-SURVEY; no translation is necessary.
If a comment line in the raw data le uses a valid Star
*
Net code or command, it will be used in its
original form (as with coordinates); not as a comment. These codes are #, C, A, D, V, B, M, TB, T, TE, SS (followed
by a space) and all dot commands. (example: .CURVE, .SCALE, etc...)
Multiplication factors are converted to the .Scale command. The original multiplication factor set in the
Global Options dialog box will be placed at the beginning of the Star
*
Net le. Other multiplication factors will be
placed as they occur in the raw data le.
NOTE: You cannot use a multiplication factor for meter/feet conversion in a 3-D traverse in Star
*
Net 3.2.
Reference bearings/azimuths are converted to the B format.
All traverse points are converted to the M format and side shots to the SS format. Only points used
once (as a foresight point) will be considered a side shot. If a point is located from more than one instrument setup,
or is used as an instrument point or backsight point, the point will be converted to a M format
The LT, ET, OT, FT and CT codes are converted to comments. Point codes are combined with descrip-
tions.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1208
If Elevations are on, the Star
*
Net le must be adjusted as a 3-D traverse. The following could oc-
cur:
If you input slope distances and vertical angles, all distances will rst be reduced to their horizontal/vertical
components. Multiple distances will be averaged and then a slope distance and vertical angle will be recomputed
from the averaged horizontal/ vertical components. This is done so Star
*
Net can compute corrections for curvature
and refraction and vertical divergence (can only be done if vertical angles are used in a 3-D traverse.) A ''.Delta Off''
command will be placed in the Star
*
Net le.
If Curvature and Refraction is on in the Options/Global Options dialog box, a Curve command will be
placed in the Star
*
Net le.
If you input horizontal and vertical distances, a ''.Delta On'' command will be placed in the Star
*
Net le.
No corrections for curvature and refraction or vertical divergence will be possible.
If Elevations are off in the Options/Global Options dialog box, the Star
*
Net le must be reduced as a 2-D
traverse. The following will occur:
If you input slope distances and vertical angles, all distances will be reduced to their horizontal/vertical
components and the vertical components will be thrown away.
Multiple distances will be averaged.
No corrections for curvature and refraction or vertical divergence are allowed in a 2-D traverse with Star
*
Net
version 3.2 or earlier.
Pulldown Menu Location: CGTrav
Keyboard Command:STN, CG REDUCE STARNET
Prerequisite: Open CG Raw le
*
.CGR
CGCogo
General Information
The Command Line:
Throughout CGSurvey the user will be prompted at the command line for input. Typically the command line is at
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1209
the bottom of the CAD graphic screen, although the command line can be placed above the graphics screen. To
enter a command at the command line use the key board, and press the <Enter> key when nished.
The F2 hot key can be used at any time to access a full text window that displays user input and history.
As point numbers are typed in, or selected on the screen using the mouse, the point number entered is displayed at
the command line. When the next point ID is requested the previous point ID is used as the starting point for the
command.
For example, when inversing from 5 to 7. First you type 5 at the command line and press <Enter>.
Command:
[Point group/Reset/sNap on] (last point = <none>: 5
[cLockwise curve/ccW curve/Point group/Reset/sNap on] (last point = 5):
Note that 5 is now displayed as the ''Last Point''. This means that when 7 is entered at the command line
the inverse will be calculated from point 5 to point 7.
To clear the last point enter R or ''.'' and <Enter> for Reset. The last point will now be shown as <none>.
Inverse
This command allows you to determine the bearing and distance between the endpoints of a line or a curve by
entering the points that dene the line or curve.
After choosing the Inverse menu item you are asked to ''Enter point sequence''. A point sequence is a series
of points that dene the points being used to calculate the inverse. You may enter one point ID at a time to inverse
from point to point. You may enter the two points separated by a dash (5-7), etc.
Enter point sequence
[Point group/Reset/sNap on] (last point = <none>: 5
[cLockwise curve/ccW curve/Point group/Reset/sNap on] (last point = 5): 7
Note that 5 is now displayed as the ''Last Point''. This means that when 7 is entered at the command line
the inverse will be calculated from point 5 to point 7.
To ''Reset'' the last point enter R or ''.'' and <Enter> for Reset. The last point will now be shown as <none>.
Inversing Around Curves Clockwise
To inverse around a clockwise curve (one curving to the right), enter the PC point ID then enter ''L'' or ''+'' to indicate
a clockwise curve. Next enter the point IDof the radius point of the clockwise curve and followwith the PT point ID.
For Example:
First enter the PC of the curve. In this example type or pick point ID 2201
Enter point sequence
[cg-Point-group/Reset/turn-Snap-on] (last point = <none>): 2201
Now type L or ''+'' and <Enter> for a clockwise curve
Enter point sequence
[clockWise curve/Ccw curve/Point group/Reset] (last point = 2201):L
Next type or pick the radius point ID 2200
Enter radius point for curve [Reset/sNap on]: 2200
You may also use the mouse to pick a C&G Arc. In this case, the arc's radius point will be used
Next type or pick the PT point ID 2202
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1210
Enter point of tangency (PT) for curve [Reset/sNap]: 2202
Inversing Around Curves Counter Clockwise
To inverse around a curve in a counter-clockwise direction (curving to the left) simply type W or ''-'' and <Enter>
then proceed as with a clockwise curve.
Inversing between a series of points in the coordinate le
By entering 2 point numbers separated by a ''+'' you can inverse through successive point IDs in the order they are
found in the coordinate le (either numeric or alphabetic order). For example, if you enter 3+6, inverses will be
calculated and displayed from point 3 to 4, 4 to 5 and 5 to 6. You can use the <F2> key to view the information
printed at the command line or you can view the print le (CGFile > Print/View Print File).
Inversing using Point Groups:
You can use a Point Group to inverse between a series of points specied by the point group. To specify a point
group type a P or '
*
' and <Enter> at the command line. This will display a dialog box showing the Point Groups
currently in the default directory.
Prompts
Enter point sequence
[Point group/Reset/sNap on] (last point = <none>]: Enter or pick the rst point on a line or the PC of a curve.
Type ''P'' and Enter to use a point group to specify the inversing sequence. Type ''R'' and Enter to Reset the last
point. Type ''N'' and Enter to turn on CAD snaps (these are turned off when the command starts).
[cLockwise curve/ccW curve/Point group/Reset/sNap on] (last point = 5): Enter or pick the next point ID to
inverse to or type ''L'' and Enter or ''W'' and Enter to specify the radius point of a curve.
if you are entering a curve:
Enter radius point for curve [Reset/turn Snap on]: Enter or pick the radius point for the curve.
Enter point of tangency (PT) for curve [Reset/turn Snap on]: Enter or pick the PT point for the curve.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo
Keyboard Command: cg inverse
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Intersects
This feature allows you to calculate intersections based on one of the following methods:
Bearing-bearing
The bearing-bearing intersect is calculated based on a line passing through a point on a given bearing intersecting
another line passing through a second point on another specied bearing.
Bearing-distance
This is based on a line passing through a point at a given bearing intersecting a circle at a given distance (radius)
from a second point. This intersection by result in 2 points of intersection.
Distance-distance
This is based on intersecting a circle at a given distance (radius) from a point with another circle at another given
distance (radius) from a second point. This may also result in 2 points of intersection.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1211
Perpendicular
This is based on calculating the perpendicular distance from a given point to a line that passes through another point
at a specied bearing.
Tangent
This is based on calculating the tangent points of a line drawn from a given point to a circle having a specied
radius and radius point.
Command line input
After selecting the Intersects option on the CGCogo pull down menu and the Use Intersects Dialog menu item is
not checked you will see the following prompt.
Intersection method: Brng-Brng/Brng-Dist/Dist-Dist/Perp/Tangent or offsets-on
[BB/BD/DD/Perp/Tangent/turn-Offsets-on]:
Bearing-Bearing Intersections:
Type ''bb'', then press <Enter>
At the Enter rst Point: prompt type in or pick the point using the mouse
As an illustration, using the example shown in the gure: type or pick point 2203.
At the Enter rst bearing: prompt there are 3 options available:
Type the bearing directly using the special C&G notation qddmmss (quadrant, degrees, minutes and econds)
105.2316 (N 05 23' 16''E)
Enter the two known C&G points that dene the bearing either by typing the two points in with a dash be-
tween them or picking the two points one at a time using the mouse.
Or select a C&G line. When you select a line the bearing is computed by inversing between the two points that
created the line. The bearing quadrant is based on traversing from the end point of the line farthest from the location
where the line was picked to the end point of the line nearest to the point picked.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1212
Enter second point: for the example type or pick point 2204
Enter second bearing: use any of the methods outlined for entering rst bearing.
The intersection will then be calculated, the intersection point saved to the coordinate le and the results displayed
at the command line.
When saving the intersection point, depending on your settings on the Global Settings tab of the C&G Op-
tions dialog, you may be asked to either enter or change the point ID, elevation, point code and description.
At each of the STORING POINT prompts there is an option to change settings [Settings]. Pressing S will
bring up the Global Options tab of the C&G Options dialog box, allowing you to change settings prior to saving the
point. (see the CGTools Chapter for a description of the CGOptions dialog box)
Bearing-Distance Intersection
Type bd to calculate the intersection of a circle with a line. Generally, the data is entered in the same fashion as for
a bearing-bearing intersection.
Once the data is entered each of the two solutions will be displayed one at a time.
You will be asked if the solution shown is the correct solution.
Is this the correct solution [Yes/No/ESC]:
If the solution is the correct one press Y for <Yes>. If it is not the correct solution press N for <No> and
the second solution will be displayed. If neither solution is correct press <Esc> to cancel and return to the previous
prompt.
Distance-Distance Intersection
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1213
Type dd to calculate the intersection of two circles: with the distances being the radii of the circles
You will be prompted to enter the rst radius point and distance (radius)
You will then be asked to enter the second radius point and distance (radius)
As with the bearing-distance intersection, the two possible solutions will be displayed and you will be asked to
choose the correct one (see dialog below).
If you click the No button the other possible solution will be displayed. If you click the Yes button the intersection
point will be stored. If you click Cancel the point will not be stored.
The routine will continue with additional DD Intersections prompts until you escape [ESC] the routine.
The process will be repeated until the user presses <Esc> twice to end the command.
Perpendicular Intersection
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1214
Press P and <Enter> to calculate the point where the perpendicular constructed from a given point to a line
intersects the line.
At the Enter rst Point <>: prompt, type or pick a point on the line (in the example illustrated in the gure, type or
pick point 2514)
At the Enter bearing: <>: prompt, type the bearing of the line or type or pick the two points dening the bearing
(in the example, 2514-2513)
You will then be asked if you want to
Store Perp. Int. Pt. (Yes/No):
Choose whether to store the calculated point or simply view the data (you may not want to save the resulting
intersection point).
Enter second point <>: Type the point ID, or use the mouse to pick the point from which the perpendicular to line
is to be constructed (in the example, 2488).
The STORE POINT prompt will indicate the point being stored (in the example it will be 2489). Press <ESC> to
cancel point storage.
To exit the Instrsects feature, the user must press <Esc> twice or the routine will repeat.
Tangent Intersection
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1215
Type T and <Enter> to calculate the points at which a line from a given point becomes tangent to a circle. You
must choose a radius point for the circle, the radius of the circle, and the external point from which the tangent will
start.
At the Enter radius point for circle: prompt, type or pick the center or radius point of the circle (in the example,
2490)
At the Enter radius of circle: prompt, type the radius or type or pick two points that dene the radius distance (in
this example, 2490-2492, or 69.92' )
At the Second point: prompt, type or pick the point through which the tangent lines must pass (in the example,
2491)
As in some of the other intersection types, you must select the desired solution from the two possible solutions
using the dialog shown for the distance-distance intersect.. If you click the Yes button, he intersection point will
then be saved to the coordinate le and the results displayed at the command line.
To end the command, press <Esc> twice or the routine will repeat
Turn-Offsets-on:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1216
Type O and <Enter> to turn the use of offsets on or off .
An example of an offset intersection would be the easement lines for a sewer line. This routine can calculate the
offset intersection say for a 7.5' left offset and a 10' right offset, as shown.
For example:
Enter rst offset distance <>: -7.50
Enter Second offset distance <-7.50>: 10.00
The offset distances are positive if right of the line, as seen looking down the line in the direction of the dened
bearing, negative if left of the line.
Intersects dialog
If the Use Intersects Dialog menu item is checked you will see the following dialog:
To use the Intersects dialog just set the Intersect Type drop down list to specify the type of intersect you wish to do.
Next click on the item you wish to specify. You may type in the information or you can move the curser over the
drawing area and you will be prompted for the information required for the edit box you were last in. To enter the
next item, click on that edit box and type the information or, as before, move the cursor over the drawing and you
will be prompted for the necessary information for the last edit box you were in. Continue to do this until all
information has been entered then click the Compute button to compute the intersection. The results will be printed
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1217
on the CAD command line and to the print le. If the Store Intersect Point check box is checked the intersection
point will be stored in the coordinate le. You may specify offsets by checking the Specify Offsets checkbox and
entering or picking the off set distance(s). Click the Reset button to remove all entered data from the dialog.
You may perform any other commands while the Intersects dialog is displayed - the data entered in the dialog will
remain for use at any time.
Prompts
Not using Intersects Dialog:
Intersection method: Brng-Brng/Brng-Dist/Dist-Dist/Perp/Tangent or offsets-on
[BB/BD/DD/Perp/Tangent/turn-Offsets-on]: Type the 1 or 2 capitalized letters to specify the typ of intersect to
calculate or to turn offsets on.
point prompts
Enter point: Type a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen.
Enter rst point: Type a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen.
Enter second point: Type a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen.
Enter radius point for circle: Type a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen.
Enter point on tangent line: Type a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen.
bearing prompts:
Enter bearing <100.0000>: Type or pick the bearing.
Enter rst bearing <100.0000>: Type or pick the bearing.
Enter second bearing <100.0000>: Type or pick the bearing.
distance prompts:
Enter distance <0.000000>: Type or pick the distance.
Enter 1st distance <0.000000>: Type or pick the distance.
Enter radius of circle <0.000000>: Type or pick the distance.
perpendicular intersect prompt:
Store perpendicular intersect point [Yes/No] <N>: Type ''Y'' or ''N'' and Enter.
Stopping to allow viewing of intersect point (red X) <Enter to continue> This prompt is displayed if you
answered ''N'' to the previous prompt. Just press Enter to continue.
Intersects dialog: Type or pick the data into the appropriate edit boxes then click the Compute button to view the
results and save the intersection point to the coordinate le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo
Keyboard Command: cg intersects
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Station Offset
Station Offset
In order to use the station offset functions, you must create a Point Group (formerly called a batch point le or point
le) dening a centerline alignment. The Coordinate Management > Point Groups > Create section describes how
you can create a Point Group.
To illustrate the use of point groups in the various station offset features, the following point group le will be used:
7.25+ (Slope in, 1st vert. Curve)
1.75- (Slope out, 1st vert. curve & slope in, 2nd vert. Curve)
200
*
(Vertical Curve Length curve 1)
/123.50 (PVI Elevation curve 1)
*
1300 (PVI Station curve 1)
2.00- (Slope out of curve 2)
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1218
*
1750 (PVI Station curve 2)
300
*
(Curve Length curve 2)
1000 (Subgroup name - also default beginning station)
2001 (Point ID at Sta. 10+00)
2002 (Point ID at PC of Curve)
-2003 (Radius point ID, '-' indicates counter clockwise)
2004 (Point ID at PT of curve)
2005 (Point ID at PC of curve)
+2006 (Radius point ID , '+' indicates clockwise curve)
2007 (Point ID of PT of curve)
2008 (Point ID of PC of curve)
+2009 (Radius point ID, '+' indicates a clockwise curve)
2010 (Point ID of PT of curve - last entry in subgroup and in le)
NOTE: Information shown in parenthesis are comments used here for explanation and do not appear in the
point group le itself.
Alignment used for examples
Coords From Station Offset
This feature allows you to calculate and store a coordinate point for any given station and offset along an alignment
dened by a point group. Use the Select a C&G Point Group File dialog to open a point group le.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1219
.
Enter Starting Station [Done] <0.0000> You can Press <Enter> to use the default station shown, or you can enter
a new starting station. If you enter a ''+'' followed by a value, ex. ''+50'', all stations on a 50 foot interval will be
calculated automatically.
Enter Offset <0.00000>: Enter the offset distance from the alignmnent.
The point ID, station, offset, northing, easting, elevation and description will be printed at the command line and
written to the print le.
You may repeat the process until you have calculated all the desired stations or press D then <Enter> to
exit the command.
Note: If Elevations are set to ''Calculate'' and Elevation is on, (See General tab of the C&G Options dia-
log) then you will be asked to ''Enter constant elevation change for offset points''. The constant elevation change
will be added to or subtracted from the calculated elevation of each newly created point on the alignment. If there
is vertical curve information contained in the point group, this information will be used to calculate the initial
elevation of each point. If there is no vertical curve information, the elevation of each new point will be calculated
by interpolation between the elevations of the points contained in the point group.
Prompts
Enter Starting Station [Done] <0.0000>: You can Press <Enter> to use the default station shown, or you can
enter a new starting station.
Enter station [Interval] <0.000000>: Enter a station expressed as a decimal number. Type ''I'' and Enter to
specify an interval or, alternatively, you can precede the station number with a ''+''. This will cause stations to be
automatically calculated based on the value you specify.
If you choose Interval in the previous prompt:
Enter interval: Enter the desired interval for automatic generation of stations.
Enter offset (+ = right, - = left) <0.000000>: Enter the offset distance from the alignmnent.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Station Offset
Keyboard Command: cg crds from staoff
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1220
Prerequiste: coordinate le, point group le dening the alignment
Create Point Group From Station Offset
This feature allows you create a point group by locating all the points along a predened alignment at a given offset.
It then sorts the points by station and saves the points to a new Point Group.
Select Create Point Group from Station-Offset from the menu.
Use the Select a C&G Point Group File: to open the point group le specifying the ponts in the alignment.
At the Calculate new points on the control line [Yes/No] <Y> prompt,
If you answer no to this prompt, the points chosen by you in the previous step will be saved in station order to the
new point group le.
If you answer yes to the prompt, a new point will be created exactly on the offset line for each point found in the
coordinate le that lies within the given range. The elevation of the new point will be set to the elevation of the
nearby existing point and the new point IDs will be written to the new point group le instead of the existing point
IDs.
Repeat the above steps to specify another offset.
Press D for <Done> to exit.
Prompts
At the Enter Offset <0.00000>: Type an offset if desired or just press enter for no offset. Offsets to the left should
be preceded by a ''-''.
At the Enter Maximum Range <0.0000>: Specify the tolerance for points not exactly on the alignment.
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/Radius/Select]: Use the various methods available to choose the
points to be tested for being within the tolerance from the alignment.
Calculate new points on the control line [Yes/No] <Y>: Type ''Y'' and Enter or just Enter to create new points
on the alignment for those points found to be near the alignment and place these new point IDs in the point group
being created. Type ''N'' and Enter to place the existing points in the point group being created.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Station Offset
Keyboard Command: cg bpf from sta
Prerequiste: coordinate le, point group containing the points in the alignment
Display Centerline Stations
This features allows you to view a list of the centerline stations for a given point group.
In the le dialog select the point group le that denes the alignment.
At the Enter Starting Station [Done] <1000>: prompt you will notice that the subgroup name is used to determine
the starting station default value. To use the default value, press <Enter>. You may also enter a new starting station
for the rst point in the point group. For example, 24+34.12 is entered as 2434.12.
The centerline station information will be listed on the command line and written to the print le.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1221
The Enter Starting Station (Done) <0.00000>: prompt will again be displayed at the command line, at this point
you can either enter another point group, or type in another starting elevation. When done entering data, type D and
<Enter> for to end the command.
NOTE: The rst line of the Point Group must be the beginning station of the alignment. In any routine that
computes or requires stationing information the station numbers must be relative to the stationing in the Point
Group le.
Prompts
At the Enter Starting Station [Done] <1000>: Enter the starting station for the alignment as a decimal number.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Station Offset
Keyboard Command: cg display cl sta
Prerequiste: coordinate le, point group le dening an alignment
Station Offset From Coords
This feature allows you to calculate the station and offset of selected points in the current coordinate le, based on
the alignment as dened by the Point Group.
Select Station Offset from Coords from the menu.
You will rst be asked to open the point group le that denes the alignment.
At the Enter Starting Station [Done] <0.00000>: prompt, enter the station of the rst point in the point group. For
example, if the rst station is 24+34.12, enter it as 2434.12.
(As an example using the point group listed in the previous section, the starting station must be greater than 1000,
the starting station in the point group, and less than 2016.05, the station of the last point in the point group. If not,
no information will be displayed.)
Enter Maximum Range <0.00000>: The range identies how far to look left and right of the alignment for points
in the current coordinate le.
Next, you will be asked to select the points to be considered in computing the station offsets
Add points from coordinate le. (Enter when done) [All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limit/Radius/Select]:
At the prompt type A and <Enter> for all the points in the current coordinate le or use the other options to choose
a subset of the points. As indicated by the prompt, press <Enter> by itself to end point selection.
The station and offset information will be printed in order by station.
The Enter Start Station [Done] <0.0000>: prompt will appear again, you may enter the next starting station or type
D and <Enter> to end the command.
Prompts
Enter Starting Station [Done] <0.00000>: Enter the starting station as a decimal number.
Enter Maximum Range <0.00000>: The range denes the distance tolerance left and right of the alignment for
points selected from the current coordinate le.
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/Radius/Select]: Use the various methods to select points from the
coordinate le to be searched for proximity to the alignment.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Station Offset
Keyboard Command: cg staoff from crds
Prerequiste: coordinate le, an existing point group le dening the alignment
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1222
Points on Line
This feature allows you to calculate and store points along a line at specied distances.
After choosing Points on Line from the menu and, if needed, opening a coordinate le, you will see following
prompt:
Pts on line - specify No. of pts & dist., divide line, or place pts at interval [Number and dist/Divide/Interval]:
Choose one of the following:
Number and dist: Type N and <Enter> to specify a number of points at a given interval from the start point on a
line.
Divide: Type D and <Enter> to select a line and indicate how many points you wish to create. The program then
creates the specied number of points equally spaced along the length of the line.
Interval: Type I and <Enter> to create points at the specied interval along a line dened by 2 points.
Number and dist
This option allows you to calculate a given number of points at a xed distance along a line. For example, you can
set the corners for 3 lots at 150' intervals.
At the Enter start point: prompt, enter a point on the desired line by typing a point ID or picking a point with the
mouse.
At the Enter bearing <100.0000>: prompt, use any one of the methods available to enter the bearing of the line on
which you wish the points to fall.
At the Enter distance <0.00000>: prompt, use any of the available methods to enter the distance between
the points along the line.
Enter number of points: Enter the number of points you want created.
At the STORING POINT: prompt data required will vary depending on your current settings. You can enter a point
number and its elevation, description, and code. This prompt will appear for each of the points created along the
line
The Enter start point: prompt will repeat until you press <Esc>.
Pressing <Esc> again will allow you to create points on a line using one of the other methods.
Pressing <Esc> a third time to end command.
Divide
Choosing this method allows you to create points by dividing a line between two points into a specied number of
divisions
Enter start point: Enter the rst point dening the line by picking a point using the mouse or typing a point ID.
Enter end point: Enter the second point dening the line by picking a point using the mouse or typing a point ID.
Enter number of segments: Enter the number of points you want to create.
As the points are saved respond to the STORING POINT: prompt as required.
The Enter start point: will repeat unless you press <Esc>.
After pressing <Esc> once you may choose another method of creating points on a line or press <Esc> once more
to end command.
Interval
This option allows you to create as many points as possible at a specied interval on a line between two points.
Enter start point: Enter the rst point dening the line by picking a point using the mouse or typing a point ID.
Enter end point: Enter the second point dening the line by picking a point using the mouse or typing a point ID.
Enter Distance <0.0000>: Enter the desired distance between the points created along the line. Points will be
created along the line at the given distance. As many points as will t between the end points at the given spacing
will be created.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1223
No matter which method is used to create points, the Saving Point dialog (see below) will appear for each
of the points created.
Click OK to save the point in the coordinate le.
Repeat from the Enter start point: prompt or press <Esc> to use another method to create points along a line.
Press <Esc> once more to end the command.
Prompts
Specify: Number of points and distance, divide line or points at an interval
[Number and dist/Divide/Interval]: Type ''N'' and Enter to create a specied number of points along a line a
specied distance apart. Type ''D'' and Enter to create a specied number of points between 2 points. Type ''I'' and
Enter to create a point a specied distance from the starting point of a line specied by 2 points.
Enter start point: Enter the point ID or pick the point symbol for the starting point of the line.
for Number and Dist:
Enter bearing <100.0000>: Enter the bearing of the line along which the points are to be created.
Enter distance <0.000000>: Enter the distance between the points.
Enter number of points: Enter the number of points to be created.
for Divide:
Enter end point: Enter the point ID or pick the point symbol for the ending point of the line.
Enter number of segments: Specify the number of points to be created on the line between its end points.
for Interval:
Enter end point: Enter the point ID or pick the point symbol for the ending point of the line.
Enter distance <0.000000>: Enter or pick the distance along the line for creating the new point.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo
Keyboard Command: cg pol
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1224
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Curves
There are several possible curve calculations available on the Curves submenu. The available options will be
described in the following sections.
Calculate Horizontal
This feature allows you to calculate the components of a horizontal curve but does not save any points to the
coordinate le.
In the dialog enter any two curve components then press OK to calculate the other components.
To use the mouse to pick the two known components press the Pick button and pick the PC, PT and radius points or
a C&G or non-C&G arc.
The description eld is merely used to identify the curve in the printout.
The Reset button clears all elds.
When done, press the Cancel button to close the dialog.
Prompts
Horizontal Curve Calculation dialog: Enter any two curve components then press OK to calculate the other
components.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Curves
Keyboard Command: cg horz calc
Prerequiste: None
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1225
Curve Between Tangents
This feature allows you to calculate the curve components for a curve between two tangent lines given either the
radius, the length of the tangent line or a point through which the arc passes.
At the Enter rst point [Done]: prompt, enter or pick a point on one of the tangent lines. The point ID of
the point selected will be displayed on the command line.
Enter rst Bearing <100.000000>: use any of the available methods to enter the bearing from the point you just
selected going toward to the point of intersection (P.I.) of the curve. The bearing entered will be displayed on the
command line.
Enter second point: type or pick a point on the other tangent line.
Enter second bearing <100.000000>: enter the bearing of the other tangent.
Offset out <0.000000>: This is an optional entry. It allows you to calculate a point outside the curve (for example,
on the right-of-way). Press <Enter> to use the default value or enter another offset. The offset used will be
displayed on the command line.
Offset in <0.000000>: 50 This ioptional entry allows you to calculate a point inside the curve.
Enter point on arc [Radius mode/Tangent-Distance mode]:
At this prompt there are three options as to how to specify the location of the desired curve:
At this prompt you can type or pick a point on the arc,
Or you can type R and <Enter> to get the prompt:
Specify radius of curve [Tangent-mode/Point-on-arc-mode]:
At this prompt specify the radius of the curve.
Or you can type T and <Enter> to get the prompt:
Specify tangent distance [Radius-mode/Point-on-arc-mode:
At this prompt enter the distance from the PC or PT to the PI.
The locations of the PC, PI, PT, and radius point are calculated and the Saving Point dialog (see below) will appear
once for each.
Depending on the Global Options settings, the calculated points may be drawn. If Auto Line Plot is on, the arc will
be drawn as well. The coordinates of points that were created and the curve information will be displayed at the
command line.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1226
To end the command type D and <Enter> at the Specify an existing point on the rst tangent line [Done]: prompt.
Prompts
Specify an existing point on the rst tangent line [Done]: Enter or pick a point on one of the tangent lines.
Specify the bearing of the rst tangent line <100.0000>: Enter the bearing or pick 2 points or a line to dene
the bearing.
Specify an existing point on the second tangent line: Enter or pick a point on the second tangent line.
Specify the bearing of the second tangent line <100.0000>: Enter or pick the bearing of the second tangent.
Offset out <0.000000>: This is an optional entry. It allows you to calculate a point outside the curve
Offset in <0.000000>: This ioptional entry allows you to calculate a point inside the curve.
Specify an existing point on the arc [Radius mode/Tangent distance mode]: Enter or pick a point on the arc
or change how you dene the arc by entering ''R'' and Enter for the Radius method or 'T'' for the Tangent-distance
method
Specify radius of curve [Tangent distance mode/Point on arc mode]: Enter the radius or change the mode.
Specify tangent distance [Radius mode/Point-on-arc-mode: Enter the tangent distance or change the mode.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Curves
Keyboard Command: cg cbt
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Middle Ordinate Solution
Allows you to calculate the other curve elements when you can locate the chord and determine the middle ordinate
distance in the eld.
Prompts
Save coordinates [Yes/No)] <Y>: press Enter or type ''Y'' and Enter if you want the calculated radius point to be
stored in the coordinate le. If not type ''N'' and Enter. Press Esc key to end the command.
Enter P.C. point: specify the PC point by typing a point ID or picking a point on the screen.
Enter PT point: specify the PT point by typing a point ID or picking a point on the screen.
Middle ordinate: Type in the middle ordinant distance or pick it on the screen.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Curves
Keyboard Command: cg chd mo
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Points on Arc
This feature allows you to create points along an arc. The rst point is set at a distance measured along the arc
starting at the PC.
Enter PC point or pick a C&G Curve: enter or pick the PC point or pick a C&G curve.
If you picked a C&G Curve, the PC, Radius point, Pt point and arc length will be displayed at the command line.
After picking a C&G Curve, skip the next 2 steps.
Enter PT point: Enter or pick the PT point.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1227
Enter radius point [cLockwise/ccW]: For a clockwise curve either type L or '+' and <Enter> then pick or type a
point ID or type a point ID preceded by a '+'. For a counter clockwise curve either type a W or a '-' and <Enter>
then pick or type a point ID or type a point ID preceded by a '-' .
Enter arc length [Occupy/Multiple points] <0.000000>:
Occupy option
In occupy mode the points are located along the arc with the arc length being measured from the previous point.
Thus the occupied point moves ahead to the last computed point as calculations proceed. When you type O and
<Enter> the prompt becomes:
Enter arc length [do not Occupy/Multiple points] <0.000000>:
Specify the arc length at the prompt.
A point will be created and you will be prompted for the next arc length. Continue entering arc lengths until done
then press <Esc> to return to the Enter PC point or pick a C&G Curve: prompt.
Multiple points option
This option allows you to compute multiple points along the arc at a given distance. The specied distance is used
to set as many points along the arc as will t between the PC and the PT. When you type M and <Enter> the
prompt becomes:
Enter arc length [do not Occupy/Single point] <0.000000>:
Specify the arc length at the prompt.
A as many points as can be t between the PC and the PT will be created. You will then be prompted for the next
arc length. Continue entering arc lengths until done then press <Esc> to return to the Enter PC point or pick a
C&G Curve: prompt.
At the Enter PC point or pick a C&G Curve: prompt you can continue specifying curves or you can press <Esc>
to end the command.
Prompts
Enter PC point or pick a C&G Curve: Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol or a C&G Arc on the screen. Press
Esc to end the command.
Enter PT point: Enter or pick the PT point.
Enter radius point [cLockwise/ccW]: For a clockwise curve either type ''L'' (or a plus sign ('+')) and <Enter>
then pick or type a point ID or type a point ID preceded by a '+'. For a counter clockwise curve either type a ''W''
(or a minus sign ('-')) and <Enter> then pick or type a point ID or type a point ID preceded by a '-' .
Enter arc length [Occupy/Multiple points] <0.000000>: Enter an arc length to create a single point on the arc.
Enter ''O'' and Enter to ''occupy'' the calculated point so the next arc length is calculated from that point instead of
the PC. Enter ''M'' and Enter to calculate multiple points along the arc at a specied distance.
Enter arc length [do not Occupy/Single point] <0.000000>: For multiple points enter the desired arc length or
change input mode.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Curves
Keyboard Command: cg poa
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Spiral Curve Design
This feature allows you to design a spiral curve. You will be prompted using standard spiral curve component
nomenclature.
Follow the prompts described in the Prompts section below and the following Spiral curve data is calculated
and displayed at the command line and written to the print le.
Point of Intersection of the spiral (PI for spiral)
Tangent point of the spiral (TS for spiral)
Point where spiral meets simple curve (SC for spiral)
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1228
Radius point of the simple curve
Point where simple curve meets outgoing spiral (CS for spiral)
Point where spiral meets tangent on outgoing side (TS for spiral)
For each of the points calculated the prompt
The Saving Point dialog (see below) will appear and allow you to specify the point ID.
Click OK to cause the point to be stored in the coordinate le.
At the Curve Description <enter if done>: prompt you can either enter the description for another curve or
press <Enter> to end the command.
Prompts
Curve description <enter if none>: This description is optional but is used to identify the information in the
results. Press Enter to end the command.
Enter the rst point: Enter or pick a point on the tangent going into the spiral.
Enter rst bearing <100.0000>: Enter or pick the bearing from rst point to the P.I of the spiral.
Enter second point: Enter or pick a point on the tangent going out of the spiral.
Enter second bearing <100.0000>: Enter the bearing from second point to the PI.
Enter Radius [Degree of curve] <0.000000>: Enter or pick the radius or type ''D'' and Enter to change to
degree of curve prompt.
or
Enter Degree of Curve [Radius]: Enter or pick the degree of curve or type ''R'' and Enter to change to radius
prompt.
Enter spiral length in <0.00000>: Enter or pick the length of the spiral coming from the rst tangent into
the simple curve. Enter a zero for no spiral in.
Enter spiral length out <0.00000>: Enter the length of the spiral from the simple curve out to the second tangent.
Enter a zero for no spiral out.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1229
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Curves
Keyboard Command: cg scd
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Spiral Curve Stakeout
This feature allows you to calculate points along a spiral at a given interval and offset for use in staking out the
curve in the eld.
Curve Description <enter if done>: This text description is only used to identify the spiral curve data printed at the
command line and written to the print le.
Enter the rst point: Enter or pick a point on the tangent line going into the spiral.
Enter rst bearing <100.000000>: Enter the bearing going toward the P.I. of the spiral from the rst point.
Enter the second point: Enter or pick a point on the tangent line going out of the spiral.
Enter second bearing <100.0000>: Enter the bearing from the tangent point just dened to the P.I. for the spiral.
Enter Radius [Degree of Curve] <0.0000>:
Radius option: Entering the radius is the default option as indicated by the wording of the prompt.
Degree of Curve option: To change to entering the degree of curve type D and <Enter>.
Once you have chosen the type of data you wish to specify, type or pick the radius of the simple curve between the
two tangents or the degree of curve.
Enter spiral length in <0.000000>: enter the length of the spiral from the TS (Tangent to Spiral) to the SC
(Spiral to Curve). Enter zero for no spiral in.
Enter spiral length out <0.000000>: enter the length of the spiral from the CS (Curve to Spiral) to the ST (Spiral
to Tangent). Enter zero for no spiral out.
Enter P.I. station <0.0000>: Enter the station of the PI. For example: station 460+28.52 is entered as 46028.52
Enter station interval <0.0000>: Specify the interval at which you wish to stake the spiral. For example,
enter 50 to stake every 50 units.
Enter offset from centerline <0.0000>: This can be a positive or negative number depending on whether you want
to set points inside or outside the spiral. If you want to place points on the centerline, simply press <Enter> to use
the 0.00 default value.
Odd stations to be staked (6+34.22 as 634.22): You can stake as many odd station locations as needed. When done
press <Enter> without entering a station value.
The points will be calculated and stored in the coordinate le. The station and offset will be placed in the description
eld.
The results will be printed at the command line and in the print le.
Continue to stake another spiral or press <Esc> or <Enter> at the Curve Description <enter if done>: prompt to
end the command.
Prompts
Curve Description <enter if done>: This text description is optional and is used to identify the spiral curve in the
output
Enter the rst point: Enter or pick a point on the tangent line going into the spiral.
Enter rst bearing <100.000000>: Enter the bearing going toward the P.I. of the spiral from the rst point.
Enter the second point: Enter or pick a point on the tangent line going out of the spiral.
Enter second bearing <100.0000>: Enter or pick the bearing from the second tangent point to the P.I. for the
spiral.
Enter Radius [Degree of Curve] <0.0000>: Enter or pick the radius. or, to change to entering the degree of
curve, type ''D'' and Enter.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1230
Enter spiral length in <0.000000>: enter the length of the spiral from the TS (Tangent to Spiral) to the SC (Spiral
to Curve). Enter zero for no spiral in.
Enter spiral length out <0.000000>: enter the length of the spiral from the CS (Curve to Spiral) to the ST (Spiral
to Tangent). Enter zero for no spiral out.
Enter P.I. station <0.0000>: Enter the station of the PI. For example: station 460+28.52 is entered as 46028.52
Odd stations to be staked (6+34.22 as 634.22): Enter as many odd stations as needed. When done press Enter.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Curves
Keyboard Command: cg scs
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Stakeout Horizontal
This feature allows you to create points for eld staking a horizontal curve.
After choosing the Horizontal Stakeout menu item, and opening a coordinate le you will be asked if you
want to Save coordinates [Yes/No] <Y>.
If you respond Yes (or press enter), a new point will be saved to the coordinate le for each point to be staked along
the curve. No matter how you answer this question, stakeout information will be generated and displayed.
Enter curve description: Enter a description that will allow you to identify the curve in the output.
P.C. station <0.000000>: Enter the station for the P.C. of the curve.
Station interval <0.000000>: Enter an interval for staking the points along the curve.
Odd stations to be staked (6+34.22 as 634.22) [Done]: Enter the station of any odd location along the curve to be
staked. For example, you may wish to stake the point on the curve at which a pipe crosses or the point where the
extension of a property line intersects the curve. You may enter as many odd stations as required. When done, press
<Enter> at the prompt without entering a new odd station or press D and <Enter>.
Offset from C/L <0.000000>: enter a non-zero value here if you must stake points offset from the main alignment
- for example: along a curb line, a barrier wall or along a property line.
If the distance is entered as a positive number, the distance will be added to the radius or staked outside the curve.
If the number entered is negative, it will be subtracted from the radius or staked inside the curve. To stake the
centerline, enter zero.
At the Enter PC point or pick a curve: prompt you can type a point ID for the P.C. or use the mouse to pick a point
or a C&G curve on the screen.
If you picked a C&G curve in the previous step, you need not enter the PT point or the radius point so skip the next
2 steps.
Enter PT point: type the point ID for the P.T. or click the point on the screen.
Enter radius point [cLockwise/ccW]: Use any of the available methods of specifying a radius point.
Type the radius point: If the curve is in a clockwise direction from the P.C. to the P.T., enter the point number
preceded by a plus sign, e.g. +18. If the curve is in a counterclockwise direction from the P.C. to the P.T., the point
ID preceded by a minus sign, e.g. -18.
Pick the radius point with the mouse: If the curve is in a clockwise direction from the P.C. to the P.T., type an L or a
'+' and <Enter>, then use the mouse to pick the point on the screen. If the curve is in a counterclockwise direction
from the P.C. to the P.T., type either a W or a '-' and <Enter>, then pick the point on the screen.
The report will be printed at the command line and written to the print le.
The command will repeat until you press <Esc> at the Save coordinates [Yes/No] <Y>: prompt to end command.
Prompts
Save coordinates [Yes/No] <Y>: Type ''Y'' and Enter or just Enter if you wish to save resulting points to
coordinate le. Type ''N'' and Enter if not. Press Esc to end command.
Enter curve description: Enter a description that will allow you to identify the curve in the output.
P.C. station <0.000000>: Enter the station for the P.C. of the curve.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1231
Station interval <0.000000>: Enter an interval for staking the points along the curve.
Odd stations to be staked (6+34.22 as 634.22) [Done]: Enter as many ''odd'' stations to be staked. Type Enter or
''Done'' and Enter when all odd stations have been entered.
Offset from C/L <0.000000>: If you wish to stake stations not on the centerline, enter the offset and press Enter
or just press Enter to accept the default offset. Positive offset is outside the radius and negative is inside.
Enter PC point or pick a curve: Enter a point ID, pick a point symbol or pick a C&G arc.
if you did not pick a C&G arc:
Enter PT point: Enter or pick the PT point.
Enter radius point [cLockwise/ccW]: Enter ''L'' or ''W'' to choose the type of curve then Enter or pick the radius
point. You may also enter ''+'' and Enter then enter or pick a point for the radius point of a clockwise curve or Enter
a ''-'' and enter or pick a point for the radius point of a counter clockwise curve.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Curves
Keyboard Command: cg hcso
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Tangent Between Curves
This feature allows you to calculate the end points of a tangent line joining two curves. This may be used, for
example, to layout roads which do not have curve/tangent information.
Follow the prompts noted below and, if a solution is possible, the endpoints of the tangent between the two curves
will be calculated. Point IDs will be assigned and coordinates stored for the points of tangency. Repeat or enter ''D''
when done.
NOTE: There are 4 tangent solutions for this problem. The solutions sets differ according to the sign pre-
ceding the radius or degree of curve.
Enter rst radius point [Done: Enter or pick the center point for one of the curves. Press Enter or type ''D'' and
Enter when done.
Enter rst radius <0.00000>: Enter the radius of the rst curve. Use a ''+'' sign before the point ID to specify a
clockwise curve or a ''-'' sign to specify a counter clockwise curve.
Enter second radius point: Enter or pick the center point for the second the curve.
Enter second radius <0.00000>: Enter the radius for the second curve. Use a ''+'' sign before the point ID to
specify a clockwise curve or a ''-'' sign to specify a counter clockwise curve.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Curves
Keyboard Command: cg tbc
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Vertical Curve Design
This feature prints a list of station and elevation information for stations along one or more vertical curves.
Use the Odd stations to be staked (6+34.22 as 634.22): prompt to enter any stations along the curve for
which you wish elevation information. This permits you to calculate elevations over culverts or at other important
locations.
The calculated station and elevation information . The station, tangent elevation, tangent offset and grade elevation
will be printed at the command line and in the print le. The high or low point will be marked with an asterisk.
Repeat the process to design another vertical curve or press <Esc> at the Enter curve description: prompt to end
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1232
the command.
Prompts
Enter curve description: Description is used to identify the curve in the output.
Enter slope in <0.00000>: The slope is entered as a percent. For example: enter -1.5 for a 1.5% downhill slope.
Enter slope out <0.00000>: Enter the slope as a percent.
Enter length of vertical curve <0.00000>: Enter the length of the vertical curve.
Enter PVI Station <0.000000>: Enter the PVI station. For example: Enter 1250.00 for station 12+50.00
Enter PVI Elevation <0.000000>: Enter the PVI elevation.
Enter station interval <0.000000>: Enter the station interval.
Odd stations to be staked (6+34.22 as 634.22): Enter any stations along the curve for which you wish elevation
information.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Curves
Keyboard Command: cg vcd
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Area Summary
The Area Summary feature allows you to get information on the area and perimeter of one or more parcels and the
tract that contains the parcels.
After choosing the Area Summery menu item and, if required, opening a coordinate le, you are asked to
specify the type of Area Summary you want:
Type of Area Summary [Complete/Area only/Mapcheck] <C>:
Complete Area Summary
Complete summary allows you to get complete information on the area and perimeter of parcels and the tract that
contains the parcels
Source of points dening area [Point group/Manual entry] <P>
If you have a Point Group, enter <P>. Enter <M> if you prefer to manually enter the points.
Once the overall area and parcels have been dened either by using a point group or manually entering the
information, the Complete Area Summary is displayed at the command line.
The points used in dening the area are listed rst. If there are any arcs involved in the area computation, all of the
elements of the curve will be displayed as well. After listing the points dening the area, the area and perimeter
summary are reported.
Area Only
The data input is the same as for the Complete Area Summary but the report produced contains only the area of
each parcel and the accumulated area for the entire tract
Mapcheck Area
The data input is the same as for the Complete Area Summary as is the resulting report except that it also includes
closure information. The closure information includes the correct ending coordinates; the actual ending coordinates;
the northings, eastings, and bearing and distance of the error; the total distance traversed and the overall closure.
Prompts
Open Coordinate File dialog: If a coordinate le is not open, you will be asked to open one.
Type of Area Summary [Complete/Area only/Mapcheck] <C>: Press ''C'' and Enter or just Enter for Complete,
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1233
''A'' for Area only, or ''M'' for Mapcheck.
Source of points dening area [Point group/Manual entry] <P>: Type ''P'' and Enter or just Enter to use a point
group to specify the points dening the tract. Type ''M'' and Enter to specify the points dening the tract by typing
in point numbers or picking from the screen.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Area
Keyboard Command: cg asum
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Roadways
The roadways submenu contains 2 features: Right-of-Way/Easements and Intersections/Cul-de-Sacs and the Inter-
sections/Cul-de-Sacs has a submenu containing several features for each type of intersection or cul-de-sac.
Right-of-Way Easements
The Right-of-Way/Easements feature allows you to compute offsets left and/or right of an alignment.
After the alignment points have been entered, offset points will be created to the left and right of each point you
specied in the alignment. If Auto Point Numbering is on, the calculated points will be stored in the coordinate le.
Depending on your settings for Auto Line Plot and Auto Point Plot in the Graphic tab of the C&G Options dialog,
the new points and lines may also be drawn. If Auto Point Numbering is off, you will see the Saving Point dialog
and can accept or change the default point number and other information associated with the point.
Prompts
Enter offset right<0.000000>: Enter the offset to the right of the alignment.
Enter offset left<0.000000>: Enter the offset to the left of the alignment.
Method for specifying center line points [Point group/Manual entry] <P>: To use a point group type ''P'' and
Enter or just Enter and select the point group from a le dialog box. Type ''M'' and Enter to specify the alignment
interactively.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Roadways
Keyboard Command: cg rw
Prerequiste: coordinate le containing points dening the alignment
Intersections/Cul-de-sacs
T Intersections
This feature allows you to calculate the right-of-way intersection points and/or the llet points and llet radius
points (if llets are used) at T type intersections. One or both of the roads may have arc centerlines. The points
dening the llet points will be calculated and stored in the coordinate le. Repeat as needed or press <Esc> or
<Enter> at the Enter C/L intersection point (Enter when done): prompt to end the command.
Prompts
Enter C/L intersection point (Enter when done): enter or pick the centerline intersection point.
Enter through road C/L bearing [Arc] <0.000000>: If the through road is a straight road, enter or pick the
bearing for the road. Otherwise type A and <Enter>to switch to Arc mode and enter the radius point of the through
road.
Enter through road width <0.000000>: Enter the width of the through road.
Enter 2nd road C/L bearing away from intersection [Arc] <0.000>: enter the 2nd bearing or press <A> for
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1234
Arc and enter the radius point. The bearing is away from the intersection.
Enter 2nd road width <0.000>: Enter the 2nd road width.
Enter llet radius <0.000>: If you do not want to have llets, press <Enter> to use the 0.00 default value.
Otherwise, enter the llet radius.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Roadways > Intersections/Cul-de-sacs
Keyboard Command: cg tint
Prerequiste: coordinate le
X Intersections
The radius, PC and PT points for each llet will be calculated and stored. If Auto Line Plot is on, the llet arcs will
be drawn. Repeat as needed then press Enter or Esc to end the command.
Prompts
Enter C/L intersection point (Enter when done): enter or pick the intersection point of the two road centerlines.
Enter 1st road C/L bearing [Arc]: If rst road is straight, enter the 1st bearing. If it is an Arc, enter the 1st radius
point.
Enter 1st road width: Enter 2nd road C/L bearing (Arc): If the intersection point for the rst road centerline is
on a straight segment, enter the bearing of the centerline. If it is on an arc, type A and <Enter> then enter the rst
road centerline's radius point.
Enter 2nd road width: Enter the second road width.
Enter 2nd road C/L bearing [Arc]: Enter the second road centerline bearing or type A and <Enter> and specify
the centerline radius point for the second road.
Enter llet radius: Enter the llet radius or zero, if there are no llets.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Roadways > Intersections/Cul-de-sacs
Keyboard Command: cg xint
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Y Intersections
The radius, PC and PT points for each llet will be calculated and stored and if Auto Line Plot is on, the llet arcs
will be drawn. Repeat as necessary then press <Esc> or <Enter> to end command.
Prompts
Enter C/L intersection point (Enter when done): Enter or pick the intersection point for the three road centerlines.
Enter 1st road C/L bearing away from intersection point: Enter one of the road centerline bearings (going away
from the intersection point).
Enter 1st road width: enter the rst road width.
Enter 2nd road C/L bearing away from intersection point: Enter another of the road centerline bearings (going
away from the intersection.)
Enter 2nd road width: Enter the width of the second road.
Enter 3rd road C/L bearing away from intersection point: Enter last of the road centerline bearings (going away
from the intersection.)
Enter 3rd road width: Enter width of third road.
Enter llet radius: Enter radius of llets or zero for none.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Roadways > Intersections/Cul-de-sacs
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1235
Keyboard Command: cg yint
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Bubble Cul-de-Sac
This type of cul-de-sac is also called a sh-eye cul-de-sac. It is commonly used at sharp turns in roads in
subdivisions.
Follow the prompts described below. When done the llet points and radius points will be stored in the coordinate
le. These points will be plotted and the llet arcs will be drawn if the C&G settings call for it. You may repeat the
process as necessary or press <Esc> to end command:
Prompts
Enter cul-de-sac radius point (Enter when done): type or pick the radius point.
Enter cul-de-sac radius <0.000>: Enter the radius of the cul-de-sac.
Enter 1st C/L bearing away from radius point <0.000>: Enter the bearing along the rst roadway centerline
away from the cul-de-sac radius point.
Enter 2nd C/L bearing away from radius point<0.000>:Enter the bearing along the second roadway centerline
away from the cul-de-sac radius point
Enter road width <0.000>: Enter the roadway width.
Enter llet radius <0.000>: Enter the llet radius or zero for no llets.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Roadways > Intersections/Cul-de-sacs
Keyboard Command: cg bcul
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Standard Cul-de-Sac
The standard cul-de-sac is a common feature of most subdivisions.
Enter cul-de-sac radius point (ENTER when done): type or pick the cul-de-sac radius point (in this example, point
2301).
Enter cul-de-sac radius <0.000000>: Enter or pick the radius of the cul-de-sac (60 units in the example).
Enter C/L bearing away from radius point [Arc] : In computing a straight cul-de-sac you must enter the bearing of
the road centerline going away from the radius point. For the example the bearing is from point 2301 to point 2302.
Enter point on C/L (NOT radius point): This must be a C&G point on the centerline but cannot be the same as the
cul-de-sac radius point. In this case we can use point 2302
Enter road width <0.000000>: enter the total width of the road right-of-way.
Enter llet radius <0.000000>: Enter the llet radius. Remember, you do not have to have a llet radius, you may
enter zero here.
The points needed to dene the cul-de-sac and the llets are calculated and stored in the coordinate le.
If Auto Line Plot is on the lines for the cul-de-sac and the llets will be drawn automatically.
You may repeat the process as many times as necessary.
When done, press <Enter> at the
Enter cul-de-sac radius point (ENTER when done):
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1236
Standard Cul-de-Sac on ARC
The procedure for a cul-de-sac on arc is the same as it is for a straight cul-de-sac, except at the
Enter C/L bearing away from radius point [Arc] : prompt, choose A for Arc, then enter the C/L radius point for the
roadway, in this case point 2313.
Offset cul-de-sac:
The procedure for offset cul-de-sac is the same as a straight cul-de-sac except the radius point is the offset point. In
the sketch, the point 2324 is the radius point. The bearing is from 2324 toward 2326 and the point on the C/L would
be point 2325.
Prompts
Enter cul-de-sac radius point (ENTER when done): type or pick the cul-de-sac radius point. Press Enter when
done.
Enter cul-de-sac radius <0.000000>: Enter or pick the radius of the cul-de-sac.
Enter C/L bearing away from radius point [Arc] : Enter or pick a point. For a straight cul-de-sac roadway, this
must be a point on the centerline but cannot be the same as the cul-de-sac radius point. Type ''A'' and Enter to
specify information for a cul-de-sac on a curved roadway.
if you chose a curved roadway:
Enter C/L radius point [Line]: Type a point ID or pick a point symbol or type ''L'' and Enter to switch back to a
straight roadway.
Enter point on C/L (NOT radius point): Type a point ID or pick a point symbol.
Enter road width <0.000000>:
Enter llet radius <0.000000>: Enter the llet radius. You may enter 0.0 for no llets.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Roadways > Intersections/Cul-de-sac
Keyboard Command: cg scul
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Stake-Out
The Stakeout feature allows you to calculate the required information for either a radial stakeout or staking out using
angles right.
Angles Right
This feature is similar to the Radial Stakeout feature except it allows you select the foresight points one at a time.
If a coordinate le is not open, a le dialog will appear, allowing you to open an existing coordinate le.
After following the prompts outlined below, the angle from the backsight point, the distance, the frontsight point
ID, the azimuth and the description are printed at the command line and written to the print le.
You may press <F2> to view the complete listing of angles and distances.
Repeat the prompt sequence as many times as are required.
Press <Enter> or type D and <Enter> when done.
Prompts
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1237
Enter the instrument point. [Done]: Type or pick the instrument point.
Enter backsight point. [Done]: Type or pick the backsight point.
Enter foresight point. [Done]: Type or pick the foresight point.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Stake-Out
Keyboard Command: cg ar
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Radial Stake Out
This feature allows you to obtain the angles required to stakeout several foresight points from a single instrument
point.
If a coordinate le is not open, a le dialog box will appear, allowing you to open an existing coordinate
le.
After following the prompts outlined below, the angles right from the backsight point, the distances, the foresight
point IDs, the azimuths and the descriptions for all the selected points will be printed at the command line and
written to the print le.
You may press <F2> to view the complete listing of angles and distances.
Repeat as necessary for as many setups as are required.
When done, press <Enter> to end the command.
Prompts
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/Radius/Select]: Use one of several methods to specify the points in
the coordinate le to be staked out.
Enter the Instrument point [Done]: Type or pick the instrument point.
Enter backsight point [Done]: Type or pick the backsight point.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo > Stake-Out
Keyboard Command: cg rso
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Best Fit
The best t feature uses a least squares algorithm to compute the best t line or circle for the points selected. The
user can assign a weight to each point that is between 1 and 15, a point with a weight of 15 acts as if there are 15 of
the points at the same location and thus skews the t closer to that point. This is done to skew the result in favor of
certain points. A weight of 0 means do not adjust this point or give it ''innite'' weight.
When you choose Best Fit from the CGCogo menu you will see the following prompt:
Enter the type of best t problem [Line/Arc/Tan-arc-tan] <L>:
Best Fit Line:
Press <Enter> for Line to calculate the best t line through a series of points. In the example in the gure below,
2075 is an Iron Pin Found that we do not want adjusted, so the weight will be set to 0.
Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on the line: for the example, type or pick 2075
Enter weight for point 2075 <1>: for the example type 0 (zero) and <Enter>
Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on the line: for the example, type or pick 2076
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1238
Enter weight for point 2076 <1>: for the example, type 8 and <Enter>
Continue entering point ID - weight pairs until done then press <Enter> when asked for the next point ID.
The point locations and weights will be used to compute the best t line .
The results, a list of the point IDs entered and their offsets from the best t line and the bearing of the line, is printed
at the command line and written to the print le.
Printed output for the line example
Pt.: 2075 Wt.: 0 Offset: 0.000 RT
Pt.: 2076 Wt.: 8 Offset: 5.360 LT
Pt.: 2077 Wt.: 3 Offset: 3.411 RT
Pt.: 2078 Wt.: 6 Offset: 1.915 RT
Pt.: 2079 Wt.: 2 Offset: 6.326 LT
Pt.: 2079 Wt.: 2 Offset: 6.326 LT
Pt.: 2080 Wt.: 4 Offset: 1.093 RT
Pt.: 2081 Wt.: 4 Offset: 0.986 RT
N: 6354.64727 E: 8112.07615 Dir: N 8830'32''E
N: 6366.14982 E: 8553.96369 Dir: S 8830'32''W
At the [Edit/Ok/Quit] <0>: prompt:
If you are satised with the results, press <Enter>for Ok and the endpoint coordinates will be computed and saved.
For each point saved, the Saving Point dialog (see below) will be shown.
Clicking OK will cause the point to be saved to the coordinate le.
If, on the other hand, you wish to edit the input data, type E and <Enter>. You see the following prompt:
[Add/Change/Delete/eXit]:
Add - add another point to the calculation
Change - change the weight of one of the points
Delete - remove one of the points from the calculation
eXit - when done editing.
If you wish to cancel the command without calculating the line type Q and <Enter>.
Best Fit ARC:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1239
This option allows you to calculate the best t arc through a series of points. As with the Line option, each point
can be weighted from 0 (no adjustment) to 15.
At the Enter the type of best t problem prompt, type A and <Enter> to choose the Arc option.
Enter the point ID - weight pairs as in the Line option.
When all the point ID - weight pairs have been entered press <Enter> at the Enter or Pick a C&G point on the line
prompt.
A table of the results similar to that for the Line option will be displayed at the command line.
Output for the example in shown in the gure
Pt.: 2083 Offset: 2.862 OUT
Pt.: 2084 Offset: 3.699 IN
Pt.: 2085 Offset: 3.608 OUT
Pt.: 2086 Offset: 6.280 IN
Pt.: 2087 Offset: 5.584 OUT
Pt.: 2088 Offset: 1.393 IN
N: 6369.30690 E: 8269.70677 RAD: 237.282
The [Edit/Ok/Quit] <O>: prompt and its options for editing the input data are explained in the section on
the Line option.
If you are satised with the results, press <Enter> for Ok and the PC, PT and radius point of the best t
arc will be saved to the coordinate le using the Saving Point dialog.
Tan-arc-tan:
This option allows you to calculate a combination of the best t tangent line going into a curve, the best t arc for
the curve itself and the best t tangent line out of the curve through a series of points dening two tangent lines and
an arc.
The two tangent lines are calculated using a least squares solution and then the best t arc is calculated.
The method used to nd the best t arc is to calculate a radius and radius point for each point on the arc using a
function that calculates a curve between tangents through a known point. Each radius and radius point is weighted
based on the central angles between the PC, point-on-arc and PT points. The larger the central angles, the higher
the resulting weight will be. All the calculated radii and radius points are then averaged. It is not necessary that you
locate the actual PC or PT points in the eld.
At the prompt
Enter the type of best t problem [Line/Arc/Tan-arc-tan] <L>:
First you must enter the points on the 1st tangent line. At the series of prompts to:
Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on 1st tangent:
and
Enter weight for point XXXXX <1>:
enter the point ID - weight pairs for the tangent going into the curve.
When done entering the tangent line points, press <Enter> when asked for the next point.
Next at the series of prompts:
Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on the arc:
enter the points for the arc. Weights for these points are calculated by the program.
In the example shown in the gure, there are 2 points dening the rst tangent, 3 points dening the arc and 2 points
dening the tangent out.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1240
Output for example shown in gure
Pt.: 2210 Wt.: 0 Offset: 0.000
Pt.: 2211 Wt.: 5 Offset: 0.000
N: 6512.07291 E: 8572.91824 Dir: N 4500'00''E
N: 6567.12692 E: 8627.97226 Dir: S 4500'00''W
Pt.: 2212 Wt.: 5 Offset: 0.000 LT
Pt.: 2213 Wt.: 1 Offset: 0.000 LT
N: 6585.04757 E: 8796.89599 Dir: S 4500'49''E
N: 6505.88861 E: 8876.09255 Dir: N 4500'49''W
Pt.: 2214 Offset: 1.736 OUT
Pt.: 2215 Offset: 3.232 IN
Pt.: 2216 Offset: 2.324 OUT
N: 6492.00101 E: 8721.39653 RAD: 119.183
The [Edit/Ok/Quit] <O>: prompt following the output is explained in the Line option.
If you are satised with the results press <Enter> for Ok.
The coordinates for the endpoints of the tangents and PC, PT and radius point of the curve are computed and saved
to the coordinate le using the Saving Point dialog.
Prompts
Enter the type of best t problem [Line/Arc/Tan-arc-tan] <L>: Type ''L'' and Enter or just Enter for a best
t line, ''A'' and Enter for a best t arc or ''T'' and Enter for the best t of a curve with two straight tangents in and out.
For a best t line or arc:
Enter or Pick a C&G point on the line (or Arc): Type a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen. Repeats
until all points are entered and the user presses Enter at this prompt.
Enter weight for point <####> <1>: Enter a number between 0 and 15 (0 = innite weight).
For best t tan-arc-tan:
Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on 1st tangent: Enter or pick as many points and weights as desired for
the rst tangent line.
Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on the arc: Enter of pick as many points as desired for the arc (weights
are determined by the program).
Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on 2nd tangent: Enter or pick as many points and weights as desired for
the second tangent line.
[Edit/Ok/Quit] <0>: Type ''E'' and Enter if you wish to change the weight of a point or add or delete
points. Type ''O'' and Enter or just Enter to calculate the best t line, arc or line-arc-line and store its dening points
in the coordinate le. Type ''Q'' and Enter to quit without calculating the best t points.
[Add/Change/Delete/eXit]: if you choose Edit then this prompt allows you to Add a point, Change a weight, or
Delete a point. When done editing press ''X'' and Enter to return to the Edit/Ok/Quit prompt.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1241
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo
Keyboard Command: cg bt
Prerequiste: Coordinate le.
Triangulation
This feature allows you to calculate the location of an unknown point given the angles at the 3 vertices of the
triangle formed by the 2 known points and the unknown point.
Enter the point ID of the rst known point then the point ID of the 2nd known point (the backsight) and the
measured horizontal angle to the unknown point. Do the same for the 2nd known point backsighting the 1st known
point. Next, if available, enter the angle between the 2 known points with the instrument at the unknown point. The
standard deviation and other information for the calculation will be printed at the command line and written to the
print le. The calculated point will be saved to the coordinate le using the Saving Point dialog (Shown Below).
Prompts
Enter rst instrument point: Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen.
Enter rst backsight point:: Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen.
Enter rst horizontal angle to unknown point: Enter an angle.
Enter second instrument point: Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen.
Enter second backsight point: Enter a point ID or pick a point symbol on the screen.
Enter second horizontal angle to unknown point: Enter an angle.
Enter horizontal angle at unknown point or <skip> <0.000000>: Enter an angle if available or press Enter to
skip.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo
Keyboard Command: cg triangulation
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1242
NAD83
This feature allows you to convert longitude and latitude to and from NAD83 state plane coordinate systems.
NOTE: Do not use this function for any other coordinate system, i.e. NAD 1927. Make sure the correct state is
selected on the General tab of the C&G Options dialog box.
After choosing the NAD83 menu item from the CGCogo menu you will be prompted for the necessary
data.
At the Enter zone prompt enter the letter for the appropriate zone for the area where the survey was performed. The
zones allowed may vary by state.
[Coords to longitude-latitude/Longitude-latitude to coordinates] <C>:
Coords to longitude-latitude
Pressed <Enter> (or type C and <Enter>)
you will be asked to select the points.
After selecting points a table of longitude-latitude and related data for the points will be printed at the command
line
Longitude-latitude to coordinates
Type L and <Enter>,
You will be asked to enter the longitude and latitude of the points you wish to calculate
When you have entered the nal longitude-latitude pair press <Enter> when asked for the next latitude.
The computed points will be stored in the coordinate le using the Saving Point dialog shown below.
Click OK to save the point to the coordinate le.
Repeat until done or press <Enter> to end the command.
Prompts
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1243
Enter zone (E, W): enter the letter for the appropriate zone for the area where the survey was performed. The
letters allowed will vary depending on the state.
[Coords to longitude latitude/Longitude latitude to coords] <C>: Type ''C'' and Enter or just Enter to calcu-
late coordinates given longitude and latitude. Type ''L'' and Enter to do the reverse.
if you chose Coords to longitude-latitude:
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/Radius/Select]: Use the various selection methods to choose the
points for which you wish to calculate longitude and latitude
if you chose Longitude-latitude to Coords:
Enter latitude [<Enter> when done]: Enter the latitude angle for a longitude - latitude pair.
Enter longitude: Enter the longitude angle for a longitude - latitude pair.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Cogo
Keyboard Command: cg nad83
Prerequiste: coordinate le
CGDraw
Drawing Settings
See CG Options... menu item in the Tools menu.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Drawing Settings
Keyboard Command: DSU, CG DRAW SETUP
Prerequiste: None
Set Line Type
To use a line type it must be loaded and it must be the current line type. The current line type will be used for any
lines or polylines drawn. The Set Line Type feature allows you to load line types from any line type le (
*
.lin) and
to specify the currently active line type. It gives you easy access to the most commonly use line type les while
allowing you to access any line type le available to you.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1244
Prompts
Clicking the Set Line Type menu item brings up the Line Types dialog: By default the dialog displays the
acad.lin line type le contents (CgSu.lin in the standalone version of CGSurvey) .
By clicking the AutoCAD/IntelliCAD ISO button: you can view the acadiso.lin le line types (CgSu-
iso.lin in the standalone version of CGSurvey).
By clicking the C&G button: you can view the custom line types created for CGSurvey (in CgLinedefs.lin). You
may also use the Browse... button to view and load line types from other line type les.
To load a line type: pick the le the line type is in, highlight the desired line type, then click the Load but-
ton. Notice that the status column now indicates that the line type is ''Loaded''.
To make the highlighted line type current: click the Set Current button. The status column now reads
''Loaded (C)'', indicating that the line type is loaded and it is the currently active line type.
You can load a line type and make it current: by double-clicking it. If it is already loaded, double-clicking will
make it current.
Cancel button: returns the current line type to what it was before the command was run.
Click the Done button: to close the dialog.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Set Line Type
Keyboard Command: SLT, CG SET LINE TYPE
Prerequiste: None
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1245
Global Edit
Global Edit allows you to make several changes to one or more entities, in one operation.
Prompts
After selecting Global Edit from the CGDraw menu you will be asked to specify the method of entity selection at
the command line:
Screen: This option allows you to use any of the standard mouse based CAD selection methods.
Points: Allows you to select C&G points using the standard C&G selection methods. Checking a given check box
activates that section of the dialog box and allows you to make the desired changes.
Done: When nished selecting the entities enter ''D'' for done this will bring up the Dialog box.
There are ve basic sections in this dialog.
All: checking this checkbox is just a fast way of checking all the checkboxes and thus allows you to edit all of the
properties of the selected entities.
All of the editable items for the entities selected will have their checkboxes checked.
CAD properties
Layer: change the layer of the items selected
Color: Change the color of the items selected
Font/Style: Change the font style to a another existing font style.
Text Size: Change the current Text size (this setting is in inches)
Lines
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1246
Linetype: set the linetype for the lines selected. Pressing the down arrow will bring up a list of all of the available
linetypes.
Line Scale: This allows you to set the length of the pattern.
Line Stop: This allows you to set the line stop. This item will only be activated if a C&G line was chosen.
Line stop is a C&G parameter that allows you to stop the line short of the point symbol plotted at the point
location thus the line can be made to not go through the symbol. For example, if you were plotting 0.10
diameter circles for property corners, you could set the line stop to .10. This would cause a C&G line drawn to the
property corner to end .05 plotted units short of the actual corner and thus not cross the property corner point symbol
Calls
Distance precision: From the pull down select the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Angle precision: From the pull down simple select the angle precision you need.
Points
This portion of the Global Edit dialog allows you to change various aspects of point symbols:
Symbol: from the pull down select the new symbol to use.
Symbol Size: set the symbol size (in inches or cm)
Point Label Size: Set the point label size (in inches or cm)
Point Label Position: Displays the point label conguration dialog box, set the options as needed.
Elevation Places Displayed: set the number of places to be displayed.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Global Edit
Keyboard Command: GE, CG GLOBAL EDIT
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Border
This option allows you to place a border Polyline on your drawing with sheet sizes.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1247
Prompts
Sheet Setup
Sheet Size: The letters A, B, C, etc. refer to ANSI sheet size standards. You also have the option of creating and
naming custom sizes.
Rotate 90 Degrees: when checked will rotate the border 90 degrees.
Border Inset: species the inset distance for the border. Keep in mind this inset distance is measured from the
edge of the plotable area of your plotter. Check the plotter manual for plotter specications.
Layer: The layer the border will be drawn on.
Line Width: The thickness of the border line in inches (cm).
Press OK button when done and the border polyline will be drawn at the mouse cursor. You can move it to the
correct location and left click to place it there.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey >CGDraw>Border
Keyboard Command: DB, CG DRAW BORDER
Prerequiste: None
Coordinate Grid
Choosing the Coordinate Grid item in the CGDraw menu brings up the Grid Conguration dialog. The various
areas of the dialog are described below:
Map Grid: is used to provide a visual reference grid to show northings and eastings on a map. A Map Grid can
be labeled along its border to show the coordinate values of the grid lines. The Map Grid is oriented North-South
East-West whereas a Layout Grid can be oriented at any specied bearing.
Layout Grid: is meant to be used to create points on a regular grid for laying out building columns, a topo grid,
etc. A Layout Grid does not allow for a border nor for coordinate labels along the border.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1248
Grid Layer: specify the layer the grid is to be created on. The layer does not need to exist prior to running this
command.
Lines: If selected grid lines will be drawn for the full height and width of the grid dimensions.
Crosses: Only crosses will be drawn at the grid intersections for the full height and width of the grid dimensions.
Cross Height (drawing units): this denes the size of the crosses in drawing units. If your drawing scale is 40 feet
and you wish to have crosses that are 0.25 inches when plotted, you must specify cross height as 10 feet.
Draw Border: If checked, a border will be drawn around the perimeter of the dened grid. You can choose a
different layer for the border if you wish. This will allow you to set the color, line thickness and/or line type for the
border (this option is not available for Layout Grid).
Draw Labels: Label the grid lines or crosses around the perimeter at the same interval as the Baseline and
Perpendicular intervals (this option is not available for Layout Grid) . If checked you must specify:
Label Interval: This number must be some even multiple of both the baseline and perpendicular intervals. The
Label Interval CAN NOT be less than the base or perpendicular interval settings.
Label Decimal Places: Specify the number of decimal places used for the label text.
Label Layer: Specify the layer the labels are to be drawn on.
Grid Dimensions: Baseline Extent: This is the total width of the grid, East to West (or parallel to the
baseline bearing in the case of a Layout Grid).
Perpendicular Extent: This is the total height of the grid perpendicular to the baseline.
Baseline Interval: This is the distance between the grid lines (or X's) drawn perpendicular to the baseline
Perpendicular Interval: This is the distance between the grid lines (or X's) drawn parallel to the baseline.
Grid Baseline:
Use Point ID for Baseline Origin: checking this box allows you to use an existing C&G coordinate for the Grid
Origin. This is typically used for a Layout Grid.
Enter the point ID, or select the point from the screen.
Origin Northing/Origin Easting: manually enter the Northing and Easting value for the grid origin or pick it on the
screen using the Pick Origin button.
Baseline Bearing: This is only used when you are drawing a Layout Grid. This is the bearing of the baseline. Use
the standard C&G bearing input format qdd.mmss (e.g. 125.3527 for N2535'27''E or 325.5405 for S25E54'04''W)
Pick Origin button: This option allows you to pick the origin graphically on the screen. You do not have to pick a
C&G point.
Create Points at Grid Intersections:
Checking this box will cause the default C&G point to be plotted at each grid point or grid line intersection and
a corresponding point to be stored in the currently open coordinate le. This is especially useful when creating a
Layout Grid.
Point Description: enter a point description for the points saved to the coordinate le.
Exclude Area: This button allows you to graphically specify a horizontal window within which no grid is to be
drawn. This can be used to guarantee that a title block, legend or other area is not obscured by the grid or its labels.
Preview: This button allows you to preview the grid as specied. Pressing <Enter> will return you to the Grid
Conguration dialog allowing you to make changes if necessary.
Cancel : This button exits the command without drawing the grid.
OK: This button causes the grid to be drawn.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Coordinate Grid
Keyboard Command: GRD, CG DRAW GRID
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1249
Text on Arc
Create
Text on arc allows you to create text that follows an arc specied by you. Each word in the text is a separate block
and can be moved later as needed.
Prompts
You will be prompted to Enter Text to place on arc:
Type the desired text then press <Enter>:
Enter center point for arc: using the mouse, select the center point of the arc the text is to follow, this can be a
C&G point, or any point in the drawing. You need not actually have an arc drawn.
Enter Midpoint of text: select the midpoint of the text, this can be a C&G point, or any point in the drawing.
Move to desired location: The text will be drawn at the cursor. Move the cursor to the desired location and left
click to place the text.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Text on Arc>Create
Keyboard Command: TOA, CG TOA
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Move
Allows you to move all the text associated with the selected text-on-arc entity.
Prompts
Select entities: select text
Entities in set: 1 item is found and selected
Select entities: press <Enter> to accept entry
Move Text to desired location: move text
Select entities: repeating the selection set
Press <ESC> or <Enter>: to end command
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Text on Arc>Move
Keyboard Command: MTA, CG MOVE TOA
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Edit
Allows you to edit the text associated with a text-on-arc entity.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1250
Text: Arc=107.6709, R=75.7740 (Edit Text )
Text Attributes
Layer: 0 (current)
Text Size: 0.100 inches (Default)
Text color: Bylayer
Set Color Button: select a new color
Text style: Standard text style
Prompts
Select entities: select text
Entities in set: 1 item found and selected
Select entities: repeat selection set
Press <ESC> or <Enter >: to end command
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Text on Arc>Edit
Keyboard Command: ETA, CG EDIT TOA
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Delete
Allows you to delete all the text associated with a text-on-arc entity.
Prompts
Select entities: select text
Entities in set: 1 item found and selected
Select entities: repeat selection set
Press <Esc> or <Enter>: to end command
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Text on Arc>Delete
Keyboard Command: DTA, CG DELETE TOA
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1251
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Draw Mapcheck
This routine will draw a mapcheck le. The settings allow you to plot points, draw lines, and place calls all at the
same time.
If a mapcheck le is NOT currently open when you open the map check le routine a dialog box will prompt you to
open a mapcheck le. Once a mapcheck le is open the following dialog box will open.
If the mapcheck le displayed at the top of the dialog box is not the le you want to draw you can use the browse
button to search for another le.
You also have the option to edit the le which will take you to the mapcheck editor (CGEditor).
Reduce File: If this item is checked there will be a closure report written to the print le and the command
line.
Starting/Ending Points: You have the option of entering an existing point number or manually entering the
northing and easting. If you enter an existing point number the northing and easting values will be read from the
coordinate le and placed in the appropriate edit boxes (see below).
If the starting and ending point are the same point, you need only enter the starting point values.
Clicking the Select Point button will cause the Draw Mapcheck dialog to be hidden thus allowing you to
pick the starting and ending points from the screen or use the command prompt:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1252
Select starting point for mapcheck:
or
Select ending point for mapcheck:
rather than manually entering the point number or coordinate values in the edit boxes.
Lines: This portion of the dialog allows you to turn on or off the draw line command as well as select the
linetype and layer where the line will be drawn
Calls: This section of the dialog allows you to turn on or off the draw calls command as well as edit the call setup
options.
Point Symbols: This area of the dialog allows you to turn on or off the draw point symbols command as well as
having a button that will take you to the drawing settings dialog. At the drawing settings dialog you can change the
symbol, symbol size, label options and more.
OK: Selecting ok will cause the mapcheck le to be drawn, based on the current settings as described above.
Prompts
Select starting point for mapcheck: Select a point symbol or type a point number for the starting point.
or
Select ending point for mapcheck: Select a point symbol or type a point number for the ending point.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Draw Mapcheck
Keyboard Command: DMP, CG DRAW MAPCHECK
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1253
Prerequiste: Open Mapcheck le
*
.cgm
Multi-Draw
This feature allows you to complete several drawing operations at the same time. For example, in one operation you
can plot points and generate a coordinate table for the points at the same time. Or you can draw lines by points and
place calls on the resulting lines at the same time.
Prompts
When you choose Multi-Draw from the CGDraw menu, the Multi-Draw dialog box is displayed.
Specify Points
Use the radio buttons to indicate how you want to specify the points that will be used for the drawing operations.
You can Choose Points Interactively using the standard C&G point sequence command line interface or you can
Use Point Group.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1254
NOTE: If you Choose Points Interactively, you will not have the option of plotting points or creating a coordinate
table.
If you click Use Point Group, you must specify a Point Group Name and the point group description for the points
you wish to use. You can either type the full path (including the drive letter) to an existing point group le or you
can click the Browse button and use the le dialog box to specify the Point Group le.
NOTE: In this context, Description refers to the Point Group description, NOT the description for the indi-
vidual points as found in the coordinate le.
Drawing Operations
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1255
In this area of the dialog box you must specify which drawing operations to perform and, if needed, make the
necessary settings changes required for the drawing operations. Any settings changes are saved to the drawing and
thus remain in effect after this command is completed.
Plot Points: Checking this checkbox will cause the selected points to be plotted.
Point Settings button: selecting this button will bring up the Drawing Settings dialog box allowing you to make
changes to the drawing settings.
Coordinate Table: Checking this checkbox causes a coordinate table to be created for the points selected.
Table Settings button: will bring up the Coordinate Table Settings dialog box allowing you to make changes to
layer, text size and line spacing.
Draw Lines/Arcs: Checking this checkbox causes lines and or/arcs to be drawn between the points speci-
ed.
Line Settings button: Will bring up the Linetype Manager allowing you to select the linetype.
Draw Breaklines: Checking this checkbox causes breaklines to be drawn between the specied points.
Breaklines are for use in topographic operations (see CGTopo).
Topo Settings button: displays the CGSurvey Auto Contouring settings dialog box allowing you to make
changes to the current topo settings.
Draw Calls: When Draw Calls is checked, calls will be drawn between the points specied.
Call Settings button: will display the Call Settings dialog box allowing you to make changes.
If Use Call Table is checked: all call information will be placed in a call table, rather than along the line
work. The Call Table Settings button displays the Call Table Settings dialog and allows you to set the layer calls
will be placed on, the text size, the line spacing, the rst course label, etc.
If Use Curve Table is checked: all curve information will be placed in a curve table, rather than along the
line work. The Curve Table Settings button displays the Curve Table Settings dialog and allows you to specify:
which components will be shown in the curve table, which layer the table will go on, the text size, the line spacing,
the rst course label, etc.
The Layer Settings button: displays the Layer Manager dialog. Here you can create any layers you need
or set the current layer as required.
When you are satised click OK.
If you choose Use Point Group: the drawing operations you have selected will be completed immediately.
If you have selected Choose Points Interactively: enter or pick the desired points at the following stan-
dard C&G point sequence command line prompt:
Note: When entering the points at the command line, some drawing operations may occur as you enter the
points.
Placement of coordinate, call and or curve tables
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1256
No matter what point selection method you use, if you specied that any tables be drawn, the coordinate, call or
curve table will be placed at the cursor and you will be asked to move the cursor to the desired location. Clicking
the left mouse button will place the table in the drawing at the cursor location.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Mult-Draw
Keyboard Command: MD, CG MULTI DRAW
Prerequiste: Coordinate File and/or Point Group
Plot Points and Symbols
Plot Points on Screen
Plot Points on Screen: This feature plots the selected points from a coordinate le on the screen.
Prompts
If a coordinate le is not open, a le dialog box will appear allowing you to open one.
You will then be asked to select the points to be plotted (for additional information, see Getting Started: Coordinate
point selection sets).
Type the Capped Letter to initialize the selection Set
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/radius/select]: A
Press <Enter>3x when done: The points will be plotted on the screen.
In which layer will the points be plotted?
If the Use Description Table for point plotting parameters checkbox is not checked in the Graphic Options
tab in C&G Options dialog: then all points will be plotted on the current layer according to the Drawing Settings
dialog.
If the Use Description Table for point plotting parameters checkbox is checked and the Default layer
for codes or descriptions not found in description table is specied: point's will be plotted to the layers specied
by the description table (for a discussion of description tables see the CGMngmt chapter).
Description matches a description found in the description table: the point and its labels will be plotted
as specied in the description table. For a description to match it must be a whole word match, disregarding
numbers.
For example:
Table Description Point Description Match
TC TC-.5 to Bc yes
SW SW1 yes
FH TOPFH no
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1257
If a point has several different descriptions found in the description table: then that point can be plot-
ted in more than one layer. For example: If the point's description is TC WV, it will be plotted in the layer assigned
to the description TC as well as the layer assigned to the description WV.
No match is found in description table: the point will be plotted in the default layer with point labels as
specied for the active point symbol.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Plot Points and Symbols>Plot Points on Screen
Keyboard Command: PP, CG PLOT POINTS
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Remove Points from Screen
This feature allows you to remove/erase specied points from the drawing.
Prompts
If a coordinate le is not open, a le dialog box will appear and allow you to open an existing coordinate le.
Using the standard C&G Select Points commands, select the points to be removed.
Type the Capped Letter to initialize the selection Set
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/radius/select]: A
Press <Enter> 3X when done: The points will be removed from the screen.
Note: Remove Points from Screen does NOT delete points from the coordinate le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Plot Points and Symbols
Keyboard Command: RP, CG REMOVE POINTS
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Graphic Scale
This feature allows you to draw a graphic scale. Make sure the correct scale has been specied in the Drawing
Settings dialog box.
Prompts
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1258
In the CGSurvey Draw Graphic Scale dialog specify the layer for the graphic scale.
Layer: Scale
Once you have specied the layer: press the OK button.
The Graphic Scale symbol will then be drawn at the mouse cursor: You can move the cursor to posi-
tion the graphic scale then press the left mouse button to place it at the cursor location.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Plot Points and symbols>Graphic Scale
Keyboard Command: GSC, CG DRAW GSCALE
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Lines and Polylines
Lines by Point Number
This feature allows you to draw lines and/or arcs based on the points in the coordinate le.
Prompts
If you choose this option and a coordinate le is not open, you will be prompted to open one.
You will be prompted at the command line to enter the coordinate point IDs that dene a line/arc or a series of
lines/arcs. You may type the point IDs at the command line or pick points on the screen.
Enter Point Sequence
(point group/Reset/sNap on) (last point = <72>):
Once a point is selected the command line will change to a new group of options
(cLockwise curve/ccW curve/Point group/Reset/sNap on) (last point = <72>):
Once nished plotting points simple hit<Enter> and the command line will clear.
Point Input: When entering a point sequence specifying a line/arc the following input forms are accept-
able:
34: Either species the starting point of a line or, if this is a continuing series of lines, draw a line from the
previous end point to point 34 and occupy point 34.
6-9: Draw a line from point 6 to 9 and occupy point 9.
-4 : Draw a line from the previous end point to point 4 but remain at previous end point.
L: Specify a cLockwise curve. The previous end point is assumed to be the PC of the curve. The next point
specied is the center or radius point of the curve and the next point entered is the PT of the curve.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1259
W: Specify a counter clockWise curve. The data entry sequence is similar to a clockwise curve.
P: Use a Point group to specify the lines/arcs. You will be asked to pick the point group le using a le dialog box.
R: Reset the ''last point'' to none
N: Toggles the CAD snap command on or off
If you choose to use a point group le, lines will be drawn from point to point in the order specied in the
point group le (see the CGMngmt chapter for information on point group les).
If you do not want to type in the point IDs to dene the lines/arcs, you can select the points from points
that are plotted on the screen using your mouse. (see Plot Points and Symbols).
Note: To specify an arc to be drawn pick the PC point of the curve then enter either L <Enter> for clock-
wise or W<Enter> for counter clockwise curve. When prompted, pick the radius point and then pick the PT.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Lines and Polylines>Lines by Point Number
Keyboard Command: LBP, CG LBP
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Lines by Description
This feature allows you to connect lines between all the points in a coordinate le having a common description.
Prompts
After choosing the Lines by Description menu item you will see the CGSurvey Draw Lines by Desc dialog.
Layer: Specify the name of the layer the lines are to be drawn on.
Desc: Specify the description of the points you want to connect. Case is ignored and, unless the check-
boxes described below are checked, only the leading characters of the point description are considered for a match.
Match text anywhere in desc: If this checkbox is checked, the entire point description eld will be searched for
the characters specied in the Desc: edit box. For example:
Input Description Point Description Match
MH SanMH Yes
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1260
Force match to be whole word: If this box is selected, the match must be a complete word in the point
description, not just a portion of a word. For example:
Input Description Point Description Match
RD CL RD Yes (whole word)
RD CLRD No (not whole word)
Connect Mode
Sequential: Connects the points in point ID order.
Closest: Ignores point ID and connects to the closest point with named description.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey >CGDraw>Lines and Polylines>Lines by Description
Keyboard Command: LBD, CG LBD
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Lines by Codes
This feature allows you to draw lines between the points in the coordinate le having a common point code. The
point code is a two to four character eld (depending on the type of coordinate le).
Prompts
Choosing the Lines by Code menu item brings up the CGSurvey Draw Lines by Code dialog.
With the exception of the Code: eld, the items in this dialog are identical to those in the CGSurvey Draw Lines by
Desc dialog.
Code: eld species the code for the points you want to connect. Case is ignored.
Connect Mode
Sequential: connects line in point ID order
Closest: connect lines in Closet point with named description
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Lines and Polylines
Keyboard Command: LBC, CG LBC
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Polylines by Point
This feature works very similar to the Lines by Point feature described in the previous pages. In Polyline by Points
data entry is similar to Lines by Point except Reset does not apply to a polyline. The C&G Polyline allows you
to treat road centerlines and other similar things that would normally be made up of several line segments, as one
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1261
entity. You can use a C&G polyline to create a point group or you can place calls along it. You could also use a
C&G polyline as the bounding polygon in the Fit Structure feature.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Lines and Polylines>Polylines by Point
Keyboard Command: CGP, CG POLY
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Fit Polylines
This feature allows you to use a variety of best t methods to smooth an existing polyline.
Prompts
First you must choose the method to use in tting the selected polylines at the following prompt:
Type of t to apply: [Decurve/Fit/Quadratic spline/cUbic spline/Cg spline]<C>:
Next, select the polylines you wish to t then press the <Enter> key or right mouse button to apply the t to the
selected polylines.
Decurve: This will decurve a previously smoothed polyline.
Fit: uses CAD t - a series of interconnected circular arcs.
Quadratic spline: Uses a quadratic spline curve tting algorithm.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1262
Cubic spline: Uses a cubic spline curve tting algorithm.
C&G Spline: Creates a smooth curve that passes through all vertices.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey >CGDraw>Lines and Polylines>Fit Polyline
Keyboard Command: FITP, CG FIT POLY
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1263
Calls
Place Calls
This feature allows you to annotate C&G and CAD lines, arcs and polylines.
Call Setup
Selecting Calls Setup will brings up the Call settings dialog box.
Desired Call Components: Specify the desired components for the call.
Bearing and Distance (or Arc and Radius)
Bearing (Arc)
Distance (Radius)
Bearing over Distance (Or Arc over Radius)
If you specify points to form a curve then the components shown in parentheses will be used to form the call text.
Format and location: Specify how you want the call placed relative to the line or arc:
Parallel: to the line or Arc
Perpendicular: to the line or arc
At Cursor: means the call text will be drawn horizontally at the cursor and you must move it to the desired location
then left click to place it.
Place Call to Right of Line: If you are placing a call either parallel or perpendicular to a line or arc, select this box
if you want the call placed to the right of the line or arc, assuming you are standing on the line and facing in the
direction of the bearing. The call will be centered along the line or arc.
Use the Foot Abbreviation [ ' ] in Distance Text: Checking this box will places the [ ' ] mark after the distance (
125.36' ). Un-checking the box will remove the [ ' ] mark ( 125.36 ).
Line Bearing Direction to:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1264
Selecting NW,NE: will force all calls to be shown only with NE and NW notation (N 428 35' 12'' E or N 168 25'
31'' W)
Selecting SW,SE :will force all calls to be shown only with NE and NW notation (S 428 35' 12'' E or S 168 25' 31''
W)
If < no preference >: is selected the software will dene the bearing based on the direction of the points selected.
Layer Name for Call Text: Specify the layer where you want the calls placed.
Automated Placement of Calls on Specied Layers
Check the Automate Placement of Calls check box making the options in the dialog active. This routine allows you
to select one or more layers to scan for the placement of calls. The scan will look for lines only in the layers you
specify even though other layers may be currently displayed.
Choose one or more layers to search: this dialog will display the complete list of layers in the drawing le. You can
scroll up and down the list and simple click with the mouse those layers you want to search for lines/polylines.
Types of Lines to Annotate:
C&G Lines and C&G Polylines: refer to lines that have been drawn using the CGDraw command, thus being
based on the C&G coordinate le.
CAD lines and CAD Polylines: refer to lines that have been drawn using the CAD Draw command and are not
based on the C&G coordinate les.
Example Cell: this display shows you the actual layout as it will appear on you drawing.
Prompts
When you choose the Place Calls menu item and a coordinate le is not already open, you will be asked to open a
coordinate le. You will then see the following prompt at the command line:
Enter point sequence: [Point group/Reset/turn sNap on/Setup/polYline] (last point = <none>):
Point Group: If you press P and <Enter> you will be asked to enter a point group and it will be used to place calls
automatically.
Reset: Press ''R'' resets the last point ID to <none>
sNap on or sNap off: Press ''N'' turns the CAD snaps on or off. When the command starts the AutoCAD snaps are
off by default.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1265
The Setup: Press ''S'' option brings up the Calls Setup dialog box.
polYline: if you Press''Y'' and <Enter> you can then pick a C&G polyline and it will be annotated in the order that
the vertices were specied when it was drawn.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Calls>Place Calls
Keyboard Command: CALL, CG CALLS or CALS, CG CALLS SETUP
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Move Calls
Allows you to move call text and once moved it will not go back to its original location when you use Refresh
Screen to refresh calls. The calls will move or change if the point numbers that generated the call change but the
position of the call relative to the end points will remain approximately the same.
Prompts
Select entities: Pick call on screen
Entities in set: 1
Select entities: Pick another call on screen
Move call to desired location.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Calls>Move Calls
Keyboard Command: MCL, CG MOVE CALLS
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Reverse Calls
This feature allows you to reverse the bearing of the call.
Prompts
Pick a call to reverse: select call bearing on screen
Pick a call to reverse: select another call bearing on screen
Pick a call to reverse: select again if wish to continue or
Press <Esc>: to quit command
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Calls>Reverse Calls
Keyboard Command: RCL, CG REVERSE CALLS
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Tables
Coordinates
This feature allows you to draw a table containing information related to specied points in the coordinate le then
place the table in the drawing by picking the desired location.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1266
When you pick the Table > Coordinate menu item and a coordinate le is not already open, you will be asked to
open one. Once a coordinate le is open, then the Coordinate Table Settings dialog will appear. Using this dialog
you can congure the following settings:
Layer: Specify the layer on which you want the table drawn.
Text Size: Enter the text size in inches or centimeters. The text size is the size the text will appear when printed on
a page.
Line Spacing: Enter the space you want between lines in inches or centimeters. The line spacing is the height of
the spacing when the table is printed on a page.
Note Northings and Eastings will be rounded based on the values specied in the Rounding Options tab of
the C&G Options dialog box.
Note The point ID, northing, and easting will always be part of the coordinate table. If you want elevations,
codes and descriptions shown, make sure they are set to ''On'' on the Global Settings tab of the C&G Options dialog.
Click OK to save the settings and continue the command, this will return the action to the command line. If you
click Cancel the command will be canceled.
Selecting Points for the coordinate table:
Select the points that will be included in the table using the familiar C&G prompt.
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/Radius/Select]: A
Prompts
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/Radius/Select]: A
Expand base selection set: Choose more points from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/Radius/Select/Include/eXclude/View]:
Building Point Selection Set...
Press Enter 2 more times to end selection set: <Enter>
When done selecting points just press <Enter>:The table will be drawn at the cursor.
Move Coord Table to desired location: Drag the table to the desired location on the drawing and press the
left mouse button to place the table.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1267
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Tables>Coordinate
Keyboard Command: CRDT, CG COORD TABLE
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Call Table
This feature allows you to place the bearings, distances, etc. in a table instead of along the lines and curves in the
drawing. This is especially useful when space along the lines or curves is limited. When you use a call table only
the course labels are placed along the line or curve to identify it in the table.
When you choose the Table > Call item from the menu the Call Table Settings dialog appears. As with the
coordinate table, this dialog box allows you to enter: the layer, text size and line spacing for the call table.
Drawing Settings
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1268
Layer: CG Template
Text size: 0.100
Line Spacing: 0.075
Use Foot symbol: Checked
This setting will place a Foot symbol < '' > if desired.
Course labels
First course label: The course labels will be based on the First course label setting in the Call Table Settings
dialog box. The course label will then be determined by incrementing the last character in the previous course label
starting with the rst course label.
For example: line1 increments to line2, line3, etc. whereas line a increments to line b, line c, or as in the example
above L1, L2 L3, etc.
Automatically increment course label: Check or Uncheck box
This setting will automate the process with selecting point sequence
After conguring the settings in the Call Table Settings dialog:
Ok Button : select OK
Prompts
You will be prompted at the command line to enter the point sequence.
Enter the point sequence by typing point IDs or by selecting C&G points and/or lines on the screen.
Enter point sequence: [cLockwise curve/ccW curve/Point group/Reset/turn Snap on]
The Reset button: The ' R' resets the last point to <None>
When you are done entering calls: press <Enter>
This will end the input process and the call table will be drawn at the cursor.
Move Call Table to desired location: Drag the table and left-click the mouse button to place table on
screen. The course description will be placed in the table and on the line or arc in the drawing.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Tables>Call
Keyboard Command: CALT, CG CALL TABLE
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1269
Curve
This feature allows you to Draw a table containing curve information for specied curves.
You will be prompted to open a coordinate le if one is not already open. Once the coordinate le is open, the
Curve Table Settings dialog box will appear. The Curve Table Settings dialog allows you to congure the following
settings:
Curve Components
Check the checkboxes for the curve components that you wish to appear in the table, Radius, Tangent, Arc Length,
Chord Bearing, Delta, Degree and Chord.
Drawing Settings
Enter the layer, text size and line spacing, and check or uncheck the Use Foot Symbol checkbox.
Layer: CG Template
Text Size: 0.100
Line spacing: 0.075
Curve Labels
Enter the First Curve Label for the rst curve
First Curve Label: C1
Automatically increment curve label: check or uncheck the Automatically increment curve label checkbox.
OK Button: When done, click OK to begin entering the curve data.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1270
Prompts
You will be prompted at the command line to Enter point sequence
Picked C&G Point [1444]
Enter point sequence
[cLockwise curve/ccW curve/Reset/turn Snap on] (last point = 1444): L
Enter radius point for curve [Reset/turn Snap on]:
Picked C&G Point [1449]
Enter point of tangency (PT) for curve [Reset/turn Snap on]:
Picked C&G Point [1448]
Move Curve Table to desired location: Drag Table to desired location and Left-mouse click to place on the
drawing. Note: After
entering the PT point for any curve, you can continue entering curve data. However, you should be aware that the
PT point is shown as the last point.
If the PT point is not the PC of the next curve then you need to enter ''R'' for Reset. This allows you to be-
gin the next curve at a new PC, then continue on to enter its radius point and PT.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Tables>Curves
Keyboard Command: CURT, CG CURVE TABLE
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Auto Map
Map allows the user to automate the production of a drawing based on special ''mapping codes'' included in the
descriptions found in the coordinate le. Using this feature can save a great deal of time. This allows the lines and
points to be placed in the drawing based on mapping codes without user intervention.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Auto Map
Keyboard Command: MAP, CG MAP DRAW
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Draw
This feature automates the production of a drawing that can contain specic points, lines, arcs and curve t lines.
The draw option also acts as a Cogo function in that it will calculate the PC, PT and radius points of curves and has
the ability to calculate points by traversing and intersection.
Prompts
After choosing the Draw command, if a coordinate le is not open, you will be asked to open one.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1271
After opening the coordinate le, you will be asked to select the points you want to map:
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord. le: (Enter when done) [All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-
group/Limits/Radius/Select]:
Next, you will be asked whether you want to store elevations at calculated PC, PT, and radius points:
When locating items like back of curb you may need to note the beginning and ending of curves. The points located
are never exact as far as the beginning and ending of the curve, but when noted in the mapping routine the ap-
plication will compute a PC, PT and Radius using the best t routine and you can choose to store theses points or not.
Note: If Auto Point Plot is ON as specied in the Graphic Options tab of the C&G Options dialog, points
will be plotted and lines, arcs and/or curve t lines are drawn when indicated by Mapping Codes found in the point
descriptions.
Mapping Codes Used by the Draw feature
The map codes used by the Draw feature must be placed in the description eld for each point in the coordinate le
that is to be ''Mapped''.
Below is the list of map codes:
BL - Begin Line
EL - End Line (optional)
CL - Close Figure
PC - Begin Curve (tangent to previous line)
OC - Point on Curve (begin/end non-tangent curve)
PT - End Curve (tangent to next line)
RP - Radius Point
CF - Curve Fit (spline t to irregular curves)
CC - Compound Curve
RC - Reverse Curve
Mapping Codes can be upper or lower case. The map code MUST be followed by an asterisk and a line
description for the line that is being drawn. For example: BL
*
CURB1, where CURB1 is the line description for the
line you are beginning. It is OK to have spaces between the code, asterisk and line description, but it is not necessary.
For example:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1272
Point ID Description
5 BL
*
CURB1 BL
*
SW1 WV
6 CURB1
7 SW1 PP
8 PC
*
CURB1
9 FH
10 PT
*
CURB1
11 CURB1 SW1
12 OC
*
SW1
13 SW1
14 SW1
15 SW1
16 OC
*
SW1
17 CL
*
SW1
18 BL
*
CURB1
Important Note: Mapped lines are connected in ascending order by point ID. The point ID's are always
saved in the coordinate le in increasing order. Since the coordinate le is used to perform the Map Drawing and
the point ID sequence is produced when the raw data is reduced, it follows that the order of eld location of the
points will determine point ID sequence order when the lines are mapped.
In the sample sequence above:
Point 5 begins two lines, Curb1 and SW1. Curb1 and SW1 are line descriptions. A line description must be a
whole word (no spaces). WV (water valve) is not the beginning of a line because an asterisk does not precede it.
For example:
5 BL
*
CURB1 BL
*
SW1 WV
The Curb1 line will be drawn from point 5 to point 6 to point 8. This begins a curve tangent to the line
from 6 to 8 continuing to point 10. The curve is tangent to the line from 10 to 11. Since point 18 begins a new
Curb1, point 11 is the end of the rst Curb1 line (the EL code is not required in order to end a line).
A second line (SW1) will be drawn from 6 to 7 to 11 to 12. At point 12 a non-tangent circular curve be-
gins and continues through points on the curve at 13, 14, and 15. The non-tangent curve ends at point 16 and lines
continue from 16 to 17 to 1 (the CL code closes the gure). In creating the non-tangent curve from point 12 through
point 16, points 13-15 are used by the Map Draw feature in the calculation of the best t circular curve.
In addition to the lines drawn, the symbol specied for the WV description in the description table (see
CGMngmt) will be placed at point 5 and, at point 7, the symbol specied in the description table for the description
PP will be drawn.
As demonstrated in the above example, you may combine multiple codes and line descriptions within a single point
description.
For example:
Point ID Description
20 BL
*
SW1 BL
*
CURB1 CURB2 EL
*
CURB3 CL
*
CURB4
In this example point 20 begins the SW1 line and the CURB1 line. It continues the CURB2 line. It ends
the CURB3 line and it closes the CURB4 line.
The Begin Line Code:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1273
All lines must start with a BL code. No lines will be connected to a point unless a word in the point description
matches a BL
*
line name.
The Close Line Code: The close line code (CL) causes the Draw Map feature to connect the CL point to
the BL point. You can also use the CL command to traverse. Thus you may place dimensions after a CL command.
For example:
Point ID Description
20
*
BL
*
BLD1
21 CL
*
BLD1+10.1+10.2-20.3+50.6 EL
*
SW1
Note: The FC-48 data collector does not allow '+' characters in description eld. Because of this, the '/'
character can be used instead of the '+' character in all the CL examples.
In the above example a line will be drawn from point 20 to point 21. The following points will then be calculated
through a traverse sequence (assume the next point available is 100):
Occupied Pt BS Pt Angle Distance New Point
21 20 90 10.1 100
100 21 90 10.2 101
101 100 270 20.3 102
102 101 90 50.6 103
Point 103 will then be connected to point 20 to close the BLD1 line. Please note that point 21 is also the
end of the SW1 line.
In a CL mapping code sequence, a negative dimension turns -90 degrees from the back azimuth and a positive
dimension turns +90 degrees from the back azimuth. Both the '+' and '-' symbols are required but, as noted above,
the '/' symbol can be substituted for the '+' where necessary.
This same gure could also be drawn using the following sequence:
Point ID Description
20 BL
*
BLD1
21 CL
*
BLD1+10.1+10.2-20.3+
Note that the closing distance was not included in the description sequence. See the following examples.
If you have located two corners of a rectangle, you may use the following short cut:
Point ID Description
20 BL
*
BLD1
21 CL
*
BLD1+50.6+
In the above example a line will be drawn from point 20 to point 21. The following points will then be cal-
culated through a traverse sequence (assume the next point available is 100):
Occupied Pt BS Pt Angle Distance New Point
21 20 90 50.6 100
Point 101 will be calculated by a bearing-bearing intersection. Then point 101 will be connected to point
20. The rst '+' sign determines the direction used to calculate point 100. The description ending in a '+' sign has
the same effect as ending in a '-' sign: if there is no dimension after the last '+' or '-' sign, the last point will be
calculated by a bearing-bearing intersect.
If you have located three corners of a rectangle, you may use the following short cut to dene the lines to be drawn:
Point ID Description
20 BL
*
BLD1
21 BLD1
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1274
22 CL
*
BLD1+
In the above example lines will be drawn from point 20 to 21 to 22. The missing corner will be calculated using a
bearing-bearing intersect and stored. As noted earlier, ending in a '-' sign instead of a '+' sign has the same end result.
Curve Codes
Anytime a circular curve is encountered, 3 new points may be calculated and stored in the coordinate le. These
points are the PC, PT and radius point of the curve. It is necessary to calculate these points during automated
mapping since the eld points are only approximations of a perfect curve. They will automatically be assigned
point numbers (regardless of the Auto Point Numbering setting). The points calculated during automated mapping
of curves will begin with the coordinate les current high point number plus 1.
If the beginning of a line is also the beginning of a curve, one of the following formats must be used:
Point ID Description
10 BL
*
SW1 CF
*
SW1 (begin a curve-t line)
or 10 BL
*
SW1 OC
*
SW1 (begin a non-tangent circular curve)
or 10 BL
*
SW1 PC
*
SW1 (begin a tangent circular curve)
Once a curve has begun, all matching line descriptions will be considered points on the curve until the
curve is ended. A curve is ended with either a PT
*
, OC
*
, or CF
*
code.
For Example:
Point ID Correct Sequence Incorrect Sequence
10 OC
*
SW1 (Begin SW1)
11 SW1 OC
*
SW1 (will end SW1)
12 SW1 OC
*
SW1 (will end SW1)
13 SW1 OC
*
SW1 (will end SW1)
14 OC
*
SW1 (End SW1)
The rst OC begins the curve. The next OC ends the curve. All the points between them are on the curve.
The same is true for curve t (CF
*
).
If a curve is either tangent (in), tangent (out) or tangent (in) & tangent (out), you only need two points to dene the
curve:
Point ID Sample 1 Sample 2 Sample 3
10 PC
*
CURB1 PC
*
CURB1 OC
*
CURB1
11 PT
*
CURB1 OC
*
CURB1 PT
*
CURB1
Otherwise you will need at least three points on a curve:
Point ID Description
12 CF
*
CURB1
13 CURB1
14 CF
*
CURB1
The RP Mapping Code
If you use the RP code (radius point), it will be used regardless of the number of points on the curve. The radius
will be calculated by averaging all the distances from the radius point to the points on the curve.
Best Fit Circular Curve Calculations
If you have three or more points on a non-tangent curve, the best-t curve solution is used to nd the radius point.
If you have three or more points on a tangent curve (either tangent in, tangent out, or tangent in and out), the best-t
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1275
curve solution is used to determine an approximate radius and radius point. A dummy point is then calculated on
the curve and a curve is drawn that goes through the dummy point and meets the tangent criteria (the PC and PT
points are shifted up/down the tangent lines as necessary). If only three points are located, PC, POC and PT, the
curve will always go through the POC point.
If you have only two points (PC and PT) on a tangent curve, the tangent lines from the PC and PT will be intersected
to nd the PI of the curve. The distance from the PI to the PC and the distance from the PI to the PT will be
averaged to obtain a tangent distance. A new PC and PT point will be calculated on the tangent line and the radius
point will be calculated based on the tangent and central angle.
Non-Circular Curves
You may use the CF
*
code for a non-circular curve t (splines). The CF code will start a curve t line. The curve
will continue until a second CF
*
code is encountered, example:
Point ID Description
11 CF
*
SW1
12 SW1
13 SW1
14 CF
*
SW1
Only use CF to start or end a curve. Notice points 12 and 13 do not have automated mapping codes.
A smooth curve will be drawn through points 11, 12, 13 and 14. No new coordinate points are generated with the
CF code.
Layers and linetypes for mapped lines and curves
The description table determines the layer in which a mapped line will be drawn. For mapped lines and curves,
only the description and layer elds in the description table are used. However, if the default layer is not set, no
description table lookup is performed and the line is drawn on the current layer.
For example, assume that the default layer has been set and that the description table contains the following entry:
Desc. No. Description Layer Name
5 CURB Road
Since layer ''Road'' is specied for description ''Curb'', all lines with descriptions ''Curb'' will be placed in
layer ''Road''. Numbers are not used in the comparisons: Curb1, Curb2, Curb10, etc. are considered a match for the
description ''Curb'' and will therefore be placed in layer ''Road''.
If a matching description is not found in the description table, the line is drawn on the default layer (as set in the
Graphic Options tab of the C&G Options dialog box).
Calculated Points
All coordinate points that are automatically calculated and stored during automated mapping are given a MP point
code.
Note: Even though the point description eld can contain Mapping Codes, the point code found in C&G
coordinate les is separate and distinct from the point description eld. All points already having an MP Code are
ignored by automated mapping. This avoids re-mapping points that were generated during automated mapping and
thus were not points actually located in the eld.
Important Note: Consider the MP point code as a reserved code and do not use it for eld data collec-
tion.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1276
The description (e.g., CURB) used for calculated points is the same as the line description of the points the
calculated point is associated with and reects the type of calculated point that it is.
For Example:
Assuming the line description for the following points is ''CURB1'' and the points are the PC, PT and radius point
of a curve, then the line descriptions will be:
New Point ID Point Code Description
100 MP PC CURB1
101 MP RAD.PT CURB1
102 MP PT CURB1
Plotting of Points
If Auto Plot Points is ''On'', all the selected points in the coordinate le will be plotted on the screen during the
mapping process. If a default layer is set, Each point will be drawn on the layer specied in the description table.
The points labels will be congured as specied in the description table. Any point that does not have a description
match in the description table will either be drawn on the default layer.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey >Auto Map>Draw
Keyboard Command: MAP, CG MAP DRAW
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Erase
The Map Erase feature will nd all line, arc, curve t and point entities created Using the Map Draw feature and
delete them from the drawing. It will also delete any coordinate points from the coordinate le that where created
with the using Map Draw (PC, PT, radius points and close line (CL) points or those points having the point code MP)
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey >CGDraw>Auto Map>Erase
Keyboard Command: EMAP, CG MAP ERASE
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Leaders
Leaders are used to label features in the drawing. They consist of a line or series of connected line segments with
an arrow at one end and a text label at the other end. The arrow size is determined by the symbol size as set in the
Drawing Settings - Active Point Symbol dialog.
Text
A text leader allows you to draw a series of lines with an arrow at the starting point then specify the text that is to
be drawn at the nal endpoint of the leader.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1277
Prompts
To draw a text leader:
Pick start of leader: Pick the starting position of the leader with the left mouse button:
Picked C&G Point [4]
To point (Enter to end): Move the cursor to the next point on the leader and press the left mouse button.
The rst segment of the leader will be drawn with an arrow placed at the rst point picked
To point (Enter to end): As you pick succeeding points, lines will be drawn from the previous point to the
current point.
To point (Enter to end): When you have picked the nal point, press <Enter> or the right mouse but-
ton.
Enter Text for leader: At the command line, type the text to be placed on the leader and <Enter>.
Sample of Text Leader
Pick start of leader: repeats the command
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Leaders>Text
Keyboard Command: TXTL, CG TEXT LEADER
Prerequiste: Coordinate le.
Coordinate Leader
This feature allows you to pick a point then draw a leader that is labeled with the coordinates of the point picked.
To draw a Coordinate Leader:
Prompts
Pick the starting point of the leader with the left mouse button: If you pick a C&G point, the coordinates will
be read from the coordinate le, otherwise the graphic coordinates will be used.
Move the cursor to the next point for this segment of the leader and click the left mouse button: Repeat until
all desired leader segments are drawn.
The coordinates of the rst point picked will be drawn near the nal point on the leader. The coordinates are
rounded based on the rounding specications in the Rounding Options Tab of the C&G Options dialog box.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Leaders>Coordinate Leader
Keyboard Command: CRDL, CG COORD LEADER
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1278
Point Label
This feature allows you to label a point using a leader instead of the normal point labels. This feature can only be
used with C&G points. The leader will display the point ID and, if Elevation and/or Descriptions are ''On'', the
elevation and description will be displayed as well.
Prompts
It is suggested that you rst plot the points on the screen with the point labels turned off by setting their point label
positions to 0 on the Drawing Settings - Point Label Position dialog. Thus only the symbols will be plotted. Next,
in the Drawing Settings tab of the CGOptions dialog box: turn on the items you want to be displayed on the leader.
Now choose the Point Label Leader menu item:
Pick start of leader: Move the cursor to a C&G point and press the left mouse button. Picked C&G Point
[3]
To point (Enter to end):Move the cursor to the end point of the next leader segment and press the left mouse
button. An arrow will be drawn at the rst point picked.
To point (Enter to end): When you have picked the end of the last segment of the leader, press <Enter> or the
right mouse button.
To point (Enter to end):The point attributes will be placed near the last point picked for the leader.
(You may repeat the previous step as many times as is necessary)
When done press <Enter> when asked to pick the next C&G point, Press Enter
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Leaders>Point Label
Keyboard Command: PTL, CG POINT LEADER
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Station-Offset
This Leader feature allows you to label points along a predened alignment with their station and offset.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1279
Prompts
Prior to using this feature you must create a point group that denes the alignment.
Next you will be asked to open a point group le. In the Select a C&G Point Group File dialog box: select
the point group le that denes the horizontal alignment you wish to use.
Enter starting station <0.00000>: 1000
10+00.00
Enter Starting station for the alignment as dened by the point group. If a station is specied for the rst subgroup
name in the point group le, it will be used as the default station (for more details on this, see the section on point
group les in CGMngmt).
Pick the starting location of the leader: Picked C&G Point [3]
If a C&G point is not found at this location, the station and offset will be calculated using the drawing coordinates
of the picked point. If a C&G point is found, the station and offset will be calculated from the coordinates read
from the coordinate le. If a C&G point is found, the point ID will be printed at the command line.
To point (Enter to end): Move the cursor to the end point for this segment of the leader and press the left
mouse button, An arrow will be placed at the rst point picked. Repeat until all the segments of the leader have
been specied.
To point (Enter to end): When you have picked the end point of the last segment of the leader, press the
<Enter> key or right mouse button.
The station and offset label will be placed next to the end point of the leader.
To point (Enter to end): Enter
Pick start of leader: Repeats the command
Note: The station and offset values are rounded based on the values specied in the Rounding Options tab
of the CGTools > CGOptions dialog box
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Leaders>Station-Offset
Keyboard Command: STOL, CG STA OFF LEADER
Prerequiste: Point group must be created
Query
Selecting Query and then selecting a drawing object will display information related to the following C&G entities:
Point symbols and labels
Lines
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1280
Arcs
Polylines
Calls
Structure Footprints
Coordinate, Call and Curve Tables
Prompts
Select entities: (Pick entity on screen) Entities in set: 1
Select entities: (item selected) C&G POLYLINE
Below is an example of a Query listing of a C&G Polyline:
Coordinate File: CGDEMO.CRD (C&G Numeric)
Plotted from Auto Mapping: No
Layer: Boundary
Points dening C&G Polyline: 11->9
Polyline is NOT CLOSED
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Query
Keyboard Command: Q, CG QUERY
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Drop C&G Attributes
This feature allows you to strip the C&G attribute from any C&G entity. When the C&G attribute is dropped, the
graphic entity becomes standard CAD entity and will no longer be affected by the Refresh Screen feature nor can
they be used by C&G commands requiring C&G entities as input.
Prompts
Select entities: pick on graphic screen
Entities in set: 1
Select entities: pick again on screen
Entities in set: 4
Select entities: select another set of entities by window
Entities in set: 7
Select entities: Specify opposite corner: 8 total found,
Entities in set: 8
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Drop C&G Attributes
Keyboard Command:DROP, CG DROP
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
re-Associate Coord. le
This routine allows you to associate the current drawing le with different coordinate le than created the drawing
le. An example of this could be a phase of a project. The over all project coordinate le might contain 10,000 to
15,000 coordinates, While working on a phase of the over all project a separate, smaller, coordinate le was created,
easier to work with a 1000 points rather than 15,000. Now you want to re-associate this new drawing le with the
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1281
over all project coordinate le.
Prompts
After selecting the re-Associate command there will be displayed a Warning dialog box. This box recommends
that you create a backup of your drawing le. The danger with using this application is if the coordinates are not
managed carefully and the same point ID's were used in both the overall project le and the out parcel then the
graphics will be incorrect. C&G graphics are based on the coordinate le and if the X/Y/Z values change so does
the graphics.
Do you wish to Continue? Press <Y> button: Y
Re-associate only those C&G entities plotted using which coord. le [Any le] <A>: A
An Additional Warning message may also appear indictating conicts in linked crd les
Do you wish to Continue? Press <Y> button: Y
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>re-Associate Coord. le
Keyboard Command: Not available
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1282
Refresh Screen
Many graphic entities created by CGSurvey contain attributes that tie them to the coordinate le (C&G points,
lines, arcs, calls, etc.). Examples would be point numbers, elevations, and descriptions that are plotted with the
node when you plot points. However, once an entity is drawn the user is free to move or edit it. Also, it may be
necessary to change the coordinates of the point or points used to create the entity.
If C&G entities are edited or the coordinate values change, you refresh the drawing so that it reects the
current coordinate le values. You can use the Refresh Screen feature to nd all C&G entities tied to the coordinate
le and read the points from the coordinate le and redraw the entities based on the current coordinate values.
Prompts
Check the appropriate boxes in the list to refresh: Press Ok to continue
Do you wish to retain the point symbol size and Label height of the existing points?: Press <Y> button
Below is example of Refreshed screen entities:
Command: cg refresh
24 Lines refreshed.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1283
2 splines refreshed.
24 Calls refreshed.
24 Points refreshed.
There were 2 C&G polylines refreshed.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > CGDraw>Refresh Screen
Keyboard Command: REF, CG REFRESH
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
CGMngmt
Point Manager
The point manager allows the user to perform most of the normal coordinate le management functions. You
can perform whole le operations such as renaming the le, copying or moving the le, etc. There are also point
operations which allow the user to add, delete, or change individual points or groups of points in a coordinate le.
The C&G Point Manager dialog (shown below) is divided into three sections. These sections are described below.
Current Coordinate File Information
This section gives you basic information on the currently selected coordinate le. The Directory and File Name
defaults to the currently active coordinate le but you can choose to perform operations on any one of the supported
types of coordinate les by clicking the Browse... button. When you click the Browse... button you will see a
le dialog allowing you to choose the coordinate le you wish to work on. The Make Current checkbox allows
the user to make the specied le the current le. Thus, when the dialog closes, the le will be used for future
commands requiring a coordinate le.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1284
File Operations
This section of the dialog allows you to perform operations that effect the entire coordinate le.
There eight operations that can be performed using this section of the dialog (see descriptions listed below).
To perform one of the operations on the le shown in the Current Coordinate File Information section, click on
the radio button for the desired operation then click the Perform Operation button.
Apply Desc Table
This operation only applies to C&G coordinate les and will not be available for other le types. When you
apply a description table to a coordinate le it translates the numeric codes found in the description eld using a
C&G description table. For each point in the coordinate le having an integer in the description eld the program
looks for that integer description number in the description table. If a matching description number is found in the
description table, the description found in the description table is placed in the description eld for that point and
the description number is placed in the code eld for that point. The point is then stored back to the coordinate le
with the changed eld values. If no match is found the point is not changed in any way.
Change Desc Length
This operation only applies to C&G coordinate les and will not be available for other le types. When a
C&G coordinate le is created, the user is allowed to specify the length of the description for a given point in the
le. The description length may be between 1 and 100 characters. This operation allows the description length to
be changed. It can be made smaller or larger. If an existing point in a coordinate le has a description that is longer
than the new description length, the description will be truncated. When you click the Perform Operation button
you will be asked to enter the desired description length (see dialog below).
Change File Type
This operation allows the use to convert among the supported types of coordinate les. The types supported
are C&G numeric (
*
.crd) and alphanumeric (
*
.cgc), Carlson numeric (
*
.crd) and alphanumeric (
*
.crd), Simplicity
(
*
.zak) and AutoCAD Land Desktop (
*
.mdb). When you select this operation and click the Perform Operation
button you will see the Change File Type dialog:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1285
In the Change File Type dialog choose the type of le you want the current le to be converted into by clicking on
the appropriate radio button.
Note: the radio button for the current le type is greyed out.
After choosing the le type click the OK button. Click Cancel to cancel the operation.
If you attempt to convert to a le type having point ID length or description length limits that are less than
the limits for the le being converted, you will get the following warning:
Copy File
Performs a basic le copy. Must be to another directory and/or le name. When you click the Perform
Operation button you will be asked to specify the copied le name and directory using a le dialog (see below).
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1286
Note: by changing the Save as type: this command can change the le type when it copies the le. However, if the
type of le being copied has maximum allowable point IDs or descriptions that are greater than one or both of
those for the le being copied to, you will receive a warning that point IDs and/or descriptions may be truncated
(see Change File Type section above).
Delete File
Deletes the le listed in the Current Coordinate File Information area of the C&G Point Manager dialog alonge
with any of its associated les. Before actually deleting the le you must click the Yes button in the following dialog.
Edit File
Allows the user to use the CGEditor to edit the coordinate le. You may add and delete points or edit any
of the elds for an existing point (see the CGEditor section for more information on using the CGEditor)
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1287
Move File
Moves the current le to a new location. You will use a le dialog to specify the new location of the le.
When moving a coordinate le you may also change the le type by changing the Save as type: The same cautions
with regard to possible point ID and description truncation apply here as they do any time you change the le type
(see Change File Type section above).
Rename File
Simply renames the le to whatever name the user species. You will use a le dialog to specify the new
name and location of the le. Thus this command may be used to change the le type and/or move the le to a
different directory. To change the le type change the Save as type: in the le dialog when you specify its new
name. The same cautions with regard to possible point ID and description truncation apply here as they do any time
you change the le type (see Change File Type section above).
Point Operations
You may perform sevaral operations that effect one or more of the points in the current coordinate le in this section
of the C&G Point Manager dialog. Use the Points used: and Points Available: lists to help you determine which
points or ranges of points you wish to work on.
Add/Delete section
You may use the standard CGSurvey interface or the CGEditor to add or delete points. Choose which one to use
using the radio buttons on the right side of the Add/Delete portion of the Point Operations area.
Add Points
If you chose to use the CGEditor, the CGEditor will come up (as shown above - see the CGEditor section
for more information on using the CGEditor).
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1288
If you chose to Use the Standard CGSurvey Command, you will see the Manual Coordinate Storage dialog
(see below). Fill in the edit boxes as described in Management > Manual Storage
Delete Points
If you chose to use the CGEditor, the CGEditor will come up (as shown above - see the CGEditor section for
more information on using the CGEditor).
If you chose to Use the Standard CGSurvey Command, you will see the following prompt at the Command:
line:
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select]: use one or more of the available methods to
specify which points are to be deleted from the current coordinate le.
Buttons section
Renumber Points
If you click on the Renumber Points button you will see the Renumber Points dialog:
Fill in the dialog (see the Management > Renumber Points section for more details) and click OK to renumber the
specied range of points. If you check the OVERWRITE Existing Points checkbox, you will not be warned of
any points that are overwritten during the renumbering process.
Import Points
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1289
You can use this to copy points from another coordinate le into the current coordinate le. If you click the Import
Points button you will be asked to specify the coordinate le from which the points are to be imported. After
specifying the import le name, you will use the C&G Select Points from: dialog to select which point are to be
imported:
C&G Select Points from: <le name> dialog
Choose Points section:
You can select any one of the methods you wish to use to use to choose the points by clicking one of the methods
of point selection in the Choose Points section of the dialog. You may also specify whether you wish to Include or
Exclude the points chosen. If you include the points, they will be added to the list from the coordinate le. If you
exclude the points, the points chosen will be removed from the list of points previously Included. The method of
choosing the points is very much like using the
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select]:
prompt. For example, if you choose the Include radio button and the All radio button then click on the <Add
button, all the points in the coordinate le will be shown in the list on the left side of the dilaog. If you then choose
the Exclude radio button and the Block radio button, ll in the block of points you wish to remain in the list, then
all but these points will be excluded from the list when you click the Remove> button (see the example dialog
below).
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1290
When the points you wish to import are all in the list on the left, click OK.
CAUTION: If the points that are being imported exist in the current coordinate le, they will be overwritten
without warning!
Export Points - click the Export Points button to copy points from the current coordinate le into another
coordinate le. You will be asked to specify the le to export the points into then, similar to importing points, use
the C&G Select Points from: dialog to select the points to be exported. Click OK in the C&G Select Points
from: dialog to export the points.
CAUTION: If the points that are being exported exist in the le they are being exported to, they will be
overwritten without warning!
Prompts
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select]: use one or more of the available methods to specify
which points are to be deleted from the current coordinate le. Note: this prompt is only used if you have the Use
the Standard CGSurvey Command radio button set.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Management > Point Manager
Keyboard Command: cg pt mngr
Prerequiste: One or more Coordinate les
Edit Coordinates (CGEditor)
The user can use the CGEditor to edit an existing coordinate le or create a new one. You can add and/or delete
points and edit existing points. The CGEditor has many sophisticated editing tools that make editing fast and
relatively easy. Please refer to the CGEditor section of the Tools menu for a detailed explanation of how to use the
CGEditor.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1291
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Managment > Edit Coordinates (CGEditor)
Keyboard Command: EDC, CG EDIT COORDS
Prerequiste: None
Auto Create Points
The purpose of this feature is to create points in the current coordinate le and draw the associated point symbols
using coordinate values extracted from existing drawing entities. These drawing entities may or may not have
been created with CGSurvey. The user can automatically place C&G point symbols at the vertices, radius points,
insertion points, etc. of selected lines, arcs, points, polylines, and point blocks. The coordinates of the newly
created points are then saved in the currently open coordinate le.
Note: Unless point symbols are picked, the coordinates that are stored will be the coordinates of the CAD
entity. In the case of point symbols, the point ID will be read and used to look up the proper coordinates in the
current coordinate le.
After picking the Auto Create Points menu item, the Auto Create Points dialog box will appear:
Entity Types section
Select the entity types for which you wish to create C&G points. You can check any combination of the available
entity types.
When you click the Select Entities button, specifying only certain entities allows you to window a large area
but only have points created for the specied types of entities. You may also select individual entities or several
groups of entities. After selecting the entities, click the Create Points button to create the points and save them to
the current coordinate le.
Point Blocks
If you wish to have coordinates created for point blocks (or inserts) and you want the point ID, description and
elevation to be set from information contained in the block, the block must have attributes that can be used to obtain
these values. When you choose Point Blocks, the following edit boxes in the dialog are activated and must be lled
out:
Block Name: Specify the name of the blocks you wish to have points created for.
Point Attribute Tag: For the block entities chosen, specify the tag name for the attribute of the block contains the
point ID. If no point ID attribute is found then the next sequential point ID will be used.
Description Tag: For the block entities chosen, specify which attribute of the block contains the description. If
descriptions are ON and no description attribute is found then the default description will be used.
Elevation Tag: For the block entities chosen, specify which attribute of the block contains the elevation.
If elevations are ON and no elevation attribute is found: if the Use Z-Value as Elev is checked, then the Z value of
the block insertion point will be used for the elevation of the newly created point; otherwies the specied default
elevation will be used.
Point Creation Information section
Starting point number:
Use this to specify the starting point number. Specifying anything other than the next available point in the
coordinate le as the starting point makes it possible that one or more existing points could be overwritten.
However, whenever a situation arises that a point in the coordinate le may be overwritten, a dialog box will appear
warning you of this and allowing you to decide whether to proceed with the overwrite or not.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1292
Use coordinate point duplication factor:
If this box is checkbox Coordinate point duplication tolerance edit box is activated and you must enter a tolerance
for determining coordinate point duplication. This is used to test if a new point that is about to be created is the
same as a point already in the coordinate le. If the new point coordinates are within this tolerance the new point
will not be created.
Use Z-Value as Elev
Select this box if the entities you select may have a Z value and you want that value used as the point's elevation.
Default Code
If point codes are turned ON, then this value is used as the default Code for all newly created points.
Default Elevation
If elevations are turned ON, then this value is used as the default Elevation for all newly created points.
Default Description
If descriptions are turned ON, then this value is used as the default Description for all newly created points.
Buttons
Select Entities <
Press this button to begin selecting the entities for which you wish to create coordinate points. The dialog box will
disappear and you will be asked to use the normal entity selection methods to choose the entities to be used for
point creation. Just press Enter at the Select Entities prompt when you are done. You will then be returned to the
Auto Create Points dialog.
Create Points
After the entities have been selected, press this button to create coordinate points using the entities. Any existing
C&G lines, arcs or polylines will be ignored since they already have points associated with them. Non-C&G lines,
arcs and polylines will be converted to C&G lines, arcs and polylines.
Prompts
Fill in the dialog box as required (see above explanation).
Select Entities: use the normal entity selection methods to select the entities to use for creating points.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt
Keyboard Command: cg acp
Prerequiste: Coordinate le.
Manual Storage
This feature allows you to store points in a coordinate le by typing in the values for the point ID, code, northing,
easting, elevation and/or description. You also have the option of using the mouse to pick the location coordinates
on the screen.
When you choose the Manual Storage menu item:
If a coordinate le is not currently open, you will be prompted to open one.
Next, the following dialog box will appear: Point
When the dialog box rst appears, the point ID (Point) eld defaults to the next available point ID as set on the
General tab of the C&G Options dialog box. If you enter an existing point number in the point eld and click on
one of the other elds, the values associated with that point number will be retrieved from the current coordinate
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1293
le and placed in the other elds. You may edit them if you wish.
Note: If you enter an existing point ID and alter any of the other elds associated with that point then save
the point, NO POINT OVERWRITE WARNING WILL BE GIVEN!
North, East and Elevation
There are three different ways to enter coordinate values:
1. You can type in the coordinate values and elevation in the appropriate edit boxes.
2. You can duplicate a points values by entering a '+' sign and a point ID (example: +25) in the North eld. When
you click on another eld, the coordinate values for the specied point will be automatically entered in the North,
East and Elevation elds.
3. Or you can press the Pick Coords button. When you do this the dialog box disappears and you are prompted to
pick a point on the screen. Once you have picked the desired point on the screen, the dialog box reappears with the
coordinates of the selected point entered in the North and East elds.
Note: If you pick a C&G point, the coordinate values will be read from the coordinate le.
Note: The elevation eld is only activated if Elevation is ON.
Code and Description
Enter the desired description in the description edit box.
Enter the point code in the edit box. The point code eld is a 4 digit alpha or numeric code only used by
C&G. When present it can be used as a sorting tool in addition to the description table.
As an example: say that the description table number 25 is dened as 'Sanitary Manhole'. In addition to
using 25 from the description table you also have used the code 'AB' for As-Built and 'DS' for design. Now you can
build a selection set of all the description 25's, excluding all of the 'AB' codes and the selection set will contain only
those points that are Design Sanitary Manholes.
Note: If descriptions are ON and Get Description From Table is checked, then if you enter an integer
code in either the Code or Description eld, that number will be used to lookup a description in the current descrip-
tion table. If a matching number is found it will be used for the code and the associated description will be used for
the point's description. If there is no matching number found in the description table all elds will remain as entered.
Buttons
Store Point: When all the elds are entered, press the Store Point button to store the point in the coordinate le. If
Auto Point Plot ON is checked on the Graphics tab in the C&G Options dialog, the point will be plotted as well.
Reset: This button clears all the elds in the dialog box and sets the point number to the next available point number.
Pick Coords <: click this button to use the mouse cursor to pick the point's coordinates on the screen.
Cancel: Press this button when done.
Prompts
Pick coordinates for point '<point ID>': use the mouse cursor to pick the coordinates for the point.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1294
Keyboard Command: cg man coord store
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Delete
This feature allows the user to delete selected points from a coordinate le.
If a coordinate le is not open, you will be prompted to open one.
Select the points you wish to delete, either by picking with the mouse or entering the point sequence at the command
line.
When point selection is complete, press Enter.
A dialog box will come up asking if you are sure you want to delete the points.
If you click OK, the points are deleted.
Note: Deleted points CANNOT BE RECOVERED unless point history is turned on. (See Carlson Cong-
ure)
Prompts
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt group/Limits/Radius/Select]: Use any of the point ID selection methods to
specify which points you wish to delete from the current coordinate le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt
Keyboard Command: cg delete coords
Prerequiste: Coordinate le.
Fix Coords
This feature should only be used if you wish to attempt to repair a damaged C&G coordinate le. A le can
sometimes become damaged. when the computer is shut down prior to closing the le. It is wise to always keep a
backup copy of your coordinate les in case a damaged one cannot be xed.
Before running this command, try to open the le after closing any other C&G softer that may be running.
When you run this command you will rst be warned that only C&G les should be xed:
When the le dialog comes up, browse to the le you wish to attempt to repair.
If the x is unsuccessful, you will get an error message otherwise the x was successful.
Prompts
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1295
Use the le dialog to choose the le to be xed.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt
Keyboard Command: cg x coords
Prerequiste: Possibly damaged C&G Coordinate le
List
This feature allows the user to list all the information associated with selected points in the current coordinate le.
If Display at command line On is checked on the Output tab of the C&G Options dialog box, the information for
the selected points is displayed at the command line (press <F2> to view it). Otherwise the output is sent to the
print le. If a coordinate le is not open, you will see a le dialog allowing you to open one.
Note: To print and/or view the print le after listing the coordinates, choose Print/View Print File from
the CG-Survey > File menu. This will open a text editor with the print le as the current le. You may view the le
or print it using the text editor.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt
Keyboard Command: cg list coords
Prerequiste: Coordinate le.
Renumber Points
This feature allows you to renumber the point IDs of a range of points in the current coordinate le. The point IDs
will be renumbered sequentially. If the renumbered points have been previously plotted to the drawing, the points
will be redrawn to reect the changed point IDs.
When you choose this menu item, the following dialog box appears:
Point ID range to renumber:
Specify the range of point IDs you wish to renumber. Use the Point IDs Used and Point IDs Available lists to help
you determine the appropriate range.
New Starting point ID:
Specify the new starting point ID for the range specied. The specied range of points will be renumbered
sequentially starting with the New Starting point ID.
OVERWRITE Existing Points
If you check this check box and, in the process of renumbering the points, the new point ID is the same as an
existing point in the coordinate le, the point will be overwritten. However, if you do not check this checkbox and
a possible overwrite is detected, you will be informed of the possible overwrite and required to check this checkbox
before proceeding. If you do not wish to overwrite existing points, either re-specify the New Starting point ID or
click the Cancel button.
To proceed with the renumbering click the OK button.
Note: this feature will only renumber points in a coordinate le in which all point IDs are numeric. Thus
you can renumber the points in Carlson and C&G alphanumeric coordinate les only if all the point IDs are
numeric.
Prompts
Fill in the dialog box as specied above.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1296
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt
Keyboard Command: cg renumber pts
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Transformations
Combined Transformations
The Combined Transformations feature allows the user to translate, rotate, adjust elevation and/or scale the selected
points in a specied coordinate le. The user may also specify whether the transformed coordinates replace the
values in the current coordinate le or are saved to another coordinate le.
The Combined Transformations menu item brings up the Transform Points dialog box. This dialog is
used to congure the transformations that will be applied.
To begin the process, in the Coordinate Files Used area, choose the coordinate le into which the transformed
points are to be stored. If you wish to store them in the current coordinate le, you can go on to the next step.
However, if you wish to have the transformed ponts stored to a coordinate le other than current coordinate le,
click the Browse... button and use the le dialog to choose the disired destination le.
Next, check the checkboxs for each of the transformations you wish to apply. Then, for each type of trans-
formation to be applied, ll in each item of data in that area of the dialog.
Translate Points
To translate the points check the Translate checkbox, then ll in the data in the edit boxes in this section of the
dialog.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1297
The amount that the selected points are translated in the North and East directions is determined by the difference
between the northing and easting of the Reference Point and the coordinates specied in the New Northing and
New Easting edit boxes.
Reference Point species the point in the current coordinate le that is to be used as the reference point for
the translation. All the selected points are translated in the same manner as the Reference Point. The reference
point will be translated by the difference between its current coordinates and those specied in the New Northing
and New Easting edit boxes. You can ll in the New Northing and New Easting edit boxes directly or you can
enter a point ID in the New Point edit box. Assuming the point ID entered is found in the coordinate le, the
coordinates read from the coordinate le will be placed in the New Northing and New Easting edit boxes. You can
edit these coordinates or leave them as they are.
Rotate Points
If the Rotate check box is checked, the selected points will be rotated according to the specications in the Rotate
Points area. Rotation defaults to rotation by an angle but can be changed by merely clicking on the Bearing or
Angle radio button.
Use the Rotate About Point edit box to specify the point in the current coordinate le about which the se-
lected points will be rotated.
Rotating by an angle
To rotate by an angle click the Angle radio button. Next, type in the appropriate angle in the Rotation Angle edit
box or click the Pick Angle button and pick the desired angle on the screen.
Rotating by Bearing
To rotate by bearing, click the Bearing radio button then type in the appropriate values in the Current Bearing and
New Bearing edit the boxes or click the Pick Bearing button and pick the desired bearing on the screen.
Note: Bearings must be specied using qdd.mm.sss notation, where q is the quadrant (1 = NE, 2 = SE, 3 = SW, 4 =
NW), dd is degrees, mm is minutes and sss is seconds. Seconds can be specied to 0.1 seconds if desired.
Adjust Elevation
If the Adjust Elevation box is checked, the elevations of the points will be adjusted according to the specications
in the Adjust Elevation area. The type of elevation adjustment can be specied by clicking on the Translate or
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1298
Scale radio button.
To Translate elevations
The elevations of the selected points will be translated by the difference between the Reference Point elevation and
the value entered in the New Elevation edit box. When you enter a point ID in the Reference Point edit box and
click on another edit box the New Elevation edit box will be lled out with the current elevation of the reference
point.
To Scale elevations
The elevations of the selected points will be scaled by the value entered in the Multiplication Factor edit box.
Scale
If the Scale check box is checked the northings and eastings of the selected points will be scaled according to the
specications in the Scale area of the dialog.
Meters to Feet and Feet to Meters
You can scale the coordinates to convert feet to meters or meters to feet by checking the appropriate check boxes.
Using this form of scaling disables the other items in this section of the dialog box.
Other types of scaling:
The Point to Hold is a point in the current coordinate le that will be used to obtain the reference coordi-
nates for the application of the specied scaling factor to the selected points.
Simple Scale - if you choose simple scaling it will calculate the scaled differences in northing and easting
between the Point to Hold and each of the points selected for scaling. This scaled difference is found by calculating
the difference between the coordinates of the Point to Hold and those of a given selected point and multiplying that
times the specied Scale Factor. This scaled difference is then added back to the northing (easting) of the given
selected point.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1299
Adjust to Grid - this scaling method uses the Site Elevation (MSL) and the Projection Table Factor to adjust the
northings and eastings of the selected points to grid coordinates
Methods of Specifying Point IDs for the Various Transformations
When specifying a point ID in the transformation data (for example to specify the Reference Point when
the Translate checkbox is checked), you many select points using any one of the three options listed below:
1. Type the point ID directly into the edit box provided.
2. Point List: click the Point List button to bring up the Choose Point Blocks dialog. The left pane shows
a listing of all the points found in the current coordinate le. Highlight the desired point in the Points Avail-
able list then click the Add > button and the point selected will be displayed in the Points Chosen list. In every
case you are only allowed to choose a single point. Once you are satised with the point chosen click the OK button.
3. Screen Pick: when you click the Screen Pick button the Transform Points dialog disappears and Choose
a point: prompt is displayed at the command line. You may type a point ID or pick a point symbol from the drawing.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1300
Selecting Which Points Will be Transformed
At any time prior to clicking the OK button you may choose the points to be transformed. To do this click the
Select Points button. The Transform Points dialog will disappear and you will be prompted to choose the points:
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select]: - use any of the available methods to specify the
points to be transformed. When done specifying the points press Enter until the Transform Points dialog reappears.
Transforming the points
To transform the selected points, click the OK button. The points will be transformed and saved to the specied
coordinate le.
Prompts
Fill out the Transform Points as described above.
When the Select Points button is clicked the following prompt appears:
Choose initial points for base selection set from coord le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select]: - use any of the available methods to specify the
points to be transformed. When done specifying the points press Enter until the Transform Points dialog reappears.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Management > Transformations
Keyboard Command: cg transformations
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Best Fit Transformation
Best Fit Transformation is used to transform the coordinates in the current coordinate le using a ''rubber sheet''
method of transformation.
First the user must .
Add points from the coordinate le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select]: specify which points are to be transformed using
one or more of the available selection methods.
Next, in the Coordinate Transformation dialog the user must choose at least 2 points in the coordinate le
that are known (or ''xed'') points
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1301
To specify a xed point, highlight it in the Points Available list then press the Add > button to copy it to the Points
with Known Coordinates list on the right. Or, if you wish, you can also specify a known point from the drawing
by clicking the Screen Pick button and picking a point from the screen or typing a point ID at the command line.
After choosing a known point, the following dialog will appear:
The Add Point dialog allows you to change the current coordinates of the known point or accept the current
coordinates. When done specifying the coordinates of the known point, click the OK button
After a point has been placed in the Points with Known Coordinates list on the right, you can edit the values you
entered by highlighting the incorrect point and clicking the Edit Point button. Or, if you wish, you can remove
an incorrect point from the right hand Points with Known Coordinates list by highlighting it and clicking the <
Remove button.
After specifying all the known points, you must specify which coordinate le will be used to store the trans-
formed points. If you wish to use the current coordinate le you need do nothing. If you wish to write the
transformed points to a different coordinate le than the one listed in the Store the Transformed Points in the
File: edit box, click the Browse... button and use the le dialog (see below) to specify a new or existing coordinate
le. When done choosing a coordinate le, click the Open button in the le dialog.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1302
Click the Transform button in the Coordinate Transformation dialog to cause the transformed coordinates to be
calculated and stored in the specied le
Prompts
Add points from the coordinate le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select]: specify which points are to be transformed using
the typical C&G Selection method.
Follow the instructions above to ll out the Coordinate Transformation dialog box.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt > Transformations
Keyboard Command: cg crd trns
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Copy Coordinates
This feature allows the user to copy a selected set of points from the current coordinate le to itself or to another
coordinate le and, optionally, increase or decrease the point ID by a specied number.
First you must choose the points to be copied:
Add points from coordinate le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select]: use one of the available methods to specify the set
of points to be copied.
Next, you must specify what value to add to or subtract from the point IDs to form the new point IDs. If
you press <Enter> the default is to leave the IDs the same.
Value to add or subtract from point numbers <0>: press Enter to leave the point IDs as they are or en-
ter a positive or negative number.
Next you must specify the coordinate le to which the points are to be copied.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1303
Store coordinates in [Current-le/Existing-le/New-le] <C>: type ''C'' and Enter or just Enter to copy
the specied points into the current coordinate le. Type ''E'' and Enter to choose an existing coordinate le into
which to copy the points or Type ''N'' and Enter the copy the points to a new le. If you choose either an existing or
new le you will use a le dialog to specify the le to use.
The selected points will then be copied to the specied le.
Prompts
Add points from coordinate le. (Enter when done)
[All/Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Pt-group/Limits/Radius/Select]: use one of the available methods to specify the set
of points to be copied.
Value to add or subtract from point numbers <0>: press Enter to leave the point IDs as they are or en-
ter a positive or negative number.
Store coordinates in [Current-le/Existing-le/New-le] <C>: type ''C'' and Enter or just Enter to copy
the specied points into the current coordinate le. Type ''E'' and Enter to choose an existing coordinate le into
which to copy the points or Type ''N'' and Enter the copy the points to a new le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Management > Transformations
Keyboard Command: cg move coords
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Description Tables
Description tables have several purposes. They can be used as a shortcut method of using point codes or numeric
descriptions to automatically set point descriptions when points are saved to a coordinate le. (Descriptions have a
similar functionality when used in conjunction with the CGEditor)
Note: the description table is only used in conjunction with saving points to the coordinate le if Descrip-
tions are ON and Get Description From Table is checked on the General tab of the C&G Options dialog.
Description tables allow the user to specify many details regarding the appearance of a plotted point when
using Auto Map > Draw or Trav > Reduce, or anytime points are being plotted.
Note: the description table is only used in conjunction with drawing points if Descriptions are ON and Use
description table for point plotting parameters is checked on the Graphics tab of the C&G Options dialog.
A description number acts as an index into the description table.
When saving a point to the coordinate le and a number is used in a description eld, the description table
will be searched for that number. If that description number is found, the number in the description eld will be
replaced with the description in the description table. In the case of C&G coordinate les, the number will be
moved to the point code eld. If no match is found, the number will remain in the description eld.
When plotting points, the description for the point being drawn is compared to the descriptions found in the
description table. If a match is found then the point is plotted using the parameters specied in that description table
entry.
The items in this menu allow you to create and manipulate description tables. You can create a new empty
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1304
description table and edit it. You can edit an existing description table. You can set or close the current description
table and set a different default description table to be used in new drawings.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt
Keyboard Command: None
Prerequiste: None
Create
This feature allows you to create a new description table. A dialog box will prompt you to name the description
table to be created.
Once you have specied the description table to create, you will be allowed to edit the new, empty descrip-
tion table. See Description Table > Edit for a detailed description of how to edit a description table.
Prompts
Use a le dialog to specify the name and location of the new description table and the Edit Description Table dialog
to create the table entries.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt > Description Tables
Keyboard Command: cg create desc table
Prerequiste: None
Edit
This feature allows you to edit an existing description table. The following edit dialog box will appear:
Note: Editing a description table does not make it the current description table for the current drawing. To
make a description table the current one you must choose the Set Current menu item in the Description Table.
Caution for CG-SURVEY for DOS users: You may open the older format CG-DOS Description Table.
However, when opened, the CG-DOS description table will be converted to the current format and once converted,
the description table cannot be converted back to or used by the CG-SURVEY for DOS program.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1305
Description Table File:
Displays the name and location of the description table currently being edited. Pressing the Browse button
brings up the Choose a Description Table to Edit le dialog box allowing you to select a description table to edit.
Note about the Browse button: If you are in the editor just after using the create menu item to create a
new description table, you should not use the Browse button.
Descriptions list
This list contains a list of all the descriptions in the current description table. You may scroll through the list using
the scroll bar on the right or use the scroll bar on the bottom to view the complete description. The list contains
one description per line. By clicking on a description in the list its properties are displayed to the right of the list.
The list itself contains some of the description's properties but you must click on the specic description you are
interested in to view all its specications. Each row in the list consists of rst the description number then the
description itself then the symbol and symbol and label height.
Description section
Description Number: This number acts as an index to the description table.
Description: The description you wish to set parameters for.
Auto Map Line Drawing section
If you check the Draw Lines ONLY checkbox then during Auto Mapping (see Draw > Auto Map > Draw) points
with this description will not have the point symbol drawn but will be connected by lines if the line drawing codes
are used. The Line Type to Use drop down box allows you to choose one of the currently loaded line types for the
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1306
lines drawn between points having this description.
Point Symbol section
Symbol: The drawing in the box on the left side indicates which point symbol is currently specied for this
description. The text next to the symbol drawing is the name of the symbol minus the .dwg ending. This is the
symbol to be used when plotting a point having a description matching that specied in this description entry.
You may specify any valid block name by rst selecting the type of symbol you wish to use: either Carlson
or C&G. You can specify any standard C&G or Carlson symbol supplied with the software or create your own
custom point symbols. Custom point symbols must be located in either the users Sup directory with the Carlson
symbols or with the C&G symbols in Sup\CGPTSYM generally found under C:\Documents and Settings\<User
Name>\Application Data\Carlson Software\<Carlson product name>\<CAD version> directory.
You may press the Change Symbol button to view and/or select the desired symbol.
Symbol Layer: The drawing layer that the point symbol will be plotted on for any point having a description
matching that specied in this description table entry.
Point Labels section
Point Label Positions
The entries in this area refer to the plotting of Point ID, Description and Elevation labels around a point symbol.
Layer
The Point ID, Description and Elevation layer names can be specied. If none is specied then the current layer
will be used.
Position
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1307
You can assign the Position of the point number, elevation and description labels in relation to the point symbol.
Valid positions are 0 through 9 based on the numeric keypad on your keyboard. Consider 5 as the location
of the center of a point symbol. Labels can be placed around the point symbol just as the other numbers surround 5.
You identify the location where you want the label to be placed around the point symbol by selecting the number
on the numeric keypad that corresponds to that relative location. The relative positions are also indicated in the list
and can be picked directly from the list.
Position 0 - indicates that you do not want the label to be plotted.
Position 5 - can only be used for the elevation label. (If you select position 5 for any other label it will be treated as
Position 0). If you select position 5 for the elevation label the whole number portion of the elevation will be plotted
to the left of the center of the symbol and the decimal portion of the elevation will be plotted to the right.
Whole Places - can be specied for the elevation label only.
Decimal Places - can be specied for the elevation label only.
Plot Radial
If Plot Radial is checked, the point labels will be plotted radially from the symbol's center at the Position specied.
If plot radial is not selected, point labels will be plotted horizontally.
Symbol and Label Size section
Symbol Size: The size of the symbol to be plotted for a point having a description matching that specied for this
description table entry.
Label Size: The height of the point label text. This refers to labeling symbols with point number, elevation
and description.
Units: Units can be set to Scale X Symbol Size or Literal.
Scale X Symbol Size indicates that the values for Symbol Size and Label Size will be multiplied by the
drawing scale (Specied on the Drawing Settings tab of the C&G Options dialog) to determine the size of the
symbol and/or label in actual drawing units.
Literal indicates that the specied Symbol Size is in actual drawing units and should not be scaled.
Note: If the Units for a given description is set to Scale X Symbol Size, then the symbol size and label
height on the printed drawing are interpreted to be in inches if drawing units are set to FEET on the General tab of
the C&G Options dialog and centimeters if drawing units are set to METERS or METRES.
Buttons
List: clicking this button causes the description table to be printed as a report on the command line and to the print
le.
Add/Replace: click this button to save your changes when you complete a new description or edit an exist-
ing description.
Delete: click this button to delete the highlighted description. If you delete a description, it cannot be re-
covered and you will not be allowed to cancel the deletion.
Exit: When nished editing, click this button.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1308
Prompts
Use the Edit Description Table dialog to enter or modify descriptions and their drawing parameters.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt > Description Tables
Keyboard Command: cg edit desc codes
Prerequiste: An existing C&G description table or a newly created one (see Create)
Set Current
Allows the user to select the current description table using a le dialog. The selected description table will be
active for the current drawing. When Set Current is used the description table name and location are saved with the
drawing settings.
Prompts
Use a le dialog to choose the current le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Description Tables
Keyboard Command: cg set desc table
Prerequiste: Existing C&G Description table
Close Current
Closes the current description table. This is saved with the drawing as part of the CG SETTINGS.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt
Keyboard Command: cg close desc table
Prerequiste: None
Set Default
Allows the user to select the default description table using a le dialog. The selected description table will be saved
to the CGSURVEY.OPT le for the current user and used to set the default settings for any new C&G drawings
created by the current user.
Prompts
Use a le dialog to choose the default le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Description Tables
Keyboard Command: cg set default desc table
Prerequiste: Existing C&G Description table
Convert to SurvCE FCL le
This feature allows you to convert a C&G description table to a SurvCE feature code list or FCL le.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1309
If you are using SurvCE and wish to import your C&G description table for use with SurvCE use this fea-
ture to create the FCL le then upload it to the SurvCE data collector FCL directory.
If a C&G description table is not currently open you will be asked to choose which le you wish to convert
using a le dialog box.
Next, using le dialog, you will be asked to specify the name of the FCL le to create.
When you click OK after specifying the FCL le name, the conversion will take place.
Prompts
Use le dialog boxes to pick the C&G description table to convert and to specify the name of the FCL le to create.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt > Description Tables
Keyboard Command: CG CONVERT DESC TO SURVCE FCL
Prerequiste: Existing C&G description table (
*
.tbl) and its index le (
*
.tbx).
Point Groups
Point groups were formerly called Batch Point Files or point les. These les are text les with the extension pts.
These features allow the user to create or edit a point group. A point group is simply an ASCII text le that
contains a list of point IDs that are in a specic sequence. The points in a point group can describe a tract of land,
a road centerline, a utility line, a group of lots in a subdivision, etc. - anything that can be dened by a series of
points. Point groups can also contain the PC radius point and PT for horizontal curves as well as vertical curve
information.
An example of a point group le:
If you view a point group le in a text editor like notepad you will see something like this example
Note: the text in square brackets does not appear in the le itself - it is only used to clarify this example:
LOT 1 [Subgroup description]
1 [Point 1]
23 [Point 23, PC]
+48 [Clockwise radius point 48]
49 [Point 49, PT]
50 [Point 52]
1 [Point 1, back to starting point]
LOT 2 [Subgroup description]
12 [Point 12]
24 [Point 24]
65 [Point 65]
70 [Point 70]
12 [Point 12, starting point]
The above example illustrates a point group with two subgroups. Each subgroup denes a lot. The last
point in each subgroup is optional - you don't need to close the lot boundary by entering the starting point twice.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1310
Keyboard Command: None
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Create
There are two ways to create a new point group: you can use this command or you can use the CGEditor. Previous
C&G users may prefer to use this command but the CGEditor allows the user the ability to view and edit the point
group as it is being created.
If a coordinate le is not open, you will be prompted to open one using a le dialog.
Once the coordinate le is open, the point group le dialog can be used to specify the name of the point
group le you wish to create.
Subgroup description <Enter when done>: Enter the subgroup description.
Specify points for subgroup <lename>:
[Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Indiv/liMits/Radius/Vertical curve] <pick polyline>:
Use any of the available methods, including picking a polyline in the drawing, to specify the point IDs of the points
in the subgroup. Remember that, within a given subgroup, you are dening a specic shape or line and thus the
points need to be entered as an ordered sequence that properly denes the lot, alignment, etc.
Repeat the steps outlined above until all subgroups and their points have been entered.
To end the command and create the point group le, press Enter twice after specifying the last point in the last
subgroup.
Using a Polyline to specify a group of points
If you pick a polyline, the coordinate le is searched for points having northings and eastings that match the x and
y coordinates of the vertices of the polyline. If none of the points in the coordinate le match the polyline vertices,
then no points are added to the points in the current subgroup. Any points that match are added to the subgroup
points and you are prompted for the next point in the subgroup. You may continue using any of the methods of
specifying points, including picking other polylines.
Entering a Curve
First type ''I'' and enter to enter individual points. As you are specifying the individual points in the subgroup
you can specify a curve by entering the radius point ID immediately after entering the ID of the PC. The radius
point must be indicated by preceding its point ID with a plus sign for a clockwise curve or a minus sign for a
counterclockwise curve. The next point ID you enter is assumed to be the PT.
Vertical Curves
If you are creating a point group to dene a road alignment, you may wish to enter vertical curve information so
that both the horizontal and vertical alignments are dened.
Note: You may nd it more convenient to use the CGEditor to enter vertical curve information.
To do this type ''V'' and Enter at the command prompt. You will see the following prompt:
Vertical Curve 1
[Next/slope-In/slope-Out/Length/pvi-Station/pvi-Elevation]:
For the rst vertical curve you must enter ve curve components. Enter these ve componants by typing the
capitalized letter representing the component that you wish to specify, then press Enter. You will be prompted to
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1311
enter the component specied.
You must enter a value for each of the following ve required elds:
The slope-In
slope-Out
Length of the vertical curve
pvi-Station
pvi-Elevation.
Entering succeeding vertical curves
After entering the information for the rst vertical curve, enter <N> for Next. Since the slope in and PVI
elevation are determined by the previous vertical curve information, so you need only specify three elds for any
additional curves:
slope-Out
Length
pvi-Station
Use Previous and Next to enter and/or change the vertical curve information. You may enter as many as
fty vertical curves. You can press the F2 key at any time to view the prompt history screen, then use the scroll bar
on the right to view the entire data entry sequence.
Multiple Subgroups
To place more than one subgroup in a single point group, press Enter when asked to select another point for the
current subgroup. This ends input for the current subgroup.
At the Subgroup description <Enter when done>: prompt, enter the name of the next subgroup and go on to
enter a new series of points, including both horizontal and vertical curve information as needed.
Continue to enter subgroups of points by repeating these steps until all subgroups have been entered.
When you have entered all the subgroups, press Enter until you get the Subgroup Description prompt.
Press Enter at the Subgroup Description prompt to end the command and create the point group le.
Prompts
Subgroup description <Enter when done>: Enter the subgroup description.
Specify points for subgroup <lename>:
[Block/Code/Desc/Elev/Indiv/liMits/Radius/Vertical curve] <pick polyline>: use one or more of the available
methods to specify points in the current subgroup.
Vertical Curve 1
[Next/slope-In/slope-Out/Length/pvi-Station/pvi-Elevation]: specify which element of the vertical curve you
wish to enter or type ''N'' and Enter to begin entering the next vertical curve.
Vertical Curve ##
[Next/slope-Out/Length/pvi-Station]: after entering the data for the rst vertical curve the following curves are
controlled by the initial curve. Thus the prompt changes.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Mngmt > Point Groups
Keyboard Command: cg create bpf
Prerequiste: Coordinate le
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1312
Edit
The Edit Point Groups feature allows you to use the CGEditor to edit/create an existing point group le.
CGEditor General Information
The CGEditor is an integral part of preparing les for use in C&G applications. The CGEditor is a very powerful
tool. You can open multiple data les of any supported le type and edit the les as needed. The CGEditor has a full
complement of tools for searching and replacing and navigating within a le. It will also allow you to cut or copy
records from one le and paste them into another le in order to merge les, move data between phases of a job, etc.
The CGEditor can create and/or edit six types of data les used by C&G:
Raw Data Files
Raw data les contain information pertaining to a eld traverse. Raw data les are typically downloaded from the
data collector and converted to the C&G raw data le format. These les have the extension .CGR.
Map Check Files
Map Check les contain bearing, distance and curve information and are typically used to calculate the closure of a
deed description. These les have the extension .CGM.
Cross Section Files
Cross Section les contain one or more cross sections identied by their station along the alignment. Each cross
section record has the percent grade dened for its left and right slopes. Following the ''Station'' record are several
''Point'' records containing the elevations and offsets of the points along the cross section. Cross section les consist
of a pair of les; the main data le has the extension .CEW and the index le has the extension .CEX.
Template Files
Template les are merely cross section les that represent a standard cross section and can be used to generate
other cross section les. However, unlike cross section les, template les use an integer ID instead of a station to
uniquely identify each template. Like cross section les, the percent grade is dened for the left and right slopes
of each template and there are a set of ''Point'' records specifying the template elevation at a given offset. The
centerline elevation at offset 0.00 is typically set to 0.00. Template les consist of a pair of les; the main data le
has the extension .CTP and the index le has the extension .CTX.
Point Group Files
Point Group Files are simply a list of point numbers that can dene a group of points, a lot or parcel, or an
alignment. These are ASCII les and have a .PTS extension.
Coordinate Files
CGSurvey supports many different coordinate le formats:
C&G .CRD/.IDX - C&G numeric coordinate les
C&G .CGC/.CGX - C&G alpha-numeric coordinate les
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1313
Carlson .CRD - Carlson coordinate le format, numeric and alpha-numeric
Simplicity .ZAK - Simplicity coordiante le
LDT - MDB - Land Desk Top coordinate le
Note: for further and complete information on using the Edit Raw File see the chapter on CGEditor in the
Tools section.
Pulldown Menu Location: Management\Point Groups\Edit
Keyboard Command: BPF, CG EDIT BPF
Prerequisite: Open Raw File
CGTopo
Topographic Settings
Allows you to view or change the Topographic Settings. See the Topograpy tab section of the CG Options..
menu item of the Tools menu.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Topo
Keyboard Command: cg cont setup
Prerequiste: None
Erase Surface from DWG
When you open a C&G surface (or TIN le,
*
.tin) it is shown on the screen as a graphic image overlaid on your
drawing. You must use the Write Surface to DWG feature to actually create coutour polylines, TIN lines, etc. If
the surface changes due to changes in elevation or location of points you will want to erase the old surface and write
the new surface to the drawing. However, once a surface is written to the drawing, it can be a difcult process to
pick out all the surface entities in order to erase them from the drawing. This feature makes this an easy, one step
operation.
You can use the items in this menu to erase the various topographic features: the TIN, Main Contours, In-
termediate Contours, Break Lines, Include Boundaries, and/or Exclude Boundaries or All topo items.
Note: To erase contour labels use CG-Survey > Topo > Label Contours > Delete Labels
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Topo
Tin
This feature erases all the C&G TIN entities found on the TIN layer specied on the Topography tab of the C&G
Options dialog.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Topo > Erase Surface from DWG
Keyboard Command: cg erase tin
Prerequiste: None
Main Contours
This feature erases all the C&G main contour polyline entities found on the main contour layer specied on the
Topography tab of the C&G Options dialog.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1314
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Topo > Erase Surface from DWG
Keyboard Command: cg erase main cont
Prerequiste: None
Intermediate Contours
This feature erases all the C&G intermediate contour polyline entities found on the intermediate contour layer
specied on the Topography tab of the C&G Options dialog.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Topo > Erase Surface from DWG
Keyboard Command: cg erase interm cont
Prerequiste: None
All topo items
This feature erases all the C&G topo entities found on any of the layers specied on the Topography tab of the
C&G Options dialog.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Topo > Erase Surface from DWG
Keyboard Command: cg erase all topo
Prerequiste: None
Label Contours
The items in this submenu allow you to either label contour lines with appropriate elevations or remove previously
placed contour labels.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Topo
Place Labels
This feature allows you to place the appropriate elevation labels at selected locations on C&G contour polylines.
The label is a TEXT entity overlaying a WIPEOUT entity. The WIPEOUT entity serves to create a space between
the label text and the contour line and to keep the contour line from showing through the text and obscuring it.
If you have not already done so, please review the coutour labeling settings by choosing the CG-Survey >
Topo > Topographic Settings menu item The labels will be created on the Main and Intermediate Contour
Label Layers. The Labeling Interval determines which contours are labeled. For example, if the Labeling
Interval is set to 2.00, then every C&G contour polyline that you choose having an elevation evenly divisible by
2.00 will be labeled. The Label-Contour Separation Distance:. is the space separating the contour line and the
start and end of the label text.
Once you have veried the correct settings, choose the Label Contours > Place Label menu item.
At the prompt (see below) use the left mouse button to pick any point that is on one side of the contour line
you wish to label.
Pass a line thru the contours to be labeled.
Pick rst point on line. [<ENTER> to quit]:
Now, at the next prompt (see below), drag the rubber band line through one or more of the contours you
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1315
wish to label and click the left mouse button a second time.
Pick second point [<ENTER> to quit]:
The labeling operation can be repeated as many times as needed, then press Enter to end the command.
Some Trouble Shooting Tips for Labeling Contours:
When a C&G surface is opened it is shown only as a graphic image overlying the drawing. Therefore, before you
can place labels on the contour lines, the surface must be written to the drawing using the CG-Survey > Topo >
Write Surface to DWG menu item..
If the labels do not appear on the contour lines you chose, verify the elevation on the contour using the
CAD LIST command.
Also, try changing the Labeling Interval setting on the Topography tab of the C&G Options dialog.
If the labels still do not appear on the contour lines, look at Drawing Settings tab of the C&G Options di-
alog and verify that the Text Size is set to a value that is large enough to be seen when viewing the contours.
If the elevation labels are created with an incorrect number of decimal places, check the Elevation Preci-
sion on the Rounding tab of the C&G Options dialog under Text in Drawing. Use the CAD UNDO command to
undo the previously placed labels and try again.
Prompts
Pass a line thru the contours to be labeled.
Pick rst point on line. [<ENTER> to quit]: use the left mouse button to pick any point that is on one side of the
contour line you wish to label.
Pick second point [<ENTER> to quit]: drag the rubber band line through one or more of the contours
you wish to label and click the left mouse button a second time.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Topo > Label Contours
Keyboard Command: cg label contours
Prerequiste: C&G contour polyline entities in the drawing
Delete Labels
This feature allows you to delete previously placed C&G contour labels. C&G contour labels consist of two entities:
a TEXT entity containing the elevation text and a WIPEOUT entity used to hide the contour polyline under the
elevation text. While you can delete these using standard CAD commands, it requires several steps and can be
tricky. This feature makes deleting these labels a one step operation.
After choosing the CG-Survey > Topo > Label Contours > Delete Labels menu item you will see the
following prompt at the command line:
Select contour labels to delete:
Select objects: use the mouse to pick the label text for the labels to be deleted. Press Enter when done and the
labels and their accompanying WIPOUT entities will be deleted.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1316
Prompts
Select contour labels to delete:
Select objects: use the mouse to pick the label text for the labels to be deleted.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Topo > Label Contours
Keyboard Command: cg del cont labels
Prerequiste: None
CGTools
CG Options
The CG Options menu item brings up the C&G Options dialog, allowing you to view or change various CGSurvey
settings or save the currently congured settings to be used as the default settings for a newly created drawings.
There are nine tabs on the C&G Options dialog. Each tab pertains to a catagory of settings:
1. General tab - settings regarding the coordinate le type for new les, units, scale factors, and other gen-
eral settings.
2. Rounding tab - number rounding settings used for the print le and for text placed in the drawing.
3. Graphics tab - specify when CGSurvey draws points and lines, format of bearings and other graphics related
settings.
4. Traverse tab - settings used by all traverse related features.
5. Output tab - specify the name and layout of the print le and how the results of C&G features are displayed.
6. Data Path tab - specify the default path to your data les
7. Drawing Settings tab - specify drawing scale, text size, and details of how point symbols and their labels are to
be drawn.
8. Topography tab - specify contouring parameters along with the layers used for the TIN, countour and other
topographic entities.
9. Calls tab - specify the componants, format and layer for calls (annotations).
Each of these tabs will be covered in the following sections.
This tab contains a wide variety of settings that apply to almost all of the features found in the CG-Survey menus.
These are settings such as Next Point ID, Elevations, State, Arc Denition, Bearings/Azimuths, Coordinate order
and more.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1317
Creating New Coordinate Files section
File Type: You may select one of the following coordinate le types:
C&G numeric (
*
.crd)
- point ID can be an integer between 1 and 65,536
- description from 1 to 100 characters
C&G alphanumeric (
*
.cgc)
- point ID can contain up to 10 characters using any combination of letters and numbers.
- description from 1 to 100 characters
Carlson numeric (
*
.crd)
- point ID can be any integer containing up to 9 digits.
- description from 1 to 31 characters
Carlson alphanumeric (
*
.crd)
- point ID can contain up to 9 characters using any combination of letters and numbers.
- description from 1 to 31 characters
Simplicity (
*
.Zak)
- point ID can contain up to 8 characters using any combination of letters and numbers.
- description from 1 to 28 characters
Land Desktop Format (
*
.mdb)
- point ID can contain up to 255 characters using any combination of letters and numbers.
- description from 1 to 255 characters
Description Length: This value can only be set for C&G coordinate les. It becomes the default descrip-
tion length for new C&G coordinate and C&G raw data les. It can be set to from 1 to 100 characters.
Current Coordinate File section
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1318
Elevations ON If this checkbox is checked, elevations will be carried on all points computed and/or you will be
able to enter an elevation when saving a point.
Enter Elev.: If this checkbox is checked, you will be prompted to manually enter elevations.
Calculate Elev.: If this checkbox is checked and an elevation can be computed from the data that has been entered
during the command, it will be. Otherwise you will be asked.
Descriptions ON If the Descriptions ON checkbox is not checked, you will not be prompted to enter a de-
scription as points are created or edited.
If descriptions are ON, and Get Description From Table IS NOT checked, you will be prompted to manually enter
a description for each coordinate point created. However, if Descriptions are on and Get Description from Table
IS checked, when a point is stored and a description table IS NOT open, you will be prompted to select a description
table. The description table will then be used to look up any integer number in the description in order to substitute
the description in the table for the integer and move the integer to the Code les. (see help under CG-Survey >
Management > Description Tables)
Point Codes ON If the Point Codes ON checkbox is checked, you will be allowed to enter a two to four
character code depending on the number of characters in the code type you are using. This code can be used later to
group points with the same code for plotting or listing points. When Point Codes are off, you will not be prompted
to enter the point codes.
Automatic Point Numbering ON If the Automatic Point Numbering ON checkbox is checked, as points
are created they will automatically be assigned the next available point ID in the current coordinate le. If
Automatic Point Numbering is OFF, as points are created you will be prompted to enter their ID. If you enter a
point number that already exists in the coordinate le, you will be asked if you want to overwrite the existing point
or enter a new point ID.
Scale Factors section
Input: This allows you to set a scale factor that will be applied to all entered distances and coordinate values during
any C&G feature.
Output: This allows you set a scale factor that will be applied to all output. For example, if this factor is
et to 2.0 and the inversed distance between two points is 100.00, the output will show the distance as 200.00.
Apply Scale to Elevation If the Apply Scale to Elevation checkbox is checked, the Input and Output Scale
Factors will be applied to elevation values.
Apply Scale to Coordinate Listings If the Apply Scale to Coordinate Listings checkbox is checked, the Input
and Output Scale Factors will be applied to coordinates listed at the command line and in the print le using the
C&G feature in menu item CG-Survey > Management > List.
Units section
Angles: Choose either the Degrees or Gradians radio buttons.
Distance: Choose Feet, Meters or Metres from the list.
Note: The only difference in the two metric choices is the spelling used for output.
Foot Denition: Choose either the US or International radio button.
Location section
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1319
State: specify the state in which the current survey was done.
This is only used in the following features:
Solar Observation
NAD83 (to and from longitude and latitude)
Hemisphere: Hemisphere can be set to Northern or Southern.
This is only used in the following features:
Solar Observation (Calculating the Convergency Angle)
NAD83 (to and from Longitude and Latitude - UTM only)
Miscellaneous section
Azimuth/Bearing: Allows you choose between Bearing and Azimuth for all direction input and output.
Azimuth Direction: This sets all azimuth input and output to either North or South azimuth.
Curve Denition The Curve Denition can be set to Arc or Chord.
Arc: the most commonly used denition in roadway design. When units are set to Feet, the degree of curve is the
central angle of a 100 foot arc length.
Chord: is most commonly used in railroad work. When units are set to Feet, the degree of curve is the central angle
of a 100 foot chord.
When a curve is added to a Curve Table or the results of calculations are listed at the command line and in the print
le, the displayed information will reect the Curve Denition setting.
Coordinate Order: Can be set to North-East or East-North. This sets the order in which coordinates are
displayed and input.
Allows you to specify the rounding settings for various types of numbers for the print le text and for the drawing
text.
Note: All internal calculations are performed with double precision accuracy. Only the output is rounded.
When you select the Rounding tab , you will see the following dialog:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1320
The Rounding dialog has a section for At Command Line and in Print File rounding settings and a section
for Text in Drawing rounding settings. Both sections have similar settings but they apply to different output. At
Command Line and in Print File rounding settings effect all output to the command line and the print le. Text
in Drawing rounding settings effect numeric text placed in the drawing.
Angular precision can be specied to the nearest:
Angles in Degrees or Angles in Grads
0.1 Second 0.000001 Grad
Second 0.00001 Grad
5 Seconds 0.0001 Grad
15 Seconds 0.001 Grad
30 Seconds 0.01 Grad
Minute 0.1 Grad
Distance precision can be specied to the nearest:
Foot (or Meter) 0 (no decimal places)
Tenth of Foot (or Meter) 0.1
Hundredth Foot (or Meter) 0.12
Thousandth Foot (or Meter) 0.123
Ten Thousandth Foot (or Meter) 0.1234
Hundred Thousandth Foot (or Meter) 0.12345
The Graphics tab settings apply only to CGSurvey features that draw points, lines, etc. to the drawing. When you
select the Graphics tab, the following dialog will appear:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1321
Point Drawing section
Auto Point Plot ON if the Auto Point Plot ON checkbox is checked, points symbols will be drawn as they are
calculated and saved to the coordinate le by the various C&G features.
Use Description table for point plotting parameters When this checkbox is checked the description(s) for
a given point in the coordinate le will be matched with the descriptions in the description table. If a match is found
then the description table information will be used to set the layer, symbol type, symbol size, and label positions of
each point plotted. If no descriptions in the description table match then the layer will be set to the layer specied
in the Default layer for codes or descriptions not found in description table edit box and the other settings
specied in the Drawing Settings tab will be used (see below).
If the Use Description table for point plotting parameters checkbox is not checked, the points, symbols and
labels will be plotted on the Current Layer as set in the CAD layer manager.
Default layer for codes or descriptions not found in description table: When the Use description table
for point plotting parameters checkbox is checked, any points plotted that do not have a description or having a
description that does not match any of those in the description table, will be plotted on the layer you have specied
as the default layer in this edit box.
Use Elevation as Z Value: If this checkbox is checked, objects (lines/arcs/points) will be placed in 3-D
space with the point elevation serving as the Z-value. C&G features, such as intersects and inverse, ignore the
Z-value of lines and arcs. If you inverse a 3-D line, the 2-D distance between the points will be shown.
If the Use Elevation as Z Value checkbox is not checked, all objects will be placed at zero elevation.
Note: 3D lines can cause problems in trimming or editing using CAD functions. 3D lines do not intersect if their
elevations are different. Thus two lines may appear to intersect in plan view but do not actually intersect in 3D space.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1322
Line Drawing section
Auto Line Plot ON If the Auto Line Plot ON checkbox is checked, those features that create points that can be
interpreted as a line will draw C&G lines.
The following features can draw lines and curves as the points are calculated:
Quick Traverse (not to side shots)
Curve Between Tangents and Tangent Between Curves
Bearing and Hinge/Radial Area-Cut-Off
Roadways (Right of Way/Easements and Intersections/Cul-de-Sacs)
Middle Ordinate Solution
Best Fit
Line Stop Size This allows you to terminate C&G lines at the edge of the point symbols plotted. If you are
drawing lines and/or arcs with a C&G feature that draws lines and you want the line to end before crossing into the
symbol, then set the Line Stop Size to the symbol size.
Note: If you set the line stop to something other than 0.0, the line that is drawn is shorter than the actual
distance beteween the coordinate points. So if you wish to check the true distance of that line, use the Query
command (on the Draw menu) rather than the CAD LIST command.
Text section
Arc Annotation Prex
This is used when annotating arcs when drawing calls. This should be set to the desired prex for arc length
annotation.
Example:
''Arc ='' annotation prex results in the annotation being
Arc = 256.32
''A ='' annotation prex results in the annotation being
A = 256.32
Radius Annotation Prex
This is used when annotating arcs when drawing calls. Similar to Arc Annotation Prex, This should be set to the
desired prex for radius annotation.
Leading Space in Bearing
When the Leading Space in Bearing checkbox is checked the bearing text has a space between the N or S and the
degrees text (eg, N 85&ordm;15'30''E). When left unchecked there is not space (eg, N85&ordm;15'30''E).
Miscellaneous section
Process Descriptions before Displaying:
This setting will allows you to specify how descriptions are processed prior to being displayed. It allows the
removal of all underscores ( ) and/or mapping codes. No change is made to the data in the coordinate le.
C&G Snap can be set to:
Off: No snap.
POINTS - Snap to C&G point symbols and labels.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1323
LINES - Snap to C&G lines.
POINTS-LINES - Snap to C&G points and lines.
All C&G functions will use this setting when you are picking point symbols, point labels, lines, and arcs on the
screen.
Curve Fit Type
When contouring, the contour lines that are created can be smoothed using one of the following methods:
No Fit - Straight line segments between the points.
Fit - Use the CAD program's standard t method. Contours may not pass through point symbols having the same
elevation as the contour.
C&G Spline - Use the C&G Spline Fit algorithm. Contours are guaranteed to pass through point symbols having
the same elevation as the contour.
These settings are specic to traverse raw data entry using the CGEditor and the traverse reduction and quick
traverse features.
Raw section
Raw Angle Input
This allows you to specify how you want to specify angles when inputting raw traverse data. The options are:
Angle, Azimuth or Deection Angle.
Adjustment Method
You have the following choices for traverse adjustment:
None
Least Squares (NOT network least squares - see SurvNET for that)
Find Bad Angle
Compass
Transit
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1324
Crandall
Note: See the Reduce Traverse feature help section for more details on these methods.
If the Backsight Distance ON checkbox is checked and you entering raw traverse data, you must specify
the distance to the backsight at each instrument point. These distances will then be used during the reduction
process.
If the Adjust Angles ON checkbox is checked, angles will automatically be balanced prior to traverse ad-
justment. Angular error will be spread equally between all points. Closure information prior to and after balancing
will be displayed at the command line.
If the Balance Elevations ON checkbox is checked, the elevations in a 3-D traverse will automatically be
balanced during traverse adjustment. The elevations are adjusted proportional to the length of the traverse legs.
Tolerances section
Horz. Angle.
When comparing multiple angles for a given foresight point from a given instrument point and backsight point, this
value will be used as the maximum acceptable angular error. If the difference between any two angles is greater than
the acceptable limit, the reduction process will pause and showing the instrument point ID and angle measurements
will be displayed at the command line.
Horz. Dist.
When comparing multiple horizontal distance componants or measurements to a single foresight point, this value
will be used as the maximum acceptable distance difference. If the difference between any two distances is greater
than this limit, the reduction process will pause and the instrument point ID and the involved distances will be
displayed at the command line.
The horizontal distance tolerance is also used as the maximum allowable difference between the two calcu-
lated curve radii at the curve end points. If the difference between the distances from the radius point to the PC
point and the radius point to the PT point is greater than this value, the calculations will be terminated with an
appropriate error message.
Note: for curves, if this value is set unreasonably low, many curves will produce this error message. If you
change the setting to a larger, more reasonable value, the curve can be recalculated and generated without error.
Vert. Dist.
This value is the maximum acceptable elevation difference. It is used when comparing multiple vertical distance
components/measurements to a given foresight point from a given instrument point. If the difference between the
distances is greater than this limit, the reduction process will pause, showing you the instrument point ID and the
involved distances. This only applies to the reduction of a 3-D traverse.
Quick section
Quick Angle Input
This species the default angle input mode for the Quick Traverse Feature. This can be changed when using the
Quick Traverse feature.
The angle input modes are:
Angle
Deection Angle
Azimuth
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1325
Bearing
If the Print Traverse Input ON checkbox is checked, all raw input data will be displayed along with the
traverse output. If this checkbox is not checked, only the traverse output will be printed.
If the Vertical Angles ON checkbox is checked you will be asked to enter vertical angles with the traverse
distances. This can be changed when using the Quick Traverse feature.
Curve Bearing
This denes how non-tangent curve bearings will be input and can be set to either Chord or Radius depending on
how you wish to dene the orientation of non tangent curves.
When set to Chord and you are traversing around a non-tangent curve, you must enter the bearing or angle from
the PC to the PT.
When set to Radius and you are traversing around a non-tangent curve, you must enter the bearing or angle from
the PC to the radius point.
Curve Tables and printed calculations will reect this setting.
Traverse Mode
Sets the default traverse mode for the Quick Traverse feature.
It can be set to Traverse or Side Shot mode .
Traverse mode: as a point is created the new point is occupied and backsight the previously occupied point.
Side Shot mode: as a point is created the currently occupied point and backsight will be held.
Common section
Instrument Height (HI)
The value entered for the HI can be either the actual instrument Elevation or the distance from the ground to the
instrument (Plus up). In the latter case the elevation of the point the instrument is over is read from the coordinate
le and the instrument height is added to it to determine the instrument elevation.
Vertical Angle Input - can be set to one of the following, depending on the type of instrument used:
Zenith: Zero angle up
Nadir: Zero angle down
Transit: Zero angle level
Note: If set to Transit, vertical can either be full circle (0 to 360 degrees; 0 to 400 grads) or positive angle up and
negative angle down.
EDM Offset
Depending on where your EDM is mounted, enter the vertical difference between the center of the scope of
the instrument and the center of the beam of the EDM (+ if EDM is above; - if EDM is below). Do not use an
EDM Offset for scope mounted EDM's. This offset should only be applied to yoke or azimuth base mounted EDM's.
Note: Use of the EDM offset allows you to turn your vertical angles directly to the target. A correction
will be applied to all distances and elevations computed from eld entries in the Traverse and Quick Traverse
routines. Most total stations today have the EDM coincident with the center line of instrument scope. In this case
the EDM Offset should be set to zero.
Note: When an offset is entered, it is used on all distances in the traverse. If some distances are chained,
the correction will also be applied. These shots should be reduced separately with no EDM Offset.
Distance Components - This option can be set to allow either Slope Distance/Vertical Angle or Horizon-
tal Distance/Vertical Distance data entry.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1326
If the Curvature and Refraction ON check box is checked, the horizontal and vertical components of all
slope distances are corrected for curvature and refraction. If your EDM does not already make this correction, it is
recommended that this correction be used when carrying elevations using vertical angles and distances. This tab
allows you to specify the name and format of the print le and how it is viewed.
Print File Name section
The nal results of calculations and other actions performed during C&G command execution will always be
printed to this ASCII text le. New information is always appended to this le and never overwritten. The default
le name is PRINTER.TXT. It is recommended that you use a name that corresponds with the project you are
working on. This way you will have a record of all calculations throughout the project. Use the New Print File
button to specify a new print le to create. Use the Existing Print File button to specify an existing le.
Print File Viewer section
You can choose to use Microsoft Notepad or Wordpad when viewing or printing the print le. If you want the
viewer to always come up full screen, check the Force print le viewer to use full screen checkbox.
Point Conguration section
If the Headings On checkbox is checked, a heading is printed to the command line and/or the print le any time
multi-line output is generated by a C&G feature. The heading information contains date, time, feature name,
coordinate le name and input and output scale factors. The header is repeated when the number of lines output by
a function exceed the value set for Lines Per Page.
If the Display On checkbox is checked, the output from CGSurvey features is printed at the command line.
Regardless of this setting, output is always sent to the print le.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1327
Printable Columns
Use the edit box to specify the maximum number of characters per line to be written to the print le. This allows
you to t the text to the printed page given the font and paper your uses. The acceptable values are 80 through 255.
Lines Per Page
This allows you to set the number of lines that will be placed on a page. If headings are on, a header will be printed
to the print le and the command line each time this number of lines is exceeded.
On this tab you can specify the path to your data les. The data path is the default directory for le dialogs used in
various C&G commands that open or save les.
You can type the path in the Data Path edit box or you can use the Browse... button to use a le dialog to
specify the data path. On this tab you can specify
drawing scale, text size, point symbol type and its format, and point symbol layers.
Drawing Scale section
This sets the horizontal scale. For example, if units are set to feet and you want a horizontal scale of 1'' = 20' then
type 20 in the Horizontal (ft/in) edit box. For metric units, if you want a scale of 1m = 500m then enter 500 in the
Horizontal (m/m) edit box
Text Size section
Allows you to set the text size for any text drawn using a CGSurvey feature. The text size is the size of the text as
measured on the plotted or printed page. It must be specied in inches if using feet or centimeters if using meters.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1328
Point Symbol Conguration section
Current Symbol section
This section allows you to control the symbol, its size and how it is scaled (called units here).
Type of Point to be Drawn: There are two point symbol libraries to select symbols from, the C&G and the
Carlson symbol libraries.
Using symbols from either the C&G or Carlson symbol library both allow you to use all of the associated C&G
features for plotting, sorting, line stops, attribute information, selection, etc. If you choose to use Carlson symbols
the Label Position section of the dialog changes somewhat. This will be discussed later in this section.
Select Symbol button
Choosing Select Symbol button will bring up the Choose Point Symbol dialog:
Use this dialog to choose the active point symbol. You do this by highlighting the symbol name in the list on the
left or by clicking the symbol image on the right. Symbols CG00 and CGDCA are compatible with LDT/LDD
points. The CGDCA symbol is the correct size for a true LDT/LDD point, and should be used if you are also using
LDT/LDD.
Symbol Size and Units
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1329
There are two options available for specifying symbol size: (Height) X (Scale) and Literal
If Units are set to (Height)x(Scale), then the symbol size entered here is specied as plotted page units (inches or
centimeters - depending on whether feet or meters are being used). In this case, regardless of scale, the symbol will
always be the same size when plotted. In example above, the symbol is set to .300''. At 30 scale the symbol height
will be 9 feet in the drawing itself, at 40 scale it would be 12 feet. Thus, in either case, its plotted size will be 0.3
inches.
If Units are set to Literal then the symbol will be drawn in the drawing at the size specied. This setting is often
used for inserts such as title blocks, north arrows, company logos, standard notes, etc.
Label Layer Control section
If you check the Separate Layers check box, you can assign each point label to a specic layer. This allows you
to see only the labels you want by turning different layers on or off. If this checkbox is not checked, all the point
labels will be drawn on the current layer.
Label Position section
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1330
C&G Labels:
If the label location is set to 0 <Off> that label will not be displayed when a point is plotted. Only the elevation
is allowed to be at the Center position. If you select Center for the elevation label, the whole number portion of
the elevation will be on the left side of the insertion point of the symbol and the decimal portion on the right side
(example: the elevation 987.23 will be drawn as 987+23, where the plus sign represents the symbol).
If Plot Radial is checked, the point labels will be plotted radially from the symbol's center. If not selected,
point labels will be plotted horizontally.
Label Position for Carlson Symbols
In the Point Symbol Conguration section of the dialog you have the option to plot C&G symbols or Carlson
symbols. When the Carlson symbols are used, the Label Position portion of the dialog box changes to display the
Carlson method for dening label positions (see below). These ''label positions'' are actually pre-dened blocks
with a predened location and orientation for the attributes (or labels). There are ten blocks available. The available
blocks are identied by the numbers 0 through 9.
Note: when Carlson point symbols are used, the Sample drawing is only approximate - the actual layout
will look slightly different when drawn.
Label Format section
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1331
Label Height: this is the text size in inches/centimenters when Units are set to (Height) x (Scale) or feet/meters
when Units are Literal. The Label Height is used for all three labels: point number, point description, and point
elevation.
Number of description characters to show: Depending on the type of coordinate le being used, here
may be as many as 255 characters in the description eld. This option allows you to truncate the description at a
given number of characters.
Elevation: This sets how many characters are displayed before and after the decimal point. On a at piece
of property 2 placed before the decimal may be enough information. On a steep mountain site 3 or 4 decimal places
may be needed.
Topography tab
NOTE: The information on this tab is used for items on the CGTopo menu which has limited functionality and does
not allow you to create a TIN. You must use the Carlson features to make, use and manipulate TINs (see Surface
menu). These settings may be used when opening a CG-SURVEY for DOS drawing (
*
.PL1) when it has topo data
in it.
The items on this tab allow you to specify contouring parameters and Tin, countour and other topographic
entity layer specications.
This dialog allows you to specify the drawing layers for the various topographic entities, as well as set various
parameters for the creation of a new surface and placement of contour elevation labels.
Layer Names section
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1332
In this part of the dialog you can specify the layers for the various previously existing topographic entities found
in the drawing. These allow you to label contours and, if necessary, remove contours and/or labels from the drawing.
TIN Layer: Species the layer on which triangulation network lines or TIN are found.
Main Contour Layer: Layer on which main contours are found.
Intermediate Contour Layer: Layer on which intermediate contours are found.
Main Contour Label Layer - Elevation labels for the main or index contour lines will be drawn on this layer.
Intermediate Contour Label Layer - Elevation labels for the intermediate contour lines will be drawn on this layer.
Note: The last two Contour Label Layer names will be used when labeling contours.
TIN and Contour Parameters section
TIN Interpolation Range: The interpolation range determines which points will be joined to form the triangles in
the TIN. (MAY be used converting a CG-SURVEY for DOS PL1.)
Contour Interval: (MAY be used converting a CG-SURVEY for DOS PL1.).
Labeling Parameters section
Label Interval: When labeling contours, only the contours falling on this interval will be labeled. For example, if
you enter a 10' interval, only the contours at 900, 910, 920, etc will be labeled.
Label-Contour Separation Distance: This is the space between each end of the elevation label text and
the contour line being labeled. A separation distance that is too small can make the elevation label hard to read,
while a separation distance that is too large may not be visually pleasing.
This tab gives you several options for specing the call or annotation format
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1333
Desired Componants section
The of the dialog allows you to specify what you want displayed for a given call and whether the call text is
stacked. The text in perentheses indicate the call items for a curve.
Format and Location section
The allows you to specify whether the call is placed Parallel to Line, Perpendicular to Line or requires the user
to pick the location for horizontal call text (At Crosshair). If the Place Calls to Right of Line checkbox is
checked the calls will be placed on the right side as determined by standing at the rst point picked or the rst point
in a C&G line and looking toward the second point. You may also specify whether to use the foot symbol when
units are feet. If bearings are being used, you may specify whether to limit bearing text to NW,NE only or SW, SE
only or <no preference>.
Layer name for call text:
Specify the layer the call text is to be drawn on.
Automated Placement of Calls on Specied Layers section
This section of the dialog sets the parameters for a feature that allows you to place calls on C&G and/or CAD lines
and/or polylines found on specied layers. To use this option, check the Automate Placement of Calls checkbox.
Choose one or more layer names from the list of layer names. You can specify multiple layers by holding the Ctrl
key down while picking the layers to search.
In the Types of Lines to Annotate section, check the types of entities you wish to annotate.
Example Call section
The of the tab allows you to see a good approximation of how the call will look when drawn.
OK - click the OK button to save all the settings and close the dialog.
Cancel - click the Cancel button to close the dilaog and discard any changes.
Set As Default
Click this button to save the settings to the CGSURVEY.OPT le. These settings will then be used whenever a new
CGSurvey drawing is created.
Note: You can set the default settings and not dffect any of the settings for the current drawing by clicking the
Cancel button after clicking the Set As Default button.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg options
Prerequiste: None
Copy Entity to Layer
This feature allows you to easily copy a single entity or group of entities from one layer to another.
Choose entities to copy:
Select entities: use the standard CAD selection methods to choose one or more entities to be copied. Once you
have selected the entities press Enter.
Next use the Layer Name dialog to choose the layer to copy the entities to:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1334
Prompts
Choose entities to copy:
Select entities: use the standard CAD selection methods to choose one or more entities to be copied.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg copyent
Prerequiste: None
Layer Control
These routines allow you to freeze, thaw, restore, turn on and off, and set the current layer without having to open
the CAD layer manager.
Pick Layers to Freeze
This feature allows you to freeze layers by picking entities that are on layers you wish to freeze. You may pick as
many entities as you wish.
Prompts
Select object on layer to FREEZE.
Select entities: choose objects on the layers you wish to freeze. Press Enter when done.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools > Layer Control
Keyboard Command: cg lfreeze
Prerequiste: None
Pick Layers to Thaw
This feature allows you to thaw frozen layers by picking entities that are on a layer you wish to freeze. All frozen
layers are turned on while you pick the entities. You may pick as many entities as you wish.
Prompts
Select object(s) on layers to keep THAWED.
Select entities: choose objects on layers you wish to thaw. Press Enter when done.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools > Layer Control
Keyboard Command: cg lthaw
Prerequiste: None
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1335
Freeze ALL Layers
Choosing this menu item causes all layers, except the current layer, to be frozen.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools > Layer Control
Keyboard Command: cg alfreeze
Prerequiste: None
Thaw ALL Layers
Choosing this menu item causes all layers to be thawed.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools > Layer Control
Keyboard Command: cg althaw
Prerequiste: None
Pick Layers to turn Off
This feature allows you to turn off layers by picking entities that are on layers you wish to turn off. You may pick
as many entities as you wish.
Prompts
Select object on layer to turn OFF. choose objects on layers you wish to turn off. Press Enter when done.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools > Layer Control
Keyboard Command: cg loff
Prerequiste: None
Pick Layers to turn On
This feature allows you to turn on layers by picking entities that are on layers you wish to turn on. All layers will be
turned on during the command to allow you to pick the desired entities. You may pick as many entities as you wish.
Prompts
Select object(s) on layers to keep ON.
Select entities: choose objects on layers you wish to turn on. Press Enter when done.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools > Layer Control
Keyboard Command: cg lon
Prerequiste: None
Turn OFF ALL Layers
Choosing this menu item causes all layers, except the current layer, to be turned off.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools > Layer Control
Keyboard Command: cg aloff
Prerequiste: None
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1336
Turn ON ALL Layers
Choosing this menu item causes all layers to be turned on.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools > Layer Control
Keyboard Command: cg alon
Prerequiste: None
Pick Current Layer
This feature allows you to pick an entity that is on a layer you wish to make the current layer.
Prompts
Set Current Layer - Select entity on the desired layer: pick the entity which is on the layer you want to made the
current layer.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools > Layer Control
Keyboard Command: cg lset
Prerequiste: None
Elevations
If this menu item is checked, then point elevations are ON. If it is unchecked then point elevations are OFF.
When point elevations are ON and the Enter Elev. radio button is set on the General tab of the C&G Op-
tions dialog, you will be prompted to enter an elevation when new points are saved to the coordinate le.
When point elevations are ON and the Calculate Elev. radio button is set you will not be prompted to enter an ele-
vation. When point elevations are OFF, no elevation is stored when coordinate points are saved to the coordinate le.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg tog elev
Prerequiste: None
Descriptions
If this menu item is checked, then point descriptions are ON. If it is unchecked then point descriptions are OFF.
Generally, when point descriptions are on, you will be prompted to enter a description when new points are saved to
the coordinate le. Also, when descriptions are ON, the description eld will be enabled when editing coordinate
point values.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg tog desc
Prerequiste: None
Point Code
If this menu item is checked, then point codes are ON. If it is unchecked then point codes are OFF. Point codes are
unique to C&G coordinate les that can be used to lter or group points in various C&G features.
When point codes are ON, you will be prompted to enter a point code when new points are saved to the co-
ordinate le. When point codes are OFF, no code is stored when coordinate points are saved to the coordinate le.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1337
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg tog code
Prerequiste: None
Auto Point Number
If the Auto Point Number menu item is checked then automatic point numbering is ON . This means that, as points
are created they will automatically be assigned the next available point ID in the current coordinate le and will be
saved without any user interaction.
When auto point numbering is OFF, as points are created you will be asked to enter the point ID. If you en-
ter a point ID that already exists in the coordinate le, you will be asked if you want to overwrite the existing point
or enter a new point ID.
See also: Automatic Point Numbering ON checkbox on the General tab of the C&G Options dialog.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg tog auto num
Prerequiste: None
Auto Point Plot
If the Auto Point Plot menu item is checked, when a point is calculated and stored in the coordinate le it will be
plotted in the drawing.
See also: the Auto Point Plot ON checkbox on the Graphics tab of the C&G Options dialog.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg tog auto pt plot
Prerequiste: None
Auto Lines
If the Auto Lines menu item is checked, automatic line plotting is ON. When automatic line plotting is ON, the
following COGO features will automatically draw lines and curves using the newly calculated points as they are
saved to the coordinate le:
Quick Traverse - but lines will not be drawn to side-shots
Curve Between Tangents and Tangent Between Curves
Bearing Area Cut-Off
Hinge/Radial Area Cut-Off
Roadway (Right-of-way and all Cul-de-Sacs and Intersections features)
Middle Ordinate Solution for curves
Best Fit
See also: Auto Line Plot ON checkbox on the Graphics tab of the C&G Options dialog.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg tog auto lines
Prerequiste: None
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1338
CG Snap
C&G Snaps are object snaps that are active only during a C&G command. These snaps allow you to pick point
symbols and/or C&G lines by clicking near them. They work similar to the CAD snaps but only snap to C&G
entities. The C&G snaps work in conjunction with the normal CAD snaps but, when a C&G command is run,
the CAD snaps are automatically turned off at the start of the command and the C&G snaps become active. In
almost all C&G features you have the option of turning the CAD snaps back on if desired. When both the CAD and
C&G snaps are on, the CAD snaps are applied rst to deternine the x and y screen coordinates of the point on the
appropriate CAD entity; these coordinates are than passed to C&G and they are used to apply the C&G snaps and
nd the nearest appropriate C&G entity.
Note: If CAD snaps are turned on during a C&G command and if C&G snaps are also on, a double snap-
ping process occurs. Because of this double snapping, it is recommended that when C&G Snaps are on, CAD snaps
should be left off during C&G commands.
Note: If snapping is desired and C&G snaps are off, then the CAD snaps must be turned on each time a
C&G command is run.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: None
Prerequiste: None
Off
This turns off all C&G snaps.
Note: This setting applies ONLY to C&G features and is not directly supported by whatever CAD software
you are using.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg snap off
Prerequiste: None
Points
This allows you to pick near and snap to a C&G point symbol whenever a point ID is required for a C&G feature.
Note: This setting applies ONLY to C&G features and is not honored by whatever CAD software you are
using.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg snap points
Prerequiste: None
Lines
This allows you to pick near and snap to a C&G line whenever a bearing, distance, or pair of points is required for a
C&G feature.
Note: This setting applies ONLY to C&G features and is not honored by whatever CAD software you are
using.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg snap lines
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1339
Prerequiste: None
Points and Lines
This allows you to pick near and snap to a C&G pont or line whenever a point ID, bearing, distance, or pair of
points is required for a C&G feature.
Note: This setting applies ONLY to C&G features and is not directly supported by whatever CAD software
you are using.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg snap points lines
Prerequiste: None
Zoom to Point ID
This feature pans the drawing in order to place the location of the point ID you specify at the center of the screen. It
is not necessary to plot the point symbol prior to using this feature.
Prompts
Point ID of point to zoom to: specify the point ID of a point in the current coordinate le.
The drawing will be panned to center the point and a ''rubber band'' line will extend from the point to your
cursor.
Stopping to view point [View another/Done] <D>: Press ''D'' and Enter or just Enter to clear the rubber
band line and return to the CAD command line. Press ''V'' and enter to specify another point ID.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: cg zoom pt
Prerequiste: coordinate le
Windows Calculator
Selecting this menu item will bring up the standard Microsoft Windows calculator.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey > Tools
Keyboard Command: 'cg cal
Prerequiste: None
CGEditor
CGEditor
The CGEditor is an integral part of preparing les for use for C&G applications. The CGEditor is a very powerful
tool. You can open multiple data les of any supported le type and edit the les as needed. The CGEditor has a full
complement of tools for searching and replacing and navigating within a le. It will also allow you to cut or copy
records from one le and paste them into another le in order to merge les, move data between phases of a job, etc.
Types of data les supported
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1340
The CGEditor can create and/or edit four types of data les used by CGSurvey and Carlson.
Raw Data Files
Raw data les contain information pertaining to a eld traverse. Raw data les are typically downloaded from the
data collector and converted to the C&G raw data le format. These les have the extension .cgr.
Map Check Files
Map Check les contain bearing, distance and curve information and are typically used to calculate the closure of a
deed description. These les have the extension .cgm.
Cross Section Files
Cross Section les contain one or more cross sections identied by their station along the alignment. Each cross
section record has the percent grade dened for its left and right slopes. Following the ''Station'' record are several
''Point'' records containing the elevations and offsets of the points along the cross section. Cross section les consist
of a pair of les; the main data le has the extension .cew and the index le has the extension .cex.
Template Files
Template les are merely cross section les that represent a standard cross section and can be used to generate
other cross section les. However, unlike cross section les, template les use an integer ID instead of a station to
uniquely identify each template. Like cross section les, the percent grade is dened for the left and right slopes
of each template and there are a set of ''Point'' records specifying the template elevation at a given offset. The
centerline elevation at offset 0.00 is typically set to 0.00. Template les consist of a pair of les; the main data le
has the extension .ctp and the index le has the extension .ctx.
NOTE: The CGEditor program sold as part of the stand alone
version of SurvNET can only be used to edit raw data les.
The CGEditor can be used to create new les or edit existing les. It uses a multi-document interface, so you can
edit or view several les of several different types at the same time. The following sections will describe how to
open and edit les.
Opening Existing Files
To open an existing le, click on the File menu then choose Open in the submenu. You can then use the Open le
dialog box to browse to the desired le. Check to make sure the Files of Type: is set correctly. Click on the desired
le to highlight it, then click the Open button.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1341
Creating Files
To create a new le, use the File menu and choose New and then click on the type of le you wish to create:
C&G Raw File
C&G Mapcheck File
C&G Cross Section File
C&G Template File
Coordinate File
Point Group File
After clicking the menu item for the type of new le you wish to create, a temporary le is created with no
data in it and a spreadsheet-like window will open. At this point more menus items will be added to the main menu
and, as you will see, the Add menu itemwill allowyou to insert data rows (or records) where you can enter your data.
NOTE: The CGEditor program sold as part of the stand alone version of SurvNET can only be used to edit
raw data les.
The CGEditor Menus
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1342
File Menu
Many of the following File menu items will be familiar to experienced Windows users:
New: Allows you to create a new le.
Open (Ctrl + O): Brings up the Open File dialog box so you can select and edit an existing le.
Close (Ctrl + E): Closes the current data le. If more than one le is open, the le that is currently being worked
on will be closed.
Save (Ctrl + S): Saves the current le.
Save As: Allows the user to save the current le to a le having a different name.
Print (Ctrl + P): Allows the user to print a copy of the currently active le.
Print Preview (Ctrl + W): Display a preview of the le about to be printed.
Print Setup (Ctrl + u): Printer selection as well as page size and layout.
Exit (Ctrl + Q): Exit the CGEditor application.
Edit Menu
As with the File menu, the Edit menu is typical of most Windows programs.
Most of the items in the Edit menu require that either a eld within a record, or the entire record itself, be selected
(highlighted) before clicking the menu item. To select a an individual data item (or eld) in a data record simply
click the eld. To select a record (row) simply click in the rst eld (Type or Row#) for the desired record.
Undo (Ctrl + Z): Undoes the most recent editing action. (you need not have anything highlighted for this item)
Redo (Ctrl + Y): Reverses the most recent undo action. (you need not have anything highlighted for this item)
Cut (Ctrl + X): Cuts the currently highlighted cell or record. You may then use the paste command to put the cut
cell or record in another location.
Copy (Ctrl + C): Copies the currently highlighted cell or record. You may then use the paste command to put the
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1343
copied cell or record in another location.
Paste (Ctrl + V): Allows you to paste any previously cut or copied cell or record to the currently highlighted
location.
If entire records are being pasted and only a eld is currently highlighted, the pasted records will be inserted above
the current record. However, if one or more entire records are currently highlighted, the pasted records will replace
the highlighted records.
Delete (<Delete> key): Deletes the currently highlighted eld or record.
Select All (Ctrl + A): Selects all the records in the current data le.
Clear (Ctrl + L): Removes the data from the selected eld or record.
Add Menu
The Add menu allows you to add a record to the current le. The Add menu item appends the record to the end of
the le. The types of records that can be added will depend on the type of le being edited, these record types will
be described in more detail in later sections for each type of le you can editor.
Insert Menu
The Insert menu allows you to insert a record above the current record.
The types of records that can be inserted will depend on the type of le being edited, these record types will be
described in more detail in later sections for each type of le you can edit.
View Menu
The View menu allows you to turn tool bars on or off. The items listed in the View menu will differ for different
types of les. The individual tool bars will be discussed in the sections pertaining to the various types of les that
can be edited.
Standard Tool Bar
The above gure shows the standard tool bar. The Standard toolbar is the same for all types of les. It allows you
to create all the various les that can be edited by the CGEditor. It allows you to open and save les. It allows you
to cut, copy and paste and undo and redo as well as print the current le.
Settings
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1344
The Settings Menu will differ depending on the type of le being edited.
But generally contains the settings for the le and the record colors.
Tools
The Tools Menu contains a variety of spread sheet tools, such as nd, nd next, nd and replace etc. The menu will
vary slightly for each type of data le and will be discussed in the sections pertaining to the various le types.
Windows
This menu contains many of the standard Window menu items found in other programs. It allows you to arrange
the currently open windows in several congurations. It has the added functionality of the New Window command
which allows you to have two or more views of a single le.
Traverse types
The raw data le can contain data pertaining to one or more traverses. If you will be using SurvNET to process the
data, there is no need to delineate separate traverses in the raw data le. However, if you are using the old C&G
traverse reduction program, and you want to combine more than one traverse in a raw data le, you will need to use
the special traverse code records at the beginning and end of each traverse.
There are three basic types of traverses:
Closed Loop Traverse
Closed Traverse Beginning and Ending at Known Points
Open Traverse and Side Shots
Figures 1, 2, 3 and 4 show illustrations of each of these traverse types. Below each illustration you will
also see the accompanying raw data as seen in the CGEditor.
Closed Loop
A closed loop begins and ends on the same two points as shown below in Figure 1
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1345
Figure 1
Closed Loop beginning and ending on known points
Figure 2 shows a closed traverse beginning on two known points (1 and 2) and ending on two known points (4 and
5). With this type of traverse, both a linear and angular closure can be calculated
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1346
Figure 2
Loop beginning on two known points and closing on an azimuth
Figure 3 illustrates a traverse that begins on two known points, or a single known point and a back sight azimuth,
and ends on one known point. In this case it is only possible to calculate a linear closure.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1347
Figure 3
Open Traverse
Figure 4 shows an open traverse (side shots).
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1348
Figure 4
Note: The data shown in the CGEditor views accompanying the four illustrations include instrument height (HI)
and rod height entries. However, if you have elevations turned off, these entries are optional. Also, the examples
use single distance and angle entries but multiple measurements are allowed.
In these gures each traverse has been placed in a separate raw data le. However, with the use of special
codes you can combine multiple traverses in a single raw data le.
Entering and Editing Traverse Data
In the CGEditor ''Raw Data'' refers to unadjusted eld traverse data, typically downloaded to the PC from a data
collector. C&G raw data les have the extension .CGR.
Creating or Opening a Raw Data File
To create a new le or open an existing le click on the File menu then either click on New or Open. If you click
on New, another submenu will appear, pick C&G Raw Data File. In either case you will then see a le dialog.
Browse to the directory where you wish to work and, if creating a new le, type in a le name, or, if opening an
existing le, click on a raw data le (
*
.cgr). Next, click the Save button for a new le or the Open button for an
existing le.
If you are creating a new le, an empty le will be shown in its own document window within the editor. If you
are editing an existing le, the data from the le will appear in a similar document window. It is possible to have
multiple documents open at the same time. So you could create a new le and open an existing le in the same
editing session and each would appear in its own window in the editor. You can have as many new and/or existing
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1349
les open as your project demands.
Settings
Before entering any data you should check the current settings. Click the Settings menu item then click Raw Data
File to review and/or change the current settings. (See Settings Menu section later in this section.)
Traverse Data Entry
A line or row in the raw data le is referred to as a record and each item of data in a record is referred to as a eld.
There are several types of records that you may use in a raw data le:
Instrument Point
Foresight
Foresight Tie
Reference Bearing
Coordinate Value
Standard Errors
Control
Measurement
Setup
Elevation
Scale
Loop Traverse
Closed Traverse
Open Traverse
End Traverse
Data on/off
Comment
The type of data required for each of these types of records varies. Some require no data entry and are only
''ags'' to signify the beginning or ending of a series of records, others require only one eld to be lled out, while
others require several elds of data.
Adding and Inserting new records
When creating a new le, to begin entering data you must select from the Add or Insert menus to create the rst
blank record and begin data entry. Depending on what type of record you are editing, when you press <Enter> for
the last eld in the record, the following record will be added automatically.
Note: If the Add and/or Insert toolbars are not showing, click on the View menu then click on the toolbar
you want to turn on.
When you click on one of the Add menu items or toolbar icons, an empty record is added to the end of the
le. If you click on one of the Insert menu items or toolbar icons, an empty record is inserted above the currently
active record or eld. To make a record the currently active record, just click on one of its elds.
Moving from eld to eld:
While entering data, to move to the next eld, press the Enter or the Tab key. To move to the preceding eld press
the Esc key or both the Shift and Tab keys at the same time.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1350
Insert and Add menus
Instrument Point records
The rst record of a raw data le is often an instrument point. Add or insert a blank record using the
menus or toolbars. Fill in the following elds in the new instrument point record:
Inst. Point:
Enter the point ID of the instrument point.
Inst. Height (or HI):
Enter the instrument height. This may be either the distance from the IP on the ground (''Plus-up'') or the actual
elevation of the instrument, depending on how the data is to be reduced. This eld will only be active if elevations
are on. (See the Settings section in the Entering and Editing Traverse Data section of this chapter). If elevations are
ON and you leave this eld BLANK (zero is a valid height), all measurements taken a this setup will be considered
2D and no elevations will be calculated.
Backsight:
Enter the point ID for the backsight.
Rod Height:
Enter the rod height. This eld will only be active if elevations are on. (See the Settings section in the Entering and
Editing Traverse Data section of this chapter).
Horz. Angle:
Enter the instrument's initial horizontal angle reading at the backsight. When doing an azimuth traverse, no entry is
required here.
Note: on doubled angles: Doubled angles require 2 Instrument Point records. Each new instrument setup
requires a 0 to the back sight. The rst angle to the foresight is the single angle. This angle is locked into the gun
and the back sight is retaken. The second angle to the foresight is the doubled angle. You may also double angles to
side shots.
Slope Distance and Vertical Angle or Horizontal Distance and Vertical Distance to the Back sight:
Enter the appropriate distance and/or angle. A blank is assumed to be a zero.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1351
Note: When the Slope Dist/Vert Angle or Horz. Dist/Vert. Dist. column headings are preceded by a '''',
it indicates that a record inserted before the current record (or added after the current record) will have the same
type of distance entry mode. For example, if the heading shows Dist and Angle and you insert a record, the new
record will be in the Slope Dist/Vert Angle distance entry mode. You can change this by clicking on one of the
distance headings to remove or add the ''''. If the '''' is not present it means that the inserted or added record will
have the opposite distance entry mode than does the current record.
If, after entering the data in the last eld of a given Instrument Point record, you press the Enter or Tab key, a
Foresight record will automatically be created. If you want to change this newly created blank Foresight record
into an Instrument Point record, press the Esc key. If you are at the end of the le, pressing Esc again to delete last
blank record.
Foresight Point records
After entering the data for the last eld in the Instrument Point record, press Enter. This will cause a
Foresight record to be created below it. This record will contain the following columns (the explanations of several
of these columns are as described for Instrument Points, only thedifferences will be noted here):
Rod Height:
This column is only active if elevations are on. If elevations are ON and this eld is left BLANK, the point will be
considered 2D and an elevation will not be calculated. Horz. Angle:
Enter the instrument's horizontal angle reading at the foresight point. Enter a positive value for a clockwise angle
and a negative value for a counter-clockwise angle. This entry may be blank if you are entering only the distance
readings to the foresight.
Slope Dist./Vert Angle or Horz. Dist/Vert. Dist.:
Enter the distance data for the foresight point.
Foresight:
Enter the Point ID for the foresight point.
Code:
Enter the code for the Foresight Point. This column is only active if Code is on. (See Settings in this section.)
Description:
Enter the description for the Foresight Point. The number of characters you are allowed to enter is set in the Settings
under Description Length. If you enter an integer code here and the Translate Raw Descriptions Using Description
Table is checked in the Settings and a matching description number is found in the description table, then the
description from the table will replace the integer value you entered in the Description eld. The integer value you
entered will then be moved to the Code eld.
Note: Side shots should be placed within the block of foresights immediately following the instrument
point record for the instrument point from which they were shot. You may append side shots to the end of a traverse
le, but they must be preceded by a begin open traverse record.
Foresight Tie records
In some cases, you will need to tie to an existing traverse. You use a Foresight Tie record to do this. This
record is used in the reduction process to determine what known point you are tying into. It is necessary if there are
side shots taken at the last setup along with the tie point.
In a closed traverse, you must end a traverse by occupying a known point and turning an angle to a second known
point. The second known point is the tie point.
Reference Bearing
From Point
Enter the point ID of the from point.
To Point
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1352
Enter the point ID of the to point
Bearing (Azimuth)
Bearings must be entered in the form Qdd.mmsss where Q is the quadrant (1 = NE, 2 = SE, etc), d is whole degrees,
m is minuts, and s is seconds (you can specify seconds to the nearest .1 seconds but when you do not wish to specify
tenths of a second, a trailing is zero it is not required)
Azimuth is entered as ddd.mm.sss (when the leading d or the trailing s is zero, it is not required)
Coordinate Value record
You can use either the Add or Insert menus or toolbars to create a new coordinate record. You can then hand enter
known coordinates for a point. Coordinates can be used as a reference point during the reduction process.
Entering CoordinateValue records from a Coordinate File
Instead of hand entering coordinate points, you can insert coordinate records from an existing coordinate le.
Click the Insert menu, then pick the Coords From File menu item.
Elevation
You can specify the elevation for a given point ID using an Elevation record.
Scale
You may specify a scale factor in a Scale record. A scale factor is a decimal number. You may enter as many scale
factors as you wish. A scale factor will be used until another is encountered. Scale factors should be placed before
an Instrument Point record.
Note: Multiple Traverses: If you are combining more than one traverse in a single raw data le, you must
separate the traverses with special records. After inserting or adding a begin traverse record, you may type in a com-
ment regarding the traverse in the Comment column. You may also specify the order in which the traverses are to
be processed by using the rst part of the Comment eld. Please see Traverse reduction order below for more details.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1353
Note: If you are processing the data with SurvNET, the Scale records are ignored. SurvNET calculates
scale factors autmatically when working on State Plane coordinates.
Beginning and/or ending a Traverse
Note: If you are processing the data with SurvNET, Traverse Records (LT, OT, CT, ET) are ignored. Since SurvNET
adjusts all data simultaneously, it requires no traverse denitions.
Use Loop Traverse, Open Traverse and Closed Traverse records to delineate multiple traverses within a
single le.
Traverse reduction order
The order in which the traverses appear in the raw data le is typically not important. Traverses are pro-
cessed in the order in which they appear in the le. Traverses may be entered in a sequential order or you may
embed one traverse within another. However, if the coordinates computed from one traverse are needed for the
reduction of another traverse, then traverse order IS important. If this condition is true for a raw data le and the
traverses have NOT been placed in the raw data le in the correct order, then you need to specify a Traverse Order
Number for each traverse in the le.
Note: If you specify Traverse Order Numbers, the traverses in the le will be reduced in the order of their
Traverse Order Numbers.
Traverse Order Numbers
Each Loop Traverse, Open Traverse or Closed Traverse comment eld can contain a Traverse Order Number.
Note: The Traverse Order Number must be an integer and must appear as the rst entry in the Comment
eld separated from the remainder of the comment by a space.
For example, the comment eld of a Loop Traverse record having a Traverse Order Number of 3 should
look like this:
3 this is a comment
If any one Begin Traverse record has a Traverse Order Number, then all Begin Traverse records MUST
have a Traverse Order Number. Also, the Traverse Order Numbers in a given le must begin with 1 and continue
sequentially. You may not duplicate a Traverse Order Number for any Begin Traverse record in a given le.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Reducing a raw data le having Traverse Order Numbers that violate any of the
above specications will have unpredictable results. Error messages during the reduction process may not reect
the fact that improper traverse order numbering is actually the root cause of the problem.
Loop Traverse
This record indicates the beginning of a loop traverse. A loop traverse begins and ends at the same point. If you
wish to add a comment to identify the traverse in some way, just type it in the Comment column.
Closed Traverse
This record indicates the beginning of a closed traverse. A closed traverse ties into known points at both ends. If
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1354
you wish to add a comment to identify the traverse in some way, just type it in the Comment column.
Note: If you are running a Closed Traverse and tying into a single point, a reference azimuth must be
placed at the last instrument point if you wish to adjust the angular error.
Open Traverse
This record indicates the beginning of an open traverse. An open traverse is a group of side shots. If you wish to
add a comment to identify the traverse in some way, use the Comment column.
End Traverse
Signals the end of the data records for any of the traverse types.
Comment
Inserts a comment line above the current active line. Comment lines are ignored during processing.
Data On/Off
Data On/Off records surround a series of records that are to be ignored during processing by C&G or SurvNET.
The rst Data On/Off record encountered causes processing to skip to the next Data On/Off record. Processing
continues beginning at the record after the second Data On/Off record. This can be used when trying to isolate
errors in a traverse.
The Add and Insert Tool bars
ADD Tool Bar: add the various types of traverse records to the end of the current le.
Insert Tool Bar: insert one of the various types of traverse
records above the current record.
Notice that the only difference between the appearance of the Add Toolbar and the Insert Toolbar above is
the check mark in the lower right hand corner of each icon of the Insert Toolbar.
Toolbar Icon Explanation
IP Add/Insert an Instrument Point record
FS Add/Insert a Foresight record
FT Add/Insert a Foresight Tie record
DR Add/Insert a Reference Bearing record
S Add/Insert a Scale record
C Add/Insert a known Coordinate point record
E Add/Insert an Elevation benchmark record
LT Add/Insert a Loop Traverse record
OT Add/Insert a nOpen Traverse record
CT Add/Insert a Closed Traverse record
ET Add/Insert an End Traverse record
SE Add/Insert a Standard Error record for Network Least Squares Adjustment (SurvNET) program
Co Add/Insert a Comment record
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1355
DO Add/Insert a Data On/Off record
The Least Squares Toolbar
The ''network'' icon:
Selecting this icon will start the SurvNET Network Least Squares program. If SurvNET has already been started,
clicking this icon will bring it to the front so you can work with it. (See the Tools nenu section and the SurvNET
section for additional info.)
The ''eyeball'' icon:
This icon brings up a separate window displaying a scaled map of the current raw data le. (See Graphic View
under the View menu section)
The ''C'' icon:
Clicking this icon hides all Comment records. The Comment records still remain in the raw le, they are just not
shown on the screen. You will nd that there are some actions you cannot perform when Comments are off.
The ''No DO'' icon:
Clicking this icon removes all the Data On/Off records from the raw data le.
Status bar
When this menu item is checked, the status bar will display. The status bar is along the bottom border of the
CGEditor window. On the left side of the status bar a brief help message is displayed when you hold the cursor
over such things as menu items or toolbar icons. It also has indicators that tell you if Caps Lock or Num Lock are
turned on and displays the Row/record number that is currently active.
Graphic View
Clicking on this menu item brings up a window containing a graphic representation of the traverse. The traverse
lines and points are drawn to scale using the data from the current raw data le.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1356
The Graphic View Window
The Graphic View window shows a scaled drawing of the current raw le traverse lines and points. The
toolbar icons at the top of the window can be used to move around in the view and change its appearance. The icons
will be discussed as they appear from left to right:
Pan: This works very much like the CAD Pan command. When you click the hand icon the cursor changes to
a hand. When you click on the graphic screen the rst time you are ''grabbing'' the graphic. You can then move it to
the proper view and click a second time to ''put it down''. You may repeat this as many times as you wish in order to
move around the drawing. When done with the Pan command, click on the Pick Point icon.
Zoom In: Clicking on this icon causes the graphic image to be enlarged a preset amount. The zoom factor
cannot be congured. If you wish to see a certain area of the graphic image it is recommended that you click Zoom
Extents then use Zoom Window to view the desired area.
Zoom Out: As with Zoom In, Zoom Out reduces the image size a pre set amount. The zoom factor is not
congurable.
Zoom Extents: Zooms the image so all points and lines can be seen on the screen.
Zoom Window: Allows you to click on two diagonal corners of the rectangular area that you wish to see.
Pick Point: Use this icon to allow you to pick a point on the graphics screen in order to ''zoom'' to the rst
instance of the associated point ID found in the raw data editor window. This allows you to rapidly and conveniently
locate a given point ID in the data le. This is especially useful in trouble shooting for errors or other problems in
the data that may be more easily detected in the graphic image than when viewing the raw data. When you pick
near a plotted point on the graphics screen its point ID is noted. The raw data le is then searched for that point
ID. The active eld in the editor window is then set to the rst instance of that point ID. You can pick the same
location several times to move to the next instance of the point ID in the le. If you have a large Pick Radius set
(See Graphic Settings) or are zoomed out, picking a point may result in more than one point being found. If this
occurs, a dialog box listing the nearby points will pop up. Using the list box in the dialog choose the desired point
ID and press <Enter> or click OK to nd the point in the data le.
Clicking this icon also allows you to turn off the Pan feature when you are done panning. Brings up the
Graphic Settings dialog:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1357
The graphic settings dialog allows you to congure the appearance of the various items that may be seen on the
graphics screen.
Note: The Graphic Settings dialog is also used for the SurvNET program and thus the items on the Error
Ellipses and GPS tabs have no effect on the CGEditor Graphic View.
Points and Trav/SSs tabs
Control Points, Fixed Control Points and Floating Points and Traverse, Sideshots and Azimuths:
Specify whether the symbols, labels or lines for any of these should be shown. Also, if they are to be shown, specify
symbol and/or line color, symbol type and point ID label size.
Symbol:
Choose to represent the various types of points as a Square, Triangle or Circle using the drop down list.
Color:
For symbol or line color you can choose Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta or Yellow from the drop down list.
Size:
Specify the point symbol size.
Pt. Num.
Text: Check the check box if you want the points labeled.
Size: If the points are to be labeled, specify the label height.
Pick Radius
When you pick near a point plotted on the graphics screen, the current eld in the editor window moves to the rst
instance of that point in the current raw data le. Setting the pick radius allows you to specify how large an area
around the pick point is to be searched for raw data points drawn in the Graphics View window.
Error Ellipses tab (Has no effect in CGEditor)
GPS tab (Has no effect in CGEditor)
Refresh Graphics: Allows you to refresh the graphics to view recent changes in the raw data due to editing.
Important Note: For the Refresh Graphics to reect recent changes in the raw data le, you must save
the le itself prior to refreshing the graphics.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1358
Settings Menu
The items in the settings menu can be used to congure how the data in the raw data le will be interpreted and the
appearance of that data as seen in the CGEditor.
Raw Data File Settings dialog
When you click on the Raw Data File menu item you will see a dialog box that allows you to specify many of the
more important settings related to the currently open raw data les. You can also set up the defaults that will be
used for newly created raw data les.
Note: See the More on Default Settings subsection at the end of the Settings Menu section.
The Raw Data File Settings dialog
Current File
To view and/or edit the settings for a given le, pick the le using the Current File list box. You can also view
and/or edit the DEFAULT settings for newly created les.
File Information
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1359
This portion of the dialog allows the user to specify job or project specic information. Except for description
length, these items are for your own information and do not effect processing of the raw data.
Job: Enter any name you wish to identify the job or project.
Operator: Enter the name of the person who led the eld work.
Client: The name of the person or company for whom this work was done.
Date: Date in any format you wish to use.
Temperature: Temperature at the time the eld work was done. For your reference only. May be Celsius or
Fahrenheit.
Pressure: Atmospheric pressure at the time the eld work was done. For your reference only. May be in any units.
Book: Field book number for the eld work.
Page: Page number in the eld book.
Description Length: Specify the length of the description eld used in this le.
Set Defaults:
This button sets the items in the File Information portion of the dialog as the current default values. When a new
raw data le is created, these default settings will be used. See the More on Default Settings heading at the end of
the Settings section.
Restore Values:
This button allows you to set the values in the File Information portion of the dialog back to what they were when
you opened the Raw Data File Settings dialog.
Save As Default:
Sets the default values for the File Information portion of the dialog. These values are used as the default settings
when a new le is created. See the More on Default Settings heading at the end of the Settings section.
File Measurement Info
Angular Units: Clicking the button to the right changes the angular units from Degrees to Grads or vice versa.
Distance Units: Clicking the button to the right changes the distance units from Foot to Meter or vice versa.
Foot Denition: Clicking the button to the right changes the foot denition from US feet to International feet or
vice versa. This button is only active when Distance Units are set to Foot.
Traverse Angles: Choose one of the items in the list to specify how the traverse angles were measured:
1. Horiz. Angles
2. Azimuths
3. Deection Angles
Direction:
Specify what type of angle is used to dene the direction of a line. Clicking the button to the right changes the
direction from Bearing to Azimuth or vice versa.
Azimuth Direction:
Specify the reference direction for azimuths. Clicking the button to the right changes the azimuth direction from
North to South or vice versa. This button is only active when Direction is set to Azimuth.
Coordinate Order: Clicking the button to the right changes the Coordinate Order from North-East to East-North
or vice versa.
Vertical Reference: Pick one of the items from the list to the right to specify the reference orientation for measuring
vertical angles:
1. Zenith
2. Nadir
3. Horizontal
Set Defaults:
This button sets the items in the File Measurement Info portion of the dialog to the current default values. See the
More on Default Settings heading at the end of the Settings section.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1360
Restore Values:
This button allows you to set the values in the File Measurement Info portion of the dialog back to what they were
when you opened the Raw Data File Settings dialog.
Save As Default:
Sets the default values for the File Measurement Info portion of the dialog. These values are used as the de-
fault settings when a new le is created. See the More on Default Settings heading at the end of the Settings section.
Edit Options
Elevation Off:
Check this check box to turn off the Elevation data entry column for this le. This makes data input more convenient
since you do not have to enter any data in the Elevation column, nor do you have to tab through it. Turning off
elevations does not cause any data to be deleted from the current le.
Code Off:
Check this check box to turn off the Code data entry column for this le. This makes data input more convenient
since you will not have to enter any data in the Code column. Turning off codes does not cause any data to be
deleted from the current le.
Description Off:
Check this check box to turn off the Description data entry column for this le. This makes data input more
convenient since you will not have to enter any data in the Description column. Turning off descriptions does not
cause any data to be deleted from the current le.
Note: You can turn the Elevation, Code and Description data entry columns on or off while editing a le by
clicking on the column heading.
Distance Component:
Specify how distances are to be entered. Clicking the button to the right changes the Distance Component from
Slope Dist-Vert Angle to Horiz. Dist-Vert. Dist. or vice versa.
Translate Raw Descriptions Using Description Table:
This check box is only active if descriptions are on. If you check this check box, integer codes entered in the
Description eld will be looked up in the specied description table (See the following item.). If a matching
description number is found in the description table, the code will be moved to the Code eld and the description
found in the description table will be placed in the Description eld. If no matching description number is found,
the Description eld remains as entered.
Desc Tbl:
Click on the Desc Tbl button use a le dialog to set or change the description table. The description table is used to
set the Description eld when an integer number is entered in the Description eld. (See the previous item.) If you
prefer, instead of clicking on the Desc Tbl button you can also type in the full le path in the edit box.
Set Defaults:
This button sets the items in the Edit Options portion of the dialog to the current default values. See the More on
Default Settings heading at the end of the Settings section.
Restore Values:
This button allows you to set the values in the Edit Options portion of the dialog back to what they were when you
opened the Raw Data File Settings dialog.
Save As Default:
Sets the default values for the Edit Options portion of the dialog. These values are used as the default settings when
a new le is created. See the More on Default Settings heading at the end of the Settings section.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1361
Other Edit Options dialog
Click the Other Options button to bring up the Other Edit Options Dialog box.
Current File:
Click on the name of the le in the le list for which you wish to review and/or specify the settings. You can also
choose to view or edit the DEFAULT settings.
Default values for new record:
Checking the check box for the following items causes CGEditor to ''remember'' the most recently entered value in
the respective eld. Thus when you insert or add a record containing one of the checked items, it will be lled in
with a ''default'' value.
Backsight ID
Horz. Angle
Vert. Angle
Foresight ID
Rod Height
Code
Description
Note: The previously used eld values are not ''remembered'' and thus will not be used to ll in new records the
next time you open the CGEditor.
Set Defaults:
This button sets the items in the Other Edit Options dialog to the current default values. See More on Default
Settings at the end of the Settings section.
Restore Values:
This button allows you to set the values in the Other Edit Options dialog back to what they were when you opened
the Raw Data File Settings dialog.
Save As Default:
Sets the default values for the items found in the Other Edit Options dialog. These values are used as the default
settings when a new le is created. See More on Default Settings at the end of the Settings section.
Click OK to close the Other Edit Options dialog.
Click OK to close the Raw Data File Settings dialog.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1362
More on Default Settings:
When the CGEditor is started from CGSurvey, many of the initial default settings may not be those you had
specied in a previous session. This is because many of the default settings you previously specied where
overridden by the current CG Settings specied in CGSurvey. However, you may yourself override the default
settings for the current session only by changing any of the settings and clicking the Save As Default button. If you
wish to change the ''default'' settings for future editing sessions, you must change the CG Settings in CGSurvey.
Settings overridden by the settings on the various tabs in the CAD C&G Options dialog:
File Information: only Description Length is overridden by the settings in the CAD C&G Options dialog.
File Measurement Info: ALL items are overridden by the settings in the CAD C&G Options dialog.
Edit Options: ALL items are overridden by the settings in the CAD C&G Options dialog.
Other Edit Options: NONE are overridden by the settings in the CAD C&G Options dialog.
Record Color
To set the color for a given record type click the Record Color menu item. Then, in the Record Color dialog, click
on the record type and a color selection dialog will appear. Click on the color you want the that record type to have.
If you click the Set Defaults button, the original program default colors are set. Click the OK button to save the
color settings and close the dialog. Click the Cancel button to close the dialog without saving the changes.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1363
Validate Records
If this menu item is checked , all the records in the le will be validated prior to saving the le. To change the
Validate Record setting, just click the menu item. If an invalid record is encountered when saving a le with the
Validate Records menu item checked, you are asked if you want to edit the invalid eld, ignore the error or ignore
all errors. If you decide to edit the offending eld, the eld will be highlighted and you can edit it and attempt to
save again.
The Tools menu has several items that can be used to nd and replace specic text in specic types of elds. It even
allows you to apply simple mathematical functions to allow you to edit the data in a group of elds in a single step.
Goto (Ctrl + T):
Select this item to go to a certain row (or record) number. In the dialog box that comes up, type in the desired row
number and click OK. The editor window will zoom to that record and set the current eld to the rst editable eld
in the record.
Find (Ctrl + f) menu item:
The Find dialog allows you to enter a value to nd and set the detailed search criteria.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1364
Find: Type in the string or number you are searching for in the edit box or pick a previous search string from the
list.
Field is a: Choose what type of data is in the eld you are looking for. Check appropriate checkbox for matching
case and/or whole word.
Columns to search:
The default is to search All columns, but if you choose the Columns radio button, you can enter a comma separated
list of column numbers. The column to the right of the TYPE column is column 1 and it is the rst column in which
you can search.
Search:
You can search By Rows or By Columns and you can choose to search Up or Down from the current eld.
Once you have specied the parameters for the search, click the Find Next button to nd the rst instance
of the search string. Continue to click the Find Next button to nd the next instance of the string. To just nd the
next instance of a string and close the dialog box, you can click OK.
Find Next (F3) menu item: Finds to the next occurrence of the string previously specied in the Find dia-
log.
Find Prev (<Shift>+ <F3>) menu item: Moves you to the previous occurrence of the string previously specied
in the Find dialog.
Find Record Type menu item: Allows you to nd the next record type of the type specied. The search starts
at the curren record. When you click this menu item, the Find Record Type dialog box is displayed. Choose the
record type you wish to look for by picking from the list then speciy the direction of search and click the Find
Next button to nd the record. Click Cancel when done.
Replace (<Ctrl> + r) menu item: When you click on this menu item, the Replace dialog appears.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1365
The Replace dialog allows you to specify a Find: value and a Replace with: value. The other elds in the Replace
dialog are the same as the Find dialog. You can view the Find: value one instance at a time by clicking the Find
Next button, if you decide to replace a given value found just click the Replace button. Alternatively, you can allow
the software to automatically replace all the instances of the Find: value encountered in the specied columns in
the raw data le by clicking the Replace All button.
Note: Before clicking the Replace All button, be sure to specify whether you wish to replace matching
elds in the highlighted Selection of elds/records or in all the elds in the Whole File.
Data On/Off (<Ctrl> + d) menu item:
Selecting this menu item inserts a Data On/Off record above the current record. Records between pairs of Data
On/Off records are ignored when the traverse is reduced. This can be useful when trying to nd problems in a
traverse.
Change
The items in this submenu allow you to change specic types of elds in the raw data le.
Point ID (<Ctrl> + I) menu item: This menu item allows you to change point IDs for instrument points, back
sight points, or foresight points. You can change individual points one at a time or you can make a global change.
You can specify a value to nd and a value to replace it with. The Change Point ID dialog has several sections that
are similar to the Replace dialog
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1366
Field is a: You must specify how you want to treat the point ID eld. You can do this by clicking on the String or
Number radio buttons.
Dene: You must specify whether you wish to specify the replacement value by Value or Formula.
Note: The Values: (Input > Output) section of the dialog changes its title to Formula: when you elect
to Dene by Formula. Also, the content of this portion of the dialog changes according to the eld type (see
Values: or Formula: section below).
Instr. Point, Backsight, and Foresight check boxes: Check the check boxes of the types of point IDs
you wish to change.
Values: or Formula: section
When Dene is set to by Value and Field is a is specied as either a String or a Number then the title of this
section of the dialog becomes
Values: (Input -> Output) (as shown in the dialog above). In this conguration the Change Point ID dialog
functions like the Replace dialog except that it only searches the point ID elds specied.
Specify the value to search for in the edit box to the left of the ''>'' and the value to replace it with in the edit box
to the right of the ''>''.
The Find Next, Replace and Replace All buttons act exactly the same as the Find Next, Replace and Replace All
buttons in the Replace dialog.
When Dene is set to Formula the title of this section of the dialog becomes Formula:
If Field is a is specied as a String, the dialog is as shown below:
In this conguration the formula acts to add a prex and/or a sufx to the existing point ID (represented by [Old]).
Enter the prex in the edit box to the left of [Old] and the sufx in the edit box to the right of [Old]. If you do not
wish to add a prex or you do not wish to add a sufx, you may leave either the left or right hand edit boxes empty.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1367
If Field is a is specied as a Number, the dialog is as shown below:
In this conguration the formula adds a specied number to a given point ID. Enter the positive or negative number
in the edit box to the right of ''[Old] +''.
NOTE: When the Field is a is specied as a Number and a point ID containing non-numeric characters is
encountered, it will be skipped and no change will be made to it.
Change Height (<Ctrl> + h)
Use this menu item to change the instrument height and/or rod height. Clicking this menu item brings up the Change
Height dialog.
Action section of dialog
Use this section to determine how the height is to be changed when Dene is set to Formula.
Multiply/Divide: Choose this if you wish to multiply or divide the height by a given number.
Add/Subtract: Choose this if you wish to add a specied number to the height or subtract a specied number from
the height.
Dene section of dialog by Value: If you choose by Value, this command becomes like the Replace
command, except that it acts only on instrument heights and/or rod heights.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1368
Formula: This allows you to specify a number to apply to the height by addition, subtraction, multiplication, or
division. (See the Action and Values:/Formula: sections.)
Values:/Formula: section of dialog
Depending on what you choose in the Action and Dene sections there are several possibilities for this section of
the dialog:
When Dene is set to by Value the Action section of dialog is disabled and the title of this section be-
comes Values: (Input->Output)
In this conguration the feature functions like the Replace command, except that it acts only on instrument heights
and/or rod heights.
When Dene is set to Formula, the Action section of dialog is enabled and the title of this section be-
comes Formula:
When the Action is set to Multiply/Divide, the Formula: section changes as seen below:
In this conguration you can multiply or divide the instrument height or rod height by the number specied in the
edit box. To switch between multiply and divide, just click on the button with the multiply (''
*
'') or divide (''/'')
symbol on it.
When Action is set to Add/Subtract, the Formula: section changes as seen below:
In this conguration you can add or subtract the number specied in the edit box to or from the instrument height or
rod height. To switch between add and subtract, just click on the button with the add (''+'') or subtract (''-'') symbol
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1369
on it.
Search section of the dialog
Use this section of the dialog to specify how the records will be searched. The search begins at the currently active
eld.
Instrum. and Rod checkboxes: Check one or both of these check boxes to specify which types of heights
are to be searched/changed.
Find Next button: Use this button to move to the next eld that matches the specications you entered.
Replace button: Use this button to replace the highlighted text that was found.
Change All button: Use this button to make the changes specied to all matching elds in the le. Be sure to
specify whether to apply the changes to the highlighted Selection (records or elds) or to the Whole le.
Cancel button: Click the Cancel button to close the dialog.
Change Angle (<Ctrl> + g)
Choose this menu item to change vertical and/or horizontal angle elds. Clicking the Change Angle menu item
brings up the Change Angle dialog: This dialog is almost identical to the Change Height dialog and will not be
described in detail. The differences are: the Multiply/Divide action seen in the Change Height dialog is replaced
by the Make Opposite action; you can check either the Vertical or Horizontal check boxes to specify the angles you
wish to change; chosing Formula and Make Opposite disables the Formula: section of the dialog due to the fact
that the action to be taken is merely to reverse the sign of the angle.
Change Distance (<Ctrl> + D)
The Change Distance dialog is almost identical to the Change Height dialog. The only difference is that you can
choose to change the Slope distance and/or the Horizontal distance by checking the checkboxes.
Change DescLen (<Ctrl> + j)
This command allows you to set the description length for the current raw data le. It displays the Longest
description length: that is found in the current records in the le. It allows you to specify a new Description
length:.
Warning: If you specify a length less than the longest description found in the le, the descriptions that
exceed that length will be truncated.
Network Least Sq. menu item
This menu item runs the SurvNET Network Least Squares Adjustment program. Please refer to the section on
SurvNET for a detailed description of this very powerful traverse and level loop adjustment program.
Window menu
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1370
This menu contains many of the standard Window menu items found in other programs. It allows you to arrange
the currently open windows in several congurations. It has the added functionality of the New Window command
which allows you to have two or more views of a single le
Help
For information regarding the CGEditor program version click the About CGEditor... menu item.
Editing C&G Mapcheck Files
Mapcheck les are typically used to check the closure of a given parcel of land given the deed description of that
parcel. A mapcheck le may contain straight line boundaries as well as boundaries described by both tangent and
non-tangent curves.
Creating or Opening a Mapcheck File
To create a new le or open an existing le choose File on the main menu then either click New or Open.
If you choose New a submenu will appear, click the C&G Mapcheck File menu item.
In either case you will then see a le dialog. Browse to the directory where you wish to work and, if creating a new
le, type in a le name, or, if opening an existing le, click on a mapcheck le (
*
.cgm). Next, click the Save button
for a new le or the Open button for an existing le.
If you are creating a new le, an empty le will be shown in its own document window within the editor.
If you are editing an existing le, the data from the le will appear in a similar document window. It is possible to
have multiple documents open at the same time. So you could create a new le and open an existing le in the same
editing session and each would appear in its own window in the editor. You can have as many new and/or existing
les open as your project demands. You may also cut, copy and/or paste between les.
Settings: Before entering any data you should check the current settings. Click the Settings menu item
then click Map Check File to review and/or change the current settings. (For more details, see the Settings Menu
section of Editing C&G Mapcheck Files.)
Mapcheck Data Entry
Opening an existing template le or creating a new one is very similar to opening or creating a raw traverse data
le. There are three types of records that you may use in a mapcheck le:
Straight line (identied as Line in the Type column)
Tangent Curve (identied as TC in the Type column)
Non-tangent Curve (identied as NTC-C or NTC-R in the Type column for Chord or Radius denition NTC
records)
Adding and Inserting new records
To create a new record in the current le you must either use the Add or Insert menu item or the Add or Insert
toolbar.
Note: If the Add and/or Insert toolbars are not showing, click the View menu then choose the menu item
for the toolbar you want to turn show.
When you click on one of the Add menu items or toolbar icons, an empty record is added to the end of the
le. If you click on one of the Insert menu items or toolbar icons, an empty record is inserted above the currently
active record or eld. To make a record the currently active record, just click on one of its elds.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1371
Moving from eld to eld: While entering data, to move to the next eld, press the Enter or Tab key. To
move to the preceding eld press the Esc key or the Shift and Tab keys at the same time.
Straight Lines
There are two elds to be lled out in a Straight Line (or Line) record:
Bearing or Azimuth: For a bearing, use the standard C&G bearing notation:
For Bearing: Qdd.mmsss
Where
q = quadrant (1 = NE, 2 = SE, 3 = SW, 4 = NW)
d = 2 digit bearing
m = minutes
s = seconds and tenths of seconds
For example: enter S 35 22' 34.2'' E as 235.22342
For Azimuth, use the notation: ddd.mmsss
Distance: Enter the length of the boundary in whatever units you have specied in the Map Check File
Settings.
Code: Enter a code (optional).
Note: If Code Off is checked in the Map Check File Settings dialog, this eld will not be active. However,
clicking on the Code column title will turn it on.
Description: Enter a description (optional).
Note: If Description Off is checked in the Map Check File Settings dialog, this eld will not be active. However,
clicking on the Description column title will turn it on.
If Translate Mapcheck Descriptions Using a Description Table is checked in the Map Check File Settings
dialog and you have entered an integer number description, then when you move to the next eld, the description
table will be searched for a description number matching the integer entered. If a matching description number is
found, the description from the table will be placed in the Description eld and the integer originally entered in the
Description eld will be placed in the Code eld.
Tangent Curves
For a Tangent Curve record there are six possible elds to enter. Of the following six elds you must enter data for
two of the rst four:
Radius - decimal distance
Arc Length - decimal distance
Chord - decimal distance
Central Angle - angle specied as ddd.mmsss (degrees.minutes and seconds to nearest .1 sec.)
Code (optional - see Straight Lines above)
Description (optional - see Straight Lines above)
Non-Tangent Curves
The elds in a Non-Tangent Curve record vary according to whether it is dened using the chord bearing/azimuth
or radius bearing/azimuth.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1372
When using Non-Tangent Curve record it is necessary to specify whether the chord or radius denition
will be used when specifying the curve . There are four ways to accomplish this:
1. Prior to Inserting or Adding the record, use the Settings menu then choose Map Check File. In the Map
Check File Settings dialog set the Curve Denition in the File Measurement Info section of the dialog.
2. Prior to Inserting or Adding the record, use the Settings menu to check or uncheck the Non-Tan Curves
Use Chord menu item. When the Non-Tan Curves Use Chord menu item is checked, newly created Non-
Tangent Curve records will added or inserted that use the chord denition, otherwise they will use the radius
denition.
3. Prior to Inserting or Adding the record, click the C-R toolbar icon. When the icon appears depressed,
newly created Non-Tangent Curve records will use the chord denition, otherwise they will use the radius
denition.
4. To change the type of curve denintion for an existing Non-Tangent Curve record, use the Edit main menu
and choose the Change Curve Def'n menu item. This changes the current record from what it is now to the
opposite type of curve denition.
For both the Chord and Radius denitions the following elds are present in the record:
Chord or Radius Brg/Azimuth
used to orient the curve properly as it leaves the PC. As noted in the Tangent Curves section, bearings must be
entered in the qdd.mmsss format and azimuths entered in the ddd.mmsss format. Radius
Arc Length
Chord
Central Ang
Code
Description
All but the rst eld has been discussed earlier in the Tangent Curves section and will not be described
here.
Editing a Mapcheck File
Most of the menu items found in the mapcheck menus have been discussed in the Editing Traverse Raw Data
Files section. Only the differences will be discussed here.
File Menu: The File menu when editing a mapcheck le is identical to the File menu discussed in the
Editing Traverse Raw Data Files section.
Edit Menu: With the exception of the Change Curve Def'n menu item, the Edit menu is identical to the Edit
menu discussed in the Editing Traverse Raw Data Files section. Change Curve Def'n was discussed above in the
Non-Tangent Curves section
Add Menu: The Add menu allows you to add Straight line, Tangent Curve and Non-Tangent Curve records to
the end of the le.
Insert Menu: The Insert menu allows you to insert Straight line, Tangent Curve and Non-Tangent Curve
records above the current record.
View Menu: Allows you to turn the toolbars on and off.
Settings Menu
The Settings menu contains items that allow you to specify the format of the data in a mapcheck le and how this
data will appear in the CGEditor.
Map Check File settings menu item
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1373
The Map Check File menu item brings up the Map Check File Settings dialog (see below). This diaog
allows you to specify settings for each of the mapcheck les currently open in the editor. It also allows you to
specify the default settings for creating new map check les.
Current File: Use this list to choose a le you wish to set or view the settings for. You may also set or view the
DEFAULT settings that are used for newly created les.
File Information and Edit Options:
The settings in the File Information and Edit Options sections have been discussed under the Settings Menu section
of Editing a Raw Data File.
File Measurement Info:
Most of the settings in the File Measurement Info section have been discussed under the Settings Menu section of
Editing a Raw Data File. However, a Curve Denition: item has been added to this section for mapcheck les:
Curve Denition: click the Curve Denition button to change from Chord to Radius denitions and vice versa.
Curve Denition only applies to the insertion or addition of Non-Tangent Curve records.
Record Color menu item
The Record Color menu item has been discussed under the Settings Menu section of Editing Traverse
Raw Data Files. The only difference is that here you are setting the colors for the various types of mapcheck
records instead of raw data records.
Validate Records
This menu item allows you to set whether records are validated prior to being saved. (See also, Validate
Records in the Settings Menu section of Editing Traverse Raw Data Files.)
Non-Tan Curves Use Chord: Use this to switch which types of Non-Tangent Curve records are added or
inserted.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1374
Tools, Window and Help Menus the items in these menus have been discussed in the Editing Traverse
Raw Data Files section
C&G Cross Section Files
Cross section les contain data which denes one or more topographic or design cross sections along an alignment.
Any features using a cross section le assume that it is at right angles to the alignment. Each cross section is
identied by its station along the alignment. Each cross section is dened by a Station record specifying a station
on the alignment followed by a series of Point records specifying the offset and elevation of points on the cross
section at that station. Cross sections can be used to visualize a site, specify design elevations and calculate volumes.
Opening an existing cross section le or creating a new one is very similar to opening or creating a map check le.
Cross Section File Data Entry
Station Records: There are three elds to be lled out in a Station record:
Station: Species the station of this cross section along the alignment. For example: station 6+45.37 is indicated as
645.37.
Left Slope:
This eld denes the slope at the left side of the cross section in feet per foot (or meters per meter if units are set to
meters). This slope will be used to extend this cross section to meet any cross section it overlays.
Right Slope:
This eld denes the slope at the right side of the cross section in feet/foot (meters/meter). This slope will be used
to extend this cross section to meet any cross section it overlays.
Point Records
There are two elds in a Point record:
Offset: The Offset denes the perpendicular distance from the alignment to this point on the cross section.
Elevation: The Elevation species the elevation of this point on the cross section.
Cross Section File Data Editing
Adding and Inserting new records: To create a new record in the current le you must either use the Add or Insert
menu or toolbars.
Note: If the toolbars are not showing, click on the View menu then click the item for the toolbar you want to turn on.
Settings Menu item
Record Color:
The Record Color menu item has been discussed under the Settings Menu section of Editing Traverse Raw Data
Files. The only difference is that here you are setting the colors for the various types of cross section records instead
of raw data records.
Validate Records: This menu item has been described in the Settings Menu section of Editing Traverse
Raw Data Files
US Foot: If this menu item is checked units are US feet. If the Meters menu item is checked, this menu
item is disabled.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1375
International foot: If this menu item is checked units are International feet. If the Meters menu item is
checked, this menu item is disabled.
Feet: If this menu item is checked units are Feet.
Meters: If this menu item is checked units are meters.
Note: The settings for US Foot and International foot will be ignored if Meters is checked.
C&G Template Files
Template les contain data dening standard cross section templates that can be used to create a cross section le
that represents the design cross sections for a proposed alignment. Cross section les created using templates can
be overlaid on existing cross sections to allow the computation of cut and ll volumes and to visualize the design
alignment. Opening an existing template le or creating a new one is very similar to opening or creating a map
check le.
Entering and Editing Template Data
Entering and editing template data is analogous to that described in Entering and Editing Cross Section Data
except that, instead of being identied by their station along the alignment, templates are identied by an integer
template identier. This identier is used when building a cross section from templates in order to specify a
template among the many that a template le may contain. Templates are placed along a proposed alignment
at various stations and thus create a series of cross sections using the alignment elevation to set the elevation of
the template points. When building cross sections along an alignment using templates, cross sections at stations
between two template stations result in a series of cross sections being created to transition between the templates.
Template File Data Entry
Template Records: There are ve elds to be lled out in a Template record:
Template: Template number for identifying the template
Left Slope:
Species the slope at the left side of the template in feet/foot (meters/meter). This slope will be used to extend this
template generated cross section to meet any cross section it overlays. Right Slope:
Enter the slope at the right side of the template in feet per foot (or meters per meter units are set to meters). This
slope will be used to extend this template generated cross section to meet any cross section it overlays. Offset:
The Offset denes the distance from the centerline of the template to this point on the cross section. The template
centerline should be assigned a 0.0 offset. The 0.0 offset is placed on the alignment when cross sections are
generated from templates.
Elevation:
The Elevation species the elevation of this point on the template. If the elevation of the centerline point is set
to 0.0, then this elevation can be used to directly compute the elevation of the point based on the elevation of the
alignment where the template is placed.
Editing a Template File: All template menu items and editing procedures are identical to those described
for cross sections.
Editing Coordinate Files
Coordinate les contain data on the Point IDs, Northings, Eastings, Elevations, Descriptions and, for C&G les,
Codes for various points located in the eld and points created by calculations and/or by hand data entry. The
coordinate le may have points from a single job, portions of a single job or many jobs. The Point ID must be a
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1376
unique identier for a given point. Typically Point IDs are integer numbers but may also be any combination of
letters and numbers depending on the format of the le.
The CGEditor can be used to edit six different types of coordinate les. All the supported coordinate le
types have Point ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, and Description elds. In all formats, any given point may
have a blank Description eld. The types of les supported and a brief description of their differences follows:
C&G Numeric (
*
.crd)
Point ID: any integer number between 1 and 65,536.
Description: The maximum description length for a given le can vary between 1 and 100 characters and is set
when the le is created. A given point description entry may be blank.
Code: up to 4 characters long. Used to lter and sort points. The Code eld may be blank.
C&G Alpha-numeric (
*
.cgc)
Point ID: up to 10 characters long and can contain any combination of alphabetic and numeric characters.
Description: The maximum description length for a given le can vary between 1 and 100 characters and is set
when the le is created. A given point description entry may be blank.
Code: up to 4 characters long. Used to lter and sort points. The Code eld may be blank.
Carlson Numeric (
*
.crd)
Point ID: any positive integer number containing 1 to 9 digits.
Description: entries can be from 0 to 31 characters long.
(the Code eld is not supported.)
Carlson Alpha-numeric (
*
.crd)
Point ID: any a series of from 1 to 9 alphabetic or numeric characters.
Description: entries can be from 0 to 31 characters long.
(the Code eld is not supported.)
Simplicity (
*
.zak)
Point ID: can be any positive integer number containing 1 to 8 digits.
Description: entries can be from 0 to 28 characters long.
(the Code eld is not supported.)
Land Desktop (
*
.mdb)
Point ID: can be a series of from 1 to 255 alphabetic or numeric characters.
Description: entries can be from 0 to 255 characters long.
(the Code eld is not supported.)
Creating or Opening a Coordinate File
To create a new le or open an existing le choose File on the main menu then either click New or Open.
If you choose New a submenu will appear, click the Coordinate File menu item or click on the ''C'' icon in the
Standard toolbar. Next pick the type of coordinate le you wish to create using the Coordinate File Type dialog:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1377
A new coordinate le with a temporary name will appear in its own document window in the CGEditor and will
contain only a single blank coordinate Point record.
If you are opening an existing le using the Open menu item, you will be asked to choose the le using le
dialog. Browse to the directory where you wish to work click on a coordinate le and click the Open button The
coordinate records from the le will appear in a separate document window in the CGEditor.
It is possible to have multiple documents open at the same time. So you could create a new le and open
an existing le in the same editing session and each would appear in its own window in the editor. You can have as
many new and/or existing les open as your project demands. You may also cut, copy and/or paste between les.
Settings: Before entering any data you should check the current settings. Click the Settings menu item
then click Coordinate File to review and/or change the current settings. (For more details, see the Settings Menu
section of Editing Coordinate Files.)
Entering and Editing Coordinate File Data
Once a coordinate le has been opened or created, you can edit any of the elds in any of the records. To create
a new coordinate point you must use the Add/Insert main menu or toolbar. Both the Add/Insert menu and toolbar
allow you to add or insert individual blank records or one or more records from an existing coordinate le. When
you add a record or records, they are appended to the end of the le. When you Insert one or more records they are
inserted just above the current record.
Insert and Adding Coordinate Records from an Existing Coordinate File
If you choose to either the Add or Insert Pts from File or the corresponding toolbar item, you will see the
C&G Select Points from: dialog.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1378
This dialog consists of a list of the points chosen so far from the le listed in the Change File to Select From edit
box. Use the File button to set the le name and the Open button to open the le for use. When the dialog rst
comes the point list is empty.
Choose Points section
Choose one of the available methods you will use for choosing points. Different methods will cause data entry
controls to appear below the Choose Points section.
Note: Any time there are points in the list the REMOVE from SELECTION button will be enabled. Click-
ing this button will remove points from the list according to the current method being used to choose points.
All
If you choose all and not all of the points in the le are in the list, the ADD from FILE button will be enabled.
Clicking the ADD from FILE button will add all the points from the le to the list.
Block
If you choose the Block method, the following Dene Block section will appear below the Choose Points section
of the dialog.
Fill in the Starting Point ID and End Point ID then click the ADD from FILE button.
by Desc
If you choose the by Desc method, the following Specify Description section will appear below the Choose Points
section of the dialog.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1379
Fill in the description to look for and check the Match Case and Match Whole Work Only checkboxes as needed.
Next click the ADD from FILE button
and any matching point records will be added to the list.
by Code
If you choose the by Desc method, the following Specify Code section will appear below the Choose Points
section of the dialog. This section of the dialog looks and functions the same as the Specify Description section
shown above except you must specify a code.
by Elev
If you choose the by Desc method, the following Specify Elevation section will appear below the Choose
Points section of the dialog.
Specify the high and low elevation values. You can do this by directly entering the elevation values or you can type
a point ID in the Point ID edit box then click on another edit box. When you do this the elevation of the point is
written to the appropriate Elevation edit box. If you used a point ID to get the elevation, you can edit the value if
necessary. Next click the ADD from FILE button to add the points to the list.
in Radius
in Rect
Coordinate File Data Entry
There is only one type of coordinate record called a Point record. This record has six elds:
Point ID: Point indentier must be unique. Its format varies according to the type of coordinate le.
Northing: Species the northing or Y coordinate of a point.
Easting: Species the easting or X coordinate of a point.
Elev: Species the elevation or Z coordinate of a point. (May be On or Off. To turn the column on click the column
heading.)
Code (C&G coordinate les only):
a 4 character optional eld used to group points. May be blank. (May be On or Off. To turn the column on click the
column heading.)
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1380
Description:
Text describing the point. May be blank. Length limited by type of coordinate le. (May be On or Off. To turn the
column on click the column heading.)
After adding or inserting a Point record, ll in the various elds as needed. Use the Tab or Enter keys to move
from one eld to the next. If you press Enter when in the last activated eld in a record, a new blank record will be
created just below the current record and the current eld will be set to the Point ID eld in the new record.
To replace the data in an an existing record, just click once on the eld you wish to replace and begin typ-
ing the new data. To edit the data in an an existing record, click twice on the eld you wish to edit and make any
edits required in the existing data.
Settings Menu
Coordinate Files
Choosing this menu item brings up the Coordinate File Settings dialog
Settings for
drop down list box allows you to specify settings for any coordinate le currently open in the CGEditor as well as
choose to set the Default settings for new les you create.
Type of File is only visible for the les currently open.
Description Length:
this edit box can be used to set a new description length for the le. If you choose to change the description length,
any descriptions that already exist in the le will be truncated to the new length.
Translate Coordinate Descriptions Using Description Table checkbox
if this is checked then the description table le name edit box and the Browse... button will be enabled and you will
be required to specify a description table to use.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1381
Description ON checkbox - if this is checked then the Description column will be activated in the edi-
tor.
Point Code ON checkbox - if this is checked then the Code column will be activated in the editor. (Only
applies to C&G coordinate les)
Elevation ON checkbox - if this is checked then the Elevation column will be activated in the editor.
Units: click the button to switch between Foot and Meter.
Foot Denition: click the button to switch between US and International feet. (Disabled if Units are set
to Meter)
Coordinate Display section
Places displayed: drop down list - use to specify the number of decimal places displayed in the editor for northing,
easting and elevation.
Note: the Places displayed setting does not effect the values actually stored in the coordinate le, only how they
are displayed in the editor window.
Coordinate Order: click button to switch between North-East and East-North.
Printing: Page Orientation section
choose Portrait or Landscape. You may wish to choose Landscape to avoid having the coordinate records with
long descriptions causing each page to span 2 pages in width.
The Set Defaults, Restore Values and Save As Default have been covered elsewhere.
US Foot menu item
If this menu item is checked units are US feet. If the Meters menu item is checked, this menu item is disabled. The
check will also be set or cleared by changes in the Coordinate File Settings dialog.
International foot menu item
If this menu item is checked units are International feet. If the Meters menu item is checked, this menu item is
disabled. The check will also be set or cleared by changes in the Coordinate File Settings dialog.
Feet menu item: If this menu item is checked units are Feet. The check will also be set or cleared by
changes in the Coordinate File Settings dialog.
Meters menu item: If this menu item is checked units are meters. The check will also be set or cleared by
changes in the Coordinate File Settings dialog. Note: The settings for US Foot and International foot will be
ignored if Meters is checked.
Tools Menu
With the exception of Renumber Points, the items on the Tools menu are similar to those items already discribed
for other le types.
Renumber Points menu item
When you choose the Renumber Points menu item you will receive a warning regarding the problems that
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1382
may be encountered in existing C&G drawings.
After considering the problems you may encounter due to point renumbering respond Yes or Yes-Don't Ask Again
to continue with the renumbering operation, or No to cancel the operation.
If you choose to continue with the renumbering of points, you will see the Renumber Points dialog:
Renumber Points dialog
Points to Renumber section
First choose All or Enter Points.
If you choose Enter Points you must ll in the edit box specifying the points to renumber. The points to renumber
can consist of single points or range(s) of points. Multiple entries of ranges and/or single points must be separated
from the next entry by a comma ('','') and ranges must be specied using a dash (''-'')
Renumbering Method section
choose Add or Multiply then enter the Amount to Add: or Multiply by: in the edit box. You may specify a
positive or negative whole number.
When done click OK. Click Cancel to end the command without changes to the coordinate le being edited.
Editing C&G Point Group Files
A C&G point group is essentially a list of points placed in a specially formatted text le (
*
.pts). It is possible to
create and/or edit point group les using any plain text editor like Microsoft Notepad or Wordpad if you know the
format of the le. Typically it is far easier to use the CGEditor to create and/or edit C&G point group les. Point
groups have many uses in C&G commands: road alignments, property boundaries, dene Include and Exclude
Boundaries for Topo commands, etc. In the case of alignments, a point group can also include vertical curve
information.
C&G point group les are organized into named subgroups. The subgroup name can be anything you wish
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1383
to use to identify the points that follow. You may have several subgroups in a single point group le. For example, if
you are dening subdivision lots, then you may choose the subgroup names to be lot 1, lot 2, etc. For an alignment
you can make the subgroup name the starting station and C&G features will make this the default starting station
when asking you for an alignment. Point groups can also be used to .
Creating and Opening Point Group Files
You may open and/or create as many les as are needed for your project.
To create a new empty point group le choose the File menu then the New menu item then the Point Group File
menu item or, more simply, just click the ''P'' toolbar icon on the Standard toolbar. In either case, a document
window will appear within the main CGEditor window. This will have a single blank record or row for the
Subgroup name - identied by SGR in the Type column.
To open an existing point group le, choose File then Open... Then, in the le dialog, browse to the direc-
tory where your point group le is located, highlight the desired le and click the Open button. The records will be
read from the le and will be displayed in a separate document window
Entering and Editing Point Group File Data
If you do not have a subgroup name record, choose the Add/Insert main menu then, if you wish to place it at the
end of the le, choose the Add Subgroup menu item or, if you wish to insert it above the current record, choose
the Insert Subgroup menu item. After lling in the subgroup name, you can just press Enter to add a single Point
record (identied by PNT in the Type column) below the subgroup name record. Alternatively, you can use the
Add/Insert menu to add or insert a single point or you can choose to add or insert several points from a coordinate
le. These same add and insert methods can be found on the Add/Insert Toolbar.
If you choose to Add or Insert Pts from File the following dialog comes up:
The use of this dialog to choose points has been described in detail under the section on Editing Coordinate Files.
Please refer to that section for more details. After choosing the points you wish to add or insert into the point group
using the C&G Select Points from ... dialog, click OK and the point records will be created in the point group le
being edited.
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1384
Horizontal Curves
You may have noticed that the Rad Pt Type column is marked with <None> for the points you have inserted so
far. However, if you wish to specify a curve in your alignment or lot boundary, you must designate the record as a
radius point. If you click on the Cw toolbar icon (for clockwise) or the Cc toolbar icon (for counter clockwise) or
choose similar items on the Tools menu, you will notice that the Rad Pt Type column for the point changes to CW
or CCW to indicate that the point is a radius point. If a radius point is specied, the preceding point is assumed
to be the PC and the following point is assumed to be the PT. If you wish to change the point back to not being a
radius point, click the Not Radius Pt toolbar icon or use the Tools menu.
Vertical Curves
You may enter vertical curve information in a point group le. This allows you to not only specify the horizontal
location of the alignment, but also its vertical alignment. A point group le that has vertical curves in it may not
contain any subgroup records. If you attempt to place vertical curve data in a le having one or more subgroups,
you will be given the following warning:
As indicated by the choices in the dialog, you may continue and place vertical curve info in a point group le
containing subgroups, but it will not be usable in C&G commands.
If you have no subgroups (or if you do and answer ''Yes'' to the warning) and this is the rst vertical curve
in the le, the Enter Vertical Curve Information dialog will come up.
Enter the information in the dialog to specify the vertical curve. The Starting Station and the PVI Station should
be entered as decimal numbers and when you click in another edit box the decimal station will be converted
to standard station notation. The Slope in and the Slope out should be entered as a percent (For example, en-
ter 2 or 2.0 for 2%). When you click OK the vertical curve records VC1 and VC are added in the document window.
For the second and succeeding vertical curves, you can either Add Vertical Curves to the end of the verti-
cal curve records or you can Insert Vertical Curves within the existing vertical curve records. For these vertical
curve records, the dialog requires fewer entries:
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1385
This is a result of the fact that the initial vertical curve Starting Station, Initial PVI Elevation and Slope in control
the overall vertical orientation of the succeeding vertical curves thus you need only enter the PVI Station, Length
and Slope out for these vertical curves. When you click OK, another vertical curve record will be added to or
inserted into the document.
Once the vertical curve information has been specied you can go ahead and enter the points specifying the
alignment.
Settings Menu
The Settings menu allows you to congure the point group le and the record appearance.
Choose the Point Group Settings menu item to bring up the Point Group Settings dialog:
In this dialog you can set the units and the page orientation for printing.
Note: the units setting only effects the display of stations in station notation.
Choose the Record Color menu item to bring up the Record Color dialog. Set the display color of the
various records by clicking on the line for the record type. This brings up a color dialog that allows you to pick
from the 16 available colors. Click OK when done.
Tools Menu
The items in the Tools menu are, for the most part, self explanatory or have been covered in detail for other types of
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1386
les.
Pulldown Menu Location: CG-Survey>Tools>CGEditor
Keyboard Command:eda, cg edit all
Prerequisite: May need existing C&G raw traverse data le (
*
.cgr), C&G Map Check le (
*
.cgm), C&G Cross
Section le (
*
.cew), C&G Template le (
*
.ctp), coordinate les (
*
.crd,
*
.cgc,
*
.zak,
*
.mdb) and/or C&G Point
Group les (
*
.pts)
Chapter 18. CGSurvey Module 1387
SurvNET 19
1388
Introduction
Key Features of SurvNet
SurvNet reduces survey eld measurements to coordinates in assumed, UTM, SPC83 SPC27, and a variety
of other coordinate systems. SurvNET calculates the minimum necessary corrections to measured horizontal
angles, slope distances and vertical angles in order to t the desired control. SurvNET can only process
raw eld measurements, it is not designed to process bearing or azimuth traverses. If you wish to use
SurvNET to process your traverses, you must collect the angles and distances.
In the 2D/1D model in a state plane coordinate system, a grid factor is computed for each individual line
during the reduction. The elevation factor is computed for each individual line if there is sufcient elevation
data. If the raw data has only 2D data, the user has the option of dening a project elevation to be used to
compute the elevation factor.
SurvNet supports a variety of map projections and coordinate systems including the New Brunswick Survey
Control coordinate system, UTM, and user dened systems consisting of either a predened ellipsoid or a
user dened ellipsoid and one of the following projections, Transverse Mercator, 1 Standard Parallel Lam-
bert Conformal, 2 Standard Parallel Lambert Conformal, Oblique Mercator, and the Double Stereographic
projection.
A full statistical report containing the results of the least squares adjustment is produced and written to the
report (.RPT) le. An error report (.ERR) le is created and contains any error messages that are generated
during the adjustment.
Coordinates can be stored in a Carlson (.CRD) le, C&G (.CRD) le, Simplicity le (.ZAK) or an LDD le.
An ASCII coordinate (.NEZ) le is always created that can be imported into most any mapping/surveying/GIS
program. The user has the option to compute unadjusted preliminary coordinates.
There is an option to compute traverse closures during the preprocessing of the raw data. Closures can be
computed for both GPS loops and total station traverses. Closure for multiple traverse loops in the same raw
le can be computed.
When processing Angle-Only records for triangulation, if there is a zenith angle and rod height (zero is a valid
rod height), a 3D triangulation will be performed, calculating an elevation of the triangulation point. This is
true in both the 3D and 2D/1D models.
SurvNet can combine GPS vectors and total station data in a single adjustment. GPS Vector les from
Leica, Thales, Topcon and Trimble can be input, as well as GPS les in the StarNet format. Additionally
GPS vectors can be read from NGS G-les. There is also an option to read the G-le section of an Opus report.
SurvNet includes a variety of blunder detection routines. One blunder detection method is effective in de-
tecting if the same point number has been used for two different points. Additionally this blunder detection
method is effective in detecting if two different point numbers have been used for the same physical position.
This method also ags other raw data problems. Another blunder detection method included in SurvNet is ef-
fective in isolating a single blunder, distance or angle in a network. This method does not require that there be
a lot of redundancy, but is effective if there is only one blunder in the data set. Additionally, SurvNet includes
a blunder detection method that can isolate multiple blunders, distances or angles in a network. This method
does require that there be a lot of redundancy in the network to effectively isolate the multiple blunders.
Other key features include: Differential and Trig level networks and loops can be adjusted using the network
least squares program. Geoid modeling is used in SurvNet, allowing the users to choose between the Geoid99
and the Geoid03 model. The user can alternately enter the project geoid separation. There are description
codes to identify duplicate points with different point numbers. The user can specify the condence interval
from 50 to 99 percent.
SurvNet performs a least squares adjustment and statistical analysis of a network of raw survey eld data, including
total station measurements, differential level data and GPS vectors. SurvNet simultaneously adjusts a network
of interconnected traverses with any amount of redundancy. The raw data can contain any combination of angle
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1389
and distance measurements, and GPS vectors. SurvNet can adjust any combination of trilaterations, traverses,
triangluations, networks and resections. The raw data does not need to be in a linear format, and individual traverses
do not have to be dened using any special codes. All measurements are used in the adjustment.
SurvNet implements the standard parametric observation equation method with independent weighting for az-
imuths, directions, angles, distances, GPS baselines, coordinates, elevations and level data to compute least squares
estimates of all unknowns in accordance with well established reference texts such as Adjustment Computations:
Spatial Data Analysis (4th Edition) Paul R. Wolf, Charles D. Ghilani.
General Rules for Collecting Data for Use in Least Squares Adjustments
Least squares is very exible in terms of how the survey data needs to be collected. Generally speaking, any
combination of angles, and distances combined with a minimal amount of control points and azimuths are needed.
This data can be collected in any order. There needs to be at least some redundancy in the measurements. Redundant
measurements are measurements that are in excess of the minimum number of measurements needed to determine
the unknown coordinates. Redundancy can be created by including multiple GPS and other control points within a
network or traverse. Measuring angles and distances to points in the network that have been located from another
point in the survey creates redundancy. Running additional cut-off traverses or additional traverses to existing control
points creates redundancy. Following are some general rules and tips in collecting data for least squares reduction.
Backsights should be to point numbers. Some data collectors allow the user to backsight an azimuth not
associated with a point number. SurvNet requires that all backsights be associated with a point number.
There has to be at least a minimum amount of control. There has to be at least one control point. Additionally
there needs to be either one additional control point or a reference azimuth. Control points can be entered in
either the raw data le or there can be a supplemental control point le containing the control point. Reference
azimuths are entered in the raw data le. The control points and reference azimuths do not need to be for the
rst points in the raw le. The control points and azimuths can be associated with any point in the network or
traverse. The control does not need to be adjacent to each other. It is permissible, though unusual, to have one
control point on one side of the project and a reference azimuth on the other side of the project.
Some data collectors do not allow the surveyor to shoot the same point twice using the same point number.
SurvNet requires that all measurements to the same point use a single point number. The raw data may need to
be edited after it has been downloaded to the ofce computer to insure that points are numbered correctly. An
alternative to renumbering the points in the raw data le is to use the 'Pt Number substitution string' feature in
the project 'Settings' screen. See the 'Redundant Measurement' section for more details on this feature.
The majority of all problems in processing raw data are related to point numbering problems. Using the
same point number twice to different points, not using the same point number when shooting the same point,
misnumbering backsights or foresights, and misnumbering control points are all common problems.
A big source of problems with new users is a misunderstanding in dening their control for a project. It is
always best to explicitly dene the control for the project. A good method is to put all the control for a project
into a separate raw le.
Some raw data collector les may have preliminary unadjusted coordinates included with the raw data. These
coordinate records should be removed from the raw le. The only coordinate values that should be in the raw
le are the control points. Since there is no concept of 'starting coordinates' in least squares there is no way
for SurvNet to determine which points are considered control and which points are preliminary unadjusted
points. So all coordinates found in a raw data le will be considered control points.
When a large project is not processing correctly, it is often useful to divide the project into several raw data
les and debug and process each le separately as it is easier to debug small projects. Once the smaller
projects are processing separately they can be combined for a nal combined adjustment.
SurvNet gives the user the option to choose one of two mathematical model options when adjusting raw data, the
3D model and the 2D/1D model.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1390
In the process of developing SurvNet numerous projects have be adjusted using both the 2D/1D model and the
3D model. There are slight differences in nal adjusted coordinates when comparing the results from the same
network using the two models. But in all cases the differences in the results are typically less than the accuracy of
measurements used in the project. The main difference in terms of collecting raw data for the two different models
is that the 3D model requires that rod heights and instrument heights need to be measured, and there needs to be
sufcient elevation control to compute elevations for ALL points in the survey. When collecting data for the 2D/1D
model the eld crews do not need to collect rod heights and instrument heights.
In the 2D/1D model raw distance measurements are rst reduced to horizontal distances and then optionally
to grid distances. Then a two dimensional horizontal least squares adjustment is performed on these reduced
horizontal distance measurements and horizontal angles. After the horizontal adjustment is performed an optional
one-dimensional vertical least squares adjustment is performed in order to adjust the elevations if there is sufcient
data to compute elevations. The 2D/1D model is the model that has been traditionally been used in the past by
non-geodetic surveyors in the reduction of eld data. There are several advantages of SurvNet's implementation of
the 2D/lD model. One advantage is that an assumed coordinate system can be used. It is not necessary to know
geodetic positions for control points. Another advantage is that 3D raw data is not required. It is not necessary to
record rod heights and heights of instruments. The 2D/1D model allows you to mix 2D and 3D measurements.
Elevations are not required for the control points. The primary disadvantage of SurvNet's implementation of the
2D/1D model is that GPS vector data cannot be used in 2D/1D projects.
In the 3D model raw data is not reduced to a horizontal plane prior to the least squares adjustment. The 3 dimen-
sional data is adjusted in a single least squares process. In SurvNet's implementation of the 3D model XYZ geodetic
positions are required for control. The raw data must contain full 3D data including rod heights and measured
heights of instrument. The user must designate a supported geodetic coordinate system. The main advantage of
using the 3D model is that GPS vectors can be incorporated into the adjustment. Another advantage of the 3D
model is the ability to compute and adjust 3D points that only have horizontal and vertical angles measured to the
point. This feature can be used in the collection of points where a prism cannot be used, such as a power line survey.
When using the 2D/1D model if you have 'Vertical Adjustment turned' ON in the project settings, elevations will be
calculated and adjusted only if there is enough information in the raw data le to do so. Least squares adjustment
is used for elevation adjustment as well as the horizontal adjustment. To compute an elevation for the point the
instrument record must have a HI, and the foresight record must have a rod height, slope distance and vertical angle.
If working with .CGR raw data a 0.0 (zero) HI or rod height is valid. It is only when the eld is blank that the record
will be considered a 2D measurement. Carlson SurvCE 2.0 or higher allows you to mix 2D and 3D data by checking
or unchecking the 3D MODE checkbox in the Conguration dialog (General Tab). A comment record ''Elevation:
3D'' or ''Elevation: 2D'' will be inserted into the .RW5 le and SurvNET will pay attention to those records. A
3D traverse must also have adequate elevation control in order to process the elevations. Elevation control can be
obtained from the supplemental control le, coordinate records in the raw data le, or elevation records in the raw
data le.
SurvNet can also automatically reduce eld measurements to state plane coordinates in either the NAD 83 or NAD
27 or other supported geodetic coordinate systems. In the 2D/1D model a grid factor is computed for each individual
line during the reduction. The elevation factor is computed for each individual line if there is sufcient elevation
data. If the raw data has only 2D data, the user has the option of dening a project elevation to be used to compute
the elevation factor.
A full statistical report containing the results of the least squares adjustment is produced and written to the report
(.RPT) le. An error report (.ERR) le is created and contains any error messages that are generated during the
adjustment. Coordinates can be stored in the following formats:
C&G numeric (
*
.crd)
C&G alphanumeric (
*
.cgc)
Carlson numeric (
*
.crd)
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1391
Carlson alphanumeric (
*
.crd)
Carlson SQLite (
*
.crdb)
MS Access Database (LDT) (
*
.mdb)
Simplicity (
*
.zak)
ASCII P,N,E,Z,D,C (
*
.nez)
A le with the extension .OUT is always created and contains an ASCII formatted coordinate list of the nal adjusted
coordinates formatted suitable for printing. Additionally an ASCII le with an extension of .NEZ containing the
nal adjusted coordinates in a format suitable for input into 3rd party software that is capable of inputting an ASCII
coordinate le..
SurvNet produces a wealth of statistical information that allows an effective way to evaluate the quality of survey
measurements. In addition to the least squares statistical information there is an option to compute traverse closures
during the preprocessing of the raw data. Traverse closures can be computed for both GPS loops and total station
traverses. This option has no effect on the computation of nal least squares adjusted coordinates. This option is
useful for surveyors who due to statutory requirements are still required to compute traverse closures and for those
surveyors who still like to view traverse closures prior to the least squares adjustment.
Starting Survnet
Using SurvNET Standalone
Double click on the SurvNET icon on the desktop or use the Start menu > Programs (or All Programs) > SurvNET
Running From Carlson:
Entry into the SurvNet program is easy. It can be accessed in two different ways. The easiest way to start the
program is to select SurvNet from the Survey menu. The other method is to start SurvNet from within the Raw
Data File editor. To bring up the Raw Data File editor select Edit-Process Raw Data File from the Survey menu
(see below).
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1392
To access SurvNET from within the Carlson Raw Data Editor choose the Process (Compute Pts) menu then the
SurvNET menu item (see below).
SurvNet Start-up Dialog
The SurvNet Start-up dialog is displayed when SurvNet is rst started (see below). SurvNet is a project based
program. Before performing a least squares adjustment an existing project must be opened or a new project created.
This opening dialog box allows the user to open or create a project on start-up. You also can create or open a project
from the Files menu. Since all project management functions can be performed from the Files menu you need
not use the start-up dialog except as a convenience. If you do not wish to see the Start-up dialog when you start
SurvNET, uncheck the Show this dialog box on start-up checkbox then click the Cancel button.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1393
The following is a view of the SurvNet main window after an existing project has been opened.
Menu System Overview
The following graphic shows the main network least squares window. Least squares operations are initiated using
the menus and toolbars found here.
File Menu
Selecting the File menu opens the following menu:
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1394
SurvNET projects
SurvNET is a project based system. Everything related to processing raw data must be specied in the project
settings.
A Project (.PRJ) le is used to store all the settings and les necessary to reprocess the data making up the project.
You can create a New project, or Open an existing project. It is necessary to have a project open in order to process
the data.
The Save Project As Default can be used to create default project settings to be used when creating a new project.
The current project settings are saved and will be used as the default settings when any new project is created.
Project settings are covered in the Settings menu sections.
Some statutes and jurisdictions still require the computation of traditional traverse closures. SurvNet gives the
surveyor the ability to compute the closures of multiple traverses within a project as part of the preprocessing of the
project raw data. Closures for single or multiple traverses can be computed for a single project. Additionally, GPS
closures can be computed for GPS loops. To compute closures you must rst create a ''Closure'' le (.CLS). Closure
les dene the type of traverse loops that are to be computed and the point numbers that make up the traverse.
There are two options in the FILE menu that are used to create and edit the closure, .cls, les:
Open Traverse Closure File
New Traverse Closure File
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1395
After choosing the 'New Traverse Closure File' you will be prompted for a new le name. After choosing a le name
the following dialog box is displayed.
First enter the point sequence which denes the traverse in the 'Ordered Traverse Point List' grid eld. If you initiate
the traverse closure input dialog from the FILE menu (as opposed to running it from the Settings Dialog), you will
have the option to pick the points graphically.
Set the check boxes to set whether vertical closure and angle closures are to be computed. Then choose what type
traverse is being entered. .
Enter the points that dene the traverse. If you check the ''Allow graphic pt. pick'' box, the graphic window will pop
up. You can then pick the points graphically. The points will go into the list separated by commas.
If you manually enter the points, they can be entered in the form:
1,23,30-35,45,23,1
A comma separates the point numbers. You can select a range (30-35) when the points are sequential. You
must start with the rst backsight point number and end with the last foresight point number. For example, if you
have a simple loop traverse with angle closure using points 1, 2, 3 and 4, it will be entered as ''4,1,2,3,4,1'' where 1
is the rst occupied point and 4 is the initial backsight.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1396
You can turn the ''Angle Closure'' ON or OFF. If the angle closure is ON, you will be shown the total angu-
lar error and error per angle point. If the nal closing angle was not collected you can turn ''Angle Closure'' OFF
and only the linear closure will be computed.
You can turn the ''Vertical Closure'' ON or OFF. If the vertical closure is ON, you will be shown the total
vertical distance closure.
In order to calculate the traverse closure, you must select the TRAVERSE TYPE. It can be:
Pt. to Pt. Trav. - A point to point traverse is a traverse that starts at a set of known coordinates and ends
at another known coordinate. This option assumes you start from two control points and tie into two control points
if an angle closure is desired and one control point if only a linear closure is desired. The rst backsight distance
and last foresight distance if angle closure is ON are not used in computing the linear closure. Following is an
example of a pt. to pt. traverse with angle closure.
100,101,2-5
In the above pt. to pt. list Pt 100 is the starting backsight point, Pt. 101 is the starting instrument point. Pt. 4 is the
ending instrument point and the foresight to the angle closure point is point 5. If a closing angle was not collected
the list would look as follows '100,101,2-4'.
Loop Trav., Int. Az. Ref. - A closed loop traverse that begins by backsighting the last interior point on the traverse.
Following is an example.
7,101,2-7,101
In the above example closed loop with angle balance list, point 7 is the backsight point and point 101 is the rst
occupied point. If the closing angle 6-7-101 was not collected the list would be entered as follows ' 7,101,2-7'
Loop Trav., Ext. Az. Ref. - A closed loop traverse that begins by backsighting an exterior point (point not on the
traverse).
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1397
100,101,2-7,101,100
In the above example loop with exterior reference and angle balance list, point 100 is the backsight point and point
101 is the rst occupied point. If the closing angle 7-101-101 was not collected the list would be entered as follows
' 100,101,2-7,101'
GPS Loop Closure: - GPS loop closures can be computed using this option.
A,E,F,A
In the above example GPS loop, closure will be computed from the GPS loop going from A-E-F-A.
After the closure, .CLS, le has been created the preprocessing project settings need to be updated to include
the closure le in the project. Following is a view of the settings screen that denes a closure le to be used in
preprocessing. Notice that the check box 'Compute Traverse Closure' is checked and a closure le has been entered
in the edit box eld. Notice that the 'Edit/Create' button can be used to edit an existing closure le or create a new
closure le.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1398
When the data is processed, the closure reports will appear in the RPT and ERR les. Traverse Closures will show
the error of closure with and without angles balanced. Following is an example of a closed loop traverse report:
Traverse Closures
=================
Traverse points:
103-118,43-44
Traverse starting and ending on different points;
Compute angle closure.
Compute vertical closure.
BS IP FS Angle FS H. Dist. FS V. Dist.
103 104 105 173-07'48.5'' 310.4916 -7.7483
104 105 106 167-48'21.5'' 253.4909 5.6306
105 106 107 200-52'46.0'' 381.4896 8.4879
106 107 108 149-09'05.5'' 410.5470 -16.6830
107 108 109 080-42'36.5'' 245.5728 9.4221
108 109 110 174-21'17.5'' 175.3846 -5.6971
109 110 111 201-42'21.5'' 367.0014 -11.8161
110 111 112 171-52'54.5'' 237.7806 7.5346
111 112 113 192-32'53.5'' 368.8396 -7.0329
112 113 114 171-30'59.0'' 338.0024 -19.1945
113 114 115 184-54'03.5'' 344.5005 16.3157
114 115 116 149-20'19.5'' 353.8455 7.5562
115 116 117 202-19'01.5'' 390.1117 -9.9180
116 117 118 112-36'32.0'' 293.9931 2.0060
117 118 43 146-06'36.5'' 411.3674 -7.7112
118 43 44 270-04'01.5''
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1399
Closing Az: S 47-39'47.8''W
Computed Closing Az: S 47-39'51.3''W
Total angular error: 000-00'03.5''
Angular error per point: 000-00'00.2''
Correct Ending Coordinates, North: 1400952.0140 East: 2241884.7010
Ending Coordinates, North: 1400951.7962 East: 2241884.8180
Error, N: -0.2178 E: 0.1170 Total: 0.2472 Brg: N 28-14'34.6''W
Distance Traversed: 4882.4190 Closure: 1:19751
Correct Ending Elevation: 948.1710
Ending Elevation: 948.1221
Elevation Error: -0.0489
Closure After Angle Adjustment
103 104 105 173-07'48.3'' 310.4916 -7.7483
104 105 106 167-48'21.3'' 253.4909 5.6306
105 106 107 200-52'45.8'' 381.4896 8.4879
106 107 108 149-09'05.3'' 410.5470 -16.6830
107 108 109 080-42'36.3'' 245.5728 9.4221
108 109 110 174-21'17.3'' 175.3846 -5.6971
109 110 111 201-42'21.3'' 367.0014 -11.8161
110 111 112 171-52'54.3'' 237.7806 7.5346
111 112 113 192-32'53.3'' 368.8396 -7.0329
112 113 114 171-30'58.8'' 338.0024 -19.1945
113 114 115 184-54'03.3'' 344.5005 16.3157
114 115 116 149-20'19.3'' 353.8455 7.5562
115 116 117 202-19'01.3'' 390.1117 -9.9180
116 117 118 112-36'31.8'' 293.9931 2.0060
117 118 43 146-06'36.3'' 411.3674 -7.7112
118 43 44 270-04'01.3''
Closing Az: S 47-39'47.8''W
Computed Closing Az: S 47-39'47.5''W
Total angular error: 000-00'00.2''
Angular error per point: 000-00'00.0''
Correct Ending Coordinates, North: 1400952.0140 East: 2241884.7010
Ending Coordinates, North: 1400951.7752 East: 2241884.8397
Error, N: -0.2388 E: 0.1387 Total: 0.2762 Brg: N 30-08'45.6''W
Distance Traversed: 4882.4190 Closure: 1:17679
Following is an example of a GPS loop closure report.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1400
Traverse Closures
=================
GPS Loop Points:
A,E,F,A
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X:
-0.0323
Y:
-0.0162
Z:
-0.0105
Closure error:
0.0376
Perimeter: 20229.3858
Precision: 1:537594
GPS Loop Points:
C,F,D,B,C
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X:
-0.0121
Y:
-0.0101
Z:
0.0002
Closure error:
0.0158
Perimeter: 41332.9807
Precision: 1:2622216
GPS Loop Points:
F,D,B,F
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X:
-0.0022
Y:
-0.0044
Z:
0.0097
Closure error:
0.0109
Perimeter: 30814.5047
Precision: 1:2833226
Following is a view of the closure le that created the above GPS closure report. The 'Vert. Closure', and 'Angle
Closure' toggles serve no purpose with GPS loop closures.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1401
SurvNet provides the ability to generate reports that give the surveyor the information needed to determine if his
survey is within ALTA positional tolerances. It is required that the user dene which points are to be included in the
ALTA testing. The points to be included for ALTA testing are dened in an .Alt le.
There are two options in the FILE menu that are used to create and edit the ALTA, .alt, les:
Open ALTA, Rel. Err. Ellipse File
New ALTA, Rel. Err. Ellipse File
After choosing the ALTA le to be created or edited the following dialog box is displayed.
The above dialog box allows the user to dene the points to be included in the ALTA report processing. There
are two sections in the .RPT le created through the ALTA reporting. The following report shows the sections of
the ALTA report generated by the data in the dialog box. The rst section of the report displays only the relative
error ellipses between points. The point sequences used in this section come from the list on the right hand side
of the above dialog box. The second section of the report performs an ALTA tolerance test and displays only
those connections that fall outside of the ALTA tolerances (as set in the ADJUSTMENT tab of the SETTINGS
dialog box). The program rst checks the specic point sequences dened by the list on the right side of the dialog
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1402
box. The program then checks all the connections between all the points listed on the left hand side of the dialog box.
When adding points to either section, you can choose the option to Allow graphic pt. pick. This option is
only available if you run the ALTA dialog from the FILE menu (as opposed to from the Settings dialog). A graphic
window will pop up and you can pick the points graphically that you want to include in the ALTA report.
There can be many connections to check if the point list on the left hand side of the dialog box has a lot of
points. The user can limit the number of sequences to be displayed that fail the ALTA test by entering a number in
the ''Max. Connections to display'' eld.
Notice that you can enter points based on descriptions in the left hand list box. If you wished to check con-
nections between all points with TP, EIP, MON descriptions, enter the descriptions in the edit eld and press the
'Add' button. If TP, EIP, and MON represented traverse points, existing iron pipes and monuments then ALTA
testing would be performed on those point types.
After you have created the .ALT point le you need to set a few project settings. These settings dene the ALTA
tolerances, specify the .ALT le to be used, and dene the type of reporting to be generated. The 'Adjustment' tab
sheet within the project 'Settings', has a relative error ellipse section where the ALTA report settings are located.
All the ALTA reporting settings reside within the Relative Error Ellipse box.
Note: You do not have to ''Enable sideshots for relative error ellipses'' to get an ALTA report on sideshots that are
selected for the report. All points selected for the ALTA report will automatically be included in the computational
process.
The 'Rel. Err. Points File:' check box must be checked, and an .ALT le must be chosen to get an ALTA report. The
.ALT le denes which points will be included in the ALTA reporting. See the previous discussion on the creation
of the .ALT le if you are unsure of how to create an .ALT le.
Check the 'Include ALTA tolerance report' check box to create the ALTA tolerance checking report section. If an
.ALT le has been chosen then the relative error section of the report will always be generated.
Next make sure the appropriate tolerance and PPM has been dened. The ALTA standards dene their positional
standard as .07 plus 50 PPM. Additionally, the ALTA standards require that the computations be performed to a
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1403
95% condence. The condence interval is set in the 'Condence Interval:' edit eld.
After the project has been processed the ALTA/Relative Error portion of the report is displayed in the report window
under its own tab.
The following is a sample ALTA report:
Relative Error and ALTA Tolerances
==================================
Alta Tolerance Report ,Specific Connections, 95% Confidence Interval
Actual Allowable Ratio
Sta. Sta. Dist. Semi Major Semi Major Actual/Allowable Semi Minor Max. Err. Az.
27 500 204.4590 0.0384 0.0802 0.4790 0.0332 N 17-50'50.2''E
500 502 66.8572 0.0415 0.0733 0.5658 0.0310 S 86-04'58.5''E
34 36 237.9748 0.1340 0.0819 1.6364 0.1340 N 00-00'00.0''E
All the connections between the following points were checked.
500,501,502,503,504,505,506,507,508,509,510,511,512,513,514,515,516,517,518,519,520,521,522,523,524,525,526,527,528,529,
530,531,532,533,534,535,536,537,538,539,540,541,542,543,544,545,546,547,548,549,600,601,602,603,604,605,606,607,608,609,
610,611,612,613,614,615,616,617,618,619,620,621,622,623,624,625,626,627,628,629,630,631,632,633,634,635,636,640,641,642,
645,646,647,648,649,650,651,652,653,654,655,656,657,658,659,660,670,671,672,673,674,675,676,677,678,679,680,681,682,683,
684,685,686,687,688,689,690,691,692,693,694,695,696,700,701,702,703,704,706,712,713,714,715,716,717,718,719,720,721,722,
723
From the above points the following connections exceeded the tolerance of 0.070 + 50 PPM. at the 95% CI.
Alta Tolerance Report ,All Connections, 95% Confidence Interval
Actual Allowable Ratio
Sta. Sta. Dist. Semi Major Semi Major Actual/Allowable Semi Minor Max. Err. Az.
642 692 416.9231 0.1709 0.0908 1.8814 0.1046 S 79-32'05.0''E
641 642 491.5046 0.1759 0.0946 1.8597 0.1064 S 78-49'09.6''E
640 642 632.6614 0.1775
0.1016 1.7463 0.1053 S 74-34'49.3''E
642 673 529.6088 0.1680 0.0965 1.7412 0.1003 S 79-00'20.2''E
642 650 704.7900 0.1793 0.1052 1.7037 0.1038 S 82-47'35.7''E
640 647 538.1392 0.1640 0.0969 1.6925 0.1074 S 51-54'59.1''E
616 640 449.6151 0.1555 0.0925 1.6813 0.1039 S 48-04'33.5''E
640 646 840.1672 0.1791 0.1120 1.5994 0.1169 S 22-41'37.8''E
541 642 163.9307 0.1234 0.0782 1.5775 0.0599 S 87-42'15.2''E
547 642 646.1891 0.1607 0.1023 1.5705 0.0959 S 82-55'56.5''E
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1404
If the Ratio Actual/Allowable is 1.0 or less, the positional tolerance of the two points have passed the ALTA
standards.
The rst part of the report shows the SPECIFIC connections as specied in the ALT le.
The second part shows the ALL CONNECTIONS as specied in the ALT le. It is preceded by the list of
selected points. All possible combinations of connections between these points are calculated. Based on the
setting Maximum Connections to Display in the ALT le, that number of connections are shown, beginning
with the largest Ratio Actual to Allowable. Only the connections that fail the ALTA standards will be shown. If
all the points ''pass'' the ALTA standards, no points will be shown and you will see the message: All connection
combinations passed the tolerance test.
Settings Menu
The project settings are set by selecting Settings > Project from the menu, or pressing the SE icon on the tool
bar. The project settings dialog box has six tabbed windows, Coordinate System, Input Files, Preprocessing,
Adjustment, Standard Errors, and Output Options. Following is an explanation of the different project settings
tabbed windows.
Notice that there are two buttons at the lower left of the dialog box. The 'Save Project' button can be used to store
the current settings to the active project. If there is no active project then the user will be prompted for a new project
le name. Projects can also be saved using the 'File/Save Project' menu option from the main menu. The 'Save
as Default' button can be used to save the current project settings as the default settings whenever a new project is
created. Default project settings can also be dened using the 'File/Save Project as default' menu option from the
main menu.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1405
Coordinate System
The Coordinate System tab contains settings that relate to the project coordinate system, output units, the adjustment
model and other geodetic settings.
You can select either the 3D model or the 2D/1D mathematical model. If you choose 2D/1D mathematical model
you can choose to only perform a horizontal adjustment, a vertical adjustment or both. In the 3D model both
horizontal and vertical are adjusted simultaneously. The 3D model requires that you choose a geodetic coordinate
system. Local, assumed coordinate systems cannot be used with the 3D model. GPS vectors can only be used when
using the 3D model.
If using the 2D/1D mathematical model you can select Local (assumed coordinate system), or a geodetic coordinate
system such State Plane NAD83, State Plane NAD27, UTM, or a user-dened coordinate system as the coordinate
system. When using the 3D model you cannot use a local system.
Select the 'Horizontal Units for' output of coordinate values (Meters, US Feet, or International Feet). In the 3D
model both horizontal and vertical units are assumed to be the same. In the 2D/1D model horizontal and vertical
units can differ. The 'Horizontal unit' setting in this screen refers to the output units. It is permissible to have input
units in feet and output units in meters. Input units are set in the 'Input Files' tabbed screen.
If you choose SPC 1983, SPC 1927, or UTM, the appropriate zone will need to be chosen. The grid scale factor is
computed for each measured line using the method described in section 4.2 of NPAA Manual NOS NGS 5, ''State
Plane Coordinate System of 1983'', by James E. Stem.
If using the 2D/1D model and you select a geodetic coordinate system, you have a choice as to how the elevation
factor is computed. You can choose to either enter a project elevation or you can choose to have elevations factors
computed for each distance based on computed elevations. In order to use the 'Compute Elevation from Raw Data'
all HI's and foresight rod heights must be collected for all points.
If you choose a geodetic coordinate systemand are using the 2D/1Dmodel you will want to select ''Project Elevation''
if any of your raw data measurements are missing any rod heights or instrument heights. There must be enough
information to compute elevations for all points in order to compute elevation factors. For most survey projects it is
sufcient to use an approximate elevation, such as can be obtained from a Quad Sheet for the project elevation.
Geoid Modeling
If you are using either the 3D or the 2D/1D adjustment model using SPC 1983 or UTM reduction you must choose
a geoid modeling method. A project geoid separation can be entered or the GEOID99 or GEOID03 grid models
can be used. The project must fall within the geographic range of the geoid grid les in order to use GEOID99 or
GEOID03 models.
Geoid modeling is used as follows. Entering a 0.0 value for the separation is the method to use if you wish to ignore
the geoid separation. In the 2D, 1D model it is assumed that elevations entered as control are entered as orthometric
heights. Since grid reduction requires the data be reduced to the ellipsoid, the geoid separation is used to compute
ellipsoid elevations. The difference between using geoid modeling and not using geoid modeling or using a
project geoid separation is insignicant for most surveys of limited extents. In the 3D model it is also assumed
that elevations entered as control are orthometric heights. Since the adjustment is performed on the ellipsoid, the
geoid separation is used to compute ellipsoid elevations prior to adjustment. After the adjustment is completed the
adjusted orthometric elevations will be computed from the adjusted ellipsoid elevations and the computed geoid
separation for each point.
Geoid modeling is especially important for projects covering large extents. If you incorporate GPS vector data from
an OPUS solution into your project it will be necessary to use geoid modeling, otherwise your results will be poor.
If you choose the GEOID99 or GEOID03 modeling option, geoid separations are computed by interpolation with
data points retrieved from geoid separation les. The geoid separation les should be found in the primary the
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1406
installation directory. Grid les have an extension of .grd. These les should have been installed during the instal-
lation of SurvNet. These les can be downloaded from the Carlson/C&G website, carlsonsw.com, if needed. The
geoid les used by SurvNet are not in the same format as the geoid les available from NGS. The geoid les used by
SurvNet must come from Carlson/C&G, either installed during installation or downloaded from the Carlson website.
If you choose to enter a project geoid separation the best way to determine a project geoid separation is by using the
GEOID03 option of the NGS on-line Geodetic Toolkit. Enter a latitude and longitude of the project midpoint and
the program will output a project separation.
Working With User-dened Coordinate Systems
SurvNet allows the creation of user-dened geodetic coordinate systems (UDP). The ability to create user-dened
coordinate system allows the user to create geodetic coordinate systems based on projections that are not explicitly
supported by SurvNet. A SurvNet user-dened coordinate system consists of an ellipsoid, and a map projection,.
The ellipsoid can be one of the explicitly supported ellipsoids or a user-dened ellipsoid. The supported map
projections are Transverse Mercator, Lambert Conformal Conic with 1 standard parallel, Lambert Conformal Conic
with 2 standard parallels, Oblique Mercator (NGS), and Double Stereographic projection. User-dened coordinate
systems are created, edited, and attached to a project from the Project Settings 'Coordinate System' dialog box. To
attach an existing UDP le,
*
.udp, to a project use the 'Select' button. To edit an existing UDP le or create a new
UDP le use the 'Edit' button.
The User-dened Oblique Mercator projection used by SurvNet uses the Oblique Mercator projection formulas
published in the NGS document ''State Plane Coordinate System of 1983' by James Stem. This implementation
of the Oblique Mercator projection uses the convention of the False North and East being the natural origin, as
opposed to the origin being the center of the projection.
The following dialog box is used to create the user-dened coordinate system. The ellipsoid needs to be dened and
the appropriate map projection and projection parameters need to be entered. The appropriate parameter elds will
be displayed depending on the projection type chosen.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1407
Test - Use the 'Test' button to enter a known latitude and longitude position to check that the UDP is computing
correct grid coordinates. Following is the test UDP dialog box. Enter the known lat/long in the top portion of the
dialog box then press 'Calculate' and the computed grid coordinates will be displayed in the 'Results' list box.
Load -Use the 'Load' to load the coordinate system parameters from an existing UDP.
Save - Use the 'Save' button to save the displayed UDP. The 'Save' button prompts the user to enter the UDP le
name.
OK - Use the 'OK' button to save the UDP using the existing le name and return to the 'Coordinate System' dialog
box.
Cancel - Use the 'Cancel' button to return to the 'Coordinate System' dialog box without saving any changes to the
UDP le.
If you need to dene an ellipsoid chose the 'User-Dened' ellipsoid option. With the user-dened ellipsoid
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1408
you will then have the option to enter two of the ellipsoid parameter.
Input Files
Raw Data Files: Use the 'Add' button to insert raw total station les into the list. Use the 'Remove' button to
remove raw les from the list. All the les in this list are included in the least squares adjustments. Having the
ability to choose multiple les allows one to keep control in one le and measurements in another le. Or different
les collected at different times can be processed all at one time. If you have multiple crews working on the same
project using different equipment, you can have ''crew-specic'' raw data les with standard error settings for their
particular equipment. Having separate data les is also a convenient method of working with large projects. It is
often easier to debug and process individual raw les. Once the individual les are processing correctly all the les
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1409
can be included for a nal adjustment.
You can select C&G (.CGR) raw les, Carlson (.RW5) les or SDMS (.PRJ) les for processing. You cannot
select different le types. For example, you cannot select both .CGR and .RW5 les in the same project to be
processed at the same time. Notice that you have the ability to highlight multiple les when removing or adding les
Carlson RW5 les can contain GPS vector records. If you wish to use the vectors from the RW5 le, check the
''Include any GPS Vectors'' box. You can also select RW5 les containing vectors in the GPS vector Files area.
Level Raw Files: Differential and Trig level les can be entered and processed. There are two type of level le
supported by SurvNET:
.TLV les - this is the new Carlson level le. It can contain Trig-Level and/or Differential-Level data. This is the
le created by SurvCE version 2.0 or higher.
.LEV les - this is Carlson's old level le format. It can contain single-wire or three-wire differential-level data.
You can view/edit these les by pressing the ''Edit'' button next to the level le input eld.
Under the tools menu pull down, you have the option to convert level les from other formats to either a TLV or
LEV format.
GPS Vector Files: GPS vector les can be entered and processed. Both GPS vector les and total station raw
les can be combined and processed together. You must have chosen the 3D mathematical model in the Coordinate
System tab in order to include GPS vectors in the adjustment.
Currently, the following GPS vector le formats are supported.
ASCII (StarNET)
Ashtech / Thales: Thales les typically have .obn extensions and are binary les.
Carlson RW5 les containing GPS vector records
GeoLab (.IOB)
LandXML, (
*
.xml)
Leica: Leica les are ASCII les.
NGS G-File
NGS G-File from an OPUS report
StarNet ASCII GPS: See below for more information on StarNet format. These les typically have .GPS extensions.
Topcon (.tvf): Topcon .tvf les are ASCII les.
Topcon (.xml): Topcon also can output their GPS vectors in XML format which is in ASCII format.
Trimble Data Exchange Format (.asc): These les are in ASCII format
Trimble data collection (.dc): These les are ASCII.
Trimble LandXML (.jxl)
The following is a typical vector record in the StarNet ASCII format. GPS vectors typically consist of the 'from'
and 'to' point number, the delta X, delta Y, delta Z values from the 'from' and 'to' point, with the XYZ deltas being
in the geocentric coordinate system. Additionally the variance/covariance values of the delta XYZ's are included in
the vector le.
G0 'V3 00:34 00130015.SSF
G1 400-401 4725.684625 -1175.976652 1127.564218
G2 1.02174748583350E-007 2.19210810829205E-007 1.23924502584092E-007
G3 6.06552466633441E-008 -5.58807795027874E-008 -9.11050726758263E-008
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1410
The GO record is a comment. The G1 record includes the 'from' and 'to' point and the delta X, delta Y, and delta
Z in the geocentric coordinate system. The G2 record is the variance of X,Y, and Z. The G3 record contains the
covariance of XY, the covariance ZX, and the covariance ZY. Most all GPS vector les contain the same data elds
in varying formats.
Use the 'Add' button to insert GPS vector les into the list. Use the 'Delete' button to remove GPS vector les
from the list. All the les in this list will be used in the least squares adjustments. All the GPS les in the
list must be in the same format. If the GPS le format is ASCII you have the option to edit the GPS vector
les. The Edit option allows the editing of any of the ASCII GPS les using Notepad. Typically, only point
numbers would be the elds in a GPS vector le that a user would have need to edit. The variance/covariance values
are used to determine the weights that the GPS vectors will receive during the adjustment and are not typically edited.
For a variety of reasons it is common for GPS vector data collected with GPS equipment to have point names that
do not match the point names used in the total station data. Generally the easiest way to handle this situation is to
rst convert the GPS data into the StarNet ASCII .format using the 'Tools/Convert GPS le to ASCII' menu option.
Once the le has been converted to ASCII it is straightforward to change the G1 records using any text editor to
reect the correct point numbers.
Supplemental Control File: The supplemental control le option allows the user to designate an additional coordi-
nate le to be used as control. The supplemental control les can be from a variety of different le types.
Carlson SQLite (
*
.crdb)
C&G numeric (
*
.crd)
C&G alphanumeric (
*
.cgc)
Carlson numeric(
*
.crd)
Carlson alphanumeric(
*
.crd)
Autodesk Land Desktop (
*
.mdb)
Simplicity (
*
.zak)
ASCII P,N,E,Z,D,C (
*
.nez)
ASCII P,Lat,Long,Ortho,D,C (
*
.txt)
CSV ASCII NEZ with std. errors
SDMS (.ctl) control le
Note: You should never use the same le for supplemental control points and for nal output. Least squares
considers all points to be measurements. If the output le is also used as a supplemental control le then after the
project has been processed all the points in the project would now be in the control le and all the points in the le
would now be considered control points if the project was processed again. The simplest and most straight-forward
method to dene control for a project is to include the control coordinates in a raw data le.
Preprocessing
The Preprocessing tab contains settings that are used in the preprocessing of the raw data.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1411
Apply Curvature and Refraction Corrections: Set this toggle if you wish to have the curvature refraction
correction applied. Curvature/refraction primarily impacts vertical distances.
Tolerances: When sets of angles and/or distances are measured to a point, a single averaged value is calcu-
lated for use in the least squares adjustment. You may set the tolerances so that a warning is generated if any
differences between the angle sets or distances exceed these tolerances. Tolerance warnings will be shown in the
report (.RPT) and the (.ERR) le after processing the data.
Extended Angle Sets & Distance Report: If you check this box, you will get an expanded tolerance re-
port. You will see a list of angles, distances, zenith angles and vertical differences that were averaged to get the
single measurement used in the adjustment. If the list exceeds the tolerance settings, you will also see a warning.
This will make for a much longer report. Below is a sample of the extended report:
=========================================
Horizontal Angle: IP: 122, BS: 142, FS: 123
265-29'23.0''
265-29'21.0''
Average: 265-29'22.0''
=========================================
Distance: From: 104, To: 103
Vert. Ang. Slope Dist. Horiz. Dist. Vert. Dist.
090-37'11.0'' 324.8900 324.8710 -4.3718
090-37'06.0'' 324.8900 324.8711 -4.3640
089-01'54.0'' 324.9150 324.8685 4.4032
089-01'50.0'' 324.9150 324.8684 4.4095
090-37'03.0'' 324.8900 324.8712 -4.3592
090-37'10.0'' 324.8900 324.8711 -4.3703
089-03'59.0'' 324.9200 324.8768 4.3864
089-04'05.0'' 324.9200 324.8769 4.3769
Average 089-50'02.2'' 324.8878 324.8719 -4.3802
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1412
Vertical Distance from 104 to 103 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 4.3592, High: 4.4095, Diff: 0.0502
=========================================
Horz./Slope Dist Tolerance: This value sets the tolerance threshold for the display of warnings if the dif-
ference between highest and lowest horizontal distance exceeds this value. In the 2D model it is the horizontal
distances that are being compared. In the 3D model it is the slope distances that are being compared.
Vert. Dist Tolerance: This value sets the tolerance threshold for the display of a warning if the difference
between highest and lowest vertical difference component exceeds this value (used in 2D model only).
Angle Set Spread Display: You can choose either individual angle spreads or SET angle spreads. If you
choose individual, all the angles will be compared and a high and low will be determined. If you choose SETS,
we will treat a SET (two angles) as a single angle by averaging them prior to comparing to another SET. If you
only turn one SET of angles, there will be no tolerance check. If you turn 4 SETS of angles, the tolerance will be
calculated from four angles.
Horz. Angle Tolerance: This value sets the tolerance threshold for the display of a warning if the differ-
ence between the highest and lowest horizontal angle exceeds this value (or highest and lowest SET depending on
the previous setting). Vert. Angle Tolerance: This value sets the tolerance threshold for the display a warning if
the difference between the highest and lowest vertical angle exceeds this value (used in 3D model only).
Compute Traverse Closures: Traditional traverse closures can be computed for both GPS loops and total station
traverses. This option has no effect on the computation of nal least squares adjusted coordinates. This option is
useful for surveyors who due to statutory requirements are still required to compute traditional traverse closures and
for those surveyors who still like to view traverse closures prior to the least squares adjustment. This option is used
to specify a previously created closure le.
To use this option the user has to rst create a traverse closure le. The le contains a .cls extension. The traverse
closure le is a le containing an ordered list of the point numbers comprising the traverse. Since the raw data
for SurvNet is not expected to be in any particular order it is required that the user most specify the points and the
correct order of the points in the traverse loop. Both GPS loops and angle/distance traverses can be dened in a
single traverse closure le. More details on creating the traverse closure les follow in a later section of this manual.
Pt. Number Substitution String: This option is used to automatically renumber point names based on this string.
Some data collectors do not allow the user to use the same point number twice during data collection. In least
squares it is common to collect measurements to the same point from different locations. If the data collector
does not allow the collection of data from different points using the same point number this option can be used to
automatically renumber these points during processing. For example you could enter the string '=' in the Pt. Number
Substitution String. Then if you shot point 1 but had to call it something else such as 101 you could enter '=1' in the
description eld and during preprocessing point 101 would be renumbered as point '1'. With small projects it may
be just as easy to edit the raw data.
Adjustment
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1413
Maximum Iterations: Non-linear least squares is an iterative process. The user must dene the maximum number
of iterations to make before the program quits trying to nd a converging solution. Typically if there are no blunders
in the data the solution will converge in 2-5 iterations.
Convergence Threshold: During each iteration corrections are computed. When the corrections are less than the
threshold value the solution has converged. This value should be somewhat less than the accuracy of the measure-
ments. For example, if you can only measure distances to the nearest .01' then a reasonable convergence threshold
value would be .005'.
Condence Interval: This setting is used when calculating the size of error ellipses, and in the chi-square testing.
For example, a 95% condence interval means that there is a 95% chance that the error is within the tolerances
shown.
Enable sideshots for relative error ellipses: Check this box if you want to see the error ellipses and relative error
ellipses of sideshots. This checkbox must be set if you want to use the ''relative error ellipse inverse'' function with
sideshots. When turned off this toggle lters out sideshots during the least squares processing. Since the sideshots
are excluded from the least squares processing error ellipses cannot be computed for these points. When this toggle
is off, the sideshots are computed after the network has been adjusted. The nal coordinate values of the sideshots
will be the same regardless of this setting.
Large numbers of sideshots slow down least squares processing. It is best to uncheck this box while debugging your
project to avoid having to wait for the computer to nish processing. After the project processes correctly you may
turn on the option for the nal processing.
Note: If you wish to get statistics on certain selected sideshots, you can create an ALT le with the selected points.
This will force them to be included in the calculation process - even if you have ''Enable sideshots for relative error
ellipses'' unchecked.
Relative Err. Points File: The ALTA standards require that surveyors certify to the relative positional error between
points. Relative error ellipses are an accepted method of determining the relative positional error required by the
ALTA standards. The points that are to be included in the relative error checking are specied by the user. These
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1414
points are dened in an ASCII le with an extension of .alt. To select an .alt le for relative error checking use the
'Select' button and then browse to the le's location.
There is a section later in the manual that describes how to create and edit the .alt le.
Include ALTAtolerance report: Turn this toggle on if you wish to include the ALTAtolerance section of the report.
Allowable Tolerance, PPM: These elds allow the user to set the allowable error for computations. Typically the
user would enter the current ALTA error standards, i.e. 0.07' & 50 PPM.
See the later section in this manual for more detailed information on creating and interpreting the ALTA section of
the report.
Standard Errors
Standard errors are the expected measurement errors based on the type equipment and eld procedures being used.
For example, if you are using a 5 second total station, you would expect the angles to be measured within +/- 5
seconds (Reading error).
The Distance Constant, PPM settings, and Angle Reading should be based on the equipment and eld pro-
cedures being used. These values can be obtained from the published specications for the total station. Or the
distance PPM and constant can be computed for a specic EDM by performing an EDM calibration using an EDM
calibration baseline.
Survey methods should also be taken into account when setting standard errors. For example, you might set the
target centering standard error higher when you are sighting a held prism pole than you would if you were sighting
a prism set on a tripod.
The settings from this dialog box will be used for the project default settings. These default standard errors can be
overridden for specic measurements by placing SE records directly into the Raw Data File (see the above section
on raw data les).
If the report generated when you process the data shows that generally you have consistently high standard residuals
for a particular measurement value (angles, distances, etc.), then there is the chance that you have selected standard
errors that are better than your instrument and methods can obtain. (See explanation of report le). Failing the
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1415
chi-square test consistently is also an indication that the selected standard errors are not consistent with the eld
measurements.
You can set the standard errors for the following:
Distance and Angle Standard Errors
Distance Constant: Constant portion of the distance error. This value can be obtained from published EDM
specications, or from an EDM calibration.
Distance PPM: Parts per million component of the distance error. This value can be obtained from published EDM
specication, or from an EDM calibration.
Horizontal Angle Pointing: The horizontal angle pointing error is inuenced by atmospheric conditions, optics,
experience and care taken by instrument operator.
Horizontal Angle Reading: Precision of horizontal angle measurements, obtain from theodolite specs.
Vertical Angle Pointing: The vertical angle pointing error is inuenced by atmospheric conditions, optics, experi-
ence and care taken by instrument operator.
Vertical Angle Reading: Precision of vertical angle measurements, obtain from theodolite specs.
Instrument and Target Standard Errors
Target Centering: This value is the expected amount of error in setting the target or prism over the point.
Instrument Centering: The expected amount of error in setting the total station over the point.
Target Height: The expected amount of error in measuring the height of the target.
Instrument Height: The expected amount of error in measuring the height of the total station.
Control Standard Errors
Direction (Bearing / Azimuth): The estimated amount of error in the bearing / azimuth (direction) found in the
azimuth records of the raw data.
North, East, Elev: The estimated amount of error in the control north, east and elev. You may want to
have different coordinate standard errors for different methods of obtaining control. Control derived from RTK
GPS would be higher than control derived from GPS static measurements.
GPS Standard Errors
Instrument Centering: This option is used to specify the error associated with centering a GPS receiver over a
point.
Vector Standard Error Factor: This option is used as a factor to increase GPS vector standard errors as found in
the input GPS vector le. Some people think that the GPS vector variances/covariances as found in GPS vector les
tend to be overly optimistic. This factor allows the user to globally increase the GPS vector standard errors without
having to edit the GPS vector le. A factor of 0 should be the default value and results in no change to the GPS
vector standard errors as found in the GPS vector le. The maximum value allowed is 10.
Differential Leveling Standard Errors
These setting only effect level data and are not used when processing total station or GPS vector les.
Avg, Dist. To BS/FS: This option is used to dene the average distance to the backsight and foresight during
leveling.
Rod Reading Error per 100 ft./m: This option is used to dene the expected level reading error.
Collimation Error: This is the expected differential leveling collimation error in seconds.
Standard Error Denition Files
The Standard error settings can be saved and then later reloaded into an existing or new project. Creating libraries
of standard errors for different types of survey equipment or survey procedures is convenient method of creating
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1416
standards within a survey department that uses a variety of equipment and performs different types of surveys.
Standard error library les,
*
.sef les, can be created two ways. From the 'Settings/Standard Errors' dialog box the
'Load' button can be used to import an existing .sef le into the current project. A .sef le can also be created from
the existing project standard errors by using the 'Save As..' button.
Standard error les, .sef les, can also be managed from the main 'Files' menu. Use the 'Edit Standard Error File'
menu option to edit an existing standard error le. Use the 'New Standard Error File' option to create a new standard
error le.
After choosing one of the menu options and choosing the le to edit or create, the following dialog box will be
shown. Set the desired standard errors and press the 'OK' button to save the standard error le.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1417
These settings apply to the output of data to the report and coordinate les.
Display Precision
These settings determine the number of decimal places to display in the reports for the following types of data. The
display precision has no effect on any computations, only the display of the reports.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1418
Coordinates (North, East, Elevation) - Chose 0-4 decimal places.
Distances - Chose 0-4 decimal places
Directions (Azimuths or Bearings) - nearest second, tenth of second, or hundredth of second.
Format
These settings determine the format for the following types of data.
Direction - Choose either bearings or azimuth for direction display. If the angle units are degrees, bearings are
entered as QDD.MMSSss and azimuths are entered as DDD.MMSSss. If the angle units are grads, bearings are
input as QGGG.ggggg and azimuths are input as GGG.ggggg.
Coordinate Display - Choose the order of coordinate display, either north-east or east-north.
Null Elevation - Choose the value for null elevations in the output ASCII coordinate NEZ le. The Null Elevation
eld defaults to SurvNet's value for NO ELEVATION,of -999999999.0 .
Angle Display - Choose the units you are working int, degrees or gradians.
ASCII NEZ Output
These settings determine the type and format of the output NEZ le. An ASCII .NEZ and .OUT les are always
created after processing the raw data. The .OUT le will be a nicely formatted version of the .NEZ le suitable for
printing. The .NEZ le will be an ASCII le suitable to be input into other programs. There are a variety of options
for the format of the .NEZ le. Following are the different ASCII le output options.
P,N,E,Z,CD,DESC (xed columns); - Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc in xed columns separated by commas.
P,N,E,Z,CD,DESC; Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc separated by commas.
P N E Z CD DESC (xed columns); Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc in xed columns with no commas.
P N E Z CD DESC; Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc in xed columns with no commas.
P,N,E,Z,DESC (xed columns); Point,north,east,elev., desc in xed columns separated by commas.
P,N,E,Z,DESC; Point,north,east,elev., desc separated by commas.
P N E Z DESC (xed columns); Point,north,east,elev., desc in xed columns with no commas.
P N E Z DESC; Point,north,east,elev.,code,desc separated by spaces.
P,E,N,Z,CD,DESC (xed columns); - Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc in xed columns separated by commas.
P,E,N,Z,CD,DESC; Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc separated by commas.
P E N Z CD DESC (xed columns); Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc in xed columns with no commas.
P E N Z CD DESC; Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc in xed columns with no commas.
P,E,N,Z,DESC (xed columns); Point,east,north,elev., desc in xed columns separated by commas.
P,E,N,Z,DESC; Point,east,north,elev., desc separated by commas.
P E N Z DESC (xed columns); Point,east,,northelev., desc in xed columns with no commas.
P E N Z DESC; Point,east,north,elev.,code,desc separated by spaces.
CSV ASCII with std. errors (This format is useful as it can be used as a supplemental control input le type option,
where the coordinate standard errors output for one project can be used as input for another project.)
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1419
You can also set the output precision of the coordinates for the ASCII output le. This setting only applies to ASCII
les, not to the C&G or Carlson binary coordinate les which are stored to full double precision.
*
N/E Precision: number of places after the decimal to use for North and East values (0 -> 8) in the output NEZ
ASCII le.
*
Elevation Precision: number of places after the decimal to use for Elevation values (0 -> 8) in the output NEZ
ASCII le.
Coordinate File Output
If you want to write the calculated coordinates directly to a Carlson or C&G coordinate le, check the ''Write to
Coordinate File'' box and select the le. You can choose the type of Carlson/C&G le to be created when you
'select' the le to be created. You may wish to leave this box unchecked until you are satised with the adjustment.
Following are the different available coordinate output le options.
*
NOTE: If coordinate points already exist in the CRD le, and they have different values, before a point is written,
you will be shown the NEW value, the OLD value, and given the following option:
Cancel: Cancel the present operation. No more points will be written to the Carson/C&G le.
Overwrite: Overwrite the existing point. Notice that if you check the 'Do Not Ask Again' box all further duplicate
points will be overwritten without prompting.
Do not Overwrite: The existing point will not be overwritten. Notice that if you check the 'Do Not Ask Again' box
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1420
all further duplicate points will automatically not be overwritten - only new points will be written.
Scaled Coordinate File
This feature allows you to output to a second, ''Scaled'' coordinate le. The main purpose of this feature is to create
a GROUND based coordinate le when working on a SPC system.
First check the ''Create Scaled/Ground NEZ File'' checkbox to turn the feature ON.
Select the TYPE coordinate le you wish to output to and select the le.
If your project is based on a SPC system, you will have the following scaling options:
To Ground. Use avg. computed combined SF
Manually enter SF
If you select the rst option, the combined scale factor is calculated for each of the points and then the total is
averaged. The inverse of this scale factor will be used to calculate the coordinates of the SCALED coordinate le.
This will give you GROUND coordinates for the project.
If you wish, you may also manually enter the desired scale factor.
If your project is based on a Local or Assumed coordinate system, you will only have the option to manually enter
the scale factor as the scale factors cannot be calculated.
Next you will enter the point number you wish to SCALE around:
Pt. to Scale
Next you have the following TRANSLATION options:
Use current NE values
Enter new NE values
Enter translation values
The rst option will use the current coordinates of the SCALE POINT, all other coordinate points will be scaled
around this point.
The second option allows you to enter NEW coordinate values for the SCALE POINT. All the points will rst be
translated so that the SCALE POINT has the values entered here and then they will be scaled around the SCALE
POINT.
The third option allows you to directly enter the delta-north and delta-east translation values. All the points will rst
be translated and then scaled.
If the Scaled Coordinate le exists when you process the project, you will see the following warning dialog box:
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1421
If you pick OK the points in the Scaled File will be overwritten. If you Cancel no point will be written to the Scaled
File.
Process Menu
When you select Process >Network Adjustment from the menu, or select the NETWORK ICON on the tool bar, the
raw data will be processed and adjusted using least squares based on the project settings. If there is a problem with
the reduction, you will be shown error messages that will help you track down the problem. Additionally an .err le
is created that will log and display error and warning messages.
The data is rst preprocessed to calculate averaged angles and distances for sets of angles and multiple distances.
For a given setup, all multiple angles and distances to a point will be averaged prior to the adjustment. The standard
error as set in the Project Settings dialog box is the standard error for a single measurement. Since the average of
multiple measurements is more precise than a single measurement the standard error for the averaged measurement
is computed using the standard deviation of the mean formula.
Non-linear network least squares solutions require that initial approximations of all the coordinates be known before
the least squares processing can be performed. So, during the preprocessing approximate coordinate values for each
point are calculated using basic coordinate geometry functions. If there is inadequate control or odd geometric situ-
ations SurvNet may generate a message indicating that the initial coordinate approximations could not be computed.
The most common cause of this problem is that control has not been adequately dened or there are point number
problems.
Side Shots are separated from the raw data and computed after the adjustment (unless the ''Enable sideshots for
relative error ellipses'' toggle is checked in the adjustment dialog box). If side shots are ltered out of the least
squares process and processed after the network is adjusted, processing is greatly speeded up, especially for a large
project with a lot of side shots.
If the raw data processes completely, a report le, .RPT, a .NEZ le, an .OUT le, and an .ERR le will be created in
the project directory. The le names will consist of the project name plus the above le extensions. These different
les are shown in separate windows after processing. Additionally a graphic window of the network is displayed.
.RPT le: This is an ASCII le that contains the statistical and computational results of the least squares processing.
.NEZ le: This le is an ASCII le containing the nal adjusted coordinates. This le can be imported into any
program that can read ASCII coordinate les. The format of the le is determined by the setting in the project
settings dialog box.
.OUT le: The .OUT le is a formatted ASCII le of the nal adjusted coordinates suitable for display or printing
.ERR le: The .ERR le contains any warning or error messages that were generated during processing. Though
some warning messages may be innocuous it is always prudent to review and understand the meaning of the
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1422
messages.
The following is a graphic of the different windows displayed after processing. Notice that with the report le you
can navigate to different sections of the report using the Tabs at the top of the window.
If you have ''Write to Carlson/C&G.CRD'' checked in the output options dialog, the coordinates will also be written
to a .CRD le.
GPS vector networks can be adjusted with the current version of SurvNet. This chapter will describe the processing
of a simple GPS network. Following is a graphic view of the GPS network that is to be adjusted. Points A and B are
control points. The red lines represent measured GPS vectors. Most GPS vendor's software can output GPS vectors
to a le as part of the post processing of GPS data.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1423
When processing GPS vectors certain project settings are important. In the following settings dialog box notice that
the 3D-model has been chosen, and SPC 1983 with an appropriate zone has been chosen. The 3-D model and a
geodetic coordinate are required when processing GPS vectors. Though it is not require for GPS processing it is in
most cases appropriate to chose to do geoid modeling, especially if the project covers a large extents. The following
settings dialog box shows the raw les used in processing GPS les. A GPS vector le must be chosen.
GPS vector les from various GPS vendors are currently supported. Select the vector les to be processed:
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1424
Coordinate control for the network can be in one of several les. The control can be located in the GPS vector
le itself. More typically, the control points can be regular coordinate records in the .RW5 or the .CGR le. The
also can be entered as 'Supplemental Control' in one of the available formats. When the control coordinates are in
the raw data le or supplemental coordinate le, the coordinates are expected to be grid coordinates. If the control
coordinates are found in the GPS vector le, they are assumed to be Earth centered XYZ.
Very often the point numbering convention used in the GPS data collection is different than the point number
convention used when collecting total station data. If the point numbers in the GPS le differ from the total station
point number it is easy to rst convert the native GPS format le to a ASCII .GPS using the 'Tools/Convert GPS le
to ASCII' menu option. The .GPS ASCII les can easily be edited to ensure point numbers are consistent between
GPS and total station data.
It is not unusual to have different distance units for GPS, total station data, and control data. Often the GPS vector
data is in metric units but the total station raw le is in US Feet. So, the distance units must be specied for the
different raw data types.
In the Preprocessing Settings dialog box the only important setting is the 'Compute Traverse Closures:' options.
If GPS loop closures need to be computed, the loop point numbers need to be entered into a closure le. See the
chapter on traverse closures to see how to create closure les.
There are two GPS standard errors elds in the Standard Errors Settings dialog box. The GPS vector XYZ standard
errors and covariances do not need to be dened as project settings since they are typically found in the GPS vector
data les. The Instrument centering standard error is the estimated error in centering the GPS unit over the survey
point. The 'vector Std. Err. Factor' can be used to globally increase the variance/covariances found in the GPS les
without having to edit the GPS le itself. .
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1425
Processing a Total Station and a GPS Vector Network
Processing a GPS vector network together with conventional total station data is similar to processing a GPS network
by itself. The only difference in regards to project settings is that a raw data le containing the total station data needs
to be chosen as well as a GPS vector le. The project must be set up for the 3D model and a geodetic coordinate
system needs to be chosen. The total station must contain full 3D data, including all rod heights and instrument
heights measured. Following is a view of the Input Files Settings dialog box showing both a GPS vector le and a
total station raw data le chosen in a single project. It is not uncommon to have different distance units for GPS data
and total station data, so make sure the correct units are set for data types.
One of the most common problems for new users in combining GPS and total station data is not collecting HI's and
rod heights when collecting the total station data. Since the 3D model is being used complete 3D data needs to be
collected.
The 'Preprocess, compute unadjusted coordinates' option allows the computation of unadjusted coordinates. If there
are redundant measurements in the raw data, the rst angle and distance found in the raw data is used to compute
the coordinates. If a state plane grid system has been designated the measurements are reduced to grid prior to the
computation of the unadjusted coordinates. If the point is located from two different points the initial computation
of the point will be the value stored.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1426
A variety of blunder detection tools are available that gives the user additional tools in analyzing his survey data,
and detecting blunders. The standard least squares adjustment processing and its resulting report can often be used
to determine blunders. No blunder detection method can be guaranteed to nd all blunders. So much depends on
the nature of the network geometry, the nature of the measurements, and the intuition of the analyst. Generally, the
more redundancy there is in a network the easier it is to detect blunders.
There are three different methods that can be used to track down blunders in a network or traverse.
Option 1) Preprocess the raw data:
The 'Preprocess the raw data' option validates the raw data. It displays angle and distance spreads as well as checks
the validity of the raw data. Traverse closures are computed if specied. It also performs a ''K-Matrix'' analysis. The
''K-Matrix'' analysis compares the unadjusted, averaged measurements with the computed preliminary measurements
(measurements calculated from the preliminary computed coordinates). This method will catch blunders such as
using the same point number twice for two different points. The report will be sent to the ERR le. The ERR le
will contain the tolerance checks, closures and the K-Matrix analysis. Following is an example of the report created
using the 'Preprocess the raw data' option. Notice that the rst section of the report shows the angle and distance
spreads from the multiple angle and distance measurements. The second part of the report shows the 'K-matrix
analyses.
Additionally there is a 'Point Proximity Report' section that reports pairs of different points that are in close proximity
to each other which may indicate where the same point was collected multiple times using different point numbers.
The 'Preprocess the raw data' option is one of the simplest and effective tools in nding blunders. Time spent
learning how this function works will be well spent. If the project is not converging due to an unknown blunder
in the raw data this tool is one of the most effective tools in nding the blunder. Many blunders are due to point
numbering errors during data collections, and the 'K-matrix' analysis and 'Point Proximity' search are great tools for
nding this type blunders.
=====================================
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1427
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT ERROR REPORT
=====================================
Tue Mar 21 16:04:32 2006
Input Raw Files: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Checking raw data syntax and angle & distance spreads.
Warning: Missing Vert. Angle. Assumption made as to whether it is direct or reverse.
1 5.00 180.00050 4
Warning: Missing Vert. Angle. Assumption made as to whether it is direct or reverse.
1 5.01 145.54300 2 H&T
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 1, BS: 5, FS: 2
Low: 109-19'10.0'' , High: 109-19'17.0'' , Diff: 000-00'07.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 6
Low: 190-32'02.0'' , High: 190-32'10.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
K-Matrix Analysis.
Distance: From pt.: 4 To pt.: 5
Measured distance: 309.61 Initial computed distance: 309.65
Difference: -0.04
Distance: From pt.: 12 To pt.: 3
Measured distance: 144.63 Initial computed distance: 144.66
Difference: -0.03
Distance: From pt.: 5 To pt.: 6
Measured distance: 348.51 Initial computed distance: 523.29
Difference: -174.79
Angle: IP: 4 BS: 3 FS: 5
Measured angle: 093-02'11.5''
Initial computed angle: 093-01'45.1''
Difference: 000-00'26.4''
Angle: IP: 12 BS: 11 FS: 3
Measured angle: 140-39'24.5''
Initial computed angle: 140-40'32.6''
Difference: -000-01'08.1''
Angle: IP: 5 BS: 4 FS: 1
Measured angle: 117-30'42.5''
Initial computed angle: 117-31'16.4''
Difference: -000-00'33.9''
Angle: IP: 5 BS: 4 FS: 6
Measured angle: 145-30'34.0''
Initial computed angle: 079-39'46.4''
Difference: 065-50'47.6''
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1428
Point Proximity Report:
Points 3 and 30 are within 0.05 of each other.
The problem with the above project was that point 6 was accidentally used twice for two separate side shots. Because
of the point numbering problem the project would not converge, using the regular least squares processing. The
'Preprocess the raw data.' option was then used. Notice in the K-matrix section the distance from 5 to 6 shows
a difference of 174.79' and the angle 4-5-6 shows a difference of 065-50'47.6''. Then notice that the other listed
differences are in the range of .02' for the distances and less than a minute for the angles. This report is clearly
pointing out a problem to point 6.
Note the point proximity report section. During data collection point number 30 was used as the point number when
the point was previously collected as point 3.
In the rst section of the report notice that there are several warnings concerning whether a horizontal angle
reading was collected in direct or reverse reading. The preprocessing software uses the vertical angle reading to
determine the angle face of the horizontal angle reading. If the vertical angle is missing the program makes its best
guess as to whether the angle was collected in direct or reverse face. Since all horizontal angle spreads in the report
are reasonable, the preprocessing software must have made the correct determination.
Option 2) Float one observation:
This option is useful in nding a single blunder, either an angle or distance, within a network or traverse. If there is
more than a single blunder in the network then it is less likely that this method will be able to isolate the blunders. If
the standard least squares processing results in a network that will not converge then this blunder detection method
might not work. Use the 'Preprocess the raw data' blunder detection method if the solution is not converging.
Also this method will only work on small and moderately sized networks. This method performs a least squares
adjustment once for every non-trivial measurement in the network. So for large networks this method may take so
long to process that it is not feasible to use this method.
With this method an adjustment is computed for each non-trivial individual angle and distance measurement.
Consecutively, a single angle or distance is allowed to oat during each adjustment. The selected oated angle
or distance does not ''constrain'' the adjustment in any way. If there is a single bad angle or distance, one of
the adjustment possibilities will place most of the error in the ''oat'' measurement, and the other measurements
should have small residuals. The potentially bad angle or distance is agged with a double asterisk (
**
). Since an
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1429
adjustment is computed for each measurement this method my take a long time when analyzing large data les.
The adjustments with the lowest reference variances are selected as the most likely adjustments that have
isolated the blunder. You have the choice to view the best adjustment, or the top adjustments with a maximum
of ten. In the above example we asked to see the top 5 choices for potential blunders. The results are shown in
the ERR le. Following is a section of the report generated where an angular blunder was introduced into a small
traverse. Notice the '
**
' characters beside the angle measurements. In this report the two most likely adjustments
were displayed. The blunder was introduced to angle 101-2-3. Angle 101-2-3 was chosen as the 2nd most likely
source of the blunder, showing that these blunder detection methods though not perfect, can be a useful tool in the
analysis of survey measurements. Notice how much higher the standard residuals are on the suspected blunders
than the standard residuals of the other measurements.
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
101 2 68.780 -0.006 0.608 0.008
2 3 22.592 -0.006 0.573 0.008
3 4 47.694 -0.002 0.213 0.008
4 5 44.954 -0.001 0.069 0.008
5 6 62.604 0.005 0.472 0.009
6 7 35.512 0.006 0.539 0.008
7 101 61.704 0.003 0.314 0.009
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.005
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
7 101 2 048-05'06'' -5 0 21
101 2 3 172-14'33'' -2 0 27
2 3 4 129-27'44'' -222
*
7 56
**
3 4 5 166-09'59'' 11 0 25
4 5 6 043-12'26'' 22 1 21
5 6 7 192-11'52'' 12 0 25
6 7 101 148-38'19'' 8 0 25
Root Mean Square (RMS) 85
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
101 7 N 00-00'00''E 0 0 4
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:3
Reference variance:0.78
Standard error unit Weight: +/-0.88
Passed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 signicance level
0.216 <= 2.347 <= 9.348
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1430
101 2 68.781 -0.005 0.473 0.009
2 3 22.592 -0.005 0.512 0.009
3 4 47.690 -0.006 0.586 0.009
4 5 44.950 -0.005 0.523 0.009
5 6 62.605 0.006 0.607 0.009
6 7 35.512 0.006 0.560 0.009
7 101 61.708 0.006 0.614 0.009
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.006
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
7 101 2 048-05'22'' 11 0 24
101 2 3 172-11'03'' -213
*
7 58
**
2 3 4 129-31'23'' -3 0 29
3 4 5 166-09'48'' 1 0 26
4 5 6 043-12'11'' 6 0 21
5 6 7 192-11'50'' 10 0 27
6 7 101 148-38'24'' 13 0 27
Root Mean Square (RMS) 81
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
101 7 N-00-00'00''E -0 0 5
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:3
Reference variance:0.89
Standard error unit Weight: +/-0.94
Passed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 signicance level
0.216 <= 2.675 <= 9.348
The blunder is most likely in the measurement containing the largest residual and standard residual. The observation
marked with
**
is the observation that oated. It is also most likely the measurement containing the blunder.
Option 3) Re-weight by residuals & std err:
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1431
This method is capable of detecting multiple blunders but one is more likely to nd the blunders if there is a high
degree of redundancy (network of interconnected traverses). The higher the degree of freedom the more likely this
method will nd the blunders. This method will not work if the standard least squares processing will not converge.
Use the 'Preprocess the raw data' blunder detection method if the network is not converging.
First, select the number of adjustments or passes you wish to make. Each time an adjustment is completed, the
measurements will be re-weighted based on the residuals and standard errors. Hopefully, after three or four passes,
the blunders will become obvious. The results are shown in the ERR le, look for the measurements with the highest
standard residuals. These measurements are more likely to contain blunders.
The theory behind this method is that after processing, the measurements with blunders are more likely to have
higher residuals and computed standard errors. So, in the next pass the measurements are reweighted based on the
computed residuals, with less weight being assigned to the measurements with high residuals. After several passes
it is likely that the measurements with the blunders have been reweighed such that they have little effect on the
network.
As a rule of thumb three or four passes are usually sufcient. Following is a section of the report showing the results
of the 'Reweight by residuals & std. err.'. This report was generated using the same data used in the earlier example.
Notice that it has agged the same two angle measurements.
The 'Reweight by residuals & std. err.' method performs a new adjustment for each pass. So, this method will take
longer than the standard least squares adjustment, but does not take near as long to complete processing as the 'Float
one Observation' method for larger networks.
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
101 2 68.778 -0.009 0.827 0.014
2 3 22.588 -0.010 0.942 0.015
3 4 47.694 -0.002 0.208 0.009
4 5 44.954 -0.001 0.077 0.006
5 6 62.608 0.010 0.919 0.016
6 7 35.517 0.011 1.040 0.016
7 101 61.705 0.004 0.398 0.011
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.008
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
7 101 2 048-05'07'' -4 0 21
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1432
101 2 3 172-13'19'' -77
*
2 65
2 3 4 129-29'56'' -91
*
3 64
3 4 5 166-09'44'' -3 0 24
4 5 6 043-12'05'' 0 0 9
5 6 7 192-11'40'' -0 0 19
6 7 101 148-38'10'' -1 0 20
Root Mean Square (RMS) 45
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
101 7 N 00-00'00''E 0 0 2
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 1 iterations
Degrees of freedom:3
Reference variance:1.77
Standard error unit Weight: +/-1.33
Passed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 signicance level
0.216 <= 5.322 <= 9.348
The blunder is most likely in the measurement containing the
largest residual and standard residual
Tools Menu
Inverse Buttons - The 'Inverse' button is found on the main window (the button with the icon that shows a line with
points at each end). You can also select the Tools->Inverse menu option. This feature is only active after a network
has been processed successfully. This option can be used to obtain the bearing and distance between any two points
in the network. Additionally the standard deviation of the bearing and distance between the two points is displayed.
The Relative Error Ellipse Inverse button is found on the main window (the button with the icon that
shows a line with an ellipse in the middle). You can also select the Tools > Relative Error Ellipse menu option.
This feature is only active after a network has been processed successfully. This option can be used to obtain the
relative error ellipse between two points. It shows the semi-major and semi-minor axis and the azimuth of the error
ellipse, computed to a user-dene condence interval. This information can also be used to determine the relative
precision between any two points in the network. It is the relative error ellipse calculation that is the basis for the
ALTA tolerance reporting. If the 'Enable sideshots for relative error ellipses' toggle is checked then all points in the
project can be used to compute relative error ellipses. The trade-off is that with large projects processing time will
be increased.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1433
If you need to certify as to the ''Positional Tolerances'' of your monuments, as per the ALTA Standards, use the
Relative Error Ellipse inverse routine to determine these values, or use the specic ALTAtolerance reporting function
as explained later in the manual.
For example, if you must certify that all monuments have a positional tolerance of no more than 0.07 feet with 50
PPM at a 95 percent condence interval. First set the condence interval to 95 percent in the Settings/Adjustment
screen. Then process the raw data. Then you may inverse between points in as many combinations as you
deem necessary and make note of the semi-major axis error values. If none of them are larger than 0.07 feet +
(50PPM
*
distance), you have met the standards. It is however more convenient to create a Relative Error Points File
containing the points you wish to check and include the ALTA tolerance report. This report takes into account the
PPM and directly tells you if the positional tolerance between the selected points meets the ALTA standards.
Convert GPS/Total Station Files
The purpose of this option is to convert GPS vector les that are in the manufacturers' binary or ASCII format into
the StarNet ASCII le format. The advantage of creating an ASCII le is that the ASCII le can be edited using a
standard text editor. Being able to edit the vector le may be necessary in order to edit point numbers so that the
point numbers in the GPS le match the point numbers in the total station le.
There is also a tool to convert Trimble Data Exchange total station data to either the Carlson RW5 format or
the C&G CGR format.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1434
The following dialog box is displayed after choosing this option.
First choose the le format of the GPS vector le to be converted. Next use the 'Select' button to navigate to the
vector le to be converted. If you are converting a Thales le you have the option to remove the leading 0's from
Thales point numbers. Next, use the second 'Select' button to select the name of the new ASCII GPS vector le
to be created. Choose the 'Convert' button to initiate the le conversion. Press the 'Cancel' button when you have
completed the conversions. The le created will have an extension of .GPS. Following are the different GPS formats
that can be converted to ASCII.
Ashtech/Thales: The Ashtech/Thales GPS vector le is a binary le and is sometimes referred to as an 'O' le.
Notice that you have the option to remove the leading 0's from Thales point numbers, by checking the ''Remove
leading 0's from Thales point numbers'' check box.
Carlson RW5: Carlson SurvCE version 2.0 or higher can store GPS vectors in the RW5 raw data le. Unlike other
vector les, these vectors are Antenna to Antenna so the rod height information must be obtained from the RW5
le. This allows you to edit rod heights and re-process the vectors. Additionally, RW5 vectors are always in meters,
regardless of the job units.
LandXML (.XML): The landXML format is an industry standard format. Currently SurvNet will only import
LandXML survey point records. The conversion does not currently import LandXML vectors.
GeoLab IOB Format: GeoLab's vector format.
Leica: The Leica vector le is an ASCII format typically created with the Leica SKI software. This format is created
by Leica when baseline vectors are required for input into 3rd party adjustment software such as SurvNet. The SKI
ASCII Baseline Vector format is an extension of the SKI ASCII Point Coordinate format.
NGS G-File: The NGS G-File is the format used National Geodetic Survey in their processing software.
NGS G-File from an OPUS report: Every OPUS report contains a G-File section. The vectors making up this
G-le are the vectors from the control points to the computed. point making up the OPUS solution. These OPUS
vectors can be extracted and then combined with other GPS or total station data to create a larger SurvNet project.
If the OPUS vector data is used in a SurvNet project it is important to use Geoid modeling since the control points
making up the OPUS solution typically cover a large extents.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1435
Topcon (.TVF): The Topcon Vector File is in ASCII format and typically has an extension of .TVF
Topcon (.XML): The Topcon XML le is an ASCII le. It contains the GPS vectors in an XML format. This
format is not equivalent to LandXML format.
Trimble Data Collection (.dc): The Trimble .dc format is an ASCII le. It is typically output by Trimble's data
collector. It contains a variety of measurements including GPS vectors. This option only converts GPS vectors found
in the .DC le.
Trimble Data Exchange Format (.ASC): The Trimble TDEF format is an ASCII le. It is typically output by
Trimble's ofce software as a means to output GPS vectors for use by 3rd party software. The Trimble Data
Exchange le can also contain traverse data. The conversion dialog will give you the option to create either an RW5
or CGR le with the traverse data, along with the GPS le containing the vector data.
Trimble LandXML (
*
.jxl): Trimble vector les in Land XML format.
Convert Level Files
The purpose of this option is to convert differential level les from digital levels into C&G/Carlson differential level
le format. At present the only level le format that can be converted are the level les downloaded from the Topcon
digital levels.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1436
EDM Calibration
The EDM Calibration program allows a surveyor to enter and process the raw data collected on an EDM calibration
baseline. The purpose of an EDM calibration is to determine if the EDM is measuring within standards. The
program performs a statistical analysis of that data as outlined in ''Use of Calibration Base Lines'', by Charles
J. Fronczek, NOAA Technical Memorandum NOS NGS-10. The NGS document can be downloaded from the
NGS website. NGS maintains a webpage on EDM Calibration Base Lines. The manual and other information
on EDM calibrations can be found at http://geodesy.noaa.gov/CBLINES/calibration.shtm. Following is the main
EDM Calibration dialog box. NGS publishes the EDM calibration data in metric units. SurvNet's EDM calibration
program currently expects the data to be collected in meters.
The basic ow of this program is to rst ll out the lower portion of the dialog box which contains different text
elds, EDM constant values, and the optional Atmospheric Corrections settings. Next, ll out the grid in the upper
portion of the dialog box. This grid contains the eld data collected and also the published distances between
monuments of the baseline. After this information has been lled out use the 'Compute' button The program will
then display the result of the calibration in the window in the lower portion of the dialog box as follows.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1437
After the le is processed the results can be stored as an ASCII text le. Use the 'Save Output' or the menu option
''File/Save Results File As...''. to save the results. First, you will be prompted for an output le name. The input
data can also be stored. Once stored it can be opened and processed again.
Following is the entire output with a brief explanation of the results. Comments about the results are in-
serted in bold.
EDM Calibration Report
Observed Data
EDM Type:
Date: Time:
Prism description:
Weather description:
Comment:
Atmosphere Correction: OFF
Constants: Refrector: 0.000 EDM: 0.000
From From From To . To To Observed Published
Sta. Elev. HI Sta. Elev. HI Temp. Pressure Slope Dist. Dist.
STA 0 47.494 1.576 STA 150 44.631 1.552 0.0 0.0 150.0326 150.0008
STA 0 47.494 1.576 STA 400 41.497 1.537 0.0 0.0 400.0229 399.9772
STA 0 47.494 1.576 STA 1100 41.431 1.519 0.0 0.0 1100.0203 1100.0001
STA 150 44.631 1.570 STA 1100 41.431 1.519 0.0 0.0 950.0081 949.9991
STA 400 41.497 1.583 STA 1100 41.431 1.519 0.0 0.0 700.0265 700.0226
STA 400 41.497 1.580 STA 150 44.631 1.480 0.0 0.0 249.9946 249.9764
STA 400 41.497 1.580 STA 0 47.494 1.526 0.0 0.0 400.0260 399.9722
The above section shows the input. The input consists of the observed slope distances and the measured HI's.
The from and To elevations are published data from the data sheet from NGS on the particular baseline being
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1438
observed. The published distances are also published data from the data sheet from NGS. In this example
atmospheric pressure was turned off so the temperature and Pressure elds are irrelevant.
Results
Null Hypothesis, HO: EDM scale error and EDM constant error = 0.0
If the scale error and the EDM constant are 0.0 then the edm is without error. So the purpose of the statistical
test is to test how close to 0.0 are the results.
Scale Error (ppm): -0.00000044
Constant Error: -0.0032
The two above lines show the values for the computed scale error and constant error.
Scale Standard Error: 0.00000403
Constant Standard Error: 0.0026
The two above lines show the values for the computed standard errors of the scale error and constant error.
Reference Variance: 0.0000126
Scale t-Value: -0.1096
Constant t-Value: -1.2110
Degrees of Freedom: 5
Critical t-Value at the 1 percent confidence level: 4.0320
Cannot reject the H0 for the scale error. (The scale factor is 0.0)
Cannot reject the H0 for the constant error. (The constant is 0.0)
The above lines show the nal results of the statistical test. Since the test determined that we cannot reject
the null hypothesis, this edm is in good working order.
EDM Calibrations and Atmospheric Corrections
The atmospheric correction algorithms used in the edm calibration are from the NGS manual. To use this method
both dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperature needs to be measured, or the vapor pressure, e, and the dry bulb temperature
needs to be measured. Refer to the NGS documentation for a detailed explanation of the atmospheric corrections
that they use.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1439
It is probably most common to turn atmospheric correction off in the calibration program, and turn atmospheric
correction ON on the EDM (total station). When atmospheric correction is turned off in the calibration program
the user does not need to enter the temperature into the grid or any of the other atmospheric values. If atmospheric
corrections are turned OFF then the grid input columns 'Temp.(dry bulb)', 'Pressure, (mm of Hg)', and 'Temp. (wet
bulb)' will not be displayed since they are not needed.
Constants can be entered for both the EDM and the reector. These values are added to the observed dis-
tances during processing. Typically they are set to 0.0.
The following text elds have no effect on any computations and are simply comments that can be used to document
the calibration.
Entering Data Into the EDM Calibration Grid
Blank data records are inserted into or deleted from the grid using the following tool bar.
The rst button deletes the current highlighted record. The second button inserts a new blank record before
the current highlighted record. The third button inserts a new blank record after the current highlighted record.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1440
Alternately the 'Edit' menu options could be used to delete and insert new data records.
Following is a brief explanation of the elds that make up the grid.
From Sta. - This eld represents the station name where the EDM is located. Any name can be used, but you must
be consistent and used the same name whenever you occupy or measure a distance to the station.
From HI. - This eld represents the height of instrument of the from station. It should be in the same units
as the measurements. If horizontal distances are being entered into the grid then all the HI elds should be set to a
constant value such as 0.0.
From Elev. - This eld represents the elevation of the station. This value is published as part of the base-
line calibration sheets obtained from NGS. If horizontal
distances then all the Elevation elds should be set to a constant.
To Sta. - This eld represents the station name where the prism is located. Any name can be used, but you
must be consistent and used the same name whenever you occupy or measure a distance to the station.
To HI. - This eld represents the height of instrument of the to station. It should be in the same units as
the distance measurements. If horizontal distances are being entered into the grid then all the HI elds can be set to
a constant value such as 0.0.
To Elev. - This eld represents the elevation of the station where the prism is located. This value is pub-
lished as part of the baseline calibration sheets obtained from NGS. If horizontal distances then all the Elevation
elds should be set to a constant.
Observed S. Dist. This is the measured slope distance. This can be a measured horizontal distance. If it is
a horizontal distance then all the HI's and elevations should be set to a constant value.
Published Dist. This eld represents the published distance between the From and To station. This value is
published as part of the baseline calibration data obtained from NGS for the particular baseline being observed.
Temp. (dry bulb) This eld is only present if atmospheric corrections are turned on.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1441
Temp. (wet bulb) This eld is only present if atmospheric corrections are turned on.
Pressure. (mm of Hg) This eld is only present if atmospheric corrections are turned on.
Edit Output Files
You can edit any of the output les created by SurvNET processing:
Report File (.RPT)
NEZ File (.NEZ - ASCII coordinate le)
Formatted NEZ File (.OUT - ASCII coordinate le)
Error File (.ERR) - le containing list of processing errors).
SurvNET will use Microsoft Notepad as the editor.
Edit Level Files
If you have a .TLV or .LEV level le in your project, this option will run the Carlson Level Editor program and
automatically load the level le for editing.
View Menu
Graphics
SurvNet provides a window that graphically displays the survey network. Additionally the user is able to display
error ellipses, and GPS vectors. The user has much control over how the network is displayed. The graphic tool is
a useful tool in debugging networks since the raw data can be displayed prior to adjustment. If there are problems
with the raw data the graphics often reect the problem. The actual graphics cannot be output or saved. The graphics
can be shown independent of whether the project has been processed.
The following snapshot shows a view of the graphic window. The graphic window can be accessed using the eye
icon on the main tool bar. A project must be opened before the graphic window can be displayed. The graphics
window will only display error ellipses after the project has been processed.
The tool bar in the graphics window contains buttons that allow the user to pan, zoom in, zoom out, zoom extents,
and zoom to a window. Additionally there is a button that allows the user to navigate to points in the .CGR raw data
editor. Also, there are buttons that will refresh the graphic, and change the graphic settings.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1442
Pan: Use this button to pan the graphics.
Zoom in: Use this button to zoom in on the graphics.
Zoom out: Use this button to zoom out on the graphics.
Zoom extent: Use this button to zoom to the extents of the graphics
Zoom to window: Use this button to zoom to the extents of a user picked window.
Pick Point. This button allows the user to navigate within the .CGR raw editor from the graphics window.
Currently this button serves no purpose when working with .RW5 data..
Settings: This buttons is used to change the graphic display settings.
Refresh: This button will refresh the graphic view. Graphics are generated from the saved raw data le. If
you make changes to the raw le in the raw editor you must save the le before the changes will be reected in the
refreshed graphic screen.
Following is a description of the options in the graphics setting dialog box, which is accessed using the tool
bar button.
Points Options
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1443
These settings determine how the different type control points are displayed in the graphics window. Different
graphic settings can be applied to standard control points, xed control points and oating control points. The
symbol node display can be controlled as to symbol type, symbol color, symbol size. The control point name can be
displayed and its size set from this setting dialog box.
The graphic pick radius denes a search radius. This radius is used when navigating the .CGR editor using the
graphic window. You can pick a point graphically and the cursor in the editor will go to the next eld containing
that point number. The radius is dened in terms of the distance units of the raw data le.
Trav/SS's Options
These settings determine how the network line work will be displayed for total station raw data. There are settings
for traverse data, side shot data, and azimuth control. The program considers any point that has only a single angle
and distance to it a side shot. The user can control the color of the traverse lines. The symbol node display can be
controlled as to symbol type, symbol color, symbol size. The point name can be displayed and its size set from this
setting dialog box.
Error Ellipses Options
These settings determine how the error ellipses will be displayed in the graphic window. Error ellipses will only be
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1444
displayed if there is a successful least squares adjustment. The display of the error ellipses is relative. The program
automatically determines a default relative error ellipse size. The user can modify the visual size of the error ellipses
using the track bar in the following dialog box. The user can also control the color of the error ellipse from the
following dialog box.
GPS Options
The settings in the following dialog box determine how GPS vectors will be displayed in the graphic window. The
user can control the color of the GPS vector lines. The symbol node display can be controlled as to symbol type,
symbol color, symbol size. The GPS point names can be displayed and their size set from this setting dialog box.
Toolbars
Many of the most commonly used functions can be accessed using the toolbar. Following is an explanation of the
buttons found in the toolbar in the order they are shown.
Create New Project - New project Icon.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1445
Open an Existing Project - Open le Icon.
Save the Current Project - Disk Icon.
Print One of the Reports - Printer Icon.
Settings -Wrench Icon. This icon initiates the SETTINGS->STANDARD ERRORS tab.
Data Collector Transfer Program - This icon will initiate either the C&G Data Collector Transfer/Conversion
program or the Carlson SurvCom program. The C&G program allows you to transfer data from the data collector,
or convert the data collector le to a .CGR le format. It supports all major data collectors. The Carlson program
connects specically to the Carlson SurvCE data collector.
Edit Raw Data - This icon can be used to start either the .RW5 raw data editor or the .CGR raw data editor. If
your project has multiple raw data les, you will be shown a list and asked to select the le you wish to edit. The
appropriate editor will be called depending on what type raw les are dened in the project settings. If no raw le
or project has been specied the default raw editor as dened in the Settings menu will be executed. Any changes
you make in the editor need to be saved before returning to SurvNet for processing.
Process Network - Icon that looks like a traverse network.
Inverse - Icon has a line with points on each end..
Relative Error Ellipses - Icon has a line with points on each end and an ellipse in the middle.
Graphics - Icon that looks like an eye. This icon is active once a project has been opened.
Help - Icon that looks like a question mark. This icon will take you to the SurvNET help feature.
Raw Traverse Data
SurvNet works equally well for both Carlson users and C&G users. The primary difference between the two users
is that a Carlson user will typically be using an .RW5 le for his raw data and a C&G user will typically be using a
.CGR as the source of his raw data.
SurvNet is capable of processing either C&G (.CGR) raw data les, Carlson (.RW5) raw data les or SDMS (.PRJ)
raw data les. If the raw data is in another format, you can use our conversion tools to create one of the supported
formats.
Measurement, coordinate, elevation and direction (Brg/Az) records are all recognized. Scale factor records in the
.CGR le are not processed since SurvNet calculates the state plane scale factors automatically. The menu option
'Global Settings' displays the following dialog box. If the 'Use Carlson Utilities' is chosen then the .RW5 editor will
be the default raw editor and Carlson SurvCom will be the default data collection transfer program. If the 'Use C&G
Utilities' is chosen then the C&G .CGR editor will be the default raw editor and C&G's data collection transfer
program will be the default data collection transfer program.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1446
Standard errors are estimated errors that are assigned to measurements or coordinates. Astandard error is an estimate
of the standard deviation of a sample. A higher standard error indicates a less accurate measurement. The higher the
standard error of a measurement, the less weight it will have in the adjustment process.
Although you can set default standard errors for the various types of measurements in the project settings of SurvNet,
standard errors can also be placed directly into the raw data le. A standard error record inserted into a raw data le
controls all the measurements following the SE record. The standard error does not change until another SE record
is inserted that either changes the specic standard error, or sets the standard errors back to the project defaults.
The advantage of entering standard errors into the raw le is that you can have different standard errors for the
same type measurement in the same job. For example, if you used a one second total station with xed backsights
and foresights for a portion of a traverse and a 10 second total station with backsights and foresights to hand held
prisms on the other portion of the traverse, you would want to assign different standard errors to reect the different
methods used to collect the data.
Make sure the SE record is placed before the measurements for which it applies.
If you do not have standard errors dened in the raw data le, the default standard errors in the project settings will
be applied to the entire le.
Carlson Raw Data Editor:
The raw data editor can be accessed from the tool bar icon. Following is an image of the .RW5 editor. Refer to the
Carlson raw editor documentation for guidance in the basic operation of the editor. The following documentation
only deals with topics that are specic to the .RW5 editor and SurvNet.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1447
You can insert or Add Standard Error records into the raw data le. Use the INSERT or ADD menu option and
select Standard Errors, or pick the SE buttons on the tool bar. Use the 'Add' menu option to insert standard error
records into the raw les.
SEc - Control Standard Errors
You can set standard errors for Northing, Easting, Elevation, and Azimuth using the 'Control Standard Error' menu
option. Azimuth standard errors are entered in seconds. The North, East and Elevation standard errors affect the PT
(coordinate) and EL (elevation) records.
You can hold or x the North, East and Elevation xed by entering a ''!'' symbol. You can allow the North, East and
Elevation to FLOAT by entering a ''#'' symbol. You can also assign the North, East and Elevation actual values. If
you use an ''
*
'' symbol, the current standard error values will revert to the project default values.
North East Elevation Azim
! ! ! (Fix all values)
# # # 30.0 (Allow the N., E. & Elevation to Float)
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1448
0.01 0.01 0.03 5.0 (assign values)
* * * *
(return the standard errors back to project defaults)
When you x a measurement, the original value does not change during the adjustment and all other measurements
will be adjusted to t the xed measurements. If you allowa value to oat, it will not be used in the actual adjustment,
it will just be used to help calculate the initial coordinate values required for the adjustment process. Placing a very
high or low standard error on a measurement accomplishes almost the same thing as setting a standard error as xed
or oat. The primary purpose of using a oat point is if SurvNet cannot compute preliminary values, a preliminary
oat value can be computed and entered for the point.
Direction records (Reference azimuths) cannot be FIXED or FLOAT. You can assign a low standard error (or zero
to x) if you want to weight it heavily, or a high standard error to allow it to oat.
Example:
North East Elev Azim
CSE ! ! !
PT 103 1123233.23491 238477.28654 923.456
PT 204 1124789.84638 239234.56946 859.275
PT 306 1122934.25974 237258.65248 904.957
North East Elev Azim
CSE
* * *
PT 478 1122784.26874 237300.75248 945.840
The rst SEc record containing the '!' character and sets points 103, 204, and 306 to be xed. The last SEc record
contains the '
*
' character. It sets the standard errors for point 478 and any other points that follow to the project
settings. The Azimuth standard error was left blank.
MSE - Measurement Standard Errors
You can set the standard errors for distances, horizontal angle pointing, horizontal angle reading, vertical angle
pointing, vertical angle reading, and distance constant and PPM.
''Distance'' - distance constant and measurement error, can be obtained from EDM specs, or from performing an
EDM calibration on an EDM baseline, or from other testing done by the user.
''PPM'' - Parts per Million, obtain from EDM specs, or from performing an EDM calibration on an EDM baseline,
or from other testing done by the user.
''Pointing'' - total station horizontal angular pointing error in seconds. This value is an indication of how accurately
the instrument man can point to the target. For example, you may set it higher in the summer because of the heat
waves. Or you may set it higher for total stations running in Robotic Mode because they cannot point as well as a
manual sighted total station.
''Reading'' - total station horizontal angular reading error in seconds. If you have a 10 second theodolite, enter a
reading error of 10 seconds.
''V.Pointing'' - total station vertical angular pointing error in seconds. This value is an indication of how accurately
the instrument man can point to the target. For example, you may set it higher in the summer because of the heat
waves.
''V.Reading'' - total station vertical angular reading error in seconds. If you have a 10 second theodolite, enter a
reading error of 10 seconds.
Example:
Distance Point Read V.Point V.Read PPM
MSE 0.01 3 3 3 3 5
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1449
You can enter any combination of the above values. If you do not want to change the standard error for a particular
measurement type, leave it blank.
If you use an ''
*
'' symbol, the standard error for that measurement type will return to the project default values.
SSE - Setup Standard Errors
These standard errors are a measure of how accurately the instrument and target can be setup over the points.
''Rod Ctr'' is the Target Centering error. This value reects how accurately the target prism can be set up over the
point.
''Inst Ctr'' is the Instrument Centering error. This value reects how accurately the instrument can be set up over the
point.
''Ints Hgt'' is the Instrument Height error. This value reects how accurately the height of the instrument above the
mark can be measured.
''Rod Hgt'' is the Target Height error. This value reects how accurately the height of the prism above the mark can
be measured.
Example:
TargCtr InstCtr HI TargHgt
SSE 0.005 0.005 0.01 0.01
You can enter any combination of the above values. If you do not want to change the standard error for a particular
measurement type, leave it blank.
If you use an ''
*
'' symbol, it will return the standard error to the project default values.
C&G Raw Data Editor:
You can set standard errors for control, measurements and instrument setup using the Insert->Standard Error menu
option:
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1450
This will open a Standard Error dialog box:
This dialog allows you to create three types of standard error records: Control, Measurement, and Setup. You need
only enter the values for the standard errors you wish to set. If a eld is left blank no standard error for that value
will be inserted into the raw data le.
You can hold the North, East and Elevation xed by entering a ''!'' symbol (as shown above). If you want to x a
point, you can press the Set Fixed Point button and it will place a ''!'' symbol in each eld. You can allow the North,
East and Elevation to FLOAT by entering a ''#'' symbol. You can also assign the North, East and Elevation actual
values. If you use an ''
*
'' symbol (or press the ''Set Project Defaults'' button), the current standard error value will
return to the project default values.
In the above example, a Control Standard Error record (SEc) will be created:
Below are some sample values for control standard errors:
North East Elevation Azim
! ! ! (Fix all values)
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1451
# # # 30.0 (Allow the N., E. & Elevation to Float)
0.01 0.01 0.03 5.0 (assign values)
* * * *
(return the standard errors back to project defaults)
When you x a measurement, the original value does not change during the adjustment and all other measurements
will be adjusted to t the xed measurements. If you allowa value to oat, it will not be used in the actual adjustment,
it will just be used to help calculate the initial coordinate values required for the adjustment process. Placing a very
high or low standard error on a measurement accomplishes almost the same thing as setting a standard error as oat
or xed. The primary purpose of using a oat point is if SurvNet cannot compute preliminary values, a preliminary
oat value can be computed and entered for the point.
Direction records (reference azimuths) cannot be FIXED or FLOAT. You can assign a low standard error (or zero to
x) if you want to weight it heavily, or a high standard error to allow it to oat.
MSE - Measurement Standard Errors
You can set the standard errors for distances, horizontal angle pointing, horizontal angle reading, vertical angle
pointing, vertical angle reading, and distance constant and PPM.
''Distance'' - distance constant and measurement error, can be obtained from EDM specs, or from performing an
EDM calibration on an EDM baseline, or from other testing done by the user.
''PPM'' - Parts per Million, obtain from EDM specs, or from performing an EDM calibration on an EDM baseline,
or from other testing done by the user.
''Pointing'' - total station horizontal angular pointing error in seconds. This value is an indication of how accurately
the instrument man can point to the target. For example, you may set it higher in the summer because of the heat
waves. Or you may set it higher for total stations running in Robotic Mode because they cannot point as well as a
manual sighted total station.
''Reading'' - total station horizontal angular reading error in seconds. If you have a 10 second theodolite, enter a
reading error of 10 seconds.
''V.Pointing'' - total station vertical angular pointing error in seconds. This value is an indication of how accurately
the instrument man can point to the target. For example, you may set it higher in the summer because of the heat
waves.
''V.Reading'' - total station vertical angular reading error in seconds. If you have a 10 second theodolite, enter a
reading error of 10 seconds.
Example:
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1452
You can enter any combination of the above values. If you do not want to change the standard error for a particular
measurement type, leave it blank. If you use an ''
*
'' symbol, the standard error for that measurement type will return
to the project default values.
The following SEm record will be created:
SSE - Setup Standard Errors
These standard errors are a measure of how accurately the instrument and target can be setup over the points.
''Targ Ctr'' is the Target Centering error. This value reects how accurately the target prism can be set up over the
point.
''Inst Ctr'' is the Instrument Centering error. This value reects how accurately the instrument can be set up over the
point.
''HI'' is the Instrument Height error. This value reects how accurately the height of the instrument above the mark
can be measured.
''Targ Hgt'' is the Target Height error. This value reects how accurately the height of the prism above the mark can
be measured.
Example:
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1453
You can enter any combination of the above values. If you do not want to change the standard error for a particular
measurement type, leave it blank.
If you use an ''
*
'' symbol, it will return the standard error to the project default values.
The following SEs record will be created:
There are several other features available in both the Carlson and C&G editors that are useful to SurvNet.
Insert Coordinate records from le - when inputting control into a raw data le, it is more convenient to read
the control point directly from a coordinate le than it is to manually key them in. The ''Insert Coordinates''
function allows you to select points in a variety of manner making it easy to select just control points. For
example, you can select points by description, code, point blocks, point number, etc.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1454
Data ON/OFF records - when trying track down problems, sometimes it is convenient to remove certain
sections of raw data prior to processing. The editors have a special record (DO record) that will turn OFF or
ON certain areas of data. For example, when you insert a DO record all data following that record will be
turned OFF (it will be shown in a different color). When you insert another DO record further down, the data
following it will be turn back ON. It is simply a toggle. In the example below, the instrument setup at point
106 backsighting 105 was turned OFF.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1455
On the SurvNET toolbar, the one with the network, and eye icons, you can press the ''remove data on/offs'' icon and
all DO records will be removed from the raw data le, showing the data as it originally existed.
Graphics and the C&G Editor -When using the C&G editor the graphics window can be used to navigate within
the raw data. To use this feature initiate the graphics window from the C&G Editor.
Press the graphic 'Pick Point' button then pick the desired point in the graphic window. The text editor cursor
should move to the next record that contains that point number.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1456
If there is more than one point number within the search radius the following dialog box is displayed so that the
desired point can be chosen.
One of the benets of least squares is the ability to process redundant measurements. In terms of total station data,
redundant measurement is dened as measuring angles and/or distances to the same point from two or more different
setups.
It is required that the same point number be used when locating a point that was previously recorded. However,
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1457
since some data collectors will not allow you to use the same point number if the point already exists, the following
convention for collecting redundant points while collecting the data in the eld is used. If you begin the point
description with a user dened string, for example a ''='' (equal sign) followed by the original point number, we will
treat that measurement as a redundant measurement to the point dened in the description eld. The user dened
character or string is set in the project settings dialog. For example, if point number 56 has the description ''=12'', we
will treat point number 56 as a shot to point number 12, not point 56. Make sure the Preprocessing Settings dialog
box has the Pt. Number Substitution String set to the appropriate value.
Alternately, the point numbers can be edited after the raw data has been downloaded from the data collector.
Supplemental Control Files
In order to process a raw data le, you must have as a minimum a control point and a control azimuth, or two control
points. Control points can be inserted into the raw data le or alternately control points can be read from coordinate
les. Control points can be read from a variety of coordinate le types:
Carlson SQLite (.CRDB)
C&G or Carlson numeric (.CRD) les
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1458
C&G Alphanumeric coordinate les (
*
.cgc)
Carlson Alphanumeric coordinate les (
*
.crd)
MS Access Database (LDT) (
*
.mdb)
Simplicity coordinate les (
*
.zak)
ASCII (.NEZ) le
ASCII latitude and longitude (3D model only)
CSV ASCII NEZ with std. errors.
SDMS (.clt) control le
ASCII (.NEZ) le
Typically the standard errors for the control points from a supplemental control le will be assigned from the
NORTH, and EAST standard errors from the project settings dialog box. The option 'CSV ASCII NEZ with std.' is
the exception. With this option the standard errors are eld within the le.
In the ASCII .NEZ le, the coordinate records need to be in the following format:
Pt. No., Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description<cr><lf>
103, 123233.23491, 238477.28654, 923.456, Mon 56-7B<CR><LF>
Each line is terminated with carriage-return <CR> and line-feed <LF> characters.
ASCII latitude and longitude (3D model only)
In the ASCII latitude and longitude le, the records need to be in the following format:
Pt. No., Latitude (NDDD.mmssssss), Longitude (WDDD.mmssssss), Elevation (Orthometric), Descrip-
tion<cr><lf>
FRKN,N35.113068642,W083.234174724,649.27<CR><LF>
Each line is terminated with carriage-return <CR> and line-feed <LF> characters.
CSV ASCII NEZ with std. errors.
In the CVS ASCII .NEZ with std. errors le, the coordinate records need to be in the following format: This format
is typically created as an output NEZ option. The typical use of this format is if the control for a project was initially
created as a project. Then the points from that projects can be used as supplemental control for subsequent projects
and the actual standard errors of the control will be used.
Pt. No., Northing, Easting, Elevation, Std. Err. N, Std. Err. E, Std. Err. Z,Description<cr><lf>
504 ,204015.23528803,786760.95695104,876.15662064, 0.002, 0.003, 0.004, ,1<CR><LF>
Each line is terminated with carriage-return <CR> and line-feed <LF> characters.
The major advantage of putting coordinate control points in the actual raw data le is that specic standard errors
can be assigned to each control point (as described in the RAW DATA section above). If you do not include an
SE record the standard error will be assigned from the NORTH, EAST, and ELEVATION standard errors from the
project settings dialog box.
Warning: SurvNET will not allow the supplemental control le and the nal output le to be the same le. This is
because ALL points in the supplemental control le are treated as CONTROL. If you were allowed to output to the
Control File, after you processed the data ALL the points would then be considered CONTROL the next time you
process.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1459
SurvNET Editor
Please refer to topic on Carlson or CGEditor raw editor.
Data Collector Transfer
Please refer to the Carlson or CG data collector transfer topic
Example Projects
On the installation disk there are a variety of different least squares projects one can use to become familiar
with least squares and SurvNet. These projects are located in the C&G/Carlson application folder under the
\Data\SurvNet\ subdirectory.
When you open a project for review, you will need to check the project settings - input data les tab to see if
the data les are listed. If they are not, you will have to re-select them.
Simple Traverse with Traverse Closure
This project is located in \Data\SurvNet\2DTraverse. The name of the project is Traverse. This project illustrated
a basic loop traverse with two control points and a known azimuth for control. This project also illustrates how to
obtain traditional closure information as part of the least squares report. The program uses the 2D/1D model and
uses a local coordinate system.
Traverse using State Plane Coordinates
This project is located in \Data\SurvNet\SPCTraverse. The name of the project is TravSPCUSFt. This project
illustrated a basic network with three GPS control points for control. This project is computed using the SPC83 NC
Grid coordinate system. The project is set up to generate traditional loop closure data. The program uses the 2D/1D
model. No elevations are computed or adjusted as there were no HI's or rod readings collected. Notice, that the
project uses two raw data les. One le contains the raw angle & distance data. The other raw data le contains the
control for the project.
Network with ALTA Reporting
The ALTA reporting project is located in \Data\SurvNet\ALTARpt. The name of the project is ALTARpt. This
project illustrates how to perform ALTA tolerance testing on points within a network.
GPS Network with GPS Loop Closures
The GPS network project is located in \Data\SurvNet\GPSNetwork. The name of the project is GPSOnly. This
project is a simple GPS network. In addition to the least squares computation and report, GPS loop closures were
generated for various GPS loops for this project.
Level Network
The differential leveling project is located in \Data\SurvNet\LevelNetwork. The name of the project is network1.
This project is a simple differential leveling network.
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1460
Basic 3D Project
The basic 3D adjustment project is located in \Data\SurvNet\3DNetwork. The name of the project is pg08. This
project is a simple four point example network. Notice in the raw data that all set up records have an HI and all FS
readings have valid rod heights. Also note that there are valid vertical angles for every slope distance. Since the 3D
model is a true one process 3 dimensional adjustment, you must enter all valid slope distances and vertical angles.
Be aware that you cannot just enter a horizontal distance and a vertical angle of 90 from reduced eld notes when
adjusting using the 3D model.
3D Project Combining Total Station and GPS Vectors
The total station raw data combined with GPS vectors example is located in \Data\SurvNet\GPSandTtlSta. The
name of the project is GPSandTtlSta. This project illustrates a 3D model adjustment that combines both GPS vectors
and data from a total station. Since there is GPS data the 3D model must be used. Notice that the GPS vectors are
in meters but the total station data is in US feet and the output coordinates are in US feet. Always make sure your
units are correct for each data type especially when using the 3D model.
Resection
The total station raw data combined with GPS vectors example is located in \Data\SurvNet\Resection. The name
of the project is Resect. This project illustrates an angle and distance resection. There is no real difference in a
resection project than any other angle and distance network in terms of how the data is collected or how the project
is set up.
Network Processing Reports
Report File: A report le consisting of the project name with an .RPT extension is generated after successfully
processing the raw data. The report le will be shown in a text window so you can analyze the data. You can pick
the ''Printer'' icon if you want a hardcopy. The following sections review some example results from several different
types of adjustments.
2D-1D Local Coordinate System
The following explanations should be used in conjunction with the report at the end of the explanatory text.
Project Settings
The rst section of the report displays the project settings at the time the project was processed.
Tolerances
The second section of the report displays warning and error messages generated during the preprocessing of the raw
data. The primary messages displayed will be warnings when multiple angles, horizontal distances, and vertical
differences exceed the tolerance settings as set in the project settings. The low and high measurement and the
difference are displayed. It is prudent to pay attention to any messages generated in this section of the report. Some
warnings may be innocuous but it is prudent to check and understand all warning messages.
Unadjusted Observations
The next four sections list the reduced and averaged, but unadjusted measurements that make up the net-
work. Multiple measurements of the same angle or distance are averaged to a single measurement. The standard
error of multiple averaged measurements is less than the standard error of a single measurement. When multiple
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1461
measurements are used, the standard error for the averaged measurement will be computed using the average of the
mean formula.
The rst of the four sections is a list of the control coordinates used in the network adjustment. These coordinates
could have been read from the .CGR raw data le, or from the .CRD or .NEZ supplemental coordinate le. Notice
that the standard errors for the control points are displayed.
The second of the four measurement sections shows the distances and distance standard errors used in the adjustment.
These distances are horizontal distances computed from all slope distance and vertical angles for that distance,
including all foresight and backsight distances. The standard error settings used to calculate the nal distance
standard error include the distance standard error, the PPM standard error, the target centering standard error and the
instrument centering standard errors. The techniques and formulas used to calculate the nal distance standard error
are found in section 6.12 of the textbook ''Adjustment Computations, Statistics and Least Squares in Surveying and
GIS'', by Paul Wolf and Charles Ghilani.
The third of the four measurement sections shows the angles and angle standard errors used in the adjustment.
These angles are the averaged angle value for all the multiple angles collected. The standard error settings used
to calculate the nal angle standard error include the pointing standard error, the reading standard error, the target
centering standard error and the instrument centering standard errors. The techniques and formulas used to calculate
the nal angle standard error are found in section 6.2 of the textbook ''Adjustment Computations, Statistics and Least
Squares in Surveying and GIS'', by Paul Wolf and Charles Ghilani.
The fourth of the four measurement sections shows the azimuths and azimuth standard errors used in the adjustment.
Azimuths can only be dened as a direction record in the .CGR raw data le.
Adjusted Coordinates
If the adjustment of the network converges the next section displays a list of the nal adjusted coordinates and the
computed standard X, Y standard error. An interpretation of the meaning of the X, Y standard error, is that there is
a 68% probability that the adjusted X, Y is within plus or minus the standard error of the X, Y of its true value.
The next section displays the error ellipses for the adjusted coordinates. The error ellipse is a truer representation
of the error of the point than the X, Y standard error. The error ellipses are calculated to the condence interval as
dened in the settings screen. In this report the error ellipse axis is larger than the X, Y standard errors since the
error ellipses in this report are calculated at a 95% probability level as set in the Settings screens. The maximum
error axis direction is along the axis of the semi-major axis. The direction of the minimum error axis direction is
along the semi-minor axis and is perpendicular to the semi-major axis. If a point is located from a variety of stations,
you will most likely see that the error ellipse will approach a circle, which is the strongest geometric shape.
Adjusted Observations
The next three sections list the adjusted horizontal distance, horizontal angle, and azimuth measurements. In ad-
dition to the adjusted measurement the, residual, the standard residual and the standard deviation of the adjusted
measurement is displayed.
The residual is dened as the difference between the unadjusted measurement and the adjusted measurement. The
residual is one of the most useful and intuitive measures displayed in the report. Large residuals in relation to the
standards of the survey are indications of problems with the data.
The standard residual is the a priori standard error divided by the residual of a measurement. The a priori standard
errors are the standard errors of the measurements as displayed in the unadjusted measurement section. A standard
residual of 1 indicates that the adjustment applied to the measurement is consistent with the expected adjustment to
the measurement. One or a few measurements having high standard residuals, in relation to the rest of the standard
residuals, may be an indication of a blunder in the survey. When all standard residuals are consistently large there is
likely an inconsistency in the a priori standard errors and the adjustments being made to the measurements. In other
words the standard errors dened for the project are too small, in relation to the survey methods used.
The standard deviation of the measurement means that there is a 68% probability that the adjusted measurement is
within plus or minus the standard deviation of the measurement's true value.
Additionally, the root mean square of each measurement type is displayed. The root mean square is dened as the
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1462
square root of the average of the squares of a set of numbers. Loosely dened, it is as an average residual for that
measurement type.
Statistics
The next section displays some statistical measures of the adjustment including the number of iterations needed for
the solution to converge, the degrees of freedom of the network, the reference variance, the standard error of unit
weight, and the results of a Chi-square test.
The degree of freedom is an indication of how many redundant measurements are in the survey. Degree of freedom
is dened as the number of measurements in excess of the number of measurements necessary to solve the network.
The standard error of unit weight relates to the overall adjustment and not an individual measurement. A value of
one indicates that the results of the adjustment are consistent with a priori standard errors. The reference variance is
the standard error of unit weight squared.
The chi-square test is a test of the ''goodness'' of t of the adjustment. It is not an absolute test of the accuracy of
the survey. The a priori standard errors which are dened in the project settings dialog box or with the SE record in
the raw data (.CGR) le are used to determine the weights of the measurements. These standard errors can also be
looked at as an estimate of how accurately the measurements were made. The chi-square test merely tests whether
the results of the adjusted measurements are consistent with the a priori standard errors. Notice that if you change
the project standard errors and then reprocess the survey the results of the chi-square test change, even though the
nal adjusted coordinates may change very little.
Sideshots
The next section displays the computed sideshots of the network. Sideshots are ltered out of the network adjustment
as part of the preprocessing process if the 'Enable Sideshots for Error Ellipses' toggle is off. Least squares adjustment
requires a lot of computer resources. Sideshots are ltered out to minimize the computer resources needed in a large
network adjustment. The sideshots are computed from the nal adjusted network points. The results of the side shot
computations are the same whether they are reduced as part of the least squares adjustment or from the nal adjusted
coordinates.
VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
The next part of the report displays the results of the vertical adjustment. In the 2D/1D model the horizontal and
the vertical adjustments are separate least squares adjustment processes. As long as there are redundant vertical
measurements the vertical component of the network will also be reduced and adjusted using least squares.
The rst section displays the vertical benchmarks used in the vertical adjustment. Next, is listed the points that
will be adjusted as part of the vertical adjustment. The following section displays the measurements used in the
adjustment. The measurements consist of the vertical elevation difference between points in vertical adjustment.
The lengths between these points are used to determine the weights in the vertical adjustment. Longer length lines
are weighted less in the vertical adjustment than shorter length lines.
The next section displays some statistics about the vertical control: Number of unknown elevations, number of
routes, number of xed and non-xed benchmarks, and degrees of freedom.
The next section displays the adjusted elevations and the computed standard deviations of the computed elevations.
Following the adjusted elevation section is a section displaying the nal adjusted elevation difference measurements
and their residuals. Finally, the computed side shot elevations are displayed.
State Plane Reduction Report le:
When reducing to a state plane coordinate system, there is additional information displayed in the report le.
First, notice the heading of the report. The heading indicates that the project is being reduced into the North Carolina
zone of the 1983 State Plane Coordinate System. The heading shows that the elevation factor is computed based on
a project elevation of 250 feet:
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1463
===============================
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Mon May 08 10:16:16 2006
2D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files:
C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: ON
Maximum iterations: 10 , Convergence Limit: 0.002000
Local Coordinate System, Scale Factor: 1.000000
Horizontal Units: US Feet
Confidence Interval: 95.00
Default Standard Errors:
Distance: Constant 0.010 ,PPM: 5.000
Horiz. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Vert. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Total Station: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Target: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Azimuth: 5''
Coordinate Control: N:0.010, E:0.010, Z:0.030,
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 1, BS: 5, FS: 2
Low: 109-19'10.0'' , High: 109-19'17.0'' , Diff: 000-00'07.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 6
Low: 190-32'02.0'' , High: 190-32'10.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 3
Low: 096-03'48.0'' , High: 096-03'56.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 3, BS: 2, FS: 4
Low: 124-03'50.0'' , High: 124-03'56.0'' , Diff: 000-00'06.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 10
Low: 039-26'35.0'' , High: 039-26'45.0'' , Diff: 000-00'10.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 10, BS: 5, FS: 11
Low: 241-56'23.0'' , High: 241-56'35.0'' , Diff: 000-00'12.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 11, BS: 10, FS: 12
Low: 114-56'20.0'' , High: 114-56'34.0'' , Diff: 000-00'14.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 12, BS: 11, FS: 3
Low: 140-39'18.0'' , High: 140-39'31.0'' , Diff: 000-00'13.0''
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1464
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 1
Low: 117-30'35.0'' , High: 117-30'50.0'' , Diff: 000-00'15.0''
Horizontal Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 324.15, High: 324.20, Diff: 0.04
Vertical Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 6.62, High: 8.36, Diff: 1.74
Vertical Distance from 3 to 4 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 11.46, High: 11.51, Diff: 0.05
Horizontal Distance from 12 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 144.64, High: 144.66, Diff: 0.02
HORIZONTAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
============================
Unadjusted Observations
=======================
Control Coordinates: 1 Observed Points, 0 Fixed Points, 0 Approx. Points
Sta. N: E: StErr N: StErr E:
1 658428.26 2150182.70 0.01 0.01
Distances: 14 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Dist. StErr
1 5 290.45 0.01
1 2 292.21 0.01
2 6 52.39 0.01
2 3 324.19 0.01
3 4 275.60 0.01
3 20 134.66 0.01
20 21 116.07 0.01
21 22 50.12 0.01
4 5 309.65 0.01
5 10 129.99 0.01
10 11 126.01 0.01
10 15 10.00 0.01
11 12 129.43 0.01
12 3 144.65 0.01
Angles: 15 Observations
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle StErr (Sec.)
5 1 2 109-19'13.5'' 7.7
1 2 6 190-32'06.0'' 26.2
1 2 3 096-03'52.0'' 7.3
2 3 4 124-03'53.0'' 7.8
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' 12.8
3 20 21 180-15'26.0'' 17.6
20 21 22 183-26'45.0'' 31.2
3 4 5 093-02'11.5'' 7.5
4 5 10 039-26'40.0'' 10.4
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1465
5 10 11 241-56'29.0'' 15.6
5 10 15 056-23'10.0'' 125.0
10 11 12 114-56'27.0'' 15.5
11 12 3 140-39'24.5'' 15.3
12 3 2 325-54'30.0'' 9.5
4 5 1 117-30'42.5'' 7.7
Azimuths: 1 Observations
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing StErr (Sec.)
1 2 N 45-00'00.0''E 5.0
Adjusted Coordinates
====================
Adjusted Local Coordinates
Sta. N: E: StErr N: StErr E:
1 658428.26 2150182.70 0.02 0.02
2 658634.88 2150389.32 0.02 0.02
5 658554.12 2149920.92 0.03 0.02
3 658887.03 2150185.59 0.02 0.03
4 658863.61 2149910.99 0.03 0.03
20 658999.28 2150111.19 0.03 0.04
21 659096.31 2150047.49 0.04 0.05
10 658657.11 2150000.25 0.03 0.03
11 658636.21 2150124.52 0.03 0.03
12 658742.89 2150197.81 0.03 0.03
Adjusted Coordinates Error Ellipses, 95% CI
Sta. Semi Major Semi Minor Max. Error Az.
Axis Axis
1 0.05 0.05 S 29-26'39.4''E
2 0.07 0.07 N 45-00'00.0''E
5 0.08 0.07 N 10-58'28.2''E
3 0.10 0.07 N 84-37'31.0''E
4 0.11 0.07 N 51-23'12.0''E
20 0.13 0.10 N 84-24'17.5''E
21 0.17 0.12 N 72-01'17.5''E
10 0.09 0.07 N 43-35'54.5''E
11 0.09 0.08 N 54-43'51.1''E
12 0.08 0.08 N 79-48'07.2''E
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
1 5 290.46 0.01 1.42 0.01
1 2 292.21 -0.00 0.40 0.01
2 3 324.17 -0.01 1.62 0.01
3 4 275.59 -0.01 1.11 0.01
3 20 134.66 -0.00 0.00 0.02
20 21 116.07 -0.00 0.00 0.02
4 5 309.65 0.01 0.64 0.01
5 10 130.00 0.01 0.97 0.01
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1466
10 11 126.01 0.00 0.16 0.01
11 12 129.44 0.01 0.98 0.02
12 3 144.66 0.01 0.94 0.02
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.01
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
5 1 2 109-19'19.2'' 5.7 0.7 9.9
1 2 3 096-03'43.4'' -8.6 1.2 9.2
2 3 4 124-03'48.1'' -4.9 0.6 10.1
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' -0.0 0.0 21.5
3 20 21 180-15'26.0'' 0.0 0.0 29.7
3 4 5 093-02'12.8'' 1.3 0.2 9.3
4 5 10 039-26'37.1'' -2.9 0.3 14.4
5 10 11 241-56'27.5'' -1.5 0.1 21.2
10 11 12 114-56'39.8'' 12.8 0.8 21.8
11 12 3 140-39'40.8'' 16.3 1.1 20.3
12 3 2 325-54'33.8'' 3.8 0.4 13.2
4 5 1 117-30'56.6'' 14.1 1.8 9.9
Root Mean Square (RMS) 8.1
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
1 2 N 45-00'00.0''E 0.0 0.0 8.4
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.0
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:6
Reference variance:2.84
Standard error unit Weight: +/-1.68
Failed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 significance level
1.237 <= 17.023 <= 14.449
Sideshots
=========
From To Bearing Dist. N E StDev. N StDev. E
2 6 N 55-32'06.0''E 52.39 658664.53 2150432.52 0.02 0.02
21 22 N 29-50'09.6''W 50.12 659139.78 2150022.56 0.04 0.05
10 15 N 86-00'28.6''W 10.00 658657.80 2149990.27 0.03 0.03
LEAST SQUARES VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
Mon May 08 10:16:16 2006
2D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files:
C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: ON
VERTICAL BENCHMARKS
Station Elevation Std. Error
1 569.8500 FIXED
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1467
POINTS TO BE ADJUSTED
Station
2,5,3,4,10,11,12
MEASUREMENT SUMMARY
From To Elev. Diff. StdErr
(unadjusted)
1 5 7.5040 0.0162
1 2 7.5659 0.0163
2 3 6.9843 0.0162
3 4 -11.4907 0.0161
4 5 4.3557 0.0165
5 10 2.2639 0.0150
10 11 1.0931 0.0150
11 12 0.3828 0.0150
12 3 3.3590 0.0153
STATISTICAL SUMMARY
Total Unknown Elevations:7
Total Elev. Routes:9
Total Fixed BM's:1
Total non-fixed BM's:0
Degrees of freedom:2
ADJUSTED ELEVATIONS
Station Adjusted Elev Standard Dev.
2 577.4336 0.02463
5 577.3363 0.02462
3 584.4355 0.02907
4 572.9625 0.03072
10 579.6004 0.03286
11 580.6935 0.03575
12 581.0764 0.03469
ADJUSTED MEASUREMENT SUMMARY
From To Elev. Diff. Residuals Std. Dev.
(adjusted)
1 5 7.4863 -0.0177 0.025
1 2 7.5836 0.0177 0.025
2 3 7.0019 0.0177 0.025
3 4 -11.4730 0.0177 0.024
4 5 4.3738 0.0181 0.024
5 10 2.2641 0.0001 0.024
10 11 1.0932 0.0001 0.024
11 12 0.3829 0.0001 0.024
12 3 3.3591 0.0001 0.025
Vertical Sideshots
Station Elevation
7 577.6338
20 571.7662
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1468
21 581.2509
22 580.1399
15 579.6004
2D-1D State Plane Coordinate System
Note: highlighted explanatory text is found within the report text.
===============================
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Tue Mar 21 17:37:27 2006
2D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: ON
Maximum iterations: 10 , Convergence Limit: 0.002000
1983 State Plane Coordinates, zone:3200 North Carolina
Elevation factor computed from project elevation,250.000000.
Elevation Units: US Feet
Horizontal Units: US Feet
Condence Interval: 95.00
Project Geoid Height: 0.00
Default Standard Errors:
Distance: Constant 0.010 ,PPM: 5.000
Horiz. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Vert. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Total Station: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Target: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Azimuth: 5''
Coordinate Control: N:0.010, E:0.010, Z:0.030,
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 1, BS: 5, FS: 2
Low: 109-19'10.0'' , High: 109-19'17.0'' , Diff: 000-00'07.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 6
Low: 190-32'02.0'' , High: 190-32'10.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 2, BS: 1, FS: 3
Low: 096-03'48.0'' , High: 096-03'56.0'' , Diff: 000-00'08.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 3, BS: 2, FS: 4
Low: 124-03'50.0'' , High: 124-03'56.0'' , Diff: 000-00'06.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 10
Low: 039-26'35.0'' , High: 039-26'45.0'' , Diff: 000-00'10.0''
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1469
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 10, BS: 5, FS: 11
Low: 241-56'23.0'' , High: 241-56'35.0'' , Diff: 000-00'12.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 11, BS: 10, FS: 12
Low: 114-56'20.0'' , High: 114-56'34.0'' , Diff: 000-00'14.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 12, BS: 11, FS: 3
Low: 140-39'18.0'' , High: 140-39'31.0'' , Diff: 000-00'13.0''
Horizontal Angle spread exceeds tolerance:
IP: 5, BS: 4, FS: 1
Low: 117-30'35.0'' , High: 117-30'50.0'' , Diff: 000-00'15.0''
Horizontal Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 324.15, High: 324.20, Diff: 0.04
Vertical Distance from 2 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 6.62, High: 8.36, Diff: 1.74
Vertical Distance from 3 to 4 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 11.46, High: 11.51, Diff: 0.05
Horizontal Distance from 12 to 3 exceeds tolerance:
Low: 144.64, High: 144.66, Diff: 0.02
HORIZONTAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
============================
Unadjusted Observations
=======================
Control Coordinates: 1 Observed Points, 0 Fixed Points, 0 Approx. Points
Sta. N: E: StErr N: StErr E:
1 658428.26 2150182.70 0.01 0.01
The rst distance listing in the Unadjusted Observation section of the report shows the unadjusted
horizontal ground distances
Distances: 14 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Ground Dist. StErr
1 5 290.45 0.01
1 2 292.21 0.01
2 6 52.39 0.01
2 3 324.19 0.01
3 4 275.60 0.01
3 20 134.66 0.01
20 21 116.07 0.01
21 22 50.12 0.01
4 5 309.65 0.01
5 10 129.99 0.01
10 11 126.01 0.01
10 15 10.00 0.01
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1470
11 12 129.43 0.01
12 3 144.65 0.01
Angles: 15 Observations
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle StErr (Sec.)
5 1 2 109-19'13.5'' 7.7
1 2 6 190-32'06.0'' 26.2
1 2 3 096-03'52.0'' 7.3
2 3 4 124-03'53.0'' 7.8
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' 12.8
3 20 21 180-15'26.0'' 17.6
20 21 22 183-26'45.0'' 31.2
3 4 5 093-02'11.5'' 7.5
4 5 10 039-26'40.0'' 10.4
5 10 11 241-56'29.0'' 15.6
5 10 15 056-23'10.0'' 125.0
10 11 12 114-56'27.0'' 15.5
11 12 3 140-39'24.5'' 15.3
12 3 2 325-54'30.0'' 9.5
4 5 1 117-30'42.5'' 7.7
Grid Azimuths: 1 Observations
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing StErr (Sec.)
1 2 N 45-00'00.0''E 5.0
There is a new section displaying the reduced unadjusted grid distances. The grid factor, the eleva-
tion factor, and the combined factor used to reduce the ground distance to a grid distance are included in the
listing:
Grid Distances: 14 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Grid Dist. Grid Factor Z Factor Combined Factor
1 5 290.41 0.99988685 0.99998804 0.99987490
1 2 292.18 0.99988686 0.99998804 0.99987491
2 6 52.38 0.99988689 0.99998804 0.99987494
2 3 324.15 0.99988692 0.99998804 0.99987497
3 4 275.57 0.99988695 0.99998804 0.99987500
3 20 134.65 0.99988697 0.99998804 0.99987501
20 21 116.06 0.99988700 0.99998804 0.99987504
21 22 50.11 0.99988701 0.99998804 0.99987506
4 5 309.61 0.99988691 0.99998804 0.99987495
5 10 129.97 0.99988688 0.99998804 0.99987493
10 11 125.99 0.99988689 0.99998804 0.99987494
10 15 10.00 0.99988690 0.99998804 0.99987494
11 12 129.41 0.99988690 0.99998804 0.99987495
12 3 144.63 0.99988694 0.99998804 0.99987498
Average Combined Scale Factor: 0.99987497
There is a new section displaying the reduced unadjusted horizontal angles with the t-T correction ap-
plied. The t-T correction is generally a small correction. For most surveys of limited size the correction is
negligible. The t-T correction is displayed in seconds.
Grid Horizontal Angles: 15 Observations
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle StErr (Sec.) t-T
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1471
5 1 2 109-19'13.5'' 7.7 0.0
1 2 6 190-32'06.0'' 26.2 0.0
1 2 3 096-03'52.0'' 7.3 0.0
2 3 4 124-03'53.0'' 7.8 -0.0
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' 12.8 -0.0
3 20 21 180-15'26.0'' 17.6 -0.0
20 21 22 183-26'45.0'' 31.2 -0.0
3 4 5 093-02'11.5'' 7.5 -0.0
4 5 10 039-26'40.0'' 10.4 0.0
5 10 11 241-56'29.0'' 15.6 0.0
5 10 15 056-23'10.0'' 125.0 0.0
10 11 12 114-56'27.0'' 15.5 0.0
11 12 3 140-39'24.5'' 15.3 0.0
12 3 2 325-54'30.0'' 9.5 0.0
4 5 1 117-30'42.5'' 7.7 0.0
Adjusted Coordinates
====================
Adjusted Grid Coordinates
Sta. N: E: StErr N: StErr E:
1 658428.26 2150182.70 0.02 0.02
2 658634.86 2150389.30 0.02 0.02
5 658554.11 2149920.95 0.03 0.02
3 658886.98 2150185.59 0.02 0.03
4 658863.56 2149911.03 0.03 0.03
20 658999.20 2150111.20 0.03 0.04
21 659096.23 2150047.51 0.04 0.05
10 658657.08 2150000.27 0.03 0.03
11 658636.18 2150124.52 0.03 0.03
12 658742.85 2150197.81 0.03 0.03
In the Adjusted Coordinates section of the report there is a new section displaying the latitude and
longitude of the nal adjusted points. Additionally the convergence angle, the grid factor, the elevation factor,
and the combined factor are displayed for each point:
Adjusted Geographic Coordinates
Sta. Latitude Longitude Conv. Ang. Grid Factor Z Factor Combined Fact.
1 35-33'29.13143''N 78-29'42.16576''E 000-17'29.2'' 0.99988684 0.99998804 0.99987488
2 35-33'31.16445''N 78-29'39.65237''E 000-17'30.7'' 0.99988689 0.99998804 0.99987493
5 35-33'30.38930''N 78-29'45.32617''E 000-17'27.4'' 0.99988687 0.99998804 0.99987491
3 35-33'33.66835''N 78-29'42.10255''E 000-17'29.2'' 0.99988695 0.99998804 0.99987500
4 35-33'33.45055''N 78-29'45.42733''E 000-17'27.3'' 0.99988695 0.99998804 0.99987499
20 35-33'34.78212''N 78-29'42.99610''E 000-17'28.7'' 0.99988698 0.99998804 0.99987503
21 35-33'35.74495''N 78-29'43.76102''E 000-17'28.3'' 0.99988701 0.99998804 0.99987505
10 35-33'31.40380''N 78-29'44.35979''E 000-17'27.9'' 0.99988690 0.99998804 0.99987494
11 35-33'31.19087''N 78-29'42.85714''E 000-17'28.8'' 0.99988689 0.99998804 0.99987493
12 35-33'32.24222''N 78-29'41.96349''E 000-17'29.3'' 0.99988692 0.99998804 0.99987496
Adjusted Coordinates Error Ellipses, 95% CI
Sta. Semi Major Semi Minor Max. Error Az.
Axis Axis
1 0.05 0.05 N 17-17'30.9''E
2 0.07 0.07 N 45-00'00.0''E
5 0.08 0.07 N 10-58'14.5''E
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1472
3 0.10 0.07 N 84-37'33.3''E
4 0.11 0.07 N 51-23'11.9''E
20 0.13 0.10 N 84-24'34.6''E
21 0.17 0.12 N 72-01'28.4''E
10 0.09 0.07 N 43-35'55.4''E
11 0.09 0.08 N 54-43'48.7''E
12 0.08 0.08 N 79-47'56.6''E
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
1 5 290.43 0.01 1.42 0.01
1 2 292.17 -0.00 0.40 0.01
2 3 324.13 -0.01 1.62 0.01
3 4 275.56 -0.01 1.11 0.01
3 20 134.65 0.00 0.00 0.02
20 21 116.06 0.00 0.00 0.02
4 5 309.61 0.01 0.64 0.01
5 10 129.98 0.01 0.97 0.01
10 11 126.00 0.00 0.16 0.01
11 12 129.42 0.01 0.98 0.02
12 3 144.64 0.01 0.94 0.02
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.01
Adjusted Angles
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
5 1 2 109-19'19.2'' 5.7 0.7 9.9
1 2 3 096-03'43.4'' -8.6 1.2 9.2
2 3 4 124-03'48.1'' -4.9 0.6 10.1
2 3 20 185-23'56.0'' -0.0 0.0 21.5
3 20 21 180-15'26.0'' -0.0 0.0 29.7
3 4 5 093-02'12.8'' 1.2 0.2 9.3
4 5 10 039-26'37.2'' -2.8 0.3 14.4
5 10 11 241-56'27.5'' -1.5 0.1 21.2
10 11 12 114-56'39.8'' 12.9 0.8 21.8
11 12 3 140-39'40.8'' 16.3 1.1 20.3
12 3 2 325-54'33.8'' 3.8 0.4 13.2
4 5 1 117-30'56.6'' 14.1 1.8 9.9
Root Mean Square (RMS) 8.1
Adjusted Azimuths
Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Bearing Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
1 2 N 45-00'00.0''E -0.0 0.0 8.4
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.0
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:6
Reference variance:2.84
Standard error unit Weight: +/-1.69
Failed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 signicance level
1.237 <= 17.037 <= 14.449
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1473
Sideshots
=========
From To Bearing Dist. N E StDev. N StDev. E
2 6 N 55-32'06.0''E 52.38 658664.50 2150432.48 0.02 0.02
21 22 N 29-50'09.6''W 50.11 659139.69 2150022.58 0.04 0.05
10 15 N 86-00'28.6''W 10.00 658657.77 2149990.30 0.03 0.03
GPS Network
Note: The following section shows the report generated by the least squares adjustment of the GPS network.
Explanations of the report are included in the report section and are in bold text.
===============================
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Mon May 08 13:03:02 2006
3D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\gpsOnly\control.cgr
GPS File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\gpsOnly\chapt16.gps
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\gpsOnly\gpsOnlyl.RPT
Traverse File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\gpsOnly\gpsLoops.cls
Curvature, refraction correction: OFF
Maximum iterations: 10 , Convergence Limit: 0.002000
1983 State Plane Coordinates, zone:4803 Wisconsin South
Horizontal Units: Meters
Condence Interval: 95.00
Project Geoid Height: 0.0000
Default Standard Errors:
Distance: Constant 0.010 ,PPM: 5.000
Horiz. Angle: Pointing 10.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Vert. Angle: Pointing 3.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Total Station: Centering 0.005 ,Height: 0.010
Target: Centering 0.010 ,Height: 0.010
Azimuth: 5''
Coordinate Control: N:0.001, E:0.001, Z:0.030,
GPS: Centering:0.000, Vector Err. Factor:1.0
3-DIMENSIONAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
The following section shows the unadjusted measurements that make up the network. The control
coordinates are displayed rst followed by the GPS vectors. The control coordinates are displayed as lati-
tude/longitude, SPC Grid XYZ, and geocentric XYZ. If geoid modeling is set both ellipsoid and orthometric
elevations are displayed, ellipsoid elevation in the latitude/longitude section and orthometric elevation in the
SPC section. The GPS vector section shows the unadjusted delta XYZ, variances and covariances of the
vectors.
Unadjusted Observations
=======================
Control Coordinates: 0 Observed Points, 2 Fixed Points, 0 Approx. Points
Sta. Latitude Longitude Z (Ellip.) StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1474
A 43-15'46.28901''N 89-59'42.16399''W 1382.62 FIXED FIXED FIXED
B 43-23'46.36261''N 89-54'00.75701''W 1235.46 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Grid XYZ
Sta. N: E: Z (Geoid): StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
A 140291.2060 600402.2380 1382.62 FIXED FIXED FIXED
B 155110.5390 608083.9250 1235.46 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Geocentric XYZ
Sta. X: Y: Z: StErr X: StErr Y: StErr Z:
A 402.3510 -4652995.3008 4349760.78 FIXED FIXED FIXED
B 8086.0316 -4642712.8473 4360439.08 FIXED FIXED FIXED
GPS Vectors: 13 Observations
From Sta. Delta X Variance Delta X Covariance XY
To Sta. Delta Y Variance Delta Y Covariance XZ
Delta Z Variance Delta Z Covariance YZ
A 11644.223 0.001969 -1.916E-005
C 3601.217 0.001875 1.904E-005
3399.255 0.001965 -1.904E-005
A -5321.716 0.0004316 -4.2E-006
E 3634.075 0.0003838 4.32E-006
3173.665 0.000401 -4.2E-006
B 3960.544 0.000461 -4.46E-006
C -6681.247 0.0005092 4.14E-006
-7279.015 0.0004504 -4.46E-006
B -11167.608 0.00054 -5.5E-006
D -394.520 0.0005442 5.7E-006
-907.959 0.000534 -5.44E-006
D 15128.165 0.0002922 -2.86E-006
C -6286.705 0.0003228 2.68E-006
-6371.058 0.0002616 -2.88E-006
D -1837.746 0.0002462 -2.38E-006
E -6253.853 0.0002554 2.44E-006
-6596.670 0.0002566 -2.42E-006
F -1116.452 0.0001495 -1.58E-006
A -4596.161 0.0001319 1.76E-006
-4355.906 0.0001523 -1.62E-006
F 10527.785 0.0005134 -4.5E-006
C -994.938 0.0004326 4.8E-006
-956.625 0.0004794 -4.54E-006
F -6438.136 0.0001889 -1.84E-006
E -962.069 0.0001992 2.08E-006
-1182.230 0.0001765 -1.78E-006
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1475
F -4600.379 0.0001866 -1.98E-006
D 5291.779 0.0001975 1.8E-006
5414.431 0.0002408 -1.98E-006
F 6567.231 0.0001329 -1.3E-006
B 5686.293 0.0001493 1.38E-006
6322.392 0.000121 -1.28E-006
B -6567.231 0.0001103 -1.26E-006
F -5686.303 0.0001495 1.22E-006
-6322.381 0.0001326 -1.26E-006
A 1116.458 0.0001324 -1.6E-006
F 4596.155 0.0001622 1.8E-006
4355.914 0.0001875 -1.64E-006
The optional Traverse Closure section shows the GPS loop closures for the GPS loops dened in the
closure, .CLS le.
Traverse Closures
=================
GPS Loop Points:
A,E,F,A
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X: -0.0323 Y: -0.0162 Z: -0.0105
Closure error: 0.0376 Perimeter: 20229.3858
Precision: 1:537594
GPS Loop Points:
C,F,D,B,C
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X: -0.0121 Y: -0.0101 Z: 0.0002
Closure error: 0.0158 Perimeter: 41332.9807
Precision: 1:2622216
GPS Loop Points:
F,D,B,F
GPS Loop Closure;
Misclosure, X: -0.0022 Y: -0.0044 Z: 0.0097
Closure error: 0.0109 Perimeter: 30814.5047
Precision: 1:2833226
Following are the nal adjusted coordinates. Included in the report are point grid factor, elev. factor
and the combined factor. Following the adjusted coordinates are the error ellipses, followed by the adjusted
measurements section.
Adjusted Geographic Coordinates
Adjusted Grid Coordinates, (Meters)
Sta. N: E: Z (Geoid): StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
C 145233.5553 612043.7117 1103.10 0.0062 0.0062 0.0060
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1476
E 145091.9380 595081.6888 914.98 0.0053 0.0053 0.0052
D 154179.9383 596919.0552 894.01 0.0051 0.0050 0.0052
F 146611.7860 601518.4564 1024.24 0.0029 0.0027 0.0028
Adjusted Geocentric Coordinates, (Metric)
Sta. X: Y: Z: StErr X: StErr Y: StErr Z:
C 12046.5807 -4649394.0824 4353160.06 0.0062 0.0062 0.0060
E -4919.3403 -4649361.2195 4352934.45 0.0053 0.0053 0.0052
D -3081.5836 -4643107.3693 4359531.12 0.0050 0.0051 0.0052
F 1518.8008 -4648399.1451 4354116.69 0.0027 0.0029 0.0028
Adjusted XYZ Coordinates Error Ellipses, 95% CI
Sta. Semi Major Semi Minor Max. Error Az. Elev.
Axis Axis
C 0.0161 0.0159 S 25-49'31.6''E 0.0157
E 0.0138 0.0137 S 29-24'51.2''E 0.0136
D 0.0133 0.0130 S 11-30'48.4''E 0.0135
F 0.0074 0.0070 S 05-18'52.7''E 0.0073
Adjusted Observations
=====================
GPS Vectors: 13 Observations
From Sta. Delta X Residual StdRes StdDev
To Sta. Delta Y Residual StdRes StdDev
Delta Z Residual StdRes StdDev
A 11644.2435 0.0203 0.4581 0.0062
C 3601.2230 0.0065 0.1502 0.0062
3399.2795 0.0245 0.5521 0.0060
A -5321.7125 0.0039 0.1894 0.0053
E 3634.1005 0.0251 1.2810 0.0053
3173.6781 0.0129 0.6429 0.0052
B 3960.5330 -0.0112 0.5219 0.0062
C -6681.2418 0.0049 0.2181 0.0062
-7279.0098 0.0050 0.2378 0.0060
B -11167.6067 0.0009 0.0406 0.0050
D -394.5281 -0.0077 0.3288 0.0051
-907.9606 -0.0013 0.0568 0.0052
D 15128.1644 -0.0003 0.0194 0.0063
C -6286.7131 -0.0077 0.4275 0.0064
-6371.0592 -0.0009 0.0573 0.0061
D -1837.7566 -0.0107 0.6844 0.0056
E -6253.8502 0.0032 0.2006 0.0057
-6596.6687 0.0010 0.0619 0.0057
F -1116.4498 0.0025 0.2079 0.0027
A -4596.1557 0.0053 0.4606 0.0029
-4355.9139 -0.0077 0.6259 0.0028
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1477
F 10527.7799 -0.0053 0.2318 0.0061
C -994.9372 0.0005 0.0223 0.0061
-956.6272 -0.0026 0.1175 0.0060
F -6438.1411 -0.0047 0.3391 0.0050
E -962.0744 -0.0050 0.3507 0.0051
-1182.2367 -0.0062 0.4631 0.0050
F -4600.3844 -0.0057 0.4188 0.0047
D 5291.7758 -0.0027 0.1889 0.0048
5414.4321 0.0010 0.0615 0.0050
F 6567.2308 -0.0003 0.0220 0.0027
B 5686.2978 0.0052 0.4292 0.0029
6322.3917 -0.0000 0.0037 0.0028
B -6567.2308 0.0003 0.0248 0.0027
F -5686.2978 0.0055 0.4474 0.0029
-6322.3917 -0.0110 0.9511 0.0028
A 1116.4498 -0.0079 0.6903 0.0027
F 4596.1557 0.0004 0.0321 0.0029
4355.9139 -0.0002 0.0128 0.0028
The nal section displays a variety statistical measures, followed by sideshots if there are any. Side
shots would be a point that has only a single GPS vector going to or from the point.
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 2 iterations
Degrees of freedom:27
Reference variance:0.26
Standard error unit Weight: +/-0.51
Failed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 signicance level
14.573 <= 6.927 <= 43.195
GPS Vectors and Total Station
Following is a report generated from a project that combined GPS vectors and total station data. Notice that
the report is very similar to the GPS vector only project report. Explanations of the report are included in
the report and are in bold, normal text.
===============================
LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Mon May 08 15:08:39 2006
3D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\GPSCombined\rawCombined.cgr
GPS File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\GPSCombined\VectorJob.gps
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\3dModel\GPSCombined\gpsCombined2D.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: OFF
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1478
Maximum iterations: 10 , Convergence Limit: 0.000200
1983 State Plane Coordinates, zone:0202 Arizona Central
Horizontal Units: Meters
Condence Interval: 95.00
Project Geoid Height: -30.000
Default Standard Errors:
Distance: Constant 0.002 ,PPM: 5.000
Horiz. Angle: Pointing 0.6'' ,Reading: 0.0''
Vert. Angle: Pointing 2.0'' ,Reading: 3.0''
Total Station: Centering 0.001 ,Height: 0.002
Target: Centering 0.001 ,Height: 0.002
Azimuth: 5''
Coordinate Control: N:0.010, E:0.010, Z:0.030,
GPS: Centering:0.001, Vector Err. Factor:10.0
3-DIMENSIONAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
===============================
Notice that in this example geoid modeling was used. Notice that the ellipsoid elevation is displayed
with the latitudes and longitudes. Orthometric elevations are displayed with the SPC83 grid coordinates.
Unadjusted Observations
=======================
Control Coordinates: 0 Observed Points, 2 Fixed Points, 0 Approx. Points
Sta. Latitude Longitude Z (Ellip.) StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
17 32-58'09.73116''N 112-47'13.55718''W 179.384 FIXED FIXED FIXED
12 33-04'44.24403''N 112-54'36.04569''W 194.299 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Grid XYZ
Sta. N: E: Z (Geoid): StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
17 218691.215 131994.035 209.384 FIXED FIXED FIXED
12 230946.179 120618.775 224.299 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Geocentric XYZ
Sta. X: Y: Z: StErr X: StErr Y: StErr Z:
17 -2074605.540 -4938403.868 3451206.784 FIXED FIXED FIXED
12 -2082621.133 -4927852.115 3461405.389 FIXED FIXED FIXED
Notice that in the 3-D model distances are not reduced to horizontal or grid. Slope distances are re-
duced to mark to mark distances. A Mark to mark distance is the computed slope distance from the
monument to monument.
Mark to Mark Slope Distances: 8 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Dist. StErr
13 51 4013.947 0.022
51 52 2208.268 0.013
52 53 2202.068 0.013
53 18 2714.298 0.016
51 15 1601.219 0.010
52 15 2499.608 0.015
52 16 2639.678 0.015
53 16 2859.648 0.016
Notice that in the 3-D model distances vertical angles are considered as separate measurements. Ver-
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1479
tical angles have also been converted to mark to mark vertical angles.
Mark to Mark Vertical Angles: 8 Observations
From Sta. To Sta. Vertical Ang. StErr (Sec.)
13 51 090-04'46.6'' 3.6
51 52 090-14'33.0'' 3.6
52 53 089-43'23.7'' 3.6
53 18 089-58'21.3'' 3.6
51 15 090-27'52.0'' 3.6
52 15 090-05'53.1'' 3.6
52 16 090-07'37.0'' 3.6
53 16 090-20'24.0'' 3.6
Horizontal Angles: 8 Observations
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle StErr (Sec.)
12 13 51 067-58'23.5'' 0.8
13 51 52 160-18'01.7'' 0.9
51 52 53 213-47'22.1'' 0.9
52 53 18 198-52'17.3'' 0.9
13 51 15 240-35'47.0'' 0.9
51 52 15 320-50'46.2'' 0.9
51 52 16 142-02'01.5'' 0.9
52 53 16 061-14'43.7'' 0.9
GPS Vectors: 8 Observations
From Sta. Delta X Variance Delta X Covariance XY
To Sta. Delta Y Variance Delta Y Covariance XZ
Delta Z Variance Delta Z Covariance YZ
12 -507.728 6.64E-005 7.231E-005
13 -5749.936 0.0002136 -1.914E-005
-8484.249 7.969E-005 -6.468E-005
12 5291.644 4.281E-005 4.478E-005
16 -4337.804 0.0001497 -1.252E-005
-3048.755 5.397E-005 -4.592E-005
13 4725.685 0.0001066 6.211E-005
15 -1175.977 0.0002265 -5.722E-005
1127.564 0.0001289 -9.329E-005
13 5799.369 5.779E-005 5.987E-005
16 1412.130 0.0001984 -1.63E-005
5435.492 7.569E-005 -6.123E-005
15 3797.625 0.0001611 0.0001685
17 -3625.824 0.001025 -8.94E-005
-2841.898 0.0003411 -0.000365
16 2723.952 6.601E-005 6.098E-005
17 -6213.925 0.0001595 -3.951E-005
-7149.837 0.0001187 -8.61E-005
16 3983.996 4.166E-005 3.668E-005
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1480
18 -2884.461 9.022E-005 -2.464E-005
-1679.646 6.868E-005 -4.835E-005
17 1260.043 3.331E-005 2.912E-005
18 3329.461 7.695E-005 -1.931E-005
5470.192 6.021E-005 -4.279E-005
Adjusted Geographic Coordinates
Adjusted Grid Coordinates, (Meters)
Sta. N: E: Z (Geoid): StErr N: StErr E: StErr Z:
13 220822.407 122293.821 205.469 0.011 0.006 0.007
51 222914.991 125719.002 200.982 0.013 0.008 0.028
52 224634.004 127105.001 191.980 0.011 0.009 0.028
53 225289.986 129206.984 202.983 0.011 0.008 0.032
18 225217.062 131920.203 204.850 0.008 0.005 0.007
15 222134.510 127117.007 188.195 0.013 0.008 0.011
16 227273.259 127147.034 186.643 0.007 0.004 0.006
Adjusted Geocentric Coordinates, (Metric)
Sta. X: Y: Z: StErr X: StErr Y: StErr Z:
13 -2083128.851 -4933602.055 3452921.136 0.006 0.011 0.007
51 -2079539.552 -4933856.880 3454699.821 0.008 0.013 0.028
52 -2077907.135 -4933512.881 3456146.639 0.009 0.011 0.028
53 -2075836.064 -4933996.021 3456717.919 0.008 0.011 0.032
18 -2073345.496 -4935074.401 3456676.978 0.005 0.008 0.007
15 -2078403.158 -4934778.040 3454048.691 0.008 0.013 0.011
16 -2077329.484 -4932189.930 3458356.627 0.004 0.007 0.006
Adjusted XYZ Coordinates Error Ellipses, 95% CI
Sta. Semi Major Semi Minor Max. Error Az. Elev.
Axis Axis
13 0.030 0.013 N 20-10'14.1''E 0.019
51 0.036 0.019 N 21-18'08.4''E 0.071
52 0.029 0.020 N 29-51'55.4''E 0.072
53 0.030 0.021 N 19-08'38.0''E 0.083
18 0.022 0.010 N 26-26'36.4''E 0.018
15 0.034 0.020 N 17-51'28.5''E 0.028
16 0.021 0.009 N 22-55'33.0''E 0.014
Adjusted Observations
=====================
Adjusted Mark to Mark Distances
From Sta. To Sta. Distance Residual StdRes. StdDev
13 51 4013.941 -0.005 0.244 0.013
51 52 2208.258 -0.011 0.803 0.010
52 53 2202.072 0.004 0.281 0.011
53 18 2714.316 0.018 1.146 0.011
51 15 1601.218 -0.001 0.072 0.008
52 15 2499.610 0.002 0.145 0.008
52 16 2639.683 0.005 0.357 0.008
53 16 2859.656 0.008 0.469 0.008
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.008
Adjusted Angles
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1481
BS Sta. Occ. Sta. FS Sta. Angle Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
12 13 51 067-58'22.4'' -1.1 1.3 0.4
13 51 52 160-18'02.3'' 0.6 0.7 0.7
51 52 53 213-47'22.2'' 0.1 0.1 0.7
52 53 18 198-52'17.5'' 0.2 0.2 0.9
13 51 15 240-35'46.5'' -0.5 0.5 0.9
51 52 15 320-50'47.2'' 1.0 1.2 0.7
51 52 16 142-02'01.5'' -0.0 0.0 0.8
52 53 16 061-14'43.4'' -0.3 0.4 0.7
Root Mean Square (RMS) 0.6
Adjusted vertical angles
From Sta. To Sta. Vertical Ang. Residual StdRes StdDev(Sec.)
13 51 090-04'55.5'' -9.0
*
2.5 1.4
51 52 090-14'36.5'' -3.5 1.0 2.9
52 53 089-43'25.0'' -1.2 0.3 3.1
53 18 089-58'22.0'' -0.7 0.2 2.4
51 15 090-27'53.0'' -1.0 0.3 3.4
52 15 090-05'52.9'' 0.2 0.1 2.3
52 16 090-07'39.9'' -2.9 0.8 2.1
53 16 090-20'24.9'' -0.9 0.2 2.3
Root Mean Square (RMS) 3.6
GPS Vectors: 8 Observations
From Sta. Delta X Residual StdRes StdDev
To Sta. Delta Y Residual StdRes StdDev
Delta Z Residual StdRes StdDev
12 -507.7297 -0.0022 0.267 0.0061
13 -5749.9259 0.0102 0.699 0.0109
-8484.2524 -0.0037 0.409 0.0072
12 5291.6464 0.0028 0.430 0.0045
16 -4337.7947 0.0096 0.785 0.0074
-3048.7649 -0.0095 1.298 0.0055
13 4725.6931 0.0085 0.818 0.0080
15 -1175.9849 -0.0083 0.549 0.0115
1127.5557 -0.0086 0.754 0.0100
13 5799.3676 -0.0014 0.185 0.0060
16 1412.1252 -0.0048 0.339 0.0107
5435.4912 -0.0010 0.116 0.0073
15 3797.6184 -0.0067 0.524 0.0083
17 -3625.8277 -0.0034 0.107 0.0128
-2841.9072 -0.0093 0.505 0.0109
16 2723.9438 -0.0081 0.999 0.0045
17 -6213.9378 -0.0129 1.022 0.0074
-7149.8428 -0.0061 0.562 0.0055
16 3983.9875 -0.0082 1.268 0.0054
18 -2884.4705 -0.0092 0.965 0.0079
-1679.6485 -0.0024 0.290 0.0069
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1482
17 1260.0437 0.0003 0.049 0.0052
18 3329.4673 0.0063 0.719 0.0079
5470.1943 0.0021 0.276 0.0069
Statistics
==========
Solution converged in 3 iterations
Degrees of freedom:27
Reference variance:1.32
Standard error unit Weight: +/-1.15
Passed the Chi-Square test at the 95.00 signicance level
14.573 <= 35.620 <= 43.195
Vertical Adjustment
=========================================
LEAST SQUARES VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT
=========================================
Tue Mar 21 17:37:27 2006
2D Geodetic Model.
Input Raw Files: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\CGSTAR.CGR
Output File: C:\data\lsdata\cgstar\cgstar.RPT
Curvature, refraction correction: ON
FIXED VERTICAL BENCHMARKS
Station Elevation
1 569.8500
POINTS TO BE ADJUSTED
Station
2,5,3,4,10,11,12
MEASUREMENT SUMMARY
From To Elev. Diff.
(unadjusted) StdErr
1 5 7.5040 0.0145
1 2 7.5659 0.0145
2 3 6.9843 0.0145
3 4 -11.4907 0.0146
4 5 4.3557 0.0145
5 10 2.2639 0.0143
10 11 1.0931 0.0143
11 12 0.3828 0.0143
12 3 3.3590 0.0144
ADJUSTED ELEVATIONS
Station Adjusted Elev Standard Dev.
1 569.8500 0.00000
2 577.4336 0.02465
5 577.3363 0.02465
3 584.4355 0.02915
4 572.9628 0.03070
10 579.6003 0.03341
11 580.6935 0.03641
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1483
12 581.0764 0.03519
STATISTICAL SUMMARY
Total Unknown Elevations:7
Total Elev. Routes:9
Total Fixed BM's:1
Total non-fixed BM's:0
Degrees of freedom:2
ADJUSTED MEASUREMENT SUMMARY
From To Elev. Diff. Residuals
(adjusted)
1 5 7.4863 -0.0177
1 2 7.5836 0.0177
2 3 7.0019 0.0177
3 4 -11.4728 0.0179
4 5 4.3735 0.0178
5 10 2.2641 0.0001
10 11 1.0932 0.0001
11 12 0.3829 0.0001
12 3 3.3591 0.0001
Vertical Sideshots
Station Elevation
20 571.77
21 581.25
22 580.14
15 579.60
Chapter 19. SurvNET 1484
Index
plus-0.5in
2 Point - 2 Point Intersect, 752
2 Tangents, Arc Length, 289
2 Tangents, Chord Length, 289
2 Tangents, Degree of Curve, 290
2 Tangents, External, 290
2 Tangents, Mid-Ordinate, 289
2 Tangents, Radius, 288, 729
2 Tangents, Tangent Length, 290
2 Tangents, Through Point, 291
2D Align, 225
2D Polyline, 29, 53, 54, 5660, 111, 126, 132, 134
136, 277, 278, 280, 405, 804, 807, 846, 847
2D Scale, 216, 217
2D-1D Local Coordinate System, 1461
2D-1D State Plane Coordinate System, 1469
3 Point, 286, 296, 759
3-Radius Curve Series, 294
3D Entity to 2D, 249
3D Polyline, 29, 119, 201, 203, 235, 245247, 281
285, 333, 667, 668, 713, 804, 805, 807, 808,
810, 812, 981, 1017, 1031, 1044, 1078
3D Polyline by Slope on Surface, 246
3D Polylines, 119, 235, 246
3D Viewer Window, 258, 264, 265, 390, 982, 995,
1019
4 Sided Building, 57, 728
AASHTO, 786
Add Culvert to Polyline, 968
Add Intersection Points, 233
Add Point by Two Slopes, 235
Add Points At Elevation, 246
Add Polyline Arcs, 234
Add Polyline Vertex, 234
Add Prex/Sufx To Text, 223
Add Zig to Polyline, 968
Adjoiner Text, 68, 935, 937
Align by Two Pairs of Points, 439
Align Points, 434, 443, 458
All topo items, 1315
Alphanumeric, 46, 391, 421, 434, 579, 587, 1170,
1459
Angle/Distance, 69, 455, 896, 922
Angle Balance, 511, 534, 536, 707
Angle Info, 348, 349
Angle Mode, 352, 389, 393, 739, 1143
Angles Right, 1237
Annotate Menu, 905
Annotation, 3, 25, 312314, 317, 321325, 692, 729,
871, 919, 926, 959, 974, 1070, 1072, 1073,
1323
Annotation Defaults, 906, 914, 940, 954
Aperture Object Snap, 416
Append Another Raw File, 545
Arc Length, 281, 285, 289, 291, 786, 795, 906, 939,
1372, 1373
Arcview, 1099
Area/Layout Menu, 817, 879
Area by Closed Polylines, 825
Area by Interior Point, 825
Area by Lines & Arcs, 824, 825
Area Defaults, 818, 821, 823825, 828, 832, 871, 895,
896
Area Label Defaults, 732, 827
Area Radial from Curve, 839
Area Summary, 1233
Area Table Defaults, 828, 829, 871
Arrowhead, 327, 467, 471, 977
ASCII File, 48, 105, 106, 430, 1107, 1108, 1116,
1149, 1150, 1154
ASE, 33, 197, 1277
Attach Image to Entity, 1104
Attribute Denitions, 901
Attribute Layers, 668
Attribute Layout ID, 424, 464, 668
Audit, 192
Audit Links, 1096
Authorizing Carlson Software, 10
Auto Annotate, 19, 114, 233, 689, 871, 913, 916, 917,
919, 921, 923, 950
AutoCAD Overview, 160
Auto Create Points, 1292, 1293
Auto Lines, 1338
Auto Map, 1271, 1281
Automatic Point Numbers, 424
Auto Point Number, 1338
Auto Point Plot, 1338
Auto Tablet On, 391
Azimuth-Distance with Leader, 932
Backsight, 88, 393, 511, 527, 529, 541543, 546548,
556, 559, 561, 565, 734, 735, 739, 742, 763,
764, 1132, 1164, 1175, 1177, 1325, 1351,
1362, 1367, 1390
Barscale, 944
Bearing-Bearing Intersect, 745, 746, 752, 1212
Bearing-Distance Intersect, 749, 1213
1485
Bearing-Distance with Leader, 931
Bearing & 3D Distance, 344
Bearing Annotation, 909
Bearing Area Cutoff, 840
Bearing with Leader, 930
Benchmark, 504, 556, 561, 754, 755, 1163
Best Fit, 1238, 1239, 1323, 1338
Best Fit Centerline, 781
Best Fit Circle, 779, 781
Best Fit Curve, 294
Best Fit Line by Average, 782, 783
Best Fit Line by Least Squares, 783
Best Fit Point, 778
Best Fit Transformation, 1301
Blips, 232, 343
Block Explode, 204
Bold Curve Leader, 331
Border, 12471249
Boundaries, 306, 1383
Boundary, 3, 19, 29, 306, 332, 699, 727, 729, 730,
769, 825, 875, 879, 1003, 1139, 1281
Boundary Polyline, 3, 133, 332, 699, 981
Break, 111, 130132, 135, 154, 206, 209, 210, 222,
238, 729, 758, 896, 10621064
Break, At Selected Point, 210
Break, Select Object, 2nd Point, 210
Break, Select Object, Two Points, 210
Break at Intersection, 209
Break by Crossing Polyline, 208
Breakline, 675, 986, 1005, 1008, 1009
Breaklines, 981, 985, 986, 1005, 1027, 1028, 1256
Breakpoint Descriptions, 1047
Break Polyline at Specied Distances, 209
Brg-Dist w/Leader, 69
Bubble Cul-de-Sac, 1236
Buffer Offset, 202, 203, 819, 990
Building Dimensions, 66, 114, 934, 936
Building Offset Extensions, 761, 762
Building Pad, 872, 873
Cadastral Automated Plat Drafting (CAPD), 729
Calculate Horizontal, 1225
Calculate Offsets, 18, 297, 813
Calculator, 345, 346
Callout Leader, 330, 331
Calls, 12641266, 1281, 1284, 1317, 1334
Call Table, 1268, 1269
Carlson File Types, 25
Carlson Points, 215, 453, 480
Carlson Registration, 12
Carlson Settings Explorer, 399
Centerline, 19, 26, 124, 178, 182, 278, 280, 297,
299, 390, 711, 715, 716, 781, 785, 786, 788,
789, 793, 797799, 801, 804, 806812, 814
816, 826, 847, 990, 1046, 1047, 1049, 1070,
1077, 1079
Centerline Conversion, 816
Centerline Conversions, 816
Centerline File, 364, 702, 715, 718, 798, 799, 808,
810, 904
Centerline ID, 799, 990
Centerline Menu, 785
Centerline Report, 798, 799
CGCogo, 1209
CGDos Drawings, 11261128
CGDraw, 1244, 1257, 1259, 1265
CGEditor, 13401345, 1349, 1356, 1358, 1359, 1362,
1363, 1371, 1373, 1377, 1378, 1381, 1383,
1384, 1387, 1460
CGFile, 1110, 1114, 1119, 1121, 1129, 1130, 1211
CGMngmt, 1284
CG Options, 1317
CG Snap, 1339
CGSurvey Module, 1109
CGTools, 1317
CGTopo, 1314, 1332
CGTrav, 1131, 1134, 1202, 1204, 1206, 1209
Change Attribute Style, 212
Change Block/Inserts Resize, 215
Change Block/Inserts Rotate, 214
Change Block/Inserts Substitute, 214
Change Colors, 213
Change Elevations, 156, 211, 434, 442
Change Layer, 61, 156, 272
Change Point LayerColor, 473
Change Polyline Elevation, 241
Change Polyline Linetype, 55, 60, 61, 965, 966, 969,
970
Change Polyline Width, 240
Change Properties, 210, 211
Change Style, 212
Change Text Font, 220
Change Text Oblique Angle, 221
Change Text Size, 221
Change Text Width, 221
Channel Sample, 25
Check Elevation Range, 241, 282
Check Lot Network Parameters, 887
Chord Bearing, 347, 690, 1270
Chord Length, 288, 289, 292, 940
Circle, 286, 295, 448, 449, 482, 546, 547, 681, 761,
780, 844, 1358
CLAYER, 16, 270, 427
Cleanup Lot Linework, 844, 845
CL File, 230, 798, 804, 808, 10471049, 1077, 1079
Clipboard, 188, 189, 199, 561
Index 1486
Close, 168, 185, 186, 206, 237, 240, 244, 252, 278,
281, 285, 320, 504, 653, 654, 729, 737, 806,
822, 825, 828, 836, 861, 864866, 895, 901,
919, 934, 1031, 1074, 10921094, 1099,
1113, 1126, 11891191, 1193, 1194, 1200
1202, 1261, 1272, 1309, 1343, 1345, 1346,
1350, 1354, 1355
Close Current, 1309
Closed Polylines, 17, 131
Close Map Check File, 1126
Close Raw File, 1126
Closure, 2, 39, 528, 531, 551, 565, 589, 625631, 636,
639, 640, 646, 690, 705, 707709, 725727,
896, 897, 1131, 1132, 1134, 1195, 1198,
1204, 1325, 1389, 1395, 1397, 1398, 1400,
1401, 1425, 1460, 1476
Closure by Point Numbers, 705
Closure Error, 725, 824, 897
Coal Sections, 397
Code Denitions, 652, 664
COGO Menu, 731
Color by Elevation, 1019
Combined Transformations, 1297
Command Entry, 16
Compare Points, 18, 434, 444, 445
Compass, 19, 550553, 727, 729, 822, 1188, 1324
Compass Polyline Adjustment, 726, 729
Composite Bed Qualities by Density, 396
Compound Curve, 786788
Compound or Reverse, 293
Conguration, 25, 28, 399, 401, 402, 413, 855, 1171,
1249, 1327, 1329, 1331, 1391
Congure, 388, 411, 413, 421, 422, 433, 445, 456,
461, 480, 509, 700, 821, 828, 834, 855, 906,
923, 935937, 949, 1045, 1187, 1188, 1295
Congure Carlson, 376
Consolidate Area Table, 835
Contour Elevation Label, 997
Contour from TIN File, 994
Contour ID, 996
Contours, 147, 155, 240, 394, 411, 986, 987, 989,
990, 996999, 1008, 1017, 1020, 1022,
1027, 1039, 1041, 1314, 1316, 1324
Convert C&G to Carlson Points, 478
Convert CAICE KCM to Carlson CRD, 480
Convert Carlson Points to Ashtech GIS, 480
Convert Carlson Points to C&G, 478
Convert Carlson Points to Eagle Point, 481
Convert Carlson Points to Land Desktop, 477
Convert Carlson Points to Simplicity, 478
Convert Carlson Points to Softdesk, 480
Convert Civil 3D to Carlson Points, 476
Convert CRD to Land Desktop MDB, 475
Convert CRD to TDS CR5/Convert TDS CR5 to
CRD, 475
Convert Eagle Point to Carlson Points, 481
Convert Geodimeter to Carlson Points, 480
Convert Land Desktop MDB to Carlson Points, 476
Convert Land Desktop to Carlson Points, 477
Convert LDD Contours, 1038, 1039
Convert Leica to Carlson Points, 479
Convert Old CG Dos Cross Section File to New For-
mat, 1129
Convert Old CG Dos Level File to New Format, 1129
Convert Old CG Dos Raw File to New format, 1129
Convert Old CG Dos Template File to New Format,
1130
Convert PacSoft CRD to Carlson CRD, 480
Convert Simplicity to Carlson Points, 479
Convert Softdesk to Carlson Points, 477
Convert Surveyor1 to CRD, 475
Convert to SurvCE FCL le, 1309
Coordinate File, 26, 295, 364, 390, 425, 429, 433,
436, 450, 456, 492, 494, 527, 528, 543, 559,
561, 593, 597, 676, 679, 722, 755, 765, 784,
812, 865, 1015, 1026, 1079, 1110, 1138,
1148, 1149, 1257, 1284, 1285, 1287, 1318,
1342, 1353, 1377, 1378, 13801382, 1420
Coordinate Files, 11111114, 1125, 1126, 1135,
1297, 1313, 1381, 1384
CooRDinate File Utilities, 434
Coordinate File Utilities, 211, 353, 354, 421, 422,
426, 435, 446, 456, 477, 479481, 735
Coordinate Grid, 1248, 1249
Coordinate Leader, 1278
Coordinates, 1266, 1302, 1353, 1389, 1391, 1400,
1418, 1454, 1460, 1462, 1466, 1469, 1472,
1474, 1476, 1477, 1479, 1481
Coordinate Transformation, 18, 27, 435, 437, 1301,
1303
Coords From Station Offset, 1219
Copy Coordinates, 1303
Copy Entity to Layer, 1334
Copy Polyline Section, 200
Copy To Layer, 200
Crandall, 2, 1194, 1198, 1325
CRD File, 226, 341, 390, 422, 434437, 442, 456,
462, 477, 479481, 497, 499, 505, 506, 513,
676, 786, 815, 824, 897
Create, 1250, 1263, 1292, 1293, 1305, 1309, 1311,
1421, 1445
Create Links, 1095, 1098, 1107
Create Point Group From Station Offset, 1221
Create Points from Entities, 746, 748
Create Point Table, 945, 946
Create Polyline ID Labels, 239
Create StarNet File, 1206
Index 1487
Crosshairs, 411
Crossing Breaklines, 991
Cross Sections, 713
CSTYLE, 16
Cul-de-Sacs, 847, 1234, 1323, 1338
Current Information, 1110
Current Query, 1090
Curve, 12701272, 1275, 1276, 1281, 1311, 1312,
1320, 1323, 1324, 1326, 1338, 13711374,
1385
Curve - Arrow, 17, 327, 328
Curve Between Tangents, 1226
Curve Calc, 296, 1225
Curve Edit Mode, 792
Curve Info, 347, 389, 730
Curves, 1225, 1227, 1228, 12301233
Curve Table, 802, 917, 947951, 953958, 1256
Custom, 7, 26, 33, 172, 217, 260, 305, 385, 424, 668,
670, 961, 1307
Custom Label Formatter, 960
Custom Label Formatter AD, 921
Cut Sheet, 18, 711, 713, 714, 717, 722, 763
Database File Utilities, 1106, 1107
Data Collectors, 486, 487, 514, 1144, 1148
Data Collector Transfer, 1135, 1141, 1164, 1188,
1446, 1460
Data Depot, 371, 377
Data Link, 311, 314
Deed Correlation, 693, 694
Deed Description, 18, 27, 36, 125
Deed Linework ID, 692
Deed Reader, 690, 692, 709
Dene GIS Features, 1084, 1085
Dene Lot Attributes, 901
Dene Note File Prompts, 11051107
Dene Strata, 396, 397
Delete, 1251, 12871289, 1295, 1308, 1314, 1344,
1411
Delete Labels, 1316
Delete Layer, 155, 405
Delete Points, 434, 442
Delete Table Elements, 955
Delta Angle, 293, 908, 916, 918, 939, 940, 961, 1034
Densify Polyline Vertices, 231
Depth Contours, 1024
Description for Points, 435, 443
Descriptions, 1337, 1352, 1361, 1372, 1376, 1381
Description Tables, 1304, 1305, 1309, 1310, 1319
Design Centerline, 786, 788, 798
Design Lot, 889
Design Pad Template, 3, 28, 1030, 10331038, 1078
Design Road Prole, 1078
Design Template, 1031
Digitize Areas, 827
Direct-Reverse Settings, 543, 544
Discussion Groups, 30
Display-Edit File, 349
Display Centerline Stations, 1221
Display Last Report, 349
Display Order, 269, 385
Display Precision, 592, 1418
Distance-Bearing with Leader, 932
Distance-Distance Intersect, 748, 1213
Distance Between Two Entities, 815
Distance with Leader, 931
Divide Along Entity, 757
Divide Between Points, 757
Dozer, 27, 186
Dozer Push, 26
Dragline, 26, 28
Draw, 12711274, 1277, 1279, 1304, 1306, 1308,
1316, 1317, 1322, 1323, 1328, 1329
Draw-Locate Points, 425, 442, 453, 648, 689, 733
737, 981
Draw 3D Grid File, 1018, 1021
Draw Barscale, 118, 944, 945
Draw Box Around Text, 297, 990, 999
Draw By Example, 325
Draw Centerline File, 797, 990
Draw End Point Leaders, 923
Draw Field to Finish, 647652, 655657, 664, 666,
669, 676, 981, 991
Draw Grid, 937, 1054, 1056, 1057, 1060
Drawing Block, 334
Drawing Cleanup, 189, 191
Drawing Explorer, 13, 181, 360363, 377, 389
Drawing Inspector, 342344, 422
Drawing Settings, 1244, 12561258, 1268, 1270
Drawing Setup, 13, 20, 36, 46, 47, 55, 75, 120, 176,
181, 183, 184, 186, 268, 312, 316318, 322,
325, 331, 351, 352, 354, 356, 388391, 409,
410, 427, 428, 450, 670, 698, 703, 727, 729,
732, 733, 745, 748, 749, 766768, 803, 809,
818, 819, 900, 906, 910, 911, 942, 949, 953,
961, 969, 973, 1029, 1039, 1098
Draw Legend, 941943
Draw Lot Setback, 851
Draw Mapcheck, 1252, 1253
Draw Menu, 276
Draw North Arrow, 943, 1058
Draw Perimeter, 822
Draw Pipe, 679, 1070, 1075
Draw Polyline Blips, 232
Draw Polyline File, 187
Draw Prole, 19, 27, 356, 1045, 1053, 1058, 1074,
1076, 1077
Draw Standard Item, 310, 311, 315
Index 1488
Draw Text On Arc, 961
Draw Text on Tangent, 963, 964
Draw Triangular Mesh, 995, 1039
Drop C&G Attributes, 1281
Duplicate Points, 190, 434, 443
Dynamic Annotation Note, 923
Eagle Point, 163, 481, 653, 655
Eagle Point Coding, 653
Earth Curvature, 531, 548, 550
Edit, 12501252, 12871289, 1291, 1302, 1304
1306, 1309, 1311, 1313, 1314, 1324, 1343,
1349, 1351, 13611363, 1371, 13731376,
1378, 1383, 1384, 1390, 1392, 1398, 1407,
1410, 1411, 1417, 1441, 1442, 1446, 1447,
1450, 1456
Edit-Process Level Data, 556
Edit-Process Raw Data File, 486, 509, 563, 689, 705,
707
Edit Area Table Properties, 832
Edit Coordinates (CGEditor), 1291, 1292
Edit Map Check File, 1202
Edit Menu, 196, 517, 561
Edit Multiple Pt Attributes, 463
Edit Point, 143, 422, 429, 449
Edit Point Attributes, 390, 422, 461, 462
Edit Points, 452, 676, 693
Edit Polyline Section, 236
Edit Polyline Vertex, 235, 236
Edit Process SDMS File, 562
Edit Raw File, 1134, 1135
Edit Symbol Library, 403
Edit Table, 947, 958, 1107
Edit Table Properties, 951
Edit Table Values, 955
Edit Text, 218
Edit Text on Arc or Tangent, 964
Elevate 2D Polylines, 848
Elevation Difference, 733, 739, 1020, 1060, 1063
Elevations, 1337, 1391, 1468, 1484
Elevation Zones, 1019
Empty Print File, 1130
End Areas, 26
Enter-Assign Point, 736, 738
Enter and Assign, 125, 427
Enter Deed Description, 688, 696
Entities to Polylines, 186, 230, 797
Entity Insertion Point Rotate, 216
Erase, 1277
Erase by Closed Polyline, 198
Erase by Layer, 197
Erase Links, 1096, 1097
Erase Outside, 199
Erase Point Attributes, 112, 468
Erase Points, 453
Erase Select, 197
Erase Sub-Areas Hatch, 877
Erase Surface from DWG, 1314, 1315
Example Projects, 1460
Existing File, 369
Exit Drawing Standards, 325
Explode Carlson Points, 474
Export Coordinates to ASCII, 1114
Export DWG File with Esri MSC, 1101
Export GIS Data to SurvCE, 1100
Export Google Earth File, 184, 186, 1030
Export LandXML File, 177
Export Lot File to MDB Database, 903
Export Lot File To Old SurvCADD, 903
Export RoadXML File, 181
Export SHP File, 1099
Export Text, 437
Export Text/ASCII File, 431, 434, 437, 451
Export Topcon Grid or TIN File, 1039
Extend, 3, 29, 54, 5660, 111, 112, 126, 205208,
278280, 283285, 417, 418, 588, 1072,
1412
Extend Arc, 205
Extend by Distance, 206, 207
Extended Entity Data, 194
Extend To Edge, 205
Extend to Intersection, 205
Extract Project Archive, 378
Extrapolate, 247, 398, 1016, 1022, 1023, 1047
Extrapolate Grid, 1019
Extrapolation, 1016
Fence Diagram, 26
Ferm Codes, 26
Field to Finish, 2, 15, 26, 35, 107110, 119, 123, 148
150, 152, 279, 283, 301, 302, 317, 424, 462,
485, 544, 649, 652, 655
Field to Finish Inspector, 685, 686
File Editor, 556558, 560, 563
File Menu, 166, 512, 560, 1343, 1373, 1394
Fillet, 29, 129, 227, 245, 248, 846
Fillet 3D Polyline, 245
Find Bad Angle, 544, 1198, 1324
Find Lot Name, 888
Find Point, 345
Fit Polylines, 1262
Fit Structure, 858, 859, 862, 863, 865867, 869, 1262
Fit Text Inside Arc, 964
Fit Text Outside Arc, 964
Fix Coords, 1295
Fix Label Overlaps, 924
Fix Point Attribute Overlaps, 469, 472
Flip Last Label, 928
Index 1489
Flip ON/OFF, 928
Flip Selected Labels, 933
Flip Text, 114, 222, 651, 803, 810, 819, 916, 918, 961,
1057
Flood Note, 409
Flow Leader, 331
Footprint Creator, 852, 855
Four Way Control, 773
Freeze ALL Layers, 1336
Freeze Layer, 17, 64, 116, 139, 155, 272, 273, 453
Freeze Layer By Pick, 273
Freeze Points, 453, 454
General Commands, 162, 733737
General Information, 1209
Geodetic Double Break, 767
Geodetic Double Proportion Line Division, 766
Geodetic Middle Break, 768
Geodetic Single Proportion Line Division, 766
Geodetic Traverse, 765
Geodimeter, 480, 486, 505507, 514, 555, 1184
Geologic Column, 26
GIS Database Settings, 1084, 1086, 1095
GIS File, 424
GIS Inspector, 1087
GIS Inspector Settings, 1087, 1088
GIS Links, 24
GIS Menu, 1083
GIS Query/Report, 1089
Global Edit, 1246, 1247
Global Reannotate, 933
GLO Corner Proportioning, 765, 773, 774
GPS Network, 1474
GPS Vectors and Total Station, 1478
Grant Boundary Adjustment, 727, 728
Graphic Scale, 1258, 1259
Grid File, 237, 240, 247, 362, 364, 389, 425, 531, 713,
993, 1017, 1020, 1022, 1023, 1035, 1040
Grid File Utilities, 26, 187, 1016
Guard Rail, 970
Hatch, 304306, 387, 872, 874877, 894, 895, 941,
942, 988, 1044
Hatch Sub-Areas, 876, 877
HEC-2, 26
Highlight Crossing Plines, 242
Highlight Depression Contours, 987, 996
Highlight Index Contours, 996
Highlight Non-Tangent Polylines, 242
Highlight Unclosed Polylines, 244
Hinged Area, 3, 133, 837
Horizontal Axis Elevations, 1059
Hydrograph, 26
Identify Area Descriptions, 836
Identify Sub-Area, 876
Image Adjust, 253, 254
Image Clip, 253
Image Frame, 252
Image Inspector, 1102
Import ASCII File into Coordinates, 1125
Import GIS Data from SurvCE, 1100
Import Google Earth File, 184, 1029
Import Google Earth Surface, 1028, 1029
Import LandXML File, 175
Import Lot File From MDB Database, 902
Import MrSID Images, 1103
Import RoadXML File, 180
Import SHP File, 1097, 1098
Import Text/ASCII File, 2, 15, 48, 430, 434, 437, 648,
730
Import Xref to Current Drawing, 173
Indicated, 1055
Input-Edit Centerline File, 788
Input-Edit GIS Data, 678, 1086, 1091
Input-Edit Point, 429, 445
Input-Edit Prole File, 1049
Input-Edit ROW Offsets, 877
Inquiry Menu, 339
InRoads, 664
Insert, 337, 389, 417, 450, 452, 477, 510, 527, 571,
576, 577, 653, 671, 712, 955, 991, 993, 994,
1018, 1073, 1128, 1201, 1344, 1350, 1351,
1353, 1355, 1371, 1373, 1375, 1378, 1384,
1450, 1454
Insert Multi-Point Symbols, 301
Insert Symbols, 62, 63, 299, 301
Installing Carlson Software, 5
Instruction Manual and Program Conventions, 25
Interior Point, 132, 139, 140, 821
Intermediate Contours, 1315
Interpolate Points, 757759
Intersections, 19, 127, 146, 744, 846, 847, 991, 993,
1064, 1214, 1237, 1249, 1338
Intersections/Cul-de-sacs, 12341236
Intersects, 1211, 1212, 1217, 1218
Interval Along Entity, 758
Interval Between Points, 758
Introduction, 1, 1389
Inverse, 732, 734736, 739, 760, 824, 1210, 1433,
1446
Inverse with Area, 43, 822, 824
Irregular Boundary Adjustment, 768
Isolate Layer, 17, 273, 274, 425
Isolate Layers, 56, 57
Issuing Commands, 161
Item Standards Manager, 314, 405
Item Standards Manager - Best Practices, 322
Index 1490
Join, 190, 223, 225, 247, 248, 660
Join 3D Polyline, 246
Join Nearest, 3, 17, 126, 230, 247, 797, 990, 1078
Join Text Entities, 224
Label Angle, 947, 948, 952, 970, 973
Label Arc, 114, 115, 939, 959, 960
Label Contours, 989, 13151317
Label Coordinates/Elevation, 971, 972
Label Curb Flow Elevations, 974
Label Elevations, 1056
Label Elevations Along Pline, 976
Label Elevations Along Polyline, 977
Label GIS Polyline: Closed Polyline Data, 1093
Label GIS Polyline: Closed Polyline Image, 1091
Label GIS Polyline: Open Polyline Data, 1094
Label Last Area, 827
Label Lat/Long, 729, 730
Label LatLong, 973
Label Offset Distances, 976
Label Station-Offset, 807
Label Sub-Areas, 877
Label Zeros, 426, 650
Land Development Desktop, 190
Latitude/Longitude, 733
Layer and Style Defaults, 16
Layer by Description, 425
Layer Control, 270, 1330, 13351337
Layer ID, 341
Layer Inspector, 342
Layer Library, 405407
Layer Report, 342
LDD, 190, 475, 476, 565, 1329, 1389
Leaders, 1277
Leader With Text, 328, 329
Least squares, 88, 565, 566, 587, 608, 1390, 1391,
1411
Legal Description Writer, 698700, 896
Legend Denition, 73, 74, 941, 943
Leica, 20, 479, 480, 486, 500504, 514, 516, 561,
565, 586, 599, 600, 1081, 1082, 1175, 1410,
1435
Lesson 1: Entering a Deed, 36
Lesson 2: Making a Plat, 45
Lesson 3: SurvNET, 81
Lesson 4: Field to Finish for Faster Drafting, 104
Lesson 5: Intersections and Subdivisions, 123
Lesson 6: Contouring, Break Lines and Stockpiles,
146
License Agreement, 5, 11, 30, 31
Limit Polylines, 396
Line, 277, 279, 281, 283285, 288291, 302, 310
313, 317, 319, 320, 322324, 342, 344, 348,
352, 382, 390, 393, 396, 406, 410, 411, 430,
434, 441, 451, 471, 491, 504, 519, 544546,
551, 650, 651, 654, 655, 661, 665, 670, 674
676, 688, 689, 692, 699, 701, 704, 729, 730,
735, 737, 738, 741, 742, 746, 749, 782, 784,
786789, 792795, 801, 802, 807, 813, 815,
821825, 828, 837839, 841, 842, 844846,
854, 871, 874, 884, 892, 895, 906, 907, 909,
911922, 926, 930, 934937, 942, 946953,
955958, 965970, 976, 982, 986, 987, 993,
995, 1011, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1047, 1055,
10581060, 10651067, 1070, 1074, 1075,
1077, 1079, 1088, 1120, 1123, 1180, 1181,
1192, 1201, 1209, 1226, 12341238, 1240,
1241, 12451249, 1253, 1256, 1261, 1264,
1265, 1267, 1269, 1270, 1272, 1273, 1280,
1283, 1306, 1314, 1321, 1323, 1327, 1328,
1334, 1338, 1371, 1372
Line by Angle-Distance, 760
Line On/Off, 737, 742
Lines, 1339, 1372, 1437
Lines and Polylines, 12591263
Lines by Codes, 1261
Lines by Description, 1260
Lines by Point Number, 1259
Line Table, 950, 952, 953
Line Type Scaler, 56
Line Up Text, 224
Linework Intersection Points, 745
Link Points with Coordinate File, 422
Links Manager, 441
LISCAD, 503, 504
LisCad, 479
List, 340, 352, 362, 405, 418, 422, 429, 430, 437, 442,
448, 449, 452, 457, 458, 460, 487, 491, 655,
685, 698, 706, 730, 739, 763, 945, 1039,
1085, 1141, 1142, 1296, 1300, 1308, 1319,
1396
List Elevation, 157, 344
List Points, 49, 428, 429, 434, 442, 651
Load Saved Report, 350
Locate by Azimuth, 743
Locate by Bearing, 743, 749, 750
Locate by Delta, 743
Locate by Line Bearing, 742
Locate by Turned Angle, 742
Locate on Real Z Axis, 124, 423, 426, 746
Locate Point, 15, 18, 29, 50, 51, 124, 424, 427, 469,
509, 650, 729, 744, 1107
Lock Layers, 274
Lot File, 19, 139, 144, 146, 698, 886, 889894, 897,
901, 903, 904
Lot File by Closed Linework, 892
Lot File by Interior Text, 139, 892
Lot File by Pick Interior, 891
Index 1491
Lot File to Centerline, 904
Lot Inspector, 897
Lot Layout, 130132, 135, 842, 843, 845, 846
Lot Manager, 893, 894
Lot Network - Assign Lot Type, 888
Lot Network Boundary, 875
Lot Network Hinged Area, 885
Lot Network Inspector, 887, 888
Lot Network Labels, 886
Lot Network Linework, 883
Lot Network Output To Lot File, 889
Lot Network Renumber Lots, 888
Lot Network Report, 886
Lot Network Road Network, 878
Lot Network Settings, 870, 879, 885, 887, 888
Lot Network Sliding Side Area, 885
Lot Network Subdivide Area, 883
Main Contours, 1314
Make 3D Grid File, 1014, 1019, 1020, 1034
Manhole, 73, 109, 322, 1073, 1074, 1177, 1178, 1294
Manual Storage, 1293
Map Check by Pnts, 708
Mapcheck by Screen Entities, 709
Map Points from, 437
Maps, 184, 1017
Maptech, 515
Max Samples, 393, 395
Measured, 504, 617, 618, 1428
Menu System Overview, 1394
Merge Tables, 957
MicroStation, 186188
Middle Ordinate Solution, 1227, 1323, 1338
Minimum Frontage, 881, 884, 887
Mirror, 29, 228, 863, 865, 869, 870, 927, 928
Mirror and Flip Selected Labels, 927
Mirror Selected Labels, 927
Mortgage Block, 409
Mouse Click Settings, 402
Move, 199, 206, 219, 220, 277, 323, 357, 405, 422,
434, 441, 442, 452, 461, 466, 467, 471, 472,
698, 719, 789, 818, 829, 832, 837, 851, 866,
867, 870, 894, 895, 898, 920, 921, 923, 925,
928930, 942, 977, 1000, 1005, 10081012,
1088, 1102, 1105, 1250, 1266, 1267, 1278
1280, 1288, 1365
Move Calls, 1266
Move Label Along Contour, 999
Move Label with Leader, 928
Move Point Attributes, 113, 115
Move Point Attributes Single, 466
Move Point Attributes with Leader, 467, 472
Move Points, 461
Move Text with Leader, 219
Multi-Draw, 1254
Multi-Point Symbols, 301, 304
Multiple Offsets, 202
NAD83, 1243, 1320, 1406
National Geodetic Survey, 437, 599, 1435
Nearest Found, 334, 649, 660
Network Processing Reports, 1461
New, 167, 168, 175, 212, 215, 240, 248, 253, 270,
280, 284, 306, 315, 424, 433, 439, 441, 448,
455457, 504, 512, 513, 539, 561, 564, 590,
601, 625, 626, 631, 648, 712, 727, 737, 747,
766, 769, 831, 862, 883, 975, 1006, 1086,
1097, 1104, 1107, 1111, 1138, 1175, 1274,
1277, 1296, 1298, 1299, 1304, 1318, 1327,
1342, 1343, 1345, 1349, 1371, 1377, 1384,
1389, 1395, 1396, 1402, 1445
New Area Table, 831
Nikon, 486, 504, 505, 515, 555, 1187, 1188
Nodes, 425, 1026
North Arrow, 40, 71, 118, 1058
Note File, 712, 1107
Numeric, 46, 390, 391, 731, 900, 1110, 1138, 1169,
1281, 1377
Numeric Pad COGO, 755
Object Data, 397
Object Linking, 192, 390
Obtaining Technical Support, 30
Occupy Point, 734, 739
Off, 1339, 1355, 1356, 1361, 1366, 1372, 1375, 1376,
1380, 1381
Offset 3D Polyline, 244
Offset Cutoff, 187, 191, 1053, 1099
Offset Dimensions, 67, 118, 934936
Offset Point Entry, 297, 811
Offset Proles, 1047
Offsets & Intersections, 846, 847
Offset to Area, 202
Offset To Layer, 201
OLE objects, 382, 384
One Way Control, 769
Open, 168, 192, 206, 244, 258, 381, 390, 421, 434,
435, 476, 478, 479, 502, 511513, 553, 558,
560, 563, 601, 625, 631, 712, 865, 866,
894, 988, 994, 999, 1035, 1039, 1045, 1051,
1052, 1054, 1087, 1102, 1107, 1112, 1113,
1115, 1126, 1134, 1135, 11921194, 1197,
1201, 1202, 1204, 1209, 1233, 1254, 1302,
1314, 1341, 1343, 1345, 13481350, 1354,
1355, 1371, 13751379, 1384, 1395, 1402,
1445, 1446
Open Dos Drawing, 1127
Opening Closing and Saving, 1111
Index 1492
Overview Draw Standard Items, 310
Ownership, 27
Page Setup, 169, 382
Pan, 258, 259, 278, 283, 390, 472, 522, 623, 686, 741,
742, 789, 919, 1045, 1088, 1357, 1443
Parking, 850
PC, PT, Center, 287
PC, PT, Tangent, 287
PC, Radius, Arc Length, 288
PC, Radius, Chord, 288
PCMCIA card, 504
PC Point, 288
PDMODE, 477
PDSIZE, 389, 422
Perpendicular Intersect, 750, 846, 1214
Pick Current Layer, 1337
Pick Intersection Points, 744
Pick Layers to Freeze, 1335
Pick Layers to Thaw, 1335
Pick Layers to turn Off, 1336
Pick Layers to turn On, 1336
Pipe Polylines, 1074
Pipe Size, 27, 1053
PI Points, 789, 792, 802, 807
Pivot Point Rotate by Bearing, 215
Place Calls, 12641266, 1334
Place Camera Symbol/Image, 1103
Place Image by World File, 309, 1103
Place Labels, 1315
Plot, 169173, 228, 245, 246, 271, 296, 329, 352, 382,
383, 405, 441, 689, 842, 975, 1016, 1023,
1039, 1058, 1079, 1234, 1256, 1272, 1277,
1294, 1308, 1322, 1331
Plot Points and Symbols, 1257, 1258, 1260
Plot Points on Screen, 1257
Plot Preview, 169
Point Code, 1337, 1382
Point Defaults, 36, 37, 50, 279, 283, 299, 423, 424,
464, 473, 648, 735, 736, 743, 750, 758, 759,
765, 769, 771773
Point Description, 38, 39, 345, 427, 442, 474, 475,
736, 737, 742, 744, 757, 761, 810, 896, 975,
1063, 1249, 1257, 1260, 1261
Point Entity, 464, 676
Point Entity Grouping, 193
Point Group Manager, 447, 449, 452, 699, 1048
Point Groups, 1310, 1312
Point ID, 341, 441, 681, 1146, 1147, 1169, 1206,
1219, 1232, 1249, 12731276, 1296, 1307,
1317, 1340, 1352, 1366, 1367, 1376, 1377,
13791381
Point Label, 1279, 1307
Point Layer, 667, 761
Point Manager, 1284, 1287, 1288, 1291
Point Notes, 531, 651, 814
Point Number Report, 434, 443
Point Object Snap, 393, 415
Point on Arc, 756
Point Protect, 176, 179, 184, 430, 446, 493, 495, 496,
498, 499, 502, 505, 506, 530, 735
Point Range, 27, 436, 491
Points, 1339, 1345, 1352, 1358, 13781380, 1382
1384, 1401, 1403, 1414, 1423, 1429, 1434,
1443, 1465, 1470, 1474, 1476, 1479
Points and Lines, 1340
Points Menu, 421
Points on Arc, 1227
Points on Centerline, 812, 1079
Points on Line, 1223
Polygon Processor, 27
Polyline by Nearest Found, 333
Polyline File, 186188
Polyline Info, 348
Polyline Report, 725
Polylines by Point, 1261
Polyline to Centerline File, 797, 799
Polyline to Deed File, 726
Polyline to Lot File, 890
Polyline to RW5 File, 726
Polyline to Special Line, 966, 969
Polyline to Tree Line, 967
Pre-calculated grids, 27
Preferences, 378, 385, 414
Print View Print File, 1130
PRO, 15, 27, 3134, 176, 211, 356, 370, 714, 717,
729, 730, 1045, 10471051, 1066, 1077
1082, 11611163
Process Deed File, 696, 697, 726
Process Menu, 1422
Process Only Strata with Beds, 396
Product Overview, 2
Prole Conversions, 10801082
Prole from Grid or Triangulation Surface, 1047
Prole from Points on Centerline, 1048
Prole from Surface Entities, 1046
Prole to 3D Polyline, 1078
Prole To Points, 1078
Project Explorer, 13, 358, 360, 361, 363365, 369
Projections, 20
Project Setup, 401
Properties and Layers, 164
Properties Manager, 228, 270, 271
Properties Toolbar, 165, 270
Property lines, 61
Purge, 194, 195, 342, 369
Query, 1280, 1281, 1323
Index 1493
Quick Keys, 16, 29
Quick Prole, 1044, 1045
Quick Traverse, 1131, 1132, 1323, 1325, 1326, 1338
Radial Stake Out, 1238
Radial Stakeout, 762, 764, 1237
Radius Point, 281, 285, 291293, 347, 689, 725, 804,
1272
Railroad, 296, 940, 1079
Railroad Curves, 810
Railroad Curve Table, 951
Raster Image, 307
Raw File On/Off, 737
Raw Traverse Data, 1446
re-Associate Coord. le, 1281, 1282
Reactors, 192
Reame, 28
Reannotate, 924
Recover, 192
Redo, 197, 1343
Redraw, 256
Reduce Direct-Reverse, 544
Reduce Map Check File, 1202
Reduce Polyline Vertices, 187, 191, 231, 391, 881
Reduce Traverse, 1188, 1189, 1202
Reduce Vertices, 3, 987
Refresh Screen, 1283, 1284
Regen, 256
Registration, 10, 13
Remove Area Table Rows, 834
Remove Duplicate Polylines, 237
Remove Groups, 193
Remove Points from Screen, 1258
Remove Polyline Arcs, 237, 240
Remove Polyline Segment, 111, 154, 238
Remove Polyline Vertex, 238, 729
Remove Reactors, 192, 924
Remove Spaces From Text, 224
Remove XData, 194
Renumber Points, 442, 445, 474, 1289, 1296
repackaged, i
Replace Text, 22, 225
Replot Descriptions, 975
Report Formatter, 2224, 26, 28, 243, 350, 361, 364,
390, 397, 401, 406, 429, 460, 513, 532, 558,
684, 687, 697, 715, 719, 720, 723, 798, 814,
815, 822, 825, 886, 896, 942, 1002, 1021,
1090
Report Grade Elevation, 814, 815
Report Log, 389
Report Sub-Area, 876
Rescale Drawing, 410
Resection, 752754, 1461
Residuals, 27, 295, 541, 606, 614, 779, 780, 784,
1468, 1484
Resize, 522
Resize Point Attributes, 469
Restore Due North, 268, 730, 947
Restore Layer, 56, 57, 64, 274, 275
Restore World View, 269
Reverse Calls, 1266
Reverse Polyline, 131, 132, 230, 797, 842
Right-of-Way Crossing Table, 898
Right-of-Way Easements, 1234
Right of Way, 785, 789, 791, 884, 901, 1323
Rigid Body Transformation, 440
Road Design, 27, 28, 714, 879, 1031
Roadside Ditch, 27
Roadways, 12341237
Rotate by Pick, 216
Rotate Points, 267, 422, 434, 443, 456, 1298
Rotate Text, 219, 937
Runoff, 27
Save, 168, 169, 174176, 193, 197, 261, 264, 271,
274, 308, 328, 358, 379, 381, 382, 388, 389,
401, 413, 420, 441, 449, 464, 475, 483, 504,
512, 513, 517, 561, 581, 584, 601, 648, 664,
694, 697, 705, 712, 789, 796, 798, 810, 821,
834, 882, 894, 899, 900, 902, 913, 922, 940,
942, 947, 961, 972, 989, 1006, 1045, 1051,
1054, 1077, 1090, 1091, 1093, 1094, 1105,
1112, 1114, 1116, 1175, 1227, 1231, 1287,
1288, 1343, 1349, 1371, 1395, 1405, 1408,
1438, 1446
Save/Load Tablet Calibration, 413
Save/Restore Layer State, 274
Save As, 169, 358, 405, 558, 561, 590, 648, 664, 694,
697, 857, 942, 955, 1006, 1113, 1114, 1343,
13601363, 1382, 1417
SB-Slope, 28
Scale, 218, 220, 226228, 259, 261, 305, 309, 312,
316325, 338, 352354, 389391, 410413,
424, 427, 434, 442, 443, 459461, 467471,
513, 527, 531, 536, 537, 540, 548, 550, 567,
594, 602, 667, 668, 670, 681, 728, 732, 733,
803, 809, 819, 820, 876, 900, 906908, 911
913, 917, 923, 930, 934, 935, 938, 940, 944,
966, 969, 974, 977, 983, 987, 989, 998, 999,
1005, 1052, 1055, 1056, 1058, 1060, 1110,
1202, 1208, 1259, 1299, 1308, 1319, 1330,
1332, 1350, 1353, 1421, 1422, 1439, 1446,
1464, 1471
Scale Point Attributes, 52, 468, 469
Scale Points, 459
Screen Pick Point, 442
SDPS, 397
Index 1494
Seam Stacking, 395
Search Published Control, 482
Section File, 713, 1129, 1130, 1135, 1313, 1341,
1342, 1375
Section Subdivision, 764
SEDCAD, 26
Select by Area, 251
Select by Block, 251
Select by Elevation, 250
Select by Filter, 249
Select by Length, 252
Selection of Items, 163
Select Similar, 252
Sequential Numbers, 137, 325, 844
Set/Reset X-Hairs, 411
Set Active Area Table, 832
Set Back Measure-Move, 851
Set Coordinate File, 421, 433, 509, 786
Set CRD File for Lot Files, 903
Set Current, 1309, 1337
Set Data Directory, 15
Set Default, 1309, 13601362, 1382
Set Drawing Standards Data Source, 314
Set Layer, 272
Set Line Type, 1244, 1245
Set Linework Angles To Nearest Second, 845
Set Linework Intersections To Perpendicular, 846
Set Lot File, 889
Set Point Elevations by 3D Polylines, 724
Set Point Elevations by Surface Model, 724
Set Polyline Origin, 240
Set Project/Data Folders, 356, 360
Set Table Position, 950
Settings File Manager, 401
Settings Menu, 351, 1345, 1350, 1359, 1371, 1373
1375, 1378, 1381, 1386, 1405
Setting Up a Project, 13
Set UCS to World, 413
Setup DOS Dwg, 1128
Sewer, 28, 60, 264, 322, 358, 1050, 1052, 1072, 1074
Sewer Network, 1071
Sewer Structure, 28, 324
Shade, 262, 662
SHP File, 1099
Shrink-Wrap Entities, 332
Side Shots, 736, 738, 740, 1196, 1198, 1422
Sight Distance, 537, 1052
Size Lot by Frontage, 885
Sketch, 969
Sketch Tree Line, 969
Sliding Side Area, 3, 135, 136, 838
Slope Distance, 507, 547, 548, 556, 561, 643, 739,
740, 754, 763, 1177, 1479
Slope Zone Analysis, 1039
Smart Prompting, 1086, 1087
SMI, 26, 486, 499, 515, 554, 786, 11841187
Smoothing, 261, 987, 1039
Smooth Polyline, 57, 232, 675
Snap Tolerance, 234, 781
Softdesk, 398, 477, 480, 514, 816, 10801082
Sokkia/SDR, 496, 497, 554, 1081
Sokkia G, 486, 498
Solar Observations, 774
Special Leader, 3, 70, 329
Special Line, 19
Special Line/Entity, 969
Spiral, 297, 702, 787, 790, 792795, 801, 802, 1228,
1230, 1231
Spiral Curve, 296
Spiral Curve Design, 1228
Spiral Curve Stakeout, 1230
Spiral In, 793
Spirals, 786
Spline, 127, 190, 1263, 1324
Split Bed by Parameters, 396
Split Table, 956
Split Text into Two Lines, 222
Spot Elevations, 19, 1026
Spot Elevations By Surface Model, 1025
SQL, 391, 421, 434, 436, 1084, 1392, 1411, 1458
SRVPNO, 340, 473, 668, 991
Stack Label Arc, 69, 70, 939
Stage-Storage, 394
Stake-Out, 1237, 1238
Stakeout Horizontal, 1231
Standard Align, 226
Standard Copy, 199
Standard Cul-de-Sac, 1236, 1237
Standard Explode, 203
Standard Offset, 201
Standard Report Viewer, 20, 44, 49, 142, 347, 349,
429, 532, 534, 700, 726, 955
Starting Survnet, 1392
Start Point Number, 424
Startup Wizard, 13, 15, 36, 45, 46, 104, 105, 123, 144,
389, 391
State Plane, 353, 438, 460, 538, 539, 582, 594, 609,
638, 642, 646, 1407, 1463
Station-Offset, 810, 812, 1221, 1279, 1280
Station/Elevation, 1070
Station Offset, 1218, 12201222
Station Offset From Coords, 1222
Station Polyline/Centerline, 798, 799, 802
Stockpile, 156, 158, 159, 1001
Store Project Archive, 377, 378
StrataCalc, 26, 397
Strata Isopach Maps, 26
Strata Quantities, 28
Index 1495
Superelevation, 28
Surface 3D FlyOver, 265
Surface 3D Viewer, 264
Surface Entities, 261, 981
Surface Inspector, 28
Surface Manager, 1007, 1012, 1014, 1035
Surface Menu, 980
Surface Model, 230, 263, 266, 282, 724, 1030, 1035,
1047, 1078
SurvCE, 18, 26, 28, 353, 486, 487, 490, 492, 494, 498,
512, 515, 539, 540, 556, 567, 586, 601, 655,
668, 678, 711713, 1100, 1101, 1106, 1107,
11561159, 1309, 1310, 1391, 1410, 1435,
1446
SurvCOGO, 515, 555
Survey Menu, 485
Surveyors Assistant, 486
Survey Text Defaults, 64, 66, 67, 114, 118, 934937
SurvNET, 562, 582, 595, 1324, 1341, 1345, 1354
1356, 1358, 1370, 1388, 1389, 13911393,
1395, 1410, 1442, 1446, 1456, 1459
SurvNET Editor, 1460
SurvStar, 486, 1105
Switch Bearing/Azimuth Quadrant, 926
Symbol Library, 17, 28, 299, 316, 422, 424, 670
Symbol Size, 62, 63, 118, 389, 482, 942, 966, 993,
1247, 1308, 1329
System Requirements, 4
System Variable Editor, 418
Table Defaults, 946, 950
Table Header, 900, 916, 917, 949, 950
Tables, 1266, 1268, 1269
Tablet Calibrate, 411
Tablet Calibration, 411413
Tag Area Descriptions, 836
Tag Hard Breakline Polylines, 1027
Tag Sub-Area, 875877
Tang, PC, Radius, Chord Length, 292
Tang, PC, Radius, Delta Angle, 293
Tangent, PC, Radius, Arc Length, 291
Tangent, PC, Radius, Tangent Length, 292
Tangent Between Curves, 1232
Tangent Intersect, 751, 1215
Tangent Line from Circles, 760
Tangent Out Bearing, 688
TDS, 2, 430, 486, 498, 499, 509, 515, 517, 558, 655,
816, 1160, 1164
TDS CR, 475
Technical Support, 30
Template Database, 10861089
Template Point Centerline, 797
Template Point Prole, 714
Temporary Erase, 199
Terramodel, 816, 1082
Text, 1277, 1278, 1316, 1321, 1323, 1328, 1358, 1381
Textbox, 975
Text Enlarge/Reduce, 42, 120, 218, 221
Text Explode To Polylines, 186, 223
Text on Arc, 1250
Text Plot Size, 47, 120
Text Size, 43, 65, 67, 68, 219, 325, 522, 819, 830, 831,
833, 834, 877, 942, 946, 947, 952, 1246,
1251, 1267, 1270
Text Style, 17, 76, 321, 324, 354, 730, 803, 809, 819,
830, 831, 833, 834, 900, 909, 911913, 934,
935, 946, 947, 951, 952, 962
Thaw/On All Layers, 274
Thaw ALL Layers, 1336
Thaw Layer, 17, 64, 156, 273, 454
Thaw Points, 454
Three Way Control, 772
TIF le, 309, 310, 1103, 1104
Tin, 1314, 1332
T Intersections, 1234
Title Block, 3, 39, 47, 71, 116, 407, 938
Toolbars, 403, 601, 1445
Tools Menu, 1433
Topographic Settings, 1314, 1315
Transformations, 1297, 1300, 1301, 1303, 1304
Transit, 535, 543, 689, 707, 1134, 1324, 1326
Translate Layers, 193
Translate Points, 267, 434, 443, 454, 461, 1297
Traverse, 734739, 863, 11311134, 1164, 1168,
1174, 1188, 1189, 11921198, 12001203,
1206, 1317, 1325, 1326, 1345, 1350, 1353
1355, 1360, 1392, 13981401, 1413, 1425,
1427, 1460, 1474, 1476
Triangle Solutions, 778
Triangulate &Contour, 981, 983, 993, 995, 996, 1000,
1027, 1039, 1042, 1078
Triangulation, 20, 26, 28, 176, 364, 393, 395, 398,
713, 718, 982, 983, 985, 986, 995, 1000,
1001, 10141016, 1020, 1039, 1042, 1047,
1048, 1242
Triangulation File Utilities, 1002, 1004
Trim, 29, 204, 224, 227, 430, 486, 496, 515, 558, 561,
565, 586, 599, 600, 655, 816, 1034, 1035,
1084, 1102, 1389, 1410, 1434, 1436
Trimble, 20, 180, 181
Trim by Point Symbol, 43, 472, 473
Trim Linework Through Text, 298
Turn OFF ALL Layers, 1336
Turn ON ALL Layers, 1337
Tutorials, 35
Twist, 18, 112114, 214, 216, 219, 269, 389, 468,
469, 810, 819, 947
Twist Point Attributes, 18, 113, 468
Index 1496
Twist Screen: Line Pline or Text, 268
Twist Screen: Standard, 267
Twist Screen: Surveyor, 268
Twist To 3D View, 269
Two Surface Volumes, 10191023, 1034
Two Way Control, 770, 771
Undo, 197, 204207, 236, 253, 273, 277, 279281,
283, 285, 313, 328, 441, 446, 456, 458,
517, 688690, 741, 786, 787, 823, 889, 890,
1051, 1343
Unequal Radius, 896
Units Control, 413
Universal Transverse Mercator, 437, 776
Unix, 374
Untag Area Descriptions, 837
Untag Hard Breakline Polylines, 1027
Untag Sub-Area, 875
Update Drawing from CRD File, 435, 442
Update Point Table, 946
Using the Carlson Software Manual, 2
Variable Offset, 201
Ventilation, 27
Vertical Adjustment, 1483
Vertical Angle, 507, 520, 529, 543, 548, 589, 643,
736, 739, 742, 743, 1177, 1326, 1351, 1416,
1480
Vertical Angle Mode, 424
Vertical Curve, 1218
Vertical Curve Design, 1232
View, 3, 17, 20, 22, 27, 29, 39, 40, 43, 44, 53, 56
61, 64, 75, 7779, 92, 108, 110, 112, 116,
130, 139, 155, 156, 162, 166, 172174, 194,
255, 257, 258, 260, 264, 265, 267269, 271
275, 307, 308, 355, 377, 390, 391, 399, 532,
533, 686, 700, 717, 721, 786788, 876, 894,
919921, 925, 938, 1018, 1019, 1021, 1028,
1029, 1035, 1058, 1104, 1121, 1130, 1131,
1144, 1267, 1296, 1327, 1340, 1344, 1350,
13561358, 1371, 1375
View Menu, 255, 1344, 1373, 1442
Viewpoint 3D, 266, 269, 985, 1018, 1019, 1038
Visual COGO, 738, 741
Visual Map Check, 1204
Volume, 3, 157, 158, 483, 1000, 1002, 1019, 1020,
10221025, 1034, 1078
Volumes By Layer, 1023
Volumes By Triangulation, 1000
Web Site, 30
What is New, 17
White Solid Behind Text, 298
Wild, 63, 122, 147, 190, 427, 430, 433, 504, 554, 717,
1081, 1082, 1170, 1174, 1175
Wildsoft, 442, 503, 504, 514
Windows Calculator, 1340
Write Block, 336
Write Polyline File, 186, 223
X Intersections, 1235
Xref Manager, 173, 174
Y Intersections, 1235
Zeiss, 432, 515
Zero Thickness, 396
Zone Polylines, 187
Zoom - Center, 256
Zoom - Dynamic, 256
Zoom - Extents, 257
Zoom - Previous, 256
Zoom - Window, 256
Zoom IN, 257
Zoom OUT, 257
Zoom Points, 257
Zoom Selection, 257
Zoom to Point ID, 1340
Index 1497